MISSIONA RY R E •' E -\ R C H 
 Uni O' 
 
 5041 Broadway , : ev> 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 on 
 
 ork City 
 
 
 
 
 
»• IS* _ 
 
 
THE 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 s 
 
 NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES OF INDIA, 
 
 EDWIN T. ATKINSON, B.A., F.R.G.S. 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 CF 0 R M ! N G VOLUME X. OF THE GAZETTEER, N.-W. P.) 
 
 ALLAHABAD: 
 
 SORT II- WESTERN TBOVINCES AND OUDH GOVERNMENT PRESS. 
 
 1 8 82. 
 
o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 AZETT 
 
 fra-m^unyl 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 S | 
 
 ^Dpcrn&x* I 
 
 ^\tyeangri* arty 
 
 ! f\\ \ 
 
 188§3 a ^Chagycosicnu^ 
 
 
 ^Zcumjja, 
 
 ^T^Li'a-k 
 
 / 
 
 S * /> t? 
 
 J 1 £^wnla,Kha*\ 
 
 l 
 
 t' 
 
 ■ ■ -p)uru iun v. 
 
 NaAJhzvn 
 
 t/vurrt) V. <^yuwgpa, V 
 
 32 
 
 very ' 
 
 / 
 
 Choi&oum,, 
 &?Xu Maxi]# 
 
 /" : -n 
 
 •-~.J % it 
 
 ,-j^ 
 
 \\ ® .d'Cfugujp 
 
 -f-)y'bF(ipaJt- / 
 
 \ %f 
 
 \ / 
 i / 
 
 »' £ 
 
 i 
 
 iLeo Por-c 
 
 • 22227 f 
 
 j Shanyrany Lee i 
 
 x ^K9 , ‘ r - 
 
 H4bo f J MnyjcxrvSa. 
 
 y£lh4- i a- 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 O 
 
 
K 
 
 Scale 16 Moles = 1 Inch ox- 
 
 1013160 
 
 60 Miles 
 
 Gangri 
 
 23 oi? 2 4000 
 
 Btrshan, 
 
 S^6H - G\ - CHU ow SiH6H 
 'Jbrfc&i cam. /aBarr-fa 
 
 390 
 
 'asMjSoTlg 
 i 13020 
 
 ■fcio 14010 
 
 .3020 
 
 Chimoront/ 17150 
 Gictckuritff 15130 
 
 iGar (gixruta>) 
 (Winter- qu. 
 \ % 14140 
 
 Maru mvch- Ch 
 16660 \ tyring) 
 
 &fk ably a. ak e 
 5\oarx\ cVu, la akfe 
 
 15100 
 
 I£290 
 
 Ghafo Tot ia 
 y-ivjovrvcf\^z^ 
 19 500 
 
 ' ,) Ehuikliar < % 
 
 13660 A/i 
 
 (ocyp-Iq, 19 220 
 
 
 S Wvaa^ 
 
 >ho-Lco V^Jtvng'khctyr' 
 ^ Chok olak i© 539 
 S ajmbrulr 
 ft\Y> laioi ^ 
 
 *~UJ 
 
 a Kailas S 
 
 19796 
 
 15700 
 
 or 
 
 ■ loo (/7-JJu, 
 18000 
 
 "rib do 
 
 A . 26373 
 
 Oj \Sa7v Lj 
 XL.TTV La, \ 
 •V- .SktLshtZr 
 V . 16200 
 
 urru 
 
 p - ^ JtflTl532(r^ 
 
 CVl OTCV 9 CO 
 or 
 
 hkaaa.a.%ar owar 
 ) 'L«uk.e jzf 
 ■6oiu*iMr 
 
 rxj Tsdbffyot- 0 
 
 T } IvaC&aV 
 
 ^ liOTV^j CV \0 
 
 or 
 
 'Bjaka.s/XeCV 
 
 iBidpoutu/ 1 58 5 .0 
 r 7^hdx7t*70 S itmitexs i< i ' 
 
 \Shvuy Zih&rtcJi x 
 
 So (MsoTldh. 6 Dtcij) 
 
 2^500 
 
 agio; JOvar- 13300 
 
 3Gxcrj a,x Karfct 
 
 ~>xJV , DP 121 4;0 
 
 <ccnv 
 
 rew 
 
 1163 0 
 
 22289 
 
 80 30 
 
 f Fn,n > ■*<, 
 
 f I ckajrdztiff La; 
 
 'PKK { 
 
 . & 6 ' sr.shcuna JL 
 \ ■ ’ A ’ „ •• ' 
 
 (SjoiBxCq) 
 ^ ! \V| 13000 
 
 , — ^edixikoiztiof \\1 
 
 \ \ / / . K: JflBr-vnqjLa, \\%> 
 
 drri' ■ ' . 1 -j - \\,£’ 
 
 i^cu-dh^.Feah 
 
 30 
 
 aiigyaim^ 
 \ ^ 
 
 .4*000 
 
 f,s 
 
 Si3b' %i '&¥>“*' 
 
 ' / 
 
 » / / G J <x£lunxr 'No Tiibus/. 
 
 * /■ \ 4 
 
 o 
 
 Nbuqe.rrv Cccnyg 
 
 f. y/^J&hokr SuvloAgr 
 ^ctonuklarik* 
 
 
 t.dcmxj 
 
 3 S' 
 
 
 sdsr<*L-< 
 
 O CJmprtrntf o K 
 
 ' k’/Bcmksu 
 
 • Lpnvet 1276o 
 
 / / * » / /..■*■ ^Za/ / 
 
 '(iffmaetar-y) 
 
 ^NdtA-Ji.ar'jphic 15100 
 
 \Jictohsxn-, ( 3^^^)15810 
 
 } Mr JbtAf ia^ 011 'T ol ^d here 
 
 \Jxacliaii 
 
 T<X«/ 1 
 
 oc* Akailsbs s.p.isrs 2 
 
 »/ . , 20086 
 xrn-wnv) 
 
 2Wo \ 'Jodhr- 
 
 ^KJvcnu.^ 
 
 -B o Ixdxihxo j cQrx!urca !P.f\ 
 
 ©T\ Jr 
 
 is'ija oj^ a Kaijfsbs S .P. 
 dy Ty-y,/ 2 ^ 2028 ^ 
 
 'Lutyw M¥ 14-9 4; 
 
 _ -.yjamdxtl phur M ?. 154)0 O 
 
 'aaoehfc -^ 
 
 Lepvu 
 
 r ^.d\x\X\A Ocvo 
 
 j\^?-aZ<7 ^<i/^L62< 0 O 
 
 \ c ! 
 
 %bV\KVO«V *0^0 
 
 // / 
 
 L / 
 
 « 1134 0 t, ' ' 
 
ICJf 
 
 JPWJJ, 
 
 C fkjr. Jn, 
 
 
 
 e~ Jivn Knorussr Gold, Mail'. 
 
 /iUdjdiml 
 
 Rohm VU 
 «Wo 
 
 Mipa/u/ take 
 
 Vaiah.i i. 
 
 ddfkhe 
 
 ' • 
 
 i £ueyha/.l 
 
 WM 
 
 sffeSS: 
 
 
 5HAHJUHANP00R 
 
 [anparaJi 
 
 ' 
 
 MkGURH, 
 
 
 i> SHAHABAO 
 
 (Burae^h 
 
 3XHYRABAD! 
 
 JtdraJnpoc 
 
 \ib$tu» 
 
 Rjnmwghur » 
 
 ^Adampoor 
 
 LU K NOW 
 
 (jBctUah 
 
 300GOWLEE 0 
 
 VTory* Sooji 
 
 , Urny Sxy 
 
 CAWNPOOf*^ 
 
 
 'DhanRsee 
 
 Bengal t Sshar, prdtmvuvy Camp datum Map on. SJhrJKtht tothlneh. bateden&Jci.rfurvey, fim Auote 
 to Tttalpa., 10 the Sou A 
 
 JX Hookers Sikkim- Map. I Cip^' S. SKermOj Recenru. Sumy Mop cf J/asjeetaig jyu/reed , 
 to the huh. to the Soft 
 
 Kwnaoan.irOudH, CfHee. Compilation Maps _ m 8 MU*? lo th» Inch. - to the Vest. MK and S Mist-- 
 - Jfipah proper, and, all to iha T/orth emrds . front/a, (fanptlatLn Map prepared ut the y,V General's 
 Office, ibmo Stale. J, Milts to an Inch. 
 
 Jung Rahadoars ThpaL Sketch Map. in leva, Mag ret character t received from Foreign PepaePnl 
 sent cheerio by Resident oC Bfipal. (no Scale j 
 
 ifrrvwsmith, Walker Major Cranford, Colt JOrkpairteh.. and a. Frvfnectlsm, by Major C remme/m of art 
 Itinerary Root* of FT Campbell*, from. Chain, MmC.il to l.assa,. hair a/co been consulted 
 The position, of Soomla. in/brrnatum. respeetau/ tie Military Rosts and the. Suhdunsvmt of the 
 Country, mrp supplied by Mqpyr G. 'Ramsay. TUsiAend of Wiped 
 
 
 A Miles 
 
 Reg. No, MS, S. I. D.— Aug. 91.— ICC, 
 
 
 COMPILED IN THE OFFICE Of THE SURVEYOR GENERAL OF INDIA, FROM ACTUAL SURVCYSJHE BEST AVAILABLE 
 
cl a, Sur 
 '■dJuiru. Pass 
 $£>11270 _ 
 
 SjtShtUmg $sl^\ 
 ^ 13000^^-] 
 
 SP ( 
 
 *7uutyma'''"?s% ^ 
 
 Wooo | 
 
 'k %£$•*&. 
 
 Shibuj 
 
 ',<X ' * SaunP' 
 
 vMMiW^T 
 
 \nKhirrJircj 
 
 vMj^<joa 
 
 L'li'irfar-d) 
 
 Tinkh, 
 
 . ' Rau/ikalt • yy % 
 
 ■ , y A Va//%u5v^ 
 
 2^^ Garb in, • * 
 
 X^W- 10300 fi/A 
 " Kin^W'4^, 
 
 
 
 'PmaloBKcoMi 
 
 UlOuilnwSp 
 
 
 
 0% 
 
 idfirusk^aD 
 
 
 “p‘,i : - 
 
 P^nale^irXi'l’' 
 
 \OfXtm fflS? 
 
 IkXsHIPUR 
 
 Haldupokhr^ 
 
 / Laaf^; 
 
 ,B^chaa 
 
 iRudorpur 
 
 80 
 
 PATTI 
 
 
 
 
 AND NUMBER 
 
 NAME 
 
 NO. 
 
 
 Bisaud Malla 
 
 Biaaud BieblA 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 Hiaaud TallA 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 X Kill Ku-J 
 
 iorArauWallA 
 
 6 
 
 matm 
 
 DwArsaun 
 
 6 
 
 
 KairArau 
 
 7 
 
 
 KAUgAr 
 
 KhAsparja 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 XI KotA 
 
 Ucbydr 
 
 
 
 Rydni 
 
 11 
 
 
 8yunarA MallA 
 
 
 
 SyduarA TallA 
 
 13 
 
 
 Tikhdn MallA 
 
 H 
 
 
 Tikhun Tall A 
 
 16 
 
 
 AthAguli PallA 
 
 16 
 
 
 AthAguli WallA 
 ChhakhAta 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 
 DArun 
 
 19 
 
 XII PAli 
 
 Kharahi 
 
 20 
 
 
 Lakhanpur MallA 
 
 21 
 
 
 laikhanpur TallA 
 
 22 
 
 
 RithagAr 
 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 
 SAlam MallA 
 
 
 
 SAlam TallA 
 
 20 
 
 
 DAnpur Mall A 
 
 27 
 
 
 DAnpur BichlA 
 
 28 
 
 
 DAnpur TallA 
 
 29 
 
 
 Ddg 
 
 Kalydr Mn\lA 
 
 
 XIII PhaldAkot 
 
 Katvdr Biclild 
 
 32 
 
 KatyAr TallA 
 
 33 
 
 
 NAkuri 
 
 34 
 
 
 ByAna 
 
 30 
 
 
 (JhaudAna 
 
 80 
 
 XIV Ram garb 
 
 DArtnA MallA 
 
 87 
 
 DArmA TallA 
 
 38 
 
 
 ChauthAn 
 
 39 
 
 
 Dbaniyakot 
 
 40 
 
 XV SlrA 
 
 UchAkot 
 
 41 
 
 
 Simalkha 
 
 42 
 
 
 Biajvula 
 
 43 
 
 
 Chhabla Dumaula 
 
 VI 
 
 
 Chaubhainsi 
 
 46 
 
 
 Chnugadh 
 
 40 
 
 
 Mall! Rau 
 
 47 
 
 
 Talll Rau 
 
 48 
 
 XVI Sor 
 
 Bel 
 
 49 
 
 
 Bherang 
 
 60 
 
 
 BarAun 
 
 61 
 
 
 KamtyAr 
 
 62 
 
 
 PungarAun 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 
 
 JohAr MallA 
 
 65 
 
 
 GoriphAt 
 
 TallAdea 
 
 56 
 
 67 
 
 XVIII Kotauli 
 
 ChAlai 
 
 68 
 
 
 ChArAl MallA 
 
 ChArAl TallA 
 
 69 
 
 60 
 
 XIX Mabrydri 
 
 
 61 
 
 
 Gangol 
 
 62 
 
 
 Khilpattl PbAt 
 
 
 
 PAlbclaun MallA 
 
 
 
 Prepared for Mr. E. T. Atkinson’s Gazetteer, under the orders of Colonel J. T. Walker, B. E., P. B, S.. &c. Superintendent of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India, by Mr. G. W. E. Atkinson. 
 The details are all taken from the Great Trigonometrical Survey of Kumaun with the exception of Byans Patti and portions of Johar Malla and Darma Malla' Pattis, which are derived from 
 the map of Kumaun and British Garhwal compiled in the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, 1850, and from information supplied by Mr. E. T. Atkinson. 
 
 The spelling of names is in accordance with a list supplied by Mr. E. T. Atkinson. 
 
 Bkotoiincograpkei at Iks Office of Ike Sepehotendent, Ortal Trigonometrical Streep, Dekra Din, Xocemher 1876. 
 
MISSIONARY RESEARCH LIBRARY' 
 Union Collection 
 • 5041 Broadway, New York City 
 
 j — - — — — — ■ — ——— — 
 
4 
 
 / 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The system of transliteration used in the present volume is that 
 which has been adopted in the Gazetteer of the North-Western 
 Provinces. For the vowels it is briefly as follows : — 
 
 a 
 
 as in 
 
 ‘ woman.’ 
 
 d 
 
 
 ‘ father.’ 
 
 e 
 
 99 
 
 ‘ grey.’ 
 
 i 
 
 99 
 
 ‘ bit.’ 
 
 i 
 
 99 
 
 ‘ machine. 
 
 U 
 
 as in 
 
 * pull.’ 
 
 u 
 
 99 
 
 ‘ rule.’ 
 
 ai 
 
 99 
 
 ‘ aisle.’ 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 * hole.’ 
 
 au as ‘ ou ’ in ‘house ’ (nearly). 
 
 The original plan of this Memoir provided for a thorough ex- 
 amination of the country between the Tons and the Kali somewhat 
 on the plan of Tennent’s Ceylon, and in addition a less detailed 
 summary of our knowledge of the Himalaya-Tibetan region. It 
 was believed that only thus could the physical unity and with it 
 the historical connections of the entire region be correctly under- 
 stood. From or through the Himalaya came the pre-Aryan and 
 Aryan races now inhabiting India, as well as the successive waves 
 of Baktrian, Skythian, and Musalman invaders who have conquer- 
 ed India in historical times. As we shall see hereafter, forms of 
 belief having their origin in or beyond the Himalaya have influ- 
 enced the religious systems of India from the earliest ages to the 
 present day, so that for the political and religious history of the- 
 plains an adequate conception of the physiography, ethnography, 
 and history of the Himalaya-Tibetan tract is a necessary prepara- 
 tion. It is to be regretted that this extended programme cannot 
 be carried out, but the pressure of official duties prevents its com- 
 pletion, and all that can now be attempted is to work up the mate- 
 rials that have been collected for the Himalayan districts of the 
 North-Western Provinces. At the end of Chapter I. will be found 
 a series of ‘ References’ to materials illustrating the history and 
 resources of the Himalaya from Asam to Afghanistan. These were 
 collected in continuation of a plan suggested by Mr. R. N. Oust in 
 1866 for the preparation of a ‘ Catalogue raisonne of every kind of 
 printed information connected with the North-Western Provinces 
 and I certainly know of no better aid to good administration than 
 an index to the special and local reports of those engaged in it. 
 
 The necessity for such a catalogue has ceased in great part wtih 
 
 V> C 1 *•••'/ 
 
 
 
IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 the publication of the District Memoirs, but there are subjects of 
 general importance which the publication of the local accounts does 
 not subserve. One of these is the history, using this word in its 
 widest sense, of the Himalaya-Tibetan region, and I offer the refer- 
 ences as the nucleus of a complete index to our knowledge of its 
 physiography, products, peoples, and institutions. 
 
 As observed in the foot-note to Chapter I., much remains to be 
 done, but at the same time very much more has been accomplished 
 than is generally known. Scientific and economic botany have 
 been carefully explored ; the chapter on economic mineralogy leaves 
 little to be desired : those on meteorology and geology have been 
 brought up to the level of our present scientific knowledge ; and the 
 introduction to physical geography gives a popular and suggestive 
 summary of the information that we possess, whilst the references 
 afford a guide to materials for the study of details. All this is new, 
 or embodies information buried, in correspondence and reports, and 
 practically as inaccessible to the public as if it had never been com- 
 mitted to writing. To General Diehard Strachey I am indebted 
 for the use of an unpublished work of his own on the physical 
 geography of the Himalaya, which has been specially made use of 
 in the chapters on 1 Geology’ and 1 Meteorology.’ Mr. H. B. Med- 
 licott, Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India, prepared 
 the chapter on ‘ Geology,’ and Mr. S. A. Hill, Meteorological Re- 
 porter to the Government of the Hortli- Western Provinces, contri- 
 buted the valuable chapter on t Meteorology.’ Dr. King, Superin- 
 tendent of the Royal Botanical Gardens, Calcutta, furnished the 
 list of the flora of Western Garhwal, Dehra Dun, and Jaunsar- 
 Bawar, and Dr. Watson, the list for Eastern Garhwal, Kumaon, and 
 the Bhabar. To General Strachey I am further indebted for the 
 list of plants collected by himself and Mr. W r interbottom in Ku- 
 maon, Garhwal, and the neighbouring parts of Tibet, and which 
 has never before been published. This list has been admirably 
 edited by Mr. F. Duthie, Superintendent of the Botanical Gardens 
 at Saharanpur, to whom also I am indebted for the sketch of the 
 history of the Tea industry in th® Himalayan districts. The sheets 
 of the portions relating to economic botany have had the criticism 
 of Dr. Watson and Mr. Duthie; and for the forest history Mr. 
 Greig and Major Garstinliave advised me in many matters of detail. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 V 
 
 Of the maps, the map of Kumaon was prepared under the instruc- 
 tions of Colonel Walker, R.E., Superintendent of the Great Trigono- 
 metrical Survey, and is the result of great labour and care for detail : 
 indeed, a less accurate map might possibly be more useful. The 
 great 1 one-inch to one-mile’ sheets were photographed down to a 
 smaller scale and sent to me. I then obtained the correct names in 
 Hindi of all the villages, rivers, &c., in Kumaon and Garhwal (about 
 8,000) and entered against each the correct transliteration for use in a 
 new edition of the large maps, and then drew up a draft list of names 
 for the district map. I desired to enter the names of all halting-places 
 on every ordinary route ; villages in which the patwari usually re- 
 sides; places of note ; trade-centres; and all villages containing over 
 one hundred inhabitants. After much trouble, correspondence, and 
 inquiry, this was fairly accomplished. The villages retained were 
 marked off on the photographic copies of the maps, and these were 
 returned to the Surveyor-General with lists showing the actual and 
 revised spelling for the further compilation. In addition, the prin- 
 cipal lines of road have been laid down, and for the first time the pattis 
 or subdivisions adopted at the recent settlement by Mr. J. Beckett 
 have b een shown. In the trans-Himalayan portion to which the sur- 
 vey had not extended I have added places from the village maps pre- 
 pared by the patwaris, and in their selection was aided by Mr. Beckett. 
 The map of the Iiimalaya-Tibetan region is taken from one prepared 
 by Mr. Trelawny Saunders, omitting the eastern portion. The geolo- 
 gical map is a revised copy of that which accompanied General 
 Strachey’s paper ‘ On part of the Himalaya Mountains and Tibet’ 
 read before the G-eological Society in 1851. It may be necessary 
 to explain that these volumes are not intended to be solely a popular 
 account of the districts which they describe, but to contain, first of 
 all, a record of all facts of permanent scientific or economic value 
 that have been gathered by me during my visits to Kumaon and 
 the Dehra Dun or which have been contributed by others. This 
 work has occupied my leisure time for several years, and I can only 
 hope that the labour and care bestowed on it will be of some use to 
 my successors, and enable them to produce a more worthy record 
 for those who are truly interested in the moral and material pro- 
 gress of the North-Western Provinces. 
 
 Bombay, 1 E. T. ATKINSON. 
 
 17 if A December , 1881. J 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Introductory. 
 
 Limitation of this work— Systematic geography— Herbert ; Vigne, Jacque-^^* 
 mont, &c. ; Hodgson ; R. Strachey ; Thompson ; Cunningham • II. Stra- 
 
 chey; Rawlinson; Saunders; Markham; Calcutta Review, Blanford — 
 Nomenclature— Ethnical sketch : Plains of Asam and Bengal ; Plains of 
 Upper India; Clothing; Pood; Customs; Eastern Himalaya— Eastern 
 tribes; Tribes of the Southern watershed; Bhutan, Sikkim; Nepal; 
 Tribes of the Lower Himalaya— Karnali to Tons; Bisahr ; the Satlaj to 
 the Indus Afghanistan; Galchha States; Kara-Tangutans ; Tibet — 
 General distribution 
 
 *" ••• (M 
 
 References 
 
 1 
 
 42 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Physical Geography of the Himalaya. 
 
 The Himalayan river basins— The Indus basin — Subordinate systems of the 
 Indus basin — The Ganges basin — Subordinate systems of the Ganges 
 basin; The Brahmaputra basin— Subordinate systems of the Brahma- 
 putra basin ; Systems of Tibet — Lob-Nor basin ; Oxus basin. Plains 
 of Hindustan— Indus plain ; Indian desert ; Gangetic plain ; Asam val- 
 ley ; Bhabar; Tarai ; Siwaliks; Duns. Extent of Bhabar — Cause of 
 the deposit— Hodgson’s oceanic theory; Fluviatile theory; Tarai; 
 Siwaliks ; Duns ; Ganges to Brahmaputra ; Lower Himalaya. Materials 
 of the mountains — Eocene period ; Mode of mountain formation ; Moun- 
 tain-sculpture ; Ice-wedges ; Avalanches ; Glaciers ; Rain; Rivers 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Geology. 
 
 Position of the ground. Early observers : Herbert, Cautley, Falconer. The 
 mountain system. The sub-Himalayan zone formed of tertiary rocks. 
 Siwaliks. Post-tertiary deposits. Supposed glacial deposits. Lower 
 Himalayan region. Simla region. Sirmur formation. Relation of Sir- 
 mur and Siwalik series. The Satlaj valley. East of Simla. The Ku- 
 maon section. The Nepal section. Sikkim section. Slight correspond- 
 ence between the rocks of the Himalaya and of the Peninsula. Fre- 
 quent occurrence of carbonaceous deposits throughout the Lower Hima- 
 laya. Conjectural affiliation of the Lower Himalayan sections. The 
 Central Himalaya. Strachey. Stolickza. Western Tibet. The principal 
 crystalline areas. Nummulitic deposits. Post-eocene eruptive rocks. 
 Central gneiss. Kashmir-Kishtwar region. Central Tibet. Its granites, 
 schists, slates, conglomerates and iossilifeious rocks. Paleozoic strata. 
 
Vlll 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Silurian, Trias, Jurassic. Fossils Tertiary deposits. So-called Niti 
 fossils. General Strachey’s conclusions. Stolickza’s views ... Ill 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Tiie Him a' la ya. 
 
 The outer Himalaya. Mountain systems ; Jumna; Ganges; Kali. Subordi- 
 nate boundaries The Nayar. Western Ramganga ; Kali. The snowy 
 range. Axis of highest elevation. The Tibetan plateau. Glaciers. 
 Glacier of the Pindar ; feeder of the glacier ; moraines ; crevasses and 
 ice tables. Glacier of the Kuphini. Motion of the Pindar glacier. 
 Snow-line. Observations in the eastern Himalaya. Observations in 
 Kumaon: Bisahr Across the snowy range. Kumacn; Garhwal; Kunaor ; 
 Western Tibet. Lakes ... .. ... ••• ••• 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Meteorology. 
 
 Preliminary sketch of climate. Contrast between the eastern and western 
 parts of the plain and the Himalaya. Radiation, solar and nocturnal. 
 Temperature: — Diurnal and annual ranges, — Vertical decrement, • 
 Height of snow-line. Pressure and winds : — Barometric tides, Moun- 
 tain winds,' — -Annual variation of pressure, — Monsoons. Humidity. ■ 
 Vertical distribution of vapour, — Relative humidity,- 'Cloud. Rain- 
 fall : — Distribution on plains anl on the Himalayan slope,' 'Annual 
 variation,— The winter rains, — The monsoon rains ... 201 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Economic Mineralogy . 
 
 Min’ng history : experiments in Garhwal. The Kumaon Iron Works Company. 
 Causes of present poor returns — Mode of mining : excavation : removing 
 the ore : crushing the ore : cleaning the ore : drainage. Smelting opera- 
 tions : refining the ore. Division of profits. Improvement needed in 
 appliances : Chili furnace : English system. Outturn. Financial results 
 of the settlement of the revenue derived from minerals. Gold : Tibetan 
 gold-fields : Thok Jalung mines. Silver. Copper mines : Bai mine 
 and its ores: Sira mines : Gaul and Sor Gurang. Bournonite. Copper 
 mines of Garhwal : Dhanpur : Dliobri : Pokhri : Chaumattiya mines : 
 Raja’s mine: Notamine: Thalamine: Danda mine : Talapungla mine: 
 Kharna mine : Agar Sera mine. Iron mines : Kumaon Iron mines : Giwar 
 mines: Garhwal mines : Nagpur: Dasauli : Iriyakot. Lead Arsenic. 
 Lignite. Graphite. Sulphur. Borax. Gypsum. Soap. Stone. As- 
 bestos. Silajit. Limestone. Building stone. Roofing slate. Alum... 259 
 
 ... 297 
 
 IUJei ences ... ••• 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Scientific Botany. 
 
 A list of th e flora of Garhwal, Jaunsai-Bawar and the Dehra Dun, by Dr. 
 King. Tract to_which the list refers : The Siwaliks. Sub Siwalik Tract. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IX 
 
 Page. 
 
 Dehra Dun. Himalayan tract. Characteristic vegetation from the 
 plains to Mussooree. From Mussooree northwards. A list of the flora 
 of Kumaon and the Kumaon Bhabar by Dr. Watson ... ... 299 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Scientific Botany— { continued ). 
 
 Plants found in Kumaon, Garhwal and the adjoining parts of Tibet by 
 Captain (now General) Richard Strachey and Mr.. W interbottom ... 403 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Economic Botany. 
 
 Arrangement of the subject. Food of the people. Analysis of the food- 
 grains. Watson’s formula. Cultivated food-grains. Cereals. Pulses. 
 Amaranths. Polygonacsse. Cultivated vegetables. Gourds. Vegeta- 
 bles. Condiments and spices, greens. Fruits, cultivated and wild. 
 Uncultivated products used as food. Drugs. Narcotics and spirits. 
 Oil-seeds. Dyes and tans. Gums and gum-resins. Fibres. Woods ... 672 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Economic BotanY' — ( continued ). 
 
 Forest history. Grazing tax. Boundary disputes. Government forests. Ku- 
 maon forest-division. Naini Tal forest-division. Ranikhet forest- 
 division. Garhwal forest-division. Dehra Dun forest-division. Ganges 
 (Bhagirathi) division. Forest at the head of theTons andtheJumna. Jaun- 
 sar forest-division. Rheea cultivation. Cinchona. Tallow-tree. Ipeca* 
 cuanha, Cork-oak, Sweet chestnut. Carob. Mezquit and others. 
 Tea ... 
 
 References ... ... ... ••• ••• ••* 
 
 Appendix A. Forest Statistics ... 
 
 General Index iti ••• ••• *** 
 
 Botanical Index ... ... ... ••• ••• •** 
 
 Vernacular Index ... ... ... ••• ••• ••• 
 
 845 
 
 909 
 
 915 
 
 925 
 
 930 
 
 936 
 
 MAPS AND ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 1. Map of Kumaon and the adjoining part of Tibet (in cover). 
 
 2. Map of the Himalaya-Tibetan region (in cover). 
 
 3. Geological map of the country between the Satlaj and the Sarda (page 115). 
 
 4. Front view of the Pindar glacier (page 182). 
 
 6. The Pindar and Kuphini glaciers (page 184). 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 I O : : 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — __ 
 
 
THE 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NORTH WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 PART I 
 
 CHAP T E R I , 
 
 Introductory- 
 
 Limitation of tins work — Systematic geography — Herbert", Vigne, Jacquemont, 
 &c. ; Hodgson ; R. Strachey ; Thompson ; Cunningham ; H. Strachey ; Rawlinson ; 
 Saunders; Markham; Calcutta Review ; Blanford — Nomenclature — Ethnical sketch ; 
 Plains of As am and Bengal ; Plains of Upper India ; Clothing ; Food ; Customs ; 
 Eastern Himalaya— Eastern tribes ; Tribes of the Southern Watershed ; Bhutan ; 
 Sikkim ; Nepal ; Tribes of the Lower Himalaya — Karnali to Tons ; Bisahr ; the 
 Satlaj to the Indus — Afghanistan, Galcha States ; Kara-Tangutans ; Tibet — General 
 distribution — Appendix : list of authorities for this Chapter. 
 
 Limitation of work. 1 
 
 Under the name Himalayan districts of the North-Western 
 Provinces of India we include the British 
 districts of Kumaon, Ghirhwal, Tarai, Dehra 
 Dun and Jaunsar-Ba war, and the independent State of Tihri or foreign 
 Garhwal, comprising the tract within the Himalaya bounded by the 
 
 1 The collection of materials for the ‘ Memoir on the Kumaon Himalaya’ has 
 been in progress since 1872, but other and more pressing duties have hitherto pre- 
 vented their arrangement for publication. It was tben intended to give as complete 
 a description of the entire Himalaya as the means at our disposal would permit. 
 There is little hope, however, that the leisure necessary for such an undertaking will 
 occur within any reasonable time, and it therefore seems better to work up the 
 materials already existing in their present form than to wait until opportunity is found 
 for completing the original design. There are many and- great gaps in our informa- 
 tion regarding Kumaon, but the first step towards remedying this defect will be this 
 attempt to take stock of our present knowledge, which is far more complete than is 
 supposed. Without the aid of the materials entrusted to me by General R. Strachey, 
 Sir John Strachey, Mr. J. H. Batten, Rudradatta Pant, and others, whose assist- 
 ance will be found acknowledged in the preface, as well as the co-operation of 
 Mr. H. B. Medlicott, Mr. S. A. Hill, Mr. Duthie, Dr. King, Dr. Watson, Captain G. 
 Marshall, and others, my own work would be very meagre and unsatisfactory, as 
 well from the great range of subjects discussed as from their frequent special and 
 technical character. 
 
2 
 
 HIMALAYAN DTSTETCTS 
 
 Tons on the west, and the Kali or Sarda on the east. The adjoining 
 portion of Tibet, to which British subjects resort for the purposes 
 of trade, or in order to visit the sacred lakes, also comes within the 
 scope of our investigations. A glance at the accompanying map 
 will show that both the Himalayan and Tibetan portions of the tract 
 with which we are concerned form but a small slice or segment of 
 a greater system, which must be studied as a whole before an 
 adequate conception of the structure and relation of its parts can be 
 arrived at. The Himalaya itself is but the southern belt of that 
 great girdle of mountains which encloses within them the country 
 of which the southern half is commonly called Eastern Turkistan. 
 From or through the southern slope of the Himalaya flow the great 
 rivers known as the Indus, Ganges, and Brahmaputra. To the east, 
 the continuation of the Himalaya is traced in the mountain ranges; 
 through which flow the Yang-tse-kiang and the Hoang-lio, and 
 which are prolonged to the north in the Ala-shan, Inshan, and 
 Khing-han mountains* The last of these ranges joins- the Yablonnoi 
 Khrebet branch of the Altai system at right angles in about 55> Q 
 north latitude. The Yablonnoi mountains are the north-eastern 
 continuation of the Altai range and form the water-parting between 
 the Lena and the Amour. The Altai rises, on the right bank of the 
 Irtish river, at the north-western angle of the central plateau, and 
 separates the Upper Gobi from the Siberian steppes. It consists of 
 a belt of mountains varying in breadth from 400 to 1,000 miles, 
 though in one place contracting to 150 miles, of no great elevation, 
 and descending in a succession of broad terraces to the Siberian 
 plains. It is pierced by the rivers draining into Lake Baikal, and, 
 east of the 88th meridian, consists of three almost parallel ranges — - 
 the Saiansk, Tangnou, and Ulangomula. From the sources of the 
 Kara-Irtish the Barluk Orochuk and Zungarian Ala-tau connect 
 with the Tian-shan, the Celestial mountains of the maps, in which 
 are the sources of the Syr-Darya or Jaxartes. The Tian-shan to 
 the north and north-east of Kashgar consists of a series of parallel 
 ranges having a direction from the east to west and an increased 
 elevation as they proceed northwards. They abut on the elevated 
 mountainous region known as the Alai and Pamir plateau, the 
 latter of which contains the source of the Oxus in the little lad 
 or lake of the lesser Pamir. The eastern margin of the Pamir is 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 3 
 
 Eastern T urldst an. 
 
 described by M. Severtsof, who visited it in 1878, as neither a 
 mountain chain nor the precipitous extremity of a table-land, but 
 an extensive mountainous region filled with numerous ranges. The 
 peak measured by Hayward (21,000 feet), and the Tagharma or 
 Muztagh-Ata peak measured by Trotter (25,350 feet), and supposed 
 to form a part of the Ivizil-Art range connecting the Tian-shan with 
 the Himalayan system, are now reported to be only the culminating 
 points of groups of snowy peaks separated from each other by a 
 distance of over thirty miles. The intervening country contains 
 the basin of the little Kara-kul lake surrounded by a complicated 
 system of short and comparatively low mountain ranges having 
 an altitude of from 14,000 to 15,000 feet. These ranges, however, 
 connect with the Hindu Kush, Karakoram, and W estern Himalaya, 
 and thus complete idle girdle of mountains from one or another 
 side of which flow all the great rivers of Asia. 
 
 The country thus defined forms a part of the great Empire 
 
 of China. To the south lies the rugged, 
 elevated plateau of Tibet, regarding which we 
 shall have more to say hereafter. To the north of this comes the 
 depression known as the Lob-nor basin, which receives the drainage 
 ©f the northern slope of the Tibetan plateau called, in the 39th 
 degree of north latitude, the Altyn-Tagli range, but more generally 
 known as the Kuen-lun, a name given probably from some well- 
 known pass. The drainage from the eastern slope of the Tian-shan 
 flows in the same direction, as well as that from the south-eastern 
 slopes of the Altai range ; but all is swallowed up in the great sandy 
 desert of Gfobi, which at one time apparently formed the bed of an 
 ancient sea some 300,000 square miles in extent. According to 
 Prejevalsky this plateau varies in height from 6,000 feet on the 
 margin to about 2,000 feet in the middle. It is intersected from west 
 to east by a depressed valley called Shamo, or 1 sea of sand,’ contain- 
 ing salt. West of this lies the Han-hai, or £ dry sea.’ Prejevalsky 
 has crossed the desert between Kuldja and what may turn out to 
 be Lob-nor, lying in east latitude 90° and north latitude 39° 30/ and 
 found himself at only 2,500 feet above the level of the sea on the 
 banks of the Tarim. To the west, the desert presented a thin loam 
 impregnated with salt, and to the east a plain of drift-sand. 
 Towards the Kurugh-tagh hills, from which he descended on the 
 
4 
 
 hima'layan eistbigts 
 
 desert ; lay a belt of pebble and gravel some 15 to 18 miles wicfe* 
 He also crossed tbe desert to the north between the Ala-shan range 
 and Urga, where he found it to vary in height between 3,000 and 
 5,500 feet, whilst it still preserved its sandy character. On the 
 route between Urga and Kalgan explored by the same traveller, 
 there is a great depression towards the middle, where the elevation 
 is as low as 2,400 feet. Here the soil of the Gobi proper is 
 composed of coarse reddish gravel and small pebbles interspersed with 
 drifts of yellow shining sand. Leaving these regions, we shall in 
 future restrict ourselves to the southern plateau, of which the Kuen- 
 lun mountains are the northern boundary, and which is so intimately 
 connected in its physical relations with the Himalaya. 
 
 Herbert. 
 
 Before proceeding with our examination of the structure of the 
 Early attempts at gene- Himalaya-Tibetan legion, it will be conve- 
 falisation. nient to pass in review the different theories 1 
 
 that have been advanced in regard to its systematic geography, 
 since a complete understanding as to what has been done in this 
 direction will enable us to arrive at some conclusion as to what 
 remains to be done. Captain Herbert, who conducted the mineralo- 
 
 gical survey of the Himalayan country 
 between the Kali and the Satlaj in 1818, was 
 the first who attempted to give a general account of its physical 
 characteristics. His description 2 was intended to serve as an intro- 
 duction to his geological account of the Himalaya, as well as to bo 
 a distinct contribution to general geography ; the existing works on 
 the subject “being singularly deficient in details, as well as errone- 
 ous in the few that are given. ” His idea of the country north of 
 India was apparently derived only from maps. He describes it as a 
 large central space strongly marked by the feature that it was little 
 intersected by rivers, whilst from its sides flowed the streams which 
 united to form the greatest rivers in the world. As the source of 
 every river must be higher than any other part of its course, he 
 inferred that the zone in which those rivers originated must be 
 higher than the plains through which they flowed to seek the ocean, 
 and that the entire central tract itself was completely surrounded br- 
 iefly mountains. He considered the upper beds of the Brahmaputra 
 
 1 For a brief summary of these theories sec Mr. C. E, Markham’s ‘ Memoir on 
 the Indian Surreys,’ p. 341, 2 J, As, Boc, Ben., XI., Ft. I., p. x, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 5 
 
 and the Satlaj as forming part of the barrier zone which surrounds 
 the central tract, and not as a part of the plateau itself. He 
 further showed that the true u line of boundary is undoubtedly the 
 chain of water-heads, and that this is by no means synonymous with 
 the line of greatest elevation. ” At first view the arrangement of 
 the mountain masses in the tract between the Kali and the Satlaj 
 appeared to be irregular and confused, but by tracing the courses of 
 the rivers and their tributary streams, a clue was found to lead the 
 observer out of this labyrinth. “ By connecting their sources and 
 by following out the devious windings of the several feeders, an idea 
 is obtained of the extent, the direction, and the connection of the 
 several ranges. * * * Instead of a succession of parallel and continu- 
 ous ranges running south-east to north-west, and rising one behind 
 the other in regular array and increasing elevation till the series 
 is closed in the farthest distance by the line of snow-clad peaks, we 
 see only one continuous range of any extent forming an irregularly 
 curved line which bends round the tract, commencing on the north- 
 east angle, and with a north-westerly direction, which it gradually 
 alters to a south-easterly one on the south-west angle, and latterly 
 due south just before it is lost in the plain country. This range 
 forms one of the boundaries of the basin of the Satlaj which bends 
 around the convex side, while within its concavity are contained the 
 numerous sources of the Ganges. ” This he called the Indo-Gan- 
 getic chain, “ a ramification of that more extensive line of water- 
 heads which would exclude from the central plateau all the mountain 
 tract watered by the Sanpu and the Indus as well as by the Ganges. 
 Next in extent are the two principal ramifications separating the 
 basin of the Jumna from that of the Ganges, and the basin of the 
 latter from that of the Kali. From these two principal ramifica- 
 tions proceed a number of minor ones which, but for the assistance 
 derived from a study of the course of the rivers, would almost bid 
 defiance to any analysis. Transverse ridges, several thousand feet 
 higher in elevation, ramify from the Indo-Gangetic chain towards 
 the Ganges basin, and a line or plane connecting their summits 
 would be that of the greatest elevation, which, however, has no 
 connection with the disposition of the water-heads. It is a fact that in 
 a line of 500 miles two summits are found exceeding five miles in 
 perpendicular height, not isolated, but connected to appearance by a 
 
6 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 regular series of peaks of very little inferior elevation. If we 
 confined ourselves to heights of 21,000 feet, we should find a connected 
 line of peaks extending over 1 5 000 miles ; that is, one apparently 
 without breaks, hut in reality connected only through the line of 
 water-heads from which they ramify. Whether the word ‘ line ’ or 
 ‘ plane ’ is used, the idea of considerable breadth must be conceded, 
 and in that case its surface would be very irregularly studded with 
 peaks, and in this way it may be said to be parallel to the common 
 boundary of mountain and plain land, and to intersect instead of 
 bounding the river districts.” The above summary gives a resume of 
 Herbert’s speculations on the physical structure of the Himalaya. 
 His errors were those of his time, when the knowledge even of 
 descriptive geography was in its infancy. He was unable to recognise 
 the unity of the great central mass and its bulwarks, and was wrong 
 in saying that the groups of snowy peaks intersected the river basins, 
 when, in fact, they bound the drainage area, and are the determining 
 causes of its existence. Still Herbert is to be remembered as the 
 first who attempted to give a systematic account of the Himalaya 
 as a whole, 1 and is therefore worthy of a prominent place in this 
 brief notice of its geography. 
 
 Next to Herbert comes Hodgson, who in an admirable article in 
 
 the Asiatic Society’s Journal 2 also alludes to 
 Hodgson. J 
 
 the difficulty experienced by a traveller in 
 
 the Himalaya in getting “ rid of that tyranny of the senses which 
 so strongly impresses almost all beholders of this stupendous scenery 
 with the conviction that it is a mighty maze without a plan.” His 
 first step towards freedom was his grasping the fact “ that the vast 
 volume of the Himalayan waters flows more or less at right angles 
 to the general direction of the Himalaya, but so that the num- 
 berless streams of the mountains are directed into a few grand 
 rivers of the plains either at or near the confines of the two 
 regions.” Secondly, a study of the river systems like the “Sapt 
 Gandaki” and the “Sapt Kausiki” urged him “to discover, if 
 possible, what cause operated this marked convergence of innumer- 
 able transverse parallel streams, so as to bring them into a series of 
 distinct main rivers.” Thirdly, he found that “the transcendant 
 
 1 Neither Moorcroft, Vigne, Jacqnemont, Hooker, Shaw, Iicnclcrson, nor Bellow 
 attempt any description of the Himalaya as a whole. 2 J, As, Sac. Ben., 
 
 XVIII.. Pt, II., p. 701. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 7 
 
 elevation and forward position, at right angles to the line of ghats of 
 the great snowy peaks, presented that casual agency : the remotest 
 radiating points of the feeders of each great river being coincident 
 with the successive loftiest masses belonging to the entire extent of 
 the Himalaya.” The great peaks bound and do not intersect the 
 principal Alpine river basins, as Herbert had thought, and, by 
 so bounding, create the basins, whereas their intersection would 
 destroy them. Hodgson’s Himalaya proper is the ghat line or 
 watershed between Tibet and India, and the watershed between the 
 valleys of the Indus and Sanpu and the great plateau is called by 
 him the Nyenchhen Thangla chain. The cause of the convergence 
 of the various streams which form the great rivers upon or near the 
 verge of the plains is shown by him to be “the superior elevation of 
 the lateral barriers of these river basins, between which there are 
 synclinal slopes of such decided preponderance that they overrule the 
 effect of all other inequalities of surface, how vast soever the latter may 
 sometimes be.” These lateral barriers are crowned by the great 
 peaks which stand forth from the watershed and send forth south- 
 ward ridges proportionally immense. Equally effective with the 
 divergent power of these peaked ridges is the convergent power of 
 two ridges upon the single contained river basin. “ The synclinal 
 lines from the inner faces of the two adjacent ridges draw the waters 
 together, and because these ridged peaks are the loftiest masses of 
 the entire mountains, the effect of all other masses, even that of the 
 spine of Himachal or the ghat line of the snows, is overruled or 
 modified, so that in the most rugged region on earth a very limited 
 series of distinct main rivers appear in the plains from innumerable 
 independent Alpine feeders.” We may assume that where the 
 loftiest peaks occur, there is a proportionate intumescence of the 
 general mass, and therefore that these grand peak-crowned ridges 
 determine the essential character of the aqueous distribution along 
 the entire line. A further proof is adduced from the fact that the 
 lower rivers, which take their rise in the middle region, do not 
 show this unitizing principle, such as the Bagmati and Iiamganga. 
 With regard to the mountain systems, Hodgson divides them into 
 the lower, central, and upper ; sub-dividing the first into the sand- 
 stone range with its contained Duns or Maris, the Bliabar or sal 
 forest, and the Tarai. The lower region extends from the level of the 
 
8 
 
 H I MA L AYA N D I STRICTS 
 
 plains to 4,000 feet above the level of the sea ; the central region 
 from 4,000 to 10,000 feet; and the upper region to the watershed 
 or ghat line : divisions which fairly correspond with the distribution 
 of both organic life and inorganic matter. Though unable to follow 
 Mr. Hodgson in all his theories and the deductions that he draws 
 from them, credit must be given for his recognition of the position 
 of the great mountain masses in regard to the alpine river basins 
 and for his appreciation of the intiuence of climatic conditions on 
 the animal and vegetable world. 
 
 Captain (now General) 14. Strachey, in his paper on the Physical 
 
 Geography of the Provinces of Kumaon and 
 Captain R. Jtiac he} . Garhwal, read before the Royal Geographical 
 
 Society 1 in 1851, pointed out distinctly for the first time that the 
 Himalaya was in truth the broad mountainous slope of the great 
 Tibetan table-land descending to the plains of Northern India, 
 while a slope of corresponding character descending to the north is 
 known as the Kuen-lun. He remarks that the great peaks in 
 Kumaon and Garhwal “ are not found on a continuous ridge, but are 
 grouped together in masses that are separated one from the other 
 by deep depressions, through which flow the streams that drain 
 those parts of the mountains that are immediately contiguous to the 
 north.” To the east the same sort of arrangement obtains, but to the 
 west it is much less distinct. The river-beds to within a distance of 
 ten miles in a direct line from the snowy peaks seldom exhibit a rise 
 of more than four or five thousand feet ; but when we cross “the line 
 on which the great peaks are situated, the ascent very rapidly 
 increases, and a very few miles carries the river-bed up to an altitude of 
 nine or ten thousand feet ; thus showing that the sudden increase of 
 height of the mountains along this line is not confined to the peaks 
 alone, but is a general elevation of the whole surface.” Hr. Thomson 3 
 
 substitutes the name cis-Satlaj Himalaya for 
 Herbert’s Indo-Gangetic chain, and gives the 
 name trans-Satlaj Himalaya to the chain which, commencing in 
 Kailas, separates the waters of the Satlaj from those of the Indus. 
 He refers to these two great chains the whole of the mountains 
 between the Indus and the plains, and says : “ The northern boundary 
 
 i ,/. 11. G. S., XXI., p. 57: adopted in Somerville’s Physical Geography, 7th 
 edition ; London, 1877, p. 56, 2 Travels, p. 456. 
 
OE THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 9 
 
 of Tibet is formed by the great chain north of the Indus, to which 
 Humboldt gave the name Kouen-lun” : and again, that every part 
 of Tibet is traversed by mountains having their origin either in the 
 trans-Satlaj Himalaya or the Kouen-lun. So far the unity of the 
 
 Himalaya-Tibetan region is acknowledged 
 
 Major A. Cunningham. 
 
 by this distinguished traveller. Major A. Cun- 
 ningham 1 makes the Bara-lacha range, which forms the watershed 
 between the Indus and its five affluents, the continuation of the main 
 Himalaya or watershed between the Sanpu and the Ganges. To the 
 south of this lies two distinct and independent ranges stretching in 
 the same general direction from south-east to north-west, which he 
 calls the mid- Himalaya, or Pir Panjal, and the outer or sub-Hima- 
 laya, leaving the name Siwalik unchanged for the lowermost sand- 
 stone ranges. Beyond the Himalaya the same system of parallel 
 chains is observed, comprising at least three distinct ranges of moun- 
 tains, which Cunningham proposes to call the trans-Himalayan, or 
 that which divides the head waters of the Satlaj from those of th© 
 Indus and extends to the western limits of Bongdo and Astor ; 
 second, the Kailas or Gangri range which runs through the midst of 
 Western Tibet along the right bank of the Indus to its confluence 
 with the Shay ok; and third, the trans-Tibetan range, also called 
 
 . „ , Bolor and Karakoram. These distinctions are 
 
 Captain H. Stracney. 
 
 however, purely local and geographical and 
 are so far convenient and to be accepted. Captain H. Strachey, in 
 his paper 2 on the Physical Geography of Western Tibet, shows us that 
 the Indian watershed is not the Great Himalaya as seen by the Indian 
 •observer, but is found in a succession of valley heads much depressed 
 and penetrating that mass to such a depth that the passes from India to 
 Tibet are never visible from any station fairly south of the perpe- 
 tual snow. The Turkish watershed divides the waters of Tibet from 
 those of Turkistan, including Khoten and Kashgar. “ The general 
 plan of the mountain system of W estern Tibet appears to consist of 
 a series of parallel ranges running right across the breadth of the table- 
 land in a direction so extremely oblique to the general extension of the 
 •whole as often to confound the one with the other, or to convert the 
 transverse direction to a longitudinal one. Short transverse necks 
 connecting the main ranges in some parts, and cross fissures cutting 
 1 Ladak, p, 41. 2 London, 1854. 
 
 2 
 
10 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Sir H. Rawlinson, 
 
 through them in others, together with projecting spurs of a secondary 
 order, will suffice to convert the supposed primary arrangement 
 into all the existing variety of valley and drainage.* *The great snowy 
 peaks lying mostly on the terminal butt-ends of the primary ranges, 
 sometimes widened by lateral spurs ; and the Tibetan passes ci ossing 
 the low connecting links, whose alignment forms the main watei shed, 
 but not the main mountain-crest.’' Sir H. Rawlinson 1 recognises 
 
 the unity of the entire mass, and writes 
 that the u whole country between India and 
 Tartary may be considered as a broad mountain range, the Himalaya 
 forming the southern crest, and the Kuen-lun the northern. The 
 direction of this range is from east to west, trending to the north- 
 ward, while the parallel chain which bounds Siberia to the south, 
 and the outer crest of which is the Tian-shan, trends somewhat to 
 the south; so that at a short distance to the west of Yarkand and 
 Kashgar the great interior depression of Chinese Tartary terminates, 
 and the bounding ranges coalesce in the elevated table-land of Pamir. 
 
 We have now come to the theory set forth by Mr. Trelawny 
 
 Saunders , 2 Geographer to the India Office, 
 according to whom the summit of the Hima- 
 laya consists of a double range of peaks enclosing a series of valleys 
 running parallel to the axis of the mass, and which he would call 
 the northern and southern Himalaya respectively. The first of 
 the two forms the water-parting between the Ganges basin and 
 that of the Sanpu. To the latter must be assigned nearly all the 
 great snowy peaks which are seen from the plains of India, 
 and which are separated from the former by the valleys already 
 mentioned. These valleys are comparatively elevated, and at 
 length burst through the southern range by intersecting gorges. 
 Both Herbert and Hodgson are set aside, and the great peaks are 
 described as forming a chain, broken at intervals by intersecting 
 gorges. u The upper valleys of the Sanpu, the Satlaj, and the 
 Indus appear to form a huge elevated trough separating the 
 Himalaya from the northern part of the table-land of Tibet and from 
 the snowy range into which the table-land contracts at its western 
 
 end.” This range is crossed by the Muztagh, Karakoram, and 
 
 * 
 
 1 England and Russia in the East : London, 1875, p. 236, 2 Sketch of the 
 
 Mountains and River Basins of India : London, 1870, 
 
 Mr. Saunders’ theory. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 11 
 
 Mr. Markham. 
 
 and Changchemno passes, and is remarkable for the great length of 
 its glaciers and the great height of its peaks. The Indus forms its 
 southern base as well as the northern base of the Himalaya. The 
 Indus, Satlaj, and Sanpu, u are the only rivers which, washing the 
 northeni base of the Himalaya in channels parallel to the range, 
 break through the entire breadth of the range and water the plains 
 at its southern base.” The eastern base of the mountainous highland 
 of Tibet is marked by the Min river, and on the north-east the slope is 
 defined by the basin of the Hoang-ho. From the latter river west- 
 ward to the Muztagh the Kuen-lun mountains descend to the plains 
 of Gobi from the northern edge. These unite with the Himalaya, 
 Pamir, and Hindu Kush in the lofty peak or knot called Pusht-khar 
 or Taghdambash. The accompanying map, prepared by Mr. Saunders 
 for Mr. C. It. Markham’s Memoir on the Indian Surveys, will 
 illustrate better than any further quotations his views on the subject 
 of the relations of the great mountain systems, as well as serve our 
 own purpose. Mr. Markham 1 divides the Himalayan system into 
 
 three great culminating chains, which he calls 
 the inner, central, and outer, running more 
 or less parallel to each other from the gorge of the Indus to that of 
 the Dihong. “ The lofty region of Great Tibet lies mainly between 
 the inner and outer range, with the central chain, whence most of 
 the rivers of Northern India take their rise, running through its 
 length.” The western extremity of his inner and most northern 
 range is the Karakoram, which separates the Indus valley from the 
 affluents of the Lob-nor system, and the eastern section is the Gangri 
 mountains of the map, the Nyenchhen Thangla of Hodgson and 
 Ninjinthangla or Nyenclihen-tang-la of Markham, which commences 
 in peak or knot called Kailas. Parallel to the northern range runs 
 the central range, the eastern section of which commences at the 
 Mariam-la pass near the Kailas peak. “ Here a comparatively low 
 saddle connects the northern and central ranges and separates 
 the valley of the Satlaj from that of the Brahmaputra. To the east- 
 ward the northern side of the central chain forms the southern 
 watershed of the Brahmaputra, whilst on its southern slopes are the 
 sources of many important rivers, which, forcing their way through 
 the southern chain of the Himalaya, eventually join the Ganges or 
 
 1 Tibet, p. xxiii., 1876. 
 
12 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the Brahmaputra.” The southern chain is made up of the series o! 
 snowy peaks which, to the east, overhang Nepal, Sikkim, and Bhutan. 
 Thus, Mr. Markham is at one with Mr. Saunders in his theory 
 as to the Himalayan system, only substituting the terms “inner 
 or northern, central and outer or southern,” for the terms Gangri, 
 northern and southern Himalaya,” used by Mr. Saunders. 
 
 A writer in the Calcutta Review 1 has taken objection to the 
 
 creation of the southern chain, which, “being 
 occasionally intersected by rivers of more 
 
 Calcutta Review . 
 
 remote origin, is not a chain at all, but a series of spurs running 
 southwards from an extended line of elevation more to the north, in 
 the neighbourhood of which the said rivers rise.” He also suggests 
 for the whole system the name Indo-Tibetan, correctly urging that 
 it is undesirable to give to the whole a name which belongs only to 
 a part. He prefers simply to lay down two lines of watersheds, the 
 northern corresponding for the most part with Mr. Markham s inner 
 range, and the southern extending from Chilas by the Zoji-la, 
 Baralacha, Niti, and No passes to the Laghalangla above Shikatse. 
 He then examines the river basins and shows that Hodgson s tlieoiy 
 regarding them is in accordance with tacts ; that these basins deiive 
 much of their water from certain prominent peaks which, standing 
 in advance — that is, southwards of the watershed — are connected 
 with it, and from which ridges with dependent spurs project, that 
 serve as lateral barriers to the basins. “ The preponderating synclinal 
 slopes of the ridges and spurs which overrule the effect of all 
 other intervening inequalities of surface, however vast, cause the 
 several groups of mountain streams between them to converge till 
 they unite and constitute a main river near the edge of the plains.” 
 Tins is practically Hodgson’s law re-affirmed in the full light of all 
 that modern research has shown us regarding the geography of 
 Tibet, the Karakoram and Kashgar, a terra incognita to our early 
 writers. 
 
 Both Mr, Markham and Mr. Saunders have issued rejoinders 
 Rejoinders of Mr. Mark- to the criticisms in the Calcutta Review in 
 ham and Mr. Saunders. two articles in the Geographical Magazine . 2 
 
 1 January, 1877, p. 145. 2 By Mr. C. R. Markham in May, 1877, and Mr. 
 
 Saunders in July, 1877, Geo. Mag. IV, 113, 173, London. The other matters in contro- 
 versy between the reviewer and Mr« Markham are omitted as foreign to the subject 
 of this notice, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 13 
 
 Mr. Markham chiefly confines himself to a defence of his use of the 
 word ‘ chain’ as applied to a series of culminating ridges, whether rivers 
 force their way through its gorges or not ; but Mr. Saunders goes more 
 fully into the entire question at issue between him and the reviewer, 
 and supports his arguments by a re-statement of his views on the 
 physical geography of the entire Himalaya-Tibetan system. For 
 this purpose he draws largely on his “ Sketch of the Mountains 
 and Fiver Basins of India,” already noticed, in which the theory 
 of the southern chain of snowy peaks was first developed; and 
 whether we agree with his deductions or not, we must consider his 
 summary as a valuable contribution to our knowledge of the 
 subject. He recapitulates the arguments in favour of considering 
 the line of snowy peaks a southern chain, and concludes that 
 they are entitled to that name, u (1) as the culminating summit 
 of the southern or Indian slope ; (2) as the common origin of a 
 succession of rivers ; (3) as cut off from the northern range by a 
 succession of remarkable valleys, sometimes very long, sometimes 
 very deep, and sometimes very broad and flat, and all containing 
 considerable rivers running parallel to the chains which they divide.” 
 He objects to the inclusion of the mountain ranges on both sides 
 of the troughs of the Indus and Sanpu under the term Himalaya, 
 the northern watershed of those rivers composing the contreforts, 
 buttresses and slopes or escarpments of the great central plateau which 
 they uphold and from which they cannot be separated. The table- 
 land is Tibetan ; therefore its southern slope cannot be called Himala- 
 yan. The remaining portion of Mr. Saunders’ article will be noticed 
 
 as we proceed. 
 
 The latest contribution to the physical geography of the Himalaya 
 
 is to be found in Mr. TI. Blanford’s Manual 1 
 Mr Blanford. n ^ 
 
 and Mr. W. Blanford s introduction 4 to 
 
 the “ Manual of the Geology of India.” In the latter work, 
 
 which may presumably be taken as giving Mr. W. Blanford’s 
 
 conclusions on the subject, he considers the Himalaya to form a 
 
 curved belt of mountains with their convexity to the southward 
 
 which mark the southern scarp of the Tibetan plateau as the 
 
 1 Physical Geography for the use of Indian Schools, Calcutta. 2 * Calcutta, 
 
 1879, I., ix. It should be remembered that the term, ‘range’, is used here for geological 
 
 purposes which are not always the same as those intended by geographers. Its 
 
 precise meaning depends on the context. 
 
14 
 
 HIMALAYAS’ DISTEICTS 
 
 Kuen-lun define the northern. The western terminal portion of the 
 Himalayan chain comprises a number of great ranges variously 
 named. It is doubtful whether any of these “should be considered 
 the prolongation of the main Himalayan axis, although, if any be 
 really a continuation of the Himalaya proper, it is either the Pir 
 Panjal or the Zanskar range.” Geological considerations would 
 lead him to suppose that “the main range commences on the west- 
 ward in the Dhauradhar near Dalhousie, and extends to the east- 
 south-east till it rises into the main snowy range of the north- 
 west Himalaya. Many geographers distinguish two parallel ranges 
 from the neighbourhood of Simla to the eastward; the snowy 
 range proper, formed of the highest peaks (Saunders theory), and 
 a more northern ridge, forming the watershed between the Tibetan 
 plain and the rivers running to the plains of India. Others consider 
 the latter to be the true Himalayan range, and look on the higher 
 peaks as belonging to the spurs between the rivers flowing from 
 that range. It is certain that the great peaks, such as Nandadevi, 
 &c., are separated from each other by deep valleys, through 
 which flow streams coming from the northern range, and that, 
 although the peaks of the latter are inferior in elevation, the 
 passes by which it is traversed are much higher ; but it has not 
 yet been ascertained whether the great peaks are on the strike of 
 any continuous band of rock, or whether they merely consist 
 of hard nuclei left undenuded.” There is little doubt that, until 
 the geologist is able to assist us, the question whether the line of 
 snowy peaks should be considered a true chain or merely spurs 
 from the main water-parting must be left undecided. Though year 
 by year fresh materials are added to our stock of knowledge regarding 
 the Himalaya, they are yet too imperfect for us to offer little more 
 than a suggestion as to the views that should be adopted regarding its 
 structure. A glance at Mr. Saunders’ map will show us the vastness 
 of the subject, and that the Himalaya of Kumaon and Garhwal, 
 with which we are more immediately concerned, is but a very 
 small portion of the great girdle of snowy peaks that uphold between 
 them the elevated plateau of Tibet. Herbert showed us that this 
 girdle, as seen from the plains of India, is not a continuous line of 
 parallel ranges rising one behind the other, and increasing in eleva- 
 tion until the series is closed in the farthest distance by the line of 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 15 
 
 snow-clad peaks ; but that these peaks or groups of peaks are 
 ramifications from the line of water-parting which itself is lower than 
 the line of greatest elevation. Hodgson subsequently explained the 
 influence of these groups of peaks on the river-systems, and Captain 
 Strachey showed us that the Himalaya was the southern slope of 
 the Tibetan plateau as the Kuen-lun formed its northern slope. 
 These are, broadly, the more important additions to our knowledge 
 of the physical geography of the Himalaya that have been made of 
 late years. To our mind the recognition of the unity of the entire 
 Himalaya-Tibetan system is the most important of them all, and that 
 alone which will lead to practical results. The division of the 
 Himalaya into ranges may be allowed as a matter of convenience, but 
 should not be permitted to cloud the great fact that all are but varia- 
 tions in the southern slope of the great table-land due to the influ- 
 ence of the elements on the materials of which they are composed, 
 and to the disturbing action of subterranean forces. We can lay 
 down the line of water-parting and the line of greatest elevation 
 with some precision, but must call in the aid of the geologist and 
 mineralogist to distinguish which amongst the ranges is entitled 
 to be called the real main axis of the Himalaya; and, until their 
 labours are communicated to the world, must rest content with the 
 somewhat arbitrary distinctions afforded by the prominence or other- 
 wise of existing physical features. 
 
 Seeing the misunderstandings that have arisen from a too loose 
 
 Nomenclature. USe ° f WOrds ™ d P hraSeS * !t w!U b « as well 
 
 to state here that we adopt the word ( water- 
 
 parting ’ to represent the ridge which separates the flow of water on 
 either side of a range of hills . 1 The word ‘ range ’ will include a 
 series of mountains or hills continuing in one direction alono- a 
 common axis, whether broken by chasms or not ; and the word ‘spur’ 
 will be used of a ramification from a range, whether connecting it 
 with another range or sinking gradually into a plain. 
 
 The great mountain chain lying between Tibet and the plains of 
 India is generally known to the natives of India by the term pahdv 
 (mountain), to which they prefix the local name where such exists. 
 
 1 The use of this word in this sense is one of the subjects of controversy 
 between the Calcutta reviewer and Mr. Markham. The former (p. 147, note) 
 objects that the old word ‘ water-shed ’ is sufficient. 
 
16 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 'The more educated give the name Himachal 1 (snowy-range) or 
 Himalaya (abode of snow) to the snow-covered ranges ; whilst Euro- 
 peans popularly include under the name Himalaya the entire moun- 
 tainous region lying between the gorge of the Brahmaputra on the 
 east and that of the Indus on the west, and between the upper 
 valleys of the same rivers on the north and the plains of India on the 
 south. A first glance at any good map will convince us of the 
 general unity of the physical relations of the range within the 
 limits commonly assigned to the Himalaya, whilst a closer examina- 
 tion will induce us to include much more. For our part we accept 
 the popular definition of the Himalaya as extending from the gorge 
 of the Indus on the west to that of the Brahmaputra on the east, 
 and from the upper courses of the main branches of those rivers 
 on the north to the plains of India on the south, speaking of its 
 connections beyond those limits as the western and eastern extensions 
 respectively. 
 
 It will materially aid the reader if we further preface our remarks 
 
 with a short description of the ethnical and 
 Ethnical Sketch. political divisions of its surface, and of the 
 
 regions in immediate contact with it. We have arrived at some idea 
 of the physical relations of the tract itself, and shall now, at the risk 
 of being thought diffuse, endeavour to trace the ethnical affinities of 
 its inhabitants. Commencing, then, with the plain on the south, we 
 find the provinces of British India flanking the foot of the Himalaya 
 along its entire length from the 96th to the 72nd meridian of east 
 longitude. Following the direction of the Himalaya from east to 
 west, we find in Upper Asarn a number of tribes speaking different 
 languages and dialects, and so intermixed and blending the one into 
 
 i The word Himachal ( ) is derived from two Sanskrit words, 1 hii net? 
 
 (snow) and ‘ achala’ (mountain), meaning ‘snowy-mountain’ or ‘snowy-range. 
 Similarly the word Himalaya ^ ) is derived from ‘ lima ’ and ‘ alaya, 
 
 (abode), meaning the ‘home ’or ‘abode of snow.’ The proper pronunciation is 
 therefore Ilim-Alay-a, not Him-a-lay-a as commonly obtains. The plains-men speak 
 of the Simla -pah&r, the Mansuri -pah&r, and sometimes of the snowy-range as the 
 harf (ioeypah&r. “ The people south of the Himalaya in Nepal call all snowy 
 mountains langar, by which they mean the highest points. They call the peaks 
 that have no snow banjang, and the low ground under the said banjang they call 
 rpheili. The term Himalaya is not used by uneducated people, who only talk of 
 the snowy mountains as '■barf (mi langar,'— G, T, S, Rep., 1872, p, 46, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 17 
 
 tlie other that, beyond a mere cursory description, their classification 
 cannot be attempted here. In the extreme north-east they are 
 Plains of Asam and allied with or are members of the tribes inha- 
 Bcngal. biting the neighbouring hills, of whom more 
 
 will be said hereafter. They speak a language having an affinity 
 with the great Barma-Tibetan group, and are mere pagan savages. 
 Alon g either side of the Brahmaputra in its course through the valley 
 we find the settled tribes of Asam speaking a language akin to Bengali. 
 Though differences exist they so closely resemble in habits and 
 character the people of the conterminous parts of Bengal that it is 
 difficult to draw a strict line of severance between them without 
 entering into long historical and ethnical discussions quite out of 
 place here : many that are now Hindu or Musalman Bengalis in all 
 outward appearance can be shown to be converts in recent times 
 from the pagan tribes in their neighbourhood of unmistakably 
 aboriginal origin. The people of Bengal, the flat alluvial plains of 
 which lie along the lower courses of the Ganges and Brahmaputra, 
 exhibit all the features characteristic of a race inhabiting a region of 
 tropical heat and moisture. They are small in stature, of dark com- 
 plexion, and effeminate in character, living chiefly on rice grown in 
 the lowlands subject to annual inundation. Their dress is of the 
 scantiest proportions, consisting chiefly of one or two pieces of cotton 
 cloth simply wrapped around their waist and shoulders, and not 
 wrought into any form of garment. Their heads and feet are usually 
 left bare. Their houses, constructed of mats, lie scattered amongst the 
 thick groves of bambus and palms that spring up in wild luxuriance 
 on the uncultivated ground. 
 
 As we ascend the Ganges, 1 we find a drier climate with greater 
 
 contrasts between the summer and winter 
 
 Plains of Upper India. 
 
 temperature, and a taller, more manly, and more 
 robust race, of whose food the millets and unleavened bread of wheat, 
 barley, and other grains form the principal element. Their clothing 
 is more elaborate and warmer than that of the Bengali. All wear 
 turbans, and those who can afford it have short jackets fastening on 
 the right breast in the case of Hindus, and on the left breast in the 
 case of Musalmans. Their houses are built of mud and are either 
 
 1 This account of the Hindiis in the plains is partly based on Elphinstone and 
 Notes by General R, Strachey. 
 
 3 
 
18 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 tiled or tlmi died in tlie villages, but in many of tlie towns very small 
 brides are used in the construction of the better class of dwellings. 
 The country is open and unenclosed, and almost the only trees are 
 groves planted near towns and villages, with occasional patches of 
 dh ah ( Butea frondosa) and babul ( Acacia arcibica ) jungle. The peo- 
 ple are mostly Hindu in religion and speak dialects of Hindi. On 
 approaching the Satlaj the language passes into Panjabi, also Sans- 
 luitic in its character, and we find the religion of the Sikhs the seal 
 of the double dispensation of Brahma and Muhammad. 1 To the west 
 of the Panjab, or country of the five rivers, the religion of Islam 
 predominates amongst a motley group of tribes of very varied origin. 
 The name Hindustan, which is more correctly applied to the north- 
 ern Gan get ic districts alone, may without impropriety be used so as 
 to include the entire tract below the Himalaya. Intersected by the 
 innumerable streams that flow from the mountains above it, watered 
 by the copious falls of periodical rains, and enjoying a semi-tropical 
 climate, the great unbroken plain is thus supplied with the two great 
 requisites, heat and moisture, that are the necessary and certain agents 
 for the development of vegetable life. We naturally, therefore, find 
 an agricultural population often in the older settled parts extremely 
 dense, and attaining to no small degree of civilisation. Cities 
 and large towns are common, many with a population of over 50,000 
 souls ; and the inhabitants, without coming up to a European 
 standard, enjoy considerable wealth. Literature, both indigenous 
 and of European origin, is cultivated ; schools are numerous, 
 and the useful arts are highly advanced and eagerly followed. 
 The hot climate which induces a love of repose and fertility of soil 
 which renders severe labour unnecessary has, in some measure, 
 modified the habits of patient industry which are usually character- 
 istic of an agricultural population ; but the dislike to change which 
 marks those communities in all parts of the civilised world is 
 nowhere more strikingly exhibited than in Hindustan. The great 
 wealth of the country and its open and easily accessible character, 
 together with the insuperable obstacles to union presented by 
 differences in race and caste, have, for many centuries, subjected it to 
 the reiterated attacks of foreigners. With very few exceptions all 
 truly national government has ceased to exist; and from what little 
 1 Cunningham, History of the Sikhs, p. 13, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN RRO VINCES. 
 
 19 
 
 we know regarding it, the people have small cause to regret the 
 successive changes of masters. India has never had in the whole 
 course of its history so strong, universal, and just a government as 
 it has enjoyed under the British since the memorable mutiny of 
 1857. Englishmen may well point with just pride to the lengthy 
 catalogue of measures attesting true moral and material progress 
 that have been introduced during the last quarter of a century, and 
 have been assimilated by the people to such a degree that the advance 
 — political, moral, and social — made has eclipsed all that had been 
 previously effected under British rule. 
 
 Taking the people of the plains as a whole, their clothing is 
 
 cotton and their food is vegetable, though 
 Clothing, food, customs. n . ,, , , , 
 
 IVlusahnans and some Hindus eat meat and a 
 
 few eat fish. The dress of the men, as a rule, is white, though they 
 often wear coloured jackets ; the women, who have no other covering 
 for their heads than a corner of the cloth that they wrap round 
 their bodies, frequently wear bright colours, usually indigo blue, 
 Turkey red, or safflower yellow. The Hindus preserve their mous- 
 tache, but shave their beards, and frequently their heads, except 
 a small scalp-lock, whilst the Musalmans allow their beards to grow. 
 The seclusion of women seems to be a custom introduced by the 
 Muhammadans, but amongst all religions and races in Hindustan 
 the position of females is essentially inferior to that of the other sex, 
 with whom they do not mix in society. Marriages are almost 
 always contracted in childhood, and the betrothed bride is always 
 under the age of puberty. Amongst Hindus, a dowry is given with 
 the daughter, though the practice of accepting a sum of money for 
 a daughter is in many parts of the country gaining ground. Female 
 infanticide has been rife in the Grangetic districts of Upper 
 India, due to the disgrace supposed to be attached to the expression 
 ‘ father-in-law,’ as well as to the great expenses ordinarily consequent 
 on the marriage of a daughter. The education of women is 
 absolutely neglected, and the efforts of Gfovernment in this direction 
 have proved a total failure. The men, however, for the most part, 
 amongst the classes above those actually engaged in the cultivation 
 of the soil, can read and write, and even the men who have not 
 acquired those attainments possess the power of mental calculation to 
 a remarkable degree. The Brahmanical faith is with few exceptions 
 
20 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 dominant throughout Hindustan. The Musalmans arc, however, 
 numerous everywhere, and in some districts are in the majority. 
 They belong chiefly to the Suni sect, but Shiahs are also found 
 in certain tracts where the influence of powerful families of their 
 persuasion has been felt. The peculiar modification of Hinduism 
 adopted by the Sikhs is chiefly confined to that portion of the Panjab 
 which lies east of the Chinab. To the west of that river, the great 
 mass of the population is Muhammadan. Taking the people of the 
 Pan jab proper, excluding Peshawar and the trans-Indus distiicts 
 attached to the Leia and Multan divisions, we have a population of 
 ten millions, of whom seven-twelfths are Musalmans, four-twelfths 
 
 are Hindus, and one-twelftli are Sikhs. Distributing them accord- 
 ing to race, General Cunningham 1 makes o per cent, of so-called 
 early Turanian origin, 27 per cent. Aryans, and 70 per cent, later 
 Turanians. 
 
 We shall now consider the ethnical and political divisions of 
 
 the Himalaya itself, proceeding in the same 
 Eastern Himalaya. direction from east to west. At the extreme 
 
 east we have the same races speaking a Barma-Tibetan language that 
 we found in the plains, but a line drawn north and south across the 
 Brahmaputra, in the general direction of the Dhansiri river, and 
 continued southwards so as to leave Kachar to the west of it, would, 
 according to Hodgson, divide them from the Alpine laces of moic 
 pronounced Tibetan stock, as well as from the so-called aboriginal 
 tribes of the central Himalaya. These Barma-Tibetan tribes are 
 known as Abors, Bor-Abors, Daphlas, Akas, Mishmis, Miris, &c., and 
 their communities are reported to have a sort of rough republican 
 constitution. This conjecture of Hodgson appears to be supported 
 by the result of the most recent investigations. 
 
 The country lying on the Tawang route by the Dhansiri river 
 from Asam to Chetang in the valley of the 
 Sanpu, in the 92nd meridian of east longitude, 
 has been traversed by one of the Pandits of the Great Trigo- 
 nometrical Survey, from whom we learn that to the east of that line 
 the Himalaya is inhabited by Lhoba Daplila tribes. 2 These men are 
 remarkable for the abnormal development of the muscles of the arms 
 and calves of the legs. They wear cylindrical-shaped hats made of 
 
 Eastern tribes. 
 
 1 Cunningham’s Arch. Rep., II., 2, H 2 See section A. of references 
 
 attached to this chapter, 
 

 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 21 
 
 bambus, and their only garment is a long blanket folded somewhat after 
 the fashion of a plaid and fastened round the waist by a cloth girdle, 
 which is used as a quiver for their arrows, which all carry, as well as 
 a bow slung over their left shoulder. The greater part of their legs 
 and arms is bare. They wear no boots, but ornamental rings made of 
 rope, fastened very tightly both on the wrists and legs below the knee. 
 They have a decided Tibetan caste of feature, high cheek-bones, and 
 Chinese-looking eyes. They wear no hair on the face, but the hair of 
 the head is allowed to grow to a great length, and is drawn together 
 behind the head and then allowed to hang down . 1 They appear to be 
 distributable into two groups — those living in the great rice country 
 to the north on the banks of the Sanpu, called Lho-khals, and who are 
 independent of the Lhasa authorities; and the Shiyar Lliobas, a wild 
 race who inhabit the country through which the great river flows to 
 Gaya, Asam, and who may be identified with the wilder tribes of 
 Mishmis. The Mishmis are distributed into three great divisions com- 
 prising numerous clans — the Chulikata or crop haired, the Midhu, 
 and the Digaru, each of whom have a separate dialect, and the last 
 reside within British territory along the hills as far west as the Digaru 
 river. The Abors or Padams inhabit the country to the west of the 
 Dibong river. They are described by their neighbours as exceed- 
 ingly fierce and blood-thirsty : “ like tigers, two cannot dwell in the 
 same den. Their houses are scattered singly or in groups of two 
 and three over the immense extent of mountains inhabited by them.” 
 They manufacture the weapon called clao, and weave coarse cloth, 
 which with manjit , beads, bell-metal cooking vessels, female slaves or 
 rather wives, and the breed of cattle called mithans, are exchanged 
 for salt and coarse cloth imported by the Miris from the plains. 
 The Miris are more civilised than the Abors, and dwell in villages 
 both in the hills and plains. The Alias or Hrussos live between 
 the Miris and the Daphlas on the upper waters of the Sundari, 
 and call themselves Tenae. The women of the Akas wear blue or 
 black petticoats and jackets of white cotton of their own manufacture. 
 Their faces are tattooed, whence the name “Aka” given them 
 by the people of Asam. The males wear a girdle of canework 
 painted red, which hangs down behind in a long bushy tail. Their 
 staple food is rice, but everything edible is made use of. The 
 
 KG. T. S., 1878, p. 70. 
 
 
22 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Daphlas belong to the same stock, and all are mere pagan savages, 
 debased, cruel, and treacherous, though in the last respect the Akas 
 have a somewhat favourable report. 
 
 To complete our review, we shall diverge to the south of the 
 Tribes Of the southern Brahmaputra and briefly notice the tribes 
 water-shed. inhabiting its southern water-shed . 1 In the 
 
 extreme east we find the Khamtis or Shans, a tribe linguistically 
 allied to the Siamese and Buddhists in religion ; next we have the 
 Singphos, or Kakhyens, and the Jilis, on the northern slopes of the 
 Patkoi range, both of whom are pagans and speak a language 
 intermediate between Barmese and Tibetan. Further west come 
 the Nagas, who are distributed into three great classes — the Namsang, 
 Khari, and Angami. They are the most numerous of all the pagan 
 tribes to the south of the Brahmaputra, extending from the Kopili 
 river in the meridian of Nowgong on the west to the meridian of 
 Sadiya on the east. They bury their dead and appear to manage 
 their affairs in a sort of republican assembly. The Kopili river 
 separates the Nagas from the Kliasiyas of the Jaintiya and Khasiya 
 hills around Shillong. The Kliasiyas appear to be an isolated group, 
 speaking a monosyllabic language which cannot be classed with any 
 other of the same family. The form of government is republican 
 and the religion is mere paganism. To the west are the Garos, who 
 also are pagans, though their language has affinities with the Aryan 
 dialects spoken on the north, south, and west. The language, 
 however, has a Tibetan basis, and Hodgson would include it in the 
 Bodo group, of which more hereafter. South-west of the Nagas come 
 the tribes of the Manipur, Lushai, Tipura (Tipperah), and Chitta- 
 gong hills. From McCulloch and Damant we learn that there are 
 numerous dialects in Manipur, and that the principal has a character 
 of its own derived from the Nagari. The inhabitants have adopted 
 the Brahmanieal faith. The people further west are known as Kukis, 
 and appear to speak four dialects of a common stem-language : — 
 the Lushai spoken by the I)zos of the Lushai highland, the Thadu 
 in northern Kachar, the Kuki in the same district, and the Hallami 
 in the Tipura hills. The Kukis are pagans, but are gradually yield- 
 ing to the influence of their Brahmanieal neighbours, as indeed are 
 all the pagan tribes similarly situated in the Asam valley. We shall 
 1 See section ]j. of references attached to this chapter. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 23 
 
 now return again to the tribes inhabiting the Himalaya to the west 
 of the Dliansiri river. 
 
 The whole country along the Tawang route from Asam to the 
 , head of the valley leading down to Chetang 
 
 on the banpu is under the rule of the Lhasan 
 Jongpen of the Chona Jang. The Lamas of the great lamasery of 
 Tawang, however, own the country to the south of the range of hills 
 which form the water-parting between the Tawang and Dhirang 
 valleys, and are entirely independent of Lhasa. They manage all 
 public business in an assembly of the principal Lamas, called the Kato, 
 ■which is also the supreme court of justice. To the north, near the 
 Chetang valley, the elevated highlands are occupied by nomad tribes ; 
 but to the south, in the Mon-yul or Sub-Himalaya, the country within 
 which Tawang is situated, the people are called Monpas or Hill Indians, 
 and differ materially in language, dress, and manners from the Bod- 
 pas, or people of Bod-yul to the north of Chona. The Monpas 
 resemble the inhabitants of Bhutan on the west. They wear their 
 hair closely cut round the head, not in plaited tails as in Tibet, and 
 as a covering have a small skull-cap of woollen cloth or felt. Instead 
 of the long gown of Tibet a short coat is worn which reaches to the 
 knee, and is fastened by a woollen girdle that invariably holds a 
 long, straight knife. The people keep cattle, sheep, and pigs. Thus, 
 the line drawn north and south by the Dliansiri river passes through 
 this wedge of Tibetan territory, separating the Barma-Tibetan tribes 
 on the east from those who have a more pronounced Tibetan origin 
 in the central Himalaya and the so-called aboriginal tribes of the 
 lower Himalaya on the west. Hodgson assigns to the latter the 
 name Tamulian, but it cannot stand, involving as it does linguistic 
 and ethnical associations which modern research has failed to 
 establish. 
 
 To the west of the Dliansiri river we have the countries of Bhu- 
 tan, Sikkim, and Nepal, all of which possess 
 Bhutan, Sikkim. / „ 1 
 
 a more or less established form of govern- 
 ment . 1 Much has been written regarding the people inhabiting those 
 countries which we can but very lightly touch upon here. The 
 entire tract may be divided into three great belts, — the elevated region 
 beyond the snowy range that is visible from the plains, varying 
 1 See section 0. of references attached to this chapter. 
 
24 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 from 10,000 to 16,000 feet above the level of the sea ; the central 
 region, varying from 4,000 to 10,000 feet ; and the lower region, 
 extending from the plains to 4,000 feet. 1 To the central region are 
 confined the Lhopas, Lepchas, Limbus, Kirantis, Mnrmis, Newars, 
 Sunwars, Cliepangs, Gurungs, Magars, and Kliasiyas. To the lower 
 regions belong the Kocli, Bodo, Dhimal, Kichak, Tharu, Denwar, 
 and Pallah tribes. The inhabitants of the central region belong to 
 a comparatively recent Tibetan immigration, whilst those of the 
 lower region, the so-called Tamulian aborigines, are apparently to 
 be ascribed partly to an early Tibetan immigration and partly to 
 an Aryan source. To the north, along the entire line of ghats from 
 the 92nd meridian to the Jumna, we find the Bhotiyas or Bod-pas 
 of pure Tibetan origin and Buddhists in religion. Bhutan, the 
 Lho-pato, Llio-duk, or Lho-mon of the Tibetans, is also a Buddhist 
 country, as well as Sikkim, the Demojong of the Tibetans. Nepal, 
 called Palbo by the Tibetans, is partly Buddhist and partly Brah- 
 manical in religion. In the central Himalaya of Bhutan and Sikkim 
 we find the Lhopas, Lepchas, and Limbus. The name ‘Lhopa’ 
 seems to be a generic term signifying the people of Lho or Bhutan, 
 as £ Bod-pa’ means a person of Bod or central Tibot, and £ Kham-pa,’ 
 a person of Kham or eastern Tibet. So also the term £ Dok-pa’ is the 
 religious equivalent of the territorial term £ Lho-pa.’ The Lepchas 
 extend from Panakha in mid-Bhutan on the east into eastern Nepal 
 on the west. They are divided into the Bong and Khamba tribes. 
 The women of both divisions wear a loose coat of the fibre of 
 the silk-worm that feeds on the castor plant, or of unbleached 
 cotton with a wrapper of the same material around the waist 
 to form a petticoat. The men wear a robe of striped red and 
 white cotton cloth crossed over the breast and shoulders and 
 descending to the calf of the leg, leaving the arms bare ; a loose 
 jacket of red cotton cloth is worn over the robe by those who can 
 afford it, and both are bound round the waist by a red girdle. 
 Some strings of coloured beads round the neck, silver and coral 
 earrings, a bambu bow with a quiver of iron-pointed arrows, 
 and a long knife complete their costume. This knife, called 
 £ ban by the Lepchas and £ chipsa by the Bhotiyas, is worn on 
 the right side, suspended from the left shoulder, and serves as 
 
 1 Bettor known as Hodgson’s belts. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 25 
 
 an axe, hoe, spade, sword, and knife. The Lepchas eat any 
 flesh of bird or beast, all cultivated and many wild grains, and 
 drink beer and tea. They are Buddhists in religion. Their 
 language, though allied to Tibetan, is not Tibetan, and has a 
 character of its own. They bury their dead ; though the Murmis, 
 a tribe of the same country, first burn their dead* and then bury 
 the ashes. The Lepchas are short in stature, averaging about 
 five feet, bulky for their height, and rather fleshy than sinewy. 
 They have a fair complexion, pleasantly marked Tibetan features, 
 and part their hair along the crown of the head. Both sexes 
 allow it to grow long ; the younger males allow it to hang loose 
 over the shoulders, whilst the elder males and women plait it into 
 tails, and the latter tie the ends with braid and silken cords and 
 tassels. Like all Buddhist hill-tribes they are very filthy in their 
 habits, ablution being unknown. 
 
 The Limbus are an important tribe of the central Himalaya, 
 T . . found between the Tista on the east and the 
 
 Dudh-Kosi on the west. The word ‘ Limbu,’ 
 according to Dr. Campbell, is a corruption of the term ‘ Ekthumba,’ 
 the correct name of this people, and used generally to designate 
 the whole population of this portion of the Himalaya not included 
 amongst the well-known divisions, such as Lepchas, Murmis, 
 Bhotiyas, and Parbatiyas. Under the name Limbu are included 
 the Kirantis or Kiratis, Ekas, and Pais, and their country is 
 divided into Kirati-des from Dudh-Kosi to the Arun and Limbua 
 from the Arun to the Ivonki river, which leaves the Nepal hills 
 about twenty miles to the west of the Mechi river. Further east 
 and west they occur only in small colonies. Hodgson records the 
 vocabulary of seventeen dialects of the Kirati language, none of 
 which are referable to the written Tibetan or Hindi. They are 
 pagans in religion, though willing to pass themselves off as 
 followers of Hinduism or Buddhists where those religions prevail. 
 Their features, the absence of a beard, and the colour of their 
 skin, all show them to be of Tibetan origin. The Limbu wears 
 his hair long, but does not plait it ; he carries a hukhvi or curved 
 knife instead of the ban, and has a wide trousers and jacket instead 
 of the robe and long jacket of the Lepcha. Both tribes are found 
 at elevations of from 2,000 to 4,000 feet above the level of the sea. 
 
 4 
 
•26 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The Hayus or Yahus prefer the lowest elevations in the valleys, 
 
 and occupy the central and lower ranges 
 Ncpa1, of the mountains of eastern Nepal between 
 
 the A run river and the Konki. They are found mixed with the 
 Eka division of the Limbus, but possess clearances and villages 
 of their own. They differ from all around in language, religion, 
 and habits, and are esteemed an outcast race by the Gur- 
 khalis. They do not intermarry or hold intercourse with other 
 tribes. The Bramhus, similarly placed in the Noakot valley to 
 the west, speak a Barma-Tibetan dialect and aie also pagans. 
 The great bulk of the Murmis are found between the Nepal 
 valley and the Dudh-Kosi, whence in smaller numbers they extend 
 to the Tista on the east and as far as twenty miles west of Kath- 
 mandu on the west. They are divided into two classes : one 
 from the Ni district in Tibet, and the other from the Tsang dis- 
 trict ; hence the generic name Nitsang or Nishang applied to the 
 whole tribe. They prefer elevations of from 4,000 to 6,000 feet 
 and engage in pastoral and agricultural operations, living 'in cottages 
 built of stone and thatched with grass. They are Buddhists m 
 religion and their language is akin to Tibetan. In their physical 
 traits they resemble the Lepchas, though somewhat taller. The 
 Newars compose the majority of the inhabitants of the Nepal 
 valley, but are not numerous beyond its limits. They are a shortci 
 race than the Gurkhalis, and their appearance betrays their 
 transmontane origin. The greater number are Buddhists, and the 
 remainder profess the Brahmanical faith. They possess a written 
 character of their own and speak a distinct dialect, though the 
 Buddhist portion also use Tibetan, in which their religious books 
 are chiefly written. In the forests to the west of Nepal, close to 
 the plains, we have the wild tribes known as Chepangs and Kusundas, 
 the former clearly akin to the Raj is of Knmaon. They speak 
 a language allied to that of the Lhopas of Bhutan. In the same 
 direction are the TIinduised tribes of Khasiya, Magars and Guiungs, 
 generically known as Parbatiyas. They speak a language having 
 a Tibetan basis, and into which many Hindi and Urdu vocables 
 have been introduced. The Gurungs, like the Murmis, prefer 
 elevations of 6,000 feet, and are partly pagan and partly Hindu in 
 religion. The Magars are entirely Hindu in religion, and to them 
 
OF THE NORTI-I-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 27 
 
 belong the Thapa clan so famous in later Nepalese history. Both 
 these tribes supply numerous recruits to the regiments in the 
 British service, and to this is probably due the Indianised form of 
 their speech. North of them we find the Sunwars, and on the west 
 the Thaksyas (Thakuris ?), and on the east the Pahris. Vocabularies 
 of the languages of these tribes have been preserved by Hodgson. 
 
 The Gurkhalis speak the Hindi dialect called Nepalese Khas 
 or Parbatiya. In summer they wear a sort of pantaloons called 
 pdejdrnas and a jacket or coat of white or blue cotton, and in the 
 winter the same padded with cotton or lined with fur and fastened 
 by a cotton girdle, which invariably holds the heavy, crooked knife, 
 called kukhri. Turbans of dark cloth or loosely-folded cotton are 
 used as a head-dress, or small tinsel, embroidered skull-caps. The 
 Newars wear a waist-cloth of cotton and a jacket of the same, or 
 some woollen materials. Some adopt the Tibetan costume of full 
 short trousers, a long tunic, and a fur-edged cap. The head-dress 
 is a small skull-cap of black or white cloth thinly wadded with 
 cotton and generally turned up an inch or so at the border. The 
 dress of the other inhabitants of Nepal differ little from that already 
 described. The women of the Newars wear their hair gathered into 
 a short thick club at the crown of the head, whilst others have it 
 plaited into a long tail. Flesh is much more commonly used by all 
 classes than in the plains. The lower classes drink a coarse fermented 
 stimulant called rakshi, and the higher classes, when they can afford 
 it, consume large quantities of tea. 
 
 Taking now the tribes inhabiting the lower Himalaya to the 
 Tribes of tlie lower north of the Brahmaputra, we find on the 
 Himalaya. extreme east the Deoriya Chutiya, the 
 
 remnants of a powerful tribe, who though Hinduised in religion 
 preserve their old language, which is affined to the Barma- 
 Tibetan group. Next come the Dhimal, Kachari or Bodo, and 
 the Koch. Hodgson tells us that in travelling between Gwalpara 
 in Asam and Aliganj in the Morang Tarai of Nepal one has 
 to pass through the country of the following tribes : — the Ivoch, 
 Bodo, Dhimal, Rablia, Hajong, Kudi, Batar or Bor, Kebrat, Pallah, 
 Gangai, Marahi, and Dhanuk. The Rablia, Kudi, Hajong, Mech, 
 Garo, and Pani-koch, are all affined to the Kachari or Bodo 
 type. The last six of Hodgson’s list are doubtful and undefined 
 
2.8 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 and require further investigation. The Dhimals are found hi 
 the sal forest between the Ivonki and the Tarsa, mixed with the 
 Bodos, but without intermarriage and living in separate villages. 
 The Bodos extend from the Surma to the Dhansiri, and thence by 
 Bijni and the Bhutan and Sikkim Tarai to the Konki ; besides 
 occupying outside the forest limits a large proportion of central and 
 lower Asam. 1 The Rabhas and Hajongs are found in the Gwalpara 
 district and are Hindus, whilst the Pani-koch occupy the tract along 
 the foot of the Garo hills and are still pagans. The Dhimals and 
 some of the Bodos, Kochs, and Mecliis are still pagans. The last- 
 mentioned tribe is found all along the Tarai with the Kochs and 
 Dhimals. Their dialect and religion differ from those of the neigh- 
 bouring tribes of the hills and plains. They are fairer than the 
 Kochs and have strongly marked Mongolian features, but softer 
 than those of the Lepcha or Limbu, resembling more the Newars 
 than the other hill-tribes of Tibetan origin. They live at elevations 
 between 800 and 1,000 feet, and almost always keep to the forest, 
 where they make temporary clearances. Their religion is connected 
 with the Bhairava form of Sivaism. The Koch tribe is now nearly 
 completely converted to Islam or Brahmanism, and with their 
 conversion have dropped their old name and language, speaking a 
 corrupted form of Bengali, in which, however, many of the ancient 
 vocables are retained. The Pani-koch, according to Hodgson, 
 represents the unimproved primitive Koch stock ; but Dalton 
 considers them a plains tribe driven upwards by the Aryan invader. 
 Hodgson estimates the number of all religions at over a million 
 souls. The settled Koch assimilate in their food and clothing with 
 the Bengalis, and show no marked differences. The Bodo women 
 wear garments of coarse silk, the produce of the worm that feeds 
 on the castor-plant. The Bodo men and Dhimals of both sexes 
 wear cotton clothes. The men wear one cloth thrown over the 
 shoulders and another wrapped round the waist and drawn up 
 between the legs. The female garment consists of a cloth wrapped 
 around the body and enveloping it from the arm-pits to the centre 
 of the calves. Wooden sandals are worn, but ornaments are rare, 
 though the women sometimes wear small silver rings in their noses 
 and ears and heavy bracelets of mixed metal. Meat, fish, and 
 1 See Hodgson’s Aborigines of India, p. 151. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 29 
 
 vegetables are eaten by all, ancl beer made of rice or millet is a 
 favourite beverage. Tharus and Denwars are found westwards in 
 Nepal mixed with the Mechis, and especially the former in the 
 malarious tract in the Gorakhpur and Tirliut Tarais along the foot 
 of the mountains where no other human being can live. They, 
 however, seem to be healthy, robust races. 
 
 The mass of the people of the Doti district of Nepal and the 
 
 British district of Kumaon belong to the race 
 Karnali to the Tons. . , 
 
 genencally known as Khasas or Khasiyas. 
 
 In Garhwal they are more mixed, though the difference is scarcely 
 
 discoverable. The northern inter-Alpine valleys are, however, 
 
 inhabited by Bhotiyas, who are decidedly of Tibetan origin. 
 
 Amongst the Khasiyas there is a great admixture of immigrants 
 
 from the plains, and most of the better classes look down with 
 
 contempt on the purer members of the Khasiya class, who appear 
 
 to represent the oldest inhabitants of these hills, though now much 
 
 modified by centuries of close connection and intermarriage with 
 
 the more civilized tribes of the plains. Throughout Kumaon, the 
 
 Kyunam of the Tibetans, the inhabitants dress and eat like those of 
 
 the plains, the only difference being that to the north woollen 
 
 materials find more favour, and there is greater license in matters 
 
 of food and drink. In Garhwal, which is known as Galdiya to the 
 
 Tibetans and to the north as Chongsa, garments made of hempen 
 
 fibre are common amongst the poorer classes. The language spoken 
 
 throughout is pure Hindi, though for purposes of trade the Bhotiyas 
 
 also use Tibetan, and amongst themselves speak a dialect of Tibetan 
 
 origin. In the land of marsh and forests which borders the plains 
 
 we find the Tharus in the eastern Tarai and the Bhuksas, a tribe of 
 
 similar character, occupying the tract between Puranpur-Sabna in 
 
 the Bareilly district and Chandpur in the Bijnor district. The Raj is 
 
 in eastern Kumaon are akin to, the Chepangs of Nepal, and the 
 
 Luis and Rawats of the same tract are now absorbed in the Hinduised 
 
 population. 
 
 To the west of the Tons we have a number of petty independent 
 
 states known as the “ protected hill-states,” 
 
 Bisahr. 
 
 followed by British territory. Amongst the 
 former the most important is Bisahr , 1 of which the northern part, 
 1 See section D. of references attached to this chapter. 
 
30 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS- 
 
 called Kunawar, or more correctly Knaor, the Kunu of the Tibetans, 
 marches with Tibet. The people of upper Knaor are of Tibetan 
 origin and Buddhists in religion, and correspond to the Bhotiyas 
 further east. Buddhism extends down the valley of the Satlaj as 
 far as Sarahan, between which and Pangi is a sort of debateable 
 ground common to Hindus and Buddhists ; but north of Pangi 
 Buddhism prevails, and south of Sarahan, Hinduism. With our 
 approach to these Buddhist countries the curious custom of poly- 
 andry appears. Commencing in north-western Tihri, we trace 
 it through Bisahr and Lahul, but find it confined to the inhabitants 
 of the valleys of the central and higher ranges professing both 
 the Buddhist and Hindu religions. The central tract is inhabited 
 by a fair, slight, and muscular race of mixed origin known as 
 Kunets, and akin to the Khasiyas on the east. To the south, 
 in the portion adjoining the plains, the people resemble the 
 inhabitants of the lower country, and appear of every shade of 
 colour from dark-brown to a tawny yellow or yellowisli-white. The 
 hair is black and worn long at the sides and back of the head down 
 about the ears, where it is cut short. The crown of the head is 
 shaved bare, but moustache and beards are worn. The dress is 
 a short coat of coarse cotton reaching to the knee, pleated in folds 
 to give it fulness, and fastened round the waist by a girdle of 
 the same material. A pair of cotton pdejdmas and a sheet of 
 the same material complete the hot-weather costume. In winter 
 these are exchanged for a pair of woollen drawers and a blanket, 
 but the poorer classes remain content with a coarse waist-cloth and 
 a blanket all the year round. The food of the people from the 
 Kali to the Indus differs very little in each tract, or, indeed, from 
 that of the people in the adjoining plains. Wheat, barley, rice, and 
 various millets and pulses are grown in the lower hills, and to the 
 north hardier varieties suited to a sub- arctic climate are cultivated. 
 When the produce is insufficient for the wants of the inhabitants, a 
 supply is imported from the lower districts. To the north, woollen 
 home-spun replaces the cotton worn in the lower hills, and the girdle 
 supports an axe. The women wear a similar dress, the coat reaching 
 down to the ancles, and the hair, done up in long plaits, is twisted 
 into rolls and covered with a piece of cloth wound like a turban 
 round the head. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 31 
 
 To the west of the Satlaj we find the British territory of Knlu 
 
 and Mandi, the independent state of Chamba, 
 and the territories of Kashmir and Jamu. 1 
 Kulu, called in Tibetan Nyungti and Mandi, lies along the upper 
 course of the Byas ; Chamba, known to Tibetans as Panga, along 
 the Itavi ; and Laliul, the Tibetan Grarzha, on the Upper Chinab. 
 To the north in Laliul and Ladak the people are Bhotiyas or Bodpas 
 of Tibetan origin, professing tho Buddhist religion, and amongst 
 them is a servile race known as Bern or ‘ low.’ Further east in Bcil- 
 tistcin are Tibetan Musalmans who have adopted with their religion 
 the Arabic alphabet. All these have decided Mongolian features, 
 and are noted for their strength of body and power of enduring 
 fatigue. In this respect the Baltis are somewhat inferior to their 
 Buddhist brethren in race. The men wear a coat of woollen mate- 
 rial reaching to the knees, fastened by a girdle, in which a knife is 
 usually carried. Bound their legs, from knee to ancle, they have 
 coarse woollen leggings secured by a tape of the same material wound 
 spirally round the leg from the ancle upwards. The head-dress is 
 either a quilted skull-cap or a fur cap with the hair or wool inside, 
 and with a large flap behind which covers the neck and ears. They 
 wear boots of felt with soles of sheep or goat-skin. The women 
 wear a black woollen jacket with a striped parti-coloured petticoat 
 and baggy trousers, and over all a skin coat with the fur turned 
 inside. The hair is arranged in a number of small plaits, and is 
 ornamented by a band of cloth, on which is sown a number of tur- 
 quoises and beads. The food of the common people consists of thick 
 barley cakes, though those who can afford it eat wheaten bread and 
 drink tea and a fermented liquor called dicing. Tho name Kunet 
 seems properly to designate only the mixed race in southern Ivnaor, 
 but it is used for the population of the central tract in Bisahr, Kulu, 
 Chamba, and Kashtwar, which borders on Ladak. In Chamba we 
 find the Gaddis, who cross over into the neighbouring territory of 
 Kashmir and meet the Thakars or Takkas, the chief cultivating 
 class in those hills, and apparently in the same position with refer- 
 ence to other Hindus as the Jats of the plains. In the valley of 
 Kashmir we have the Kashmiris, and amongst them the servile 
 class called Batal. To the south-west, along the left bank of the 
 1 See section E. of references attached to this chapter. 
 
32 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 J hoi am, we have the Musalman Dogras, called Chibhalis, and the 
 Musalman Sadans of Punch. On the right bank of the same 
 river we have Musalman Gakkars, Satis, and Dunds. To the east 
 of the Chibhalis come the Hindu Dogras, and amongst them the 
 servile tribes of the Meghs and Dums, who are scattered about 
 everywhere and form a considerable part of the population. The 
 Dogras have a light-brown complexion, clearly-cut features, and 
 black hair, which is cut to form a fringe below the turban. The 
 hair is worn on the face. The Thakars are a well-made race, 
 somewhat more powerful in body than the Dogra Rajputs, whilst 
 the Meghs and Dums are darker in colour, smaller in limb, 
 shorter in stature, and less bearded. The food and clothing differ 
 in no marked respect from that of the hill-tribes at a similar 
 elevation to the east. Passing to the north-west of the Kashmir 
 valley we come upon the Dards, an Aryan tribe called Brokpa by 
 the Tibetans, and most of whom are Musalmans, though the Dab 
 section have adopted the Buddhist religion, language, and customs. 
 They occupy Astor and the trans-Indus Kashmiri district of Gilgit, 
 as well as the neighbouring Kanjdd states of Nagar and Hanza, 
 and the Kashkara states of Chitral, Yassan, and Mastuj. They are 
 a strongly-built race, with decidedly Aryan features, wearing 
 woollen garments, except among the higher classes, who wear 
 cotton in summer. The ordinary costume consists of trousers, a coat 
 reaching to the knees and confined by a girdle, and a cap of woollen 
 cloth about half a yard long and turned up at the edges until it fits 
 the head, the outward roll thus forming a protection against heat 
 and cold. On their feet they have scraps of leather put under, 
 over, and around the foot, and kept in their place by straps of the 
 same material wound around them. A servile race is also found 
 amongst them, known as Dums, and performing the same duties 
 as the Dums of Kumaon. To the south-west of Kashmir, in the 
 salt range, we find the Awans and Janjuhas, tribes of Aryan origin 
 and of considerable antiquity. From the Kali to the Indus, 
 dialects of Tibetan are spoken to the north. Mr. Drew tells 1 us 
 that from near the Nunkun group of peaks which form the water- 
 parting between the Maru-wadwan and Suru rivers, “and from no 
 other spot in Asia, one may go westward through countries entirely 
 
 1 Northern Barrier of India, p. 20. 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 33 
 
 Muhammadan as far as Constantinople ; eastward among none but 
 Buddhists, to China ; and southward over lands where the Hindu 
 religion prevails, to the extremity of the Indian peninsula.” 
 
 Amongst the great mountain groups comprising the western or 
 
 , „ , , . , , trans-Indus extension of the Himalaya, and 
 
 Afghanistan, &c. , J 
 
 including the ranges known as the Hindu 
 Kush, Kara-koram, and those connecting them with the Tian-shan, 
 are several petty states, regarding which much has been learned of 
 late. 1 To the south lies the country called Afghanistan, the north- 
 eastern portion of which is included in the western prolongation 
 of the Himalaya, while the south-western part is a mountainous 
 country confluent with the Himalaya on the one hand and extend- 
 ing far in the opposite direction to the table-land of Persia. To 
 the north the boundaries are ill-defined and vary almost from 
 decade to decade. The authority of the ruler of Kabul, in many 
 places, depends on the forces at his disposal to coerce his unwilling 
 subjects; but in 1879, the Afghan province of Turkistan included 
 the whole of the countries between the Hindu Kush and the Oxus, 
 comprising Balkli, Kunduz, and Badakshan, with their dependent 
 states. The seat of the government is Balkh, Avith cantonments 
 at Faizabad. Karatigin, on the upper valley of the Surkhab, pays 
 tribute to Bukhara ; also Darwaz, on the Panja branch of the same 
 river, and Shignan-cwm-Iloshan, on the Ghund and Murghab rivers. 
 Wakhan is tributary to Badakshan, and south of it lies Kashkara, 
 also called Chitral. Northern Kashkara, including Yassan and 
 Mastuj, is subordinate to the ruler of southern Kashkara, who 
 resides at Chitral. North of Gilgit we have the robber states of 
 Hanza and Nagar or Kanjud. South of Gilgit, in the A-alley of the 
 Indus beloAV Banji or Bawanji, are a number of small republics, who 
 manage their affairs in assemblies called sigas , with Avhich we may 
 compare the similar institutions at the opposite extremity of the 
 Himalaya. Some of these, such as Darel and Hodar, owe a nominal 
 subjection to Kashmir. Further south Ave come to the independent 
 tribes of Buner and Swat. West of the Indus, in the Kunar 
 valley, are the Bajaur and Dir states, and betAveen them and 
 the Hindu Kush range the country of Kafiristan. 2 It may Avell 
 
 1 See section F. of references attached to this chapter. 2 Lately partially 
 
 explored by Major Tanner, R.E. 
 
 5 
 
34 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 be supposed that this rugged tract, the meeting-place of the 
 Turanian, Iranian, and Aryan races, presents many points of interest 
 to the ethnographer as well as to the geographer ; but here we can 
 but very briefly refer to them, however important they may be. 
 
 We have already noticed an Aryan race, the Dards, occupying 
 
 Gilgit and forming a part of the population 
 of the neighbouring states. Here they 
 meet the great Iranian race, which, under the name Tajik 
 or Galcha, form the bulk of the cultivating population of the 
 Musalman states between the Indus and Jaxartes. History tells 
 us that from the third century before Christ to the sixth century 
 after Christ this tract was subject to the continued incursions of 
 a Skythian race, traces of whom may be seen in the Brahuis of 
 Biluchistan, the Hazaralis of the Hindu Kush, the Gujars there and 
 in India, the Gakkars and Kohistanis of the Indus, and the Jats of 
 India, and who have continued to influence the entire history of 
 this tract to the present day. In the eleventh century the Afghans 
 were a small tribe in the Sulaiman mountains, of no importance and 
 but little known. Since then they have increased so much as to 
 have been able to annex a considerable extent of country, and to 
 impose their language, Pukhtu or Pushtu, on the populations which 
 they have absorbed. Along the Indus, Afghans occupy the villages 
 as far as Batera in 34° 53' north latitude, where the Kohistan 
 commences. The Afghans themselves are tolerably fair, robust, 
 and of moderate stature. They have long faces, high cheek-bones, 
 and dark hair, which they wear unshaved. Their underclothing is 
 of cotton, over which they throw a loose coat of woollen cloth, felt, 
 or, more commonly, of sheepskin. They wear low caps on their 
 heads, around which a cloth is twisted to form a turban. Boots are 
 generally worn, and they cany a matchlock, scymitar, and shield. 
 Leavened bread and meat are eaten by all classes. The women are 
 rigorously secluded in the towns, but in the country, beyond the 
 influence of the local maulvi or mullah, much more liberty is allowed. 
 The use of wine is forbidden, but in the hills it is taken in secret, 
 and that made in the Harel valley has more than a local reputation. 
 Pushtu approaches the Pehlavi or Zendic form of old Persian on 
 the one hand, and the Sindhi form of Prakrit on the other. It is 
 spoken throughout Afghanistan, and, with dialectal variations, in 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 35 
 
 Kohistan, Kaslikara. 
 
 Bajaur, Panjkora, Dir, and Swat. Afghans are Sunni Muham- 
 madans. 
 
 The Kohistanis of the Indus claim an Arab descent and speak 
 
 a language different from Pushtu and akin 
 to Kashkari and Dardui. They are fair 
 and have sandy hair, and are of a robust make. They wear a 
 tight-fitting coat and trousers resembling somewhat those of the 
 European, with a cap of brown woollen material in the form of a 
 bag rolled up at the edges. Around the legs and the feet a goatskin 
 is wound, kept in its place by a strap of leather, the great-toe and 
 the heel being left bare. A matchlock and sword are always 
 carried, and they are expert shots. The women wear a loose jacket 
 and trousers, and a cap of cotton or wool, over which they throw a 
 woollen or cotton sheet when proceeding far from their villages. 
 Unleavened bread of wheat, barley or millet (liolcus sorghum ) is 
 eaten with vegetables, milk, butter, or stewed meat. Further north 
 the people are less prosperous and more regardless of cleanliness. 
 In some of the villages there are colonies of pastoral Gfujars, and in 
 the Yassan villages settlements of Duins, who supply the musicians 
 and dancers of the country. Following next the Kunar valley, we 
 have dialects of Pushtu spoken in Bajaur and Dfr as far as the 
 Lahori pass leading into Chitral. Here it meets the Kaslikara, 
 which is akin to the Dardui and is of Prakritic origin, though many 
 Persian vocables have been added. The pagan inhabitants of 
 Ivafiristan are of the same race as the Kashkaras and the Dards, 
 and speak a language having an archaic Prakritic origin. 
 
 Moving further westward into Badakshan, we come amongst a 
 
 large Iranian population speaking Pushtu 
 in the south and Persian in the north, and 
 from Harm an Uzbeg population speaking Tiirki, and the nomad 
 Hazarahs having a dialect of their own. On the invasion of the 
 Turks the old inhabitants retreated into the more inaccessible valleys 
 of the great ranges, and there founded the Galcha states of Darwaz, 
 Karatigin, Shighnan, and Waklian. In Darwaz and the adjoining- 
 parts of Badakshan pure Persian is spoken or understood. The 
 vocables and grammar of the Galcha proper show a strong affinity 
 to Dardui, and many conjecture that, in its pure state, it must have 
 been the intermediate link between the Iranian and Indian branches 
 
 Galcha states. 
 
36 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 of the great Aryan family ; that the dispersion took place from 
 the ‘ bam-i-dunya , / £ the roof of the world/ the Indian branch 
 proceeding southwards and along the Kabul river to India, whilst 
 the Iranian branch crossed the Pamir to the plains of Turkistan. 
 Towards the plains the Galchas are Sunnis, but in all the hill 
 districts, except Darwaz, they are Shiahs. The Shiah is held 
 in the same contempt as the infidel, and the Sunni esteems it a 
 holy and righteous act to capture and sell his less orthodox 
 fellow-believer into slavery. Amongst the tribute paid by the 
 hill states to the Afghan governors of Badakshan and to the Wali 
 of Bukhara, not the least important parts are the troops of fair- 
 complexioned girls from the upper valleys of the Gbilclui states, and, 
 when procurable, pagan boys from Ivafiristan. Uzbegs are chiefly 
 found in the country, and Tajiks in the towns along the plains 
 below Badakshan and in Turkistan ; the former invariably speak 
 Turki and the latter Persian, or dialects with a number of Persian 
 words in them. In IVakhan the men wear brown woollen coats and 
 trousers, Ladaki boots, and a scanty cotton turban, either blue or 
 white. The women here also dress much like the men, and, as in 
 Chitral, wear their hair in long plaits. They have Jewish noses 
 and are not very fair-looking. Kirghiz are found along the eastern 
 slopes of the Tian-shan and the northern slopes of the Pamir and 
 Kuen-lun ranges in Chinese Turkistan. The Alai Kii ghiz of the 
 Pamir have a bad reputation as robbers. East of them lie the great 
 uninhabited steppes until we come to the countiy neai Kanjud, 
 which is rendered unsafe by the raids of the people of Hanza and 
 Nagar. Further east we have the Chang-thang highlands, occupied 
 by the robber Bhotiya tribes of Changpas, speaking a Tibetan dialect 
 akin to Zanskari. The dress of the male Kirghiz inhabiting the 
 pastoral slopes of the highlands south of Yarkand and Kashgai is not 
 different in any material degree from that of the other inhabitants . 1 
 Their women wear as a head-dress a white cloth rolled evenly 
 and regularly round a skull-cap ol red or other bright material, 
 with lappets over the ears. The end of the turban is drawn down 
 and passed over the lappets and under the chin, and the coat worn 
 is a dressing-grown of wadded and cpulted cotton. In the plains 
 the winter dress of the females comprises a fur cap of black lamb’s 
 
 i Gordon : Roof of the World. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 37 
 
 wool with a trimming of the fur, and a crown of coloured silk or 
 cloth worn over a square of muslin which forms a veil. The coat 
 worn is full and long, and the boots are of embroidered leather 
 with high heels. The hair is worn either in two long plaits or in 
 ringlets. The men wear a close-fitting cap lined with fur and 
 turned up at the bottom. The coat resembles that worn by the 
 women, only it is fastened by a cotton girdle, and the boots are 
 worn long and plain, with felt stockings. In winter, sheepskin 
 with the wool attached is the universal material for clothing. 
 
 To Prejevalsky we are indebted for an account of the people 
 
 around the lake country of the Tarim near 
 Kara-kurchins. m t 
 
 Lob-nor, to the north of the Altyn-Tagh, 
 
 and of those inhabiting the eastern extremity of the Kuen-lun 
 near the sources of the Hoang-ho. The former 1 present “ a strange 
 mixture of facial types, some of which call to mind a Mongolian 
 race. The prevailing characteristics are, however, Aryan, though 
 far from pure. * * In height they are rather below the average ; 
 
 frame weak and hollow-chested ; cheek-bones prominent and chin 
 pointed ; beard scanty and a V Espcignole ; whisker even smaller ; 
 hair on the face generally of feeble growth ; lips often thick and 
 protruding ; teeth white and regular and skin dark, whence 
 their name Kara-kurchin may be derived.” Their language is 
 said to resemble closely the dialect of Khoten. The clothing of 
 the lake-dwellers is made from the fibres of a species of cisdepias, 
 and consists of a loose coat and trousers with, in winter, a sheep- 
 skin cap, and in summer one made of felt. In summer the feet 
 are uncovered, and in winter shoes of untanned hide are worn. The 
 coats in winter are lined with duckskins dressed in salt.. Fish, 
 wild-fowl, and the tender shoots of reeds are their principal food. 
 All profess the Muhammadan religion. The inhabitants of the 
 country along the Tarim towards Korla appear to be also of the 
 same race, though comparatively more civilised. 
 
 To the north-east, towards the Yellow river, we have the Kara- 
 
 Tangutans, a race apparently connected 
 with the Tibetans proper. They are more 
 robust in form, greater in stature, and darker in complexion, than 
 
 1 From Kulja across the Tian-shan to Lob-nor : London, 1879, pp. 44, 166, See, 
 further, section G. of references attached to this chapter. 
 
 Tara-Tangutans. 
 
38 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the Tan gu tans of Kan-su. Their hair is black, hut the head is 
 shaved clean and no pig-tails are worn. The eyes are dark and 
 large, never narrow like the Mongols ; the nose straight and some- 
 times aquiline and also sometimes retroussde; the lips thick and 
 protruding ; the cheek-bones not so prominent as in the Mongol ; 
 the face long and never flat, and the skin tawny coloured. The 
 language is akin to Tibetan. The dress in summer comprises a 
 long, grey, woollen coat reaching to the knees, boots, and a low- 
 crowned, broad-brimmed, felt hat. In winter a sheepskin coat is 
 put next the skin, and the upper part of the legs is usually left 
 bare and also the right arm and part of the right breast, the right 
 sleeve being allowed to hang down empty. The women dress like 
 the men, and all live in tents made of black, coarse, woollen cloth, 
 whence the name Kara (or black)-Tangutans. They are met as far 
 as the Murui-ussu, the extreme point reached by Prejevalsky. 1 Of 
 the people between the Hoang-ho and Brahmaputra very little is 
 known beyond the fact that they are of Tibetan origin and chiefly 
 Buddhists in religion. Pamutan near Bathang, which lies in about 
 99° east longitude and 28° 50' north latitude, is the most westerly 
 point attained by Mr. Cooper 2 in his memorable journey from Han- 
 kow towards the frontier of India in 1868 ; and Prun, in the Mishmi 
 country, the most easterly point reached in his attempt to penetrate 
 the intervening ranges to China in 1870, leaving a space of about 
 120 miles as the crow flies unexplored and unknown. 
 
 W e have now briefly sketched the character of the countries 
 ^ and peoples encircling the great elevated 
 
 area which from Ladak on the west to the 
 Chinese frontier is known as Tibet, and is entirely under Chinese 
 influence. The true name of this tract is Bod-yul or Bod-land, 
 and the people Bod-pas, corrupted by the Indians into Bhotiyas, a 
 name now applied to the Tibetans living on the borders between 
 India and Tibet, whilst the people of Tibet proper are called 
 Huniyas and the country Hundes. The eastern division of Tibet 
 is known as Kham or Kham-yul, sometimes called Bod-chon ; it 
 extends from the frontiers of China to about 95° east longitude. 
 Central Tibet or Tibet proper is called Bod at its eastern end, and 
 
 1 Mongolia, by Prejevalsky: London, 1876, II., pp. 109, 301. 2 Travels of 
 
 a Pioneer of Commerce in Pig-tail and Petticoats : London, 1871. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 39 
 
 g-Ndri or Nari at its north-western end ; the former division being 
 the shorter of the two, but perhaps broader and more civilised and 
 populous. A line drawn from Darjiling northwards would apparently 
 separate Bod from Nari. The central part is also called U-Tsang 
 from the two provinces of U and Tsang in which Lhasa is situated. 
 Nari is divided into the three great districts of Mang-yul, Khorsum, 
 and Mar-yul. 1 The first marches with Nepal almost to its western 
 boundary ; the second extends along the British frontier of Kumaun 
 and Gfarhwal and that of the independent state of Bisahr ; and the 
 last included western Tibet and the Kashmiri states of Balti and 
 Ladak. The physical characteristics of this tract have had the 
 effect of isolating its inhabitants, who are distinct in race . and 
 language, from all the nations we have described, and find their 
 affinities in the Tangutans of the north-eastern Kuen-lun already 
 noticed. They are broadly built; have dark hair, scanty beards, 
 high cheek-bones, oblique eyes, complexion fair amongst the better 
 classes, dark amongst the lower, who are more exposed to the 
 weather. To the east in the warmer valleys they are agriculturists, 
 and to the west and north follow a pastoral life. The costume 
 varies in the different provinces and with the means of the person, 
 but as a rule the men in the wilder parts shave the head clean like 
 the Kara-Tangutans, whilst the more settled allow it to grow long 
 and plait it into a queue or tail like the Tangutans proper. To the 
 east Chinese fashions are in vogue, and to the west the common 
 dress is a coat and trousers of undyed woollen material with boots 
 to the knee. The Lamas wear distinctive dresses, red or yellow 
 according to the sect to which they belong, and the wealthier 
 indulge in coloured broad-cloth garments of English or Russian 
 manufacture. Barley porridge, tea and meat form the staple food 
 of the people, and dicing or beer, a simple infusion of malted barley, 
 is of universal use all over Tibet. 
 
 Having completed our review of the nations inhabiting the 
 
 Himalaya and the surrounding country, we 
 
 General distribution. , . n .. ,. 
 
 may now bnefiy notice the natural distribution 
 of the several great races that have come under our consideration in 
 
 1 From Captain Henry Strachey’s paper on the physical geography of Western 
 Tibet, London, 1854, still our best authority on the subject. A more detailed account 
 will be given hereafter in tlie Gazetteer portion of this memoir ; see also section H, 
 of references attached to this chapter. 
 
40 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the special tracts that each now occupies. The extraordinary rigour 
 of the climate and the physical barrier that exists between Tibet 
 and India sufficiently explains the absence of ethnical or political 
 relations between the two countries. Accident has (riven the Indian 
 state of Kashmir political preponderance in western Tibet, but the 
 ethnical distinction still remains, and will probably ever continue. 
 The climatic condition of eastern and northern Tibet allows of a free 
 migration of the inhabitants from one part to the other, which is 
 shewn in the common origin of the people of those countries to 
 the present day. Turks and Tartars occupy the country called 
 Turkistan, similar in character to their original homes ; but in 
 proportion as the climatal conditions become Indian, so does the 
 population become Aryan. The Tartar is the child of the rugged 
 bleak steppes ; and when we approach the cold and wooded 
 mountains we come on the Hindu element at its maximum in the 
 tract around the sacred sources of the Jumna and the Ganges, 
 gradually diminishing as we move eastward towards the excessively 
 moist though warmer valleys of the Nepal and Asam Himalaya, 
 where they are replaced by races akin to the people of eastern Tibet 
 and Siam, and on the west meeting the Iranian and the Tartar in 
 the trans-Indus ranges. To the north of the Kuen-lun the Mongol 
 and Chinese converts to Muhammadanism, called Tunganis, and in 
 western Tibet the Muhammadan Baltis, divide the Buddhists from 
 the followers of Islam. In the valleys of the affluents of the Oxus 
 and the Kabul river we have an Iranian race of Galchas or Tajiks 
 driven upwards by political disturbances and mixing with an indi- 
 genous mountain race of Aryan extraction. The rigorous climate 
 and scant}- cultivation which prevents the intrusion in any numbers 
 of a southern race also debars the tribes inhabiting the higher hills 
 from making any permanent occupation of the lowlands. Like their 
 favourite domestic animal the yak, the Himalayan mountaineers do 
 not thrive at low altitudes, nor can plains-bred men or animals with- 
 stand for any time the arctic cold and rarefied air of the more elevated 
 regions. Thus, there is a clear connection between the distribution 
 of the nations that are found in the Himalaya and the physical 
 characteristics of the regions that they occupy ; and if we had time to 
 pursue the subject further, it might be shown that the orographical 
 conditions of a tract have materially influenced its history, political 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 41 
 
 Hnd religious, and tlie social and moral character of its inhabitants. 
 The disposition of a people towards peace or war ; their migrations ; 
 the diffusion of their language ; their habits, pastoral, agricultural, 
 or commercial ; the extent of their influence — all depend more or 
 less on the physical peculiarities of the country that they inhabit. 
 And not only is man so affected, but the entire fauna and flora obey 
 the same laws, so that the skilful naturalist can from a plant or even 
 a butterfly describe the general character of the country of which it 
 is a native, and with it the customs and manners of the inhabitants. 
 For the nature of a country, whether mountainous or level, the 
 direction of the great ranges, the length and line of coast, the 
 position with regard to the equator, the relations of land and water, 
 and the drainage systems, are all primary agents in the distribution 
 of organic life and of the influences which govern all atmospheric 
 and climatic phenomena. 
 
 G 
 
42 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 REFERENCES. 
 
 The following list of references to books bearing on the geographical and ethnological notices in 
 the preceding chapter is not intended to bo exhaustive, but simply to furnish a guide to the 
 bibliography of the countries within and adjoining the Himalaya, aud only includes such 
 works as are ordinarily procurable. 
 
 Section A.— Eastern Asam and Tibet. 
 
 («) — Indo-Chinese Frontier. 
 
 1. La Mission du Thibet, by Fr. C. FI. DesGocIins. Verdun, 1872. 
 
 2. Pays frontieres du Thibet, de la Burmanie et de Yunnan, by the same. Bull, 
 
 de la Soc. de Geogr. de Paris, Oct., 1876. 
 
 8. Territoire de Bathang, by the same. Ibid, Dec., 1876, and Dec., 1877. 
 
 4. Le cours superieur des fleuves de lTndo-Chine, by the same. Ibid, Aug., 1876, 
 
 5. Notes sur le Thibet, by the same. Ibid, Oct., 1877. 
 
 6. Mandalay to Momein, by J. Anderson. London, 1876. 
 
 7. Overland route to China via Asam, the Tenga Pani river, Khamti and Singpho 
 
 country, across the Irrawaddy river into Yunnan, by PI. Cottam. P. R. G. 
 
 S., XXI., 6. 
 
 8 Travels in Western China and on the Eastern borders of Tibet, by Capt. W. J. 
 Gill. Ibid, XXII., 255, and see H., 26. 
 
 9. Across China from Chin-Eaing to Bhamo in 1877, by J. McCarthy. Ibid, I. N. 
 
 S., 489. 
 
 10. Official narrative of the expedition to explore the trade routes to China via, 
 Bhamo under Major Sladen. Calcutta, 18 lO. 
 
 ^ j Travels of a Pioneer of Commerce in Pigtail and Petticoats ■ an overland jour- 
 ney from China towards India, by T. T. Cooper. London, 1871. 
 
 12. Journal of an attempted ascent of the river Min to visit the tea-plantations 
 
 of the Fukhien Province of China, by G. J. Gordon. J . A. S., Ben., IV ., 553. 
 
 13. Short survey of the country between Bengal and China, by Baron Otto des 
 
 Granges. Ibid, XVII., i., 132. 
 
 14 Memorandum on the countries between Thibet, Yunnan, and Burmali, by 
 Rev. T. D’Mazure. Ibid, XXX., 367. 
 
 (See also the writings of Blakiston, Margary, Fytche, Poll ok, Phayre, &c.) 
 
 (5) — Upper Asam. 
 
 15, Memoir of a survey of Asam and the neighbouring countries executed in 
 1825-28, by Lieut, R. Wilcox. As. Res., XVII., 436, and Sel. Rec., Bengal, 
 XXIII., 1855, and Sel. papers, Hill tracts, 1S73, p. 1. 
 
 36. Account of Asam, the local geography, tea-plant, manners of the neighbour- 
 ing tribes, by W. Robinson. Calcutta, 1841. 
 
 17. Report on the Eastern frontier of British India, by Capt. R. B. Pemberton, 
 
 Calcutta, 1835. 
 
 18, Journals of travels in Asam, Burmah, Bootan, and Afghanistan, by W. Griffiths', 
 
 Calcutta, 1847. 
 
 19. Memoir on Sylhet, Kachar, and the adjacent districts, by F. H. Fisher. J. A, 
 
 S., Ben., IX., 808. 
 
 20, Notes on northern Cachar, by Lieut. R. Stewart, Ibid, XXIV., 582, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 43 
 
 21. Travels and adventures in the Province of Asam, by Major J. Butler. Lon- 
 
 don, 1855. 
 
 22. Koch Bihar, Koch Ha jo, and Asam in the 16th and 17th centuries, by H. 
 
 Blochmann. J. A. S., Ben., XLI., i., 49. 
 
 23. History of Asam, by Anundorum Boruah. Calcutta. 
 
 24. Memorandum on various phenomena in Asam, by the Rev. N. Brown, J. A. S., 
 
 Ben., XIL, 909. 
 
 25. Notes on the Asam temple ruins, by Capt. E. T. Dalton. Ibid, XXIV., i. 
 
 26. Description of ancient temples and ruins at Chardwar in Asam, by G. E. 
 
 Westmacott. Ibid, IV., 185. 
 
 27. Note on ancient temples and other remains in the vicinity of Suddyah in 
 
 Upper Asam, by Major S. F. Hannay. Ibid, XVII., i., 459. 
 
 28. Ruins at Dimapur on the Dunsiri river, Asam, by Major Godwin-Austen. 
 
 Ibid , XLIII., 1. 
 
 29. Temple at Jaysagar in Upper Asam, by J. M. Foster. Ibid, 311. 
 
 30. Contributions to the geography and history of Bengal, by PI. Blochmann. 
 
 Ibid, XLII., 209 : XLIII., 280. 
 
 31. Report of a visit to the hills in the neighbourhood of the Soobansiri river, by 
 
 Lieut. S. F. Hannay. Ibid, XIV., 250. 
 
 32. Account of a visit to the Jugloo and Seesee rivers in Upper Asam, by the 
 
 same. Ibid, XXII., 511. 
 
 33. Report of an expedition into the Mishmee hill to the north-east of Sudyah, 
 
 by Lieut. E. A. Rowlatt. Ibid, XIV., 477. 
 
 34. Journal of a visit to the Mishmee hills in Asam, by W. Griffith. Ibid, VI., 
 
 325, and Sel. papers, Hill tracts, 110. 
 
 35. Notes on the language spoken by the Mi-Shmis, by W. Robinson. Ibid, XXIV., 
 
 307. 
 
 36. Note on the Dophlas and the peculiarities of their language, by W. Robinson. 
 
 Ibid, XX., 126. 
 
 37. Correspondence and journal of Capt. Dalton in a visit to a clan of Abors on 
 
 the Dihing river. Sel. Res., Ben., XXIII., 139. 
 
 38. On the Meris and Abors of Asam, by the same. J. A. S., Ben., XIV., 426. 
 
 39. Account of the mountain tribes on the extreme north-eastern frontier of Ben- 
 
 gal, by Capt. Jenkins, edited by J. McCosh : containing notices of the 
 Miris, Abors, Mishmis, Kangtis, Singhphos, Muamarias, and Nagas. Ibid, 
 V., 193. 
 
 40. Notes on the tribes of the eastern frontier, by J. H. 0’D.oneI. Ibid, XXXII., 
 
 400-404, and by PI. J. Reynolds. Ibid, 407. 
 
 41. Memorandum an the north-eastern tribes, by A. Mackenzie. Calcutta, 1869. 
 
 (c) — E thnography. 
 
 42. Descriptive Ethnology of Bengal, by E„ T. Dalton : Calcutta, 1872. [Gives an 
 
 account (with figures) of the Khamtis ; Singhphos, Mishmis, Cliulikata 
 Mishmis ; Abor group', including Padams, Miris, Dophlas, and Akas ; Nagas 
 of Upper Asam ; lower Nagas, including Kukis, Mainpuris, and Koupouis ; 
 Mikirs ; Jaintiyas and Khasiyas ; Garos, Kacharies ; Mechs ; Kochs ; 
 Bhotiyas ; Lepchas ; Murmis ; Limbus and Kirantis ; Hayas, and the 
 Tipura (Tipperah) and Chittagong tribes]. 
 
44 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 (d)— Gabo Hills. 
 
 43. Observations on the inhabitants of the Garrow hills, by J. Eliot. As. Res., 
 
 III., 17. 
 
 44. A narrative of our connection with the Dushani and Cliianni Garrows, with a 
 
 short account of their country, by C. S. Reynolds. J. A. S., Ben., NYU!., 
 1, 45. 
 
 45. Some account of the Casiah hills. Gl. in sec. I., 252. 
 
 46. Notes on the Casiah hills, by H. Yule. J. A. S., Ben., XIII., 612. 
 
 47. A vocabulary of the Garo and Konch languages, by Lieut. W. J. Williamson. 
 
 Ibid, XXXVIII.., 14. 
 
 48. Khasia grammar, selections and vocabulary, by W. Pryce. Calcutta, 1855. 
 
 49. English- Khasia vocabulary, by Kelsall. Calcutta, 1864. See also Hodgson’s 
 
 papers. 
 
 50. Some account of the Palis of Dinajpur, by G. H„. Damant, Ind. Ant., I., 336, 
 
 371. 
 
 51. On the dialect of the Palis, by the same. Ibid, II., 101. 
 
 52. The Garos, by the Rev. I. J. Stoddard. Ibid, II., 336. 
 
 53. On the Khasia hill-tribes of north-eastern Bengal, by A. Morgan. P. Lit. and 
 
 Phil. Soc., Liverpool, 30, 1875-76. 
 
 Section B — Southern Asam. 
 
 1. Report on the wild tribes of the Chittagong frontier, by C. Ricketts. Cal- 
 
 cutta, 1847. 
 
 2. Some account of the hill-tribes in tire interior of the district of Chittagong, 
 
 by the Rev. M. Barbe, J, A. S., Ben., XIV., 380. 
 
 8. Selection of papers regarding the hill tracts between Asam and Burmah and 
 on the Upper Brahmaputra. Calcutta, 1873. 
 
 4. The wild tribes of the south-east frontier, by Capt. T. H. Lewin. 
 
 5. The Chittagong hill tracts and the dwellers therein, with comparative voca- 
 
 bularies of the hill dialects, by the same. Calcutta, 1869. 
 
 6. History of Arakan, by Col. J. P. Phayre. J. A, S., Ben., XV., 232. 
 
 7. Account of Arakan, by the same. Ibid, X., 679, 
 
 8. History of Pegu, by Sir A, Phayre. Ibid, XLII., 23, 120 : XLIIL, 6. 
 
 9. Notes on the Heuma or Shendoos, a tribe inhabiting the hills north of Arra- 
 
 can, by Capt. Tickell. Ibid, XXL, 207. 
 
 10. History of the Burmah race, by Sir A, Phayre. Ibid, XXXVII., i. : XXXVIII., 
 29. 
 
 31. The hill tribes of the north-east frontier. Ind. Ant,, I., 62, 
 
 12. The Lushais, by Capt. Badgley, Ibid, II., 363. 
 
 13. Abstract of the journal of a route travelled by Capt. S. F. Hannay from the 
 
 capital of Ava to the amber mines of the Hukong valley on the south- 
 eastern frontier of Asam, by Capt. R. B. Pemberton. J. A. S., Ben., VI., 
 245, and No. 3 above, p. 83. 
 
 14. Journey from Upper Asa:m towards Hookhoom, Ava, and Rangoon, by W, 
 Griffiths. No. 3 above, p. 125. 
 
 Narrative of a journey from Ava to the frontier of Asam and back in 1836-31, 
 by G. T. Bayfield. Ibid, 134, 
 
 15 . 
 
OF THE HORTI-I-WESTERN PROVINCES. 45 
 
 16. Notes on a trip across the Patkoi range from Asam to the Hukoong valley, 
 
 by H. L. Jenkins in 1869-70. Ibid, 245. 
 
 17. Notes on the Burmese route from Asam to the Hukoong valley, by the same. 
 
 Ibid, 250. 
 
 18. The Nagas of Asam, by Capt. Jenkins. J. A. S., Ben., V., 207. 
 
 19. Extract from the narrative of an expedition into the Naga territory of Asam 
 
 in 1840, by Lieut, Grange. Ibid, VIII., 445 : IX., 947. 
 
 20. Extracts from a report on a journey into the Naga hills in 1844, by B. Wood. 
 
 Ibid, IX., 947 : X., 126 : XIII., 771. 
 
 21. Extract from a memoir on some of the natural products of the Angami Naga 
 
 Hills, by J. W. Masters. Ibid, XIII., 707 : XVII., i., 57. 
 
 22. Narrative of a tour over that part of the Naga hills lying between the Diko 
 
 and Dyang rivers, by Capt. Brodie. Ibid, XIV., 828. 
 
 23. Report of Lieut. Brodie’s dealing with the Nagas on the Sibsagar frontier in 
 
 1841-46. Sel. papers, Hill tracts, p. 284. 
 
 24. Note on a visit to the tribes inhabiting the Hills to the south of Sibsagar in 
 
 Asam, by S. E. Peal, J. A. S., Ben., XLI„ i., 9 : and Sel. papers, Hill 
 Tracts, p. 316. 
 
 (/)— Languages. 
 
 25. A rough comparative vocabulary of some of the dialects spoken in the Naga 
 
 Hills, by Capt. J. Butler. J. A. S., Ben., XLII., i., App. i. Vocabulary 
 of the Banpara Nagas, by S. E. Peal. Ibid, xxx. 
 
 26. Account of the valley of Munipur and of the Hill tribes, by Major McCulloch. 
 
 (To which is added a comparative vocabulary of the Munniporee, Undro 
 Sengmai, Chairel, Meeyang, Koupooee Poveeron, Koupooee Songboo, 
 Qoireng, Khoonggoee, Pliudang, Koopome, Tukaimee, Muram, Murring Anal 
 Namfau, Kookie, Burmese and Shan languages). Sel. Res., Government 
 of India, For. Dept., XXVII., 1859. 
 
 27. Analysis of the Bengali poem ‘ Rajmala,’ or chronicles of Tripura, by the Rev. 
 
 J. Long. J. A. S., Ben., XIX., 533. 
 
 28. Progressive colloquial exercises in the Lusliai dialect of the Dzo or Kuki 
 
 language, by Capt. T. H. Lewin. Calcutta, 1874. 
 
 29. Hill Proverbs : a collection of wit and wisdom from the people of the Chitta- 
 
 gong Hills, by the same. Calcutta, 1875. 
 
 30. Notes on the languages spoken by the various tribes inhabiting the valley of 
 
 Asam and its mountain confines, by W. Robinson. J. A. S., Ben., XVIII., 
 i., 183, 310. ' 
 
 81. A dictionary in Asamese and English, by M. Brouson, American Baptist 
 Missionary. London, 1876. 
 
 32. Note on the Shans, by Col. S. F. Hannay. Calcutta, 1846. 
 
 83. A visit to Xiengmai, the principal city of the Shan State, by Sir R. H. 
 
 Schomburgh. J. A. S., Ben., XXXII., 387 (1863). 
 
 84. Introductory sketch of the history of the Shans in Upper Burmah and 
 
 Yunan, by N. Elias. Calcutta, 1876. 
 
 85. A grammar of the Shan languages, by J. Cushing. London, 1877. 
 
 86. Alphabets of the Tai languages, by Rev. Nathan Brown, with plates of those 
 
 of the Ahom, Khamti, Shyan, Laos, and Burmese. J, A. S., Ben., VI., 17. 
 
46 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 37. Interpretation of an Ahom inscription, by Capt. Jenkins. Ibid, 980, 
 
 38. Comparison of Indo-Chinese languages with comparative vocabularies of 
 
 Bangali, Asamese, Khamti, Siamese, Aka, Abor, Mishimi, Barmese, 
 Karen, Singpho, Jili, Garo, Manipuri, Songpu, Kapwi, Koreng, Maram, 
 Champhung, Lahuppa, N. Tangkhul, C. Tangkhul, S. Tangkhul, Khoibu, 
 May ing, Anamese, Japanese and Corean, by Rev. W. Brown. Ibid, 1,023. 
 
 39. Description of the tomb of an Ahom noble, by C. Clayton. Ibid, XVII., 
 
 i., 473. 
 
 40. Note on Ghargaon in Asam, by J. M. Forster. Ibid, XLI., i., 32. 
 
 41. Note on the Singphos, by Col. S. F. Hannay. Calcutta, 1846. 
 
 42. Report of a visit by Capt. Vetch to the Singpho and Naga frontier of Lakim- 
 
 pur in 1842. Sel. papers, Hill tracts, p. 255. 
 
 43. Remarks on the Indo-Chinese alphabets, by Dr. Bastian. J.R.A. S., III., ii. 
 
 Section C.— Bhutan, Sikkim, Nepal. 
 
 (&) — Bhutan. 
 
 1. Narratives of the Mission of George Bogle to Tibet (1774), and of the journey 
 
 of Thomas Manningto Lhasa (1811-12), by C. R. Markham. London, 1870. 
 
 2. Notes on Dr. Hamilton’s Missions to Panakha in 1775 and 1777. 
 
 3. Account of an embassy to the court of the Teshoo Lama in Tibet and a journey 
 
 through Bootan, by Capt. S. Turner. London, 1806. 
 
 4. Poorungeer Gosseyn’s residence at Lhasa in 1785. As. Res., I., 207. 
 
 5. Account of Bhutan, by Kishan Kant Bose. As. Res., XII., 128. 
 
 6. Report on Bootan, by Capt. R. B. Pemberton. Calcutta, 1839. Journal 
 
 of the Mission to Bhutan, 1837-38, under Capt. R. B. Pemberton, by W. 
 Griffiths, M.D. Calcutta, 1847, and J. A. S., Ben., VIII., 208, 251. 
 
 7. Report on the state of Bootan and on the progress of the Mission of 1863-64, 
 
 by the Hon’ble Ashley Eden. Calcutta, 1864. 
 
 8. The last four are reprinted in ‘ Political Missions to Bootan.’ Calcutta, 1865. 
 
 9. Bootan, or the story of the Dooar war, by Surgeon Rennie, M.D. London, 1866. 
 
 10. Papers relating to Bootan presented to Parliament. No. 13 of 8th February, 
 
 1865. 
 
 11. Further papers relating to Bootan presented to Parliament. No. 47 of 15th 
 
 February, 1865. 
 
 12. Visit to Dewangiri, by E. T. Dalton. J. A. S., Ben., XVIII., 66. 
 
 13. A Military report on the country of Bhutan, containing all the information 
 
 of Military importance which has been collected up to 12tli July, 1866, by 
 Lieut. C. M. Macgregor. Calcutta, 1873. 
 
 (5)— Sikkim. 
 
 14. Himalayan Journals : notes of a naturalist in Bengal, the Sikkim and Nepal 
 
 Himalayas, &c., by J. D. Hooker. London, 1855. 
 
 15. Notes, chiefly botanical, made on a journey from Darjeeling to Tonglo, by the 
 
 same. J. A. S., Ben., XVIII., i., 419. 
 
 16. Notes on a tour in the Sikkim Himalayan mountains undertaken for the pur- 
 
 pose of ascertaining the geological formation of Kinchinjanga. by W. S. 
 Slierwill. Ibid, XXIL, 540, 611. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 47 
 
 17. Journal of a trip undertaken to explore the glaciers of the Kancliinjinga 
 
 group, by Major J. L. Sherwill. Ibid, XXXI., 457. 
 
 18. Diary of a journey through Sikkim to the frontiers of Thibet, by A. Campbell. 
 
 Ibid, XXL, 407, 477, 563. 
 
 19. A journal of a trip to the Sikkim, by the same. Ibid, XVIII., i , 482. 
 
 20. Routes from Darjiling to Tibet, by the same. Ibid, XVII., ii., 488. 
 
 21. Itinerary from Phari in Tibet to Lassa, with appended routes from Darjiling 
 
 to Phari, by the same. Ibid, XVII., i., 257. 
 
 22. Notes on eastern Thibet, by the same. Ibid, XXIV., 252. 
 
 23. Report on a visit to Sikkim and the Tibetan frontier in 1873, by J. Ware- 
 
 Edgar, C.S.l. Calcutta, 1874. 
 
 24. Sikkim, with hints on mountain and jungle warfare, exhibiting also the facili- 
 
 ties for opening commercial relations through the hills of Sikkim with 
 Central Asia, Tibet, and Western China, by Col. J. C. Gawler. London, 
 1873. 
 
 25. A short account of the Cooch Behar State, by Capt. T. H. Lewin. 
 
 26. The Indian Alps and how we crossed them. London, 1S76. 
 
 27. Note on the Mechis, together with a small vocabulary of the languarge, by Dr. 
 
 A. Campbell. J. A. S., Ben., VIII., 623. 
 
 28. Note on the Lepchas of Sikkim, with a vocabulary of their language, by the 
 
 same. Ibid, IX., 379. 
 
 29. A note on the Limboos and other hill tribes hitherto undescribed, by the 
 
 same. Ibid, IX., 595. 
 
 30. On the literature and origin of certain hill tribes, by the same. Ibid, XI., 4. 
 
 31. Note on the Limboo alphabet of Sikkim, by the same. Ibid, XXIV., 202. 
 
 32. Ethnology of India, by Mr. Justice Campbell. Ibid, XXXV., 1. 
 
 33. Specimens of the languages of India, including tribes of Bengal, the Central 
 
 Provinces, and the eastern frontier, by Sir G. Campbell. London, 1874. 
 
 34. A sketch of the modern languages of the East Indies, accompanied by two 
 
 language maps, by R. N. Cust. London, 1878. 
 
 35. A comparative dictionary of the languages of India and High Asia, by W. W. 
 
 Hunter. London, 1868. 
 
 36. A grammar of the Rong (Lepcha) language as it exists in the Dorjeling 
 
 and Sikkim hills, by G. B. Mainwaring. Calcutta, 1876. 
 
 (c) — N epal. 
 
 37. An account of the kingdom of Nepal, by Father Guiseppe. As. Res., II., 307. 
 
 38. An account of the kingdom of Nepal, being observations made during a mission 
 
 to that country in the year 1793, by Colonel Kirkpatrick. London, 1811. 
 
 39. An account of the kingdom of Nepal and of the house of Gorklia, by Francis 
 
 Hamilton (formerly Buchanan). Edinburgh, 1819. 
 
 40. Narrative of a five years’ residence at Nepal, from 1841 to 1845, by T. Smith. 
 
 London, 1852. 
 
 41. A journal to Kathmandu with the camp of Jang Bahadoor, by Lawrence 
 
 Oli pliant. London, 1852. 
 
 42. History of Nepal, translated from the Parbatiya by Munslii Shew Sliunker 
 
 Singh and Pandit Sliri Gunanand and edited by D. Wright, M.D. Cam- 
 bridge, 1877. 
 
48 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 43. Nepal : its people, religion, customs, zoology, botany, by Dr. Oldfield. London, 
 
 1879. 
 
 44. Memorandum relative to the seven Kosis of Nepal, by B. H. Hodgson. J. A. 
 
 S., Ben., XVII., ii., 646. 
 
 45. Route from Kathmandu to Darjiling, by the same. Ibid, 634. 
 
 46. A cursory notice of Nayakot, by the same. Ibid, IX., 1114. 
 
 47. Selections from the records of the Government of Bengal, No. XXVIL 
 
 48. Quality of the Kosis of Nepal. J. A. S., Ben., V., 369. 
 
 49. Papers on the colonisation, commerce, geography, &c., of the Himalaya moun- 
 
 tains and Nepal, by B, H. Hodgson. London, 1857. 
 
 (/7) — Ethnology. 
 
 50. Notices of the languages, literature, and religion of Nepal and Thibet, by B. 
 
 H. Hodgson. As. Res., XVI., 409. 
 
 51. On the aborigines of the Himalaya, by the same. J. A. S., Ben., XVI., 1235, 
 
 and XVII., i., 73. 
 
 52. Origin and classification of the military tribes of Nepal, with a tabular view 
 
 of the tribes, by the same. Ibid, II., 217* 
 
 53. On the Chepang and Kusunda tribes of Nepal, with a Chepang vocabulary, by 
 
 the same. Ibid, XVII., ii, 650. 
 
 54. Cursory notice of Nayakot and the remarkable tribes inhabiting it, by the 
 
 same. Ibid, IX., 1114. 
 
 55. On the tribes of northern Tibet, Horsok and Sifan, by the same. Ibid, XXIL, 
 
 121 . 
 
 56. On the colonisation of the Himalaya by Europeans. Sel. Rec. Ben., XXVII., p. 1. 
 
 57. On the commerce of Nepal. Ibid, p. ll. 
 
 58. The preceding seven papers have been reprinted in ‘ Essays on the languages, 
 
 literature, and religion of Nepal and Tibet.’ London, 1874. 
 
 59. Classification of the Newars or aborigines of Nepal Proper, preceded by the 
 
 most authoritative legend relative to the origin and early history of the 
 race, by the same. J. A. S., Ben., III., 215. 
 
 60. Comparative vocabulary of the several languages and dialects of the eastern 
 
 Sub-Himalaya from the Kali or Ghagra to the Dhansri, by the same, 
 Ibid, XVI., 1244. 
 
 61. Ethnography and geography of the Sub-Himalayas, by the same, with a Khas 
 
 vocabulary. Ibid, XVII., i., 544. 
 
 62. On the Tibetan type of mankind, by the same. Ibid, XVII., ii,, 222, 580. 
 
 63. A brief note on Indian Ethnology, by the same. Ibid, XVIII., 238, 
 
 64. On the aborigines of north-eastern India, by the same, with a comparative 
 
 vocabulary of Tibetan written and spoken, Dhimal, Bodo and Garo. Ibid, 
 451. 
 
 65. On the origin, location, creed, customs, character and condition of the Kooch 
 
 Bodo and Dhimal people, with a general description of the climate they 
 dwell in, by the same. Ibid, 702. Reprinted with the preceding in the 
 Aborigines of India. Calcutta, 1847. 
 
 66. On the aborigines of the eastern frontier with vocabularies of Burman written 
 
 and spoken, Singpho, Naga, Abor-miri and Miri, by the same. J. A. S., 
 Ben,, XVIII., 967. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 49 
 
 67. On the aborigines of southern India, by the same. Ibid, 350. 
 
 68. On the aborigines of Central India, by the same. Ibid, XVII., ii., 550. 
 
 69. On the aborigines of the north-eastern frontier, by the same. Ibid, XIX., 
 
 309. 
 
 70. Indo-Chinese bo-rderers and their connection with the Himalayans and Tibet- 
 
 ans, by the same. Ibid, XXII., 1. 
 
 71. Caucasian and Mongolian affinities, by the same. Ibid, XXII,, 26. 
 
 72. Comparative vocabulary of the languages of the broken tribes of Nepal : 
 
 [(1) Dahi or Darhai ; (2) Denwar; (3) Pahi or Pahari ; (4) Chepang ; 
 {5) Bhramu ; (6) Vayu or Hayu ; (7) Kuswar ; (8) Kusunda ; (9) Pakhya 
 (unbroken) ; (10) Thaksya (do.)'; (11) Tharu], and comparative vocabulary 
 of the (seventeen) dialects of the Kiranti language, also a Vayu and a 
 vocabulary and grammar, by the same. Ibid, XXVI., 317 '. XXVII., 393, 
 
 73. On the Vayu tribe, by the same. Ibid, XXVII., 443. 
 
 74. On the Kiranti tribe, by the same. Ibid, 446. 
 
 75. The Magar language of NepAl, by J. Beames. J. Ik A. S., IV., 1869. 
 
 Note. — A rticles Nos. 44, 45, 62, 64 — 66, 68, 69, 70 — 74 above have been reprinted 
 in Miscellaneous Essays relating to Indian subjects, by B. H. Hodgson, 
 London, 1880. 
 
 Section D. — Kali to the Satlaj, 
 
 1. Illustrations of the botany and other branches of the Natural History of the 
 
 Himalayan mountains, by J. Forbes Royle. London, 1839. 
 
 2. Notes of an excursion to the Pindaree Glacier in 1846, by E. Madden. 
 
 J. A. S., Ben., XVI., 226, 596 (chiefly botanical). 
 
 -3. The Turaee and outer mountains of Kumaon, by the same. Ibid, XVII., 
 
 1., 349 : XVIII., i., 603 (chiefly botanical). 
 
 4. Description of the (so-called) mountain trout of Kumaun, by J. McClelland. 
 
 Ibid, IV., 59. 
 
 5. Notes of observations on the Boksas, by Dr. J. L. Stewart. Ibid, XXXIV., 
 
 11., 147, 
 
 6. Ancient remains in the Garhwal Bhabar, by H. Pullan. Ibid, XXXVI., 155. 
 
 7. Narrative of a survey for the purpose of discovering the source of the Ganges, 
 
 by Capt. F. V. Rapier. As. Res., XI., 446. 
 
 8. Pilgrim’s wanderings in the Himmala, by Barron. Agra, 1844. 
 
 9. Report on the Bhotia mahals of Kumaon, by G. Traill. J. A. S., Ben., II., 
 
 551. Reprinted in Kumaon Reports. 
 
 10. A. few notes on the subject of the „ Kumaon and Rohilkhand Tarai, by 
 
 J. H. Batten. Ibid, XIII., 887. 
 
 11. Extract from the journal of J. Weller on a trip to the Bulcha and Oonta 
 
 Dhoora passes, edited by the same. Ibid., XII., 78. 
 
 12. Journal of a visit to Melum and the Gonta Dhoora pass in Jawahir, by 
 
 E. Masson, edited by the same. Ibid, XI., 1157. 
 
 13. Note of a visit to the Niti pass of the grand Himalayan chain, by the same. 
 
 Ibid, VII., 310. 
 
 14. Notice of a trip to the Niti pass. Ibid, XIX., 79. 
 
 15. Account of a visit to the Bians pass. Gl. in Sci., I., 97. 
 
 7 
 
50 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 16. Notes on a trip to the Kedamath and other parts of the snowy range of the 
 
 Himalayas in 1853 (by J. M.) Edinburgh, 1856. 
 
 17. The Himalaya in Kumaon and Garhwal. Col. Rev., XVIII., 72. 
 
 18. Kumaon and its Hill stations. Ibid, XXVI., 373. 
 
 19. On the Physical geography of the Himalaya, by B. H. Hodgson. J. A. S., 
 
 Ben., XVIII., ii., 761. 
 
 20. On the Physical geography of the provinces of Kumaon and Garhwal in the 
 
 Himalaya mountains and of the adjoining parts of Tibet, by Capt. (now 
 General) R. Strachey. J. E. G. S., XXI., 57 (1851). 
 
 21. Explanation of the elevation of places between Almora and Gangn, by 
 
 Lieut. H. Strachey. J. A. S., Ben., XVII., ii., 527. 
 
 22. Narrative of a journey to Cho Lagan (Kakas Tal), Cho Mapan (Manasaro war) , 
 
 and the valley of Pruang in Gnari Hundes, by the same. J. A. S., Ben., 
 XVII., ii., 98, 127, 327. 
 
 23. A description of the glaciers of the Pindur and Kuphinee rivers in the 
 
 Kumaon Himalaya, by the same. Ibid, XVI., 794, 1002. 
 
 24. Notice of Lieut. H. Strachey’ s scientific inquiries in Kumaon and Garhwal. 
 
 Ibid, XIX,, 239. 
 
 25. Note' on the motion of the glacier of the Pindur in Kumaon, by Lieut. H, 
 
 Strachey. Ibid, XVII., if., 203. 
 
 26. A Sketch of the mountains and river-basins of India, by Trelawny Saunders, 
 
 India Office, London, 1870. 
 
 27. Trans-Himalayan missions- and their results. Cal. Rev., Jan, 1877, 115. 
 
 28. Geographical Magazine (London), IV., 113 (May, 1877), by C. R. Markham, 
 
 on “ the Himalayan system,” and p. 173, by T. Saunders, on the same 
 subject, being a reply to the preceding article in the Calcutta 
 Review. 
 
 29. A memoir on the Indian Surveys, by C, R. Markham. London, 1878. 
 
 30. On the snow-line in the Himalaya, by Lieut. H. Strachey. J. A. S., Ben., 
 
 XVIII., r., 287. 
 
 31. On the limits of perpetual snow, by Capt. J. D. Cunningham. Ibid, XVIII., 
 
 ii., 694. 
 
 32. Remarks on the snow-line, by Capt. T. Hutton. Ibid, 954. 
 
 33. Reports on the trans-Himalayan explorations in connection with the Great 
 
 Trigonometrical Survey of India, 1866-67, 1867, 1868, 1869, 1870, 1871, 
 1872, 1873-75, 1876, 1877, viz — 
 
 (1.) Route-survey from Nepal to Lhasa, and thence to the sources of the Brahma- 
 putra, made in 1865-66. As well as a route survey through western Nepal 
 and from Niti to Gartokh and back. 
 
 (2.) Route-survey from Manato Totling, thence to Demchok and along the northern 
 branch of the Indus to Thok Jalung and back to Milam, in 1867. 
 
 (3.) Surveys from Rudok by the gold fields to King-lo, and. thence to the Mana- 
 sarowar lake ; from Manasarowar to Shigatze and from the Tadam Monas- 
 tery to Muktinath in Nepal; also along the Tingri maidan in the eastern 
 Himalaya, 1868. 
 
 (4.) Smwey from Kabul to Badakshan and through the upper valley of the Oxus 
 to Kashgar and back by the Karakoram, 1867-68. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 51 
 
 (5.) Survey from Peshawar to Fyzabad in Budakshna, 1870. 
 
 (6.) Exploration of the Namcho or Tengri Nuf lake in Tibet, 1872, and Havildar’s 
 journey from Kabul to Bukhara, 1872. 
 
 (7.) Account of the survey operations in eastern Turkistan, 1873-74, in connection 
 with the Yarkand Mission, by Oapt. H. Trotter, E.E. 
 
 (8.) Survey from Badakshan to Kolab, Darwaz, and Kubadian to Balakli in 1873. 
 (9.) Journey from Jalalabad to Sarhadd-i-Wakhan by the Baroghil pass in 1873. 
 (10.) Journey from Leh in Ladakh to Lhasa, and thence by Chetang to Odalguri 
 near Tezpur in Asam, July 1873 to March, 1875. 
 
 (11.) Indus river from Amb to Bunji ; Yassin to Mastuj and thence toBarkulti ; Sar 
 Laspur to Dodbah near Dir; Mianlcalai to Pachat near New Kunar by 
 Nawagi and Nawagi to Abazai in 1876. 
 
 (12.) Mr. E. C. Ryall’s exploration of Hundes to the north of Kumaon and Garhwal, 
 1877. 
 
 Account of the operations of the G. T. S., India, Yol. I. (1870), II. to IV. (1879), 
 Dehra Diin, 1879. 
 
 Section E. — Satlaj to the Indus, 
 
 1 . Journal of a tour through part of the snowy range of the Himalaya mourn 
 
 tains and to the sources of the rivers Jumna and Ganges, by J. B. Fraser, 
 London, 1820. 
 
 2. Travels in the Himalayan provinces of Hindustan and the Panjab ; in Ladakh 
 
 and Kashmir ; in Peshawar, Kabul Kunduz and Bokhara, by W, Moorcroft 
 and G. Trebeck, from 1819 to 1825, edited by H. H. Wilson. London, 1841, 
 
 3. Account of Koonawar in the Himalayas, by Capt. A. Gerard. London. 1841. 
 
 4. Notes on Moorcroft’s travels in Ladakh and on Gerard’s account of Koonawur, 
 
 by Capt. J. D. Cunningham. J. A, S., Ben., XIII., 172, 223. 
 
 5. Journal of a trip through Kulu and Lahul to the Chumureri lake in Ladakh 
 
 in 1846, by Capt. A. Cunningham. Ibid, XVII., i., 201. 
 
 6. Kashmir and das Reich der Siek, by C, Von Hugel, translated into English 
 
 by Major Jervis. London, 1845. 
 
 7. Notes of a visit to the valley of Kashmir in 1836, by Baron Hugel. J. A. S., 
 
 Ben., V., 184, 303. 
 
 8. Travels in Kashmir, Ladakh, Iskardo, the countries adjoining the mountain 
 
 course of the Indus, &c,, by G. J. Vigne. London, 1842, 
 
 9. Notice by Vigne of his travels in Kashmir. J. A. S., Ben,, V,, 56. 
 
 Description of the valley of Kashmir, Ghazni and Kabul, by G. J. Vigne. Ibid , 
 
 VI., 766. 
 
 10. Ladakh, physical, statistical, and historical, with notices of the surrounding 
 
 countries, by Major A, Cunningham. London, 1854, 
 
 11. Abstract journal of the routes to the sources of the Panjab rivers, by the 
 
 same and A. Broome. J. A. S, Ben., X,, 105, 
 
 12. Correspondence of the Commissioners deputed to the Tibetan frontier, by 
 
 Captain A. Cunningham. Ibid, XVII., i., 89. 
 
 13. Memorandum on the boundary between the territories of Maharaja Gulab 
 
 Singh and British India as determined by the Commissioners, by J. D, 
 Cunningham. .Ibid, XVII,, i., 295. 
 
52 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 14. Memorandum on the district of Bussahir and the pacification of the disaffect- 
 
 ed portion of the inhabitants, by G. C. Barnes. Lahore, 1859. 
 
 15. Journal of a tour through Hungrung, Kunawur and Spiti in 1838, by T. 
 
 Hutton. Ibid, VIII., 901 : IX., 489, 555. 
 
 16. Journal of a trip to the Burenda pass, by the same. Ibid, VI., 901. 
 
 17. Diary of an excursion to the Boorun and Shatool passes over the Himalaya, 
 
 by E. Madden. Ibid, XV., 79. 
 
 18. Journey from Soobathoo to Shipke in Chinese Tartary, by J. G. Gerard. Ibid, 
 
 XL, 363. 
 
 19. Report on the valley of Spiti, by the same. Ibid, X., 198 ; and by W. C. Hay. 
 
 Ibid, XIX., 429 ; see also As. Res., XVIII., 239. 
 
 20. Notes of a trip from Simla to the Spiti valley and Chomoriri lake in 1861, by 
 
 W. Theobald. Ibid, XXXI., 480. 
 
 21. Illustrations of ancient buildings in Kashmir, by H. H. Cole. London, 1869. 
 
 22. Kashmir, the Western Himalaya, and the Afghan mountains, by Dr. A. M. 
 
 Verchere. J. A. S., Ben., XXXV., ii., 89, 159. 
 
 23. Western Himalaya and Thibet : a narrative of a journey through the mountains 
 
 of northern India during the years 1847-48, by T. Thomson, M.D. London, 
 1852. 
 
 24. Voyage dans l’lnde, by V. Jacquemont. Paris, 1841. 
 
 25. Letters from India, describing a journey in the British dominions of India, 
 
 Tibet, Lahore, and Cashmere during 1828-31, by the same. London, 1834. 
 
 26. Notes taken in 1829 relative to the territory and the Government of Iskardo, 
 
 by C. M. Wade. J. A. S., Ben., IV., 589. 
 
 27. Notes on Iskardo, by Vigne. Ibid, V., 56, 308 : VI., 773. 
 
 28. The abode of snow : observations on a journey from Chinese Tibet to the 
 
 Indian Caucasus, through the upper valleys of the Himalaya, by A. Wilson, 
 Edinburgh, 1876. 
 
 29. The Jummoo and Kashmir territories : a geographical account, by F. Drew. 
 
 London, 1875. 
 
 30. The northern barrier of India, a popular account of the Jummoo and Kashmir 
 
 territories, by F. Drew. London, 1877. 
 
 31. A Gazetteer of Kashmir and the adjacent districts of Kishtwar, Bhadrawar, 
 
 Jamu, Naoshera, Ptlnch, and the valley of the Kishenganga, by Capt. 
 E. Bates, B.S.C. Calcutta, 1873. 
 
 32. Handbook to Kashmir, by Dr. Ince. Calcutta, 1868. 
 
 33. Recollections of India, by the Hon. C. H. Hardinge. London, 1847. 
 
 34. Vazeeri Rupi, the silver country of the Vazeers in Kulu, by J. Calvert. 
 
 London, 1873, 
 
 35. The Himalayan districts of Kooloo, Lahoul, and Spiti, by Capt. A. F. Har- 
 
 court. Lahore, 1874, 
 
 36. Hunting in the Himalaya, by R, H. Dunlop. London, 1860. 
 
 37. Large game shooting, Thibet and the North-West, by A. Kinloch. London, 
 
 1876. 
 
 38. The large and small game of Bengal and the North-Western Provinces of 
 
 India, by S. J, Baldwin. London, 1876. 
 
 39. From the Hebrides to the Himalayas, by 0. F. G. Cumming. London, 1876, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 53 
 
 40. A grammar and vocabulary of the Kashmiri language, by M. P. Edgworthj 
 
 J. A. S., Ben., X., 1038 
 
 41. A grammar of the Kashmiri language, by R. Leach. Ibid , XIII., 397, 553. 
 
 42. Kashmiri vocabulary and grammatical forms, by L. Bowring. Ibid, XXXV., 
 
 ii., 225. 
 
 43. A vocabulary of English, Balti and Kashmiri, by Capt. H. H. Godwin Austen. 
 
 Ibid , XXXV., i., 223. 
 
 44. A vocabulary of the Kashmiri language, by Dr. W. J. Elmslie. London, 
 
 1872. 
 
 45. Kashmiri test-words, by the Same. J. A. S., Ben., XXXIX., 95. 
 
 46. A vocabulary of the Koonawar language, by A. Gerard. Ibid , XI., 479. 
 
 47. Manners and custom of the Dards, by G. W. Leitnef. Ind. Ant., I., 7, 
 
 84, 187. 
 
 48. The languages and races of Dardiston, by the same. Lahore, 1877. 
 
 Section F.— Afghanistan, 
 
 ( a ) — Baluchistan. 
 
 1. Notes taken on a tour through part of Baluchistan in 1838-39 by Haji Abdun 
 
 Nabi of Kabul, edited by R. Leech. J. A. S,, Ben., XIII., 667, 786. 
 
 2. Some account of a journey from Kurrachee to Hinglaj in the Lus territory, 
 
 descriptive of the intermediate country and of the port of Sonmeanee, 
 by N. Hart. Ibid, IX., 134. 
 
 3. Map of the route to Hinglaj, by the same. Ibid, IX., 615. 
 
 4. Journeys in Balochistan, Afghanistan, the Panjab, and Kalat, by C. Masson. 
 
 London, 1844. 
 
 5. Caravan journeys and wanderings in Persia, Afghanistan, Turkistan, and 
 
 Baluchistan, by J. P. Ferrier. London, 1856. 
 
 6. Travels in Belochistan and Scinde, by H. Pottinger. London, 1816. 
 
 7. Central Asia, Part III., Balochistan, by Col. MacGregor. Calcutta, 1875. 
 
 8. The country of Balochistan, by A. W. Hughes. London, 1877, 
 
 9. Gazetteer of Sind, by the same. London, 1874. 
 
 10. Report on the country between Kurrachee, Tatta, and Sehwan Scinde, by 
 
 E. P. de La Hoste. J. A. S., Ben., IX,, 907. 
 
 11. Brief history of Kalat, brought down to the deposition and death of Mehrab 
 
 Khan Brahoee, by R, Leech. Ibid, XII., 473. 
 
 12. Memorandum on the Beloch tribes in the Dera Ghazi Khan district, by 
 
 Capt. Minchin. Lahore, 1869. 
 
 13. Sindh and the races that inhabit the Indus valley, by R. Burton. London, 
 
 1851. Corespondence relative to Sinde, 1836-43, presented to both 
 houses of Parliament by Her Majesty’s command. Calcutta, 1844. 
 
 14. Note on the Brahooes, by N. Hart. Ibid, X., 136. 
 
 15. General notice of the tribes of Kujjukzyes, by the same. Ibid, IX,, 1214. 
 
 16. Report on Upper Sindh and the eastern portion of Cutchee, with a memo- 
 
 randum on the Beloochee and other tribes of Upper Sindh and Cutchee, 
 by J. Postans. Ibid, XII., 123. 
 
 17. Vocabulary of the Scind language, by J. B. Eastwick. Bombay, 1843, and 
 
 J. A. S,, Ben,, XII., 1. 
 
54 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS. 
 
 18. Sindlii and English dictionary, by G-. Stack. Bombay, 1855. 
 
 19. Sindlii reading-book, by Dr. E. Trumpp. London, 1858. 
 
 20. Grammar of the Sindlii language, by the same. London, 1872. 
 
 21 . Grammar of the Sindlii language, by W. H. Wathen. J . A. S., Ben., VI., 347. 
 
 22. Epitome of the grammars of the Brahnilty, the Balochky, and the Panjabi 
 
 languages, with vocabularies of the Baraky, the Pashi, the Laghmani, the 
 Cashgari, the Teerhoi, and the Deer dialects, by Lieut. R. Leech. Ibid, 
 VII., 538, 608, 711, 780. 
 
 23. A Balochee grammar, by E. Mockler. London, 1877. 
 
 (5) — Western frontier. 
 
 24 Narrative of a journey into Khorasan and the countries noith-east of Peisia 
 in 1821-22, by J. B. Fraser. London, 1825. 
 
 25. Extracts from a demi-official report on a mission into Khorasan, by A. Conolly. 
 
 J. A. S., Ben., X., 116, 718. 
 
 26. Ibn Haukul’s account of Khorasan, by W. Anderson. Ibid, XXII., 162. 
 
 27. A description of the country of Seistan, by R. Leech. Ibid, XIII., 115. 
 
 28. Sketch of the physical geography of Seistan, by A. Conolly. Ibid, IX., 710. 
 
 29. Journal kept whilst travelling in Seistan, by the same. Ibid, X., 319. 
 
 30. Narrative of a journey from Heraut to Khiva, by Capt. J. Abbot. London, 1843. 
 
 31. Central Asia, Part IV., Persia, by Col. MacGregor. Calcutta, 1871. 
 
 32. Narrative of a journey through the Province of Khorasan and on the north- 
 
 western frontier of Afghanistan in 1875, by Col. C. M. MacGregor. 
 London, 1879. 
 
 33. From the Indus to the Tigris : a narrative of a journey through the countries 
 
 of Baluchistan, Afghanistan, Khorasan, and Iran in 1872 : together with a 
 synoptical grammar and vocabulary of the Brahoe language, by H. W. 
 Bellew. London, 1874. 
 
 34. Clouds in the east : travels and adventures on the Perso-Turkoman frontier, by 
 
 V. Baker. London, 1876. 
 
 35. Journey on the Turkoman frontier of Persia, by G. Napier. P. R.G. S., XX., 3. 
 
 36. Eastern Persia : an account of the journeys of the Persian boundary com- 
 
 mission, 1872. London, 1876. 
 
 37. The sixth great oriental monarchy, or the geography, history, and antiquities 
 
 of Parthia, by Professor Rawlinson. London, 1876. 
 
 38. The seventh great oriental monarchy, or a history of the Sassanians or new 
 
 Persian Empire, with notices, geographical and antiquarian, by the same. 
 London, 1876. 
 
 39. Persia, from the earliest period to the Arab conquest, by W. S. W. Vaux. 
 
 London, 1876. 
 
 (c) — A fghanistan. 
 
 40. Journey from Bengal to England through Kashmir, Afghanistan, and Persia 
 
 into Russia, by G. Forster. London, 1798. 
 
 41. Account of the kingdom of Cabul, comprising a history of the Afghan 
 
 nation, by M. Elphinstone. London, 1818. 
 
 42. Account of the kingdom of Cabul and its dependencies in Persia, Tartary, and 
 
 India: a view of the Afghan nation and history of the Dooraunee 
 monarchy, by the same. London, 1842, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 55 
 
 43. Narrative of a visit to Ghazni, Kabul, and Afghanistan, by G. Vigne. Lon- 
 
 don, 1840. 
 
 44. Journey to and residence in Cabul, by A. Barnes. London, 1842. 
 
 45. Journey to the north of India overland from England, by A. Conolly. London, 
 
 1834. 
 
 46. Ariana Antiqua : a descriptive account of the antiquities and coins of 
 
 Afghanistan, with a memoir on the buildings called topes, by C. Masson, 
 by H. H. Wilson. London, 1841. 
 
 47. Ancient geography of India : Buddhist period, by A. Cunningham. London, 
 
 1871. 
 
 48. Memoirs of Zehir-ed-in Muhammad Baber, written by himself in Jaghatai 
 
 Turki, translated from the Persian version by Leyden and Erskine. Lon- 
 don, 1826. 
 
 49. Geographical notice of the valley of Jalalabad, by G. H. MacGregor. J. A. S., 
 
 Ben., XI., 117. 
 
 50. Notice of Jalalabad, by J. G. Gerard. Ibid, III., 325. 
 
 51. Journal of a political mission to Afghanistan in 1857, by Dr. Bellew. 
 
 London, 1862. 
 
 52. On the highland region adjacent to the trans-Indus frontier of India, by 
 
 Col. J. T. Walker. R. G. S. J., XXXII., 316. 
 
 53. Central Asia, Part II., Afghanistan, by Col. MacGregor. Calcutta, 1875. 
 
 54. Survey operations of the Afghanistan expedition, the Kurram valley, by 
 
 Capt. G. Martin. P. R. G. S., I., 617, N. S. 
 
 55. Afghan geography, by C. R. Markham. P. R. G. S., XX., 4, 1876. 
 
 56. Mountain passes on the Afghan frontier, by the same. Ibid, I., 38, N. S. 
 
 57. The upper basin of the Cabul river, by the same. Ibid, 110. 
 
 58. The basin of the Helmund, by the same. Ibid, 191. 
 
 59. The mountain passes leading to the valley of Bamian, by Lieut.-Col. Kaye, 
 
 Ibid, 244. 
 
 80. March and operations of the army of the Indus to Afghanistan in 1838-39, 
 
 by Major W. Hough. London, 1841. 
 
 81. British operations at Kabul in 1841-42, by the same. London, 1849. 
 
 82. Campaign in Sinde and Afghanistan, by Col. Outram. London, 1840. 
 
 63. Narrative of the campaign of the army of the Indus, in Scind, and Cabul in 
 
 1838-39, by R. H. Kennedy. London, 1840. 
 
 64. Diary of a march through Sinde and Afghanistan, by Rev. J. N. Allen. 
 
 London, 1843. 
 
 65. Sale’s brigade in Afghanistan, by Rev. G. R. Gleig. London, 1846. 
 
 66. The Sikhs and Afghans immediately before and after the death of Ranjit 
 
 Singh, from the journal of an expedition to Cabul through the Pan jab 
 and the Khaibar Pass, by Shahamat Ali. Calcutta, 1847. 
 
 67. History of the war in Afghanistan, by J. W. Kaye. London, 1851. 
 
 68. Reminiscences of forty-three years in India, by Lieut.-Genl. Sir. G. Law- 
 
 rence. London 1874. 
 
 69. A retrospect of the Afghan war, with reference to passing events in Central 
 Asia, by Sir V. Eyre. London, 1869. 
 
 The Panjab and North-Western frontier of India, by Major-Genl. H, Coxe, 
 London, 1878. 
 
 70 . 
 
56 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 71. General Gilbert’s raid to the Khaibar, by R. W. Bingham. London, 1850, 
 
 72. History of Afghanistan from the earlier period to the outbreak of the war in 
 
 1878, by Col. Malleson. London, 1879. 
 
 73. Journal of a tour through part of the Panjab and Afghanistan in the year 
 
 1837, by Agha Abbass of Shiraz, edited by R. Leech. J. A. S., Ben., 
 XII., 561. 
 
 71, Account of parts of the Cabul and Peshawar territories, by the same. Ibid, 
 XIV., 660. 
 
 75. Reports by B times, Lord, and Wood, political, geographical, and commercial, 
 
 on Scinde and Afghanistan. Calcutta, 1839. 
 
 76. Memoir on the climate, soil, produce, and husbandly of Afghanistan, by Lieut, 
 
 Irwin. J. A. S. Ben., VIII., 715, 779, 869, 1005 : IX., 33, 189. 
 
 77. Extracts from a report on subjects connected with Afghanistan, by W, 
 
 Griffiths. Ibid, X., 977. 
 
 78. Notes on the geography of Western Afghanistan, by W. Anderson. Ibid, 
 
 XVIII., i., 553. 
 
 79. Verification of the itinerary of Hwen Thsang through Afghanistan and India, 
 
 by Capt. A. Cunningham. Ibid, XVII., i., 176, and ii., 13. 
 
 80. Route from Dera Ghazi Khan through the Veziri country to Kabul, by 
 
 M. Honigberger. Ibid, III., 175. 
 
 81 . Route from Dera Ghazi Khan to Kandahar through the Sakhi Sarwar and 
 
 Bozdar passes, with other routes, by R. Leech. Ibid, XIII., 527. 
 
 82. Diary of a trip to Pind Dadan Khan, &c., by A. Fleming. Ibid, XVI., I., 661, 
 
 83. Account of Ghazni. Ibid, VI., 775. 
 
 81. Itinerary from Yezd to Herat (official). XIII,, 827. 
 
 85. Route from Kandahar to Herat (official). XIII., 121. 
 
 86. Report of a journey by Candahar, Kabul, and the Panjab from Herat to Simla, 
 
 by Major Todd. XIII., 339. 
 
 87. Description of Herat, by Mohan Lai, III., 9. 
 
 88. Central Asia, Part I., our north-western frontier, by Col. MacGregor. Cal- 
 
 cutta, 1871. 
 
 89. Bannu, or our Afghan frontier, by S. Thorbum. London, 1876. 
 
 90. Notes on the Bunnoo district, by Major H. B. Urmston. Lahore, 1869. 
 
 {( I ) — Languages. 
 
 91. Dictionary of the Panjabi language, prepared by a Committee of the Lodiaaaa 
 
 Mission. Lodiana, 1 851. 
 
 92. Pukhto-English dictionary, by H. G, Raverty. London, 1860. 
 
 93. Grammar of the Pukhto or Pushto language, by the same. London, 1869, 
 
 91. Grammar of the Pashto, or language of the Afghans, by Dr. E. Trumpp. 
 
 London. 
 
 95. Dictionary of the Pukkhto or Pukshto language, by H. W. Bellew. London, 1867. 
 
 96. Grammar of the Pukkhto language, by the same. 
 
 97. Grammar of the Pushtoo or Afghani language, by R.. Leech. J. A S., Ben., 
 
 VIII., i. : XXIII., 550. 
 
 98. Is the Pushto a Semitic language ? by Rev. I. Loewenthal. Ibid , XXIX., 323. 
 
 99. Some remarks on the origin of the Afghan people and dialect, by II, G, 
 
 Raverty. Ibid, XXIII. 550, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 57 
 
 100. Translation of the Pukhto text-book, Kalid-i- Afghani, by T. C. Plowden. 
 
 Lahore, 1875. 
 
 101. Notes on the Eusofzye tribes of Afghanistan, by E. Conolly. Ibid, IN., 924 : 
 
 XVII., i., 624. 
 
 102. Report on the Yoosoofzaie district, by Lieut. H. P>. Lumsden. Sel. Rec. 
 
 Panj., L, 5, 1853. And Covert, J. A. S., Ben., V., 481. 
 
 103. An account of the early Ghiljaees, by R. Leech. Ibid, XIV., 306. 
 
 104. An account of the early Abdalees, by the same. Ibid , XIV., 445. 
 
 105. An account of the Hazarehs, by the same. Ibid, XIV., 393. 
 
 106. Account of Roh in Derajat, by H. G-. Raverty. 7 bid, XXVI., 177. 
 
 107. The district of Dera Ismail Khan, by T. W. Tolbort. Ibid, XL., 1. 
 
 108. History of the Gakkhars, by J. G. Delmerick. Ibid, XL., 67. 
 
 109. Rough notes on the Khutuks of the Teree country and Khurali below Atok, 
 
 by Lieut. F. H. Pollock. Lahore, 1850. 
 
 110. Report on the eastern Khutuks, by Lieut. H. Lumsden. Ibid, 1851. 
 
 111. The lower Derajat frontier, by Capt. G. 0. Jacob. Ibid, 1854. 
 
 112. Kohistan of the Jullundhur Doab, by Lieut. Parish. J. A. S., Ben., XVII., i., 
 
 281 : XVIII., !., 360. 
 
 1T3. The Syads of Tira and their quarrels with the Sunis, by Capt. P. Cavagnari 
 of Kohat. Lahore, 1875. 
 
 114. Notes on the Dera Ghazi Khan district and its border tribes, by R. Bruce. 
 
 Lahore, 1871. 
 
 115. Memorandum on the Dera Ghazi Khan district. Sel. Rec. Panj,, IV., 4, 1860. 
 
 0)— Kohistan. 
 
 116. An account of upper and lower Suwat. and the Kohistan to the source of the 
 
 Suwat river and of the tribes inhabiting those valleys, by Capt. H. G. 
 Raverty. J. A. S., Ben., XXXI., 227. 
 
 1 1 7. An account of upper Kashkar and Chitral or lower Kashkar, together with the 
 
 independent Afghan State of Panjkorah, including Talash, by the same. 
 Ibid, XXXIII., 125. 
 
 118. An account of the Panjkora valley and upper and lower Kaslikara, by Rajah 
 
 Khan of Cabul, edited by R. Leech. Ibid, XIV., 812. 
 
 1 1 9. Some account of a visit to the plain of Koh-i-Daman, the district of Ghorband, 
 
 and the pass of Hindu -kusli, by P. B. Lord. Ibid, VII., 521. 
 
 120. On the Siah-posh Kaffirs, with specimens of their language and costume, by 
 
 Capt. A. Burnes. J. A. S., Ben., VII., 325. 
 
 121. Information regarding the Siah-posh --tribe, by A. Burnes Ibid II 
 
 305. ‘ ’ ■’ 
 
 122. Further information regarding the same, by Mohan Lall Ibid III 
 
 76. 
 
 123. On the language of the Siah-posh Kafirs, with -a short list of words, to which 
 
 are aided specimens of Kohistani and other dialects spoken on the 
 northern borders of Afghanistan, by H. G. Raverty. Ibid, XXIII, 267. 
 
 124. Notes on Kafiristan, by the same. Ibid, XXVIIL, 317. 
 
 125. On the language of the so-called Kafirs of the Indian Caucasus, by Dr. 
 
 Trumpp. J, R, a. Soc., XIX. 
 
 8 
 
58 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 1 . 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6 . 
 
 7. 
 
 8 . 
 
 10 . 
 
 31. 
 
 12 . 
 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 
 16. 
 
 17. 
 
 18 . 
 
 19. 
 
 20 . 
 21 . 
 22 . 
 
 23. 
 
 24. 
 
 25 
 
 26. 
 
 27 . 
 
 Section Pamir and Turkistan, 
 
 Memorandum on routes from the Punjab to eastern Turkistan, by T. D. 
 Forsyth. Lahore, 1868. 
 
 Report on the route to the Karakash valley and pass, by Dr. H. Caley. Ibid. 
 
 Results of a scientific mission to India and High Asia, by H. A. and R. von 
 Schlagentweit. Leipzig, 1861-66. 
 
 Route-book of the western parts of the Himalaya, Tibet and Central Asia, by 
 the same. Leipzig, 1863. 
 
 Lahore to Yarkand, by G. Henderson and A. Hume London, 1872. 
 
 Visits to High Tartary, Yarkand and Kasligarh, by R. Shaw. London, 18< ( . 
 
 The Roof of the world, being the narrative of a journey over the high pla- 
 teau of Tibet to the Russian frontier and the Oxus sources on Pamir, by 
 Lieut. -Col. T. E. Gordon, C.S.I. Edinburgh, 1876. 
 
 Kashmir and Kashgarh, a narrative of the journey of the embassy to Kasligarh 
 in 1873-74, by H. W. Bellew, C.S.I. London, 1875. 
 
 Report of the mission to Yarkand in 1873 under command of Sii 1. D. 
 
 Forsyth. Calcutta, 1875. 
 
 Account of the survey operations in E. Turkistan, 1873-74. by Capt. H, 
 Trotter. Calcutta, 1875. 
 
 A sketch of the Turki language as spoken in E. Turkistan, by R. B. Shaw. 
 Lahore, 1875. 
 
 Les confins Anglo-Russes dans l’Asie Centrale : Etude historique, geogra- 
 phique, politique, et militaire Mr la Kacligarie (E. Turkistan), by Capt, 
 Kouropatkine. Translated by G. LeMarchand. Paris, 1849. 
 
 Benoit de Goes, missionaire voyageur, 1603-07 (in E. Turkistan), by J, 
 Brucker. Lyons, 1879. 
 
 Route from Peshawar to Bokhara, by Dr. Gerard and Lieut. A. Bumes. J. A, 
 S., Ben., I., 139 : II., i., 143, 224. 
 
 Memoir on the Usbelc State of Kokan, called Khokend (the ancient Ferghana), 
 by W. H. Wathen. Ibid, III., 369. 
 
 Memoir on Chinese Tartary and Khoten, by the same. Ibid, IV., 6:>3. 
 
 Notes on the manners and habits of the Turkoman tribes, with some geogia- 
 pliical notices, by E. Stirling. Ibid, X., 290. 
 
 Russian geographical operations in Asia, by Col. J. T. Walker. Ibid , XXXI < 7, 
 
 Note on Central Asia, lb'ul, XXXIV., 113. 
 
 Central Asia, by T. Hutton. London, 1874. 
 
 Central Asia and the Anglo-Russian frontier, by A. Vambery. London, 1874, 
 
 History of Bokhara, by the same. London, 1873. 
 
 Asie Centrale, recherches, by A. von Humboldt. Paris, 1843. 
 
 Travels into Bokhara, journey from India to Kabul, Tartary, and Persia, and 
 voyage on the Indus, by A. Burnes. London, 1834. 
 
 Diplomatic transactions in Central Asia, 1834-38, by J. Urquhart. London, 
 1841. 
 
 Journey to the source of the Oxus by the route of the Indus, Kabul and 
 Badakshan, by J. Wood. London, 1841. New edition, London, 1872. 
 
 Narrative of a mission to Bokhara in the years 1843-45 to ascertain the fate 
 of Col. Stoddart and Capt. Conolly, by Dr. J. Wolff. London, 1846. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 59 
 
 28. Httaoire sur la partie mdridionale cle I Asie Centrale, by N. de Khanik of. 
 
 Paris, 1861. 
 
 29. Notes of a journey in Russian Turkistan, Khokand, Bokhara and Kuldja, by 
 
 E. Schuyler. London, 1876. 
 
 30. Campaigning on the Oxns and the fall of Khiva, by J. A. MacGahan. London, 
 
 1876. 
 
 Section H. — Tibet. 
 
 1. Geographical notice of Tibet, by Csoma de Koros. J. A. S., Ben. I., 121. 
 
 2. The physical geography of Western Tibet, by Capt. H. Strachey. London, 
 
 1854, and J. R. G. S. XXIII., 2. 
 
 3. Thibet nacli den resultaten geographischer forschungen friilierer und neuester 
 
 zeit, by K. Ganzenmuller. Stuttgart, 1877. 
 
 4. Tibet, Tartary and Mongolia, by H. T. Prinsep. London, 1851. 
 
 5. Explorations in Western Tibet by the Trans- Himalayan parties of the 
 
 G. T. S. P. R. G. S., 444, 1879. 
 
 6. Historic generate des Huns, des Turcs, des Mongols et des autres Tartares 
 
 occidentaux, by Des Guignes. Paris, 1756-58. 
 
 ' 1 . History of the Mongols, by II. H. Howorth. London, 1876. 
 
 8*. History of tlie Genghizan, the Great, first Emperor of the ancient Moguls 
 and Tartars, by Petis de la Croix, translated into English. Calcutta, 
 1819. 
 
 9. The book of Ser Marco Polo, concerning the kingdoms and marvels of the 
 east, edited by Col. Yule. London, 1875. 
 
 10. Cathay and the way thither, by the same. London. 
 
 11. Recueil de Turkestan : comprenant des lives et des articles sur 1 Asie Cen- 
 
 trale en general et la province du Turkistan en particulier, by V. J. 
 Mejovv. St. Petersburg, 1878. 
 
 12. Notices of the mediaeval geography of Central and Western Asia, by E. 
 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 
 16. 
 
 17 . 
 
 18. 
 
 19. 
 
 20 . 
 21 . 
 
 Bretschneider. London. 
 
 Notes on Chinese mediaeval travellers to- the west, by the same. 
 
 Itineraire de Marco Polo a travel’s la region du Pamir au XIIIc siecle, by 
 J. B. Paquier. Paris, 1876. 
 
 Le Pamir : etude de geograpliie physique et historique sur l’Asic Centrale, by 
 the same. Paris, 1876. 
 
 The Russians in Central Asia, their relations with Khiva, Bokhara and 
 Kokand, descriptions of Chinese Turkistan and Dzungaria from the 
 Russian’ of Valikhanoff, &c-.,by Messrs. Michell. London, 1865. 
 
 Lc Kohistan, le Ferghanah et Kouldja, avec an appendice sur la Kachgane, 
 by C. E. de Ujfalvy de Meso-Kovesd. Paris, 1S78. 
 
 Le Syr-Daria, Le Zerafchane, les pays des sept-rivieres et la Sibene-occiden- 
 tale, by the same. Paris, 1879. 
 
 Resultats anthropologies d’un voyage en Asie Centrale, communiques au 
 Congres anthropologique de Moscou, by the same. Pans, 1880. 
 
 Die Russen in Central Asien, by Fr. von Hellwald. Augsburg, 1877. 
 Pevtsoli’s expedition in North-Western Mongolia, by E. D. Morgan. P. R. G. S. , 
 
 701, 1879. 
 
60 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 22. The Russians on the Amur, by E. G. Ravenstein. London, 1861. 
 
 23. England and Russia in the East : a series of papers on the political and geo- 
 
 graphical condition of Central Asia, by Major-General Sir Henry Rawlin- 
 son. London, 1875. 
 
 24. Mongolia, the Tangut country and the solitudes of Northern Tibet ; being a 
 
 narrative of three years’ travel in eastern High Asia, by Lieut.-Col. N. 
 Prejevalsky. London, 1876. 
 
 25. From Kulja across the Tian-Shan to Lob Nor, by the same. London, 1871). 
 
 26. The river of Golden Sand, the narrative of a journey through China and 
 
 eastern Tibet to Burmah, by Captain W. Gill, R. E. ; with an introductory 
 essay by Colonel H Yule, R. E,, London, 1S80. 
 
Physical Geography of the Himalaya. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 The Himalayan river basins— The Indus basin— Subordinate systems of the 
 Indus basin ; The Ganges basin— Subordinate systems of the Ganges basin ; The 
 Brahmaputra basin— Subordinate systems of the Brahmaputra basin ; Systems of 
 Tibet— Lob-Nor basin ; Oxus basin. Plains of Hindustan— Indus plain ; Indian 
 desert ; Gangetic plain ; Asam valley ; Bhabar ; Tarai ; Siw&liks ; Duns. Extent 
 of Bhabar Cause of the deposit — Hodgson’s oceanic theory ; Fluviatile theory ; 
 Tarai ; Siwaliks ; Duns ; Ganges to Brahmaputra ; Lower Himalaya. Materials 
 of the mountains— Eocene period ; Mode of mountain formation ; Mountain- 
 sculpture ; Ice-wedges ; Avalanches ; Glaciers ; Rain ; Rivers. 
 
 The Himalaya. 
 
 We have already decided to restrict our use of the word 
 ‘ Himalaya ’ to that portion of the great 
 mountain girdle which lies between the bend 
 of the Indus on the west and the unexplored gorge of the Brahma- 
 putra on the east. Hodgson, in 1849, estimated the length of this 
 range at 1,800 miles with a mean breadth of about 90 miles, a maxi- 
 
 mum breadth of 110 miles, and a minimum breadth of about 70 miles. 
 In fixing the breadth of the Himalaya, however, as in determining 
 its length, we have similar difficulties to contend with. For, as we 
 have seen that the popular estimate as to the boundaries of the range 
 may possibly be correctly extended both on the east and on the west, 
 so on the north, the channels of the Indus and the Brahmaputra, 
 which are commonly assigned as the northern limit, are found in a 
 plateau, but little lower than the passes by which the traveller crosses 
 
 the first line of snowy mountains into Tibet. • On the south, we 
 have a well-marked descent to the plains of India, but on the north 
 there is no immediate descent to a fevfer country beyond. On the 
 contrary, range after range is met with to the north, many of which 
 may compete in altitude with the snowy mountains seen from the 
 plains of northern India. 
 
 Before proceeding to a closer examination of the form of that 
 
 River-basins. portion of the Himalaya lying within the 
 
 province of Jvumaon, it will be convenient 
 o ^ descube tlie river-basins throughout the Himalaya and 
 
62 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 endeavour to trace the general law underlying their arrangement. 
 For as this depends in the main on the direction of the great ranges 
 and the position of the great peaks, a consideration of it will conduce 
 to a clearer apprehension of the entire mountain system itself as 
 well as of the relations of its various parts. We find that 
 from a water-parting about longitude 81° east and almost imme- 
 diately due north of Kumaon, the drainage of the southern part 
 of the Tibetan plateau flows north-west in the Indus and south-east 
 in the Brahmaputra. These two rivers maintain a course along the 
 length of the table-land, and receive as they proceed the drainage of 
 a large part of its breadth ; the exceptions being, first, the eastern 
 border, which apparently is drained by the Lu-tse, the Lan-tsang, and 
 the Murui-ussu, one of the sources of the Yang-tse-kiang J second, an 
 occasional strip along the southern edge from which the water passes. 
 off 2 more or less directly to the south through the Himalaya ; and 
 
 third, the north-western part from which the water has no escape, 
 but is collected in lakes at the lowest level it can reach. 3 The 
 waters thus accumulated in the two great streams are at length 
 discharged by two openings in the Himalayan slope through the 
 plains of India into the Indian Ocean. No great portion of the 
 drainage of the table-land, so far as we know, passes in the opposite 
 direction through the northern slope, and the area that dischaiges 
 itself southward at points intermediate between the debouches of 
 the Indus and the Brahmaputra is with one exception, that of the’ 
 Satlaj, comparatively small. The waters of the northern slope with 
 a small area of the table-land adjoining flow down to the plains of 
 eastern Turkistan : while, in like manner, those of the southern slope 
 -with the drainage of the exceptional area along the southern border of 
 the table-land which passes through the line of water-parting from the 
 north, give rise to such rivers as the Jhilam, Clnnab, Ravi, Jumna, 
 
 •From Prejevalsky’s Mongolia (London, 1876) it would appear that his 
 Burkhan Buddha range marks, in 96° longitude, the north-eastern termination of 
 the Tibetan plateau. This range forms the southern boundary of the Isaidarn plain, 
 which, according to native report, extends thence to Lob-Nor. The Nomokhun-gol, 
 which rises on the southern face of the Burkhan Buddha range and joins the Baian- 
 gol, does not appear to be a feeder of the Hoang-lio or Yellow River which has its 
 origin outside the Tibetan plateau. To the south of the Burkhan Buddha range the 
 elevation is from 13,000 to 15,000 as far as the Murui-ussu, the bed of which where 
 seen by Preievalsky -was 13,000 feet above the level of sea with a channel 7o0 feet 
 broad in January. The name ‘Murui-ussu’ signifies ‘ the tortuous river ’ and 
 according to Yule, it is the Bri-chu of the Tibetans, the Bmis of Marco Polo, and 
 the Yang-tse-kiang or Blue River of the Chinese. _ ~ By the Satlaj, Karnali, 
 
 and A run. 3 Examples of river-systems without an outlet to the ocea^i 
 
 are to be found in the basins of the Caspian, Aral, Balkhash, Lob-Noi, &c, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 03 
 
 Ganges, Kali, Gandak, Kosi, and Tista. We thus see that the 
 northern crest of the table-land or the summit of its northern slope 
 practically forms the water-parting between the rivers that flow 
 southwards and those that lose themselves in the plain of Gobi, In 
 the southern crest we have a subordinate water-parting separating 
 the rivers that fall into the Indian Ocean into two classes ; first, those 
 that rise on that slope and flow directly down it to the plains of 
 Hindustan ; and secondly, those that are collected along the table-land 
 and are finally discharged also through the southern slope, chiefly by 
 two concentrated channels at distant points towards the ends of 
 the range. Captain Henry Stracliey 1 has called the northern crest 
 of the table-land the Turkish, and the southern the Indian water- 
 parting. 
 
 If we examine the river-systems having their source in the 
 
 Himalaya, we find a regularity of plan and 
 arrangement which at first sight would not 
 be expected. Taking the Indus basin and its system, we see that 
 the Satlaj and all the rivers that join the Indus on its left bank have 
 a south-westerly direction towards the Arabian Sea. On the east 
 this system is bounded by the small inland basin of the Kaggar, 
 which receives the drainage from an inconsiderable portion of the 
 outer hills between the Satlaj and the Jumna, and finally loses its 
 waters in the Indian desert. The eastern water-parting of the Indus 
 system is found in the elevated range extending from the main 
 Himalayan mass along the left bank of the Satlaj to Rtipur, and is 
 continued thence in the uplands hordering the khadir of that river 
 until it meets the Arvali (Aravali) range which constitutes the 
 north-western abutment of the table-land of Central India. The 
 character of the slope towards the south-west will be best understood 
 from the following table of heights taken along the course of the 
 Satlaj to Ludhiana, and thence by The Grand Trunk Road to the 
 Jumna : — Tara, about two miles below the junction of the Panjnad 
 and Indus, 337 feet above the level of the sea ; Bahawalpur, 375 
 feet ; Nur Shah, 481 feet ; Pir Ivhalis, seven miles north-east of 
 Bahawalgarli, 548 feet ; Fazilka, 588 feet ; Firozpur cantonment, 
 645 feet ; Jagraon, 765 feet ; Ludhiana, 806 feet ; Amballa Church, 
 899 feet; and Madalpur, on the banks of the Jumna khadir, 906 
 
 ij. R. Ct. S., XXIII., p. 7. 
 
htmXlayan districts 
 
 G4 
 
 feet. From Sodiwala in the Firozpnr district southwards on the 
 75th meridian we have Sodiwala, 718 feet; Ahmad wala, 705 feet ; 
 Sirsa, on a mound, 737 feet ; level of Sambhar lake, 1,184 feet. 1 
 These observations show a slight depression towards the south in 
 addition to that towards the south-west, and would make us include 
 the Kaggar inland basin in the Indus system. The Sotra or Hakra, 
 the ancient river of the Indian desert, seems, however, to have once 
 had its debouche in the Kan of Kachh, 2 and would therefore be still 
 entitled to be considered separate. To the west the Ravi and the 
 Chmab run in lines almost parallel to the Satlaj, as well as the Jhilam, 
 from the town of that name, until it takes a bend to the south to its 
 junction with the Chmab. To the west, the water-parting of the 
 Indus commences at Cape Monze on the Arabian Sea, and advances 
 nearly northwards along the Hala mountains to the east of Sohrab, 
 Kalat, and Quettab (Kwatah). It thence continues in the same 
 direction along the western Sulaiman range, also known as the 
 Konak, and Kub Jadran range to the Safed-koh, at the head of 
 the Kurram valley. Thence it follows the crest of the Safedkoh 
 westwards to the hills north of Gfhazni, where it separates the 
 southern affluents of the Kabul river from the waters of the small 
 inland basin of lake Abistida. The direction is then continued north- 
 westerly to the ridge separating the head-waters of the Argand-ab 
 from those of the Kabul river, and again in the range that separates 
 the waters of the Halmand basin from the most westerly affluents of 
 the Kabul river, whence a transverse ridge near the pass to Bamian 
 connects the line of water-parting with the Hindu-kush. For 300 
 miles the line follows the Hindu-kush to its junction with the great 
 Taglidambash Pamir near the Baroghil pass. It then follows the 
 Muztagk iange, 3 but cuts through it around by the Karakoram 
 pass to the north, so as to include the tributaries of the Shayok, and 
 proceeds in a south-easterly direction by the Aling Gfang-ri to its 
 junction with the Grang-ri at Kailas, where a transverse ridge 
 separates the head-waters of the Indus, the Brahmaputra, and the 
 trans-Himalayan feeder of the Granges system. The Indus has a 
 length of 1,800 miles, and, according to Mr. Saunders, its basin has 
 an area of 372,000 square miles. 
 
 r< l* ^ T ' 2 See Notes on the lost river of the Indian desert, 
 
 Dai. Kev., July, 1874. 3 < Ice-mountain’ : a better name than Karakoram 
 
 (, black-gravel), which should be restricted to the pass, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 65 
 
 The Hala mountains to the south of the Mula pass are better known 
 
 Subordinate systems of the Khirthar lulls and as the Pubh hills, 
 the Indus basm. and the drainage from them loses itself in the 
 
 plains before it can reach the Indus. The same may be said of the 
 drainage through the Mula and Bolan passes, and that by the Thai 
 valley. To the north, the Luni, Gomal, Kurram, and Kabul rivers, 
 each possessing a perennial stream, have an easterly course more or less 
 parallel to each other, and break through the range bordering the 
 right bank of the Indus by deep and narrow gorges which form the 
 passes into the upper country. The Kabul river itself is the drainage 
 channel for the very elevated country from the hills north of Ghazni 
 to the Baroghil pass north of Chitral, and from Naushera to the pass 
 leading to Bamian, and thus forms a compact subordinate system 
 well deserving of separate study . 1 The upper waters of the Jhilam 
 drain the Tile and Kashmir valleys, and have a general direction 
 between west and north to Muzaffarabad, where they unite, and, 
 meeting a meridional ridge, take a bend southwards to the plains. 
 The Chi nab, in the upper portion of its course known as the Chan- 
 dra, has a similar direction between west and north until it meets 
 the spurs from the range which forms the water-parting between it 
 and the Jhilam, whence it seeks an outlet southwards towards the 
 plains. The Ravi runs in a valley parallel to that of the Chinab 
 and south of it until it meets the outliers of the range that forms 
 the water-parting between it and the Chinab, when it also turns 
 suddenly southwards towards the plains. Next comes the Bias, 
 which has also a westerly direction until it meets the ridge between 
 it and the Ravi, when it takes a bend to the south through the outer 
 hills. The upper course of the Satlaj has a similar westerly trend 
 until it meets the great obstruction culminating in the Leo Porgyul 
 peak, after which the direction is between west and south until it 
 enters the plains. A range runs between the Satlaj and the southern 
 branch of the Indus from the meridian of Tirthapuri by Gar, to 
 where it is joined by the ridge connecting it with Leo Porgyul, and 
 thence into Rupshu to the north of the Tso Moriri lake, and consti- 
 tutes the subordinate water-parting between the Satlaj itself and the 
 
 1 For interesting articles on the tract between the Arabian sea and the Gilgit 
 river, by Mr. C. R. Markham, see Proceedings R. G. S., 1879 : the mountain passes 
 on the Afghan frontier of British India, p. 38 : the upper basin of the Kabul river 
 p. 110 : the basin of the Helmund, p. 191. 
 
 9 
 
hima'layan districts 
 
 66 
 
 Indus. Thus we see that the great feeders of the Indus system 
 from the west have a similar character, and that those from the east, 
 from the Himalaya proper, have a general westerly direction, in the 
 upper portions of their courses in the hills, until they turn south- 
 wards towards the plains, where the direction is south-west to th ex- 
 junction with the Indus. 
 
 Tlie Ganges basin. 
 
 Next we have the Ganges basin with its subordinate systems. 
 
 To the north, the water-parting, as a rule, 
 follows the ghat-line of the Himalaya and 
 on the extreme west separates the sources of the Jadh-Ganga, one 
 of the head-waters of the Bhagiratlii, from the Hop-gadh, an affluent 
 of the Satlaj. North of Kumaon, however, we have a phenomenon 
 similar to that observed near the Karakoram 1 pass, where the waters 
 of the Shay ok, Yarkand, and Karakash rivers have a common origin 
 in that elevated plateau at no great distance from each other. We 
 find that to the east of the Unta-dhura pass, north of Milam in 
 Kumaon, the water-parting of the Ganges basin crosses to the north 
 of the ghat-line to a place called Tara, where the sources of the 
 Satlaj and the Karnali lie close together, “ divided by an almost 
 level plain, across which a man might walk from one river to the 
 other in an hour or two, without a vertical ascent or descent of 500 
 feet,” yet the waters of one stream seek the sea at Karachi, and of 
 the other by Goalundo. Further east the water-parting is continued 
 in the ghat-line to the Arun river, which has its sources to the north 
 and forces for itself a way through the Himalaya to the plains. The 
 water-parting then follows the eastern boundary of Nepal to the 
 plains, where an intricate system of drainage is met with, throwing 
 off feeders sometimes to the Brahmaputra and sometimes to the 
 Ganges down to their junction at Goalundo. Following the line 
 on the west from east longitude 79° 11' and north latitude 25°, we 
 
 1 Dr. Scully describes the appearance of the country between the top of one 
 of the Shayok gorges and the Karakoram pass thus : — “ At the top of the ascents 
 strange sight met our eyes, for we found ourselves on an immense undulating plain, 
 the Dipsang, which looked like the top of the world. * * Northwards, in front of 
 
 us, we saw a few irregular flat-topped hillocks, they looked like scattered about * * 
 I had occasion to look back in the direction of the route by which we had come. A 
 fine snowy range of mountains met my view and looked quite continuous ; but, of 
 course, this was a deceptive appearance, as we had passed through this chain without 
 crossing any pass.” This was the Muztagh range, whilst the Karakoram pass, dis- 
 tant about 25 miles ahead and forming the water-parting, lay amongst the seeming 
 hillocks, a fact which shows that though a range may form a water-parting, a water- 
 
 S irting does not always form a part of a range , Colonel Gordon gives views of the 
 arakoram pass in his 1 Roof of the World.”’ 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 67 
 
 find in the extreme north-west that the water-parting keeps to the 
 crest of the range running along the left bank of the Baspa, an 
 affluent of the Satlaj, and is continued by Hattu to the ridge on which 
 Simla is built. Thence it proceeds southward, and then eastward 
 along the right bank of the Griri to the junction of that stream with 
 the Jumna near Raj ghat. Here the water-parting turns southwards 
 along the line separating the drainage area of the Kaggar system 
 from that of the Jumna, and continuing along the Arvali range- 
 and the edge of the Malwa plateau, passes through the Jabalpur 
 and Mandla districts, separating the sources of the Nerbudda 
 from those of the Son, and then along the range connecting the 
 Satpuras with the Rajmahal hills to the plains, where it follows 
 a course along the left bank of the S'abanreka to the sea. Mr. 
 Saunders has given the length of the main stream of the Gan- 
 ges as 1,514 miles, and the area of its basin at 391,000 square 
 miles. 
 
 The Ganges basin, like that of the Indus, possesses several subor- 
 
 Subordinate systems of dinate systems that may be called in their 
 the Ganges basin. order from west to east, the Jumna- Ganges,. 
 
 Karnali, Gandak, and Kosi systems. The alpine basin of the J umna- 
 Ganges system is bounded on the west by the well-defined range 
 which descends from the Jamnotri group of peaks to the Satlaj river, 
 and on the east by a similar ridge descending from the Nan da Devi 
 group of peaks and separating the waters of the Pindar from those 
 of the Himalayan Sarju. To the north, the ghat-line separates it 
 from the source of the Karnali on the east, and the source of the 
 Satlaj on the west. Although the upper waters of both the Jumna 
 and the Alaknanda, or principal source of the Ganges, have at first 
 a westerly direction, they soon take a bend to the south, and form 
 the main channels to which are directed their affluents from either 
 side. It is remarkable that, with the exception of the Ramganga, 
 which unites with the Ganges in the Farukhabad district, neither the 
 Jumna nor the Ganges before their junction receives any consider- 
 able affluent of Himalayan origin during its course through the 
 plains. The western boundary of the alpine basin of the Karnali is 
 marked by the ridge extending from the Nanda Devi group between 
 the Pindar and Sarju rivers, already noticed. The eastern boundary 
 
68 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 is formed by a similar ridge descending from the Dhaulagiri group 
 of peaks. To the west the Sarju, eastern Ramganga, Gori, and Kali 
 enter the plains in one stream as the Sarda. Then the Swetaganga 
 Karnali, and Bheri form the Karnali, and further east we have the 
 Jhingrak or Rapti and its affluents. All unite in the plains to form 
 the Ghogra, which joins the Ganges to the south of the Ghazipur 
 district. But this unitising law is better exemplified in the alpine 
 basin of the Gandak, which reaches from the Dhaulagiri group 
 to the Gosain-than group of peaks. We have here seven rivers 
 named in order from west to east, the Barigar, Narayani, Sweti- 
 gandaki, Marsyangdi, Daramdi, Burhiya-Gandaki, and Trisul- 
 Gandaki. These are called the seven Gandaki by the Nepalese, and 
 unite their waters at Tribeni within the hills to form the Gandak 
 river of the plains. Here we have what Hodgson 1 terms an admi- 
 rably defined natural division lying between two great groups of 
 peaks. In the same manner as the Karnali basin is bounded on the 
 west by the spur descending from the Nanda-Devi group of peaks, 
 and on the east by the ridge from the Dhaulagiri group, so the 
 Barigar of the Gandak system does not receive a single streamlet 
 from the westward of the Dhaulagiri ridge, nor does the Trisul of 
 the same system receive any .water from the east of the ridge 
 descending from Gosain-than. The alpine basin of the Kosi lies 
 between the Gosain-than group and the Kanchinjinga group of peaks, 
 and, like the Gandak system, consists of seven rivers , 2 known as the 
 seven Kosis. These, named in their order from west to east, are the 
 Milamchi or Indrawati, the Bhotiya-Kosi, Tamba-Kosi, Likhu-Kosi, 
 Dud-Kosi, Arun, and Tamra or Tamor. The Aran has one of its 
 sources to the north of the line of snowy peaks seen from the 
 plains, and the Tamor is also said to have trans-nivean affluents, 
 but all the others rise on the southern slope of the Himalaya’ 
 and unite within the hills at Varaha-Kshetra above Nathpur. The 
 subordinate systems of the Ganges basin thus appear to be strongly 
 characterised by a common origin within an area bounded on the 
 north by the ghat-line, and on the west and east by well-marked 
 groups of culminating peaks, whence ridges descend and form the 
 water-parting between successive systems. 
 
 xvn\ h %46 ticlc ° n the GangeS basin ’ J - A ’ s -’ Ben > XVIII., 761, * ibid, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 The Brahmaputra basin in its full extent has not been explored, 
 
 but sufficient evidence has been collected by 
 recent travellers to show that from the water- 
 
 Brahmaputra basin. 
 
 parting between the sources of the Brahmaputra and the Indus, the 
 northern water-parting of the former river continues in a range of 
 lofty peaks on its left bank to the bend towards the south, by which 
 it reaches the plains of India. This range has a direction south-east, 
 and to the west of the 86th meridian is sufficiently distant from the 
 Brahmaputra to allow of such affluents as the Chachu and the Charta 
 rivers. About the 86th meridian, a line of peaks culminating in the 
 Targot La stretch in a north-easterly direction to the Gfyakharma 
 group of peaks, south-east of the Kyaring-cho or Kyaring lake, one 
 of the sources of the Nak-chu-kha. The drainage of the southern 
 slope of the range is sent by the Dumphu-chu into the Kyaring lake, 
 so that the northern water-parting of the Brahmaputra must here 
 approach much closer to the river and run in a south-easterly direc- 
 tion. On the 89th meridian, it descends as low as the 30th parallel 
 in the Shiang Lahu range, which appears to be connected with the 
 great Ninjin-thangla range of snowy peaks to the south of the Jang 
 Namcho or Tengri-Nor lake with a trend to the north-east, for it 
 gives the head-waters of the Ki-chu or Lhasa river from its southern 
 slope, as well as other important streams further east, regarding 
 which our information is still very imperfect. To the north-east we 
 find the Nak-chu-kha or Hota Sanpo, a large river that issues from 
 the Chargut lake about north latitude 32° and east longitude 89° 
 and flows eastward, having its drainage area on the south, bounded 
 by the water-parting between it and the Brahmaputra basin. This 
 great river takes a bend to the south, and according to one of the 
 Pandit explorers/ flows by Tsiamdo on the road from Lhasa to 
 Bathang, and thence through Amdu to China, under the names 
 Machu and Konkong. These names would connect it with the Yang- 
 tse, but if it flows by Tsiamdo it should_be one of the branches of the 
 Lan-Tsang, the name of the upper portion of the Mekong or Kam- 
 bodia river. Des Godins notes that the Nu-Tse or Lu-Tse is known 
 as the Ngen-kio in Tibet, a name which may perhaps be referred to 
 
 1 Gr. T. S. Rep-, 1873-75, p. 63. The Atlienceuvi of the 17th April 1880 
 e arrival of Colons! Prp-ioTraioV-,. « + w/i, , , . w 11 ! 
 
 • io80, announces 
 marches north of 
 oblenr connected 
 
 with this river from this great traveller, 
 
70 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTEICTS 
 
 the Nak-chu, and it would then be the head-waters of the Salween,, 
 whilst others claim it as the source of the Ira wadi. All that can, 
 therefore, be said is that there is a great river in eastern Tibet, 
 between which and the Brahmaputra is an unexplored tract of 
 country, and within it will be found the eastern water-parting of 
 the Brahmaputra. So far as we may conjecture from the imperfect 
 materials at our command, the range that forms the northern water- 
 parting of the Brahmaputra takes a sudden bend southwards 
 between the 96th and 97th meridians along the right bank of the 
 Lu-Tse. Thence one branch proceeds westwards in the Patkoi 
 rano-e, and another southwards, between the Irawadi and Salween. 
 
 To the south, the water-parting follows the crest of the Patkoi 
 range, and is continued westwards in the Manipur, Lusliai, and 
 Chittagong hills, where it separates the southern affluents of 
 the Brahmaputra from those of the Burmese systems. To the 
 west, the water-parting is conterminous with that of the Ganges 
 basin. Mr. Saunders estimates the course of the Brahmaputra 
 at 1,800 miles, and the area of its basin at 361,000 square- 
 miles. 
 
 Following the systems that carry off the drainage from the south- - 
 
 Subordinate systems of ™ dope* ° f the Himalaya and join tlie Brail- 
 the Brahmaputra basin. maputra in its course through the plains, we 
 
 trace much the same regularity found in the subordinate systems of 
 the Ganges basin further west. The Tista system of Sikkim is 
 bounded on the west by a ridge descending from the Kanchinjinga 
 group of peaks, and on the east by a similar ridge from the Chumalari 
 group that also forms the eastern boundary of Sikkim. The alpine 
 rivers of this system in order from west to east are the Bari Ranjit, 
 Baton g, Lachen, Lachung, and Rang-chu, and all unite within the 
 hills above Kalingpong to the east of Darjiling. The alpine basin 
 of the Tarsa-Gangadhar system extends from the Chumalari group 
 on the west to the ridge descending some fifteen miles east of the 
 90th meridian in the 28th parallel, and which separates the waters 
 of the affluents of the Tarsa from those of the Manas system. The 
 rivers of this alpine basin from west to east are the Ammo, Dor, 
 Par, Wang, Ma, Pachu, and Tanchu, which unite within the hills 
 to form the Tarsa and the Gangadhar tributaries of the Brahmaputra. 
 Further east comes the Manas system, of which the western water- 
 
OF THE NORTI-I-WESTEEN PROVINCES. 
 
 71 
 
 parting is conterminous with that of the Tarsa-Gangadhar system. 
 On the east, it is bounded by a ridge descending from the group of 
 snowy peaks to the west of the Karkang pass crossed by the Pandit 
 on the Tawang route in 1873, and for its alpine feeders has the 
 Mali, Manas, Kuril, Lhopra, and Tawang streams, which apparently 
 also unite within the verge of the mountains to form the Manas. 
 Eastwards lies the Subansiri system between the Manas and the 
 Dihong. The Sikang-chu, which rises to the south of the Karkang 
 pass, probably forms one of its sources, but the remainder lie within 
 the wild country of the Abors and have not yet been explored. The 
 southern affluents of the Brahmaputra during its course through 
 the valley of Asam are not so important, and may be divided into 
 two classes — ’those which carry the drainage of the northern slope 
 of the hills inhabited by the Singpho, Aror, and Naga tribes, 
 and fall directly into the Brahmaputra, and those which carry 
 the drainage of the northern slope of the hills of the Lushai 
 country and hill Tipura and of the southern slopes of the Jaintiya, 
 Khasiya, and Garo hills to the Megna, which joins the Brahma- 
 putra below Dakka. To the former class belong the Dihing, 
 Disung, Southern Dhansiri, and Kopili, and to the latter the 
 Barak, Surma, and Dhani. 1 To the extreme east of the Asam 
 valley is a snowy range from which issues the Lohit or Brahmakund 
 river that gives its name to the Brahmaputra ; but geographers 
 have applied the same name to the great river flowing by Lhasa, 
 and which the best authorities identify with the Dihong that 
 joins the Lohit in the upper valley of Asam. The more general 
 name of the Brahmaputra, in the upper portion of its course, 
 seems to be ( Tsanpo ’ or c Sanpo,’ meaning 1 the river ’ or ‘ the 
 great river,’ used like ‘ Ganga ’ in the plains and ‘ Iviang ’ in 
 China. In Asam, the name varies with the tribe inhabiting its 
 banks or those of its tributaries, so that the designation ‘ Brahma- 
 putra,’ to express the entire course of the river from its source to 
 the north of Kumaon to its junction* with the Ganges, must be 
 considered a convenient device of geographers, and not a term 
 based on received usage. We have seen that at its junction with 
 
 1 Any further discussion of the systems of the Asam valley would be out of 
 place here; they are sufficiently described in the Asam Gazetteer, to which the reader 
 in search of further information on this subject is referred. 
 
72 
 
 htmXlayan districts: 
 
 the Loli it, the Brahmaputra is called the Dihong. 1 East of this 
 junction, the Lohit receives a tributary from the north, called the 
 Dibong, and on the south another called the Dihing, and again 
 one called the Disung. Much confusion has resulted in Asam 
 geography from not remembering that all these names refer to 
 different rivers. 2 
 
 We have already noticed the division of Tibet into the eastern, 
 
 western, and central provinces. It is called 
 Tibet. ’ . 1 
 
 Si-tsang by the Chinese, and is also known 
 
 under the names Tu-pu and Mu-tu, or Upper and Lower Tibet. From 
 the accounts of the eastern province in the writings of Klaproth, Hue, 
 Blakeston, Cooper, Des Godins, and Gill, we may assume that the 
 drainage to the east of the 96th meridian has a southerly direction, 
 and that the general conditions resemble much those further west. 
 Pengshan on the Yang-tse in western Sz-chuen is 1,500 feet above 
 the level of the sea. At Ching-tu, some seventy miles due north of 
 Pengshan, Cooper, in March, found the fields in the neighbourhood 
 occupied by luxuriant crops of wheat, barley, sugarcane, and opium, 
 the latter of which demands a climate similar to that of the plains 
 below the Kumaon Himalaya. The same traveller crossed the 
 Yalung and Kinsha branches of the Yang-tse between Chingtu and 
 Bathang, and beyond Tatsien-lu entered Eastern Tibet, where yaks 
 are used in the carrying trade and a more alpine climate is met with. 
 Bathang on the west has much the same position with respect to the 
 elevated highland to the north that Chingtu has on the east, but lies 
 a degree of latitude more to the south than Chingtu ; so that from 
 the meridian of Bathang, the range dividing the Tibetan plateau 
 from the plains of China seems to take a north-easterly direction. 
 The feeders of the Yang-tse and other rivers find their way through 
 this range by a series of gorges similar to that of the Dihong 
 further west. Between the Yang-tse and the Dihong, we have two 
 
 1 Klaproth suggested the Irawadi as the continuation of the Sanpo, and Colonel 
 Godwin- Austen was the principal advocate for the Subansiri ; Progs. R. G. S., 
 August, 1876 ; but the researches of the Pandit employed by Lieutenant Harman 
 perhaps show that the Dihong is the real representative of the Sanpo, and that the 
 bend it takes beyond Chetang is quite sufficient to leave a large water-shed for the 
 Subansiri. The most recent advocate of the Irawadi as the true continuation of 
 the Sanpo is Mr. R. Gordon, in his elaborate “ Report on the Irrawaddy River.” 
 The first volume is illustrated with hydrographical hypsometrical and orographi- 
 cal maps of Tibet and the neighbouring countries together with a hyetographical 
 map of India. 2 See Peal’s observations on As&m nomenclature in J.A.S., Ben, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 73 
 
 great rivers, the Lan-tsang identified with the Mekong or river of 
 Kambodia, and the Lu-tse or upper course of the Salween. Father 
 Des Godins informs us that the Mekong has its origin in about 33° 
 to 34° north latitude in the mountains south of Koko-Nor, and the 
 Lu-tse further west is known as the Ngen-kio in Tibet ; but whether 
 this name is to be regraded as one with the Nak-chu-kha of the 
 Pandit explorer is left to future travellers to decide. 
 
 Turning now to the upper portions of central and western Tibet, 
 we find from the Pandit explorations that the drainage to the north 
 of the northern water-parting of the upper portions of both the 
 Indus and the Brahmaputra flows into a number of lakes. East of 
 the 84th meridian, these lakes appear to be connected the one with 
 the other, and eventually with the great river Nak-chu-kha, which 
 has an easterly direction in the upper part of its course and finds a 
 southern outlet in one of the great rivers to the east of the Dihone-. 
 
 I rom the Pangong lake on the west to the Lonkor Clio between the 
 83rd and 84th meridians on the east, the drainage is collected in a 
 series of depressions without any outlet, each of which is the centre 
 of a subordinate minor system of its own. We do not know of 
 any considerable stream proceeding northwards or westwards from 
 this tract. This lake-system is a characteristic feature of the 
 orography of north-western Tibet. The waters of these lakes are 
 generally brackish and the margins exhibit expanses of salt-marsh. 
 Streams of fresh water are found, but in their course towards the 
 lakes these rapidly become brackish, and in the end little influence 
 the quality of the lake-water itself. According to the Pandit, the 
 country to the north of Garge and Garchethol is a great uninhabited 
 plain. 1 It was formerly customary to travel in a north-north-westerly 
 direction from Tliok Daurakpa 2 for some twenty days to the range 
 overlooking the Gobi plain in which -'the commercial entrepot Nari 
 Tharu lay. 3 A two months’ journey from Tliok Daurakpa to the 
 
 1 Called Jung Pliayil Puyil, meaning literally “ the desert country in which the 
 father and son have wandered,” from a tradition that two men had entered it and 
 died there from want of water. G. T. S. Eep., 1S73--75, p. 55. 2 In about 85° 8' 
 
 east longitude, and 32° V north latitude. 3 Trotter suggests that N ari Tharu 
 
 occupies a position at the foot of the northern boundary ridge of the Tibetan plateau, 
 similar to that held by Polu and Sorghak, and that the stream passing Nari Tharu 
 may be the same that passes by Charchand. Prejevalsky (p. 76) says that Charchen 
 is situate about 200 miles to the south-west of Chargalilc on a river of the same 
 name. Hence it is a ten days’ journey to the oasis of Nai (900 houses), and three 
 days further to Kiria. The position and distance of Nai would suit the Pandit’s 
 description of Nari Tharu. 
 
 10 
 
•HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 7 ^ 
 
 Lob-Nor basin. 
 
 north-east brought the traveller to Ajan, also a commercial centre. 1 
 This road lay throughout over an extensive plain ; no large moun- 
 tains were seen and no streams were crossed. Drinking-water was 
 obtained from a number of fresh-water lakes mostly dependent on 
 the rainfall for their supply. From these reports we learn that 
 northern Tibet is a plateau of great elevation without inhabitants 
 and possessed of few streams. 
 
 As we approach the west, the boundary ranges that support the 
 
 Tibetan plateau between them on the north 
 and south gradually incline towards each 
 other, so that westwards of the Pangong lake they are little more 
 than fifty miles apart. 2 Here we find the water-parting of the Indus 
 and Lob-Nor systems in the elevated Dipsang plain, which attains a 
 height of 18,000 feet above the level of the sea near the Karakoram 
 pass (18,550 feet). From the Karakoram pass on the north flows 
 a feeder of the Yarkand river, and from the east, an affluent of the 
 Khrakash river, both of which belong to the Lob-Nor system. On 
 the south-east, only eleven miles from the pass, the Daulat-beguldi 
 encamping ground is close to one of the feeders of the Nubra branch 
 of the Shayok river that belongs to the Indus system. In one case 
 the waters lose themselves in the Gobi desert, and in the other they 
 reach the Indian Ocean at Karachi. If the statements of Kostenko 
 and Severtsof be accepted, we have here in the west an analogue of 
 the arrangement that has been described as characteristic of all the 
 river-systems along the southern face of the Himalaya between the 
 Jumna and the Brahmaputra. The alpine basin of the Yamanyar 
 lies between two great groups of peaks, some thirty miles apart. 
 On the south-east of the Yamanyar is the Tagharma group, 
 of which the Muztagh-Ata 3 peak attains an elevation of 25,350 
 feet above the level of the sea. On the north-west there is a 
 similar group, of which the Tash-balik peak reaches an elevation of 
 22,500 feet. The Yamanyar collects its waters in an elevated valley 
 
 1 On approaching Ajan, a bare rocky range is passed and the town is occupied by 
 Sokpas, who procure their corn and flour from Kokod and Karka, a large monastery 
 some ten or twelve days’ journey beyond the borders of their country. Trotter 
 suggests that Karka lies between Lob-Nor and Koko-Nor, and that Ajan is one 
 with the Anj-si of Uspenski ; but both of these identifications require confirmation. 
 3 From the Khrakoram to Shahidullah (11,780 feet) on the verge of the plains 
 of Yhrkand is a distance by road of 78 miles, and from the same to Changlung 
 on the south is 83 miles, and to Leh on the Indus, 163 miles. 3 ‘ Father of 
 
 ice-mountains,’ 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES- 
 
 75 
 
 between these groups and the water-parting range on the west, 
 which is known variously as the Tagharma plain or plain of the 
 Kichik Kara-kul . 1 The groups themselves are in advance of the 
 water-parting range and are connected with it by transverse ridges. 
 That on the south connects the Muztagh-Ata group near the Kok 
 Mainak pass with the water-parting range, west of the Neza-tash 
 pass, while that on the north has not yet been accurately defined'. 
 Spurs from the groups descend northwards towards the plains and 
 effectually divide the waters of the Yamanyar from those of the 
 Kashgar-darya on the west and from those of the Yarkand river on 
 the east. It has generally been supposed 2 that these two groups of 
 peaks belonged to a great meridional range ; but Severtsof, who has 
 had recently exceptional means for obtaining an accurate estimate 
 of its character, distinctly states that “ these two peaks were sup- 
 posed to be connected by a continuous range, while the real fact is 
 that each is respectively the highest point of separate small high 
 mountain knots capped with eternal snow.” We have, therefore, in 
 the west also an apparent snowy chain of mountains as seen from 
 the plains, but which on closer examination resolves itself into 
 groups of snowy peaks in advance of the water-parting range from 
 which they are divided by an elevated valley. This valley gives 
 rise to a river that makes a way for itself between the boundary 
 groups to the plains below, while the groups themselves are con- 
 nected by transverse ridges with the line of water-parting. A 
 ridge from Muztagh-Ata to Yangi Hissar separates the drainage of 
 the northern slope from that of the Kinkol river on the east, and' a 
 second ridge follotvs at some distance the left bank of the 
 Yamanyar which shortly after its issue from the mountains is ab- 
 sorbed in artificial branches or canals for irrigation purposes. The 
 whole system is a remarkable illustration of Hodgson’s formula for 
 the river-systems of the eastern Himalaya. 
 
 The alpine affluents of the Yarkand river known as the Sarikol 
 
 and Zarafshan rivers also illustrate the unit- 
 ising principle observed elsewhere. They 
 
 Oxus basin. 
 
 1 Lesser Kara-kul or ‘ black lake.’ 2 The two groups form a part of 
 
 Hayward’s meridional Kizil-Art range, the existence of which was supported 
 by Shaw and Trotter and denied by Fedchenko, who considered the phenomenon 
 described by Hayward as merely representing the terminal butt ends of parallel 
 ranges belonging to the Pamir plateau. Kostenko, however, maintained it to be a 
 great mountain range. Views of the Muztagh-Ata peak and the Karikol valley are 
 given by Gordon in his ‘ Roof of the World-’ 
 
76 
 
 iilma'layan districts 
 
 are separated from eacli otlier by the Kandar range, which descends 
 in a north-easterly direction from the water-parting range to the 
 south, and terminates where the Sarikol and Zarafshan unite their 
 waters within the outer range of hills to the north. The Oxus sys- 
 tem further gives an example of another of the characteristic features 
 of the Himalayan river-systems. The water-parting follows the line 
 of the Hindu Kush from the pass near Bamian to the Baroghil pass, 
 and thence follows the Pamir range to the greater Kara-kul. The 
 height of the water-parting on the Baroghil plain has been estimated by 
 Captain Biddulph at about 12,000 feet. The Mullah states that in 
 traversing it for a distance of five miles there was no appreciable 
 rise or fall, and further it is said that from a point one-and-a-half 
 miles short of the crest, the difference in height did not appear to 
 be more than two hundred feet. The Sarhad head of the Panjah 
 branch of the Oxus is not more than two miles distant from the 
 Gez-kul or Oi-kul, the longest source of the Aksu branch of the 
 same river known as the Murghab. The principal source of the 
 western head of the Panjah branch of the Oxus in Wood’s Victoria 
 lake is but twelve miles distant from the water-parting between it 
 and another branch of the Aksu. So little is his water-parting 
 marked by any defined physical feature that it was only after 
 some difficulty that Trotter discovered it at a height of 420 
 feet above the level of lake Victoria. There is also reason to 
 believe that the greater Kara-kul once gave off at one end a feeder 
 to the Kashgar-darya of the Lob-Nor system, and at the other a 
 feeder to the Oxus. We have already seen that it is but a little 
 difference in perpendicular height that determines the drainage 
 between the Satlaj and Karnali and between the Nubra branch of the 
 Shay ok and the Karakash, so that where rivers have their sources in 
 these elevated areas it may be generally stated that a slight inequality 
 in the surface, such as it is not possible to delineate on any ordinary 
 map, is sufficient to determine the course of springs into channels 
 that have a very remote debouche one from the other in the pla ns. 
 The terms trough, channel, basin arc in such cases often misleading. 
 Nor are the bounding ranges in these elevated regions marked with 
 such well-defined characters as are met with elsewhere. The great 
 Pamir is divided from the Alichur Pamir on the west by a range 
 having an average elevation of only 3,000 feet above the level of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 77 
 
 Victoria lake, and from the little Pamir by a similar range averag- 
 ing about 2,000 feet above the same level. The direction of the 
 rivers depends, therefore, on the influence of much less relatively 
 important masses of matter than are to be found at lower levels. 
 The slight difference in level that determines the course of the 
 head-streams of the Karakash and Yarkand rivers on the Dip- 
 sang plains, is sufficient to divert the former from their normal 
 direction and drive them directly against the Kuen-lun range, 
 where, finding a fault in the wall, they work their way through 
 towards the plains. The influence of the law of gravity and the me- 
 chanical and chemical changes wrought by water are the sufficient 
 causes for every form of river channel that is met with, and it is 
 to their ceaseless action that even the stupendous gorges of the 
 Indus, the Satlaj, and the Brahmaputra, are due. 
 
 Plains of Hindustan. 
 
 Indus plain. 
 
 Having concluded our review of the river-basins and their 
 
 to 
 
 relations to each other, we shall now pro- 
 ceed to examine the different parts of the 
 area under our consideration. The great plain of Hindustan 
 which first claims our notice is a vast flat extending with an 
 almost unbroken surface along the foot of the Himalayan slope from 
 the upper Indus to the Bay of Bengal. Its direction is from north- 
 west to south-east over a distance of nearly 1,500 miles, and having 
 an area, including its western branch along the Indus and its eastern 
 prolongation into Asam, of about 500,000 square miles. On the 
 
 west it has its greatest development stretch- 
 ing along the Indus from the foot of the 
 mountains to the sea, from north-east to south-east for a length of 
 750 miles. Its breadth from the Arvali hills to those west of the 
 Indus is about 400 miles. The Arvali hills run in a north-easterly 
 direction from the peninsula of Kathiawar until they lose themselves 
 in the plain near Delhi. From this v point they run in a south-east- 
 erly direction connecting with the Vindhyas, and in both cases con- 
 stitute the abutments of the elevated plateau of Central India. They 
 thus form two sides of a triangle with its apex towards the north, 
 where it separates the Indus plain from that of the Ganges. The 
 general slope of the Indus plain is south-west, with, as we have seen, 
 a slight depression towards the south, until the influence of the north- 
 ern slope of the Arvalis is felt, when it gradually rises again. Taking 
 
78 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 a line along the Indus/ we have Sell wan, 117 feet above the level of 
 the sea ; Shikarpur, 199 feet ; Dehra Grhazi Khan, 395 feet ; Segra, 
 on the eastern bank of the Indus, opposite Dehra Ismail Khan, 606 
 feet ; and Khairabad, opposite Kalabagh, 750 feet. Following the 
 32nd parallel from west to east, we have Sandi on the left bank of 
 the Indus, 629 feet above the level of the sea ; Lodri, on the left 
 bank of the Chinab, 657 feet ; and Ramdas, on the left bank of the 
 Ravi, 796 feet : further east, we enter the hills. Following the 
 30th parallel we find Mare on the 71st meridian, with an elevation 
 of 386 feet ; Nur Shah on the 73rd meridian, 482 feet; and Pakka 
 Sarawa, on the 75th meridian, 698 feet. The perfect uniformity of 
 the surface is broken in the north-west by the small table-land be- 
 tween the Indus and the Jhilam, of which the salt range 2 forms the 
 abutment. These hills at the Sakesir station of the survey in the 
 Jhilam district rise to a height of 4,994 feet above the level of the 
 sea. They extend from Khairabad on the Indus to the Jhilam op- 
 posite Chilianwala, and thence those forming the eastern flank of the 
 table-land as well as a subsidiary range to the east of the Jhilam turn 
 abruptly north-east and connect with the outer ranges of the Hima- 
 laya near Bhimbar (1,200 feet). The table-land itself is seldom 
 more than two or three hundred feet above the general level of the 
 plain, and presents an undulating though tolerably even surface bro- 
 ken occasionally by ridges which attain a height of from two to three 
 thousand feet. 
 
 The Indus plain along the foot of the hills is sufficiently watered, 
 
 , , but to the east and south at any distance 
 
 Indian desert. .... . 
 
 from the rivers cultivation on an extended 
 scale is only possible when the scanty rainfall can be aided by 
 artificial irrigation. The latter tract known as the great Indian 
 desert stretches through Bhatiana, Bikamr, and Bahawalpur into 
 Sind. Tradition tells us that in former time it was a fertile and 
 populous country studded with numerous cities and towns and 
 inhabited by prosperous and civilised tribes. A recent writer 3 
 states that “there is nothing in history to show that the rivers (of 
 this tract) ever contained much more water than they do now. 
 Some diminution in their volume may have taken place during the 
 
 1 All these heights are taken from the records of the Great Trigonometrical Sur- 
 vey. 2 Fleming on the salt range, J. As. Soc., Ben., XXII., 229. 3 Cal. 
 
 Rev., July, 1874, p. 3. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 79 
 
 lapse of ages, from changes in the lower Himalayan range, as well 
 as from the destruction of forests and increase of irrigation. There 
 is no doubt also a tendency to the obliteration of the lower part of 
 their course ; partly by the drift of sand and dust from the desert ; 
 and partly by the deposit of the silt brought down by the streams 
 themselves, owing to the absence of the great river by Avhich it 
 would have been carried off to the sea.” Between the Sarasvati 
 and the Satlaj are a series of broad channels, most of them a mile in 
 width, of which those to the west appear to terminate in the valley of 
 the Satlaj, while those to the east, which are also the more ancient, 
 lead to the channel of the lost river Hakra or Sotra. 1 The Kaggar 
 now runs in an old bed of the Satlaj and was formerly an affluent 
 of that river. The change may have taken place owing to some 
 great cataclysm 3 which formed a new bed for the river and left the 
 old one for its tributaries on the east, and there is much to be said 
 in favour of the identification of the Sotra channel with this old bed. 
 At the present day the water-level in wells in this tract is excessively 
 low, being often so deep as three hundred feet from the surface. As 
 the water when procured is often brackish, it is a matter of wonder 
 that people are found to inhabit this country which long ago receiv- 
 ed the name of Marusthali, ‘ the region of death.’ 
 
 The Gangetic plain extends from the debouche of the Jumna 
 
 from the hills to the head of the delta of the 
 Gangetic plain. Ganges, and lies between the great bend of 
 
 the Himalaya and the north-eastern slope of the table-land of Central 
 India, which here has a general elevation of about one thousand feet 
 above the plain. The breadth of the plain varies from about two 
 hundred miles at Agra to about one hundred miles at Bajmahal. 
 The direction is to the south-east, but to the east of the Ganges the 
 courses of the rivers exhibit more southing. A general idea of the 
 fall in height along the course of the Ganges may be obtained from 
 the following figures : Saharanpur, 903 feet above the level of the 
 sea ; Meerut, 735 feet ; Aligarh, 610 feet ; Agra, 516 feet ; Cawn- 
 pore, 517 feet; Allahabad, 315 feet ; Benares, 255 feet ; Patna, 174 
 feet ; Bhagalpur, 159 feet; and Bardwan, 97 feet. 3 Cross sections 
 
 1 Said to have dried up in the thirteenth century. * Like that of 1762, 
 
 when, according to General Cunningham, the river was dammed up by a landslip in 
 the hills and rose some four hundred feet before the barrier gave way. A similar 
 cataclysm occurred on the Indus. 2 From G . T. S. tables. 
 
80 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 show little difference in height at any point. Bhatpura, below 
 Mohan, at the entrance to the principal pass into the Dehra Dun, is 
 954 feet above the level of the sea. Following eastwards the line 
 along the foot of the hills, we have Hard war, 1,016; Najfbabad 
 860; Barhapura, 910 ; Kashipur, 750; Bilahri, 760 ; Sigauli in 
 Gorakhpur, 300 ; Madanpur in Tirhut, 230; and Amua, 248 feet. 1 
 Noting these figures on any good map and following the course 
 of the rivers, a sufficiently correct idea of the general slope of 
 the Gangetic plain will be obtained. At the termination of the 
 hills near Rajmahal, the plain once more expands largely to the 
 south and again presents an uninterrupted surface from the moun- 
 tains to the sea. The length of this section is about 350 miles, 
 and its breadth from Bajmahal to the Brahmaputra about 150 
 miles, but increasing to about 300 miles along the coast at the 
 head of the Bay of Bengal. The height varies from 100 feet, the 
 level of the river Mahanadi at Malda, 2 to 75 feet at Jelinghi, the 
 head of the Hugh branch of the Ganges, 3 and 31 feet at Chinsurah. 
 The Howrah station bench-mark is but 1 8 - 2 feet above the level of 
 the sea. 4 These portions of the great plain, often though not very 
 appropriately called the valley of the Ganges, are intersected by the 
 countless tributaries of that river and are under the full influence of 
 the periodical rains. They therefore, as might be expected, com- 
 prise the richest, the most populous, and the most civilised districts 
 of India, and in these respects form a striking contrast to the west- 
 ern parts along the Indus which are doomed to perpetual sterility, 
 not from any natural deficiency in the quality of the soil, but only 
 from the great aridity of the climate. This barrenness is no doubt, 
 in a great measure, due to the relative position of the Indus plain 
 to the higher ground around it and to the prevailing winds ; matters 
 which, at first sight, appear to be of little importance, but which 
 are the efficient causes of the extremely dry climate that it possesses. 
 Fluviatile action in erosion and deposition, productive of the allu- 
 vion and diluvium, terms so well known in the settlement records of 
 these provinces, has clearly directed the course of the rivers in the 
 great Gangetic plain. Mr. Fergusson, in an article quoted by the 
 authors 5 of the £ Manual of the Geology of India,’ shows that the 
 
 1 First five from Webb and Sigauli from Kirkpatrick. 2 Hooker. 
 
 3 Prinsep. 4 G. T. S., 52 : in sc, VIII., 1866. 5 Pp. 406, 4 12. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 81 
 
 rivers of the Granges delta oscillate in curves, the extent of which 
 is directly proportional to the quantity of water flowing down their 
 channels. Thus, the oscillations of the Granges between Mungir and 
 Raj mall al average 9^ miles, and between Allahabad and Chunar, 
 only 3‘7 miles in length. Further, when a great river runs through 
 a low country, its course is considerably stayed by the sluggish 
 expanses of stationary water generally termed jhils in Bengal, and it 
 is thus compelled to deposit its silt along its banks. Hence arises 
 the phenomenon of a river passing through a country between 
 banks that are higher than the adjacent alluvial flats, and the gra- 
 dual increase of the banks until the stream makes its way through 
 them to some lower level. Mr. Fergusson estimates that when the 
 slope of a river bed falls to less than six inches in a mile, a denuding 
 river will be converted into a depositing river, and as the deposit 
 commences at the bottom of the slope, the change proceeds up- 
 stream. Moreover, since the Ganges receives its more consider- 
 able affluents from the north, the left bank gradually increases 
 and drives the main stream more and more towards the table-land 
 of Central India, and makes the point of confluence of its affluents 
 continually move upwards. This tendency is well marked in 
 the Jumna in the Mainpuri district, where the old silted-up bed is 
 locally known as the bhagna. 1 In the Tarai below Kumaon the same 
 law prevails, and streams that in the upper portion of their course are 
 denuding rivers in the lower portion where the check in slope 
 occurs deposit their silt, form jhils, and continually change their 
 courses like the rivers of the Gangetic delta. 
 
 The Asam valley forms a narrow prolongation of the- eastern 
 
 extremity of the plain, partaking more, 
 however, of the nature of a simple river valley 
 liable to annual floods. It has a length of about 300 miles with a 
 breadth of thirty to forty miles, widening at its junction with the 
 
 1 Gaz. IV., 478. The old bed in Sahlranpur is called the Budhi Jumna. — Ibid, 
 II., 140. Remains have been found in the Jumna alluvion near Allahabad. — J. A. S., 
 Ben., III., 302, 529 : IV., 262, &c. Wilford also notices the discovery of bones of 
 men and animals in the Ganges alluvion near Benares about a furlong from its 
 present bed at ninety-five feet from the surface and' thirty feet below the level of 
 the present bed. He says the human bones were entire, but those of quadrupeds 
 were broken and bore evident marks of their having been cut with a sharp instru- 
 ment He found no marine deposits at over 105 feet when the water-bearing strata 
 was reached. — As. Res., VIII., 294. He has also noticed the fact that the point of 
 junction of the Kosi with the Ganges had moved up from Nawabganj opposite Rilj- 
 mahal some twenty-five miles. 
 
 11 
 
82 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Gangetic delta. It is shut in on all sides, except the west, by 
 mountains. The characteristic of a sudden and total change j^ong 
 a definite line at the foot of the mountains from a broken hilly sur- 
 face to an absolute flat, which holds good throughout the other parts 
 of the plain, here no longer prevails. We frequently see small iso- 
 lated hills standing out like islands from the general level surface, a, 
 phenomenon observable on a smaller scale where the Yindhyan range 
 mingles with the plain. From Sadiya, which is 440 feeF above 
 the level of the sea,, the fall is gentle to Gauhati, which is placed at 
 163 feet, and Goalpara, Ay Inch is 150 feet. 1 Taking a line along the 
 foot of the hills, we have Titaliya, 330 feet ; Raj hat at the footed the * 
 hills near Buxa, 220 feet ; and the station at the foot of the hills ^ 
 below Diwangiri, A70 feet : figure^ which show a more sudden 
 descent than those at similar positions under the western Himalaya. 
 
 We shall now return to the plain between the Jumna and the 
 
 Sarda, and more particularly to that part 
 Bhabai. which lies immediately below the foot of the 
 
 Kumaon hills. We find there a narrow belt of country usually 
 covered with forest and remarkable for the entire absence of water, a 
 phenomenon eminently characteristic of this tract. The great rivers 
 preserve their course with some diminution in their volume, but all 
 the minor streams that have their origin in the lower hills on enter- 
 in c- this belt soon lose themselves in the shingly deposit thatconsti- 
 tutes the substratum. In time of flood, however, they often preserve 
 a visible stream throughout their course, but this appearance lasts 
 only so long as the cause exists. This belt of waterless forest land 
 is called the Bliabar or ukhar bhumi (waterless forest) under 
 Kumaon, and has a breadth of from five to fifteen miles. Though 
 no stream or spring exists, the Bliabar is clothed with a magnificent 
 forest finding its nourishment in the few feet of alluvial matter 
 that rests on the boulder and shingle deposit below. 3 To the 
 
 1 These figures are from the Great Trigonometrical Survey records, which make 
 Dibruo-arh, 3-18 feet above the level of the sea ; Sibsa gar, 319 feet ; and Baramak, 
 near Tezpur, 256 feet. 2 First from Hooker, two last from Pemberton. 
 
 3 These descriptions are chiefly based on Herbert’s report ; and on an article 
 entitled ‘The Himalaya in Kumaon and GarlrwaT by Mr. (now Sir John) Strachey, 
 Cal Rev. No. 35. Stewart notes that he can find no definite statement as to the 
 breadth of the tract known as Bhabar and Tarai to the east of Sikkim, but Hooker 
 mentions expressly that there it ranges from 8 to 12 miles in width ; Kirkpatrick 
 and Hoffmeister coincide in making its breadth opposite Nepal about 10 or 12 
 miles, and between the Sarda and Ramganga it ranges from 20 to 30 miles, falling 
 to 6 or 7 miles abreast of Garhwal and disappearing to the west of the J umna. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 83 
 
 south of the Bhabar, the character of the country changes into a 
 swamp devoid of trees and intersected by sluggish streams that rise 
 
 from unhealth v morasses. This tract is 
 
 Tar&i. 
 
 included with the Bhabar between the 
 Ganges and the Phika under the general term ban or jungle. 
 East of the Phika under Kumaon, where it apparently attains its 
 maximum breadth, it is known as the Tarai, and under Nepal as 
 the Taryani, with some specific addition as Morang, &c. It lies 
 between the forest belt and the cultivated plains, with an average 
 breadth of about ten miles under Kumaon, though varying much 
 in different parts. Thus wo have between the plains proper 
 under Kumaon and the foot of the hills two distinct belts of 
 country, each about ten to fifteen miles broad, known as the 
 Tarai and the Bhabar. The Tarai is characterised by the presence 
 of reeds and grasses showing the marshy nature of the ground. 
 The streams carry off only a portion of the superfluous moisture 
 and sluggishly run in tortuous channels, doubling back con- 
 stantly in their course. The soil consists of moist alluvial mat- 
 ter without a sign of rock either in fragments or in site. In the 
 Bhabar, on the other hand, no water rises from the ground. Through- 
 out its whole extent not a single spring nor any water can be seen, 
 except occasionally where one of the larger rivers takes its course. 
 In the rainy season alone torrents cut into the ground, and the chan- 
 nels thus formed exhibit characteristic sections of this remarkable 
 tract. We then find that there is but a thin covering of alluvial soil 
 on a vast dry bed of boulders and of shingle, through which all rain 
 that falls sinks rapidly, and which absorbs in the same way all the 
 minor streams of the outer ranges. Instead of reeds and grasses, 
 we have here all the magnificence usually attributed to oriental 
 forest scenery. Gigantic haldus ( Adina cordifolia ) and /chairs 
 ( Acacia catechu ) rear their heads above a tangled undergrowth of 
 creepers and tliorn-buslies which present a barrier to progress that 
 an elephant alone can surmount. Towards the hills we find the sal 1 
 ( Shorea robusta ), and in Kota great groves of mangoes, while patches 
 of cultivation appear wherever irrigation is practicable. For this 
 
 1 The sal is the characteristic tree of the upper Bhabar wherever it is found. 
 Hodgson notes that constant -observation has enabled the people of the Tarai to dis- 
 tinguish the principal belts of the Bhabar from the trees that grow in each. The 
 highest is the sal level, the next is the Jthair level, and the lowest is the sisu ( Dul- 
 ler tji a sisu ) level. 
 
84 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 purpose, the streams of the lower hills are turned into artificial chan- 
 nels before they reach the shingle deposit, and even the lakes in the 
 lower hills are dammed up to retain a sufficient supply of water for 
 the Bhabar. West of the Ivosi, however, there is little cultivation 
 or irrigation, and the Bliabar there almost remains untouched by 
 the plough. The actual slope of the ground between the Tarai and 
 the foot of the hills is considerable, though not apparent to the tra- 
 veller, except when he observes the rapidity of the current in the irri- 
 gation channels that line the road by which the Bhabar is crossed. 
 
 Siwaliks. 
 
 Before entering into more detail regarding the Bhabar and Tarai, 
 
 there is yet a third feature characteristic of 
 the tract below the Himalaya that must be 
 noticed here as intimately connected with the other two, and this is 
 the line of hills called the Siwalik 1 or sub-Himalayan. These will 
 be well known to palaeontologists in connection with the rich col- 
 lection of fossil mammalian bones discovered in them by Dr. Fal- 
 coner and Colonel Cautley. As a rule, they appear to rise abruptly 
 and without any intermediate undulating slope from the apparently 
 level surface of the flat country below to heights varying from a few 
 hundred to three or four thousand feet. They are composed of sand- 
 stones and conglomerates, and the dip of the strata is usually towards 
 the general mass of the mountains at a low angle. The form of dis- 
 turbance of the strata is very regular, producing broad normal anti- 
 clinal flexures, the axis-plane sloping towards the mountains. To- 
 wards the plains the slope has been weathered out, so that plains- 
 wards the Siwaliks exhibit a steep face from which rise the highest 
 summits of the range, while a long gentle declivity slopes inwards 
 and forms a longitudinal shallow valley by meeting the foot of the 
 next line of hills. The latter, as a rule, run on a line parallel to the 
 Siwaliks, but at a distance of from five to ten miles from them. 
 
 The bottom of this longitudinal depression is, as may be supposed, 
 
 by no means continuous. In some places it 
 is cut through by the passage of the streams 
 that drain the interior of the mountains ; in others, it is quite obli- 
 terated by the near approach to each other of the two ranges that 
 flank it, and which usually form distinct lines. This is, moreover, a 
 
 I) tins. 
 
 1 Sivawala, belonging to Siva ; for use of the term ‘ Siwaliks’ by Musalman 
 historians, see ‘ History ’ posted. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 85 
 
 structural feature and not due simply to denudation. In the country 
 between the Satlaj and the Kali, these valleys are called Duns 
 and under Nepal, according to Hodgson, they are called Maris. 
 They have been confounded by some writers 1 with the Tarai, which, 
 as we have seen, is quite distinct. The lower part of the Duns 
 generally appears to be covered with a deposit of boulders and gravel 
 that slopes somewhat steeply from the Himalaya towards the Siwa- 
 liks, so that the whole bottom of the valley is considerably raised 
 above the level of the plain without. In consequence of this eleva- 
 tion, the outer hills when viewed from the interior of the valley, as 
 from Masuri, present a very insignificant outline. The drainage of 
 these valleys usually collects along their longitudinal axis and either 
 falls into some of the larger streams that cross them, or less 
 frequently finds an independent exit for itself into the plains by a 
 sudden bend to the south through a break in the outer range. Owing 
 to the considerable elevation of the Duns above the plains down to 
 the level of which the drainage finds its way in a very short distance, 
 the unconsolidated strata that form the floor of these valleys are 
 constantly cut through to a great depth by water-courses. Conse- 
 quently, the surface, though often presenting an apparent flat for 
 several miles together, is frequently broken up into steps which, on 
 the whole, are tolerably level, but at different heights, the one 
 above the other. This phenomenon is not uncommon, and is 
 constantly observed along rivers that are eroding their banks. To 
 the same causes also are to be attributed the practical impossibility 
 of procuring water by means of wells in the Duns, a difficulty 
 which mainly arises from the thorough dessication of the gravelly 
 soil by the deep drainage. 
 
 We have not sufficient information to state distinctly how far 
 
 the Bhabar extends both east and west along 
 Extent of the Bhabar. * 
 
 the foot of the Himalaya, but the following 
 
 indications would lead us to suppose that this phenomenon is 
 inherent in the relations of such a mass as the Himalaya with the 
 subjacent plains. Under Nepal it is called the Jhari or Bhavar, 
 and, according to Hodgson , 2 extends from the Kali to the Mechi on 
 the east with the same general characteristics as under Kumaon. 
 
 1 Somerville’s Physical Geography corrected in 7th edition, 1878. 2 Physical 
 
 Geography of the Himalaya. — J. A. S., Ben., XVIII., 778. 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 86 
 
 Eastward of the Tista, according to the same writer, the Bhabar 
 and Tarai do not exhibit the same parallelism to the line of the 
 Himalaya, but “show themselves plain wards, like an irregular series 
 of salient and re-salient angles resting on the mountains. Or like 
 small insulated plateaus or high undulated plains, surrounded in 
 both the latter cases by low swampy land analogous to the Tarai.” 
 An example of the former is found in the plateau called the Parbat 
 Joar on the coniines of As am and Rangpur, which is considerably 
 elevated, quite insulated, remote from the mountains and covered 
 with scd , the characteristic tree of the upper Bhabar. Again, we 
 have undulating plains, such as those that occur around Dinajpur 
 and to the north-west and north-east of Siligori, all of which may 
 be identified with the Bhabar. In all these cases where the detritus 
 bed thins out, a moist tract is met with, though in no case so 
 marked as to the westward. Herbert 1 affirms the general applica- 
 bility of his remarks regarding the submontane tract below Kumaon 
 to the entire country between the Ganges and the Satlaj and 
 Parish 2 to the tract further west between the Satlaj and the Bias. 
 There is no well-defined line dividing the area of swamp from the 
 Bhabar proper between the Sarda and the Ramganga. To the 
 east in the Tallades Bhabar, where the streams seek the Sarda 
 directly, there is less Bhabar, and the swamps that exist are not so 
 extensive, but at the same time are more formidable, being often 
 surrounded by tangled masses of canebrake. The Dhyanirau 
 Bhabar also is comparatively narrow, and it is not until we come to 
 the Chhakhata Bhabar that we get a breadth of eight to twelve 
 miles that lasts until the Phika river is reached. The Tarai exist 
 all along the tract to the south of, and parallel to, the Bhabar from 
 the Sarda to the Phika. But west of the Phika it loses its charac- 
 teristics and can only be traced in the closeness to the surface of the 
 water-level in wells. Westward of the Phika, the Bhabar or water- 
 less tract also narrows and the scd forest does not descend more 
 than six miles from the foot of the hills, and a few miles further 
 west it has not a breadth of two miles. The Bhabar, however, 
 exists, and is broader than the present sal forest, of which much has 
 been cut down of late years. Its presence is shown by the absence 
 
 1 Report of the Mineralogical Survey of the Himalaya Mountains, 1 bid, extra 
 No., Vol. XI. 2 Kohistan of the Jullundhur Doab, Ibid, XVII., p, 281 : 
 
 XVIII., p. 360. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 87 
 
 of wells, and similarly the Tarai appears in a line of wells with 
 water at from three to six feet from the surface, running parallel 
 to and bordering on the Bhabar. This limitation of both the 
 Bhabar and Tarai is conterminous with the commencement of the 
 Path Dun, which has detained the greater part of the detritus that 
 is elsewhere spread out below over the plains. From the Pliika 
 eastwards to the Sarda, where these tracts attain their maximum 
 importance, there are no Duns, properly speaking ; for the Kota 
 Dun presents no great barrier to the south, and further east the 
 Siwaliks are so blended with the outer range that a geologist alone 
 can trace their sequence. In this fact, we have an illustration of 
 that portion of Hodgson’s theory that gives a narrow extent to the 
 Bhabar below the Duns and a broader range where there is no Dun 
 to intercept the debris from the hills. The facts that we know 
 regarding the Bhabar to the north of the Saharanpur district 1 
 further confirm this deduction. 
 
 In Eastern Turkistan we find a similar phenomenon. Trotter 
 The Bhabar in Turkis- us that the Sagon river, which has its 
 
 tan - source at the eastern foot of the Terek pass, 
 
 after it reaches the plains north of Kalti Ailak wastes away and leaks 
 through crevices in the stony ground. The hakim of the latter place 
 assured him that wells had been often sunk but proved of no use. 
 Trotter writes : — “ This diminution in the size of rivers as they des- 
 cend is one of the chief characteristics of the country, and occurs in 
 all minor streams that have come under my notice. Of course much 
 of this is due to irrigation, which necessarily carries off large quan- 
 tities of water, but the stony soil has also much to answer for ; on 
 the other hand, the frequent appearance of large springs giving con- 
 siderable supplies of water and often issuing from the open plains at 
 long distances from the mountains may account in a great measure, 
 if not fully, for the water thus dost in its early infancy.” Here we 
 have the existence of a Bhabar and Tarai vouched for by competent 
 authority in the Yarkand and Kashgar country. The same pheno- 
 menon, but on a larger scale, was found by Prejevalsky to charac- 
 terise the tract between Korla and Lob-Nor. A belt of country 
 about three to four miles wide, consisting of an undulating plain 
 covered with a pebbly or gravelly soil and totally devoid of 
 
 1 Gazetteer, II., 110. 
 
88 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 vegetation, runs parallel to and at the foot of the Kurugh-tagh, a 
 low waterless and barren range. Beyond this stony margin, which 
 appears to define the shore-line of an ancient sea, lies the great desert 
 of drift sand amid which salt marshes exist wherever the moisture 
 comes to the surface. The same pebbly plain was found under the 
 northern slope of the Altyn-tagh, the north-easterly continuation of 
 the Kuen-lun mountains between the 90th and 92nd meridians, and 
 north of and below the stony margin the usual salt marshes occurred. 
 The latter are also found at the foot of the north-eastern portion of 
 the Tibetan table-land in Tsaidam. It would, therefore, appear that 
 tracts analogous to the Bhabar and Tarai of Kumaon surround the 
 entire Himalaya-Tibetan mass, and that they vary in character accord- 
 ing to local influences. 
 
 Hodgson attributes the distinctive character of the Bhabar, as a 
 © 
 
 Cause Of the deposit : whole, “ to the vast mass of diluvial detritus 
 Hodgson’s oceanic theory. w hicli was shot from the mountains upon the 
 
 plains, like gravel from a cart, at some great geological epoch, and 
 which has been, since its deposit, variously and often abraded both 
 in degree and direction by oceanic and, in a far less degree, by 
 ordinary floods.” Another writer considers that this theory of 
 Hodgson’s appears to be a reasonable explanation of the existence 
 of these great beds of shingle, sand, and boulder all along the foot 
 of the mountains. It is argued that no rivers can have laid out such 
 a vast deposit, and we can only conclude that we see here the limits 
 of an ancient ocean that once washed the base of the Himalaya. The 
 boulders and shingle are spread out only for a distance of ten or 
 fifteen miles from the mountains from which they are derived, while- 
 the finer particles of sand and clay are carried much further. Great 
 variations in the depth and breadth of the deposit occur, due, in a 
 great measure, to local causes. One which apparently has had a 
 great influence is the existence or otherwise of the Siwalik range-. 
 Where there was no sandstone range to intervene between the moun- 
 tains and the plains and collect the detritus within their contained 
 Duns, the deposit is broader and not so thick. Where there was 
 such a barrier, it has been carried less southwards and exists in great 
 accumulations between the barrier and the mountains. Again, where 
 no range existed but only spurs sent forth, like bent arms, upon the 
 plains from the mountains, Hodgson observes that the embayed 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 89 
 
 detritus is simply deeply piled and lofty within such spurs, and thinly 
 and unequally spread without them, by reason of the action of the spurs 
 on the current. He notices, as an example of this form, the debris 
 embayed by a spur on the road to Darjiling by Pankabari, where it 
 is accumulated to several hundred feet, and where, moreover, there 
 is outside the spur a succession of terraces, apparently due to oceanic 
 forces . 1 Further, “ where, as from Gauhati to Sadiya, there was 
 not room upon the plains for the free spread and deposit of the 
 detritus owing to large and rapid rivers and to other chains both 
 proximate and parallel to the Himalaya, the phenomena, created 
 elsewhere by the more or less unrestricted spread of the Himalayan 
 detritus over the plains, would necessarily be- faintly, if at all, trace- 
 able. Lastly, if at the time of the descent of the debris, there existed 
 a great dip in the Gangetic plain from north-west to south-east, the 
 lithologic character, as well as the distribution, of the debris, would 
 be materially affected thereby, for the subsiding oceanic current 
 would have a set from the former to the latter quarter and would 
 continue to lash the gravel into sand and here to deposit both in a 
 series of terraces, there perhaps utterly to displace both in the latter 
 quarter long after the former had emerged from the waves.” 
 
 Fluviatile theory. 
 
 The oceanic theory of Hodgson is not accepted by the majority 
 
 of professed geologists. Mr. W. Blandford 
 writes : 2 — u There is absolutely no proof of 
 any sort or kind that the whole Indo-Gangetic plain has at any 
 time been a marine area ; but there is equally no proof that it has 
 not. It has been shown that in eocene times the sea occupied the 
 Indus valley as far as the foot of the Himalaya, and extended 
 along what is now the base of the mountains, as far east as Ku- 
 
 maon ; and also that marine conditions prevailed to the north-west 
 throughout a great part of the tract now occupied by the Asam 
 range ; but it was also pointed out- that, in the area between Ivu- 
 maon and the Garo hills, no trace of marine formations had been 
 found. Yet it is difficult to understand, if the Gangetic plain was 
 a; sea-basin, why no marine beds occur. It is true that the north- 
 ern border of the plain, throughout the most important part of the 
 
 1 The oldest advocate of the oceanic theory is Wilford (in As. Res., VIII., 
 292). who thus accounts for several statements made by the Pauranik geographers,, 
 and particulary the story of Sagara. He, however, acknowledges that the existing - 
 soil of the Gangetic plain, so far as is known, was due to fluviatile. action. 
 2 Manual of Geology of India, p. lx., 393. 
 
 12 
 
00 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 intervening space in Nepal, is, unfortunately, inaccessible to Euro- 
 peans ; but still, if the Gangetic plain in any way corresponds to 
 an eocene sea, as the Indus plain doubtless does, why are no traces 
 of marine beds found to the south of the valley on the margin of the 
 peninsular area, as they are in the desert to the east of the Indus ? 
 In the Brahmaputra plain, also, no marine deposits of tertiary age 
 are found ; in the plain itself only fluviatile deposits have been 
 detected and the marine, eocene, and miocene beds are confined to 
 the southern slope of the range forming the southern watershed of 
 the valley.” Mr. Blandford considers the post-tertiary formation 
 of these proAnnces to be clearly river deposits. The latter tertiary 
 formations belonging to the Siwalik series contain reptilia and 
 mollusca, but not a single marine shell. “ It is impossible to tell 
 what beds may be concealed below the Indo-Gangetic alluvium, 
 and marine strata may exist to an enormous extent without appear- 
 ing at the surface ; it is also unquestionable that the amount of 
 information hitherto derived from borings is very small indeed, but 
 so far as that information extends, and so far as the lower strata of 
 the alluvial plain have been exposed in the beds of rivers, not a 
 single occurrence of a marine shell has ever been observed, nor is 
 there such a change in the deposits as would render it probable 
 that the underlying stratra are marine * * . The only evidence 
 
 known in favour of marine conditions having prevailed durino- the 
 deposition of any portion of the Gangetic alluvium is the occur- 
 rence of brine springs at considerable depths in a few localities. 
 These springs, however, are not numferous, and, without additional 
 evidence, it is impossible to look upon them as proofs of marine 
 deposits. At the same time it is by no means impossible that the 
 sea occupied portions of Sind and Bengal long after the plains of 
 Upper India were dry land.” On the whole, Mr. Blandford thinks 
 that the oceanic theory wants further support ; that the fluviatile 
 theory is the only one that fits in with the present state of our 
 knowledge, and that the depression of the Gangetic plain is of con- 
 temporaneous origin with the disturbance and contortion of the 
 Himalayan ranges, and that the physical features of the two areas 
 are closely connected. No important borings have ever been made 
 in these provinces, and nothing has ever been discovered so far as 
 we are aware, to show that the older theory is the correct one. The 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 91 
 
 newer theory is further supported by the discovery of the buried 
 town of Behat in the Saharanpur district, some seventeen feet below 
 the present level of the country and containing coins of the com- 
 mencement of the Christian era, thus showing what can be effected 
 by fluvial action in eighteen centuries. 
 
 We have already seen that the distinctive features of the Tarai 
 
 are not found west of the Phfka river, if we 
 
 Tarai. 
 
 except a small tract on the left bank of the 
 Ramganga, the condition of which, however, is probably due to de- 
 fective drainage in that particular part, and might occur in any other 
 place. The existence, therefore, of the Tarai as a distinctive feature 
 must be due to local causes capable of explanation, but the imperfect 
 nature of our knowledge will only allow us to guess at them. Her- 
 bert 1 described the Tarai as “ defined in its southern boundary by 
 a rise or step which runs parallel to the common boundary of moun- 
 tain and plain land.” He observes the height is variable, occasion- 
 ally as much as thirty feet and sometimes sudden and steep. Modem 
 research can discover no well-defined boundary beyond the chain of 
 springs which sometimes approach within a couple of miles of the 
 foot of the hills and sometimes are separated from them by a belt 
 fifteen miles wide. In no case is there any such rise or step as des- 
 cribed. Hodgson 2 also accepted the existence of a longitudinal 
 trough running parallel to the Himalaya as a characteristic of the 
 Tarai, which he held to be a natural depression in the plain, and thus 
 accounted for its peculiarities. This theory, however, is opposed to 
 the results obtained by levelling operations and appears to be based 
 on an entirely erroneous idea, the fact being that the drainage of the 
 higher country, beyond which has been lost in the absorbent strata 
 of the Bhabar, here breaks out again in a line of copious springs 
 which collect into swamps in the Tarai. This feature has also some- 
 what plausibly been accounted for 3 by the existence of an impervi- 
 ous stratum below the absorbent boulder detritus, and as the latter 
 gradually thins out the finer and less permeable silt underlying it 
 approaches nearer, and eventually reaches the surface, bringing with 
 it the water that has been absorbed by the shingle talus and has 
 been retained by the impervious silt. 
 
 1 l. c„ art. 73. 2 l. c., p. 788. 
 
 p. 184. 
 
 3 Batten in Kuxnaun Reports, 
 
9:2 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTEICTS 
 
 (a) Point of 7e-appearance of water. | (b) Point of disappearance of water. 
 
 Although this explanation seems reasonable so far as it goes, it 
 must be remembered that the swampy Tarai extends only from the 
 Plhka to the Tista, and we must, therefore, look for some peculiarity in 
 this part of the plain which does not exist elsewhere, by which we may 
 account for the existence of swamps exclusively in this particular locality. 
 
 In a recent note, Mr. Lawder gives the following section of the 
 Bhabar and Tarai — 
 
 His experience of this tract has led him to consider that, what- 
 ever may be the nature of the underlying formation, the surface 
 beds are solely due to fluvial action. The mountain torrents along 
 the foot of the Kumaon hills bring down every year a vast amount 
 of debris which is spread out over the surface now on one side of 
 their previous course and again on the other. This irregular depo- 
 sition itself compels the torrents to change their beds from place to 
 place until, as now obtains, the points where they debouche from 
 the hills are marked by more or less irregular, great, fan-shaped 
 boulder and gravel deposits. The clayey or semi-soluble particles 
 are necessarily carried farthest and are readily deposited not only 
 where there is a check in the slope, but where the current is impeded 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 93 
 
 by the tortuous nature of the channel which itself naturally assumes 
 that form under these conditions. Here, during the rains, the 
 streams saturated with clayey silt, overflow their banks, form new 
 channels, fill up old ones, and create the Tarai. Above this deposit 
 of clay we find one of clay combined with sand, in which, how- 
 ever, the latter predominates. From this bed issues the line of 
 Tarai springs that flow uninterruptedly throughout the year, and its 
 margin marks the northern boundary of the Tarai. Above we meet 
 beds of sand and gravel or gravel and boulders as we approach 
 nearer to the hills. A longitudinal section taken at the top of the 
 Bhabar (Fig. 2 B.) will show that the hill torrents in the upper 
 portions of their course run along a ridge formed by the debris 
 transported by themselves, whilst a similar section of the Tarai (Fig. 
 2 C.) would show that, as a rule, the river channels are found in 
 depressions below the general level of the country. The geological 
 section (Fig. 2 A.) shows the gradients of the present ground sur- 
 face on the road between Bareilly and Ranibagh, and from them it 
 will appear that in the boulder region deposition takes place at a 
 slope of sixty-six feet to the mile, whilst the clay is not deposited 
 until the descent falls to about eight feet in the mile. It may fairly 
 be assumed that these are the usual angles of deposition of the ma- 
 terials, and that they have obtained since the degradation of the 
 lower hills and the resulting deposition below them commenced. 
 If so, a series of proportionate curved lines running almost parallel 
 to the present ground surface may be taken to represent the ground 
 surface of succeeding periods, and such portions of these lines as 
 may be similarly inclined with the present Tai’ai portion ( i.e ., at the 
 same angle with the horizon) will evidently represent the Tarai or 
 clay deposit as it then existed. A line intersecting all these beds at 
 the several points of junction of the ‘ clay’ with the ‘ sand and clay’ 
 will represent the present impermeable bottom of the Bhabar basin 
 and account for the line of springs upon the surface where the stra- 
 tum of sand and clay crops out. The upper boulder and gravel beds 
 permit of the filtration of water freely through them to the clay, at 
 the same time acting as a capillary reservoir to keep up the dry 
 weather supply to the springs below. 
 
 We have further evidence in support of this theory in the fact 
 that the Tarai proper does not extend westwards of the Pliika river. 
 
94 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Between the Phika and the Sarda there are no Duns, for the Kota 
 Dun has its southern boundary broken through by rivers, and along 
 the entire tract numerous torrents find their way directly to the 
 fiat country below. The proximity of these torrents to each other 
 causes the accumulation of debris to exhibit a continuous appear- 
 ance which seems to have suggested the theory of a marine origin. 
 To the west of the Phika river, the drainage of the lower hills is 
 carried oft' mainly by streams which collect the drainage within the 
 Sub-Himalayan range and seek the plains in one well-defined chan- 
 nel. The Ramganga is the great arterial drainage channel fol- 
 lower Garhwal, and between it and the Ganges, the only consider- 
 able stream is the Ivhoh, which has a small strip of Bhabar below it. 
 In eastern Kumaon the Ladhiya serves a similar purpose, and where 
 in its course towards the Kali it approaches the plains and does not 
 allow of any considerable stream from the southern face of the outer 
 range, both Bhabar and Tarai are narrow, and as this influence of 
 the Ladhiya on the east and the Ramganga on the west decreases 
 the Bhabar and Tarai increase and eventually attain their maximum 
 breadth where that influence is least felt. Where rivers discharge 
 large volumes of water like the Ganges and the Sarda, and in a lesser 
 degree the Ramganga and Kosi, the velocity at their debouches 
 from the mountains is much less than that of the minor torrents, 
 owing to their having cut back and more deeply their channels 
 within the hills, so that only the lighter particles of eroded matter 
 are carried onwards, whilst the boulders are left behind at their 
 natural point of deposition. Hence, near these larger rivers it 
 curiously happens that the width of the Bhabar and Tarai con- 
 tracts in a certain ratio and in the case of the Ganges disap- 
 pears. 
 
 This explanation is supported by the results obtained during 
 the contour survey of the Tarai. 1 The second diagram 2 (Fig. 3) 
 shows a portion of the country between the Dhora river and the 
 Bhuta stream, taken from the survey maps, and will illustrate the 
 intricate nature of the levelling operations, and show why in some 
 
 1 See Proceedings, N.-W. P., P. W. Department, May 31, 1864; July, 1869; 
 February, 1872. 2 From the Rohilkhand remodelled canals’ contour map of 
 
 a portion of the Tar&i surveyed in 1865-67 by Captains Thomason and F. Brown 
 and Lieutenant Bisset. An examination of the records of this survey shows that 
 what is stated regarding the portion noticed here is true also of the entire tract 
 between the Phika and the Sarda. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 95 
 
 places the streams double back on their original direction and 
 exhibit the tortuous courses so characteristic of this tract : — 
 
96 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICT 
 
 It will also be observed that there is a sudden check in the slope 
 where the Tarai commences ; to the north in the Bhabar the slope 
 is from sixty to a hundred feet in the mile, and in the Tarai it 
 falls to about ten feet. These are the adequate causes of the 
 existence of swamps, and though the neglect of artificial obstructions 
 made for the purpose of utilising the water for irrigation may 
 doubtless aggravate the natural defects of drainage, it would 
 probably produce no effect whatever were it not for the peculiar 
 physical conditions that exist here. To the west between the Indus 
 and the Ganges, the great arterial drainage lines collect within the 
 hills and run off directly from them, the general fall of the surface 
 receiving no such check as is found under Kumaon. The same is 
 true of the country to the east along the head of the Bay of Bengal, 
 and in the narrow valley of Asam, the Brahmaputra runs in a deep 
 bed at right angles to the natural course of the streams from the 
 hills, and thus forms a perfect system of cross-drainage that dons 
 not allow of the formation of swamps. 
 
 The Siwaliks appear to have a more or less definite existence 
 
 along the whole of the Himalaya from the 
 Indus to the Brahmaputra, presenting modi- 
 fications of the same general features along the entire line. To the 
 eastward of the Tfsta they are wanting locally, a fact which it has- 
 been suggested is due to denudation as in the case of the partially 
 obliterated barrier to the south of the Kota Dun. As the Siwaliks 
 will be noticed hereafter in the chapter on the geology of Kumaon, 
 we need not describe them here . 1 Between the Jumna and the 
 Sarda they are found as the southern boundaries of valleys as far 
 eastwards as the Kiln'd river, and thence onwards they almost 
 coalesce with the outer range of the lower Himalaya. 
 
 Of the Duns or valleys, between the Siwaliks and the Himalaya, 
 
 that known as ‘ the Dun ’ or Dehra Dun, 
 from the town of Dehra, is not only the most 
 remarkable but the best known. Since the physical geography of 
 this tract will be considered in more detail hereafter, in the notice 
 of the Dehra Dun district, it will be sufficient for our purpose here 
 to note that the Dun, a little to the west of the town of Dehra, is 
 
 1 See also Chaps. XXII.-IV. of the ‘Manual of the Geology of India. ’ and 
 Gaz., II., IG. 
 
 Siwaliks. 
 
 Duns. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 97 
 
 divided by a ridge that serves as a water-parting between the Asan, 
 a tributary of the Jumna on the west, and the Suswa, a feeder of 
 the Ganges on the east. The tracts drained by these rivers are 
 known respectively as the western and eastern Duns. The two 
 taken together have a length of about forty-five miles and an aver- 
 age breadth of eleven miles. The east end of the Dehra base line 
 of the Great Trigonometrical Survey on the extremity of one of the 
 spurs of the Gliati range, about one mile west of Mahobawala, is 
 1,9 57-65 feet above the level of the sea : Mahobawala itself is 2,096-56 
 feet and Dehra is 2,323 feet. The junction of the Suswa and the 
 Ganges is little more than 1,000 feet above the level of the sea, 
 giving a considerable fall for that stream between Dehra and the 
 Ganges. A well sunk by Mr. Shore, when Administrator of the 
 Dun, attained a depth of 221 feet before a plentiful supply of water 
 was met with, and even at that depth the nature of the deposit was 
 the same as at the surface. 1 The greatest thickness of the deposit 
 is observed near the central ridge. It thins out to the west and 
 east along the course of the Asan and the Suswa, and, according to 
 Herbert, may be observed in the beds of the Jumna and Ganges 
 resting on sandstone. Next, on the west, comes the Kayarda Dun, 
 
 1 The following table shows the character of the stratum, and is reproduced here 
 from Mr. Shore’s notes in the Dehra archives compared with Herbert’s record as 
 one of the few notices of this character that we possess. 
 
 Feet. 
 
 Total. 
 
 Soil. 
 
 Feet. 
 
 Co 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 Soil. 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 Fine black mould, few stones. 
 
 9 
 
 158 
 
 Sand, larger pieces of conglom- 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 Reddish earth with gravel. 
 
 
 
 erate. 
 
 9 
 
 18 
 
 Sand, gravel, large stones. 
 
 4 
 
 162 
 
 Do., enormous stones 
 
 2 
 
 20 
 
 Do., with reddish clay. 
 
 6 
 
 168 
 
 Conglomerate and gravel. 
 
 3 
 
 23 
 
 Stiff reddish clay. 
 
 3 
 
 171 
 
 Sand, gravel, and conglomerate. 
 
 8 
 
 31 
 
 Do., yellow clay. 
 
 3 
 
 174 
 
 Blocks of conglomerate. 
 
 3* 
 
 34i 
 
 Sand, gravel, little red clay. 
 
 3| 
 
 177| 
 
 Sand, gravel, conglomerate. 
 
 14 
 
 36 
 
 Stiff reddish clay. 
 
 4| 
 
 182 
 
 Do., gravel. 
 
 2 
 
 38 
 
 Sand and gravel. 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 1824 
 
 Conglomerate. 
 
 22 
 
 60 
 
 Stiff red clay. 
 
 2 3 
 
 185 
 
 Sand and clay. 
 
 2 
 
 62 
 
 Clay, sand and gravel. 
 
 13 i 
 
 2.94 
 
 Loose sand and gravel and large 
 
 16 
 
 78 
 
 Sand and gravel. 
 
 
 
 blocks conglomerate. 
 
 12 
 
 90 
 
 Stiff yellow clay with little 
 
 5 
 
 209 
 
 Sand, gravel, very moist. 
 
 
 
 sand. 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 2094 
 
 Conglomerate, over half. 
 
 35 
 
 125 
 
 Sand, gravel, few round stones. 
 
 If 
 
 211 
 
 Red clay. 
 
 6 
 
 131 
 
 Sand, large conglomerate blocks. 
 
 7 
 
 218 
 
 Sand and gravel. 
 
 13 
 
 144 
 
 Do., gravel, stones, 
 
 34 
 
 2214 
 
 Brackish clay with angular frag- 
 
 5 
 
 149 
 
 Do., larger stones. 
 
 
 
 ments of clay slate. 
 
 Another well in Dehra gives water at a depth of 88 feet from the surface, and 
 one at Sati-bagh at 75 feet. There are only twenty-nine wells in the whole valley, 
 and many of these are at favourable places near rivers, so that the difficulty of 
 procuring water by this means is common to the whole Dun. Herbert records the 
 
 13 
 
98 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 some six miles broad and twenty-five miles long, to the water-part- 
 ing between the Jumna and the Kaggar systems. Beyond it w r e 
 have the Pinjor Dun, which has in parts a breadth of six miles and 
 a length of about thirty miles. The Siwaliks here are neither so 
 broad nor so high as to the south of the Dehra Dun. The Pinjor 
 Dun is divided into two parts, the eastern and western Duns, by a 
 ridge similar to that observed in the Dehra Dun, and which attains 
 an elevation of 2,402 feet 1 above the level of the sea. To the east, 
 the drainage flows into the Kaggar, and to the "west into a tributary 
 of the Satlaj. Mansi Devi, a temjfle in the plains just within the 
 Dun, has an elevation of 1,263 feet,, 1 giving a fall to the rivers within 
 this Dun similar to that found to exist within that of Dehra. 
 
 East of the Dehra Dun we have the Patli Dun, also divided into 
 
 Ganges to the Brahma- two parts, but by a depression, not a ridge, a 
 
 l mtl ' a - fact possibly pointing to its being a valley 
 
 of denudation. That to the west, which is drained by the Sona nadi, 
 
 has a slope eastwards parallel to the Himalaya, and is known as the 
 
 Ivotri Dun. That to the east, which is drained by the Bamganga 
 
 and has a slope to the west in the same direction, is called the Path 
 
 Dun. The two rivers meet just before their waters take a bend to 
 
 the south at an elevation of about 950 feet 3 above the level of the 
 
 sea. A few miles eastward of their confluence, the valley of the 
 
 Path Dun shows an elevation of 1,200 feet on the right bank of the 
 
 stream, and thus allows a considerable fall to the Ramganga in a 
 
 comparatively short horizontal distance. The peaks of the Siwaliks 
 
 to the south along this entire line seldom rise above 2,500 feet, 
 
 whilst the plains at their southern base average between eight and 
 
 nine hundred feet. Eurther east comes the small Kota Dun between 
 
 result of borings made by Mm In various parts of the tract along the foot of 
 the hills. At Kashipur, in a spot some twenty feet below the surface of the red 
 clay, he obtained the following results — 
 
 S>'3" superficial red clay : 1"3" green sandy clay, water : 4'6" black clay, 
 
 extremely tenacious : T6" light blue sand and abundant water. At Haldua, seven 
 miles north, nearly similar results were obtained : — S' 6" a ferruginous sandy clay or 
 loam, latterly becoming more stiff : T6" a greenish clay, becoming blackish below : 
 2 ' a bluisli-grey clay, partially sandy, not so tenacious, and quite moist. At 
 Jaspur, nine miles north-west of Kashipur, he found : — S’ surface sand, which gra- 
 dually changed to a stiff red clay : 2' a red, loose sand, damp : 2' variegated sand 
 and clay, spotted : 3' yellowish sand changing to light grey : twigs and roots were 
 found at nine feet and water at twelve feet. At Afzalgarh 6' superficial loam 
 with small nests of imperfectly formed lignite : 2'6" red sand and a quicksand : 
 4' blackish stiff clay, and 3'6" stiff clay, latterly sandy. Two other borings are 
 recorded without mentioning the locality. 
 
 1 Herbert, l. c. art 63. 2 G. T. S. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 99 
 
 Dhikuli and Kali-dhungi, much broken up by torrents, and having 
 its southern boundary cut through by the various hill streams that 
 cross it at right angles. From Naim Tal to the Sarda the sandstone 
 ridge that represents the Siwaliks is so close to the Himalaya that 
 the geologist alone can discern the connection. The Duns are here 
 reduced “ to deep longitudinal gorges and low gaps, corresponding 
 with a leading geological boundary, that between the old slaty and 
 schistose rocks of the mountains and the massive tertiary sandstones 
 of the Siwaliks.” Further east, according to Hodgson, the Duns 
 are represented by the Saliyan Mari, the Gfongtali Mari,, the Chit- 
 wan Mari, the Makwanpur Mari, and the Bijayapur Mari, all under 
 Nepal. With the exception, however, of the Dun lying on the road 
 to Kathmandu, none of these have been subjected to scientific exami- 
 nation. “ On this track,” writes Mr. Medlicott, 1 “ very complete 
 representatives are found of the two sub-Himalayan ranges and their 
 intervening dun or mart. The Churiaglniti range ' is -structurally a 
 facsimile of the original Siwaliks. At the outer base at Bichiyakoh, 
 there are some earthy rusty beds, all greatly crushed. The dip soon 
 settles down to 30° to north-north-' west, maintaining the same angle 
 steadily to> the top of the pass. This is the typical structure of these 
 detached sub-Himalayan ranges, . the flat inner half of a normal 
 anticlinal flexure. The range is about four miles wide.” Through- 
 out the Sikkim and Bhutan cludrs there is no representative of the 
 Siwalik hills' and therefore no (Vans, but in the Dikrang basin of the 
 Daphla hills. Colonel Gfodwin-Austen discovered two well-marked 
 ranges of sub-Himalayan hills with an intervening dun. We have 
 now seen that the first characteristic features met with in advancing 
 
 from the plains to the Himalaya are the Tarai, Bhabar, Siwalik range, 
 and duns or valleys, and that though not continuous and indeed occa- 
 sionally altogether absent, they are, taking the whole range, characte- 
 ristic of the relations of the Himalayan mass with the subjacent plains. 
 
 Lower Himalaya. 
 
 Crossing tlie Duns northwards towards the snows, we meet the 
 
 outer ranges of the lower Himalaya. They 
 have a general elevation of about 7,000 feet 
 above the level of the sea, while the highest summits along the line 
 reach between 8,000 and 9,000 feet. This generalisation, though 
 giving the nearest approach to accuracy that the state of our knovv- 
 
 1 Manual of Geology, p. 543, 
 
100 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 ledge permits, is only approximate, for we know very little regarding 
 the outer range between the Sarda and the Brahmaputra. There is 
 this peculiarity in Kumaon, that the outer range first crossed by the 
 traveller is of considerably higher elevation than the intermediate 
 ranges crossed between it and the outlying spurs of the great 
 snowy range itself. We have said that we hold the entire Himalaya 
 to be but the southern slope of the great Tibetan plateau ; that 
 however rugged and furrowed this slope appears, it is homogeneous 
 throughout. W e reserve for the district notices the purely geogra- 
 phical description, and will here try to answer the questions that 
 naturally arise regarding these mountains as a whole. What have 
 geologists been able to discover regarding their history and the ma- 
 terials of which they are composed, and are the causes at work 
 sufficient to produce such very varied results as are here exhibited? 
 In attempting 1 to answer these questions, we must refer to well- 
 known principles, ^ which have been found true in Europe and apply 
 with equal or even greater force to the phenomena observable in the 
 Himalaya. Without trespassing on the domain of the professed 
 geologist, we may briefly summarise the facts observed regarding 
 the Himalaya as a whole. We have seen that the outer range 
 forms a geological as well as a physical boundary under Kumaon. 
 The whole mountain mass may be divided into three great belts ► 
 First, the sub-Himalayan tertiary sandstones outside the Himalaya 
 proper of geologists, and which have a considerable development 
 west of the Jumna. To them belong the Siwaliks and the Sirmiir 
 series on which the hill sanitaria of Kasauli, Dagshai, and Subathu 
 are built. Secondly, a belt of limestone and slate forming the 
 outer range of the lower Himalaya on which the hill sanitaria of 
 Simla, Chakrata, Misuri, Landaur, and Naim Tal are situate. 
 Thirdly, the crystalline rocks with granitic intrusions that form the 
 remainder of the lower Himalayan region as well as the line of 
 snowy peaks, and across the British frontier to the north of Ku- 
 maon, the paleozoic and secondary rocks of Tibet. Thus we have 
 as the materials of the Himalaya the two great classes of rock 
 known as the stratified or bedded and the crystalline. To the 
 
 1 My acknowledgements are due to the works of Medlicott, Blandford, Tyndall, 
 and Geikie, on which the following pages are based. 2 Though known to 1 
 
 every student, a re-statement of these principles seems necessary in a work intended 
 for popular use in India. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 101 
 
 former belong the limestone, sandstones, and slates that have been 
 derived from the waste of the older rocks ; and to the latter the gra- 
 nite, Gneiss, and schists which occur in masses. 
 
 The core or nucleus of all great mountain masses is formed of 
 Materials of the Hima- crystalline rocks, while the stratified rocks 
 la y a - enter largely into the composition of the 
 
 lower subordinate ranges. This is true of the Himalaya, Alps, 
 Pyrenees, Pocky Mountains, and indeed of all the great mountain sys- 
 tems. A glance at the geological map given hereafter will show 
 more clearly than any description the arrangement of these rocks 
 in Kumaon. One of the fundamental principles of geology is that 
 the sites of all the great mountain masses of the world at one time 
 formed a part of the bottom of the sea. K2, Nanda Devi and 
 Mount Everest, the last of which exceeds a height of 29,000 feet 
 above the level of the sea, at one time apparently formed parts of 
 the bed of an ancient ocean. For the crystalline rocks have arisen 
 either from the gradual consolidation of materials which had been 
 fused deep within the crust of the earth or from the influence of 
 subterranean water combined with the earth’s internal heat, out of 
 earlier sediments such as sea-mud and sea-sand, which in the course 
 of time had sunk down and been covered by many thousands of feet 
 of later deposits. 1 Geologists tell us 2 that while no important move- 
 ments, except small and partial changes of elevation, can be traced 
 in the peninsular formations of India, the whole of the gigantic 
 forces, to which the contortion and folding of the Himalaya and the 
 other extra-peninsular mountains are due, must have been exercised 
 since eocene times. The sub-Himalayan beds were deposited upon 
 uncontorted paleozoic rocks ; and although a part of the Himalayan 
 area may have then been land, the direction of the ranges is clearly 
 due to post-eocene disturbance. It has also been shown that the 
 movement has been distributed over the tertiary, post-tertiary, and 
 pleistocene periods. It has been suggested that upheaval still goes 1 
 on, as earthquakes are of common occurrence along the line of the 
 Himalaya and as far westwards as Kabul. Three distinct shocks were 
 felt at Kami Tal in April, 1880, and Srinagar in Garhwal was almost 
 destroyed by a great earthquake in 1803. A recent traveller, 
 
 1 Professor Geikie on * Mountain architecture.’ 2 Manual of the Geology 
 
 of India, Ivi. 
 
102 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 M. Severtsof, attributes the contraction of the great Kara-kul lake on 
 the western Pamir to a similar cause, and says that the connection 
 of the Tian-shan with the Pamir is due to an upheaval which geo- 
 logically is of recent date and is still progressing. At the end of 
 the cretaceous period and at the beginning of the tertiary period, 
 the Tian-shan was separated from the Pamir by a strait with rocky 
 islands, the marine deposits of which are found beyond the Tuz- 
 Ashu pass. It is startling to the uninitiated to be told that 
 the mighty mass of the Himalaya, as it now appears, is a forma- 
 tion younger than the comparatively insignificant hills of the Dak- 
 hin (Deccan) and Central India. The same, however, is said of 
 the Alps, Pyrenees, Andes, and Rocky Mountains, all of which 
 received their chief upheaval in tertiary times. 
 
 According to Mr. Blandford it is probable that the crystalline 
 
 „ . , axis of the western Himalaya which appa- 
 
 Locene period. _ ^ 1 A 
 
 rently terminates in the Dhauladhar peak, 
 
 the western extremity of the snowy range seen from Simla, coin- 
 cides with the shore of the ancient paleozoic continent of which 
 the Indian peninsula formed a portion. If this be a correct view, 
 the cis-Himalayan paleozoic rocks are in a great part of fresh water 
 origin, whilst the marine paleozoic formations are found through- 
 out the extreme north of the Panjab, Kashmir, and the neighbour- 
 ing countries north of the Dhauladhar and crystalline axis. In 
 eocene times, the peninsula of India was part of a great continent 
 probably united with Africa. To the east was a great sea extend- 
 ing up the Asam valley along the southern base of the (Taro hills 
 and thence southward throughout a considerable area west of the 
 Irawadi in Banna. There was another sea to the north-west cover- 
 ing a great part, if not the whole, of Persia, Baluchistan, the Indus 
 plain, and extending as far north-east as Grarhwal, and an arm of 
 this sea extended up the Indus valley into Ladak. The Himalaya 
 and perhaps Tibet, wholly or in part, were raised above the sea, but 
 there is no evidence to show that they had then attained any un- 
 usual elevation. In later eocene times, the Himalaya had risen 
 sufficiently to send back the sea boundary to the north of the Panjab, 
 and in miocene times, the marine area was still further contracted. 
 The existence of a sea in these places is attested by the pre- 
 sence of marine deposits and shells, and this discovery clearly shows 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 103 
 
 that not only did the sites in which they occur once form the bot- 
 tom of a sea but that the difference in height now observed between 
 them and the level of the sea must be greatly added to in order to 
 arrive at the true measure of the upheaval that has since occurred. 
 The work of denudation that continually goes on shows us that the 
 present summits of the mountains must in the course of time have 
 lost a considerable portion of their substance, and in the next place 
 we cannot suppose that the marine shells now found lay exactly at 
 the sea level. The bed of the great sea may also have been subject 
 to successive periods of depression and elevation before the eocene 
 period without greatly altering its height. Professor Geikie 1 tells 
 us what the forces are to which these marvellous results are due : — 
 “The upheaval of the sea floor into land seems to have been due to 
 a cause which has been going on from the earliest geological times 
 and which is still in progress. It is believed that originally this 
 planet possessed an enormously high temperature ; that, indeed, it 
 was thrown off from its parent sun with a temperature probably 
 even much fiercer than that of the sun at present ; and that it has 
 since been gradually cooling and contracting. The external crust 
 of the earth, varying greatly in structure and otherwise, has yielded 
 unequally to the strain of contraction. One result of this process 
 has been the elevation of portions here and there into long ridges, 
 forming the continental masses and mountain chains. You may 
 illustrate this production of lines of elevation along a generally 
 subsiding surface by what takes place when an apple dries. Its 
 surface contracts and wrinkles, most of the skin sinking inwards, 
 but, at the same time, inequally and leaving intermediate ridges to 
 stand up. So in the gradual contraction of our planet, wrinkles have 
 arisen on its surface. It is these wrinkles which form our mountain 
 chains. But such a subsidence of the crust could not have taken 
 place without a very great deal of folding of the rocks. Descending 
 nearer to the earth’s centre, the various layers of the crust had a less 
 diameter to fill. They could only accommodate themselves to their new 
 position by being crumpled up so as to occupy less space, or by being 
 cracked across so as to allow some parts to be pushed above others.” 
 We find that both these results have been produced, and the records 
 of the Indian Geological Survey teem with illustrations of them. 
 
104 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 One other fact is noticed, by the same writer, in connection with 
 Mode of mountain forma- the crumpling up of the mountains, and that 
 tion - is that this process has been the means of 
 
 bringing up the crystalline rocks. “ Before the time of the crump- 
 ling, the whole future mountain area was covered with one continuous 
 sheet of marine strata. But as the mountain chain began to form, 
 the central portions came to be more and more compressed, 
 puckered, and crystalline, some parts being squeezed up, whilst 
 intrusive masses and veins of granite and other crystalline rocks 
 were injected amongst the intensely altered strata along the central 
 nucleus or core. It was during this process, doubtless, that the 
 crystallisation of the gneisses and schists took place, w'hen they 
 passed from their original character of fragmentary (bedded) rocks 
 and assumed the peculiar crystalline texture which they now present.” 
 We have already noticed that there have been successive upheavals 
 of the Himalayan mass through the tertiary and post-tertiary and 
 even the pleistocene periods, and the effect of these upheavals on 
 the form of the mountain ranges must have been considerable. 
 Supposing, with Professor Gfeikie, that a whole mass of sedimentary 
 rocks has been upheaved into land as a mountain chain, we find 
 that “on the outskirts of this elevated area, sedimentary deposits 
 will continue to accumulate in the sea. If in the course of the slow 
 secular contraction of the planet the upraised tract subsides, a new 
 set of strata will be laid down upon the upturned edges of the older 
 rocks. It is evident that in every junction of this kind, some 
 considerable interval must have elapsed between the formation of 
 the older series of rocks A (Fig* 4.) and the newer series B. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Section of a mountain chain showing three epochs of upheaval (Geikie). 
 
 “In the course of time, the region having once yielded to the 
 strain from terrestrial contraction will probably yield again, and a 
 new upheaval will take place. The series B will now be raised up 
 together with A, and another series C will be laid down in turn 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 10& 
 
 upon its edges. Subsequently, the same fate will befall the group 
 C. These three sets of differently inclined strata would fix for us 
 three successive periods of upheaval.” This simple explanation 
 shows how very varying must be the results of successive periods 
 of depression and upheaval, and especially when, as in the case of 
 the Himalaya, such an immense area has been subject to disturbance. 
 W e have now seen that the primary factor in mountain architecture 
 are the great changes in the earth’s crust by which mountains 
 have been formed, and the bedded deposits have become rocks, 
 and eventually, as the process of upheaval went on, have been 
 crumpled, folded, crystallised, and fractured. In this process, late- 
 ral pressure has been the chief agent, and this has been exerted 
 simultaneously from different sides in the case of the Himalaya, at 
 least in the pleistocene period. No better examples can be given 
 than those enumerated by Mr. Blandford as characteristic of the 
 western area. Here we have amongst the mountain ridges that 
 encircle the Indus plain and comprise pliocene beds, “ranges run- 
 ning north and south such as the Khirthar and Sulaiman; east 
 and west as the Mari and Bliugti and the Afridi hills ; north-west 
 and south-east as the Pir Panjal ; north-east and south-west as the 
 eastern Salt Range and Kharian hills ; and many intermediate 
 directions may also be traced, independently of curved ridges.” 
 Of the extent of these lateral thrusts an example will be found to the 
 west of the Indus. Taking the Persian area and that of the Hima- 
 laya and Tibet, “ the mountain ranges fall roughly into two great 
 curves convex to the southward ; but the deeper western curve has 
 produced the smaller mountain ranges. That a gigantic lateral 
 movement has taken place in the apex of the western curve is, 
 however, shown by the fact that for nearly 150 miles between 
 Gwadar and Jalk in Baluchistan, the track traverses beds, all appa- 
 rently of tertiary age, at right angles to their strike and that all 
 these beds are vertical or nearly so. The contraction in breadth, or 
 in other words, the lateral movement must have been great to have 
 converted horizontal formations into a series of undulations, with dips 
 so high as those seen in the Baluchistan ranges.” The terms at our 
 disposal to denote the relations of magnitude and adequately to depict 
 the changes that have been wrought during such a period are utterly 
 insufficient to convey a correct idea of what has taken place. Perhaps 
 
 14 
 
106 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Mountain sculpture. 
 
 Ice-weclges. 
 
 Professor Geikie’s simile of the dried apple is as far as we can go with- 
 out entering into scientific details that belong to the professed geologist. 
 
 Only second in importance to subterranean influence in the forma- 
 tion of mountains are the sub-aerial tools 
 of the great sculptor, the different forms of 
 water, ice-wedges, glaciers, snow, rain, and rivers . 1 It is impossible 
 to say what may have been the appearance of the mountain ranges 
 when first formed, but we have every reason to believe that usually 
 the process was gradual and that at once the denuding influence of 
 the different forms of water came into play. Nature from the time 
 the first atmosphere existed has ever been at work tracing lines 
 which gradually work into gorges, ravines, and valleys, weathering- 
 
 peaks and rounding ridges and producing 
 those alterations in the general appearance 
 of the mountains that on a very small scale are familiar to most of 
 us in a neglected hill-station. Both crystalline and bedded rocks 
 abound in joints or divisional planes by which they are separable 
 into blocks and no small part of nature’s work in sculpturing moun- 
 tains is thus rendered possible. Into these crevices runs the melted 
 snow or rain, and there congeals and again expands, forcing the 
 blocks asunder by slow degrees. The sun’s rays turn the ice into 
 water during the day, to penetrate still further and again congeal 
 during the night, and this ceaseless process continued for many 
 centuries shows its effect in the form of the mountains composed of 
 even the hardest rocks. These are covered with massive boulders 
 quarried by nature’s ice-wedges in this simple fashion. Where the 
 dislocation takes place near the edge of a weathered cliff, the mass 
 of ruin caused by the toppling over of huge blocks is often gigantic. 
 Gerard describes the upper portion of Purgial (Lio Porgyul) as the 
 “wreck of some towering peak burst asunder by severe frost.” Fraser 
 tells us that the summits near Gangotri and Jamnotri are a mere con- 
 fused mass of huge crumbling boulders, and the same description 
 applies to nearly all the peaks that have been visited by travellers. 
 
 We have next to notice snow in the form of avalanches as one 
 
 of the tools employed in mountain sculpture. 
 The winter snow, when exposed to the summer 
 Professor Tyndall's and Professor 
 
 Avalanches. 
 
 1 Acknowledgment is due here to 
 A.Gcikie's mountain architecture. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 107 
 
 sun and influenced also by the heat of the earth itself, is often de- 
 tached in masses sufficient to cause great natural disturbances. It 
 has been suggested that the change in the bed of the Satlaj in the 
 plains to its present one has been produced by an avalanche in its upper 
 course having dammed up the river. In time the barrier gave way 
 and sent down an immense flood to the plains, sufficient to carve out a 
 more direct course which the river itself has since continued to 
 occupy. 
 
 It is, however, to the action of snow in the form of glaciers that 
 
 the more important results are due. These 
 great engines of denudation have the form 
 of a solid river ever progressing downwards through the valleys 
 until the point is reached where the rate of motion is balanced 
 by the melting of the ice. In the figure of the Pindari glacier, 
 given hereafter, it will be seen that the glacier fills the bed of the 
 upper valley and is fed by the drainage of the snow-covered slopes 
 on either side. Its face is discoloured with mud and stones and is 
 utterly unlike one’s preconceived idea of masses of ice. Along the 
 sides and edges, too, are rows of earth, stones, and boulders trans- 
 ported and deposited in order by the ice-stream. These deposits are 
 called moraines. Much of the material transported falls down into 
 the crevices and gets between the bottom of the glacier and the rocky 
 bed along which it moves, and which is thus subjected to a grinding 
 process that reduces even the hardest rocks to powder. This fact 
 accounts for the turbid character of glacier streams, especially near 
 their source. The influence of glaciers, therefore, is two-fold, firstly 
 in transporting materials and secondly in reducing them to mud or 
 sand. The combined result is often seen in the mass of detritus 
 heaped up towards the end ot a glacier called a terminal moraine, 
 and in the striated and smoothed appearance of the rocks that have 
 been subjected to glacial action. As will be seen hereafter, there 
 is sufficient evidence of a great extension of glacial action in 
 former times that must have had a very important influence on the 
 form of the mountains. Cunningham records three gieat inunda- 
 tions of the Indus due to the bursting of glaciers in the upper por- 
 tions of its course. These had dammed up the river bed and 
 eventually gave way, sending a flood down the channel which in 
 the cataclysm of June, 1841, appeared as a wall of water some 
 
108 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 thirty feet high, destroying every thing that came within its 
 reach . 1 
 
 Rain has had even a more constant and penetrating influence 
 
 on the mountain masses than any of the pre- 
 Bain. J 
 
 ceding forms, for it has furnished the ma- 
 terials from which the ice has been formed and is more universal in 
 its operations. The salts and acids contained in it have also had a 
 peculiar action of their own. Rain while falling through the air 
 takes up some portion of carbonic acid and when it reaches a rock 
 dissolves and carries away certain portions of its texture. The 
 result of this process is that not only is the rock reduced in bulk by 
 chemical action but what remains also becomes more easily operated 
 on by the mechanical action of falling water in the next shower. 
 For illustrations of these processes take any line along the lime- 
 stone ridges about the hill sanitaria already mentioned, and it will 
 be seen how the outer crust where exposed is crumbly to the touch, 
 and has a rough sandy appearance. For those who have seen the 
 long gneissic range extending from Almora to Devi Dhura in 
 Kumaon, there could not be a better example of the influence of 
 rain or rock than is there exhibited. Along the road on each side 
 where the rock has been exposed to the weather, the outer layer is 
 removable by the hand, and at the base will be found a little heap 
 of sand that has been weathered away in course of time. Many of 
 the more loosely formed shales, especially those that contain alum, 
 speedily decompose on exposure to the atmosphere and it is on this 
 account that in the midst of rocky formations in the Himalaya it is 
 so often very difficult to obtain good building stone. Another 
 familiar example of the influence of the rain-fall on the rocks will 
 be seen in the stones of old buildings throughout the hills. Where 
 protected from the weather their surface exhibits the faintest trace 
 of the graver s tool intact, but where exposed they are worn and 
 eaten into and the outer skin appears granulated and rough. This 
 waste of rock material has been in progress for centuries and has 
 produced a soil in which trees have taken root and shed their leaves 
 to pioduce by decomposition and mixture with the waste the rich 
 vegetable mould that overlies our forest-clad hills. The presence 
 of these tiees has had the further effect of retarding the removal of 
 1 Laclak, 104 : J. A. S. Ben. X. 017 : XII. 183 : XVII. 230. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 109 
 
 the newly formed soil not only by absorbing a portion of the chemi- 
 cal elements carried down by the rain-water, but also by breaking 
 the force with which the rain would otherwise fall on the soft soil. 
 Thus we find that on well wooded hills the depth of useful soil is 
 considerable and that springs are numerous and abundant. On the 
 other hand where the hills have been cleared of forests, the finer soils 
 are soon washed away by the almost tropical rain. The rocks from 
 which the soil has been formed again appear at the surface and 
 the rainfall rapidly drains off leaving no supply for springs, and if 
 the process be continued over any considerable area, cultivation 
 becomes impossible and the climate is essentially altered. What de- 
 foresting has done for Almora can be seen in its scanty rain-fall, its 
 barren slopes, and few springs, although the area affected is so small. 
 
 The action of a river in the sculpture of mountains is three-fold. 
 
 First, it has the chemical action of rain in dis- 
 solving portions of rock constituents : again, 
 it has in its mountain course the grinding power of the glacier in the 
 force with which it drives the gravel, stones, and boulders along its 
 rocky bed : and thirdly, it has the glacier function of transporting 
 material and laying them down in deposits elsewhere. In the case of 
 glaciers the denuding process is the more important, and in the case of 
 rivers the transporting function has, perhaps, more influence in mould- 
 in o- the features of the surrounding country. In the beds of many of 
 our mountain streams we can detect the action of both glaciers and 
 rivers in the striated and furrowed appearances produced by the 
 former and the rounded forms of worn pebbles due to the influence of 
 flowing water. The muddy colour of the water is due to mud or sand 
 held in suspension, and it has been estimated that in this way one six- 
 thousandth part of a foot is annually carried away from the water-shed 
 of a great river. This waste is, however, very unequally distributed, 
 being very much greater in slopes and valleys and less in plains. “We 
 may be prepared, therefore,” with Professor Geikie, “ to find that solely 
 by the continued erosion of running water, even the most recently up- 
 lieaved mountain chains have had stupendous chasms carved out of 
 their sides, and an almost incredible amount of material removed from 
 their surface.” Such has been the origin of the Scottish valleys 
 which, according to the same writer, “ have been cut out of the 
 general mass of the upraised rock. The existing mountains are 
 
no 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 what we now find them to be, because they have been left standing 
 while the valleys have been excavated among them.” Playfair in his 
 “ Illustrations of the Huttonian Theory,” as quoted by the same 
 author, writes : — u If indeed a river consisted of a single stream 
 without branches, running in a straight valley, it might be supposed 
 that some great concussion, or some powerful torrent, had opened 
 at once the channel by which its waters are conducted to the ocean; 
 but when the usual form of a river is considered, the trunk divided 
 into many branches, and then again subdivided into an infinity of 
 smaller ramifications, it becomes strongly impressed upon the mind 
 that all these channels have been cut by the waters themselves ; that 
 they have been slowly dug out by the washing and erosion of the land; 
 and that it is by the repeated touches of the same instrument that 
 this curious assemblage of lines has been engraved so deeply on the 
 surface of the globe.” In major and minor river systems the same 
 principle is observed ; the lines marking the tributaries of a stream 
 appear like the veins of a leaf all converging on the mid-rib and 
 each forming within its own area a separate main line of a smaller 
 system until the differences are inappreciable. But it may be asked 
 why, if these influences are uniform in their action, the results are 
 so varied. The answer is not far to seek and is to be found in the 
 varied character of the materials on which the aerial forces operate. 
 The southern flank of the Siwaliks below Dehra, consisting of soft 
 sandstones, are weathered by the heavy monsoon rains until they are 
 almost perpendicular. The Krol limestones give their picturesque 
 outline to the outer Himalaya, when compared with the other lower 
 ranges. The shales and slates have a character of their own, and 
 the great crystalline range itself owes its form to the rocks of which 
 it is composed. Kamet has its peculiar pyramidal shape from its cap 
 of granite, and Nanda Devi, Trisfd, and the Panch Chilli have had 
 their peaks defined by simple aerial action on their materials. Thus, 
 our mountain ranges are due in the first place to subterranean disturb- 
 ances, and in the second place, to the action of the different forms of 
 water, chemically and mechanically, on the varied materials of which 
 the rocks are composed. It is the combination of these two forces 
 that gives such varied results, and until more accurate and compre- 
 hensive information is recorded regarding their operation, it is impos- 
 sible to base our physical description on other than arbitrary grounds. ■ 
 
I 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 Geology. 1 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Position of the ground. Early observers : Herbert, Cautley, Falconer. The 
 mountain system. The sub-Himalayan zone formed of tertiary rocks. Siwaliks. 
 Post-tertiary deposits. Supposed glacial deposits. Lower Himalayan region. Simla 
 region. Sirmur formation, ltelation of Sirmur and Siwalik series, the Satlaj 
 valley. East of Simla. The Kumaon section. The Nepal section. Sikkim section. 
 Slight correspondence between the rocks of the Himalaya and of the Peninsula. 
 Frequent occurrence of carbonaceous deposits throughout the Lower Himalaya. 
 Conjectural affiliation of the Lower Himalayan sections, i he Cent] al Himalaya. 
 Strachey. Stoliekza. Western Tibet. The principal crystalline areas. Nunimu- 
 lilic deposits. Post-eocene eruptive rocks. Central gneiss. Kaslimir-Kishtwar 
 region. Central Tibet, Its granites, schists, slates, conglomerates and fossiliferous 
 
 fco- 
 
 Position of the ground. 
 
 rocks. Palaeozoic strata, Silurian, Trias, Jurassic. Fossils. Tertiary deposits, 
 called Niti fossils. General Stracliey’s conclusions. Stolickza's views. 
 
 The British Himalayan districts, which form the immediate 
 
 subject of this sketch, are themselves such 
 a small portion of the immense geological 
 region to which they belong, that we shall have to wander consider- 
 ably beyond their limits to attain some idea of their place in nature. 
 Some of the ground forms part of one of the best known, and 
 certainly the most widely known, ot our Indian rock-tor illations . 
 the Dehra Dun is pre-eminently the Dun ; and the low hills sepa- 
 ratum it from the wide Gangetic plains are the original Siwaliks, a 
 name to be found in every geological text book. The rocks ot the 
 higher hills to the north, below the snowy range, have as yet received 
 only cursory attention, being chiefly non-lossi I iterous slates and crys- 
 talline schists. On the snowy range and beyond it in Chinese territory 
 we again come upon formations ot well-established position, but ot 
 which we have little real knowledge, and are altogether dependent 
 upon the occasional observations of a few adventurous explorers. 
 
 In geology, no less than in other sciences, it is desirable to be 
 
 able to trace the stages of knowledge. Even 
 in descriptive geology this information is 
 interesting ; and for the student such illustrations are almost essen- 
 tial. Although the germinal idea of geology, that the aboriginal 
 
 i This chapter has been written by Mr. H. B. Medlieott, Superintendent of the 
 Geological Survey of India, for this volume. E. 1. A. 
 
 Early observers. 
 
112 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 superposition of sedimentary deposits is a sure indication of succes- 
 sion in time of formation, and hence that the structural relations of 
 rocks are the ultimate criterion of age, had to be conceived before 
 geology could have birth. The difficulty of applying this test, of 
 observing obscure and scattered outcrops, and of putting together 
 and discussing the features thus laboriously collected, is so great, 
 that, from the beginning, geologists have sought for, and adopted 
 more ready tests for the chronological classification of rocks. The 
 history of progress in geology is in great measure made up of the 
 failures of generalisations thus too hastily arrived at ; the total 
 breakdown of false assumptions, and the correction of errors due to 
 the forced application of partially understood principles ; to the 
 neglect of the regulating laws of structure. The science is so young 
 that its history in India affords examples of these errors. In some 
 cases our admiration of the men and the work they accomplished 
 is positively enhanced by our knowledge of the difficulties under 
 which they laboured. The names Herbert, Falconer, Cautley, and 
 Strachey call especially for mention in connection with the around 
 under notice. Cautley and Falconer will be imperishably associated 
 with the paleontological branch of geology, as having with great 
 labour brought together the unrivalled collection of fossils, the 
 description of which was partially published in the Fauna Antiqua 
 Sivalensis. Work of this kind endures, in so far as it is to a great 
 extent a record of hard facts, having each a permanent interest, 
 such as the existence of a certain fossil within a fixed rano-e of 
 
 o 
 
 strata. It is not so with facts of the first order in geology proper i 
 the announcement that such a kind of stone occurs in any particular 
 place conveys no information that can be said to have scientific 
 value ; it is only when accumulated and colligated under established 
 principles of formation that such petrographical facts come to have 
 any geological meaning. Herbert’s observations were of this order. 
 He dealt entirely with unfossiliferous rocks, and the principles under 
 which he had to arrange those observations were still to a great 
 extent artificial ; his work has therefore only an historical interest. 
 
 Captain G. H. Herbert, however, must rank in merit as well as 
 Herbert. date amongst the foremost pioneers of geo- 
 
 ffigy in India. As a man of great talent and 
 of sound and extensive scientific culture, he may stand with Captain 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 113 
 
 Newbold, who did so much for the geology of Southern India. The 
 advantage of the latter lay in the greater simplicity of the ground he 
 worked in and in his being even a few years later in the field. The 
 mineralogical survey of the Himalayan districts was one of the earliest 
 attempts at a geological map of a considerable area made officially in 
 India. The work was entrusted to Captain Herbert by the Marquis 
 of Hastings ; but it was left to private enterprise to make known the 
 results. The publication was taken up by Mr. Henry Torrens, of the 
 Bengal Civil Service, the accomplished editor and proprietor of the 
 so-called Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, which was then 
 brought out at the personal risk and responsibility of the Society’s 
 Secretary, and was really the continuation of the publication started 
 by Captain Herbert himself in 1829 with the more appropriate title 
 (under such conditions) of Gleanings in Science. The report appeared 
 as an extra number of volume XI. of the Journal for 1842, nine years 
 after the death of Captain Herbert, and seventeen years after the 
 completion of the survey. The map to illustrate the report was 
 issued with volume XIII. for 1844. It comprises the very large 
 area lying between the river Kali and Satlaj, more than 200 miles 
 in length, and from the plains to beyond the snowy peaks, a breadth 
 of 90 miles. Captain Herbert does not assume any pretensions to 
 authority. He tells us very plainly that he made up his geology for 
 
 the occasion, but it is plain, too, from his obser- 
 II is geological theories. . a , . ,, , , ,, - - 
 
 vations and reflections, that fie thoroughly 
 
 mastered his authors. His suggestions in correction of current 
 views are often very judicious, and display a truly scientific turn of 
 mind. His work, nevertheless, can only be noticed in illustration of the 
 history of Indian geology. He divides all the rocks of the mountains 
 into two great 1 primary ’ formations — one for the gneiss occupying 
 the central region, and one for the micaceous, chloritic, hornblendic, 
 and argillaceous schists, to which also hq, joins the limestones. He 
 makes a third zone of the narrow strip of “ secondary rocks, mostly, 
 if not entirely, the Newer Red, or Saliferous Sandstone.” On the 
 strength of this purely imaginary identification borings were recom- 
 mended, if not actually undertaken, along the margin of the plains, 
 to find the carboniferous formation with its coal. This notion was 
 not quite exploded by the discovery of the famous tertiary fauna in 
 a part of the rocks designated by Herbert as New Red Sandstone ; 
 
 15 
 
114 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 and by the latest writers, prior to the Geological Survey, the sand- 
 stone along the fringe of the Kumaon mountains, and now known as 
 the Nahan or lower Siwalik group, are treated as secondary. The 
 constant dip of the rocks of the southern Himalaya towards the 
 central axis, so marked a feature in their structure, was treated by 
 Herbert in a manner characteristic of the times. His three forma- 
 tions being by assumption successive in order of time, the observed 
 structure seemed to subvert this ordained relation, making the 
 younger apparently pass beneath the older, the schists beneath the 
 gneiss, and the sandstones beneath the schists. He attempted first to 
 explain this anomalous feature by faulting ; but when his cal- 
 culations seemed to demand a fault having a throw of eight miles, 
 he gave up the idea in favour of a supposition infinitely more 
 extravagant. He came to the conclusion that the apparent bed- 
 dins in each of his three series is not true stratification, due to 
 the process of deposition in water, but only pseudo-stratification, 
 produced by some process of concretionary action ; thus, for 
 the sake of a collateral issue, he cut away the very foundations of 
 the science of geology. 
 
 The work of Cautley and Falconer was the geological converse 
 
 of that attempted by Herbert. They dealt 
 Cautley and Falconer. . 
 
 entirely with one series ot rocks, and treated 
 
 them almost exclusively from the point of view of their fossil contents. 
 
 The range of their operations was limited to the low fringing hills 
 
 between the Ganges and the Satlaj. The structural features w r ere 
 
 very slightly touched upon, the strata being taken to belong to one 
 
 unbroken formation, which was recognised as of geologically recent 
 
 date, and as being distinctly made up of the debris of the Himalaya. 
 
 The following abstract list of fossils will give an idea of the extent of 
 
 their labours, and of the richness of the fauna they discovered : — * 
 
 SIWALIK FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. 
 Quadrumana. 
 
 Semnopithecus , Pithecus. 
 
 Carnivora. 
 
 Hycena, Amphicyon, Hyamarctos, Canis, Mellivora, Fells,, 
 Drepanodon, Lutra , Enhydriodon, 
 
jpRGY fj [, 
 
 S’ -- 
 
 r / ) 
 
 j/\ a 4SRMV&>.Oi€pi«J f *0« .jferv' 
 
 ■ > ii r «.. ; 4»i: i*P- •,.^V^ "oSsh- 1 ^- 
 
 ooKto/fi.oo^rj, 
 
 / rom/ 16 . 
 
 ■ ’•// V\V I A - .■>( \ . V ' 
 
 oiinViq . \ V 'l 
 
 PPM 
 
 W/////////7/A 
 
 ;<xprccn 
 
 l:" It' ■': 
 
 ' 
 
 gaBiSftaii 
 
 
 ^t^pSiS 
 
 > .zUigclyepmj/,..^, \ ' / Mgy 
 
 7 ■ sfs 
 
 StS®0®llSw 
 
 .\ 
 
 HU/w>iii(rn/ 
 
 iSfeS?? 
 
 t^ ; C 
 
 ,W 
 
 I ^JfflTspMapha 
 
 ■s^jV jihlfancLsanotyt 
 \ijti§/X 15,200 
 
 \mr« Bb^ ■ v.r,;A 
 
 JL 
 
 ;•%■• , . V- 
 
 >/U/-/'' V ^ ’ v,,,;- 1 p—*, > ' 
 
 10MgR(fe3 
 
 / 
 
 / r'J'FUWWWyfflw/ 
 
 ■^w^G^scfSdm ms s&Y?. 
 
 
 •fyih4.'6t°i 
 
 
 mmmm 
 
 
 Fatia. 1 ; 
 
 
 ^taua# 
 V J ' , ' : //f 
 
 9U^ I : / ' 
 
 . 
 
 
 «|| 
 
 1 fSlIgl 
 
 Mar-tfvv’i 
 
 opod>4 
 
 mTJo 
 
 IOOO' 
 
 Thaa\e s aa? 
 
 Sililtf 
 
 •■•‘i. - ■ 
 
 - baruliX-n) 
 
 "Roorkee. 
 
 ft Hi 
 
 a ;1,;^V^ 
 
 §£<#xfa,ooo 
 
 fr-Yfi'-'-v \ 
 
 Kotdyvcuu 
 
 fl.ZOO 
 
 flslp 
 
 S’XsSc^ £%%% : 
 
 NA.JIBA BAD 
 
 A) huiiajziiQt 
 1.800 
 
 sgasSft/l 
 
 Ǥ* 
 
 B1JN OR 
 
 CbaM cLyaS 
 
 o~j \ Ka-shipiir' 
 
 £/“> 730 
 
 Ewctr£i/| 
 
 ^ <> ^JQxoT'Qo2i\ 
 
 \s2j£WMi 
 
 MERA 
 
 NcuTwCkrruUhou 
 
 lAmrohd 
 
 ORABABAD 
 
 610 
 
 >RA mpu: 
 550 0 
 
 UL1BH1T 
 5 550 
 
 DELHI 
 
 Six*itind 
 
 REFERENCES. 
 
 upper and middle Tertiary 
 
 Lower Tertiary 
 
 Mezozoic 
 
 Talceozoic 
 
 Azoic Slates 
 
 Crystalline Schists 
 
 Gneiss and Granite 
 
 Greenstone 
 
 X; OUTLINE 
 GEOLOGICAL MAP 
 of Part of the 
 
 HIMALAYA MOUNTAINS 
 
 English Miles 
 
 2.0 30 40 
 
 NOTE 
 
 NOTE 
 
 The Crystalline Schists of the outer 
 hills have a fringing' zone of less al- 
 tered rocks, some of which have been 
 doubtfully recognised asTriassic. The 
 Schists are in part formed of the same 
 formations metamorphosed. 
 
 Reproduced, with slight corrections 
 from the map published by Captain 
 R. Strachev. R. E., in 1851 in the 
 Ii Joul-nal of the Geological Society of L 
 London. 
 
 O U D 
 
 LITHOGRAPHED IN COLORS AT THE SURVEYOR GENERAL’S OFFICE, CALCUTTA, FEBRUARY 1876, 
 For E. T. Atkinson Esq., in charge of the N. W. P. Gazetteer. 
 
OF THE WORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES.. 
 
 115 
 
 Proboscidia. 
 
 Stegodon (4 sp.), Loxodon (1 sp.), Enelephas, Mastodon (2 sp.), 
 Dinotherium (sp.). 
 
 Artiodactyla. 
 
 Hexaprotodon , Merycopotamus, Hippohyus, Sits, Chalicotherium , 
 Sivatherium, Antilope , Cervus (sp.), Camelopardalis, Camelus , Bos 
 (sp.), Hemibos, Amphibos. 
 
 Perissodactyla. 
 
 Rhinoceros (3 sp.), Antoletlierium, Equus, Hippotherium. 
 
 Reptilia. 
 
 Crocodilus, Leptorhynchus, Varanus , Colossockelys, Emys, 
 
 Trionyx, Testudo. 
 
 Undetermined species of Aves, Pisces, Mollusca and Crustacea. 
 
 It is to Captain Richard Strachey, of the Bengal Engineers, now 
 General Strachey, Member of the India Council, that we owe the 
 
 first sound attempt at a sketch of Himalayan 
 geology based upon extensive observation. 
 An abstract of his results was published in the Quarterly Journal 
 of the Geological Society of London for November, 1851, and the 
 map accompanying his paper includes about the same ground as 
 that of Herbert. A comparison of the two maps shows how great 
 an advance had been made. It is greatly to be regretted that 
 official and other business prevents General Strachey from making 
 with his own hand the few corrections and additions necessary to 
 bring his work up to date for the present publication. The annexed 
 map is little more than a reproduction of General Strachey’s, 
 and the description also of a large portion of the ground is a reprint 
 of his paper. 1 Acknowledgment is made by him that a considerable 
 portion of the observations recorded were contributed by his 
 brother, now Sir John Strachey, late Lieutenant-Governor of these 
 provinces. 
 
 ' . v 
 
 For the geographer a mountain chain is fixed by the conditions 
 
 of continuity and direction. The geologist 
 would fain make his mountain systems to 
 
 1 On the Geology of Part of the Himalaya Mountains and Tibet : Quar, Jour.,. 
 
 Geol. Soc., London, for November, 1851, Vol. VII. — E. T. A. 
 
 The mountain system. 
 
116 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 depend primarily upon contemporaneity of formation, as suggesting 
 causal connection. From neither point of view can the Himalaya 
 pretend to fixity of limits. On the south, indeed, no great physical 
 boundary could be more marked than the base of the mountains 
 between the Jhelum on the west and the Bramaputra on the east, a 
 distance of about 1,500 miles. The line is remarkably unbroken, 
 without projecting spurs or open re-entering valleys. It has a 
 uniform curve, the bearing in Upper Asam being to east by north, 
 while in the Panjab it is nearly to north-west. Throughout this 
 entire length the hills rise abruptly from the alluvial plains. The 
 terminations of this boundary are also very well marked. The Asam 
 valley ends against the ranges of the Barma-Malayan mountains, 
 which pass up from the south, at right angles to the Himalayan 
 chain, to coalesce with it in the elevated regions of Eastern Tibet. 
 Similarly on the north-west the ranges of the Suliman and Hindu 
 Kush pass continuously into the mountain region of Little Tibet, 
 nearly at right angles to the run of the north-west Himalaya. It 
 is on the north that the question of a physical boundary is to a great 
 extent arbitrary. The chain of mountains that, under the name of 
 Himalaya, forms the northern boundary of Hindustan, is in reality 
 the southern face of the great mass of elevated land extending through 
 nearly 30 degrees of longitude, from the sources of the Oxus to those 
 of the great rivers of China, while its northern face appears upon 
 our maps as the range called Kuenluen. To the south lie the plains 
 of India, whose greatest elevation is about 1,000 feet above the sea; 
 while on the north is the Central Asiatic desert, which nowhere is at 
 a less altitude than 3,000 feet. The loftiest summits known on the 
 surface of the earth are to be found towards the southern edge of this 
 elevated region, at least one peak having been measured whose height 
 
 is upwards of 29,000 feet, while along the whole line peaks of 20,000 
 feet abound. 
 
 So little is known of the interior and northern parts of this region 
 that it is impossible to offer any general account of it based upon 
 actual observation ; but as far as we may judge from those parts that 
 h<.i\ e been exploied, it appears that the surface is, with few excep- 
 
 Tibetan plateau. tions, broken up into a mass of mountains, 
 
 the general elevation of which, valleys as 
 well as ridges, is very great ; and there seems no reason for supposing 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 117 
 
 that either the Himalayan or Kuenluen have any definite special 
 existence as mountain ranges apart from the general elevated mass 
 of which they appear to be the two opposite faces. The portion of 
 the southern chain to which the following description more particu- 
 larly refers, is somewhat to the west of a central line, on about the 
 80th degree of east longitude, which meridian passes through the 
 island of Ceylon, and not far from Cape Comorin. The order of 
 notice will be in successive zones from south to north — the plains, 
 the Sub-Himalayan zone, the Outer or Lower Himalaya, and the 
 Central Himalaya. 
 
 While difference of opinion exists as to the formation of the most 
 
 recent deposits, it is not to be wondered at 
 The plains. that there is often much doubt as to the origin 
 
 of ancient formations. The primitive idea that a water-basin is 
 necessary to the accumulation of extensive sedimentary deposits is 
 still widely held. To it is primarily due the not yet obsolete opinion 
 that the plains of India are in great part of marine origin. The only 
 direct evidence in support of this vieAv is the local occurrence of salt- 
 wells, which also involves a popular error, for although the sea is the 
 great receptacle of salt, it is chiefly by rock-decomposition on dry 
 land that salts originate. This fact is likely to force itself disagree- 
 ably upon future generations in India ; at present we have only to do. 
 with it as at least weakening a mistaken geological position. The only 
 fossil remains found in these plains-deposits are of land or fresh water 
 oriffin, and these occur even in the delta below the present sea 
 level. 
 
 The surface-form, and the distribution of the materials of these 
 deposits, is, moreover, just what is now understood to be due to the 
 normal action of rivers above their final point of discharge. T orrents, 
 streams and rain-scour from the precipitous slopes have accumulated 
 a wide bank of coarse diluvial deposits along the base of the mountains 
 
 which is known in these provinces as the bhd- 
 bar or forest zone. In Rohilkhand it is about 
 ten miles wide, and has a fall of from fifty to seventeen feet per mile, 
 and, except in the rainy season, water is not procurable in it. Even 
 
 considerable streams sink into the porous 
 
 [L'a vd l 
 
 gravel-beds. Outside the bheibar is the tarcii, 
 also about ten miles wide, in which water is superabundant, 
 
118 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 producing swamps and excessive moisture. Formerly it was 
 supposed that this was an area of actual depression ; it has, however, 
 a very considerable fall, averaging (in Rohilkhand) more than ten 
 feet in a mile. The moisture is due to the copious re-appearance 
 of the water absorbed at the head of the bhdbar. From the tardi 
 the plains gradually decrease in slope to three or four inches per 
 mile in the deltaic regions. 
 
 A belt of fringing ridges, varying in width and abruptly lower 
 
 than the contiguous mass of the Himalaya, 
 The Sub-Himalayan or ® J ’ 
 
 Siwalik zone, formed of occurs throughout their entire length, with 
 
 J perhaps two short interruptions m Lower 
 
 Asam, which are doubtfully and in part attributed to denudation. 
 The pure geographer might, in some places, ignore this feature, as 
 perhaps below Nairn Tal and Darjeeling, choosing to regard its 
 representative there as mere spurs of the mountains. Geological 
 observation, however, draws attention to geographical features that 
 might otherwise escape notice, and notes that these so-called spurs 
 will always be found affecting the form, not of spurs proper, but of 
 ridges parallel to the adjoining mountains, and in a more or less 
 marked degree semi-detached from them by a chain of deep longitu- 
 dinal gorges and low gaps, corresponding with a leading geological 
 boundary, that between the old slaty and schistose rocks of the 
 mountains and the massive tertiary sandstones of these fringing 
 hills. 
 
 From this double consideration the name Sub-Himalaya has 
 
 Divisions of the terti- been g iven to these lower ranges and to 
 ary senes. the rock-series forming them. For the 
 
 most part these hills are apparent to the least observant traveller, 
 their outer ranges being separated from the inner ones by broad 
 flat valleys, or duns. These more detached ridges have long been 
 familiarly called Siwaliks, a name extended by Cautley from the 
 native name (Shib-wala) of the representative range separating 
 the Dehra Dun from the plains. This name, too, has been hitherto 
 currently applied to the hills and rocks here described as Sub- 
 Himalayan, wherever distinctly recognised. The closer study of 
 this zone has, however, brought to light distinctions involving some 
 difficulties regarding the application of this familiar name. It has 
 been found that there are recognisable divisions in this great series 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 119 
 
 •of the tertiary deposits of the Sub-Himalayan hills, and that the 
 younger of these groups contains by far the largest share (if not 
 all) of the well known Siwalik fossils. On this account it was 
 proposed to restrict the name Siwalik to the band in which those 
 fossils occur ; but there are good reasons for preferring to con- 
 tinue the extension of the old name, and to indicate the separable 
 geological horizons as Upper, Middle, and Lower Siwaliks. On 
 the small map annexed they are coloured together as upper 
 tertiary. 
 
 It was in the ground west of the Jumna, between the Kayarda 
 
 Supposed key section of and Pinjor duns, where the outer and inner 
 unconformable groups. bills are confluent for a length of about 
 
 forty miles, that the separation of the original Siwalik series into 
 distinct groups was first brought to notice. Throughout the whole 
 cross-section the dip of the strata is inwards, towards the moun- 
 tains ; but along a sharply marked line, continuous through the 
 length of these hills, there is a junction of highly contrasting rocks : 
 the brown and yellow clays, and conglomeratic gravels at the top 
 of the series forming the outer zones of low hills, abut against 
 harder red clays and sandstones forming an inner zone of somewhat 
 higher hills. The feature is nowhere better seen than in the 
 region of the Markanda, south of the town of Nahan, the capital 
 of Sirmur. As is generally the case along the junction of rocks of 
 very different textures, the actual surface of contact is concealed 
 by debris ; and the appearance suggested by the conformable 
 dips is that the outer rocks pass regularly beneath the inner 
 ones. 
 
 Such was the view tacitly adopted by the discoverers of the 
 
 Overlooked by early Fauna Sivalensis. It was from the same 
 observers. trans-Jumna region, south of ISTahan and 
 
 of this rock-junction, that a very large proportion of the great 
 Siwalik fossils were procured. No particular notice was taken 
 of the striking feature just described ; and Cautley accounted 
 for the absence to the east of the Jtunna of the highly fossilifer- 
 ous beds known to the west, by supposing a lesser upheave- 
 ment of the ground to have occurred in that direction ; thus dis- 
 tinctly implying that those beds underlie and are older than 
 the rocks of the cis- Jumna Siwalik range, which he had himself, 
 
120 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 from fossil and petrological evidence, identified with the rocks at 
 Nahan. 
 
 Herbert’s deliberate' rejection of the elementary fact of stratifi- 
 Nature of the uncon- cation, to make way for a theoretical diffi- 
 foimity. culty, is scarcely a less remarkable date- 
 
 mark than the ignoring of so striking a stratigraphical feature by 
 the original explorers of the Siwaliks. The facies of the two con- 
 trasting groups, as seen along the boundary, at once suggest that 
 the outer and apparently underlying rocks are really the younger, 
 and this is immediately confirmed by finding that the conglome- 
 rates of this group are principally made up of the debris of the 
 contiguous inner strata. Although this latter fact would be some- 
 what against the supposition, the steep abutting rock-junction 
 would next suggest a fault, along which the lower strata were 
 upheaved on the north, and thus brought into contact with younger 
 beds of the same series. Patient search, however, revealed an exposed 
 section of the actual contact showing the relation of the strata 
 to be quite different from that implied by faulting. The con- 
 glomerates were found to rest against a denuded surface of the older 
 group of rocks ; the junction being in fact that of an original steep 
 edge of deposition to which an actually overhanging, inverted pitch 
 had been given at many points by subsequent lateral compres- 
 sion. 
 
 The feature, as thus described, involves much more than simple 
 
 successive deposition of the groups. It ex- 
 First inferences from it. ..... . „ .. . . „ 
 
 mbits strong unconformity between them, 
 
 requiring the older group to have been upraised and deeply denuded 
 before and during the formation of the younger one. Such a relation 
 generally implies a considerable break and lapse of time between the 
 formations, with a corresponding change in their fossil fauna. It is 
 precisely the history of such changes which it is the business of 
 geology to unfold. But to the unfortunate neglect of the simplest 
 stratigraphical observations, fossils from both groups were mixed 
 together in the magnificent collection that lay ready to the hand of 
 the early discoverers. On account of the character and extent of this 
 stratigraphical feature, suggesting that an unconformity of such depth 
 must have a very wide range, it was proposed by the first observer of it 
 to restrict the name Siwalik to the younger formation, and to designate 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 121 
 
 the older rocks, of the inner zone, as the Nahan group. It is the name 
 by which Cautley identified a certain horizon in the series, although 
 apparently assigning to it a position the reverse of the correct 
 
 one. 
 
 Corrected view. 
 
 Large as is the gap absolutely required between the ages of the 
 
 beds actually in contact along this boundary, 
 it was matter of surprise from the first that 
 no trace of so great an unconformity could be found in the immense 
 thickness of deposits to the south of it. From the conglomerates 
 at the junction, southwards to the plains, one crosses a descending 
 section of several thousands of feet of strata without a trace of 
 unconformity : showing either that even at the base of this section 
 the beds of the Nahan group are not represented, or that the dis- 
 turbance which produced the unconformity along this line of abrupt 
 contact was of such a nature as to admit of continuous deposition 
 within so very short a distance. Ruling ideas at the time were 
 certainly against the latter supposition, that extended observation 
 seems to confirm it. Going westwards along the Pinjor Dun, we 
 find at the Satlaj, on the very strike and extension of the Nahan 
 range, a continuous conformable sequence from the beds of the Nahan 
 horizon into the softer sandstones, clays and conglomerates at the 
 top of the series. The line of disturbance which in the Nahan region 
 resulted in a denuded scarp against which the topmost beds were 
 deposited by overlap, produced in the Satlaj region an anticlinal 
 flexure which must have been so gradually evolved that the deposits 
 accumulating along its southern base were sensibly conformable 
 throughout, although now we find the uppermost conglomerates 
 almost vertical, with a southerly underlie, at the edge of the Dun. 
 Thus it is evident that a well-defined break is not a general feature 
 in the Sub-Himalayan rock-series, and that it would be premature 
 so far to sever such a portion of it by a separate name from the time- 
 honoured Siwaliks. The name Nahan is already current in print 
 and may at present be understood to indicate lower Siwalik rocks. 
 It is important, however, to point out that the real inference from 
 the unconformable junction is of more interest than the primd facie 
 one ; without it we should not have had distinct proof that slow 
 disturbance of great amount took place in the Sub-Himalayan zone 
 during the formation of the Siwalik deposits. 
 
 10 
 
122 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Although the marked separation of groups suggested by the 
 peculiar feature of the hills between the Kayarda and Pinjor duns 
 A division maintained is not maintainable westwards, there is a uni- 
 
 the rocks and fossils : up- 
 
 through the character of f orm jty 0 f change throughout the series from 
 
 per Siwaliks. base to top whereby approximate horizons are 
 
 assignable. Conglomerates and gravels prevail at the top, variably 
 associated with brown sandy clays. In many clear sections the 
 thickness is quite 4,000 to 5,000 feet. It is not, however, to be 
 understood that the deposits were ever strictly superimposed to that 
 depth vertically. The mode of deposition in successive banks, each 
 trailing upon and thinning out beyond its predecessor, as pointed 
 out above for the section on the Satlaj, must greatly modify the 
 familiar meaning of the word thickness as regards space ; although 
 where such deposits become tilted up by lateral pressure, and exposed 
 along a comparatively shallow section, the appearance is quite the 
 same as if vertical superposition of the whole series had obtained. 
 Nevertheless, as regards time , the fullest thickness must be taken 
 into account, for each bed is truly successive to that below it. Even 
 when raised to the vertical, those upper Siwalik strata have so 
 fresh an appearance as to be scarcely distinguishable from the 
 most recent deposits — from the beds of the torrent shingle or of 
 sandy alluvium now accumulating in the duns or on the plains. 
 The complete justification for their distinction as an upper Siwalik 
 group is found in the few fossils they have yielded, some of 
 which, as Buhalus paloeindicus , would connect them with the 
 pleistocene deposits of the Narbada valley rather than with the 
 pliocene Siwaliks. 
 
 The main fossiliferous zone of the Siwalik series constantly 
 
 Middle Siwaliks. occurs beneath the thick mass of deposits 
 
 noticed in the last paragraph, and it has a 
 fairly characteristic rock-facies of its own. Massive, clear, gray; 
 soft sandstone is decidedly the prevailing rock ; but brightly tinted 
 clays are also often in great force. The large vertebrate remains, 
 although mostly found in sandstone, are certainly more abundant 
 where there are associated clays. Several thousand feet of thickness 
 must also be assigned to this middle Siwalik group. Falconer con- 
 sidered this Siwalik fauna to be miocene, but pakeontologists are 
 now decidedly in favour of its pliocene affinities. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 123 
 
 In conformable sequence beneath the fossiliferous zone we find 
 
 Nahan or lower Siwalik. 
 
 rocks of the same type, but having a decid- 
 edly different aspect — strong sandstones, 
 
 but of a darker hue, and often highly indurated, with hard clays 
 generally of a deep red or purple colour. Throughout the Himala- 
 yan range, east of the Satlaj, they form the flanking ridges close 
 under the higher mountains, and inside the duns ; or at least they 
 mostly occupy that position, for it cannot be said that middle Siwa- 
 lik beds do not occur there too, as will be seen from the remarks 
 upon structure. No fossils can be quoted from those beds, but it is 
 believed that some existed in the original Siwalik collections. They 
 
 would probably be of miocene age. 
 
 One of the most interesting features in these Siwalik deposits is 
 
 Horizontal variations the variation they exhibit in relation to the 
 in the Siwalik deposits. position of the great river-gorges. This is 
 
 most marked in the case of the upper portion of the series. The 
 accumulation of coarse conglomerates is immensely greater in the 
 immediate vicinity of the large rivers of the Himalayan system, and, 
 moreover, it is only within the range of those streams that we find 
 the beds of large rounded blocks of quartzite and other hard locks 
 such as are now brought down by those great torrents. In the 
 intervals between the rivers such congl omerates as occur are formed 
 
 almost exclusively of the debris of the adjoining hills, the same as 
 are found in the minor streams now flowing from those hills; but in 
 this position sandy clays often form the bulk of the formation. The 
 same influence is observable in the middle group of the series, which 
 is often conglomeratic and gravelly, or almost exclusively sandy, 
 near the main rivers, while away from them the clays are often in 
 great force. These facts are very observable at the Satlaj ; in the 
 gorge above Bubhor the whole of the upper group is coarsely con- 
 oiomeratic, and the middle one is more or less pebbly throughout, 
 while at seven miles to the north-west the brown sandy clays, in 
 which the fossil huhalus and camelus were found, form three-fourths 
 of the entire thickness of the upper group. The apparent exception 
 in the case of the Jumna is even a more marked illustration of the 
 fact under notice. The river now flows through the Siwalik range 
 at many miles to the west of the gorge, where it leaves the moun- 
 tains; the fact being that in the elevation of the outer range the 
 
124 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Jumna could not erode a passage through the great accumulation of 
 conglomerates it had formerly discharged in front of that gorge, 
 and which now form the highest summit of the outer range. It had 
 to work round them not in the direction of its near neighbour the 
 Granges, hut towards the region of lesser deposition. Thus the con- 
 trast between the Siwalik strata to the east and west of the actual 
 river-passage is so great that it has been questioned if the formations 
 can really he the same. To the east the upper group is made of 
 the hard shingle conglomerates, while on the same strike to the 
 w r est the conglomerates are composed of local, principally lower 
 Siwalik, debris. In the cis-Jumna Siwaliks the middle group is 
 formed of thick masses of soft sandstones that have yielded very 
 few fossils, while to the west clays occur largely on the same 
 horizon, and fossils abound. The facts indicated in this paragraph 
 are of great importance, as bearing upon the question of the 
 mountain-formation ; showing, as they clearly do, that although 
 these deposits, to a thickness of 8,000 to 10,000 feet, are 
 now in many places turned up to ' the vertical, and even in- 
 verted, yet the main features of the higher mountains must have 
 been during the Siwalik period sensibly similar to what they 
 are now. 
 
 So far we have briefly considered the original characters of the 
 structure of the Siwalik Siwalik strata : it is necessary now to notice 
 rocks - the features induced by disturbance. This 
 
 has taken place on the grandest scale. On the right bank of the 
 Ganges above Hard war the gray sandstones of the middle group 
 have a high southerly dip ; and this rises gradually, through an 
 enormous thickness of strata, to a nearly vertical underlie in the 
 conglomerates at the outer edge of the range. A section of the 
 same type is splendidly exposed in the gorge of the Satlaj above 
 Bubhor, in -the second range of the Sub-Himalayan hills. There 
 is much method in the form of these flexures : they very generally 
 affect the form known as normal , i. e., bends in which the dip is 
 greater on one side of the axis, and so called because of more com- 
 mon occurrence than the symmetrical flexure — when both dips are 
 equal — or than the folded flexure, in which the strata on the side of 
 the steeper dip have been pushed beyond the vertical, and so 
 partially inverted. As an almost universal rule in this region, the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 125 
 
 steep side of these normal anticlinal flexures is turned from the 
 mountains. From this there results the familar conformation of the 
 Sub-Himalayan hills, presenting a scarped face to the plains and a 
 long' slope towards the interior valley. These duns, or at least the 
 flat longitudinal valleys which are the typical duns, are thus struc- 
 tural features, not mere valleys of denudation ; they rest upon the 
 comparatively little disturbed strata in the hollow of the synclinal 
 flexure. The range separating the dun from the plains is formed by 
 the anticlinal, the steep (outer) limb of which is generally broken 
 up and denuded away, hence the south face of the range presents 
 the scarped outcrop of the beds on the north side of the axis of 
 flexure. 
 
 In the inner ranges, where the disturbing action was greater, 
 The Nun under Mus- the normal flexure often becomes folded, 
 sooree - with, of course, inversion of the strata. There 
 
 is an instance of this fairly seen in the Nun stream under Mussooree : 
 below the narrow gorge, through massive sandstones having a steep 
 northerly underlie, there is a continuous section in the low banks 
 showing the sandstone becoming pebbly, then interbedded with thin 
 conglomerates, then with thicker and coarser beds, all having the 
 same high northerly dip. This is undoubtedly an ascending section 
 though apparently, according to the dip, it is a descending one, i.e., 
 the whole series is inverted. To any one who has understood these 
 simple explanations, it will be apparent that if these conglomerates 
 are upper Siwalik, and unless there is a fault somewhere about the 
 mouth of the Nun gorge, the inner Sub-Himalayan range under 
 Mussooree must be in great part made up of middle Siwalik, and 
 not of Nahan beds ; and indeed their character would support that 
 view. If these conglomerates of the Nun are not upper Siwalik 
 they would form a new sub-division of the Nahan group, which 
 could then hardly be classed as lower Siwalik. Similar conglomer- 
 ates have lately been observed in this inner Sub-Himalayan zone 
 east of Naini Tab It is however to be remarked that these folded 
 flexures often are attended by great faulting, on such a scale that all 
 appearance of flexure is lost and we only find a section of upper 
 Siwaliks dipping against, and apparently passing under, beds of the 
 Nahan type. There are several grand instances of such faults in the 
 broad area of Sub-Himalayan rocks beyond the Satlaj in the Kangra 
 
126 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 region and on through the Jamu hills. They run quite straight 
 or in very open curves for several scores of miles, and as the dislo- 
 cation lessens, the unfaulted flexure is gradually disclosed. The 
 section in the Nun shows us that to the east as well as to the west 
 flexures may take the place of the peculiar unconformable overlap- 
 ping boundary between the upper and lower Siwaliks described in 
 the Nahan region, where there is no dun. The difference of struc- 
 ture would be such as might result from the presence of some 
 unyielding mass of rock underground in this latter position, prevent- 
 ing the formation of flexures. This Nahan region is in other ways 
 remarkable, as we shall see in following sections. 
 
 The form of the structural features prevailing in the Sub-Hima- 
 layan zone indicates plainly a thrust from the adjoining mountain 
 mass ; and the magnitude of the total movement is astonishing in 
 connection with the reflection made in a previous section, that it 
 must in great part have occurred since the mountain mass had 
 assumed somewhat of its present form ; or, at least, that the main 
 drainage system had remained the same throughout. 
 
 From what has already been said, a general idea might be formed 
 
 Distribution of Siwalik of the distribution of the different groups of 
 rocks. the Siwalik series ; but the effects of denu- 
 
 dation and other influences remain to be indicated. The chief 
 expanse of the Sub-Himalayan hills and rocks is beyond the Satlaj. 
 From about Pinjor, the lower Himalayan ranges trend northwards 
 towards the lofty gneissic ridge of the Dhauladhar, overlooking the 
 Kangra Dun. The outer range of the Sub-Himalayan is not affected 
 by this change of direction, so that the zone of tertiary rocks becomes 
 permanently widened to about three times the breadth it exhibits 
 along the whole mountain range to the east. In the Kangra region 
 there is a succession of three duns occupied by conglomerates, separated 
 by ridges of sandstone brought up along great faults. To as far as 
 the Ganges the upper Siwaliks are still well represented in the outer 
 hills ; but east of this river, along the whole of Rohilkhand, only 
 remnants of these outer Siwaliks have been observed. They seem to 
 have been mostly denuded away, and one conies at once upon the 
 older sandstones of the ranges immediately flanking the high moun- 
 tains. This is the case under Naini Tab The change, however, is 
 not a permanent one ; for, again, far to the east, on the read- to 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 127 
 
 Kathmandu, there is a broad outer Siwalik range, formed of soft 
 sandstones and conglomerates, and separated by a dun from an 
 inner zone of lower sandstones. But, again, along the Sikkim 
 and Bhutan border, there is no sign of the outer Sub-Himalayan 
 
 range. 
 
 It has been said above that the uppermost Siwalik strata are 
 
 considered to be of newer pliocene age, and 
 Post-tertiary deposits. , , . 
 
 we have seen modern deposits being laid 
 
 down against them along the base of the hills in the bhdbar region. 
 In these a fossil village was dug out by Colonel Cautley in the 
 excavations for the Eastern Jumna Canal. They no doubt passed 
 down into beds of the prehistorical or recent period. Still there 
 would be a great gap left in the sequence of formations — the whole 
 of the pleistocene period, represented in Europe by the drift, and 
 the cave deposits, which for years past attracted so much attention 
 in connection with the discovery of human remains. For some 
 middle portion of that period representatives are found in the Sub- 
 Himalayan zone. They are unmistakably exposed on the Satlaj, 
 above Bubhor, where the hills on either side of the river, to a height 
 of some 500 feet, are capped by clays and coarse conglomerates, 
 resting quite undisturbed on the edges of vertical Siwalik strata, 
 both of the middle and uppermost groups. It is clear that a long 
 time of disturbance and denudation must have intervened between 
 the deposition of those totally unconformable deposits ; also that 
 those high-level conglomerates are separated from recent deposits 
 by at least the time it has taken the Satlaj to excavate its gorge to 
 its present depth. These two limiting tests of age are quite as co- 
 gent as those applied to corresponding deposits in Europe. Beds of 
 the same age are well exposed above the sanction already described 
 in the Nun river under Mussooree. They are here quite on a level 
 with the summits of the Siwalik hills to south of the Dehra 
 Dun. 
 
 The most interesting deposits of this age are those to which a 
 
 glacial origin has been assigned. It was long 
 Supposed glacial deposits. . , . f , , , 
 
 since observed that the glaciers of the 
 
 Himalaya had once extended to a much lower level than they do 
 
 now. Unmistakable moraines are found-in Sikkim to within 8,000 
 
 feet of the sea level, the present limit of glaciers being about 14,000 
 
128 
 
 him/layan districts 
 
 feet. More recently a glacial deposit lias been described in the 
 Kangra valley. Enormous blocks of gneiss are freely scattered in 
 the low ground, at an elevation of 2,500 to 3,000 feet, along the 
 whole base of the Dhauladhar range, resting on the Siwalik strata. 
 One cannot well assign a limit to the mass that may be moved by 
 a rush of water on a considerable slope ; but the distribution of 
 these blocks makes it very difficult to account for them by any 
 action of this kind through the existing gorges ; for they occur 
 along the slope of the flanking ridges, seemingly quite out of reach 
 of any possible sweep of the torrents. They are three possible 
 assumptions to account for their position : by supposing the scarp 
 of the gneiss now forming the mountain-ridge to have once extended 
 a couple of miles in advance of where it is now, and so as to bring- 
 those blocks within the range of its talus, but in this case the blocks 
 should be found over the intermediate heights, which is not the case; 
 or to admit that the blocks were ice-borne, and not by glaciers, for 
 the blocks are not arranged in moraine fashion, but by floating ice 
 in a lake of that period ; or to suppose that the whole valley and 
 the main gorges were formerly choked up with detrital accumulations 
 to such a level as may have brought these lateral positions within 
 the range of the spill from the gorges, ever overtopping the lower 
 flanking hills. This is by no means a gratuitous supposition, for we 
 find those coarse superficial deposits capping the heights above 
 Kangra fort, on the south of the valley, and not derivable from the 
 Siwalik conglomerates on which they rest. The necessary slope of 
 deposition for such materials, from this position to the mountain 
 range, would give elevation enough there for any observed distribu- 
 tion of the great blocks, by simple diluvial action. This is probably 
 the real history of the case ; but the possible influence of ice action 
 to aid the process is not to be lost sight of. When the Himalayan 
 glaciers reached to 8,000 feet lower than at present, ice-work must 
 have been very active in the Dhauladhar, and its effects very mark- 
 ed in the deposits at the base of the range. All the facts suggest 
 that those high-level gravels are of the same age throughout ^the 
 Himalayan border, and probably of the same age as the former 
 extension of glacial action ; and it is impossible not to notice the near 
 coincidence of this age with that of the glacial period of Europe. 
 There is no independent evidence of changes of level since the ao-e 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 129 
 
 of these deposits ; and it is doubtful how far mere difference of rain- 
 fall could count for the change ; we should thus he driven to enter- 
 tain the idea of an ice-age. 
 
 The confirmation of this physical evidence of a great phenome- 
 non having affected synchronously so large 
 Importance of the theory. ^ p 0r tion of the earth’s surface would be of 
 
 the highest importance to geological science. Since the abandon- 
 ment of the primitive idea that all similar rocks were of contem- 
 poraneous origin, we have been at a loss for any test of absolute 
 time-horizons. Within continuous land areas some approach to a 
 judgment can he made by closely comparing series of adjoining 
 sections, but for any distant or detached area we have to tiust to 
 palaeontology for the homotaxis, or comparative classification, of 
 formations. Palaeontological homotaxis, however, implies differ- 
 ence as well as correspondence in actual time relations ; and the 
 problem of settling, from fossil evidence only, in which direction 
 the difference should be counted, is an exceedingly complex under- 
 taking. Thus palaeontology itself was the chief sufferer by the 
 natural limitation of age-tests for the stratigraphical foundation 
 upon which it was based, and of which it is as yet far from being 
 independent. And as the history of life upon the globe is the 
 object of the highest interest in geology, the check to progress was a 
 very serious one. The occurrence of even one semi-universal 
 phenomenon, leaving such peculiar and well-marked stratigraphi- 
 cal characters as those of an ice-period, would afford an invalu- 
 able test whereby to check the direction of growth and distribution 
 of organic forms in all the formations nearly connected therewith. 
 
 The change from the Sub-Himalayan hills to the outer region 
 
 of the mountains is always, as has been 
 
 The lower Himalayan 
 
 region. sliown^ a more marked feature than the 
 
 mere difference of height would suggest. The hills of the Nahau 
 zone ran«e from 3,000 to nearly 5,000 feet, while the summits of 
 the adjoining mountain-ridge vary from 6,000 to 8,000. From 
 this to the great snowy range there lies-, a tract more than fifty mi es 
 wide, of deep valleys and narrow ridges, the average elevation of 
 which would be scarcely over that of the border-zone of mountains. 
 This is the region appropriately known as the lower or outer 
 Himalaya. The main watershed of this broad tract ol mountains lies' 
 
130 
 
 htmXlayan districts 
 
 well to the north of the line of snowy peaks, and the great rivers 
 traverse the lower hills in very tortuous courses. The configuration 
 stamped npon the area by the denudation from rain and rivers gives 
 very little clue to the rock-structure. Although the general strike of 
 the formations is parallel to that of the range, the composition of the 
 strata is too complex, and the cases of local distortion too frequent, 
 to admit of anything like the regularity of feature that has been 
 described in the Sub-Himalayan zone. One character may, how- 
 ever, be noticed as constant throughout the western part of the lower 
 Himalaya to as far east as the Nepal frontier : along the outermost 
 zone there occurs a strong limestone formation, producing ridges of 
 more rugged outline and having a greater elevation than the hills 
 for some distance to the north of it. Our knowledge of this 
 immense stretch of mountains is so fragmentary that no connected 
 account can be given of it. We can only give a sketch of the four 
 sections that have been even cursorily observed, and offer some 
 conjectures as to their connection. The four sections occur in the 
 Simla region, the Kuinaon region, Nepal and Sikkim. 
 
 The first thing to note of the Simla region is that it constitutes 
 
 the termination of the Lower Himalaya as 
 
 The Simla region. 
 
 Sub-Himalayan zone it was noted how from about Pinjor (on the 
 main road to Simla) the boundary of the mountains trended round 
 to the north for about eighty miles, up to the base of the Dhaula- 
 dhar ridge, which is exactly on the line of the great snowy range, 
 and is structurally its equivalent. Thus, of course, the continuous 
 broad area of lower mountains is cut off. It is important to notice 
 that this is not a freak of denudation, a great bay worn into the 
 mountains by a tertiary sea : were this the case, we should find the 
 successive formations of the area striking out along that curve and 
 abruptly cut off there. The fact is not so. The strike of the rocks 
 bends regularly with the direction of the boundary, thus showing 
 that the entire feature is an original character of the mountain- 
 structure. We have here, in the extinction of the Outer Hima- 
 layan region, the beginning of the north-westerly decrease of the 
 Himalayan elevation. The mountains beyond the Ravi, which, 
 in a superficial sense — as being south of the range of maximum 
 elevation — might be held to represent the Lower Himalaya, do not 
 
 characterised above. In describing the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 131 
 
 reproduce its characters. Kashmir has structurally more relation 
 to the Central Himalaya than to anything south of the snowy range. 
 This fact of diminishing original elevation comes out very clearly in 
 the peculiar distribution of some of the formations that occur in the 
 Simla region. These have been roughly classified as below : — 
 
 r Kasauli. 
 
 Sirmur ... < Dagshai. 
 
 v. Subathu (nummulitic). 
 
 Krol (? triassic). 
 
 Infra-Krol. 
 
 Blaini. 
 
 Infra-Blaini. 
 
 Schists and gneiss. 
 
 The marked change in the surface configuration from the Sub- 
 
 Himalayan to the Lower Himalayan hills 
 The Sirmur formation, j n j :roc [ uces for the most part a total change 
 
 of rocks. Below Mussooree and Kami Tal, and throughout the 
 whole range to eastward, one steps at once and for good fiom the 
 upper tertiary sandstone to the much oldei slaty locks. It is not 
 so, however, in the region between the Jumna and the Satlaj. 
 The high ridge on which stand the stations of Kasauli and Dagshai 
 is formed of rocks very similar in character to those of the Nahan 
 zone close by ; but the marked boundary separating them is con- 
 tinuous with that forming to the east the separation of the Nahan 
 from the slates. Indeed even here, under Kasauli, the slates often 
 appear along the boundary beneath the sandstones of the ridge, 
 which have been upheaved upon a basement of their supporting- 
 rock. Resting upon the slates in this position we find thick beds 
 of dull brown, gray, and olive indurated clays with bands of lime- 
 stone, in which there occur abundantly fossils characteristic of the 
 nummulitic period. These beds are well seen about Subathu. 
 They are overlaid conformably and with alternating transition by 
 red clays with hard purple and gray sandstone, well seen about 
 Dao-shai. In the ascending section sandstone prevails to the 
 exclusion of the red clays, as is well seen on the ridge at Kasauli. 
 In these top beds numerous leaves have been found indicating 
 the proximity of an abundant sub-tropical vegetation. The 
 ao-o-reo-ate thickness of this threefold formation (Subathu, Dagshai, 
 
132 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Its distribution. 
 
 and Kasauli) may be from 2,000 to 3,000 feet. Collectively it 
 may be known as the Sirmur series, a considerable part of its area 
 occurring within that State. 
 
 Here, then, at last we have a formation the horizon of which is 
 
 fixed by a well-marked marine fauna. The 
 Subathu group at the base of this series is 
 certainly eocene ; and considering the perfectly transitional charac- 
 ter of the three groups, we may provisionally consider the whale 
 series to be of this age. The study of its position and relations seems 
 to throw much light upon the history of the mountain-system. It 
 forms an almost isolated outlier, caught up on the edge of the moun- 
 tain-area. Its greatest width, east of Dagshai, is about ten miles. 
 In that direction it stops out along the crest of a ridge at about 
 fifteen miles west of the Jumna ; the mode of termination show- 
 ing that it was effected simply by greater elevation to the east, 
 and consequent denudation. The only other known occurrence of 
 these rocks within the south Himalayan boundary to eastwards is 
 a small patch of Subathu beds on the top of the ridge east of 
 the Ganges close to the village of Bon in Garhwal. In the far 
 east, however, the nummulitic deposits at the south base of the 
 Garo hills have a very striking resemblance to the Subathu beds ; 
 but it is doubtful if they were ever connected. To the west, 
 at the Satlaj, the outlier is attenuated to a band a few yards 
 wide — a bottom remnant of the Subathu beds. These rocks again 
 appear in some force in the ridge beyond, but become gradually 
 depressed in that direction, so that before reaching the Bias 
 the most characteristic bottom group has disappeared. The band 
 as represented by the upper groups is well marked, though very 
 narrow, at the Ravi. The hill station of Dharmsala stands upon it. 
 
 Some points of interest have been made out regarding the rela- 
 
 Its uncomformity to the tions between the Sirmur series and the 
 Older rocks. contiguous older formations. There is very 
 
 deep unconformity : the Subathu beds do not rest upon the next 
 youngest rock, which is the great Krol limestone, but upon beds 
 which underlie that limestone. This is fully made out. As a 
 natural concomitant, we find that the surface of contact of the two 
 contrasting foi mations is a very uneven one. On the ridge at 
 Subathu there are not more than 50 feet of the typical Subathu 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 183 
 
 beds below the red rocks ; while in the valley alongside there must 
 be 600 to 800 feet of this bottom group. These facts suggest 
 proximity to the edge of deposition of the nummulitic sea ; and the 
 succeeding deposits, ending in the plant-beds of the Kasauli zone, 
 tend to confirm the view. 
 
 It seems, too, that little or none of the contortion which now 
 
 Contortion of the slates affects a11 tlie rocks kad occured before the 
 post-eocene. deposition of the Subathu beds ; for at 
 
 Subathu itself a characteristic bottom layer is clearly seen, resting 
 continuously throughout a considerable synclinal flexure upon 
 approximately the same bed of the supporting slates. In agree- 
 ment with this observation, we now find these rocks to have 
 undergone equal contortion with the slates. The inner boundary 
 of the eocene area is a very broken one ; and outlying shreds 
 of the nummulitic clays are found caught up in folds of the 
 slates, as may be seen on the road north of the Haripur rest- 
 house. 
 
 All these facts would tend to prove that although some general 
 
 elevation of the mountain area, involving 
 Inf ci cnees. deep denudation of the rocks, had occurred 
 
 here prior to the tertiary period, none of the special disturbance 
 characteristic of the existing mountain-system, and so specially 
 marked in this fringing zone, took place till after the deposi- 
 tion of the eocene rocks. The Sirmur series exhibits more intense 
 and varied disturbance than is at all general in the Nahan group. 
 
 The relation of the Sirmur to the Nahan group cannot be so 
 
 Relation of Sirmur and definitely made out, as they are only seen 
 Siwalik series. near eac h other along a single steep line of 
 
 boundary ; and the question is, as to the nature of this boundary. 
 The argument for the total separation of the groups in this region 
 appears, however, to be pretty conclusive. Although, as has been 
 said, the rocks of the upper Sirmur groups have a strong lithologi- 
 cal resemblance to those of the Nahan .group — so much so that the 
 type of the Sub-Himalayan deposits may be said to have set in 
 with the eocenes — the facies of the Nahan and Sirmur groups are so 
 distinct, in close proximity, that there is little ground for consider- 
 ing any parts of them, as represented in this Jumna-Satlaj region, 
 to be equivalent. It is only on the supposition of the boundary 
 
134 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTEICTS 
 
 between the areas (which is also the chief boundary along the 
 base of the mountains) being a great fault, that the question of 
 correspondence can arise at all. But as this supposition is the 
 prima facie one — the one that would be applied from the accepted 
 interpretation of like boundaries in other mountain regions — it is 
 necessary to state the evidence against it. 
 
 Throughout the whole range of the Nahan zone in this region 
 
 no trace of the very characteristic Subathn 
 
 Probable unconformity. , . , , 
 
 beds has been found, either at the apparent 
 local base of the section, or as a remnant adhering along the sup- 
 posed fault-ground. In the former position it might be said we 
 should be more likely to find the top rocks of the older group ; but 
 this too can be answered negatively r the lower we get in the Nahan 
 group, we find clays to occur more frequently, whereas the Kasauli 
 beds are almost exclusively sandstones. It is also to be noted that 
 no remnant of the Nahan rocks has been recognised capping the 
 Kasauli beds, or otherwise, within the eocene area. No conglome- 
 rate has been observed in the Sirmur group. The only position 
 from which the original continuity of the groups, with separation 
 by faulting, could be maintained, would be to assert that, as the 
 actual base of the Nahan group has never been seen in this region, 
 the whole eocene group may be buried beneath it in conformable 
 sequence, or otherwise ; and correspondingly, that any trace of the 
 Nahan deposits had been washed away from the present eocene 
 area. So much for the direct evidence. As to the indirect, there 
 is really little, except the fact of abruptness, in the character of 
 the boundary itself to countenance the supposition of a great 
 fault. A straight line drawn from the west end of the eocene area 
 in Sirmur to the small nummulitic outlier east of the Ganges 
 would touch the Siwalik hills south of Dehra ; and along the great 
 bay-like course of the boundary, north of that line, there are 
 many sharp changes of direction, such as are not supposed to he 
 compatible with dislocations of such dimensions as would be 
 required in this case. The great faults in the Sub-Himalayan zone 
 were seen to be remarkably straight. The alternative and most 
 probable supposition is that the eocene area was upraised, and 
 something approaching to the present steep edge of contact eroded 
 out of it, before the deposition of the Nahan rocks. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 135 
 
 It is, however, to he mentioned that far to the north-west 
 
 Change of character to there is complete transition throughout the 
 the north-west. tertiary series, from the Subathu to the top 
 
 Siwalik. The partial obliteration of the Sirmur series, as forming 
 a sharply defined zone at the base of the mountains, commences 
 at some fifty miles beyond the Ravi about Udampur. The zone 
 is there more than twenty miles broad, and rocks of Siwalik aspect 
 occur within it. Still as a zone of greater upheaval it is traceable to 
 beyond the Punch ; but before reaching the Jhilam it is quite 
 effaced, the whole tertiary series sweeping across it in an anticlinal 
 flexure. These facts do not in the least disturb our conclusions 
 regarding the relation of the lower and upper tertiary series in the 
 Lower Himalayan region. They only form part of the concurrent 
 evidence that towards the middle of the Himalayan system the 
 elevation was greater, and commenced earlier than in the terminal 
 region. The same fact is emphatically shown in the comparative 
 relation of the Sirmurs to the older rocks in these two positions. 
 In this case there can be no doubt of the deep unconformity in 
 the Simla region — a relation of the same kind as that here 
 adopted for the Sirmur-Nahan relation in the same area. But this 
 feature too is quite changed to the north-west : in the great inkers 
 of old limestone that occur within the tertiary area of the Jamu 
 hills, the Subathu group, with the same characteristic bottom- 
 bed as noticed at Subathu, is everywhere observed in parallel (con- 
 formable) superposition with the old limestone. It is not in- 
 deed proven that this rock represents the Ivrol formation ; never- 
 theless, the contrast of the stratigraphical relation is most striking. 
 
 We have again to refer to the Jumna-Satlaj ground for the 
 
 Older rocks of the Simla best sections of the next older rocks to the 
 region. eocene. The peculiarities of this region 
 
 come out stronger as we recede in time. Its character in the 
 plains, as the present main watershed of Hindustan, is really its 
 least permanent feature : there is some reason to think that the 
 Jumna once upon a time may have flowed towards the Indus 
 through western Rajputana. It can certainly be affirmed that 
 such a course was within the range of the diluvial conditions that 
 formerly obtained in upper India. The peculiar unconformity 
 found in this position between the upper tertiary rocks is not, 
 
hima'layan districts 
 
 136 
 
 like the plains’ watershed, accidental or temporary, but structural. 
 In the well-preserved sections of the Sirmur group we found in this 
 region the only representative of the eocene period within the 
 Southern Himalaya ; and again here we find the best preserved 
 remains of the older formations. This ground too has been examined 
 in more detail, so it will serve as a standard of comparison. 
 
 Standard section. 
 
 The Solan rest-house on the new road to Simla stands between 
 
 three picturesque mountains of limestone, 
 more or less isolated in each case upon a 
 base of supporting rock. It is a blue gray stone, several hundred 
 feet in thickness. From its position here we are safe in taking 
 it as the youngest group of the series with which it is connected. 
 It has now for some years been spoken of as the Krol limestone. 
 There is often a band of coarse sandstone at the base of it, which 
 seems to vary a good deal in thickness, often at the expense of the 
 limestone. Below this there is well exposed in this neighbourhood 
 a thick band of black carbonaceous slaty shales, which pass down 
 into similar non-carbonaceous flaggy beds, forming the whole base 
 
 of the mountains in this zone, down to the lowest levels. At a 
 thousand feet or more from the base of the Krol limestone there 
 occurs in those slaty flags a thin band of compact limestone of 
 clear pink, yellow, or gray tints, often accompanied by a bed of 
 conglomerate, and a white quartzite. This band, though a thin one, 
 seems to be very persistent to great distances ; it is therefore 
 important as a well-marked horizon. It has been identified on the 
 flanks of the hills under Simla; far up the valley of the Tons, at 
 
 the crossing of the Simla-Mussooree road ; on the Ganges near 
 Tapuban, and again on the hillside north of the Kota Dun in 
 Kumaon. It is called the Blaini group. The Krol group is traceable 
 eastwards almost continuously, and in about the same condition as 
 at the Krol, through Deoban in Jaunsar to Mussooree and Naini Tab 
 From certain lithological resemblances to the rocks in Spiti, 
 
 which he had classified from fossil evidence, 
 Conjectured affinities. Dr Stolickza fl as conjectured that the Blaini 
 
 and infra - Blaini beds may correspond with members of his Maith 
 and Bhabe series, of upper and lower silurian age ; that the Krol 
 group represents his Lilang series, which is triassic ; and that 
 the infra - Krol may correspond with his Kuling series of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 137 
 
 carboniferous period, in the central Himalaya. But no recognizable 
 fossil has yet been found in these rocks in the lower Himalayan 
 region. 
 
 The relation of this series, which forms so continuously the 
 
 outermost zone of the lower Himalaya, to 
 Extension to Simla. . . . . . , . . 
 
 the metamorphic rocks on the north is very 
 
 puzzling, yet essential to the explanation of the mountain structure. 
 Some important hints towards it are found in the Simla region. 
 Unless one chances to stumble upon an outcrop of the Blaini group, 
 the flaggy slates of the infra- Krol and infra- Blaini horizons are 
 indistinguishable. Immediately north of the Krol there is a com- 
 pressed anticlinal flexure, with elevation to the north of it ; so that 
 the slaty rocks occupy the whole ground till we reach the quartzites 
 of Tara Devi and Boileauganj, which dip towards their common 
 synclinal axis at the gap south of Simla : limestone occurs above 
 them on Jatog. These may represent the Krol group. However 
 this may be, there can be no doubt about the identification of the 
 Blaini group on the spur under the Yarrows and under Chota Simla, 
 on the opposite sides of Jako. The thickness of strata above these 
 outcrops, to the top of Jako, would quite carry the section up to the 
 base of the Krol group. 
 
 An interesting feature of the section is that the rocks of 
 
 the Jako and Boileauganj hills are highly 
 Typical instance of over- ... • i • > l ±.*d 
 
 lying metamorpliism at metamorphic — mica-schists and garnetiierous 
 
 hornblende-schists with abundance of vein- 
 quartz — while the flaggy slates above and below the Blaini group, 
 all round the west, north and east base of the hill, are as little meta- 
 morphic as on the base of the Krol. This is a crucial instance of 
 a phenomenon that meets us far and wide throughout the Himalaya, 
 the superposition of highly metamorphic upon non-metamorphic 
 strata. The metamorphism is often apparently greater than here — 
 we find gneiss instead of crystalline schists at top — while the case 
 for superposition is less distinct ; so that it is possible to doubt the 
 fact of its being a normal ascending section ; and accordingly this 
 has always been a chief stumbling-block in the interpretation of 
 the lower Himalayan sections. It is the feature that so fatally 
 puzzled Herbert fifty years ago. We shall have to return to the sub- 
 ject presently, and would only remark here that the very instructive 
 
 18 
 
138 
 
 Til M/LAY AN 'DISTRICTS 
 
 instance we have just seen occurs in a much frequented position, 
 where many English people pass many idle hours. 
 
 The same flaggy slates seem to continue for a long way north of 
 
 Section a long ridge north Simla, for the most part with a moderate 
 of Simla. north-easterly inclination. There are several 
 
 lines of crush and strain, generally found at the gaps, but apparently 
 unattended by great dislocation, for no new rock appears along these 
 lines. The Blaini group has been identified on the ridge north of 
 Theog bringing in the Krol beds towards Matiani, where there are 
 symptoms of gradual general metamorphism. At Nagkanda this 
 change is very decided, and here those slaty schists seem to pass 
 into the flanks of Hatu, the top of which is formed of massive beds 
 of gneiss, lying nearly horizontally. This rock is the same as the 
 so-called central gneiss forming the southern basement of the great 
 snowy range, where its chief characteristic seems to be the preva- 
 lence in it of ramifying veins of albite-granite. These observations 
 have suggested that the Krol beds had here overlapped the slate 
 series, and are in original contact with the gneiss. 
 
 We have now seen a general section up to the great mountain 
 
 Parallel section in the range. It is taken for the most part along 
 Satlaj valley. the watershed in a north-east-by-east direc- 
 
 tion from Simla. The apparent simplicity of it is very encourag- 
 ing ; but we have not far to go to dispel this illusion. It may be 
 noted that no limestone appears on this section beyond Simla. The 
 Shali mountain, however, only a few miles to the west of Matiani, 
 is made of strong limestone, not unlike the Krol rock, with an 
 accompanying sandstone, and underlaid by flaggy slates like those 
 about Simla. If they are the same, and indeed in any case, their 
 position is somewhat puzzling, for from Shali they dip eastwards 
 under the schists of Matiani and northwards down to the Satlaj, 
 where the limestone seems to pass under the gneiss of the Jalori 
 ridge. It is not merely a case of dipping toioarcls these metamor- 
 phic rocks ; the Y-shaped outcrop of the junction along the steep 
 sides of the Satlaj gorge points up the valley, and is more or less 
 parallel to the dip of the strata in both rocks. In the Satlaj valley 
 above and below Suni, close to the north of Simla, the confusion of 
 the limestones and slates is indescribable ; and there is profuse trap- 
 pean intrusion : whereas, on the whole section through Simla, from 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 139 
 
 The Kumaon section. 
 
 tlie plains to Nagkanda, only one small dyke has been observed. The 
 ■absence of fossils in these limestone and slate rocks makes it almost 
 impossible to settle their stratigraphical relations with any certainty. 1 
 
 The distribution of these limestones and slates is as irregular to 
 
 the- east as to the north of Simla. The Chor 
 East of Simla. mountain — directly between Simla and Mus- 
 
 sooree, and remarkable for being the highest summit (12,000 feet) 
 occurring within such a short distance of the plains — is an isolated 
 mass of gneiss. To east of it the limestone stretches again far into 
 the mountains, along the valley of the Tons, forming Deoban hill ; 
 along the Mussooree ridge it occurs frequently, as on the- Abbey and 
 Camel’s-back hills. On the top of Landaur it is mixed with sandstones, 
 and appears again by itself on the Tapuban point. The Blaini lime- 
 stone and' conglomerate are well seen on the flanks of the Sarkanda 
 summit, and again in the Ganges at the confluence with the ITiunalgar. 
 
 In the Kumaon section we still find the limestone and slate rocks 
 
 fairly represented. The ridge of Kami Tal 
 is a broad synclinal range, with many local 
 fractures and contortions, like its type the Kiol lango. The stiong 
 limestone that forms the summits about the lake is very like the Ivrol 
 rock. Here, however, and also at Mussooree, there is a good deal of 
 trappean intrusion. In the- Syamkliet valley, north of Kami Tal, 
 trap-rock is in great force, and immediately to the north we come 
 upon crystalline schists. Along the heights of Sunthala and Gragai 
 these are gneissose. The dip throughout is at a moderate angle to 
 north-north-east, and about Almora one or moie bands of gianitoid 
 gneiss occur in these rocks. Its general mode of appeal ance is that 
 of interstratification with the schists ; but in one place it has beer 
 described as intrusive, which would establish its character as a true 
 granite. North of this, for some way, there is a reversal of the dip- 
 to south-south-west up to a line of trappean intrusion, which has been 
 traced for many miles along the strike. The rocns to the noitli of 
 this band are of a more varied character ; some aie slaty ; and lime- 
 stone is of frequent occurrence, often steatitic in the vicinity of the 
 trap. The dip is less constant in these rocks, and their relation to. 
 the crystalline schists of the snowy range is not well defined. 
 
 1 Much detail with suggestive conjectures regarding this region is given in 
 Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, v ol. ill., ai 
 
140 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 here we next get a section of the lower Himalaya through the 
 
 The Nepal section. ^ ™ U< >y> there » littl ° outward resemh- 
 
 lance to what we have seen to the west. 
 
 The Churia Grhati range, between the plains and the Etounra Dun, 
 
 is a pattern specimen of the Siwalik type. North of the Dun there 
 
 is an equally characteristic representative of the Nahan range flank— 
 
 ing the mountains. But inside this we no longer find the border 
 
 mountain-range of slaty rocks capped by plain blue limestone that 
 
 is so constant to the west of the Kali. We come at once upon 
 
 schistose rocks. These, however, are not mica schists of the ordinary 
 
 type, such as those north of Naini Tal. First there are earthy (slaty) 
 
 schists, some quite black and with carbonaceous layers ; then flaggy 
 
 quartzose schists, passing up into strong schistose quartzites ; and 
 
 these are succeeded by a great mass of dense highly crystalline white 
 
 limestone within three miles from the Nahan boundary. All are 
 more or less vertical and folded with a prevailing northerly underlie 
 the strike being 15° south of east. Beyond this steep ascending 
 section there is a broad band of still greater disturbance, apparently 
 a synclinal ; for the limestone is variously repeated, and the under- 
 lying rocks brought in again. It would seem to be followed in the 
 Chessa-garhi ridge by a crushed anticlinal, about the axis of which 
 there are thick bands of porphyritic gneiss associated with flaggy 
 quartzites. From here there is again a general ascending section 
 through similar flaggy quartzitic schists to the Chandragiri range, 
 bounding Nepal on the south-south-west. This ridge and all those 
 to west-north-west and east-south-east of the valley are made of 
 folded repetitions of one set of rocks, in which a calcareous element 
 is more or less prevalent ; varying from strong beds of pure limestone 
 to earthy schistose limestone, and prominently a thickly bedded fine- 
 grained quartzite, with scanty calcareous bond. The Shiupuri rido- e on 
 the north-north-east of the valley, is of' massive gneiss ; schists appear- 
 ing again to the north in the valley of the Tadi and the Trisul Granga. 
 
 There is sufficient resemblance in the two bands of limestone and 
 
 Possible affinities. the flaggy quartettes of this sec- 
 
 tion to suggest that they are repetitions of the 
 same series ; and this has certain characters of resemblance to the rock- 
 series at the Krol, which admit of our conjecturing their identity. 
 The whole of this Nepal section exhibits an intensity of disturbance 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 141 
 
 throughout, such as has not been observed in any other section of the 
 lower Himalaya. Only one instance of a doubtful trap-rock has been 
 noticed in the above section, in the schists near the outer boundary. 
 
 We have one more section of the lower Himalaya to take note 
 Sikkim section : of, far to the east, in Sikkim, and still more 
 
 Damuda formation. unlike than that in Nepal to the sections of 
 
 the north-west Himalaya. It is of the highest interest, because we 
 find here in a recognizable state a formation well known to us 
 in the peninsula of India, thus establishing almost the only link 
 between these separate geological provinces. There are, indeed, the 
 nummulitic deposits resting against the edges of the Deccan trap at 
 the base of the western ghats to compare with the nummulitics of 
 Subathu, and showing that the Himalayas are younger than the 
 Deccan plateau. But this is a comparatively superficial connexion ; 
 whereas in Sikkim we find a bottom formation of one of the great 
 rock-series of the peninsula, intimately connected with the rock 
 forming the mountains. It is now thirty-one years since Dr. Hooker 
 discovered Damuda fossils near Pankabari, at the foot of the Dar- 
 jeeling hills ; but it was only in 1874 that an examination of the 
 mode of occurrence of the rocks was made by Mr. F. R. Mallet, of 
 the Geological Survey, who was sent to investigate the prospect of 
 a useful coal being found. He traced the band of Damuda rocks 
 from Pankabari to Dalimkot ; at the Tista it is nearly a mile in 
 width. In the western Duars it does not occur, but on or about its 
 horizon there is a new formation, not found in Sikkim, consisting 
 largely of massive dolomite, and called by Mr. Mallet the Buxa 
 series. In 1875, Major Godwin-Austen, who accompanied the 
 expedition into the Daphla hills, found the Damudas again in force 
 at the base of the mountains in Upper Asam, the Buxa series being 
 there wanting. It is, of course, possible that the Damudas may 
 recur to the west also, in Nepal, though they do not appear at the 
 Sikkim end of the frontier, and certainly they are not specifically 
 
 represented in the section through Kathmandu. 
 
 Lithologically as well as by fossils the formation resembles its 
 Its condition and posi- prototype in the Damuda valley, consisting 
 tion. 0 f strong sandstones, gray shales, and coal 
 
 seams. In some few spots the rocks are' so little altered that the 
 resemblance is complete, the coal itself being the only rock that has 
 
142 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 not escaped modification. It is always crushed to powder, and could 
 only be utilized by being made into bricks. Very often, however, 
 the whole group is as much altered as the contiguous rocks to the 
 north, the sandstones being converted into foliated quartzites, and 
 the shales into splintery slates or carbonaceous schists. The impor- 
 tant point to settle is the stratigraphical relation of the group to the 
 other rocks of the mountains. These are, first, a zone of slate rocks, 
 some greenish and slightly unctuous, some ordinary clay state with 
 bands of flaggy quartzite, rarely hornblendic and calcareous, and also 
 rarely carbonaceous. These form the Dating series of Mr. Mallet. 
 Next comes the gneiss of the upper hills : it is distinguished as the 
 Darjeeling gneiss. The dip in all these rocks is into the mountain, 
 and hence the immediate inference that they underlie each other in 
 the above order. Here, then, we find again an instance of the puzzle 
 noticed in the section at Simla, and on which Herbert made ship- 
 wreck. Mr Mallet was unable to find any escape from the position ; 
 the Daling beds pass most regularly with parallel interstratification 
 into the gneiss by increase of metamorphism, appearing underneath 
 it all up the gorges of the Tfsta and the Ranjft to the north of Dar- 
 jeeling, but in a more altered condition. Also he found in several 
 clear sections most completely conformable and transitional junction 
 between the Daling and the Damuda beds. Their junction forms a 
 re-entering angle up the Tfsta valley ; the Damudas, however, 
 are not known to rise to the surface again in the interior of the 
 mountains. The conviction was forced upon him that they are 
 indeed what they appear to be, — the lowest and oldest rocks of the 
 Himalayan series in this position. 
 
 Yet so great is the prepossession in favour of gneiss as necessa- 
 Theoretical considera- nty ^ fundamental rock, that doubt still pre- 
 tlonp * vails amongst those who have not seen for 
 
 themselves. It may then be well to mention some independent con- 
 siderations which tend to remove this obstruction to the rationale of 
 Himalayan geology. It has long since been shown experimentally 
 that the silicious minerals entering into the composition of crystal- 
 line rocks can, through the medium of moisture, be produced 
 under very moderate temperature and pressure ; and, hence, that the 
 hydro-metamorphism to which gneiss and even granite were due 
 need not be a very plutonic operation. Also it can be urged that 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 143 
 
 although when gneiss occurs extensively on the flat, we may he 
 entitled to regard it as a fundamental rock, due to such hypogene 
 action as would require any underlying rock to exhibit as great a 
 degree of metamorphism as itself, yet when we come to mountain 
 formation the case is very different. Here a special concentration 
 of forces has manifestly occurred which may be adequate to the pro- 
 duction of this apparently anomalous result. In a recent and very 
 thorough discussion of this branch of geological dynamics we find a 
 direct explanation of our difficulty ; that if a mixed mass of strata 
 were subjected to compression, those portions which by position or 
 texture were least capable of yielding, whether by shrinkage or con- 
 tortion, would have to bear the brunt of the pressure, and to undergo 
 in some other form its effects, prominently in the development of in- 
 ternal heat. 1 In some such way overlying massive strata may have 
 been converted into gneiss, while softer beds below underwent no 
 crystalline metamorphism. If it should be shown, as in the Simla 
 region, that the Darjeeling gneiss is the same as the central gneiss, the 
 above interpretation of the Sikkim section would have to be abandoned. 
 
 Geologists in India have been long on the look-out for a connect- 
 Slight correspondence ing link between the rocks of the Peninsula 
 
 ffiSya andTf the' Pel and of the Himalaya. So many of the forma- 
 ninsula. tions in the former region are unfossiliferous, 
 
 it was hoped that some clue to their homotaxis might be obtained 
 through their representatives in adjoining regions ; and although 
 the elevation of those mountains may have occurred in tertiary times, 
 the rocks so upraised might, of course, be of any age. Thus this 
 discovery of the Damudas, as apparently the oldest formation in the 
 Lower Himalaya, at least in the east, comes rather as a surprise. 
 Although the Damuda series is, according to the most recent estimate 
 of its fossils, of lower mesozoic age, its appearance in the field 
 amongst other Indian formations is one of comparative youthfulness. 
 It is, for instance, immensely younger than the great Yindhyan 
 formation, which cover such large areas in undisturbed stratification, 
 but in which as yet no trace of life has been observed, and below 
 which there are several groups of slaty and sub-metamorphic rocks 
 before we come to the fundamental gneiss of the region. However, 
 in these matters, what is, is best ; the object being to ‘know what 
 1 See R. Mallet on Volcanic Energy, Phil. Trans., Vol. CLXIII, page 147, 
 
144 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 really has occurred. If the Himalayan sections would reflect to 
 the geology of the Peninsula some light in return for that it has 
 now received therefrom, by clearing up the doubts that still exist 
 about the age of the Damuda formation, it is all we could expect. 
 
 There is but one character found almost constantly throughout 
 
 Frequent occurrence of the Lower Himalayan sections — the frequent 
 
 througliout US the d Lower appearance of carbonaceous matter. It may 
 Himalaya. be of no great significance, but it is worth 
 
 notice. Coal-mining had been attempted near Subathu in the 
 carbonaceous shale of the infra - Krol group, or rather where this 
 rock has been compressed and glazed in fault-ground. And this 
 appearance of carbon (some of it as volatile hydro-carbons) with 
 fault-rock is very common throughout the Lower Himalaya. It 
 occurs at Simla, below Niigkanda, at Mussooree, and east of the 
 Ganges. Among the more highly metamorphosed rocks it is repre- 
 sented by graphite, as about Almora. Its appearance in the Kath- 
 mandu section, at the outer fringe of the mountains, next the tertiary 
 sandstones, is about the only specific similarity between this section 
 and that in Sikkim, where carbonaceous matter occurs in the Daling 
 and theBuxa, as well as the Damuda horizon. It may provisionally be 
 taken as a suggestive link of affinity between all these rocks. In 
 this connection it is important to recall that in Dr. Stolickza’s 
 independent classification the infra - Krol horizon corresponds with 
 his Central Himalayan Kuling series of carboniferous age, which is 
 also the age assigned by some to the Damuda formation. 
 
 From what we have seen of the rocks of the Lower Himalaya, 
 
 Conjectural affiliation of there is not much prospect of a near solution 
 the Lower Himalayan 
 
 sections. of this question. The main hope is in the 
 
 present manifest want of information. Immediately west of Sikkim 
 comes Nepal, taking up the whole middle region of the Himalaya 
 for 500 miles in length, and which through the unaccountable for- 
 bearance of our Government, is as much a forbidden land to Euro- 
 peans as is Chinese Tibet. Except on the single track to Kathmandu, 
 which has lately been traversed by a geologist visitor to the Resident, 
 no Englishman dare set foot in Nepal, whose people are entirely 
 dependent upon our good will for communication with the out- 
 side world, and freely enjoy it. In the section to Kathmandu, 
 which is only thirty miles from the plains, we have seen a general 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 145 
 
 resemblance to the rocks of the Simla region, the contrast being chiefly 
 the universally high clips and general metamorphism. Except in 
 this latter character it has little in common with the Sikkim section ; 
 specific resemblance in the two rock series cannot be made out. 
 The great limestone has no equivalent in kind in the whole of 
 Sikkim. Where distances are so great, much allowance must, 
 however, be made for probable original change in the nature of 
 synchronous deposits. The fact that the present base of these eastern 
 Himalayas adjoined, or indeed formed part of the Damuda land 
 surface, suggests a difference in the deposits near it from those at a 
 distance. We have also had to notice all through our sections a dis- 
 position in the Krol limestone to pass into a sandy rock. In some 
 such manner it may yet be shown that the Darjeeling gneiss is on 
 the same horizon as the fine calcareous schists of the Nepal valley. 
 Every geologist will understand the very precarious nature of 
 such a speculation. As an object to confute, it may be of 
 some service. 
 
 The Central Himalaya . — In treating of the Lower Himalaya we 
 
 Consist largely ol well- have had almost entirely to depend upon 
 known formations. local names for the various rock groups, and 
 
 to be satisfied with conjectural identifications of them in different 
 parts of the ground. This unsatisfactory result is owing to the want 
 of fossils. For a great part of that ground it must be a permanent 
 difficulty, owing to the high state of metamorphism of the rocks ; 
 but there are large tracts where this condition does not obtain, and 
 where we may hope that fossils will yet be found. At the snowy 
 range and over a large part of Tibet the case is quite different. There 
 numerous zones of strata are identifiable, not only locally, but 
 in the established scale of formations, by the presence of well- 
 known fossils. 
 
 Our information of those regions is, however, in a very fragment- 
 
 Rtractey, 1848-49. ary state, and must long remain so, owing 
 
 Stolickza, 1864 - 65 . to the inaccessibility of the ground and the 
 
 rigours of the climate at such great elevations. Numerous tiavelleis 
 have crossed the mountains in various directions, and have brought 
 back a few fossils and isolated observations of the rocks, but only 
 two observers have given a connected geological description of any 
 considerable area. One account is of a portion of Central Tibet in 
 
 19 
 
146 
 
 htm/layan districts 
 
 Chinese territory, north of Kumaun visited by Captain R. Strachey, 
 R.E., 1848 and 1849. The description is quoted in extenso from 
 his paper, the map attached to which is reproduced to illustrate 
 this chapter. The second and fuller account is that of Western 
 Tibet, by Dr. Stolickza, published in the fifth volume of the 
 Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, In the summers of 
 1864 and 1865 he explored the region between Spiti and Dras 
 and the Indus. It will he recollected that he died in June, 1874, 
 after crossing the Karakoram pass, on the return journey with the 
 mission to Kashgar, having lost his life through his zeal for 
 scientific research. His observations on this expedition complete a 
 rough section across the whole Tibetan mountain region from the 
 Panjab to the plains of Khotan. 
 
 Western Tibet. 
 
 Dr. Stolickza’s list of formations, observed 
 in Western Tibet, is as follows : — 
 
 Age. Group. Fossils. 
 
 IV.— River and 
 Lacustrine 
 Deposits. 
 
 III. — Tertiary. — Nummulitic ... Indus or Sliingo Beds ...Nummulites. 
 
 Second- 
 
 ary, 
 
 Cretaceous ... 
 
 
 Jurassic 
 
 (Upper). 
 
 ff 
 
 Jurassic . . . 
 
 
 Middle Lias ... 
 
 V 
 
 Lower Lias ... 
 
 D 
 
 Rhcetic 
 
 
 Triassic 
 
 (Upper). 
 
 Chikkim Beds 
 
 Gieumal Sandstone 
 
 Spiti Shales (Braun 
 Jura). 
 
 Upper Tagling Lime- 
 stone. 
 
 Lower Tagling Lime- 
 stone. 
 
 Para Limestone 
 
 Lilang series 
 
 . . .Rvdista and Foramini- 
 fera. 
 
 ...Avicula ecliinata. 
 
 Ammonites macroce- 
 phalus ParMnsoni, 
 triplicatus, etc. 
 
 Trochus epulus, Cliem - 
 nitzia undvlata, Te- 
 rebratula sinemuri- 
 ensis. 
 
 Terebratula grevaria 
 and pyriformis, 
 Rliynclionella Aus- 
 triaca, Belemnites. 
 
 ...Megalodon triqueter. 
 jDicerocardium Him • 
 alayense. 
 
 ... Ilalobia Lommeli, 
 
 Ammonites fioridus 
 etc. 
 
 I. — Palaeozoic — Carboniferous, Ruling series 
 
 „ Upper Silurian, Muth series 
 
 ,, Lower Silurian Bhabeh series 
 
 Gneiss, Metamorphic Schists, etc. 
 
 ...Productus semireti- 
 cula tus, Spirifer 
 Keilhavii, etc. 
 
 ... Tentaculites , Orthis 
 etc. 
 
 ... Orthis ? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 147 
 
 The distribution of these formations, though subject to many local 
 
 irregularities, exhibit well the general struc- 
 
 Synclical basins. . .. . r. . i • mi ■ 
 
 tural features of the region, lhere are two 
 
 main synclinal rock-basins, along the centres of which the younger 
 members of the sedimentary series, with one important exception, 
 are found. These geological features have no superficial relations to 
 any geographical basins. The Indus receives a ■ great part of the 
 drainage from both areas in this region, flowing nearly along the 
 intervening anticlinal axis. The southern basin is best exhibited 
 in the Spiti valley, where the fullest section of the upper secondary 
 formations is found. The northern synclinal-basin forms the Kara- 
 koram range. This latter ground has been very little searched, and 
 as yet neither oolitic nor cretaceous strata have been observed in it. 
 Dr. Stolickza describes the Karakoram pass as formed of liassic rocks 
 
 resting upon trias. 
 
 These long rock-basins are bounded by parallel areas of crystal- 
 The principal crystalline 1 ™ metamorpllic rocks. The southernmost 
 areas. 0 f these is that already spoken of as the cen- 
 
 tral gneiss. Its peculiarity, as compared with the other crystalline 
 ridges, is that we seem to have here what may be locally called the 
 fundamental rock. On Dr. Stolickza’s type section at the Bhabeli 
 pass, and in General Strachey’s ground, 200 miles to the east, the 
 m/Vct-Silurian rocks in a non-crystalline state, and of great thickness, 
 are represented as overlying the gneiss. There is no doubt a parallel- 
 ism of strike in the two contiguous rock-systems, but the condition 
 suggested or implied is that the conversion of the gneiss is ot pre- 
 Silurian date ; although, in the east at least, granite seems to pene- 
 trate both formations. It was in this sense of basal that Dr. Stolickza 
 applied the word central to this gneissic axis. 
 
 The gneiss and schists forming the middle region of the moun- 
 tain mass, from 70 to 80 miles wide at the 
 Middle crystalline axis. p angkong an( j Moriri lakes, are described of 
 
 a quite different type, as being largely syenitic, and as more or less 
 made up of metamorphosed Silurian rocks.. Along the north outcrop 
 of the southern synclinal basin even the zone of carboniferous rocks 
 is hardly recognizable, and all below it is converted into crystalline 
 schists and gneiss, the south-westerly dip .continuing in these rocks 
 up to the Indus : similarly along the north-east side of this gneissic 
 
148 
 
 hima'layak districts 
 
 mass the carboniferous formation is the first that is clearly recogniz- 
 able ; all below it being strongly foliated and mineralized, passing 
 with a north-easterly dip under the Karakoram synclinal basin. 
 
 The gneissic axis of the Kuenluen is also described as formed 
 Northern crystalline chiefly of syenitic gneiss and cjuartzose and 
 axis ‘ chloritic schists, the relation of which to the 
 
 adjoining slates has not been made out. Carboniferous rocks with 
 fossils have been observed on both sides of the range. On the 
 northern flanks of the Kuenluen, triassic and cretaceous deposits are 
 the only secondary formations noticed by Dr. Stolickza. 
 
 Some minor features in the distribution of the several formations 
 
 Peculiar position of the wi ^ be mentioned presently. We must 
 nummuhtic deposits. first notice the remarkable exception, already 
 
 mentioned, in the general arrangement as above sketched. The 
 nummulitic formation occurs in great force in the Central Himalaya 
 of Ladak, but not even approximately in sequence with the next 
 oldest group. The cretaceous deposits are found capping the sedi- 
 mentary series in the centre of the southern synclinal basin; but no 
 trace of nummulitic beds has been noticed near them. These occur 
 in force along the valley of the Indus, in the centre of the middle 
 gneissic area. Dr. Stoliczka remarked how strongly the rocks 
 resemble these of the same eocene age at the south margin of the 
 mountains, especially those of the Dagshai and Subathu groups. 
 It may also be noticed how similar the statigraphical conditions 
 are in both positions. In the Simla region we saw that the Subathu 
 beds were deeply unconformable to the contiguous formations, the 
 youngest of which is thought to be triassic. In the Central 
 Himalaya the unconformity is even more striking, because the 
 upper secondary period is well represented, yet the succeeding 
 lower tertiary rocks are in a totally independent basin of deposition. 
 Stoliczka estimates their thickness at 5,000 feet. 
 
 There is yet another formation to be mentioned in the Central 
 Extensive post-eocene Himalaya. We have seen granite in con- 
 eruptive rock. nection with the central gneiss. Stoliczka 
 
 frequently notices greenstone as locally associated obscurely with 
 the Silurian rocks ; and intrusive trap (much of it of presumably 
 tertiary age) is occasionally, as has been said, very abundant in the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 149 
 
 lower Himalayan rocks. There is, however, one exhibition of erup- 
 tive rocks in the Central Himalaya that calls for special notice. It 
 occurs in the middle gneissic zone, locally forming the axis of a 
 mountain range. It is more than ten miles wide at the Hanle 
 valley, and is continuous thence, with a variable thickness on the 
 south edge of the eocene rocks, to Kargil. Stoliczka describes it 
 as an epidote, diallage and serpentine rock. It appears to be, at 
 least in part, the same rock which he speaks of as syenite to the west 
 of Kargil, where the nummulitic rocks stop out. The eruptive rock 
 there gets entangled in silurian schists, and becomes quartziferous. 
 This igneous rock strongly affects the eocene strata and is therefore 
 of younger date, and is probably connected with the similar rock 
 described by General Strachey on the same strike far to the east. W e 
 were able to draw some very instructive warnings from errors of 
 the early school of Himalayan geologists, so we must not let the 
 moderns escape the same ordeal. On Stoliczka’ s first visit he did 
 not recognise the rocks on the Upper Indus as nummulitic. In that 
 position they are considerably altered, and he took them to be a very 
 old formation. In then writing of the contiguous eruptive rock, he 
 remarked ( l. c., page 128) : “ From their dark colours these rocks 
 have sometimes been referred to basalts, but they have certainly 
 nothing to do with these more recent volcanic rocks.” His next 
 season’s work proved that they cannot be older than middle tertiary, 
 and therefore much younger than the great basaltic formation of the 
 Deccan. The idea of the lithological criterions of age in eruptive 
 rocks has still a strong hold upon the German school of geologists. 
 
 It cannot be supposed that the rough cross section we have 
 Range of tll0 nummu . sketched near the west end of the Tibetan 
 litics. mountain mass can be taken as a type for 
 
 the immense region to the east. Already within known ground, 
 some interruptions can be pointed out to the longitudinal ex- 
 tension of the several structural zones. Of the continuation 
 of the Karakoram and Kuenluen, and even of the middle 
 gneissic range, we may be said to know nothing. Stoliczka 
 describes the nummulitic band as completely stopped out against 
 the syenite at Kargil ; and although this obtruding rock is at 
 least in part of later date, it is suggested that the termina- 
 tion of the eocene beds here is probably aboriginal. The eastern 
 
150 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 extension of these deposits is quite unknown, save that num- 
 mulitic strata occur in the far east north of Sikkim. Some 
 doubtful observations of them in the Changchenmo valley and about 
 the Pankgong lake are recorded. 
 
 The southern synclinal basin of secondary rocks, continuous for 
 Range of the southern d00 miles from Spiti to the north-west, is 
 basm< also interrupted in the Kargil region against 
 
 an upheaval of metamorphosed palaeozoic rocks. Any recurrence of 
 regularity in this strike cannot be expected, for the whole Himalayan 
 mountain system becomes confused there, towards the transverse 
 gorge of the Indus, where the stratigraphy is complicated by other 
 systems of flexure. The short break that occurs at the transverse 
 gorge of the Satlaj between the secondary basin in Spiti and the 
 perfectly homo 1 ogous one to the east, as described by General 
 Strachey, is also due to a transversely obtruded mass of partially 
 metamorphosed palaeozoic rocks, through which the stratigraphical 
 continuity is so far maintained. 
 
 Although the main elevations, constituting the chain of Himalayan 
 Extension of the cen- peaks, aie sometimes, at least m this western- 
 tral gneiss. region, formed of the older stratified rocks 
 
 along the outcrop of the southern synclinal basin, the underlying, 
 pseudo-conformable, central gneiss must be taken as the stratigra- 
 phical axis of the range. Stoliczka’s type-section of it at the 
 Satlaj and the Bhabeh pass is on the actual continuation of that 
 described by General Strachey to the east, in a more central portion 
 of the great Himalayan chain, where these gneissic rocks are much 
 more prominent. The connection of this gneiss of the main chain 
 with that forming the core of the ridges to the north-west of the 
 Satlaj has not been proved. There are three such ridges. On the 
 direct line of the great chain there is the Dhauladhar ridge, having 
 an axis of coarse gneiss, with slates (probably silurian and lower) 
 resting high on its northern shoulder and passing down into the 
 valley of the Ravi in Ohamba. But the Dhauladhar is cut off from 
 the Bhabeh section by the deep valley of Kulu, on the upper Bias, 
 where no massive gneiss has been observed. The Dhauladhar ridge 
 absolutely terminates at Dalhousie, the slates sweeping round the 
 end of the gneiss at the bend of the Ravi. Again, Stoliczka 
 observed his c central gneiss, ’ though greatly reduced, north of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 151 
 
 Chinab, at the southern base of the Zanskar ridge, below the Bara- 
 lacha pass. But on the south of the Chinab valley, on the northern 
 flanks of the Rotang ridge, he observed slates which he conjectured 
 to be continuous with those of the Bhabeh pass ; in which case the 
 gneiss of the Zanskar ridge can hardly be continuous with that of 
 Bhabeh section. This ridge of the Rotang pass is apparently from 
 the maps the structural continuation of the Pir Panjal range, in 
 which a coarse gneiss is again prominent. These three ridges are 
 in a manner confluent in the mountain region of Lahul and Vaziri- 
 Rupi, from which flow the head-waters of the Chinab, the Ravi, and 
 the Bias. The Bhabeh gneiss strikes into it from the east. Thus 
 it would seem as if the main Himalayan axis broke up into three 
 minor features of the same type in its extension to the north-west. 
 
 The gneiss of the Pir Panjal passes beyond Kashmir towards 
 
 The Kashmir- Kistwar Ka « hfa ' Bl,t north-west of Kashmir, at the 
 region. Zojila, the gneiss of the Zanskar ridge 
 
 is extinct, the whole range being there formed of the palaeozoic schists 
 and triassic limestone, which thus roll over from the Tibetan area 
 into Kashmir. Carboniferous limestone occurs in the valley, strik- 
 ing through the Marbal pass into Kistwar. Eruptive rocks have 
 been frequently observed in Kashmir, but none of later than Silu- 
 rian age. The whole Kashmir-Kistwar region, between the Pir 
 Panjal and Zanskar ranges, is very little known. Its geological 
 affinities are with the Central Himalaya rather than with the region 
 specially designated as the lower Himalaya, east of the Satlaj. 
 
 General Strachey’s description ofthe Central Himalaya, towards 
 
 the sources of the Indus and Satlaj, is so brief 
 that it can be given in full in his own words, 
 with his summary of conclusions upon the mountain-formation. A 
 few notes are added, giving additional information or suggesting 
 other opinions : — 
 
 “ Entering the region of the crystalline schists 1 of the great 
 line of peaks, we find the strike still remaining the same, with the 
 dip pretty constantly to the N.-N. E. Along the lines on which 
 
 Central Tibet. 
 
 1 The term crystalline schists is often used, as above, to include gneiss. General 
 Strachey hardly uses this latter word, which is now so much applied to distinguish 
 the felspathic and often massive form of metamGrpliic rock. It is probable that 
 some, at least, of the granite of General Strache3 r ’s description is really massive 
 gneiss. 
 

 152 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Granite. 
 
 tlie points of greatest elevation are found in this part of the range, 
 we invariably see for a breadth of several miles, veins of granite 
 
 in great abundance penetrating the schists, 
 often cutting through them, but perhaps most 
 frequently following the bedding of the strata, between which they 
 seem to have been forced. The great peaks are, I think, in almost 
 every case composed of schistose rock, but the granite-veins may 
 be most clearly seen on the faces of the mountains to very great 
 elevations. Karnet, one of the highest of the peaks in this region, 
 seems, however, to be among the exceptions of this rule ; its sum- 
 mit, which is upwards of 25,500 feet above the sea, appearing to 
 consist of granite alone. This line of granite seems to be sub- 
 divided into several branches, distributed generally along the strike, 
 but otherwise not very regularly (see map). It appears to consist, 
 where I have seen it, almost entirely of veins of moderate size, and 
 such is probably its general character in the portion of the moun- 
 tains between the Satlaj and the Kali ; but the veins occasionally 
 expand into masses of considerable magnitude, and more rarely large 
 outbursts are met with that constitute whole mountains. In the 
 vicinity of the peak to which I have just alluded, Kamet, the granite- 
 area is very large (see map), and a similar development of it also 
 occurs in the vicinity of Gangotri, at the source of the sacred branch 
 of the Ganges. The vein-granite is usually large-grained with 
 schorl-crystals. It is very hard and durable, neither it nor the schists 
 that accompany it being at all liable to decay. The felspar of all 
 granites that I have seen in these mountains is white, and kyanite 
 is of frequent occurrence in the veins. 
 
 “ The schists that accompany this granite are very hard and 
 
 crystalline, and comprise all varieties of 
 mica-schist and gneiss. Beds of highly crys- 
 talline limestones, some pure, others hardly to be distinguished by 
 sight from mica-schist, are of frequent occurrence, and a band of 
 such rocks seems to traverse the country near the line of greatest 
 elevation. The strata, where penetrated by the granite, are often 
 very much contorted, and the dip appears on the whole to increase 
 as we approach the granite, where it reaches an angle of 45°, 
 w T hich it does not often exceed. Thermal springs are met with 
 in many of the valleys along the line of granite, and in several 
 
 Schists. 
 
 % 
 
 * 
 
 v 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 153 
 
 tha£ 1 am acquainted with the temperature seemed pretty regularly 
 to be about 128° Fahr. The whole of the appearances presented 
 by the granite and crystalline schists of the great line of peaks in 
 this part of the mountains seem to be universally repeated through- 
 out the whole length of the chain when we reach the region of max- 
 imum elevation ; and as we extend our examination, we still conti- 
 nue to find additional reasons for concluding that the general geo- 
 logical phenomena of the range, and the causes that have produced 
 them, remain very similar over great distances. 
 
 “ In immediate succession to the crystalline schists penetrated 
 
 , by granite veins, we here come at once upon 
 
 Slates and conglomerates. r 
 
 slaty beds overlying them, along the bottom 
 of which, near the mica-schists and gneiss, is a line of granite-veins 
 differing somewhat in appearance from those of the larger eruption, 
 and not producing any great alteration in the slaty beds themselves, 
 as is shown by the occurrence of a coarse conglomerate, the 
 component parts of which are perfectly distinct, only a few feet 
 above the granite. Sufficient change, however,' has taken place to 
 prevent our distinguishing much more than that the constituents 
 of this rock are chiefly quartzose, and that it contains rounded stones 
 of all size. I have met with this conglomerate in a similar position, 
 and with much the same general appearance, thirty miles or so further 
 to the east. Above these are slaty beds, in all perhaps 9,000 feet in 
 thickness, consisting of coarse slates, grits, and limestones, all more 
 or less affected by slaty cleavage, and all devoid of fossil remains. 
 
 u It is after reaching the top of these strata, which is rarely 
 
 done at a less elevation than 14,000 feet 
 
 Fossilliferous rocks. 
 
 above the sea, that we at length enter again 
 a region of fossilliferous rocks, which extends as far as my exami- 
 nations have been carried. And it is not a little wonderful to find 
 at this immense elevation a regular succession of most of the more 
 important formations, from the Silurian to the Tertiary Periods. 
 The Palaeozoic beds met with immediately above the slaty rocks 
 I have just mentioned seem to have a thickness of about 6,000 feet, 
 but it is quite possible that organic remains may extend lower than 
 I supposed ; indeed, from the very difficult nature of the country, 
 the precise thickness of the deposits and the limits of the different 
 formations cannot be determined properly without a much more 
 
 20 
 
154 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 careful examination of the country than I was able to give it. The 
 lower portion of these strata are undoubtedly of lower Silurian age, 
 and I am indebted to Mr. Salter for the following list of the species 
 that he has been able to recognize on a somewhat cursory examina- 
 tion of my specimens. 
 
 “ Among the Trilobites are — Cheirurus (the Silurian form of 
 the genus), Lichas, A sapiens (only as yet found in Lower Silurian 
 beds), IUcenus, Calymens, Prosopiscus , Splicer exochus. 
 
 u Of Molluscs are — Strophomena, a strongly ribbed Ortlvis , 
 Terebratula , Leptama very like L. clepressa, Lingulla, Orthoceras, 
 Cyrtoceras , Lituites, Theca , Bellerophon, Murchisonia , Pleurotomaria 
 JRaphistoma, and Ctenodonta. 
 
 “ Of Polyps — Ptilodictya, Chcetetes. 
 
 “ Also Encrinites and Cystidos, Tentacidites and other Annelids 
 and Fucoids. 
 
 “ I had also an opportunity of showing these fossils io M. Bar- 
 rande, who appeared to have little doubt, from their general cha- 
 racter, that some of the beds from which they came were certainly 
 of Lower Silurian age. 
 
 “ The lowest beds of these Palaeozoic strata consist of dark- 
 
 coloured thickbedded limestones, in some 
 Stiatification. places filled with corals. They are succeeded 
 
 by limestones mixed with slates, in which were found the strong-ribbed 
 Orthis, Terebratula, Lingula, Bellerophon, and fragments of Encri- 
 nites. Above these come flaggy limestones with grits, that contain 
 the greater part of the Trilobites, Strophomena, Leptama, Lituites, 
 Ptilodictyon, Cystidece, and Fucoids. The beds then become more 
 argillaceous, and shales and slates mixed with an impure concretion- 
 ary limestone follow. In these beds are found Cyrtoceras and 
 Orthoceras, and amongst the nodular concretions of limestone a 
 Chcetetes is common. Next in order come dark-red grits, sometimes 
 marly, containing only a few fragments of Encrinital stems. Above 
 these, pale flesh-coloured quartzite, and finally a white quartzite, in 
 neither of which I ever found any fossils, and which form the 
 highest peaks of the ridges composed of the Palaeozoic rock. The 
 whole of these strata are in various degrees affected by cleavage 
 and joints, which penetrate all the beds without regard to tlieir 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 155 
 
 mineral character, although in a somewhat less marked degree in the 
 limestones and quartzites. That the general sequence of these strata 
 is pretty regularly maintained, I have seen over a longitudinal 
 extent of about fifty miles, but it appears highly probable that their 
 development has a far greater range, as we shall also see to be the 
 case with some of the other groups of the fossiliferous rocks. 
 
 “ Before passing on, I must observe the very remarkable simi- 
 larity of general mineral appearance that 
 
 Compared witli England. . -i . 1 1 0*1 • 1 
 
 subsists between the bilurian rocks 01 the 
 
 Himalaya and of England. The peculiar pale tint assumed by 
 many of these rocks answers most exactly to the descriptions given 
 by Sir Roderick Murchison of the Silurian districts of Wales, and 
 the characters of the concretionary limestones of both countries 
 appear equally to correspond. Even in hand specimens the texture 
 and appearance of the rocks and of the fossil impressions are so 
 similar that they might most readily be mistaken one for the other. 
 In pointing to these resemblances, however, I would not have it 
 supposed that I should wish in any way to set up mineral character 
 as a criterion by which to decide on the age of any rock. Never- 
 theless, the facts, if they are to be relied upon, would appear to indi- 
 cate that as we see the conditions of the existence of organic matter 
 to have been generally similar over large areas, or even over the 
 whole earth, during the same epoch, and to have changed with the 
 progress of time, so likewise has it been with the conditions under 
 
 which the mineral constituents of the earth have been aggregated. 
 
 • > 
 
 “ The Palaeozoic strata that I had an opportunity of examining 
 
 in detail in situ , which I have just been 
 Silurian predominates. 1 
 
 describing, appear to be exclusively Silurian, 
 
 but the existence of rocks of Devonian or Carboniferous age seems 
 to be shown by some of my specimens, not found in situ, which 
 contain Productus, Clionetes , Athyris, Orthis, Aviculopecten, Spirifer. 
 I may here be allowed to repeat that the higher portions of the 
 .Silurian rocks being usually found at elevations of 17,000 or 18,000 
 feet, their examination is not a very easy task, and the difficulties 
 occasioned by the great altitude are infinitely aggravated by the 
 confusion into which the beds are thrown by the vast dislocations 
 that have accompanied the elevation of these mountains. In con- 
 cluding my remarks on the Palaeozoic beds I would observe that, 
 
T56 
 
 HIMALAYAN DIRTRT'CTS 
 
 as a' general rule, to which, however, there are no doubt many 
 exceptions, these rocks are to be found forming the summits of the 
 highest passes between the British provinces of Kumaon and Grarh- 
 wal and Tibet, which probably average 18,000 feet in elevation, and 
 that the highest points of the ridges on which these passes are found 
 not unfrequently reach nearly 20,000 feet in altitude. 
 
 “ In proceeding along the section, we shall next observe some 
 t . beds very remarkable from their apparently 
 
 close similarly to the Trias of Europe. I 
 can now only regret that, not having been sufficiently aware of their 
 importance, their exact relation to the beds below them has not been 
 better made out ; but their position in the series immediately above 
 the Palaeozoic rocks is at least certain. In one place these strata 
 were found in situ intermediate between the Palaeozoic and Secondary 
 rocks, but the greater part of my specimens were obtained from 
 fragments lying on the north slope of the Palaeozoic ridge, which 
 appears to terminate with a line of fault, to the north of which a 
 cliff of Oolitic age suddenly rises. From these strata I have obtained 
 not less than twenty-five species of fossil shells, which is a remark- 
 able Circumstance, considering the small bulk of the specimens that I 
 was able to bring away with me. Mr. Salter, who has been so good 
 as to examine these also, tells me that we have Ammonites several, 
 Ceratites, Orthoceras , Natica, Exogyra, Halobia, ( Aviculci ), Pecten , 
 Lima , Athyris , Walclheimia , Rynchonella , Spirifer. The Triassic 
 beds were chiefly dark-coloured limestones and, where seen in situ , 
 were associated with shales and dark-red grits, the latter of which 
 seemed very similar to those found near the top of the Palseozoic 
 series. The line on which they were seen was, however, a very bad 
 one for determining such matters, for it was in one of the great 
 valleys, and consequently on a great dislocation where accumulations 
 of debris almost always greatly predominate over rock in situ. 
 
 “ In our progress northward, we next come upon the strata that 
 
 T . . form the representatives of the Jurassic sroun 
 
 Jurassic senes. . ® 1 * 
 
 As m the Palmozoic beds, so we here find 
 the general dip to be to the north ; but it is impossible for me to offer 
 any opinion as to the degree of conformability of any of these depo- 
 sits one to another, owing to the great disturbances to which they 
 have everywhere been subjected. It appeared to me, however, as 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 157 
 
 probable that in the parts of the mountains that I examined, a great 
 line of fault intervened between the Oolitic and Palaeozoic series. 
 The mountain-ridge of Silurian age most carefully examined by me 
 lies generally parallel to the line of strike, and along its north-east 
 face runs a stream separating it from the Secondary rocks, which 
 rise in an almost impassable precipice beyond. The section here 
 exposed must be at least 5,000 or 6,000 feet in thickness, but the 
 difficulties of the route prevented my extending my examinations 
 into the' 'lower beds. The lowest that X reached weie of black lime- 
 stones and shales, with very few organic remains, and those very 
 imperfect. Above these lie several thousand feet of limestones of 
 various descriptions, the rock in some places being almost made up 
 of fragments of shells. Professor Forbes, who has kindly looked over 
 my specimens from these beds, is inclined to identify some of the 
 species with certain forms that occur in the Fuller’s Earth and Corn- 
 brash of England ; and it appears that there is here no representa- 
 tive of the Lias. 
 
 “ Continuing to ascend in the series, we reach next a large devel- 
 opment of dark-coloured shales which abound 
 Oxford Clay. w jth remains of Ammonites and Belemnites, 
 
 the former usually imbedded in spherical nodules, apparently of 
 much the same nature as the shale itself, but exceedingly compact. 
 The shale is for the most part, on the other hand, very rotten, 
 and the band of country along which it is found is often 
 depressed so as to form a valley, apparently in consequence of 
 this disintegration of the rock. This shale Professor Forbes pro- 
 nounces to be without doubt of the age of the Oxford Clay, a con- 
 clusion indicated by the peculiar forms of the Ammonites , two of 
 which seem to be identical with species found in beds of the same 
 age in Kachh and Sind, which have been figured and described in 
 PPq Transactions Greol. Soc. 1 The existence of these beds in the 
 northern parts of the Himalaya was pointed out by Sir Roderick 
 Murchison some years ago, as proved by the occurrence of some 
 of these Ammonites, which he had seen. There is indeed direct 
 evidence of the existence of these Oxford Clay strata for a distance 
 of about 200 miles to the westward of the places where I have 
 myself seen them, and their prolongation along the north of the 
 
 > N. Ser., Vol. V. 
 
158 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 mountains for 200 miles more in an easterly direction is rendered 
 highly probable by the well-attested recurrence of the Ammonites 
 in the eastern parts of the kingdom of Nepal. Although we find 
 stratified deposits apparently lying conformably on the Oxfordian 
 strata, I cannot say anything definite regarding them, as they appear 
 to be almost entirely devoid of fossils. They are very hard and 
 compact, consisting of grits, shales, and limestones, and have not 
 improbably been converted into their present state by the action of 
 eruptive rocks which are of common occurrence in this region. 1 
 
 O 
 
 [Subsequent to the publication of General Strachey’s papers in 
 the Journal of the Geological Society, a description of his collections 
 of fossils was drawn by Messrs. Salter and H. F. Blanford, and 
 printed for private circulation. The following complete lists are 
 taken from that work : — 
 
 Si lu ei an Fossils. 
 
 Asaphus emodi. 
 
 Illaanus brachyonisus. 
 
 Do. punctulosus. 
 Cheirurus mitis, 
 Prosopiscus mimus. 
 Sphaeaexochus idiotes. 
 Lichas Tibetairas. 
 Calymene nivalis. 
 Tentaculites sp. 
 Serpulites sp. 
 
 Nautilus ? involvens. 
 Cyrtoceras centrifugum. 
 Lituites iuliformis. 
 Orthoceras striatissimum. 
 
 Do. Kemas. 
 
 Theca lineolata. 
 Bellerophon Ganesa. 
 Strophomena trachealis. 
 Do . cheemerops. 
 
 Do. umbrella. 
 
 Do. aranea. 
 
 Do. nubigena. 
 
 Do. bisecta. 
 
 Do. halo. 
 
 Do. lineatissima. 
 
 Orthis Thakil. 
 
 Do. Tibetica. 
 
 Murchisonia Himalensis. 
 
 Do. pagoda 
 Pleurotomaria turbinata. 
 Raphistoma emodi. 
 Trochonema htimifusa, 
 Cyclonema rama. 
 
 Do. subtersulcata. 
 Holopea varicosa. 
 
 Do. pumila. 
 Ctenodonta sinuosa. 
 Cyrtodonta ? imbricatula. 
 Lingula Kali. 
 
 Do. ancyloides. 
 Leptfena Himalensis. 
 
 Do. repanda. 
 
 Do. cratera. 
 
 Do nux. 
 
 Orthis compta. 
 
 Do. monticula. 
 
 Do. uncata. 
 
 Ptilodictya ferrea. 
 
 Do. plumula. 
 Spliaerospongia mclliflua. 
 
 Oo. inosculans. 
 
 Chaetetes ? Yak 
 Heliolites depauperata. 
 
 Carbonipeeous Fossils. 
 
 Productus Purdonii. 
 
 Do. Flemingii. 
 Chonetes Vishnu. 
 
 Athyris Roissyi. 
 Aviculopecten hyemalis. 
 
 , , J?., 1 873 p Mr * T - Hughes of the Geological Survey, brought some fossils from 
 
 the Milam Pass. They were identified by Dr. Waagen as representing crestacJouT 
 Jurassic, triassic, penman, carboniferous, and Silurian formations This briS 
 the series here into fuller agreement with that described by Stoliczka in Western 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 150 
 
 Ammonites floridus. 
 
 Do. Aon. 
 
 Do. Winterbottomi. 
 
 Do. planodiscus. 
 
 Do. diffissus. 
 
 Do. Gaytani. 
 
 Do. Ausseeanus. 
 
 Do. Blanfordii. 
 
 Ceratites Jacquemonti. 
 Orthoceras pulchellnm. 
 
 Do. salinarium. 
 
 Natica subglobulosa. 
 
 Belemnites sulcatus. 
 Amonites acucinctus. 
 
 Do. alatus. 
 
 Do. bifrons. 
 
 Do. biplex 
 
 Do. communis. 
 
 Do. concavus. 
 
 Do. Eugenii. 
 
 Do. Geravdi, 
 
 Do. Griffithii. 
 
 Do. guttatus. 
 
 Do. Hookeri. 
 
 Do. heterophyllus. 
 
 Do. Himalayanus. 
 
 Do. Hyphasis. 
 
 Do. Jubar. 
 
 Do. Medea. 
 
 Do. Nepalensis. 
 
 Do. octagonus- 
 
 Do. robustus. 
 
 Do. scriptus. 
 
 Do. Spitiensis. 
 
 Do. strigilis. 
 
 Do. temiistriatus. 
 
 Do. torquatus. 
 
 Do. triplicatus 
 
 Do. Tliouarsensis. 
 
 Do. umbo. 
 
 Do. Wallicbii. 
 
 Triassic Fossils. 
 
 Exogyra sp. 
 
 Halobia Lommeli. 
 
 Pecten scutella. 
 
 Lima Stracheyi. 
 
 Atbyris Deslongchampsii. 
 
 Do. Strohmeyeri. 
 
 W aldheimia Stopp'ani. 
 Rhynclionella retrocita. 
 Spirifer Oldliami. 
 
 Do. Stracheyi. 
 
 Do. Rajah. 
 
 Oolitic Fossils. 
 
 Anatina Avaginula. 
 Myophoria Blanfordi. 
 Cardium truncatum. 
 Cyprina trigonalis. 
 
 Astarte major. 
 
 Do. unilateralis. 
 
 Modiola sp. 
 
 Nucula cuneiformis. 
 Cuculhea virgata. 
 
 Do. leionota. 
 Inoceramus Hookeri. 
 
 Lima acuta 
 
 Do. gigantea. 
 
 Do. mitiloidea. 
 
 Monotis concenticus. 
 Avicula echinata 
 
 Do. imequivalvis. 
 
 Pecten tequivalvis 
 Do. comatus. 
 
 Do. bifrons 
 
 Do. monilifer. 
 
 Do. Lens. 
 
 Do. Sabal. 
 
 Ostrea flabelloides. 
 
 Do. acuminata. 
 
 Terebratula numismalis. 
 Do. - carinata. 
 
 .Do. globata. 
 
 Rhynconella variabilis. * 
 Do. concinna. 
 
 Acrosalenia ? 
 Pentacrinites sp.] 
 
 Turritella moutium. 
 
 Pleurotomaria ? sp 
 Turbo invitus. 
 
 Cliemnitzia sp. 
 
 « But the most striking feature of the geology of these mom- 
 
 tains is probably that which I have next to 
 Tertiary deposit. mention, viz., the existence of a great Terti- 
 
 , ry deposit at an elevation of from 14,000 to 16,000 feet above the 
 L; still preserving an almost perfectly horizontal surface. On 
 crossing the watershed-ridge between the streams that flow to the 
 uth into the Ganges, and those that fall into the upper part of the 
 Satlaj to the north, which here constitutes the boundary between 
 the British territory and Tibet (see map), we find ourselves on a plain 
 
160 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 120 miles in length and varying from 15 to 60 miles in breadth, 
 that stretches away in a north-westerly direction. Its western por- 
 tion is everywhere intersected by stupendous- ravines, that of the 
 Satlaj being nearly o,000 feet deep. The sections afforded by these 
 enable us to see that this plain is a deposit of boulders, gravel, clay, 
 and mud of all varieties of fineness, laid out in well-marked beds 
 that iun nearly parallel with the surface, and that hardly deviate 
 from a horizontal position. The discovery of the fossilized remains 
 of several of the larger mammalia distinctly marks the Tertiary age 
 of this deposit. The existence of such fossil remains in the northern 
 paits of these mountains had been long known, but we were alto- 
 gether ignoiant of the precise locality whence they came, and had no 
 facts before us from which any conclusions could be formed as to 
 their geological import. The Mti Pass, from which it was said 
 that the bones had been brought, was not the place where they were 
 found, but one of the routes only by which they came across the 
 great Himalayan chain from unknown regions beyond. 
 
 Mi. Waterhouse, who has been so obliging as to examine 
 
 So-called Niti fossils. ^ ie s P ec “ 2iens that I procured from these 
 
 beds, informs me that he recognizes amongst 
 them the following : — Metacarpal bone and distal end of tibia of 
 Hippotherium ; patella of small horse ; distal end of radius of a larger 
 species of horse ; distal half of tibia of a horse of very large size ; 
 part of metacarpal of a horse ; upper end of tibia of bovine ruminant ; 
 dorsal vertebra of a ruminant. Portion of head of an undescribed 
 animal allied to goat and sheep, having, like them, prominent orbits, 
 and the hords above the orbits; but which differs in the peculiar form 
 the bony core of the horns. The horns are remarkable for being placed 
 very near to each other at the base (their upper portions are broken 
 off). There is a specimen in the British Museum, however, from 
 the same locality, of an animal very like this, in which the horns are 
 seen to be short, stout, and slightly bent outwards at the apex. 
 Right wing of the atlas vertebra of rhinoceros ; phalanx of one of the 
 outer hmd toes of ditto ? ; and portion of tooth of elephant ? Speci- 
 mens of the bones of ruminants, pachydermata, and other animals 
 from this district, presented to the Society by Sir Thomas Colebrooke 
 and Dr. Traill, are in the Museum of the Geological Society 
 
 I irmrlrm * 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 161 
 
 u The bones that we have hitherto obtained from these strata are 
 
 Actual Site as yet not almost all very miserable fragments, so that 
 identified. jt is difficult even for the very learned natu- 
 
 ralists that I have mentioned to do more than distinguish the genus 
 to which they belong. It is therefore, I am afraid, at present impos- 
 sible to come to any decided conclusions as to the identity or other- 
 wise of the species here found with those of the Siwalik hills, a 
 question of the greatest interest with reference to all our speculations 
 on the geology of these mountains. The fossil bones I have not 
 seen in situ nor indeed, curious to say, could I, in spite of every 
 attempt, learn a definite locality in which any one knew positively 
 that they had been found. But of the general position where they 
 occur there can be no doubt, for, besides the common account of their 
 being found in some of the ravines that traverse the plain, on many 
 of the specimens quite enough of the rock in which they are 
 imbedded has remained to enable me to recognize a fine-grained 
 calcareous conglomerate exactly identical with beds such as I 
 have seen intercalated with the boulder and gravel beds that consti- 
 tute the mass of the deposit. Hills of limestone rise here and there 
 above the general level of the plain, and it appears as though the 
 calcareous matter derived from them had cemented together portions 
 of the sands and gravels that were deposited near them. 
 
 Probably of marine origin. 
 
 “ The existence of such animals as I have mentioned as being 
 
 found in these beds being a physical im- 
 possibility in the present state of the country, 
 there can be no doubt that the strata have been elevated, to their 
 present height from some lower level since the time of their 
 deposition. There is no direct proof that these beds are marine, no 
 shells having been obtained from them, but I think on the whole 
 that the probabilities appear to be in favour of this plain having been 
 a true sea-bottom rather than of having been occupied by a detach- 
 ed body of fresh water. The general extension of some of the 
 older fossiliferous rocks along the northern face of the Himalaya 
 over a great longitudinal distance is a fact of which we have 
 tolerable proof, and it thence follows that the line on which they 
 occur, distant about twenty or thirty miles to the north of the 
 great line of peaks,, has probably been a sea-margin from the 
 remotest ages of the earth’s history until as late as the Oolitic 
 
 21 
 
162 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 period at least. So far, therefore, there is nothing adverse to my 
 supposition ; nor is the present interruption of the plain any proof 
 that it did not once have a far greater extension. This is suffi- 
 ciently proved hy my having traced these tertiary beds to the very 
 top of the watershed-ridge in the vicinity of the Niti Pass, where 
 they reach an elevation of upwards of 17,000 feet ; the summit of 
 that pass being strewn with boulders that appear to be derived from 
 the white quartizite capping the Silurian strata of the neighbourhood. 
 Further, two or three miles to the south of the pass, a detached 
 portion of this deposit is to be seen on the declivity of the moun- 
 tain, which must have been separated from the general mass by the 
 dislocations that have upheaved the whole country. It is, moreover, 
 to be noticed that there seem to be grounds for supposing that 
 plains, such as I have mentioned, are found in other parts of the 
 chain under somewhat similar circumstances, which may not 
 improbably have once formed portions of the same sea-bottom. 
 The plain of Pamir, so long known from the accounts of Marco 
 Polo, and the existence of which is fully corroborated by Lieut. 
 Wood of the Indian Navy, in his Narrative to his Journey to the 
 Source of the Oxus, may be its representative to the west ; while 
 to the east the plains described by Turner as having been passed 
 over during his embassy into Tibet, as well as others mentioned by 
 Kirkpatrick as existing to the north of Nepal, the descriptions of 
 which are quite confirmed by Dr. Hooker, are not improbably of a 
 similar nature. Another argument in favour of the marine origin of 
 this deposit is, I think, also to be derived from the very regular way in, 
 which the beds of gravel and boulders are laid out, for which I should 
 conceive that some action like that of the tides would be requisite. 1 
 
 1 No notice has been taken of these great detrital accumulations up to this, 
 because they occur on the grandest scale in the regions described by General 
 Strachey ; but every explorer in the Ladak country has noticed deposits of the same 
 kind. In many cases they are very recent. The process of their formation has 
 been very well described by Mr. Drew in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological 
 Society for 1873. From the fossils enumerated above, it is, however, certain That 
 some of them are very ancient The fact that General Strachey did not observe 
 the actual site of these bones leaves it open to. conjecture whether they may not 
 occur in some disturbed beds more or less covered by these horizontal gravels ; for 
 it is very difficult to conceive how any great dislocation or upheaval of the moun- 
 tains can have occurred without disarranging such incoherent materials. On the 
 other hand, the fact that such large animals as the Yak, the Kiang, the Ovis Am- 
 mon, &c., now flourish in the wild state in those bleak sterile regions suggests, 
 that a moderate change of climate, without any great change of elevation, might 
 make them habitable for the fauna now found fossil there. No evidence for 
 marine action later than the nummulitic period is known within the Himalayan 
 border, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 163 
 
 « X have already mentioned the occurrence of eruptive rocks in 
 the Tibetan plateau. A great outburst, in 
 Eruptive rocks. which are found hypersthene and bronzite, 
 
 besides syenitic and ordinary greenstones, and various varieties of 
 porphyry, occurs in the vicinity of the lakes which are found at the 
 eastern extremity of the plateau (see map). The greenstone is 
 known to extend considerably to the west, and forms, at an elevation 
 of about 17,600 feet, the summit of Balcha, one of the Himalayan 
 passes into Tibet which I have crossed. 
 
 u Having thus given a general description of the geology of this 
 
 General Strachey’s con- region, I shall, as shortly as possible, enu- 
 clusions. merate the chief conclusions to which I have 
 
 been led with regard to the physical forces that have been called into 
 action in the formation of these mountains : — 
 
 (a.) — The general extension of the chain along the direction 
 of the strike of the strata is a phenomenon necessarily connected 
 with the action of an upheaving force along a line. This longi- 
 tudinal action is further evinced by the parallelism of the lines of 
 eruptive action with that of the strike. The continuance of action 
 of the upheaving forces along the same general line for a vast 
 period of time, with occasional intervals of repose or of subsidence, 
 is indicated along both the north and south faces of the Himalaya. 
 The great depth at which the forces have originated seems to be 
 proved by the regularity of the action along the entire length of the 
 chain, as shown by the elevation of such a ridge as the Siwalik hills. 
 
 (py — The granites appear to constitute lines of elevation, not of 
 rupture ; but there seems to be no specific action produced by them 
 on the dip of the strata, which they appear to leave generally 
 unchanged. 
 
 ( c .) — The greenstones, on the other hand, usually follow lines 
 of dislocation of the strata, being sometimes apparently contem- 
 poraneous, and at others intruded through rocks already consoli- 
 dated. 
 
 U.) The cause of the general north-easterly direction of the 
 
 dip is obscure, although its occasional sudden reversal to south- 
 westerly seems to indicate some connexion with the action of an 
 upheaving force from below, or of violent lateial thiust. 
 
jtim Xlayan districts 
 
 104 
 
 (a) — T he lines of fracture of the strata are constantly either 
 parallel or perpendicular to the direction of the upheaving force. 
 The positions ot the rivers appear to be altogether dependent on the 
 configuration of surface produced by these fractures ; while the con- 
 figuration of surface, on the other hand, seems to be but slightly 
 afiected by the action of the streams, of which there is rarely any 
 visible sign at 200 feet above the present level of the waters, and 
 never to my knowledge above 300 feet. 
 
 (/•) — The fact of the granite of the great snowy peaks being 
 seen in veins, penetrating the schists up to 20,000 feet, makes it 
 highly probable that the granite must have been injected long- 
 before the mountains received any considerable development. That 
 this granite is older than the Silurian period is rendered probable 
 by the comparatively unaltered state of the lower beds of the Azoic 
 slates at the foot of the Pakeozic series, where almost in contact 
 with it. 
 
 ([/.') — The conglomerate bed near the bottom of these same Azoic 
 slates shows the proximity of land at the time of its deposit, and 
 indicates that some upheaval of land had already taken place near 
 the present line of great peaks, possibly occasioned by the granite 
 in question. 
 
 (/«.) — The occurrence of pebbles of greenstone in the sandstones 
 along the southern edge of the mountains shows that the exterior 
 lines of greenstone are older than those beds of sandstone. 
 
 (i .) — The frequent occurrence of boulders of the quartizites, slates, 
 and greenstones of the outer ranges of mountains among the Ter- 
 tiary deposits of the Siwalik hills shows that the Tertiary ocean 
 washed the foot of those mountains. 
 
 (j.) — The regular slope of the plains of Northern India up 
 to the Siwalik hills, which rise suddenly from the flat ground, leads 
 me to infer that the sea must have continued to reach at least as far 
 as the foot of the Siwalik hills for some time after their upheave- 
 ment. 
 
 (/c.) — The rise of the Tibetan plain has not been caused by the 
 granite eruption of the line of snowy peaks. That the greenstone 
 rocks that abound in many parts of it have equally not caused it, 
 is proved by the peculiar nature of the valleys among the hills to 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 1G5 
 
 the west of the lakes, which must have been laid out level under 
 water ; from which it is to be inferred that these eruptive rocks are 
 older than the tertiary beds of the plain. The same thing is shown 
 by the occurrence of worn pebbles of greenstone in the surface of 
 the plain in the vicinity of some of the detached hills of that rock. 
 
 (/.) — The former extension of the glaciers far beyond their 
 present limits is a phenomenon that may be noticed almost every- 
 where in these mountains, and may give rise at first sight to an 
 Mea that there may here also have been some special period of cold 
 corresponding to the glacial epoch of Europe. But it seems, I 
 think, more probable that this is here only the result of a change 
 of climate consequent on the upheaval of the great plains of North- 
 ern India. 
 
 (jjk) — The existence of ancient moraines on the tertiary plain 
 of Tibet proves that the extension of the glaciers is post-tertiary. 
 Now, if we conceive that after the rising of this plain to nearly its 
 present elevation, the sea still continued to wash the foot of the 
 Siwalik hills, as I have already said that I considered likely, it is 
 clear that the climate of the Himalaya would have been far more 
 moist, and that the quantity of snow that fell on the highest parts 
 of the mountains would have been greatly in excess of what now 
 falls there, causing a great extension of the glaciers beyond the 
 limits to which they have now receded.” 
 
 There are several points in the foregoing summary that might 
 
 Remarks on the above be objected t 9 in detail, but it is hardly 
 summary. necessary to point them out. With the 
 
 much more extensive information iioav available than was at General 
 Strachey’s disposal, one ought to be able to give a more precise 
 account of the phenomenon under discussion. But one lesson of 
 experience is caution. From all sides the geologists of Europe 
 have been for long years hammering at the Alps ; yet the mode of 
 formation of those mountains is still a subject of very vague specu- 
 lation. What then can we expect from our fragmentary knowledge 
 of Himalayan geology ? In one respect we seem to have the advan- 
 tage : the much grander scale on which the phenomenon took place, 
 and perhaps also the less advanced stage of the process, have result- 
 ed in a somewhat less complexity of structure. 
 
10(3 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The process of investigation is to find out as far as possible from 
 these remnants of the formations, and their relations to each other, 
 what were the conditions of the surface at the time of deposition 
 of each, and what successive changes of conditions occurred. Thus 
 General Strachey’s observations that the metamorphism of the rocks 
 forming the crystalline axis and the introduction of the granite are 
 of pre-silurian date ; that this axis of elevation was a shore of deposi- 
 tion at that time, would be facts of prime importance in the early 
 history of this region. It would give a prodigious antiquity to the 
 be ginning of the Himalayan mountain system, for all subsequent 
 disturbances have conformed in elevation with that which produced 
 the gneissic axis. It may be remarked that this view is apparently 
 in immediate opposition to what is now a very favourite theory 
 of mountain-formation — that which connects these areas of special 
 contortion and elevation with a preceding long-continued accumu- 
 lation of deposits, and accompanying depression, in the same area ; 
 whereby through the gradual rise of temperature in the sediments 
 thus sunk to a considerable depth, expansion occurs, and also a 
 softening of the rocks, including a yielding to the horizontal thrust 
 in the earth’s crust, thus producing the compression and up-squeez- 
 ing into mountains of the accumlated sediments . 1 In the simple 
 application of this process the position of greatest elevation should 
 approximately coincide with that of the preceding greatest deposi- 
 tion, and not with the limit of the deposition, as we find it according 
 to General Strachey’s observation. 
 
 To this objection, and in defence of the theory, it may be very fairly 
 argued, that the line of actual maximum elevation is due to denudation 
 having removed the softer and more broken strata and left the more 
 massive rock ; that according to the observation under discussion, the 
 sedimentary series never passed across this primitive gneissic axis ; 
 and that the position of greatest elevation (in the active sense of 
 upheaval) occurred about the middle gneissic axis formed of meta- 
 morphosed palaeozoic rocks, all the once overlying strata having been 
 removed ; that but for this result of denudation we should have the 
 crest of the Himalaya to the north of the upper valley of the Indus. 
 
 1 Notwithstanding the numerous recent claimants to this theory, the mechani- 
 nal elements of it are essentially those given by DeBeaumont in his Systemes de 
 Montagnes, p. 1318 ; the other ideas in it being due to two other equally eminent 
 philosophical physicists, Herscliel and Babbage. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 167 
 
 The interpretation of the drainage system gives direct support 
 to this view. It is an evident postulate of physical geology that 
 along any line of elevation the drainage is originally transverse. 
 The manner in which this primitive system becomes largely convert- 
 ed into longitudinal drainage lines is explained in every text-book 
 on geology. Now, making the fair assumption that the initial 
 line of elevation coincides with the maximum line of upheaval, the 
 main watershed of the future continent is determined by that initial 
 line, and it is presumably a very permanent feature. Every geo- 
 graphy book notes the fact that the Himalayan watershed lies far to 
 the north of what is more particularly described as the Himalayan 
 range, but the line of reasoning we have just indicated would sug- 
 gest that the real axis of maximum elevation in the Himalayan 
 system may coincide more or less with the watershed. We should 
 thus have two magnificent examples of the process of drainage-con- 
 versions above alluded to : the Indus and the Sanpo (Brahmapu- 
 tra) now flow from about the same central position, having gradually 
 worn back along the line of easiest erosion, cutting off in succession 
 the originally transverse drainage along the whole line. 
 
 The applicability of this theory of mountain-formation to the 
 Himalaya system does not, however, depend upon the correctness 
 of General Strachey’s view regarding the exceeding antiquity of 
 the first gneissic axis. The gneiss there in early Palaeozoic times 
 
 may have been a floor of shallow deposition 
 Stoliczka’s views. ... ... .. ... .. , . 
 
 without being a range limiting that deposition. 
 
 Stoliczka does not adopt this latter view though, leaving it an 
 open question. His own provisional identification of lithologically 
 similar Silurian rocks in equal force to the south of the axis would, 
 perhaps, suggest their original continuity across that axis. He 
 hazarded very few remarks upon the general geology of the 
 Himalaya, wisely postponing such considerations until the data 
 would warrant something definite. He points out that the deposits 
 of carboniferous age, filling only broken ground in variable thick- 
 ness, represent the close of a general geological epoch. The 
 Permian and lower Trias are not represented. He considers that 
 after the Trias extensive upheavements occurred, laying dry large 
 tracts that have not since been submerged. The J urassic basin was 
 then approximately defined. The evidence for these conclusions is 
 
168 iiima'layan districts of the n.-w. provinces. 
 
 not given, and they seem difficult to reconcile with the general 
 regularity of succession of the rocks. On his figured sections the 
 Para limestone (Rlnetic group) is the only one that exhibits great 
 inequality of distribution, being of considerable thickness on the 
 north side of the basin, and altogether wanting to the south. His 
 remarks would, however, assign at least an early Mesozoic age for 
 the origin of some of the prominent features of disturbance now 
 stamped upon the Himalayan system. 
 
 The most notable features in the sequence of formations in the 
 Himalaya is the position of the nummulitic deposits, as already 
 mentioned. They are in greater thickness than any of the older 
 formation sexcept the lower Silurian. Stoliczka speaks of them 
 as having been deposited in the narrow basin where they now lie In- 
 the very centre of the mountain region. This view strongly confirms 
 that previously arrived at from the consideration of the same deposits 
 at the south edge of the mountains : that long and extensive- 
 denudation of the Himalayan area had preceded the Tertiary epoch. 
 It seems to have been greatest, as would naturally occur, along the 
 centre of the area of upheaval, wearing down to the metamorphic- 
 rocks along what may then have been the back of a brord- flat 
 tuberence of the earth’s crust. A comparatively slight settlement 
 of the area, submerging only the more deeply eroded parts, would 
 then have sufficed for the accumulation of those eocene deposits, and 
 it seems possible that the production of the synclinal basins of the 
 Central Himalaya — as was shown for the contortion of the infra- 
 Ivrol beds of the Lower Himalaya — did not occur, or, at least, was 
 not stron gly developed till the great compression upheaval in middle 
 Tertiary times. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 The Himalaya. 
 
 contents. 
 
 The outer Himalaya. Mountain systems; Jumna; Ganges; Kali. Subor- 
 dinate boundaries. The Nayar. Western Ramganga ; Kali. The snowy range. 
 Axis of highest elevation. The Tibetan plateau. Glaciers. Glacier of the 
 Pindar ; feeders of the glacier ; moraines ; crevasses and ice tables. Glacier of 
 the Kuphini. Motion of the Pindar glacier. Snow-line. Observations in the 
 eastern Himalaya. Observations in Kumaon. Bisahr. Across the snowy range. 
 Kumaon ; Garhwal ; Kunaor ; Western Tibet. Lakes. 
 
 We have seen that the term ‘ outer Himalaya’ has different 
 
 meanings according to the sense in which it 
 The outer Himalaya. . g ugec p Geographers understand by it all 
 
 the mountain systems lying between the snowy range and the plains 
 of India, whilst in the western Himalaya geologists restrict its use 
 to the limestone and slate formations that lie between the outlying 
 tertiary series and the central crystalline axis. To the geologist 
 Simla and Naini Tal are situate on the outer Himalaya, and Ka- 
 sauli and Subathu are not ; whilst to the geographer all these hill sani- 
 taria are on the outer Himalaya. To obtain a correct appreciation 
 of the physical relations of the ranges of the outer Himalaya we 
 cannot ignore their geological affinities, but we have as yet no geolo- 
 gical details on which we can rely for the greater portion of their 
 area. For the tract between the Tons and the Kali we have the 
 record given in the preceding chapter and the map that accompanies 
 it. A glance at this map will show us that the main line of gnei."^ 
 and granite, which is almost conterminous with the region of perpe- 
 tual snow, is met with between the eightieth and ninetieth mile from 
 the foot of the Himalaya, and at a distance of from twenty to thirty 
 miles south of the Indian water-parting. Between this line of per- 
 petual snow and the plains there are numerous well-defined ranges, 
 some seemingly spurs from the snowy axis, and of which the geolo- 
 gical relation is not well established, and others having an apparent 
 separate and independent existence. As we have already noticed, 
 the traveller from the plains meets first an outer range, which has 
 a general elevation of about 6,000 to 7,000 feet above the level of 
 
 U 
 
170 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the sea, and which in China above Naim Tal rises to 8,568 feet, 
 and in a peak, on the Tirhi road, east of Masuri, to 8,565 feet 
 This band or outer range has a general direction parallel to the 
 plains, and is pierced by the greater rivers, such as the Tons, Jumna, 
 Ganges, Ramganga (western), Kosi, and Kali. Between it and the 
 ridges descending immediately from the snowy range we cross a 
 number of subordinate ranges which are, as a rule, of considerably 
 less elevation than the outer range. Between China and Dhakuri 
 .Binayak, on the road to the Pindari glacier, a distance of forty-live 
 miles as the crow flies, there is no peak having an elevation of 8,000 
 feet, and very few attaining to 7,000 feet. But further westward, 
 in the same parallel, we have groups of peaks attaining an eleva- 
 tion of over 10,000 feet, notably those connected with the Dudu- 
 ka-toli range in Garliwal. When the river valleys close to the 
 snowy range are reached, the increase in elevation is rapid and 
 marked. The flanking ranges seldom fall below 10,000 feet, and 
 aie clowned with peaks rising still higher, until the culminating 
 ridge crowned with perpetual snow is met. 
 
 If we carefully examine the great sea of mountains lying be- 
 
 Mcrantain system. ' ^f n the outer Himalaya and the snows, 
 
 we shall find that the dominating ranges are 
 spurs from the great groups of peaks, remarkable alike for their 
 elevation and the position they fill as the boundaries of the several 
 river-basins. On the west, the western boundary of the Jumna 
 system is found in the elevated ridge that has its origin in the 
 group of peaks crossed by the Shatffl and Burenda passes. This 
 ridge follows the left bank of the Satlaj in a south-westerly direction 
 to Hatu (10,700 feet), where it bifurcates: one branch continuing 
 
 Jumna system. tlie normal direction to Bilaspur, and the 
 
 second proceeding in a south-easterly direc- 
 tion by Chor (12,081 feet), where it forms the water-parting 
 between the Giri and the Pabar branch of the Tons. A second 
 great ridge, descending from the Jamnotri groups, and marked 
 by the Deoban (9,347 feet), Chakrata (7,300 feet), Clhlmeri (7 160 
 feet), and Bairat (7,423 feet) peaks in British territory, separates 
 the affluents of the Tons from those of the Jumna. The eastern 
 boundary of the Jumna system is formed by a great ridge bavin o- 
 its origin m the same group of peaks, and which joins the outer 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 171 
 
 Himalaya near the Sarkanda peak to the east of Masuri (Mus- 
 sooree). The eastern boundary of the Ganges system is found in 
 the great ridge descending in a south-westerly direction from 
 
 the Nandakot peak, and which passes along 
 the left bank of the Pindar to its junction 
 
 Ganges system. 
 
 with the Alaknanda, and thence along the left bank of the Alaknanda 
 to Deoprayag. It admits of two great bifurcations : one at the head 
 of the Katyiir valley and one at the head of the Lohba valley. 
 From the group of peaks at the head of the Katyur valley a branch 
 passes in a south-easterly direction through Binsar and Dol and 
 along the right bank of the Ladhiya to Barmdeo on the Sarda, and 
 
 from the head of the Lohba valley a branch 
 
 Y7’ * 1 * 
 
 ll l ' runs south-by-east to Gujargarh, whence it 
 
 passes almost due west to the Ganges at Kharak and Chandi. The 
 tract to the south of these two arms is in shape a great obtuse- 
 an cried triangle, with its base towards the plains and its apex in the 
 group of hills to the north of Dwara Hat. It forms the mountain 
 basin of the western Ramganga. The eastern boundary of this 
 system forms the western boundary of the Kali system, of which 
 the eastern boundary is found in a great ridge descending from the 
 Api peak in Doti of Nepal. It is clear from the above brief description 
 that it is the spurs from the snowy range that bound the river basins, 
 and if we examine further the affluents of each system, we shall see 
 that the ramifications from these spurs form the water-parting 
 between each minor system. 
 
 The principal affluents of the Jumna system are the Tons and 
 
 the Giri. The Pabar, Rupin, and Supin 
 unite to form the Tons, and are separated 
 
 Subordinate boundaries. 
 
 from each other by transverse ridges descending from the great 
 boundary ridge. United they drain a delta-shaped basin having its 
 apex at Kalsi. To the south-west the Giri drains a similarly shaped 
 basin having its apex near Kalsi, and to the east the Jumna drains 
 one having its apex at Kalsi. "W e find that the point of junction 
 of the apices of these three deltaic basins lies within the Siwaliks, 
 the outer range of geographers, and that the union of these three 
 main affluents forms the Jumna of the plains. This basin, as well 
 as the minor systems within it, is bounded by spurs from the great 
 snowy range or transverse ridges descending from. them. If we 
 
172 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 . further examine the relations of the minor feeders of the three great 
 constituents of the Jumna system, we see that, as a rule, they flow at 
 right angles to their recipients, and that the affluents of these minor 
 feeders obey a similar law. The ridge separating the Tons from the 
 Jumna gives off feeders on the west to the Tons and on the east to 
 the Jumna, at right angles to its direction. From the western slope 
 the Dliaragad, Binol, Simula, and Manjgaon streams flow to the 
 Tons, and from the eastern slope the Ihtlena, Kutni, and Silo seek 
 the Jumna. Each of these minor feeders is separated from the 
 other by lateral spurs, descending usually from some peak or knot 
 of peaks, and all, as the veins on a leaf seek the midrib, flow towards 
 the mid-depression and give it their moisture. The two great rivers 
 that unite to form the Ganges are themselves the centres of 
 subordinate systems. The Bhagirathi is divided from the Bhilang 
 by a great ridge descending from the Gangotri group of peaks, 
 whilst a second ridge having a similar origin separates the Bhilang 
 from the Mandakini, an early affluent of the Alaknanda. The Bha- 
 girathi unites with the Bhilang near Tfrhi, and the two rivers drain 
 a delta-shaped ti'act having its apex at Deoprayag. Tire Saraswati 
 and Dhauli, which form the head-waters of the Alaknanda, are sepa- 
 rated from each other by a ridge of snowy peaks, and its more 
 southern affluents, the Nandakini and the Pindar, are divided from each 
 other by a great ridge descending from Trisul. The entire basin 
 of the Alaknanda to its junction with the Bhagirathi at Deoprayag 
 is thus a great delta-shaped tract, cut up by the minor feeders into 
 subordinate systems that are bounded by great ridges descending 
 from the snowy range. Between Deoprayag and Hardwar, the 
 Ganges receives from the east the Nayar and the Hinnal, and from 
 the west the Suswa that drains the Dehra Dun. All unite within 
 the Siwaliks to form the Ganges of the plains. 
 
 The Nay hr. 
 
 We shall now take up the compact system of the Nayar in 
 
 southern Garliwal, which at first sight would 
 appear to be an exception to the general 
 rules. We find that the boundary ridge that marks its exent is a 
 continuation of the great ridge that, descending from the snowy 
 peak of Nandakot, runs along the left bank of the Pindar to the 
 head of the Lohba valley. Here, as already noticed, this ridge 
 bifurcates ; one branch proceeding in the normal direction along 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 173 
 
 the left bank of the Alaknanda to Deoprayag, whilst the second 
 branch passes south to Gujargarh and then west to the Ganges 
 at Kharak. These two branches mark the axis of highest elevation 
 in the tract through which they pass. Following the western branch, 
 we have the Dubri peak, 9,862 feet ; Dobri peak, 9,862 feet ; 
 Gandkhola, 7,553 feet ; Devidatta, 7,034 feet ; Kankwala, 6,651 
 feet ; Gurdari, 5,893 feet ; Jhangarh, 5,878 feet ; and a peak about 
 two ’miles from Deoprayag, 5,030 feet. Following the southern 
 branch through Gujargarh, we find the second, Duda-ka-toli peak 
 with an elevation of 10,180 feet above the level of the sea ; Barma- 
 dungi, 9,190 feet; Nandatopa, 8,086 feet; Khamek, 7,152 feet; 
 Gujargarh, 7,969 feet; Kliatti, 8,270 feet; Utai-n, 6,901 feet; 
 Bukrari, 6,267 feet ; and Naugarh, about a mile above Kharak, 
 6,065 feet. Close to the point of bifurcation, the boundary ridge 
 sends a lateral spur southwards, that divides the basin of the Nayar 
 into two parts, that drained by the western Nayar or Chhiphalghat 
 river, and that drained by the eastern Nayar or Kainyur stream. 
 This great spur preserves the superior elevation of the boundary 
 ridge, and is marked by the following peaks Barari, 8,499 feet; 
 Bandani, 8,278 feet; Panjing, 8,810 feet ; Devitank, 8,849 feet ; 
 Matikhal, 7,688 feet; and Chhatargah, 6,790 feet, when it is lost 
 in the valley of the eastern Nayar near Kandui. Short ramifications 
 from this spur or the boundary ridge itself determine the course of 
 the minor feeders of the two great channels of the Nayar system. 
 Thus a transverse ridge from Dubri, marked by the Tara-ka-kand 
 (9,000 feet) and Banjkot (8,203 feet) peaks, divides the Clihiphal- 
 ohat river near its source from its feeder at Paitliani on the left 
 bank, whilst other ridges from Gandkhola, Devidatta, and other 
 peaks, separate the other feeders the one from the other. A similar 
 rule obtains along the course of the eastern branch, and we thus 
 see that there is no real difference in principle between the 
 arrangement of the drainage system of this apparently abnor- 
 mal minor basin and that of the other greater systems already 
 
 noticed. 
 
 In the system of the western Bamganga, however, we have an 
 
 arrangement for which we find an analogue 
 Western Rdmganga. - n ^ a t 0 f the Bagmati in Nepal. As we 
 
 have already seen, the basin of the Bamganga is in shape a great 
 
174 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 obtuse-angled triangle, with its apex towards the snowy range and 
 its base towards the plains, thus filling up the gap between those 
 systems that have their apices towards the plains and their bases 
 towards the snowy range. Of its affluents, the Kosi alone has a 
 considerable course within the hills, the remainder having their 
 origin in or close above the elevated tract lying along the foot of 
 the hills, and joining the Ramganga at some distance southwards 
 in the plains. Here, although the main boundary ridges are still 
 the spurs descending from the snowy range, the several streams 
 do not unite within the outer range, but, like the Bagmati and its 
 affluents, well beyond it in the plains. The Kali is known as the 
 Yankti near its source, as the Kali during the greater portion of 
 
 its course through the hills, as the Chauka 
 
 T< o]l * 
 
 or Sarda in the Bhabar and Tarai, and as 
 the Sarju and Ghogra in Oudli to its junction with the Ganges, to 
 the south of the Ghazipur district. The Kali basin is bounded on 
 the west by that of the Ganges, and on the south-west by that 
 of the western Ramganga. It receives from the west the Gori, 
 Sarju, and Ladhiya, and from the east some small streams from 
 Nepal, all of which unite within the hills to form the Sarda at 
 Barmdeo. The Sarju is divided from its affluents, the eastern Ram- 
 ganga, by a great meridional ridge, extending from their sources 
 to their junction, whilst a second ridge, running in a south-easterly 
 direction from the same group of peaks to Askot, separates the 
 latter river from the Gori. The great Pancha-chuli range, running 
 south-east from the line of water-parting, divides the basin of the 
 Gori from that of the Hanna Yankti, and a similar snowy range 
 having a like origin separates the Darma Yankti from the Kuthi 
 Yankti. The great mass of peaks comprising Trisul, Nanda Devi, 
 and Nanda-kot thus send forth great boundary ridges from their 
 entire southern face to the west between the Riniganga and 
 Nandakini : to the south-west between the Nandakini and the 
 Pindar, and between the Pindar and the Sarju ; to the south be- 
 tween the Sarju and the eastern Ramganga ; and to the south-east 
 between the last river and the Gori. These indications are suffi- 
 cient to mark the salient features of this portion of the Himalaya, 
 and we reserve the details for the Gazetteer articles of this 
 notice. 
 
OF TIIE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 175 
 
 The snowy range. 
 
 The mountain system lying between the snowy range and the 
 
 plains may therefore be said to consist of 
 an outer range parallel to the snowy range 
 and connected with it at wide intervals where it meets the great 
 ridges descending therefrom. These latter bound the river basins, 
 and the ramifications from them determine the course of the minor 
 feeders of each system. We have now to consider the snowy range 
 itself, and in these provinces at least it is a well-marked feature, 
 lying from ten to twenty miles to the south of the Indian water- 
 parting. The line of snowy peaks seen from Naini Tal and Masuri 
 all lie to the south of the passes by which travellers cross into 
 Tibet. The route by Nilang in foreign Garhwal through the Jadh 
 valley crosses north of the Jamnotri group ; that by Mana in Bri- 
 tish Garhwal lies to the north of the Kedarnath group ; that by 
 Milam in Kumaon behind the Nanda Devi group ; and that by the 
 Lanpiya-dhura, also in Kumaon, behind the Panchachuli group. 
 The Jadh Ganga runs in a valley parallel to the snowy range and 
 the line of water-parting, at an elevation of 15,000 feet above the 
 level of the sea, near its source at Sumla, but gradually falling to 
 below 9,000 feet at its junction with the Bhagirathi, near Bhairon- 
 gliati. The horizontal distance between these two points is a little 
 over 17 miles, and the fall is therefore over 350 feet in a mile. The 
 Vishnuganga or Saraswati descends from the Mana Pass at 18,000 
 feet above the level of the sea to Vishnuprayag, a distance of some 
 35 miles, where it is little over 5,000 feet. Here we have an 
 average fall of about 370 feet in the mile. The increase in elevation 
 from the place where the river valleys enter the area of greatest 
 elevation is equally marked in the valleys of the Dhauli, the Gori, 
 and the Darma river. Dliarcliula on the Kali, before the line of 
 snowy peaks is reached, is only 2,750 feet above the level of the sea ; 
 whilst Golam La, to the north and above that line, and about 1,500 
 to 2,000 feet above the bed of the Kali, is 8,000 feet above the level 
 of the sea. The bed of the Kali at Changru is 10,000 feet, and in 
 the twenty-five miles between it and the Lanpiya-dhui a Pass the 
 fall is over 8,000 feet, giving an average fall of 400 feet to the mile. 
 These facts well illustrate the law that the river beds 1 to within a 
 distance of ten miles in a direct line from. the snowy peaks seldom 
 
 1 See page 8. 
 
176 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 exhibit a rise of more than four or five thousand feet ; but when we 
 cross the line on which the great peaks are situated, the ascent very 
 rapidly increases, and a very few miles carries the river-bed up to 
 an altitude of nine or ten thousand feet, thus showing that the sudden 
 increase of height of the mountains along this line is not confined 
 to the peaks alone, but is a general elevation of the whole surface. 
 
 This sudden and steady rise in elevation when the line of snowy 
 Axis of highest eleva- speaks is reached appears to be a well- 
 tl0n - marked feature of the entire Himalayan 
 
 range. The snowy peaks, however, do not occur in a continuous 
 ridge, but in masses separated the one from the other by deep depres- 
 sions that form the line of drainage for all the surplus moisture of 
 the tract between the snowy range and the line of water-parting to 
 the north. These depressions are, so far as we know, a more distinc- 
 tive feature of the Indian than of the Turkish slope of the Himalaya- 
 Tibetan mass, a fact doubtless due to the greater rainfall received 
 by the former. The influence of the monsoon on the southern slope 
 is shown in its supporting a more dense and varied vegetation, and 
 even on individual ranges and hills the southern exposure is similarly 
 strongly marked in Kumaon. It is the ceaseless action of water 
 that has furrowed out these valleys from the great mass, and natur- 
 ally this has been accomplished on a greater scale and with more 
 results along the southern slope that receives the full force of the 
 periodical rains. The mass of peaks known as the Gangotri, 
 Kedarnath, and Badrinath groups, are separated from the next 
 group to the east by the valley of the Saraswati, and this group 
 again from the Nanda Devi mass by the Dhauli river. The last is 
 again divided from the Panchachuli group by the valley of the 
 Gori, and the latter from the succeeding group by the Darma 
 valley. All these valleys are inhabited and cultivated during the 
 summer and rains, and some of them are comparatively of consider- 
 able extent. The masses of snowy peaks are more like the terminal 
 ends of huge spurs descending from the line of water-parting than 
 a continuous ridge. They, however, occur in regular sequence 
 along the entire line of the Himalaya, and, as seen from the plains, 
 have the appearance of a connected chain. The following table, show- 
 ing the principal peaks that occur throughout some eleven degrees 
 of longitude, will give some idea of their number and importance. 
 
or THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 177 
 
 Points on the Himalaya mountains arranged in order of longitude by 
 Mr . Trelaivny Saunders, from the records of the G. T. S. 
 
 Number. 
 
 Name of peak. 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 Altitude. 
 
 I. 
 
 Chumalari , • 
 
 
 27° 
 
 49' 
 
 37" 
 
 89° 
 
 18' 
 
 43" 
 
 23,944 
 
 II. 
 
 Gipmochi 
 
 SB* 
 
 27 
 
 1C> 
 
 23 
 
 88 
 
 56 
 
 37 
 
 14,518 
 
 III. 
 
 Pauhunri (Donkia)... 
 
 • • • 
 
 27 
 
 5G 
 
 52 
 
 88 
 
 53 
 
 5 
 
 23,186 
 
 IV. 
 
 Chumunkn ( Chola) . . . 
 
 
 27 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 88 
 
 49 
 
 38 
 
 17,325 
 
 17,572 
 
 V. 
 
 Black rock (Guaream) 
 
 
 27 
 
 34 
 
 7 
 
 88 
 
 48 
 
 39 
 
 VI. 
 
 Narsing... 
 
 
 27 
 
 30 
 
 36 
 
 88 
 
 19 
 
 28 
 
 19,146 
 
 VII. 
 
 Pandim... 
 
 
 27 
 
 34 
 
 34 
 
 88 
 
 15 
 
 35 
 
 22,017 
 
 VIII. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Kanchanjlnga 
 
 
 27 
 
 27 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 26 
 
 5 
 
 88 
 
 88 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 50 
 
 26 
 
 27,815 
 
 28,156 
 
 X. 
 
 Kabru 
 
 
 27 
 
 36 
 
 26 
 
 88 
 
 9 
 
 15 
 
 24,015 
 
 XI. 
 
 Jannu 
 
 
 27 
 
 40 
 
 52 
 
 88 
 
 5 
 
 13 
 
 25,304 
 
 XII. 
 
 
 27 
 
 39 
 
 55 
 
 87 
 
 7 
 
 56 
 
 ... 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Sihsur 
 
 
 27 
 
 53 
 
 18 
 
 87 
 
 7 
 
 54 
 
 27,799 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Chamlaug E. 
 
 
 27 
 
 46 
 
 27 
 
 87 
 
 I 
 
 21 
 
 24,020 
 
 XV. 
 
 Mount Everest 
 
 
 27 
 
 59 
 
 12 
 
 86 
 
 58 
 
 6 
 
 29,002 
 
 XVI. 
 
 Cliamlaug W. 
 
 
 27 
 
 45 
 
 16 
 
 86 
 
 51 
 
 56 
 
 22,215 
 
 XVII. 
 
 Sankosi 
 
 
 27 
 
 45 
 
 11 
 
 86 
 
 36 
 
 57 
 
 22,826 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 52 
 
 46 
 
 86 
 
 31 
 
 57 
 
 21,987 
 
 XIX. 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 58 
 
 13 
 
 86 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 23,570 
 
 XX, 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 57 
 
 48 
 
 86 
 
 22 
 
 42 
 
 23,447 
 
 XXI. 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 57 
 
 24 
 
 86 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 19,560 
 
 XXII. 
 
 Jabjibiya 
 
 
 2S 
 
 7 
 
 36 
 
 85 
 
 54 
 
 42 
 
 21,853 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 
 28 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 85 
 
 49 
 
 21 
 
 26,305 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 28 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 85 
 
 48 
 
 17 
 
 22,891 
 
 XXV. 
 
 Dayabang 
 
 
 28 
 
 15 
 
 17 
 
 85 
 
 33 
 
 35 
 
 23,762 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 Akn 
 
 
 28 
 
 23 
 
 25 
 
 85 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 24,313 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 
 28 
 
 20 
 
 38 
 
 85 
 
 7 
 
 24 
 
 23,313 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 ■ 5 
 
 Yassa 
 
 
 28 
 
 25 
 
 58 
 
 84 
 
 41 
 
 0 
 
 25,818 
 
 XXIX. 
 
 
 28 
 
 30 
 
 7 
 
 84 
 
 36 
 
 34 
 
 25,729 
 
 XXX. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 55 
 
 84 
 
 36 
 
 9 
 
 26,680 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 39 
 
 39 
 
 84 
 
 21 
 
 56 
 
 ,,, 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 39 
 
 21 
 
 84 
 
 20 
 
 32 
 
 • . . 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 Barathor 
 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 18 
 
 84 
 
 13 
 
 56 
 
 22,947 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 0 
 
 84 
 
 9 
 
 52 
 
 26,069 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 
 
 2S 
 
 32 
 
 6 
 
 84 
 
 7 
 
 32 
 
 24,718 
 
 xxxvr. 
 
 Morshiadi 
 
 
 28 
 
 34 
 
 58 
 
 84 
 
 1 
 
 57 
 
 24,780 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 37 
 
 83 
 
 59 
 
 22 
 
 22,964 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 48 
 
 83 
 
 59 
 
 20 
 
 22,986 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 35 
 
 38 
 
 83 
 
 51 
 
 46 
 
 26,522 
 
 XL. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 30 
 
 59 
 
 83 
 
 50 
 
 55 
 
 23,641 
 
 XLT. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 39 
 
 11 
 
 83 
 
 46 
 
 22 
 
 22,471 
 
 XLII. 
 
 5 ? 
 
 Dhaulagiri 
 
 
 28 
 
 41 
 
 43 
 
 83 
 
 32 
 
 9 
 
 26,826 
 
 XLIII. 
 
 Karayani 
 
 
 28 
 
 45 
 
 39 
 
 83 
 
 25 
 
 52 
 
 25,456 
 
 XLIV. 
 
 
 28 
 
 45 
 
 8 
 
 83 
 
 25 
 
 12 
 
 25,299 
 
 XLV. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 28 
 
 43 
 
 56 
 
 83 
 
 24 
 
 18 
 
 24,912 
 
 XLVI. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 44 
 
 2 
 
 83 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 25,095 
 
 XLVII. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 40 
 
 21 
 
 83 
 
 19 
 
 6 
 
 23,565 
 
 XLVIII. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 28 
 
 43 
 
 49 
 
 83 
 
 15 
 
 9 
 
 24,181 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 44 
 
 47 
 
 83 
 
 11 
 
 18 
 
 23,779 
 
 L. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 44 
 
 30 
 
 83 
 
 9 
 
 29 
 
 21,727 
 
 LI. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 45 
 
 53 
 
 83 
 
 8 
 
 27 
 
 21,472 
 
 L1I. 
 
 Chanbisi 
 
 
 28 
 
 49 
 
 33 
 
 82 
 
 39 
 
 33 
 
 19,415 
 
 f, LIII. 
 
 Api 
 
 
 29 
 
 59 
 
 7 
 
 80 
 
 56 
 
 22 
 
 LIV. 
 
 Padchachuli 
 
 
 30 
 
 12 
 
 51 
 
 80 
 
 28 
 
 9 
 
 22,673 
 
 LV. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 30- 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 80 
 
 25 
 
 5 
 
 21,471 
 
 23 
 
178 
 
 iiimXiayan districts 
 
 Points on the Himalaya mountains arranged in order of longitude by 
 Mr. Trelawny Saunders from the records of the G. T. S . — ■ 
 (concluded.) 
 
 Number. 
 
 Name of peak. 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 Altitude. 
 
 LVI. 
 
 Nandakot 
 
 lit 
 
 
 30° 
 
 16' 
 
 51" 
 
 80° 
 
 6' 
 
 39" 
 
 22,538 
 
 LVII. 
 
 .Nan da Devi 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 30 
 
 21 
 
 58 
 
 80 
 
 2 
 
 21 
 
 24,417 
 
 LVIII. 
 
 Nanda Devi 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 31 
 
 80 
 
 0 
 
 50 
 
 25,661 
 
 LIX. 
 
 Do. 
 
 # • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 35 
 
 80 
 
 0 
 
 45 
 
 25,587 
 
 LX. 
 
 East Trisul 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . . 
 
 30 
 
 16 
 
 14 
 
 79 
 
 54 
 
 51 
 
 22,342 
 
 LXI. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 30 
 
 56 
 
 79 
 
 54 
 
 31 
 
 23,092 
 
 LX II. 
 
 West Trisul 
 
 ... 
 
 
 30 
 
 18 
 
 43 
 
 79 
 
 49 
 
 7 
 
 23,382 
 
 LXI1I. 
 
 Nandakna 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 9 
 
 79 
 
 45 
 
 40 
 
 19,916 
 
 LXIV. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 30 
 
 20 
 
 56 
 
 79 
 
 45 
 
 36 
 
 20,722 
 
 LXV. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 20 
 
 57 
 
 79 
 
 45 
 
 35 
 
 20,773 
 
 LX VI. 
 
 Do. 
 
 , , 
 
 
 30 
 
 41 
 
 6 
 
 79 
 
 44 
 
 53 
 
 22,093 
 
 LXVII. 
 
 Kamet (Ibn Gamin) 
 
 
 30 
 
 55 
 
 13 
 
 79 
 
 38 
 
 4 
 
 25,373 
 
 LXVIII. 
 
 Nilakanta 
 
 • e • 
 
 
 30 
 
 43 
 
 52 
 
 79 
 
 26 
 
 56 
 
 21,661 
 
 LX IX. 
 
 Badrinath 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 44 
 
 16 
 
 79 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 23.210 
 
 LXX. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 43 
 
 2 2 
 
 79 
 
 17 
 
 52 
 
 82,511 
 
 LX XI 
 
 Do 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 30 
 
 46 
 
 44 
 
 79 
 
 16 
 
 58 
 
 22,347 
 
 LXX II. 
 
 Kedhrnath 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • t 
 
 30 
 
 47 
 
 53 
 
 79 
 
 6 
 
 34 
 
 22,790 
 
 LX XIII. 
 
 Tharl asagar 
 
 ... 
 
 • a. 
 
 30 
 
 51 
 
 40 
 
 79 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 22,582 
 
 LXXIV. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 30 
 
 51 
 
 41 
 
 79 
 
 2 
 
 13 
 
 22,628 
 
 LXXV. 
 
 Jaonli 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 30 
 
 51 
 
 18 
 
 78 
 
 53 
 
 53 
 
 21,672 
 
 LXXVI. 
 
 Bas or Srikanta 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 30 
 
 57 
 
 25 
 
 78 
 
 50 
 
 50 
 
 20,149 
 
 LX XVII. 
 
 Bandarponchh 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 0 
 
 12 
 
 78 
 
 35 
 
 45 
 
 20/758 
 
 LX XVIII. 
 
 Jamnotri 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 '31 
 
 0 
 
 25 
 
 78 
 
 34 
 
 6 
 
 20,038 
 
 LXX1X. 
 
 Swargaruini 
 
 .. . 
 
 
 31 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 78 
 
 32 
 
 32 
 
 20,405 
 
 After crossing the line of water-parting which, as we have seen, 
 , lies at the valley heads to the north of the 
 
 1 lUGttlll plclt6Rlli t 
 
 line of snowy peaks, we come upon the 
 great Tibetan plateau which has a mean elevation of from 13,000 
 to 17,000 feet above the level of the sea. Puling on the plateau 
 by the Nilang route is 13,800 feet, Chiurkung on the Mana route 
 to Totling is 15,700 feet, Chitung-dhar on the Unta Dhura route 
 to the Satlaj is 15,810 feet, and Buljuing near the head- waters of 
 the Karnali is 15,850 feet. Rabgyaling is 14,000; Gartokh, 
 14,240 feet; Tirthapuri, 14,820 feet; and lake Rakas Tal over 
 15,000 feet above the level of the sea. Captain H. Strachey has 
 described 1 the Tibetan tableland lying between the Indian and 
 Turkish water-partings “as the flat top of a great embankment 
 exhibited in all its thickness in the scarp of the Indian Himalaya : 
 the summit, though deeply corrugated with Valleys and mountains 
 in detail, being in its general relief laid out horizontally at a 
 1 On the physical geography of Western Tibet : London, 1854; 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 179 
 
 height little inferior to that of its southern scarp.” Although the 
 highest summits yet known and measured lie along the Indian 
 slope, very lofty peaks have been seen in all parts of the interior, 
 “and the passes which must be crossed to get from one Tibetan 
 valley to another, even in the very central axis of drainage, 
 generally equal those by which Tibet is reached from India:” so 
 that, on the whole, Captain Stracliey was of opinion that the medial 
 depression is but faintly marked in the beds of’ the great rivers 
 without much affecting the mean elevation of the mass. His 
 description of the mountain system of that portion of Tibet lying 
 to the north and west of Kumaon is the best that we possess, and 
 will usefully conclude our brief review of the features of this 
 portion of the Himalaya-Tibetan mass. “ The mountains that com- 
 pose the bulk of West Nari are not easily understood or defined. 
 On ascending the highest passes we can seldom see anything but a 
 contracted view of mountain tops on all sides, looking very like 
 chaos: no general view of. ranges under our feet is ever obtainable 
 as the passes naturally select the ravine-lieads and lowest points 
 of the ridge which are not only flanked but often almost surrounded 
 by the higher summits ; and the valleys are commonly so steep and 
 narrow, especially in the Bong country, that the view can hardly 
 ever penetrate to an alluvial bottom and the sight of any inhabited 
 place from a pass top is most unusual. When travelling along the 
 bottoms of the valleys, we generally see nothing but a narrow 
 tortuous passage between steep rocky walls, shutting out all extended 
 view, and rather concealing than exhibiting the mountain ranges of 
 which they form but the lowest outworks; consequently it is only 
 by an extended series of observations and inferences, joined and 
 assisted by maps, that any regular arrangement of these mountains 
 can be distinctly established, and my account of them is liable to 
 error in proportion to the defects of my own map. The general 
 plan of the mountain system appears to me to consist of a series of 
 parallel ranges running right across the breadth of the tableland 
 in a direction so extremely oblique to the general extension of the 
 whole as often to confound the one with the other, or to convert 
 the transverse direction to a longitudinal one. The annexed figure 
 may help to explain this. Short transverse necks connecting the 
 main ranges in some parts, and cross fissures cutting through 
 
180 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 them in others, together with projecting spurs of a secondary- 
 order, will 
 
 / V 
 
 Such connecting necks, when above 18,000 feet, become more or 
 less confounded with the main ranges, and, if not above 17,000 feet, 
 often appear as low watersheds, just dividing the heads of two val- 
 leys lying in one line, but draining opposite ways. Secondary 
 spurs also may be so high and so obliquely joined to the primary 
 ranges as to make it difficult to distinguish between the two ; and 
 the cross fissures may sometimes admit a main river to pass through 
 a main mountain mass, in which case the continuity of the" range 
 is often evidenced by the extreme narrowness of the rocky gorge 
 or height steepness, and geological correspondence of its sides. 
 Much of the Indian watershed seems to be formed in this way, 
 the great snowy peaks lying mostly on the terminal butt-ends of 
 the primary ranges, sometimes widened by lateral spurs, and 
 the Tibetan passes crossing the low connecting links, whose 
 alignment forms the main watershed, but not the main mountain 
 crest.” 
 
 It seems strange that so late as the year 1847 the occurrence 
 
 of glaciers in the Himalaya was considered a matter of doubt by 
 
 the learned in Europe. There is now no fact more widely attested 
 
 and more thoroughly established than the 
 Glaciers. ^ ' 
 
 existence of glaciers at the head of almost 
 
 every valley that descends from the ranges covered with perpetual 
 
 snow. In size and importance they also fitly compare with those 
 
 stupendous peaks around them that have placed the Himalaya in 
 
 the foremost rank of all the mountains of the earth. Colonel 
 
 Gordon gives us 1 illustrations and descriptions of the great glaciers 
 
 1 Hoof of the World, 17. 
 
/ 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 181 
 
 mot by the Yarkand Mission on the journey between Leh and the 
 Karakoram pass. He mentions the lower Kumdan glacier that 
 comes from the high peaks to the north-west, and continues down 
 the right bank of the stream for over two miles, “ forming a perfect 
 wall of ice, rising from the water about 120 feet, and showing a 
 surface covered with countless pinnacles and points.” The Benin 
 olacier, also seen by Colonel Gordon, rises amongst peaks and 
 ridges from 19,000 to 24,000 feet high. “ It is about 21 miles in 
 length and from one to one and three-quarters mile broad, termi- 
 nating at an elevation of 15,800 feet above the level of the sea, with 
 a width of about three miles of gigantic cliffs of ice fully 250 feet 
 hi o h.” He adds : — “ the glaciers of the western Himalaya are twice 
 as extensive as those of the Alps, and are probably the largest in 
 the world, or at all events larger than any others out of the polar 
 reo-ions. One in the Muztagh range is believed to be 34 miles long 
 with fifteen distinct moraines ; while in its immediate vicinity is 
 another, 31 miles in length, which may be said to join with it in 
 making 65 miles of continuous ice.” Other glaciers have been 
 described by travellers in the ranges between Ladak and Garhwal. 
 In the tract with which we are more immediately concerned we 
 have glaciers at the head of the Jadh Ganga, the Bhagirathi, Vishnu 
 Ganga, Dliauli, Kailganga, Sundardliunga, Pindar, Kupliini, eastern 
 Ham- ganga, Gori, and Darina Yankti. Lieutenant Weller 1 in his 
 visit to the source of the Gori near Milam, describes that river as 
 coming “ out in a small hut impetuous stream at the foot of appa- 
 rently a mass of dirt and gravel some 300 feet high, shaped like a 
 halfmoon. This is in reality a mass of dark-coloured (bottle-green) 
 ice, extending westward to a great distance, and covered with stones 
 and fragments of rock which in fact form a succession of small 
 hills.” Here and there were circular and irregularly shaped craters 
 (as it were) from 50 to 500 feet in diameter at top, and some of 
 them 150 feet deep, and higher up these gave place to narrow 
 fissures. This glacier is between seven and eight miles long, and 
 terminates at an elevation of 11,600 feet above the sea. The glacier 
 of the Pindar in Kumaon is the one, however, regarding which we 
 have the most complete informatiom, and we shall confine ourselves, 
 therefore, to its description in detail. 
 
 i J„ A. S., Ben, XI., 1166 . 
 
182 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Glacier of the Pindar. 
 
 The Pindar river 1 is an affluent of the Alaknanda, and has its 
 
 rise in a glacier to the west of the Nandakot 
 peak and its valley, where the glacier ends, is 
 about a mile across between the precipitous mountains that bound it. 
 From the foot of the rocks on either side the bottom of the valley slopes 
 inwards with a moderate inclination, leaving in the middle a hollow 
 about 300 yards wide and 250 feet deep, with very steep banks, at the 
 bottom of which flows the river. This comparatively level space 
 between the precipices on either side and the river bed is observable 
 for a mile or more below the end of the glacier, though much cut up 
 by watercourses. The glacier occupies about two-thirds of the whole 
 breadth of the head of this valley, leaving between itself and the 
 cliffs on the east an open grassy slope, which extends along the foot 
 of the moraine for upwards of a mile and a half above the source 
 of the river, and which seems to be a continuation of the level space 
 before mentioned. The first appearance of the glacier is thus 
 described : — “ It seems to be a vast rounded mass of rocks and ground 
 utterly devoid of any sign of vegetation, standing up out of a grassy 
 valley. F rom the foot of its nearer extremity the river, even here 
 unfordable, rushes in a turbid torrent out of a sort of cave ; the top of 
 which is but a few feet above the surface of the water (May). The 
 end, immediately over the source of the river, is very steep and of a 
 dull black colour. It is considerably fissured, the rents appearing to 
 arise from the lower parts, tearing themselves from the upper by their 
 own weight. On a closer examination this abrupt end proves to be a 
 surface of ice covered with sand and gravel and curiously striped by 
 the channel made by the water that runs down it as it melts. Behind 
 this, the glacier rises less steeply, like a bare gravel hill, to its full 
 height, which is probably aboutJ).QfLfeet above the water of the 
 river when it leaves the cave. In some places, however, are seen 
 great fissures both vertical and horizontal, the latter evidently made 
 by the separation of regularly stratified layers.” 
 
 The glacier is formed by the meeting of two ice streams from 
 
 gorges, one coming from the north-west and 
 the other nearly from the east, and which 
 
 1 From “ A description of the glaciers of the Pindar and Kuphini rivers in the 
 Kumaon Himalaya,” by Lieutenant R. Strachey, Ben. Eng., J., A. S B. XVI 
 794, and “ Note on the motion of the glacier of the Pindar in Kumaon”by the 
 same. Ibid., XVII., ii., 203, and given as nearly as possible in the writer’s words as 
 the only scientific examination of these glaciers that we possess. 
 
 Feeders of the glacier. 
 

 */. A. S. BenJXVL 706 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' — . 
 
 
 
OF THE N ORTH-WE STERN PROVINCES. 
 
 183 
 
 Kippt about two miles above the source of the river, as shown in the 
 accompanying sketch. 
 
 The feeder from the north-west is larger than that from the east, 
 and its surface is at a considerably higher level for some hundred 
 yards below their first junction. It descends with a great inclina- 
 tion, entirely filling the gorge, down which it comes in a cascade of 
 ice. It assumes the general appearance of a confused mass of 
 irregular steps, which are again broken up transversely into peaks 
 of every shape. The west side of this 'cascade continues nearly in 
 its original direction after having passed the point below which the 
 glacier bends sharply to the south-west, and in this way completely 
 crosses the glacier. The steps in which it falls, however, also 
 gradually change their direction so as to remain nearly perpendi- 
 cular to the general current of ice. The transition to the regular 
 level ice is very sudden, and begins much higher up on the west 
 than on the east side. Near the foot of this ice-fall the steps were 
 observed to have their tops considerably overhanging. A small 
 tributary, also descending in cliffs of ice, joins the main glacier 
 from a ravine on the east, not far above where it takes the sudden 
 bend. The feeder from the east is formed by the union of two 
 smaller glaciers, one from the north-east and the other from the 
 south-east, which is the larger of the two. The north-eastern tiibu- 
 tary appeared to have no very steep inclination, but was considei- 
 ably broken up at its junction with the , ’other. Another small, glacier 
 joins the main one from the north-west, a short distance below the 
 point where it bends southwards. Its in clinatio n is \ei.y gieat, but 
 it perfectly maintains its continuity of structure to the bottom. 
 
 The lateral moraine of the west side of the northern branch of 
 
 the glacier is first seen near the bend, where 
 Morames ‘ it shows itself as a black-hand along the 
 
 edge of the ice which in other parts of the fall is quite whi£g, The 
 moraine is small between the bend and the tributary glacier below 
 it, but very rapidly increases, and in its lo wer parts is a chaos of 
 desolation. This great addition to the size of the moraine is owing 
 to the quantity of ddbris brought down by the small glacier. The 
 ice below the junction is much broken up by crevasses, and rocks 
 and gravel from the moraines on both sides of the tributary glacier 
 are scattered over the space between them, and the moraines at 
 
184 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 first sight seem to lose their distinct form. Although there is no 
 clear ice between the moraine that originates on the east of the 
 tributary and the west side of the glacier, the identity of that 
 moraine is sufficiently marked by its colour and by the regular rise 
 above the general surface of the glacier of its top, which remains 
 tolerably even for some way down, being beyond the limit of the 
 disturbance caused by the prevasses along the edge of the glacier. 
 About half way down to the lower end of the glacier, however, the 
 full action of these crevasses reaches the whole of the moraine, and 
 it is scattered or lost sight of in the general confusion of surface. 
 An epoch of peculiar destructiveness to the mountains is marked in 
 one part of this moraine by the accumulation of huge masses of 
 rock from 20 to 30 feet square and as much as 15 feet high, and 
 the stone found on it are generally larger than those on any of the 
 other moraines. The true west lateral moraine, below the tributary 
 glacier, is not very large, nor is its top much elevated above the 
 bottom of the valley, excepting quite at its end. 
 
 The lateral moraine of the south-eastern side of tlio glacier is 
 Its tojy rises, on an average, probably 250 feet above 
 the bottonyof the _ valley. Along its foot runs a stream, gradually 
 inci easing in size, that collects the open drainage of the outer 
 slopes of the moraine. The lower part of this slope is a mass of 
 loose stones and earthy gravel which rolls down from above, as the 
 face of the ice which is visible in the upper fifty or sixty feet of 
 the slope melts and recedes, a process that is constantly going on. 
 On the inner side the slope of the moraine is thirty or forty feet 
 above the level of the clear ice of the glacier. The upper part of 
 the moraine comes down nearly straight from the point where it 
 meets the foot of the north moraine of the east glacier. The 
 north branch glacier being considerably higher than the eastern, 
 the moraine slopes down from the bed of the former to that of 
 the latter, forming a deep angular depression where they meet, that 
 gradually diminishes in depth up to the top of this glacier, which 
 i&Jiare ^en tirely cov ered with debris, the moraines of its two sides 
 being scattered all over it for -some distance above its union with 
 the north or mam branch. The resulting appearance is that the 
 northern branch runs over the eastern, or that the latter runs into 
 the former and is- absorbed by it. The eastern tributary brings 
 
VMM>5£ 
 
 
 S ' '' '■■■ 
 
 v\ '"|| 
 
 PfMgPIP 
 
 ■■■Pi?. 
 
 ■ : - •- 
 
 WM&& 
 
 
 Foot of th& Pindar Grinder: 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 18-5 
 
 down moraines that spread over the whole of its breadth at its 
 i2iX extremity. Besides these lateral moraines there is a^medial one 
 
 that is first seen as a dirty stripe along the 4s&. cliffs of the fall at 
 the head of the north glacier. As it comes down the level ice it 
 gradually begins to assume the decided appearance of a moraine, 
 and increasing by degrees at last becomes very large. It conti- 
 nues in a well-defined form for some short distance beyond where 
 the western moraine is dispersed, but there it also is scattered over 
 the ice, and the two become blended together, and ultimately 
 extend to meet the debris, which is similarly dispersed by the 
 eastern moraine from the opposite site of the glacier. The whole 
 of the moraines, in the middle of the length of the glacier where 
 it is most regular, are very considerably raised above the general 
 surface of the ice, which in some parts may be as much as one 
 hundred feet below the tops of the western and medial moraines. 
 It would appear that this great elevation is not so much due to the 
 accumulation of debris as to the protection afforded by the superin- 
 cumbent rubbish to the ice below which prevents its being melted. 
 The clear ice beyond the moraine is constantly depressed where ex- 
 posed, and on the very tops of the moraines pure ice was often seen 
 f hardly covered by stones. The protection afforded by the lateral 
 moraines raises the sides of the glacier so much that a very consi- 
 f derable hollow is caused in its middle, which is a striking feature 
 in the first appearance of its lower extremity. 
 
 4 '2 The ice of which the glacier is composed is perfectly pure and 
 
 clear, but where seen in considerable masses, 
 Crevasses : glacier tables. , . „ , , , . . . i 
 
 stripes of a darker and lighter bluish green 
 
 are distinctly visible. It is composed of bands of ice containing 
 small air bubbles, alternating with others quite free from them. 
 In many places the surface presents a striated appearance, arising 
 from the different degrees of compactness of these differently co- 
 loured bands and their consequently different rates of melting. 
 The direction of these coloured views as seen in crevasses showed 
 a dip inwards or towards the longitudinal axis and a dip upwards 
 or towards the origin of the glacier in every part, the stratification 
 being more perpendicular towards the head and more nearly horizon- 
 tal in the lower parts. The direction of the strata in place was also 
 very clearly marked in many parts of the ice, and was placed in 
 
 24 
 
186 
 
 HIM/LATAN DISTRICTS 
 
 curves, having their branches nearly parallel to the sides of the 
 glacier and their apices directed downwards, the curvature in the 
 centre not being at all sudden. No dirt bands were observed. The 
 crevasses were neither very numerous nor very formidable. They 
 are developed across the direction of the glacier’s length on both of 
 its sides, commencing from the small tributary on the west side and 
 from the union of the eastern glacier on the other, and continuing 
 almost to the end, those on the west side being, perhaps, the larger. 
 They are generally wider towards the edges of the glacier, closing 
 up as they approach the centre. They are nearly vertical, and are 
 directed from the sides upwards or towards the head of the glacier, 
 those on the west bearing nearly east and west, and those on the 
 east bearing nearly north and south, thus forming angles of 
 about 45° with the axis of the glacier. Many pools of water 
 ( Ixdgnoirs ) were seen on the surface of the ice ; some of the largest 
 were said by the guides, who are in the habit of visiting the glacier, 
 to be found in the same place every year. The clear surface of the 
 ice everywhere assumes a more or less undulating appearance from 
 the action of the water that drains from it as it melts and the small 
 ! streams, into which the drainage collects, end by falling into some 
 of the crevasses. The remains of the last winter’s snow was hardly 
 perceptible on any part of the glacier. The occurrence of stones 
 standing up on bases of ice ( glacie r tables) above the general sur- 
 face of the glacier is common, but those seen were small. The rocks 
 below the bead in the north-western glacier were covered with 
 grooves or scratches, sloping in about the same direction as the 
 surface of the ice at the spot. These grooves extend to twenty or 
 thirty feet above the present level of the glacier. Almost in every 
 place a space was left between the rock and ice, the latter appearing 
 to shrink from contact with the former, due doubtless to the heat 
 i of the rock melting the ice. 
 
 The Kuphini river, that rises on the side of the Nanda-kot 
 
 j 5 T „ ... peak, opposite to the Pindar river, has also 
 Glacier o± the Kuphim. 
 
 its source m a glacier. Both rivers unite 
 at Dwali, about eight miles from the end of the Pindar glacier 
 and about six miles from the end of that of the Kuphini. General 
 Strachey examined the Kuphini glacier also, and describes the 
 valley for a mile or two below the end of the glacier as having 
 
OF THE NORTH- WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 187 
 
 very much tlio same general character as that ol the Pindar, but 
 somewhat more rugged and desolate in appearance. The glacier 
 commences about two m iles above the source of the river and fills 
 the whole breadth. 'of the valley,, which is about three-quarters of 
 a mile broad in its upper part. The glacier begins in a precipitous 
 fall of ice some sixty or seventy feet high, which, however, still 
 exhibits the rjbhqn-lfr e structure. From the foot of the fall the 
 • surface was very even, though the slope was still considerable. 
 The main glacier of the Kuphini is joined by two small tributaries 
 on the east and by one on the west, all of which are highly 
 inclined and bring d own considerable quantities of debris.. The 
 moraines are confined, to the sides of the glacier, though many small 
 stones are scattered over every part of the ice. As was obseived 
 
 \\ 
 
 \\ 
 
 on the Pindar, the protection given, by the lateral moraines to the 
 underlying ice leads to the promotion of a medial depression in 
 the glacier at its end. The crevasses here, too, are most strongly 
 marked near the sides and are inclined at an angle of about 45° 
 from the longitudinal axis downwards. The structure of the ice 
 was in all respects similar to that found on the Pindar. On the in- 
 teresting question of the e ^ension o L glacier ,a^ ; rjpgotej^igd 
 the inquiries of General" Strnchoy give.no precise information. 
 He, however, considers that “some very decided change m the 
 state of things is certainly indicated by thc^ long plateaus before 
 mentioned running for a mile or tw,o below the present termina- 
 tions of both glaciers nearly parallel to the rivers, but several 
 hundred feet above them.” * He considers it “ impossible that these 
 level banks above the rivers have been caused by deposits from the 
 ravines in the sides of the valleys, for such deposits would have had 
 very irregular surfaces, and indeed their present effect in destroy- 
 ing the regularity of the plateaus is everywhere visible. Had the 
 same appearance been noticed in any other part of the river’s 
 course, it would at once have been attributed to the action of 
 water at some former period, and it would have been supposed that 
 the bed had afterwards been excavated to its present depth. It 
 this was the case, the glaciers which the plateau was forming must 
 either have terminated considerably higher up the valleys or have 
 stood altogether at a much higher level. In either of these ways 
 the water could have been delivered at a level sufficiently high to 
 
188 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTEICTS 
 
 form the plateau. But it may admit of doubt whether the quan- 
 tity of water in the rivers, as they are at present, is sufficient to 
 account for such an extent of level deposit or for such a depth of 
 erosion of their beds ; for at this great elevation they are not 
 subject to those violent floods that occur lower down, and for nearly 
 half the year too they are inert. The only other way of account- 
 ing for the appearance is that it has been occasioned by an extension 
 of the glacier, and that the le vel top of the plateau shows the limit 
 to which the tops of the moraines reached, as the glacier gradually 
 receded.” We have referred on a previous page 1 to the existence 
 of evidence of glacial aetion far below the present limits of glaciers, 
 and to those who wish to- pursue the subject further we commend 
 the records of the Geological Survey and the summary 2 in the re- 
 cently published ‘ Manual of the Geology of India.’ 
 
 General Strachey has rendered us another important service in 
 Motion of the Pindar his observations on the motion of the Pin- 
 
 glacier ' dari glacier recorded in May, 1848. His 
 
 procedure is thus stated. About 200 yards below the small tributary 
 that enters the main glacier from the north-west a moraine was found 
 heaped up against an almost perpendicular wall of rock, and suffi- 
 ciently high to command a view of the greater part of the surface 
 of the glacier along the line on which observations were to be 
 made. This line, which is nearly perpendicular to the general 
 direction of the glacier, was marked by two crosses painted white, 
 one on the rock in contact with the old moraine and one on a cliff 
 on the opposite side of the valley. A stake was driven into the 
 moraine at its highest point, close to the rock, on the line between 
 the two crosses, and a theodolite was set up over it. Five other 
 marks were also made on the glacier at intervals along the same 
 Jine by fixing stakes in holes driven in the ice with a jumper. 
 These marks, which were all carefully placed on the exact line be- 
 tween the crosses by means of the theodolite, were completed at 
 about Oh. 30m. p. m. on the 21st May. On the following day the 
 theodolite was again set up on the same place as before, and being 
 properly adjusted, the cross-wires of the telescope were directed to 
 the cross on the cliff on the opposite side of the glacier. A stick was 
 then set up near the first of the five marks that had been made the 
 1 P. , l Pp. lxx., 372, 373, 586, 689. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 189 
 
 previous day, and was, by means of signals, moved up or down the 
 glacier, till it appeared to coincide exactly with the cross-wires of 
 the telescope, and consequently to be exactly on the line between the 
 two crosses painted on the cliffs. The distance between the centre 
 of the stick and that of the fixed mark was then measured, which 
 evidently showed the downward progress of the ice at that point of 
 the glacier, since the marks were made the day before. The same 
 procedure was followed at each of the marks. The results were 
 as follows : — 
 
 Time of observation. 
 
 Distances of fixed mar Its from standard line. 
 
 On the west 
 moraine. 
 
 On tlie me- 
 dial mo- 
 raine. 
 
 At east 
 foot of me- 
 dial mo- 
 raine. 
 
 Near the 
 middle of 
 the clear 
 ice. 
 
 On the 
 eastern 
 moraine. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 21st May 0 30 p. m. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 22nd 1 15 p. m. 
 
 0 5J 
 
 1 01 
 
 1 0 
 
 1 Oj 
 
 0 6| 
 
 25tli „ 8 45 a. m. 
 
 1 9i 
 
 2 9| 
 
 2 Ilf 
 
 3 1 
 
 1 5 J 
 
 The motion in 24 hours of the several marks will also be found 
 to be — 
 
 Mean motion (in inches ) of ice in 24 hours. 
 
 Date. 
 
 On the west moraine. 
 
 On the medial mo- 
 raine. 
 
 * 
 
 At east foot of medi- 
 al moraine. 
 
 Near the middle of 
 the clear ice. 
 
 <d 
 
 a 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 m 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 <D 
 
 rt 
 
 O 
 
 Approximate mean 
 temporature. 
 
 21st to 22nd May 
 
 5-3 
 
 11-9 
 
 11-6 
 
 11-9 
 
 6-5 
 
 43°F. 
 
 22nd „ 25th „ 
 
 5-7 
 
 7-6 
 
 8-4 
 
 8-8 
 
 3-8 
 
 38°F. 
 
 General mean 
 
 5-5 
 
 9-7 
 
 10-0 
 
 10-3 
 
 5-1 
 
 • • • 
 
 The progress of the lower extremity of the glacier was likewise 
 approximately measured by observing the apparent angular motion 
 of a pole fixed on the top of the eastern moraine, and of a conspicuous 
 
290 
 
 hima'layan DisamicTS- 
 
 rock lying not far from the middle of the glacier. The results of 
 these observations were — 
 
 Date. 
 
 Mean motion (in inches ) of ice in 24 hours. 
 
 On the moraine. 
 
 Near middle of the 
 glacier. 
 
 19th to 20th May 
 
 3-0 
 
 
 20th „ 23rd „ 
 
 6-2 
 
 8-1 
 
 23rd „ 25th „ 
 
 5-3 
 
 10-8 
 
 General mean 
 
 4-8 
 
 9*4 
 
 A comparison of the motion of the upper and lower parts of the 
 glacier gave on the lateral moraines 4‘8 inches as the mean motion of 
 the ice in 24 hours in the lower part of the glacier, and 5 ‘3 inches 
 in the upper part, and in the middle of the glacier 9*4 inches as the 
 mean motion for the lower part, and 10 inches for the upper part 
 of the glacier. The elevation of the foot of the glacier at the source 
 of the Pindar is 11,929 feet, and of the theodolite station, whore 
 these observations were made, was 12,946 feet above the sea. 
 
 We have made mention of the snow-line or limit of perpetual 
 .. snow, 1 which has, at times, given rise to con- 
 
 siderable discussion. The height at which 
 precipitations of vapour fall to the earth’s surface as snow varies 
 with the temperature of each particular place, and with the annual 
 or even diurnal oscillations of the temperature. In Bhutan and 
 Sikkim the ordinary winter limit of snow is about 6,000 feet, and 
 it is rare, says Dr. Hooker, for even three inches to remain on the 
 ground as many days at 7,000 feet. 2 According to General Stra- 
 chey, the height at which snow is certain to fall in Kumaon is about 
 6,500 feet, and at an elevation of 5,000 feet it will not fail more 
 than one year out of ten. The lowest level to which sporadic falls 
 of snow are here known to descend is about 2,500 feet, of which 
 there are two authentic instances on record since the British occu- 
 pation, the first in 1817 and the second in 1847. In the valley of 
 Kashmir, at an elevation of 5,500 feet, the snow falls every year, 3 
 
 1 These observations on the snow-line are based on the article in J., A. S., 
 Ben., XVIII., i. 287, entitled, “ On the snow-line in the Himalaya,” by Lieutenant 
 E. Strachey, Engineers, on notes placed at my disposal by the same writer, and 
 on the works of recent travellers. 2 Hooker, Quar. J., Hort. Soc., VII,, 141: 
 
 Griffith Post. Papers, I., 236. 3 Moorcroft, II., 107. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 191 
 
 tincl further west as low as 4,000 feet, whilst at least one fall of 
 snow is recorded at Peshawar, which has an elevation of only 1,250 
 feet above the level of the sea. 1 Campaigning experiences during 
 the late war show that the winter snows descend to a very low eleva- 
 tion in the valley of the Kabul river and at Kandahar. If we 
 -follow the lower boundary of the winter snow on a mountain as it 
 melts with the advance of summer, we at length ascend to a height 
 at which the summer influence is insufficient to entirely melt the 
 ■snow, and from which, as the season advances towards winter, we 
 liave gradually to descend in order to follow the line of snow. The 
 line to which the snow recedes, and from which it again advances 
 in one complete revolution of the seasons, is called the snow-line. 
 The snow above that line is called perpetual snow, not as observed by 
 Professor Forbes, that the continuance of snow at any spot implies 
 that it never melts there, but only that some always remains unmelted. 
 
 According to our best authorities, the height of the snow-line 
 
 Observations in the m ° st southem exposures of the 
 
 ■eastern Himalaya. Himalayan slope that carry perpetual snow 
 
 ranges from 15,000 to 16,000 feet all along that part of the chain 
 that lies between Sikkim and the Indus, whilst to the north 
 towards Tibet it has a considerably higher elevation. Before pro- 
 ceeding further we may observe, with General Strachey, that “ all 
 estimates of the snow-line are, in the very nature of things, subject 
 to no little uncertainty ; for, independently of the variations of the 
 seasons from year to year there are naturally considerable differ- 
 ences in the level at which the snow lies on steep or slight slopes 
 and on north or south exposures, between the latter of which a 
 difference of as much as a thousand feet may at times be observed. 
 Besides this, too, there is some practical difficulty in the actual 
 observation of the snow-line, for the process of judging by the eye 
 whether the snow upon one’s path and still more on contiguous 
 mountain sides begins to exceed the bare spaces is neither easy 
 nor susceptible of much precision. Hence the errors and uncer- 
 tainty to be looked for in all our conclusions must be considerable, 
 amounting no doubt to several hundred 2 feet.” Dr. Hooker 
 estimated the height of the snow-line on the most southern 
 spurs of the snowy mountains in Sikkim to be at about 15,500 
 * Born. Geog. Jour., X., 39. 2 Captain H. Strachey, J. R. G. S., XXIII. 69. 
 
192 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 feet. 1 Of the peaks covered by perpetual snow, the elevation of which 
 is noted in Dr. Hooker’s map, Chola, on the boundary between Sik- 
 kim and Bhutan, is the lowest, (17,300 feet), and at the same time 
 the most southern and the Chola Pass immediately to the south of 
 the peak, and rising to 14,900 feet, he found to be free from snow 
 at the beginning of November. Somewhat further to the north, 
 near Youngbong, the lower limit of perpetual snow was directly 
 measured in September and found to be nearly 16,000 feet. To the 
 west of Kanchanjinga in eastern Nepal, the south-eastern descent 
 from the Kambache pass was found to be free from snow, a little 
 from the summit, at the beginning of December, and on the northern 
 approach the snow was supposed to become perpetual at about 15,000 
 feet, though the fresh falls of the previous October forced Dr. Hooker 
 to be in some measure guided by the people of the country in this 
 estimate. On the ascent to the YVallanchun or Wallungsuin pass 
 the snow-line was again estimated, though under similar circum- 
 stances of doubt, to be at 15,000 feet. The Pandit crossin o- the 
 same pass, his Tiptala, on the 16th August, 1871, found it covered 
 with snow, 2 and Dr. Hooker on December 3 31st, 1848, crossed 
 “ with snow on both sides up to the shoulder.” 
 
 The following are the results of trigonometrical measurements 
 
 Observations in Kumaon. ° f ^ eleTati<m of th « ad g® °f *■»« 
 
 snow observed on spurs of the Trisul and 
 
 Nanda Devi groups of peaks, made by General It. Strachey before 
 
 the winter snow had commenced in 1841 : — 
 
 Point 
 
 observed. 
 
 Height of snow-line. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 On south 
 exposure. 
 
 On west 
 exposure. 
 
 No 1 ... 
 2 ... 
 
 3 ... 
 
 4 ... 
 
 16,705 
 
 17,007 
 
 17,205 
 
 15,347 
 
 15,892 
 
 14,898 
 
 16,298 
 
 16,051 
 
 These heights were calculated 
 from observations made with the 
 theodolite at Almora and Binsar. 
 The distance of these two places, 
 which served as a base, was obtained 
 by measurement from a map of 
 points fixed by the G-. T. Survey. 
 The elevations of the two places 
 were taken from Captain Webb’s 
 trigonometrical survey. 
 
 Mean ... 
 
 15,566 
 
 15,395 
 
 ( 16,174 
 { 15,980 
 
 derived , , 2 Reports 1871, p. 1 : the name appears to be 
 
 MWStek* Yen!! xvmt L P " ^ 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 193 
 
 The points 1, 2 and 3 are on ridges that run prominently out 
 in a south-westerly direction from the great peaks of Trisul 
 G. (G. T. S.) same as Webb’s No. XI. and H. (G. T. S.), same as 
 Webb’s No. XII. The dip of the strata being to the north-east, 
 the faces exposed to view from the south are for the most part very 
 abrupt and snow never accumulates on them to any great extent. 
 This will explain the difference between the heights at which snow 
 was observed on the southern and western exposures, the ground 
 having been less steep on the latter and better able to retain the 
 snow ; but in these places it was in very small quantities, and had 
 probably fallen lately, so that its height may probably indicate the 
 elevation below which the light autumnal falls were incapable of 
 lying rather than the inferior edge of the perpetual snow. It is 
 further to be understood that below this level of 15,000 feet the 
 mountains were absolutely free from snow, excepting those isolated 
 patches that are to be seen in ravines or at the head of glaciers, 
 which do not affect such calculations as these. The point No. 4 
 was selected as being in a much more retired position than the 
 others, and is situated not far from the head of the Pindar river, 
 between the peaks of Nanda Devi, I. (G. T. S.), same as No. XIV. 
 of Webb, and of Trisul IT. (G. T. S.) It was quite free from 
 snow at 15,300 feet. On the whole, therefore, General Strachey is 
 inclined to consider that 16,000 feet may be given as a close approxi- 
 mation to the maximum height to which the snow recedes every 
 year on the most southern and external ranges in Kumaon. 
 
 This result appears to accord well with what has been observed 
 
 _ by Dr. Gerard in a visit made by him to 
 
 Bisahr. y . J 
 
 the bhatui pass m the Bisahr range ex- 
 pressly for the purpose of determining the height of the snow-line. 1 
 He reached the pass, the elevation of which is 15,000 feet, on the 
 9th of August, 1822, and remained there till the 15th of that 
 month. The southern slope of the range was generally free from 
 snow, and he says that it is sometimes left without any whatever. 
 On the top of the pass there was no snow, but on the northern 
 slope of the mountain it lay as far down as 14,000 feet. On his 
 arrival rain was falling, and out of the four days he was there it 
 rained and snowed for the greater part of three. The fresh 
 
 1 Tours I., 289-347. 
 
 25 
 
 snow 
 
194 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 that fell did not lie below 1(1,000 feet, and some of the more 
 precipitous rocks remained clear even up to 17,000 feet. Dr. 
 Gerard concludes that 15,000 feet is about the height of the snow- 
 line on this range, but it will be seen that Dr. Gerard was there 
 rather early in the year, and General Strachey, from what he heard 
 from others who crossed the range later in the season, thinks that 
 15,500 feet will probably be a better estimate, even if it should 
 not be carried still higher. At the beginning of the month of 
 July, Captain Gerard found heavy snow on the northern face of 
 this Bisahr range at about 15,000 feet, and the Kunlia pass, the 
 elevation of which he states to be 17,000 feet appears never to be 
 free from snow 1 Dr. Thomson 2 agrees that the estimate formerly 
 made by General Strachey of 15,500 feet, which his subsequent 
 researches led him to believe was a little too low for Kumaon, is 
 as nearly as possible correct for the Bisahr range. He adds — • 
 “ Captain Herbert, in his geological report, had fixed upon 15,000 
 feet, which is a little too low even in the district of Bisahr, to which 
 his estimate, I believe, refers. In the trans-Satlaj Himalaya, from 
 the diminished amount of summer cloudy weather, the snow-level 
 is probably a little higher.” The Chamba range and the Pir 
 Panjal, south of Kashmir, both of which rise immediately from the 
 low external sandstone hills, just enter, he tells us, the region of 
 perpetual snow. The highest peaks of the former are about 
 16,700 feet, and its mean height about 15,000 feet above the sea, 
 and its snow-line will consequently be not far from 16,000 feet. 
 Major A. Cunningham also places the snow-line on the most 
 southern ranges of the Himalaya to the west of the Ganges at about 
 16,000 feet. 3 
 
 When, however, we advance into the interior of the chain, 
 Across the snowy after having once passed over any range of 
 range * sufficient height to come within the limits 
 
 of perpetual snow, we invariably find that there is less snow on all 
 such ridges of similar altitudes so that when we arrive at the Indian 
 watershed, the snow-line has risen to about 18,500 feet, and op 
 the summit of the tableland it reaches to an elevation of 
 ; feet. Dr. Hooker observed this phenomenon in Sikkim, and bears 
 1 testimony to the gradual rise of the snow line as we enter among 
 1 lbid, II., 71. s Travels, p. 487. 3 Ladak, pp. 73-77. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 195 
 
 the peaks covered with perpetual snow. Near Zemu, twenty miles 
 north-east from Kanchanjinga, he found little snow on south 
 exposures at the beginning of July. A little further in, above Pha- 
 lung, in the middle of the same month, the snow-line was supposed 
 to be about 16,500 feet, and at the end of the month many plants 
 were obtained at 17,000 feet. Another ascent in the same 
 vicinity about the same time did not carry our traveller to perpe- 
 tual snow at 16,800 feet. On the flanks of the Kanchan-jhao 
 broad summits were seen quite bare of snow at 18,000 feet. Dr. 
 Campbell 1 who accompanied Dr. Hooker on his return journey in 
 September, notes that vegetation ceased at the foot of the Dankia 
 pass at 18,000 feet, and there was no trace of it within 500 feet of 
 the summit on either side. There was no snow on the road as he 
 ascended the north face nor as he descended the south face, but it 
 lay in patches amongst the rocks all the way on both sides. On the 
 mountain to the west of the pass snow lay deep in hollow places, 
 but these may have had glacial ice in them though the surface of 
 the snow was then smooth. The line of snow would here be 
 19,800 feet, and further north in Tibet it rose to 20,000 feet. 
 Bhorutso, on the 18th October, had not a particle of snow on it at 
 18 or 18,500 feet, whilst in the Lachung valley in Sikkim to the 
 south snow was lying at about 15,000 feet. Dr. Campbell adds: 
 
 “ South of the Himalaya, the quantity of snow that falls is very 
 much greater than in Tibet, and from the greater moisture of the 
 air and cloudiness of the sky, it is not carried otf with the 
 rapidity of evaporation which obtains in Tibet, where you do not 
 find even a rill of water from the melting snow. Besides in 
 Tibet the snow falls in light, feathery skiffs, and not in flakes. 
 I believe that the lowest snow-line we saw on the mountains to 
 the north of us in Tibet must have been upwards of 22,000 feet. 
 On the Kambajang range, which, comparing them with Bhorutso, 
 must be 20,000 feet at least, there was not a particle of snow.” 
 
 We have the results of General Strachey’s experience for 
 
 Kumaon and Garhwal. Towards the end 
 Kumaon * of August, 1848, he crossed the Barjikang 
 
 pass leading from Ralam to Juhar on a subordinate ridge between 
 the Nandakot and PanchachuM peaks. Although this pass has an 
 
 i J., A. S., Ben., XXV., 565. 
 
196 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 elevation of about 15,400 feet, not a vestige of snow was met with 
 on the ascent from the southeast, and only a very small patch 
 remained on the north-western face, and indeed, in no considerable 
 quantity, up to 17,000 feet. The vegetation on the very summit 
 of the pass was far from scanty, though it had already begun to 
 break up into tufts, and had lost the character of continuity it had 
 maintained to within 500 or 600 feet of the top; but many species 
 of flowering plants, all evidently flourishing in a congenial climate, 
 showed that the limits of vegetation and regions of perpetual snow 
 were still far distant. This place is within ten to fifteen miles of 
 the most southern border of perpetual snow. The Unta-dhura pass 
 has an elevation of about 17,300 feet, and lies to the north of the 
 great peaks nearly at the crest of the watershed. There was no snow 
 along the southern ascent to this pass, at the top of which General 
 Strachey arrived in September, 1848, in a little drizzle of rain that 
 at last turned into snow. The ground was quite free from snow, 
 being worked up into a deep black mud by the feet of the cattle 
 that had crossed it. There w r as, however, on the north side of the 
 pass an accumulation of snow some little way down, extending per- 
 haps 200 feet, apparently the effect of the drift through the gap in 
 which the pass lies. No snow was seen on the hills on either side 
 within some few hundred feet, and the snow-line was certainly 
 above 18,000 feet. Vegetation reached to within 300 or 400 feet 
 of the summit. 
 
 The Chor-hoti pass (18,000 feet) and the Marshak pass, (18,400 
 
 feet), both to the north of Nfti, have a position 
 Garhwal. _ . . ’ 1 
 
 relative to the great snowy masses nearly 
 
 similar to Unta-dhura. The Marshak pass was crossed in July by 
 General Strachey, a time rather too early to judge fairly of the 
 snow-line, which is also obscured by the presence of a glacier that 
 fills up the valley by which the pass is approached. 1 On the Chor- 
 hoti pass in September there was not a vestige of snow on any part 
 of the southern face of the ridge that the route crosses, but on the 
 north face was a patch that was plainly perpetual, descending some 
 hundred feet to a glacier which was connected with that just men- 
 tioned to have been crossed at Marshak or Balchak. The snow-line 
 was, therefore, here no doubt near 18,500 feet. The Kyungar and 
 1 This expedition is apparently referred to in J., A. S., Ben., XIX., 79. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 197 
 
 Balchha passes, each about 17,500 feet in elevation, and both lying 
 to the north of the Unta-dhura pass, were equally free from snow 
 on their southern faces in September, small quantities only being 
 found on the northern aspects. The highest points on the ridge, over 
 which the latter of these passes leads, only just exceed 18,000 feet 
 in elevation, and in fact it does not come within the limits of per- 
 petual snow, nor does it appear snowy when viewed from the Tibetan 
 plain to the north of it. The vegetation on all these passes reaches 
 to about 17,500 feet. Lieutenant Weller visited the Balchha pass 1 
 on the 1st June, 1.842, and found “ towards the top of the ascent a 
 tolerable quantity of snow, but in detached portions.” The Lakliar 
 pass also, to the north of Unta-dliura, was crossed by General 
 Strachey in September. It has an elevation of about 18,200 feet, 
 and was found free from snow on both sides, as well as the Jainti 
 ridge some 20.0 feet higher. This latter is, however, a somewhat 
 detached spur, and the snow-line was manifestly near, for unbroken 
 snow could be seen in more sheltered places considerably below this 
 elevation. General Strachey thinks that, on the whole, 18,500 feet 
 may be considered a fair average height of the snow-line in this 
 locality. Lieutenant Weller crossed the Unta-dhura pass at the end 
 of May, and found more soil than snow visiHs , whilst snow was 
 scattered thinly on either side, but the northern slope presented one 
 unbroken sheet of steep snow. 2 In September (28tli) Captain 
 Manson found the last ascent to this .pass quite free from snow. A 
 detached peak, Lanjar, a little to the north of the Mti pass, and 
 having an elevation of 18,400 feet, was found by General Strachey 
 nearly quite free of snow having only a patch lying in a ravine on 
 the north side of the hill. Two other peaks near the Balchha pass, 
 seen from Lanjar, having an altitude of 18,100 and 18,200 feet 
 respectively, were also quite free from snow, so far as could be 
 ascertained at the distance. Mr. J. H. Batten, who visited the Mti 
 Pass in 1837, found it free from snow, of which the first heavy fall 
 did not occur till the lltli of October. 3 
 
 In the more western part of the mountains the authority of the 
 Gerards, of Dr. Thomson and of Major A. Cunningham coincide in 
 fixing the snow-line at much about the same level as that just 
 assigned to Kumaon. Captain J. D. Cunningham also accepts 
 i J., A. S., Ben., XII., 97. 2 Ibid., XII., 87. 3 Ibid., VII., 316. 
 
198 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the results of General Strachey’s observations. In upper Kunaor 
 Captain Gerard 1 found a little snow on either side of the Kyu- 
 
 Kunaor brang pass (18,300 feet) in July, but none 
 
 on its summit, and the summits in the neigh- 
 bourhood, though attaining a height of 18,000 or 19,000 feet, 
 were only just tipped with snow. 1 The Gangtang pass, also 
 18,300 feet and lying a little farther to the west, was snowy 
 for the last few hundred feet at the end of the same month. The 
 Kyubrang pass is on the Indian waterparting, and the Gangtang 
 pass a little within it, but both the observations were made before the 
 snow-line had attained its maximum elevation. The gradual des- 
 cent of the snow-line as we advance southwards is shown by the 
 fact of the Charang pass having an altitude of only 17,400 feet, 
 and lying between the passes above named and the Bisahr range, 
 being said to be never free from snow, though early in July it had 
 already melted up to 16,300 feet. North of the Satlaj, under the 
 peak Leo Porgyul, the surface was found to be free from snow in 
 October up to 19,000 feet or even higher, while west of that river 
 on the Manirang or Rupak pass, having an elevation of 18,600 feet, 
 the summit was covered with newly fallen snow at the end of 
 August, showing that the level of perpetual snow was nearly at its 
 maximum. Snow was, however, met with on the road to the pass, 
 but this was due to avalanches and drifts and to the fact of the road 
 lying in a deep glen. Dr. Thomson, who visited the Karakoram 
 pass in August, 1848, estimated the snow-line on the journey back 
 to Saser at 17,500 to 18,000 feet but to the northward and east- 
 ward it was much higher, probably not less than 20,000 feet. 2 
 Trotter 3 also notes that the Karakoram pass (18,550 feet) is always 
 free from snow in summer, whilst the Saser further south is seldom, 
 if ever, free from snow. 
 
 Regarding the height of perpetual snow on the tableland of 
 
 western Tibet Captain H. Strachey is still 
 Western Tibet. J 
 
 the best authority. He writes “ from a 
 
 series of minute observations on the snow-level, made during two 
 
 years, in the course of which I crossed twenty-five passes elevated 
 
 from 15,000 to 19,000 feet at various seasons between the end of 
 
 1 Tours in the Himalaya, II., 73, 117, 133, 242 : Account of Koonawur, 157-9. 
 
 2 Travels, p. 437. 3 Report, p. 11. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 199 
 
 April and the beginning of November, I have arrived at the follow- 
 ing conclusions. The snow-line in the central and northern parts 
 of west Nari attains an extreme height of nearly 20,000 feet. It 
 lowers on approaching the Indian Himalaya, and on the southern- 
 most parts of the Indian watershed descends perhaps as low as 
 
 18.000 feet.” The mountains under 20,000 feet in height in the 
 northern and more open parts of the tableland will, he adds, be 
 almost entirely denuded of snow during the latter part of the sum- 
 mer. General Strachey, during his visit to the tableland north of 
 Garhwal during September, 1848, found snow only in patches in 
 sheltered ravines, but the highest summits in the district through 
 which he passed were only 18,400 feet. Perpetual snow was not 
 found on any of the hills between the Indian water-parting and 
 the Satlaj. The height of the snow-line on the south face of the 
 peak of Kailas was observed in the month of September by means 
 of a theodolite, and found to have an elevation of nearly 20,500 
 feet, and the altitude of a peak on the ridge between the Satlaj and 
 the Indus which was only tipped with snow in August was in like 
 manner determined to be 20,500 feet above the sea: so that, making 
 a fair allowance for the difference between the northern and south- 
 ern exposures, the mean snow-line was in both cases about the 
 same. The limit of snow on the Pamir is reported to be between 
 
 16.000 and 17,000 feet and on the Alai Pamir about 14,000 feet. 
 
 Throughout Kurnaon and Garhwal there are several lakes, but 
 
 the chief in size and beauty occur in par- 
 LakeS ’ gana Chhakhata, the Westmoreland of 
 
 Kurnaon. These are known as Naini, Bhim, Sat, Naukuchiya, 
 Malwa, Khurpa, Sukha, Sariya, Khuriya, &c., with the affix HdV or 
 ‘lake’ attached. The following table gives some information regard- 
 ing the principal lakes : — 
 
 Name. 
 
 Height above 
 sea-level. 
 
 Greatest 
 
 length. 
 
 Greatest 
 
 breadth. 
 
 Greatest 
 
 depth. 
 
 Approximate 
 
 area. 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Bliim Tal 
 Naukuchiya Tal ... 
 Malwa Tal 
 
 Feet, 
 
 6,407 
 
 4,500! 
 
 4,000! 
 
 3,400‘ 
 
 Feet. 
 
 4,733 
 
 5,580 
 
 3,120 
 
 4,480 
 
 Feet. 
 
 1,518 
 
 1,490 
 
 2,270 
 
 1,833 
 
 Feet. 
 
 93 
 
 87 
 
 132 
 
 127 
 
 Square feet. 
 
 5.149.000 
 
 4.900.000 
 4,849,500 
 4,909,600 
 
 1 Approximate measurements. 
 
200 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 It lias been suggested that these lakes were formed by glacial 
 action, but Mr. Ball in a recent paper 1 combats this view, and 
 assigns their existence to landslips which closed up the valleys in 
 which they occur. Be this as it may, they form one of the most 
 remarkable and beautiful features of the Lower Himalaya in 
 Kumaon. The lake ol Naini lies in a valley which runs about 
 north-west and south-east, and is surrounded on all sides except the 
 east by lofty ridges, Sher-ka-danda, China (8,568 feet), Deopatha 
 (7,989 feet), and Ayarpatha (7,721 feet). Bhim Tal lies in a 
 comparatively open valley with a hill to the south of the lake rising 
 some l,o00 feet above its level. Further east in the same valley is 
 Naukuchiya Tal, occupying a hollow in the slope, and without any 
 remarkable hills around it. The Sat Tal or seven lakes, lie within 
 a circle of hills between Bhim Tal and the valley of the Naini Tal 
 river, and Malwa Tal lies to the north of Bhim Tal in a deep valley, 
 the sides of which rise up abruptly from the level of the lake. 
 The only lakes of importance in Gfarhwal are the Gudiyar Tal in 
 patti Dasauli Malli and Diuri Tal in patti Kaliphat Malla, neither 
 of which can compare with the Kumaon lakes in size or beauty. 
 
 1 Rec., Geo. Sur., XL 2, p. 174. 
 
CHAP T E R Y . 
 
 Meteorology . 1 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Preliminary sketch of climate. Contrast between the eastern and western 
 parts of the plain and the Himalaya. Radiation, solar and nocturnal, temper- 
 ature : — Diurnal and annual ranges, — Vertical decrement, — Height of snow-line. 
 Pressure and winds Barometric tides, — Mountain winds, Annual variation of 
 pressure, — Monsoons. Humidity : — Vertical distribution of vapour,— Relative hu- 
 midity,— Cloud. Rainfall Distribution on plains and on the Himalayan slope,— 
 Annual variation, — The winter rains, — The monsoon rains. 
 
 The climatoloo-ical conditions of tliese hill districts are a most 
 
 O 
 
 important element in their physical geography, and will therefore 
 require to be treated at considerable length. An exhaustive discus- 
 sion of the meteorology cannot yet be attempted, but sufficient data 
 have already been collected to serve as a basis fora general descrip- 
 tion of the climate, and at the same time to throw some light on 
 several of the more interesting problems of meteorology. In this 
 latter respect the Himalaya, on account of its less distance from 
 the equator and its greater elevation, presents many points of 
 advantage as compared with the Alps and other European moun- 
 tain systems ; and already some important general conclusions 
 regarding the physics of the atmosphere have been drawn from the 
 observations that have been made in it. The mere statement of the 
 fact that nearly all the snowy peaks and most of the passes over 
 the Indian watershed stand above the lower half of the atmosphere, 
 and thus completely cut off all communication between India and 
 Central Asia, except in the upper strata, indicates how much regard- 
 ing the general movements of the atmosphere may be learnt from 
 observations taken in India and the Himalaya. 
 
 Of late years, a good deal has been done in the way of collect- 
 ing trustworthy meteorological data for the mountain zone by the 
 establishment of Government observatories at certain points. The 
 places where observations are made at the public expense must 
 
 1 Written by Mr. S. A. Hill, Meteorological Reporter to the Government of the 
 North-Western Provinces and Oudh, for this volume. 
 
 26 
 
202 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 always, however, be few, and it is desirable that more should be 
 done in the way of enlisting the services of volunteer observers. 
 Temperature and rainfall observations are now made at many tea- 
 gardens in Kumaon ; but, as a rule, so little attention is paid to the 
 hours of reading, the exposure of the instruments, and the continuity 
 of the registers, that the results are of no value for scientific discus- 
 sion and comparison. By far the most important of the observations 
 taken in the north-west Himalaya, prior to the establishment of 
 regular observatories, were those collected by Lieutenant (now 
 General) II. Strachey, of the Bengal Engineers, in 1848 and 1849. 
 Some of General Strachey’s deductions from them have been given 
 to the world in the Proceedings of the Royal Society and the Journal 
 of the Asiatic Society of Bengal ; but others have not yet been 
 published, though they were long ago embodied in a work on the 
 “ Physical Geography of the Himalaya” that has been placed at the 
 disposal of the compiler of this volume. Considering the scanty nature 
 of the materials General Strachey had to work with, the conclusions 
 arrived at were wonderfully accurate ; and though some of them were 
 opposed to the generally received opinions of the European meteoro- 
 logists of the day, they have been confirmed in almost every respect 
 by the more extensive data subsequently obtained from the Hima- 
 layan observatories. 
 
 In the following pages a somewhat detailed discussion of all the 
 data available for meteorological inquiry will be given after a brief 
 general sketch of the climate. The several elements of meteoro- 
 logical observation will be taken in the natural order of cause and 
 effect, commencing with solar radiation and afterwards passing on 
 to temperature, barometric pressure and winds, and the distribution 
 of vapour and rain. 
 
 Sketch of climate. 
 
 The order of the three seasons on the plains of Upper India — 
 
 the cold, the hot, and the rainy — is now well 
 known even in Europe. After the close of 
 the rains at the end of September or beginning of October the 
 sky is serene and the atmosphere transparent. Owing to the 
 absence of cloud and the rapidly diminishing proportion of water 
 
 vapour, the air is also very diathermanous ; that is, it permits the 
 free passage of heat from the sun to the earth in the daytime, 
 and in the calm nights that prevail at this season the radiation of 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 203 
 
 heat, into space goes on so rapidly that the earth s surface and the 
 air resting on it become very cold before morning. The months of 
 October and November are thus characterized, not only by clear 
 skies and calms, but by a great temperature range and heavy dews 
 at night. These conditions prevail through the greater part of 
 December, and towards the end of that month and in the beginning 
 of January, the exposed thermometer sometimes falls 10 degrees 
 below freezing at places as far down the plain as Allahabad and 
 Benares. In the Panjab it is much colder, and there the shaded 
 thermometer sometimes reaches the freezing point. 
 
 About the end of December and in January and February, how- 
 ever, clouds often interfere with the free radiation of heat at night, 
 and the daily range of temperature for these months is less, on the 
 average, than that of November. Some rain usually falls at this 
 time of the year, especially in the Punjab and the higher distiicts 
 of the North-Western Provinces. In March and April the tem- 
 perature rises rapidly, especially at a distance fiom the mountains, 
 and the air becomes extremely dry. Hot winds from the west or 
 north-west blow down the valley of the Ganges and rapidly change 
 the appearance of the whole country from that of a highly culti- 
 vated plain to a parched and sandy desert, almost the only green 
 thin o-s left being the groves of mango trees. In April, the daily 
 range of temperature over the plains is at a maximum, exceeding 30 
 degrees in most parts of the North-Western Provinces and the 
 Punjab. The nights are still tolerably cool, though in the day- 
 time the thermometer ranges as high as 110' F. or even higher 
 sometimes. 
 
 During May and the first half of June the temperature continues 
 to increase, though much less rapidly than in March and April, until 
 by the 15tli or 20th of June, if the periodical rains have not com- 
 menced, the temperature is probably higher in North-Western India 
 than anywhere else in the world. In the North-Western Provinces 
 the shaded thermometer has only been known to rise once or twice 
 above 120°F., but in the Punjab temperatures as high as 123° or 
 124° have been recorded. The days in June are thus only a few 
 decrees hotter than those of April ; but, as the rainy season 
 approaches, the range of temperature diminishes and the nights become 
 insufferably bot and close. 
 
204 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Rain seldom falls in the hot weather, the falls that do oocnr 
 generally taking place during thunderstorms. About the middle 
 of May, however, the quantity of water vapour in the air begins to 
 increase rapidly, betokening the approach of the rainy season. This 
 vapour is probably brought by the prevailing south-west upper 
 current of the atmosphere which seems to descend gradually until it 
 merges with the surface sea winds of the Bay of Bengal and forms 
 u the south-west monsoon” or prevailing wind of the rainy seasou. 
 In Northern India the lowest strata of the sea winds are deflected from 
 their normal course by the mountains and directed towards the seat 
 of highest temperature in the Panjab, thus appearing as east or 
 south-east and not as south-west winds. Along the foot of the hills 
 these easterly winds are felt occasionally by the middle of May, 
 when the quantity of vapour in the air first begins to show signs of 
 a rapid increase. 
 
 During the latter half of June the sea winds increase in strength 
 and gradually advance along the foot of the Himalaya, until, by the 
 beginning of July, the rains have usually set in all over Northern 
 India. In ordinary years rain continues to fall, not steadily but 
 with frequent intermissions or “ breaks,” until about the end of 
 September, when the easterly winds cease, except close to the hills, 
 where they last a month longer, and are succeeded by calms or fee- 
 ble currents from the west. In the Panjab the rains begin later, 
 are lighter and more intermittent, and end sooner than in the North- 
 Western Provinces, and the length and intensity of the rainy sea- 
 son increase regularly as we approach the sea in Bengal. During 
 the rains the temperature averages about 85° over the greater part 
 of Northern India, The daily range at tins time varies from 8 to 
 12 degrees, being greatest in the driest districts. 
 
 The extremes of heat and cold are much greater in the Panjab 
 and the upper part of the North-Western Provinces than in 
 Bengal, for two reasons — the greater distance from the sea and 
 the higher latitude. On account of its proximity to the sea 
 and its heavy rainfall, Bengal is moist and cloudy at all seasons 
 compared to the Panjab. This condition of the atmosphere, by 
 retarding the radiation of heat, renders the climate of Bengal 
 more equable than that of the Panjab, just as an insular climate 
 is more equable than a continental one. Again, the latitude of 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 205 
 
 the Panjab, which is 7 or 8 degrees higher than that of Bengal, 
 causes its winters to be much colder and its summers much 
 hotter. At first sight it seems anomalous that a place should be the 
 hotter the more distant it is from the equator, at any season of the 
 year ; but when it is borne in mind that the quantity of heat 
 received from the sun is directly dependent upon the length of the 
 day as well as on the elevation of the sun above the horizon, the 
 anomaly disappears. Various mathematical physicists from Halley 
 downwards, including Poisson 1 and more recently Meech, 2 have cal- 
 culated the total heating effect of the sun in different latitudes during 
 a day or other given period of time. The latest investigation of this 
 kind has been made by Wiener 3 of Carlsruhe, who finds that while 
 the maximum of heat for the whole year falls on the equator, the 
 maximum for the 21st of June is at the north pole, where the sun 
 remains above the horizon for twenty-four hours, and has an altitude 
 of nearly 23| degrees for the whole of that time. In the summer 
 half year, from equinox to equinox, most heat falls on a zone about 
 25i° north of the equator, and during the three months nearest to the 
 summer solstice — that is, from the 7th of May to the 6th or 7th of 
 August, the zone of greatest heat lies about 41°N. The total heat 
 received during these three months by an area in latitude 40° or 
 41 °N. is more than a fifth greater than that which falls on an equal 
 area at the equator. The actual increase of temperature produced is 
 much more than this, for the mean temperature is determined by the 
 balance between the gain of heat during the day and the loss at 
 night. When the gain of heat from the sun at any place is greater 
 than at the equator, on account of the length of the day, the loss at 
 night must be correspondingly less. 
 
 This excess of solar heat in summer, together with the dryness 
 of the air and the absence of cloud, seems to a icount for the exces- 
 sively high temperature of June and July in the extreme north of 
 the Panjab and on the plains of Yarkand and Kashgar still farther 
 north. In the moister zone of the mountains, the direct action of 
 the sun is less observable ; but beyond the Indian watershed it is by 
 far the most important factor in determining the character of the 
 seasons. 
 
 ' Theoriedela Chaleur, 1835 edition, page 473. 2 Smithsonian Cantri- 
 
 buttons to Knowledge, Yol. IX. 3 Zeitsclivi/t dev Oestevveichischen (resell' 
 
 schuft fur Meteoroloyie, Band XIV, page 133. 
 
200 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Regarding the succession of the seasons in the mountain zone, 
 General Strachey says : — 
 
 “ The same general sequence of the seasons takes place in tlie 
 mountains as in the plains. Here, however, every altitude has its 
 own special temperature, from the lower valleys where the heat is 
 still overpoweringly great, to the regions of eternal frost ; but at 
 all elevations in summer the force of the sun’s rays is excessive. 
 The summer rains, too, gradually diminish in strength as we move 
 along the chain from east to west, being at their maximum in Sik- 
 kim, but still being felt slightly on the ranges north of Peshawar. 
 The heaviest falls invariably take place on those portions of the chain 
 most exposed to the south ; increasing in amount up to a certain 
 height [not very exactly determined, but probably about 4,000 
 feet] ; at the same time every high and continuous ridge most 
 sensibly diminishes the supply of rain that falls on the country 
 to the north of it, and we find, as we approach the Indian 
 watershed, that the quantity is very small, and that the 
 monsoon only just drops a few partial showers on the southern 
 border of Tibet. The winter, as may be supposed, is extremely 
 rigorous on the summit of the table-land ; and at this season, 
 or in spring, the only important precipitations of moisture take 
 place in the form of snow, but they are exceedingly small in 
 quantity.” 
 
 The reason why every altitude has its own special temperature 
 is that the air is warmed chiefly by contact with the hot ground on 
 which it rests, and but little by direct absorption of the solar rays. 
 The air in contact with the ground, expanding and becoming less 
 dense, rises up, but in doing so its heat is rapidly converted into the 
 work of expansion ; the result being that the temperature o P the 
 upper strata can never rise so high, on the average, as that of the 
 air near the ground. Dry air, if heated only at the bottom, would 
 lose 1 degree Fahrenheit for every 183 or 184 feet of ascent. In 
 moist air that is precipitating rain, and thus being warmed by the 
 latent heat of the condensed vapour, the rate of decrease is much 
 less. The rate actually observed, both in balloon ascents and on 
 mountain sides, is less than that calculated theoretically ; because 
 even dry air is to some extent warmed directly by the sun’s rays, 
 while air saturated with moisture has a very considerable absorbing 
 
OF THE NORTn-W ESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 207 
 
 power. On mountain slopes also the temperature falls less rapidly 
 than in the free air over the plains — at all events for the first nine 
 or ten thousand feet of ascent, the reason being that the air is 
 heated by contact with the mountain sides. 
 
 No data at present exist from which the average intensity of 
 
 solar radiation, and its variations from time 
 to time, can be estimated with any approach 
 to exactness. Any deductions made by passing from radiation to 
 other meteorological phenomena must therefore to a great extent 
 be based on theoretical considerations. 
 
 The instrument hitherto used to measure the intensity of the 
 sun’s heat has been a maximum thermometer with a blackened bulb 
 surrounded by a thin glass case more or less completely exhausted 
 of air. If the exhaustion were perfect, the temperature of the 
 instrument would be determined by radiation to and from surround- 
 ing objects ; including under these the glass case of the instrument 
 which is in contact with the air, the sun, the ground, the clouds, 
 and the open sky. W ere solar thermometers all made exactly alike 
 and exposed under absolutely identical conditions, the excess temper- 
 ature of the instrument above the contemporaneous temperature of 
 the air would be a measure of the excess of radiant heat falling on 
 it from objects above the horizon over that which passes away from it 
 in an upward direction. The following table gives the average value 
 of this difference for each month at six stations. Corrections have 
 been applied as far as possible for differences of instrument and 
 exposure, except at Delira, for which the corrections are not 
 known : — 
 
 J , — Monthly mean excess temperature of the solar thermometer above 
 
 the maximum in shade. 
 
 Stations. 
 
 3 
 
 .2 -p 
 
 05 
 
 C& 0) 
 
 h 
 
 c3 
 
 fc* 
 
 o3 
 
 & 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 June. 
 
 
 -P 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 g 
 
 CD 
 
 f4 
 
 05 
 
 rQ 
 
 CD 
 
 rO 
 
 a 
 
 Fh 
 
 05 
 
 a 
 
 
 ® rt 
 
 £ 
 
 c3 
 
 ha 
 
 Fh 
 
 05 
 
 rH 
 
 c3 
 
 a 
 
 • r— 1 
 
 P 
 
 Q 
 
 <i 
 
 May 
 
 July 
 
 bJD 
 
 05 
 
 T J1 
 
 o 
 
 -p 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 P 
 
 cS 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 0 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Leh 
 
 11.538 
 
 49-9 
 
 63-1 
 
 62-3 
 
 63-2 
 
 58-7 
 
 58-1 
 
 54-1 
 
 62-8 
 
 63-8 
 
 63-9 
 
 54-1 
 
 50-9 
 
 58-7 
 
 Cliakrata, 
 
 7,052 71*1 
 
 67-1 
 
 69-4 
 
 69-5 
 
 69-1 
 
 66-3 
 
 63-0 
 
 61-5 
 
 70-3 
 
 69-8 
 
 69-4 
 
 68-5 
 
 67-9 
 
 Ranikhet, 
 
 6,069 61-1 
 
 60-6 
 
 62-6 
 
 60-4 
 
 60-3 
 
 57-1 
 
 50'8 
 
 52-1 
 
 59-8 
 
 57-3 
 
 52-7 
 
 55‘7 
 
 57-5 
 
 Delira ... 
 
 2.232 51-0 
 
 52'2 
 
 57-6 
 
 57-1 
 
 56 '8 
 
 54-2 
 
 53-6 
 
 52-1 
 
 57-7 
 
 58-5 
 
 55'6 
 
 51-8 
 
 54-9 
 
 Roorkee... 
 
 887 
 
 568 
 
 l 52-2 
 
 51-5 
 
 55-9 
 
 54'6 
 
 53'7 
 
 51-2 
 
 51-9 
 
 51 '8 
 
 54-5 
 
 54 - 5 
 
 55-1 
 
 52-5 
 
 53-3 
 
 Bareilly . . 
 
 50-0 
 
 52-6 
 
 54-1 
 
 54‘4 
 
 55’3 
 
 | 54-2 
 
 50-7 
 
 50-1 
 
 49-3 
 
 52-0 
 
 52-4 
 
 48-9 
 
 52-0 
 
208 
 
 HIM XL A VAN DISTRICTS 
 
 If the air were absolutely diathermanous, tlie altitude of the sun 
 above the horizon and the vertical thickness of the atmosphere 
 above the place of observation should have no effect upon the 
 temperature differences in the table, which should therefore ho the 
 same for all the stations and for every month of the year. But the 
 air having some absorbing power, the differences should be greatest 
 when there is least air for the sun’s rays to pass through ; that is, 
 at the highest stations and in the summer months. Up to Chakrata 
 the excess temperature of the solar thermometer does increase with a 
 fair degree of regularity ; but it appears to be less at Leh than at 
 Chakrata, contrary to all theory. There is also no regular increase 
 apparent in the heating power of the sun as the season changes from 
 winter to summer. The truth is that the indications of the black- 
 bulb thermometer are affected by so many disturbing causes, that 
 after all possible corrections they are of little or no value for inter- 
 comparison ; though with the same thermometer, at the same place, 
 and under absolutely constant conditions of exposure, the figures 
 for one year may be to some extent comparable with those for 
 another. 
 
 The results of observations with the nocturnal radiation thermo- 
 meter are even more unsatisfactory, owing to differences in the 
 height of the instrument above the ground and in the nature of the 
 ground surface itself, whether grassy or bare. 
 
 II. — Monthly mean dejpressicm of the grass thermometer below the 
 
 minimum in shade. 
 
 Stations. 
 
 January. 
 
 ' 
 
 February. 
 
 March. 
 
 April. 
 
 £ 
 
 June. 
 
 July. 
 
 I August. 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 +=> C 
 
 CD 
 
 m 
 
 October. 
 
 Novem- 
 
 ber. 
 
 Decem- 
 
 ber. 
 
 Year. 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Chakrata, 
 
 9-5 
 
 6*5 
 
 7'2 
 
 7-5 
 
 6'3 
 
 6-0 
 
 3-1 
 
 4-3 
 
 5-S 
 
 8-8 
 
 9-8 
 
 11-0 
 
 7-2 
 
 Ranikliet. 
 
 U-5 
 
 13-6 
 
 13-9 
 
 13-3 
 
 12-0 
 
 9-0 
 
 5 3 
 
 6-0 
 
 8'9 
 
 13*5 
 
 17-2 
 
 19-1 
 
 12-2 
 
 Dehra ... 
 
 4-4 
 
 4-4 
 
 4-2 
 
 4-7 
 
 4-8 
 
 3-6 
 
 2-2 
 
 1-5 
 
 2-3 
 
 3-5 
 
 4-8 
 
 4-6 
 
 3-8 
 
 Roorkee... 
 
 6-3 
 
 5-8 
 
 6-4 
 
 6-3 
 
 5-0 
 
 3-5 
 
 2-4 
 
 2*9 
 
 3-9 
 
 6-3 
 
 7-3 
 
 6-3 
 
 5-2 
 
 Bareilly... 
 
 7-0 
 
 7-5 
 
 8-0 
 
 10-0 
 
 10-5 
 
 8-8 
 
 4-3 
 
 3-3 
 
 3-4 
 
 6-4 
 
 8-2 
 
 8-0 
 
 7-1 
 
 The figures in table II. serve to show that the depression of the 
 nocturnal radiation thermometer below the minimum in shade is less 
 in the rainy season than in the dry, and that both at the hill stations 
 and on the open plain the refrigeration of the earth’s surface during 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 209 
 
 the night is probably greater than at Debra, where the observatory 
 is situated in a well-wooded park. They do not throw any light on 
 the question whether the ground surface cools more rapidly at night 
 on mountain tops or on the plains ; though it is probable that in 
 the clear, calm nights of the cold weather the difference, it any, is 
 in favour of the plains ; since there the air cooled by contact with 
 the ground remains in contact with it, whereas on the mountains 
 the cooled air constantly drains away, and is replaced by warmer air 
 from the surrounding free atmosphere. 
 
 It has been already stated that, in the western Himalaya, every 
 
 elevation has its characteristic mean annual 
 Temperature. temperature. Each elevation has probably 
 
 also a distinctive form of variation of temperature during the year, 
 and the daily variation is different at different altitudes, in iangc if 
 
 not in general form. 
 
 For a proper discussion of the distribution of temperature in a 
 hilly country a very large number of observations would in most cases 
 be required ; and these should be made at places chosen so as to 
 be at nearly equal distances from each other vertically, and at the 
 same time fairly distributed in latitude and longitude. On the 
 southern slope of the Himalaya it fortunately happens that differences 
 of latitude and longitude make but/ little difference in the mean 
 annual temperature. The sea-level values of the mean temperature 
 at the Sub-Himalayan stations from Lower Asam to Ambala 
 all lie between 76 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit, and the tempera- 
 tures of places at about 7,000 feet elevation along the whole range 
 from Darjiling to Marri in the north of the Panjab do not differ 
 
 more than 2 or 3 degrees. 
 
 Both along the plains and at the level of the hill sanitaria 
 the highest mean temperatures are found to characterize the 
 regions lying between the Kali and Satlaj rivers. Hie chief 
 reason for the great uniformity of mean temperature at the 
 same elevation that prevails over the whole Himalayan region— 
 that is to say, through more than 7 degrees of latitude and 17 of 
 longitude— is the greatly increased heat of summer in the north- 
 west as compared to the east. In Bengal and Sikkim the sun s lays 
 when most intense are to a great extent cut off b\ cloud, whereas 
 
 27 
 
210 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 in the Panjab and the north-west Himalaya the winter is almost if 
 not quite as cloudy as the summer. For these reasons Darjiling 
 lias very nearly the same temperature in January as Simla, 
 Chakra ta, or Mussooree, while in May and June it is seven or eight 
 degrees cooler. The comparatively low temperature of the summer 
 at Darjiling renders the mean for the year nearly two degrees lower 
 than that of Marri in the extreme north-west, though the effect of 
 latitude is apparent in the low temperature of Marri in January. 
 
 On account of this uniformity of temperature a small number of 
 observations, at places chosen specially with reference to height above 
 the sea, will enable us to ascertain the most important features of tem- 
 perature distribution in the Himalayan districts of the North- W estern 
 Provinces. The following table gives the mean monthly temper- 
 atures of twenty-one places, including the two stations on the plains 
 that were given in the previous tables. All the other places except 
 Dharmsala lie in one or other of the three districts of Kumaon, 
 Gfarhwal, and Dehra Dun, or in parts of Kunawar, Lahul, and Ladak 
 to the north of Dehra Dun. The monthly means from a Government 
 observatory at Dharmsala in the Panjab have been inserted, though 
 this station lies nearly two degrees west of Dehra Dun, because it 
 was considered desirable to have some trustworthy figures for places 
 about 4,000 feet above the sea ; and the only other station near that 
 altitude is Hawalbagh in Kumaon, for which we have but one 
 year’s observations. 
 
III. — Mean monthly and annual temperatures of places in Kumaon, Garhwdl, Delira Dim, and adjacent districts. 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 211 
 
 's jgsa jo aaquitiR 
 
 H»HINNHIt5r-lNmCOCnO-#rH>nNHHl>.H 
 
 1 rH | | | | 1 | 
 
 rl J (DNH CH hH C0 
 
 
 0005 CO O CO lO (MTHO^Nl>CpN’^<p cpc^ 
 
 »b 4* ; Ah 6 »o c* ;moj ioooojojcoj^ • £r 
 
 ^ co co • O O lO CO O O lO o ^ ^ -coco 
 
 Moquiaoao; 
 
 0 1.0 h (M O O <^-^^OCMcp»pcOrHrHO ^ ^ 
 
 o o ■ lO »0 O LO GNr— 1 
 
 •j-aqiuqAOR 
 
 IQ O (fnoot- Q O) to l' l> M IN 9 V *P 
 
 »%, »Vk • As\ A.1 /“■*> |^» • I*, rH CO LO CM CM CM 05 CM l> • 0> CM 
 go :§®§Io :£j!oS!oisiaio^^os -coin 
 
 •aoqojoo 
 
 O ts^ooO'CHpommipf H? ^osco 
 
 ^ y. • ^ to o o ta ^ to tc to O LQ lO lO ^ CO CO 
 
 Moqiuojdag 
 
 °0I>0^M000iflN<N^f09cpcp909b- 
 ra K N 1C C3 QO ^ ^ ^ h N >0 C3 CM 
 
 2oooS^t^^§v£?-Scococococococoioo^io 
 
 •jstiiniy 
 
 ohoimooooicnconccht'9999 2? 5 
 
 fflfflaBS^fflf-Stotoaotototoototoo 
 
 
 CO WOlXMOb’OO^H^Ci'^b-OCOcpOOiOP- 
 
 H)'nrirAC)i)6o5cbHciNGO^'t'»OCCCOCOOH 
 
 SJ22a0§SSS«>t-COCOCOCOCOCO-COCOlO5OCO 
 
 •a unp 
 
 coaoooooooooooocprHipoiptH© . © © 
 
 o o 4t to -h to »o co to ' — io> — a; co co oo m 'tj .coco 
 
 § £ oo oo x S t> t- » » t- t~ ® «> » to to 10 • *o 10 
 
 
 HfflOINHOCOOfflOOCOOtO <pOt|t-cp « p 05 
 
 O' C— O An Ol CO CS 1 Co © © t- *c~ © lO -J CO eg 05 • © 10 
 
 SSooooooi>t-tci>totototoeototsiai< * ^ 
 
 •Ij.uly 
 
 2jn lrfOl>HOCOOI>CJlCOd'^jp^pCpcpO rH tp 
 
 ^ 2 h n i i od 6 ^ 6 w >b 6 o Q *o o ^ :ot> 
 
 oorat>i'?-Sffltocototototoioioio^Tt( • cm 
 
 •qMBH 
 
 Old OOOS« ^CO«cp.OOfHNO COCO 
 
 • L. • At ,o ^ b- : t- w t- © >’o Nooji'i : o oh 
 tSi? ! © © © © •OLOlOOlOtOlOTHCOTtt CO CH 
 
 •j£.ii3tu:qaR 
 
 o-^ OOO-H N 00 O (N CO Ol t> H®9 rH t>. 
 
 • • • A, ob io oo :eqiot'Coi’oaiaO'0HHHcb : ci co 
 
 23 : © © © hH •1QhH'#'HChH'*'#'#COCO ’INh 
 
 •VLOLlUGf 
 
 cot^ tcooots co©©^t»ip©oo<x>© Oio 
 
 ■ • • A j A h ; io 4 h io © on i— h t- oo hh >>- t5 
 
 XOO : © © -+ -* ! HI tH ^ -tH rH -tH CO (M IM rH r—t 
 
 •J03J Ut UOIJUA^ia 
 
 ^..l; rq ^^OT®0 0:KNNHCOWH(00 
 “^So^HooicHiHototcmiCHaH-tcwo 
 
 o KS C S H HCC io © cc © -+ c. © io Ol OO -H ©O 
 
 '' r 4' e XoJ'r*'rFlOlQ!0'»o' , tCedt£’ t -C^a:0--Hr-H''co' 
 
 ‘H apuji3uo r x 
 
 T-^ en r^i O N O lO CO O C5 r— < lQ t-h O -+■< CM 
 
 SiSSoSoOWWiOWTHHNCOb-OHWHMTHO 
 °^u^Ncoci^a)050ooo:C5oot-oOaoiN05Nco 
 ?• S t>- t> t- t> oo i> i> i> t- t- ip- b- 
 
 •R apnjijiri 
 
 HMinOOOOOOlCHHOOOOOO^ -HcOOO 
 
 N§H«§SNHM««(OIM«HiNOiOHiHH 
 
 rr,moOO®i?IOO>ffiOC:OOO^l?llNOHCl 
 
 csSoJcoeoStNcocotMCticocqtMcccococococococo 
 
 Place. 
 
 . • • O „ • • • 
 
 • • • ■ i • . , « • i t » • * * [3 , — . • • f 
 
 «o . • ! • • ••••• • • • ct _/ • * * 
 
 • * ' * £3 
 
 O’ ^ '3 _ 
 
 r*"^ S' 
 
 {H „ H 
 
 ^ S^’d O 3 00 £ rt M ^ . u-1 ■ H 
 
 ttl O H ® ^ H Cj H ® 2 -S- p} rj- ^ 
 
 o ‘rj ^ W s ^ c3 jJ ^ ^5 W c3 k'j yd' ® 
 
212 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Authorities for the above table. 
 
 Bareilly : 
 
 Registers of the Government Meteorological Observatory, 
 
 1869 to 1879 
 
 Eoorkee : 
 
 Ditto, 
 
 ditto, 
 
 1863 „ 1879 
 
 Dharms vla 
 
 : Ditto, 
 
 ditto, 
 
 1871 „ 1S75 
 
 Ra'nikiiet : 
 
 Ditto, 
 
 ditto, 
 
 1871 „ 1879 
 
 Chakrata : 
 
 Ditto, 
 
 ditto, 
 
 1869 „ 1879 
 
 Leii : 
 
 Ditto, 
 
 ditto, 
 
 1871 „ 1877 
 
 Dehra : 
 
 Registers of the Observatory at the G. T. Survey Office, 1868 „ 1879 
 
 Naini Tal : 
 
 Registers of Government Observatory, 1863 to 1869 ; and observations 
 
 by Dr. Payne in 1851-54, given at page 49(5 of the third volume of 
 the Results of a Scientific Mission to India and High Asia, by the 
 brothers Schlagintweit. 
 
 Mussooree (1): Records of an observatory at Saint Fidelis’s School for 1877-80 ; 
 somewhat fragmentary. 
 
 (2) : November to April, Sir A. Waugh’s and Mr. Mackinnon’s obser- 
 vations in 1855-5G, also one year’s observations from Dove’s tables ; 
 May to October, observations at the Survey Office for 18(5(5-79, fur- 
 nished by Mr. Hennessey, F.R.S. 
 
 Land A ur : Registers kept at the Convalescent Hospital in 1852-54, and 1 8(5(5- (57. 
 
 Observations for the three years 1877-79 have been communicated by 
 the medical officer in charge, but the means deduced from them 
 appear to be 4 or 5 degrees too high. 
 
 K K lsi : Pigot — Calcutta Journal of Natural History, Vol. VI., 1837-38. 
 
 Almora : Observations at the Regimental Hospital, 1S52-54 and 1866-69. 
 
 Hawalbagii : Schlagintweit, page 494, on authority of Mr. Batten ; year unknown. 
 
 Lohugha't : Clelland’s Geology of Kumaon, page 179 : parts of 1830, 1831, 1834, 
 and 1835. 
 
 Kardong : Schlagintweit, page 513 ; 1855-56. - 
 
 Kan am : Cunningham’s Laddh, page 1S4 1827-28. 
 
 Spiti Valley : Ditto, page 183 ; 2 1846. 
 
 Srinagar : 
 Pauri : 
 Niti : 
 
 Manuscript observations by General Strachey and his brothers 
 1847-49. 
 
 The figures for the regular meteorological observatories (printed 
 in small capitals in table III.) and those for the observatory at 
 
 'Recomputed from the maxima and minima and corrected by means of the obser- 
 vations of Chakrata and Leh, Recomputed and corrected by the Leh 
 
 observations. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 213 
 
 the Survey Office, Mussooree, are either directly calculated from 
 observations at 4 a. m., 10 a. m., 4 p. m., and 10 p. m., or have 
 been corrected to represent the means of observations taken at 
 these hours. They probably differ very little from true daily 
 means. The mean temperatures for the other places have been 
 calculated in various ways, and many of them are open to consider- 
 able doubt. 
 
 The mean annual temperature diminishes pretty regularly as 
 heio-ht increases. In the table there are only two exceptions to the 
 rule that the higher a place is the cooler it is. It will be seen also on 
 comparing places of nearly equal altitude and not very far apart that 
 the highest temperatures belong to those which, lying behind the outer- 
 most high ridge, are subject to a much smaller rainfall than stations 
 situated on the ridge or in valleys opening out to the south and 
 exposed to the full force of the rainy winds. Thus Ranikhet and 
 Almora are too hot in comparison with Naini Tab The difference 
 in temperature as well as in humidity between places situated at 
 equal heights on the outer and inner ranges of Kumaon is suffi- 
 ciently great to ho easily recognizable without the aid of instru- 
 ments, and is well known to all who have ever resided in the 
 hills. The variation of temperature between the hottest and coldest 
 months and the daily range of the thermometer are also greater, 
 as a rule, in the interior than on the outer hills, owing to the larger 
 proportion of cloudy sky and greater humidity of the air in the 
 latter region. 
 
 Both the diurnal and the annual range of temperature decrease 
 on ascending from the plains up to a height of 6,000 or 7,000 feet, 
 and beyond that they again increase, their greatest values being 
 attained at the highest stations where observations have been made. 
 Those places, however, lie to the north of the Indian watershed, 
 where the humidity is doubtless less than on the southern side, 
 and the observed ranges of temperature are probably higher than 
 they would be at equal altitudes on this side of the snowy range. 
 Moreover, the annual range in Tibet and Ladak is greater than 
 on the Indian side of the chain on account of the difference of 
 latitude, as has already been pointed out. In table IV. the daily 
 and yearly ranges of temperature at twelve places are compared, 
 and from it these relations will be readily seen. 
 
21 4 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 1 V- — Mean diurnal and annual ranges of temperature at places 
 
 in the Himalaya. 
 
 Place. 
 
 Diurnal Range. 
 
 Annual range of 
 monthly means. 
 
 Jauuary. 
 
 F ebruary. 
 
 1 
 
 March. 
 
 April. 
 
 tA 
 
 o{ 
 
 S 
 
 •June. 
 
 July. 
 
 j August. 
 
 September. 
 
 i October. 
 
 i 
 
 November. 
 
 i 
 
 I December. 
 
 Year. 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 Bareilly ... 
 
 26-3 
 
 25*5 
 
 28-0 
 
 310 
 
 28-3 
 
 22-1 
 
 14-2 
 
 14-2 
 
 15-0 
 
 24-3 
 
 30-4 
 
 28-0 
 
 23 9 33 0 
 
 lloorkee 
 
 26-5 
 
 24-6 
 
 28-3 
 
 31-4 28-9 
 
 22-2 
 
 14-5 
 
 14-6 
 
 17-2 
 
 27-8 
 
 32-9 
 
 29-3 
 
 24-8 34-1 
 
 Debra ... 
 
 23-4 
 
 23-1 
 
 24-0 
 
 26-3 24-9 
 
 18-6 
 
 12-8 
 
 12-5 
 
 15-0 
 
 23-4 
 
 25-9,24-3 
 
 21-2 30 1 
 
 Dharmsala 
 
 15-8 
 
 18-6 
 
 20-4 
 
 21-3 2P6 
 
 18-2 
 
 12-6 
 
 12-6 
 
 15-4 
 
 19-6 
 
 20-2 
 
 18-5 
 
 17-9 31-5 
 
 Mussooree, (1), 
 
 14-0 
 
 13-2 
 
 14-0 
 
 16-0, 19-3 
 
 15-4 
 
 9-4 
 
 8-0 
 
 10-3 
 
 13-6 1 , 16-3 12-3 
 
 13-2 25-2 
 
 Ranikhet 
 
 16-1 
 
 17-0 
 
 18-2 
 
 18'6 
 
 18-1 
 
 15-0 
 
 11-2 
 
 10-9 
 
 131 
 
 15"3 
 
 17-2 
 
 16-1 
 
 15-5 
 
 25-2 
 
 Mussooree, (2), 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 19-0 
 
 16-5 
 
 10-7 
 
 9-9 
 
 12-0 
 
 14-2 
 
 16-8 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 1 
 
 27-0 
 
 Chakrata 
 
 183 
 
 18*4 
 
 18-1 
 
 19'7j 
 
 19-4 
 
 16-3 
 
 12-5 
 
 11*3 
 
 12-0; 
 
 17-3 
 
 18-0 
 
 18*3 
 
 16-6 26-4 
 
 Landaur 
 
 15*3 
 
 18-7 
 
 18-2 
 
 19-7, 
 
 20-0 
 
 21-2 
 
 13 • 1 ( 
 
 9"5 
 
 12-2 
 
 16-5 
 
 17-0 
 
 18-2 
 
 16-6 
 
 28-8 
 
 Kanarn 
 
 15-2 
 
 17-2 
 
 22-0 
 
 19-0 
 
 18-5 
 
 17-3 
 
 16-3 
 
 15-5 
 
 88-9, 
 
 20-5 
 
 19-0 
 
 18-3 
 
 18*1 
 
 37-8 
 
 Leh 
 
 28-5 
 
 30-0 28*01 
 
 31-0,30-1 
 
 31-8 
 
 11-2 
 
 31-3 
 
 31-4 
 
 30-5 
 
 26*7) 25-2 
 
 29-6 
 
 42-9 
 
 Spiti ...| 
 
 193 
 
 27*7) 29*2 
 
 18-5, 
 
 22-0 
 
 29-0 
 
 32-1 
 
 31-3 
 
 28-4 28-0 
 
 18-0 32-2 
 
 i i 
 
 28-7 44-5 
 
 The table shows clearly that the minimum range for both day 
 and year is reached at Ranikhet and the lower Mussooree station — 
 that is, about 6,000 feet above the sea. The dependence of the 
 diurnal range upon the humidity of the air and the proportion of cloud 
 at each station is distinctly brought out in the variations from month 
 to month. At all the stations but Leh and the Spiti valley, which lie 
 beyond the snowy mountains, the months of the year which are 
 driest in India — April and May — have the largest daily thermonie- 
 tric range, and the most humid months — J uly and August — have 
 the smallest. There is a secondary minimum of temperature range 
 coinciding with a maximum of humidity in January, and a second- 
 ary maximum in the dry and cloudless month of November. At 
 Leh, where the most frequent precipitation of moisture during the 
 year takes place in winter, the range is somewhat greater in the 
 summer than in the winter months. 
 
 Owing to the greater annual range of temperature on the plains 
 than on the hills, the diminution of temperature in the first 6,000 
 feet of ascent is most rapid in the hottest months and least so in the 
 cold season. Between lloorkee and Chakrata the difference is less 
 than 11 degrees in December and more than 23 in May. In the 
 clear still nights of the cold weather, especially in November and 
 December, before the winter rains and snows set in, the nocturnal 
 
 > 
 
 
s * % , 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. .■ - 21 5 
 
 loss of heat goes on almost as freely on the plains as on mountain 
 peaks. It is thus not unusual to find the temperature of the exposed ^ 
 thermometer at Roorkee nearly as low as at Chakrata, and it veiy 
 frequently falls lower at Roorkee than at Dehra, where the obser- 
 vatory is surrounded by trees. In December the mean temperatuie 
 diminishes between Roorkee and Dehra at the rate of only one 
 decree in 1,034 feet, while in May and June it falls one degree in 
 
 230 feet. 
 
 The low temperature of the plains in the winter season, especially 
 in the morning, is doubtless due in part to the draining down 
 of cold air from the mountain slopes through the river gorges. 
 This, however, cannot appreciably affect the temperatuie of 
 places at a long distance from the mountains, though it may 
 have a very considerable effect on that of Roorkee, close to the foot 
 of the Siwaliks. The minimum temperature of the day is thus one 
 or two degrees lower on the average at Roorkee than at Dehra 
 in the months of November and December, and in January the 
 minimum temperatures of the two places are equal. In the moun- 
 tain country itself it often happens for the same leason that the 
 temperature of the air at the bottom of a valley is distinctly lower 
 than on the adjacent ridges. A similar inversion of the noimal 
 variation of temperature with height has been noticed in Euiope 
 during calm weather in winter. 
 
 to 
 
 From March to June the absorption of heat in melting and 
 evaporating the snow on the outer hills, and in evapoiating the 
 rain that falls there in frequent showers when no rain falls over the 
 plains, keeps down the temperature so that in May and the fust half 
 of June, when the plains are at their hottest, the decrease of tempei- 
 ature on ascending through 6,000 or 7,000 feet is more than twice 
 as great as in December. 
 
 In the Panjab, where the latitude is higher and the humidity of 
 the air over the plains is never great, the annual range of tempera- 
 ture at places on the plains is higher than in the North- 
 Western Provinces, while in the hills there is much less difference. 
 The annual variation in the decrease of temperature with height is 
 accordingly much more distinctly marked in the extreme west 
 
 of the Himalava than it is in Dehra Dun. The difference of 
 * 
 
210 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 temperature between Rawal Pindi and Marri is lb ‘5 degrees in 
 J uly and only one-third as great in December. On the other hand, 
 in the eastern Himalaya, where the air at all elevations up to 9,000 
 or 10,000 feet is nearly equally moist, and where the range of 
 temperature, especially over the plain, is much less than in the 
 north-west, the decrease of temperature with height is most rapid 
 in Februai’y and March and least so in June and July. The slow 
 rate of decrement in the rainy season is doubtless due to the libe- 
 ration of latent heat in the condensation of vapour ; this heat ren- 
 dering the atmospheric strata in which condensation occurs warmer 
 than they otherwise would be, while the constant precipitation of 
 rain prevents the lower strata from becoming very much hotter than 
 the rain drops which pass through them. The effect of the rainy 
 season in retarding the fall of temperature as we ascend is distinctly 
 seen between Bareilly and Naini Till or Ranikhet, but is not seen 
 between Roorkee and Chakrata. 
 
 The great annual range of temperature at more elevated stations, 
 especially such as lie behind the first snowy range and receive little 
 or no precipitation, causes even greater differences in the rate of 
 decrease of temperature with height, but in the opposite direction. 
 In January, the difference of temperature between Chakrata and 
 Leh is 24 degrees, but in August it is only 4 degrees. The 
 greater length of the day in summer at Leh, and the absence of 
 cloud to obstruct solar radiation on the surrounding mountain sides, 
 render the summer months at that station, 11,500 feet above the 
 sea, as hot as they would be on the southern side of the snowy 
 mountains at an elevation of 8,500 or 9,000 feet. If General 
 Cunningham’s figures for the temperature of the Spiti valley are to 
 be trusted, the heat of summer at an elevation of 13,000 feet is 
 still more excessive. The relation of this to the greater height of 
 the snow-line on the northern than on the southern side of the 
 Himalayan system is obvious. 
 
 In the following table the mean rate of decrease of temperature 
 in the first 6,000 or 7,000 feet of ascent has been worked out for 
 each month. In Dehra Dun the lower station is Roorkee and 
 the upper one Chakrata ; in Kumaon, Bareilly has been taken for 
 the lower station, and instead of choosing either Naini Tal or Rani- 
 khet for the upper one, the monthly mean temperatures of both 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 217 
 
 places have been taken and assigned to the mean elevation of the 
 two. This was considered preferable to taking the figures for 
 either hill station alone, because Ranikhet appears to be a little 
 
 9 
 
 hotter than the average of places at the same elevation, and Naini 
 Tal is probably somewhat cooler than the average. 
 
 V. — Decrement of temperature with height in the Himalaya. 
 
 Month. 
 
 Delira Dun , differ- 
 ence iff elevation , 
 6,165 feet. 
 
 Kumaon , difference 
 of elevation, 
 
 5,698 feet. 
 
 Mean rate of 
 decrease. 
 
 Difference 
 of tem- 
 perature. 
 
 Height 
 for 1°. 
 
 Difference 
 of tem- 
 perature. 
 
 Height 
 for 1°. 
 
 Height 
 for 1°. 
 
 For 1,000 
 feet. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 Ft. 
 
 O 
 
 Ft. 
 
 Ft. 
 
 O 
 
 January 
 
 
 15' 1 
 
 408 
 
 12-9 
 
 442 
 
 425 
 
 2-85 
 
 February 
 
 
 17-4 
 
 354 
 
 15-7 
 
 363 
 
 358 
 
 2-79 
 
 March 
 
 
 20-1 
 
 307 
 
 17.1 
 
 333 
 
 320 
 
 3-13 
 
 April 
 
 
 22-9 
 
 270 
 
 20-6 
 
 278 
 
 274 
 
 3'65 
 
 May 
 
 
 23-3 
 
 265 
 
 22-2 
 
 257 
 
 261 
 
 3-83 
 
 June 
 
 
 22- 8 
 
 270 
 
 20-1 
 
 2S3 
 
 27 7 
 
 3-61 
 
 July 
 
 
 20'7 
 
 298 
 
 16-7 
 
 341 
 
 319 
 
 3-14 
 
 August 
 
 
 20-0 
 
 308 
 
 16-7 
 
 341 
 
 325 
 
 3-08 
 
 September 
 
 
 19-7 
 
 313 
 
 171 
 
 333 
 
 323 
 
 3'09 
 
 October 
 
 
 18-0 
 
 343 
 
 16-3 
 
 350 
 
 356 
 
 ’2-81 
 
 November 
 
 
 12-8 
 
 482 
 
 12-3 
 
 463 
 
 473 
 
 2-11 
 
 December 
 
 
 10-9 
 
 567 
 
 10-2 
 
 559 
 
 563 
 
 1-78 
 
 Year 
 
 
 18-6 
 
 331 
 
 16-5 
 
 345 
 
 338 
 
 2-96 
 
 In Deln-a Dun there is a regular annual periodic variation in the 
 rate of decrease of temperature with height, but in Kumaon the 
 regular variation is interrupted in July and August, when the rate of 
 decrease is slightly retarded by the fall of rain, as has been explained 
 above. When the mean for both districts is taken, the regular 
 variation from month to month is only slightly broken in August. 
 
 The figures given in the table include not only the decrease of 
 temperature due to increase of elevation above the sea, but also a 
 certain diminution caused by an increase of latitude equal to about 
 a degree in 6,000 feet of elevation. The change of temperature 
 with latitude in the Himalaya is small and to some extent masked 
 by the contrast between the sunny valleys of the interior and the 
 cool and cloudy outer ranges, but nevertheless it exists. On the 
 plains of the North-West Panjab the temperature falls as the latitude 
 increases at a mean rate of about Pl° F. for each degree of latitude, 
 when corrections are made for differences of height above the sea. 
 Probably much the same rate obtains in the western Himalaya at 
 moderate elevations. The mean temperature of Yarkand, in latitude 
 
 28 
 
218 
 
 HIM/LAYAN districts 
 
 89° N. and 4,200 feet above the sea, appears from the observations 
 of Captain Trotter, R.E., of Drs. Bellew, Henderson and Scully, to 
 be about 54°F. At the same elevation in Kumaon the mean tem- 
 perature is between 65° and 66°, and since the difference of latitude 
 is ten degrees, the temperature appears to diminish about 1*1° or 
 T2° for a degree of latitude. There is also a certain variation of 
 the mean temperature with the longitude, places situated towards 
 the east of the chain being cooler than those towards the v r est on 
 account of the cloudiness of the summer months. In order to deter- 
 mine the true variation of temperature with height it is necessary 
 to make allowance for these variations in latitude and longitude. 
 The mean annual temperature of any place in the western Himalaya 
 may thus be looked upon as a function of four quantities — (1) the 
 sea-level temperature at a point taken as the zero of latitude and 
 longitude, (2) a constant multiplied into the height of the place 
 above the sea, (3) a constant multiplied into the latitude, and (4) a 
 constant multiplied by the longitude. From the Schlagintweits’ 
 ■work and the reports of the Indian Meteorological Department 
 fairly trustworthy mean temperatures for about thirty places in the 
 Himalaya between the Nepal frontier and the Indus can be obtained, 
 more than half of these being given in Table III. When treated by 
 the method of least squares the observations admit of being thrown 
 into the form T=78*5°--00277A-1'20 (X- 29°) -*105 (L-73°), 
 a formula which represents the observations with a mean error of 
 about three-quarters of a degree. It ignores, of course, the differences 
 of temperature between such places as Almora or Ranikhet and 
 others of equal elevation on the outermost range. The decrement 
 of temperature with height when latitude and longitude remain 
 unchanged appears therefore to be 2"77 degrees in 1,000 feet or 1° 
 in 361 feet. In the eastern Himalaya the decrease is more rapid, the 
 observations taken at Darjiling and Gfwalpara giving a mean rate of 
 1° in 320 feet. At great elevations on the table-land, too, it is 
 probable that the temperature diminishes more rapidly than on the 
 southern slope of the mountains. General Cunningham’s observa- 
 tions in Spiti and Rupshu during the month of September, 1847, 
 give a mean increase of about 280 feet in elevation for one degree 
 of fall in temperature; and from the observations taken by Dr. 
 Scully on the return journey from Yarkand over the Karakoram 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 219 
 
 pass and through Ladak in September, 1875, Mr. Blanford has 
 deduced a mean fall of temperature equal to one degree in 227 feet. 1 
 
 The isotherms for equal altitudes in the western Himalaya and 
 Ladak run from about W. 6° N. to E. 6° S., being thus three points 
 
 less inclined to the parallels of latitude than the general direction 
 of the mountain axis; but in eastern Tibet, Nepal, and Sikkim they 
 probably bend to the southward. The mean temperatures of 
 Kathmandu and Darjiling, at elevations of 4,354 and 6,912 teet 
 above the sea, appear from the observations of ten years to be 61' 7 
 and 53' 9 degrees respectively, but according to the preceding 
 formula they should be 66' 7° and 601°. The mean temperatures of 
 the four stations, Darjiling, Kathmandu, Gwalpara, and Sibsagar, in 
 the eastern Himalaya and Asam, may be represented very accurately 
 by the formula T ^ 77*7° - -00312/*- D53 (X-26°)--23 (L-85°). 
 In this part of the chain the temperature decreases at a mean rate 
 of one degree in 321 feet of ascent, and the isotherms run from 
 W. 10° N. to E. 10° S., the direction of the mountain axis being 
 nearly due east and west. The isotherms are thus slightly curved, 
 with the concavity towards the south-west, whilst the general line 
 
 of the mountains is considerably curved in the opposite direction. 
 This is merely another form of the statement in page 209, that the 
 highest temperatures characterize theft part of the chain between the 
 Nepal frontier and the Satlaj. 
 
 Supposing the uniform rate of decrease worked out in Table Y . 
 to hold good for the whole southern slope of the North-West Hima- 
 laya, since the difference of latitude is nearly propotional to that of 
 height, a mean temperature of 49°E., equal to that of London, 
 would he attained at a height of 9,600 feet, and the annual range 
 of temperature would probably ditier little from that observed in 
 England.. The hill sanitaria, lying between 6,000 and 7,000 feet, 
 possess climates comparable, as regards temperature, to those of 
 Nice, Mentone, and other health resorts in the Riviera ; all the 
 towns along the cost of France and Italy from Marseilles to Florence 
 having mean temperatures between 58° and 60°F. The annual 
 range of the monthly means at the Himalayan stations does not exceed 
 
 25 or 26 degrees, whereas on the Mediterranean coast it varies 
 from 28 or 29 degrees at Nice to 35 or 36 at Florence and Rome. 
 1 Indian Meteorological Memoirs. Vo!. L, page 222. 
 
220 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Nice and Ranikhet have exactly the same mean temperature, but Nice is 
 seven or eight degrees hotter than Ranikhet in July and August, and 
 several degrees colder all through the winter and spring months, except 
 in January, when the temperatures of the two places are nearly equal. 
 
 At the superior limit of natural forest in the Himalaya, about 
 12,000 feet above the sea, the mean temperature is probably ten 
 degrees above freezing. In the Alps a species of pine, F. cernbra, 
 forms natural forests on the borders of perpetual snow, where the 
 mean temperature is several degrees under the freezing point. This 
 differ ence of habit between the Himalayan and Alpine pines is very 
 curious, and it is difficult to suggest any reason for it, since the natives 
 of the Himalaya and Tibet find little difficulty in growing poplars and 
 fruit trees in sheltered situations up to 13,000 feet or higher. 1 A mean 
 temperature of 32° would be attained at a height of 15,400 feet, 
 which is 2,000 feet above the upper limit of cultivated trees in Tibet. 
 
 The zone which has a mean temperature of 32° in any month 
 will piobably be near the lower edge of the snows in that month, 
 especially in summer, when the light falls of snow on the outer hills 
 have been all melted away. If the height of this zone be calculated 
 for every month, the highest value obtained will be near the perpe- 
 tual snow-line. With the uniform rate of decrease given in the last 
 column of Table V., the result for July and August, when the snow 
 line is highest, is about 17,630 feet. This result is very much 
 higher than that given in Humboldt’s Asie Centrale, on the authority 
 of some of the earliest European travellers who penetrated into the 
 country. General Strachey has, however, shown 2 that some of these 
 mistook the lower limit of glaciers for the line of perpetual snow. 
 The elevations of the snow line on the Tils til and Nanda Devi groups 
 of peaks, determined by trigonometrical observation from Almora 
 in the latter part of 1848, before the winter snows set in, varied, 
 according to Strachey, from about 17,000 feet on the eastern face of 
 each group to 15,500 on the west ; this latter was, however, in part 
 probably newly fallen autumnal snow. The conclusion from these 
 observations was that the height of the snow-line on the “ more pro- 
 minent points of the southern edge of the belt (of snowy mountains) 
 may fairly be reckoned at 16,000 feet at the very least.” The Sclilagint- 
 
 1 Schlagintweit’s Meteorology of India, page 565. 2 Journal of the Asia- 
 
 tic bociety of Bengal , April, 1849. 
 

 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 221 
 
 weits found tliat the average height of the snow-line on the southern 
 face of the Himalaya from Bhutan to Kashmir was 1 0,200 feet. At 
 page 72 of General Cunningham’s hook on Ladak the mean height of 
 the sndw-line on the peaks north of Simla, determined trigonometric- 
 ally, is given at 16,665 feet, the highest point observed being about 
 1 000 feet higher ; and in Mr. Drew’s volume on the Kashmir terri- 
 tories, published in 1875, the elevation of the snow-line on the outer- 
 most zone is stated to be 16,500 feet. The height obtained by calcula- 
 tion as above suggested is thus probably a little too great, though it 
 comes surprisingly close to some of Strachey’s observations on Nan da 
 Devi and those of Cunningham on the peaks of Kulu. Some obser- 
 vations have recently been made by the Trigonometrical Survey 
 officers at Mussooree to determine the height of the snow-line on the 
 peaks above Jamnotri, but the results have not yet been published. 
 
 For the ranges north of the Indian watershed we have not suffi- 
 cient data to calculate the approximate height of the snow-lme from 
 temperature observations ; but the high temperature of Leh and the 
 Spiti valley in July and August show most distinctly that it must be 
 much higher than on the southern side. The limit of perpetual snow 
 on the ridges bordering on Tibet, especially those which lie beyond 
 the Satlaj, is given by Stracliey as 19,000 feet at least. Dr. Gerard 
 many years ago, and more recently Mr. Drew, assigned an elevation 
 of 20,000 feet to the limit of the snow in Kiipsliu. One reason 
 why this limit is so high — the intensity of solar radiation in summer 
 
 } ia s already been mentioned ; another is the insignificant quantity 
 
 of snow that falls each winter in these regions that are almost com- 
 pletely cut off from the great southern vapour currents. 
 
 The lower limit of the snow in winter is usually about 6,500 feet in 
 Kumaon and somewhat lower in Dehra Dun and the hills north of the 
 Panjab. While it lies the temperature does not rise much above 32°, 
 but it seldom falls in sufficient quantity to lie more than a few days at 
 a time. About one year in ten the snow comes down as low as 5,000 
 feet. The lowest level attained in the first half of the present cen- 
 tury was about 3,000 feet in 1817 and 1817. In 1877 and 1878, 
 thou oli the snowfall was heavier than it had been for many years, it 
 did not come down much below 5,000 feet. A slight fall of snow is 
 said to have been observed at Lahore on the 12 th of January, 1874, 1 
 
 1 Pioneer , 17tli January, 187-1. 
 
222 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 but no notice of this unprecedented occurrence was taken in the 
 meteorological report for that month. 
 
 One of the most important effects of solar heat upon the - atmos- 
 
 Atmospheric pressure phere is the disturbance of its statical pressure 
 and winds. relations, which in turn gives rise to those 
 
 movements of adjustment towards equilibrium that are recognised 
 as winds. The diurnal heating and cooling of the air causes certain 
 oscillatory variations of pressure called the barometric tides, and gives 
 rise to wind movements, such as the land and sea breezes and certain 
 mountain winds that will be described below. The great annual 
 change of temperature between summer and winter, in like manner, 
 causes an annual variation in the height of the barometer and sets 
 up those great currents of the lower atmosphere that are called the 
 monsoons. Since the temperature is constantly changing no such 
 thing as a simple statical distribution of pressure ever exists, though 
 the averages of long series of observations may approximate more 
 or less nearly to what a statical distribution would be. The air is 
 constantly in motion either horizontally or vertically, and these 
 movements cause variations of pressure, just as variations of pressure 
 produce movements. Cause and effect, as regards pressure variations 
 and winds, are thus so inextricably mixed up that it is next to 
 impossible to disentangle them and show their relations clearly. 
 
 There can be little doubt that both the daily and the yearly 
 inequality of pressure grow less as we ascend ; and the annual vari- 
 ation at least becomes quite altered in character at a moderate ele- 
 vation ; but since the barometric variations depend upon the range 
 of temperature which is possibly very great at great altitudes, while 
 at a height of 6,000 or 7,000 feet it is less than on the plains, the 
 decrease of the pressure variations with height is not strictly propor- 
 tional to that of the total pressure. Table VI. gives the mean monthly 
 pressures at a number of stations, and Table VII. the average daily 
 ranee between 0-30 or 10 a.m. and 3-30 or 4 p.m. The figures for 
 Bareilly, lloorkee, Delira, Mussooree (both stations), Ranikhet, Chak- 
 rata, and Leh, have been corrected for the index errors of the baro- 
 meters and are thus comparable with each other, except in so far as the 
 different lengths of the periods of observation may cause the averages 
 to differ ; the others involve an unknown barometer error, which does 
 not, however, affect the range of pressure, either diurnal or annual. 
 
VI. — Monthly and annual means of Pressure at places in the Himalaya . 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 223 
 
 Num- 
 
 ber of 
 years. 
 
 — 
 
 2 CO t- H lO O 
 
 1 2 2 1 1 *° 1 1 1 
 r-H r—( JO r — 1 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 MUOX 
 
 1/ 
 
 29*187 
 
 28-888 
 
 27-567 
 
 25-446 
 
 24*603 
 
 24-238 
 
 24-046 
 
 23-807 
 
 23*222 
 
 19-659 
 
 .loqiuooOQ 
 
 // 
 
 29-439 
 
 29-132 
 
 27-763 
 
 25-620 
 
 24-731 
 
 24-323 
 
 24-134 
 
 23-894 
 
 23-423 
 
 23-287 
 
 19-701 
 
 MoquiOAOjq 
 
 11 
 
 29-393 
 
 29 090 
 
 27-740 
 
 25-624 
 
 24-771 
 
 24-321 
 
 24-157 
 
 23-905 
 
 23-492 
 
 23-303 
 
 19-742 
 
 t 
 
 uoqopo 
 
 11 
 
 29-263 
 
 28-959 
 
 27-638 
 
 25"545 
 
 24-710 
 
 24-290 
 
 24-106 
 
 23-879 
 
 23-439 
 
 23-293 
 
 19-722 
 
 Moqiucqdog 
 
 11 
 
 29-097 
 
 28-796 
 
 27-495 
 
 25-465 
 
 24*578 
 
 24-217 
 
 24-023 
 
 23-758 
 
 23-358 
 
 23-223 
 
 19-692 
 
 •;snSny 
 
 11 
 
 29-002 
 
 28-694 
 
 27-403 
 
 25-323 
 
 24-462 
 
 24-143 
 
 23-959 
 
 23-716. 
 
 23-294 
 
 23-158 
 
 19-640 
 
 'A n r 
 
 r— IO005£s-^-HO£0<35C0e0 
 5CO(N-*05COO<MCTS-*1— 1 i— 1 
 
 ic25oWn-io 
 
 6ooot>i‘o4n4t<cb<43eocoG2 
 
 •0unp 
 
 11 
 
 28-924 
 
 28-615 
 
 27-346 
 
 25-318 
 
 24*422 
 
 24-123 
 
 23-932 
 
 23-687 
 
 23-267 
 
 23-133 
 
 19-650 
 
 
 11 
 
 29-003 
 
 28-744 
 
 27-463 
 
 25-361 
 
 A 
 
 24*542 
 
 24-211 
 
 24-010 
 
 23-760 
 
 23-334 
 
 23-194 
 
 19-668 
 
 qudy 
 
 cococoocoo<^>o3 coca 
 
 5r+llOiOcqcO»OCLOCO • CO ^ 
 
 r-H CO JO >0 03 O CO * 03 CO 
 
 CO b* i'c -rfl rH rfi CO cb CO 
 
 0303030303030303 03’—' 
 
 •qo.iuj\[ 
 
 COt-<M(NoO-*HOOO COO 
 
 aococo-^oot-io 
 
 c^03eo'#ocooco ; <M eo 
 
 05COt-lo4n4n4t<IXl CT3 CS 
 
 Ol i — ( 
 
 •ifjunjqa^ 
 
 COt^OOSOl^CO'rfH O CO 
 
 JO CO -V 03 CO t>- CO . 03 t— 
 
 COOcp^fHCOOlOCO *oi»o 
 
 m Ci b- IQ ^ -ti OO CO 02 
 
 030303 01 03030303 03 r-H 
 
 ■iCrunuuf' 
 
 n 
 
 29-417 
 
 29*123 
 
 27-734 
 
 25-478 
 
 24*704 
 
 24-287 
 
 24*096 
 
 23*865 
 
 23*259 
 
 19-604 
 
 ni aoi^UAO[g[ 
 
 568 
 
 887 
 
 2,232 
 
 4,495 
 
 5,546 
 
 5,855 
 
 6,069 
 
 6,463 
 
 6,881 
 
 7,052 
 
 11,503 
 
 Place. 
 
 Bareilly 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 Deliar 
 
 Dharmsala 
 
 Almora 1 
 
 Mussooree (1), 
 
 Ranikliet 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Mussooree (2), 
 
 Chakra ta 
 
 Leh 
 
 From one year’s observations by General Strachey. 
 
VII. — Mean diurnal and annual ranges of pressure at places in the Himalaya. 
 
 224 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 
 
 »o 
 
 tr- 
 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 rH 
 
 04 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 •siiuaut 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 i — 1 
 
 CO 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 05 
 
 Ol 
 
 co 
 
 
 IQ 
 
 1C 
 
 
 CO 
 
 04 
 
 04 
 
 04 
 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 r-H 
 
 i-H 
 
 oSirat prauuy 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 05 
 
 >o 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 CO 
 
 *.re02L 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 co 
 
 05 
 
 JO 
 
 »C 
 
 IQ 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 r— 1 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 cp 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 »o 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 
 04 
 
 •JoqtitoooQ 
 
 
 o 
 
 i— i 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 r-H 
 
 t- 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 >o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 >o 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 PM 
 
 o 
 
 ■< 
 
 o 
 
 Pi 
 
 & 
 
 ■«! 
 
 PM 
 
 M 3 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 
 MoqraoAOjsj 
 
 // 
 
 •108 
 
 •091 
 
 •093 
 
 •090 
 
 •042 
 
 •065 
 
 •057 
 
 •046 
 
 •053 
 
 • 0 S 9 
 
 Moqopo 
 
 // 
 
 •105 
 
 •094 
 
 •092 
 
 •100 
 
 •047 
 
 •062 
 
 •060 
 
 •054 
 
 •056 
 
 •079 
 
 uaqragylag 
 
 // 
 
 •107 
 
 •099 
 
 •092 
 
 •090 
 
 •060 
 
 •058 
 
 •058 
 
 •053 
 
 •051 
 
 •096 
 
 •cjsnSny 
 
 // 
 
 •097 
 
 •088 
 
 •076 
 
 •oso 
 
 •057 
 
 "055 
 
 •049 
 
 •044 
 
 •047 
 
 •083 
 
 ’ A n r 
 
 // 
 
 •096 
 
 •083 
 
 •070 
 
 •080 
 
 •045 
 
 •052 
 
 •042 
 
 •040 
 
 •051 
 
 •070 
 
 •amif 
 
 // 
 
 •112 
 
 •106 
 
 •086 
 
 •090 
 
 •063 
 
 •052 
 
 •045 
 
 •037 
 
 •039 
 
 •071 
 
 'Xbm 
 
 < 32 t-oo<Nco^H-M<o o 
 
 “■ f— 1 C3 OT CO 1C »o lO CO CO 
 
 ’-'OOOOOOOO o 
 
 qi.icly 
 
 n 
 
 •118 
 
 •099 
 
 •090 
 
 •090 
 
 •038 
 
 •060 
 
 •053 
 
 •048 
 
 •057 
 
 •qorejtf 
 
 It 
 
 •107 
 
 •089 
 
 ■082 
 
 ■090 
 
 •041 
 
 •056 
 
 •056 
 
 •050 
 
 •074 
 
 •X.ren.iqoq 
 
 n 
 
 •104 
 
 •088 
 
 •087 
 
 •090 
 
 •050 
 
 •064 
 
 •063 
 
 •050 
 
 •079 
 
 •Xiuntnjf 
 
 // 
 
 .105 
 
 •093 
 
 •087 
 
 •090 
 
 •047 
 
 •068 
 
 •066 
 
 •051 
 
 •081 
 
 
 
 <d 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 S~\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 
 C4 
 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 z 
 
 z 
 
 N-/ 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 CD 
 
 <D 
 
 
 ce 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 fH 
 
 o 
 
 Hft 
 
 <D 
 
 r-j 
 
 r-H 
 
 Eh 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 fH 
 
 O 
 
 o3 
 
 fH 
 
 
 •rH 
 
 rM 
 
 o3 
 
 fH 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 •rH 
 
 O 
 
 
 CD 
 
 Fh 
 
 c<3 
 
 pq 
 
 fH 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 pH 
 
 Fh 
 
 MM 
 
 d> 
 
 ft 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 to 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 *8 
 
 vc3 
 
 pH 
 
 ’8 
 
 ft 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 :=$ 
 
 3 
 
 r^ 
 
 c3 
 
 r^ 
 
 O 
 
 Leh 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 225 
 
 Tlie double barometric tide that occurs regularly every day, espe- 
 cially in tropical countries, is still one of tlie least understood of 
 atmospheric phenomena. It has been observed at all elevations in the 
 Himalaya to which barometers have been carried, and with no con- 
 siderable difference of phase, 1 though the range and general form of 
 the oscillation are not the same at different heights. It is thus 
 probably something of the nature of a wave of expansion and con- 
 traction propagated upwards and downwards with a velocity equal 
 to that of sound. 
 
 The amplitude of the daily tide bears an obvious relation to the 
 diurnal range of temperature, for it is greater over land areas than 
 over the sea, and in table VII. it is seen to decrease pretty regularly 
 from the plains up to stations situated at an elevation of 6,000 or 
 7,000 feet, where the range of temperature is least, becoming greater 
 again at Leli, where the temperature range is large. Moreover, on 
 the plains there is a well-marked annual variation of the daily range 
 of the barometer, having its maximum in the hot-weather months, 
 when the temperature range is greatest, and its minimum in the 
 rainy season. But the inequality of temperature is not the only 
 cause on which the observed barometric tides depend ; for their am- 
 plitude, as well as their general form, varies with the season, the 
 latitude and the position of the place with respect to the sea and to 
 mountain ranges. 
 
 1 Professor Loomis, in the American Journal of Science for 1879, finds that at 
 the top of Mount Washington the daily maxima and minima set in three hours 
 later than at the foot, though the difference of elevation between the two stations 
 is only a little over 3,000 feet. This is quite unlike anything that occurs in the 
 Himalaya, and is doubtless due to other causes than those which produce the diurnal 
 tides. Hourly observations made in India show that up to a certain moderate 
 elevation the daily barometric maxima and minima are slightly retarded ; but this 
 is due to the mountain winds described below. At Leh, in the upper Indus valley, 
 the diurnal winds cause the morning maximum to occur nearly an hour earlier 
 than on the plains. This will be seen from the following table : — 
 
 Place. 
 
 Height. 
 
 Morning 
 
 maximum. 
 
 Afternoon 
 
 minimum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Feet. 
 
 H. M. 
 
 H. 
 
 M. 
 
 Calcutta 
 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 9 35 
 
 16 
 
 26 
 
 Allahabad 
 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 307 
 
 9 34 
 
 16 
 
 30 
 
 Hazhribagh 
 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 2,010 
 
 9 47 
 
 16 
 
 24 
 
 Simla 
 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 .7,071 
 
 10 2(5 
 
 16 
 
 51 
 
 Leh 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 1 1 ,503 
 
 8 48 
 
 16 
 
 29 
 
 29 
 
226 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The observed diurnal movements of the barometric column are 
 in fact made up of several parts, only one of which is directly caused 
 by the alternate heating and cooling which the air undergoes every 
 day, though the others are all indirect effects of it. The direct effect 
 of heating and cooling upon the pressure of the air has been more 
 or less clearly explained by Espy, Davies, and Kreil,but it has not 
 yet been shown by strict mathematical reasoning that their explana- 
 tion accounts for the whole of the phenomenon. There is firstly, 
 with a rise of temperature in the morning, an increase in the elastic 
 force of the air, indicated by a rise of the barometer. I>ut the in- 
 creased elastic force immediately sets up a movement of expansion, 
 either vertically or it may be in some cases laterally, by which the 
 pressure is diminished. The actual movement of the mercury in the 
 barometer is determined by the difference of these two actions ; and 
 consists of a rise at first, up to 9 or 10 a.m., on the average, followed 
 by a fall which goes on until some time after the hottest period of 
 the day. It is easily seen that as long as the temperature continues 
 to rise more and more rapidly, that is up to 9 A.M. oi a little aftei, 
 the first effect must outweigh the second, and the barometer will 
 rise ; but as soon as the rate of increase of temperature begins to 
 grow less, expansion will prevail and the barometer will fall. The 
 expansion will not cease at the instant when the tempeiatuie leaches 
 its maximum, but owing to the accumulation of motion it will go 
 on for some time longer. Thus, there ought to be a barometric maxi- 
 mum about the time of most rapidly increasing temperature and a 
 minimum in the afternoon. In much the same way it can be shown 
 that there should be a maximum in the evening, when the tempera- 
 ture is falling most rapidly, and a minimum about the coldest time 
 of the morning. 
 
 The coincidence between the barometric minima and the extremes 
 of temperature is usually very far from exact, the barometer in this 
 country standing lowest in the mornings about two hours before the 
 time of minimum temperature, and in the afternoon about an hour 
 and a half or two hours after the hottest time of the day. This may 
 perhaps be explained on the principle of forced oscillations, that in 
 the successive transformations which the energy undergoes, the oscil- 
 lations approximate more and more nearly to simple harmonic waves 
 with the maxima and minima separated by equal intervals. The 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 227 
 
 diurnal curve of temperature approaches more nearly to a simple 
 wave form than that of the solar radiation which falls upon the earth 
 at any place, and the double daily oscillation of pressure can he 
 almost exactly represented by two waves superimposed. 
 
 At most places in India and the Himalaya the minimum tem- 
 perature of the day occurs about sunrise, that is at 6 a.m. on the 
 average of the year, and the maximum is attained about 2 p.m. 
 The daily rise' of temperature therefore occupies only eight hours of 
 the twenty-four, and the fall the remaining sixteen. On the princi- 
 ple that the height of the barometer varies with the rate of change 
 of temperature, the morning maximum should be much more decided 
 than that of the evening ; and this is found by observation to be the 
 fact, especially in the interior of India and other continental countries. 
 Over the sea in tropical regions the periods of increasing and 
 decreasing temperature are probably more nearly equal, and there 
 the difference between the day and night waves of pressure is less. 
 
 At places near the equator the epochs of maximum and minimum 
 pressure hardly vary from month to month ; but in higher latitudes 
 the morning maximum and afternoon minimum approach each othei 
 when the days are short, and become more widely separated in the 
 long days of summer. 
 
 * * ? 
 
 Besides this primary oscillation of pressure caused by the heat- 
 ing and cooling of the air every day, the barometer indicates other 
 changes due to the transfer of air by winds blowing to and from the 
 place of observation, and perhaps also in some places it indicates 
 other changes again due to the repetition of previous oscillations in 
 the form of free waves. The great regularity and considerable range 
 of the barometric tides over tropical seas where the daily range ot 
 temperature is small, may be thus to some extent caused by the repeti- 
 tion of the waves of previous days. In high latitudes, where the 
 days and nights are usually of very unequal length and the variation 
 of temperature is irregular, the tides become feebler, and near the 
 pole disappear altogether, for in forced vibrations of any kind regular 
 periodicity in the cause is an essential condition. 
 
 Near the coast the land and sea breezes modify the form of the 
 diurnal pressure curves both at sea and on land. The transfer of air 
 from sea to land during the earlier hours of the night renders the 
 
228 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 nocturnal fall of pressure on land less,' and at sea greater, than It 
 would otherwise be, while the land breeze which blows in the fore- 
 noons has a similar effect in the opposite direction. Over the water 
 the morning minimum thus comes to be the lower of the two, in 
 opposition to the usual rule. 1 Among the mountains a very similar 
 semi-diurnal transference of air takes place, causing two distinct 
 types of barometric tides — the one characteristic of valleys and the 
 plains near the mountain system, and the other of high ridges and 
 detached peaks. These types can be readily distinguished in the 
 following table, which gives the variations from the daily mean at 
 the hours nearest the turning points of the tides : — 
 
 
 4 A. M. 
 
 10 A. M. 
 
 4 P. M. 
 
 10 P. M. 
 
 
 tr 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Bareilly 
 
 ... — -021 
 
 + •060 
 
 —•047 
 
 + •008 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 ... — -020 
 
 + •057 
 
 —•036 
 
 —•001 
 
 Ranikhet 
 
 ... — ■ '025 
 
 + •041 
 
 —•018 
 
 + •013 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 ... — ■ '028 
 
 + •043 
 
 —•012 
 
 —•003 
 
 Chakrata 
 
 ... —022 
 
 + •035 
 
 —•015 
 
 —•001 
 
 Simla 2 
 
 ... — ■ '047 
 
 + -063 
 
 —•032 
 
 + •022 
 
 Leh 
 
 ... +‘011 
 
 + •037 
 
 —•049 
 
 + •001 
 
 At Bareilly and Roorkee, 
 
 on the plains, 
 
 the variation from 
 
 mean at 4 p. m. is twice as great as at 4 A. M. At all the Himalayan 
 stations except Leh, which is in a valley between two ridges, this 
 relation is reversed. Over the plains and on the outer hills, as at 
 Naini Tal and Chakrata, the pressure at 10 P. M. hardly differs from 
 the mean of the day. There is a small positive variation for this 
 hour at Bareilly, and as we recede from the mountains and approach 
 the sea the variation becomes greater ; but there can be little error 
 in concluding from the above table that along- the southern border 
 of the Himalaya the pressure rises in the evening just sufficiently 
 to touch the mean. At Simla and Hanikhet, some twenty or thirty 
 miles in towards the centre of the mountain system, there is, how- 
 ever, a well-marked evening maximum. This seems to indicate 
 that the air continues to accumulate over the interior of the moun- 
 tain zone for some time after the current has changed on the outer 
 ranges and the air has commenced to flow back towards the plains. 
 
 1 Blanford, J. A. S. B., Vol. XLVI., Part TT., page 45. 2 From General 
 
 Boileau’s observations in 1843-45. The daily range given by these figures is nearly 
 twice as great as that of the other stations at the same altitude. The reason is 
 probably some difference in the form of the barometer or in the mode of applying 
 the correction for capillarity. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 229 
 
 The transfer of air from the plains to the mountains in the 
 daytime and its retransfer to the plains at night, which, by partly 
 counterbalancing the afternoon fall of the barometer in the moun- 
 tains and correspondingly increasing it on the plains, cause the 
 peculiarities of the pressure variations seen in the preceding table, 
 are brought about by the expansion and contraction of the air under 
 the influence of heat and cold. In the daytime the air over the 
 plains expands more than that over the hills, because the total thick- 
 ness of air is greater and the range of temperature is probably 
 higher. The surfaces of equal pressure, which we may assume to 
 be horizontal on the average, are thus raised more above the plains 
 than on the mountains, and the air under the influence of gravity 
 flows down the incline towards the mountains. At night the air con- 
 tracts and these surfaces sink more above the open plains than in the 
 hills, and there is thus a slope or gradient in the opposite direction. 
 
 The following is General Strachey’s description ot the diurnal 
 variation of the wind in Kuinaon : 
 
 “ At most seasons of the year we find that on the Himalayan 
 slope winds blow up the valleys during the day, that is from about 
 9 a. M. to 9 P. M., and down them during the corresponding hours' 
 of the night, or from 9 p. m. to 9 a. m. At the debouches of the 
 principal streams into the plains, these night winds blow downwards 
 with great violence, particularly in winter. In the interior of the 
 mountains they are more moderate ; and at great elevations, and in 
 the central parts of Tibet, the nights are almost always nearly calm. 
 The diurnal currents from the south, on the other hand, inciease in 
 force as we ascend in height ; and along the Indian watershed and 
 the neighbouring parts of Tibet they are excessively strong ; so 
 that in travelling there, I have often looked forward to the after- 
 noon, when they are at their height, with real dread ; and the natives 
 of the country invariably endeavour to cross the high passes of the 
 Indian watershed early in the day, for the purpose of avoiding the 
 fury of the afternoon wind. As we advance further into the table- 
 land, however, their power rapidly ceases. 
 
 “ These winds, though on the whole blowing from the south-west 
 during the day and from the north-east at night, that is peipendi- 
 cular to the general line ot the mountains, are naturally constrained 
 
230 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 to follow the course of the deep valleys up which they pass, so that 
 their direction is subject to endless local variation ; and, excepting 
 on the tops of the hills, little information can be obtained by a 
 register of the direction of the wind on the Himalaya, beyond the 
 fact of there being an up or down current. In the part of Tibet I 
 visited, near the Indian watershed to the north of Kumaon, the 
 day wind seemed to commence in the south-east quarter about 9 A.M., 
 and gradually to shift round with the sun as the day advanced, 
 ending in the south-west quarter about 9 P. M. On several occa- 
 sions in these localities I also noticed the wind blowing faintly from 
 the north early in the morning. ********** 
 
 u The calm nights of the table-land and the higher mountains 
 would (according to the theory above stated) be a consequence of their 
 position in the centre of the mountain area, where the down current 
 would originate, and therefore have the least force, though it be still 
 felt in the faint northerly winds that are often observed near the 
 Indian watershed. 
 
 “ The violent night winds from the gorges by which the principal 
 rivers leave the mountains would not appear to be altogether due 
 to the same cause which produces the ordinary down winds, but to 
 the accumulation of cold air in the deeper valleys to which I have 
 before alluded. The air collected in these aerial lakes, as they may 
 be called, having no means of escape but the openings through which 
 the drainage is carried off, pours from them iii a current the velo- 
 city of which will be dependent on the depth and area of the 
 mountain basin from which it flows.” 
 
 General Cunningham also states that in Ladak and Spiti the 
 southerly or south-westerly day wind usually begins about 9 A. m., 
 the wind blowing faintly from the north about midnight and from 
 the north-east in the early morning. 
 
 The day and night winds are probably strongest about 4 P. M. 
 and 4 A. M., and the pressure and temperature observations made at 
 these hours on the plains and at the hill stations indicate clearly 
 enough that the direction of the baric gradient is from the plains 
 towards the mountains in the afternoons, and from the mountains 
 towards the plains in the mornings. When the pressures of Roorkee 
 and Bareilly at 4 A. M. are reduced to the level of Chakrata and 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 231 
 
 Ranikliet respectively, and are corrected for any residual gradient 
 to or from the mountains discovered by similarly reducing the mean 
 pressures to the level of the hill stations, it is found that there is a 
 pressure difference of *07 7" at Chakrata and -055" at Ranikliet, 
 sending a wind towards the plains. At 4 P. M. the gradient is 
 towards the hills, and is equal to •062 // at an elevation of 7,000 feet 
 between Koorkee and Chakrata ; while between Bareilly and Rani- 
 khet it is equal to ‘045" on the average of the year. On the southern 
 border of the mountain zone the gradient causing the down wind 
 at night is therefore rather greater than that which causes the up 
 wind during the day. 
 
 When the pressures of Roorkee at 4 A. m. and 4 p. M. are reduced 
 to the level of Leh, a station beyond the Indian watershed, the 
 gradients are found to be -033" in the morning and *182 // in the 
 nfternoon. The pressure difference causing the day wind at great 
 elevations thus appears to be nearly six times as great as that which 
 causes the night wind ; but this relation is much exaggerated, no 
 doubt, by the peculiar form of the pressure variation at Leh, which 
 cannot be taken as a typical mountain station. This peculiar vari- 
 ation is doubtless due to the position of Leh in a narrow valley 
 between two parallel mountain ranges. In the daytime the air of 
 the valley expands and flows towards the mountains, and at night 
 it again accumulates over the valley. In this way the nocturnal 
 barometric tide is completely obliterated, and the afternoon fall of 
 the barometer is rendered much greater than it would be on an open 
 plain at the same altitude. 
 
 In April, May, and June the afternoon winds of the mountains 
 blow with greatest violence, because in these months the range of 
 temperature both on the plains and among the mountains is great- 
 est. In these three months we find the afternoon fall of the 
 barometer on the plains at a maximum, while at the hill stations it 
 is less than in the cold weather. The nocturnal inequality of press- 
 ure is then at a minimum on the plains and valleys and at a maxi- 
 mum on the hills. 
 
 The annual variation of pressure differs from the diurnal in that 
 no part, or an exceedingly minute part, of it is due to diiect inciease 
 or decrease of elastic force accompanying gain or loss of heat. The 
 
223 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 rise of temperature in the first half of the year and the fall in the 
 latter half are accomplished so slowly that the increase or decrease 
 of elastic force cannot accumulate, hut is lost in expansion or con- 
 traction. The annual variation is thus almost entirely a secondary 
 effect due to the movement of air both vertically and horizontally. 
 When the temperature of the air over India changes the air expands 
 or contracts, and the hypothetical surfaces of equal pressure widen 
 out or come closer together than they were before ; and since the 
 annual variation of temperature over the south of India is very small 
 in comparison with that which occurs over the northern plain and 
 in Central Asia, the vertical range through which these surfaces 
 travel in the course of a year will be greater on the Himalaya than 
 under the equator. In the cold weather, for example, the planes of 
 30, 29, 28, &c. inches are wider apart vertically over Ceylon than 
 in Northern India, while at the end of the hot and in the rainy season 
 the opposite relation obtains. 
 
 If there were no lateral movements of the air the pressure at a 
 station on the plains would be nearly constant all the year round, 
 while at the hill stations it would be least in winter and 
 o-reatest in summer, because in the latter season a larger fraction of 
 the total atmosphere than usual would be elevated above the place, 
 while in the winter less than usual would lie above it. In winter, 
 however, the planes of equal pressure in the upper regions of the 
 atmosphere over India all slope towards the north, and down this 
 slope winds blow, causing an accumulation of air over Northern 
 India which renders the total pressure observed on the plains at 
 that season greater than in summer. As regards mountain stations, 
 it depends entirely on the height of the place whether the influx of 
 air from the south will be more or less than sufficient to compensate 
 for the contraction and sinking of the atmosphere in winter. At 
 all the hill stations in Table YI. above 5,000 feet elevation there 
 are indications of a winter minimum of pressure, though this is not 
 the lowest minimum except at Leh, the most elevated station of all. 
 There the pressure is least in the beginning of February, whereas at 
 all the other stations, as on the plains, it is least in June and July. 
 
 During the cold weather winds are usually blowing out from 
 Northern India towards the south along the surface of the ground 
 at the same time that other currents are blowing northward in the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 233 
 
 upper strata ; the apparent direction being modified in either case 
 by the rotation of the earth on its axis and by friction against the 
 ground surface. On the plain of the Ganges the conformation of 
 the surface makes the lower winds have a north-westerly direction. 
 
 As the temperature rises the air over India expands and a larger 
 and larger proportion of the total atmosphere is lifted above the level 
 of the hill stations. In consequence of this the barometer at first 
 rises at the higher hill stations ; and it simultaneously sinks over the 
 plains and the lower hills owing to the outward movement of the air. 
 As the season advances more and more air is removed from India by 
 the strong day winds which blow in the hot weather as well as by 
 the winds over the Indian watershed that have been already described, 
 while but little is restored by the feeble night winds that come from 
 the opposite quarters ; the barometer continues to fall over the plains, 
 and the rise observed at the hill stations in spring is soon also chang- 
 ed to a fall, except at Leh, where the barometer continues rising 
 until May. In the upper half of the atmosphere, that is, above the 
 plane of 15 inches pressure, the summer depression of the barome- 
 ter, which at Leh is feebler than that of winter, probably disappears 
 altogether, and the barometer stands highest in the hottest season as 
 it would do at all elevations if there was no transfer of air from place 
 to place by lateral currents or winds. 
 
 When the temperature of Northern India is at its maximum in 
 the latter half of June, the planes of equal pressure are widest apart, 
 and they all slope towards the north in the lower half of the atmos- 
 phere. Winds consequently blow in from the sea towards the land 
 in the lower strata, and there are possibly upper currents in the op- 
 posite direction, though the existence of such has not yet been estab- 
 lished. This relation continues until the autumnal equinox, after 
 which the temperature falls rapidly, and the atmosphere contracts 
 and sinks so as to reproduce the conditions characteristic of the cold 
 weather. The cooling of the air at this season, like the heating of it 
 in spring, produces a differential effect on the height of the barome- 
 ter at the hill stations, which again have a maximum of pressure in 
 November. 
 
 When the effects of the two actions above described— the expan- 
 sion and contraction of the atmosphere vertically, and the lateral 
 
 30 
 
234 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 transference of air by winds — are borne in mind, some curious and at 
 first sight inexplicable peculiarities of the annual variation of press- 
 ure become intelligible. For example, on the plains the barometer 
 almost invariably stands higher in December than in January, 
 though January is the colder month of the two. This anomaly at 
 once disappears when we remember that the total pressure of the 
 air on the plains, considered statically, is made up of two parts — 
 that of the air from the plains up to the hill stations, and that of 
 the air lying above the hill stations. The latter part appears from 
 the observations of Leh to be greatest in the first fortnights 
 of May and November, and least in the corresponding parts of 
 February and August ; and if the monthly means for any station 
 on the plains or lower hills be subjected to harmonic analysis, the 
 annual variation will be found to be very closely represented by two 
 harmonic waves — one of annual period, reaching its maximum at the 
 time of greatest cold in the beginning of January, and the other of 
 six months’ duration nearly coinciding in phase with the pressure 
 variation at Leh. The amplitude of the first of these undulations, 
 which is as much as six tenths of an inch at some places on the 
 plains, rapidly diminishes as we ascend, and passing through a zero 
 value at about 10,000 feet elevation, re-appears at Leh in nearly 
 the opposite phase, the minimum falling in Avinter. The amplitude 
 of the half-yearly oscillation increases slightly as we ascend, but it 
 appears to vary Avith distance from the plains in a horizontal direc- 
 tion rather than with height. The observed pressure on the plains, 
 being due to the superposition of the tAvo waves, is highest in 
 December — that is, betAveen the dates Avlien each wave separately 
 attains its maximum. 
 
 The truth of this theory of the annual change of pressure may b© 
 more clearly seen from Table VIII., Avhere the monthly variations of 
 the barometric weights of three successive strata of the lower atmos- 
 phere from their annual mean values are compared Avith the simul- 
 taneous variations of temperature. The last double column gives 
 the variations for the Avhole thickness of the atmosphere from the 
 plains up to 11,500 feet above sea-level. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 235 
 
 53 
 
 S3 
 
 H-O 
 
 SO 
 
 O 
 
 S3 
 
 -*o 
 
 S3 
 
 £*. 
 
 *40 
 
 OD 
 
 SO 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 % 
 
 Cs 
 
 *40 
 
 C5 
 
 t> 
 
 & 
 
 § 
 
 *40 
 
 £3 
 
 S 
 
 53 
 
 £ 
 
 53 
 
 CO 
 
 Co 
 
 CW 
 
 §» 
 
 S^H 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 ■ c-> 
 -K3 
 
 53 
 
 * eS> 
 
 5s 
 
 53 
 
 ?> 
 
 -^-O 
 
 53 
 
 3 
 
 £ 
 
 £ 
 
 s 
 
 CO . 
 
 £> ^ 
 
 •40 3 
 
 S5 ZD 
 
 S£ r~* 
 
 r-*C ZD 
 
 k O 
 
 C> H 
 
 05 
 
 r< 
 
 S * 
 
 ^ -40 
 
 <£> ^ 
 
 ■i3 .Sj 
 
 'S 
 
 53 
 
 Svj r— I 
 
 'a id 
 
 ^ *5*4 
 
 a 
 
 - -+T 
 * ^ 
 
 *§ 
 
 5 - 
 
 pi£ *40 
 
 S3 JS 
 
 <a cm 
 ^ co 
 <3 TjT 
 
 i. . 
 
 R) ^ 
 
 -S ^ 
 
 tO 
 
 05 fin 
 
 _S5 co 
 
 Ci 
 
 c 
 
 PS 
 
 <D PI 
 fi O 
 
 Pi -rt 
 
 CO TI 
 CO 5 
 
 a; m t 
 
 fi? 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 C5 
 
 r — 1 
 
 ZD 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 ■*+< 
 
 lO 
 
 C55 
 
 IQ 
 
 05 
 
 Ol 
 
 lO 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 
 (M 
 
 a cm 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 r-H 
 
 (M 
 
 
 t—4 
 
 r-H 
 
 4 
 
 + 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 b- 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 (M 
 
 d> 
 
 pH r-t 
 
 ^ A 
 
 ts O 
 
 Fh _^_3 
 
 <d <S 
 p<-p 
 
 a a 
 
 cd t> 
 
 Eh 
 
 <M 
 
 lO 
 
 
 zp 
 
 ^o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 b* 
 
 
 CM 
 
 do 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 ZD 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 hH 
 
 rH 
 
 do 
 
 t-H 
 
 i-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 J 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 4- 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 4- 
 
 4- 
 
 « R 
 
 P-2 
 
 in -y 
 02 d 
 
 <-n 
 
 <D 
 
 Fh ■» 
 
 d fl 
 
 S o 
 
 CC -I— t 
 
 Fh +•> 
 O c 3 
 
 ^ ?h 
 
 2 g 
 
 CD P* 
 
 EH 
 
 CD P 
 
 p-2 
 
 g p 
 
 CD *rj 
 
 fig 
 
 CD 
 
 Fh • 
 
 d Pi 
 *£ O 
 
 03 • r— ( 
 
 Fh 4-3 
 CD C3 
 
 P/£ 
 
 a g 
 
 CD r 
 
 Eh 
 
 CD R 
 H O 
 
 £j -rH 
 
 co -g 
 CO 03 
 CD -T* 
 
 H Pi 
 
 Ph g 
 
 CD 
 
 1 § 
 Fh 4-3 
 CD c3 
 P4*rj 
 
 a 3 
 
 O l> 
 
 H 
 
 d 
 
 CM 
 
 C5 
 
 ip 
 
 r-H 
 
 CO 
 
 Cp 
 
 t> 
 
 cp 
 
 do 
 
 4h 
 
 b- 
 
 CM 
 
 b- 
 
 do 
 
 P 
 
 do 
 
 r-H 
 
 i— i 
 
 
 
 
 i — i 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 + 
 
 4- 
 
 4- 
 
 4 
 
 + 
 
 t- 
 
 00 
 
 »0 
 
 1C 
 
 O 
 
 05 
 
 CM 
 
 O 
 
 b- 
 
 o 
 
 4 + 
 
 I 1 
 
 CO 
 
 1*0 
 
 zp 
 
 (M 
 
 co 
 
 ib 
 
 b- 
 
 ZD 
 
 O 
 
 ZD 
 
 *-H 
 
 O 
 
 + 
 
 r— I 
 
 o 
 
 + 
 
 co 
 
 r— I 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 *rH 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 <M 
 
 iO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 tH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 b- 
 
 >> 
 
 Fh 
 
 C3 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 o3 
 
 bo 
 
 c 3 
 d 
 
 Fh 
 
 rO 
 
 CD 
 
 rd 
 
 <D 
 
 Fh 
 
 *Fh 
 
 
 CD 
 
 d 
 
 >> 
 
 4^> 
 
 CO 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 4-» 
 
 Ph 
 
 Fh 
 
 CD 
 
 ■§ 
 
 4-3 
 
 c3 
 
 P4 
 
 ci 
 
 
 . ^ 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 
 <1 
 
 a 
 
 bo 
 
 I - :- 
 
 < 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 lO 
 
 t- 
 
 <ZO 
 
 + + I I 
 
 CM 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 o 
 
 I S 
 
 CM 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 ZD 
 
 b- 
 
 o 
 
 ZD 
 
 to 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 
 -H 
 
 CM 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 ZD 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 CM 
 
 cp 
 
 <p 
 
 cp 
 
 <p 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 cp 
 
 o 
 
 Cp 
 
 cp 
 
 O 
 
 <p 
 
 4- 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 4- 
 
 a 
 
 \ 
 
 ! 
 
 'l 
 
 ! 
 
 4- 
 
 1 
 
 + 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 05 
 
 b- 
 
 c? 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 *1 
 
 cp 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 <P 
 
 + 
 
 rH 
 
 4 
 
 
 05 
 
 O 
 
 05 
 
 <M 
 
 tp 
 
 ID 
 
 r-H 
 
 p 
 
 
 05 
 
 do 
 
 rH 
 
 oo 
 
 do 
 
 ZD 
 
 O 
 
 cb 
 
 CM 
 
 i — l 
 
 4- 
 
 + 
 
 4- 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 -+H 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 + 
 
 + 
 
 (M 
 
 ZD 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 cp 
 
 M 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 
 1 
 
 cb 
 
 CM 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 do 
 
 b- 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 ib 
 
 rH 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 rH 
 
 + 
 
 rH 
 
 4- 
 
 rH 
 
 4 
 
 + 
 
 4 
 
 + 
 
 8 
 
 rH 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fh 
 
 CD 
 
 rPJ 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 5z< 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 P 
 
 i** 
 
 1 From the average of the three stations — Roorkee, Chakrata, and Leh. 
 
236 
 
 himXlayan districts 
 
 The barometric weight of each stratum and of the whole thick" 
 ness — that is, the difference between the observed pressures at the 
 top and bottom — varies inversely with the temperature, and the one 
 variation is as nearly as possible proportional to the other. The only 
 exception worth noting is that in the month of November the stati- 
 cal pressure of the stratum between Chakrata and Leh is less than 
 it should bo according to the temperature figures. This anomaly, 
 however, would probably disappear from the means of a longer 
 series of observations. 
 
 The annual variation of the wind in Northern India is for the 
 most part such as should accompany the pressure variations above 
 described, according to the usually received u convection current’ 7 
 theory ; but there is one important feature of the winds of the plain 
 that has not yet been satisfactorily explained — namely, the prevalence 
 during the hot weather of strong north-westerly winds when the 
 distribution of temperature and pressure should, by the theoiy of 
 convection currents, give rise to winds with a southerly element. 
 These “ winds of elastic expansion,” as they have been called by Mr. 
 Blanford, actually blow sometimes from places where the mean press- 
 ure is low to others where it is slightly higher. They are the 
 strongest winds of the year on the Indian plain ; they blow only in 
 the daytime, and since there is no compensating current of any 
 appreciable strength at night, they are probably the chief agency in 
 that removal of air from Upper India which causes the great 
 summer depression of the barometer. They are not confined to 
 India, but are equally characteristic of Afghanistan ; and Colonel 
 Prejevalsky encountered winds perfectly similar in everything except 
 temperature in various parts of the Gobi desert and on the Alashan 
 plateau north-east of Tibet. On the southern slope of the Himalaya 
 these winds are sometimes met up to elevations of 6,000 or 7,000 
 feet, and when they blow the air is unusually dry and full of dust. 
 At greater elevations, however, they are either not felt or become 
 undistinguishable from the ordinary up currents that blow during 
 the day. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 237 
 
 
 *3 
 
 5 >. 
 
 <3 
 
 I'"— > 
 
 <s> 
 
 
 So 
 
 C5 
 
 so 
 
 ■Is 
 
 '-e 
 
 "55 
 
 s 
 
 so 
 
 £ 
 
 so 
 
 p**-o 
 
 CO 
 
 c*» 
 
 £ 
 
 J 
 
 
 •jCi’BtuqQ^ 
 
 m Lv^nw8£ 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 cS 
 
 s 
 
 •siua^ jo loqTimjq 
 
 9-12 
 
 10-13 
 
 9-10 
 
 4-5 
 
 7-10 
 
 7 
 
 6-10 
 
 4 
 
 M9qUI909Q[ 
 
 ^ ^ pq & ^ 
 
 O o O O o q o o 
 
 iO-rHCacftO,—(OOt'- 
 o t- cq io to -cH >— i i— i 
 
 Jz; Jz; !z ; cq cq cd qq oq 
 
 uoquioAO^ 
 
 ^ H ^ ^ p 4 ^ pi 
 
 O O O O O O O 
 
 '+COCO<McOcoC5t’ 
 lO I-H t- lO lO CO <N <M 
 
 }zj OQ fz; OD GQ ai CQ OD 
 
 Moqojoo 
 
 £ H £ £ pq pi jP 
 
 O O o o O n* o ° 
 
 MO-^HtOCOi-HCOt- 
 
 eocqcqcoiq-^c^co 
 
 Moqniojdog 
 
 H t* pi pi h & > 
 
 CQ rH t 
 
 cq cq iq co tH 04 
 
 [2J (25 32 CD OD OQ CQ 
 
 •jsnStiy 
 
 H H gi £=’ H & 
 
 OOOOonon 
 -H «g p 4 C<) lO lO 
 
 eqeo-»q<>;t-.^ H1 o 10 
 
 CQ CQ CQ CQ qq CQ CQ CQ 
 
 •Xpf 
 
 H M p 4 pi pi 
 
 oo9ooooo 
 
 CO O *>“ »“ < l>- r-H lr-Ht>. 
 
 cq r+f cq t>- -rH io io 
 
 CQ CQ CQ CQ* CQ* CQ CQ CQ 
 
 •9 unp 
 
 H H pi pi pi p 4 pi 
 
 <3 000000 0 
 
 »0 CO CO CO lO O -rH 04 
 
 cq ^ cq cq ^ t- iq 
 
 [2^ CQ CQ* CQ CQ CQ CQ* 
 
 •^w 
 
 pi pi > £ pi M pi pi 
 
 0 0 00 0000 
 
 Mi-HcOC5COC5»00 
 
 00 <N iq iq 50 -q 10 ^ 
 
 fa CD . CD CD CD CD CD 
 
 • judy 
 
 fi ^ i i ^ h pi pi 
 
 O O O O 0 0 O O 
 
 COC0-^O5c0|^O5O4 
 
 iqi>-i>-cqcoio 3L OC<i 
 
 jzj |zi CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ 
 
 ■qoiGj^ 
 
 pi pi pi pi pi ' pi 
 
 0 0 0 0 0 • »o 
 
 Oc0p5Ot>-CQCQa) 
 
 Jzi 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 lO 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 I — I 
 
 iq 
 
 t? 
 
 & 
 
 O 
 
 t>- 
 
 CO 
 
 cq 
 
 CO 
 
 i>- 
 
 OQ 
 
 l>- 
 
 IQ 
 
 £ 
 
 CD 
 
 fH 
 
 c3 
 
 PQ 
 
 CQ 
 
 0 
 
 g4 
 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 rH 
 
 *0 
 
 cq 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 CQ 
 
 CQ 
 
 CQ* 
 
 CQ* 
 
 p= 
 
 0 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 & 
 
 pi 
 
 r-H 
 
 cq 
 
 r-H 
 
 tq 
 
 r-H 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 •^H 
 
 05 
 
 co 
 
 OO 
 
 J25 
 
 CQ 
 
 od 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CQ 
 
 0) 
 
 CD 
 
 r-l 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 os 
 
 fs 
 
 rC| 
 
 <D 
 
 ^c3 
 
 cc 
 
 i 
 
 rH 
 
 . o3 
 
 ^3 
 
 -M 
 
 CD 
 
 1— { 
 
 rM 
 
 ’3 
 
 'C3 
 
 r“H 
 
 N73 
 
 H 
 
 •rH 
 
 d 
 
 ’3 
 
 c3 
 
 V3 
 
 M 
 
 c3 
 
 r~j 
 
 rg 
 
 P3 
 
 p 
 
 ft 
 
 Ph 
 
 Szi 
 
 0 
 
 CD 
 
238 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 From the preceding table it is seen that though the change of 
 the prevailing wind from north-west to east or south-east at the 
 commencement of the rains is very distinctly marked on the plains, 
 no such change takes place at the hill stations. Even at the lowest 
 of these, Dehra, the resultant wind varies only from about three 
 points north to the same distance south of west. At all the higher 
 stations the prevailing direction in every month is southerly or 
 south-westerly, with modifications depending on the form of the 
 ground, — at Naini Tal, for instance, the winds are generally south- 
 easterly. The only notable variation of the wind direction is a 
 deflection towards the east at Chakrata (also at Simla, Marri, and 
 other stations on the north-western Himalaya) at the time when 
 the winter snows and rains are heaviest. The cause of this has 
 not yet been ascertained. 
 
 The wind direction at the hill stations changes so little from 
 month to month because the winter monsoon is of no great vertical 
 thickness, while that of the summer months extends to a much 
 greater elevation than the highest station at which observations 
 have been made. When northerly or north-westerly winds are 
 blowing on the plains, the return current from the south-west is 
 felt on the mountains at all elevations above the first few thousand 
 feet ; and when southerly winds blow over the plains, the return 
 current, if it exists at all, lies at a very great altitude. The exist- 
 ence of this return current from the north during the summer 
 monsoon may possibly be proved by cloud observations. Dr. 
 Scully’s observations on the way back from Yarkand in August, 
 1875, tell neither for nor against it, the resultant of all the wind 
 directions observed at elevations above 14,000 feet being due west. 
 
 In the next table the vertical thickness of each monsoon current 
 on the Himalayan slope has been computed approximately from 
 observations made at pairs of hill stations in the north and south of 
 India. The northern stations are liookee and Chakrata, and the 
 southern ones, Colombo and Newara Eliya in Ceylon. To render 
 the figures directly comparable, the observed pressures at the hill 
 stations have been reduced to the common elevation of 7,000 feet, 
 and those of the lower stations to sea-level, as was done by Mr. 
 Blanford in drawing up a similar table in the Indian Meteorologist' s 
 Vade Mecum , page 175. 
 
Summer. Winter. 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 239 
 
 X . — Vertical thickness of the Monsoon Currents. 
 
 Month. 
 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 November 
 
 December 
 
 January 
 
 February 
 
 June 
 
 July 
 
 August 
 
 September 
 
 Mean pressure at 
 7,000 feet. 
 
 Mean 
 
 present 
 
 sea-level. 
 
 e at 
 
 Neutral plane. 
 
 
 
 do* 
 
 r-i 4-' rd 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 o a 
 
 4— 1 ,rH 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 r— 1 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 o3 
 
 r— I 
 
 <D 
 
 radient sei 
 iug wind 
 wards nort 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 •9 
 
 R 
 
 o3 
 
 M 
 
 CD 
 
 radient sei 
 
 ing wind 
 
 wards nort 
 
 ppro x i m a 
 
 pressure. 
 
 ppro x i m a 
 
 elevation 
 
 feet. 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 © 
 
 
 < 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 ft 
 
 n 
 
 // 
 
 n 
 
 " 
 
 
 23-388 
 
 23-353 
 
 + •035 
 
 29-904 
 
 30-021 
 
 -•117 
 
 24-45 
 
 5,780 
 
 23-387 
 
 23-337 
 
 + "050 
 
 29-911 
 
 30-078 
 
 -•167 
 
 24-89 
 
 5,260 
 
 23-379 
 
 23-310 
 
 + •069 
 
 29-915 
 
 30-070 
 
 —•155 
 
 25-39 
 
 4,690 
 
 23*389 
 
 23-270 
 
 + •119 
 
 29-917 
 
 29-994 
 
 --077 
 
 27-35 
 
 2,650 
 
 23-348 
 
 23-179 
 
 + •169 
 
 29-856 
 
 29-483 
 
 + •373 
 
 17-96 
 
 14,130 
 
 23-343 
 
 23-160 
 
 + •183 
 
 29-874 
 
 29-508 
 
 + "366 
 
 16-81 
 
 15.930 
 
 23-344 
 
 23-205 
 
 + •139 
 
 29-879 
 
 29-576 
 
 + •303 
 
 17-80 
 
 14,370 
 
 23-359 
 
 23-270 
 
 + •089 
 
 29-897 
 
 29-684 
 
 + •213 
 
 18-67 
 
 13,140 
 
 At 7,000 feet elevation the pressure gradient in both seasons is 
 
 -such as to send a current from south to north, while at sea-level it 
 
 is only in the winter season that the wind blows from north to south. 
 
 The neutral plane separating the lower wind current from the sup- 
 posed upper return current is nearly 16,000 feet above the sea in 
 the height of the rainy season ; but in the cold weather, especially 
 in January and February, the neutral plane is below the level of 
 the hill sanitaria. 
 
 The heights in the table represent only the approximate mean 
 positions of the neutral plane for the several months. In reality its 
 height is constantly fluctuating, and thus in the winter season it often 
 sinks so low as to strike the Indian plain below the base of the hills. 
 A moist easterly or south-easterly current then blows for several days 
 at a time in Upper India, bringing the winter rains, while in Southern 
 India the wind may be northerly. The prevailing direction of the 
 wind on the plains is, however, always northerly in the cold weather, 
 in accordance with the mean position of the neutral plane. 
 
 The pressure gradients both at sea-level and at 7,000 feet are much 
 greater in summer than in winter. In the latter half of October and 
 the beginning of November there is hardly any gradient either way, 
 and at that time feeble winds and calms prevail. The velocity of the 
 wind being directly proportional to the baric gradient (except perhaps 
 in the case of anomalous currents like the “ winds of elastic expansion ” 
 which blow down the valley of the Granges in the hot weather), this 
 velocity should be greater in the rainy season than in winter. 
 
240 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 XI. — Monthly mean velocity of wind in miles per diem. 
 
 Station. 
 
 January. 
 
 February. 
 
 March. 
 
 April. 
 
 May. 
 
 1 June. 
 
 r -— 1 
 £ 
 
 August. 
 
 September. 
 
 | October. 
 
 November. 
 
 December. 
 
 Year. 
 
 Roorkee, 
 
 55-8 
 
 65-9 
 
 67-3 
 
 74-6 
 
 91-9 
 
 101-0 
 
 18-3 
 
 65‘5 
 
 58-8 
 
 35*8 
 
 31-3 
 
 35-7 
 
 63-5 
 
 Bareilly, 
 
 70-6 
 
 95-4 
 
 95-1 
 
 110-4 
 
 117-2 
 
 134-5 
 
 105*5 
 
 75-9 
 
 71-6 
 
 41-0 
 
 42-3 
 
 51-6 
 
 84-3 
 
 Debra ... 
 
 40-1 
 
 49-2 
 
 57-6 
 
 65-2 
 
 64-7 
 
 54-0 
 
 34-9 
 
 29-6 
 
 34-1 
 
 42-6 
 
 50-9 
 
 47-4 
 
 47-3 
 
 Ranikhet, 
 
 7D9 
 
 77-0 
 
 87-1 
 
 131-3 
 
 98*0 
 
 120-0 
 
 129-1 
 
 150-3 
 
 136-4 
 
 116-6 
 
 99-5 
 
 95"0 
 
 109-4 
 
 Chakrata, 
 
 114-5 
 
 114-6 
 
 129-4 
 
 137-0135^8 
 
 128-1 
 
 110-1 
 
 S8-5 
 
 100-3 
 
 116-1 
 
 105-9|103-3 
 
 117-7 
 
 Table XI. shows that on the plains and at Ranikhet (for which 
 station more observations are required to get a good average) the 
 wind velocity is least in winter, but that at Cliakrata it is least in 
 the rains. At the hill stations the winds are chiefly of the diurnal 
 kind, and are feeblest when the temperature range is least— that 
 is, in the month of August. 
 
 The quantity of water vapour present in the air at any time is a 
 
 most important meteorological condition. It 
 Humidity and cloud. , , , , , , . , P 
 
 depends on the temperature, the distance irom 
 
 the sea or other evaporating surface, and the direction of the wind. 
 These relations are very distinctly marked on the North Indian plain, 
 where the high temperature range in the yearly period and the semi- 
 annual change of the winds combine to render the proportion of 
 vapour in the air during July and August nearly three times as great 
 as in December and January. A high temperature cannot of course 
 increase the quantity of vapour in the air, unless it be in a region 
 where vapour is being generated. Accordingly we find in Table XII. 
 that the vapour pressure at Roorkee, on the drier part of the plain, 
 hardly varies from December to April, though as soon as the sea 
 winds set in, which they sometimes do in the middle of May, the 
 proportion of vapour rapidly increases. At Bareilly, where the 
 surrounding country is moister and better wooded than at Roorkee, 
 there is a slight increase of vapour in the hot-weather months. 
 
XII. — Monthly mean tension of aqueous vapour at places in the Himalaya} 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 241 
 
 •8.re9i 
 jo jraqumj<[ 
 
 04 co co i-h 
 
 rH r — I iH 1 0 CO tr— rH 
 i 1 i l l ■ ' 
 
 rH 04 04 ^ rH CO CO 
 
 
 lO H H CO CO CO O 
 
 cocococo l> 
 
 JO JQ JO -H CO CO CO 
 
 tr 
 
 •J8qUI909Q 5: 
 
 lONOt OS CO 
 
 CO CO CO (M (M H H 
 
 CO 
 
 os 
 
 O 
 
 *j:9qui3AO]£ =; 
 
 (M CO CO ^ H CO CO 
 04 CO JO OS CO JO 04 
 rH CO CO (M cq cq <M 
 
 M9qopo 
 
 OCOHtUNtH^ 
 
 tH TiH o jo 
 
 CO »C IQ ^ CO CO 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 cq 
 
 o 
 
 jo 
 
 04 
 
 o ^ 
 
 CO ^ 
 CO T-) 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 J9qni9^d9g 
 
 OOr^HHCOO 
 CO N OS O (M CO h 
 CO OO I> CO CO JO JO 
 
 CO 
 
 04 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 04 
 
 •^snSny 
 
 OS CO CO t> O CO C4 
 co o i>- cq cq os co 
 
 05 OS 00 CO CO JO JO 
 
 CO o 
 
 rH 04 
 
 CO CO 
 
 o 
 
 r— I 
 
 04 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 JO 
 
 •jfpipU 
 
 CO 04 H CO CO l> CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 as 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 JO O OO ^ rt- OS CO 
 
 • 
 
 JO 
 
 co 
 
 JO 
 
 o 
 
 
 ■H* 
 
 04 
 
 CO 
 
 04 
 
 
 as as co co co jo jo 
 
 • 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 04 
 
 04 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 
 # 9iinp 
 
 H t> H o H N 1C 
 JO N Cl CO N 1> JO 
 
 ts COi> JO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 -4H 
 
 O O t- O 
 
 04 rH rH i-H 
 
 CO 04 04 
 
 o3 .i 
 
 •jC'bm: 
 
 O O r— I OS 04 rH 04 
 t> CO H JQ (M co 
 JO ^ JO ^ CO CO W 
 
 CO 
 
 •ir.idy 
 
 CO O 00 CS O ^ JO 
 JO CO I— I CO OO co CO 
 ^ CO ^ ^ 04 04 04 
 
 04 
 
 TpiVJ/l 
 
 CO 04 04 04 cs JO 04 
 rH CO t> JO -rjH CO 04 
 ^ CO CO CO 04 04 04 
 
 o 
 
 04 
 
 04 
 
 riH 
 
 CO 
 
 •Xi^ruiq9^ 
 
 CO 00 J O H co CO H 
 JO CO 04 OO o o OS 
 CO CO CO 04 04 04 rH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 04 
 
 •jtranmsf 
 
 o ^ h M o N 
 
 CO H C5 l> O O. l> 
 CO CO Cl 04 04 r rH 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 • PJ . 
 
 03 • rH 4 JJ 
 
 > (H CD 
 0) g ffl 
 >-< o =M 
 W-J3 
 
 OOO OOOOOOO 
 
 OOOIMIOOOSNOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
 
 tooocoo5>cno>oOoooooeoooooooOoooOooo 
 
 lt)00lM-#00OOOO °„0 O O lO O^O^O^OO^O^O^OO.O o ©_©_©_ 
 
 cT io~ cif t-~ oo os' o' cT i-T,-r cTco'co m co co t- e- od'ao'aT 
 
 j . — i _ j —t r—l H r-H r-H r—H rH i— H rH rH rH r-H r— H r 
 
 04 
 
 O 
 
 c3 
 
 S 
 
 'C3 
 
 * 
 
 rfl 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 : 1 
 
 O 
 
 o3 
 
 <l> P ' 
 
 o 
 
 « P p P 
 
 31 
 
242 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The tensions in the foregoing table have been computed from 
 observations of dry and \V p et bulb thermometers. The formula used 
 for the most part has been Apjohn’s ; but all the figures for Leh and 
 Musooree, and those for the last four years at the other stations, have 
 been computed by means of certain tables based on August’s formula. 
 
 On the southern slope of the mountains the annual variation of 
 vapour tension is similar to that which obtains on the plains, though 
 because of the considerable evaporation from the forest-covered 
 slopes, and the occasional showers of rain which fall, the increase of 
 vapour during the hot weather goes on much more uniformly than on 
 the plains. At Leh, where hardly any precipitation occurs at any time 
 of the year, but in the neighbourhood of which there is some cultivated 
 land irrigated from the hill streams, the annual variation of vapour 
 tension is determined almost entirely by the temperature. In the 
 valley of Yarkand the quantity of vapour in the air is similarly 
 determined by the temperature and the extent of irrigation. 
 
 In the mountains the mean vapour tension decreases very rapidly 
 with the height, on account of the rapid decrease of temperature as 
 we ascend. If Dalton’s law, that in a mixture of gases or vapours 
 the pressure of each is the same as if it filled the whole space alone, 
 were applicable to the , atmosphere, as is sometimes supposed even 
 yet, then the pressure or tension of vapour observed on the plains 
 ought to be reduced one-half on ascending through 29,000 feet; 
 but it is found by observation that a vapour pressure equal to half 
 that observed on the plains is attained at an elevation of 7,000 or 
 8,000 feet. This was pointed out by General Strachey in the Pro- 
 ceedings of the Royal Society for March, 1861, where he has shown 
 that the observations of Mr. Welsh in balloon ascents, those of Dr. 
 Hooker in Sikkim, and his own observations in Kumaon (most of 
 which are included in Table XII.), make it perfectly certain that the 
 proportion of water vapour which exists at any given elevation is 
 determined, not by Dalton’s law, but simply by the temperature. 
 The vapour raised from the earth’s surface is constantly diffusing 
 upwards, and would go on doing so until it attained the state of 
 equilibrium represented by Dalton’s law ; but the temperature falls 
 so rapidly as the height increases that saturation point is reached and 
 the vapour is partially condensed into cloud or rain long before the 
 barometric equilibrium is attained. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 243 
 
 In the third column of Table XIII. the figures given in the previous 
 table have been compared in a manner suggested by Strachey. The 
 tension of vapour at sea-level under Kumaon and Garhwal has been 
 computed for each month, by multiplying the mean of the observed 
 tensions at Roorkee and Bareilly into the ratio between the tension of 
 saturated vapour at the sea-level temperature and that ot saturated 
 vapour at the temperature of the plain ; that is to say, the temperature 
 is supposed to be corrected for elevation above the sea while the degree 
 of saturation remains constant. The figures in Table XII. have then 
 been divided by the corresponding tensions at sea-level, and the average 
 of the fractions for all the months has been calculated for each elevation. 
 Finally, from these results the ratio of the tensions at each even thou- 
 sand feet above the sea has been found by interpolation. The second 
 column of the table gives the results of Sir Joseph Hooker s observa- 
 tions in Sikkim compared with those taken at the meteorological obser- 
 vatory of Gwalpara near the foot of the hills, and the fourth column has 
 been computed from the observations in General Cunningham’s Ladak 
 and those taken by Dr. Scully on the way back from T arkand in 187o. 
 The latter have been published in the Indian Meteorological Memoirs , 
 Ho. VIII. The base station for the Kashmir group is Rawal Pindi. The 
 figures opposite 7,000 feet in the second and fourth columns are derived 
 from the monthly means of the Darjiling and Marri observatories. 
 
 XIII. — Proportions, of vapour tension at various elevations in the 
 
 Himalaya. 
 
 Mean for Himalaya. 
 
 Height. 
 
 Sikkim. 
 
 1 
 
 Kumaon. 
 
 Kashmir 
 
 and 
 
 Ladak. 
 
 Observed. 
 
 Computed by 
 Strachey’s 
 method. 
 
 Computed by 
 Hann’s 
 method. 
 
 Sea-level ... 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-00 
 
 1,000 feet .. 
 
 •S9 
 
 •92 
 
 •92 
 
 •91 
 
 •91 
 
 •91 
 
 2.000 ,, ... 
 
 •83 
 
 •89 
 
 •85 
 
 •86 
 
 •83 
 
 •82 
 
 3,000 „ ... 
 
 •74 
 
 •87 
 
 •69 
 
 •77 
 
 •75 
 
 •74 
 
 4.000 ., ... 
 
 •67 
 
 •74 
 
 •52 
 
 •64 
 
 •68 
 
 •67 
 
 5.000 
 
 •04 
 
 •70 
 
 '51 
 
 •62 
 
 •62 
 
 •61 
 
 6,000 „ ... 
 
 •59 
 
 •60 
 
 •57 
 
 •59 
 
 '56 
 
 •55 
 
 7.000 ., ... 
 
 '53 
 
 *56 
 
 •60 
 
 •56 
 
 *51 
 
 •50 
 
 8,000 „ ... 
 
 *50 
 
 '53 
 
 •41 
 
 •48 
 
 •46 
 
 •45 
 
 0.000 
 
 •44 
 
 •49 
 
 •28 
 
 •40 
 
 •42 
 
 •41 
 
 10,000 ., ... 
 
 •40 
 
 •47 
 
 •27 
 
 •38 
 
 •38 
 
 •37 
 
 11,000 „ ... 
 
 •37 
 
 *35 
 
 •26 
 
 •33 
 
 •34 
 
 •33 
 
 12,000 „ ... 
 
 •35 
 
 •28 
 
 •21 
 
 •28 
 
 •31 
 
 •30 
 
 13,000 ,, ... 
 
 •30 
 
 •25 
 
 •23 
 
 •26 
 
 •28 
 
 •27 
 
 14,000 
 
 •27 
 
 •20 
 
 •19 
 
 •22 
 
 •25 
 
 •24 
 
 15,000 „ . ... 
 
 •27 
 
 •17 
 
 •15 
 
 •20 
 
 ■22 ■ 
 
 •22 
 
 16,000 „ ... 
 
 •22 
 
 *15 
 
 •16 
 
 •18 
 
 •20 
 
 •20 
 
 17,000 „ ... 
 
 •20 
 
 •15 
 
 •14 
 
 •16 
 
 •18 
 
 •18 
 
 18,000 ., ... 
 
 •19 
 
 •14 
 
 •15 
 
 •16 
 
 •16 
 
 •16 
 
 19,000 ,, ... 
 
 •18 
 
 •13 
 
 •14 
 
 •15 
 
 •14 
 
 •15 
 
244 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Tlie mean of all three sets of observations probably represents 
 very closely the actual diminution of vapour pressure on ascending 
 in the Himalaya. It decreases with more regularity than either the 
 Kumaon or Kashmir series of observations alone, and it agrees very 
 closely with the series for Sikkim, where the relative humidity, or 
 percentage of saturation, varies much less than in the western 
 Himalaya. The last column of the table but one gives a series of 
 ratios calculated on the assumption that the degree of humidity is 
 the same at all elevations, and that the temperature of the southern 
 slope of lhe Himalaya decreases at the mean rate above found — one 
 degree in 361 feet. This series agrees very closely with the average 
 of the results given by observation ; though from 2,000 to 10,000 feet 
 the calculated ratios are all considerably less than those observed in 
 Kumaon. During the hot-weather months the degree of saturation 
 on the plains below Kumaon falls exceedingly low, while on the hills, 
 as has already been stated, the air remains much moister ; at Dehra, 
 for example, the vapour pressure in March, April, May, and June is 
 greater than at Roorkee owing to local evaporation. Thus on the 
 average of the year the relative humidity of the air in the Kumaon 
 hills is considerably greater than over the plain. On the other hand, 
 the observed ratios from 14,000 feet upwards are less than those 
 given by calculation, because most of the observations at these 
 altitudes were made at places lying behind the snowy range* 
 
 In the last column are given the ratios calculated by the log- 
 arithmic formula, log p — log P — —ft-- , where h is expressed in feet* 
 Ik’. Julius Hann, in an article in the Austrian Meteorological Society’s 
 Journal for 1874, page 193, has deduced from all the available obser- 
 vations on mountains and in balloons a similar formula in which the 
 numerical constant is 6,517 metres, or 21,382 feet. On the assump- 
 tion that this formula holds good to some distance beyond the limits 
 of observation, we find that an elevation of 23,000 feet, or about the 
 average height of the snowy peaks, the quantity of vapour in the 
 air is only one-tenth of the quantity at sea-level. The extreme 
 dryness of Tibet and Ladak is thus easily accounted for. 
 
 The logarithmic formula has the advantage of enabling us to 
 calculate approximately the total quantity of vapour in the air 
 at any time, by an application of the integral calculus. Using 
 the generally received values for the density of water vapour and its 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 245 
 
 co-efficient of expansion with heat, and extending the integration to 
 an infinite height above the ground, it is found that the depth of 
 water that would be formed by the complete condensation of the 
 vapour over a given area is almost exactly three times the height of 
 the mercurial column which measures the pressure of the vapour at 
 the bottom. In the rainy season for example, when the pressure 
 of vapour over the Indian plain is equal to about an inch of 
 mercury, the complete precipitation of the vapour would yield only 
 three inches of rain, that is, less than the quantity which sometimes 
 falls in two or three hours. A continuous downpour amounting to 
 fifteen or twenty inches, such as frequently occurs in India, must 
 be fed by a powerful indraught of moist air. 
 
 The relative humidity of the air is probably greater at all eleva- 
 tions on the Himalayan slope than either on the plains or on the 
 Tibetan plateau beyond the Indian watershed ; and it is doubtless 
 greater on forest-clad slopes and valleys than on steep and bare 
 mountain sides. On a high ridge, too, which intercepts and deflects 
 upwards the prevailing south-west winds, thereby cooling them and 
 partially condensing their vapour, the degree of saturation is 
 greater than on the lower ridges or valleys behind it ; for the air 
 in sinking after crossing the high ridge is warmed and rendered 
 capable of absorbing more moisture than it has been able to retain 
 in crossing the ridge. Thus Naini Tal, independently of the influ- 
 ence of the lake, is always much moister than Ranikhet or the 
 notoriously dry and bare station of Almora. The registers of 
 the meteorological observatories do not, however, illustrate this 
 very well ; for at several of them observations have only been 
 taken in the daytime, when the relative humidity is below the mean ; 
 and the humidities recorded at the old observatory of Naini Tal aie 
 quite untrustworthy and in many cases impossible. At Bareilly, 
 Roorkee, Ranikhet, and Chakrata observations were taken both 
 night and day for some years, at the hours of ten and four. If the 
 means of the four observations at these hours be adopted as daily 
 means, Chakrata appears to be the most humid of the four stations, and 
 Roorkee and Ranikhet the driest, though the difference between 
 Chakrata and Roorkee or Ranikhet is less than might be anticipa- 
 ted. The humidities of the other places in Table XI Y. hav e been 
 .calculated approximately from the monthly means of tempeiatuie 
 
246 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 and vapour tension. The figures for Leh in the winter months- are 
 doubtful; the psychrometer generally giving unreliable results when 
 the temperature falls much below freezing. 
 
 XIV. — Approximate mean humidities of places in the Himalaya. 
 
 Place. 
 
 January. 
 
 February. 
 
 March. 
 
 April. 
 
 May. 
 
 June. 
 
 15 
 
 August. 
 
 September. 
 
 October. 
 
 November. 
 
 1 
 
 December. | 
 
 Year, 
 
 Bareilly 
 
 69 
 
 63 
 
 51 
 
 39 
 
 43 
 
 59 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 81 
 
 70 
 
 65 
 
 69 
 
 65 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 69 
 
 65 
 
 53 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 54 
 
 78 
 
 80 
 
 77 
 
 65 
 
 62 
 
 68 
 
 62 
 
 Delira 
 
 69 
 
 69 
 
 58 
 
 47 
 
 45 
 
 63 
 
 86 
 
 90 
 
 86 
 
 69 
 
 62 
 
 67 
 
 70 
 
 Dharms&la 
 
 83 
 
 73 
 
 67 
 
 57 
 
 51 
 
 55 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 
 77 
 
 69 
 
 56 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 Mussooree 
 
 66 
 
 64 
 
 53 
 
 45 
 
 49 
 
 62 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 98 
 
 70 
 
 61 
 
 72 
 
 70 
 
 R&nikhet ..j 
 
 60 
 
 58 
 
 52 
 
 39 
 
 49 
 
 61 
 
 85 ' 
 
 86 
 
 79 
 
 60 
 
 53 
 
 54 
 
 62 
 
 Chakrata 
 
 68 
 
 64 
 
 56 
 
 49 
 
 57 
 
 68 
 
 94 
 
 94 
 
 89 
 
 64 
 
 49 
 
 58 
 
 67 
 
 Leh ... | 
 
 100 
 
 100 
 
 79 
 
 57 
 
 52 
 
 50 
 
 62 : 
 
 66 
 
 1 
 
 68 
 
 63 
 
 67 
 
 71 
 
 70 
 
 The relative humidity of the air at all elevations up to 11,500 feet 
 is subject to a double annual variation, one maximum occurring at the 
 time of greatest cold, and the other in the middle of the rainy season. 
 At Leh the summer maximum is very faintly marked, nine-tenths of 
 the vapour brought by the south-west monsoon being cut off before 
 reaching the station, and at Dharmsala, north of the Panjab, the air 
 appears to be slightly more humid in winter than in summer. At all the 
 other stations the maximum degree of humidity is reached in August. 
 
 In April and November the air is dry, especially in the former 
 month, when, during hot winds from the north-west, the percent- 
 age of saturation over the plains often falls as low as 5 or 6. In 
 the hills, at Almora and Ranikhet, the humidity of the air frequently 
 sinks to 25 per cent., but is seldom less than 20 per cent. The 
 month of November and the beginning of December appear to be 
 quite as dry as April at the higher hill stations, where these months 
 are rainless, while showers sometimes fall in April ; but on the 
 plains, because of the low temperature of November and the mois- 
 ture left in the ground by the summer rains, the air is still compa- 
 ratively moist. In the cold weather the Sub-Himalayan stations are 
 more humid than the hill stations on the average of the twenty- 
 four hours, probably because the air, which is cooled and has its 
 relative humidity increased by radiation during the night, drains away 
 from the hills and collects over the plain. At this season the air at the 
 hill stations appears to be drier in the mornings than in the evenings. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 247 
 
 The humidity of the upper regions of the atmosphere, as 
 indicated by clouds, is always greater in the daytime than at night. 
 On the outer slope of the Himalayan chain the variation is doubtless 
 quite as distinctly seen as anywhere else in the world, hut it has 
 not been recorded in the observatory registers, where only the 
 amounts of cloud seen at 10 A.M. and 4 P.M. have been entered. The 
 variation is, however, probably very similar to that which occurs 
 •over the plains, where the sky is most serene about 10 P.M. and 
 most cloudy at the hottest time of the day, when the upward con- 
 vection currents are strongest. In Table XV. the figures represent 
 the means of the 10 A. m. and 4 p. M. observations, and they are 
 therefore a little above the true mean for the day. 
 
 X V. — Average proportion of cloudy sky in tenths of the expanse. 
 
 Station. 
 
 January. 
 
 February. 
 
 | March. 
 
 April. 
 
 May. 
 
 June. 
 
 July. 
 
 August. 
 
 September. 
 
 October. 
 
 I 
 
 November. 
 
 j December . 
 
 I 
 
 1 Year. 1 
 
 Bareilly 
 
 2-87 
 
 3-12 
 
 2-97 
 
 1*96 
 
 1-46 
 
 3-98 
 
 7-11 
 
 6*18 
 
 4'50 
 
 0-73 
 
 0-72 
 
 1*85 
 
 3-12 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 2-96 
 
 3-47 
 
 3-12 
 
 2-25 
 
 1-71 
 
 2-90 
 
 4-97 
 
 4-50 
 
 4-58 
 
 0-99 
 
 0-82 
 
 2-18 
 
 2-87 
 
 Dehra ... 
 
 3-73 
 
 4-07 3-55 
 
 2-50 
 
 2-75 
 
 4-02 
 
 7-50 
 
 7-00 
 
 4-83 
 
 1-08 
 
 1-33 
 
 2-74 
 
 3-76 
 
 Dharmsala ... 
 
 4 99 
 
 3-91 
 
 3-42 
 
 2-17 
 
 2-60 
 
 3-26 
 
 7-60 
 
 6-76 
 
 4-09 
 
 0-74 
 
 0-95 
 
 2-02 
 
 3-54 
 
 Ranikhet ... 
 
 3-66 
 
 4-42 
 
 3-78 
 
 3-34 
 
 3-58 
 
 5-41 
 
 8-58 
 
 8-42 
 
 5-64 
 
 1-69 
 
 1-31 
 
 2-99 
 
 4-40 
 
 Chakrata 
 
 4-23 
 
 4-75 
 
 4-44 
 
 3-42 
 
 3-75 
 
 5-14 
 
 8-89 
 
 8-57 
 
 6-79 
 
 2-28 
 
 1-74 
 
 3.62 
 
 4-80 
 
 Leh. ... 
 
 6-32 
 
 6*38 
 
 6-27 
 
 5-78 
 
 5-77 
 
 5-50 
 
 4-89 
 
 4-68 
 
 4*44 
 
 4-19 
 
 5-12 
 
 5-91 
 
 5*44 
 
 The annual variation of cloud is similar to that of the relative 
 humidity of the air near the ground. It has two maxima, in the 
 cold weather and the rainy season, and two minima, in April or May 
 and in November. April is cloudier than November, probably be- 
 cause the upward movement of the air during the day then prevails 
 over the downward movement at night, while in November the preva- 
 lent movement is downward. In this way the air in the upper 
 strata is dynamically cooled in the hot-weather months and dyna- 
 mically heated in November. The variation ol humidity at the hill 
 stations is intermediate in character between that observed on the 
 plain and the variation in the cloud-bearing strata of the atmosphere. 
 
 No direct observations of the heights of clouds above the ground 
 have been made in the Himalaya. The ordinary clouds of the 
 rainy season that look like broken cumulus from below are often 
 not more than 5,000 or 6,000 feet above sea-level, hill stations 
 like Naini Tal and Mussooree being frequently enveloped in them 
 
248 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 for days. They sometimes even extend down to the level of the 
 plains, the whole mass of the mountains up to the snows being then 
 shrouded in fog. From the vapour tensions given in Table XIII., 
 and the temperature decrements in Table V., it is possible to calculate 
 approximately the average height at which a mass of air rising up 
 from the plain would reach the dew-point and begin to form cloud. 
 In January this height is a little over 4,000 feet above the plain, or 
 about 5,000 feet above sea-level. In April and May the height above 
 the plain is 8,000 feet, and at this time of the year it is rare to find 
 clouds resting on the outer ridges of the Himalaya, though great 
 banks of them are formed every day along the southern face of the 
 snowy range. In the rainy season, that is, between the middle of 
 June and the end of September, the average height at which 
 clouds would commence to be formed in a rising column of air 
 is 3,100 feet above the plain or about 3,900 above sea-level. 
 This probably coincides very nearly with the zone of greatest 
 rainfall on the mountains. In August, when the air is most humid 
 and rainfall most frequent, the average lower limit of cloud is 
 probably about 3,200 feet above the sea. 
 
 Regarding the upper limit of cloud nothing is known. The 
 light feathery ice-cloud called cirrus, seen above the plains of Tibet 
 and the passes over the Indian watershed, appears quite as hi o h as 
 when viewed from the Indian plain. It is probably formed tt all 
 elevations to which water vapour extends, though what the upper 
 limit of vapour is we do not know. If we assume the cirrus clouds 
 over the Tibetan plateau to be twice as high as the plateau itself 
 say 30,000 feet above sea-level, the quantity of vapour in the air 
 would be only one-twentieth of that observed on the plains of India 
 but it would probably be quite sufficient to form light clouds. 
 
 The distribution of rain both on the plains and on the mountains 
 
 Rain and snow. ^ as already been described in a general way. 
 
 The plains of Northern India, between the 
 mountains and the Jumna river, or a line drawn north-westward from 
 Delhi beyond the river, may be divided into roughly parallel zones of 
 equal rainfall, that which receives the greatest amount of precipitation 
 lying nearest to the Himalaya. The breadth of each of these zones 
 gradually diminishes towards the north-west and widens out in the 
 direction of Bengal, because, the prevailing wind of the rainy season 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 249 
 
 being easterly over the plain, the supply of vapour gradually dimi- 
 nishes and the rains become lighter as we pass from east to west. In 
 Table XVI., the average monthly rainfalls of 15 places on the plains 
 near the base of the hills of Kumaon, Garhwal, and Dehra Dun, are 
 given. The first group of stations is at an average distance of 20 to 30 
 miles from the base of the hills, and the distance of the other group 
 is under 20 miles. In both groups the stations are arranged in 
 order from east to west. The table might be extended indefinitely 
 in both these directions as well as southwards, but little would be 
 gained by doing so, since the distribution of rain above described is 
 seen clearly enough from the figures as they stand. 
 
 The average rainfall of the line of stations at a distance exceeding- 
 twenty miles from the Himalaya is 40' 1 inches, and that of the 
 stations at a distance less than twenty miles is 46'6 inches. In each 
 group the total rainfall gradually diminishes in passing from the 
 extreme east of Rohilkhand to the neighbourhood of the Ganges, 
 where it increases suddenly and again gradually shades off' to the 
 westward. The mean wind directions for the rainy season at Roor- 
 kee, Meerut, and Delhi indicate that there is frequently a sort of 
 eddy formed at that season near the upper course of the Ganges, 
 probably by the meeting of the south-east winds of the plain with 
 south-west winds from the Arabian Sea that have been deflected 
 northward by the Aravali hills in Rajputana, and this may be the 
 cause of the increased rainfall that is observed. 
 
 On the mountains the rainfall varies rapidly with height, and 
 its quantity is to a very great extent dependent on the situation 
 of the place to the windward or leeward of high ridges and peaks. 
 At fairly exposed stations of nearly equal altitudes there is a gradual 
 diminution of the annual rainfall on passing from west to east, and 
 between the Ganges and J umna there is a slight increase perfectly 
 comparable to that which occurs on the plain in the districts of Bijnor 
 and Saharanpur. Thus the annual rainfall of Darjiling is 120 inches, 
 that of Naini Tal 91 inches, that of Mussooree 95 inches, and that of 
 Chakrata, Simla, and Marri 62, 68, and 58 inches respectively. 
 
 The next table gives the average monthly and annual rainfall of 
 twenty places on the Himalayan slope, classified into three groups 
 according to their positions near the foot of the slope, on the outer 
 high ranges or on the inner ranges and valleys. 
 
 32 
 
X VI. — Rainfall of stations on the plains near the base of the Himalaya. 
 
 250 
 
 himXlayan districts 
 
 1 
 
 *>• 
 
 
 Ih 
 
 
 tH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 t- 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 04 
 
 D— 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 H 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 .Toqiunjsf 1 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 cm 
 
 
 r ”' 
 
 04 
 
 rH 
 
 1 — t 
 
 
 r-r 
 
 CM 
 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 
 JuO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 r—i 
 
 to 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 O 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 ■«. rH 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 IH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 op 
 
 p 
 
 Cp 
 
 
 O 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 03 
 
 l> 
 
 At 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 to 
 
 cb 
 
 l> 
 
 © 
 
 cb 
 
 cb 
 
 o 
 
 j’o 
 
 O 
 
 rH 
 
 
 ■rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 H4 
 
 H 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 1 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 Sr 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 
 M9q 1 
 
 ^ rH 
 
 rH 
 
 to 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 -ra303Q[ j 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 ° 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 •I9q 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 >o 
 
 .CO 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 N • 
 
 O 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 ' 
 
 ' 
 
 r 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 rH 
 
 -Ul9AOj£ 
 
 
 o 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 H 
 
 to 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 <M 
 
 
 ^ JO 
 
 
 t- 
 
 JO 
 
 'SM 
 
 JO 
 
 OO 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 >o 
 
 CO 
 
 tr- 
 
 \raqcqoo 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 ugq 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 tr 
 
 O 
 
 <M 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 ^ O 
 
 JO 
 
 03 
 
 rH 
 
 H+ 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 OO 
 
 t- 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 (M 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 J— 
 
 -TO9^d9g 
 
 OO 
 
 to 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 cb 
 
 rH 
 
 do 
 
 C3 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 to 
 
 lb 
 
 rH 
 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 rH 
 
 (M 
 
 to 
 
 IH 
 
 JO 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 l>“ 
 
 CM 
 
 
 JO 
 
 qsnSny 
 
 ^ 
 
 JO 
 
 lH 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 Ip 
 
 tp 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 cp 
 
 
 cp 
 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 rH 
 
 r — i 
 
 03 
 
 OO 
 
 03 
 
 cb 
 
 JO 
 
 (M 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 cb 
 
 —H 
 
 CM 
 
 
 rH 
 
 H 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 r— 1 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 <M 
 
 I- 
 
 , 
 
 M 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 <M 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 (M 
 
 •Afor 
 
 ^ 03 
 
 t p 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 04 
 
 T* 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 JO 
 
 p 
 
 to 
 
 r- 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 <M 
 
 r— i 
 
 © 
 
 to 
 
 JO 
 
 cb 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 CM 
 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 04 
 
 rH 
 
 T— 1 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 
 <M 
 
 >o 
 
 JO 
 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 <M 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 *9unp 
 
 
 CO 
 
 03 
 
 cp 
 
 OO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 04 
 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 O 
 
 p 
 
 cp 
 
 JO 
 
 jo 
 
 >b 
 
 rH 
 
 C3 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 CD 
 
 JO 
 
 <b 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 
 03 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 (M 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 CM 
 
 H4 
 
 
 ^ <M 
 
 <M 
 
 o 
 
 t- 
 
 05 
 
 OO 
 
 Cp 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 O 
 
 i—4 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 6 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 "IJjdy 
 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 <M 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 t- 
 
 CM 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 >, eg 
 
 cm 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 Cp 
 
 rH 
 
 jp 
 
 J O 
 
 tp 
 
 p 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 jo 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 O 
 
 03 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 •qoj^j\[ 
 
 ^ p 
 
 c p 
 
 
 OO 
 
 <M 
 
 cp 
 
 O 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 cp 
 
 l- 
 
 tp 
 
 cp 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 •Xi'Biuqgj 
 
 JO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 (M 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 03 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 ** rH 
 
 rH 
 
 to 
 
 <M 
 
 tp 
 
 JO 
 
 cp 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 Cp 
 
 tp 
 
 p 
 
 co 
 
 r— H 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 tH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 •XlBTlirBf 
 
 00 
 
 <M 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 <M 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 OO 
 
 03 
 
 JO 
 
 S <M 
 
 rH 
 
 JO 
 
 rH 
 
 cp 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 cp 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 p 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 O 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 2 o! 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 03 
 
 <M 
 
 o 
 
 tr 
 
 JO 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 CM 
 
 JO 
 
 OO 
 
 JO 
 
 
 03 
 
 H 
 
 > -d 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 t- 
 
 OO 
 
 co 
 
 03 
 
 OO 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 Ir 
 
 
 tr 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 : 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 l 
 
 z 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 l 
 
 ; 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 t 
 
 J 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 *43 
 
 c3 
 
 -+-> 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •r— i 
 
 
 *3 
 
 
 
 Fh 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nawabgai 
 
 <D 
 
 rd 
 
 c3 
 
 £ 
 
 d 
 
 f-i 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 rd 
 
 Fh 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 •i — > 
 
 d 
 
 l 
 
 rQ 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 c3 
 
 vS 
 
 •s 
 
 o3 
 
 bs 
 
 a 
 
 Fh 
 
 d 
 
 Oh 
 
 § 
 
 H 
 
 d 
 
 -H 
 
 -rH 
 
 rd 
 
 rO 
 
 rH 
 
 Fh 
 
 d 
 
 Oh 
 
 rH 
 
 o3 
 
 •d 
 
 d 
 
 Fh 
 
 d 
 
 Oh 
 
 •rH 
 
 rd 
 
 CQ 
 
 Fh 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 V05 
 
 rd 
 
 03 
 
 d 
 
 -rH 
 
 do 
 
 05 
 
 ■a 
 
 a 
 
 Q> 
 
 a> 
 
 F4 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 P 
 
 OQ 
 
 <1 
 
 p 
 
 S 
 
 p 
 
 w 
 
 P 
 
 £ 
 
 !2i 
 
 C4 
 
JT T II. —Rainfall on the Himalayan slope. 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 251 
 
 •sj:u 0,£ 
 jo aoqmuyj; 
 
 16-17 
 
 16-17 
 
 5-6 
 
 4 
 
 2-3 
 
 31 -33 
 
 2-3 
 
 16-17 
 
 30-31 
 
 1-3 
 
 16-28 
 
 11-12 
 
 5 
 
 t> l> t>- O T-H b- 
 
 HHCOHCOHCO 
 
 l 1 l l i I 
 
 50 CO JO 05 O 50 
 
 H H CO CO r-H 
 
 
 (M CO Cl fc— Ci to cc fC 
 h OCOCOOOCDCC 
 
 5: O lO lO N l> OI 
 
 50 t>- CO IQ t>* t>- CO 
 
 ^ »o CO CO CO 
 
 05 Cq 01 N rH 
 
 o cq »b cq t- 
 
 05 Cl CO CO 
 
 T-H 
 
 jo cq th co cq co cq 
 
 jo 05 05 cq cq 50 co 
 
 i OO QO co O O) H 
 lO -rH CO '•+! JO CO 
 
 •JoquioooQ 
 
 0*-H0500Cq»0 05 
 j. iC CO CO lO H CO lO Cl 
 
 oooooooo 
 
 05 CO f-H O »o 
 
 )C (M o r-H 05 
 
 H OJ r-H r-H O 
 
 t- (M l(! OC t- 
 q re h t> t- ; 
 
 o o © A o o ■ 
 
 •JoqraoAoyt 
 
 i-H CO CO t>- 
 
 v. o : o ip : o • o 
 
 o * o o : O • o 
 
 JO 05 CO CO 
 
 r-H • O I— H ZD 
 
 O’ © o o 
 
 C5 co o cq 
 ; l H o cq © ; 
 
 • : © 6 © © ’ 
 
 .joqojoo 
 
 CO »C CO (M O lO (N Cl ! 
 ^ ^rHOt>GCI>^00. 
 m H H H o 6 o o 
 
 o o 05 h cq 
 
 co cq o o co 
 
 r-H O r-H O O 
 
 rH COCO CO -H 50 
 
 H CC Cl t>* 50 50 : 
 
 NHOOOO • 
 
 Moqmojdag 
 
 OiHCOO^^OrU 
 »0 iO N Cl h N O 
 
 ij)0»0»OC3©CCO 
 
 r-H r-H r— 1 
 
 r+l O *r* hH 05 
 
 cq cq to C5 zp 
 
 © 05 Cl«lb 1 
 
 r-H t-H 
 
 cq 05 b— jo co t-h h 
 t>. O IO O O b cq 
 
 co 4h< ^ »o jo cq o 
 
 •jsnSny 
 
 COt>ClODOCCWH 
 
 CO ’O >C ^ CO CO |> Cl 1 
 
 *“ ib 6 *o i> oo co co io 
 
 HWHHlONNtN 
 
 23-77 
 
 54-30 
 
 31-27 
 
 16-31 
 
 30*86 
 
 50 cq rH H JO JO H 
 
 CO 05 rH t-H 50 O t>- 
 
 H 05 00 H cq 00 o 
 
 rH t-H r-H 
 
 •Aptp 
 
 50 ~"H i co 50 CO - CO C5 
 ^ XJ>CO CO oo c »p O 
 
 oo h o ci N ^ ib 
 
 o 50 JO CO T-H 
 
 CO r-H CC W 
 
 4* t>- 05 t>- CO 
 
 cq co cq rH cq 
 
 CO^tHCihOO 
 
 05 t-h co 50 oo cq 
 
 -b< CD 05 co cb oo uo 
 
 t — It — 1 T-H I — 1 
 
 •ounp j 
 
 COHCOCOCO(MiO(M 
 ^ 05ococq,oco500 
 " COO^CIOOOOHCO 
 rH r—i 
 
 NO O t» -sH 
 
 -+ 33 O'. O! N 
 
 ic co 05 t- t~ 
 
 rH r-H 
 
 50 co o t-h cq jo co 
 
 rH o 05 CO rH CO O 
 i> t- 1*0 » c j*o -rn o 
 
 •Atq\[ 
 
 1C IM lO 3; t- 05 t H 
 
 _ cccc^t-comow 
 
 1 — li — 1 O 6 H ’ — 
 
 t- CO rH CO O 
 
 05 cq N H cp 
 
 cq cq co 
 
 rH CO 50 H CO JO »C 
 
 jo cq t-h 50 cq o 
 co co cq co cq cq o 
 
 'ILidy 
 
 COClCOCOt-COCOCO 
 ^ lOV>OOD(Nt-rH!p 
 OOOO-^HOrHO 
 
 CO t>- O 00 Cl 
 
 cq 05 co 
 
 r-H CO t-H rH (fq 
 
 05 cq 05 cq 05 jo 
 ^ n o o w 9 ; 
 
 t-H r-H r-H r-H rH rH 
 
 •qoiuj5 
 
 r^X^(MCOHiO(M 
 ^ OOtT-OOOCq'^cpcq 
 o r- ^ H t-H r-H r-H O’ OI 
 
 CO H CO 
 
 CO HU C5 *rb O 
 
 cq r-H cq CO r-H 
 
 M rH rH o Cl CO H 
 
 cq co jo 50 cq co o 
 
 Cq rH r-H rH Cd Cl O 
 
 - A,retuqoq 
 
 NOOOhI>OQO(N 
 
 ^ NMCOCl^rHCO^ 
 
 " ^Hcbcqcqcbcqbqcb 
 
 rH l> 05 JO -r}4 
 
 cq *o> cq o ^ 
 
 co cb cb co t-h 
 
 05 CO CO t-H GO -rH* rH 
 
 0 9 9 9 9^9 
 
 co cq cq cq cq cb 0 
 
 •jfuunu'Bp 
 
 (M O cc lO l> CO N H 
 
 ^ COtHCSCO'+99^ 
 
 ^H(fqCOH(N^OJ 
 
 -rH! CO O H (> 
 
 O -+< O ^ ^ 
 
 cb cq cq bn cq 
 
 cq cq co ^ t-h 0 0 
 
 H l>- 00 50 50 Cq r-H 
 
 cq bn rH rH cq cq 0 
 
 •(139J 
 
 Ul) UOpCAO[[h[ 
 
 OOOOOOOO 
 
 OCOOWLOCCOO 
 
 OO ^ H CO^ C^ CO^ O 
 
 r-T H H c4 Cq rH cb 
 
 6,600 
 
 5,850 
 
 6,550 
 
 7,052 
 
 7,511 
 
 O O O 05 O O CO 
 
 JO O 05 50 JO JO CO 
 
 JO lO r^ t> JO 
 
 lb l b' lb 50 JO r-H r-H 
 r-H 
 
 Station, 
 
 Kilpuri 
 
 Haldwani ... ... 
 
 Hardwar ... 
 
 Molian 
 
 Bhogpur ... 
 
 Dehra 
 
 Ambari 
 
 Kalsi 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 ■ Mussooree (St. Fidelis's, 
 School). 
 
 Mussooree (Hospital) ... 
 Chakrata ... 
 
 Landaur 
 
 Champawat 
 
 Pithoragarh 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 Ranikhet 
 
 Pauri 
 
 Srinagar 
 
 Leli 
 
 
 ' ^ ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' V 
 
 
 woq vanaa cr^ v 
 
 •saojstva 
 
 "SiJmvA aay 
 
 
 ‘saiayAVig ‘avayHa 
 
 aaj.no 
 
 sasxva aaxaj 
 
 Interpolated from upper station in some years. 
 
252 
 
 him/layan districts 
 
 The influence of an elevated ridge in diminishing the rainfall 
 of the valley behind it is seen on comparing the rainfall of Almora 
 with that of Naim Tal, or even by comparing Srinagar with Pauri, 
 though both of these lie far in the interior of the mountain system. 
 A much greater contrast is observable between Bhogpur, at the foot of 
 the mountains overhanging the gorge of the Ganges above Hard war, 
 and Dehra, in the Dun, behind the central and highest part of the 
 Siwalik chain. The rainfall of Bhogpur, given by the observations 
 of two and a half years is, however, probably too high. 
 
 The variation of rainfall with height can only be roughly determin- 
 ed, because every high ridge and peak thus cuts off the supply of vapour 
 from the lower ground to the north of it. In Table XVIII. an attempt 
 has been made to determine it approximately from the rainfall figures 
 in the first two sections of Table XVII., together with those of two or 
 three places in the hills north of the Panjab and the observations made 
 by General Strachey at Niti in 1849. The ratio between the mean 
 rainfall of each hill station and that of the nearest station or stations 
 
 on the plains, for the same years, is given in the last column. 
 
 A VIII. — Rainfall of the outer slope of the Himalaya compared to 
 that of the neighbouring plain. 
 
 Hills. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Kilpuri 
 Hard war 
 Pathankot 
 Mohan 
 Haldwani 
 Ambari 
 Kalsi 
 Nurpur 
 Dehra 
 Bhogpur 
 Palampur 
 Dharmsala 
 Mussooree (1) 
 Mussooree (2) 
 Naini Tal 
 Simla 
 Chakrata 
 Landaur 
 Niti 
 
 .8. 
 
 
 Plains. 
 
 
 
 Difference of 
 elevation. 
 
 Height 
 in feet. 
 
 '"cS 
 
 'cS 
 
 Ph 
 
 Nearest station or 
 stations. 
 
 Height 
 in feet. 
 
 r— H 
 r *i 
 
 c2 
 
 SH 
 
 .9 
 
 c3 
 
 P3 
 
 800 
 
 // 
 
 60-1 
 
 Rudarpur 
 
 720 
 
 n 
 
 43-9 
 
 80 
 
 1,100 
 
 45-7 
 
 Roorlcee 
 
 | S90 
 
 40-2 
 
 210 
 
 1,100 
 
 50-2 
 
 Gurdaspur 
 
 1 900 
 
 30-1 
 
 260 
 
 1,330 
 
 65'1 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 890 
 
 39-8 
 
 440 
 
 1,430 
 
 74-1 
 
 Rudarpur 
 
 720 
 
 43-9 
 
 710 
 
 1,800 
 
 77-8 
 
 Saha ran pur and Ambala, 
 
 890 
 
 30-0 
 
 910 
 
 2,000 
 
 82-3 
 
 Ditto 
 
 890 
 
 34-0 
 
 1,110 
 
 2,05(J 
 
 2,230 
 
 79-3 
 
 Gurdaspur 
 
 900 
 
 30-1 
 
 1,150 
 
 74-9 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 890 
 
 41 ’5 
 
 1,340 
 
 2,450 
 
 157-7 
 
 Ditto 
 
 890 
 
 30-0 
 
 1 ,560 
 
 4,000 
 
 1180 
 
 Gurdaspur 
 
 900 
 
 28-7 
 
 3,100 
 
 4,490 
 
 123-2 
 
 Ditto 
 
 900 
 
 33-1 
 
 3,590 
 
 5,850 
 
 142-2 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 890 
 
 32-0 
 
 4,960 
 
 6,550 
 
 95-2 
 
 Ditto 
 
 890 
 
 4P5 
 
 5,660 
 
 6,600 
 
 90-9 
 
 Rudarpur 
 
 720 
 
 43-9 
 
 5^880 
 
 6,950 
 
 68-6 
 
 Ambala 
 
 820 
 
 36-2 
 
 6,130 
 
 7 ,050 
 
 62-2 
 
 Saharanpur and Ambala, 
 
 890 
 
 36-4 
 
 6^360 
 
 7,510 
 
 87-1 
 
 Roorkee 
 
 890 
 
 42-5 
 
 6,620 
 
 10,660 
 
 11,460 
 
 5*5 J 
 
 Roorkee and Rudarpur, 
 
 800 
 
 450 1 
 
 Fh 
 
 c3 
 
 t+H 
 
 £ 
 
 •H 
 
 cs 
 
 PS 
 
 1-37 
 
 1*14 
 
 1-67 
 
 1-64 
 
 1- 69 
 
 2- 59 
 
 2- 42 
 2-60 
 1-80 
 5-26 
 4-11 
 
 3- 72 
 
 4- 44 
 2-29 
 2-07 
 1-90 
 1-71 
 205 
 0-12 
 
 by GmSd StraS’ AUgUSt ^ Se P tember ’ 1849 5 the observations at Niti taken 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 253 
 
 By grouping together the ratios for the places lying between the 
 even thousands of feet, many of the irregularities that appear in 
 Table XVIII. are cleared away and the results may be accepted with 
 more confidence. The excessive rainfall of Bhogpur, for example, 
 will to some extent counterbalance the defect at Dehra caused by the 
 position of the latter station behind the ridge of the Siwaliks. The 
 following figures are thus obtained : — 
 
 Height above plain. 
 
 Mean height. 
 
 Rainfall ratio. 
 
 Observed. 
 
 Calculated. 
 
 
 
 Feet. 
 
 Feet. 
 
 
 
 0 to 
 
 • • • 
 
 1,000 
 
 435 
 
 1-68 
 
 1-83 
 
 1,000 „ 
 
 ... 
 
 2,000 
 
 1,290 
 
 3-04 
 
 3-01 
 
 3,000 „ 
 
 • •• 
 
 4,000 
 
 3,350 
 
 3-91 
 
 3-77 
 
 4,000 „ 
 
 ... 
 
 5,000 
 
 4,740 i 
 
 3-48 
 
 3'15 
 
 5,000 „ 
 
 ... 
 
 6,000 
 
 5,770 
 
 2-18 
 
 2-39 
 
 6,000 „ 
 
 • . • 
 
 7,000 
 
 6,370 
 
 1-89 
 
 1-89 
 
 10,000 „ 
 
 ... 
 
 11,000 
 
 10,660 
 
 0-12 
 
 0 
 
 The ratios in the last column are calculated by means of a 
 formula, B, = 1 + 2T2 h — 0 - 47 h 2, + 0025 7t 3 , given in the 
 official Report on the Rainfall of the North- Western Provinces and 
 Oudh, published in 1879. It was originally computed from some- 
 what different data, but it represents the observed ratios in the above 
 table as closely as can possibly be expected, considering the nature 
 of the observations. At elevations greater than 9,585 feet above the 
 plain this formula gives increasing values for the rainfall, and is 
 therefore inapplicable; hut from 7,000 feet above the plain upwards 
 the rainfall ratio may be approximately represented by a logarithmic 
 formula, log 11 = 2 * 1 5 1 — 0'287 h. In both formulae A is to he 
 expressed in thousands of feet. 
 
 The mean rainfall along Rohilkhand and the Doab, at a distance 
 of twenty miles from the hills, is about 43 inches, and the mean 
 elevation of this line above sea-level is 800 feet. Applying the 
 formulae in the preceding paragraph to these data, we find that 
 
 1 The observations for the lower Mussooree station being for a very short period 
 only, the figures for the stations immediately above and below it in Table XVlil. 
 have been included in striking the average. 
 
254 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 the average rainfall on the southern slope of exposed mountain 
 ridges in Kumaon and Garhwal would probably be the follow- 
 ing : 
 
 At 800 feet above the sea 43 inches. 
 
 99 
 
 1,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 2,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 3,000 
 
 >> 
 
 99 
 
 5? 
 
 4,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 5? 
 
 5,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 6,000 
 
 5? 
 
 99 
 
 5? 
 
 7,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 8,000 
 
 99 
 
 >> 
 
 99 
 
 9,000 
 
 J? 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 10,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 11,000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 IT 
 
 12.000 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 60 
 
 99 
 
 125 
 
 > 
 
 159 
 
 99 
 
 164 
 
 IT 
 
 149 
 
 9T 
 
 122 
 
 99 
 
 88 
 
 9T 
 
 52 
 
 99 
 
 27 
 
 99 
 
 14 
 
 99 
 
 7 
 
 99 
 
 4 
 
 rr 
 
 From the table it appears that the maximum rainfall occurs 
 about 4,000 feet above the sea. The exact height of the maximum 
 zone determined by the formula is 2,948 feet above the plain, or 
 about 3,750 above sea-level. This agrees very closely with the mean 
 altitude at which a rising column of air reaches its dew-point in the 
 rainy season. 
 
 By far the most important if not the only cause of rain in the 
 Himalaya is the cooling of the air by expansion as it ascends the 
 mountain slope. It has been already seen that in the rainy season, 
 the direction of the wind at all elevations in the Himalaya up to 
 15,000 or 16,000 feet, if not higher still, is from some southerly 
 quarter. Near the foot of the hills the prevailing direction is south- 
 easterly, but at most of the stations from the level of Dehra Dun 
 upwards the wind blows from some point to the west of south ; that is, 
 more or less nearly at right angles to the axis of the mountain zone. 
 The air in rising to surmount the barrier has its heat rapidly converted 
 into the work of expansion, and it commences to precipitate rain when 
 the temperature falls to the dew-point. When once condensation 
 begins, the rate of decrease of vapour with height will be a measure of 
 the quantity condensed or the rainfall. This rate is greatest at the 
 lowest elevations ; and thus rain should be heaviest at places on the 
 outer slope of the mountains where a rising stream of airs usually 
 begins to precipitate moisture, as the observations prove to be 
 the fact. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 255 
 
 The slight rainfall of places like Almora and Srinagar, to the 
 leeward of a higher mountain mass is caused by the partial exhaus- 
 tion of the vapour in crossing the mountains and by the dyna- 
 mical heating of the air as it streams down towards the valley, 
 both causes diminishing the tendency to condensation. The rapid 
 decrease of rainfall on ascending beyond 6,000 or 7,000 feet is 
 due simply to the exhaustion of the vapour, but at all elevations 
 the influence of high ranges in cutting off the supply of vapour 
 is easily seen. Regarding the rainfall of 1849 on the Tibetan 
 table-land, General Strachey says: — “In the country beyond Nfti 
 no register was kept ; but during a week of rainy weather in 
 the middle of August 1’5 inches fell at Niti, while at Sanjar, 
 beyond the watershed, where I was then encamped, at 16,500 
 feet, the rain never exceeded a very faint drizzle, and could 
 hardly have been susceptible of measurement.” At the Leh 
 observatory all through the summer the rainfall hardly ever exceeds 
 a few drops, and the greatest fall in a month during several years 
 was an inch and a half. Sir Joseph Hooker’s experience in 
 Sikkim supplies us with facts quite parallel to these. In August, 
 1849, he says 26*8 inches fell at Darjiling, while in the interior, 
 at the same elevation, but in the rear of the first masses of snowy 
 mountains only 12*5 inches were, measured. Between the 8th 
 of September and the end of the month only 1'7 inches fell at 
 Mome Samdong, about 15,500 feet above the sea, while at Darjiling- 
 10 inches fell, and other instances of a similar nature might be 
 cited. 
 
 The variation of rainfall with season is very distinctly marked in 
 India. At all the stations in Tables XVI. and XVII., and at almost 
 every station on the North Indian plain, the driest month of the 
 year is November. In the great majority of years no precipitation 
 whatever occurs in this month or in the first half of December, 
 except perhaps on the higher mountains towards the north-west 
 where the winter snows usually begin before the end of November. 
 About Christmas a few showers of snow usually fall on the outer 
 hills, and at the same time there is a slight precipitation of rain 
 over the plains of the Panjab and the North-Western Provinces. 
 These winter snows and rains increase in quantity and in frequency 
 on the hills and in the north-west Panjab until February or March, 
 
250 
 
 iiimXlayan districts 
 
 but on the plains of the North-Western Provinces and Behar the 
 maximum occurs in January. 
 
 The cause of the winter rains and snows has already been pointed 
 out in describing the annual changes of the winds. In October and 
 about the beginning of November the air over Northern India is as 
 near as it ever attains to a condition of statical equilibrium. It is 
 subject to the diurnal oscillations called ihe barometric tides and to the 
 accompanying mountain winds, but there is little permanent move- 
 ment of the air in any direction. During the cold weather, however, 
 the neutral plane of pressure gradually sinks and the south-west 
 upper currents of the atmosphere are then forced to ascend the slope 
 of the mountains where they precipitate more or less of the vapour 
 they contain. On the lower hills the temperature increases so 
 rapidly in March and April that the tendency to precipitation, and 
 consequently the rainfall, becomes less than in January and February, 
 though the upper currents continue to blow from nearly the same 
 direction as in winter. Along the southern declivity of the great 
 snowy range, however, thunderstorms are of daily occurrence at this 
 time of the year, and above the snow line considerable quantities of 
 snow are frequently precipitated. In Ladak the heaviest falls of 
 snow observed by Captain H. Strachey in 1848-49 occurred in 
 April ; but during the three years, 1876-78, there was no precipita- 
 tion at Leh in that month. 
 
 April and May are the months in which hail is most frequently 
 noticed in the Himalaya. No regular registers of this phenomenon 
 have been kept, but nearly every year several hailstorms occur in 
 the outer hills, and the stones are often of large size. On the 11th 
 of May, 1855, a hailstorm occurred at Naini Tal in which many 
 stones of 6, 8, 10 and even 24 ounces were observed to fall, the 
 circumference of these varying from 9 to 13 inches. In 1878 there 
 was a storm in which large hailstones fell, some of them so heavy that 
 they punched holes through the zinc roofs of the houses, while the 
 quantity was so great that it lay in shady places, where covered with 
 leaves, for nearly a month. 
 
 About the middle of June usually, and sometimes before the 
 end of May near the foot of the hills, the hot north-west winds of 
 the plains give way to sea winds from the Bay of Bengal. The 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 257 
 
 whole of the lower atmosphere over India is then moving towards 
 the Himalaya ; and the upward deflection of the air currents by 
 the mountains causes frequent precipitations of rain in the manner 
 already described. The rainy season almost always commences 
 sooner on the mountains than on the plains, for saturation is reached 
 first at high elevations and then propagated downwards by the 
 cooling effect of the falling rain drops and the cutting off of the 
 sun’s heat by clouds. At most places in India, and in the inner 
 parts of the Himalaya, July is the rainiest month, but on the outer 
 slope of the mountains August is equally or sometimes even more 
 rainy, especially towards the north-west of the chain. 
 
 While the rainy season lasts, the parts of Ladak about Leh, 
 and the Tibetan plateau generally, receive perhaps, on the whole, 
 less precipitation than in winter, because the temperature is then so 
 much higher than on thelndian side of the chain, this high temper- 
 ature greatly decreasing the relative humidity of any air that may 
 reach the plateau from the south. It is probable also that the high 
 snowy peaks, lying above the limit of the monsoon current proper, 
 receive less precipitation in summer than in winter. At the turn 
 of the seasons, however, about the end of September, falls of snow 
 amounting to several feet in thickness sometimes occur on the 
 passes over the Indian watershed. 
 
 Shortly after the autumnal equinox, about the end of September 
 or beginning of October, the rains cease all ovei Hoi them India. 
 The sudden cessation of the rainy season seems to be in some 
 measure determined by the rapid diminution of solar heat, as the 
 sun retreats to the south of the equator. It is possibly to this 
 that we must attribute the somewhat remarkable regularity of 
 the recurrence of two or three days incessant lain frequently 
 experienced in Kumaon about the 20th of September. On the plains, 
 also, it is well known to the natives of the country that if rain 
 falls in the nakshatra (lunar mansion) of Hathiya — that is, in the 
 last week of September or first week of October, it is likely to be 
 heavy. Excessively heavy rain, like that of the 17th and 18 th 
 September, 1880, when 30 inches fell in little more than two days 
 at Naini Tal and produced a disastrous landslip, cannot, however 
 be thus produced by a simple loss of heat, but requires a powerful 
 indraught of moist air to keep up the supply of vapour. The 
 
 33 
 
258 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W, PROVINCES. 
 
 heavy rain observed on the plains at “ the break-up of the 
 monsoon,” and probably also that which falls at the same time on 
 the outer hills of Kumaon, must be due chiefly to the minor storms 
 of a cyclonic character that are frequently formed near the head 
 of the Bay of Bengal at the turn of the season, and pass inland in a 
 north-westerly direction. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Economic Mineralogy. 
 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Mining history. Experiments in Garhwal. The Kumaon Iron Works Company. 
 Causes of present poor returns. Mode of mining : excavation: removing the oie . 
 crushing the ore : cleaning the ore : drainage. Smelting operations : refining the 
 ore. Division of profits. Improvement needed in appliances: Chili furnace: 
 English system. Outturn. Financial results of the settlement of the revenue derived 
 from minerals. Gold : Tibetan gold-fields : Thok Jalung mines. Silver. Copper 
 mines: Rai mine and its ores : Sira mines: Gaul and Sor Gurang. Bournonite. 
 Copper mines of Garhwal : Dhanpur : Dhobri : Pokhri : Chaumattiya mines : Raja’s 
 mine : Nota mine : Thala mine : Danda mine : Talapungla mine : Kharna mine : 
 Agar Sera mine. Iron mines : Kumaon iron mines : Giwar mines : Garhwal mines : 
 Nagpur; Dasauli : Iriyakot. Lead. Arsenic. Lignite. Graphite. Sulphur. 
 Borax. Gypsum. Soap-stone. Asbestos. Silajit. Limestone. Building stone. 
 Roofing slate. Alum. 
 
 The mineral resources of the Kumaon division early obtained 
 
 the attention which their traditional value 
 Mining history. assumed to be due to them, and it was one 
 
 of the directions to the first Commissioner to procure specimens of 
 the ores to be found in Kumaon and transmit them to the mint for 
 assay. Specimens of copper ore from the mines in Sira and Gangoli 
 were accordingly forwarded to Calcutta in 1815, but the report was 
 not favourable ; for, if the specimens sent were fair samples of the 
 ores in general, it was doubted whether the mines could be worked 
 to advantage. 1 The Government were, however, not satisfied with 
 this report, and in 1817 deputed Mr. A. Laidlaw as mineralogical 
 surveyor to accompany Lieutenant W ebb s pai ty thr ough Kumaon. 
 Iiis orders 2 were to consider the examination of the mineral resour- 
 ces of the country his primary duty, though at the same time he 
 
 1 To Government, dated 26th June, 1815 : from Government, dated 13th Jan- 
 uary, 1816. For further information on the mineral resources of Kumaon see 
 Moorcroft’s Travels, I., 7 ; As. Res., XVIII., 286 ; Rec Geol. Sur., 1871, 19 . II., 86 . 
 (Lawder) III , 43 ; J. A. S , Ben., VI., 653 ; Glean, in Sc., K 230 . 
 
 Graphite, Glean, in Sc., III., 280 ; J. A. S„ Ben., XXIV., 203 , N.-W. P. Rec., 
 
 Ill N S., 371 ; G. India Rec., XVII., 58. „ TTT , 
 
 iron ores and works, N.-W P. Rec., XVIII., 1 ; Rec. G. India, Sup., VIII., 
 37 • XVII , 1 : XXVI. : Bh&bar iron works, Agra, 18ob. 
 
 Copper ores and works, J. A. S„ Ben., VII., 934 (Drummond) : VIII 471 
 (Glasfurd) : XII., 453, 769 (Lushington) : XIV., 471 (Reclcendoif) As. Res., 
 XVIII., 239 ; N.-W. P. Rec., III., N. S., 22 ; Glean, m Sc., I., 228. 
 
 ^Phonf* GovCTnme^^dated' 11th July, 1317. Mr. Laidlaw died at Pithora- 
 garh in 1836 , and I have not been able to procure any of his ongmal iqoit. 
 
260 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 should not feel himself debarred from bestowing attention on any 
 other matters deserving of scientific research, so far as such investi- 
 gation did not interfere with his more immediate duties. These 
 instructions further go on to say : — “You should ascertain the 
 existence or otherwise of mineral productions applicable to purposes 
 of public use, or available as a source of revenue ; and report on the 
 practicability of bringing them to account. The existence of iron 
 and copper ores in considerable quantity has already been ascertained ; 
 but as the working of these metals might injuriously affect important 
 articles of British import, it is not designed that your attention 
 should be occupied in detailing any practical arrangements for that 
 purpose ; you will not, however, consider yourself debarred from 
 prosecuting enquiries into any circumstances regarding them which 
 may be of sufficient interest to science to merit particular notice. 
 In every part, indeed, of your researches it is the wish of Govern- 
 ment that, in the first instance at least, you should contemplate 
 rather the general capabilities of the country which you are to visit 
 than the special means necessary for bringing them into action in 
 any particular district ; though, of course, the facility or difficulty 
 with which metallic ores or other useful minerals could be raised 
 and brought to market must be a leading point in your observations 
 on them. The minuter details of machinery, mode of working, &c., 
 are what it is meant to postpone, as these will be the subject of 
 future determination, when the whole result of your survey shall be 
 before Government.” 
 
 In 1826 Captain J. D. Herbert submitted his report on the 
 mineralogical survey of the province. 1 This was followed by a 
 report 2 in 1838 by Captain H. Drummond, of the 3rd Light 
 Cavalry, on the copper mines at Rai in Gangoli and at Sira in 
 Barabisi. Captain Drummond had brought with him from England 
 an experienced Cornish miner, Mr. Wilkin, to examine the mines 
 already worked, and proposed that, with a view of ascertaining their 
 actual value, a certain sum should be advanced by “ Government for 
 an experimental opening of such mines as might appear best suited 
 to the object in view.” This proposal was accepted 8 by Government, 
 and a sum of Rs. 2,415 (subsequently increased by Rs. 1,000) was 
 
 1 To Commissioner, dated 10th January, 1826. 5 J. A. R., Ben., VII., 
 
 &31 ; andStat. Kum., p. 358. 3 To Commissioner, dated 26th November, 1838. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 261 
 
 allotted to carry out the designs furnished by Captain Drummond. 
 A report 1 on the experiments then undertaken was rendered by Mr. 
 G. T. Lushington, Commissioner of Kumaon, in 1842. 
 
 The place selected for the important purpose of determining the 
 
 advantages or otherwise of working the 
 Experiments in Garhwal. European superintendence was 
 
 the Pokhri copper mine in pargana Nagpur in Garhwal. The works 
 were carried on from 1838 to 1841 with a net loss to Government 
 of Rs. 7,384. The Commissioner considered this complete failure 
 to be due to the poorness and scarcity of the ores found, and not in 
 the least to any want of skill or industry on the part of Mr. Wilkin, 
 or any injudicious selection of the places for experiment. Mr. 
 Reckendorf, a mining engineer, visited these mines again in 1845, 
 and in commenting on the deductions to be drawn from Mr. "Wilkin s 
 experiment, gave it as his opinion that the operations then under- 
 taken should not be considered as conclusive against the value of the 
 mines. 2 The experiment should have been confined to driving a 
 shaft some thirty or foi’ty fathoms below the old mines, and not to 
 collecting ores which might have been a good addition in smelting 
 other ores, but the smelting of which alone could never be 
 profitable. 
 
 Again, there were no proper appliances for smelting, the loss 
 from which by the native method adopted was very great, and the 
 ores used, from their nearness to the surface, had already lost much 
 of their value by the slow metamorphosis of pyrites into sulphate of 
 copper. On the whole, Mr. Reckendorf’s opinion was favourable 
 to more extended and expensive operations in the hands of a private 
 company. Nothing of importance, however, resulted from this the 
 first attempt to obtain some accurate information regarding the 
 mineral resources of the Himalaya. Captain Drummond also com- 
 bated 3 the conclusions arrived at by Mr. Lushington as to the mines 
 not affording a fair field for investment of capital, and in support of 
 his views quoted the testimony of Captain Glasfurd (Executive En- 
 gineer), Captain J. D. Herbert ( Superintendent of the Mineralogical 
 Survey), and the experts Wilkin and Reckendorf, who had actually 
 visited and partially worked the mines. He urged that the sums 
 
 1 J. A. S., Ben., XII., 454, and Stat. Kum., p. 367. 2 J. A. S., Ben , XIV , 
 
 471 ; and Stat. Kum., p. 385. 3 In a pamphlet published m London m 1845, 
 
 and Stat. Ivum., p. 393. 
 
262 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 hitherto expended were barely sufficient to pay for the expenses of dis- 
 covering and laying open the lode, and were utterly insufficient to 
 carry on the experiment in the only way in which it could he made to 
 pay. Nothing was undertaken until 1852, when the mines were 
 again opened on the same footing, but the result was failure as 
 complete as before. No attempt has since been made towards 
 placing the copper mines of Garhwal under European superintend- 
 ence. In 1872, however, a European leased the mines and con- 
 tinued the extraction of the ore according to the native method, 
 but was obliged to abandon the process, as he found the cost of the 
 metal when manufactured more nearly approached the current rate 
 for silver than that obtainable in the market for the best foreign 
 copper. The copper mines in Kumaon have never been worked 
 under European superintendence, and any remarks that I have to 
 make on their value or fiscal history will be found under the notice 
 of the mines themselves. 
 
 * 
 
 Connected with the history of mining enterprise in Kumaon 
 
 Kumaon Iron Works special prominence must be given to the 
 Company. Kumaon Iron Works Company still in exist- 
 
 ence, and whose origin is no doubt due to the continued belief, 
 in spite of successive failures, in the possibility of turning the 
 utilisation of the mineral resources of the province into a profitable 
 investment. These had again in the regular cycle of inquiries 
 become the subject of much speculation. From a review of the 
 information before Government and the results of certain experi- 
 ments made in 1856 the Directors of the East India Company 
 sent out a Mr. Sowerby and a large staff of mining assistants in 
 1857 to carry on the smelting of iron on account of Government in 
 the interior. 1 The fact was soon established that iron of an 
 excellent quality could be manufactured at rates below the cost of 
 iron imported from England, and a number of private individuals 
 under] the style of Davies and Co. were permitted to undertake oper- 
 ations for the same pm*pose in other parts of the lower hills. 
 
 1 Report on the Government iron works in Kumaon, with plans, specifications, 
 and estimates for establishing iron works in Kumaon, and remarks on the iron 
 deposits of the Himalayas by W. Sowerby, C.E., printed as No. XXYI. of the Sel. 
 Ree.. Government of India (Public Works Department), Calcutta, 1859. These 
 papers give a review of the English, Ulverstone, Continental, Belgian and French, 
 Rhineland, Black Forest, Bohemian and Styrian Iron Works, and estimates and plans 
 for adapting the approved processes of those iron countries to the Kumaon mines. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 203 
 
 The avowed object of the Government enterprise was to 
 
 induce private companies to work by demonstrating the financial 
 
 and physical possibility of carrying on iron works as a remunerative 
 
 industry in this province. Messrs. Davies proposed to take over 
 
 the tract between the Dhabka and the Bhakra, and their proposals 
 
 were accepted, with an assurance that they might proceed in 
 
 confidence to make their arrangements, as Government would 
 
 grant the lease sought. They therefore took over the Khurpa Tal 
 
 works in the rains of 1858, and paid their cost price in 18(53. 
 
 This company also erected buildings at Kaladhungi at a cost of 
 
 Bs. 1,25,000. On the failure of the Government works at Deh- 
 
 cliauri Colonel Drummond ottered to take them over at a valuation. 
 
 These works were given over to Drummond and Co., who paid the 
 
 capital under agreement into the treasury in 1861. The forest 
 
 rules were relaxed in favour of both companies, so as to allow them 
 
 entire control over the fuel supplies, and eventually in November, 
 
 1862, both companies were amalgamated under the title of the 
 
 North of India Kumaon Iron Works Company (Limited). Soon 
 
 after the formation of the company instructions were received from 
 
 the Secretary of State to construct a tramway to Khurja on the 
 
 East Indian Bailway, chiefly, it would appear, to afford an outlet for 
 
 the iron manufactures of Kumaon. The tramway was to be laid 
 
 with cast-iron rails manufactured at Dehchauri, and the company 
 
 lost no time in making several thousand maunds of pig iron. 
 
 Before the rails were made, however, the Government announced 
 
 its determination not to undertake this line itself, but to hand its 
 
 construction over to the Oudh and Bohilkhand Railwav. It was 
 
 */ 
 
 essential to the success of the enterprize that some such outlet 
 should exist, and the company accordingly determined to close its 
 works for a time and await the opening of the line. 
 
 A license was granted by Government, but, unfortunately for 
 the company, not executed till it was too late, and the deed of 
 agreement contained briefly the following clauses 1. — That a 
 capital of 3 % lakhs of rupees should be paid before execution of the 
 deed. 2. — That the, company should pay Bs. 83,585 as the liquidated 
 value of the works at Dehchauri, Bamgarh, and Khurpa Tal, made over 
 to them by Government, in four instalments, on or before the 1st Sep- 
 tember, 1862, 1863, 1864, and 1865, respectively; and in default of one 
 
264 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 payment the whole to become immediately due. 3. — To pay yearly, 
 for the first three years from 6th June, 1861, a rent of Es. 1,500, 
 and thereafter a yearly rent of Es. 2,500 and a royalty of one 
 rupee per ton of cast or wrought iron produced, and eight annas 
 per ton of iron ore raised and sold without being smelted ; the said 
 royalties not to be paid unless they exceed, and only so far as they 
 exceed, the rents of Es. 1,500 and Es. 2,500 before named ; 
 payments to be made on the 1st May yearly. 4. — To erect during 
 the third, fourth, and fifth years suitable furnaces with requisite 
 appliances for the smelting or blasting of iron (no number men- 
 tioned), and during these third, fourth, and fifth years to manufac- 
 ture at least 750 tons of iron per annum on an average, and 
 thereafter till the end of the term of 50 years manufacture 2,500 
 tons of iron per annum on an average of three years, to be struck 
 in May each year. 5. — That the area of the forest at the close of 
 every ten years should be covered with at least nine-tenths of such 
 timber like trees as stood upon it at the commencement of the 
 term, and when less than nine-tenths the company should plant to 
 the necessary extent, failing which they should pay for each default 
 Es. 20,000. 6. — Not to transfer their lease without the consent of 
 
 Government. 7. — To keep all roads (not being public ways made 
 by Government) used by them in repair, also their works. 8. — At 
 the close of their term remove their buildings, &c., first giving 
 Government the option of purchasing them at a fair valuation. 
 
 — On the failure to pay or manufacture as stipulated, Government 
 to enter upon and possess the works. 10. — But if such failure is 
 not due to the neglect of the company, they shall be free from such 
 penalty. 
 
 The purchase-money of the Khurpa Tal works was alone paid 
 up, but the forfeiture clause was suspended by the local Govern- 
 ment in 1868. The forest tract was never given over to the company 
 in the meaning of the agreement, but its revenue has been sepa- 
 rately collected and credited by Government. The license was not 
 sent up from Calcutta till June, 1864, by which time the company 
 had begun to see that the speculation would not turn out a profitable 
 one. In fact the license deed was not prepared for signature until 
 after the company had suspended operations, and then it was ruled 
 by the Solicitor to Government that it ought not to be signed. The- 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 265 
 
 map of the tract to be given over to the company was not completed 
 till 1869. So much for the relations of the company to Govern- 
 ment, and the delay in dealing with its affairs which has been 
 shown throughout. In June, 1861, permission was obtained for 
 the company’s manager to draw against their capital. This was 
 expended with little result, and in 1864, as above mentioned, the 
 company was wound up. This result was in a great measure, no doubt, 
 due to the company being unable to raise capital in the market, 
 owing to the defect, or rather the want, of title, which appears to be 
 ascribable to no fault of their own. Since 1865 correspondence 
 has been carried on in reference to the affairs of the company and 
 plans have been proposed for its resuscitation. In 1872 the works 
 were visited by Mr. Jones of the Roorkee Workshops and valued ; 
 he made them then worth Rs. 1,26,733, with a debt to Government 
 of about Rs. 80,000. There can be no doubt that the works can 
 hardly be said to have had a fair trial, and the valuable opinion of 
 the Commissioner of Kumaon may be quoted to the effect that 
 there is every reason to believe that, if carefully supervised and fed 
 with capital, the works should at least turn out as favourable under 
 any circumstances as the East Indian Railway. There is no doubt 
 that, in the distance, the fuel difficulty exists, but at Dehcliauri and 
 Kaladhungi for many years this can- scarcely be felt, and under 
 penalties to replant, the company may fairly be allowed to have an 
 unlimited supply from the neighbouring forest. At Ramgarh it is 
 doubtful whether iron manufacture will pay, as the ore, though of 
 the finest quality, lies at a considerable distance from any forests 
 of any considerable magnitude, so that until it has been definitively 
 settled whether coal does or does not exist in Kumaon the eventual 
 absolute success of these Kumaon mines must remain problematical. 1 
 The increase of railways in Northern India and the development of 
 the resources of this province must sooner or later press these diffi- 
 culties into notice, and they will then obtain a final solution. “ Too 
 much has been written and too little done” hitherto in this direction. 
 
 In reviewing the causes of the poor returns from the different 
 
 Causes of present poor mines, one that presses itself into notice on 
 
 returns. the most cursory inquiry is the comparative 
 
 ‘ 1 For the materials for this note I am indebted to the office of the Com- 
 
 missioner of Kumaon and a note drawn up by Sir - Henry Ramsay, than whom 
 the Company and Kumaon has no more warm well-wisher. ' 
 
 34 
 
266 
 
 HIM/LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 inaccessibility of the principal mines. The copper mines of Sira and 
 Gangoli, equally with Pokhri and Dhanpur, are situated on high 
 cliffs in the interior. The talcose and calcareous formations in 
 which the ores are found occupy the high precipitous mountains 
 which build up the outlying spurs of the principal range, and some 
 lie within it. This chain itself is metalliferous, as the lead mines at 
 Ghirti between Milam and Nfti, the copper indications at Tola and 
 elsewhere in the Juhar country, and the copper and iron mines at 
 Polar near Pudrnath combine to show. The absence of coal and the 
 increasing cost of wood fuel, with the distance it has to be carried 
 when the forests near the mines have been exhausted, materially 
 enhances the cost of production, while the difficulties of carriage in 
 the tracts where the mines lie are often such as almost to preclude 
 the transport of ore for smelting, and the forests in the neighbour- 
 hood of most mines only suffice for the most moderate requirements. 
 Another difficulty is the want of labourers. The present work- 
 men only come to work in the mines from the latter end of 
 October to the beginning of April, and many of the less pro- 
 ductive mines have been abandoned owing to the miner class 
 turning to agriculture and to supplying the labour market at 
 Ranikhet and Naim Tal. This want, however, could be supplied 
 from Nepal were regular wages and constant employment once 
 established. Sea-borne copper, though inferior to native copper, is 
 fi om its cheapness piefeired, and until capital is invested in opening up 
 the larger mines and conducting the whole operations on a sufficiently 
 large scale to warrant the permanent investment of capital in 
 machinery and proper furnaces, and other appliances for the more 
 economical working of the ore, mining enterprise must remain as it 
 is — a practical failure in this province. It may be said that these 
 extended experiments have already been tried in the case of the 
 Kumaon iron works, but this remark will scarcely apply, as that is 
 another of those unsatisfactory operations which stopped just at the 
 point where further progress would have decided the question for or 
 against the possibility of making mining speculation a remunerative 
 one in Kumaon. I shall now briefly describe the mode of working 
 and the financial results of the settlements of the revenue from 
 
 mines from the official reports and papers before describing each 
 mine. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 267 
 
 Mode of excavation. 
 
 The mode of working the mines is the same in Garhwal and 
 
 Kumaon, and the suggestions for its improve- 
 Mode of mining. m ent will serve for all classes of minerals. A 
 
 gallery or passage is cut in the face of the hill with such slight 
 declivity outwards as is sufficient to carry off the water. These 
 adits have more of the nature of burrows than that of the shafts known 
 in European mining. The section is always small, and in those parts 
 where the hardness of the rock occasions any difficulty in working the 
 passage is scarcely sufficient to admit of a person in a creeping posture. 
 In no place will it allow of an erect position. Where necessary, 
 frames of timber formed of unsawn branches of trees, rudely and 
 even carelessly constructed, are set up to support the roof and sides. 
 Accidents are therefore not uncommon, and the frequently falling 
 in of the mines is one result of these imperfect protections . 1 
 
 The ore as well as the rock is excavated by a very different 
 
 kind of pickaxe, the handle being made of 
 a piece of wood with a knob at one end, into 
 which a piece of hard iron is thrust and sharpened at the point. 
 This with a miserable iron hammer, wedge, and crowbar, constitutes 
 all the apparatus that the native miner has to depend upon. It is 
 plain that with such tools no hard rocks can be penetrated nor can 
 the softer ones be worked with much facility, and to this fact may 
 be attributed the universal smallness of the passages throughout the 
 mines, as the native miner can have his passage no larger than the 
 rock which encloses the ore and its matrix will admit of. Proper 
 pickaxes and steel gads (wedges) should therefore be substituted 
 instead of the inefficient tools in use, and when blasting may be 
 required the necessary materials should be provided. The miners 
 work during the day, using torches made of dry pine, and clear 
 out on an average from ten to twelve maunds of ore. 
 
 The ore is removed from the mine by boys, who pick up the 
 
 stuff with their hands and put it into skins, 
 Removing the oie. which they drag along the floor by means of a 
 
 rope and cross handle attached to their neck to the entrance of the 
 mine. In most mines the greater part of this work must be done in 
 a creeping posture, the string from the skin being fastened around 
 the waist of the dragger. In place of this method wheel-barrows 
 i Paras. 19, 20, Captain Herbert’s report, already quoted. 
 
268 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 or sledges on four wheels and shovels should be used when the 
 passages are enlarged and properly supported with sawn timber. 
 
 The ore or dhun being delivered at the mouth of the mine is 
 
 Crushing the ore. reduced to a small size either by the water- 
 
 mill or by the manual labour of women. A 
 large stone is placed on the ground on which they lay the ores ; they 
 then, either with a stone or a large hammer, and more frequently 
 the former, proceed to pulverize the ore and pick out the im- 
 purities. In this way a woman may manage one to two maunds 
 (821b avd.) a day, according to the hardness of the ores. In Corn- 
 wall a woman will pulverize from 10 to 15 cwt. per day, according, 
 as in the former case, to the nature of the ores. The method 
 m practice there is, first, to dispense with the picking ; secondly, 
 to have the ores elevated, so as to enable the individual to stand 
 while working, and to have a plate of iron about a foot square and 
 two inches thick on which the ores are broken with a broad flat 
 hammer. The impurities are then finally separated by a peculiar 
 mode of dressing the ores with a sieve, by which a boy gets through 
 with from one and a half to two tons per day. The ores are 
 conveyed to the women, and from them to the boys by a man who 
 attends for that purpose. 
 
 The washing of the ore in Kumaon also is performed by women, 
 
 Cleaning the ore. w stuff in baskets from the 
 
 entrance of the mine to a stream, where they 
 contrive by dabbling it with their hands to wash off the mud and 
 finer particles of the earth. They then proceed to pick out all 
 the pieces of ore they can get hold of; or, in the case of what 
 may be submitted to the water in a commuted state, they work 
 this against the stream, so as to gather it clean at the head of a 
 small pit by handfuls ; but, from the bad construction of the pits 
 it is with difficulty that this is performed. After picking up any 
 larger P leces of ore which may have gone back with the stream 
 they scoop out the refuse with their hands, and then proceed with 
 another charge. In Cornwall, one woman provided with a wheel- 
 barrow and shovel for the conveying and washing of the ores and 
 a boy with a sieve for dressing them, as formerly mentioned, would 
 accomplish a task equal to that of ten women on the system 
 
 rl nari J 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 269 
 
 The drainage of the mine is managed in a proper manner by 
 
 an adit. But whenever any attempt is 
 Drainage. niac l e to go below it, as is the case in most 
 
 if not all of the mines, the water is then raised in wooden buckets, 
 handed from one man to another until they reach the adit into 
 which they are emptied. In this manner six, ten, or even more 
 men may be employed, whilst only an inferior number can be spared 
 for excavating the ores. At the Sira mine, for instance, six men 
 were found constantly engaged in lifting up the water, and there 
 were only two at the ores : the work done by these six men could 
 be effected with a hand-pump by one man ; but in order to keep 
 the pump constantly going, two men might be required, and the 
 remaining four added to the number of those who are excavating. 
 
 The furnace of the Dhcinauriya or smelter is very simple, and is 
 
 made of common stone and clay faced with 
 Smelting the oie. s l a bs of quartzose schist, luted with a com- 
 
 post of chaff and clay. It is about 3%' long by i\' broad, with an 
 ash-pit about six inches square, all of which are built inside a house 
 about 12' by 14', of which the roof is composed of planks. (Figs. 
 A.. B.) The operation of smelting takes about 28 1 hours, during 
 
 Fig. A.- Kiimatjro j'umcu'^ 
 
 /T| 
 
 //h 
 
 I 
 
 I! 
 
 FFf. B.- Vr-rtiml Section,^ from; thejrovF 
 
 Sill!®®! 
 
 JL 
 
 
 Mill II III 
 
270 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 which time the fire is kept up, and after that the facing slabs and 
 luting require renewal. The implements used are a crowbar, poker, 
 shovel, and a pair of buffalo hides, dressed whole, to form the 
 bellows, the neck of which forms the nozzle, and the buttock the 
 valve for the ingress of air. The hides for making them are 
 worth Its. 12 apiece. 1 The furnace being freshly luted, the ash-pit 
 is filled with charcoal dust and chaff, and a fire being lit, six 
 baskets of iron ore, each containing about thirty sers (the ser = 2Ib. 
 2oz. avd.), are placed round the fire. The blast is then commenced, 
 one bellows being inflated while the other is undergoing depletion. 
 In about half an hour the slag commences to flow from the floss- 
 hole, which is kept open by a poker. In about two hours more, 
 theory having subsided considerably, two more baskets of ore and 
 a corresponding supply of charcoal is given with a new luting 
 for the bellows nozzle. In another two hours, this having also 
 subsided, the charge is deemed ready. The fire is then raked 
 out through the flosshole, and the charge, consisting of a pasty 
 mass called phalka or jhauj, is shoved out with a crowbar by the 
 smelter. The same operation is repeated until seven blooms 
 are obtained, consuming thirty-eight baskets of ore, thirty-one 
 of which are converted into the seven blooms, and the remainder, 
 comprising the partially roasted ore, become the property of the 
 smelter. The charcoal consumed weighs 340 sers, or a little more 
 than the seven blooms, which weigh 327 sers, or about one-third 
 of the ore expended (930 sers). Each bloom consists of three 
 qualities of metal, all intermixed with earthy particles. These are 
 kept separate, and are broken into small pieces before being sent 
 to the khatauniya or refiner. 
 
 The furnace of the refiner is smaller than that of the smelter, 
 
 and the implements required are a pincers. 
 
 Refining the ore. 
 
 poker, two or three sledge-hammers, an 
 anvil, and bellows. The fire being lit, a mixture of one-sixth of 
 first quality, one-sixth of second quality, and the remaining two- 
 thirds of third quality, in all about six sers of bloom metal, is 
 placed on the hearth opposite the bellows, with the larger pieces 
 nearest the fire. The blast having commenced, in a quarter of an 
 hour the slag begins to flow, and in another quarter of an hour the 
 1 Beckett, III., Sel. Rec., N.-W.P., 25. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 271 
 
 metal (now a porous, pasty mass) is taken out ot the fire and 
 subjected to the blows of two or more sledge-hammers ; the blows 
 being slight at first, to prevent the metal flying into pieces, hut 
 as it becomes more solid, they are given with the full force of 
 the workmen. Meanwhile a fresh supply of bloom-metal is placed 
 on the hearth, as at first. The hammered mass, after several 
 hammerings, assumes the shape of a small bar, weighing one and 
 a quarter ser ; it is thick in the middle and tapering to either 
 extremity, and six sers of charcoal have been used in its formation. 
 This bar is now fit for the market, and is called by the workmen 
 pjiala , but by the plains-people pain. The charcoal used by the 
 refiner is made from the dry trunks of fir trees which have been 
 felled for two or more years, while that made use of by the smelter 
 is made from small green wood. The refiner class is subdivided 
 into another, called Bhadeliya, who, instead of making the iron into 
 bars, manufacture it at once into cooking utensils. Nine hundred 
 and thirty sers of ore produce 327 sers of bloom-metal, which in its 
 turn produce 82 sers of marketable bar-iron, or only 8*8 per cent. 
 The bloom operation consumes 340 sers of charcoal and the refining 
 process 667 sers, so that for every ser of iron produced 8*2 sers of 
 charcoal are consumed. The Swedish furnace only consumes l'oo 
 times the weight of the iron produced. 
 
 The mines are leased for a term of years to contractors for a 
 
 Division of profits. 
 
 certain sum, and the lessee collects for the 
 season from the different classes of workmen 
 at the following rates : from each son or miner Its. 2^ ; from each 
 gang of smelters Rs. 4£ ; from refiners of the Khatauniya class 
 Rs. 4£, and from those of the Bhadeliya class Rs. 6. The miner is 
 originally sole proprietor of the ore, which he takes to the smelter 
 to reduce into blooms, giving him for his trouble one basket of ore 
 (30 sers) and one basket of charcoal (5 sers) for each bloom turned 
 out; also for each set of seven blooms 16 sers of grain, and food for 
 one man for four days ; and at the end of the season a suit of clothes. 
 Sometimes, however, owing to the smelter being largely in debt to 
 the miner, he does not receive any charcoal from him. The smelter 
 can only work for certain miners, generally five in number, not 
 being allowed to work for any other miners ; or, in other words, 
 each party of five miners employ one family of smelters exclusively. 
 
272 
 
 HIMALAYAN' DISTRICTS 
 
 Each party of smelters must consist of at least five persons, but 
 they generally count eight to ten persons. The share of each party 
 of refiners is one half of the bloom-metal made over to them to 
 refine, no further remuneration being allowed them. Refiners, 
 unlike the smelters, are not bound to work for any particular 
 peison, but may work for any one that chooses to patronize them. 
 
 In the roasting and smelting of the ore Captain Herbert 
 Improvement needed in recommends a system of reverberatory fur- 
 appiiances. naces for these two different processes. An 
 
 excellent material is at hand in the indurated talc known as potstone, 
 which, though soft, is infusible. The simple blast furnace in use in 
 Chili would also be an improvement. It is of a circular shape, 
 similar to a lime-kiln, covered with a dome to confine and concen- 
 
 CMli furnace. ^ ra ^ e ^ ea ^- The ore is arranged in it in 
 
 alternate layers with the fuel, which is wood, 
 and being lighted it continues burning for a considerable time! 
 II hen required, the heat is urged by a double pair of bellows 
 worked by a crank turned by a water-mill. 
 
 The methods of reduction practised in England, where the 
 English system. subject is best understood, vary with the ore, 
 
 an d even with the establishment. But the 
 differences are trifling and only affect the minor details. The two 
 great objects to be effected are, first, by a proper calcining heat to 
 drive off the volatile ingredients sulphur and arsenic, and to oxidate 
 the iron, thereby promoting the fusibility of the ore and consequent 
 separation of the metal from the scoria when in fusion; and, 
 secondly, by an intense and properly continued fusing heat to effect 
 the vitrification of all the impurities which thus form a slag at the 
 top and are skimmed off while the metal sinks down in a compara- 
 tively pure state. To promote this vitrification of the ingredients 
 occasional additions are made to the ore as the case may seem to 
 require, though in general the run of the ores is such as to require 
 little beyond a few slags of an old smelting. The operations of roastin g 
 and smelting are repeated several times, each smelting being followed 
 by a roasting, to expedite which effect in the case of copper the ore is, 
 after each smelting but the last, let into water to be granulated. This 
 separation of the metal into such small parts assists the calcining 
 power of the furnace, and the work is more speedily effected than if 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 273 
 
 performed on tlie mass. After the last smelting comes the process 
 of refining or poling, which consists in keeping the copper in a 
 melted state covered with charcoal, and introducing from time to 
 time a wooden pole into the melted mass to produce the evolution 
 of o-aseous matters. Lead is sometimes used both in Hungary and 
 England to expedite the previous operations of the refinery. The 
 oxides of this metal are amongst the most powerful verifiers known. 
 As such they are effectual in the assay and refinery of the precious 
 metals, and as such they may be also used with copper. But the 
 process requires attention, for if not stopped in time, or if too much 
 lead he added, the copper itself will be oxidated and vitrified. 
 
 The process of manufacturing iron from the ores is different 
 from that of copper, inasmuch as none but the oxides or carbonated 
 oxides of the former metal are ever employed. In the copper ores, 
 that is in those which occur in any quantity, the metal is combined 
 with sulphur, which can only be driven oft' by repeated roastings. 
 In the iron ores the metal is united to oxygen and mixed with 
 various earthy impurities. In reducing these ores, then, there are 
 three distinct points to be attended to : first, the provision of a 
 substance which shall effectually take the oxygen from the ore, 
 leaving the metal mixed only with its earthy constituents ; second, 
 the proportioning the flux used to those earthy ingredients so as to 
 insure a complete vitrification of them and separation from the 
 metallic particles; and third, a sufficient heat to fuse the latter, that 
 the separation and reduction may be more complete. The fiist 
 point is attained by using a sufficient quantity of charcoal in the 
 reduction of the ores ; the second by adding, as the ore may lequiie 
 it, limestone or other flux ; and the third point is only to be effected 
 by using a powerful blast furnace. 
 
 It is not easy to give the outturn from the mines, the arrange- 
 ments are so intricate and the returns so 
 ’ imperfect. In 1868 about 29 maunds of 
 
 copper were raised from the Kumaon mines, and in 1869 the same 
 mines yielded the same amount, of which 21 maunds were exported. 
 The Dhanpur mines in Grarhwal yielded 10 maunds of copper in 
 1869, but every year since the produce has decreased. In 1868 tie 
 Kumaon iron mines yielded about 2,000 maunds of metal, and the 
 Garhwal mines about 1,752 maunds, while the returns of 1869 give 
 
 35 
 
274 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 5,153 raannds for Kumaon and 529 maunds for Garhwal. Besides 
 tliis an immense quantity of copper is imported into Kumaon in the 
 shape of manufactured vessels for culinary purposes : about 2,000 
 maunds of iron also are imported from the plains against 155 
 maunds exported. No reliance can be placed upon the estimates of 
 outturn in recent years, as the mines have been leased for a term of 
 years, and the lessees are not inclined to have their affairs too closely 
 examined. 
 
 Previous to the Gorkhali conquest of Garhwal the copper mines 
 
 Financial result, of the ° f NA « >Ur are Snid to ha ™ R»- 8,000 
 
 settlement of the revenue Gk. a year, or about Its. 3,800 of our 
 derived from minerals. ™ 
 
 money. Hie entire mineral revenue of 
 
 Kumaon and Garhwal, including mint dues 1 on the coinage of copper 
 pice, had fallen in 1812 to Its. 4,800 Gk., equivalent to Bs. 3,600 
 British currency. 1 This was mainly due to the neglect of the 
 Gorkhali Government, under which the mines had fallen in and 
 become choked with rubbish. Their suspicious policy prevented 
 them from trusting their own officers, whilst their want of probity 
 precluded any private person from venturing to sink the capital 
 necessary to re-open the mines. In 1815 the Nagpur mines were 
 leased for Rs. 10, and in the following year for Rs. 15, and with the 
 villages attached to them seldom brought in more than Rs. 1,850 a 
 year, whilst those in Kumaon were leased at Rs. 850 a year. Up 
 to the year 1826 the revenue of the Kumaon mines was included 
 in the assessment of pargana Ramgarh, and that of the Garhwal 
 mines in pargana Uhanpur, and subsequently was accounted for in 
 the returns of the pargana within which they are actually situated. 
 Between the years 1815 and 1840 the revenue derived from mines 
 
 averaged as follows : — 
 
 
 Kumaon. 
 
 Garhwal. 
 
 Total. 
 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Copper ... 
 
 ... 801 
 
 2,086 
 
 2,887 
 
 Iron 
 
 ... 1,905 
 
 226 
 
 2,131 
 
 
 2,706 
 
 2,312 
 
 5,018 
 
 The highest mineral revenue of the province for any one year 
 amounted to Rs. 5,417. This return was not altogether due to the 
 
 . 1 The f e mint dues were collected for a few years under British rule at the 
 mines of Dhanpur and Gangoli, and at one-half per cent, yielded a revenue of 
 Rs. 300 a year. To Board, dated 6th August, 1821. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 275 
 
 smelting of ore, and included the land revenue of villages attached 
 to the mines for the location and support of labourers. Mr. Beckett 
 in his report 1 on the settlement of Ghirhwal gives the revenue of each 
 mine from 1839-40 to 1863-64. The revenue every fifth year from 
 each class of mine during this period was as follows : — 
 
 Class of 
 mine. 
 
 1839-40. 
 
 1844-45. 
 
 1849-50. 
 
 1S54-55. 
 
 1859-60. 
 
 1863-64. 
 
 Total 
 
 revenue from 
 1838-39 to 
 1863-64. 
 
 Iron 
 
 Copper ... 
 Lead 
 
 Rs. 
 
 609 
 
 1,990 
 
 Rs. 
 
 727 
 
 2,442 
 
 5 
 
 Rs. 
 
 779 
 
 2,138 
 
 S 
 
 Rs. 
 
 430 
 
 1,305 
 
 3 
 
 Rs. 
 
 272 
 
 81 
 
 Rs. 
 
 134 
 
 627 
 
 10 
 
 Rs. 
 
 3,764 
 
 21,304 
 
 64 
 
 Total ... 
 
 2,599 
 
 3,174 
 
 2,920 
 
 1,738 
 
 353 
 
 771 
 
 25,132 
 
 N u m ber 
 of mines 
 worked, 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 23 
 
 17 
 
 11 
 
 30 
 
 76 
 
 In 1865 there were 24 iron, 9 copper, and 2 lead mines worked 
 in Ghirhwal, and 33 iron, 35 copper, and 3 lead mines had been 
 abandoned. The lead mines have since been abandoned, and the 
 revenue from copper and iron mines in 1878-79 was as follows: — 
 
 
 Copper. 
 
 Iron. 
 
 Total. 
 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 1878 
 
 ... 86 8 0 
 
 136 12 0 
 
 223 4 0 
 
 1879 
 
 ... 89 0 0 
 
 153 8 0 
 
 242 8 0 
 
 There are no statistics of outturn for these years. 
 
 In his Kumaon settlement report Mr. Beckett gives the revenue 
 of each mine from the year lb44-4o to the year 1872-/3. The 
 revenue every fifth year from each class of mine during this period 
 was as follows : — 
 
 Class of 
 mine. 
 
 1848-49. 
 
 1853-54. 
 
 1858-59. 
 
 1863-64. 
 
 1868-69. 
 
 1872-73. 
 
 Total 
 
 revenue from 
 1848-49 to 
 1872-73. 
 
 Copper .. 
 Iron 
 
 Rs. 
 
 100 
 
 2,274 
 
 Rs. 
 
 48 
 
 1,751 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Nil. 
 
 1,532 
 
 Rs. 
 
 120 
 
 870 
 
 Rs. 
 
 67 
 
 929 
 
 Rs. 
 
 30 
 
 1,420 
 
 Rs. 
 
 2,831 
 
 46,126 
 
 v Total 
 
 2,374 
 
 1,799 
 
 1,532 
 
 990 
 
 996 
 
 1,450 
 
 48,957 
 
 •Allahabad, 1866. 
 
276 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The following quotation from the Commissioner’s report in 1874 
 gives the opinion of those best acquainted with the subject on the 
 future of the mining industry in Kumaon Iron and copper 
 abound, but at the present value of labour the mines are worth very 
 little. The sons or miners have, as a rule, given up their old trade 
 and taken to contracts. The great attraction to miners in former 
 times was the cheapness of grain in the Khetsari valley, where iron 
 was most extensively manufactured. This advantage no longer 
 exists, for the market at Ranikhet has doubled the price of grain, 
 and the miners would be no longer content to exchange their labour 
 for the small profits on iron. Copper mines are in no greater 
 favour. Formerly some villages where the miners reside were 
 included in the mining leases of Kumaon and Garhwal. These 
 villages have been settled with the miners, therefore they are no 
 longer servants of the contractor. Tea gardens and other labour 
 markets offer much better terms than a contractor, who, at the least 
 possible expenditure, tries to make the greatest possible profit. 
 These contractors know nothing about the science of mining, and 
 they have no money to expend in penetrating beyond the worked- 
 out galleries. In fact the mines have collapsed, and without consi- 
 derable outlay no reasonable profit can be expected. Labour is 
 expensive, and English copper can be bought at a cheaper rate in 
 the Ahnora bazar than the local miners can produce it with profit. 
 
 I expect nothing more from native petty contractors than a pittance 
 which they can realize by the resident miners working when 
 convenient to themselves, when they give half of the ore to the 
 contractors and keep the other half. No doubt there is abundance 
 of copper in Gangoli ; but any mines, copper or iron, that are now 
 worked barely produce sufficient for local consumption. Agricul- 
 tural instruments are made for the people of the surrounding 
 country, and a few copper vessels ; but all the mines in the interior 
 are m remote places, and too far removed from a good market to be 
 of much value.” 
 
 The gold exported from Kumaon is either obtained from the 
 Gold. streams within the province, or is brought 
 
 doAvn by the Bhotiya traders from Tibet. 
 Although no mine of this metal has been discovered in the province' 
 there are indications of its existence in Garhwal. The sands of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 277 
 
 Alaknanda, Pindar, and Sona furnish a small amount of gold-dust. 
 The Ganges also is auriferous as far as Lachhman Jhiila, and the 
 Ramganga for a short distance below its junction with the Sona. 
 The washing is nowhere a profitable occupation, and scarcely gives 
 an average of four annas a day for each workman. The gold 
 obtained by washing the sands of rivers paid a small duty during 
 the Gorkliali rule, and was leased with the forest duties for a short 
 time after the British occupation, but the amount was too tiifling to 
 render its continuance expedient, and it was accordingly abolished 
 by Mr. Traill. Undoubtedly a greater return might be had from 
 this source by the use of mercury, as in Australia, for the purpose 
 of separating the gold from the sand; for as this is afterwards 
 recovered by a simple process of distillation, the expense would be 
 very little more than it now is. Captain Herbert found gold in a 
 
 Tibetan gold mines. 
 
 matrix of granite near the Alaknanda. 
 
 The gold imported from Tibet by traders is chiefly taken in 
 
 exchange for grain or cloth to balance their 
 accounts, as rupees are taken by them at 
 the hill fairs for the same purpose. The principal gold mines in 
 Tibet, sdr-ckaJca , are ten days’ journey beyond the borax fields 
 further north and north-east in a district otherwise uninhabitable, 
 named Sdr-bachydd. These are farmed or managed by a sdr-pan or 
 gold commissioner on a triennial contract direct from Lhassa. The 
 lessee in 1845 was also Garpan Urku-wa at Gartoh, and paid 
 Rs. 17,000 per annum for the lease. He had 170 miners at work, 
 for whose subsistence he used to send supplies from Pruang. It 
 
 would also appear to be sometimes the custom to sublet £ claims at 
 a tax of a sdrjao or jao of gold, about 7* mashas, or ten rupees. 1 
 The gold mines are worked by pits and shafts under ground, where 
 the gold is found in its pure native state, and undergoes no other 
 process than washing and shifting, and after that requires little or 
 no refining. In this state, tied up in little bags called sdr-shu (H. 
 phatang), weighing about 90 grains, it forms the heavy currency of 
 the country. A superstitious belief holds ground that no large 
 nugget should be removed, as it belongs to the genii ot the place, 
 bu^ the Lama of Gnari is said to have one weighing nearly a ser. 
 
 > II. Strachey, J. A. S. Ben., XVIII. (2), 5 ; J. D. Cunningham, ibid, XIII, ; 
 Herbert to Commissioner of Kumaon, l'Jth January, 182(3. 
 
278 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Gold is sold at the same fairs as the borax, and is imported to the 
 value of about Its. 10 to 12,000 annually. 
 
 The gold in the bags commonly current has usually not more 
 
 Thok JaJang mines. th ™ 7 ' 73 S P edfic 8 Tavit 7- Even the F cked 
 
 yellow grains have only a specific gravity 
 
 of 11-96, showing that they are alloyed with some other metal. 
 The grosser impurities appear to consist of iron more or less 
 oxidised. One of Montgomery’s pandits visited the gold mines 
 oi Thok Jalang in Hob toll in 186 7, 1 and describes it as a great 
 excavation from 10 to 200 paces in width and 25 feet in depth, 
 access to the bottom being by means of steps and slopes, 
 the eaith dug out being thrown on either side. The dixiafino' 
 is caiiied on with a long-handled kind of spade or an iron 
 hoe, the iron tor which conies from Tadak. A very small stream 
 runs through the gold field, and the bottom is consequently 
 a quagmire during the daytime. The diggers dam up the 
 water, leaving a sloping channel for an escape. A cloth is then 
 spiead at the bottom of this channel, and the channel is sup- 
 plied by one man with the auriferous earth, and another gives 
 water, so that the gold sinks to the bottom and is caught in 
 the cloth at the end. Some nuggets weigh up to two pounds. 
 The diggeis come from the Tsang province round Shigatze or 
 Digarcha. There are numbers of abandoned gold fields in different 
 dilections about Thok Jalang, and probably a whole series of them 
 from Rolitoh to Lhassa. The Sarpan levies a tax of about half a tola 
 ( saishu ), or two-fifths of an ounce, from each digger. There is no 
 wood, and water can only be had from melted ice. A cold wind blows 
 at all seasons, and, in consequence, the tents of the dio-o- e rs are 
 pitched, m excavations in the ground to protect them from this 
 wind. The dried dung of yaks, ponies, and sheep afford fuel. 
 The Tibetans cook and eat three times a day, their food consisting 
 chiefly of boiled meat, barley cakes, buttermilk, and tea stewed 
 with butter : they also smoke a great deal. They always sleep with 
 their knees close up to the head and rest on the knees and 
 elbows, huddling all the clothing on to their backs. The price of 
 gold at Thok Jalang was about 5^ to 6 rupees per saishu , or JO 
 rupees per ounce. 
 
 1 Rec.,G. I., H. D., 3ti. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 279 
 
 ■Silvei\ 
 
 Silver was brought down to these provinces from Tibet 
 
 in former times. It was imported into 
 that country from those surrounding it 
 (probably China), and does not seem to be found in Tibet itself 
 in any quantity. It was sent into Tibet in a crude state in 
 lumps called doja or thaka, of a general value of Rs. 165 each. 
 Importations from that source have ceased for some time, owing 
 possibly to the great and growing influx of silver in the shape 
 of rupees from British territory. Formerly all borax, salt, &c., 
 was bartered for grain, cloth, &c., but now, while a large amount 
 is still disposed of in that way (probably to procure actual 
 necessaries), still, whether it proceed from the increase of trade 
 and the portability of coin for hoarding purposes, or from the 
 existence of a greater demand for silver in Tibet, by far the 
 lar crest amount of borax is disposed of here for British money. 
 The Bhotiyas, too, state that our coin is largely current in Gartoli 
 and the other large towns, and is preferred by the inhabitants 
 there to the coinage of other countries. They ask for the Che - 
 hardddr Rupaija, or face-printed money. 1 The difference in the 
 exchange now made up in Government rupees cannot be less 
 than' eighty thousand to one lakh of rupees per annum. This 
 trade in rupees dates from about 1820, when they began to dis- 
 place the Srinagari and Ladaki rupees. 
 
 The mines of copper in Kumaon and Garhwal have never been 
 
 of much practical value either as a source 
 Copper mines. su pply for local consumption or as 
 
 offering a valuable return to labour and capital. They are still, 
 however, deserving of notice, and we shall now describe each in 
 succession, commencing with the Gangoli mines m Kumaon. 
 
 The Rai mine in pargana Gangoli is the most important in 
 
 Kumaon. The ore is chiefly pyrites in a 
 Rai mine. matrix of indurated and sometimes slaty 
 
 talcose and steatitic schists inclosed in dolomite. In some places 
 the one, and in some places the other, forms the roof and sides of 
 the mine. The dolomite has a large crystalline grain and great 
 tenacity, and forms a perfectly durable work when excavated. The 
 schists when massive may be depended on, and can be easily worked, 
 
 1 Lawder in Rec. Geol. Sur. 
 
280 
 
 htma'layan districts 
 
 but, as a rule, they occur of such inferior consistence, having 
 much the appearance of re-united debris, that they require support, 
 and often occasion much inconvenience and even danger. The ore 
 occurs in the schists in numerous strings, having every appearance 
 of being leaders, as they are called, to solid ore, and forming a dis- 
 tinct lode. The strike or direction of the strata is nearly W.-N.-W. 
 to E.-S.-E., dipping at an angle of about 45° to the N.-N.-E. The 
 copper ore is accompanied by iron pyrites which are occasionally 
 found in the pentagonal dodecahedron form, but most commonly in 
 such irregular and anomalous forms as can with difficulty be 
 described. There are a few specimens of grey copper, but the work- 
 ing ore is undoubtedly pyrites. On visiting the mine in 1836, 
 Captain Drummond found the lode about two feet wide, containino- 
 a good yellow copper ore, but with a large proportion of its matrix 
 talcose, twenty per cent, only being metalliferous. The ore is 
 extracted in the usual way by means of drifts slightly inclining 
 upwards, to allow for drainage. The adit at Captain Drummond’s 
 visit was driven on the course of one of the lodes which continues 
 west about 60 feet, when it falls in with another lode that alters its 
 direction to 15,° and afterwards to 30° north, inclining nearly 50° to 
 the east of north. At that time the adit had penetrated some 348 
 feet from the entrance. The ore had been taken away from beneath 
 as far as the miners could excavate it, and the hollow had been filled 
 up with rubbish. From above, too, the ore was taken away as far 
 as it was found productive. The passage varied from two to four 
 feet in height and from two to two and a half feet in width, beino- 
 bounded by the hard dolomitic rock which the miners did not 
 
 know how to remove. In 1868-69 these mines fell in and became 
 flooded with water. About a couple of hundred yards to the north, 
 and in the same hill, is another similar deposit of copper. This 
 used to be laid open to the surface during the rainy season, and was 
 then allowed to fall in, so soon as the water employed by the miners 
 to carry off the talcose mud from the ore ceased to be plentiful. 
 This also has ceased to be worked for some time. 
 
 In 1815 one specimen of fused copper from the Grangoli mine 
 
 Ore assayed. anc ^ several specimens of the ore in matrix 
 
 were sent to the Mint at Calcutta for assay. 
 The report showed that the ore was mixed with arsenic and sulphur, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 281 
 
 and produced 25 per cent, of malleable metal, but the specimens were 
 too small to allow of any exhaustive examination of them. 1 In 1826 
 Captain Herbert valued the outturn at 35 per cent, of the pure ore, 
 and in 1836 Captain Drummond gave the general result from the 
 pyrites in their perfectly pure state as about 30 per cent, of metallic 
 copper. 2 Pyrites, though not a rich ore, is the most important of 
 any, from its abundance and from being generally more to be 
 depended on for continuance than the richer varieties. In England 
 more copper is obtained from it than from all the other ores 
 together. The Gangoli, Sira, and Sor mines were farmed from 
 the conquest until 1828, when they were leased for one year to the 
 miners, 3 and were again farmed at a reduced rent in 1833. In 
 1815 they yielded a revenue of Rs. 850, increased to Rs. 1,201 in 
 1819 and 1820, and to Rs. 1,215 in 1821 and 1822, but in 1874 
 the whole of the copper mines of Kumaon brought in a revenue 
 
 of only Rs. 30 a year. 
 
 The Sira mines in Patti Barabisi in pargana Sira are situated 
 
 on the northern side of a hill somewhat 
 Sira mines. higher than the one at Rai. The ore here 
 
 O 
 
 too consists of copper pyrites, accompanied by iron pyrites in a 
 
 gangue formed of dolomitie and talcose rocks. In 1816, a specimen 
 of copper ore from the Sira mine was sent to the Mint at Calcutta 
 for assay, with the result that it was found to contain only 24 per 
 cent, of malleable metal, so that it was thought that this mine would 
 not repay the working. 4 Captain Drummond found that nearly 
 thirty-three fathoms from the entrance the adit struck on a copper 
 lode on which a level passage was driven that continued westward, 
 its course being about 10° south of west, and the dip northeily 
 from 45° to 50°. The ore Avas harder and more mixed with iron 
 pyrites than the ore at Rai. At the end of the level a second lode 
 yielding a poor ore was met, and beyond it a pit Avas sunk which 
 seemed to have yielded in former times fair returns. 
 
 The Gaul mine in Patti Kharahi and the Sor Gurang are simi- 
 
 Gaul : Sor Gurang. 
 
 larly situated, but the ore produced is in 
 very small quantities, consisting of grey 
 
 1 To Government, dated 14tli June, 1815. From 
 January, 1816. 2 See further Stat. Kum, p. 3o9 
 
 9 To Board, dated 2nd January, 1829. •'from 
 
 Jauuary, 1816. 
 
 Government, dated 13th 
 : J. A. S. Ben., VII., 935. 
 Government, dated 1 3th 
 
 36 
 
282 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Bournonite. 
 
 copper, copper pyrites, and carbonate of copper. Steatite and lime- 
 stone are the neighbouring rocks, the steatite forming the gangue. 
 The Sor mine had not been worked up to 1833, although a lease at 
 a small rental had been taken out in 1821. 1 Captain Herbert notices 
 that all these ores are free from the presence of arsenic, which, above 
 all other metals, deteriorates the quality of the copper and is most 
 difficult to remove. 
 
 In digging the foundation of a house at Hawalbagh the workmen 
 
 oo o o 
 
 came on a vessel containing three crystallized 
 specimens of bournonite, the triple sulplmret 
 of copper, antimony, and lead, and the only trace hitherto dis- 
 covered of its existence in these hills (1826). Copper pyrites 
 also exist near Ganai and Phadiali in Patti Athgaon in pargana 
 Gangoli ; at Bujul and Rathayat in Patti Bel in a matrix of steatite 
 and feldspar ; and at Tamba kan in Patti Gangoli in a matrix of tal- 
 cose rocks. There are small mines in Patti Giwar, at Chin ka Kali, 
 Beler, Sor, and at Kemakhet, on the east bank of the Ladhiya river 
 in Kali Kumaon. 
 
 The copper mines of British Garhwal are more extensive and 
 
 have always borne a higher reputation than 
 those of Kumaon. The principal are situ- 
 ated at Dhanpur and Dhobri in pargana Dewalgarh. These mines 
 yielded a considerable outturn in former times, but of late years 
 operations have not been so vigorously carried on, owing to the 
 intricacy of the workings, and the idea prevailing among the miners 
 that very little ore remains in the mines. 
 
 The Dhanpur mine is situated on the north side of a high and 
 
 ^ . precipitous range in compact dolomite. 2 The 
 
 Dhanpur mine. . r 
 
 ores are principally copper pyrites and grey 
 or vitreous copper ores, with the red oxide and green carbonate in 
 smaller quantities, the latter being scarce. The ores are found in a 
 bed about fifty to sixty feet wide, which runs nearly north and south, 
 and underlies east about one foot in the fathom. It is divided by a 
 bed of potstone or indurated talc, which runs through the copper 
 formation longitudinally, conforming to the strata and having a frith 
 
 1 To Board, dated 14th February, 1829. 2 Mr. Wilkin’s report, J A S, 
 
 Ben., XII., 454 ; Iteckenclorf’s report, ibid, XIV., 471 ; Captain Herbert to Com- 
 missioner, 10th January, 1826. 
 
 Copper mines of Garhwal. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 283 
 
 or ftukan on the western side. The seams of ore are sometimes one 
 foot in thickness, but seldom more than one inch. In his report on 
 Dhanpur, in 1816, Mr. Traill declared that these mines were inca- 
 pable of much improvement, and that the ore produced was not rich. 
 The lease of the mines, including the twenty-two villages attached to 
 supply the requisite labour and grow grain for the miners, was fixed 
 at Ids. 1,850 a year. Up to 1829 there was little improvement, as 
 the lessees were too poor to undertake the cleaning out of the mines, 
 and no capitalist would venture to take them. 1 In 1838, the best 
 seam or vein seen by Mr. Wilkin was not more than half an inch 
 thick, and in 1841 the best lode worked was about two inches. The 
 veins are very close together, and being softer than the matrix, the 
 ore used to he first removed, and then the miners burned the rock 
 with wood and threw water on it to facilitate removal. The red 
 dolomite is of such a consistence as to seldom require props for its 
 support, thus enabling the miners to dispense with wooden frame- 
 work and to work all the year round, while the situation of the mine 
 on the top of a hill admits of adits for drainage. The interior 
 consists of a network of chambers from end to end. 
 
 The Dhobri mine is situated on the south side of the Dhanpur 
 
 range in very nearly the same kind ot lock 
 Dhobri mine. as t q e Dhanpur mine, but in this mine most 
 
 of the veins are horizontal, running along the side of the hill. At 
 the surface they are very small, containing oxide of iron and green 
 stains of copper, and occasionally copper pyrites. . The present 
 working mine is not extended very far from the outside of the pre- 
 cipice or surface, the ores being much the same near the surface as 
 at a distance from it. When the miners find their passages grow- 
 ing long and tedious they begin outside on a new vein. There are 
 several old mines west of the Dhobri village ; one of them is very 
 extensive, and the ores seem to have been most abundant when the 
 horizontal vein was crossed by perpendicular ores ; but the whole of 
 the horizontal vein has been taken away. The most western of these 
 veins is said to have been very rich, but it fell in about the time the 
 Gorklialis entered the province, and has not been opened since. The 
 ores of these mines are principally copper pyrites, containing 25 pei 
 cent, of copper. There is water for machinery about a mile and a 
 1 To Government, dated 14th February, 1S29, 
 
284 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 half below the mine, and wood for all purposes near that place. 
 There is another mine on this range at Maulgiri, said to be in the 
 same rock as the Dhobri mine. There are other mines of both 
 copper and iron in Dhanpur, but few of them are worked, and they 
 are for the most part of little value. The mines were leased in 
 1872 to a European, but even then western intelligence and energy 
 could not make them a remunerative investment. There is a copper 
 mine in Patti Lobha at Agar Sera 1 in the face of a precipice on the 
 right bank of the Bamganga river which was leased in 1872 for three 
 rupees. The lessee, however, makes little profit, as the shafts have 
 been sunk so deep that men are afraid to enter them, and the rock is 
 too hard to allow of fresh shafts being driven, unless at great expense. 
 
 The Pokhri copper mines early attracted the attention of the 
 The Pokhri mines. Government of the country. For many 
 
 years they had been worked by the Garhwal 
 Bajas, and subsequently by the Gorkhalis. They consist of several 
 separate mines ; that known as the Chaumattiya is situated in talc 
 
 Chaumattiya mine. whlch rests 011 dolomitic limestone. The 
 
 lode after crossing the ridge east of the mine 
 enters a very compact basin, in which is situated the Duined mine. 
 This has not been worked much, owing to the softness of the 
 talc and the abundance of water, but it is said to have a o- 00 d 
 lode m one part of it. The lode then crosses the hill near Deothan 
 a small village above the mine, and is found near Giigli and 
 I eswara, where some ores have been extracted, but have never 
 proved very profitable in working. 3 
 
 16 Kaja s mine is sitl *ated about 450 yards north of the Chau- 
 Raja’s mine. mattiya mine in common dolomite which 
 
 rests on talcose schist. A shaft of 70 
 athoms was dug by the early workers meeting an adit which must 
 have been driven over 100 fathoms through dead ground. Several 
 other adds were driven, and when they fell together, about one 
 
 f, PL y 7 S T tll6re "' ere * hree P ]aces where copper was 
 un e Gaja Chauk, Kuvera Chauk, and Bhartwal Kua all of 
 
 which have now fallen in. The produce was about 300 sers of ore 
 " T Pei '' Tw °- t,,irds were claimed 
 
 sSnt in J. T' f 454, ’ % 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 285 
 
 by the Raja, and the remainder was left to the miners, who had also 
 grants of land free of revenue. The experiments of Mr. Wilkin 
 already noticed were confined to these two mines and a new 
 mine which he opened close by. In the new mine the lode was 
 very promising and yielded good specimens of ores near the surface, 
 but at a depth of fifteen fathoms it became poor, and was consequent- 
 ly abandoned. During the time the experiment lasted the expen- 
 diture on the Chaumattiya mine amounted to Rs. 2,847, and the 
 return in copper to Rs. 231, besides about three to four hundred 
 rupees worth of ore. Rs. 347 were expended on the Raja’s mine, 
 and the experiment was then abandoned, and the new mine 
 cost Rs. 246 before the operations were closed. The entire net 
 cost of the undertaking when operations ceased w r as for labour, in 
 working the mines, less sale proceeds of copper, Rs. 2,585, and for 
 European superintendence Rs. 4,800, or a total of Rs. 7,385. These 
 mines were then leased to a native contractor for Rs. 500 a year. 
 
 In addition to the three mines mentioned above there are several 
 others in the vicinity of Pokhri, some of which were worked by 
 the former rulers, and some again have never been opened. Mr. 
 Wilkin noticed the principal mines, and described them as follows: — • 
 
 The Rota mine is situated about two and a half miles north-west 
 
 of the Pokhri mines in talc, which rests on 
 dolomitic limestone. The lode is a bed of 
 yellow or buff-coloured talc, about four feet wide, dipping north- 
 west at 50° ; it rests immediately on the dolomite limestone, and 
 has a sulphuric effervescence on the surface. This mine is said to 
 have been rich ; it is situated on the western side of an extensive 
 basin or valley, on the eastern side of which ores have been turned 
 up by the plough, but no mine has been worked. This is an extensive 
 field for mining, as the lode may be productive throughout the basin 
 or valley. There is wood and water for all purposes near this mine. 
 
 The Thala mine is situated about a mile north-west of the Nota 
 
 mine, probably on the same lode, in an ex- 
 Thala mine. .... . . . . . „ 
 
 tensive plain or comparatively level surface. 
 
 It was first worked in 1810, and again in 1825, but there being no 
 
 good facility for adits, the water prevented its being worked to any 
 
 considerable depth. The miners who worked it state the ores to be 
 
286 
 
 IIIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 copper pyrites disseminated in a lode of two feet wide, one-fifth of 
 which was metalliferous. There is plenty of wood for all purposes 
 in the neighbourhood of this mine. 
 
 The I)anda mine is situated on the hill, about 500 yards above 
 
 the Thala mine, in chlorite slate and talc, 
 
 Danda mine. 
 
 which on the north-western side comes in 
 contact with common dolomite. This mine has been worked to a 
 considerable extent, and is said to have yielded Rs. 52,000 profit in 
 one year. The ores are of good quality, and found in three or four 
 different beds or holes which dip into the hill at an angle of 30°. 
 The chlorite slate in which the beds of talc and ores are found is so 
 hard as to stand without timber ; it also contains finely disseminated 
 copper in small quantity. The lodes run into a fine fall or basin 
 westward, in which Mr. Wilkin thought they would be found pro- 
 ductive. There is abundance of wood near this mine, but no water 
 for machinery nearer than the Thala mine. 
 
 The Talapungla mine is situated about a mile north-east of the 
 
 Danda mine in talc, which rests on dolomitic 
 Talapungla mme. limestone. The strata in which the ores are 
 
 found is about six fathoms wide, dipping south-west at various 
 angles. The bed is extensive, but the ores are scarce ; however, 
 this might improve at a distance from the surface. Ores have been 
 found in a precipice, east of this mine, near the village of Bangtal, 
 but at present the outcrop is covered with rubbish ; it is in the tal- 
 cose formation, and has good facilities for working. 
 
 The Kharna mine is situated in the ravine below Bangtal, near 
 
 its junction with the Nagal river in talc ; it 
 was discovered by the water of the ravine 
 washing away the strata, and leaving a quantity of ores exposed to 
 view ; these ores were taken away by the Pokhri miners and the 
 mine was worked five or six fathoms under the surface, beyond which 
 they were prevented from going by the water. They say that the lode 
 at the bottom of the mine for two fathoms in length is one foot wide, of 
 solid copper pyrites. Of late years nothing has been done at this mine 
 beyond washing among the surface layer, which contains a small 
 quantity of copper pyrites. There is plenty of wood in the neighbour- 
 hood of this mine and water for machinery, but no facility for adits. 
 
 Kliarua mine. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 287 
 
 Mr. Beckett has described the mode of mining and preparing the 
 ore of the Agar Sera 1 mine from which the following account has been 
 extracted. The gangue consists of white and yellow quartz much 
 encrusted with green carbonate of copper, and is so difficult to work 
 that not more than 40 to 601b. of ore can be excavated by one man 
 in a day. The workings are dry and the lode has a dip of about 30° 
 below the horizon with a north-westerly direction. The ore is 
 pounded and moistened with water and receives an admixture of five 
 parts in six of limestone as a flux. The charge, consisting of about 
 61b. of unmixed ore, takes about half an hour to melt and is placed 
 from time to time in handfuls on the furnace, and covered with oak 
 charcoal which is occasionally moistened with water. When the 
 fire falls in after the last supply of ore, the charge is ready to be 
 taken out. The door of the furnace is then taken away and the 
 remains of the fire being raked out, there appears at the bottom a 
 melted mass which, after being stirred about a minute or two to allow 
 the heavier particles to settle down, is sprinkled with water to harden 
 the surface. Three or four of these charges being taken away, the 
 melted copper is found at the bottom in a small mass weighing 
 about 2f ounces, for which twelve pounds of charcoal have been used. 
 Thus from every 100 parts of ore about 2 T Vths parts of copper are 
 procured, having consumed 200 parts of charcoal or, in other words, 
 1371b. of charcoal are required for the production of a little over 
 two pounds of pure copper, which sells at about one rupee a pound. 
 
 The iron ores found in Kumaon all belong to either of two varie- 
 ties, the rhomb ohedral or the prismatic. The 
 lion mines. first is a peroxide of iron containing in its 
 
 best defined type 70 per cent, of iron and 30 per cent, of oxygen. 
 The workable ore, however, often contains earthy impurities which 
 reduce the proportion so low as 50 per cent, of metal. This is the 
 common species. A variety of this, known as red haematite, also 
 occurs in many places, and frequently contains small grains of 
 specular iron ore of a highly splendent lustre. At B.amgaih it 
 passes into the variety known as scaly iron ore, consisting of loosely 
 cohering glimmering particles of a steel-grey or iron-black colour, 
 strongly soiling and feeling unctuous to the touch. Captain Heibeit 
 
 i See Sel. Rec., N.-W. P., III., N.S. p. 34, and Glean, in Science, I., 230 ; As. 
 Res. XVIII. (1), 227 (Herbert) ;_Traill and Batten, Statistics of Kumaon, Agra, 
 851. 
 
288 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 Kumaon mines. 
 
 considers these beds connected with those at Dhaniya Kot on the 
 Kosi. Both yield very good iron. The prismatic species or hydrated 
 peroxide is only known to occur in the Chaugarkha pargana. 
 
 The following are the principal iron mines in Kumaon. In Patti 
 
 Agar of the Ramgarh pargana, as noted, the 
 iron is of the species known as scaly, some- 
 what laminated in structure, slightly micaceous, and influencing the 
 magnetic needle. The names of the principal mines are the Lusgani, 
 Nathua Kan, Gulla and Satbunga mines, the last of which has a rich 
 haematite. In Patti Ramgarh, also, there are several mines that are 
 largely worked. For the first 18 years of British rule these mines 
 were leased to the headman of the Agaris at a nominal rent, 1 which 
 up to 1826 included all the iron mines in Kumaon. In 1833 the min- 
 ing industry in Ramgarh received its first check in the emigration 
 of the miners to Khetsari in Pali, and has never since recovered its 
 early importance. In the Chaugarkha pargana, the ore of the 
 Muniya mine in Patti Lakhanpur is of the prismatic species. It is 
 of two varieties, the ochry and compact. The former sometimes 
 contains octahedral crystals and magnetic iron ore, and in the 
 neighbourhood of the mine on the summit of a small hill there occur 
 rolled pieces consisting of grains of quartz and small octahedral crys- 
 tals of this mineral cemented together. These pieces are magnets, 
 and have each two poles. The ores, too, contain manganese in notable 
 proportion, and would consequently afford a very good steel ; 
 as it is to the alloy of this metal that the superiority of the steel 
 manufactured from brown ore is attributed. In Patti Damn there 
 are mines at Digarhia and Jhiratoli of the same nature ; in Rangor 
 Patti at Jalal and Digarhia ; in Patti Kharahi at Lob. A specimen 
 of iron ore brought from the neighbourhood of Milam, called by the 
 natives of Malla Juhar ‘ bulclunga ,’ seems a crystalline variety 
 of red htematite. It is used there for a red dye, the colour being 
 extracted by rubbing the stone on a hard surface while wet. 
 
 The mines of Patti Giwar in pargana Pali are found at Chiteli, 
 
 Sirauli, Khetsari, Simalkhet, Gudi, Bailgaon, 
 Bonigarh, and close by at Mehalchauri and 
 Tilwara. The valley in which the iron is produced runs nearly 
 north and south, and extends from Dwarahat on the south to Pandua 
 1 To Government, 24th December, 1833. 
 
 Giwar mines. 
 
OF THE NORTTI-WESTEEN PROVINCES. 
 
 289 
 
 Khal on the north. It is formed by the rivers Kotlar and Khetsari, 
 both flowing into the Ramganga, the bed of the former being about 
 nine miles long, and that of the latter six miles. The ores lie on the 
 east side of the valley and occur along a range of hills about thirteen 
 miles in extent. The Simalkliet mine 1 is the largest, and has four 
 entrances penetrating upwards of 350 feet into the mountain. The 
 ores here consist of red haematite of a good quality in a gangue of 
 clay slate branching in every direction and at all angles. The lodes 
 range from 3' to 18' in width and 2\ f to 15' in height, the average 
 being from 3' to 5' by 4' to 6'. There is no water, and the sur- 
 rounding rock is compact, requiring few supports. 
 
 In Sayalgarh of pargana Kotauli there is some iron ore not at 
 present worked. At Manglalekh in Talla Rao the ore is much 
 esteemed for its quality, and is raised in some quantity. At Dehchauri, 
 Ramo-arh, and Khurpa Tal the mines are in the hands of the Kumaon 
 Iron Works Company. The Lugthan mine is in Malla Katyiir, and 
 there is another in Baraon Patti in pargana Gfangoli. The burrows at 
 Khairna are now unworked, likewise those atSimalkha and Uchakot. 
 
 Garhwal iron mines. 
 
 In the Garhwal district the iron mines in Patti Painkhanda 
 
 exhibit specimens of granular iron pyrites 
 imbedded in veins of quartz which occur 
 in a dark-greyish talcose schist. "They are apparently not very 
 rich in ore. In Patti Sili Chandpur the Rajbunga mine gives 
 a rich haematite which is slightly attracted by the needle, and is 
 still worked. The Khusli mine in the same patti gives a mica- 
 ceous ore, scaling off easily and showing minute crystals resemb- 
 ling garnets on the edges of some specimens. The adjacent 
 beds seem to be chloritic schists ; this ore affects the needle. 
 In Taili Chandpur magnetic ore is found with haematite, and 
 a specimen from Patti Taili Kaliphat resembles specular iron ore. 
 
 Specimens from the Biikhanda mine in Patti Bichhla Nag- 
 pur are also of a micaceous nature, and 
 seem to contain in parts minute crystals of 
 quartz and pyrites, otherwise they much resemble graphite, and 
 soil the fingers when touched. They do not influence the com- 
 pass needle. The Jakhtoli mine in the same patti give an ore which 
 
 Nagpur mines. 
 
290 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 is probably a clay ironstone. It is of a light coffee colour and of 
 little specific gravity. The Grflet mine close by gives an ore of a 
 similar quality. In Malla Nagpur the ore is probably haematite. 
 A vein of iron pyrites runs along the Alaknanda in this patti near the 
 village of Hath. The people call them ‘ sona he paihar? or gold stone, 
 and sell them to the pilgrims to Badrinath at high rates. The stones, in 
 the form of powder, are used as an orpiment, and the stone itself as a 
 flint. A specimen from Nagpur itself is probably a carbonate of iron. 
 
 The Mok mine in Patti Malli Dasauli yields an ore of which 
 Dasauli and Baclihan- specimens appear to be magnetic, rich in 
 syun ‘ metal, black in colour and crystalline, and 
 
 laminated in structure. It possesses highly magnetic properties. 
 The Charbang mine in the same locality is of a similar character, 
 very rich in iron, and, according to Mr. Lawder, exhibits its polarity 
 in the direction of the planes of lamination. The Dungara mine in 
 Patti Bachhansyiin gives specimens which may possibly be an earthy 
 hydrated oxide of iron. Its colour varies from ochry to dusky black, 
 streak the same. It is of little specific gravity, the clay seemingly 
 predominating. The lion of Bachhansyun, however, has a wide 
 reputation for hardness and toughness. Sledge-hammers (gan) made 
 from it have been found to last out those of the best English metal. 
 
 The ore of Pipali mine in Patti Iriya Kot is probably a 
 
 hydrous form of sesqui-oxide of iron, the 
 clay largely predominating. The Panda 
 Toli mine in the same patti seems to give an argillaceous variety 
 of brown hsematite. Eohba affords a rich haematite, raised in large 
 quantities. The Chalya mine in Patti Painun gives a hard and 
 brittle ore possessing the iron-black colour and metallic lustre of 
 magnetic iron, but specimens of it failed to affect the compass needle 
 in the manner characteristic of that ore. It may possibly on 
 analysis be found to contain manganese. 
 
 The deposits of lead are fairly numerous. The ore is found at 
 Lead. Tachhira in pargana Dhanpur mixed with 
 
 a little silver. A large mine also existed 
 at Ghirti in the snowy range between Milam and Nfti, but this 
 has lately been closed by a landslip. The mines at Ralum and 
 Banskum on the banks of the Gori river and at Baidli Bao-hir 
 
 to 
 
 Iriya Ivot. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 291 
 
 Arsenic. 
 
 are unworked. The ore is galena, and the matrix is silex, with 
 varying proportions of feldspar and calcspar. The Nagpur mine 
 is a fair one, hut somewhat inaccessible. Near the Gaul mine in 
 Patti Kharahi and at Sor Gurang copper mines there are depo- 
 sits of lead ore. The former is a galena traversing a silicious 
 limestone, but neither are regularly worked. When the villagers 
 require lead they burn the rock, and the lead, more or less sul- 
 phuretted, trickles from the crevices. A large nodule of lead, the 
 size of an eigliteen-pound shot, was found in Patti Maundarsyun, 
 on the banks of the Nayar river. It consisted of pure galena, but 
 though search was made no more could be discovered. In Jaunsar 
 there are mines at Maiyar and Borela on the left bank of the Tons 
 river and at Aiyar on the right bank. At Maiyar and Aiyar the 
 matrix is clay slate, and at Borela, limestone supposed to be a bed 
 in the clay slate. 1 The revenue from these mines is now nominal. 
 
 Yellow arsenic, known as haritdl , is found in the northern parts 
 
 of Ivumaon, near Munsyari. A small portion 
 is brought down every year by the Bhotiyas 
 for sale at the Bageswar fair in January. 
 
 Indications of lignite appear near Ranibagh close to Haldwani, 
 
 the Barakheri pass near Bhamauri, and in 
 the streams of the sub-Himalaya near Najfb- 
 abad in the Bijnor district. They do not give promise of any 
 workable fuel, and, judging from the experience obtained in other 
 parts of the hills, it is questionable whether any lignite deposits 
 will ever be discovered of such extent and quality as to repay the 
 expense of mining them. An analysis of a specimen of the 
 Ranibagh lignite gave carbon 60'0, volatile matter 36*4, ash 3'6. 
 The percentage of ash, however, contrasts favourably with Bengal 
 coal. 2 Traces of a true peat are found at Blum Tal. In 1833 
 Mr. E. Ravenshaw reported 3 the existence of coal in the bed of the 
 Dhela river near Laldhang in Garhwal, "where it occurred in thin 
 seams varying from one inch to four inches broad. Similar traces 
 were discovered in the beds of the Chala and Phika streams, but 
 none of any commercial value. The specimens received in Calcutta 
 were nearly all of the same character, “ strongly impregnated with 
 
 1 Gleanings in Science, I., 230. 2 As. Res., XVI., 387, 397. 3 J A, S. 
 
 Ben., 11., 264. 
 
 Lignite. 
 
292 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 sulplraret of iron which forms their fibres, streaking some of them 
 and passes into thick masses of pyrites, decomposing in others. A 
 clean lump had a specific gravity of 1’968 in consequence, and the 
 residual ash was principally iron oxide.” 
 
 Graphite 1 (plumbago) crops out at the Kalimatiya hill to the 
 
 north of Almora and on the spur of Banini 
 Graphite. Devi facing Almora on the Lohughat road. 
 
 In 1850, specimens were sent to England and subjected to exami- 
 nation, when it was found that it could he made serviceable as 
 graphite. Excavations were also made by Major Drummond at 
 Garjoli near Balti, and Palsimi, about three miles from Balti and the 
 same eastward of Almora. The following is the report of Mr. Rose, 
 the mineralogist who tested the specimens sent from Almora : — 
 “ Graphite is applied to several purposes. When very fine, compact, 
 and of a sufficient cohesion, it is cut up for drawing-pencils. When 
 the texture is loose, or it is otherwise of inferior quality, it is ground 
 down and deprived of foreign substances by washing, as ores of 
 metals are prepared for smelting. The powder thus purified is then 
 used for various purposes, such as crucibles (being refractory or 
 infusible by heat) for burning iron, and reducing the friction of 
 machinery. A new method is now adopted for making artificial 
 pencils, which are scarcely if at all inferior to those sawn out of the 
 finest blocks. The dust of such fine material as your specimens 
 Eos. 4, 8, and particularly No. 10, properly prepared, is subjected 
 to vast hydraulic pressure (several hundred tons), and thus acquires 
 the compactness and solidity necessary for the best purposes. The 
 best kinds of graphite may be known by a pale lead-blue colour, 
 high lustre, unctuosity, and inferior specific gravity. The first nine 
 specimens will answer for pencils, most of them sufficiently pure 
 and compact to be divided for that purpose. All the varieties sent 
 may be used, even No. 13, though connected with much matrix, as 
 it can be deprived of this by grinding and washing. All the 
 varieties of this substance must continue in demand and bring 
 remunerative prices if the expense of mining and conveyance should 
 not be too great.” It is also found in Patti Loliba of Garhwal on 
 the Karnprayag road, and is there used as a dye. 
 
 1 See, further, Gleanings in Science, III., 280 ; J. A. S , XXIV., 203 ; In. Rec. 
 (LI. D.), XVII., 58 : Rec., N.-W. P., III., N. S., 371. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 293 
 
 Sulphur is found both in Kumaon and Garhwal. In the former 
 
 district it occurs in the tract called Mun- 
 Sulphur. sjari, and mechanically mixed with carbonate 
 
 of lime in the beds of the Ramganga and Ganjiya rivers. . It is 
 also found as green sulphate of iron, and could be obtained in any 
 quantity from the iron pyrites of the copper mines. There are also 
 some sulphureous springs, as those at Naini Tal, Nargoli, and 
 Katligodam. There are two sulphur springs in Garhwal : the first 
 lies close to the snowy range to the north-east of the temple of 
 Madli Maheswar in pargana Nagpur ; the other is on the left bank 
 of the Biri river, two miles above its junction with the Alaknanda. 
 The water of this last is so very strongly impregnated that its 
 existence can be discovered by the smell long before arriving at the 
 spring itself. Neither are made use of any way. Sulphur is also found 
 in the galleries of the lead mines at Maiyar on the Tons in Jaunsar. 
 
 Borax or tincal, a native saline compound of boracic acid and 
 
 soda. The borax and salt fields of Gnari or 
 Borax> Hiindes, Ihd-lhaka or Ihdli-lhdka, lie to the 
 
 north of Bongbwa Tal, across mountains that round the north-east 
 side of the valley of the Shajan river, parallel to the Gangn range, 
 and in the eastern part of the Zjang of Rolitoh (Rudukh) and at the 
 Chapakani lake. The two salts are obtained from different spots in 
 the same vicinity, and are both worked in the same way by lixivia- 
 tion from the earth taken from the surface of the ground in which 
 the salts are developed by natural efflorescence. These salt fields 
 are open to all who choose to adventure their labour in them on 
 payment of one-tenth of the produce to the Lhassa Government, who 
 have an excise establishment on the spot. 1 The borax is collected 
 from June to September and sold at the different fairs Ganpa, 
 Gartoh, Sibilam, Chajna, Taklakliar, Dabakliar. It is brought 
 down by the Bhotiya traders and purchased by the merchants 
 of Ramnagar, where it is refined. The process is as follows : The 
 borax is pounded and placed in shallow tubes, and then covered 
 with water to the extent of a few inches ; to this is added a solution 
 of about two pounds of lime dissolved in two parts of water, for 
 every ten maunds (820 pounds) of borax, and the whole mass is 
 
 well stirred every six hours. Next day it is drained on sieves 01 
 1 StracRey : J. A. S. Ben., XVII. (2), 57. 
 
294 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Gypsum, 
 
 cloth, and after this is again dissolved in 2\ times its weight of 
 boiling water, and about sixteen pounds of lime added for the 
 above quantity. It is then filtered, evaporation takes place, and 
 subsequently it is crystallized in funnel-shaped vessels, usually of 
 kansa , an alloy of copper and zinc or lead. The loss in weight is 
 about 20 per cent. Borax is used in medicine and the arts. Dry 
 borax acts on the metallic oxides at a high temperature, melting 
 and vitrifying them into beautiful coloured glasses. It is also used 
 as a flux for soldering in goldsmith’s work and as a varnish combined 
 with shell-lac. Its principal use is, however, in the manufacture of 
 coloured glass, enamel, and glazed substances. 1 
 
 Gypsum is found in pargana Chhakhata. Perhaps the best bed 
 
 is near the Nihal bridge on the road between 
 Kaladhungi and Naim Tal. In 1850 the late 
 Mr. Tregear, of the Bareilly College, made some very good plaster of 
 Paris from it, which might be found useful in external plastering, as it 
 has the property of expanding on cooling. Gypsum is found in Garh- 
 wal, on the banks of the Alaknanda near Panai and Nagrasu. There 
 is also a dark-green variety which the people sometimes make 
 into saucers and bowls. 2 Captain P. T. Cautley noticed 3 the 
 occurrence of gypsum at Sansardhara and Salkot near Dehra and 
 described its appearance and origin, which was further discussed by 
 the Bev. R. Everest, but these papers have now little practical 
 value. 4 
 
 A white saponaceous stone resembling and used for the same 
 
 purpose as pipeclay is produced in many 
 
 fooapstone. 
 
 places. In Garhwal various vessels are 
 turned from it, which when polished have the appearance of marble. 
 They retain liquid, but being extremely brittle are little used. 
 
 Asbestos has lately been discovered in a hill to the north of 
 
 and at a short distance from Ukhimath in 
 Garhwal. It is said to be of very good 
 quality, but it is too far inland to be profitably worked. The people 
 use it medicinally for dressing wounds and burns, and as a wick for 
 oil-lamps, but it may yet be turned to a profitable account as 
 a packing for steam-joints and the like. 
 
 1 Ure, 1 , 381. * As. Res., XVIII. (1), p 216. 3 J. A. S. Ben., I., 
 
 289. 4 Ibid, 450, and Skerwill on Darjiling gypsum, ibid, XXI., 538. 
 
 Asbestos. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 295 
 
 Silajit 1 or Salajit, a native sulphate of alumina, is found both 
 
 in Kumaon, Nepal and parganas Pain- 
 Sllajit ‘ khanda and Nagpur in Garhwal. It is much 
 
 sought after and used as a dressing for wounds. It occurs in small 
 light lumps, colour brownish white, externally anhydrous, internally 
 semi-crystalline, fracture slightly fibrous, with a lustre resembling 
 asbestos, porous, containing small cavities lined with scarcely percep- 
 tible needle-like crystals, adheres a little to the tongue. Taste acidu- 
 lous saline, soluble in twice its weight of distilled water, friable. 
 Mr. Stevenson’s analysis 2 gives as its component parts : sulphate of 
 alumina, 95 ; peroxide of iron, 3 ; insoluble matter (silex), 1, and 
 loss, 1. This analysis would appear to point to a specimen of great- 
 er purity than those commonly met with in the bazars which, as 
 a rule, have seldom more than 66 per cent, of sulphate of alumina. 
 The lumps generally have an admixture of red sand and frequently 
 portions of micaceous stone are found embedded in them. Some 
 of them have the smooth surfaces of stalactites and are not unlike 
 those deposits. All are readily soluble in water, and when touch- 
 ed with the tongue give the taste of common alum. Dr. Camp- 
 bell has described 3 the Nepalese trade in Salajit. 
 
 Limestone is found all over the division, both in immense 
 
 masses exhibiting various shades of colour 
 and structure, and as local tufa deposits. 
 There are three distinct ranges of limestone hills in Garhwal : the 
 first north of the Alaknanda in Nagpur, the second running from 
 Lohba Patti to the Pindar, and again to the Alaknanda in Patti 
 Bachhansyun, and the third running parallel to the plains and 
 south of the Nayar river. There are also small patches of limestone 
 scattered throughout the district, but not in such large quantities 
 as in the abovementioned ranges. Lime is manufactured at Naini 
 Tal, at Jyuli in the Kharahi range, half-way between Bageswar and 
 Ahnora, at Chiteli, north of Dwarahat, at Simalkha, Baitalghat, 
 and Dhikuli for Ranikhet, and on the new cart-road to Ramnagar. 
 Lime is also made in Borarau, Sor, Sira, Dhyanirao, and Charal. 
 Two kinds of limestone are used in the Tarai district, the one being 
 obtained from the quarries at the foot of the Kumaon hills, which 
 
 Limestone. 
 
 1 Derived from ‘ sila, ' a stone, and ‘jit, ’ principle or essence. 
 Ben., II. 321. 3 J. A. S., Ben., II., 482. 
 
 2 J. A. S., 
 
29G 
 
 htmXlayan districts 
 
 Building stone. 
 
 give by far the best kind of lime ; the other is the tufa deposit 
 obtained in the small nalas of the tract itself ; this latter kind, how- 
 ever, is of a very inferior quality. First-class limestone costs at 
 the quarries five to eight rupees per 100 maunds ; the tax levied 
 by the Forest Department is eight rupees on that amount, and 
 cartage may be averaged at half a rupee per mile for 100 maunds. 
 Thus the stone is landed at most points in the district for 30 rupees 
 per 100 maunds, and including the expense of burning, a maund 
 of lime costs 10 to 12 annas. This lime will bear two or three por- 
 tions of pounded brick or surki. Second-class lime ready for use 
 now costs 25 rupees, and delivered in Naini Tal, 50-100 rupees 
 per 100 maunds ; it will, however, only bear a proportion of one 
 part of pounded brick to two parts of lime. 
 
 Good building stone can be procured in most parts of the 
 
 hills. At Ahnora fine-grained, evenly-bed- 
 ded quartzites and mica-schist form the hill 
 itself, and supply material not to be excelled for durability and 
 facility of dressing. Mica-schist seems to form the principal beds 
 for some distance to the east and west of Almora, reaching to Dwa- 
 rahat and Masi on the west, Pali, Ranikliet, Siyahi Devi, Dol, and 
 towards Kali Kumaun to the east, and also in the formation of the 
 Jageswar and Binsar ranges to the north. At Naini Tal the stones 
 used are limestone and clay schist. At Ranikhet a pale-coloured 
 gneiss forms both a handsome and a lasting building stone having 
 the property of hardening by exposure. Sandstone is abundantly 
 found in the lower hills. Gneiss and chlorite-schists are used fre- 
 quently as building stones in the district. In the Bhabar split 
 boulders are found to answer the purpose of bricks. The Tarai is the 
 only portion of the Kumaon division where bricks are extensively 
 used for building purposes. Nine-inch bricks cost about Rs. 750 
 per lakh, and the small native bricks Rs. 100. Stone is sometimes 
 carted from the foot of the hills for the better kind of work, but 
 owing to the great expense is, so far as possible, dispensed withr- 
 
 At Chiteli near Dwarahat there are roofing-slate quarries, now 
 
 ■o „ i , unworked ; also at Dhari in the Bel Patti of 
 
 Roofing slate. 
 
 Gangoli ; in Borarao Patti, Suit Patti, and at 
 Naini Tal. In Lohba of Garhwal the thin dark-blue slate is procur- 
 able, but these last appear to be much inferior to the Chiteli quarry. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 297 
 
 Alum, known as ipldtlcari , is found in different parts of the pro- 
 vince, and in abundance in the aluminous 
 shales near Jak village, on the road from 
 Naim Tal to Khairna and as an efflorescence on the micaceous schist 
 in the bed of the Kosi below Almora. The shales contain minute 
 particles of pyrites disseminated throughout their mass, which on 
 becoming decomposed promote the formation of alum and the lixivia- 
 tion produced by water leaves an encrustation of alum on the rock. A 
 dark-coloured talc called jalposhi is exported to the plains and used as a 
 tonic and febrifuge in medicine. In the neighbourhood of Kotgaon and 
 Giwarsiu near Paori in Garhwal a bitumen or mineral resin is found. 
 
 There is no doubt but that in both quantity and quality the 
 metalliferous deposits in this division are good, but the absence 
 of coal and the competition of sea-borne metal have hitherto ren- 
 dered mining an unproductive speculation, nor does there seem 
 any probability of it attaining any important position among the 
 industries of the province. 
 
 REFERENCES. 
 
 The following list gives a reference to some of the works and papers 
 on the geology and mineralogy of the North-Western Himalaya : — 
 
 1. Report of the mineralogical survey of the Himalaya mountains lying 
 between the rivers Satlaj and Kali : with a geological map, by Captain J. D. 
 Herbert. J. A. S. Ben., XI., 1, p. x. 
 
 2. On the mineral productions of the Himalaya mountains, by the same. 
 Trans. A. S., XVIII., i., 236. 
 
 3. Journal of a tour from Almora through parts of the province of Kumaon 
 and Garhwal, chiefly in the centre of the hills, by the same, edited by J. H. Batten. 
 J. A. S. Ben., XIII., 734. 
 
 4. Some inquiries in the province of Kumaon relative to geology and other 
 branches of natural science, by Assistant Surgeon J. McClelland, Calcutta, 1835. 
 
 5. Geological specimens from Kumaon and Garhwal, by the same. J. A. S. 
 Ben., II., 653. 
 
 6. Notice of some fossil impressions occurring in the transition limestone of 
 Kumaon, by the same. Ibid, VI., 653. 
 
 7. On the geology of part of the Himalaya mountains and Tibet, by Captain 
 R. Strachey. J. Geo. Soc., VII. (1851). 
 
 8. Geology of Dehra Di'm, by Dr. Royle. J. A. S. Ben., I., 96, 249. 
 
 9. Geological sketch of Mussooree and Landour in the Himalaya, together 
 with an abstract of the thermometrical register kept at Landour during the year 
 1831, by F. H. Fisher. Ibid, I., 193. 
 
 10. Geological observations made on a journey from Mussooree to Gangotri 
 by Rev. R. Everest. Ibid, IV., 690. 
 
 38 
 
298 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 11. Ontheoriginof the Kumaon Lakes, by V. Ball. Rec. Geol. Sur., XI., 2,174. 
 
 12. Note on a trip over the Milam pass, Kumaon, by T. W. H. Hughes, with 
 a description of the fossils by Dr. Waagen. Ibid, 182. 
 
 13. A Manual of the Geology of India, by H. B. Medlicott and W. T. Bland- 
 ford, Calcutta, 1879. 
 
 14. Sivatherium giganteum, a new fossil ruminant genus from the valley of 
 the Markanda in the Siwalik branch of the Sub-Himalayan mountains, by Dr. H. 
 Falconer and Captain P. T. Cautley. As. Res., XIX., I, and J. A.JS.Ben., V., 38. VI, 152. 
 
 15. Note on the fossil hippopotamus of the Siwalik hills, by the same. As. 
 Res., XIX., 39. 
 
 16. The fossil gharial of the Siwalik hills, by the same. Ibid, 32. 
 
 17. The fossil bear of the same, by the same. Ibid, 193. 
 
 18. The fossil crocodile of the same, by the same. Ibid, 25. 
 
 19. The fossil tiger of the same, by the same. Ibid, 135. 
 
 20. The fossil camel ©f the same, by the same, ibid, 115; and by Lieutenant 
 W. E. Baker. J. A. S. Ben., IV., 694 : IX. 620. 
 
 21. An additional fossil species of the order quadrumana, by the same. Ibid, 
 VI., 354. 
 
 22. Specimens of the hippopotamus and other fossil genera in the Dadupur 
 collection by H. M. Durand, As, Res., XIX., 54, and selected specimens of the Sub- 
 Ilimalayan fossils in the Dadupur collection, by Lieutenant W. E. Baker. J. A. S. 
 Ben., IV. 565, and Durand, V., 291, 486, 661, 739. 
 
 23. Discovery of fossils in the Siwaliks, by Captain Cautley. Ibid, III., 592. 
 
 24. Fossil elephant's tooth from the same, by Lieutenant Baker. Ibid, 638. 
 
 25. The fossil elk of the Himalaya, by the same Ibid, IV., 506. 
 
 26. Synopsis of fossil genera and species in the collection of Dr. Falconer 
 and Captain Cautley. Ibid, IV., 706. 
 
 27. Collections of fossils presented by Colonel Colvin. Ibid, V., 58, 179. 
 
 28. Note on the teeth of the mastodon, by Captain Cautley. Ibid, 294, 768. 
 
 29. Fossil remains of the smaller carnivora from the Sub-Himalaya, by 
 Lieutenants Baker and Durand. Ibid, 585, 
 
 30. Notice of the skull (fragment) of a gigantic fossil batrachian from the 
 Nahan field, by Dr. T. Cantor. Ibid, VI., 538. 
 
 31. Note on the occurrence of fossil bones in the Siwalik range eastward of 
 Hardwar, by Dr, Ii. Falconer. Ibid, VI., 233. 
 
 32. Note on a fossil ruminant species allied to Giraffidse in the Sewalik hills, 
 by Captain P. T. Cautley. Ibid, VII,, 658, 
 
 33. Note relating to Siwalik fauna, by H. B. Medlicott. Ibid, XXXIV., ii., 63. 
 
 34. A sketch of the history of the fossil vertebrata of India, by R. Lyddelcer. 
 Ibid, XLIX„ ii., 8. 
 
 35. Fauna antiqua Sivalensis, by Falconer and Cautley. London, 1846-49-66. 
 
 36. Palceontological Memoirs and notes of H. Falconer, by C. Murchison. 
 London, 1868. 
 
 37. Paloeontologia Indica, published by the Geological Survey, Calcutta. 
 
 38. Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, by the same. 
 
 39. Records of the Geological Survey of India, by the same. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Scientific Botany. 
 
 contents. 
 
 A list of the flora of Garhwal. Jaunsar-Bawar and the Dehra Dun, by Dr. King. 
 Tract to which the list refers. The Siwaliks. Sub-Siwalik tract. Dehra Dun. 
 Himalayan tract. Characteristic vegetation from the plains to Mussooree. From 
 Mussooree northwards. A list of the Jiom of Kumaon, and the Kumaon Bhabar, by 
 Dr. Watson. 
 
 List 1 of the Plants of Garhwal, Jauns^r-BXwar and 
 
 the Dehra Dun. 
 
 Tile tract of country of which the vegetation is to be considered 
 in the following pages presents very varied conditions in respect of 
 physical configuration, soil, and climate. Its boundaries are — on 
 the west the river Tons, a tributary of the Jumna, and on the east 
 
 Tract to which this list the Bhagirathi branch of the Ganges ; on the 
 refers. north the snowy range of the Himalaya, 
 
 and on the south the Siwalik range. 
 
 The Siwaliks run parallel to the Himalaya, and are separated 
 from the latter by the Dehra Dun, a flat valley having an elevation 
 
 of from 1,800 to 2,250 feet above the level 
 Siwbliks. 0 f the sea. The highest peaks of the Siwaliks 
 
 do not rise much above 3,000 feet, and the majority are much 
 lower, but their outline against the sky is jagged and picturesque in 
 the extreme, and the part of them with which we have to deal is 
 about seven miles wide. Their southern slopes are ploughed by the 
 force of the south-western monsoon into numerous deep narrow val- 
 leys, and the steeply scarped cliffs have a singularly bold beauty, to- 
 tally different from anything to be seen in the outer parts of the Hima- 
 laya behind them. On their northern aspect, the Siwaliks slope gently 
 into the valley of the Dun, and the scenery, though beautiful, is 
 tamer than on the southern side. The rainfall on the range during the 
 south-west monsoon is about 60 inches, but from the porous character 
 
 1 This list has been kindly prepared by Mr. G. King, M.B., F. L. & , Director of 
 the Royal Botanical Gardens, Calcutta, for this work. 
 
300 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 of the soil and the steepness of the slopes, water drains off with extra- 
 ordinary rapidity. The drainage passes away by innumerable 
 channels, which, except for a few days in the year, are wide wastes 
 of dry gravel and boulders. After each heavy shower these sud- 
 denly become filled with rushing torrents, which subside as speedily 
 as they rose. Except during the rainy season, the range is very 
 dry, and water is so scarce as to make it almost uninhabitable. 
 
 Where the Siwaliks merge into the plains on the southern side, 
 
 there are tracts of forest and grass equivalent to those covering the 
 
 Bhabar and Tarai of the Himalaya in the 
 Sub-Siwalik tract. ,, . Q . 
 
 districts where there is no Srvvalik range. 
 
 The vegetation "of the sub-Siwalik belts is to a great extent but a 
 
 reproduction jin miniature of that of the latter. The flora of the 
 
 southern face^of the Siwaliks comprises many plants of the plains, 
 
 with the addition of such species as Hypericum cemuum and Cochlos- 
 
 permum Gossypium. Perhaps the most striking tree found in the 
 
 Siwaliks is the long-leaved pine (Pinus longifolia), a Himalayan 
 
 species, for which the Siwaliks form an outlying station. A large 
 
 proportion of the arboreal vegetation of the Siwaliks consists of 
 
 species which occur both on the lower slopes of the Himalaya and 
 
 on the hilly districts of central and southern India, thus affording a 
 
 good illustration of the width of distribution of Indian plants. As 
 
 examples may be mentioned Bombax malabaricum , Buchancmia Iciti- 
 
 folia , Spondias mangifera , Boswellia serrcita, Garugci pinncitci , Spatho- 
 
 lobus Roxburghii , Albizzia stipulcita , Anogeissus latifolia , TJlmus 
 
 integrifolia, and others. Epiphytal orchids are absent, and ferns 
 
 are but few in the Siwaliks. One labiate plant ( Eremostachys 
 
 superba ) is confined to one or two spots in the Siwaliks, and is one 
 
 of the best examples known to me in India of a truly local plant. 
 
 Sal (Shorea robusta) of very stunted growth is abundant in the 
 
 southern sub-Siwalik tract and on both sides of the range, as also 
 
 over the whole of the Dun. This tree is here near its western limit; 
 
 a little way to the west of the Jumna it disappears altogether. 
 
 The Dehra Dun is a charming valley. The Siwaliks on the 
 south shut it in from the plains, and, until recently, not only most 
 
 effectually protected it from the hot winds 
 Debra Dim. . . , , . , . , , 
 
 m summer, but gave it a higher winter tem- 
 perature than the plains outside. The extensive and ruthless 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 301 
 
 clearances of the Siwalik forest of recent years are, however, believed 
 (and apparently with good reason) to have caused an increase of 
 the summer temperature of the Dun. The soil of the Dun consists 
 chiefly of sandstone debris washed down from the Himalaya. The 
 drainage is excellent, especially near the base of the Himalaya 
 where the larger debris has been deposited, and the water level is 
 
 everywhere far below the surface. The drainage water passes off 
 by the Asan into the river Jumna, and by the Son and Suswa into 
 the Ganges. The watershed of these streams runs across the valley 
 in the line of the station of Dehra. The rainfall is about 80 inches, 
 but, although only a small proportion of this total falls during any 
 other than the rainy season, vegetation is kept wonderfully green 
 during the whole year by the moisture prevalent in the atmosphere. 
 Formerly the greater part of the Dun was covered by forest, of 
 which the prevailing tree was sal , but of late years much of the 
 forest has disappeared. A certain proportion of the cleared land 
 has been devoted to village and some to tea cultivation, but much 
 of it has been invaded by tall, coarse grasses useless alike to man 
 and beast. Like the Siwaliks, the Dun is ravaged every hot season 
 by fires from which the arboreal vegetation suffers to a degree 
 which can only be appreciated by one who has lived in the forest. 
 Unless these fires are checked with a high hand, the utter destruc- 
 tion of all forest vegetation in tlfe Dun is but a question of time. 
 The flora of the Dun presents an interesting mixture of species com- 
 mon on the plains outside, and of plants from the lower hills. No- 
 table amongst the latter are the pretty little Gentiana pedicellate, 
 and in the rains, here and there, Platystemma violoicles; whilst 
 amongst shrubs and climbing plants Lespedeza, Indig of era pulchella, 
 Jasminum pubescens , and Combretum decandrum are perhaps the 
 most noteworthy. The dense canebrakes of the Tarai and Blnibar 
 of the trans-Gangetic sub-Himdlayan tract are represented in the 
 Dun by a few patches of a single species (Calamus Royleanus ), and 
 this is not found westward of the Nalapani swamp, three miles from 
 the station of Dehra. Epiphytal Scitaminece are unknown m the Dun : 
 a few orchids, however, occur, the most prominent among which are 
 Aerides affine and odoratum , Saccolabium Ghanvalicum , and Oberonia 
 iridifolia. Peperomia reflexa is found here and there on trees in damp 
 spots, and there are some epiphytal ferns, such as Polypodmm Imeare. 
 
302 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The remainder of the region under review consists of a large 
 
 irregularly shaped tract of the Himalaya proper, narrowed at its 
 
 TT „ „ , southern limit, but expanding; towards the 
 
 Himalayan tract. 10 
 
 snowy range, part of which it includes. 
 The physical features of this area are so varied that it would be out 
 of place to attempt to describe them here. It must suffice to remind 
 the reader that, while the lower and outer ranges have a climate not 
 very different from that of the plains of India, the higher peaks, 
 rising as they do to 18,000 feet above the sea-level, are covered 
 with perpetual snow. As regards vegetation, the tract may be 
 divided into three zones : the sub-tropical covering the slopes of the 
 lower and outer hills, and following the courses of the deep hot val- 
 leys far into the interior of the range ; the temperate covering the 
 middle elevations ; and the arctic confined to the greater heights and 
 bounded on the north by the snow line itself. The transition between 
 these zones is gradual. In consequence mainly of its greater distance 
 from the sea, the rainfall of the western Himalaya is much less than 
 that of the eastern part of the chain. But not only does the climate 
 steadily increase in dryness from east to west, but the rainfall on 
 the outer ranges is much heavier than in the interior. At Mussooree, 
 for example, it amounts to about 80 inches, while at Harsfl, in the 
 northern end of the Bhagirathi valley, the rainy season is repre- 
 sented by a short period of misty weather, and actual showers are 
 but rare. The intervening country has a rainfall graduated be- 
 tween these two extremes. 
 
 In ascending the Himalaya from the Dun to Mussooree, new 
 
 speeies meet the eye step by step. Among; 
 
 Characteristic vegeta- J 1 J 1 0 
 
 tion from the plains to trees, Bauliinia return , EngelJiardtia Cole- 
 
 broolziana, Rhododendron arboreum , and the 
 Oaks are the most striking new forms. Pinus longifolia , already 
 met with on the Siwaliks, becomes abundant. Berberries, various 
 Bcehmerias and other Urticacece, Hanviltonia, Leptoderrms , various 
 species of Viburnum , Clematis and Rosa at first mingle with, and 
 finally replace, the sub-arboreal woody vegetation of the base of the 
 hills. During the rains the change in vegetation, as one ascends, is 
 even more striking. On steep banks and faces of rock by the road- 
 side the eye is delighted by such charming species as Chirita bifolia , 
 j Vidymocarpus aromaticus and macrophgllus, Platystemma violoides, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 303 
 
 Selaginella Jacquemontii, Androsace sarmentosa and incisa, Frag aria 
 indica , Saxifraga ligulata , Argostemma sarmentosum, and Begonia 
 picta . Ferns too abound both on the ground and on trees. A few 
 epiphytal orchids, the Peperomia already mentioned, and Remusatia 
 vivipara are found on the trees. But the epiphytal vegetation here 
 is but poor and scanty when compared with that of the eastern 
 Himalaya, thus illustrating in the most forcible way the comparative 
 dryness of the atmosphere throughout the year. On these lower 
 slopes a dwarf palm ( Phoenix acaulis) and a pretty little bamboo 
 called ringed ( Arundinaria falcata) are not unfrequent ; a larger 
 species of bamboo ( Dendrocalamus strictus), which occurs in plenty, 
 is common also in the Dun and Siwaliks. 
 
 At the level of Mussooree temperate forms begin to appear and 
 the botanist revels in plants belonging to such familiar European 
 
 genera as Ranunculus , Thalictrum, Anemone, Geranium, PotentiUa, 
 Rubus, Rumex, Peclicularis, and Habenaria. Umbelliferous plants 
 and Polygonacece are common, and terrestrial orchids of northern 
 „ forms are not unfrequent during the rains. 
 
 From Mussooree north- \ ° . 
 
 wards. As the higher elevations are appioached, the 
 
 vegetation assumes the characteristic Alpine type. Astragali, 
 Corydalis of different species, numerous Carijophyllece, Saxifrages, 
 Seclums, Primroses, Gentians and Farices abound, and in the carpet 
 of rich green grass are here and there studded the magnificent 
 Aconites, Meconopsis and Pceonia emodi. Prominent amongst the 
 forest vegetation are the stately cedar, the rigid silver spruce and 
 the graceful weeping pine. The twisted cypress towers aloft, and 
 the solemn yew stretches out its sombre arms. Lichens, mosses and 
 fungi abound, and algce are numerous in the streams. 
 
 The following list of the flowering plants and ferns does not pro- 
 fess to be complete. It contains only the names of species of which 
 there are specimens in the Herbarium of the Calcutta Botanic Gar- 
 den, or in my own collection. The former Herbarium ought to con- 
 tain every species occurring within the British Empire in India. It 
 has, however, been brought together principally by desultory 
 private effort, and is consequently unequal and defective. As a 
 rule, there are included in this list indigenous plants only ; the few 
 others that occur are marked either as naturalized or introduced. 
 Certain plants which are believed to be natives, but which are 
 
304 
 
 HTMA'LAYATST DISTRICTS 
 
 found only in cultivation, are marked as cultivated. For much 
 assistance in revising this list I am indebted to Mr. W. Water field, 
 
 C. S. 
 
 Natural Order 1 . — •Ranunculacecs. 
 
 Clematis Nepaulcnsis. DC. 
 
 „ mon tan a. Ham. 
 barbellata, Bdgw. 
 grata, Wall. 
 
 Gouriana, Roxb. 
 puberula, Hf. & T. 
 graveolens, Lindl. 
 orientalis. L. 
 nutans, Royle. 
 acuminata, DC. 
 connata, DC. 
 
 Buchananiana, DC. 
 
 Anemone vitifolia, Ham. 
 
 obtusiloba, Don. 
 rupestris, Wall, 
 rivularis, Ham. 
 polyanthes, Don. 
 naruissiflora. L. 
 tetrasepala, Royle. 
 
 „ elongata, Don. 
 
 Thalictrum elegans, Wall. 
 
 ,, platycarpum, Hf. & T. 
 cultratum, Wall. 
 Chelidonii, Hf. & T. 
 reniforme, Wall, 
 pauciflorum, Royle. 
 rostellatum, Hf. & T. 
 Punduanum, Wall, 
 saniculaeforme, DC. 
 Javanicum, Bl. 
 foliolosiim, DC. 
 minus, L. 
 
 Callianthemum cachemirianum, Camb. 
 Adonis aestivalis, L. 
 
 Ranunculus aquatilis, L. 
 
 Lingua, L. 
 
 pulcbellus, C. A. Mey. 
 lobatus, Jacquem. 
 byperboreus, Rottb. 
 affinis, Br. 
 liirtellus, Royle. 
 sceleratus, L. 
 diffusus, DC. 
 lsetus, Wall, 
 pensylvanicus, L. 
 arvensis, L. 
 
 Oxygraphis polypetala, Hf. & T. 
 
 Caltha palustris, L. 
 
 Trollius acaulis, Lindl. 
 
 Isopyrum thalictroides, L. 
 
 „ grandiflorum, Fisch. 
 
 Nigella sativa, L. naturalized. 
 Aquilegia vulgaris, L. 
 
 Delphinium denudatum, Wall. 
 
 „ coeruleum, Jacquem. 
 
 elatum, L. 
 vestitum, Wall. 
 
 99 
 
 9J 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 )) 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 9* 
 
 99 
 9 J 
 •n 
 9? 
 99 
 99 
 99 
 99 
 99 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Natural Order 1. — Banunculaeece — 
 (concluded). 
 
 Delphinium Cashmirianum, Royle. 
 
 „ Ajacis, L., introduced. 
 
 Aconitum Lycoctonum, L. 
 
 „ palmatum, Don. 
 
 „ ferox, Wall. 
 
 „ Napellus, L. 
 
 „ heterophyllum, Wall. 
 
 Actrea spicata, L. 
 
 Cimicifuga feetida, L. 
 
 Pmonia emodi, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 2. — Magnoliaeeae. 
 
 Michelia Champaca, L., introduced. 
 Schizandra grandiflora, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ propinqua, Hf. & T. 
 
 Natural Order 3. — Anona cece. 
 
 Miliusa velutina, Hf. & T. 
 
 Natural Order i. — Menispermaceoe. 
 
 Tinospora cordifolia, Miers. 
 
 Cocculus laurifolius, DC. 
 
 „ villosus, DC. 
 
 Stephania elegans, Hf. & T. 
 
 ,, rotunda, Lour. 
 
 Cissampelos Pareira, L. 
 
 Natural Order 5.- — Berber idc v . 
 
 Holbecellia latifolia., Wall. 
 
 Berberis nepalensis, Spreng. 
 
 „ vulgaris, L. 
 
 „ aristata, DC. 
 
 „ Lycium, Royle. 
 
 „ asiatica, Roxb. 
 
 Podophyllum emodi, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 6. — NympJiceaccce. 
 
 Nelumbium speciosum, Willd., intro- 
 duced. 
 
 Nymphsea Lotus, L. 
 
 Natural Order 7. — Papaveraeece. 
 
 Papaver somniferum, L., cultivated. 
 
 „ dubium, L. 
 
 Argemone mexicana, L., naturalized. 
 Meconopsis aculeata, Royle. 
 
 „ robusta, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ nepalensis, DC. 
 
 Stylophorum lactucoides B. & Hf. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 305 
 
 Natural Order S . — Fumariacecc. Natural Order 10. — Capparidea — (concld.) 
 
 TJ 
 
 JJ 
 J J 
 
 Dicentra Roylei, Hf. Sc T. 
 
 „ scandens, Walp. 
 
 Corydalis rutaafolia, Sibth, 
 
 ,, cachemiriana, Royle. 
 
 „ crithmifolia, Royle. 
 
 „ elegans, Wall. 
 
 ,, Govaniana, Wall, 
 
 sibirica, Pers. 
 cornuta, Royle. 
 cliteropliylla. DC. 
 
 ,, meifolia, Wall, 
 
 „ flabellata, Edgw. 
 
 Fumaria parviflora, Lamk. 
 
 Natural Order 9.— Crucifer oe. 
 
 Nasturtium officinale, P>r. 
 
 „ palustre, DC. 
 
 „ montanum, Wall. 
 
 Barbarea vulgaris, Br. 
 
 Arabis glabra, Crantz. 
 
 „ alpina, L. 
 
 „ amplexicaulis, Edgw. 
 Cardamine hirsuta, L. 
 
 „ impatiens, L. 
 
 „ macroptiyla, Will’d. 
 
 Allyssum canescens, DC. 
 
 Draba alpina, L. 
 
 „ incana, L. 
 
 ,, lasiophylla, Royle. 
 
 ,, fladnitzensis, Wulf. 
 
 Sisymbrium mollissimum, C. A. Meyer, 
 himalaicum, Hf. & T. 
 Tlralianum, Gay & Monn. 
 rupestre, Edgw. 
 strictum, Hf. & T. 
 Wallicbii, Hf. & T. 
 
 Sophia, L. 
 
 Columnse, Jacq. 
 
 7J Alliaria, Scop. 
 
 Eutrema primulaefolium, Hf. & T. 
 Erysimum hieraciifolium, L. 
 
 „ altaicum, C. A. Meyer. 
 
 ,, Thomsoni, Hf. 
 
 Bi’aya rosea, Bunge. 
 
 Brassica nigra, Koch. 
 
 ,, eampestris, L. 
 juncea, Hf. & T. 
 
 Fruca sativa, Lamk. 
 
 Capsella Bursa-pastoris, Moench. 
 Lepidium sativum, L. 
 
 „ Draba, L. 
 
 ,, capitatum, Hf. & T. 
 
 Megacarnsea polyandra, Benth. 
 
 Tlrlaspi arvense, L. 
 
 ,, alpestre, L. 
 
 Iberidella Andersoni, Hf. & T. 
 Raphanus sativus, L., cultivated. 
 Goldhachia ltevigata, DC. 
 
 Chorispora tenella, DC. 
 
 Natural Order 10. — Capparidece. 
 
 Cleome viscosa, L. 
 
 Grjnandropsis pentaphylla, DC. 
 
 5J 
 
 )> 
 
 JJ 
 
 if 
 
 91 
 
 Mferua arenaria, Hf. & T. 
 
 Capparis spinosa, L. 
 
 „ horrida, L. f. 
 
 Cratmva religiosa, Forst. 
 
 Natural Order 11. — Viol acres. 
 
 Viola biflora, L. 
 
 „ Patrinii, DC 
 
 JJ 
 
 39 
 
 serpens, M r all, 
 kunawarensis, Royle. 
 
 Ionidium suffruticosum, Ging. 
 
 Natural Order 12. — Bixinca. 
 
 Cochlospermum Gossypium, DC. 
 Flacourtia Ramontchi, L’Herit. 
 
 „ sepiaria, Roxb. 
 
 Nylosma longifolium, Clos. 
 
 Natural Order 13. — Pittosporeas. 
 
 Pittosporum floribundum, W. & A. 
 
 „ eriocarpum, Royle. 
 
 Natural Order 14. — Poly galea. 
 
 Polygala triphylla, Ham. 
 
 „ crotalarioides, Ham, 
 
 „ abyssinica, Fresen. 
 
 ,, leptalea, DC. 
 
 ,, persicaritefolia, DC. 
 
 „ chinensis, L. 
 
 „ sibirica, L. 
 
 Salomonia cantoniensis, Lour. 
 
 Natural Order 15. — Caryopliylleos. 
 
 Gypsophila cerastioides, Dom, 
 Saponaria Vaccaria, L. 
 
 Silene inflata, Sm. 
 
 ,, conoidea, L. 
 
 ,, Fatconeriana, Benth. 
 
 ,, Griffithii, Boiss. 
 
 „ gallica, L. 
 
 ,, Moorcroftiana, Wall. 
 
 „ Webbiana, Wall. 
 
 „ Stracheyi, Edgw. 
 
 Cucubalus bacciferus, L. 
 
 Lychnis apetala, L. 
 
 ,, brachypetala, Hort. Berol. 
 
 ,, multicaulis, Wall, 
 
 inflata, Wall. 
 
 indica, Benth, var. fimbriata, 
 Wall. 
 
 nutans, Benth. 
 
 „ pilosa, Edgw. 
 
 Cerastium dahuricum, Fisch. 
 
 ,, vulgatum, L. 
 
 „ Thomsoni, Hf. 
 
 Stellaria crispata, Wall. 
 
 ■ )} paniculata, Edgw. 
 
 „ semivestita, Edgw. 
 
 JJ 
 
 JJ 
 
 JJ 
 
 JJ 
 
306 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Natural Order 15.-— Caryophylleae — 
 (concluded). 
 
 Stellaria aquatica, Scop. 
 
 „ media, L. 
 
 „ Webbiana, Wall. 
 
 „ latifolia, Benth. 
 
 » longissima, Wall. 
 
 » saxatilis, Ham. 
 
 „ glauca, With. 
 
 „ decumbens, Edgw. 
 
 Arenaria foliosa, Royle. 
 
 „ festucoides, Benth. 
 
 „ serpyllifola, H. 
 
 „ orbiculata, Royle. 
 
 » glanduligera, Edgw. 
 
 j, Stracheyi, Edgw. 
 
 >, holosteoides. Edgw. 
 
 „ Benthami, Edgw. 
 
 Sagina procumbens, L. 
 
 Spergula arvensis, L., in fields. 
 
 „ pentandra, L., ditto. 
 
 Drymaria cordata, Willd. 
 
 Roly carp tea corymbosa, Lamk. 
 
 Natural Order 16. — Portulacea. 
 
 Portulaca oleracea, L. 
 
 Natural Order 17. — Tamariscine ee. 
 
 Tamarix gallica, L. 
 
 » _ dioica, Roxb. 
 
 Myricaria germanica, Desv. 
 
 » elegans, Royle. 
 
 Natural Order 18. — Elatineoz. 
 
 Natural Order 22. — Malvaceae, 
 
 Malva verticillata, L. 
 
 „ silvestris, L. 
 
 ,, rotundifolia, L. 
 
 ., parviflora, L. 
 
 Sida rhombifolia, L. 
 
 „ cordifolia, L. 
 
 Abutilon polyandrum, Schl. 
 
 „ indicum, G. Don. 
 
 „ graveolens, W. & A. 
 
 Urena lobata, L. 
 
 „ repanda, Roxb. 
 
 Hibiscus Trionum. L. 
 
 ,, furcatus, Roxb. 
 
 „ Solandra, L’Herit. 
 
 „ ficulneus, L. 
 
 >, pungens, Roxb. 
 
 ,, Abelmosehus, L. 
 
 „ cancellatus, Roxb. 
 
 ,, esculentus, L., naturalized. 
 
 Thespesia Lampas, Dalz. & Gibs. 
 Gossypium herbaceum, L., introduced. 
 Kydia calycina, Roxb. 
 
 Bombax malabaricum, DC. 
 
 Natural Order 23. — Sterculiaceae. 
 
 Sterculia villosa, Roxb. 
 
 „ Roxburghii, Wall. 
 
 „ fulgens, Wall. 
 
 Helicteres Isora, L. 
 
 Pterospermum acerifolium, Willd., rare. 
 Melochia corchorifolia, L. 
 
 Waltheria americana, L. 
 
 Abroma augusta, L probably intro- 
 duced. 
 
 Natural Order 24. — Tiliacece. 
 
 Bergia ammannioides, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 19. — Hypericinece. 
 
 Hypericum cernuum, Roxb. 
 
 „ cordifolium, Chois. 
 
 » lysimachioides. Wall. 
 
 !, patulum, Thunb. 
 
 „ perforatum, L. 
 
 „ elodeoides, Chois. 
 
 „ nepaulense, Chois. 
 
 Natural Order 20.' — Ternstrcemiacece. 
 
 Eurya japonica, Thunb. 
 
 Actinidia callosa, Lindl. 
 
 Saurauja nepaulensis, DC. 
 
 Camellia Thea, Link. Tea, introduced 
 and cultivated. 
 
 Natural Order 21. — Dlpterocarpece, 
 
 Shorea robusta, Gaertn., Sal. 
 
 Grewia oppositifolia, Roxb. 
 
 „ vestita, Wall. 
 
 „ tiliaefolia, Vahl. 
 
 „ asiatica, L. 
 
 „ sapida, Roxb. 
 
 „ scabrophylla, Roxb. 
 
 „ polygama, Roxb. 
 
 •» laevigata, Vahl. 
 
 Corchorus fascicularis, Lamk. 
 
 ,, acutangulus, Lamk, 
 
 Triumfetta pilosa, Roth. 
 
 >> rhomboidea, Jacq. 
 
 „ annua, L. 
 
 Natural Order 2b.— Linear. 
 
 Linum usitatissimum, L. 
 
 >; mysorense, Heyne. 
 
 Reinwardtia trigyna, Planch. 
 
 Natural Order 26.—. Malpigldiaceat , , 
 
 ITiptage Madablota, Gamin. 
 
 Aspidopterys Wallichii, Hf. 
 
 » nutans, Hf. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 307 
 
 Natural Order 27. — Zygophyllacm. 
 Tribulus terrestris, L. 
 
 Natural Order 28. — Geraniacea. 
 
 Geranium palustre, L. 
 
 „ collinum, M. Bieb. 
 
 „ Wallichianum, Sweet. 
 
 „ nepalense, Sweet. 
 
 „ polyanthes, Bdgw, & Hf. 
 
 „ rotundifolium, L. 
 
 „ molle, L. 
 
 ,, Robertianum, L. 
 
 „ lucidum, L. 
 
 „ ocellatum, Camb. 
 
 Oxalis corniculata, L. 
 
 ,, Acetosella, L. 
 
 Biophytum sensitivum, DO. 
 
 „ Reinwardtii, Walp. 
 Impatiens Roylei, Walp. 
 
 „ Thomsoni, Hf. 
 
 „ sulcata, Wall. 
 
 „ amplexicauiis, Edgw. 
 
 ,, Balsamina, L., Mujetlii. 
 
 „ "scabrida, DC. 
 
 „ bicornuta, Wall. 
 
 „ ampliorata, Edgw. 
 
 Natural Order 29. — Rutacce e. 
 
 Bse main gliausenia albiflora, Reiclib. 
 Dictamus albus, L. 
 
 Xantlioxylon alatum, Roxb. 
 
 ,, oxypbyllum, Edgw. 
 
 Toddalia aculeata, Pers. 
 
 Skimmia Laureola, Hf. 
 
 Glycosmis, pentapylla, Corr. 
 Limonia acidissima, L. 
 
 Murraya exotica, L. 
 
 „ Ksenigii, Spreng. 
 
 Clausena pentaphylla, DC. 
 
 Citrus medica, L. 
 
 „ Aurantium, L. 
 
 HCgle Marmelos, Coit. 
 
 Feronia Elepliantum, Corr. 
 
 Natural Order BO.—Simarubca. 
 
 Ailanthus excelsa, Roxb. 
 
 Picrasma quassioides, Benn. 
 
 Natural Order 31 —OcJinacca. 
 Oclma pumila, Ham. 
 
 Natural Order 32. — Rursoracc(E. 
 
 Boswellia serrata, Roxb. 
 
 Garuga pinnata, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order BB.—Meliaeea. 
 
 Melia Azedarach, L., Bukain. 
 
 ,, composita, Willd. 
 Azadirachta Indica, Juss, Nim. 
 Cedrela serrata, Royle. 
 
 „ Toona, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 31. — Olacinece. 
 
 Olax nana, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 35. — llicineee. 
 
 Ilex dipyrena, Wall. 
 
 ,, excelsa, Wall. 
 
 „ oderata, Ham. 
 
 Natural Order 36. — Celastrinca. 
 
 Euonymus pendulus, Wall, 
 
 „ ecliinatus, Wall. 
 
 ,, grandiflorus, Wall. 
 
 „ Hamiltonianus, Wall. 
 
 „ lacerus, Ham. 
 
 „ tingens, Wall. 
 
 Celastrus paniculata, Willd., Malkagni. 
 Gymnosporia rufa, Wall. 
 
 montana, Roxb. 
 
 „ Royleana, Wall. 
 
 Elaeodendron glaucum, Pers. 
 
 Natural Order 37. — Rliamnece. 
 
 Ventilago calyculata, Tulasne. 
 
 Zyzyplius Jujuba, Lamk. 
 
 „ (Enoplia, Mill. 
 
 „ vulgaris, Lamk. 
 
 „ xylopyra, Willd. 
 
 „ nummularia, W. & A. 
 
 ,, oxyphylla, Edgw. 
 
 Berchemia floribunda, Wall. 
 
 Rbamnus purpureus, Edgw. 
 
 ,, procumbens, Edgw. 
 
 „ virgatus, Roxb . 
 
 „ triqueter, Wall. 
 
 Sageretia oppositifolia Brongn. 
 
 „ theezans, Brongn. 
 
 Scutia indica, Brong. 
 
 Gonania leptostaebya, DC, 
 
 „ nepalensis, Wall. 
 
 Plovenia dulcis, Thunb. 
 
 Natural Order 38. — Aj»ipclidc<x> . 
 
 Vitis capreolata, Don. 
 
 „ latifollia, Roxb. 
 
 „ vinifera L., introduced. 
 
 ,, Linnsei, Wall. 
 
 ,, adnata, Wall. 
 
 „ lanata, Roxb. 
 
 himalayana, Brand. 
 
 „ parvifolia, Roxb. 
 
 J} obtecta, Wall. 
 
 „ divaricata, Wall. 
 
 Leea sambucina, Willd. 
 
 „ robusta, Roxb. 
 
 „ alata, Edgw. 
 
 „ aspera, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order W.—Sapindacea. 
 
 iEsculus indica, Colebr. 
 
 Sclileichera trijuga, Willd. 
 
 Sapindus trifoliatus, L. 
 
 „ Mukorossi, Gasrtn., probably 
 introduced. 
 
308 
 
 himXlayan districts 
 
 Natural Order 39. — Sapindacece — 
 (concluded). 
 
 feapindus Danura, Voigt., probably 
 introduced. 
 
 Acer oblongum, Wall, 
 i, caesium, Wall. 
 
 „ laevigatum, Wall. 
 t, pictum, Thunb. 
 
 „ villosum, Wall. 
 
 » _ caudatum, Wall. 
 
 Melianthus major., L., introduced. 
 Staphylea Emodi, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 10.' — Sabiacecc. 
 
 Sabi a paniculate, Edgw. 
 
 „ campanulata, Wall. 
 
 Meliosma simplicifolia, BI. 
 
 », dilleniarfolia, Bl. 
 
 Natural Order 41.* — Anacardiacece. 
 
 Rhus- vemicifera, DC". 
 
 „ acuminata, DC. 
 
 „ semialata, DC. 
 
 „ Cotinus, L. 
 
 „ succedanea, L. 
 
 „ parviflora, Roxb. 
 
 Spondias Mangifera, Pern. 
 
 Mangifera indica, L. 
 
 Ruchanania latifolia, Roxb. 
 
 Odin a Wodier, Roxb. 
 
 Semecarpus Anacardduna, L. 
 
 Natural Order 42. — • Coriariea 
 
 Coriaria nepalcnsis, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 43. — -Moving ea. 
 
 Moringa pterygosperma, Gaertn. 
 
 Natural Order 44. — Leguminosce. 
 
 Piptanthus nepalensis, Don. 
 Thermopsis barbata, Royle. 
 
 Crotalaria prostrata, Roxb. 
 
 „ alata, Roxb. 
 
 „ sericea, Retz. 
 
 „ juncea, L. 
 
 ,, tretragona, Roxb. 
 
 „ albida, Heyne. 
 
 „ neglecta, W. & A. 
 
 Argyrlobium flaccidum, J. et S. 
 
 „ roseum, J. et S. 
 
 Parochetus communis. Ham. 
 
 Trigonella Fcenum-Graecum, L. 
 
 „ gracilis, Benth. 
 
 Medicago lupulina, L. 
 
 „ laciniata, All. 
 
 „ satiya, L., cultivated. 
 Melilotus parviflora, Desf. 
 
 ,, alba, Lamk. 
 
 „ officinalis, L. 
 
 Natural Order 44 . — Legum inosi 
 (continued). 
 
 Trifolium repens, L. 
 
 „ pratense, L. 
 
 Lotus corniculatus, L. 
 
 Indigofera linifolia, Retz. 
 trifoliata, L. 
 
 >>• 
 
 trita, L-, 
 
 » 
 
 >» 
 
 jj- 
 
 »> 
 
 )) 
 
 tinctoria, L. 
 pulchella, Roxb. 
 
 Dosua, Ham. 
 
 „ atropurpurea, Plam, 
 
 ,, hirsuta, L. 
 
 „ Girardiana, Wall. 
 
 „ heterantha, Wall. 
 
 Teplirosia purpurea, Pers. 
 
 ,, tenuis, Wall. 
 
 Millettia auriculata, Baker. 
 
 Caragana brevispina, Royle. 
 
 Colutea nepalensis, Sims. 
 
 Astragalus graveolens, Ham. 
 
 ,, tricbocarpus, Grab. 
 
 „ adesmiaefolius, Benth. 
 
 „ Ieucocephalus, Grah. 
 
 hosackioid.es, Bentb. 
 rbizanthus, Royle. 
 Webbianus, Grah. 
 
 ,, multiceps, Wall. 
 
 Oxytropis micropbylla, DC. 
 
 iEscbynomene indica, L. 
 
 Smitbia sensitiva, Ait. 
 
 „ ciliata, Royle. 
 
 Zornia diphylla, Pers. 
 
 Ougeinia dalbergioides, Bentb. 
 
 Desmodium oxyphyllum, DC. 
 
 „ gangeticum, DC. 
 
 ,, laxiflorum, DC. 
 
 „ gyrans, DC. 
 
 „ podocarpum, DC. 
 
 ,, tilisefolium, Don. 
 
 » floribundum, G. Don. 
 
 ,i concinnum, DC. 
 
 ,, polycarpum, DC. 
 
 » parvifolium, DC. 
 
 ,, triflorum, DC. 
 
 Uraria picta, Desv. 
 
 ,, lagopus, DC. 
 
 „ lagopodoides. DC. 
 
 Alysicarpus vaginalis, DC. 
 
 ,, bupleurifolius, DC. 
 
 Lespedeza elegans, Camb. 
 
 „ sericea, Miq. 
 
 » eriocarpa, DC. 
 
 _ )> juneea, Pers. 
 
 Vicia sativa, L. 
 
 „ rigidula, Royle. 
 i) hirsuta, Koch. 
 
 „ tenara, Grah. 
 
 „ tenuifolia, Roth. 
 
 „ tetrasperma, Mcencb. 
 
 Lens esculenta, Mcencb, cultivated 
 
 Lathyrus sativus, L. 
 
 lute us, Bak. 
 
 Apbaca, L. 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 309 
 
 Natural Order ii.—Leguminosa—(concld.) Natural Order io. Rosacea (concld.) 
 
 > cultivated. 
 
 Pisum sativum, L., introduced. 
 
 Abrus precatorius, L. 
 
 Clitoria Ternatea, L. 
 
 Dumasia villosa, DC. 
 
 Shuteria involucrata, W. Sc A. 
 
 Glycine Soja, S. et Z. 
 
 Erythrina arborescens, Roxb. 
 
 „ resupinata, Roxb. 
 
 ,, suberosa, Roxb. 
 
 Mucuna pruriens, DC. 
 
 „ atropurpurea, DC. 
 
 Butea frondosa, Roxb. 
 
 Spatholobus Roxburghii, Benth. 
 
 Pueraria tuberosa, DC. 
 
 Phaseolus Mungo, L. 1 
 
 „ aconitifolius, Jacq. r 
 
 Vigna Catjang, End. / 
 
 Dolichos Lablab, L. V 
 
 Cajanus indicus, L. / 
 
 Atylosia scarabseoides, Benth. 
 
 „ mollis, Benth. 
 
 Rhynchosia minima, DC. 
 
 „ Falconeri, Baker. 
 
 Flemingia semialata, Roxb. 
 
 „ strobilifera, R. Br. 
 
 „ vestita, Benth. 
 
 Dalbergia Sissoo, Roxb. 
 
 „ lanceolaria, L. 
 
 ,, hircina, Benth. 
 
 „ volubilis, Roxb. 
 
 Pongamia glabra, Vent. 
 
 Sophora mollis, Wall. 
 
 Caesalpinia Bonducella, Flemm. 
 
 „ sepiaria, Roxb. 
 
 Cassia Fistuta, L. 
 
 „ Tora, L. 
 
 occidentalis, L. 
 
 Absus, L. 
 pumila, Lamk. 
 
 „ Wallichiana, DC. 
 
 Bauhinia racemosa, Lamk. 
 
 „ variegata, L. 
 
 ,, retusa, Roxb. 
 
 „ Vahlii, W. & A. 
 
 „ purpurea, L. 
 
 Mimosa rubicaulis, Lamk. 
 
 „ pudica, L. Sensitive plant, na 
 turlized. 
 
 Acacia Catechu, Willd. 
 
 „ pennata, Willd. 
 
 „ cassia, W. and A. 
 
 ,, Farnesiana, Willd, naturalized. 
 ,, eburnea, Willd. 
 
 Albizzia lucida, Benth. 
 
 „ Lebbek, Benth. 
 
 odoratissima, Benth. 
 procera, Benth. 
 
 Julibrissin, Boiv. 
 stipulata, Boiv. 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 >■ 
 
 •i 
 
 i) 
 
 >> 
 
 Natural Order 45. — Rosacea. 
 
 Prunus Puddum, Roxb. 
 
 „ Padus, L. 
 
 Prunus domestica, L. Alucha, Plum, in- 
 troduced. 
 
 „ armeniaca L., Zard Alu, 
 Apricot, cultivated. 
 
 Amygdalus persica, L., Aru, Peach, in- 
 troduced. 
 
 Prinsepia utilis, Royle. 
 
 Spiraea canescens, Don. 
 
 „ callosa, Thunb. 
 
 „ Kamtschatica, Pall. ? 
 
 „ sorbifolia, L. 
 
 „ Aruncus, L. 
 
 Rubus acuminatus, Sm. 
 
 „ paniculatus, Sm. 
 
 „ parvifolius, L. 
 
 „ concolor, Wall. 
 
 „ niveus, Wall. 
 
 „ fruticosus, L. 
 
 ,, flavus, Ham. 
 
 „ lasiocarpus, Sm. 
 
 „ rosaefolius, Sm. 
 
 „ biflorus, Ham. 
 
 „ asper, Don. 
 
 Geum elatum, Wall. 
 
 Fragaria indica, Andr. 
 
 „ vesca, L. 
 
 Agrimonia Eupatorium, Linn. 
 
 Potentilla fruticosa, L. 
 
 „ micropliylla, Don. 
 
 „ multifolia, L. 
 
 „ Leschenaultiana, Sm. 
 
 „ fulgens, Wall. 
 
 „ nepalensis, Hook. 
 
 „ atrosanguinea, Lodd. 
 
 „ supina, L. 
 
 „ (Sibbaldia) procumbens, L. 
 
 Rosa Lyellii, Lindl. 
 
 „ moschata, Mill. 
 
 „ Brunonii, Lind. 
 
 „ macrophylla, Lind. 
 
 „ Webbiana, Wall. 
 
 „ sericea, Lind. 
 
 Pyrus Aria, Ehrli. 
 
 „ baccata, L., Gwala Mehal. 
 
 „ variolosa, Wall, Mehal. 
 
 „ communis, L., Nashpati, Pear, 
 cultivated. 
 
 „ Malus L., Seo, Apple, cultivated. 
 ,, ursina, Wall. 
 
 ,, foliolosa, Wall. 
 
 „ Cydonia, L., introduced. 
 Cratsegus Pyracantlia, Pers. 
 
 Cotoneaster acuminata, Lindl. 
 
 „ microphylla, Wall. 
 
 „ bacillaris, Wall. 
 
 „ nummularia, F. et M. 
 
 Natural Order 46. — Saxifragca. 
 
 Astilbe rivularis, Don. 
 
 Saxifraga ligulata, Wall. 
 
 „ Stracheyi, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ imbricata, Royle. 
 
310 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 Natural Order 4G. — Saxifragcce — (concld.) 
 
 Saxifraga ramulosa, Wall. 
 
 „ granulata, L. 
 
 » odontophylla, Willd. 
 
 jj micrantha, Edgw. 
 
 „ pallida, Wall. 
 
 » flagellaris, Willd. 
 
 „ Bruuonis, Wall. 
 
 •> filicaulis, Wall. 
 
 , t brachypoda, Don. 
 
 » diversifolia, Wall. 
 
 » Jacquemontiana, Dene. 
 Chrysosplen ium nepalense, Dene. 
 Parnassia Wightiana, Wall. 
 
 „ nubicola, Wall. 
 
 Hydrangea altissima. Wall. 
 
 Deutzia corymbosa, R. Br. 
 
 ,, staminea, R. Br. 
 
 Philadelphia coronarius, L. 
 
 Itea nutans, Royle. 
 
 Ribes Grossularia, L. 
 
 „ glaciate, Wall. 
 
 „ rubrum, L. 
 
 » nigrum, L. 
 
 Natural Order -17. — Crassulaccce. 
 
 Tillaea pentrandra, Royle. 
 
 Crassula indica, Dene. 
 
 Bryophyllum, calycinum Salisb., in gar- 
 dens. 
 
 Kalanchoe varians, Haw. 
 
 Cotyledon Oreades, Benth. et Hf. 
 
 Sedum crenulatum, hi t'. & t. 
 
 „ quadrifidum, Pall. 
 
 „ Himalense, Don. 
 
 » crassipes, Wall. 
 a elongatum, Wall. 
 
 33 linearifolium, Royle. 
 
 33 pauciflorum, Edgw. 
 
 „ trifidum, Wall. 
 
 ,, rosulatum, Edgw. 
 
 33 adenotrichum, Wall. 
 
 „ Ewersii, Ledeb. 
 ii multicaule. Wall. 
 
 33 Rhodiola, DC. 
 
 Natural Order 48. — Droseracece. 
 
 Drosera peltata Var. lunata, Ham. 
 
 Natural Order 49. — Ilaloragaccce, 
 
 Myriophyllum spicatum, L. 
 
 Natural Order 50. — Cumbretaccce. 
 
 Natural Order 51. — Myracece, 
 
 Eugenia Jambolana, Larnk , Jaman. 
 
 ,, caryophylli folia, Lamk. 
 
 Careya arborea, Roxb. 
 
 Barringtonia acutangula, Gasrtn. 
 
 Natural Order 52. — Melastomacece. 
 
 Osbeckia stellata, Don. 
 
 angustifolia, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 53.— Lythracicce . 
 
 Ammannia rotundifolia, Ham. 
 
 „ vesicatoria, Roxb. 
 
 Woodfordia floribunda, Salisb. 
 Lawsonia alba Lamk., Mehndi, gardens. 
 Lagerstrcemia parviflora, Roxb. 
 
 Punica Granatum, It., wild and cultivat- 
 ed. 
 
 Natural Order 54. — Onagraciece. 
 
 Epilobium tomentosum, Boiss. 
 
 „ roseum, L. 
 
 CEnothera rosea, Sims., 1 
 „ sinuata, L., i naturalized , 
 
 „ grandiflora, ) 
 
 Cireasa Lutetiana, L. 
 
 „ alpina, L. 
 
 Natural Order 55. — Sarny dacccs. 
 
 Casearia tomentosa, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 56.— Cucurbitavccs. 
 
 Trichosanthes cucumerina, I. 
 
 „ palmata, Roxb. 
 
 Luffa cylindrica, Eaud. 
 
 Cucumis Melo. L., cultivated. 
 
 „ sativus, L. „ 
 
 Hardwickii, Royle. 
 
 Citrullus vulgaris, Schrd. 
 
 Bryonia laciniosa, L. 
 
 Mukia scabrelia, Arn. 
 
 Zehneria umbellata, Thw. 
 
 Natural Order 57. — Begoniaceos. 
 
 Begonia pi eta. Wall, 
 i, amcena, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 58. — Datiscaccce. 
 
 Datisca cannabina, L. 
 
 Terminalia belerica, Roxb. Baharia. 
 „ Chebula, Retz . Har. 
 
 33 citrina, Roxb. Harira. 
 
 ii Arjuna, Bedd., Arjan. 
 
 ,, tomentosa, Roxb. Saj. 
 
 Anogeissus latifolia, Wall. 
 Combretum decandrum, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 59. — Ficoidece, 
 
 xuciuiucma penianara, L. 
 
 . crystallina, Yahl. 
 Mollugo hirta, Thunb. 
 
 33 pentaphylla, L. 
 » cerviana, Ser. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 311 
 
 Natural Order 60. — Umbelliferce. 
 
 Hydrocotylc asiatica, L. 
 
 Sanicula europsea, L. 
 
 Bupleurum tenue, Flam. 
 
 „ longicaule, Wall. 
 
 „ Candollei, Wall. 
 
 „ falcatum, L. 
 
 „ marginatum, Wall. 
 
 Apium graveolens, L., introduced. 
 Carum Copticum, Benth. et Hi. Ajwain, 
 cultivated. 
 
 Acronema tenerum, Edgw. 
 
 Pimpinella diversifolia, DC. 
 Chferopliyllum villosum, Wall. 
 
 CEnanthe stolonifera, Wall. 
 
 Selinum Candollei, Bth. et Hf, 
 
 „ Brunonis, DC. 
 
 „ Govanianum, DC. 
 
 ,, angelicoide, DC. 
 
 Heracleum candicans, Wall. 
 
 „ nepalense, Don. 
 
 Peucedanum graveolens, L. Sawa. 
 Coriandrum sativum, L., cultivated. 
 Daucus Carota, L., cultivated. 
 
 Torilis Anthriscus, Gmel. 
 
 Natural Order 61 — Araliacece. 
 
 Aralia cacliemirica, Dene. 
 
 Heteropanax fragrans, Seem. 
 
 Hedera Helix, L. 
 
 Heptapleurum venulosum, Seem. 
 
 Natural Order 62— Cornaceoe. 
 
 Marlea begonitefolia, Roxb. 
 
 Cornus macrophylla, Wall. 
 
 „ oblonga, Wall. 
 
 ,, capitata, Wall. 
 
 Alangium Lamarckii, Thw. 
 
 Natural Order 63. — Cap rifoliacece. 
 
 Abelia triflora, R. Br. 
 
 Leycesteria formosa, Wall. 
 
 Lonicera Myrtillus, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ parvifolia, Edgw. 
 
 „ purpurescens, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ hypoleuca, Dene. 
 
 „ orientalis, Lamk. 
 
 „ alpigena, L, 
 
 „ heteropliylla, Dene. 
 
 „ angustifolia, Wall. 
 
 „ spinma, Jacquem. 
 
 „ quinquel ocularis, Hardw. 
 
 Viburnum cotinifolium, Don. 
 
 ,, stellulatum, Wall. 
 
 „ integerrimum, Wall, 
 
 ,, nervosum, Don. 
 
 ,, coriaceum, Bl. 
 
 Natural Order 64. — JRubiacece. 
 
 Adina cordifolia, Benth. et Hf. 
 Stephegyne parvifolia, Benth. et Hf. 
 Hymenodictyon excelsum, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 64. — JRubiacece— (concld. 
 
 Wendlandia exserta, DC. 
 
 „ puberula, DC. 
 
 Argostemma sarmentosum, Wall. 
 
 ,, verticillatum, Wall. 
 
 Hedyotis Burmanniana, R. Br. 
 
 „ aspera, Heyne. 
 
 „ brachypoda, DC. 
 
 „ gracilis, Wall. 
 
 Randia dumetorum, Lamk. 
 
 „ tetrasperma, Roxb. 
 
 ,, uliginosa, DC. 
 
 Knoxia corymbosa, L. 
 
 Pavetta tomentosa, Sm. 
 
 Gardenia turgida, Roxb. 
 
 Coffera bengalensis, Roxb. 
 
 Hamiltonia suaveolens, Roxb. 
 Leptodormis lanceolata, Wall. 
 Spermacoce articularis, L. 
 
 Galium asperifolium, Wall. 
 
 „ acutum, Edgw. 
 
 „ rotundifolium, L. 
 
 „ sepylloides, Royle. 
 
 „ confertum, Royle. 
 
 „ aparine, L. 
 
 Rubia cordifolia, L. 
 
 Asperula cynanchica, L. 
 
 Natural Order 65. — Valerianae ecu. 
 
 Valeriana Wallichii, DC. 
 
 „ Hardwickii, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 66 — Dipsacece. 
 
 Morina longifolia, Wall. 
 
 ,, breviflora, Edgw. 
 
 Dipsacus inermis, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 67.— Composite . 
 
 Vemonia anthelmintica, Willd. 
 
 ,, cinerea, Less. 
 
 Elephantopus scaber, L. 
 
 Adenostemma viscosum, Forst. 
 n var. elatum, Don. 
 
 !> var. latifolium, Don. 
 
 Eupatorium longicaule, Wall. 
 
 „ Wallichii, DC. 
 
 Solidago Virga-aurea, L. 
 
 Cyathocline lyrata, Cass. 
 Dichrocephala gracilis, DC. 
 
 Grangea madraspatana, Poir. 
 Myriactis nepalensis, Less. 
 
 „ Wallichii, Less. 
 
 Aster alpinus, L. 
 
 „ molliusculus, Benth. 
 
 ., junceus, Benth. 
 
 „ Thomsoni, C. B. Clarke. 
 
 ( = Calimeris fiexuosa, Royle.) 
 
 „ peduncularis, Wall. 
 
 Erigeron acre, L. 
 
 ,, bellidoides, Benth. 
 
 Conyza veronitefolla, Wall. 
 
312 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Natural Order 67 . — Composites (contd.) 
 
 Conyza absinthifolia, DC. 
 
 „ viscidula, Wall. 
 
 Bhmiea lacera, DC. 
 
 ,, runcinata, DC. 
 
 „ bieracifolia, DC. 
 
 Sphaeranthus hirtus, Willd. 
 
 Leontopodium alpinum, Cass. 
 
 Anapbalis cinnamonea, Bentli. 
 
 ,, triplinervis, Sims. 
 
 „ nubigena, DC. 
 
 „ nubigena, var. polycepbala, 
 C. B. Clarke. 
 
 „ chionantba, DC. 
 
 „ araneosa, DC. 
 
 Gnapbalium multiceps, Wall. 
 
 „ indicum, L. 
 
 Csesulia axillaris, Roxb. 
 
 Inula vestita, Wall. 
 
 „ nervosa, Wall. 
 
 „ barbata, Wall. 
 
 „ Cappa, DC. 
 
 Carpesium cernuum, L. 
 
 „ abrotanoides, L. 
 
 Siegesbeckia orientals, L. 
 
 Eclipta erecta, L. 
 
 Bidens tripartita, L. 
 
 Allardia tridactylites, Ilf. & T. 
 
 Cotula anthemoides, L. 
 
 Tanacetum tliibeticum, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ longifolium, Wall. 
 
 Artemisia vestita, Wall. 
 
 „ vulgaris, L. 
 
 Senecio deniflorus, Wall. 
 
 „ graciliflorus, DC. 
 
 „ laciniosus, Wall. 
 
 „ coronopifolius, Desf. 
 
 „ alatus, Wall. 
 
 „ rufinervis, DC. 
 
 „ Kunthianus, Wall. 
 
 ,, Candolleanus, Wall. 
 
 Ecliinops niveus, Wall. 
 
 „ echinatus, Roxb. 
 
 Arctium Lappa, Willd. 
 
 Saussurea obvallata, Wall. 
 
 „ taraxacifolia, Wall. 
 
 „ Kunthiana, Wall. 
 
 „ depressa, Wall. 
 
 „ graminifolia, Wall. 
 
 „ Candolleana, Wall. 
 
 „ carthamoides, Bentli, 
 
 „ albescens, Hf. & T, 
 
 „ candicans, DC. 
 
 „ Roylei, DC. 
 
 Jurinea macrocephala, Bentli. 
 
 Serratula pallida, DC. 
 
 Tricholepis elongata, DC. 
 
 Leucomeris spectabilis, DC. 
 
 Aiuslhea pteropoda, DC. 
 
 „ aptera, DC. 
 
 Gerbera lanuginosa, Bentli. et Hf. 
 
 Berniera nepalensis, DC. 
 
 Tragopogon junceum, Wall. 
 
 Youngia lyrata, Cass. 
 
 Natural Order 67. — Composites — 
 (concluded). 
 
 Lactuca graciliflora, Wall. 
 
 „ Brunouiana, Wall. 
 
 „ hastata, DC. 
 
 „ macrantha, Bentli. et Hf. 
 
 „ longifolia, DC. 
 
 „ auriculata, DC. 
 
 „ sagittata. Hf. & T. 
 
 ,, Tatarica, Bentli. 
 
 Prenantlies hispidula, DC. 
 Taraxacum Dens-leonis, Desf. 
 Crepis foetida, L. 
 
 Mulgedium Tataricum, DC. 
 Microrliynchus sarmentosus, DC. 
 Gynura nepalensis, DC. 
 
 Emilia soncliifolia, DC. 
 
 Doronicum Roylei, DC. 
 
 Natural Order 68. — Camjjanulacea. 
 
 Cyanantlius integer, Wall. 
 
 „ linifolius, Wall. 
 
 Waldenbergia agrestis, A. DC. 
 Campanula latifolia, L. 
 
 „ sylvatica, Wall. 
 
 ,, canescens, Wall. 
 
 „ colorata, Wall. 
 
 Lobelia trigona, Roxb. 
 
 „ pyramidalis, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 69. — Ericaccm. 
 
 rernettya repens, Zoll. 
 
 Andromeda ovalifolia, Wall. 
 Rhododendron barbatum, Wall. 
 
 „ campanulatum, Don. 
 
 ,, arboreum, Sm. 
 
 „ lepidotum, Wall. 
 
 „ anthopogon, Don. 
 
 Cassiope fastigiata, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 70. — Primulaceas. 
 
 Primula 
 
 floribunda, Wall. 
 
 
 petiolaris, Wall, 
 purpurea, Royle. 
 
 
 
 rosea, Royle. 
 
 
 minutissima, Wall. 
 
 » 
 
 involucrata, Wall. 
 
 55 
 
 sibirica, Jacq. 
 
 55 
 
 denticulata, Wall. 
 
 AndooSace sarmentosa, Wall. 
 
 ,, Jacquemontii, Duby. 
 
 „ rotundifolia, Hardw. 
 
 „ incisa, Wall. 
 
 „ elegans, Duby. 
 
 Lysimachia lobelioides, Wall. 
 
 „ pyramidalis, Wall. 
 
 „ evalvis, Wall. 
 
 „ japonica, Thumb. 
 
 Anagallis arvensis, L. 
 
 Micropyxis pumila, Duby. 
 
 Samolus Valerandi, L. 
 
OF THE NORTII-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 313 
 
 Natural Order 71.- Myrsinea. 
 
 Mresa indica, A. DC. 
 
 „ argeutea, Wall. 
 
 JEmbelia robusta, Roxb. 
 
 Myrsine semiserrata, Wall, 
 
 „ bifaria, Wall. 
 
 Ardisia humilis, Vahl. 
 
 „ iloribunda, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 72. — Sapotacca. 
 
 Bassia butyracea, Roxb. 
 
 „ latifolia, Roxb , at lorn eleva- 
 tions : planted. 
 
 Natural Order 1$.— Menace*. 
 
 Diospvros exsculpta, Ham. 
 
 „ " Melanoxylon, Roxb. 
 
 „ montana, Roxb. 
 
 r/t Embryopteris. Pers. 
 
 Natural Order li.—Styraeecz. 
 
 Symplocos cratasgoides, Ham. 
 
 „ spicata, Roxb. 
 
 „ racemosa, Roxb. 
 
 „ ramosissima, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 75. — Jasminea. 
 
 Jasminum laurifolium, Roxb. 
 
 „ pubescens, Willd. 
 
 punetatum, Wall, 
 arboreseens. Roxb. 
 
 „ latifolium, Roxb. 
 
 „ dispermum, Wall. 
 
 „ revolutum, Sims. 
 
 „ pubigerum, Don. 
 
 officinale, L. 
 
 ,, grandifiorum, L. 
 
 „ Zarnbac, Ait., cultivated. 
 
 Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis, L. 
 
 Natural Order l&.—Oleace*. 
 
 Fraxinus floribunda, Wall. 
 
 Ligustrum nepalense, W all. 
 
 „ compactum, Hf. & T. 
 
 Olea cuspidata, Wall. 
 
 „ glandulif era , Wall. 
 
 Cliionanthus macro phylla, Wall. 
 Syringa emodi, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 77. — Apocyne a>. 
 
 Clarissa diffusa, Roxb. 
 
 Opbioxylon serpentinum, Willd. 
 Tabernsemontana coronaria, R. Br. 
 Vinca pusilla, Murr. 
 
 Vallaris dicbotoma, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 77.— Apocynece— (concld). 
 
 Wrightia mollissima, Wall. 
 
 Holarrhena antidysenterica, Wall. 
 Alstonia scbolaris, R. Br. 
 
 Nerium odorum, Solander. 
 
 Cbonemorplia macrophylla, G. Don. 
 Ichnocarpus fragrans, Wall. 
 
 „ frutescene, R. Br. 
 
 Natural Order 7 8 . — Asclepiadaceas. 
 
 Cryptolepis elegans, Wall. 
 Vincetoxicum canescens, Dene. 
 
 „ montanum, Dene. 
 
 Calotropis procera, R. Br. 
 
 Dmmia extensa, R. Br. 
 
 •Periploca calopliylla, Falc, 
 
 Tyloplrora carnosa, WalL 
 Marsdenia Roylei, Wight. 
 
 Pergularia -odoratissima, L. 
 
 Orthanthera viminea, Wight. 
 
 Hoya parasitica, Wall. 
 
 Ceropegia longifolia, Wall. 
 
 ,, lanceolata, Wight. 
 
 Natural Order 79. — Loyaniaaecs, 
 
 Gardneria angustifolia, Wall, 
 
 Buddleia paniculata, Wall. 
 
 „ asiatica, Lour, 
 
 Natural Order 80. — Gemtianacex. 
 
 Exacum tetragonum, Roxb. 
 
 „ pedunculatum, L. 
 
 Canscora decussata, R. et S. 
 
 „ diffusa, R. Br. 
 
 Gentiana tenella, Fries. 
 
 „ pedicellata, Wall. 
 
 „ argentea, Royle. 
 t) capitata, Ham. 
 
 „ decemfida, Ham. 
 
 ,, marginata, Griseb. 
 
 )f venusta, Wall. 
 
 „ depressa, Don. 
 
 „ Kurroo, Royle. 
 
 Crawfurdia fasciculata, Wall. 
 
 Ophelia cordata, Don. 
 
 „ lurida, Don. 
 
 purpurascens. Don. 
 
 „ nervosa, Wall. 
 
 „ pulchella, Don. 
 
 angustifolia, Don. 
 
 ,, Chirayta, Griseb. 
 
 Halenia elliptica, Don. 
 
 Swertia speciosa, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 81,—Bignoniacea, 
 
 Calosanthes indica, Bl. 
 Stereospermum chelonoides, DC. 
 
 suaveolens, DC. 
 
 40 
 
314 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Natural Order 82. — Pedaliacece. 
 
 Martyniaproboscidia, Glox, naturalized. 
 
 Sesamum indicum, L., Till, cultivated. 
 
 Natural Order 83. — Convolvulacect. 
 
 Argyreia speciosa, Sweet. 
 
 „ capitata, Choisy. 
 
 „ setosa, Choisy. 
 
 Quamoclit coccinea, Mcench, | 
 
 » vulgaris, Choisy, 
 
 Patatas pentaphylla, Choisy. 
 
 Pharbitis Nil, Choisy. 
 
 Calonyction speciosum, Choisy. 
 
 Ipomoea Pes-tigridis, L. 
 
 „ Turpethum, R. Br. 
 
 „ vitifolia, Sweet. 
 
 „ pilosa, Sweet. 
 
 ,, sessilillora, Choisy. 
 
 Convolvulus pluricaulis, Vahl. 
 
 Porana paniculata, Roxb. 
 
 ,, racemosa, Roxb. 
 
 E volvulus alsinoides, L. 
 
 Cuscuta reflexa, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 84. — Boraginacece. 
 
 Gynaion vestitum, A. DC. 
 
 Cordia Rothii, R. et S. 
 
 „ Myxa, L. 
 
 „ latifolia. Roxb. 
 
 Ehretia laevis, Roxb. 
 
 „ serrata, Roxb. 
 
 Rhabdia viminea, Dalz. 
 
 Heliotropium ovalifolium, Vahl. 
 
 „ strigosum, Willd. 
 
 Macrotomia Benthami, DC. 
 
 Mertensia echioides, Hf. and T. 
 
 Mvosotis caespitosa, Schult. 
 
 ,, rotundifolia, R. Br. 
 
 Eritriehium rotundifolium, DC. 
 
 ,, sericeum, Rojde. 
 
 „ spathulatum Royle. 
 
 Echinospormum glochidiatum, DC. 
 
 Cynoglossum furcatum, Wall. 
 
 ,, micranthum, DC. 
 
 „ longiflorum, Benth. 
 
 ,, grandiflorum, Royle. 
 
 Trichodesma indicum, R. Br. 
 
 Natural Order 85. — Salanace at . 
 
 Solanum tuberosum, L., Potato, intro- 
 duced. 
 
 Solanum nigrum, L. 
 
 „ verbascifolum, L. 
 
 „ sanctum, L. 
 
 ,, xanthocarpum, Schr. 
 
 „ indicum, L. 
 
 Pbysalis minima, L. 
 
 Natural Order 85. — Solanaceaz. — (conehL) 
 
 Physalis Peruviana, L., introduced and 
 almost naturalized. 
 
 Capsicum frutescens, L., LAl-mireli, 
 Chilli, introduced and naturalized. 
 Nicandra physaloides, Gasrtn, natur- 
 alized. 
 
 Withania somnifera, Don. 
 
 Nicotiana Tabacum, L., Tamaku, intro- 
 duced and naturalized . 
 
 Datura Stramonium, L. 
 
 „ fastuosa, L. 
 
 Natural Order 86. — Scrop hula riaoecs. 
 
 Verbascum Thapsus, L. 
 
 Celsia coromandeliana, L. 
 
 Linaria ramosissima, Wall. 
 
 Antirrhinum Orontium, L. 
 
 Mimulus nepalensis, Wall. 
 
 „ gracilis R. Br. 
 
 Mazus surculosus, Don. 
 
 „ rugosus, Lour. 
 
 Lindenbergia grandiflora, Benth. 
 f, urticmfolia, Lehm. 
 
 » macrostachya, Benth. 
 
 Limnophila gratioloides, R. Br. 
 Herpestis Hamiltoniana, Benth. 
 
 „ Monnieria, H. B. K. 
 
 Torenia cordifolia, Roxb. 
 
 Vandellia Crustacea, Benth. 
 
 Bonnaya brachiata, Link. 
 
 „ veronicasfolia, Spr. 
 
 Hemiphragma heterophyllum, Wall. 
 Scoparia dulcis, L., naturalized. 
 Veronica Anagallis, L. 
 
 „ Beccabunga, L. 
 
 „ deltigera, Wall. 
 
 „ lanosa, Benth. 
 
 „ alpina, L. 
 
 „ biloba, L. 
 
 „ agrestis, L. 
 
 Buchnera hispida, Lamk. 
 
 Striga euphrasioides, Benth. 
 
 „ densiflora, Benth. 
 
 „ hirsuta, Benth. 
 
 Leptorhabdos parviflora, Benth. 
 Sopubia trifida, Don. 
 
 Euphrasia officinalis, L. 
 
 Picrorhiza Kurrooa, Royle. 
 
 Pedicularis tubiflora, Fiscli. 
 
 „ carnosa, Wall. 
 
 „ pectinata, Wall. 
 
 „ pyramidata, Royle. 
 
 „ gracilis, wall. 
 
 „ porrecta, Wall. 
 
 „ abrotanifolia, Bieh. 
 
 „ megalantha, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 87.— Lentibulariee, 
 
 Utricularia flexuosa, Vahl. 
 
OE THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 315 
 
 y> 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 Natural Order 88. — Orobanchece. 
 
 Phelipsea indica, G. Don. 
 
 JSginetia indica, Roxb, 
 
 Natural Order 89. — 6fes>ieraceoe. 
 
 Didymocarpus snbalternans, Wall. 
 
 atomaticus, Wall, 
 macrophyllus, Wall, 
 pedicellatus, R. Br. 
 
 ,, lanuginosus, Wall. 
 
 Chirita bifolia, Don. 
 
 Rhynchoglossum obliquum. Bl. 
 Platystemma violoides, Wall. 
 Lysionotus fernifolius, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 90- — Acanthacece. 
 
 Thunbergia grandiflora, Roxb. 
 
 „ coccinea, Wall. 
 
 Ebermaiera glauca, N. ab. E. 
 Hygrophila polysperma, T. Anders. 
 
 „ spinosa, T. Anders. 
 
 Petalidium barlerioides, N. ab E. 
 HemigraphiS’ Pavala, T. Anders. 
 Strobilanthes auriculatus, N. ab E. 
 
 „ glutinosus, T. Anders. 
 
 alatus, N. ab E. 
 
 „ Wallichii, N. ab E. 
 
 „ isophyllus, T. Anders. 
 
 „ anisophyllus, T. Anders. 
 
 Jiehmanthera Wallichii, N. ab E. 
 Dfedalacanthus nervosus, T. Anders. 
 Barleria cristata, L. 
 
 Lepidagathis cuspidata, N. ab E. 
 
 )t purpuricaulis, N. ab E. 
 
 t> hyalina, N. ab E. 
 
 fasciculata, N. ab E. 
 Phlogacanthus tliyrsiflorus, N. ab E. 
 Justicia Adhatoda, L. 
 
 „ peploides, T. Anders, 
 
 ,, procumbens, L. 
 
 Ruugia pectinata, N. ab E. 
 
 ., repens, N. ab E. 
 
 Dicliptera Roxburghiana, N. ab E. 
 Peristrophe bicalyculata, N. ab E. 
 speciosa,N. ab E. 
 
 Natural Order 91. — Verhenacer. 
 
 Verbena officinalis, L. 
 
 Lippia nodiflora. Rich. 
 
 Lantana alba, Mill. 
 
 Premna viburnoides, Wall. 
 
 „ mucronata, Roxb. 
 
 „ barbata, Wall. 
 
 ,, herbacea, Roxb. 
 
 Caliicarpa arborea, Roxb. 
 
 ,, macrophylla, Vahl. 
 Clerodendron serratum, Spr. 
 
 „ infortunatum, L. 
 
 ,, Siphonanthus, R. Br. 
 
 Natural Order 91.- — Verbenaccae. 
 
 • — (concluded). 
 
 Caryopteris Wallichiana, Schauer. 
 
 Gmelina arborea, Roxb. 
 
 Vitex Negundo, L. 
 
 Hclmskioldia sanguinea, Retz. 
 
 Natural Order 92. — Labiatt e. 
 
 Ocimum canum, L. 
 
 „ sanctum, L, naturalized. 
 
 Orthosiphon rubicundus, Benth. 
 
 Plectranthus scroj^hularioides. Wall. 
 
 ,, striatus, Benth. 
 
 „ Coetsa, Don. 
 
 „ ternifolius, Don. 
 
 ,, cordifolius, Don. 
 
 Coleus barbatus, Benth. 
 
 Pogostemon plectranthoides, Desf. 
 
 Dysophylla cruciata, Benth. 
 
 „ purnila, Benth. 
 
 Colebrookia oppositifolia, Sm. 
 
 Elsholtzia polystachya, Benth. 
 
 „ flava, Benth. 
 
 „ incisa, Benth. 
 
 „ eriostachya, Benth. 
 
 ,, strobilifera, Benth. 
 
 Mentha arvensis, L. 
 
 ,, incana, Willd, var. Hoylean a, 
 
 Benth. 
 
 Origanum normale, Don. 
 
 Melissa calamintha, L. 
 
 Micromeria biflora, Benth. 
 
 Hedeoma nepalensis, Benth. 
 
 Salvia glutinosa, L. 
 
 ,, Moorcroftiana, Wall. 
 
 » ■ ,, lanata, Roxb. 
 
 ,, plebeja. R. Br. 
 
 Nepeta spicata, Benth. 
 
 „ distans, Boyle. 
 
 ,, ciliaris, Royle. 
 
 „ ruderalis, Ham. 
 
 „ leucophylla, Benth. 
 
 ,, Govaniana. Benth. 
 
 Lailemantia Royleana, Benth. 
 
 Anisomeles ovata, R. Br. 
 
 Prunella vulgaris, L. 
 
 Scutellaria grossa, Benth. 
 
 „ repens, Ham. 
 
 „ linearis, Benth. 
 
 ,, scandens, Don. 
 
 Carniotome versicolor, Benth. 
 
 Leonurus Royleanus, Benth. 
 
 ,, pubescens, Benth, 
 
 „ cardiacus, L. 
 
 Lamium amplexicaule, L. 
 
 „ petiolatum, Royle. 
 
 Colquhounia coccinea, Wall. 
 
 Stachys sericea, Wall. 
 
 „ splendens. Wall. 
 
 Roylea elegans, Wall. 
 
 Leucas urticaefolia, R. Br. 
 
 „ Lanata, Benth. 
 
 ,, mollissima, Wall. 
 
318 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS' 
 
 Natural Order 92 . — Labiata 
 — (concluded). 
 
 Leucas diffusa, Benth. 
 
 „ hyssopifolia, Benth, 
 
 „ cephalotes, Spr, 
 
 Leon otis nepetsefolia, R. Br. 
 
 Phlomis lamiifolia, Royle. 
 Eremostachys superba, Royle, 
 
 Ajuga remota, Benth. 
 
 „ bracteosa, Wall, 
 
 Teucrium Royleanum, Benth. 
 
 „ quadrifarium, Ham. 
 
 Natural Order 93, — Plantaginece . 
 
 Plantago major, L. 
 
 „ Ispaghula, Ro-xb. 
 
 Natural Order 94. — Chen opodia eea. 
 
 Chenopodium album, L. 
 
 ,, Botrys, L. 
 
 Natural Order 95. — Pasellaceai. 
 
 Basella rubra, L. cultivated and natu- 
 ralized. 
 
 Natural Order 96. — Aniarantacea. 
 
 Deeringia celosioides, Moq. 
 
 Rodetia Amherstiana, Moq. 
 
 Celosia argentea, Moq. 
 
 Amaran thus caudatus. L. cultivated and 
 naturalized. 
 
 Amaranthus paniculatus, Moq. 
 
 Gangeticus, L. 
 
 » frumentaceus, Roxb, Ram- 
 
 dan a, Anardana, culti- 
 vated and naturalized. 
 
 ,, spinosus, L. 
 
 iErua scandens, Wall. 
 
 ,, lanata, Juss. 
 
 Achyranthes aspera, L. 
 
 Digera arvensis, Forsk. 
 
 Pupalia Iappacea, DC. 
 
 Cyathula prostrata, Bl. 
 
 Alternanthera sessilis, R. Br. 
 
 Natural Order 97. — Nyctagineae. 
 
 Boerhaavia diffusa, L. 
 
 Mirabilis Jala pa, L., introduced and na- 
 turalized. 
 
 Natural Order 98.—P7iytolaccaccce. 
 
 Pircunia Latbenia, Moq. 
 
 Natural Order 99. — Polygonacetx. 
 
 Rumex Walliehii, Meissn. 
 
 „ nepalensis, Spr, 
 
 „ hastatus, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 99. — Polygonace'a. 
 
 — (concluded). 
 
 Rumex vesicarius, L. 
 
 Koenigia Islandica, L. 
 
 Rheum emodi, Wall. 
 
 „ himalense, Royle. 
 
 Polygonum Roxburghii, Meissn. 
 
 ,, plebeium, R. Br. 
 
 „ herniarioides, Del. 
 
 „ recumbens, Royle, 
 
 „ aviculare, L. 
 
 „ barbatum, L. 
 
 „ amphibium, L. 
 
 „ lapithifolium, L. 
 
 » sphEerostachyum, Meissn. 
 
 r , amplexicaule, Don. 
 
 „ vaccinsefolium, Wall. 
 
 f , affine, Don. 
 
 nepalense, Meissn. 
 
 „ sphterocephalum, Don, 
 
 ,, capitatum, Ham, 
 
 ,) chinense, L. 
 
 „ pterocarpum, Wall. 
 
 , , ru mi cifol i um . Royl e . 
 
 Fagopyrum esculentum, Mcench. 
 
 „ cymosum, Meissn. 
 
 n tataricum, Gaertn. 
 
 Natural Order 100. — Laurinctt. 
 
 Cinnamomum Tamala, N. ab E., var. 
 albiflorum, Tejpat. 
 
 Phoebe lanceolata, N. ab E. 
 
 „ pallida. N. ab E. 
 
 Machilus odoratissimus, N. ab E. 
 
 Tetranthera Roxburghii, N. ab E*. 
 yy monopetala, Roxb. 
 
 Litssa consimilis, N. ab E. 
 
 „ lanuginosa, N. ab E. 
 
 Natural Order IQl.—Thymelacea. 
 
 Daphne papyracea. Wall. 
 
 Wikstrcemia virgata, Meissn. 
 
 Natural Order 102. — Loranthacew » 
 
 Loranthus ligustrinus, Wall. 
 
 » pulverulentus, Wall. 
 
 >> vestitus, Wall. 
 
 yy longiflorus, Desv. 
 
 yy cordifolius, Wall. 
 
 Viscum album, L. 
 
 „ articulatum, Burm. 
 
 „ attenuatum, D.C, 
 
 Natural Order 103.' — Elceagnees. 
 
 Hippophae salicifolia, Don. 
 
 E laeagnus umbellata, Thumb. 
 
 „ latifolia, L. 
 
 Natural Order 104. — Santalaccz. 
 
 Osyris arborea, Wall. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 317 
 
 Natural Order 105. — Aristolochiacea. 
 Aristolochia bracteata, Retz. 
 
 Natural Order 106. — Euphorbiacea. 
 
 Pbyllanthus nepalensis. Milll. 
 
 „ parvifolins, Wall. 
 
 „ velutinus, Mull. 
 
 „ Miruri, L. 
 
 „ Emblica, L & 
 
 Antidesma diandrum, Tine. 
 
 Securinega obovata, Mull. 
 
 „ Leucopyrus, Mull. 
 
 Putranjiva Roxburghii, Wall. 
 Andrachne cordifolia, Milll. 
 
 Bischoffia javanica, Bl. 
 
 Briedelia montana, Willd. 
 
 „ stipularis, Bl. 
 
 Croton oblongifolius, Roxb., Introduced. 
 Trewia nudiflora, Willd. 
 
 Mallotus philippinensis, Mu.ll, (Rottlera 
 tinctoria, Roxb). 
 
 Ricinus communis, L., cultivated. 
 Homonoya riparia, Lour. 
 
 BaKospermum polyandrum, Wight. 
 Exccecaria insignis, Milll. 
 
 Euphorbia indica. Lamk. 
 
 „ pilulifera, L. 
 
 „ neriifolia, L. 
 
 „ Sikkimensis, Boiss. 
 
 „ longifolia, Don. 
 
 ,, Helioscopia, L. 
 
 „ nepalensis, Boiss. 
 
 „ Nivulia, Ham. 
 
 ,, Royleana, Boiss. 
 
 Sarcococca pruniformis, Lindl. 
 
 Natural Order 107. — Cupulifera. 
 
 Quercus 
 
 semecarpifolia, Sm. 
 
 99 
 
 Ilex, L. 
 
 9) 
 
 dilatata, Lindl. 
 
 J) 
 
 lanuginosa, Don. 
 
 9) 
 
 incana Roxb. 
 
 
 an nu lata, Sm. 
 
 Natural Order 108. — JMyricicea. 
 
 Myrica sapida, Wall, 
 
 Natural Order 109. — Betulacea. 
 
 Betula Bhojpattra, Wall. 
 
 ,, acuminata, Wall. 
 
 „ nitida, Don. 
 
 Alnus nepalensis, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 1 10.— Corylacea. 
 
 Carpinus viminea, Wall. 
 
 „ faginea, Lindl. 
 
 Cory 1 us Colurna, Linn. 
 
 Natural Order 111. — Juylandea. 
 Juglans regia, L. 
 
 Engelhardtia Colebrookiana, Lindl, 
 
 Natural Order 112. — Salic inca. 
 
 Salix tetrasperma, Roxb. 
 
 „ babylonica, L., introduced. 
 
 ,, elegans, Wall. 
 
 „ daphnoides, L. 
 
 „ flabellaris, Anders. 
 
 „ Lindleyana, Wall. 
 
 Pop ulus ciliata, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 113. — UrticacecE. 
 
 Ulmus integrifolia, Roxb. 
 
 ,. erosa, Roth. 
 
 Celtis caucasica, Willd. 
 
 „ australis, L. 
 
 Sponia politoria, Planch. 
 
 ,, orientalis, Planch. 
 
 Cannabis sativa, L. 
 
 Urtica parvi flora, Roxb. 
 
 Girardinia lieterophylla, Dene. 
 
 Pilea scripta, Wedd. 
 
 Lecanthus peduncularis, Wedd. 
 Elatostemma sessile, Forst. 
 
 „ diversitolium, W edd. 
 
 „ Stracheyanum, Wedd. 
 
 Bcehmeria rugulosa, Wedd. 
 
 „ macrophylla, Don. 
 
 „ platyphylla, Don. 
 
 Pouzolzia indica, Gaud. 
 
 „ viminea, Wedd. 
 
 Debregeasia longifolia, Wedd- 
 „ bicolor, Wedd. 
 
 Memorialis pentandra, W edd. 
 
 ,, liirta, Wedd. 
 
 Villebrunea frutescens, Bl. 
 
 Maoutia Puya, Wedd. 
 
 Cudrania javanensis, Tree. 
 
 Streblus asper, Lour. 
 
 Morus atropurpnrea, Roxb , introduced. 
 „ lasvigata, Wall. 
 
 ,, indica, L. 
 
 „ alba, Willd, cultivated. 
 
 Ficus bengalcnsis, L., Bar. 
 
 „ infectoria, Willd. 
 
 „ religiosa, L., Pipal. 
 
 „ cordifolia, Roxb. 
 
 „ nem oralis. Wall. 
 
 „ caudata, Wall. 
 
 „ scandens, Roxb. 
 
 „ foveolata, Wall. 
 
 „ tuberculata, Wall. 
 
 „ Roxburghii, Wall, 
 
318 Himalayan districts' 
 
 Natural Order 113. — Urticacece. 
 — (concluded). 
 
 Ficus hispida, L. f. 
 
 „ Cunia, Ham. 
 
 „ glomerata, Willd , Gular. 
 
 ,, Carica, L. introduced. 
 
 „ virgata, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 114. — Piperacece. 
 
 Peperomia reflexa, Dietr. 
 
 Natural Order 115. — Gnetaceai. 
 
 Ephedra vulgaris, Rich. 
 
 Natural Order 116. — Conifer re. 
 
 Pinus longifolia, Roxb. 
 
 ,, Gerardiana, Wall. 
 
 „ excelsa, Wall. 
 
 Abies Webbiana, Lindl. 
 
 „ Smithiana, Forbes. 
 
 Cedrus Deodara, Loud. 
 
 Cupressus torulosa, Don. 
 
 Juniperus communis, L. 
 
 „ excelsa, Bieb. 
 
 „ recur va, Ham. 
 
 Taxus baccata, L. 
 
 Natural Order 117. — Palmaceee. 
 
 Phoenix acaulis, Roxb. 
 
 „ sylvestris, Roxb. 
 
 Chamaerops Martiana, Wall. 
 Calamus Koyleanus, Griff. 
 
 Wallichia densiflora, Mart. 
 
 Natural Order 118. — Aroidece. 
 
 Arisaema Jacquemontii, Bl. 
 
 „ utile, Hf. & T. 
 
 „ costatum, Mart. 
 
 „ speciosum, Mart. 
 
 ,, curvatum, Kunth. 
 
 Sauromatum guttatum, Schott. 
 Remusatia vivipara, Schott. 
 Amorphophallus campanulatus, Bl. 
 Colocasia, species. 
 
 Scindapsus officinalis, Schott. 
 
 „ decursiva, Schott. 
 
 Typhonium, species. 
 
 Pothos scandens, L. 
 
 Acorus calamus, L. 
 
 Natural Order 119. — Lemanacece 
 
 Lemna minor, L. 
 
 „ polyrrhiza, L. 
 
 Natural Order 120. — Typacece. 
 
 Typha elepliantina, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 121. — Juncayinacete. 
 
 Potamogeton pectinatus, L. 
 
 Aponogeton monostachyus, Roxb. 
 
 Natural Order 122. — Scitamineee. 
 
 Globba Orixensis, Roxb. 
 
 Zingiber capitatum, Roxb. 
 
 „ Caisumunar, Roxb. 
 
 „ ligulatum, Roxb. 
 
 Curcuma angustifolia, Roxb. 
 
 „ Zerumbet, Roxb. 
 
 Roscoea elata, Sm. 
 
 „ alpina, Roxb. 
 
 „ spicata, Sm. 
 
 ,, purpurea, Sm. 
 
 Amomum subulatum, Roxb. 
 
 Hedychium coronarium, L., in gardens. 
 
 „ spicatum, Sm, 
 
 „ coccineum, Ham. 
 
 Costus speciosus, L. 
 
 Musa paradisiaca, L. plantain, cultivated. 
 „ nepalensis, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 123. — Orchidacece. 
 
 Oberonia iridifolia, Lindl. 
 
 Dienia cylindrostachva, L. 
 
 Liparis obcordata, Yalil. 
 
 Ccelogyne cristata, Lindl. 
 
 ,, ocellata, Lindl. 
 
 „ ovalis, Lindl. 
 
 Eria convallarioides, Lindl. 
 
 „ alba, Lindl. 
 
 „ flava, Lindl. 
 
 Dendrobium eriseflorum, Gritf. 
 
 alpestre, Royle. 
 
 Otochilus, species. 
 
 Apaturia Smithiana, Lindl. 
 
 Eulophia, campestris, L. 
 
 „ harbacea, Lindl. 
 
 Cyrtopera fusca, Wight. 
 
 Vanda cristata, Lindl. 
 
 Saccolabium guttatum, Lindl. 
 
 „ Gharwalicum, Reiclib. f. 
 
 Aerides affine, Wall. 
 
 ,, odoratum, I, owe. 
 
 „ Hystrix, Lindl. 
 
 „ ditforme, Wall. 
 
 Calanthe puberula, Lindl. 
 
 Orchis latifolia, L. 
 
 Gymnadenia cucullata, Rich. 
 
 „ spathulata, Lindl. 
 
 Aceras angustifolia, Lindl. 
 
 Platanthera orchidis, Lindl. 
 
 „ clavigera, Lindl. 
 
 „ obcordata, Lindl. 
 
 „ Susanna, Lindl. 
 
 „ Candida, Lindl 
 
 „ acuminata, Lindl. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROYINCFS 
 
 319 
 
 Natural Order 123. — Orchidacea 
 — (concluded). 
 
 Gamoplexis orobanchoides, Falc. 
 Epipactis latifolia, Sw. 
 
 „ macrostacliya, Lindl. 
 
 Spirantbes australis, R. Br. 
 
 Habenaria pectinata, Lindl. 
 
 „ intermedia, Don. 
 
 „ marginata, Lindl. 
 
 „ longifolia, Lindl. 
 
 Peristylus Goodyeroides Lindl. 
 Herminium Monorchis, Sw. 
 
 „ species. 
 
 Satyrium nepalense, Don. 
 
 Monocbilus flavus, Wall. 
 
 Tripleura pallida, Lindl. 
 
 Goodyera marginata, Lindl. 
 Cypripedium cordigerum, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 124 ,~—lridaceaa. 
 
 Iris sulcata, Wall. 
 
 „ decora, Wall. 
 
 „ Ramaonensis, Wall. 
 
 ,, nepalensis, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 125 — .Amaryllidacece. 
 
 Crinum toxicarium, Roxb. 
 
 „ amcenum, Roxb. 
 
 Cnrculigo recurvata, Roxb. 
 
 Hypoxis aurea, Lour. 
 
 „ orchioides, Kz. 
 
 Natural Order 126. — Dioseoreee. 
 
 Dioseorea deltoidea, Wall. 
 
 „ sagittata, Royle. 
 
 „ pentaphylla, L. 
 
 Natural Order 127. — Liliacea. 
 
 Tulipa stelleta, Hook. 
 
 Gagea thesioides, Fisch. 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 Iphigenia indica, Kth. 
 
 Lloydia serotina, Reichb. 
 
 Fritillaria cirrhosa, Don. 
 
 „ verticillata, Royle. 
 
 Lilium giganteum, Wall. 
 
 „ Wallichianum, R. et. S. 
 
 „ nepalense, Wall. 
 
 „ Thomsonianum, Ilf. 
 
 „ roseum, L. 
 
 Gloriosa superba, L. 
 
 Allium. Victoriale, L. 
 
 „ Wallichii, Kth. 
 
 „ tuberosum, Roxb. 
 
 „ Govanianum, Wall. 
 
 „ consanguineum, Kth. 
 
 „ rubens, Schrced. 
 
 j Natural Order 127. — Liliacea. — (concld.) 
 
 Urginea indica, Kunth. 
 
 Asphodelus clavatus, Roxb. 
 
 Asparagus racemosus, Willd. 
 
 „ tllicinus, Ham. 
 
 Polygonatum multiflorum, All 
 „ sibii’icum, Red. 
 
 i „ verticillatum, All. 
 
 Fliiggea intermedia, Sch. 
 
 „ Wallichiana, Kth. 
 
 Smilax maculata, Roxb. 
 
 „ elegans. Wall. 
 
 „ macrophylla, Roxb. 
 
 „ ovalifolia, Roxb. 
 
 Paris polyphylla, Sm. 
 
 Trillidium Govanianum, Kth. 
 
 Disporum Pitsutum, Don. 
 
 „ calcaratum, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 128. — Alismacea. 
 
 Alisma Plantago, L. 
 
 ,, reniforme, Don. 
 
 Sagittaria sagittifolia, L. 
 
 Natural Order 129. — Pontedsra.:ece, 
 
 Monochoria hastata, Presl. 
 
 Natural Order 130. — Commelynacex. 
 
 Cyanotis axillaris, R. et S. 
 
 „ barbata Don. 
 
 Commelyna salicifolia, Roxb. 
 
 ., bengalensis, L. 
 
 „ obliqua, Ham. 
 
 Aneilema lierbaceum, Wall. 
 
 Natural Order 131. — Juncaoeac. 
 
 Juncus concinnus, Don. 
 
 „ leucomelos, Royle. 
 
 „ castaneus, L. 
 
 „ bufonius, L. 
 
 „ effusus, L. 
 
 „ leucanthus, Don. 
 
 Natural Order 132. — Restiacecc. 
 
 Eriocaulon quinquangulare,L. 
 
 „ trilobum, Ham. 
 
 ,, sexangulare, L. 
 
 Natural Order 133. — Cyperacca. 
 
 Carex rigida, Good. 
 
 „ Thomsoni, Boot. 
 
 . „ mitis, Boot. 
 
 „ nubigena, Don. 
 
 „ foliosa, Don. 
 
320 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Natural Order 133. — C'l/peracece — 
 (concluded.) 
 
 Carex longipes, Don. 
 
 „ Moorcroftii, Falc. 
 
 „ alopecurioides, Don. 
 
 „ Wallichiana, Presc. 
 
 „ setigera, Don. 
 
 ,, cruenta, Nees. 
 
 „ uncinoides, Boot. 
 
 „ vesiculosa, Boot. 
 
 „ fllicina, Nees. 
 
 „ condensata, Nees. 
 
 „ bengalensis, Boxb. 
 
 Rhynchospora aurea, Nees. 
 
 „ Wallichiana, Nees. 
 
 Fimbristylis quinquangularis, Nees. 
 
 „ dichotoma, Vahl. 
 
 „ aestivalis, Vahl. 
 
 ,, complanata, Link. 
 
 Scirpus juncoides, Boxb. 
 
 „ affinis, Both. 
 
 „ mucronatus, L. 
 
 Abilgaardia monostachya, Vahl. 
 
 Eleocharis uniglumis, R. Br. 
 
 „ palustris, B. Br. 
 
 „ ovata, R,. Br. 
 
 Isolepis setacea, B. Br. 
 
 „ trifida, Nees. 
 
 „ supina, R. Br. 
 
 „ Boylei, Nees. 
 
 Kyllingia monocephala, L. 
 
 „ brevifolia, Itottb. 
 
 „ triceps, Nees. 
 
 Eriophorum comosum, Wall. 
 
 Cyperus pygmaeus, Vahl. 
 
 • „ alopecuroides, Bottb. 
 
 ,, compressus, L. 
 
 ,, niveus, Betz. 
 
 „ difformis, L. 
 
 „ Iria, L. 
 
 „ rotund us, L. 
 
 Mariscus paniceus, Vahl. 
 
 Natural Order 134. — Graminea. 
 
 Oryza sativa, L., Bice, cultivated. 
 
 Zea Mays, L., Makai, Bhuta, Indian 
 Corn, introduced, and cultivated. 
 
 Coix Lachryma, L. 
 
 „ gigantea, Koen. 
 
 Milium effusum, L., introduced . 
 Paspalum pedicellatum, Nees. 
 
 „ scrobiculatum, L. cultivated. 
 „ Royleanum, Nees. 
 Coridochloa semialata, Nees. 
 
 Panicum 
 
 sanguinale, L. 
 
 
 ciliare, Retz. 
 
 9> 
 
 miliaceum, L., cultivated. 
 
 >9 
 
 maximum, Jacq. 
 
 99 
 
 ovalifolium, Poir. 
 
 99 
 
 longipes, W. & A. 
 
 99 
 
 miliare, Lamk. 
 
 9 9 
 
 vestitum, Nees. 
 
 99 
 
 plicatum, Roxb. 
 
 Natui at Order 134. - Graminea — (contd.) 
 
 Panicum prostratum, Lamk. 
 
 „ repens, L. 
 
 Oplismenus colonus, Kth. 
 
 „ compositus, R. &. S. 
 
 „ frumentaceus, Kunth, culti- 
 
 ^ vated. 
 
 ,, stagninus, Kth. 
 
 Setaria glauca, Beauv. 
 
 ,, italien, Kth., naturalized ; cul- 
 tivated. 
 
 „ verticillata, Beauv. 
 
 Penicillaria spicata, Lamk, Bajra, cul- 
 tivated. 
 
 Pennisetum cenchroides, Rich. 
 
 „ triflorum, Nees. 
 
 Gymnothrix flaccida, Munro. 
 
 Arundinella setosa, Trin. 
 
 Sporobolus diandra, Beauv. 
 
 „ elongatus, R. Br. 
 
 Agrostis alba, L. 
 
 ,, ciliata, Trin. 
 
 Miililenbergia sylvatica, Trin. 
 
 „ geniculata, Nees. 
 
 „ viridissima, Nees. 
 
 Polypogon littoralis, L. 
 
 Calamagrostis Epigejos, Roth. 
 
 Orthoraphium Roylei, Nees. 
 
 Piptatherum aequiglume, Munro. 
 
 Alopecurus pratesis, L. 
 
 Phleum arenarium, L. 
 
 Phragmites Roxburghii, Kunth. 
 
 Chloris barbata, Swartz. 
 
 Eleusine indica Gsertn 
 
 ,, Coracana, Gsertn, cultivated, 
 
 ,, verticillata, Roxb. 
 
 Cynodon Dactylon, Pers, Diib. 
 
 Avena fatua, L. 
 
 „ pratensis, L. 
 
 Poa annua, L. 
 
 ,, jiratensis, L. 
 
 „ bulbosa, L. 
 
 Eragrostis plumosa, Link. 
 
 „ pilosa, L. 
 
 „ verticillata, Beauv. 
 
 „ unioloides, Nees. 
 
 „ poseoides, Beauv. 
 
 „ nardoides Trin. 
 
 ,, diandra, Boxb. 
 
 Melica ciliata, L. 
 
 Kceleria cristata, Pers. 
 
 „ phleoides, Pers. 
 
 Dactylis glomerata, L. 
 
 Festuca duriuscela, L. 
 
 Bromus squarrosus, L. 
 
 „ arvensis, L. 
 
 „ giganteus, L. 
 
 Arundinaria falcata, Nees. 
 
 „ Falconeri, Kz. 
 
 Thamnocalamus spathifiorus, Munro, 
 
 Bambusa arundinacea, L. 
 
 Dendrocalamus strictus, Nees. 
 
 Hordeum hexastichon L., Jau, Barley, 
 
 cultivated . 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 321 
 
 Natural Order 134. — Gramince — (concld.) 
 
 Hordeum vulgare, L., cultivated, 
 Elymus sibiricus, L. 
 
 Lolium speciosum, Stev. 
 
 „ temulentum, L. 
 
 Triticum vulgare, Vil., Gehun, Wheat, 
 cultivated. 
 
 Mnesithea laevis, Kth. 
 
 Rottboellia exaltata, L. 
 
 Ophiurus corymbosus, Grtn. 
 
 Manisurus granularis, Sw. 
 
 Andropogon Gryllus, L. 
 
 ,, acicularis, Rets. 
 
 „ involutus, Stend, 
 
 „ montanus, Roxb. 
 
 „ Ischaemum, L. 
 
 Heteropogcn contortus, R. & S. 
 
 ,, Roylei, Nees. 
 
 Sorghum vulgare, Pers., Joar, cultivated, 
 „ Halepense, L. 
 
 Apocopis Royleanus, Nees 
 Batratherum molle, Nees. 
 
 „ lancifolium, Trin. 
 
 „ echinatum, Nees. 
 
 Anatherum muricatum, Beauv. 
 Cymbopogon laniger, Desf. 
 
 „ flexuosus, Nees. 
 
 „ Martini, Munro. 
 
 „ Schoenanthus, L. 
 
 „ Nardus, L. 
 
 Anclroscepia gigantea, Brongti. 
 Anthistiria arundinacea, Nees. 
 
 •„ Anathera, Nees. 
 
 „ scandens, Roxb. 
 
 Apluda aristata, L. 
 
 „ geniculata, Roxb. 
 
 Imperata arundinacea, Cyrill. 
 Saccharum spontaneum, L. 
 
 „ procerum, Roxb. 
 
 ,, officinarum, L.,, Sugarcane 
 
 cultivated , introduced. 
 
 „ Sara, Roxb-. 
 
 „ filifolium, Nees. 
 
 Erianthus Ravenna;, Beauv. 
 
 „ japonicus, Beauv. 
 
 Cryptogams. 
 Filices or Ferns. 
 
 Woodsia elongata, Hk. 
 
 „ lanosa, Hk. 
 
 Dicksonia appendiculata, Wall. 
 ,, scabra, Wall. 
 
 Davallia pulchra, Don. 
 
 „ divaricata, Bl. 
 
 „ immersa, Wall. 
 
 „ nodosa, Hk. 
 
 Adiantum lunulatum, Burrf.. 
 
 ,, caudatum, L. 
 
 n Capillus-Veneris, L. 
 
 Filices or Ferns— (continued.) 
 
 Adiantum venustum, Don. 
 
 Cheilanthes Dalhousias, Hk. 
 
 „ farinosa, Kaulf. 
 
 Onychium auratum, Kaulf. 
 
 „ japonicum, Kunze. 
 
 Pellea, calomelanos, Link. 
 
 Pteris longifolia, L. 
 
 „ cretica, L. 
 
 „ quadriaurita, Rez. 
 
 „ aquilina, L. 
 
 „ Walliehiana, Agdh. 
 
 Vv T ood\vardia radicans, Sm. 
 
 Asplenium, alternans, Wall. 
 
 „ varians Hk. and Gr. 
 
 ,, viridie, Huds. 
 
 „ Trichomanes, L. 
 
 „ planicaule, Wall. 
 
 „ fontanum, Bernh. 
 
 ,, bulbiferum, Forst. 
 
 ,, tenuifolium, Don. 
 
 „ Filix foemina, Bernh. 
 
 „ polypodioides, Mett. 
 
 „ dilatatum, Wall. 
 
 „ esculentum, Persl. 
 
 „ Ceterach, L. 
 
 ,, australe, Brack. 
 
 Aspidium auriculatum, Sw. 
 
 „ aculeatum, Sw. 
 
 „ Thomsoni, Hk. 
 
 „ aristatum, Sw. 
 
 „ falcatum, Sw. 
 
 Nephrodium unitum, R. Br. 
 
 „ prolixum, Bak. 
 
 ,, sparsum, Don. 
 
 „ molle, Desv. 
 
 5 ,, cicutarium, Bak. 
 
 „ polymorphum, Bak 
 
 „ Filix-mas, Rich. 
 
 „ cochleatum, Don. 
 
 „ odoratum, Bak. 
 
 Oleandra Wallichii, Hk. 
 
 „ neriiformis, Cav. 
 
 Polypodium erubescens, Wall. 
 
 „ proliferum, Presl. 
 
 „ lineatum, Colebr. 
 
 „ amoenum, Wall. 
 
 „ lachnopus, Wall. 
 
 „ malacodon, Hk. 
 
 „ trifidum, Don. 
 
 „ Lingua, Sw. 
 
 „ stigmosum, Sw. 
 
 „ fissum, Bak. 
 
 „ flocculosum, Don. 
 
 „ lineare, Thunb. 
 
 „ normale. Don. 
 
 „ membwanaceum, Don. 
 
 „ propinquum, Wall. 
 
 „ juglandifolium, Don. 
 
 „ quercifolium, L. 
 
 „ himalense, Hook. 
 
 „ leiorhizon, Wall. 
 
 Acrostichum virens, Wall. 
 
 Gymnogramme vestita, Hk. 
 
 41 
 
322 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 Filiees or Ferns — (conoid.) 
 
 Gymnogramme Andersoni, Bedd. 
 „ javanica, Bl. 
 
 ,, lanceolata, Hk. 
 
 „ involuta, Don. 
 
 Osmnnda Claytoniana, L. 
 Schizsea digitata, Sw. 
 
 Lygodium, scandens, Sw. 
 
 ,, japonicum, Sw. 
 Botrychium daucifolium, Wall. 
 
 ,, Lunaria, Sw. 
 
 „ Yirginianum, Sw. 
 
 Lycopodiacece. 
 
 Selaginella Jacquemontii,. Springs 
 „ setacea, Spring. 
 
 „ subulifolia, Spring. 
 
 Marsiliacece. 
 
 Marsilea qudrifolia, L. 
 
 Characea. 
 
 Chara yeticillata, Roxb. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES-. 
 
 323 
 
 PLANTS OE K U M A 0 N.' 
 
 The following 
 Area under notice. 
 
 list gives the names of all plants known to have 
 been found in Kumaon, Garhwal and the 
 Bhabar, three of the districts which are in- 
 
 cluded in the Commissionership of Kumaon. Plants of the plains 
 of India, plants growing in Tibet, and plants only found in the 
 Independent States of Nepal and Tihri, do not appear in this 
 list. The words, “ common, ” “ frequent,” and “ rare ” have been 
 employed to denote the comparative occurrence of the various 
 species ; but as the European stations of Almora, Naini Tal, and 
 Ranikhet are all situated at a height of between 5,000 and 7,000 
 feet above the level of the sea, it will be easily understood that 
 plants growing about that level are more likely to meet an observer’s 
 eye than plants which grow either at a very high, or at a very low 
 elevation. Plants which are marked “rare” without any locality 
 being given, are those which have been found by former observers, 
 but which have never been seen growing within the limits of the 
 division by Colonel Davidson, Mr. Waterfield or Dr. Watson, 
 In the arrangement of the orders, genera, and species, Hooker s 
 < pq ora 0 f British India,’ has been followed as far as published, that 
 is to say, to the end of Poly petalce . With regard to the other groups 
 the books chiefly consulted have been Brandis’ Forest Flora, 
 Madden’s Papers in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, Royle’s 
 Illustrations of Himalayan Botany, C. B. Clarke’s Composite and 
 Commelynacem, Steudel’s Grasses, and Cyperacem, Hooker and 
 Baker’s Ferns, Mitten’s Mosses. 
 
 Synonyms have rarely been given except where the name 
 adopted in the list is different from that given by Hoyle. Royle’s 
 Illustrations, published in 1839, is still a standard work on Hima- 
 layan Botany, and most of the plants figured 
 Range of plants. * n p. are f oun d i n the Commissionership of 
 
 Kumaon. There are, however, in Royle’s book a certain number of 
 plants which are common near Mussooree, where the book was 
 written, but which are not found east of the Alaknanda river, the 
 
 i This notice and list has been prepared for this volume by Mr. W, Watson, M.D., 
 Deputy Sanitary Commissioner. Almora. 
 
324 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTEICTS 
 
 boundary between the Kumaon Commissionership and the Native 
 State of Tihri. As examples of these Mussooree plants not found 
 in Kumaon may be quoted — 
 
 Dictamnus albus , Berberis Lycium, Rosa Lyelli , Sonerila tenera , 
 Genticma Karroo, Ricrorhiza Kurroo, Eremostachys superba. 
 
 On the other hand, the common phalel tree of Eastern Kumaon 
 ( Bassia butyracea) is apparently not found at Mussooree, as it is 
 not mentioned by Hoyle as occurring there. The same remark ap- 
 plies to the very common and very beautiful Silang tree of Kumaon 
 ( Olea acuminata). This tree, conspicuous from its sweet scented 
 yellow blossoms, is never alluded to by Hoyle, so that he probably 
 never met with it near Mussooree. It is found in Kumaon at all 
 elevations from 3,000 to 7,000 feet. There are fine trees of it at 
 Debi Dhura at a height of 6,800 feet, and at Kapkot at a height of 
 3,400 feet. 
 
 The Kumaon Division includes a tract of country varying much 
 in elevation. On the south, the Bhabar strip along the foot of the 
 hills has a mean height of about 1,400 feet, whilst the passes that 
 lead into Tibet have an elevation exceeding 18,000 feet. It might 
 be expected that European forms would be more abundant towards 
 these passes than in the Bhabar, and this, on the whole, is the case. 
 There are, however, some European plants that are only found at 
 
 low elevations and are never seen above 
 
 Eastern depression. 
 
 6,000 feet. I he most common of these 
 are : — Ranunculus sceleratus, Geranium molle, Veronica Anagallis, 
 and Verbena officinalis, and it is difficult to assign an adequate 
 reason for this phenomenon. Another remarkable fact connected 
 with the montane flora is the eastern depression of many Hima- 
 layan plants. By this term is understood that plants which occur 
 only at high elevations near Simla are found to grow at lower 
 elevations at Mussooree and at still lower heights near Naini Tal. 
 The following plants may be named as affording examples of 
 eastern depression — 
 
 (a) The shrub Coriaria nepalensis , which gives its name to the 
 station of Mussooree, is said by Royle not to grow under 
 5,000 feet at Mussooree. In Kumaon, however, it 
 descends as low as 2,000 feet. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 325 
 
 (5) Hemip hragma heterophylla, one of the Scrophulcmaceoe , is 
 never found at Simla below 10,000 feet, whilst it occurs in 
 Kumaon at 7,000 feet, and is common there at 8,000 feet. 
 
 (c) The Tilonj oak, Quercus dilatata, is found at Simla about 7,000 
 feet, and near Naini Tal it grows abundantly down to 3,000 
 feet. 
 
 {d) Dipsacus inermis is one of the most common plants at Almora 
 (5,500 feet), but is not found towards Simla at elevations 
 below 8,000 feet. 
 
 {<?) Elsholtzici polystachya , another common Almora plant, is 
 found in Kumaon as low down as 4,000 feet, but near 
 Simla it is not met with under 7,000 feet. 
 
 </) Senecio densiflorus and S. rufinervis , with auricled leaves, are 
 common all over Kumaon in November as low as 4,000 
 feet, but are not found in the neighbourhood of Simla 
 under 7,000 feet. 
 
 It does not follow, and is not apparently true, that the higher 
 limit of these plants follows the same law as their lower limit, but of 
 the existence of the law of eastern depression of the lower limit of 
 Himalayan plants, there can be little doubt. There is no example, 
 so far as is known, of the converse, that is to say, of a plant 
 confined to the higher ranges in Kumaon and growing at a low 
 level near Simla. 
 
 With regard to certain plants being confined to particular rock 
 formations, some interesting observations were made by Major 
 Madden ; thus he found that Trigonella gracilis, Argyrolobium roseum, . 
 and Argyrolobium flacciclum were confined to limestone rock. Thy- 
 mus serpyllum, on the contrary, is only found on micaceous rock 
 formations. 
 
 One of the most interesting facts for investigation in the Flora of 
 
 any country is the number of introduced 
 Introduced plants. . . . . . i ii 
 
 plants which have become wild. Of these, 
 
 two may be noticed in Kumaon. The deodar tree, which is really 
 
 a native of the Himalaya west of the Alaknanda, but being a sacred 
 
 tree, it has for many generations been planted round almost every 
 
 Kumaon temple. There are now magnificent groves at Gangolihat, 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 32b 
 
 Lohaghat, Champhawat, and Bala Jageswar, and there is a tree at 
 Wan in Garhwal which is certainly many hundreds of years old. 
 Still the deodar is undoubtedly not indigenous. The other plant is a 
 weed and is of comparatively recent introduction. It is the Erigeron 
 canadense, known to the natives as the locust weed, ( sallo ) because it 
 is believed to spring from soil where locusts have alighted. This 
 plant is not mentioned by Major Madden, who published his papers 
 in the year 1840, and it has therefore in all probability made its 
 appearance since that date. It is now a most common and a most 
 troublesome weed in cultivated fields. 
 
 Many of the Kumaon plants are collected by the villagers and 
 
 sold to herbalists to be used in medecine. The chief marts are 
 
 T , Haldwani, Barmdeo, and Ramnagar in 
 
 Indigenous drugs. ° 
 
 Kumaon, and Kotdwara in Garhwal. The 
 articles most in demand are the fruit of Terminalia Chebula, the 
 roots of Curcuma longa , ICyllingia triceps , Piper silvaticum, and the 
 various species of aconite ; the bark of Myrica sapida and Cinna- 
 momum Tamala ; the rind of the fruit of the pomegranate ; the 
 powder from Mallotus philippinensis , and the various species of 
 chiretta, all of which will be noticed hereafter in the chapter on 
 1 Economic Botany.’ 
 
 Dr. Watson desires to record and acknowledge the assistance 
 that he has received in the preparation of this list from his friends 
 Dr. King, Director of the Royal Botanical Gardens, Calcutta; Colonel 
 Davidson, R.E., and Mr. W. Waterfield of the Bengal Civil Service. 
 
1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 327 
 
 PLANTS OF KUMAON. 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 1.— RANUNCULACE-ffi. 
 
 Note. 
 
 Clematis (Cheiropsis) Nepaulensis 
 
 „ montana 
 
 „ barbellata 
 
 (Elam mula) grata 
 
 „ Gouriana 
 
 „ puberula 
 
 „ orientalis 
 
 [parvifolia Edgeworth.] 
 „ nutans 
 
 „ acuminata 
 
 „ connata [am- 
 
 plexicaulisvelutinaand 
 gracilis, Edgeworth.] 
 
 „ Buchananiana, 
 
 ,, ,, grewiasflora ... 
 
 Anemone (Eriocephalus) vitifolia ... 
 
 „ (Anemonanthea) obtusiloba, 
 „ ' [Govaniana and discolor]... 
 
 „ „ rupestris 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 >y 
 
 >> 
 
 „ rivularis 
 
 (Omalocarpus) polyantlies, 
 „ „ elongata 
 
 Thalictrum (Physocarpum) elegans ... 
 
 platycarpum ... 
 cultratum 
 Chelidonii 
 reniforme [neu- 
 rocarp im, Royle.] 
 
 „ pauciflorum ... 
 
 (Euthalictrum) Punduanum, 
 „ saniculse forme, 
 
 Jaranicum 
 foliolosum 
 minus 
 
 Callianthemum cachemirianum 
 Adonis aestivalis 
 
 Ranunculus (Batrachium) aquatilis... 
 
 (Hecatonia) sceleratus ... 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 hirtellus 
 diffusus 
 laetus 
 
 (Echinella) fiaccidus 
 arvensis 
 
 » 
 
 33 
 
 Ghantiali 
 
 Ghantiali 
 
 Ghantiali ... 
 Ghantiali ... 
 
 Kakriya 
 
 Pengla jari. 
 
 33 
 
 Shim 
 
 Dainiya 
 
 Ainwa 
 
 December, near 
 streams ; rare. 
 
 April, common. 
 
 May; rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys ; 
 October. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 May. Common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 August, September. 
 Very common. 
 
 October. Very com- 
 mon. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 June and July ; com- 
 mon. 
 
 May. Very common. 
 Above 6,000 feet. 
 
 June. Above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare, 10,000 feet. 
 
 33 33 
 
 33 33 ^ 
 
 Rare. Badrinath. 
 Rare. 
 
 33 
 
 Common; high eleva- 
 tions, July. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Common. 
 
 On trees ; autumn. 
 
 33 
 
 Very common, summer. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 >> . » 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 feet. 
 
 High elevations. 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common at low levels. 
 
328 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS' 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETAL2E — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 1. — RANUNCULACEiE— 
 
 (concluded). 
 
 
 39 
 
 Oxygraphis glacialis 
 
 
 Above 16,000 feet. 
 
 40 
 
 „ polypetala ... 
 
 
 „ 10,000 „ 
 Common. 
 
 41 
 
 Caltha palustris [Govaniana, Royle], 
 
 
 42 
 
 Trollius acaulis 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 43 
 
 „ pumilis 
 
 
 „ 12,000 „ 
 
 44 
 
 Isopyrum grandiflorum ... 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 Aquilegia vulgaris 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 46 
 
 Delphinium denudatum [pauciflorum, 
 
 Munila 
 
 
 47 
 
 Royle.] 
 
 
 
 „ canruleum ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Above 15,000 feet. 
 
 48 
 
 „ elatum 
 
 • . • 
 
 China hill 8,000 feet,. 
 
 49 
 
 „ vestitum ... 
 
 , , , 
 
 „ 8,000 „ 
 
 60 
 
 ,, Cashmirianum 
 
 , . , 
 
 „ 10,000 
 
 61 
 
 ,, Ajacis 
 
 Munila 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 62 
 
 Aconitum Lycoctonum ... 
 
 Bish 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 ,, palmatum 
 
 „ ferox 
 
 ... 
 
 » yy yy 
 
 „ 10,000 „ 
 
 66 
 
 „ Napellus 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 „ heterophyllum 
 
 Atis 
 
 ” 8,000 ”, 
 
 57 
 
 Actsea spicata 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 68 
 
 Cimicifuga fcetida 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 Paeonia emodi 
 
 Bhunya madin, 
 
 Young shoots eaten.. 
 
 
 ORDER 2. — DILLENIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Dillenia indica 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 3.— MAGNOLIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Michelia Kisopa 
 
 Ban champa, 
 
 Common ; Beripul and 
 
 
 Schizandra grandiflora ... 
 
 
 Ukhimath. 
 
 2 
 
 Silangti 
 
 Frequent ; Gagar. 
 
 3 
 
 „ propinqua 
 
 Sindrayan ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 4.— ANONACEJE. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Polyalthia Ivorinti [Guatteria Korinti, 
 Madden.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Swamps. Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 Anona squamosa 
 
 Bella 
 
 Ditto 
 
 3 
 
 Miliusa velutina 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Saccopetalum tomentosum 
 
 Kangri 
 
 Kotdwara. 
 
 
 ORDER 6 . — MENISPERM ACEjE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Tinospora cordifolia 
 
 Gurcha 
 
 Comm on 
 
 2 
 
 Cocculus laurifolius ... 
 
 Tilbarapanya- 
 
 „ about 4.000 
 
 
 „ villosus 
 
 liandkakra. 
 
 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 4 
 
 Stephania elegans 
 
 
 6 
 
 „ rotunda [RoxburghianaJ ... 
 
 Ganjara 
 
 yy 
 
 Common. 
 
 6 
 
 Cissampelos Pareira [convolvulacea], 
 
 Pari 
 
 yy 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 329 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 6.— BERBERIDEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Holboellia latifolia 
 
 Gophla 
 
 May, common, Rani- 
 
 
 
 
 khet and Binsar. 
 
 ■C-# • 
 
 „ var. angustifolia 
 
 
 ... 
 
 2 
 
 Berber is (lVIahonia) nepalensis 
 
 Goplila 
 
 Frequent, Thakil and 
 
 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Euberbcris) vulgaris 
 
 . . . 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 4 
 
 „ ,, umbellata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 5 
 
 „ „ aristata 
 
 Chotra 
 
 Common. High ele- 
 
 
 
 
 vations. 
 
 6 i 
 
 „ „ Lvcium 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 7 
 
 „ „ asiatica 
 
 Kilmora 
 
 Common. 
 
 8 
 
 „ ,, Wallichiana ... 
 
 . . i 
 
 China hill, Colonel 
 
 
 
 
 Davidson. 
 
 9 
 
 Podophyllum emodi 
 
 ... 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 
 ORDER 7. — NYMPHACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Nelumbium sneciosum ... 
 
 Kanwal 
 
 Frequent, Buwali po- 
 
 
 
 
 kar. 
 
 
 ORDER 8. — PAPAVERACEiE. 
 
 
 I 
 
 Papaver dufeium [glabrum, Roylel| ... 
 
 Takuvia 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Argemone mexicana 
 
 Bhar bhand, 
 
 Bhabar; introduced. 
 
 3 
 
 Meconopsis aculeata 
 
 Kanda 
 
 Above 10,000 feet 
 
 4 
 
 „ robusta 
 
 >5 
 
 
 5 
 
 ,, nipalensis 
 
 
 » n 
 
 £ 
 
 Stylophor um lactucoides ... 
 
 ■5 
 
 ... 
 
 **• 
 
 
 ORDER 9.— EUMARIACEJE. 
 
 
 I 
 
 Dicentra Roylei 
 
 . . • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 2 
 
 „ scandens 
 
 ... . 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 Corydalis rntsefolia [diphylla] 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ cachemiriana ... 
 
 
 Above 9,000 feet. 
 
 5 
 
 ,, crithmifolia ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 f. 
 
 „ elegans 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 7 
 
 „ Govaniana 
 
 
 „ 8,000 „ 
 
 8 
 
 „ ramosa 
 
 ... 
 
 „ 12,000 „ 
 
 9 
 
 „ sibirica [filiformis] 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 10 
 
 „ cornuta 
 
 Blmtkes 
 
 Very common, 
 
 11 
 
 chasrophylia ... 
 
 
 Common, Binsar. 
 
 12 
 
 „ nieifolia 
 
 ... . 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 13 
 
 „ flabellata 
 
 
 „ 9,000 „ 
 
 14 
 
 Fumaria parvifolia [VailLantii] 
 
 Khairmva ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 ORDER 10.— CRUCIFERiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Arabideae. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Nasturtium officinale 
 
 Piriya halim, 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 2 
 
 „ palustre 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 „ montanum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 J) 
 
 4 
 
 Barbarca vulgaris 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 5 
 
 Arabis glabra 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 42 
 
330 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I.— POLYPETAL iE— ( continued ). 
 
 No, 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 10.— CRUCIFER2E— (continued). 
 
 Tribe ARABiDEna — (concluded). 
 Arabis alpina 
 
 „ amplexicaulis ... ... Rai ghas 
 
 Cardamine hirsuta 
 
 „ iinpatiens ... ... Slieliya 
 
 „ macrophylla ... 
 
 Tribe Alyssine^e. 
 
 Alyssum maritimuin 
 „ canescens 
 Darba (Chrysodraba) alpina 
 „ (Leucodraba) incana 
 „ „ lasiophylla .. 
 
 ,, „ fladnitzensis .. 
 
 Tribe Sisymbrie^s. 
 
 Sisymbrium mollissimum 
 himalaicum 
 Thalianum 
 rupestre 
 strict urn 
 Wallichii 
 sophia 
 Columnse 
 Alliaria 
 
 Eutrema primulsefolium . 
 
 Erysimum hieracifolium 
 
 Tribe Brassiceze. 
 
 Brassica nigra 
 „ campestris 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 )> 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 9 ) 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Jaua glias 
 
 >» 
 
 » 
 
 var. dicliotoma ... 
 vat. glauca, Box 
 
 var. glauca, Royle 
 
 trilocularis 
 
 „ luncea 
 Eruca sativa ... 
 
 Kali sarson, . . 
 Jariya 
 
 Rara, pila sar- 
 son. 
 
 Dain toriya... 
 
 Rai 
 
 Dua 
 
 Tribe Lepidineze. 
 
 Capsella Bursa-pastoris 
 Lepidium sativum 
 „ capitatum 
 
 ,, ruderale 
 
 Halim 
 
 Tribe Tiilaspideze. 
 
 Megacarpcea polyandra 
 Thlaspi arvense 
 „ alpestre 
 Iberidella Andersoni 
 
 Dhapriya ... 
 
 Note. 
 
 F r equent. 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common, 
 
 Naturalized. 
 Above 14,000 feet 
 » 12,000 „ • 
 
 „ 10,000 „ 
 
 12,000 „ 
 
 13 000 „ 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 ,, 10,000 „ 
 Common. 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 feet. 
 
 up to 11,000 
 
 Weed in fields. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 Common, May and 
 June, Almora. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
 Above 7,000 feet. 
 
 „ 12,000 „ 
 
Ox itfc OS t>s 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPBTALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 331 
 
 No. 
 
 41 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 _ ORDER 10. — CRUCIFERJE— (concluded). 
 Tribe RaphanE.®. 
 
 Raphanus sativus ... ... I Muli 
 
 ORDER 11.— CAPPARIDACEJ3. 
 Cleome [Polanisia, Madden] viscosa... 
 
 Gynandropsis pentaphylla 
 Capparis spinosa [yar. leucophylla] ... 
 „ horrida 
 
 Mserua arenaria [Niebuhria oblongi- 
 folia, Royle, 111.1 
 
 Ulta kanta . . . 
 
 >y 
 
 ORDER 12.— RESEDACEiE. 
 Reseda odorata ... ... I 
 
 ORDER 1 3. — VIOL ACEiE. 
 
 Viola biflora [reniformis] 
 
 Patrinii [csespitosa] 
 diffusa... 
 
 serpens [canescens, Wall] 
 kunawarensis 
 
 )) 
 
 >5 
 
 ORDER 14.— BININEiE. 
 
 Cochlospermum Gossypium 
 ElacourLa Ramontchi ... 
 
 \ „ sepiaria 
 
 Xylosma longifolium 
 
 Kumbi,katira, 
 
 Kandai 
 
 Katari 
 
 ORDER 15.— PITTOSPORACEiE. 
 
 Pittosporum floribundum 
 „ eriocarpum . . . 
 
 ... l 
 
 . . . \ Gar siling 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Common, Bhabar and 
 valleys. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above 1 1 ,000 feet. 
 
 Common, Bhabar, 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common, river banks,. 
 
 ORDER 1 6.— POLY G ALACK® . 
 
 1 Polygala triphylla[glaucescens, Wall], 
 crotalarioides ... 
 abyssinica 
 
 lepta'ea [oligophylla. Wal- 
 lich]. 
 
 persicarisefolia... 
 chinensis, [Rothiana, W. 
 and A. 
 
 sibirica [elegans, Wallich], 
 
 ORDER 17.— CARYOPHYLLACEjE. 
 TbIBE SlLENESd. 
 
 1 Gypsophila cerastioides ... 
 
 2 Saponaria vaccaria 
 
 3 Silene inflata 
 
 Common, autumn. 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 feet. 
 
 August, frequent. 
 Common, Bhabar, 
 
 » 
 
 Common about 10*000 
 feet. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Common. 
 
332 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 4 
 
 ORDER 1 7. — CARYOPELLACEAt- 
 
 Tribe SiLENEiE — (conclu 
 
 Silene conoidea 
 
 —(concluded). 
 
 ded). 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 „ gallica 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 6 
 
 „ Ealconeriana 
 
 
 Co i moa. 
 
 7 
 
 „ Stracheyi 
 
 ... , 
 
 Rare. 
 
 8 
 
 Cucubalus bacciferus 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Lychnis multicaulis 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 „ inflata, Blink worth 
 
 
 Very rare. 
 
 11 
 
 „ indica [fimbriata, Madden], 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 IS 
 
 Tribe Alsine^s. 
 
 Cerastium dahuricum ... 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 13 
 
 „ Tulgatum [triviale, Mad* 
 
 . . . 
 
 Very conn nou 
 
 14 
 
 den], 
 
 „ Thomsonii 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 35 
 
 Stellaria (Schizostegium) crispata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Coin man. 
 
 16 
 
 [monasperma, Don], 
 
 „ „ paniculata [media, 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 17 
 
 Wight. 
 
 „ (Malachinm) aquatica ... 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 „ (Eustellaria) media [mono 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 19 
 
 gyna, Don]. 
 
 „ „ semivestita 
 
 
 Painkhanda; commw«. 
 
 20 
 
 „ „ Webbiana, [Lea- 
 
 . 
 
 Very common. 
 
 21 
 
 costemma angus- 
 tifolia, Wall]. 
 
 „ „ latifolia, [leacos- 
 
 
 Rare. Ilanipani. 
 
 22 
 
 temma latYolia, 
 Wall]. 
 
 „ (Larbriea) longissima ]pa- 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 tens, Don], 
 
 „ (Adenonema) decumbens... 
 
 
 Above 11,000 feet. 
 
 24 
 
 Arenaria (Alsine) foliosa 
 
 ... . 
 
 Painkhanda ; common. 
 
 25 
 
 „ (Eremogone) festucoides ... 
 
 
 June. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 26 
 
 „ (Eutlialia) serpyllifolia ... 
 
 
 Common, May & June. 
 
 27 
 
 „ ,, orbiculata 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 „ (Lepyrodiclis) holosteoides, 
 
 ... . 
 
 
 29 
 
 „ Benthami 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 30 
 
 Spei'gula arvensis ... 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 31 
 
 „ pentandra [Arenaria flaeci- 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 da, Roxb.] 
 
 Tribe Polycarpe2e. 
 
 Drymaria cordata 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 33 
 
 Polycarpaeacorymbosa ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1 
 
 Order 18. — PORTULACEiE. 
 
 Portnlaca olcracea ... ... j Luniya-kulfa, 
 
 Common. 
 
1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 *) 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 333 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 19. — TAMARISCINEJE. 
 
 Tamarix gallica 
 „ dioica 
 Myricaria germanica 
 
 „ elegans 
 
 ORDER 20. — HYPERICINEiE 
 
 Hypericum (Androsasmum) cernuum, 
 cardifolium 
 lysimachioidea 
 
 
 
 patulum [uralum, Don]. 
 (Euhyper icu a. ( perfora- 
 tum. 
 
 elodeoides ... 
 
 nepaulense ... 
 
 (Brathys) japonicum 
 [pusillum]. 
 
 ORDER 2 1 . — TERN STRiEMI ACEiE 
 
 Deura 
 
 Eurya acuminata 
 
 Actinidia [Troclrostigma, Madden] 
 callosa. * * 
 
 Saurauja nepaulensis 
 Camellia thea 
 
 Gogana 
 
 Cha 
 
 ORDER 22.— DIPTEROCARPEiE. 
 Shorea robusta ... ... I Sal Sakhu 
 
 ORDER 23.' — MALVACEAE. 
 
 Tiube Malvb^e. 
 
 Malva verticillata 
 
 silYestris, [mauritiana, Mad- 
 den). 
 
 ,, rotundifolia 
 ,, parvifiora 
 Sida rhombifolia 
 „ cordifolia 
 Abutilon polyaudrum 
 
 indicum 
 
 Note. 
 
 Ulua-bena ... 
 
 Tilciioni 
 
 Bhoa Kalabali 
 
 Tribe URENEiE. 
 
 Urena lobata 
 
 Sujiya Cliat- 
 kura. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Frequent, above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 Frequent, above 1 1,000 
 feet. 
 
 Common. April. 
 
 Rare, Bamni. 
 Frequent above 8,000 
 feet. 
 
 Common, September. 
 
 „ August, and 
 
 September. 
 
 „ August, and 
 
 September. 
 
 Low elevations. 
 
 ! Common. 
 
 Bhabar and banks of 
 Sarju. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Common up to 4,500 
 feet, March- 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Gardens and wild. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Up to 2,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar and up to 3,000 
 feet. 
 
 Common, banks of 
 streams. 
 
334 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note, 
 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 23.— MALVACEiE— (concluded). 
 
 
 
 Tribe FIibisceie, 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Hibiscus (Furcaria) fnrcatus 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 11 
 
 „ (Lagunea) solandra 
 
 , . , 
 
 Common. 
 
 12 
 
 „ (Abelmoschus) ficulneus 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 13 
 
 „ pungens 
 
 Hao Kapasya 
 
 y> 
 
 14 
 
 „ cancellatus 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 Thespesia lampas 
 
 Kapasya 
 
 
 
 Tribe Bomba cum. 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 Kydia calycina 
 
 Pata 
 
 Common, September. 
 
 „ Bhabar, up 
 
 17 
 
 Bombax malabaricum [Bombax hep- 
 
 Semal 
 
 
 taphylluin, Iioxb.] 
 
 
 to 4,800 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 24. — STERCULIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Sterculia urens 
 
 Katira 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ villosa 
 
 Udyal 
 
 33 
 
 3 
 
 ,, (Firmiana) fulgens [Wal- 
 
 lichii, Madden.] 
 
 Bodala 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 Heiicteres isora 
 
 Maror phal, 
 
 Bhabar, May,-Septem- 
 
 
 
 
 ber. 
 
 5 
 
 Pterospermum acerifolium 
 
 Muchkunda, 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 6 
 
 „ lanceoefolium [P. sub- 
 
 
 Bhaber. 
 
 
 erifolium, Madden] 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Melocliia corchorifolia, [Riedleia cor- 
 
 • « • 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 
 cborifolia, Dec.] 
 
 
 8 
 
 Waltheria indica, [Melocliia corcho- 
 rifolia, Wall.] 
 
 ... 
 
 yy yy 
 
 
 ORDER 25.— TILIACEAE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Grewia oppositifolia 
 
 Bhekla, bhen- 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 gal. 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ tilisefolia 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, va’leys. 
 
 3 
 
 „ asiatica [elastica, Royle, III.] 
 
 Pharsiya ... 
 
 Common, cultivated. 
 
 4 
 
 „ sapida [nana., Wall] 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 „ scabrophylla [scleropbylla, 
 
 Gar bheli ... 
 
 
 
 Wall] 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 „ laevigata [didyma, Roxb] ... 
 
 Bhimul 
 
 
 7 
 
 „ polygama 
 
 . . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 8 
 
 Triumfetta pilosa [oblongata, Wall] 
 
 Leshwa, ku- 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 „ rhomboidea [angulata, 
 
 mariya. 
 
 
 9 
 
 Chat kura ... 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 
 Wall.] 
 
 
 10 
 
 Corchorus fascicularis ? 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 11 
 
 ,, acutangulus ? 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 12 
 
 Eloeocarpus Yarunua 
 
 Jalpai 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 26. — LINEiE. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Linum usitatissimum 
 
 Alsi 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 2 
 
 Reinwardtia trigyna 
 
 Pyura 
 
 Very common, March. 
 
 3 
 
 „ tetragyna ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 335 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 27.' — MALPIGHIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Hiptage madablota 
 
 ... 
 
 March ; common up to 
 3,000 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 Aspidopterys Wallichii [Hiroea mi- 
 
 ... 
 
 June ; frequent up to 
 
 
 tans, Wall], 
 
 ORDER 28.— ZYGOPHYLLI 
 
 LE. 
 
 4,000 . 
 
 1 
 
 Tribulus terrestris ... ••• | 
 
 ORDER 29.— GERANIACEiE. 
 
 Common. 
 
 1 
 
 Geranium pratense 
 
 . . • 
 
 Ra,re, Painkanda. 
 
 2 
 
 „ collinum 
 
 . . . 
 
 >> 
 
 3 
 
 „ palustre ? [grandiflorum, 
 
 Edgeworth] 
 
 ... 
 
 „ Mana Pass. 
 
 4 
 
 „ Wallichianum 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, Naini Tal 
 and Binsar, July. 
 
 5 
 
 „ Grevilleanum [eriostemon, 
 
 Don] 
 
 ... 
 
 
 6 
 
 „ nepalense 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, May, June. 
 
 7 
 
 „ polyantlies ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 8 
 
 „ rotundifolium 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 9 
 
 „ molle 
 
 • . • 
 
 Eebruary. Banks of 
 Ganges up to 1,500 
 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 „ Robertiannm 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 11 
 
 ,, lucidum ... •••' 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 12 
 
 ocellatum [bicolor, Royle, 
 111] 
 
 Ankri 
 
 Very common, April, 
 May, 
 
 13 
 
 Tropasolum majus 
 
 Chalmori ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 14 
 
 Oxalis corniculata 
 
 Very common. 
 
 15 
 
 „ acetosella 
 
 . . • 
 
 Rare, Pindari, April. 
 
 16 
 
 Biophytum sensitivum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 feet. 
 
 17 
 
 „ Reinwar dtii... 
 
 . . • 
 
 5 ? 33 
 
 18 
 
 Impatiens (Brevicapsulae) Balsamina, 
 
 . . . 
 
 Gardens. 
 
 19 
 
 „ (Longicapsulse Boy lei var. 
 
 moschata, Edge. 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 20 
 
 „ Thcmsoni 
 
 . . ■ 
 
 12,000 feet. 
 
 Erequcnt. 
 
 21 
 
 „ sulcata [gigantea, Edge.], 
 
 . . . 
 
 22 
 
 „ amplexicaulis 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 23 
 
 „ scabrida [tricornis, Lind, 
 
 Hamiltoniana, Don], 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, May, June. 
 
 24 
 
 „ bicornuta 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 25 
 
 „ amphorata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, autumn. 
 
 
 var umbrosa, Edge, [bi.co- 
 lor, Royle, 111.] 
 
 ... 
 
 33 
 
 26 
 
 „ racemosa 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 27 
 
 „ laxiflora 
 
 . . . 
 
 33 
 
 28 
 
 ,, micranthernum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 29 
 
 „ brachycentra 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, summer. 
 
 30 
 
 „ glauca 
 
 . * * * 
 
 Rare, Diwali. 
 
836 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ( RDER 30.' — RUTACEiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Timms. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Baenninghausenia alb i flora, [Ruta 
 
 Pisu glias and 
 
 Very common, autumn. 
 
 
 albiflora, Wall.] 
 
 upauya ghas. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Zantiioxyue.®. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Zanthoxylum alatum, [Z. hostile, 
 
 Timur and 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 Wall.] 
 
 tejbal. 
 
 
 3 
 
 ,, acanthopoidum [hostile, 
 
 Simur 
 
 Rare, Budh Jageswar. 
 
 
 Wall.] 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ oxyphyllum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, Gagar. 
 
 5 
 
 „ Budrunga 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 Tribe Toddalie.®. 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Toddalia acnleata 
 
 Kliaseru 
 
 Bhabar and valleys 
 
 7 
 
 Skimmia [Limonia, Wall. Anque- 
 
 Nehar, kas- 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 Tilia Dece.] Laureola. 
 
 turi, gural 
 
 
 
 
 pata. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Aurantie®. 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Glycosmis pentaphylla ... 
 
 Potla 
 
 Common. 
 
 9 
 
 Murraya exotica 
 
 Jnti 
 
 
 10 
 
 „ (Bergera) Kcenigii 
 
 G ani 
 
 Very common. 
 
 11 
 
 Clausena pentaphylla 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 12 
 
 Limonia acidissima [L. crenulata, 
 
 
 
 
 Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 Citrus medica 
 
 Bijaura 
 
 
 
 var. limonum 
 
 Jamlra 
 
 
 14 
 
 „ aurantium 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 15 
 
 Feronia Elephantum 
 
 Kait 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 16 
 
 iEgle Marmelos 
 
 Bel 
 
 
 
 ORDER 31.— SIMARUBEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Bicrasma quassioides ... ... 1 
 
 Valleys ; frequent. 
 
 
 ORDER 32. — OCITNACEZE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ochna pumila 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 33. — BURSERACEJE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Aura nth: as. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Boswellia serrata [thurifera, Roxb.] 
 
 Sale, gugar... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 var. glabra 
 
 Gugai 
 
 
 2 
 
 Garuga pinnata 
 
 Kharpat 
 
 33 
 
 
 ORDER 34. — MELIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Melia Azadirachta [indica] 
 
 Nim 
 
 Introduced. Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ Azadarach [sempervirensRoxb], 
 
 Betain 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 Heynea trijnga, [Zanthoxylon con- 
 
 • • • 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 naroides, W. & A.] 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Cedrela Toona 
 
 Tun 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 5 
 
 „ serrata 
 
 Dai 
 
 Very common. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 337 
 
 DIVISION I . — P 0 L YPETE J3— ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 35.— 0LACINEA3. 
 
 1 
 
 Olax scandens 
 
 , , , 
 
 2 
 
 „ nana 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ORDER 36. — ILICINEA5. 
 
 1 
 
 Ilex dipyrena 
 
 Kandali 
 
 2 
 
 „ odorata 
 
 Gar — kaula, 
 
 
 
 garshun. 
 
 3 
 
 „ excelsa 
 
 Kandali 
 
 
 ORDER 37. — CELASTRINEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 Euonymus grandiflorus [lacerus, Don], 
 
 . . . 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ,, tingens 
 
 fimbriatus 
 
 Kasuri 
 
 4 
 
 „ frigidus 
 
 . . . 
 
 5 
 
 echinatus 
 
 , , . 
 
 G 
 
 pendulus [japonicus, Wall], 
 
 Agnu 
 
 7 
 
 Hamiltonianus 
 
 8 
 
 Celastrus paniculata [nutans, Roxb]... 
 
 Malkagni . . . 
 
 9 
 
 Gymnosporia rufa, [Celastrus rufa, 
 
 
 
 Brandis.] 
 
 
 10 
 
 Royleana, [C. spinosus, 
 
 Gwala-darim, 
 
 
 Lam], 
 
 
 11 
 
 montana [C. senegalensis, 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Lam.] 
 
 
 12 
 
 Elfeodendron glaucum, [Roxburghii, 
 
 Shauria jam- 
 
 
 W. & A.,Neerijadichotoma,Roxb]. 
 
 rasiand 
 
 dehbri. 
 
 13 
 
 Microtropis discolor 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ORDER 38. — RHAMNACEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 Ventilago calyculata [madraspatana, 
 
 Rakt pita, 
 
 
 Roxb.] 
 
 kala lag 
 
 2 
 
 Zizyphus jujuba 
 
 Bair 
 
 3 
 
 nummularia 
 
 yy 
 
 4 
 
 vulgaris 
 
 yy 
 
 6 
 
 „ oxyphylla 
 
 yy 
 
 6 
 
 „ xylopyrus 
 
 yy 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 „ rugosa 
 
 Berchemia doribunda 
 
 yy 
 
 Kala lag . . . 
 
 9 
 
 flavescens ... 
 
 
 10 
 
 Edgeworthii ... 
 
 Chadua 
 
 11 
 
 Rhamnus dahuricus [virgatus, Boxb.] 
 
 12 
 
 „ purpureus ... ... 
 
 Ghont 
 
 13 
 
 ,, triqueter 
 
 14 
 
 procumbens 
 
 . . . 
 
 15 
 
 Hovenia dulcis 
 
 Aglaia 
 
 16 
 
 Sageretia oppositifolia ... 
 
 17 
 
 Gouania leptoetachya ... 
 
 Kala lag 
 
 18 
 
 nepalensis 
 
 • • • 
 
 19 
 
 Ilelinus lanceolatus 
 
 • • • 
 
 Note. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Very common. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar, & to 3,000 feet. 
 Frequent, April. 
 
 Rare, 9,000 feet, April. 
 „ 10,000 „ 
 Frequent, April. 
 
 Common. 
 
 March. Bhim Tal. 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. A white 
 aphis feeds on this 
 tree. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 >> 
 
 J! 
 
 Frequent up to 6,000 
 feet. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Rameshwar. 
 
 Common, April. 
 Common. 
 
 About 7,000 feet ; on 
 limestone. 
 
 Rare; cultivated. 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar . 
 
 Common ; valleys. 
 
33 S 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION. — POLY PETAL iE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 39.— AMPELIDEiE. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Yitis (Simplicifolire) quadrangularis 
 
 Har jora 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 [Cissus edulis]. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ pallida 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 3 
 
 „ repanda [rosea, Royle 111.} 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent ; Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, adnata 
 
 • . . 
 
 Rare.. 
 
 5 
 
 „ pedicellata 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 6 
 
 „ lanata 
 
 Purain 
 
 Common, May. 
 
 
 „ var. rugosa 
 
 Assanja 
 
 „ July. 
 
 7 
 
 „ latifolia 
 
 Pan-laguli ... 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 8 
 
 „ vin'ifera 
 
 
 Wild ? 
 
 9 
 
 „ parvifolia 
 
 Barain 
 
 Common. 
 
 10 
 
 „ (Trifoliatae) carnosa 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 11 
 
 „ [Ampelopsis, Wight} lii- 
 
 Chappar-tang, 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 malayana. 
 
 
 22 
 
 „ divaricata [tomentosa, W. 
 
 Amila 
 
 
 
 and A.] 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 „ (Digitatae) obtecta 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 „ (Pedatae) capriolata [Cis- 
 
 
 
 
 sus serrulata, Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 „ lanceolaria [Cissus femi- 
 
 Panj-pata ... 
 
 Ranibagh, 
 
 
 nea, Roxb.] 
 
 18 
 
 Leea (Simplicifolise) maerophylia ... 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 17 
 
 „ (Pinnatas) alata 
 
 , , . 
 
 
 18 
 
 » aspera 
 
 Kurmali 
 
 Common. 
 
 19 
 
 „ (Bipinnataa) sambucina ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 40. — SAPINDACEJE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Sa binder. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Cardiospermum Halicacabum 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 jEscuIus (Pavia) indica 
 
 Pankar, pan- 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 Schleichera trijuga 
 
 gri. 
 
 Kusam 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 Sapindns Mukorossi 
 
 Rita. 
 
 
 „ var. detergens 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ,, var. acuminatus 
 
 
 Com iron. 
 
 5 
 
 Acer (Integrifoliaj) oblongum 
 
 Patangtiya... 
 
 Common ; cups are 
 
 6 
 
 „ laevigatum 
 
 
 made of the wood. 
 Common. 
 
 7 
 
 Acer (Trilobataa) pentapomicum 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 8 
 
 ., (Quinquelobatae) caesium 
 
 Kilu 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 9 
 
 „ villosum [sterculacium Wall?]... 
 
 
 8,000 feet ; cups made 
 
 
 „ caudatum [pectinatum Wall.]... 
 
 
 of the wood 
 
 10 
 
 
 10,000 feet 
 
 11 
 
 „ (Septemlobatae) pictum fcultra- 
 tum, Wall.] j 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 Tribe Dodonb.®. 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 Dodonaea viscosa ... ... | 
 
 • • i 
 
 Rare ; Bhabar. 
 
 
 Tribe Melianthe.®. 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 Melianthus major ... ... j 
 
 i • • 
 
 Introduced. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALuE — {continued). 
 
 339 
 
 14 
 
 1 | 
 
 2 ; 
 3 
 
 ORDER 40.— SAriNDACEiE— (concluded). 
 Tribe Staphyre^e. 
 
 Staphylca emodi ... | Chitra 
 
 ORDER 41 . — SABIACEiE. 
 
 Gwep 
 
 Gardar 
 
 Meliosma dillenioefolia 
 „ pungens 
 
 Sabia campanulata 
 „ parvidora 
 
 Bakal pata. . . 
 
 n 
 
 panicu’.ata 
 ORDER 42. — ANACARDI AC ? J£. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 <6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 U 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 Rhus (Simplicifolias) cotinus 
 (Trifo'.iatae) parvidora 
 (Tui pari pinnatae) semialata ... 
 Wallichii [vernicifera, Royle], 
 succedanea [acuminata, Dec.]... 
 Pistacia integerrima, [Rhus integer- 
 rima, Wall ] 
 
 O.lina Wodier 
 
 Semecarpus Anacardium 
 
 Mangifera indica 
 
 Buchanania latifolia 
 
 Spondias mangifera ... «... 
 
 ] Tung-ami 
 1 Eanel 
 j Dakmila 
 Bholiao 
 Titari 
 Kakar singi, 
 
 Jhingho 
 
 Bhilawa 
 
 Am ... 
 
 Pial 
 
 Amra 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORD R 43. 
 Coriaria nepalensis 
 
 -CORIARIACETE- 
 
 Mansuri mo- 
 kola. 
 
 ORDER 44. — MORINGEiE. 
 Moringa pterygosperma... ... I Sainjan 
 
 ORDER* 45. — LEGUMINOSAE. 
 
 Tribe Podalyrie.®. 
 
 Shalgari 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 Piptanthus nepalensis ... 
 
 Thermopsis barbata 
 
 Tribe Genisteje. 
 
 Argyrolobinm flaccidum [Cytisusdac- 
 cidum, Royle] 
 
 „ roseum 
 
 Crotal aria (Diffuse) humifusa 
 ,, hirsuta 
 (Alatae) alata ... 
 
 (Calycinae) mysorensis 
 albida 
 calycina 
 
 1 
 
 >> 
 
 »> 
 
 >5 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 >5 
 
 Gungri 
 
 Gungri 
 
 T requent : Gagar and 
 Siahi Dabi. 
 
 Common about 7,000 
 feet. 
 
 Frequent ; banks of 
 streams. 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ about 5,000 
 
 feet. 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Valleys; common. 
 
 Common ; valleys 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Common ; valleys. 
 Bhabar. 
 
 „ and valleys. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Common ; Bhabar. 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 i „ 10,000 „ 
 
 Common, July and Au- 
 gust, on limestone. 
 
 >•> >> 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Common, autumn. 
 Valley. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
8 40 
 
 HIMALAYA X DISTRI CTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note 
 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDc.lt 45.- — LEGUMINOSAL — (continued). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Genisteae — (concluded). 
 
 
 11 
 
 Crotalaria (Calyeinie sessili flora 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 [anthylloides, Lam], 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 „ (Erectse)sericea 
 „ (Kriocarpae) tetragona 
 
 Gungri 
 
 Valleys, common. 
 
 14 
 
 „ (Trifoliolatae) medicaginea, 
 
 . . 
 
 Very common. 
 
 15 
 
 )j j) mcana , . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 
 Tribe Trifoltece. 
 
 Section Digit ax®. 
 
 
 
 1G 
 
 Trifolium pratense 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated ; rare. 
 
 17 
 
 „ repens 
 
 • • • 
 
 ,, common. 
 
 18 
 
 Parochetus cummunis [oxalidifolia. 
 
 • • « 
 
 Common, damp ground. 
 
 
 Royle.] 
 
 
 
 Section Pinnax®. 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 Trigonella Esenum-grsecum 
 
 Methi 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 20 
 
 „ polycerata [incisa, Royle] 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 21 
 
 „ gi-acilis 
 
 ... 
 
 July, on limestone. 
 
 22 
 
 „ pubescens 
 
 ... 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 23 
 
 „ cornieulata 
 
 • . i 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 24 
 
 „ emodi 
 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 25 1 
 
 Melilotus parviflora 
 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 26 
 
 ,, alba 
 
 Garila 
 
 Common. 
 
 27 
 
 Medicago lupulina 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 „ denticulata 
 
 ... 
 
 yy 
 
 ‘ 
 
 Tribe Lotece. 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 Lotus corniculatus ... ... ] 
 
 a « « 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 Tribe Galeg-eze. 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 Cyamopsis psoraliodes ... 
 
 Indigofera (Sphceridiophora) linifolia 
 „ (Paucifoliolatae) trifoliata ... 
 
 >> )j trita ,,, 
 
 „ (MuUifoliolatge) hirsata ... 
 
 „ Gerardiana [hete rantha. 
 
 Wall. 
 
 atropurpurea . . . 
 pulchella [arb o- 
 rea, Itoxb], 
 
 „ „ Dosua [hetcran- 
 
 tha, Wall. 
 
 Colutea arborescens, var. nepalensis. 
 
 V 
 
 >5 
 
 Mellettia auriculata [Robinia macro- 
 pbylla, Ro b], 
 
 41 T'ephrosia Candida 
 
 Nana-sakina, 
 
 Mus-sakina... 
 
 Kala-sakina, 
 
 Sakina 
 
 Saki 
 
 ma 
 
 42 
 
 purpurea 
 
 Gojha 
 
 Lehtia 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 5 ) 
 
 yy 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common, May. 
 
 Common, August. 
 Very common, March. 
 Very common, May, 
 June. 
 
 Above 1 0,000 feet, 
 J idy, August. 
 
 Very common; valleys. 
 May. 
 
 Bhabar. Leaves used to 
 poison fish. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 341 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLY PETALiE — (continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 45. — LEGUMINOSiE — (continued). 
 
 Tkibb Galkgehs (concluded). 
 
 
 43 
 
 Sesbania aegyptiaca 
 
 Jait 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 -44 
 
 Caragana pyginaea [Genista, versico- 
 lor, Hoyle], 
 
 Darna 
 
 Common above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 45 
 
 „ Gerardiana [Caragana spi- 
 
 nosissiu a, Royle.] 
 
 „ 8,000 
 feet, May. 
 
 4G 
 
 .,, polyacantha 
 
 55 
 
 Rare. 
 
 47 
 
 „ brevi^pina 
 
 55 
 
 Common above 8,000 
 feet. 
 
 48 
 
 „ crassicaulis 
 
 ... 
 
 ,, ,, 12,000 
 feet. 
 
 40 
 
 Guldenstaedtia himalaica 
 
 Dama 
 
 ,, ,, 11,000 
 feet. 
 
 50 
 
 Astragalus (Pogonophace) trichocarpvs 
 [sesbanoides, Royle], ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 51 
 
 „ (Po.lolotus) hosackioides 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 52 
 
 ., (Hypoglottis) himalayanus 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 6.1 
 
 ,, Maddenianus 
 
 
 55 55 
 
 54 
 
 „ leucocephalus 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 65 
 
 „ (Phaca) chlorostacbys 
 
 
 55 
 
 56 
 
 Jf „ viir. trichocarpoides Kurz, 
 
 . 4 4 
 
 W. Waterfield, Naini 
 Pal. 
 
 57 
 
 ,, ,, emodi 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 68 
 
 „ gravcolens 
 
 • 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 50 
 
 „ (Myobroma) Candolleanus 
 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 60 
 
 ,, (-ZEgacantha) polyaeantlms 
 
 ► 9 
 
 Tribe IIedysarkae 
 
 Section Exstipeleat/e 
 
 1 
 
 i requent. 
 
 61 
 
 Onobrychis sativa ... ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 62 
 
 Lespedesa (Eulespedeza) sericea 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 63 
 
 Gerardiana, 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 64 
 
 ’’ (Oxyrambhis) macrostyla, 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 65 
 
 ,, criocarpa ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 55 
 
 Rare ; found by Stra- 
 chey and Winter- 
 bottom. 
 
 66 
 
 Hedysarum kumaonense 
 
 ... 
 
 67 
 
 Zornia diphylla [angustifolia, D.C.] 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 68 
 
 Smithia sensitiva 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 69 
 
 geminiflora 
 
 
 55 
 
 70 
 
 ciliata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common near streams. 
 
 71 
 
 JEschynomene indica 
 
 Section Stipellateje. 
 
 t t • 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 72 
 
 Uraria picta ... ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 73 
 
 ,, crinita 
 
 
 55 
 
 74 
 
 „ lagopus 
 
 
 55 
 
 75 
 
 pruned lie folia 
 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 76 
 
 Alysicarpus (Microcalycinae) vagi- 
 nalis. 
 
 
 Common to 4,000 feet. 
 
 77 
 
 (Microcalycinae) bu- 
 
 p'.eurifolius. 
 
 » « • » 
 
 55 55 
 
312 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DI\ ISION I. — POLYPETALjE— (continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 78 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 81 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 86 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 89 
 
 90 
 
 91 
 
 92 
 
 93 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 45 — LE JrUMINOSiE — (continued). 
 T KIBE H BDYSAREiE — (coiicl uded ) . 
 Sectio < StipeeeatvE — (concluded). 
 
 Alysicarpus (Microcalycinse) rugosus, 
 
 Ougeinia dalbergioides [Dalbergia ou- 
 jeinensis, Kcxb.] 
 
 Desmodium (Phyll odium) pulcbelium, 
 „ (Ptero'oma) triquetrum, 
 
 ,, (Scorpiurus) laxiflorum, 
 
 ,, (Polocarpiur) po !ocar- 
 
 pum. 
 
 „ (Dollinera) floribundnm 
 
 [multifloru n D. C.] 
 
 „ „ oxyphyllum 
 
 [po'ycarpum, Wall.] 
 
 „ „ tiliaefo’ium [nutans, 
 
 Wall., argent eum 
 Wall.] 
 
 „ (Htteroloma) Gangeticum, 
 
 lati folium ... 
 sequax 
 
 „ concinnum 
 [penduliflorum, Wall.] 
 (NicoVonia) polycarpum 
 D C. [angulatum, Wall.] 
 (Sagotia) triflorum 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 „ parviflorum ... 
 (Pleurolobium) gyrans ... 
 „ gyroh'es... 
 
 Tribe Viciove. 
 
 96 Acrus precatorius 
 
 97 ,, pulchellus 
 
 98 Cicer arietinrm 
 
 99 .. soongaricum 
 
 Rovle.] 
 
 100 | Vica (Ervmn) tetrasperma 
 
 101 „ ,, hirsuta 
 
 102 j „ (Cracca) tenera 
 
 [microphyllum, 
 
 103 
 
 104 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 107 
 
 108 
 109 
 
 no 
 
 in 
 
 112 
 
 „ ,, mollis 
 
 ,, ,, pallida 
 
 „ „ rigidula ... 
 
 ., (Euyicia sativa 
 
 Lathyrus (Ealathyrus) aphaca 
 „ „ sativus 
 
 „ „ spbsericus [an- 
 
 gulatus, Royle.] 
 
 „ (Orobus) lutens 
 Pisum sativum 
 ,, aivense 
 
 S a indan 
 asainda. 
 
 Gunchi rakti, 
 
 Laguli-imli, 
 
 Chana 
 
 Kuri 
 
 Kur-kosha ... 
 Ghora-kolon, 
 Matar 
 
 Ningla-koslia, 
 
 Kolai 
 
 Note. 
 
 Common to 4,000 feet. 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet, March. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ Naini Tal. 
 Rare. 
 
 Very common, August. 
 Common ; Binsar „ 
 Very common, July. 
 
 Va'leys. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 55 
 
 Common up to 7,000 
 feet. 
 
 Very common, 
 autumn. 
 
 55 
 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys, 
 
 55 
 
 Cultivated ; Bhabar. 
 About 12,000 feet ; 
 
 rare. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 In cultivated fields. 
 Frequent ; Adwani, 
 April. 
 
 High levels ; rare. 
 Common. 
 
 F are. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Cultivated and wild. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 343 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — {continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 | 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 1 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 45.' — LEGUMINOSiE — (continued). 
 
 '4'KIBE PhASEOLE®. 
 
 Section Glycine.®. 
 
 
 113 
 
 Sbuteria vestita, var. involucrata ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 „ var. densifiora ... 
 
 , . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 114 
 
 Dumasia villosa 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 115 
 
 Glycine soja [Soja hispida, Mcench,] 
 
 Section Erythrine® 
 
 Bhat 
 
 Cultivated ; very 
 
 common. 
 
 116 
 
 Mucuna atropurpurea 
 
 Baldaka 
 
 Bageshwar. 
 
 117 
 
 „ pruriens 
 
 Goncha 
 
 Valleys ; common, 
 
 May. 
 
 118 
 
 Erythrina indica 
 
 Rungra 
 
 February ; Bhabar. 
 
 119 
 
 „ resupinata ... ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent ; Hawalbagh, 
 March and October. 
 
 120 
 
 „ suberosa 
 
 Rungra 
 
 March, up to 4,000 
 feet. 
 
 121 
 
 „ arborescens ... ... 
 
 Section Galactie® 
 
 
 August, common. 
 
 122 
 
 Spatbolobus Roxburghii [Butea par- 
 Yiflora, Roxb.] 
 
 Maola 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 123 
 
 Butea frondosa 
 
 Dhak 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 124 
 
 Butea superba 
 
 • « » 
 
 Near Taili Mainari 
 hill Loch, Septem- 
 ber. 
 
 125 
 
 Pueraria tuberosa 
 
 Billi-kand ... 
 
 Very common, March, 
 April. 
 
 126 
 
 „ Stracheyi 
 
 Section Euehascole. 
 
 ®. 
 
 Rare ; Kalimandi, 7,300 
 feet. 
 
 127 
 
 Phaseolus vulgaris 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated ; Bhabar 
 gardens. 
 
 128 
 
 „ trilobus 
 
 Chhihin 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 129 
 
 aconitifolius ... 
 
 Moth 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 130 
 
 „ mungo 
 
 Mung 
 
 „ not common. 
 
 
 „ var. radiatus 
 
 Urd 
 
 „ common. 
 
 131 
 
 „ calcaratu8 [torosus, Roxb.] 
 
 Gurush 
 
 „ and wild red 
 
 and white varieties. 
 
 132 
 
 Vigna (Euvigna'i catiang [Dolichos 
 sinensis, Linn.] 
 
 Riansh 
 
 „ common, three 
 
 varieties. 
 
 
 „ „ var. sinensis 
 
 Lobiya 
 
 
 133 
 
 „ (Plectropis) vexillata [Pha- 
 
 seolus angustifolius, Wall.] 
 
 Ban-mung ... 
 
 Very common, autumn. 
 
 134 
 
 Pachyrrhizus angulatus ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated; Bhabar, 
 root edible. 
 
 135 
 
 Dolichos Lablab 
 
 Shimi 
 
 Gardens, cultivated up 
 to 7,000 feet. 
 
 136 
 
 „ biflorus [unifiorus, D. C.] 
 
 Gahat 
 
 Cultivated up to 3,000 
 feet. 
 
 137 
 
 „ falcatus 
 
 Gahatiya? ... 
 
 Common. 
 
o4 
 
 No. 
 
 138 
 
 139 
 
 140 
 
 141 
 
 142 
 
 143 
 
 144 
 
 145 
 
 146 
 
 147 
 
 148 
 
 149 
 
 150 
 
 151 
 
 152 
 
 163 
 
 154 
 
 155 
 
 156 
 
 157 
 
 158 
 
 159 
 
 160 
 
 161 
 
 162 
 
 163 
 
 164 
 
 HIM A LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I.— P0LYPETALJ3— (continued). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 45.- — LEGUMINOSiE — (continued). 
 
 
 Tribe Puaseoekae — ( concluded). 
 
 
 Section Cajane/e. 
 
 
 
 Atylosia (Atylia) mollis 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ „ grandiflora 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare ; Bageshwar. 
 
 „ ., [Cantharo spcrmum] 
 
 
 Common ; Bhabar and 
 
 scaraboeoides. 
 
 
 outer hills. 
 
 „ „ platycarpa, 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Gajanus flavus 
 
 Arliar 
 
 Cultivated ; Bhabar. 
 
 Eriosema chinense [Crotalaria tube- 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common; Simtotahill. 
 
 rosa, Don.] 
 
 
 
 Rhynchosia pseudo-cajan 
 
 Sliiali, ph(i- 
 sarpata. 
 
 >> 
 
 „ minima 
 
 
 Low elevations; rare. 
 
 „ himalensis ... 
 
 
 J) 
 
 Flemingia (Ostryodium) strobolifca, 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 „ var. fruticulosa ... 
 
 
 
 Ch^ppur i • ■ 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 „ (Chalaria) paniculata ... 
 
 
 At low elevations. 
 
 „ (Flemingiastrum) con- 
 
 Bhatua 
 
 Common. 
 
 gesta [semialata]. 
 
 
 
 ,, „ var. nana 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ (Rhynchosioides) vestita, 
 
 Muskila 
 
 Edible tuber ; com- 
 mon. 
 
 Tribe Daebergieae. 
 
 
 
 Section Aeternifoliol a tje. 
 
 
 Dalbergia Sissoo 
 
 Sisu 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 „ rimosa 
 
 . . . 
 
 5) >> 
 
 „ lanceolaria [frondosa, 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 „ volubilis 
 
 Bhatia 
 
 Common. 
 
 Pterocarpus marsupium ... 
 
 Bijai-sal 
 
 Near Barmdeo. 
 
 Section OppositifolioeatjE. 
 
 
 Pongamia glabra ... ... 
 
 Pit papar ... 
 
 Bhabar, April. 
 
 Derris robusta 
 
 Baro 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet. 
 
 Tribe Sopiioreao. 
 
 
 
 Sophora mollis [Edwardsia mollis, 
 
 Pahar-gungri, 
 
 Very common, March. 
 
 Royle], 
 
 
 
 Tribe Caesaepinie^e. 
 
 
 
 Csesalpinia [Guilandina] Bonducella, 
 
 Karon j 
 
 Up to 2,500 feet. 
 
 „ [Poinciana] pulcherrima, 
 
 Krishna chu- 
 ra. 
 
 G arden. 
 
 „ „ sepiaria ... 
 
 Aira 
 
 Common. 
 
 Parkinsonia aculeata 
 
 Wilayati ki- 
 kar. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Poinciana regia 
 
 ... 
 
 Gardens ; rare. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION I.— POLY PETALiE — (continued). 
 
 N o. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 45 , — L E G U MINOSFK — (continued). 
 
 Tribe Gassier. 
 
 
 165 
 
 Cassia (Fistula) Fistula. 
 
 Rajbriksh, ki- 
 tota. ;i 
 
 May, June, up to 4,000 
 feet. 
 
 166 
 
 „ (Senna) eccidentalis 
 
 Banal’ 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 167 
 
 „ „ Sophera (purpurea, Roxb], 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 108 
 
 „ „ Tora 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 169 
 
 „ „ angustifolia [laiiceolata, 
 
 Royle.] 
 
 Sanna, mak- 
 ki. 
 
 Cultivated; Bhabas, 
 
 170 
 
 „ (Psilorhegma) glauca [arbores- 
 cens, Roxb. 
 
 Banar 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 171 
 
 „ (Lasiorhegma) Absus [cocci- 
 nea, Wall.] 
 
 Common. 
 
 172 
 
 pumila ... 
 
 Silpatiya ... 
 
 
 173 
 
 „ mimosoides 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 „ var. dimidiata 
 
 )) 
 
 Common. 
 
 ... 
 
 „ var. Wallichiana 
 
 »> ” 
 
 Tribe Amiierstic^e. 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 174 
 
 Saraca indica [Jonesia asolta, Roxb.] 1 
 
 Tribe Bauhinieas. 
 
 Asok ... 
 
 Introduced ; Sitaban, 
 Bhabar. 
 
 175 
 
 Bauhinia (Decindrse) racemosa [par- 
 vifiora Vahl.J 
 
 Amli 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet, com- 
 mon, April. 
 
 176 
 
 ,, malabarica ... 
 
 Rare, October. 
 
 Common, September. 
 
 177 ' 
 
 „ (Triandrae) retusa [einargi- 
 
 nata, Wall.] 
 
 Kandla . . . 
 
 178 
 
 „ ,, Vahlii 
 
 Main 
 
 Very common, April, 
 May. 
 
 179 
 
 „ „ purpurea 
 
 Khairwal ... 
 
 Bhabar and valleys, 
 October. 
 
 1.80 
 
 „ (Pentandraj) variegata 
 
 )9 
 
 Common, April. 
 
 ... 
 
 }} „ var. Candida, ... 
 
 Tribe Mimoseas. 
 
 
 
 181 
 
 Entada scandens 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 182 
 
 Parkia biglandnlosa 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated ; Bhabar. 
 
 183 
 
 Leucaena glauca [Acacia frondosa,... 
 D. C.] 
 
 Lajwanti ... 
 
 Common, valleys, July. 
 
 184 
 
 Mimosa pudica 
 
 Naturalized, Bhabar. 
 
 185 
 
 „ rubicaulis [octandra, Roxb.], 
 
 Tribe Acaciead. 
 
 Agla 
 
 August ; common up 
 4,000 feet. 
 
 186 
 
 Acacia (Globiferae) Farnesiana 
 
 Wilayati 
 
 babul. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 187 
 
 ,, arabica 
 
 Babul 
 
 
 188 
 
 „ eburnea 
 
 Bhes 
 
 Banks of streams. 
 
 189 
 
 (Snicatae) Catechu 
 
 Kliair 
 
 Very common; Bhabar. 
 
 190 
 
 modesta 
 
 Philai 
 
 Rare, Bhabar. 
 
 191 
 
 lenticularis 
 
 Khain 
 
 Barmdeo. 
 
 192 
 
 „ (Vulgares) concinna [rugata,D.C], 
 
 Ban-ritha ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 193 
 
 „ Intsia [Csesia, Linn.] 
 
 Katrar 
 
 Very common, Bhabar. 
 
 194 
 
 „ „ pennata 
 
 Agla 
 
 >> 99 
 
 44 
 
346 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POIATETALiE — ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 45.— LEGUMIN0S2E— (concluded). 
 
 Tribe Ingeie. 
 
 
 195 
 
 Albizzia (Multifoliolatae) Lebbek ... 
 
 Tantiya, halsis 
 
 Common, A p r i 1, 
 June. 
 
 196 
 
 ., „ odoratissima 
 
 Siris 
 
 Bhabar, April, June. 
 
 
 „ „ var. mollis 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 197 
 
 „ ,, proccra 
 
 Baro 
 
 „ May 
 
 198 
 
 „ „ Julibrissin 
 
 Lai siris 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet. 
 May. 
 
 199 
 
 „ „ stipulata [Smith- 
 
 iana, Wall. 
 
 ... 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet, 
 May. 
 
 SOO 
 
 „ Paucifoliolatae) lucida 
 
 
 Bhabar, April. 
 
 201 
 
 Pithecolobium (Unguiscati) dulee ... 
 
 Wibiyati imli, 
 Dakhni babul. 
 
 Gardens, Bhabar. 
 
 202 
 
 „ Clypearia) bigeminum 
 
 ORDER 4G. — ROSACEJE 
 
 Tribe Pruneje. 
 
 Kachlora . . . 
 
 Up to 3,000 feet, April. 
 
 1 
 
 Primus (Amygdal ns) per sica 
 
 Aru 
 
 Cultivated ; very com- 
 mon. 
 
 2 
 
 „ (Armeniaca) armeniaca 
 
 Cliuaru and 
 zardaru. 
 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Cerasus) avium 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated up to 8,000 
 feet. 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ cerasus 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ „ Jaequemontii 
 
 Padam puya 
 
 Rare, Malari, Edge- 
 v r orth. 
 
 6 
 
 „ „ Puddum 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common, Novem- 
 ber. 
 
 7 
 
 „ (Enprunus) communis var., 
 
 domestica var. 
 
 Bhotiya b a - 
 dam. 
 
 Cultivated ; Almora. 
 
 
 
 Ladaki 
 
 >> 
 
 8 
 
 „ (Laurocerasus) Pandus [cornu- 
 
 ta, Royle], 
 
 Jaman 
 
 Common. 
 
 9 
 
 „ „ nepalensis 
 
 >> 
 
 About 6,000 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 „ „ undulata [caprici- 
 
 da, Wall]. 
 
 f) 
 
 
 11 
 
 Prinsepia utilis 
 
 Tribe Spireze. 
 
 Bekla, jhatila, 
 
 Very common. 
 
 12 
 
 Spirasa (Ulmaria) vestita [Kamtschat- 
 ica, Lindley. 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 13 
 
 „ (Aruncus) aruncus [triternata. 
 Wall]. 
 
 ,, (Sorbaria) sorbifolia ["Lindley 
 and Wall.] 
 
 ... 
 
 „ 10,000 feet. 
 
 14 
 
 Dhaniyali ... 
 
 ,, 8,000 „ 
 
 15 
 
 „ (Chamasdrya) bella 
 
 Jhar 
 
 Common. 
 
 16 
 
 ,, „ canescens [cunci- 
 
 folia, Wall]. 
 
 >) ••• 
 
 }> 
 
 17 
 
 „ „ vaccinifolia 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETAL2E — {continued ) . 
 
 347 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 20 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 41 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 V ernacular 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 4 6 . — RO SACEiE— (conti nued) . 
 Tribe Rub.!::.®. 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 n 
 
 99 
 
 ?> 
 
 99 
 
 » 
 
 99 
 
 Rubus (Sinsplicifolias) calycinus [D.ili- 
 barda calycina, D.C.] 
 acuminatus 
 paniculatus [ti 1 i a- 
 ceus, Wall], 
 
 „ moluceanus [rogosus, 
 Smith]. 
 
 „ reticulatus 
 
 lanatus [tiliaceus, 
 St. & VV.] 
 
 (Digitatai) alpestris 
 (Trifoliatse) saxatilis 
 „ nutans 
 
 ni vetis 
 var. concolor 
 maeilentus [as per 
 Royle.] 
 
 „ ellipticus [rotundi- 
 folius, Wall; Gov- 
 ry-phul, R o x b. 
 flavus, Don.] 
 (Pinnataa) biflorus 
 
 lasiocarpus [rosadlo- 
 rus, Roxb.] 
 foliolosns •••- 
 
 rosiefolius 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Tribe Potkxtille^e. 
 
 Geum (Engeuui) urbanum ... 
 
 (Sievcrsia) elatum [Potentilla 
 adnata, Wall]. 
 
 Fragaria (Duchesnea) indica 
 
 „ (Eufragaria) vesea [nub: col a. 
 Wall] 
 
 Potentilla (Sibbaldia) Sibbaldl 
 
 n „ axillitlora 
 
 „ (Trichothalamus) iruticosa ... 
 „ „ ambigua 
 
 „ eriocarpa 
 
 ” (Enpotentilla) Mooniana [poly- 
 pliylla, Wall]. 
 
 dens, Wall]. 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 fulgens [splen- 
 
 Leschcnaultiana, 
 fragarioides ... 
 peduncularis ... 
 leuconota 
 microphylla ... 
 
 Lai hisalu 
 Kala „ 
 
 Lai „ 
 
 Kala ,, 
 
 99 
 
 Lai liisalu,. . 
 Pingla „ 
 ganger. 
 
 Lai „ 
 Pingla „ ... 
 
 99 99 
 
 Hisalu 
 
 Pingla hisalu, 
 Kala ,, 
 
 Safed „ ... 
 
 Lai „ ... 
 
 Kaphaliya 
 
 Note. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 99 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ low levels. 
 
 „ high levels. 
 
 About 6,000 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 Very common at high 
 elevations. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common, China hill. 
 
 March, very common. 
 Fruit much eaten in 
 April and May. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Very common, Blnibar, 
 and up to 7,500 feet. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common, above 8,000 
 feet. 
 
 „ up to 8,000 
 
 feet. 
 
 „ above 7,000 
 feet. 
 
 „ Dakuri, at 
 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Rare ; Malar i. 
 Rare, high levels. 
 
 99 
 
348 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — (continued}. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 46. — R( JSACEiE — (continued). 
 
 Tribe Potbntieeje — ( concl nded). 
 
 
 40 
 
 Potentilla (Enpotentilla) multiftda ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare, Niti pass, 1 6,000 
 fe t. 
 
 50 
 
 „ „ sericea 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rare, high elevations. 
 
 51 
 
 „ „ nepaslensis 
 
 . r. 
 
 Common. 
 
 6-2 
 
 „ „ argyrophylla ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ,, „ vur. atrosan- 
 
 guinea. 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 63 
 
 „ „ nivea 
 
 ■ 
 
 Rare, high eleva- 
 tions. 
 
 64 
 
 „ „ Kleiniana 
 
 « ' . 
 
 Common. 
 
 66 
 
 « 
 
 „ „ snpina 
 
 Tribe PoTERrEiB. 
 
 
 rr 
 
 56 
 
 Agrimonia Eupatorium 
 
 Tribe Rose.®. 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, June, July. 
 
 6 7 
 
 Rosa (Eleutlierostylae) macrophylla, 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent ; China and 
 Binsar. 
 
 58 
 
 „ „ Webbiana 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 8,00o feet, com- 
 mon. 
 
 59 
 
 „ „ sericea [tetrape- 
 
 tala, Royle.] 
 
 ... 
 
 >> >> 
 
 60 
 
 ,, (Systylae) moscliata [Brunonis, 
 Wall], 
 
 Tribe Pome.®. 
 
 
 Very common ; May- 
 J une. 
 
 61 
 
 Cydonia vulgaris 
 
 Bihi 
 
 Cultivated up to 5, 000 
 feet. 
 
 62 
 
 Eriobotrya japoniea 
 
 Loquat 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 63 
 
 Pyrus (Malus) malus 
 
 Seb 
 
 „ and perhaps 
 
 wild. 
 
 64 
 
 yy IltlCCcltcl . ■ • , , a 
 
 Ban meha.l . . . 
 
 Com on ; sometimes 
 cultivated. 
 
 65 
 
 „ (Eupyrus) communis 
 
 Nashpati ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 66 
 
 „ „ Pashia [variolosa, 
 
 Wall], 
 
 Melial 
 
 Very common. 
 
 67 
 
 „ „ kuniaoni 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 68 
 
 „ (Aria) lanata ... 
 
 Galion 
 
 Above 8,000 feet, com~ 
 mon. 
 
 69 
 
 „ ,, vestita ... 
 
 Mauli 
 
 Common. 
 
 70 
 
 „ (Sorbus) Aucuparia 
 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 71 
 
 „ „ foliolosa [ursina, 
 
 Wall]. 
 
 Salia halia... 
 
 „ 8,000 feet, very 
 
 common. 
 
 72 
 
 Stranvassia glaucescens [Photinia du- 
 
 Garmehal, 
 
 Very common about 
 
 
 bia, Madden]. 
 
 sund. 
 
 5,000 feet. 
 
 73 
 
 Cratasgus 0 xyacandtha ... 
 
 
 Cultivated ; rare. 
 
 74 
 
 „ crenulata 
 
 Gingaru 
 
 Very common. 
 
 75 
 
 Cotoneaster (Planifolia) bacillaris ... 
 
 Raus, rois ... 
 
 Common. Walking 
 
 sticks made of the 
 wood. 
 
No. 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 
 78 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 
 81 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 F 
 
 t 
 
 h 
 
 f 
 
 < 
 
 1( 
 
 1 
 
 i: 
 
 l 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION I. — POL YPETALiE — (continued) . 
 
 349 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 46.— ROSACEiE- (concluded). 
 Tries . Pomece (concluded), 
 otoneaster (Planifolia) acuminata ... I Runs, rois 
 
 „ multi flora ... 
 
 nummularia . . . 
 (Recurvifolia) microphyl- 
 la. 
 
 „ thvmifolia ... 
 
 buxifolia 
 
 Gat'i 
 
 ORDER 47. — SAXIFRAGACEiE. 
 Tribe Saxifrages. 
 
 Btilbe ri vularis [Spiraea barbata, Wall], 
 
 axifraga (Nephrophyllum) odonto- 
 phylla. 
 
 „ (Hirculus) palpebrata 
 
 „ t , saginoidcs 
 
 „ divtrsi folia ... 
 
 „ (Boraphila) micrantha ... 
 
 „ (Microphylla) imbricata 
 
 „ (Spinulasse) brachypoda... 
 
 ( „ flmbriata 
 
 fillcaulis 
 
 >5 
 
 V 
 
 „ (Flagellares) Brunoniana, 
 
 „ (Bergenia ligulata 
 
 „ var. ciliata, Royle 
 
 hrysosplenium (Oppositifolia) nepal- 
 ciiBe. 
 
 „ var. sulcatum, 
 
 „ trichospermum, 
 
 „ (Alternifolia) tenellum ... 
 Parnassia nubicola 
 
 Tribe Hydranges. 
 
 Hydrangea (Truncate) altissima 
 „ asptera 
 
 „ (Coronata3)ves- 
 
 tita. 
 
 Deutzia corymbosa 
 
 Silphora 
 
 Note. 
 
 Com m on . W alk i n g 
 sticks made of the 
 wood 
 
 Rare ; Niti pass. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 Very common every- 
 where. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Bliujhata ... 
 
 ,, 
 
 Tribe Escaet.onies. 
 
 Itea nutans 
 
 Garkath 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above .10,000 feet. 
 
 Rare ; found near Ra- 
 lam at 13,000 feet. 
 
 >> 
 
 >> 
 
 >5 
 
 )) 
 
 ,, 10,000 
 „ 10,000 
 „ 12,000 
 „ 10,000 
 „ 11,000 .. 
 
 „ 10,000 „ Pin- 
 
 dar i. 
 
 China peak. 
 
 March ; very common. 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Near Kedar Kanta. 
 Common. 
 
 „ staminea 
 
 ,, macrantha ••• •• 
 
 Phifadelphus coronarius, var. tomen- j Bukyal, dha- 
 tosus. 1 niyali. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 May, common, high 
 elevations. 
 
 May, very common. 
 May, rare. 
 
 June, frequent at high 
 elevations. Wan. 
 
 Common at low eleva- 
 tions. 
 
350 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — (continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 ! 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 
 ORDER 47.— SAXIFRAGACEiE- 
 
 (concluded). 
 
 
 
 TllIBK RlBKSIJinS. 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 Ribes (Grossularia) grossularia 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common about 10,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 20 
 
 „ (Ribesia) glaciale [acuminatum, 
 
 lvokaliya ... 
 
 ,, above 10,000 
 
 
 Wall]. 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 27 
 
 „ „ nigrum ... 
 
 Paphar 
 
 „ about 10,000 
 
 feet. 
 
 28 
 
 „ „ rubrum ... 
 
 
 ?? y> 
 
 
 ORDER 48. — CRASSULACE2E. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Isostbmones. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Tillsea pentandra 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Crassula indica 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, Gagar. 
 
 3 
 
 Cotyledon oreades 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 13,000 feet. 
 
 
 Tribe Dipl'ostemonus opposjtifolia. 
 
 
 4 
 
 Bryopbyllum calycinum ... .?. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Bliabar ; introduced. 
 
 5 
 
 Kalanchoe spathulata [varians, Wall], 
 
 Bakal patta, 
 
 Very common. ' Goats 
 
 
 
 
 poisoned by eating 
 this plant. 
 
 
 Tribe Dipbost emones alterkifolia. 
 
 
 6 
 
 Sedum (Rhodiola) Rhoiiola [rosea, 
 
 
 Common above 12,000 
 
 
 Linn], 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 7 
 
 „ „ crenulatum 
 
 
 Frequent above 12,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 8 
 
 „ „ quadrifidum 
 
 
 Common above 12,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 9 
 
 „ „ asiaticum 
 
 
 „ above 11,000 
 
 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 „ „ linearifolium 
 
 
 „ on trees. 
 
 11 
 
 „ „ trifldum [sinu- 
 
 
 >> >> 
 
 
 atum, Royle] 
 
 ,, (Eusedum) rosulatu n 
 
 
 September. 
 
 12 
 
 
 Coannon, April May. 
 
 13 
 
 Sedum [Eusedum) adenotrichum 
 
 
 Co moil, April, and 
 
 
 ,, „ trulUpetalum 
 
 
 May. 
 
 14 
 
 
 Above 1 1 ,000 feet. 
 
 15 
 
 „ „ Ewersii [rubrum... 
 
 Royle]. 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 16 
 
 „ „ multicaule 
 
 
 Com non, July. 
 
 17 
 
 Sempervivutn mucronatum 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 18 
 
 „ seloides ... 
 
 
 „ 10,000 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 49.— DROSERACFiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Drosera Burmanni ... ... 
 
 
 Bliabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ peltata 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 ( RDER 50. — HALORAGEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 My ri ophyllum spicatum ... 
 
 « t > 
 
 Naini Tal lake. 
 
 2 
 
 Call itriche verna 
 
 ••• 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 351 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — {continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 51. — COMBRETACEiE. 
 
 Trice Combretejb 
 
 1 
 
 Tcrminalia (Catappa) belerica 
 
 Behara 
 
 2 
 
 „ „ Chebula 
 
 Har, harira, 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Fentaptera) Arjuna [gla- 
 
 bra, RoxbJ. 
 
 Saj 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ tomcntosa 
 
 
 5 
 
 Anogeissus latifolius 
 
 Bakla 
 
 6 
 
 Combretum (Poivrea) decandrum ... 
 
 
 7 
 
 „ (Eucombretum) nanum... 
 
 Pharsiya ... 
 
 8 
 
 Quisqualis indica 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ORDER 52.— MYRTACEJE. 
 
 Tribe Leptospermeje. 
 
 1 
 
 Eucalyp tus obi i qua 
 
 Stringy bark, 
 
 2 
 
 „ globulus 
 
 Tribe Myrteje. 
 
 Blue gum ... 
 
 3 
 
 Psidium Guyava 
 
 Amrdd 
 
 4 
 
 Myrtus communis ... ..« 
 
 W i 1 a y a t i 
 mendhi. 
 
 5 
 
 Eugenia (Jambosa) Jambos 
 
 Gulab jaman, 
 
 6 
 
 „ (Syzygium) operculata 
 
 Rai „ 
 
 7 
 
 „ „ Jambolana 
 
 • 
 
 Tribe Barringtonteje. 
 
 Jaman. 
 
 8 
 
 Barringtonia acutangula 
 
 ... 
 
 9 
 
 Careya herbacea 
 
 Kumbh 
 
 10 
 
 ,, arborea 
 
 
 ORDER 53.— MELASTOMACEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 Osbeckia chinensis [angnstifola,Don]. 
 
 1 Kukar-makri, 
 
 2 
 
 „ stellata 
 
 1 
 
 
 ORDER 54.— LYTHRACE^S. 
 
 Tribe Ammanniete. 
 
 1 
 
 Ammannia (Rotala) peploides 
 
 • » • 
 
 2 
 
 „ rotundifolia 
 
 Darmiya . . . 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Euammannia) salicifolia, 
 
 ... 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ senegalensis, 
 
 • 
 
 Note. 
 
 Frequent ; G a n ai, 
 March. 
 
 Common np to 5,000 
 feet, April, May. 
 
 Bliabar, April, May. 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 feet, April. 
 
 „ onter range. 
 
 ,, Feb., March. 
 
 Bliabar; very common, 
 March, April. 
 
 „ gardens. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Cultivated, up to 8,000 
 feet. 
 
 Cultivated ; Bhabar. 
 Bhabar. 
 
 „ and valleys. 
 
 Banks of streams ; 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Bhabar, Mat ch. 
 
 Frequent, autumn. 
 Common „ 
 
 Rare. In damp places. 
 Very common „ 
 Bhabar swamps, and 
 up to 4,000 feet. 
 Frequent up to 5,000 
 feet. 
 
352 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — {continued) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 54.— LYTHRACEAE— (concluded). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Lytjireye. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Woodfordia floribunda [Grislea to- 
 
 Dliai 
 
 Very common, April. 
 
 
 uietosa, Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Lawsonia alba 
 
 Mend hi 
 
 Common gardens. 
 
 7 
 
 Lagerstroemia (Velaga) indica 
 
 Gulbahar ... 
 
 August, com m o n, 
 
 
 
 
 gardens. 
 
 8 
 
 „ „ parviiiora ... 
 
 Dhaura 
 
 Very common, Bliabar. 
 
 9 
 
 ,, (Adambea) Elos-Reginae, 
 
 Jaral 
 
 Rare. Gardens. 
 
 10 
 
 Punica Granat :.m 
 
 Darirn 
 
 Very com ron up to 
 
 
 
 
 5,000 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 55.— ON AGE ACE JE. 
 
 
 
 Section Polyspermeas. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Epilobium (Chamamerium) angusti- 
 
 • • • 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 folium. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ ,, latifolium 
 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Lysimachion) Iprsutum, 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ roseum 
 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 5 
 
 „ ., tetragonum . . . 
 
 
 Naini Tal. 
 
 6 
 
 ,, „ laxum, Royle, 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Aenothera rosea 
 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 8 
 
 „ nocturna 
 
 
 )> 
 
 9 
 
 „ grandi flora 
 
 
 
 
 Section Oeigosperma. 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Circsea lutetiana [repens, Wall] 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 „ alpina [intermedia, Wall] ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ORDER 5G.— SAMYDACEA3. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Casearia graveolens 
 
 Chila, c h i 1- 
 
 Fruit used to poison 
 
 
 
 ra. 
 
 fish. 
 
 
 „ tomentosa 
 
 >> >> 
 
 » » 
 
 
 ORDER 57. — PASSIFLORACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Passiflora, species ... ... 1 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 
 ORDER 58. — CUCURBIT ACEAE. 
 
 
 
 Section Sigmatoperze. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Trichosanthes palmata ... 
 
 Indrayan . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, cucumerina 
 
 
 Bliabar. 
 
 3 
 
 „ anguina ... 
 
 Chichinda ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 4 
 
 Herpetospermum caudigerum 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 6 
 
 Lagenaria vulgaris 
 
 Lauka, lauki, 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 
 
 tumri. 
 
 
 6 
 
 Luffa segyptiaca [pentendra, Roxb.] 
 
 Ghia torai . . 
 
 
 7 
 
 „ acutangula [triandra] 
 
 Torai 
 
 
 8 
 
 Benincasa cerifera 
 
 Bhuja, petha, 
 
 
 ‘ 
 
 
 kumhra. 
 
 
 9 
 
 Momordica Charantia 
 
 Karela 
 
 i 
 
 >> 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 353 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — [continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 58. — CUCURBIT ACE^E' — 
 
 (concluded). 
 
 
 
 Section Sigma toperje — ( conclnd ed) . 
 
 
 10 
 
 Momoi-dica dioica ... ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 11 
 
 Cncumis trigonns 
 
 Airalu 
 
 Common. 
 
 12 
 
 „ Melo [ufcilissimus, Roxb.]... 
 
 Kakri 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 13 
 
 „ sativus 
 
 Kakri, khira, 
 
 
 14 
 
 Citrullus Colocynthis 
 
 Tarbuza 
 
 Wild and cultivated. 
 
 15 
 
 ,, vulgaris 
 
 55 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 16 
 
 Cephalandra indica £Coccinia indica, 
 
 Kunderu . . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 W. and A.]. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 Cucurbita maxima 
 
 Kadu 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 
 Section Okthopeb.®;. 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 Bryonia laciniosa 
 
 • . • 
 
 Common. 
 
 19 
 
 Mukia scabrella 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 20 
 
 Zelmeria umbellata 
 
 Gwala-kakri, 
 
 55 
 
 
 „ var. nepalensis 
 
 . . . 
 
 55 
 
 21 
 
 Melotliria odorata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 22 
 
 Edgaria darjeelingensis ... 
 
 ... 
 
 55 
 
 23 
 
 Gynostemma pedata 
 
 • t • 
 
 55 
 
 
 ORDER 59/ — BEGONIACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Begonia (Knesebeclda) picta 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, autumn. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, (Trilobaria) amcena [tenella, 
 
 ... 
 
 55 55 
 
 
 Don.]. * 
 
 
 
 
 ORDER 60.— DATISCACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Datioca Cannabina 
 
 1 Bhang-j ala,.. 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 61. — CACTACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Opnntia Dilienii 
 
 Nag-phansa, 
 
 Introduced. Common 
 
 
 
 
 up to 6,000 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 62. — FICOIDE.ZE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Trianthema crystallina 
 
 • • . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ pentandra 
 
 ... 
 
 55 
 
 3 
 
 Mollugo stricta 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 63.— UMBELLIFERiE. 
 
 
 
 Section Hetekosciadj/e. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Hydr oco tyle j avani ca 
 
 • . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 „ rotundifolia 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 3 
 
 „ asiatica 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 Sanicula europasa [elata, Don.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, June, Ban]- 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 bagr. 
 
 45 
 
354 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION I. — POLYPETALiE — [continued] . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 63. — UMBELLIFERiE — (concluded). 
 
 Section Ha nozicia. 
 
 Tribe Ammine.®. 
 
 
 6 
 
 Yicatia coniifolia 
 
 ,,, 
 
 Khati Pindari, May. 
 
 6 
 
 „ Stewartii 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare, Garhwal. 
 
 7 
 
 Bupleurnm lanceolatum 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, June, Banj- 
 bagr. 
 
 8 
 
 „ Candollii 
 
 . .. 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 9 
 
 „ diversi folium 
 
 . . . 
 
 „ 7,000 „ 
 
 Naini Tal, common. 
 
 10 
 
 „ falcatum, var. marginata, 
 
 . . . 
 
 11 
 
 „ longicaule ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
 12 
 
 „ tenue 
 
 . . . 
 
 13 
 
 Carum (Glabrse) Carui ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 14 
 
 „ (Hispidse) Roxburghianum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 15 
 
 „ „ anethifolium 
 
 . . • 
 
 Almora, common. 
 
 16 
 
 Pimpinella (Glabrae) achilleifolia ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 17 
 
 „ [Reutera, Edgw.] acumi- 
 
 nata. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal, common. 
 
 18 
 
 „ [Acronema, Edgw.] tenera... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal, on oaks, 
 common. 
 
 19 
 
 „ (Papillosas diversifolia tri- 
 foliata, W all. 
 
 Dhanjari ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 20 
 
 „ „ Stracheyi 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare; banks of Dhauli. 
 
 21 
 
 „ „ csespitosa 
 
 ... 
 
 99 9} 
 
 22 
 
 Osmorrhiza Claytoni [laxa, Royle] ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 23 
 
 Chaerophyllum villosum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 
 „ reflexum ... 
 
 Tribe Sbseeine;e. 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 24 
 
 Seseli trilobum 
 
 
 Rare ; Niti and Milam. 
 
 25 
 
 Eaeniculum vulgare [panmorinm, 
 Roxb.] 
 
 Sonf 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 26 
 
 iEnanthe stolonifera 
 
 ... 
 
 Low elevations, com- 
 mon. 
 
 27 
 
 Ligusticum marginatum 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal, common. 
 
 28 
 
 „ elatum [Cortia elata, 
 
 Edgw.] 
 
 ... 
 
 >> 99 
 
 29 
 
 Selinum tenuifolium [Selinum Can- 
 dollii, Edgw.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 30 
 
 „ vaginatum [Cortia vagina- 
 ta, Edgw.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 31 
 
 Cortia Lendeii 
 
 . » . 
 
 
 32 
 
 Pleurospermum [Hymenolsena, D. C.] 
 Govanianum. 
 
 ... 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 33 
 
 99 99 
 
 Candollii. 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 34 
 
 „ angelicoides „ 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare ; Ralam river, 
 11,500 feet. 
 
 35 
 
 „ dentatnm „ 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 36 
 
 „ stel latum „ 
 
 . * . 
 
 Rare ; Milam glacier. 
 
 37 
 
 „ denBifiorum „ 
 
 ... 
 
 High elevations. 
 
No. 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 € 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 355 
 
 DIVISION I.— POLYPETAL2E— {concluded) . 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDEli 63.— UMBELLIFERiE — (concluded). 
 Suction Haplozygi;e — ( concluded). 
 
 Tribe Pectcedane.®. 
 
 Peucedanum graveolens [Anethum 
 sowa, Roxb.] 
 
 „ Dhana 
 
 Heracleum Brunonis 
 
 „ candicans ... 
 
 ., nepalense ... 
 
 Sea 
 
 Section Dipi/'ztgias. 
 
 Coriandrum sativum 
 Daucus Carota 
 Caucalis Anthriscus 
 
 Dhaniya 
 
 ORDER 64.— ARALIACEiK. 
 
 Section Imbricate. 
 
 Aralia cissifolia 
 
 „ cachemirica [Panax tripinna- 
 tum, Wall.] 
 
 Pentapanax parasiticmn • 
 
 ,, Leschenaultii, var. urn- 
 bellatum [Hedera f vagrans, Don.] 
 [Panax brijugum, Wall.] 
 
 Kot semal 
 
 Cultivated, 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 » 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Pindar i, autumn. 
 Up to 7,000 feet. 
 
 Section Falvatje. 
 
 ■Heptapleurum impression [tomento- 
 sum, Don.] 
 
 „ elatum ... 
 
 venulosum [Hedera 
 terebinthacea, Wall.] 
 
 Hetoropanax fragrans [Panax fra- 
 grans, Roxb ] 
 
 Hedera helix, var. sesculifolia 
 
 Banda 
 
 ORDER 65. — 'GORNACEJE. 
 
 Alangium Lamarckii [hexapetalum, 
 Roxd., decapetalum, Wight]. 
 
 Marlea bigoniiefoUa 
 Cornus macrophylla 
 „ oblonga 
 
 „ nervosa, Royle 
 
 „ capitata [Benthamiafragifera], 
 
 Tumri 
 
 Kagshi 
 
 Bamaura 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rar^. 
 
 Up to 3,000 feet. 
 
 Low elevations, No 
 vember. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Bhabar, rare. March. 
 
 Bageswar, May. 
 Common, May. 
 Frequent, September. 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. Fruit edible, 
 summer. 
 
356 
 
 HIMA'LaYAN districts 
 
 DIVISION II.— MONOPETALiE. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 
 ORDER 1 . — CAFRIFOLIACEiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Sami UCE2E. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Viburnum cotinifolium, Don. 
 
 Gwiya 
 
 Very common, June, 
 
 2 
 
 „ Mullaha, Don. [stellulatvm, 
 
 Lai titmuliya, 
 
 Common, July. 
 
 
 Wall.]. 
 
 
 3 
 
 „ cylindricum, Don. [coriace- 
 
 Kala titmuliya, 
 
 „ January. 
 
 
 um, Blume.}. 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ punctatum, Don. [acumina- 
 
 tum, Wall.]. 
 
 (Triloculares) nervosum, Don. [gran- 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, Binsar, July. 
 
 5 
 
 • . • 
 
 „ Upper Sarju. 
 
 6 
 
 difiorum, Wall.]. 
 
 
 
 „ erubescens, Wall.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, April- June. • 
 
 
 Tribe Loxiceruo. 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 / 
 
 Triostium himalayanum 
 
 Dur-bank ... 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 8 
 
 Abelia tri flora 
 
 Munri 
 
 Common, June. 
 
 9 
 
 Lonicera diversifolia, Wall. [L. quin- 
 quelocularis, Hard.]. 
 
 Bhat-kukri, 
 
 „ June and July. 
 
 10 
 
 Lonicera oriental is [Govaniana] 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare; Bhatkot. June. 
 
 11 
 
 ,, alpigena[Webbiana, Wall.]... 
 
 Nalkaru, kar- 
 
 Rare ; Bindari, June.. 
 
 12 
 
 Leycesteria formosa [Lonicera quin- 
 
 Common. Confused by 
 
 
 quelocularis, Hard.]. 
 
 naliya. 
 
 Hardwicke w i t lx 
 No. 10. 
 
 
 ORDER 2. — RUBIACEJE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Naucle^e. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Anthocephalus (Nauclea) Cadanba, 
 
 Kadam 
 
 Cultivated, June. 
 
 2 
 
 Adina (Nauclea) cordifolia 
 
 Haldu 
 
 Common ; Haldvv a ni, 
 
 
 
 Phaldu 
 
 July. 
 
 3 
 
 Stephagyne (Nauclea) parvifolia 
 
 „ Bhabar, June. 
 
 
 Tribe Cinciionaceje. 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Hymenopogon parasiticus 
 
 Bhainai y a - 
 
 On oaks at Binsar. 
 
 5 
 
 Hymenodictyon excelsum 
 
 padera. 
 
 
 6 
 
 Bhalena 
 
 Common, June. 
 
 7 
 
 ,, flaccidum 
 
 
 Rare, June. 
 
 
 Wendlandia exserta [W. cinerea 
 
 Chilkiya ... 
 
 Common, March. 
 
 8 
 
 Rondeletia exserta]. 
 
 
 „ tinctoria ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar, February. 
 
 
 Tribe Hedyotide;e. 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Argostemma sarmentosum 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 10 
 
 Hedyotis Lindleyana 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 ,, calycina 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 Oldenlandia Burmanniana 
 
 
 
 13 I 
 
 „ (Kohautia) coccinea ... 
 
 • f • 
 
 5‘ 
 
 14 1 
 
 „ gracilis 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 15 
 
 „ stipulata 
 
 . • . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 16 
 
 Ophiorliiza nana 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 ,, Mangus 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 18 
 
 „ bracteolata ... 
 
 ... 
 
 >> 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 357 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 2 — EUBIACEH:— (concluded). 
 
 
 10 
 
 Tribe Gardenias. 
 Gardenia turgida [longispina, Mad- 
 
 Thanela 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 20 
 
 den.]. 
 
 „ latifolia 
 
 Pindalu 
 
 ) T 
 
 21 
 
 Randia tetrasperma 
 
 Bhotiya gin- 
 
 Very common. 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 „ dmnetornm 
 
 gar u and 
 Bara gari. 
 Mainphal . . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 „ uliginosa 
 
 Pindalu. 
 
 >> 
 
 24 
 
 Tribe Knoxias. 
 
 Knoxia mollis ... ... f 
 
 , . • 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 25 
 
 Tribe Ixoreas. 
 
 Pavetta tomentosa [Ixora tomentosa, 
 
 Padera 
 
 Common. 
 
 20 
 
 Roxb ]. 
 
 Colfea bengalensis, 
 
 Kath jahi ... 
 
 Frequent, March. 
 
 27 
 
 Tribe Pasderiao. 
 
 Hamiltonia scabra, Dec. [suaveolens, 
 
 Jogiya-padera, 
 
 Common, November. 
 
 28 
 
 var. azurea, Wall.] 
 
 Leptodermis lanceolata ... 
 
 Padera 
 
 Very common, summer. 
 
 29 
 
 Tribe Spermacoceje. - 
 
 , Spermacocc articularis ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 30 
 
 „ lasiocarpa [s t r i c t a, 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 31 
 
 Roxb] 
 
 Tribe Gaeiaceas. 
 
 Rubia cordifolia 
 
 Majethi 
 
 Common. 
 
 32 
 
 „ nervosa, Edge. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare; Gangoli bridge. 
 
 33 
 
 ,, Munjista 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 34 
 
 i y alata • • ♦ • • * 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 35 
 
 Galium asperifolium 
 
 Kuri 
 
 Common. 
 
 36 
 
 „ elegans 
 
 jj 
 
 99 
 
 37 
 
 „ Hamiltonii [G. latifolium, 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 38 
 
 Don.] 
 
 ,, hirtifiorum [G. cilia turn, 
 
 ?) ... 
 
 „ Binsar. 
 
 39 
 
 Don.] 
 
 ,, aparine. 
 
 >) ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 40 
 
 aspevuloide, Edge., [tricorne, Dr. 
 
 
 Very com non ; above 
 
 1 
 
 King.] 
 
 ORDER 3. — 'VALERIAN! 
 
 Nardostachys grandi flora 
 
 LA 5. 
 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 2 
 
 Valeriana Wallichii 
 
 Shami 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 3 
 
 „ Hardwickii [V. elata, Don.] 
 
 
 Com on. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, tenera 
 
 9} ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
358 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II.— MONOPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 4.— -DIPSACEA 
 
 Morina Wallichiana [bre riflora, 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Edge.?] 
 
 „ longifolia 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 Dipsacus strictus, Don. ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 China, 8,700 „ 
 
 4 
 
 ,, inermia 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 5 
 
 ,, levis? 
 
 Narao 
 
 Common. 
 
 6 
 
 Scabiosa Candollii 
 
 ... 
 
 „ May. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 5.— COMPOSITE 
 
 Tribe Vernoniaceie. 
 Vernonia (Stengelia) anthelmintica, 
 
 1. 
 
 Rare ; autumn. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, (Tephrodes) cinerea 
 
 Kalajira 
 
 Very common up to 
 
 3 
 
 SJ „ va montana ... 
 
 „ (Xipholepis) teres 
 
 ,, 
 
 8,000 feet. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 4 
 
 Tribe Eupatori;e. 
 Adenostemma viscosum, var. latifo- 
 
 
 Common up to 2,500 
 
 5 
 
 lium. 
 
 Ageratum conyzoides 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 Autumn, common up 
 
 6 
 
 Eupatorium longicaule ... 
 
 ... 
 
 to 6,000 feet. 
 
 October, common. 
 
 7 
 
 Tribe Asteroide.*. 
 Solidago virga aurea [Amphiraphis 
 
 
 Summer, common. 
 
 8 
 
 pubescen' , D. C.] 
 
 Dichrocephala latifolia ... 
 
 ... 
 
 >> 
 
 9 
 
 Cyathocline lyrata 
 
 ... 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 
 10 
 
 Myriactis nepalensis [oleosa, Edgw.] 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 Autumn, common. 
 
 11 
 
 „ Wallichii [gracilis, Edgw.j 
 
 ... 
 
 JJ 
 
 12 
 
 ,, Gmelini 
 
 . . . 
 
 October, frequent. 
 
 13 
 
 Rhynchospermum verticillatum 
 
 Naipala 
 
 Autumn ; rare. 
 
 14 
 
 Callistephus chinensis ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 15 
 
 Aster (Euaster) amellus ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Aug., above 8,000 feet. 
 
 16 
 
 „ (Alpigenia) alpinus 
 
 ... 
 
 July, above 1 1 ,000 feet. 
 
 17 
 
 „ (Orthomeris) molliusculus ... 
 
 ... 
 
 May and June; fre- 
 
 18 
 
 „ „ altaicus 
 
 
 quent. 
 
 Aug., above 9,000 feet. 
 
 19 
 
 „ „ spartioides 
 
 ... 
 
 
 20 
 
 ,, (Calimeris) peduncularis 
 
 ... 
 
 September, October ; 
 
 21 
 
 Erigeron canadense 
 
 Sallo 
 
 common. 
 
 Introduced, but now 
 
 22 
 
 ,, acre [Roylei, D. C.] 
 
 Mirch mul ... 
 
 very common. 
 
 May, August ; very 
 
 23 
 
 „ multiradiatum 
 
 
 common. 
 
 July, August ; rare. 
 
 24 J 
 
 25 
 
 Microglossa cabulica [Aster ferrugi- 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare ; Badrinath. 
 
 neus, Edgw.]. 
 
 Conyza veronicsefolia 
 
 
 September, common. 
 
 26 
 
 „ viscidula [polycephala, Edgw.], 
 
 . . . 
 
 Feb., up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 27 
 
 „ absinthifolia 
 
 
 Very common, autumn. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 35 $ 
 
 DIVISION II. — MON 0 PE T A LiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 50 
 61 
 52 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 68 
 
 Sc'entific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 )) 
 
 ORDER 5. — COMP OS IT JE — (continued). 
 
 Tribe Inueoide®. 
 
 Blumea Wightiana 
 „ lacera 
 
 hieracifolia 
 
 runcinata [laciniata, Roxb.], 
 
 „ oxydonta 
 
 Blumea densiflora 
 
 Laggera alata 
 
 Sphaerantlius hirtus [mollis, Roxb.], 
 
 Eilago arvensis, var. lutescens 
 Leontopodium alpinum ... 
 
 Anaphalis cinnamonea ... 
 
 triplinervis ... 
 nubigena 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 mucronata 
 
 tenella [contorta, Don.] 
 margaritacea ... 
 adnata 
 araneosa 
 
 var. semidecurrens 
 Phagnalon niveum 
 
 Gnaphalium hypoleucum 
 
 „ luteo album 
 Caesulia axillaris 
 
 Inula [Corvisartia] Royleana 
 „ (Bubonium) vestita 
 nervosa [nitida, Edgw.] 
 barbata 
 
 (Cappa) Cappa 
 
 Amdok 
 
 Jhula, bokla, 
 
 >) 
 
 5 ) 
 5 > 
 
 cuspidata 
 rubicaulis 
 Vicoa indica 
 
 Carpesium cernuum var. nepalense ... 
 „ var. pedunculosum, 
 
 Tamagari 
 
 Note. 
 
 Spring ; Bhabar. 
 
 ,, very common. 
 May, common. 
 
 „ frequent. 
 
 November ; Col. Da- 
 vidson. 
 
 October ; common. 
 Spring ; „ 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 Autumn ; common. 
 
 yy 
 
 yy 
 
 yy 
 
 above 9,000 
 feet. 
 
 yy 
 
 above 12,000 
 feet. 
 
 yy 
 
 very common. 
 
 yy 
 
 Col Davidson. 
 
 yy 
 
 common. 
 
 yy 
 
 
 yy 
 
 very common. 
 
 June ; 
 
 banks of Dhauli 
 
 near Niti pass. 
 Autumn ; very com- 
 mon. 
 
 „ common. 
 
 October ; rice fields ; 
 Ganai. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 Spring ; up to 3,000 feet. 
 Autumn ; frequent. 
 
 5? yy 
 
 November ; very com- 
 mon. 
 
 October ; common. 
 March ; frequent. 
 Common. 
 
 Autumn ; common. 
 
 69 
 
 „ abrotanoides [racemosum. 
 
 Wall], 
 
 Tribe Heuanthoide.®. 
 
 
 Autumn ; rare. 
 
 60 
 
 Adcnocaulon himalaicum 
 
 * • • 
 
 September ; rare. 
 
 61 
 
 Xanthium strumarium ... 
 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet. 
 
 62 
 
 Zinnia elegans 
 
 ... 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 63 
 
 „ multi flora 
 
 ... 
 
 yy 
 
 64 
 
 Seigesbeckia orientalis ... 
 
 Gobariya . . . 
 
 October ; very com 
 mon. 
 
360 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II. — MON OPETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 65 
 
 ORDER 5.— COMPOSITE— (cc 
 
 Tribe II e bi a n t ii oide ns — (con 
 Eclipta alba, var . erecta ... 
 
 mtinued). 
 
 eluded). 
 
 Common. 
 
 GG 
 
 ,, ,, prostrata 
 
 Blainvillea latifolia 
 
 Karshaniya. . . 
 
 )9 
 
 Very common. 
 
 67 
 
 Wedelia biflora ? 
 
 Rare 
 
 68 
 
 Coreopsis (Calliopsis) tinctoria 
 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 69 
 
 Bidens (Platycarpaea) tripartita 
 
 
 June, October ; com- 
 
 70 
 
 [repens, Don.] 
 
 „ (Psilocarpaea pilosa 
 
 
 mon. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 71 
 
 >, „ d 2 composita, 
 
 
 
 7 2 
 
 Giossogyne pinnatifida 
 
 . • • 
 
 Low elevations. 
 
 73 
 
 Chrysantheilum indicum 
 
 , , , 
 
 September; introduced. 
 
 74 
 
 Galinsoga parviflora 
 
 • • « 
 
 99 
 
 75 
 
 Tribe Helehioid eje. 
 
 Tagetes patula 
 
 ... 
 
 Gardens and natural- 
 
 ?S 
 
 „ erecta 
 
 ... 
 
 ized. 
 
 >9 
 
 77 
 
 Tribe Anthemiders. 
 Achillea millefolium, var . cuspida- 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 78 
 
 ta, Wall. 
 
 Allardia tridactylites ? 
 
 
 Above 15,000 feet. 
 
 79 
 
 ,, tomentosa 
 
 Contula anthemoides ? ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 80 
 
 ... 
 
 February ; rare. 
 
 81 
 
 Tanacetnm longifolium ... 
 
 • 8 ■ 
 
 September, about 
 
 82 
 
 Artemisia (Dracunculus) scoparia ... 
 
 Jhao 
 
 11,000 feet. 
 
 October, common. 
 
 83 
 
 » „ parviflora... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 84 
 
 „ (Abrotanum) vestita 
 
 Deo pati ... 
 
 September, October ; 
 
 85 
 
 » ,, vulgaris [in- 
 
 Pati 
 
 rare ; Jageswar. 
 September, October ; 
 
 
 dica, Roxb.] 
 
 >, „ var . hypoleu- 
 
 • • • 
 
 very common. 
 Common. 
 
 86 
 
 ca, Edgw. 
 
 „ (Absinthium) sicversiana, 
 
 
 About 12,000 feet; 
 
 87 
 
 Tribe Senecienidrs. 
 Tussilago farfara 
 
 
 Jhelam. 
 
 Common; banks of 
 
 1 
 
 88 
 
 Doronicum Roylei [Fullartonia Ru- 
 
 
 streams above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 89 
 
 maonensis, D.C.] 
 
 Gynura nepalensis, var . Tliomsoni ... 
 
 
 March, common, Rani- 
 
 90 
 
 Emilia sonchifolia 
 
 
 bagh. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 91 
 
 Senecio (Synotis) alatus... 
 
 . . . 
 
 October, November ; 
 
 92 
 
 „ „ densiflorus 
 
 • t • 
 
 Pindari, China hill. 
 October to April; very 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 common. 
 
No. 
 
 93 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 102 
 
 103 
 
 104 
 
 105 
 
 106 
 
 107 
 
 108 
 
 109 
 
 110 
 
 111 
 
 112 
 
 113 
 
 114 
 
 115 
 
 116 
 
 117 
 
 181 
 
 119 
 
 120 
 
 121 
 
 122 
 
 123 
 
 124 
 
 125 
 
 126 
 
 127 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 361 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALiE — { continued ). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 5 . — COMPOSITE — (continued). 
 
 Tribe Seneciejiid as.— (concluded). 
 
 Senecio (Synotis) rufinervis 
 ,, Kunthianus 
 
 )> 
 
 >> 
 
 „ Candolleanus 
 (Eusenecio) gracUifior m, ... 
 ,, chrysanthenoides, 
 
 „ pallens [violancus, 
 
 Wall]. 
 
 (Ligularia) sibiricus 
 „ arnicoides 
 Caealia) quinquelobus 
 
 Tribe Cynaroidejs. 
 
 Ecliinops niveus 
 Carduua nutans 
 
 Cuicus arvensis 
 
 „ eriop'iorus vur. involucratus, 
 „ ferox, Edgw. 
 
 „ argyracanthus ... 
 
 „ vur. nepalensis ... 
 
 „ W allichii (arachnoidea, W all), 
 
 Saussurea (Bracteatas) obvallata 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 5> 
 
 (Acaules) Kunthiana 
 (Congestas) gossypina (sacra,’ 
 Edgw). 
 
 „ grammifolia ... 
 
 (Coarctatse pterocaulon . . . 
 
 (Corymbosas) candicans ... 
 
 „ vur. scaposa. 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 JJ 
 
 albescens . . . 
 denticulata, 
 hypoleuca ... 
 Jurinea macrocephala (Dolomiaaa ma- 
 crocephala, D. C.). 
 
 Serratula pallida 
 
 TricholepiB furcata 
 „ elongata 
 Volutarella divaricata ... 
 
 Carthamus tinctorius 
 
 Rat patiya 
 
 Kanaila, jao- 
 ltanda. 
 
 Kanwal 
 
 Kala tagar . . . 
 
 Kusarn 
 
 TRIBE MUTISIACEJE 
 Section Sub2E qu a eii'lo raj . 
 
 Leucomeris spectabilis ... 
 
 Ainsliaea pteropoda 
 „ aptera 
 
 Note. 
 
 November, frequent. 
 September, above 
 10,000 feet 
 
 ■5 n 
 
 October, high levels. 
 
 „ Pindar i. 
 March, June, very 
 common. 
 
 September, Pindari. 
 
 r> ’*> 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Above 8,000 feet, Jhe- 
 lam near Niti. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Autumn, common. 
 
 May. common. 
 
 June common. 
 
 October, common. 
 
 S> 
 
 September, above 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 September, common 
 above 10,000 feet. 
 
 „ about 
 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 „ about 
 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Common, April, Pan- 
 wa Naula. 
 
 September, frequent. 
 
 September, common. 
 
 » >> 
 
 Pindar i. 
 
 May, June, very com- 
 mon. 
 
 November, Pindari. 
 
 October, common. 
 
 March, Haldwani. 
 
 „ Cult i v a t e d, 
 Bhabar. 
 
 May, common. 
 
 Spring, very common. 
 )> >> 
 
 46 
 
362 
 
 ’HIMA'T.AYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALuH — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Yernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 5.-- COMPOSITE— (concluded). 
 Section Labia tjefeorje. 
 
 
 128 
 
 Gerbera lanuginosa (Chaptalia gos- 
 sypina, Royle). 
 
 ... 
 
 June, high elevations. 
 
 129 
 
 „ nivea 
 
 . . • 
 
 September „ 
 
 130 
 
 „ macrophylla (Chaptalia max- 
 
 ima, Don). 
 
 Tribe Ci chora ceze. 
 
 
 
 131 
 
 Cichorium intybus 
 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 132 
 
 Picris hieracioides 
 
 ... 
 
 Mai pat near Lohaghat, 
 October. 
 
 132 
 
 Crepis (Barkhausia) fastida 
 
 ... 
 
 May, Jime, very com- 
 mon. 
 
 133 
 
 (Yonngia) lyrata [runcinata 
 Wall], 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. An 
 Lactcca ? 
 
 134 
 
 Taraxacum Dens leonis 
 
 . • . 
 
 Very common. 
 
 -> >) 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 ... 
 
 ,, v ar. eriopodium 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 „ var. parvulum 
 
 . . . 
 
 135 
 
 LacVca (Brachy ramphus) obtusa ... 
 
 Jangli gobhi, 
 
 April, May, very com- 
 mon ; yellow. 
 
 
 ,, [Microrhynchus nudicaulis 
 
 and patens, D.C.] 
 
 ... 
 
 136 
 
 ,, (Scariola) scariola 
 
 ... 
 
 Low elevations ; yellow. 
 
 ... 
 
 „ „ var. sativa 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 137 
 
 „ (Cicerbita) auricnlata 
 
 ... 
 
 May, July, very com- 
 mon ; blue. 
 
 138 
 
 ,» „ longifolia 
 
 ; 
 
 October, fields, com- 
 mon; blue. 
 
 139 
 
 „ (Lactucopsis sagittarioides, 
 
 ... 
 
 February, common ; 
 blue. An Crepis ? 
 
 140 
 
 „ „ Brunoniana 
 
 [Prenanthes Brunoniana, D.C.] 
 
 • • • 
 
 August, October, com- 
 mon ; blue. 
 
 141 
 
 „ (Melanoseris) hastata 
 
 ••• 
 
 Autumn, common, Loh- 
 ba ; blue or white. 
 
 142 
 
 „ „ laevigata [macror- 
 
 hizon, Royle.] 
 
 ... 
 
 September, very com- 
 mon ; blue. 
 
 143 
 
 „ „ violaefolia 
 
 ... 
 
 September, high ele- 
 vations ; blue. 
 Common, October ; blue. 
 
 144 
 
 „ „ Lessertiana 
 
 • • * 
 
 145 
 
 „ „ dubyasa [Dubyaea 
 
 hispida, D.C.] 
 
 V. 
 
 September, very com- 
 mon ; yellow. 
 
 146 
 
 „ (Ixeris) glabra 
 
 ... 
 
 Winter, low eleva- 
 tions ; yellow-. 
 
 147 
 
 „ „ polycephala 
 
 
 
 148 
 
 Prenanthes hispidula 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 149 
 
 Sonchus asper 
 
 Ufat kancla 
 nalslia. 
 
 Spring, very common. 
 
 150 
 
 „ oleraceus 
 
 
 Spring, common, edi- 
 ble. 
 
 151 
 
 „ arvensis 
 
 >> 
 
 Spring, common. 
 
 152 
 
 Miclirorhynchus secundus 
 
 Rare ; Royle. 
 
 153 
 
 Tragopogon junceum 
 
 * * * 
 
 June, July, very com- 
 mon. 
 
63 44 <J> • e> t jk w bS r* 0O <4© Or ^ bi OS bS 
 
 t)F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPET ALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 363 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 6. — LOBELIACEiE, 
 
 5 Lobelia trigona, Roxb., [trialata, 
 Don,] 
 
 pyramidalis, Wall 
 rosea, Wall 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Rare 5 Malwa Tal. 
 
 ORDER 7. — CAMPANULACEiE. 
 
 Cephalostigma hirsuta ... 
 Wahlenbergia viridis, Edgw. 
 „ agrestis ... 
 
 Gol ghanna, 
 
 Campanula latifolia 
 
 „ sylvatica [integer r i m a 
 
 Don]. 
 
 „ canescens 
 
 „ argyrotricha [pa 1 1 i d a, 
 
 Madden]. 
 
 , color ata ramulosa, Wall]. 
 
 ORDER 8.— ERICACEAE. 
 
 Gualtherla nummular i a ... 
 
 Bhalu bor ... 
 
 trichophylla ... 
 
 Andromeda (Bieris) ovalifolia, [A. 
 capricida,’ Don.] 
 
 (> (Cassiope fastigiata [A 
 
 cupressiformis, Wall]. 
 
 Rhododendron arboreum ... 
 
 „ vai. roseum 
 
 „ campanulatum 
 
 „ anthopogon 
 
 „ lepidotum ... 
 
 Aiyar 
 
 Kamba 
 
 Burans 
 
 Chimul 
 
 Talisfar 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Wacham.near Pindari. 
 Frequent, Banks of 
 Kosi. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common under trees. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 )> 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common, Dakuji, 
 Bhatkot. 
 
 Frequent, above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 Very conmon. 
 
 Milam and Pinda r i , 
 12,000 feet. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Abov 8,000 feet. 
 
 „ 10,000 „ 
 
 ,, 12,000 ,, 
 
 „ 12,000 ,, 
 
 l 
 
 ORDER MONOTROHEJE. 
 
 Monotropa nepalensis 
 
 Chhao 
 
 Binsar, Septem b e r 5 
 found by Mrs. Go- 
 van. 
 
 ORDER lO.-LENTIBULARIiE. 
 
 1 Utricularia flexuosa [stell a r i s , ... 
 
 Wight]. 
 
 2 Pinguicula alpina 
 
 ORDER 11.— PRIMULACJE. 
 
 1 Primula (Sphondylia) floribunda ... 
 
 2 „ (Primulastrum) petiola r i s 
 
 [nana, Wall]. 
 
 3 „ (Athritica) purpurea 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Down to 2,500 feet. 
 Above to 10,000 feet. 
 
 >7 
 
364 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II. — MON OPETALiE — ( continued ), 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 11. — PRIMULACEiE — (concluded). 
 
 
 4 
 
 Primula Stuartii 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 » (Alcuritia) speciosa 
 
 Bisb lcopra... 
 
 Common. 
 
 6 
 
 „ involncrata 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet 
 
 7 
 
 ,, denticulata, var. erosa 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, high eleva- 
 
 8 
 
 Androsace sarmentosa, Wall 
 
 
 tions. 
 
 5) 
 
 „ lanuginosa, Wad 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 ,, rotundilo ia, Hardw. 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 M 
 
 incisa Wall,. [rotundi folia, 
 
 . . . 
 
 Valleys and Bbaba r ~ 
 
 12 
 
 Don]. 
 
 Lysimachia (Epliemerum) lobclioides. 
 
 ... 
 
 winter and spring. 
 Very com on above 
 
 
 „ pyramiflalis 
 
 
 10,000 feet. 
 
 13 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 14 
 
 „ (Lysimastrum) alternifolia. . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 15 
 
 „ debilis 
 
 
 
 1C 
 
 Anagllis arvensis, var. coerulea 
 
 Samolus Yalerandii 
 
 Junk-mam ... 
 
 
 17 
 
 ... 
 
 >v 
 
 Rare, Sual river. 
 
 
 ORDER 12. — MYRSINACAE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Miesa (Baeobotrys) indica ... i 
 
 Kalsis 
 
 Common. Low eleva- 
 
 
 
 
 tions 
 
 2 
 
 „ argentea 
 
 Phusera 
 
 Frequent, Binsar. 
 
 S 
 
 Myrsine africana 
 
 Pahar i cha, 
 
 Common, March., 
 
 
 „ semiserrata 
 
 baiberang, 
 
 
 4 
 
 Chupra 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ acuminata 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Embella r tbusta 
 
 Baiberang ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 7 
 
 Ardisia fioribunda 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 13.— SAPOTACEiE 
 
 
 1 
 
 Bassia butyracea ... ... i 
 
 Cliiura and 
 
 Common at 4,000 feet,. 
 
 
 „ latifolia 
 
 phaiel. 
 
 near Petoragarli. 
 
 2 
 
 Maiiua 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 14.— EBENACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Diospyros Melanoxylon ... ... 
 
 Tendu 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ montana 
 
 Ten du 
 
 
 3 
 
 „ lancesefo'ia 
 
 Ardinia 
 
 Kota Din. 
 
 4 
 
 „ Embryopteris 
 
 Oab 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 15. — SYMPLOCE-dS. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Symplocos (Hopea) saicata 
 
 L rdh, bholya, 
 
 Bar ndeo, November. 
 Rate,. Si a hi devi. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, sumuntia 
 
 . . . 
 
 3 
 
 „ racemosa 
 
 
 Bhabar, November. 
 
 4 
 
 „ ramosissima [nervosa. 
 
 . M 
 
 Rare, Gagar, Binsar. 
 
 
 Madden.] 
 
 
 May. 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Palura) cratoegoides [S. 
 
 Lodli 
 
 Very common, June 
 
 
 paniculata, Madden]. 
 
 
 and July. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 365 
 
 DIVISION II.— MONOPETALiE— ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific na e. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 16. -OLEACEiE 
 
 Fraxinus excelsior 
 
 i. 
 
 Align 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, (Ornus) fioribunda 
 
 Angu 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 Syringa emodi 
 
 Ohia 
 
 Common, above 10,000 
 
 4 
 
 Olea cuspidata [ferruginea, Royle III.] 
 
 Kalap briksh, 
 
 feet. 
 
 Fatal debi near Alrno- 
 
 5 
 
 „ acu ■ inata var. longi- 
 
 Silang 
 
 ra. 
 
 Very common, wild 
 
 6 
 
 folia. 
 
 ,, glandulifera 
 
 Gair 
 
 and planted. 
 
 Com . on. 
 
 7 
 
 Ligustram nepnlense 
 
 ... 
 
 Banks of streams, May, 
 
 8 
 
 „ b acteatum ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, Binsar, June. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, robustum 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, May. 
 
 10 
 
 „ compactum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 >> 
 
 1 
 
 ORD.R 17.— JASMINEH 
 Jasmnum (Simplicifolise) Sambac ... 
 
 L 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, pubtscens 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent, Ganai. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, arborescens ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 „ Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, nepaiense [dicliotomu n 
 
 Jahi 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 Don]. 
 
 ., (trifo ia3) dispcrmum 
 
 Surmali. 
 
 Common. Leaves, gen- 
 
 6 
 
 Jasminmn (Alternifoliae) revolutuin 
 
 Sonajahi ... 
 
 erally trefoil, but 
 sometimes sin pie 
 and sometimes pin- 
 nate. 
 
 Common. 
 
 7 
 
 f chrysanthemum, 
 Roxb ] 
 
 „ „ pubigerum ... 
 
 Chambeli . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 8 
 
 (Pinnatifoiias) otlicinale, 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 9 
 
 „ „ grandiliorum, 
 
 Chambeli 
 and jahi. 
 
 Common. 
 
 10 
 
 Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis 
 
 Parijat, har- 
 
 
 11 
 
 Schrebera swietenoides ... 
 
 singhar of 
 plains. 
 
 Moka 
 
 Bhabar tree. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 18 .— APOCYNACEiE. 
 
 TRIBE CARI8SE2E. 
 
 Carissa diffusa ••• ••• | Timukiya ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 TRIBE PlUNERIEJE. 
 
 Tabernsemontana coronario 
 
 ! Chandi 
 
 
 3 
 
 Vinca pusilia [V. parviilora, Roxb.J... 
 
 I 
 
 99 
 
 4 
 
 Tribe Pars nsie^e. 
 
 Vallaris dichotoma 
 
 | Dudhi 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 Tribe WRiGHTtEns. 
 
 Wrightia mollissima 
 
 i Darliela ..." 
 
 1 
 
 99 
 
366 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALiE — {continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 18.— APOCYNAC.'JE- (concluded). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Alstoxiebs. 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 Alstonla scholaris 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 7 
 
 Blabeaspus l. cidus 
 
 Dudhi 
 
 Common, 
 
 
 Tribe Echiteae. 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 H olarrhena antidysenter ica 
 
 Kuer 
 
 
 HA 
 
 „ pubescens 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 
 Neriutn odorurn 
 
 Kanyur 
 
 
 
 Cnonemorpha macrophylla, [Echites 
 
 Garbadru ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 macrophyl'a, Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 
 Ichnocarqus frute scens ... 
 
 Dudhi 
 
 Common, 
 
 
 ORDER 19. — A SCLEPIADEJE. 
 
 
 
 TiilBE PeRIPLUCKAB. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 Cryptolepi s reticulata 
 
 Rui kosa ... 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet 
 
 2 
 
 Periploca calophylla [Streptocaulon 
 
 Dal bhengla, 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 calophyllum, Wright.] 
 
 
 
 
 Tribe Asceepiadeas. 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 Vincetoxicum canescens [Cynanchum 
 
 
 Common, 
 
 
 glaucum, Wall. J 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ montanum [V. kuna- 
 
 • • • 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 warense, Madden.] 
 
 
 
 0 
 
 Calotrepis gigantea 
 
 Ak, madar ... 
 
 Common, Bhabar. 
 
 6 
 
 „ procera [Hamiitonii] 
 
 
 Rare, Bhabar. 
 
 7 
 
 Cynauchum iialhousiie ... 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 Tribe Stapeliie. 
 
 
 
 
 Sub-tribe Pergulariae. 
 
 
 8 
 
 Tylopliora tenerrin a 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 9 
 
 „ Goxanii [Tphisia Govani- 
 
 
 
 
 ana, Wight.] 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Maradenia Roylei 
 
 Murkila 
 
 Common. 
 
 1.1 
 
 „ lucida, Edgw. 
 
 Dudhi 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 12 
 
 „ tenacissima ... 
 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 IS 
 
 Pergnlaria pallida 
 
 Surkila 
 
 Common, Bhabar. 
 
 14 
 
 Gongronema nepalense ... . . . i 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent on rocks. 
 
 
 Sub-tribe Ceropegibs. 
 
 
 
 15 | 
 
 Orthanthera viminea 
 
 Chapkiya ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 J 6 
 
 Hoya lanceolata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, Bhabar, and 
 
 17 
 
 Oeropegia longifolia 
 
 
 up to 7,000 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 18 
 
 „ Wallichii 
 
 • • • 
 
 F requent. 
 
 19 
 
 „ gracilis, Edgw. 
 
 ... 
 
 yf 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 367 
 
 DIVISION II.— MONOPETAL2E— ( continued 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 20. — LOGANIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Gardneria ovata 
 
 Banjahi 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 :2 
 
 „ angiiBtifolia ... 
 
 
 11 
 
 3 
 
 Buddleia crispa [paniculata, Roxb.]... 
 
 Dhiriya, bhati, 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 dhaula. 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ asiatica [neema, Hamilton], 
 
 ... 
 
 11 
 
 
 ORDER 21.— GENTIANACE2E. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Chironie;e 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Exacum tetragonnm ... ••• 1 Uda, titkana, 
 
 Frequent, Bageswar. 
 
 
 Tribe CHLORas. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Pladera pusilla 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 •8 
 
 Canscora diffusa [virgata, Roxb.] . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 „ decussata 
 
 ... 
 
 11 
 
 
 Tribe Swertice^e. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Gentiana (Chondrophyllum) pedicil- 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 lata. 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 „ capitata 
 
 ... 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 „ aprica 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 8 
 
 decemfida ... ■ 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 9 
 
 „ marginata 
 
 ... 
 
 11 
 
 lO 
 
 Ophelia pan'culata 
 
 Chiretta Tit- 
 kana. 
 
 Autumn annual. 
 
 11 
 
 „ purpurescens 
 
 11 
 
 11 11 
 
 12 
 
 „ cordata 
 
 11 
 
 1> 11 
 
 13 
 
 var fioribus dilute roseis ... 
 
 ... 
 
 W. Waterfleld, Naini 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 14 
 
 (Agathotes) angustifolia ... 
 
 9l 
 
 Autumn annual. 
 
 16 
 
 „ chi rata 
 
 11 
 
 „ perennial. 
 
 16 
 
 ” „ alata 
 
 11 
 
 ,, annual. 
 
 17 
 
 Halenia elliptica 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 18 
 
 Swertia cuneata 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 19 
 
 casrulea 
 
 
 11 
 
 20 
 
 speciosa [perfoliata, Royle], 
 
 Simariya ... 
 
 Common, above 10,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 22.— BIGNONIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Calosanthes indica 
 
 Pharkath . . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 Millingtonia liortensis [Bignonia sub- 
 
 
 
 
 erosa, Roxb], 
 
 Nim chambeli 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 3 
 
 Stereospermum [Bignonia, Roxb.] sua- 
 
 
 
 
 veolens. 
 
 Patal 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 Amphi come arguta 
 
 ... 
 
 Banks of Patalganga. 
 
 6 
 
 Tecoma undulata 
 
 * * * 
 
 Ganai valley. May. 
 
368 
 
 tiimXlayan districts 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 23. — PEDALIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Martynia proboscidea [ M. diandra, 
 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 
 Madden]. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Sesamum indicum 
 
 Til 
 
 >5 
 
 3 
 
 Pedalium murex. 
 
 Gokhru 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 24.— CRYTANDRACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Lysionotns ternifolia [L. serrata, 
 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 
 
 Don]. 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 Didymocarpus subalternans 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, aromatica 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 4 
 
 „ (Acau'.es) macrophylla 
 
 Pathar laung, 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 ,, pedieillata 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 6 
 
 „ lanuginosa 
 
 . . • 
 
 Common. 
 
 7 
 
 Chirita Edgeworthii 
 
 Sankh pushpa, 
 
 >> 
 
 8 
 
 „ bifolia 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Rhynchogiossum obliquum [Wulfenia 
 
 
 „ up to 6,000 feet. 
 
 
 obi i qua, Wall], 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Platystemma vio’oides ... 
 
 • . « 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 iEschynanthuB Perottetiana 
 
 « . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 12 
 
 „ grandiflonis 
 
 • • * 
 
 Ear silang. October. 
 
 13 
 
 Polyneuron dimidiata 
 
 ... 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 
 ORDER 25. — POLEMONIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Cyananthus lobata 
 
 • • • 
 
 Pindari, above 10,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 „ integra 
 
 ... 
 
 Ivedar 12,000 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 26.— CONVOLVULACEiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Argyreiete. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Rivea ornata 
 
 • * • 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 Argyreia speciosa 
 
 ... 
 
 
 3 
 
 , setosa 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju, bank near Kap- 
 
 4 
 
 „ capitata 
 
 ... 
 
 kot, September. 
 
 
 Tribe Convolvuli:.®. 
 
 
 5 
 
 Quamoclit vul garis 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 6 
 
 Batatas pentaphylla 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 7 
 
 Pharbitis Nil 
 
 Baunra 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 mr. intergrifolia [caerulea, 
 
 
 
 
 Roxb.] 
 
 )) 
 
 Common. 
 
 8 
 
 Calonyction sped osum 
 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 9 
 
 Ipomiea vitifolia 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 „ Pes-tigridis 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 „ Pilosa 
 
 
 Kota Dun. 
 
 12 
 
 „ sp. [hirsuta, Madden] 
 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 339 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETAL — { continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 i 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 26.—* CONVOLULACEJS— (concluded). 
 
 Tribe Convolvulus — ( concluded). 
 
 
 13 
 
 Ipomoea’ sessiliflora [ phaerocephalus, 
 Roxb.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 14 
 
 „ chryseides [muricata, Mad- 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 15 
 
 clenj. 
 
 Aniseia barlerioides 
 
 
 Kosi bank, Khairna. 
 
 1 6 
 
 Convolvulus pluricaulis 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 17 
 
 ,, arvensis [Malcolini Roxb.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Mr. Water- 
 field. 
 
 18 
 
 Porana racemosa 
 
 Maseti 
 
 Common. 
 
 19 
 
 ,, paniculata 
 
 >> ... 
 
 5) 
 
 20 
 
 Evolvulus alsinoides [sericea, Madden], 
 
 Tribe Cuskntes. 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 21 
 
 Cuscuta reflexa [verrucosa] 
 
 Akash leguli, 
 
 Common. 
 
 22 
 
 „ macrantha [ grandiflora, 
 
 Wall], 
 
 ORDER 27.— BORAGINAC 
 
 Tribe Cordies. 
 
 J ? 
 
 EiE. 
 
 i requent. 
 
 i 
 
 Gynaion vestitum 
 
 Pyu 
 
 Common up to 3,000 ft. 
 
 2 
 
 Cordia latifolia. Roxb. 
 
 Borla 
 
 Bhabar variety. 
 
 3 
 
 „ Myxa, Linn. 
 
 Tribe Eiiretics. 
 
 Kodah 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 Ehretia serrata 
 
 Panya 
 
 Common, April 
 
 5 
 
 ,, lasvis 
 
 Kodak 
 
 ,, Bhabar, March. 
 
 6 
 
 viminea [Rhabdia sericea ... 
 Madden], 
 
 Tribe Heliotropes. 
 
 
 „ in river beds. 
 
 7 
 
 Heliotropium strigosum [brevifolium 
 Wall]. 
 
 Tribe Borages 
 
 Sub-tribe Echies. 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 8 
 
 Macrotomia Benthami ... ... I 
 
 Sub-tribe Lithosi ermes. 
 
 Badri nath. 
 
 9 
 
 Onosma echioides 
 
 • • • 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 MyosotiB pallens 
 
 » • » 
 
 „ „ Chau- 
 
 patta. 
 
 11 
 
 „ longiflora 
 
 ... 
 
 >> 
 
 12 
 
 Bothriospermum tenellum [Cynoglos- 
 sum prostratum, Don], 
 
 
 Rare, Binsar. 
 
 47 
 
370 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 DIVISION II. — MONOPETALiE — ( continued }. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 name. 
 
 
 
 ORDER 27. — BOR AG IN ACEiE — 
 
 (concluded). 
 
 
 
 SU3-T3IBE CTNOGLOSSE-aE. 
 
 
 13 
 
 Eritriehium rotundifolium 
 
 
 Above 10,000 feet ; rare 
 
 14 
 
 Echinospermum gloehidiatum [Cyno- 
 
 Kura 
 
 yy yy • r > 
 
 
 glossum uncinatmn, Royle], 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 Cynoglossum furcat um 
 
 rr 
 
 Very common. 
 
 16 
 
 „ micranthum [canescens. 
 
 yy 
 
 yy )> 
 
 
 Wall]. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 „ glochidiatum 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 18 
 
 Trichodesma indieum 
 
 
 ! Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 28.— SOLANACEJE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Sobane.®.. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Lycopersicum eeculentum 
 
 Wilayati bai- 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 
 
 gan. 
 
 
 2 
 
 Solanum (Pachysteraon) tuberosum... 
 
 Alii 
 
 
 3 
 
 „ Roxburghii [rubrum] 
 
 Chhota ghi- 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 wain. 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ verbasc'. folium 
 
 Ushita 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Leptostemon) indieum 
 
 Kant kari . . . 
 
 
 C 
 
 „ xanthocarpum 
 ,, var. Jacquinii 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 „ var. Schraderi [diffusum]. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 7 
 
 ,, esculentum [melongena], ... 
 
 Bai gan 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 8 
 
 Capsicum frutescens 
 
 Lai mirch ... 
 
 
 9 
 
 Nicandra physaloides 
 
 ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 10 
 
 Physalis peruviana 
 
 ... 
 
 yy 
 
 
 Tribe DATUREns.. 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 Datura Wall i chi i [ferox. Madden] ... 
 
 Kala dhatura, 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 12 
 
 „ var. double 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 ,, alba ... 
 
 Dhatura 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 „ var. double 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 
 Tribe Nicotian*:.*. 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 Nicotiana Tabacum ... ... j 
 
 Tamakn 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 14 
 
 Petunia Phoenicea ... ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 
 . ORDER 29.— SCROPHULARIACEJE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe A ntirrhinieae. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Verbasc um Thapsus 
 
 Ekalbir 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Ceisia coromandeliana ... 
 
 Linaria ramosissima 
 
 
 Rare, valleys. 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, incana 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Antirrhinum orontium . 
 
 
 yy 
 
 ,, May fields. 
 Above 12,000 feet,. 
 
 ‘1 
 
 Scrophularia Edgeworthii 
 
 ... 
 
7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 34 
 
 15 
 
 1*6 
 
 17 
 
 1.8 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 21 
 
 26 
 
 2 ! 
 
 3< 
 
 3 
 
 3: 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 ‘OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 371 
 
 DIVISION II.— -MONO PETALS — ( continued ), 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 nanae. 
 
 )RDER 29 .— SCEOPHULARIACEJE— (continued) 
 Tkibe Aktirhinijb — ( concluded). 
 
 Gajaila 
 
 icrophularia polyantha ... 
 
 ,, himalensis ... 
 
 ,, obtusa (Madden) 
 
 limulus nepalensis 
 ,, gracilis 
 dazus surculosus 
 ,, rugosus 
 
 jindenbergia grandiflora 
 
 „ urticaefolia [Stemodia 
 
 ruderalis, Wall]. 
 
 ,, macrostacliya 
 
 [jimnophila ment hast rum 
 „ liypevici folia 
 
 Herpestis Monnieria 
 L'orenia cordifolia 
 
 Vandellia Crustacea [pedunculata, 
 Madden]. 
 
 ,, nummulari folia 
 
 Bonnaya brachiata 
 „ grandiflora 
 
 Tkibe Rhina.ntuiuk. 
 
 Hcmiphragma heterophyllum .j. 
 
 Digitalis purpurea ... ' 
 
 Wulfenia Ainherstiana [Fsederota 
 Amherstiana, Wall]. 
 
 Veronica (Beccabunga) himalensis 
 [grandiflora, Wall], 
 n anagallis 
 
 punctata 
 „ (Chamasdrys) de’.iigera 
 „ laxa... 
 
 var. of V. chamaedrys? 
 (Ompha’.ospora) biloba 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 „ ,, Maddcnii Edge. ... 
 
 „ „ agrestis... 
 
 Buchnera hispida 
 Striga hirsuta 
 
 ,, var. lutea 
 
 „ euphrasioides ... 
 Leptorhabdos parviflora [Gerardia and 
 Sopubia parviflora], 
 
 Sopubia trifida 
 
 Centranthera hispida 
 
 ,, var. nepalensis 
 
 Euphrasia officinalis 
 
 Note. 
 
 Jangli sonf... 
 
 97 
 
 Jal nun 
 
 Common. 
 
 79 
 
 Frequent. 
 Common. 
 F requent. 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. August. 
 Frequent. September. 
 
 Common at’ 10,000 feet, 
 Dakuri andDyurital. 
 Introduced. 
 
 Common near water 
 above 8,000 feet. 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet. 
 
 77 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above 1 1 ,000 feet. 
 Kedarnath. 
 
 Common at 5,000 feet. 
 March. 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Grassy slopes at 6,000 
 feet. 
 
 Bageswar. Frequent. 
 Above 7,000 feet. 
 
4f 
 
 46 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13. 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION II. — M ON 0 PE T ALiE — ( continued ), 
 
 -> 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 29. — SCROPHULARIACEJE — (concluded). 
 Tribe Ruinanthe^s — ( concluded). 
 
 Pedicularis ( Cyc'ophyllum ) pecti- 
 nata. 
 
 n „ porrccta, 
 
 „ [elegans, Madden] 
 
 „ ( Siphonatus ) megalan- 
 
 tha. 
 
 >> (Edentual) carnosa 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 yr 
 
 yy 
 
 Above 10,000 fectJ 
 
 Common. 
 
 ORDER 30. - OROBANCHEACEiE. 
 
 Phelipoea aegyptiaca ... I 
 
 jEginetia i'ndica ... ! 
 
 ORDER 31 .— AC ANTE AGILE 
 Tribe Thunbergie.®. 
 
 Hexacentris coccinea ... j Ivaljug 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Frequent, Bageswar, 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 Wiu.cr. 
 
 Tribe Htgroriiieeje. 
 Hcmiadelphis polysperma .... 1 
 
 Tribe Ru.j.ekge. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Petalldium barlerioides 
 Hemigraphis latebrosa, 
 latebrosa]. 
 
 TEchm anther a Walli ehii 
 na, Madden]. 
 
 [Ruellia 
 
 [gossypi- 
 
 Bakraola 
 
 Jaundela 
 
 Goldfm 
 
 Strobil; 
 
 n 
 
 pentsteinenoides 
 es auriculatus 
 Wallichii 
 
 Tilkapuri ... 
 
 attenuates 
 
 glutinosus 
 
 Kapur nali . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. From 
 this bees make the 
 best honey. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Above 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 Common. 
 
 >> 
 
 Tribe Barlerieas* 
 
 larleria dichotoma 
 „ nepalensis 
 
 ,, ciliata (rosea) 
 
 ,, cristata 
 
 itpidagathis hyalina 
 „ ustulata 
 
 „ cuFpidata 
 
 Sarp jiba 
 
 Frequent, September. 
 
 yy 
 
 Common. 
 
 yy 
 
 About 4,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
OF TIIE NOIITH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 373 
 
 DIVISION II . — MONO PE TALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 V ernacu’ ar 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 18 
 
 ORDER 31.— ACANTHACIUE— 
 
 Tribe Justices. 
 
 Rhlogacanthus thyrsiflorus 
 
 (concluded). 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 10 
 
 Erantliemum nervosum 
 
 
 common. March 
 Bhabar and up to 6,000 
 
 20 
 
 Rostellularia procumbens 
 
 
 feet. May, 
 
 Very common. 
 
 21 
 
 Adliatoda vasica [Justicia Adhatoda], 
 
 Bashang. Arus 
 
 Common. 
 
 22 
 
 Rungia parvifiora 
 
 of plains. 
 
 >> 
 
 23 
 
 Dic'.iptera Roxburgliii 
 
 
 ,, up to 5,000 feet. 
 
 24 
 
 Reristrophe speciosa 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 25 
 
 ,, bicalycu'.ata 
 
 . . . 
 
 26 
 
 Rliaphidospora ciliata 
 
 
 Rare, Vishnuganga. 
 
 1 
 
 ORD ER 32.— PHR Y MAC EVE. 
 
 Phryrna leptostachya ... 1 
 
 Common in woods. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 33. — V ER B EN AC 
 
 Tii BE V ERBKNEiE. 
 
 Verbena Bonariensis 
 
 EJE. 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 ,, officina’is 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 Lippia (Zapania) nolifiora 
 
 
 Up to 4,500 feet. 
 
 4 
 
 Lantana alba [L. dubia, Royle 111.] 
 
 
 ,, 3, '.00 ,, 
 
 5 
 
 Gmelina arborea 
 
 Kumar 
 
 ,, 2,000 ,, 
 
 6 
 
 Tribe Viters. 
 
 Caryopteris Wallichiana [Clerod- 
 
 . Mohini 
 
 Very common up to 
 
 7 
 
 enuron odoratum, Madden.] 
 Premna (Gumira) serratifolia [spi- 
 
 
 6,000 feet. April, 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 8 
 
 nosa, Roxb.] 
 
 ,, (Premnos) mucronata 
 
 Agniun 
 
 Common. 
 
 g 
 
 ,, ,, barbata 
 
 
 10 
 
 ,, ,, herbacea 
 
 Ghiwali 
 
 Rare. 
 
 1 1 
 
 Callicarpa arborea, Roxb. 
 
 Common. 
 
 12 
 
 ,, macrophylla, Vahl 
 
 Daiya 
 
 Frequent, Sarju bank. 
 
 13 
 
 Clerodendron serratum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 „ var. ternifolium 
 
 . . . 
 
 ,, Bageswar. 
 
 14 
 
 ,, infortunatu n 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 15 
 
 ,, siphonanthus 
 
 Shiwali 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 16 
 
 Vitex negundo 
 
 Bhabar and outer hills, 
 
 17 
 
 Holuskioldia sanguinea 
 
 Kubtoliya ... 
 
 April. 
 
 Common, October. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 34.- — LABIATiE. 
 
 Tribe Ocime^o. 
 
 Geniospormn stroboliferum 
 
 Banks of Sarju. 
 
 2 
 
 Ortho iphon rubicumlus 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, virgatus 
 
 . . . 
 
 Banks of Ivosi. 
 
 4 
 
 Plectrantlms (Isodon) scrophulari- 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 5 
 
 oides, 
 
 ,, ,, Gerardianus... 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 , ,, striatus. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Very common October. 
 
37-1 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION IL— MONO PETAL | continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 7 
 
 ORDER 34. — LABIATJE —(continued). 
 
 Tribe Ocimk^e— (concluded). 
 
 Plectranthus (Isodon) C'oetsa 
 
 Very common. Octr. 
 
 8 
 
 „ „ rugosus 
 
 > . . 
 
 Common up to 6,500 ft. 
 
 9 
 
 ,, (Pyramid! urn) ternifolius, 
 
 , , , 
 
 „ low elevations. 
 
 10 
 
 „ (Co’.eoides) cordifolius ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 11 
 
 Coleus barb atus 
 
 Fiwai 
 
 Very common. 
 
 13 
 
 Tribe Satyre/e. 
 
 Sub-tribe Elsiioi.tzii 
 P ogostemon jilectranthoidcs 
 
 M. 
 
 Rudra 
 
 Common. 
 
 13 
 
 Dysophylla cruciata 
 
 
 ,, in swamps. 
 
 14 
 
 Coltbrookia oppositifolia 
 
 Du! shat 
 
 
 15 
 
 Elsholizia. flava 
 
 Bhangria ... 
 
 ,, down to 5,000 feet. 
 
 16 
 
 ,, prdystachya ... 
 
 Bhangria . . . 
 
 Very common. 
 
 17 
 
 ,, incisa 
 
 Set bhangria. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 18 
 
 Elsholizia pilosa 
 
 * . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 19 
 
 ,, crioslaejgva... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 20 
 
 „ (Cyc’otegia) strobolifera 
 
 
 C' mmon. 
 
 21 
 
 Sub-tribe Memiiije. 
 Perilla ocimoides 
 
 Bhangria ... 
 
 Cultivated, September. 
 
 22 
 
 Mentha viridis 
 
 Pudina 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 23 
 
 „ Royicana 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. Near Bhim Tab 
 
 24 
 
 Sub-tribe Thyme.*. 
 Origanum normale? [vulgare?] 
 
 Ban tul si 
 
 Very common, autumn. 
 
 25 
 
 Thymus serpyllum 
 
 ,, ajwain... 
 
 Common, except outer 
 
 26 
 
 Sub-tribe Melliss me. 
 
 Micromeria biflora 
 
 
 range. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 27 
 
 Calamintha (Clinopodium) repens ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 >> 
 
 28 
 
 ,, „ [Melissa, ' 
 
 Madden] umbrosa 
 
 Hedeoma ncpalensis 
 
 
 June, under trees. 
 
 29 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 30 
 
 Tribe Monarde*. 
 Salvia (Drymosphace) glutinosa 
 
 
 Frequent, outer range. 
 
 31 
 
 [hians, Royle.] 
 
 Salvia (Aethiopis) lanata 
 
 Ganiva 
 
 Vevv common, March. 
 
 32 
 
 „ „ Moorcroftiana ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 33 
 
 „ (Notiosphace) plebeia 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 34 
 
 Tribe Nep.tkik. 
 
 Nepeta (Pycnonepeta) spicata, var. 
 
 
 Common, Binsar. 
 
 
 „ ,, eiata, Royle ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Yellow, morning, blue 
 
 35 
 
 „ „ clliptica 
 
 
 afternoon. 
 
 Common, Binsar. 
 
 36 
 
 „ (Cataria) rnderal s 
 
 • • . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 37 
 
 „ ,, lencophylla ... 
 
 , . , 
 
 Common. 
 
 38 
 
 „ „ gracilitlora ... 
 
 • • i 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 39 
 
 „ (Macro nepeta) Govaniana ... 
 
 . • . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 40 
 
 Dracocephalum acantlioides 
 
 
 Niti. 
 
 41 
 
 Lallemantia Royleana 
 
 Balangu 
 
 Rare. 
 
OF THIS NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 375 
 
 DIVISION II. — MON OPE TA L M — ( concluded). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 tao, 
 
 Vernacular. 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 34.— LABIATiE - (concluded). 
 
 Tribe Stachydeas. 
 
 Sub-tribe Scutellarieau. 
 
 
 42 
 
 Prunella vulgaris 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, June, Binsar. 
 
 43 
 
 Scutellaria linearis 
 
 ... 
 
 „ spring. 
 
 44 
 
 „ repens 
 
 ... 
 
 „ spring and 
 
 autumn. 
 
 45 
 
 ,, angulosa [scandens,Don]. 
 
 Sub-tribe MARRUBiEiE. 
 
 
 „ autumn. 
 
 46 
 
 Craniotome versicolor ... ••• 
 
 Sub-tribe Laniceas. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Very common. 
 
 47 
 
 Anisomeles ovata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 48 
 
 Colquhounia coccinea [vestita, Wall] 
 
 Bhilmoraand 
 
 angiriya. 
 
 „ at Naini Tal 
 
 and Badrinath. 
 
 49 
 
 Stacliys sericea 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 50 
 
 ,, splendens 
 
 Bhainsia aj- 
 wain. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 51 
 
 Leonurus pubescens 
 
 ... 
 
 
 52 
 
 Lamium amplexicaulc ... 
 
 Tit pati 
 
 55 
 
 53 
 
 ,, petiolatum 
 
 55 
 
 54 
 
 Roylea elegans 
 
 Gnma 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 55 
 
 Leucas [Hemistoma] urticaefolia 
 
 . . . 
 
 55 
 
 56 
 
 „ [Ortholencas] lanata 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 57 
 
 „ ,, mollissima ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 58 
 
 „ [Plagiostoma] hyssopifolia, 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 59 
 
 ,, „ aspera [cephalotes, 
 
 Blume.] 
 
 
 55 
 
 60 
 
 Leonoiis nepetaefolia 
 
 
 Bhabar & Haklwani. 
 
 61 
 
 Phlomis lamiifolia 
 
 Tribe A-jugeas. 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 62 
 
 Teucrium Royleanum (■ vur .) albi- 
 dum. 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, valleys. 
 
 63 
 
 ,, quadrifarium 
 
 
 55 
 
 64 
 
 Ajuga lobata 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 65 
 
 „ remota 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 66 
 
 ,, parvifiora 
 
 
 High elevations. 
 
 67 
 
 ,, bracteosa 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 68 
 
 „ decumbens 
 
 ORDER 35.- PLUMB AG IN^ 
 
 lCE^E- 
 
 Rare. 
 
 69 
 
 Plumbago Zeylanica ... ...1 ' 
 
 ORDER 36. — PLANTAGINACEJE. 
 
 Common. 
 
 1 
 
 Plantago (Polyneuron) major, var. 
 asiatica. 
 
 Bar tang . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 2 
 
 „ „ erosa, Don, [lon- 
 
 giscapa, Jaeg.] 
 
 Lohuriya ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 3 
 
 „ „ lanceolata. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 <* 
 
37G HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS. 
 
 DIVISION III.— APETALiE. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 1 . — PHYTOLACCACIJE. 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 Phytolacca, decandra, var. acinosa, ... 
 
 Jirrag 
 
 Cultivated up to 10,000 
 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 2.— CHENOPODIACE^E. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Beta vulgaris, var. Bengalensis, Roxb., 
 
 j Palang 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 2 
 
 Chenopodiu n album 
 
 ] Bhatuwa ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Ambrina) Botrys 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ORDER 3.- — AMARANTACExE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Cel jsieje. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Deeringia celosioides 
 
 Kala lohari... 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Celosia argentea 
 
 Sirali and 
 
 >> 
 
 
 ghogiya. 
 
 
 
 TbIBE ACHYRANTHK-iK. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Amarantus caudatuB 
 
 
 Gardens. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, anardana [farinaceus] ... 
 
 Ramdana and 
 
 Cultivation. 
 
 
 chua. 
 
 
 6 
 
 „ spinosus 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 6 
 
 JErua scandens 
 
 Saji 
 
 
 7 
 
 Achyranthes aspera. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 8 
 
 „ species Tbidentata ?], ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Not known at Kew 
 
 9 
 
 Cyathula tomentosa [Pupalfa sequax,] 
 
 Jhat kuri ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 Madden. 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 ,, capitata. 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 Tribe Gomphrene.*. 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 Alternanther a nodi flora ... 1 
 
 Bhimraj 
 
 Common. Bhim Tal. 
 
 
 ORDER 4. — Nyctaginacf^e. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Boerhaavia diffusa 
 
 
 Com ron. 
 
 2 
 
 Mirabilis Jalapa 
 
 ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 
 ORDER 5.— POLYGON ACE JE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Terygocarpe.*. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Rheum emodi 
 
 Dolu 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 Oxyria e'.atior 
 
 ... 
 
 „ 9,000 „ 
 
 
 Tribe Apterocarpeie. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Rumex (Lapalium) Wallihchii 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, nepalensis 
 
 Haluniya ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 6 
 
 „ (Acetosa) hastutus 
 
 Almora 
 
 Very common. 
 
 6 
 
 Koenigia monandra or islandica 
 
 • . • 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 7 
 
 Polygonum (Avicularia) effusum 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 [herniarioides.] 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 „ Roxburghii ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 9 
 
 „ illecebroides ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
No. 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 13 
 
 .14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 28 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 85 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 88 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 OF THF NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 377 
 
 DIVISION III. — APETALiE — ( continued). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 5. -POLYGONACEiE— (concluded). 
 
 Tribe Apterocarpe.® - (concluded). 
 
 Polygonum ciliosum 
 
 „ cognatum ... 
 
 ,, recumbens ... 
 
 ,, (Persicaria) Hamiitonii 
 
 [hispidum, Don.], 
 barbatum 
 Donii 
 Posumbu 
 
 flacci dum [gl abr um ,Roxb . ] , 
 amphibium... 
 lanigerum ... 
 scabrinervum 
 (Bistorta) viviparum 
 [bnlbiferum, Royle]. 
 sphaerostachyum 
 amp! ex i caul e 
 affine [Brunonis, Wall.], 
 
 ,, emodi 
 
 (Didymocephalon) delicatulum 
 
 numm ul aci folium, 
 filicaule [ciliatum, 
 
 Don], 
 humile 
 
 perforatum [punc- 
 tatum, Don], 
 ncpalense 
 sphaerocephalum, 
 eapitatum [repens, 
 
 Wall.], 
 sinuatum 
 
 (Corymbocephalon) chinense, 
 (Echinocaulon) horridum ... 
 
 (Tiniaria) convolvulus 
 pterocarpum ... 
 
 (Aconogonon) f rondosum . . . 
 polystachyum 
 
 Fagopyrum esculentum [vul- Ogal 
 gare, Madden]. 
 
 emarginatum ... Papar 
 
 cymosum [corymb o s um Ban-ogal 
 Madden], 
 
 ff 
 . ff 
 if 
 
 ff 
 
 if 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 if 
 
 if 
 
 ff 
 
 fi 
 
 if 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 V 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ff 
 
 ORDER 6. — LA URINEJE. 
 
 Section ExiNvoi.trcROTEiE. 
 
 Cinnamomum Tamala, var. albiflo- 
 rum. 
 
 Phsebe lanceolata 
 
 „ pallida 
 ,, paniculata 
 Machilus odoratissimus ... 
 
 Note. 
 
 Tejpat, dal chi - 
 ni. 
 
 San kanwal... 
 
 Kanwal 
 Kapua kanwal, 
 
 Rare. 
 
 14,500 feet. 
 
 Common. September. 
 Frequent, Bhabar, No- 
 vember. 
 
 Bhabar. Common. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Naini Tal lake. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Naini Tal lake. 
 
 15.000 feet. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Common . 
 
 At high elevations. 
 Rare. 
 
 12.000 feet. 
 
 14.500 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 if 
 
 ff 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 8.500 feet. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Bhim Tal, 
 
 Common. 
 
 7,50o’feet. 
 
 12,000 feet. 
 
 Cultivated, lower hills. 
 
 Higher hills. 
 
 Common. The native 
 names given by Royle 
 are incorrect. 
 
 Common. February— 
 May. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys, 
 February— M ay. 
 Common. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 Common. Ma r c h — > 
 August. 
 
 48 
 
378 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION III. — APETALiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 OR DER 6 . — LAURI NE2E — (concl uded). 
 
 
 
 Section Invot bcrate-i®. 
 
 
 
 
 Tetranthera lanrifolia [a petal a, 
 
 Gar-bijur ... 
 
 Valleys. June. 
 
 7 
 
 Roxb., var Roxburghii], 
 
 
 
 
 „ monopetala 
 
 Katmara, 
 
 Common. April. 
 
 8 
 
 
 singrao. 
 
 
 Q 
 
 Litsoea lanuginosa 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 „ consimilis [T. pallens, Don.], 
 
 Chirira and 
 
 Common, interior of 
 
 
 
 chirchira. 
 
 hills. 
 
 11 
 
 Daphnidium pulcherrimum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Erequent. 
 
 
 „ bifarium ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ORDER 7. — THYMELACEiE. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Daphne papyracea [D. cannabina, W all .], 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 „ var. purpurea ... 
 
 Barmva 
 
 
 
 >> 8/1 1)8 ... ... 
 
 Set baruwa... 
 
 Used, for paper-making. 
 
 2 
 
 Wikstroemia salicifolia [Daphne seri- 
 
 Chamliya ... 
 
 Common, used for mak- 
 
 
 cea, Madden] 
 
 
 ing inferior paper. 
 
 
 ORDER 8. — EIuEAGNACE/E. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Hippophase salicifolia ... 
 
 Dur chuk ... 
 
 Common above 10,000. 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 Elseagnus parvifolia 
 
 G hi wain 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 „ latifolia [ferruginea, D.C.] 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 9. — SANTALACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Osyris arborea, [nepalensis, Madden.], 
 
 Bakar dhara, 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Thesium himalense ... ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare, Binsar. 
 
 
 ORDER 10.— ARISTOLOCHIACEA3. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Aidstolochia saccata ... ... 1 
 
 
 Frequent ; about 7,000 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 
 ORDER 11.— EUPIIORBIACEgE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe E hyleaj. the.®. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Andrachne cordifolia [Leptopus cor- 
 
 • . * 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 difolius, Deee], 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Antidesma diandra 
 
 Sarshoti amli 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 3 
 
 Phyllanthus (Hemiglochidion) nepa- 
 
 Bair mao ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 lensis [Bradlcia ovata, Wall. Glo- 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 chidion bifaria, Royle], 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ velutinus 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Emblica) Emblica 
 
 Amla 
 
 Erequent. 
 
 6 
 
 (Paraphyllanthus) urinaria 
 
 Siahi 
 
 Common. 
 
 7 
 
 (Euphyllanthus) parvifolius 
 
 . . . 
 
 Erequent. 
 
 8 
 
 Putranjiva Roxburghii ... 
 
 Putra jiva ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 9 
 
 Securinega (Eluggea) obovata [Phyl- 
 
 Dhani 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 lanthus retusus, Wall], 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 „ leucopyrus [Phylla nthus 
 
 Ainta 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 albicans, Wall]. 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 Bischoffia Zeylaniae [Andiachne trifo- 
 
 Korsa 
 
 ... 
 
 
 liata, Roxb], 
 
 
 
12 
 
 If. 
 
 u 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 2.i 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 379 
 
 DIVISION IIL— APETAL2E— ( continued ) . 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 11.— EUPHORBIACEJE— (concluded). 
 
 
 TRIBE BrIDEEIEAS. 
 
 
 
 Bridelia stipularis 
 
 „ (Cluytia) montana 
 
 „ retusa 
 
 Karnaliya ... 
 Khaja 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Up to 3,000 feet. 
 
 Tribe Acaebpiie.®. 
 
 
 
 Trewia nudifloi-a 
 
 Mallotus philippinensis (Iiottlera 
 tinetoria]. 
 
 Ricinus communis 
 
 Homonoya riparia [Adelia, Madden], 
 
 Tumri 
 
 Byuni 
 
 Ind, rendi ... 
 Kandagar ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Tribe Hippomane.®. 
 
 
 
 Jetroplia Curcas 
 
 Baliospermum montanum [Crotonpol- 
 yandrus, Roxb.] 
 
 Excascaria (Triadica) s.bifera 
 „ (Fa’.coneria) insignis 
 
 „ (Eucxcsecaria) acer i f o 1 i a 
 
 [sapium, Madden, Stillingia hima- 
 layensis ] 
 
 Safed ind ... 
 
 Phutkiya ... 
 
 Naturalized, Bhabar. 
 Common, Sarju bank. 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common, Sarju 
 bank. 
 
 Tribe Eupiiorbie-®. 
 
 
 
 Euphorbia pentagona [Royleana] ... 
 
 „ anguetifolia [dracunculoi- 
 
 des, Roxb.] 
 
 „ hirsuta [longifolia, Don.], 
 
 „ pcploides 
 
 „ pilulifera 
 
 ,, notoptera 
 
 „ hyperieifolia ... 
 
 „ thymifoha 
 
 „ pilosa 
 
 Sohund 
 Dudhila and 
 Mahabir. 
 
 » 
 
 • • 0 
 
 Up to 6,000 feet. 
 Common up to 6,000 
 feet. 
 
 Above 6,000 feet (like 
 Helioscopia). 
 Frequent. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Ganai valley. 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 >> 
 
 >> 
 
 ORDER 12.— DAPHNIPHYLLACE2E. 
 
 
 Daphniphyllum himalense [Gyrandra 
 laurina, Wall. Ilicineas sp ., Royle.] 
 
 Rakt chandan 
 [ rakt angliya. 
 
 Frequent. Used in 
 marking the tika 
 mark on forehead. 
 
 ORDER 13. — -BUXACEJE. 
 
 
 Buxus sempervirens 
 
 Sarcococca saligna Dee. [S. nepalen- 
 sis, Royle]. 
 
 Papar 
 
 Sukat sing... 
 
 Milam and Wan. 
 Common, high levels. 
 
 ORDER 1 4. — CANNABINACEiE. 
 
 
 Hum nl us lupulus 
 
 Cannabis sativa 
 
 , • • o 
 
 Bhang 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 Very common. 
 
I 
 
 380 
 
 HIMA'LA.YAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION III. — APETALiE — ( continued). 
 
 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 . 
 
 
 ORDER 15.-ULMACEAE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ulrnus Wallichiana [erosa, Roth 
 
 Chambar ma- 
 
 Frequent. Flower® 
 
 
 
 ya. 
 
 precocious. 
 
 2 
 
 „ parvi folia [virgata, Roxb.J ... 
 
 
 Frequent. Flowers 
 
 
 
 
 coetaneous. 
 
 3 
 
 Boloptelea integrifolia [Ulmus integ- 
 
 Kanju 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 rifolia, Roxbl. 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Celtis australis [tetrandra,, Roxb] ... 
 
 Kharak 
 
 V ery common ami 
 
 
 
 
 pi an ted . 
 
 5 
 
 Sponia politoria [Celtis tetrandra, 
 
 Khaoi, khak- 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 
 Wall ?] 
 
 si. 
 
 
 
 ORDER ] 6. — MORACEJE. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Streblus asper [Trophis aspera 
 
 Rusa 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 Plecospirmum spinesum [Batis spi- 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 nosa]. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Morns indica ... ... 
 
 Shahtut 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, lasvigata 
 
 
 >> 
 
 5 
 
 „ serrata 
 
 Kimu 
 
 Common. Diosceou®. 
 
 6 
 
 Eicus indica 
 
 Bar 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 7 
 
 „ infectoria 
 
 Pakar 
 
 B hi bar. 
 
 8 
 
 „ Tsiela 
 
 Kathbar 
 
 Planted. 
 
 9 
 
 „ religiosa 
 
 Pi pal 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 10 
 
 „ cordifolia 
 
 Kabai pipal, 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 „ retusa [tritida] ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 12 
 
 ,, Carica 
 
 Anjir 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 13 
 
 ,, virgata 
 
 Beru 
 
 Very common. 
 
 14 
 
 „ parasitica 
 
 . • • 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 15 
 
 „ scandens 
 
 • • « 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 16 
 
 „ trachycarpa 
 
 • • i, 
 
 
 17 
 
 „ Cunia 
 
 Kunia 
 
 Common. 
 
 18 
 
 „ glomerata 
 
 Gular 
 
 Planted and banks of 
 
 
 
 
 Kali. 
 
 19 
 
 „ macrophylla 
 
 Timla 
 
 Fruit eaten. 
 
 20 
 
 ,, oppositifolia 
 
 Totmila 
 
 Common. 
 
 21 
 
 „ Luducca 
 
 Kabhila 
 
 
 22 
 
 „ laurifolia 
 
 Dudhila 
 
 
 23 
 
 „ ovata 
 
 Betuli 
 
 
 24 
 
 „ Chincha 
 
 Kismira 
 
 
 25 
 
 ,, saxatilis 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 „ laminosa 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 „ acuminata 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 1 7.— ARTOCARPEvE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Artocarpus Lakoocha 
 
 Dhao 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 2 
 
 Cudrania javanensis 
 
 Miinda 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 ORDER 1 8.' — URTICACE2E. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Urereje. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Urtica parviflora 
 
 Shishauna ... 
 
 Eaten ; very common. 
 
 2 
 
 Girardinia heterophyila ... 
 
 Awa bichhu, 
 
 Very common. 
 
 i 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 381 
 
 DIVISION III. — APETALVE — ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 | 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 
 ORDER 18. — URTIC ACE M— (concluded). 
 
 Tin uk Fii iciUDEnfi. 
 
 s 
 
 Pilea scripta [goglado, Wall.] 
 
 , , , 
 
 4 
 
 Lecan thus peduncular is ... 
 
 Saochala . . . 
 
 6 
 
 Elatostemma sessile [Procris puncta- 
 ta, Don]. 
 
 55 
 
 6 
 
 „ platyphyllum 
 
 Gargela 
 
 7 
 
 ,, Stracheyauum 
 
 ... 
 
 8 
 
 „ diversi folium 
 
 Tkibe Bcbhmekicjb. 
 
 
 9 
 
 Bcehmeria rugulosa [nervosa, Madden] 
 
 Geti 
 
 10 
 
 ,, macrophylla ... 
 
 Saochala gol- 
 ka. 
 
 11 
 
 ,, platyphylla, var. rotnndi- 
 
 folia. 
 
 Gargela 
 
 12 
 
 Chamabaina squamigera 
 
 . . . 
 
 13 
 
 PouzoUia viminea [sanguinea] 
 
 
 14 
 
 Memoiialis pentandra [Urtica pen- 
 tandra, Roxb. 
 
 Jaiphal jari, 
 
 15 
 
 ,, hirta 
 
 
 1G 
 
 ,, quinquenervis 
 
 Poi dhaula 
 
 17 
 
 Yillebrunea frutescens, [Urtica fru- - 
 
 
 tescens, Madden ] 
 
 and kagshi. 
 
 18 
 
 Debregeasia longifolia ... 
 
 
 19 
 
 ,, bicolor [Bcehmeria salici- 
 
 folia, Madden]. 
 
 Tushyari ... 
 
 20 
 
 Maoutia Puya, [Boehmeria frutecens, 
 
 Phusar patta 
 
 
 Don.] 
 
 and dhaula- 
 kagshi. 
 
 
 ORDER 19.' — PIPER ACEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 Piper sylvaticum 
 
 Pippula mul, 
 
 2 
 
 Piperomia reflexa. [saxatilis, Mad- 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 den]. 
 
 
 
 ORDER 20. - CORYLACEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 Carpinus faginea 
 
 Gish cham- 
 kliarak. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, viminea 
 
 55 
 
 3 
 
 Corylus lacera 
 
 Kapasi, bho- 
 tiya badam. 
 
 4 
 
 Castaneopsis tribuloides 
 
 Katonj 
 
 5 
 
 Quercus incana 
 
 Ban] 
 
 Note. 
 
 Common; Naim Tal. 
 Very common ; July, 
 August. 
 
 55 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare 
 
 Common ; August. 
 
 Common ; dishes made 
 of the wood. 
 Common. 
 
 55 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 55 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Very common ; April. 
 
 Common up to 4,000 
 feet ; Bliim Tal and 
 Bageswar. 
 
 Common ; Bhabar and 
 valleys. 
 
 Yery common on trees. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 Common, J o s h i « 
 math. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Yery common. 
 
382 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION III. — iA.PETAL.ZE — ( concluded ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 20. — CORYLACEiE — (concluded). 
 
 
 6 
 
 QuercuB lanata 
 
 Rianj 
 
 Frequent ; Lariya kan- 
 
 
 
 
 ta. 
 
 7 
 
 ,, semicarpifolia ... 
 
 Karshu 
 
 Common, high eleva- 
 
 
 
 
 tions. 
 
 8 
 
 „ dilatata 
 
 Tilonj 
 
 Very common. 
 
 9 
 
 „ annulata 
 
 1 Phalyant ... 
 
 Common, valleys. 
 
 
 ORDER 21.— JUGLANDACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Juglans regia 
 
 | Akhrot, akor 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 Engelliardtia Colebrookiana 
 
 | Mao 
 
 >> 
 
 
 ORDER 22. — MYRICACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Myrica sapi 'a 
 
 Kaiphal 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 ORDER 23.— B .TULACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Betula Bhojpattra 
 
 Bhojpatra ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, fBetulaster) acuminata 
 
 li aoul 
 
 8,000 n 
 
 
 [cylindrostachysj 
 
 Shaoul 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, nitida 
 
 Puya-udesh, 
 
 JJ 
 
 4 
 
 Alnus nepalensis 
 
 Udesh 
 
 Banks of all rivers. 
 
 
 ORDER 24. — SALICACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Salix (Pleiandrse) tetraspcrma 
 
 Gar-bains ... 
 
 Common near streams. 
 
 2 
 
 „ „ acmophyLla [deal- 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 bata, Jacq.]. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ,, (Diandrse) babylonica 
 
 Majnun 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ Wallichiana 
 
 Bains 
 
 Common. 
 
 5 
 
 ,, „ elegans] kumaon- 
 
 . . . 
 
 Top of China. 
 
 6 
 
 ensis, Lindley]. 
 
 
 
 
 £ ,, daphno'.dcs 
 
 • r • 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 7 
 
 „ ,, Lindleyana 
 
 , , , 
 
 
 8 
 
 Pop ulus nigra [fastigiata] 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 9 
 
 ,, ciliata 
 
 Gar pipal ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 25.— LORANTIIACEAL. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Vi cum stellatum, Don. 
 
 Banda 
 
 Common on Pyrus. 
 
 2 
 
 „ (Aphylla) articulatum 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Common on Quercns. 
 
 
 
 
 incana and dilatata. 
 
 3 
 
 „ attenuatum 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 4 
 
 Loranthus (Euloranthus) ligustrinus, 
 
 
 Frequent ; June. 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Scurrula) pulverulentus, 
 
 
 Common ; winter. 
 
 6 
 
 ,, ,, cordifolius ... 
 
 
 Rare ; December. 
 
 7 
 
 ,, „ vestitus 
 
 
 Frequent ; winter. 
 
 8 
 
 „ (Pentamera) longiflorus 
 
 
 Common ; spring. 
 
 
 [bicolor, Roxb.] 
 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 383 
 
 DIVISION IV. — GYMNOSPERMiE. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 1.- — GNETACEiE: 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ephedra vulgaris [Gerardiana] 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet ; 
 fruit edible. 
 
 
 ORDER 2. — CONIFERiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Pinus longifolia 
 
 Chir, salla ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 2 
 
 „ Gerardiana 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, excelsa 
 
 Rai salla ... 
 
 „ 10,000 feet, Ka- 
 
 
 
 
 nol, Painkhanda. 
 
 4 
 
 Abies Smithiana 
 
 Ragha 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 5 
 
 „ Brunoniana [dumosa] 
 
 
 Rare ; found by Cap- 
 
 
 
 tain Webb. 
 
 6 
 
 Picea Pindrow 
 
 5 ) 
 
 Common above 10,000 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 7 
 
 ,, Webbiana 
 
 >> 
 
 „ 5i 12,000 
 feet. 
 
 8 
 
 Cedrus Deodara 
 
 Diyar 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 
 ORDER 3.— CUPRESSINE^E. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Cupressus torulosa 
 
 Sarai 
 
 Naini Tal and JoBlii- 
 math. 
 
 2 
 
 ,, Bempervirens 
 
 ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 3 
 
 Juniperus (Oxycedrus) communis, ... 
 
 Chichiya ... 
 
 Milam and Niti, 12,000 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 4 
 
 „ „ recurva 
 
 Bhedara 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 „ var. squamata ... 
 
 Bel bhedara, 
 
 Ilani Pani, 8,000 feet. 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Sabina) excelsa 
 
 Padam 
 
 Milam, 12,000 feet. 
 
 6 
 
 „ „ Wallichiana 
 
 Bhedara 
 
 Milam and Niti. 
 
 
 Var. squamosa, Madden ... 
 
 Bel bhedara, 
 
 Pindari, Painkhanda, 
 
 
 
 
 Rikholi gudri. A. 
 kind of yeast is made 
 from this plant. 
 
 
 ORDER 4. — TAXACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Taxus baccata 
 
 Thuner 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 „ nucifera 
 
 
 Rare ; only found by 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 Royle. 
 
384 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION V.— ENDOGEML 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 1.— -ZINGIBER ACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Curcuma angustifolia 
 
 Ban haldi ... 
 
 Up to 6,000 feet ; May. 
 
 2 
 
 „ longa [kuchoor, Eoyle] 
 
 Haldi 
 
 Cultivated up to 4,0o0 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 Hedycliium spicatum 
 
 Kachur-kac- 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, coccincum 
 
 hri, 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ villosum [Madden] 
 
 Rakt haldi ... 
 
 99 
 
 6 
 
 „ tenuifiorum Murdan Ali] 
 
 
 Rare, Piytira. 
 
 7 
 
 „ coronarium [fiavum, 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 Madden], 
 
 
 Gardens. 
 
 8 
 
 Roscoea purpurea 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 „ alpina 
 
 
 Common ; autumn. 
 
 10 
 
 „ lutea [gracilis] 
 
 
 99 
 
 11 
 
 „ elatior 
 
 
 9 
 
 12 
 
 Zingiber capitatum 
 
 
 Daknri binayak. 
 
 13 
 
 „ ligulatum 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 „ var. chrysanthemum 
 
 
 99 
 
 14 
 
 , cassumunar relation, Mad- 
 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 
 den?]. 
 
 
 Bhabar ; eaten by pigs. 
 
 15 
 
 „ officinale 
 
 Adralc 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 13 
 
 Amomum subulatum 
 
 Ilaichi 
 
 G ardens 
 
 17 
 
 Costus speciosus 
 
 , , . 
 
 Rare; valleys. Autumn. 
 
 1-8 
 
 G lobba secunda * 
 
 . • . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 „ Orixensis? 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ORDER 2.— MARANTACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Canna speciosa 
 
 Iviwara 
 
 Gardens. 
 
 
 ORDER 3. — MUSACEJE. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Musa sapientum 
 
 • • • 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 2 
 
 „ nepalensis 
 
 . . • 
 
 River banks, Askot to 
 
 
 
 
 Dharcliula. 
 
 
 ORDER 4.— AMARYLLIDACEA5. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Crinum toxicarium 
 
 Chandar kan- 
 
 Common ; July. 
 
 
 
 wal. 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ species 
 
 ... 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 
 ORDER 5.— HYPOXIDACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Curculigo recurvata 
 
 Pitari 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 2 
 
 „ orchioides 
 
 
 Common up to 6,400 
 
 
 
 
 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 Hypoxis minor ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 ORDER 6. — IRIDACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Pardanthus sinensis 
 
 Katar pata ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 2 
 
 Iris nepalensis 
 
 Nil-kanwal 
 
 Common. 
 
 3 
 
 ,, kumaonensis 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ decora 
 
 • . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 5 
 
 Tigridia pavonia 
 
 . . . 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 l 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 385 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGEN2E — ( continued ). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 Note. 
 
 name. 
 
 ORDER 7.— H YDROCIIARIDEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Vallisneria spiralis 
 Hydrilla verticillata 
 
 ORDER 8.' — ORCHIDACEiE. 
 
 Bliim Tal. 
 
 Tribe MaeaxidEj® (End.) 
 Sub-tribe Pleurotu alee^s. 
 
 1 Oberonia iridifolia 
 
 2 Microstylis Wallichii ... 
 
 3 Dienia cylindrostachys ... 
 
 Banda 
 
 4 
 
 Liparis ncpalensis 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 Pholidota articulata 
 Cadogyne uitida 
 „ praecox 
 
 ,, ovalis 
 
 Sub-tribe Denprobiive 
 
 Low elevations. 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 Common, Binsar, Chi- 
 na, August. 
 
 Lariya Kanta, Colonel 
 Davidson. August. 
 Common, April. 
 Valleys. 
 
 Kotahgar. October. 
 Binsar; common, May. 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 Eria convallarioides [Octomeria spi- 
 cata]. 
 
 Dendrobium alpestre 
 
 „ Pitrardii [roseum ?] ... 
 
 Garar panja, 
 
 Common on oaks, June. 
 
 Frequent. 
 Common, June. 
 
 Tribe Epidendre^ (End.) 
 
 12 Apaturia Smithiana ... 
 
 IS Phaius albus 
 
 14 
 
 bi color 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Very common near 
 Bliim Tal, June. 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 Tribe Vande.®. 
 
 15 
 
 Cymbidium triste [Luisia trichor- 
 hiza.] 
 
 ... 
 
 16 
 
 Eulophia campestris 
 
 ... 
 
 17 
 
 ,, herbacea 
 
 ... 
 
 18 
 
 Cyrtopcra fusca (flava, Royle 111.) ... 
 
 ... 
 
 19 
 
 Vanda cristata 
 
 Banda 
 
 20 
 
 Saccolabium guttatum ... 
 
 ... 
 
 21 
 
 „ bapillosum [Cymbidium 
 
 priemorsum, Roxb.], 
 
 ... 
 
 22 
 
 Aer ides affine 
 
 . . • 
 
 23 
 
 „ odoratum [cornutum, Roxb.], 
 
 . . . 
 
 24 
 
 Calanthe plantaginea 
 
 Hyacinth or- 
 chis. 
 
 Frequent, low levels. 
 
 Rare Bhabar. Salep 
 made from root. 
 
 Frequent, sweet scent- 
 ed. 
 
 Common up to 4,500 
 feet. May. 
 
 Common, on trees. 
 June. 
 
 Very common, low ele- 
 vations. May, June. 
 
 Haldwani, on Ulmus 
 integrifolia. 
 
 Common. June. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 Very common. April. 
 
 49 
 
zm 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS' 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGrENiE — ( confirmed }. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 8 .— ORCHID-AGE-®— (concluded). 
 
 TBIBE OPHBYDEiE. 
 
 
 26 
 
 Orchis lotifolia 
 
 ... 
 
 Phulsain near Joshi- 
 math, June. 
 
 26 
 
 Aceras angustifolia 
 
 r r ♦ 
 
 Very common. 
 
 27 
 
 Platanthera Susannae 
 
 ,,, 
 
 Ramgar, September. 
 
 28 
 
 „ obcordata ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Near Naini Tal Brew- 
 ery. September. 
 
 29 
 
 „ acuminata ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal. Colonel 
 Davidson. 
 
 30 
 
 Hemipilia cordifolia 
 
 ... 
 
 Near Khairna, Sep- 
 tember. 
 
 31 
 
 Peristylus goodyeroides ... 
 
 ' . < 
 
 ; Frequent. 
 
 32 
 
 Herminium Monorchis ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Top of Lariya Kanta, 
 August. 
 
 33 
 
 „ graminenm ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 i Rare. 
 
 34 
 
 Habenaria pectinata 
 
 . . 1 
 
 Common, September. 
 
 T7- ” 
 
 V ery common, August, 
 September. 
 
 36 
 
 „ intermedia ... 
 
 » » • 
 
 36 
 
 „ marginata ... 
 
 ... 
 
 37 
 
 „ ensifofia 
 
 ► . % 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 38 
 
 „ piantaginea 
 
 ,,, 
 
 yy 5 ? 
 
 39 
 
 ,, rostrata, Madden 
 
 ... 
 
 Perhaps same as emar- 
 ginata. No. 36. 
 
 40 
 
 Gymnadertia coinmelynaefolia, Mad- 
 den. 
 
 ... 
 
 On Kali math, 6,000 
 feet. 
 
 41 
 
 Satyrium nepalense 
 
 Tbibe Gastbodie^j. 
 
 Pakwa-dimni, 
 
 Very common, August, 
 September. 
 
 42 
 
 Epipogiutn Gmelini 
 
 Tbibe Neottieje. 
 
 ... 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 43 
 
 Spiranthes australis 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common, August, 
 September. 
 
 44 
 
 Epipactis latifolia 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 45 
 
 , , m acr ostachya ... 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 Goodyera repens 
 
 
 yy 
 
 47 
 
 „ procera 
 
 
 Binsar, August. 
 
 48 
 
 Zeuxine sulcata 
 
 Tbibe Abethuseje. 
 
 
 Winter, Bhabar. 
 
 49 
 
 Cephalanthera acuminata ... 1 
 
 Tbibe Cypbipede.®. 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, under trees. 
 May. 
 
 50 
 
 Cypripedium cordigerum 
 
 ... 
 
 Lariya Kanta, May. 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
m THE NORTH-WESTER!* PROVINCES. 
 
 387 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGrENiE — ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 Note. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 9.— PALM AC EH 
 Chamserops Martiana 
 
 5. 
 
 Thakil 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 „ vur. khasyana, Madden... 
 
 
 Common, valleys. 
 
 2 
 
 Wallichia densiflora [Harina oblongi- 
 
 Kala-aunsa... 
 
 3 
 
 folia.] 
 
 Phoenix sylvestris var. humilis Mad- 
 
 Khajur 
 
 Up to 5,000 feet. Bin- 
 
 4 
 
 den. 
 
 ,., acaulis 
 
 
 sar. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 5 
 
 Calamus Eoyleanus, [C. Rotang?] ... 
 
 Bet 
 
 >> 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER io.— PONTEDEKIA 
 Pontederia (Monochoria) liastata. 
 
 CEHS. 
 
 Common. Rice fields. 
 
 1 
 
 [P. vaginalis, Madden.] 
 
 ORDER 1 1, — MELANTHAE 
 Disporum Pitsutum 
 
 )EHS. 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 „ Leschenaultianum [Uvularia 
 
 ... 
 
 
 3 
 
 Leschenaultii, Madden.] 
 
 „ Wallichii 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, Hamiltonianum 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 6 
 
 Iphigenia indica [Anguillan* indica, 
 
 0 8 « 
 
 Common. 
 
 1 
 
 Brown.] 
 
 ORDER 12. — LILIACEE 
 
 Tribe TuLimiiE. 
 
 Tulipa stellata 
 
 E. 
 
 Majaula, nalku, 
 
 Common up to 7,000. 
 
 2 
 
 Gageaelegans ... ..., 
 
 ... 
 
 „ above 10,000 feet. 
 
 3 
 
 Lloydia serotina? ..." 
 
 . . . 
 
 Com i on. 
 
 4 
 
 ,, liimalense 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 5 
 
 Eritillaria verticillata ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 Plmlsain, 8,000 feet. 
 
 6 
 
 „ Thomsonianum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common, April. 
 
 7 
 
 Lilium Wallichianum ... 
 
 Findora 
 
 Common, Ranibagh. 
 
 8 
 
 ,, nepalense ... ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 9 
 
 „ giganteum 
 
 Bhuniya nar, 
 Bish nangal, 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 10 
 
 Methonica [Gloriosa] superba ... 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 11 
 
 Hemerocallis fulva [disticha] 
 
 ... 
 
 Above 10,000 feet. 
 
 12 
 
 Tribe ALOiNEiE. 
 
 Aioe perfoliata 
 
 Ghikw&r ... 
 
 Valleys, April. 
 
 13 
 
 Yucca gloriosa 
 
 Rambans . . . 
 
 Naturalized. 
 
 14 
 
 Tribe Hv.'.cintueze. 
 
 Uropetalum 
 
 
 Rare, Kalimath. 
 
 15 
 
 Urginea indica [Scilla indica, Mad- 
 den]. 
 
 Allium leptophyllum 
 
 Gesua 
 
 Common. 
 
 16 
 
 Piriya lahsan 
 
 Outer range. 
 
 17 
 
 ,, Wallichii 
 
 Paderiya lah- 
 
 
 18 
 
 „ ellipticum 
 
 san. 
 
 Sheolia lah- 
 
 t 8 * 
 
 19 
 
 „ Jibbu 
 
 san. 
 
 Jibbu 
 
 About. 10,000 feet. 
 
 20 
 
 „ Argand 
 
 Argand 
 
 Uanipani, 8,000 feet. 
 
388 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION V.— ENDOGENiE— ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 V ernacular 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 12.— LILIACEiE -( concluded ). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Asparagei®. 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 Asparagus racemosus 
 
 Ail ora 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 22 
 
 „ fllicinus 
 
 Khairuwa ... 
 
 Common, edible. 
 
 23 
 
 adscendens 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 24 
 
 Polygonatum verticillatum 
 
 
 9) 
 
 25 
 
 „ multiflonum ... 
 
 
 )> 
 
 26 
 
 „ cirrhiflorum ? [Sibiricum ?] 
 
 
 3> 
 
 27 
 
 Smilacina pallida 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 „ alpina 
 
 ... 
 
 Kcdar. 
 
 
 Tribe Ophiopogone^s, 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 Ophiopogon intermedins 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 30 
 
 „ Wallichianus [spicatum, 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 Madden], 
 
 
 
 
 „ ORDER 13.— COMMELYNACEJS. 
 
 
 
 SliCTI )N OlJGANDREiE. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Commelyna (Eucommelyna) salici- 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 folia. 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ „ bengalensis ... 
 
 • « • 
 
 9J 
 
 3 
 
 „ (Trithyro carpus) obliqua... 
 
 Kama 
 
 Very common. 
 
 4 
 
 Aneilema scapiflornm, [Murdannia 
 
 
 Common up to 4,000 ft. 
 
 
 scapifiora, Royle], 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 „ lined atom 
 
 
 Aboye 5,000 feet. 
 
 6 
 
 „ pratensum 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 Section Hexandre.®. 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Dithyrocarpus, paniculatus [rufus, 
 
 Kandera 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 Kuntli], 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Cyan otis axillaris 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 9 
 
 „ cristata 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 „ barbata 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 „ racemosa 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 12 
 
 Streptolirion yolubile ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 ORDER 14.— ALISMACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Sagittaria sagittifolia ... ... | 
 
 ... 
 
 • »0 
 
 
 ORDER 15. JUNCEiE. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Juncns bufonius 
 
 Shim 
 
 Common. 
 
 2 
 
 „ glaucus 
 
 t • « 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 3 
 
 „ concinnus 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ Wallichianus ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ORDER 16.— SMILACEAE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Smilax villandia, Royle 
 
 Kukar dhara. 
 
 Common. 
 
 o 
 
 „ macrophylla 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 3 
 
 „ maculata 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 „ raginata 
 
 
 Rare, China. 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 389 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGrENiE — ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 17.-DIOSCOREACEJE. 
 
 Dioscorea versicolor 
 „ sagittata 
 
 „ pentaphylla 
 
 „ delto'.dea 
 
 Genti 
 
 Ta r tagur... 
 Magina mu- 
 ni ya. 
 
 Gun 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Tubers edible. 
 
 Tubers edible. 
 Above 6,000 feet. 
 
 ORDER 18. — AROILEiE. 
 
 TlUBE DkACUXCULE/E. 
 
 Arissema speciosa 
 
 „ Jacquemontil ... 
 
 ,, costatum 
 
 „ curvatum 
 
 Arum hastatum 
 
 Sauromatum guttatum ... 
 
 „ punctatum? 
 
 Amorphophallus campa n u 1 a t u s 
 [Arum campanulatum, Roxb.]. 
 Typhonium? 
 
 Sarp lea goga, 
 
 j, 
 
 j y 
 
 Nala bank . . . 
 
 >> 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Common, July. 
 
 Kaladhungi. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Common, July, very 
 foetid. 
 
 Tbibe Caeadie^e. 
 
 Remusatia vivipara 
 „ capillifera 
 
 milum, Don ? 
 Colocasia Roxburgliii 
 
 ,, himalensis 
 
 [Caladium pu- 
 
 Baghpindalu, 
 Banj pindilu, 
 
 ^Jangli gwia 
 Gar papar. 
 Gwia and pa- 
 par. 
 
 Up to 4,500 feet. 
 Above 5,000 feet, flow- 
 ers, June. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 ORDER 19.— ORONIACEEE. 
 
 Acorus calamus 
 
 Scindapsus officinalis, Rothos offici- 
 nalis, Roxb ] 
 
 „ decursivus [I’oJios deeur- 
 sivus]. 
 
 Rothos scandeus 
 
 Bach baj 
 Hatlmngliya, 
 
 Kelauniya ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Near Bhim Tal. 
 Binsar. 
 
 ORDER 20.— TYRIIACEiE. 
 
 Typha elephantina 
 „ angustifolia 
 
 ... J Radera, pe- 
 ... tara. 
 
 Bora 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Marshes. 
 
 ORDER 21.— JUNCAGINACEiE. 
 
 Rotamogeton natans 
 
 „ mucronatum 
 
 „ cri spurn 
 
 „ pectinatum 
 
 „ perfoliatum 
 
 Bhim Tal and Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 )> 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
390 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGrENiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 22.— LEMNACI 
 
 Lemna minor 
 
 EE. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 2 
 
 „ polyrhiza [orbiculata, Roxb.]. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Streams, up to 4,000 
 
 1 
 
 ORDER 23. — GRAMINEZE. 
 
 Tribe Oryzeie. 
 
 Oryza sativa ... ... 1 Dhan 
 
 feet. 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 2 
 
 Tribe Phalarideas. 
 
 Zea Mays 
 
 Bhuta 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 3 
 
 j Coix Lacryma 
 
 Lakocbiya ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 4 
 
 | „ gigantea 
 
 )} 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 6 
 
 Tribe Fanicea:. 
 Paspalun longiflorum 
 
 Kana 
 
 Rice fields. 
 
 6 
 
 Panicum (Digitaria) cruciatum [Ro- 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 
 ylei, Madden. J 
 ,, var. distachyus ... 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 ,, octostaehyus 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Panicum (Orthopogon) acuminatissi- 
 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 8 
 
 mum. 
 
 Panicum (Echinochloa) colonum 
 
 Jangli rnandi- 
 
 Common. 
 
 9 
 
 „ frumentaceum 
 
 1 U. 
 
 Jhangora and 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 10 
 
 ,, homonymum cliamaeraphis 
 
 mandira. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 11 
 
 Madden], 
 
 » (Setaria) glaucum 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 „ Italicum 
 
 Kangni koni, 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 13 
 
 „ (Virgaria) miliaceum 
 
 China 
 
 
 14 
 
 Penuisetum trifiorum 
 
 Bimalsiya ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 15 
 
 Arundine'la setosa [hirsuta, Madden] 
 
 >> 
 
 16 
 
 ,, nepa’ensis [miliaria, Madden, 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 Thysanolaena agrostis 
 
 Aunsa 
 
 Very common. 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 Tribe Stifaceie. 
 
 Arachne (Piptatherum) ho'.ciformis, 
 Aristida cyananlha 
 
 Binniya & ka- 
 
 Co’onel Davidson. 
 
 20 
 
 Tribe Agrostidive. 
 Vilfa elongata [Sporobolus elongatus 
 
 kal sena. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Common. 
 
 21 
 
 Madden]. 
 
 Agrostis alba 
 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 22 
 
 Muhlenbergia sylyatica ... 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 23 
 
 ,, geniculata ... 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 Polypogon fugax 
 
 Giwagioliya, 
 
 Common. 
 
 25 
 
 Perotis latifolia ... ... | 
 
 
 26 
 
 Tribe Arundinaceas. 
 Phragmites Roxburghii ... 
 
 Bichra, nal... 
 
 Common. 
 
 27 
 
 ,, Karka 
 
 Karka ,, ... 
 
 28 
 
 „ nepalensis 
 
 Nal tura 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 391 
 
 DIVISION V.— ENDOG-ENiE— ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 1 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note, 
 
 29 
 
 ORDER 23.— GRAMINEJE — (coi 
 
 TRIBE CHLORIDE.*. 
 
 Chloris decora 
 
 atinucd). 
 
 Common. 
 
 SO 
 
 Cynodon dactylon 
 
 Dub 
 
 Very common. 
 
 31 
 
 Eleusine coracana 
 
 Manduwa . . . 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 32 
 
 „ indica 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 33 
 
 Tribe Avene.*. 
 
 A vena sativa 
 
 Jai 
 
 Cultivated, 
 
 34 
 
 „ fatua 
 
 Jai-ata 
 
 Common. 
 
 35 
 
 Tribe Festuce^e. 
 
 Poa annua ... 
 
 
 Introduced. 
 
 36 
 
 „ bulbosa 
 
 
 » 
 
 37 
 
 „ trivialis 
 
 
 99 
 
 38 
 
 Eragrostis- cynosuroides 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 39 
 
 ,, caudata 
 
 
 9f 
 
 40 
 
 „ nutans 
 
 
 Col. Davidson. 
 
 41 
 
 „ amabilis 
 
 
 99 
 
 42 
 
 ciliata 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 43 
 
 „ plumosa 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 44 
 
 „ diarrhena 
 
 
 Col. Dav.dson. 
 
 45 
 
 „ nardoides 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 46 
 
 „ orientalis 
 
 
 October. 
 
 47 
 
 Ivoeleria cristata 
 
 
 Very common, April. 
 
 48 
 
 Dactylis glomerata 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 49 
 
 Festuca (Brachypodium) nepalensis, 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 60 
 
 Tripogon (Plagiolytrum) filiforme, 
 
 
 99 
 
 61 
 
 Tribe Bambuseas. 
 
 Arundinarla falcata 
 
 Ringal and 
 
 Very common. 
 
 52 
 
 (Two varieties ') 
 
 Thamnocalamus spathiflorus 
 
 Ningal. 
 
 Ringal 
 
 Dudatoli. 
 
 53 
 
 „ Falconeri 
 
 Kali ringal... 
 
 Common, May. 
 
 64 
 
 Dendrocalamiis str ictus 
 
 Bans 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 55 
 
 „ sp . 
 
 99 ... 
 
 Dhamas ; cultivated. 
 
 56 
 
 Tribe Hordeace.*. 
 
 Lolium temulentum 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 57 
 
 Triticum vulgare 
 
 Lai geliun ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 68 
 
 „ striatum 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 59 
 
 Hordeum hexastychum ... 
 
 Jao 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 60 
 
 „ himalayense [coeleste] 
 
 Ua jao 
 
 ., above 10,000 ft. 
 
 61 
 
 Tribe Rottboerliace.* 
 
 Ophiurus perforatus 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 62 
 
 Rottbcellia exaltata 
 
 . . . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 63 
 
 „ hirsuta 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 64 
 
 „ laevis [Mnesithia laevis], 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 65 
 
 Manisurus granularis 
 
 • ’ * 
 
 Frequent. 
 
302 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 DIVISION V.— ENDOGEN/E— ( continued ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 66 • 
 
 ORDER 23. — GRAMINEiE -(cor 
 
 Tribe Andropogonehs. 
 Andropogon, with number in £ 
 
 Heteropogon contortns, 37 
 „ polystachyus, 42 
 
 Lcluded). 
 
 JTEUDEE. 
 
 Kumariya ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 67 
 
 99 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 68 
 
 Ischsemum corollatus, 65 
 
 Noniya 
 
 69 
 
 Ischsemonca speciosns, 132 
 
 Spodiopogon involutus, 117 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 70 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 71 
 
 Apocopis himalayensis, 168 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 72 
 
 Bathratlrerum lancifolins, 237 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 73 
 
 „ micans, 239 
 
 ... 
 
 99 
 
 74 
 
 Tribe Andropogoneje. 
 Bathratherum snbmnticus 240 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 75 
 
 Cymbopogon pachnodes, 297 
 
 . . . 
 
 99 
 
 76 
 
 „ distans, 298 
 
 . . . 
 
 99 
 
 77 
 
 ,, versicolor, 301 
 
 Piriya 
 
 Very common.Naini Tal 
 
 78 
 
 „ pendnlus, 303 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 79 
 
 ,, Iwarankusa, 306 
 
 Miriya 
 
 99 
 
 80 
 
 „ Martini, 309 
 
 . . . 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 81 
 
 ,, flexnosns, 310 
 
 Bujara 
 
 Very common A mora. 
 
 82 
 
 Andropogon erythrocoleos, 341 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 83 
 
 ,, pnnctatns, 343 
 
 Pagrimalsi... 
 
 Very common. 
 
 84 
 
 ,, controversus, 349 
 
 • • « 
 
 Very common, October. 
 
 85 
 
 „ montanns, 352 
 
 . . . 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 86 
 
 Sorghum halepensis, 384 
 
 Gandar, kashas, 
 
 Common. 
 
 87 
 
 Anatherum muricatus, 393 
 
 99 
 
 88 
 
 Chrysopogon coernleus, 404 
 
 Gweriya, par- 
 
 99 
 
 89 
 
 „ Trinii, 408 
 
 mal. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 90 
 
 „ Royleanus, 425 
 
 Salim 
 
 Common. 
 
 91 
 
 ,, echinulatus 426 
 
 
 99 
 
 92 
 
 ,, villosnlus, 427 
 
 
 ... 
 
 93 
 
 „ glaucopsis, 429 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 94 
 
 „ subrepens, 420 
 
 ,, parvispica [Rh aphis 
 
 
 99 
 
 95 
 
 Palkiya, chir- 
 
 Very common. 
 
 96 
 
 microstachys,] 431 ... 
 Spodiopogon petiolaris, 443 
 
 aula 
 
 Common , Naini Tal, 
 
 97 
 
 Anthistiria arundinacea 
 
 Ullu, kanyur, 
 
 .1 uly. 
 
 Bhabar and valleys. 
 
 98 
 
 ,, onathera 
 
 Jyotish-mati, 
 
 Roots luminous. 
 
 99 
 
 Imperata arundinacea [cylindrica Lam] 
 
 J Shiro 
 
 
 100 
 
 Saccharum spontaneum ... 
 
 Jhansh 
 
 99 
 
 101 
 
 ,, Sara 
 
 Sarur 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 102 
 
 ,, semidecnmbens 
 
 Tat, mora ... 
 
 99 
 
 103 
 
 ,, exaltatum 
 
 99 
 
 104 
 
 ,, Munja 
 
 Munj 
 
 99 
 
 105 
 
 Erianthus olivaceus, Edgw. 
 
 Kans 
 
 Common. 
 
 106 
 
 ,, vulpinus, Edgw. 
 
 . . . 
 
 99 
 
 107 
 
 ,, fllifolium, Nees. 
 
 . . • 
 
 99 
 
 108 
 
 „ rufum, Nees. ... 
 
 ,, rufipilum, Stend. 
 
 • • . 
 
 99 
 
 109 
 
 . . . 
 
 99 
 
 110 
 
 Leptatherum Royleanum 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 111 
 
 Pollinis sp. 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 1 12 
 
 Eulalia japonica 
 
 
 99 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION V.— ENDOGENtE— ( continued ) 
 
 3.93 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 2 4.— CYPERACEiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Cyperecehs, 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 Cyperur (PycrenB) capillaris ? 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 „ diaphanus ? 
 
 
 • " 
 
 3 
 
 „ angulatus 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 4 
 
 ,, alopecuroides ? 
 
 
 ... 
 
 5 
 
 „ (Eucyperus) compressus ... 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 6 
 
 „ diffiormis 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 7 
 
 ,, Iria 
 
 
 S 
 
 Cyperus niveus 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 „ tegetiformis 
 
 tenuiflorus 
 
 Motha ... 
 
 Cultivated. 
 
 Common, August. 
 
 11 
 
 rotundus [hexastachyos, 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 Roxb.] 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 „ obliquuB 
 
 
 99 
 
 13 
 
 „ pusillus [pygmseus, Retz.] ... 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 „ Wallichianus ... 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 „ fimbriatus 
 
 
 Very common. 
 
 16 
 
 „ dilutus 
 
 
 17 
 
 Mariscus cyperinus 
 
 Panmoth a 
 
 Common. 
 
 and nagar- 
 motha. 
 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 Kyllingia monocephala ... 
 
 Nirbisi 
 
 99 
 
 19 
 
 „ triceps 
 
 99 
 
 9 } 
 
 
 Tribe Scirpe.®. 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 Abilgaardia monostachya 
 
 , . . 
 
 ... 
 
 21 
 
 Eleocharis palustris 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 „ uniglumis 
 
 
 ... 
 
 23 
 
 Eleogenus ovata 
 
 
 ... 
 
 24 
 
 „ capitata 
 
 
 ... 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 Scirpns juncoides [muticuaj 
 „ lacustris 
 
 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 27 
 
 „ affinis [maritimus] 
 
 
 ... 
 
 28 
 
 Isolepis setacea 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 29 
 
 ,, supina 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 „ Roy lei 
 „ trifida 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 32 
 
 Eimbristylis pallescens ... 
 
 
 Very common, 
 August. 
 
 S3 
 
 „ junciformis 
 
 
 34 
 
 „ subtristachya [communis] ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 35 
 
 quinquangularis 
 
 Babar 
 
 99 
 
 36 
 
 Eriophorum comosum 
 
 V ery common, au- 
 tumn. 
 
 
 Tribe Hypoeytre.®. 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 Lipocarph a argentea 
 
 
 Very common, July 
 and August. 
 
 50 
 
No. 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 66 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 66 
 
 66 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION V. — ENDOGENiE — ( concluded). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 OEDER 24. — CYPERACEiE — (concluded). 
 
 Tribe Rhyncospnre.®. 
 Rhynchospora chinensis 
 „ Wailichiana 
 
 Tribe Caricineje. 
 
 Carex (Androgynse) longipes 
 
 99 
 
 foliosa 
 
 99 
 
 nubigena 
 
 99 
 
 noteleia 
 
 99 
 
 Vahlii [alpina] 
 
 )9 
 
 hasmatostoma ... . 
 
 » 
 
 setigera 
 
 99 
 
 myosurus 
 
 9} 
 
 condensata 
 
 yy 
 
 filicina 
 
 99 
 
 (Bifidse) saxatilis [ r i g i d a , 
 
 
 Good]. 
 
 Carex notha 
 
 99 
 
 acuta [gracilis, Curtis] 
 
 99 
 
 (Trifidae), ligulata 
 
 99 
 
 cardiolepis 
 
 99 
 
 Royleana 
 
 99 
 
 Moorcroftii 
 
 99 
 
 emodorum [alopecuroides Don], 
 
 99 
 
 obscura ... 
 
 99 
 
 fusiformis 
 
 99 
 
 Wailichiana 
 
 99 
 
 cruenta 
 
 99 
 
 (Incertas) Thomsonii, Boott., 
 
 99 
 
 mitis, Boott. 
 
 99 
 
 uncinoides, Boott. 
 
 99 
 
 vesiculosa, Boott. 
 
 Uncinia nepalensis 
 
 ORDER 25.— ERIOCAULONEiE. 
 
 Eriocaulon sexangulare ... ... | 
 
 Common. 
 
 Above 5,000 feet, 
 May. 
 
 Common. 
 
 » 
 
 Very common, 
 swamps. 
 
 ORDER 26.— TRILLIACEiE. 
 Paris polyphylla 
 Trillium Govanianum, Royle 
 
 Common. 
 
 Kulara Pass, 11,000 
 feet. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 395 
 
 DIVISION VI.— ACROGEKE. 
 
 Ho. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 ORDER 1.— FILICES. 
 
 Tribe Gleichbniaceas. 
 
 I Gleichenia dichotoea 
 
 Tribe Dicksonie.®. 
 
 2 
 
 S 
 
 4 
 
 Woodsia lanosa 
 
 „ elongata ' ... _ ••• 
 
 Dicksonia appendiculata [Sitolobium, 
 J. Smith]. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare, DudatolL 
 Common. 
 
 » 
 
 <S 
 
 7 
 
 S 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 >> 
 
 Tribe IIymenofhylle;®. 
 
 Hymenophyllum poyanthus [exser- | 
 turn ?] 
 
 Tribe Davaletezb. 
 
 Davallia (Leucostegia) membranulosa, 
 
 immersa 
 multidentata? 
 pulchra.? 
 
 n cliaeroph y 1 1 a 
 
 [cystopteris, 
 D. C] 
 
 J5 nodosa [Acro- 
 
 phorus Presl.] 
 (Endavallia) divaricata (ele- 
 gans, Madden). 
 (Microlepia) Hookeriana ... 
 
 „ spel uncas „ . 
 (Stenoloma) tenuifolia 
 
 » 
 
 On trees, Binsar, Oc- 
 tober. J. H. Batten. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common, Binsar. 
 Rare. 
 
 Very common. 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Tribe Pteriheie. 
 
 15 
 
 Adlantum lunulatum 
 
 ... 
 
 1*0 
 
 caudatum [rhizophorum 
 
 Swartz], 
 
 Mubaraka ... 
 
 17 
 
 „ Capillus- veneris 
 
 18 
 
 „ venustum 
 
 Hansraj 
 
 19 
 
 „ pedatum 
 
 
 20 
 
 Cheillanthes Dalhousiae ... ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 21 
 
 } , farinosa [dealbata 
 
 ... 
 
 22 
 
 Onycliium auratum 
 
 ... 
 
 23 
 
 ,, japonicum ... ••• 
 
 Pellaia [Cheiloplecion] gracilis 
 
 . . . 
 
 24 
 
 • . . 
 
 25 
 
 „ [AllosoruB nitidula 
 
 Bish kutra . . . 
 
 26 
 
 „ [Platyloma] ealomelnnos 
 
 27 
 
 Pteris (Eupteris) longifolia 
 
 ... 
 
 28 
 
 „ „ cretica 
 
 ... 
 
 „ „ var. stenophylla . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 29 
 
 „ quadri aurita 
 
 ... 
 
 30 
 
 (Paesia) aquilina 
 
 ... 
 
 31 
 
 (Campteria) bianrita 
 
 ... 
 
 32 
 
 „ Wallichiana ... 
 
 ... 
 
 33 
 
 „ (Litobrochia) inciea 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Common. 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Rare ; resembles Cryp- 
 togramma crispa. 
 Rare. 
 
 On rocks at i oiv levels. 
 Very common. 
 
 >> >> 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Near Ramghar, J. H. 
 Batten. 
 
No. 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 60 
 
 51 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 56 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 60 
 
 81 
 
 62 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACROGENiE — ( continued ). 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Yernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER l.—EILICES— (continued). 
 
 - 
 
 
 Tribe Beechne-e. 
 
 
 
 Woodwardia radicans 
 
 . .. 
 
 i 
 
 Low levels, very com- 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 mon. 
 
 
 Tribe Aspleniete. 
 
 
 
 Asplenium (Euaspienium) ensifor- 
 
 • » • 
 
 Common. Binsar, July. 
 
 
 
 me. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 alternans 
 
 . . . 
 
 Very common on walls. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 viride 
 
 
 Above 12,000 feet. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 trichomanes 
 
 . . .* 
 
 Common. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 resectum . . . 
 
 . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 n 
 
 33 
 
 planicaule 
 
 . . . 
 
 Common. 
 
 ji 
 
 33 
 
 adia n t n m 
 
 ... 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 
 ni_rum. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 fontanum, 
 
 ... 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 varians 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 » 
 
 33 
 
 bulbiferum, 
 
 . . • 
 
 Rare. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 tenuifolium 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 [concinnum 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wall]. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 (Athyrium) thelyp t e r- 
 
 * • • 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 
 
 oides. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 macro c a r- 
 
 .. . 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 pum [fo'io- 
 
 
 
 
 
 losum Wall]. 
 
 
 
 y? 
 
 33 
 
 nigripes . . . 
 
 .t • 
 
 Co’onel Davidson. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 filix femina 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 [pec t i n a- 
 
 
 
 
 
 turn]. 
 
 
 
 ?> 
 
 33 
 
 ox y p h y !- 
 
 * • • 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 
 
 lum. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 fimbriatum, 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 umbro s u m 
 
 . . . 
 
 Rare. 
 
 
 
 [Allantodia 
 
 
 
 
 
 australe] 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 (Dipiazium) pol y p o d i- 
 
 Lingra 
 
 Common. 
 
 
 
 oides. 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 maximum 
 
 
 ,j edible. 
 
 >3 
 
 (Amsogonium esculen- 
 
 
 „ not edible. 
 
 
 
 turn. 
 
 
 Rave; Very like Asnle- 
 
 33 
 
 (Hemidictyum) Cetera c h 
 
 
 nium alternans. 
 
 
 
 [(Jeter a c h 
 
 
 Common, walls, Sri- 
 
 Actimopteris radiata 
 
 • • • ••• 
 
 Morpuchh ... 
 
 nagar. 
 
 
 Tribe Aspidiece. 
 
 
 
 Aspidium (Polystichum)’auriculatum, 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 ilicifolium... 
 
 
 
 33- 
 
 33 
 
 Thomsoni ... 
 
 . • « 
 
 Above 8,000 feet. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 aculeatum ... 
 
 . • « 
 
 Common. 
 
 33 
 
 batum 
 
 Wall. 
 
 var. rufo bar- 
 
 » ♦ « 
 
 Very common. 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 Prescottianum, 
 
 * * • 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION VI.— ACROGENiE— ( continued ). 
 
 397 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 
 
 75 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 
 78 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 81 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 86 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 89 
 
 90 
 
 91 
 
 92 
 
 93 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 
 >> 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 )> 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 » 
 
 >> 
 
 ORDER 1 . — FILICES— (continued). 
 
 Tribe Aspidibie — '( concluded). 
 
 Aspidium (Polystichum) aristatum 
 (coniifolium Wall). 
 
 „ (Cyrtomium) falcatum ... 
 
 „ „ var. caryoti- 
 
 dium. 
 
 Nephrodium (Lastrea) patens 
 
 canum 
 prolixum 
 tilix mas 
 var. coclilea- 
 tum. 
 
 flaccidum 
 spiuulosum ... 
 sparsum 
 o d o r a t u m 
 
 (eriocarpum, Id. K.) 
 
 „ angustifrons, 
 (Eunephrodium) uniturn ... 
 
 „ coca 1 1 a t u m 
 (unitum, Sieb.). 
 
 ,, aridum 
 
 „ molle 
 
 (Sagenia) polymorphum ... 
 
 „ variolosum 
 
 „ cicuta ium 
 
 Nephrolepis cordifolia [tuberosa. H. 
 
 Iv.] 
 
 Oleandra nernformis 
 ,, Wallicliii 
 
 Tribe PoLYPODiE-as. 
 Eolypodium (Phegopteris) e r u b e - 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 91 
 
 91 
 
 ecens. 
 
 91 
 
 91 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 j, di stans 
 
 (Goniopteris) urophyllum, 
 proliferum, 
 lineatum ... 
 multilinea- 
 
 tum. 
 
 ii 
 
 ii 
 
 ii 
 
 11 
 
 (Goniophlebium) amsenum, 
 
 H 
 
 11 
 
 laclmopus... 
 
 
 11 
 
 subauricula.- 
 
 turn (argutum, Wall). 
 
 
 Polypodium (Niphobolus) adnascens, 
 
 i y 
 
 11 
 
 linqua ... 
 
 jj 
 
 11 
 
 stigmosum, 
 
 
 ly 
 
 flssum . . . 
 
 ii 
 
 11 
 
 (floccul o - 
 
 sum). 
 
 
 
 ly 
 
 (Phymatodes) hneare 
 
 
 [Pleopellis 
 
 nudaj. 
 
 91 
 
 ii 
 
 normale ... 
 
 Katra 
 
 Lingra 
 
 Note. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 99 
 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Very common. 
 Common. 
 
 Very common; edible. 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 11 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 Frequent. 
 
 Up to 4,000 feet. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Rare ; Pipa kothi. 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 Low elevations. 
 
 Commo n. 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 » 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 Common. 
 
 11 
 
 Valleys. 
 
 Common, June. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Scented fern ; very 
 common on trees. 
 Common. 
 
398 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACROGENiE — ( continued'). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 100 
 
 ORDER ].— FELICES— (cone 
 Tribe Polypodies*: — (concl 
 Polypodium (Phymatodes) membra- 
 
 luded). 
 
 uded). 
 
 Common. 
 
 101 
 
 naceum. 
 
 „ ,, tr ifidum 
 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 102 
 
 [oxylobum, Wall]. 
 
 „ „ ma'acodon, 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 103 
 
 „ „ ebenipes ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 >> 
 
 104 
 
 „ (Drynaria) propinquum, 
 
 • . • 
 
 Common. 
 
 105 
 
 „ „ rivale 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 106 
 
 „ ,, querci folium ... 
 
 • « • 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 107 
 
 ,, ,, juglandifolium, 
 
 „ „ liimalayense 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common. 
 
 108 
 
 * t . 
 
 Frequent. 
 
 109 
 
 [venustum, Wall]. 
 
 Tribe Grammitide^s. 
 Gynmogramma (Leptogramma) Totta, 
 
 
 Colonel Davidson. 
 
 110 
 
 „ (Engymnogramna) 
 
 Mouse ear 
 
 Pyura and China. 
 
 111 
 
 vestita, 
 
 „ „ Andersoni, 
 
 fern. 
 
 About 13,000 feet. 
 
 112 
 
 ,, ,, javanica... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Binsar. August. 
 
 113 
 
 „ (Sellignea) lanceolata, 
 
 « • « 
 
 Rare. 
 
 114 
 
 „ „ involuta... 
 
 , , , 
 
 Common. 
 
 115 
 
 Yittaria (Euvittaria) elonmta 
 
 • • • 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 116 
 
 ., (Toeniopsis) scolopendrina ? 
 
 ... 
 
 Binsar, June. 
 
 117 
 
 Tribe Acrostichte.®. 
 
 Acrostichum virens 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 „ var. deltigerum [Menis- 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 118 
 
 ciurn deltigerum, Wall]. 
 
 Tribe Osmuxdaceae. 
 
 Osmunda Claytoniana [interupta] ... 
 
 
 Very common 10,000 
 
 119 
 
 „ regalis var. japonica 
 
 
 feet Chaupatta. 
 
 Rare Khati 10,000 feet. 
 
 120 
 
 Tribe Schiztaceul 
 
 Schizaea digitata 
 
 
 May. 
 
 Common. 
 
 121 
 
 Lygodium scandenle 
 
 Marora, ban- 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 122 
 
 „ japonicum 
 
 dhaniya. 
 
 » 
 
 Common. 
 
 123 
 
 Tribe Marattiace^i. 
 
 Angiopteris erecta ... ... ] 
 
 
 Rare. 
 
 124 
 
 Tribe QpmoGLOSSAcEiE. 
 Ophioglossum vulgatum 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 125 
 
 Botrychium lunaria 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 126 
 
 „ daucifolium 
 
 •• • 
 
 Common. 
 
 127 
 
 „ virginianum 
 
 ••• 
 
 Very common. 
 
 
 var. lanuginosum 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 399 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACROGENiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 2 — EQUISETACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2. 
 
 Equisetnm debile ... 
 
 „ difEusura, Don [s c o p a- 
 
 rium, Wall]. 
 
 « • • 
 
 • 03 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Hill streams. 
 
 
 ORDER 3. — LYCOrODIACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Lycopodium tenellum 
 „ setaceum 
 
 „ circinatum 
 
 „ subuiifolium ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Tula muka .. 
 
 Very common. 
 
 Rare. 
 
 Frequent, 4,000 feet. 
 Common. 
 
 
 ORDER 4. — MARSILIACEjE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Marsilia quadrifolia ... ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 OBDER 5, — SALVINIACEJE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Azolia pinnata ... ... 
 
 Tarai ... 
 
 Common in pools. 
 
 
 ORDER 6.— CHARACEiE. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Chara verticillata 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal and Bliim 
 Tal. 
 
 
 ORDER 7. — BRYACEiE. 
 
 
 
 Tribe Dicranaceae. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 Leptotrichum inclinatum, Mitten. 
 
 () molliculum, Mittin ... 
 
 himalayanum Mitten. 
 Dicranum himalayanum, Mitten 
 
 M refiexifolium, Muller. 
 
 Didymodon laxifolius 
 
 ... 
 
 Floti. 
 
 Common. 
 
 >j 
 
 
 Tribe Leucobrtace^:. 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Octoblepharum albidum 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 
 Tribe Trichostcmaceae. 
 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 Tortula squarrosa 
 „ anomala 
 
 Ancectangium Roylei, Mitten 
 „ Thomsoni, Mitten 
 
 „ Stracheyanum, Mitten ... 
 
 
 Common. 
 
 • • • 
 
400 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACROGrENiE — ( continued ) . 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 7. — BRYACEiE— (continued). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Trichostomaceas — ( concluded). 
 
 
 13 
 
 Hymenostylium aurantiacum, Mitten, 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 14 
 
 „ cur drostrum 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 Barbula vinealis 
 
 , , , 
 
 
 16 
 
 ,, sub-pellucida, Mitten ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 17 
 
 „ gracilenta, Mitten 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 18 
 
 „ nigrescens, Mitten 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 19 
 
 Desmatodou Laureri 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 20 
 
 ,, Wallichii 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 21 
 
 „ involutus 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 22 
 
 Eucalypta ciliata 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tribe Grimmiace.®. 
 
 
 23 
 
 Grimmiaapocarpa 
 
 t • • 
 
 Rocks, common. 
 
 24 
 
 „ (Rhacomitrium) subsecunda, 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 25 
 
 Glyphomitrium tortula, Mitten 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Tribe Ortiiotrichace.®. 
 
 
 26 
 
 Orthotrichum Hookeri ... 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 Macromitrium Moorcroftii 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 0 
 
 
 Tribe Funariaceas. 
 
 
 28 
 
 Eunaria hygrometrica 
 
 . • . 
 
 Very common, sum- 
 
 
 
 
 mer. 
 
 29 
 
 „ leptopoda 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tribe Splachnace.®. 
 
 
 30 
 
 Tayloria indica 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 „ (Dissodon) tenella, Mitten, 
 
 ... 
 
 October. 
 
 
 Tribe B artr a mi a cea3 . 
 
 
 32 
 
 Bartramin Halleriana 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 „ leptodonta 
 
 ... 
 
 Near Ithyphylla, 
 
 34 
 
 „ subpellucida, Mitten 
 
 
 Resembles „ 
 
 35 
 
 Philonotis Turneriana 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common. 
 
 36 
 
 „ falcata 
 
 ... 
 
 9 ) 
 
 
 Tribe Bryace.®. 
 
 
 37 
 
 Mielichoferio himalayana 
 
 ... 
 
 Pindari, 11,000 feet. 
 
 38 
 
 Webera elongata 
 
 • . « 
 
 
 39 
 
 Bryum filiforme, Mitten 
 
 • • « 
 
 . • • 
 
 40 
 
 „ argenteum 
 
 ... 
 
 Very common. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 401 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACROGENiE' — ( continued). 
 
 No. 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 50 
 
 51 
 62 
 63 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 61 
 62 
 
 ORDER 6. — BRYACEiE — •(continued). 
 Tribe Bryace;e — ( concluded). 
 
 41 
 
 Bryum 
 
 hemisphoevicum... 
 
 42 
 
 » 
 
 alpinum 
 
 43 
 
 9 7 
 
 cernuum 
 
 44 
 
 9 > 
 
 Warneum 
 
 45 
 
 99 
 
 turbinatum 
 
 46 
 
 99 
 
 roseum ... 
 
 47 
 
 99 
 
 nepalense 
 
 Common. 
 
 Common, summer. 
 Very common, sum- 
 mer. 
 
 Common, summer. 
 
 TrRIBK HYPNACEAS. 
 
 Fabronia minuta 
 Hypnum a’gentatum, Mitten 
 Buchanani 
 cameratum, Mitten 
 kamounense 
 p'nmosum 
 rusciforme 
 commutatum ... 
 
 „ fllicinum 
 Meteoriutn squarrosum ... 
 
 Stereodon condensatus, Mitten 
 „ caperatus, Mitten 
 „ taxirameus, Mitten 
 „ plicatus [Neckera] 
 
 „ prorepens, Mitten 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 Common. 
 
 Ditto, summer. 
 
 63 
 
 macrocarpus ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 64 
 
 „ serrula, Mitten 
 
 ... 
 
 Diwali, 8,500. 
 
 
 Tribe Neckera ceas. 
 
 
 
 65 
 
 Neckera Straclieyana 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 66 
 
 „ crenulata 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tribe LEUconoNTACEiE. 
 
 
 67 
 
 Hedwigia attenuata 
 
 ••• 
 
 Above 10,000. 
 
 68 
 
 Leucodon secundns ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Common. 
 
 69 
 
 Cryplisea concavifolia 
 
 • •• 
 
 Binsar. June. Com- 
 
 
 
 
 mon. 
 
 
 Tribe Leskeaceas. 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 Anomodon tristis 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 71 
 
 acutifolius, Mitten 
 
 ... 
 
 • t • 
 
 72 
 
 Trachypus blandus [Neekera] 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 73 
 
 Buchanani [Neekera] 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 74 
 
 Leskea scopula, Mitten ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 51 
 
m 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 DIVISION VI. — ACIiOGENiE — ( concluded ). 
 
 No. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Note. 
 
 
 ORDER 7. — BRYACEJ5 — (concluded). 
 
 
 
 Tribe Lbskeaceae— ( concluded). 
 
 
 75 
 
 Leskea Wallichii [Hypnu n] 
 
 
 On trees, May. Askot. 
 
 76 
 
 „ assimilis, Mitten 
 
 
 
 77 
 
 „ haplohymenium [Hypnum] . 
 
 , , , 
 
 
 78 
 
 „ cymbifolia 
 
 ... 
 
 Common, May. 
 
 
 Tribe Mniaceje. 
 
 
 
 79 
 
 Fissidens sylvaticus 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 „ viridulus 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 81 
 
 Mnium rhynchophorum ... 
 
 
 Common, summer. 
 
 82 
 
 ,, tricliomanes ... 
 
 
 
 83 
 
 Mniadelphus humifusua 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tribe Hypopterygiaceie. 
 
 
 84 
 
 Cyathophorum intermedium 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tribe Polytrichace^b. 
 
 
 85 
 
 Atrichum flavisetum 
 
 
 
 86 
 
 Pogonatum himalayanum, Mitten ... 
 
 
 Resembles urnigeruna. 
 
 87 
 
 ,, micrqstomum 
 
 
 
 88 
 
 „ aloides 
 
 
 Ground. Blnsar, April. 
 
 .89 
 
 „ fuscatum, Mitten 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 Polytrichuni perichaetiale 
 
 
 
 91 
 
 Lyellia crispa 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ■ 
 
CHAPTER Y 1 1 1 . r 
 
 Scientific Botany — ( continued ). 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Plants found in Kumaon, Garhwal and the adjoining parts of Tibet by 
 Captain (now General) Richard Strachey and Mr. Winterbottom. 
 
 The following extract from- Hooker and Thomson’s “ Introduc- 
 tory Essay 2 to the Flora Indica ” regarding the value of General 
 Strachey’ s and Mr. Winterbottom’s botanical work in India appears 
 to be a fitting introduction to tide list of plants discovered by them 
 in Kumaon, Garhwal, and in the neighbouring parts of Tibet.- 
 
 « The collection distributed by Captain Strachey and Mr. Winter- 
 bottom consists chiefly of the plants of Kumaon and Garhwal, and 
 of those of the adjacent parts of Tibet. Captain Richard Strachey 
 was appointed by the Indian Government to make a scientific 
 survey of the province of Kumaon, and was occupied on the task 
 about two years, during which time, in addition to the important 
 investigations in physical science which occupied his attention, he 
 thoroughly explored the flora of the province, carefully noting the 
 range of each species. He was joined by Mr. Winterbottom m 
 1848, and they travelled together in Tibet. Their joint collections, 
 amounting to 2,000 species, were distributed, in 18o2-53, to the 
 Hookerian Herbarium, the British Museum, the Lmnsean Society and 
 some foreign museums ; and the scientific results are now m course 
 of publication. The beautiful preservation of the specimens, and the 
 fullness and accuracy with which they are ticketed, render this 
 herbarium the most valuable for its size that has ever been distri-* 
 
 buted from India. 
 
 The original printed list was put into Mr. Dutliie’s hands by 
 General Strachey in 1876, shortly before starting for Imha to take up 
 his duties at the Saharanpur Botanical Gardens. N ot having si 
 cient time to revise the whole of it by an examination of the specimen. 
 
 i The materials for this Chapter were placed at my Qu-ator “of the 
 
 R. Strachey, and have been edited and anangeU by ^ 
 
 Botanical Gardens, Saharanpur. 
 
404 
 
 hima'latan districts 
 
 preserved in the Kew Herbarium, his notes were left behind to be 
 completed by another hand. These notes together with the single 
 copy of the original catalogue were missing for a time. The list 
 however was found, and since then Mr. C. B. Clarke has under- 
 taken to revise it up to the end of the Polypetalse, as well as the 
 willows, the grasses, and the two families of Urticacece and 
 Piperacece. After completing the revision of the polypetalous 
 orders Mr. Clarke remarks, u I may add that the only use of the 
 above verification must be to show how very good the names in the 
 list are ; it would be useless to carry it on further, for in the next 
 order (as Composites ) it would be better to name up the Herbarium 
 by the list than to reduce the list by the Herbarium. For unless 
 the order has been specially worked up, as to the Indian plants in 
 the Herbarium, it is not so carefully sorted out as were the 
 Strachey and Winterbottom plants originally.” 
 
 The following explanatory notes by the same botanist should 
 also be recorded: — “ In the above reduction all that is asserted is 
 that I have seen the ticket of Strachey and Winterbottom copied 
 on the left-hand side of the page, and that when I saw it, it was 
 in the new bundle having the name on the right-hand side: nothing 
 beyond this. As regards the missing tickets, it appears that some 
 of the common plants (as Nelumbium, #c.), were never laid in. 
 Secondly, that where these were duplicates of the same plant under 
 several numbers, some of the duplicate numbers were distributed. 
 Thirdly, that some of the fragmentary or critical species were set 
 aside and named in MS. on the sheets, no printed ticket being placed 
 on the sheet, but the name being carried into the printed list. I 
 only discovered this in the beginning of Leguminosas , and have 
 found several of the written-up sheets since. They are among the 
 most important to find ; but without printed tickets they can hardly 
 be found in a Herbarium of this size unless they are lighted on by 
 a fortunate accident. Lastly, after these three causes have been 
 allowed for, there are certain plants, as Mucuna atropurpurea, which 
 I cannot find anywhere, though I have made a special and long 
 search for them. I can only suppose that Mucuna atropurpurea 
 was named on a flowering specimen or fragment that it was consi- 
 dered useless to paste down.” 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 405 
 
 The arrangement of the revised list has been made to correspond 
 with that of the Flora of British India, as far as that work has been 
 completed ; the names of many plants have consequently been 
 altered in accordance with the nomenclature adopted in that work. 
 As the reference number of each species in the original catalogue 
 is given in column 2, the old name is not added except in the 
 case of plants now referred to a different genus. 
 
 As the reference number of each species in the original cata- 
 logue is given in column 2, the old name is not added except in 
 the case of plants now referred to a different genus. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS LIST. 
 In Column 3. 
 
 H. 
 
 for 
 
 herb 
 
 S. or Sh. for 
 
 shrub. 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 )) 
 
 creeping herb 
 
 ,. S. H. 
 
 herbaceous shrub. 
 
 H. fl. 
 
 )) 
 
 floating herb 
 
 .. S. P. 
 
 parasitical shrub. 
 
 H. pr. 
 
 >> 
 
 prickly herb 
 
 . S. sc. „ 
 
 climbing shrub. 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 }) 
 
 climbing herb . . 
 
 . S. T. 
 
 arborescent shrub. 
 
 Herb S. & W. per herbarium of Strachey and Winterbottom. 
 
 
 
 In Column 5. 
 
 
 Bl. for 
 
 blue 
 
 ... Or. for 
 
 orange 
 
 Sc. for scarlet. 
 
 Br. „ 
 
 brown 
 
 ... Pk. „ 
 
 pink 
 
 W. white, 
 
 Gr. „ 
 
 green 
 
 ... Pr. „ 
 
 purple 
 
 Y. yellow. 
 
 Li. „ 
 
 lilac 
 
 ... R. ., 
 
 red. 
 
 
406 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaovb 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 t Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 I.— RANUNCULA- 
 CEiE. 
 
 1- Clematis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 montana, Ilam. 
 
 (7) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 W. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 var. major 
 
 (?i) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 30' 
 
 w. 
 
 May 
 
 Madbari Pass, 
 
 barbellata, Edgcm ... 
 
 (6) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. Pr. 
 
 May 
 
 &c. 
 
 Dwali, Madbari 
 
 grata, Wall. 
 
 (12) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 October .. 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Almora, See. ... 
 
 Gouriana, Roxb. 
 
 (9) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 December, 
 
 Kota-dun, Kap- 
 
 puberula, Hf. S' T. ... 
 
 (14) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 March 
 
 kot. 
 
 Outer hills, 
 
 orientalis, L. 
 
 
 
 
 Pr. 
 
 
 Ukhimath. 
 
 var. acutifolia 
 
 (3 & 4) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Niti 
 
 nutans, Royle 
 
 (13) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 March 
 
 Laptel, Guge. 
 Outer hills, 
 
 acuminata, DC. 
 
 (1) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 6' <-8' 
 
 • * • 
 
 July 
 
 Ukhimath. 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 connata, DC. 
 
 (2 & 6) 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 6'— 8' 
 
 W. Y. 
 
 J u 1 y-A u- 
 
 sar. 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra,- 
 
 Bucliananiana, DC. 
 
 11 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 gust. 
 
 October . . . 
 
 lam liiver, &c. 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 grewiadlora, DC. 
 
 10 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 8' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 December, 
 
 Thai, &c. 
 
 2. Anemone. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 albana, Stev. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 . • . 
 
 • • • 
 
 rupicola, Camb. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Pi n d a r i , 
 
 vitifolia, Ham. 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Kogila. 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 obtusiloba, Don. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Namik, Kam- 
 ni, 
 
 Bompras, Rim- 
 
 var. Govaniana, Wall, 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 Or. Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 rnpestris, Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 kim. 
 
 • •• 
 
 rivularis, Ham. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 Ralam ... 
 
 var. hispida, Wall. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 polyanthes, Don. 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Wh. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 var. villosa, Royle .. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 i'— ii' 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari, Rogila 
 
 narcissiflora, L. .. 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rirnkim. 
 
 • • » 
 
 tetrascpala, Royle ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Wh. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 elongata, Don. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 June ... 
 
 Chechani-khal, 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 407 
 
 Plants.. 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 <V 
 
 o 
 
 •§ 
 
 <D 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 r+ 
 
 O 
 
 *-+• 
 
 £ 
 
 8 
 
 Elevation in f< 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 u 
 
 R 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest 
 
 5,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open bushes ... 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2 5—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500-^-15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 b. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open bushes... 
 
 •3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R, 
 
 * 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open bushes ... 
 
 3—6,500 
 
 R, 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Berb. Winterb., Nos. 737, 770. 
 
 Rocks 
 
 10,500 — 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ^ ( )pen 
 
 ^ 8—9,000 
 
 l 13 — 15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 Herb. Winterb., No 136. 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 . 10,500—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 —A. polynnthes of Herb. Winterb. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 Herb. Winterb. 
 
 Woods 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
408 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kuinaon 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 §£ 
 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 G m* S 
 
 A 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 ri 
 
 ci 
 
 sJ 
 
 OJ 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 32 
 
 d 
 
 ’E 
 
 QJ 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 .5 u -e 
 
 
 4-i 
 
 o 
 
 *4H 
 
 
 
 G £ .O 
 
 ■e&s 
 
 s 
 
 | 
 
 1 
 
 «u 
 
 s 
 
 'c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 H-H 
 
 S 
 
 & 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 >3 
 
 3- Thalictrum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 June ... 
 
 Ralam River ... 
 
 platycarpum, Hf. Sf T, 
 
 4 & 13 
 
 H. 
 
 to 2' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Milam 
 
 reniforme, Wull. 
 
 10 
 
 IT. 
 
 4' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Ralam River ... 
 
 paucifiorum, Royle ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Piti & Gori 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Rivers. 
 
 peduncul &tx\.vo.,Edgew , 
 alpinum, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 var. acaule 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Pindar, Hoti, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Guge, 
 
 „ microphyllvm... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 S" — 4" 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bar j i k an g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass, &c. 
 
 Punduanum, Wall. ... 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, &c , 
 
 eaniculaeforme, D. C., 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. , 
 
 javanicum, 111. 
 
 8 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
 foliolosum, DC. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 W. Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. r 
 
 minus, L. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Niti, Laptel ... 
 
 4. Callianthemum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cachemirianuni, Cavib, 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 y. Pk. 
 
 J une 
 
 Pindari, Bom- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pras. 
 
 5. Adonis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 chrysocyathus, Hf. § 
 T. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Rajhoti 
 
 6. Ranunculus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aquatilis, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. fl. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Y. Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Baiqrhu, Gya- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nima. 
 
 Cymbal arise, Pursh ... 
 
 23 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 1" 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Guge Yalleys, 
 
 pulchellus, C A. Mey., 
 
 18 
 
 H. 
 
 11" 
 
 1 2 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bompras, Niti 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 var. 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Shangcha. &c.. 
 
 lobatus, Jacc[. 
 hyperboreus. Rotlb. ... 
 
 3 & 20 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Burphu, Guge, 
 
 var. natans 
 
 22 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 September 
 
 Topidhunga ... 
 
 „ radicans 
 
 21 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 S' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Topidhunga ... 
 
 Chferophyllos, L. ... 
 affinis, Dr. 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 T. 
 
 June 
 
 Knlhara 
 
 hirtellus, Royle 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 I " 
 
 August .. 
 
 Bar jilcang Paso 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 409 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 • r-H 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 pQ 
 
 c3 
 
 -4-3 
 
 i) 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 r* 
 
 4-1 
 
 0 
 
 CQ 
 
 1 
 +3 
 
 • pH 
 n—< 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 <D 
 
 4H 
 
 .9 
 
 d 
 
 o a) 
 
 *43 00 
 d o 
 t> ^ 
 
 a» 
 
 ' w 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 M 
 
 n 
 
 4 s 
 
 a 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 d'. | 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 1,500 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 = TJiaUctrum No 10, in Herb. S. 
 
 Woods 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 On rocks 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 & W. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ..• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Herb. Winterb. No. 53. 
 
 Open 
 
 12,500—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 ? = T. alpinum, & No. 793, Herb. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 4 Winterb. 
 
 Banks 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 •R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ■On trees 
 
 7 — -.8,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 8,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 E. 
 
 b. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,500—14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * ^ 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet, open 
 
 15,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 — A. pyrenaica and Trollius No. 2 
 
 Ponds 
 
 11,500—15,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Near water 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 14—17,000 
 
 ... 
 
 b 
 
 T, 
 
 - 
 
 In water 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500—15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Herb. Winterb. 736. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1 
 
 52 
 
* 
 
 410 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 ^ l 
 
 £ 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 
 S . 
 
 C3 ^ 
 
 -d 
 
 is 
 
 4* 
 
 d 
 
 c3 
 
 d 
 
 O 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 .S 
 
 *C 
 
 o 
 
 fe 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 
 l-i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 02o 
 
 td 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O +3 
 
 MH 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 Crf rQ 
 
 
 J=l 
 
 5 
 
 
 »rH 
 
 
 t; cq tu 
 
 3 
 
 fcX) 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 a 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 i-i 
 
 hirtellus var. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 i"— n r/ 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Kalhara 
 
 G 
 
 H. 
 
 4" — G" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Lahur 
 
 
 8 & 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Ealam, Pindari 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Valley. 
 
 55 
 
 1G 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bompras 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bompras 
 
 sceleratus, L. 
 diffusus, D.C. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Plains, Almora, 
 
 Lahur, Chami 
 
 var. mollis 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— G" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 „ obtectus ' ... 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Jagesar, &c. ... 
 
 lsstus, W all. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Common 
 
 flaccidus, Bf. T., 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 1" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Lahur 
 
 arvensis, L. 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 i'— 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 7- Oxygraphis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glacial is, Bunge 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Bar jikang 
 Pass. 
 
 polypetala, Bf. fy 2\, 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Champwa, &c. 
 
 8- Caltha. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 palustris, L. 
 
 var. Govaniana ... 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 15" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 „ Bimalcnsis . . . 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 J huni 
 
 9- Trollius. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 acaulis, Lindl. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari, Kulha- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ra. 
 
 pumilus, Bon. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 r— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bar ji kang 
 Pass. 
 
 10- Isopyriim- 
 
 grandiflorum, FisoTi ., 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" — 6" 
 
 Bl. Or. 
 
 July 
 
 Niti, Topi- 
 dhunga. 
 
 var. miorophyllum.. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 Bl. Or. 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari, &c. ... 
 
 11. Aquilegia. 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 vulgaris, L. 
 
 
 . • . 
 
 , • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . « 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 var. pubiflora 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 „ pyrenaica 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Fr. 
 
 June 
 
 Pathakori 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 . 
 
 : 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 411 
 
 Flants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 C<3 
 
 •X 
 
 • r-H 
 
 o 
 
 <U 
 
 & 
 
 ■§ 
 
 o 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 00 
 
 Pi 
 
 O 
 
 v -p-» 
 
 »rH 
 
 Pi 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fi 
 the sea. 
 
 >> 
 
 .3 
 
 3 
 
 Ps 
 
 >> 
 
 Jh 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 10,000 
 
 E. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 1—1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • ‘ 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 7,600—10,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—9,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 »■* 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 *•« 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ■? 
 
 
 = CaTlianthemum No. 2 in Herb. S, 
 and W. 
 
 © • * 
 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Wet, open 
 
 9,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 E. 
 
 . . . 
 
 <•« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 11,500—15,600 
 
 • . • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 
412 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 12- Delphinium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 denudatura, Wall. ... 
 
 3 
 
 PI. 
 
 2'— 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal, &c.. 
 
 caeruleum, Jacq. 
 
 10—18 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 2" 
 2"— 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Laptel, Niti, 
 
 Guge. 
 
 datum, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 var. ramincvlifoli/wm... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3 / 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam River ... 
 
 vestitum, Wall. «. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Gy. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Tola 
 
 cashmirianum, Wall., 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 V 
 
 Gy. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 BarjikangPass, 
 
 var. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Pindari 
 
 Brunonianum, Hoyle. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 BarjikangPass, 
 
 13- Aconitmn- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lycoetonum, L. ... 
 
 4 
 
 PI. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 ferox, Wall. ... 
 
 3 
 
 PI. 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Bar j i k a ngP ass, 
 Pindari. 
 
 Napellus, L. 
 
 5 
 
 PI. 
 
 6" S" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 BarjikangPass, 
 Leptel, Milam, 
 
 var« multip.dwn 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September 
 
 heterophyllum, Wall., 
 
 14- Aetsea- 
 
 i 
 
 II. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Pindari, Milam, 
 
 spicata, L. 
 
 Ml 
 
 IP. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Kulhara .. 
 
 15- Psecnia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 emodi, Wall. ... 
 
 II.- MAGNOLIA- 
 
 • •1 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— S' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
 CEAC. 
 
 1- Michelia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kisopa, Ham. ... 
 
 III. — MENISPER- 
 
 
 T. 
 
 50' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Gagar 
 
 MACE25. 
 
 1- Cocculus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iaurifolius, D.C. ... 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills, Al- 
 mora. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 413 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, & c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 ; 1 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 .2 
 
 5 
 
 K 
 
 S-. 
 
 ft 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 C 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Oi 
 
 t • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 
 b. 
 
 . 4 4 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 E. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • t 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 4<>* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,700 
 
 E. 
 
 
 l«l 
 
 
 Near water in 
 
 8—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 woods. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 12—13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Mt 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 4 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,500 — 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 9 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Shady woods ... 
 
 9—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 5 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open woods .. 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • t 
 
 ... 
 
 
 / 
 
414 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 \ 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of plant. 
 
 Height of growth. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 2 Stephania- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hernandifolia, Walp., 
 
 3 
 
 H.sc. 
 
 • • » 
 
 
 •M 
 
 ? 
 
 elegans, ///'. T. 
 
 2 
 
 H.sc. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Kathi, &c., ... 
 
 rotunda, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H.sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar ... 
 
 3- Cissampelos- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pareira, L. 
 
 Ml 
 
 S.sc. 
 
 O'— 8' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 IV„ — BERBERI DA -• 
 CEH£. 
 
 1. Holbsellia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 latifolia, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 S.sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April 
 
 Shamket, &c.. 
 
 var. anghstifolia ... 
 
 2 
 
 S.sc. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 M< 
 
 Ml 
 
 Binsar 
 
 2 Berberis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Spreng. ... 
 vulgaris, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Binsar, See. ... 
 
 var. cretica 
 
 11 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari, Bam 
 pa. 
 
 umbellata, Wall. 
 
 10 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
 aristata, D . C. 
 
 2 & 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 12' 
 
 Y. 
 
 April-May. 
 
 Binsar, N a i n i 
 Tal. D u d a- 
 toli. 
 
 var. jloribunda 
 
 3,4 & 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, Namik, 
 
 Lycium, Royle 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 O'— 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Kazi, Nandaki 
 Kiver. 
 
 asiatica, Roxb. 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G' 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Alnrora, &c. ... 
 
 concinna, H. f. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • ■ 
 
 it* 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 var. 
 
 9 
 
 Sh. 
 
 U' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Eazi ... 
 
 3- Podophyllum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 emodi, Wall. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 W. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari ... 
 
 Y. — NYMPHJSA- 
 CEH5. 
 
 1 Nelumbium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 speciosum, Willd. ... 
 
 HI 
 
 H. 
 
 Ml 
 
 W. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bhirn Tal ... 
 
 / 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 415 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hir 
 
 la\ 
 
 .9 
 
 c3 
 
 « 
 
 itf- 
 
 ia. 
 
 >> 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 • •• 
 
 5,000? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • « • 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Opeu woods ... 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •5 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *•• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • •0 
 
 Open 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 ii! 
 
 D. 
 
 .•» 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ..t 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,500—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 i«n 
 
 
 Do. •• 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,5—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 » 0 i 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 In water 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 
 
416 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kuma on 
 
 
 Si fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 
 0 
 
 Pi ^ 
 
 rd 
 
 4-3 
 
 +3 
 
 U 
 
 .2 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 S <a § 
 
 fj ■£? += 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 biD 
 
 p. 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 32 
 
 O 
 
 t*- 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^ d O 
 
 O 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 d £ ^ 
 
 4-3 
 
 1 
 
 r~ ] 
 
 bJD 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a - 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 Hi 
 
 VI.— PAPAVERA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CE7E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Papaver. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dubium. L. 
 
 
 * • . 
 
 %-l 
 
 
 
 • I I 
 
 yar. laviqatwni ... 
 
 I 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 R. 
 
 March .. 
 
 Almora .. 
 
 somniferum, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1 1 ' 
 
 1 2 
 
 W. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 2- Argemone. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mexicana, L, ••• 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Plains, Bhabar. 
 
 3- Meconopsis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aculeata, Royle . 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 \'~n’ 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Barjikang, Niti, 
 
 robusta, Hf. Sf T. ,. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 in 
 
 August ... 
 
 Namilc 
 
 4. Stylopliorum. 
 
 lactucoides, Bentli. & 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 ; 
 
 Rogila 6. 
 
 Moult. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VII. — FUMARIA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEFE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Dicentra 
 
 scandens, Walp. 
 
 Mt 
 
 H. 
 
 S'— 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar below 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 2- Corydalis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rutsefolia. Sibth. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June ,. 
 
 Dwali 
 
 caBhmiriana, Royle .. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 Goyaniana, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Champ wa 
 
 tibetica, Hf T. .. 
 
 16 
 
 II. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Lanjar 
 
 Moorcroftiana, Wall., 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 1$' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim ... 
 
 Gortschakoyii, Schrenl 
 
 12 
 
 II. 
 
 U/—2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September 
 
 Kyungar 
 
 ramosa, Wall. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—n' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 
 yar. vayinans .. 
 
 10 
 
 II . 
 
 1' -2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Ralam, Niti .. 
 
 „ nana .. 
 
 1.3,14, r 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August, | 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 Kala jawar 
 
 cornuta, Royle 
 
 8 
 
 II. 
 
 2'-3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Chaur, K a i a- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mandi Pass. 
 
 chaeropliylia, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June .. 
 
 . Binsar ... 
 
 meifolia, Wall. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 l' — 14 
 
 ' X. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 flabellata, Edyew. ,. 
 
 15 
 
 II. 
 
 2' — S' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . 
 
 . Niti 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 417 
 
 PZante— (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 <D 
 
 O 
 
 rQ 
 
 o3 
 
 Hirnd- 
 
 yala. 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 OQ 
 
 *H 
 
 O 
 
 QQ 
 
 ' d 
 o 
 
 •i - < 
 
 • r-4 
 
 "O 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 El evation in feet 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 — 
 
 P 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 it. 
 
 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 1 — 5,500 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 14,000 
 
 B. 
 
 » •« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ©pen natura- 
 lized. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ■ 
 
 ©pen 
 
 11—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 •8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 == Dior a no stigma lacUocoides. in 
 Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Shade 
 
 5 — 7,00 0 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 4 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 
 ©pen 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 17,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500—1 6,000 
 
 
 >•0 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 | Do. 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10,000? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—11,500 
 
 • • • 
 
 . 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 53 
 
418 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 Jh l 
 
 gj d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 £ 
 
 & 
 
 4-3 
 
 -UJ 
 
 u 
 
 <D 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 q . 
 
 is 
 
 9 
 
 is 
 
 a> 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 3 "S' 
 
 d 5>o 
 
 u 
 
 bo 
 
 7+ 
 
 <4-1 
 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 • p-H h +J 
 
 ^ "o o 
 
 «H 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 +3 
 
 ri 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 -4-3 
 
 
 S3 ^ §3 
 
 i 
 
 .5? 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 9 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 
 W O ' 
 
 w 
 
 W 
 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 
 3- Fumaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 par vi flora, Lam, 
 var. Vaii until •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 12" 
 
 R. 
 
 January • 
 
 ••• 
 
 Plains,Almora, 
 
 VIII.— CRUCIFERiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Parrya- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 maerocarpa. Br. 
 
 i 
 
 B. 
 
 . .. 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 G mge 
 
 lanuginosa, ti.f Sf T, 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 3 W 
 
 ? 
 
 September, 
 
 Lanjar 
 
 2- Cheiranthus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 himalayensis, Camb... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 S' 7 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Unt a-d h u r a. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 3- Nasturtium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 officinale, Br. 
 
 2 
 
 II . 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Alniora, &c. 
 
 indicum, B C. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 ? 
 
 March .. 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 4- Barbarea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vulgaris, Br. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 AnguSt ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 5- Arabis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glabra, Crantz ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 alpina, L. 
 
 14—15 
 
 II. 
 
 1' 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Niti 
 
 a'liplexicaulis, Edgem, 
 
 1, 2 &3 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 18" 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Nadhari Pass, 
 
 6- Cardamine. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hirsuta, L. 
 
 3 & 8 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 impatiens, L. 
 macropliylla, Willd. j 
 r 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 ( June- ) 
 l July, £ 
 
 Outer hills 
 Namik, Kulha- 
 
 1,2, & 4 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Pk.W.Y. 
 
 ra Sing-jari. 
 
 var. foliosa ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 7- Alyssum. 
 
 caneBcens, 1) C. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 • «« 
 
 July 
 
 Tisum 
 
 8 Draba. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 alpina, L. ... 
 
 2, 7 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Kyungar, Barji 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | kang Pass. 
 
 incana, L. 
 
 8, 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Niti, Gugd, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | Riinkim. 
 
 lasiophylla, Royle .. 
 
 l 
 
 H. 
 
 1" — 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Gugd... 
 
 I 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 419 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the area. 
 
 Hi 
 
 la% 
 
 * 
 
 .5 
 
 5 
 
 md- 
 
 /«. 
 
 ti 
 
 « 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 1 
 
 .1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Fields 
 
 1—5,600 
 
 £ 
 
 • • • 
 
 » « * 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 * • » 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 17,500 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 16—17,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Water 
 
 1—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 K. 
 
 o • » 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 = Cruciferce ignoicR No. 10 in Herb, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 . . . 
 
 = Cruciferce ignotsB Nos. 11 and 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Wet 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Cardarnine No. 5 in Herb.S. & W._ 
 
 Open 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Cardarnine No. 3 in Herb.S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 .. 
 
 
 j Wet 
 
 6—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = A rains No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 T. 
 
 = Dr ala No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 No. 2 in part Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500—15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15 -16,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. ’ 
 
 = No. 2 (partly] Herb. S. & W. 
 
420 
 
 htma'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 9- Cochlearia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 scapiflora, H. f. T., 
 
 10- Sisymbrium. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Guge 
 
 mollissimnin,C.H. Mey, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4" — 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 himalaicum, B. f. $• T. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 1 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 Thaliannm, Gay 8f 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 r-y 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March .. 
 
 Alinora 
 
 Monn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rupestre, Edgew . 
 
 G 
 
 H. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Palarn 
 
 strictum, H.f. T. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 . . . 
 
 July 
 
 Garhwal 
 
 Wallichii, H.f. &■ T. ... 
 
 9 
 
 IT. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 Sophia, L. 
 
 2 
 
 II . 
 
 2'- 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora 
 
 Columna3, Jacq. .. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' - 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 Alliaria, Scop. .. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora 
 
 11- Eutrema. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 primularrefoliuai, H /., 
 
 
 H. 
 
 4''- -6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 May 
 
 Madliari Pass, 
 
 s- T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12. Erysimum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hieraciifolium, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim, Joshi- 
 math. 
 
 Sp. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . 
 
 Guge 
 
 13- Christolea 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 erassifolia, Carnb . 
 
 « ■ « 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Sattag river in 
 Guge. 
 
 14- Braya. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rosea, Bunge .. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" £ 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Sagta-deo, 
 
 Guge. 
 
 15- Brassiea, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nigra, Koch. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, See. 
 
 campestris, L. ,.. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 V— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, Milatn, 
 
 juncea, H.f. Sf T. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 II . 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, & c. .. 
 
 16- Eruea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sativa, Bam.. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 U' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 421 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ax 
 
 o 
 
 ax 
 
 (3 
 
 O 
 
 T 3 
 
 0 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Fields 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Fields 
 
 Do 
 
 Open 
 
 Fields 
 
 Rocks 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 a> 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 33 
 
 o3 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 S-l 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 cS 
 
 D ' 
 
 S 
 
 15,500 
 
 13,500 
 
 13.000 
 
 5— 6,000 
 
 12.000 
 
 6 — 8,000 
 6 — 6,000 
 6 — 6,000 
 
 13,500 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 6—14,000 
 
 15.500 
 
 13.500 
 
 10—16,500 
 
 1 — 6,000 
 
 6 — 11,000 
 
 1 — 6,000 
 
 1 — 6,000 
 
 H im a - 
 laya. 
 
 a 
 
 c5 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R- 
 
 R. 
 
 R 
 
 R. 
 
 (H 
 
 Q 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 a) 
 
 33 
 
 T. 
 
 .. ! T. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 ■ Arabic No. 10 Herb. S. Sc W. 
 Aribis No. 8 and < rucif. ig tot, 
 No. 14, Herb. S. & W. ‘ 
 
 : Arabis Nos. 7 & 9, Herb. S. ScW. 
 = Crucifer, lynot. No. 5 Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 ss Crucifer, lgnot. No. 1 Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 = Arabis No. 6 in Herb. S. S<, W. 
 
 T. 
 
 Draba Nos. 3 & 13 Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Sinapis No. 5 Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Sinapis Nos. 2, 3 and 6 Herb. 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 = Sinnpi< Nos. 1 and 4 Herb. S. 
 and W. 
 
422 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 17- Capselli 
 
 Bursa-pas tori s, Manch. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 Thomsoni, H,f. 
 
 
 
 18- Lepidium- 
 
 Sativum, L. 
 capitatum, H./.Sf T., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2 
 
 II 
 
 19- Msgacarpsea- 
 polyandra Benth. ... 
 
 » • • 
 
 II. 
 
 20- Thlaspi. 
 
 arvense, L. 
 
 3 
 
 II. 
 
 alpestre, L. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 21- Iberidella- 
 
 Andersoni, FJ.f. 8f T., 
 
 t • X 
 
 H. 
 
 22- Crambe- 
 
 cordifola, Stev. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 23- Raphanus- 
 
 sativus, L. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 24. Chorispora 
 
 sabulosa, Camb. 
 
 « • • 
 
 H. 
 
 IX. -CARP ABIDED. 
 
 1- CleomB. 
 
 viscosa, L. 
 
 • M 
 
 II. 
 
 2. Capparis. 
 horrida, L. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 All the 
 year. 
 
 Ubique 
 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 1' 
 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mi am, Top id 
 hunga. 
 
 5'~G' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Champwa, Pin- 
 dari. 
 
 1" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 J uue 
 
 Rajhoti 
 
 2" - 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Sagta-deo, Gu- 
 ge. 
 
 4' — 5' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Rimk m 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 Vlarch 
 
 Plains to Al- 
 mora. 
 
 3" 
 
 • • • 
 
 Tuly 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sarju river, 
 
 outer hills. 
 
 10' | 
 
 W. Gr. 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 423 
 
 FI ants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 HimA- 
 
 layn. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 5—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 » » 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Herb. Strachey No. 15. 
 
 Fields 
 
 5-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 — Crucif. iqnot. No. 15 in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. and W. 
 
 Fields 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 *• 
 
 * * * 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10—16,500 
 
 R. 
 
 » ? 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 = Draba Nos. 8, 4, 11, 12, in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,000 
 
 *• • 
 
 
 T. 
 
 = Crucif. ignot. No. 4 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 13,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T- 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 = Polanisia viscosa in. Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
424 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 X.— VIOLACErE. 
 
 1. Viola. 
 
 biflora, L. ., , 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 
 Patrinii, DC. ... 
 
 3, 4, 10 
 
 If. 
 
 2" — 5" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March- 
 
 Outer hills, 
 
 
 serpens, Wall. 
 
 5,6, 7,8, 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 6" 
 
 Bl. W. 
 
 July. 
 
 March- 
 
 Batnpa. 
 
 San i an gent h a, 
 
 
 kunawarensis, Royle , 
 
 9,11. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 2" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 J une. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, Nai- 
 ni Tal, &c., 
 Kyungar 
 
 
 XI. — BIXINEiE. 
 
 1- Flacourtia- 
 
 Ramontchi, L'Herit... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. occ idental is 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 26' 
 
 i • * 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 
 XII.— PITTOSPO- 
 REJ£. 
 
 1- Pittosporum. 
 
 fioribundnm, W.SfA., 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 • x • 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 
 eriocarpum, Royle ... 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 • • • 
 
 April 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 
 XIII.— POLYGALA.- 
 CE/E. 
 
 1. Polygala, 
 triphylla, Ham. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — 3" 
 
 R. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Paton 
 
 
 var. glaucescens .. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3"- 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ramari 
 
 
 crotal arioides, Ham. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6''— 12" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, &c. •• 
 
 
 abyssinica, Frcsen. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 12"— 15" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 jApril 
 
 Kapkot, outer 
 
 
 persicariasfolia, DC., 
 
 4 
 
 Id. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 1 
 
 July 
 
 hills. 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 
 chinensis, L.. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 July 
 
 iAlmora 
 
 
 sibirica, L. 
 
 5 
 
 H, 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Kosi river 
 
 
 XIV.-CARY OPH YL 
 LACEAE. 
 
 l. Gypsophila. 
 
 cerastioides, Don. ... 
 
 I 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 I 
 
 August ... 
 
 Namik, Ralam 
 
 
 2- Saponaria- 
 
 Vaccaria, L. 
 
 Mt 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 425 
 
 \ 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Himd- 
 
 laya. 
 
 1 | 
 'F>qtX 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 (-1 
 
 ft 
 
 Open wet 
 
 8 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 Banks, & rocks, 
 
 4 — 1 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D, 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3-11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 it. 
 
 = F. sajrida, in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •a 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6 — 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • 0 • 
 
 8—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . r * 
 
 
 
 1- 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »*# 
 
 = Vnccaria parviflora , Mccnch & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Silene -No. 9 in Herb. S. fis VV. 
 
 54 
 
42(3 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U I 
 
 <D 
 
 I s 
 
 Sl^ 
 
 -d 
 
 Si 
 
 4-3 
 
 a 
 
 c3 
 
 a? 
 
 * 
 
 bo 
 
 .9 
 
 *5h 
 
 CD 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 s - 1 
 
 c 
 
 b€ 
 
 Ei 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 b Si o 
 
 H 4-3 
 f-i C3 O 
 g £ rO 
 
 5— ■ 
 
 ^ UJ QJ 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 •H 
 
 ,0 
 
 qq 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 r-3 
 
 be 
 
 qq 
 
 O 
 
 Jh 
 
 r* 
 
 c 
 
 qq 
 
 O 
 
 <D 
 
 s 
 
 >> 
 
 *3 
 
 
 a; 44? 
 
 ft 
 
 cS 
 
 ft 
 
 ■s 
 
 1 ft 
 
 *3 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 3. Silene- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 inflata, Sm. 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 9' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Outer hills, Mi 
 
 conoidea, L. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lam, Niti. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Alu ora 
 
 Moorcrofiiana. Wall., 
 
 4, 10 
 
 Id. 
 
 6" — 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gothing, Eakas 
 
 Falconeriana, Benth., 
 
 
 
 
 
 tal . 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 Griffithii, Bo ss. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Bampa 
 
 Stracheyi, Edgew .. 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Piti river 
 
 4- Lychnis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 apetala, L 
 
 4,6 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 7" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Ralam, Guge.. 
 
 macrorhiza, Boyle .. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Top i d h u n g a , 
 
 brachypetala, Hort. .. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LI an jar 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Laptel, Ralam, 
 
 indica, Benih. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. fimbriata 
 
 1 
 
 ii. 
 
 3' 
 
 W. Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Piti river 
 
 pilosa, Edyew. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—»' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August, 
 
 Ra’ am, Tung- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Septem- 
 
 ber. 
 
 nath. 
 
 5 ■ Cerastium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vulgatum, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, &c. .. 
 
 Thomsoni, Hook. f. . 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari valley, 
 
 6- Stellaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 paniculata, Edgew. ... 
 
 I, 2 & 3. 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May, July, 
 
 Binsar, Shai- 
 
 media, L. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 September, 
 
 devi. 
 
 7 
 
 6" — 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 All the 
 
 Outer hills, &c , 
 
 scmivestPa, Edgew. ... 
 Webbiana, il all. 
 
 9 
 
 Id. 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Wh. 
 
 year. 
 
 May 
 
 March .. 
 
 Chaur .. 
 
 Almora 
 
 latifolia, Benth. 
 
 • • « 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ,. 
 
 China, Naini 
 
 longissima, Wall. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Vlay ,,, 
 
 Tal. 
 
 lladhari I J ass, 
 
 uliginosa, L. 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 l' 7 — 6 C/ 
 
 Wh. 
 
 VTarch .. 
 
 Naini Tal. 
 Almora, Barji- 
 
 decumbcns, Edgew. ... 
 
 6 
 
 a | 
 
 6 " 1 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... ] 
 
 kang Pass. 
 Milam, Eaiam, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 427 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 >> 
 
 .5 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 Do. 
 
 I 
 
 5-11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 — 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 < • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 t ( . 
 
 
 near water 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Mlliandrium pilusum in Herb.. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. and W. 
 
 Open 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do, * 
 
 15 — 17,000 
 
 •• 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12 -14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Mdiundruim pilosum in Herb, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 s- 
 
 T* % 9 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Rocks, open 
 
 9 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 
 
 1 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 1 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 6,000 
 
 1 R. 
 
 *•1 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Leucostemma No. 2 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Rocks .0 
 
 6 - 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 . , 
 
 = Leucostemma No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Open 
 
 6-9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • #* 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 4—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • > 
 
 • •9 
 
 
 Open 
 
 12—13,500 
 
 R - 
 
 D. 
 
 I • •• 
 
 = Arenariu No. 9 in Herb. S. Sc W 
 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
428 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth, 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 — 1 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 7- Arenaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 foliosa, Royle 
 
 (M 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Jelam 
 
 festucoides, Benih. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Pindar i,Karnali 
 river . 
 
 Tar. imbricata ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — 3" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Balam 
 
 musciformis, Wa//. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 l" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Balchha Pass ., 
 
 scrpyllifolia, L. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Jelam, Milam . 
 
 glandulifera, Edge.iv. .. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Barjikang, 
 
 C h or h o t i 
 Pass. 
 
 Stracheyi, Ed yew. ... 
 
 1 • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 holostcoides, Edyew. .. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Rakas-Tal 
 
 8- Sagina- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 procumbens, L ... 
 
 • ». 
 
 ... 
 
 .. 
 
 • »« 
 
 
 
 var. pentamtra 
 
 9- Thylacosper- 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 1"~ 1*" 
 
 • • ( 
 
 June 
 
 Jelam, Singjari, 
 
 muni 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rupifragum, Schrenk., 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1" — 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Huge 
 
 10- Spergula 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pentandra, L. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 4"_ 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 11. Drymaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cor data, Willd. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 February. 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 12 Polycarpsea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 corymbosa, Lam. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 XIV*. — PORTULA- 
 CEAi. 
 
 1. Portulaca. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oleracea, L . 
 
 «•( 
 
 H. 
 
 6 i 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 429 
 
 Condition of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 — A! sine Roylei in Herb. S. and 
 
 Do. 
 
 •• 
 
 10—15,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • n 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « • * 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 15—16,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 9 — 1 1 ,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 14—16,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 1(1 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 — Gyvsophila, No. 3 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 *• • 
 
 Do. 
 
 •• 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 d! 
 
 >•• 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 *»• 
 
 15—16,500 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Ry water 
 
 • • • 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 In fields 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 jt * 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 t • 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
430 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Straelic-y and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 — 1 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 \ 
 
 Locality, 
 
 XY. — TAMAEISCI- 
 NEAE. 
 
 1. Tamarisc. 
 
 dioica, Roxb. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' — 10' 
 
 ■ «* 
 
 • •• 
 
 Kosi and Ganges 
 
 2- Myricaria- 
 
 elegans, Royle. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 YVh. Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 rivers. 
 
 Niti, Satlaj 
 
 germanica, Desv. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 YVh. Pk. 
 
 J une 
 
 river in Guge. 
 Pindari, Milam, 
 
 XY*. — HYPERICI- 
 NEAE. 
 
 1. Hypericum 
 
 cerauum, Roxb. 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Tisum. 
 
 Almora, &c. . 
 
 cordifoliu ", Chois. ... 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August 
 
 R dinar i 
 
 patulum, Thunb 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, & c. ... 
 Naini Tal 
 
 perforatum, L 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 elodeoides, Chois. 
 
 1,2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1 ' — 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Jagesar, Hal am, 
 
 nepalense, Chois. .. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, 
 
 Kalamandi 
 
 japonicum, 'l'hunb 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y\ 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, &c. .. 
 
 XVI. — TERNSTRAE- 
 MIACEAi. 
 
 1- Eurya. 
 
 acuminata, D C. .. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March .. 
 
 Naini Tal, &c 
 
 2- Actinidia. 
 
 callosa, Lindl. 
 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Outer hills, 
 
 3- Saurauja 
 
 nepalensis, D C. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 10' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 November, 
 
 Kapkot. 
 
 Outer hills, &c., 
 
 XVII — DIPTERO- 
 CAEPEAE. 
 
 1- Shorea. 
 robusta, Gctrtn. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' -80' 
 
 
 April 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 431 
 
 Flantc — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, & c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 « 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 1 
 
 River beds ... 
 
 1—1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 j 
 
 
 Open river beds 
 
 11—13,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a » 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—6.000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • a - 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 3—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 «*• 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 3 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1- 2,000 
 
 \ 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .« • 
 
 = Vaticarobusta, in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
432 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flower. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 i 
 
 XVIII.— MALVA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEAfi. 
 
 1. Malva. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 verticillata, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 l'— 6' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Piti river 
 
 silvestris, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Li. 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota 
 
 2- Sida. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 humilis, It illd. 
 
 2 
 
 PI. 
 
 3' 
 
 Or. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 rhombifolia, L. 
 
 3 
 
 
 „ , 
 
 
 
 Ain ora 
 
 cordifolia, L 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Aim ora, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 3. Abutilon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polyandrum, S chi edit. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'— 8' 
 
 Y. Or. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Bagesar. 
 
 inJicuin, G. Don. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G 7 — -8' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 4- IJrena. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lobata, L. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Bagesar. 
 
 5 ■ Hibiscus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 radiatus, Willd. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 5' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 Solandra, Id Her it. .. 
 
 • M 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 • •• 
 
 August ... 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 vitifolius, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 !•» 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 pangens, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 PI. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, & c. ... 
 
 cancellatus, Roxb. ... 
 
 6. Thespesia. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 Lampas, Dalz.Sf Gibs. 
 
 lit 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 • • i 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 7- Kydia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calycina, Roxb. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Bagesar, outer 
 hills. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 433 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 <*3 
 
 a> 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 .a 
 
 c i 
 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 • !— ( 
 o 
 
 QJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cfi 
 
 4H 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 4-1 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o a> 
 
 
 
 
 
 +3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 css aj 
 !> -3 
 
 4) -M 
 
 s 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Open ••• 
 
 7,500 . 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 1 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • « * 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. ! 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1-4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 > 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 
 
 % 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 3,000 
 
 j R. 
 
 •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 ' = Lagvnea lobata in Herb. S. and 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 4-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 1^ 
 
 o Abelmoschus No. 3 in Herb. S. 
 and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Abelmoschus No. 1 in Herb. b. 
 and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 p*. 
 
 ... 
 
 — Hibiscus No. 4 in Herb. S. and 
 
 w. 
 
 Do. 
 
 „.J 2—3,000 
 
 1 
 
 R. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
434 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Stracliey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 XIX.— STEECU- 
 LIACEJE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Sterculia. 
 
 villosa, Roxb. 
 fulgens,' Wall. 
 
 2 • Helicteres- 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' — 30' 
 30—40' 
 
 • •• 
 
 l« 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills 
 Bhabar, outer 
 hills. 
 
 Ieora, Wall. 
 
 3- Pterospermum 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5'- 6' 
 
 
 January .. 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 acerifolium, Willd. 
 lanceaefolium, Roxb., 
 
 XX. — TILIACEiE. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 • * • 
 
 March 
 
 Hardwar ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 1- Grewia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oppositifolia, Roxb. ... 
 asiatica, L. ... 
 
 var. vestita 
 leevigata, Vahl. 
 
 2. Triumfetta. 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 40' 
 
 20'- 30' 
 15' 
 
 Buff 
 
 Buff 
 
 • « • 
 
 May 
 
 May 
 
 Ml 
 
 BhimTal below, 
 
 Kota, Bagesar, 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 pilooa, Roth. 
 
 rhomboidea, Jacq. 
 
 3. Corchorus. 
 
 2, 3 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 i' — i*' 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kota, Alrnora, 
 Bagesar. 
 Hawaibagh. ... 
 
 olitorius, L. 
 acutangularis, Lam.... 
 
 XXI.— LINE m. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 l f , — 2 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 August ... 
 
 Hawaibagh 
 Hawaibagh .. 
 
 1* Linuxn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 usitatissimum, L. 
 
 2- Eeinwardtia. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 trigyna, Planch. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'— 5' 
 
 Y. I 
 
 1 
 
 anuary ... 
 
 Cuter kills ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 435 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 
 a> 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 d 
 
 lay 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 CD 
 
 '■H 
 
 pi 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 c a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri 
 
 
 o s 
 
 
 
 
 
 *4- 3 
 • r -1 
 
 
 
 
 
 +a 
 
 
 nd 
 
 ri 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 > r£3 
 
 <D += 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 Ph 
 
 Q 
 
 CD 
 
 rQ 
 
 • 
 
 H 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 Do. 
 
 • * 
 
 3 — 4,500 
 2,500 
 
 E. 
 
 K. 
 
 
 • a 1 
 
 = Firmiana colorata in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 » • • 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 t • ' 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 * * 1 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * i 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 .. 
 
 e» 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 2 — 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • • » 
 
 2-3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open. 
 
 • •• 
 
 2, 5—5,000 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 »•' 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 .«• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R.» 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 •• 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 M 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
436 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Nam. 
 
 XXII.-MALPHIGHI- 
 
 ACEiE. 
 
 1- Hiptage. 
 
 Madablota, Gce.rtn. ... 
 
 2 • Aspidopteris. 
 
 Wallichii, Hook.f. ... 
 Sp. 
 
 XXIII.— GERANIA- 
 
 CE®. 
 
 1- Biebersteinia. 
 
 emodi, Jaub. Spach. 
 
 2- Geranium. 
 
 pratense, L. 
 
 collinum, M. Bieb. ... 
 
 Wallichianum, Sweet, 
 Grevilleanum, Wall,... 
 nepaleuse, Sweet 
 rotundifolium, L. ... 
 Robertianum, L. 
 Incidum, L 
 ocellatum, Camb. 
 
 3- Oxalis. 
 
 corniculata. L. 
 Acetosella, L. 
 
 4- Biophytum. 
 
 sensitivum, DC. 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 GangoT 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 
 Marcn 
 
 Almora 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Chircbun, &c. 
 
 9, 10 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June, Sep- 
 tember. 
 
 Kulhara,Laptel, 
 
 Sakh. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Juy 
 
 Malari, Niti ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, & c., 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam,Kulhara, 
 
 J7 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Bebruary, 
 
 Gauges valley, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1 > — 2 ' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September, 
 
 Pandukesar ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 1 2" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Cr. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 1 
 
 IT. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 All the 
 
 year. 
 
 Common 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Dwali 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 437 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, See. 
 
 k 
 
 o 
 
 .Q 
 
 c3 
 
 4-3 
 
 <1> 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 r oi 
 
 4-3 I 
 
 O 
 
 H | 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 <4-4 
 
 .5 
 
 g cfl 
 
 O 0) 
 
 •43 ® 
 
 at 0) 
 
 ► X) 
 
 <U 4J 
 
 s 
 
 .£ 
 
 s 
 
 K 
 
 Q 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 16,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ■ — 13,000 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7- 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • *» 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • * 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 1 0. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 1,5—1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
438 
 
 hima'layan distkicts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 1 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 | Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 5- Impatiens, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Balsamida, L. ... 
 
 20 
 
 H. 
 
 l' o' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 Thomsoni, Hook. f. ... 
 
 6,7, & 8, 
 
 II. 
 
 U"—iO" 
 
 Pk. Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Milam, Gothing, 
 Maiam, Niti. 
 
 sulcata, Wall. 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 8' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalam, Kala- 
 mundi. 
 
 scabrida, DC. 
 
 9, 10 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Chi ring, Kami 
 Tal. 
 
 bicovnuta, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 3' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 amphorata, Edgew. ... 
 
 1 J , 13, & 
 16. 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 4' 
 
 Li., Pk., 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mohargari,Gori 
 Valley Naini, 
 Tal, &c. 
 
 racemosa, DC. 
 laxifiora, Edgew. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 I'— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 2,3, & 19 
 
 II. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ., 
 
 Naini Tal.Jage- 
 sar, Binsar. 
 
 glauca, H.f. 8f T. ... 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 #»♦ 
 
 August ,. 
 
 Dwali 
 
 XXIV.— RUTA- 
 C EJE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 Bsenninghause- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 albiflora, Reich. 
 
 2. Zanthoxylum. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 alatum, Roxb. 
 
 2, 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 March 
 
 Karim, Jalat, 
 Blum Tal. 
 
 aeanthopodium, f) C., 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. G. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, & c. ... 
 
 oxyphylium, Edgew.... 
 
 3- Toddalia. 
 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 20' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi, Dwali, 
 &c. 
 
 aculeata, Pers. 
 
 4. Skimmia. 
 
 1, 2 
 
 S. T. 
 
 20'— 25' 
 
 G. Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Bagesar, Bha- 
 bar. 
 
 Laureola, Hook. f. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 5 ■ Glycosmis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pentaphylla, Correa ... 
 
 >ir 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 • •• 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 439 
 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Himd- 
 lay a. 
 
 1 Tibet. 
 
 > -1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 d 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,5— 12,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,5—12,000 
 
 • • « 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Shady woods ... 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,5—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 5,-9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 6,-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 - 
 
 
 Shady woods... 
 
 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 '** 
 
 • • • 
 
 N 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • Q« 
 
 
 — Rula albijlora in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Open 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 f *1 
 
 • 0 0 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 R. 
 
 1 • * 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • *• 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 1,5—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,-9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 *•• 
 
 • it 
 
 = Limonia Laureola in Herb. S. and 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 » 0 » 
 
 * 
 
 
440 
 
 hjma'layan districts 
 
 List of Kmnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 u L 
 
 « c 
 £ ^ 
 
 03 /A 
 _ thg 1 
 
 c £ o 
 .2 "5 S | 
 
 ai 3 
 oS £ X5 
 jz ii (-< 
 
 c/j a, ; 
 
 * 1 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 1 
 
 Locality. 
 
 6- Murraya. 
 
 
 Sh. 1 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 Kcenigii, Spreng. 
 
 • * » 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 1 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 7- Citrus. 
 
 medica, L. 
 
 E2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May ... 
 
 Bagesar, outer 
 
 8- iEgle. 
 
 M arm el os, Correa 
 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 hills. 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 XXV.— simaru- 
 
 13 ACE M 
 
 1. Picrasma. 
 
 quasso ides, Benn. ... 
 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 
 *•« 
 
 BandkcBar 
 
 XXVI.— BURSERA 
 CEH£. 
 
 1. Garuga. 
 
 pinnata, Hoxb. 
 
 • • 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 • • • 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 XXVII.— MELXA- 
 CEJ3. 
 
 1 Melia- 
 
 Azadirachta, L. 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 Li. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 2 ■ Cedrela- 
 
 Teena, Koxb. 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 30' — 60' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Kota Duu, &c. 
 
 var. serrata ... 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 20'— 40' 
 
 l J k. 
 
 June 
 
 Bandari-de vl , 
 
 XXVIII— OLACI- 
 NEH£. 
 
 1. Olax. 
 
 nana, Wall , 
 
 1*1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 • •• 
 
 July 
 
 &c. 
 
 Damus 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 441 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 t 
 
 Him a- 
 laya . 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 1 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open ... 
 
 2—1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ♦ » • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • « • 
 
 ' * * 
 
 Woods 
 
 2—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ! 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 6,5 — 8,000 
 
 u. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 * « 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Gardens 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 , R - 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 - 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 i 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Serger x Koeiiyii in Herb. S. and 
 
 W. 
 
 56 
 
442 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 1 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 XXIX.-ILICI- 
 
 NEJE. 
 
 i- Ilex. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dipyrena, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 T. 
 
 0 
 >• 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 W. 
 
 April 
 
 N a i n i T a 1 , 
 outer hills. 
 
 odorata, Ham 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 W. 
 
 May 
 
 Do. 
 
 excelsa, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 25" 
 
 W. 
 
 May 
 
 Binsar 
 
 XXX.— CELAS- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TRINEiE. 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Euonymus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tingens, Wall. ... 
 
 6, 7 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 April, May, 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar, Madhari 
 Pass. 
 
 fimbriatus, Wall 
 
 4,5 
 
 T.orS. 
 
 10'— 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, N i t i 
 Dugli, &c 
 
 echinatus, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, &c. 
 
 pendulus, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 30 r — 40' 
 
 . . ■ 
 
 March 
 
 Gagar, &c. ... 
 
 Hamiltoniamis, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 2- Celastnis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 paniculata, WUld. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhim Tal 
 
 3 Gymnosporia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ruta, Wall. 
 
 1,4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' — 12' 
 
 W; G. 
 
 M arch, 
 May, 
 
 Sarju Valley, 
 Bagesar. 
 
 Royleana, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhim Tal 
 
 4- Elseodendron- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glaucum, Pers. 
 
 XXXI.- RHAMNEiE 
 
 
 T. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Bhim Tal. 
 
 1. Ventilago. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calyculata, Tulasne ... 
 
 2- Zizyphus. 
 
 IM 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 CEnoplia, Mill. 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 Bikikhes 
 
 rugosa, Lain, 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 1 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 443 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 1 
 the sea. 
 
 Hit 
 
 lai 
 
 >> 
 
 *3 
 
 p? 
 
 n a- 
 
 /a. 
 
 >> 
 
 n 
 
 ® 1 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest 
 
 5—9,000 ✓ 
 
 k. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3 - 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 5,5—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 8—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • so 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 9.8 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 it* 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »•« 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •0 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • » 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 «•« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »49 
 
 HI 
 
 
444? 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3- Berchemia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fioribunda, Wall. 
 
 . . . 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 4. Rhamnus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pei'sicus, Boiss. 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Niti. Milam ... 
 
 daliuricus, oil. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 G. Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, B;i- 
 
 purpirreus, Edgew. ... 
 
 4,5 
 
 T. 
 
 20' — 30' 
 
 
 M arch, 
 
 gesar. 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 triqueter, Wall. 
 
 
 T. 
 
 15' 
 
 
 April, 
 
 August . . . 
 
 sar, Madhari 
 Bass. 
 
 Outer hills, Al- 
 
 procumbens, Edgew. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 
 May 
 
 mora. 
 
 Naini Tal, Jag- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 thana. 
 
 5- Hovenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dulcis, Thunb. 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 Y. G. 
 
 June 
 
 Bagesar „. 
 
 6- Sageretia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oppositifolia, Brongn., 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 
 August ,. 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 7 Gonania. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 leptostachya, DC. ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 8 Helinus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceolatus, Brand. 
 
 ... 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 © 
 
 I 
 
 f— 1 
 
 to 
 
 • •• 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota Dun, &c., 
 
 XXXII.— AMPELI- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 DEAL 
 
 1. Vitis. 
 
 pallida, and A. ... 
 
 »«* 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 lanata, Roxb. 
 
 2, 3, 5 & 6 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 6'— 20' 
 
 Ml 
 
 May, June, 
 
 Naini Tal, Al- 
 
 parvifolia, Roxb 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 ru 
 
 April 
 
 mora, Gagar, 
 Namik,Kathi, 
 Dewali-khal. 
 Pyura, Almora, 
 
 himalayana, Brand.,.. 
 
 9 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 i • • 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 divaricata, Wall. 
 
 8 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Ml 
 
 June ... 
 
 Dhakri-binaik. 
 Naini Tal, out- 
 
 capriolata, Don. 
 
 • • • 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 III 
 
 May 
 
 er hills. 
 
 Naini Tal, Ka- 
 
 lanceolaria, Roxb. ... 
 
 til 
 
 S sc. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Ml 
 
 March ... j 
 
 thi. 
 
 Kota Dun, &c., 
 
 i 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 445 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Open 
 
 4,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 Forest 
 
 3—6,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 6- 7,000 
 
 Forest 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 Open 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 F orest 
 
 1-2,000 
 
 Open 
 
 2—3,000 
 
 Woods or open, 
 
 4,5—7,000 
 
 Open 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 F orest 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 Open 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 Forest 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 >> 
 
 a 
 
 • pH 
 
 c3 
 
 M 
 
 
 R. ... 
 
 ... D. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 OJ 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 = Ceanothus No. 2 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 = Ceanothus No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 = Gouania No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Cissus No. i in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 
 -.Ampelopsis No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 ■ Ampelopsis No. 2 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 = Cissus No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
446 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth, 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 2 Leea. 
 
 • 
 
 aspera, Wall. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Almora, & c. ... 
 
 XXXIII— SAPIN- 
 DACEiE. 
 
 1. Cardiospermum 
 
 Halicacabu n, L. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Bagesar ... 
 
 2 iEsculus. 
 
 indica, Colebr 
 
 
 T. 
 
 V 
 
 r—1 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 Tfi 
 
 Pk. Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, &c. 
 
 3. Selileicliera. 
 
 trijuga, Willcl. 
 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 in 
 
 • • • 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 4- Sapindus. 
 
 Mukorossi, Geer in. ... 
 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 in 
 
 t • • 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 5- Acer. 
 
 oblongum, Wall. ,. 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, &c... 
 
 lasvigatum, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 ( r. 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar, &c. 
 
 caesium, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 T. 
 
 50' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 March 
 
 Dwali 
 
 villosum, Wall. 
 
 5 
 
 T. 
 
 50' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Madhari Pass; 
 
 caudatum, Wall. 
 
 6 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 &c. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 pictum, Thunb. 
 
 3 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 Mach ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 6. Staphylea. 
 
 Etnodi, Wall. 
 
 
 Sh. T. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Gagar, Binsar, 
 
 XXX1Y.— SABIA- 
 CEJ5. 
 
 1- Sabia. 
 
 campanulata, Wall. .. 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Gagar, Namik, 
 
 purpurea, H.f. and T., 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Sarju valley, 
 
 paniculata, Edgeiv. ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bagesar. 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 447 
 
 Plants — (continued'. 
 
 c3 
 
 • r— < 
 
 o 
 
 GQ 
 
 t> 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 ci 
 
 -+J 
 
 0) 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 QQ 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 • rH 
 
 >r 3 
 
 G 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Elevation in fi 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 — 
 
 Dry. 
 
 | Tibet. 
 
 1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 V 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 9*1 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6 — 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • t 
 
 ... 
 
 = Pavia inched and Engelhardtia 
 No. 2 in Herb. S.& W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ■? 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—5,900 
 
 K. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7, 5—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6-8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 • • 
 
448 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 Name. 
 
 2- Meliosma 
 
 dilleniasfolia Wall. .. 
 pungens, Wall. 
 
 XXXV.— AN AC AR 
 DIACEAC. 
 
 1. Rhus. 
 
 Cotinus. L. 
 parviflora, Roxb. 
 semi a! at a, Murray ... 
 succedanea, L. 
 
 2- Pistacia. 
 
 integerrima, Stfivart, 
 
 3- Mangifera. 
 
 indica, L. 
 
 4. Buchan ania. 
 
 latifolia, Roxb. 
 
 5- Qdina. 
 
 Wodier, Roxb. 
 
 6. Semecarpus. 
 
 Anacardium, L.f. .. 
 
 7- Spondias. 
 
 mangifera, mild. .. 
 
 XXXVI.— COBIA- 
 BIEiE. 
 
 1- Coriaria. 
 
 nepalensis, Wall. 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 tevbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 2 
 
 T 
 
 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 N.imik, &c. 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Lvapkot, Binear, 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar, Almora, 
 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 • • • 
 
 .. 
 
 Almora, &c. 
 
 4 
 
 T. 
 
 15' 
 
 i • • 
 
 June 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 3 
 
 T. 
 
 20' 
 
 
 March 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Thakaio, Kosi 
 River. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 V. 
 
 April 
 
 Bhabar, plains, 
 Almora, &c. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 ... 
 
 January ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 . • • • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 \ 
 
 Common 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 449 
 
 Plants — (continued;. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 Hirna- 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 lay 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 'o 
 
 +» 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 § 
 
 fl Oj 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 *4-3 
 • >— < 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 433 
 
 
 d 
 
 d» 4^ 
 
 d 
 
 • rH 
 
 
 CD 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 P5 
 
 Q 
 
 H 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,5-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—5,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do 
 
 3—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Rhus integer rima in Herb. S. and 
 W. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 k 
 
 s 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • 
 
 57 
 
450 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRI GTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 XXXVII. — MOKIN- 
 GIEiE. 
 
 1. Moringa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pterygosperma, Gosrtn. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 40' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 XXXVIII. -LEGU- 
 MINOSiE. 
 
 ^ Piptantiius. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, D. Don. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sk. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi Pass 
 
 2- Thermopsis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 barbata. Boyle. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. ?. 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Ralam, 
 
 inflata, Carnb. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6"- 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Raj-hoti 
 
 3- Argyrolobmm- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 flaccidum, Jaub. Sf 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 R. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Spach. 
 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 July 
 
 
 roseum, Jaub. Sf Spach. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 Kal a p athara, 
 &c. 
 
 4. Crotalaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 prostrata, Boxb. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. ? 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 humifusa, Grah. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 5" 
 
 Y. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 alata, Bam. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 mysorensis, Both. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Y. ? 
 
 August ... 
 
 Hawalbiigh ... 
 
 albida, Beyne 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 i' 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 calycina. Sc b ank 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 G"' — 9" 
 
 Bl. ? 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 sessiliflora, L 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 11— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 sericea, Betz. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Naini Tal, Ba- 
 gesar. 
 
 tetragona, Boxb. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 medicaginea, Lam. ... 
 
 . . * 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 var. neglecta 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 incana, L. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 5 Parochetus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 communis, Ham. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Chaur, Ralam, 
 &c. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 451 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c., 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hin 
 
 hy 
 
 a 
 
 •3 
 
 PC? 
 
 la- 
 
 ta. 
 
 >-» 
 
 ** 
 
 o 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 _ . 1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 ► 
 
 * 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 •* 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •5 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •k 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 V 
 
 ... 
 
 • •« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • Cl 
 
 m 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 < A • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 til 
 
 ». 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 1 
 
 
 
 Do. *i* * 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ! m t 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 it. 
 
 IM 
 
 • • > 
 
 
 
 Gardens 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 • • 
 
 <•« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
452 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium aumber 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 tcrbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Trigonella. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Foenum-graecum, L... 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Altnora 
 
 gracilis, bemh. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 |Naini Tal 
 
 pubescens, Edgeio . .. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 14' 
 
 Y. 
 
 J une 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 emodi, benlh. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 ISaha 
 
 cornieulata, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 G"—9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Ramri, Niti ... 
 
 Melilotus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 parviflora, Desf, 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 w 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 alba, Lam. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February, 
 
 Haldwani 
 
 Medicago. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lupulina, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 denticulara, Willd. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 Lotus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 corniculatus, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 All the 
 year. 
 
 Almora &c. ... 
 
 Indigofera, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 trifoliata, L. 
 
 ’2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
 hirsuta, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Pr, 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 Gerardiana, Wall. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 , , , 
 
 « • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 var. heterantha 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 5' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Almora, Binsar, 
 
 atropurpurea, /Jam. . . . 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Gangoli, &c. ... 
 
 hebepetala, Benih. ... 
 
 4* 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Katlii 
 
 pulchella, Roxb. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' — 10' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills, Ba- 
 gesar, 
 
 Binsar, &c. ... 
 
 Dostua, Ham 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Milletia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 auriculata, 3 aker 
 
 ... 
 
 T. sc. ; 
 
 10'— 40' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 Tephrosia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Candida, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 January ... 
 
 Cota Dun 
 
 purpurea, l ers. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 Sesbanea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aculeata, Pers. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... ] 
 
 dawalbagh ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 453 
 
 Conditions of soil. &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 *• 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 .. . 
 
 tit 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • • • 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 i • ■ 
 
 9—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—5,50.0 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • li 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * * * 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 in 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 it* 
 
 • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • . « 
 
 4 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •i 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 2—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 !*• 
 
 6—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 • • 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » . > 
 
 ... 
 
 
454 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Cai agana, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pygmaea, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1'— 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Guge p'ains .. 
 
 Gerardiana, Royle ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 S' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Dliauli river ... 
 
 polyacantha, Royle ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 9 
 
 crassicaulis, Benth. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Or. 
 
 July 
 
 Pindari, Milam, 
 
 Astragalus, 
 trichocarpus, Gruk. ... 
 
 l 
 
 H. 
 
 S' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 hosackioides, Benth 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 l'— 14' 
 
 Y. Or. 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 strictus, Grah. 
 
 11 
 
 Id. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Shelong 
 
 melanostachys, Ben h 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 . , 
 
 July 
 
 Rajlioti 
 
 inconspicuus, Baker, 
 hiix alayanus, Klotzsch., 
 
 10 
 
 H„ 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August 
 
 Rilam valley . 
 
 13 
 
 Id. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 leucocephalus, Grah. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Niti . 
 
 chlorostachys, Lindl., 
 
 5 
 
 Id. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Tola (Gori R.), 
 
 emodi, Stend. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Ilwali . 
 
 Gori river 
 
 graveolens, Ham. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2 '— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 Web ianus, Grah. 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Guge plains ... 
 
 po'yacanthus, Royle 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 ir 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . 
 
 Dhauli river 
 
 multiceps, Wall. 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Kugust ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 Oxytropis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lapponica, Gaud 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Rajlioti 
 
 Stracheyana, Benth. . 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Bl 
 
 August ... Guge plains 
 
 tatariea, Jucquem. .. 
 
 3,4 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 4" 
 
 Pr 
 
 July - A u - 
 
 Rajhoti, Guge 
 
 microphylla, DC. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 
 gust 
 
 July 
 
 plains. 
 
 Guge plains 
 
 Lezpedeza. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sericea, Miq. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 8' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 
 Gerardiana, Grah. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1 A' 
 
 1 2 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August 
 
 ver. 
 
 Almora, &c. .. 
 
 eriocarpa, DC. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' — 5 ' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Gagar,Kalimat, 
 
 Hedysarum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kumaonense, Benth... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 9" 
 
 • •• 
 
 A ugust .. 
 
 Gori river 
 
 Stracheya- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tibetica, Benth. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 2" 
 
 l 
 
 July 
 
 Tisum 
 
 J 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 455 
 
 ■ 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Him 
 
 layi 
 
 £ 
 
 c3 
 
 P5 
 
 Dry. • * 
 
 <D 
 
 rQ 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 O' 
 
 r— < 
 
 1 
 
 t—i 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9 — 12,000 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 D?. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 1 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6-7,000 
 
 R 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 = Podolcetu « hosackioides in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—15,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,300 
 
 , , , 
 
 D. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 = Gulden steadtia unijlora in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 
 
 R, 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 • ■? 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000” 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,500 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R * 
 
 * * * 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
456 
 
 HIMALAYA N DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 SH 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 
 • 
 
 c 
 
 a ^ 
 
 ,C 
 
 ft 
 
 4-3 
 
 0 
 
 c3 
 
 Sh 
 
 a> 
 
 * 
 
 .2 
 
 *Sh 
 
 <D 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 3 2 § 
 
 o 
 
 Sh 
 
 tUL 
 
 3 
 
 <+H 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 PC 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 .S « 5 
 
 ■££ S 
 
 O) W 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 rC 
 
 be 
 
 *s 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 Sh 
 
 3 
 
 jD 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 <4H 
 
 o 
 
 cu 
 
 2 
 
 EH 
 
 Zornia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 diphylla, Pers. 
 
 1,2 
 
 H. 
 
 4"- 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 J une 
 
 Almora 
 
 Smithia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ciliata, Royle 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 1 
 
 Almora 
 
 iEschynomene. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 TJraria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 picta, Desv. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 l'-6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 lagopus, DC. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 l'-3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Paton, 
 
 Alysicarpus. 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 vaginalis, DC. 
 
 0 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 12" 
 
 • • • 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 bupleurifolius, DC., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 rugosus, DC 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 Oligemia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dalbergioides, Bunth., 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 30' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 Desmodium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 laburnifolium, D C ,, 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 triquetrum, DC. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Baiznath 
 
 laxiflorum, DC. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 podocarpun, DC. ... 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal be- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 low. 
 
 floribundu ", D. D on, 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. W. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 oxyphyllum, DC. ... 
 
 9 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 6' 
 
 <SiLi. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal be- 
 
 tilisefolium, G. Don., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 low. 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G' -10' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Gori river 
 
 gangeticum, DC. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 . . . 
 
 March ... 
 
 Ka 1 a d li ungi, 
 
 sequax, Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bhabar. 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal be- 
 
 concinnum, DC. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 low. 
 
 10 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Binsar 
 
 polycarpum, DC. ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 var. trichocaulon ... 
 
 14 
 
 S. cr. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 Tal. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 457 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hir 
 
 lay 
 
 £ 
 
 id- 
 
 a 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Wet 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open ... 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4-5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 .Jo. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * 
 
 % 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Open 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 3 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest .. 
 
 4—Y,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 m 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 5-6,000 • 
 
 R- 
 
 
 . • . 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 4 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 = Catenaria laburnifolia in Herb, 
 S. and W. 
 
 = Pteroloma triquetrum in Herb. S 
 and W. 
 
 58 
 
458 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 A 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 • r-t 
 ■§ 
 w 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 +3 
 
 13 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 hi 
 
 trifiorum, DC. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 heterophyllum, DC., 
 
 13£ 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 parrifolium, DC. 
 
 4 
 
 S. cr, 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 gyrans, DC. ... 
 
 11 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 Atoms. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 precatorius, L. 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 4'-8' 
 
 • • * 
 
 F ebruary, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 pulchellus, Walt. 
 
 2 
 
 S. BC. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota-dun, &c., 
 
 Cicer. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arietinum, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 BhSbar 
 
 soongaricum, Sieph.... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Laptel, 
 
 Vicia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tetrasperma, Mcench., 
 
 ... 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 hirsuta, Koch. 
 
 • . . 
 
 II. cr. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 tenera, 0 Irak. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April 
 
 Ram gar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 rigidula, Royle 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Pk. W. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jalat, &c. ... 
 
 gativa, L. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 rar. angustifolia ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora ,. 
 
 Lathyrus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Aphaca, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ». 
 
 Almora 
 
 sativus, L. •< 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 R. Pr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Sirmora 
 
 sphaericus, Relz. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 9" 
 
 R. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora 
 
 luteus, Baker 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass... 
 
 Pisum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eatiyam, L. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Common ... 
 
 Shuteria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vestita, W. §• A. 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • ® • 
 
 
 rar. involucrata, ... 
 
 2 
 
 S cr. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... Naini T&l.&c.... 
 
 „ densiflora ... 
 
 1 
 
 S cr. 
 
 10' — 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 Dumasia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 villosa, DC. ... 
 
 
 S cr. 
 
 4' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 P lan ts — (continued) . 
 
 459 
 
 Conditions of soil, & c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Him 
 
 lay 
 
 £ 
 
 P3 
 
 Dry. - 8 ?- 
 
 | Tibet. 
 
 I 
 
 Open 
 
 0 0* 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • a. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 •• 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • at 
 
 Open 
 
 aaa 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a • 
 
 Do. 
 
 aaa 
 
 3 — 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a* 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • a. 
 
 .a. 
 
 Open 
 
 aaa 
 
 11,500—14,500 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 Fields 
 
 
 1,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • at 
 
 1,6—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 ... 
 
 6 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • a. 
 
 too 
 
 Open & Woods 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • a* 
 
 Woods 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a* 
 
 Fields 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 0O. 
 
 1,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 •*• 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . a . 
 
 Do. 
 
 • a. 
 
 1,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a . 
 
 Woods 
 
 ... 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 l.l 
 
 a a • 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »•< 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a a a 
 
 Woods 
 
 ••4 
 
 3_6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 aa 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Ooen 
 
 • • 
 
 . 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Not found in Herb. 
 
 = Ervum No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 =sE'vuni No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Orobus luieus in Herb. S. & W. 
 
460 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 1 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Glycine. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Soja, Sieb. and Zucc,, 
 
 
 H. 
 
 • • t 
 
 • •• 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 Mucuna. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 atropurpurea, DC. . 
 
 2 
 
 S. BC. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kota Dun, &c., 
 
 pruriens, DC 
 
 Srythrina. 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kota Dun, &c., 
 
 Btricta, Roxb. .. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 euberosa, Roxb. .. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 June 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 arboreseens, Roxb. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Jalat, 
 
 Galactia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tenuiflora, W. and A., 
 
 • •• 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 August 
 
 Gangoli 
 
 Spatholobns. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Roxburghii, Benih. ... 
 
 t»e 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 50' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 Butea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 frondosa, Roxb. .. 
 
 l 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Pueraria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tuberosa, DC. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 20' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 Strracheyi, Baker 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 5'- 6' 
 
 R. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalitnundi ... 
 
 Phaseolus, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calcaratus, Roxb. ,. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 • •1 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 Vigna. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 yexillata, Benth. 
 
 ••• 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 Dolichos. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lablab, L. 
 
 IM 
 
 H. 
 
 ^ • • 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 biflorus. L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 l' — 14 ' 
 
 • • • 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 falcatus, Klein. 
 
 2 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 5' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gangoli, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 461 
 
 1 
 
 Conditions of soil, & c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1 — 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Op en 
 
 3 — 0,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2 , 5 — 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * * * 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Open 
 
 4 — 6,200 
 
 R. 
 
 • * * 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 2 — 4,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 6 — 7.500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Open 
 
 4 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 t , 
 
 Open 
 
 6 — 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Bufea pnrviflorn in list. Not 
 found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Neustanthus sp. in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Lahlab vulgaris in list, Not 
 found in Herb. S. and W. 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 462 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Atylosia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mollis, Benth. 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 15'- 20' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Sarju val ley, 
 Bhabar. 
 
 grandiflora, Benth. ... 
 
 i 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 6'— 12' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 scarahaeoides, Benth., 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 AllgUBt ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 Cajanus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indicus, Spreng. 
 
 ... 
 
 PI. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Ganai 
 
 Eriosema. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ehinense, Vogel 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora 
 
 Rhynchosia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pseudo- cajan, Camb 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kosi and Sarju 
 valleys. 
 
 himalensis, Benth. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Pr. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Gagar, &c. 
 
 sericea, Spanoghe 
 
 2 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 6' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August . . 
 
 Kilimundi ri- 
 ver. 
 
 vestia, Benth. 
 
 Flemingia- 
 
 4 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 3'- 4' 
 
 K. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar, &c. 
 
 strobilifora, B. Br. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . 
 
 Almora, Binsar> 
 
 paniculara, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 August . . 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 congesta, Roxb. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 var. semialata 
 
 1 , 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1'- 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Bagesar, Almo- 
 ra, &c. 
 
 Dalbergia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sissoo, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 confertiflora, Benth ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 Li. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 volubilis, Roxb. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Kosi valley, ... 
 
 Sophora- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mollis, Grab. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 O'— 8' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Common 
 
 Csesalpinia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 onducella, Fleming , 
 
 ... 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' — 15' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Kota, &c. 
 
 sepiaria, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 4G3 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 ■ I— < 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 f> 
 
 O 
 
 •§ 
 
 43 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 *H 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 0 
 
 O 
 • — < 
 
 43 
 
 • pH 
 
 T3 
 
 0 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 i 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 1 — 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • » 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Not found in Herb S.& W. 
 
 Open 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ««• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 D?. 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 Do. 
 
 6 ^ 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 •• 
 
 ; >•« 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R, 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Not found in Herb. S & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3, 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 < • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 i • • 
 
 • O* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Woods & open, 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 — 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3,5—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * *« 
 
 
 = Edwardsia mollis in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 = Guilandina Bonducella in Herb 
 S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2-5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • 
 
464 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 t: 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 * 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 , terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Cassia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fistula, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr, 
 
 25' ‘ 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 occidentals, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Bagesar, &c. — 
 
 Sophera, L. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3'- 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 Tora, L. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 All the 
 year. 
 
 Bagesar, &c. ... 
 
 Absus, L. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora, &c ... 
 
 mimosoides, L . .. 
 
 ,,, 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 var, Walliehiana .. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 I'-IJ' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Saraca- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, L. ... 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 R. Or. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 Tamarindus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, L. 
 
 in 
 
 Tr. 
 
 0 
 00 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 Bauhinia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 malabarica, Ruxb. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 ... 
 
 • •4 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 retusa, Ham. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 40' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September, 
 
 Kosi valley .. 
 
 Vahlii, W. Sr A. 
 
 •a 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' - 40' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bhabar, outer 
 hills 
 
 variegata, L. ... 
 
 i • • 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25'— 30' 
 
 Pk. W. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 Mimosa- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pudica, L 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 April 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 rubricaulis, Lam. .. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 10' 
 
 R. 
 
 June 
 
 Ramgarh val- 
 ley, &c. 
 
 Acacia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Farnesiana, Willd. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Almora 
 
 eburnea, Willd. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 Catechu, Willd. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' — 30' 
 
 . . * 
 
 January 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 Intsia, Willd. 
 
 4, 5 
 
 Tr. or 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' — 30' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Bhabar, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 Albizzia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lebbek, Benth. ... 
 
 3, 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar, Bha- 
 bar. 
 
 Julibrissin, Durazz.... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • « 
 
 • •f 
 
 
 
 ,,, 
 
 var. mollis. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 W. 
 
 May ... 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 stipulata, Boir. 
 
 i 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Baisani. 
 
OF THE' NOETII-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued ). 
 
 ci 
 
 CD 
 
 \> 
 
 O 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 
 ,0 
 
 & 
 
 layu. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 «+h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks; 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O <d 
 
 •43 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 n3 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 a & 
 
 0 + 3 - 
 
 >> 
 
 d 
 
 • r— < 
 
 d 
 
 >> 
 
 U 
 
 4-3 
 
 <D 
 
 
 o 
 
 . w 
 
 P3 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 F orest 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ) 
 
 Open 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 
 
 > Not found in Herb. S. & Wi 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ) 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Cultivated ... 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 =Jonesia Asoca in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Piliostiqvid malabaricum in Herb*. 
 S. & W. 
 
 W oods 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * 
 
 ?• • 
 
 = Fhanera retuna in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 1 - 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Fhanera Vahlii in Herb. S. & W 
 The flowers of this species are 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 usually yellowish white. J. F. D. 
 
 Woods . ••• 
 
 3 — 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ■ * * 
 
 • • • 
 
 — Fhanera vanegata in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W, 
 
 Open 
 
 1 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Gardens 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. 
 
 Poorest 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 r R ‘ 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 No. 3 not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 ••• 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 r! 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. Ss W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 5U 
 
46 (? 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 Name. 
 
 ROSACEJE. 
 
 Prunus- 
 
 persica, Benth. SfHook., 
 
 armeniaca, L. 
 
 J acquem onntii , Hook.f. 
 Puddum, Roxb. 
 
 Padus, L. 
 
 nepalensis, Ser. 
 nudulata, Ham. 
 
 Prinsepia. 
 
 utilis, Boyle 
 
 Spirssa. 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 sorbifolia, L. 
 bella, Sims. 
 
 canescens, Don. 
 vaccini folia,. Don. ... 
 
 Rubiis. 
 
 paniculatus, Sm. 
 
 reticulatus, Wall. ... 
 lanatus, Wall r 
 alpestris, Bl. 
 eaxatilis, L, 
 nutans, Wall. 
 niyeus, Wall. 
 
 macilentus, Camb. ... 
 
 ellipticus, Sm. 
 
 biflorus , Ram. 
 
 lasiocarpus, Sm. 
 
 var.membranaceus ... 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 . 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 Sin 
 
 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Almora 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Niti 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 November, 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 50' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, Dwa~ 
 li, &c. 
 
 Chaur 
 
 . . . 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' — 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 . >. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 . . . 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam, Sc c. . . „ 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 J une 
 
 Dwali, Niti ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 KathiPass,Che- 
 
 chanickhal. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Common 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Almora, &c. .... 
 
 9 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Tola (Sarju 
 
 valley). 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Lahur, Dwali .. 
 
 10 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 1 . 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar, Binsar, 
 
 17 
 
 Sh. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 1 
 
 
 Tungnath 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 July 
 
 Vfartoli 
 
 6 
 
 S. cr. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Wh. May 
 
 Lahti r 
 
 4,7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' -12' 
 
 Pk. June 
 
 ST ami k, Ramri, 
 Rur Pass. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. May 
 
 Binsar, Madhari 
 Pass. 
 
 11, 12 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' — 8' 
 
 Wh. April-May, 
 
 Outer hills,. 
 Binsar, &c. 
 
 13, 15 
 
 Sli. 
 
 G' — 8' 
 
 Wh. April 
 
 Slaiui Tal, Bin- 
 sar, &o. 
 
 3^ 1 4 
 
 S. cr. 
 
 6'— 12' 
 
 R, Pk. 
 
 May-Feb- 
 
 ruary. 
 
 iota Dun, Nai- 
 ni Tal, Bin- 
 sar, &c. 
 
 .13 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June ...'< 
 
 1 
 
 JhiringPass .... 
 
 - 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 467 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 '•a 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 a os 
 
 O aj 
 •— aa 
 
 c3 CD 
 
 l> XJ 
 <D +a 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Do, ... 
 
 By streams ... 
 Forest 
 
 Open ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 Open 
 
 Woods 
 
 Open ... 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest & open, 
 Woods 
 
 Woods & open, 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Woods 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 5.000 
 
 11,500 
 2, 5—6,000 
 7,500—11,000 
 
 6.000 
 7—7,500 
 
 3 — 8,000 
 
 9—12,000 
 
 7 — 12,000 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 5—7,500 
 7, 5—0,000 
 
 6.500 
 
 7 — 8,000 
 
 6 — 8,000 
 
 7.500 
 
 11,000 
 
 7, 500—10,000 
 8—10,700 
 
 7 — 8,000 
 
 4 — 7,500 
 
 7—7,500 
 
 1, 5—7,000 
 
 7,500 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 Q 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 R. 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 — Persica vulgaris in list. Not found 
 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 « • • 
 
 — Armeniaca vulgaris in list. Not 
 found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 ■ »• 
 
 D. 
 
 
 = Cerasus No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ft 
 
 = Cerasus No. 4 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • * 
 
 = Cerasus No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Cerasus No. 3 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 
 
 = Rhaiimus No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 t • • 
 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • t e 
 
 • •i 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • « • 
 
 • • * 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 . - . 
 
 D. 
 
 *ii 
 
 
 R. 
 
 *• 
 
 « • • 
 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 til 
 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • *» 
 
 ... 
 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 r 
 
 ■ • 
 
468 
 
 htma'layan districts 
 
 List of Kmnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 rosoefolius, Sm. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 parvifolius, L. ••• 
 
 15 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Geum- 
 
 
 
 urbanum , L. ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 II. 
 
 elatum, Wall. 
 
 i • • 
 
 H. 
 
 Fragaria- 
 
 
 
 indica, Andr. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 vesca, L. 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 yar. nub i col a ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 Potentilla- 
 
 
 
 purpurea, Boyle ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 aibifolia, Wall. 
 
 • « 
 
 H. 
 
 procumbens, L. 
 
 • •• 
 
 II. 
 
 fruticoea, L. 
 
 1 , 2 , 25 , 
 & 3. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 ambigua, Ccimb. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 eriocarpa, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Mooniana, Wight 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 fulgenB, Wall. ... 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 Leschenaultiana, Ser., 
 
 9, 20 
 
 H. 
 
 var. bannehalensis, 
 
 15, 1C 
 
 H. 
 
 peduncularis, Don. .. 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 yar. obscura, 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 leuconota, Don. 
 
 29 
 
 II. 
 
 micropbylla, Don. ... 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 var. commutata ... 
 
 18 
 
 H. 
 
 bifurea, D. ... 
 
 27 
 
 H. 
 
 multifida, L. 
 
 22, 23 
 
 H. 
 
 var. Saundersoniana, 
 
 23 (in 
 part). 
 
 H. 
 
 sericea, L. 
 
 21 
 
 H. 
 
 nepalensis, Hook. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 1 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Nainl Tal 
 
 8' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal,Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Namik, &c. ... 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Patliar, Kori ... 
 
 3"- 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Outer hilis .. 
 
 2" - 3" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari Rogila, 
 
 3" 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 Dwali. 
 
 2" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang, &e.,. 
 
 4" — 12" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Namik, Rala u, 
 
 3"— 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 Ralam, &c. 
 
 4"— 35' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Niti, 
 Pitti and Go- 
 ri rivers, Pin- 
 dari, &c. 
 
 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August - 
 
 Ralam, Milam,. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August 
 
 Pindari, Sing- 
 jar i. 
 
 1'— 35' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Kalimundi, Ra- 
 lam. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, Rrn- 
 sar. & c. 
 
 9" — 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March- Au- 
 gust. 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jalat, Tola 
 (Gori valley). 
 
 « •• 
 
 
 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Ralam 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Ralam, Duda- 
 toli. 
 
 1" — 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Barjikang, & c. 
 
 3"- 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 fcV/ _ 
 
 Y. 
 
 Inly 
 
 Milam, Guge, 
 
 3"— 12" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Inly 
 
 Niti pass. Hots, 
 &c. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 3"— 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Malari, Guge .. 
 
 1' 
 
 R. 
 
 April 
 
 Naiui Tal, Bin- 
 sar, See. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 469 
 
 6 
 
 • f— t 
 
 O 
 
 GQ 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 § 
 
 »»— » 
 
 -t- 3 
 
 >r 3 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hh 
 
 lai 
 
 .3 
 
 P3 
 
 u il- 
 ia. 
 
 M 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Woods 
 
 *• 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . • . 
 
 t« • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 I • 
 
 • it 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • 
 
 10—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 '•* 
 
 • • * 
 
 = Sieversia elata in Herb, S. & W. 
 
 Do- 
 
 • . • 
 
 3-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 I • I 
 
 in 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 •e.i 
 
 11—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 III 
 
 « • « 
 
 
 Open or woods, 
 
 8-10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • I 
 
 m 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 11—14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Sibbaldia No. 4 in Herb. S & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 8, 5—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 — Sibbaldia No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • « 
 
 9, 5—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 = Sibbaldia No. 3 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open, rocky 
 
 8 — 1 G,300 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 places. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *\ 
 
 
 Open 
 
 * . . 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T, 
 
 
 Open rocks 
 
 •• 
 
 9—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •i 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 9 — 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 G— 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • » 
 
 G— 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 in 
 
 
 HI 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 i • » 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 K. 
 
 • • • 
 
 HI 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 » • • 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Sibbaldia No. 2 in Herb. !S. & W 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 10—14,500 
 
 R, 
 
 tii 
 
 11*1 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 10—14,500 
 
 R, 
 
 • •i 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 12—16,000 
 
 Ml 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 15—17,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ditto 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 lit 
 
 10 — 15,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7 — 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •i 
 
 ••• 
 
 • 
 
470 
 
 HIM XL AY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U * 
 
 co a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 H a 
 
 4^ 
 
 4-3 
 
 <0 
 
 a 
 
 • »-H 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 * ,-A 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 t-. 
 
 rS 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 c S o 
 pfl is 
 .a q 
 
 bO 
 
 o 
 
 =4-4 
 
 o 
 
 <d 
 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 tli 
 
 ■4-3 
 
 3 
 
 -4-3 
 
 rd 
 
 # bp 
 
 ?-l 
 
 d 
 
 jo 
 
 o 
 
 <p 
 
 d 
 
 •4-3 
 
 • ■— i 
 
 r c3 
 
 o 
 
 
 K 
 
 ra 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 Kl 
 
 argyrophylla, H all. .. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— a' 
 
 Or. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Saba, Ralam ... 
 
 var. atrosanguinea, 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2'-3' 
 
 R. Or. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Barjikang, Pin- 
 
 ,, leucochroa 
 monanthes, Lindl. ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dari, &c. 
 
 6 
 
 12, 25 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 9" — 13" 
 14 " — 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang, See. 
 Ralam, Barji- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 kang. 
 
 var. 
 
 Kleiniana, W. 8f A. ... 
 
 26 
 
 11 
 
 IT. 
 
 H. 
 
 1 " — o" 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 March ... 
 
 Champwa 
 Naini-Tal, Bin- 
 
 supina, L. 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 
 
 sar. Almora. 
 
 H. 
 
 3" — 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Hard war, Bin- 
 
 8- Chamcerhodos. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sar. 
 
 sabulosa, Bunge. ... 
 
 IM 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Guge 
 
 9. Agrimonia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eupatorium, L. ... 
 
 III 
 
 H. 
 
 Qf/ 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini-Tal 
 
 10- Rosa- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrophylla, Lindl .... 
 
 2, 3, & 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' — 10' 
 
 R. 
 
 June- July, 
 
 Ralam, Binsar, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tola, Checha- 
 
 Webbianna, Wall. ... 
 sericea, Lindl. ... 
 
 6 
 
 4, 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'' 
 
 6'— 8' 
 
 R. 
 
 W. Y. 
 
 July 
 
 May-J uly, 
 
 ni-Khal, See. 
 Niti 
 
 Kathi, Milam, 
 
 moscbata, Mill. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Niti, &c 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'’— 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini-Tal, Al- 
 
 11- Cydonia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mora. 
 
 vulgaris, Fers. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 • •• 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 12. Pyrus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 baccata, L. 
 
 7 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini-Tal, Niti, 
 
 kumaoni, Dene. 
 
 6 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 lanata, Don. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Aucuparia, Gcprtn. ... 
 
 5 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 foliolosa, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali ... 
 
 13- Stransvaesia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glaucescens, Lindl. ... 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30’ 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Outer hill ... 
 
 14- Crataegus- 
 
 crenulata, Roxb. ... 
 
 HI 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12’ 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Ditto. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 471 
 
 Plants — ( continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Himd- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 9—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 11 — 14,00 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • » 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Rocks ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R, 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » t« 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 »o» 
 
 # • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • « « 
 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 7 — 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 9—1 1,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 *.f 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2, 5—8,500 
 
 11. 
 
 )• . 
 
 • • t 
 
 
 Cultivated ... 
 
 6,000 
 
 It. 
 
 • •• 
 
 it* 
 
 Not fouud in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 6-11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2, 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 9 — 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * « • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8-10,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 • 00 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 « • 
 
 D. 
 
 •« • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 9 — 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Woods „. 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ««• 
 
 = Fyrus No, 1, in Herb.S. & W. 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 2,5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
472 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U * 
 
 <D CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ £ 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 5 nzJ 
 
 ^ r~j 
 
 4J 
 
 O' 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 c3 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 _ >> g 
 a « s 
 
 o 
 
 pH 
 
 bo 
 
 Ph 
 
 qn 
 
 o 
 
 q-i 
 
 o 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 P cj O 
 
 C3 £ 
 
 X2 +3 s-i 
 7} 05 
 
 <D V-' 
 
 W 
 
 4H 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 c3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 ■+^» 
 
 r-< 
 
 &0 
 • r—i 
 
 (V 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 qn 
 
 c 
 
 <D 
 
 a 
 
 EH 
 
 Locality. 
 
 15. Cotoneaster- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 baccillaris, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sar. 
 
 acuminata, Lincll. 
 
 2, 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 rk. 
 
 May ... 
 
 Kathi ... 
 
 multiflora, Bunge 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Niti 
 
 microphylla, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Til, Mi- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lam. 
 
 var. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari 
 
 XL.— SAXIFRAGA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CE2E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Astilbe- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rivularis, Ham. ,. 
 
 • •• 
 
 II. 
 
 5' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 2. Saxifraga 
 sibirica. L. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam 1M 
 
 cernua, L. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang 
 
 palpebrata, Ilf. Ilf T. 
 
 18 
 
 II. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Halam ... 
 
 Lyclmitis Hf. T- 
 
 saginoides, Hf. l • 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Y. 
 
 A ugust 
 
 Barjikang 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 2" 
 
 Or. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalam ... 
 
 Hirculns, A. 
 
 var. hitculoides ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 . 
 
 «•« 
 
 
 , r . 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 ^// 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang and 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Balch Passes. 
 
 diversifolia, Wall. ... 
 
 3, 4 
 
 H. 
 
 12"- 15" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kalimundi. 
 
 pallida, Wall. ... 
 
 microphylla, Bogle ... 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang 
 
 21 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Chorhoti Pass, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ba r j i k a n g 
 Pass. 
 
 
 Jacquemontiana, Dene . 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— l" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July ... 
 
 Halam, Chor- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hoti Pass. 
 
 var. Stella-aurea ... 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 1 // 
 
 2 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Barjikang, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Chorhoti 
 
 Pass. 
 
 ramulosa, Wall. 
 
 8, 9, 10 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 6" 
 
 Pk. Gr. 
 
 May, June, 
 
 Naiuik, Rogila, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Y. Wh. 
 
 
 Pindari, Ba- 
 kastal. 
 
 fimbriata, Wall. 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 4"- 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam ... 
 
 filicaulis, Wall. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Badarinath ... 
 
 Brunoniana, Wall ... 
 flagellaris, Willd. ... 5 
 
 20 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Slaini Tal, Saba, 
 
 11,22,23 
 
 a. 
 
 3 ft Aft 
 
 4 ^ 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Barjikang, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lanjar, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 
 ligulata, Wall. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 var. ciliata. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. I 
 
 February, 
 
 Bagesar, Alrno- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 flj &C. ,«t 
 
 Stracheyi, Hf. Sf T. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 a" 
 
 6 1 
 
 Txv. jJune ... ] 
 
 dilam ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 473 
 
 Plants— (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 £ 
 
 s 
 
 '5 
 
 03 
 
 S-i 
 
 fi 
 
 Woods 
 
 •«• 
 
 6,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *01 
 
 i*i 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 »-* v 
 
 7,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 No. 2 not found in Herb. S. & 
 
 Open 
 
 • • » 
 
 1 1,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 tat 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ••• 
 
 12,500 
 
 E. 
 
 Ml 
 
 to. 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 1 
 
 III 
 
 
 Open 
 
 *• • 
 
 11,5—14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 • •• 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1*4 
 
 13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13—17,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ,T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 i • « 
 
 lit 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • O'. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 • • * 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Shady rocks & 
 
 8,5—15,600 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 open. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 f «♦ 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shady rocks 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 13-17,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 R, 
 
 * • • 
 
 ». • 
 
 
 Shady rocks 
 
 • •• 
 
 3—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 •ii 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • 
 
 60 
 
474 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U i 
 
 CD rf 
 
 rQ .a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i£ 
 
 
 
 
 fa}) 
 
 
 
 5 r a 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 Name, 
 
 a 
 
 tip. 
 S " § 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 f-4 
 
 b£ 
 
 1 
 
 "ft 
 
 o> 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 0) 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 .2 2 S 
 
 Fh O 
 
 o 
 
 HH 
 
 o 
 
 HH 
 
 O 
 
 
 >» 
 
 
 ci £ ^ 
 
 ££ s 
 
 Qj +S 
 
 4^2 
 
 • r-H 
 
 rO 
 
 £ 
 
 .bp 
 
 *-« 
 
 3 
 
 C> 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 a 
 
 4-a 
 
 i - < 
 
 a 
 
 o— 
 
 tq 
 
 w 
 
 M 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 • r-H 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 3, Chrysosplenium 
 
 trichospermum, Edgrr 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Gr. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, Madhari 
 
 tenellum, Ilf. $ T. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 f" 1" 
 
 Gr. 
 
 May 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 4. Parnassia- 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 nubicola, Wall. 
 ovata, Ledeb 
 
 l 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tat, & c. 
 
 pusilla, Wall. 
 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 2" 3" 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . 
 August . . 
 
 Rajhoti, Tisum, 
 Bar j ikaag 
 
 5. Hydrangea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 altissima, Wall. 
 
 i 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30—40 
 
 Gr. W. 
 
 May 
 
 Darki-binai k , 
 
 aspera, Don. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 . . . 
 
 l • • 
 
 &c. 
 
 Tola (S a r j u 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 10'— 20' 
 
 Gr. W. 
 
 July 
 
 valley). 
 
 Ramni, Dwali 
 
 6. Deutzia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 corymbosa, Dr. 
 
 i 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Y. Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Namik, Binsar, 
 
 staminea, Br. 
 macranthus, 11 f. f T. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. Wh. 
 Y. Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 May 
 
 &c. 
 
 Common 
 
 Binsar 
 
 7. Philadelplms- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 coronarius, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi, &c. ... 
 
 8. Xtea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nutans, Boyle 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 1 
 
 May ... 
 
 3agesar, outer 
 
 9. Hibes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hills. 
 
 Grossularia, L. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Sh. 
 
 
 Gr. 2 
 ... J 
 I 
 
 une ... r 
 
 hine ... ; 
 
 May ...1 
 
 
 orientate, Poir. 
 glaciate, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 3, 5 
 
 8' 
 
 6' 
 
 5'— 15' 
 
 Cola, Milam ... 
 Milari, Niti ... 
 Milam Pindari,. 
 
 ubrum, L. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 
 
 
 Lahur, Dwali. 
 
 
 15' 
 
 J 
 
 May ...] 
 
 Jwali, Ramni, 
 
 XLI. — CRASSULA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEIE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Tillsea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pea t and r a, Boyle 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — 3" 
 
 Gr. Y. J 
 
 uly ... I 
 
 1 
 
 Caini Tal, Al- 
 mora. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 475 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 Hi 
 
 la 
 
 £ 
 
 P3 
 
 md- 
 
 ya. 
 
 p 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Wet banks 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 7,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . « 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,50o 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,600' 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 - 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—11,000- 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 jD. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open and on 
 
 * 7—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 trees. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open woods \ . . 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 W et banks 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 0 • • 
 
 
476 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 fr-l 1 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 a a* 3 
 
 P H O 
 
 2 o s 
 
 rd 
 
 o 
 
 Jh 
 
 blj 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 % 
 
 4H 
 
 o 
 
 Sh 
 
 CD 
 
 ► 
 
 O 
 
 4-4 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 •f-4 
 
 S-l 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 Sh 
 
 4-1 
 
 if 
 
 
 ^2 7^ fH 
 
 zLs 
 
 -4-a 
 
 £ 
 
 bp 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 ■ H 
 
 ’S 
 
 o 
 
 
 M 
 
 tt 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 2. Crassula- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, Dene. 
 
 l 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Gr. W. 
 
 July 
 
 Gagar, Patou, 
 
 3. Kalanchce- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 spathulata, DC. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2 ' — 3 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, &e. ... 
 
 4. Cotyledon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Oreades, C. B. Clarke , 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 l" 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Ralam, She- 
 
 5. Sednm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 long. 
 
 Rhodiola, DC. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— -li' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Pindar i, Sing- 
 
 erenulatum, ITf. S? T. 
 
 12, 15, 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 9" 
 
 
 
 jari. 
 
 Nlti Pass, &c.,- 
 Patharkor,Pin- 
 
 quadrifidum, Pall. ... 
 
 17,19 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — 3" 
 
 R. 
 
 June, Au- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gust 
 
 dari. Raltas 
 
 Ilimalcnse, Don. 
 
 20 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 
 tal, Rajhoti. 
 
 ? 
 
 Saba 
 
 elongatum, Wall. 
 
 10 
 
 Id. 
 
 8" 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 fastigiatum, Ilook f. 
 
 18 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Nlti valleys in 
 
 asiaticum, DC. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Gnge. 
 
 Champwa, Bar- 
 
 var. Wallichianum, 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 jikang. 
 
 Milam 
 
 linearifolium, Hoyle y 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Y. Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam, Hardol 
 
 trifidum, Wall. 
 
 7 
 
 Id. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Naini Tal, Ge-ri 
 
 rosulatum, Edgem. ... 
 adenotrichum, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 Id. 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 4" 
 
 W. Gr. 
 
 April 
 
 valleys, &c. 
 Naini Tal, & c.. 
 
 trullipetalum, Ilf. fy 
 T. 
 
 Ewersii, Ledeb 
 
 21 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bar jikang, Mi- 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 R. 
 
 August ...; 
 
 lam. 
 
 Vlilam, Nlti, 
 
 multicaule, Wall. 
 
 3, 6, 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 6" 
 
 li. Y. 
 
 March, Au- 
 
 Guge 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 T;il,Gori val- 
 ley. 
 
 6, Sempervivnm- 
 
 
 
 
 
 gust. 
 
 acuminatum, Dene. . . . 
 
 3 
 
 Id. 
 
 4"— 5" 
 
 
 
 J lains of Guge. 
 Vlalari, ... 
 
 mucronatum, Edgem. 
 
 1 
 
 Id. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 • *• 
 
 August ...i 
 
 XLII.— BROS ERA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEJE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Drosera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 peltata, S.M. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh. 2 
 
 luly ... j. 
 
 Almora, Jage~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sar. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 477 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Himd- 
 
 layu. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—15,500 
 
 R, 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 = Section No. 2, in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—17,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—16,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 9,000 
 
 ii. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—14,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = S. Rhodiola in part. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 12—14,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Open 
 
 15,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 = Crassula No. 2 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 Do. 
 
 10.500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
478 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 bb 
 
 .s 
 
 QJ 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 S3 
 
 «H 
 
 O 
 
 ca 
 
 g 
 
 H 
 
 Locality. 
 
 XLIII — HALORA- 
 GEiE. 
 
 1. Hippnris- 
 
 vulgaris, L. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—\y 
 
 Gr. 
 
 July 
 
 Raj-hoti, Gya- 
 
 2. Myriophyllum. 
 
 spicafcum, L. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 !'■ — 2' 
 
 
 
 nyima. 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
 XLIV.-COMBRETA- 
 
 CEiE. 
 
 1. Terminalia. 
 
 bel erica, Roxb. 
 Chebula, Ret 2 . 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 3C' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Sarju valley ...1 
 
 tomentosa, Bedel. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 V. Gr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 2. Anogeissus. 
 
 latifolia, Wall. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 3. Combretum- 
 
 nanum, Ilam. 
 
 • •• 
 
 S. H. 
 
 I'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Bagesar Gau- 
 
 XLV.— MYRTA- 
 CEAE. 
 
 1. Psiclmm- 
 
 Guyava, L. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 
 February, 
 
 anath 
 
 3 uter hills ... 
 
 2, Eugenia- 
 
 Jambolana, Lam. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 1 
 
 darch ...1 
 
 Bhabar, outer , 
 
 sp— 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. t 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 Wh. I 
 
 December, 
 
 hills. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 3. Carey a- 
 
 arborea, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 
 I 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 XLVI.-MELASTOM-' 
 
 ACEA3. 
 
 1. Osbeckia- 
 cliinensis, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' ■ 
 
 Pk. S 
 
 eptember, I 
 
 iagesar, &c. ... 
 
 stellata, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. A 
 
 aigust ... C 
 
 /ommon 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 479 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions oi soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Ilii 
 
 lCL'1 
 
 >•> 
 
 .2 
 
 § 
 
 nd - 
 fa. 
 
 n 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 In water 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • t • 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 — . Pentaptera No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — 1 Conocarjjus latifolia in Herb. S. 
 & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = zSyzygium Jambolanum in Herb. 
 
 S. & w. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — -S. venosum , DC. in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. mi 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ’ll* 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
480 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 | Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 XLVIL— LYTHRA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEAE. 
 
 1- Ammannia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rotundifolia, Ham. ... 
 
 1 t •• 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Almora 
 
 salicifolia, Monti. ... 
 
 2, 3 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ivosi river, Al- 
 mora. 
 
 2. Woodfordia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 floribunda, Salisb. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 0 
 
 r-“* 
 
 1 
 
 00 
 
 Sc. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 3. Lagerstrsemia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 parviflora, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'— 50' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 4. Punica- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Granatum, L. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 10 
 
 Sc. 
 
 June 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 XLVTII. — ON AGRA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. Epilobium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 angustifolium, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Niti, Rimkirn, 
 
 latifolium, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Badari- 
 nath. 
 
 hirsutum, L. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 • i • 
 
 • i • 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 var. lastum. 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 . . • 
 
 0 • • 
 
 . 
 
 Almora 
 
 roseum, Schreb. ... 
 
 5, 1, 9 
 11, 12,13 
 
 II. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 var. cylindricum ... 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 palustre, L. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Laptel 
 
 origanifolium, Lam.... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Milam 
 
 2. Circsea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lutetiana, L. 
 cordata, Royle 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Tuly 
 
 Binsar 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal,Kali- 
 mundi, &c. 
 
 alpina, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Saba 
 
 XLIX.— SAMYDA- 
 CJE-ZE. 
 
 1. Casearia* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tomentOBa, Roxb. 
 
 tit 
 
 T. 
 
 25' 
 
 GY. 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 481 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 <8 
 
 a> 
 
 t> 
 
 o 
 
 Ilima- 
 
 
 
 jJT 
 
 rQ 
 
 c3 
 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Hi 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 S3 
 
 o 
 
 o ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 • r—< 
 
 '43 oo 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 CD 4* 
 
 w 
 
 £ 
 
 •F— 1 
 
 c3 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibel 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 — Amcletia rotundifolia in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 Open and by 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 No. 3 not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 water. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Grislea tomentosa in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open woods, cul- 
 
 1* — 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 tivated. 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,5—13,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,5—14,000 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . ■ 
 
 • • # 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • t 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ' 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,000 
 
 R 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 •V 
 
 ■ 
 
 61 
 
4-82 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 t 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 1 
 
 Locality. 
 
 L.— CUCURBITA- 
 
 CEJE. 
 
 1. Trichosanthes- 
 
 palmata, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Sarju yalley, 
 
 2. Herpestosper- 
 mum- 
 
 caudigerum, Wall. ... 
 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 &c. 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 3. Cucumis. 
 
 satirus, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. BC. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Pasc. 
 
 Jalat 
 
 4. Zehneria- 
 
 umbellata, Thun. ... 
 var. nepalensis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 5- Melothria- 
 
 odorata, Ilf. $ T. ... 
 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 6. Gomphogyne- 
 
 cissiformis, Griff. ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kalimundi Pass 
 
 7. Gynostemma- 
 pedata, Bl. 
 
 
 H. sc 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 LI. —BEG ONIACE JE . 
 
 1. Eegonia- 
 
 picta, Sm. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills. .. 
 
 amsena, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 ^ a i n i Tai, 
 
 LII.-DATISCACEJ3E. 
 
 i. Datisea. 
 
 eannabina, L, 
 
 • « • 
 
 H. 
 
 7 
 
 » t » 
 
 July 
 
 Dagesar, &c. 
 
 Almora 
 
 LIII.— EICOIDEiE. 
 1. Mollngo- 
 stricta, L. 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 4'83 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 <=8 
 
 • rH 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 •s 
 
 "S 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 § 
 
 • ph 
 
 *rg 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 i 
 
 fl 
 
 c3 
 
 cd 
 
 « 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 ©pen 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Gymnopetatum pedunculosum in 
 Herb; S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 =Karivia umbellata in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 —Euhjlia trigy na in Herb. S. &. W=. 
 
 W et banks 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Trees & rocks, 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 River-bed 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • M 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
484 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Name, 
 
 LIV. — UMBELLIFE- 
 
 RJE. 
 
 1. Hydroeotyle, 
 
 javanica, Thnb. 
 rotundifolia, Roxb. ... 
 asiatiea, L. 
 
 2. Saniciila. 
 
 europasa, L. 
 
 3- Vicatia- 
 
 eoniifolia,. DC. 
 
 4- Trachydium 
 
 Roylei , Lindl. 
 
 5. Bupleurum. 
 
 lanceolatum, Wall. ... 
 Candollii, Wall. 
 falcatum, L. 
 
 var. marginata ...! 
 longicaule, Wall. 
 
 Iienue, Don 
 
 6. Carum., 
 
 carui, L. 
 
 anethifolium, Benth. 
 
 Falconeri, C. B. 
 Clarke. 
 
 7- Pimpinella. 
 
 achilleifolia, C. B. 
 
 Clarke. 
 
 acuminata, C. B. 
 Clarke. 
 
 tenera, Benth. 
 
 diversifolia, DC. 
 
 Stracheyi, C. B. 
 Clarke. 
 
 ctespitosa, Benth. 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 1 
 
 H, cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 « 
 
 March 
 
 Gagar , Almora, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 , , , 
 
 
 ? 
 
 2 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota-Dun, &c. 
 
 # • • 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 1*' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Karim, Naims 
 Tal, &c. 
 
 1,2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Chaur, Lahur... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Lanjar 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 V. 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 CO 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Karim 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Br. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalam 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 . . . 
 
 February. 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — S' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May, 
 
 Sarju Talley ... 
 
 3 
 
 IT. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Br. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam, Niti . 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' • — 8' 
 
 . . • 
 
 September, 
 
 Naim Tal, Ga- 
 gar 
 
 i • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Tola 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 12' 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Al- 
 mora, 
 
 t • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 % « t 
 
 September, 
 
 Binsar 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
 (»< 
 
 H. 
 
 1' — 1*' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— 4' 
 
 Wh. , 
 
 August ... 
 
 Dudatoli, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. t 
 
 fune ... 
 
 Dliaoli river ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 h. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Wh. ; 
 
 fuly 
 
 Niti 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 485 
 
 d 
 
 r» 
 i 1 "H 
 
 o 
 
 a> 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 rO 
 
 c3 
 
 +3 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 OQ 
 
 fl 
 
 o 
 
 -4-a 
 
 • 1—4 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Elevation in fei 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 By water 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 9 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods. ... 
 
 3,5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 N ear water, 
 open. 
 
 6—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 «*• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 16—17,500 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1)0. 
 
 3 — 6,000 
 
 K. 
 
 ... 
 
 5* * 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Ptyehotis No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Ptyehotis No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 • • i 
 
 ? 
 
 - • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Ptyehotis No. 3 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 zsBeuiera acuminata in Herb. S. & 
 
 W. 
 
 On oaks 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 = Acronenia tenerum , not found ic 
 S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 5—9.500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On rocks ... 
 
 7.500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 On rocks ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 — Pctrosciadium cesspit osum in Herb 
 S. & W. 
 
486 
 
 HIM A'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D rj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 a &*S 
 
 •+J 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 4*» 
 
 rt 
 
 c3 
 
 P< 
 
 CD 
 
 ► 
 
 O 
 
 S3 
 
 <+H 
 
 fl 
 
 $h 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 sa 
 
 
 
 n cj O 
 
 O 4-3 
 
 T CO 3 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 • pH 
 pQ 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 o 
 
 Sh 
 
 E3 
 
 O 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 a; 
 
 a 
 
 • rH 
 
 H 
 
 4* 
 
 • pH 
 
 3 
 
 
 CD W-H 
 
 W 
 
 03 
 
 W 
 
 <D 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 ►4 
 
 8- Osmorrhiza- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 1 a y t o n i , C. B 
 Clarke, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 May 
 
 Lahur 
 
 9- Chaerophyllum 
 
 reflexum, Lindl. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 i • • 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jalat ... 
 
 10- Seseli. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indicum, W §• A, ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 •M 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 fcrilobum, Benth. 
 
 ICt 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Niti .... 
 
 11- (Enanthe. 
 
 stolonifera, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 12. Selinum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tenuifolium, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra- 
 
 var elata. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lam, Milam. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Aiigust ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra- 
 1am, Milam. 
 
 vag inatum, C. B. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Clarke. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13. Cortia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lindlei, DC. 
 
 1'2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — -9" 
 
 
 August .. 
 
 Ralam ... 
 
 14. Pleurosper- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Govanianum, Benth... 
 
 7 ? 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam valley, 
 
 Candollii, Benth. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mi] am, Kala- 
 
 angel icoides, Benth. ... 
 
 • « • 
 
 H. 
 
 5 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ..Jj 
 
 jawar 
 
 lalam valley. 
 
 dentatum, Benth. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 stellatum, Benth. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 1 
 
 Milam 
 
 Hookeri, C. B. Clarke, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ,.J{ 
 
 Shelshel Rakas- 
 
 Brunonis, Benth. ... 
 
 • «« 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ...: 
 
 tal. 
 
 Milam, Kalaja- 
 
 15- Peucedanum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 war. 
 
 Dhana, Ham. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 • • * 
 
 » . • 
 
 
 Almora 
 
<©F THE NORTH-WifTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 487 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 d 
 
 <« 
 
 • 1—4 
 
 o 
 
 «D 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 o3 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 *+H 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 «>■« 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 <W 
 
 .5 
 
 S c5 
 
 O cD 
 
 “43 01 
 
 c3 id 
 
 rTj 
 
 CD 4J 
 
 W 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 03 
 
 u 
 
 ft 
 
 4-* 
 
 CD 
 
 •O 
 
 • i-H 
 
 fH 
 
 Remarks, 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5,000 
 
 ? 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Cnidium diffusum in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Open 
 
 11.500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 — Eriocycla nuda in Herb. S. & W, 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 4.000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Not found in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open ... 
 
 5,5—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 *= Peucedanum Nos. 2 and 4 in 
 Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,6—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 — Selinum No. 1 & Peucedanum No. 
 3. 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 12,500—14,600 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 — Peucedanum No. 5 in Herb S. 
 & W. 
 
 Open *»« 
 
 8—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 — Hi/menolcena No. 8 in Herb. S, 
 & W. 
 
 Do, •«» 
 
 12—14,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. • • • 
 
 * * * 
 
 8—11,000 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 “ Angelica glavca in Herb. S & W. 
 zzzHijmenolcena No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 18,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 ~Hymenolana No. 6 in Herb. S. 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 — Hymennlcena No. 4 and Oreocome 
 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—14,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 — HymenulcenaHo. 2 in Herb. S. & 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
488 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 1 
 
 Habit of growth. I 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 16- Heracleum. 
 
 Brunonis, Benth. 
 
 1,2,' 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 15 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam, Milam, 
 
 can di cans ; Wall. ... 
 
 Ii. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra- 
 
 17- Cauealis- 
 
 Anthriscns, Scop. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 R. 
 
 August ... 
 
 lam. 
 
 Naini Tal, Pa- 
 
 LY.— ARALIACE^}. 
 
 1- Aralia- 
 
 cissifolia, Griff. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 .« « 
 
 
 ton. 
 
 yar. scandens 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, Madhari 
 
 2- Pentapanax- 
 
 Leschenaultii, Seem.,., 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 var. umbellatum ... 
 
 3 
 
 Sli. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 3. Heptapleuram- 
 impressum, C. B. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25'— 30' 
 
 • • • 
 
 September, 
 
 Dwali. 
 
 Chami-binaik, 
 
 Clarke. 
 
 venulosum, Seem. 
 
 • • • 
 
 S. sc 
 
 -CO 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 • •• 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills ...1 
 
 4. Heteropanax- 
 
 fragrans, Seem. 
 
 • ( • 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... ! 
 
 December, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 5. Brassiopsis. 
 
 aculeata, Seem. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Tr. 
 
 4'— 8' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February, 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 6- Macropanax- 
 
 oreophilum, Miq. ... 
 
 • •ft 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6 ' 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 7- Hedera- 
 
 Helix, L. 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Bagesar, Naini 
 
 LVI. — CORNACEAE. 
 
 1. Marlea- 
 
 begoniaefolia, Roxb. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 Tune 
 
 Tal. 
 
 ?aton, outer 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hills. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 489 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 c5 
 
 •N 
 
 • rH 
 
 o 
 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 .Q 
 
 -4-3 
 
 Himd- 
 
 layi. 
 
 
 
 “S 
 
 OQ 
 
 fi 
 
 O 
 
 4-3 
 
 ^3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 Elevation in fei 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 = Tordylio’psis Brunonis in Herb. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 6—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • . 
 
 ... 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5, 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Probably = Torilis Anthriscus of list, 
 
 t *4 
 
 Forest 
 
 ,,, 
 
 8,600 
 
 n. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 which is not found in Herb. 
 Strachey, though Caucalis An- 
 thriscus is there, named in ma- 
 nuscript without a printed ticket. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest near wa- 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Heeler a tomentosa in Herb S. & W. 
 
 ter 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Paratropia and Hedera No. 6, in 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Pana.v fragrans in Herb. S. & W« 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 2, 5 — 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Hedera No. 3 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Hedera No. 5 in Herb, S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 tv 
 
 3—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • 
 
 62 
 
‘HIMALAYAN DISTRICT'S 
 
 494) 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 1 
 
 £.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S ^ 
 
 03 /A 
 
 xi 
 
 += 
 
 * 
 
 -4-a 
 
 § 
 
 J-H 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 -.3 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 erbarium 
 
 (Strachey 
 
 terbottom 
 
 ho 
 
 «4H 
 
 o 
 
 • rH 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 4-> 
 
 '53 
 
 o 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 n 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 •o 
 
 q-H 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 8 
 
 
 4-3 
 
 • r— » 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 3 
 
 2- Cornus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrophylla, Wall . ... 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 « •« 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 oblonga, IT all ... 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 October 
 
 • • • 
 
 Common 
 
 capitata, Wall. 
 
 LVII. — CAPRIFOLI- 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 ... 
 
 Pyura, &c. ... 
 
 AGILE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Viburnum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cotinifolium, Don 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 
 Btellulatum, Wall. ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dwali. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 »« 
 
 Binsar, &c. ... 
 
 var. 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 c » 
 
 Dudatoli ... 
 
 „ involucrata ... 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Kathi 
 
 punctatum, Ham. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'- 50 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 coriaceum, Bl. ... 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh 
 
 July 
 
 » • ■ 
 
 Common 
 
 erubescens, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 • a 
 
 Kathi, Lahur ... 
 
 nervosum, Don ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' —20' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pindari. 
 
 2- Triosetum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hireutum, Wall . 
 
 Ml 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 • •• 
 
 July 
 
 • •• 
 
 Dugli 
 
 3- Abelia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 triflora, 
 
 Ml 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 • • 
 
 Naini Tal, Ma- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lari. 
 
 4. Lonicera- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hispida, Pall, c .. 
 
 11 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 III 
 
 Sagtea-deo 
 
 glauca, Ilf. Sf T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2J' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 
 Milam, Bom- 
 
 asperifolia, Hf. fy T. 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2g ' — 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 pras. 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 angustifolia, Wall. ... 
 
 8? 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' — 12' 
 
 Pk. W. 
 
 May 
 
 
 Namik, Kathi, 
 
 rupicola, Hf. T. ... 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2*' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 o • . 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 spinosa, Jacqutm. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 24' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 Niti, Rimkim, 
 
 parvifolia, Edgew. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 *•» 
 
 Pindari, 
 
 obovata, Boyle 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 
 
 
 Champwa. 
 
 1 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 
 Milam ... 
 
 quinque locularis, 
 
 9 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. ? 
 
 Hardiv. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hypoleuca, Dene. ... 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5 '-6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 
 Jelam 
 
 al pi gen a, L. .. 
 
 10 
 
 Sh 
 
 15 '-20' 
 
 Y. Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 0*. 
 
 Namik, Milam, 
 
 sinensis, Dene. 
 
 14 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 <M 
 
 June 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 5- Leycesteria- 
 formosa, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6 '-8' 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 «•» 
 
 Gagar, Binsar, 
 
 Xrn 
 
<f>F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 491 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 <% 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 o 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 *»* 
 
 o 
 
 4-a 
 
 <U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <W 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o S 
 
 
 
 
 
 -4-a 
 
 *3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 d d) 
 
 !> ^ 
 o +a 
 
 a 
 
 >> 
 
 d 
 
 iH 
 
 d 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Open & woods 
 
 4 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Bent.hamia fragifera in Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 Ei 
 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 7—10,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 . . a 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7 8,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 - * • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8- 0,500 
 
 R 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 .a. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open and woods 
 
 5-8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 >• a 
 
 . • a 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 a • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,5—11,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • a 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,-10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *•< 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12, 5—14,500 
 
 ? 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 13,500 
 
 
 . a « 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 13,500 
 
 • •• 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,5—13,500 
 
 ... 
 
 1. 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open & woods, 
 
 3-7,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open & woods. 
 
 8. 5-11,500 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * * * 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 ' 7-9,000 
 
 i 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
492 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rP 
 
 4-3 
 
 -4-3 
 
 S-i 
 
 P 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 _ ^ a 
 as § 
 .s«s 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 s- 
 
 bG 
 
 4H 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 1 '1 
 
 PH 
 
 O 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 qp 
 
 qn 
 
 O 
 
 f-i 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 qp 
 
 
 
 03 *3 -g 
 
 •£» S 
 
 -♦-3 
 
 • rH 
 
 rO 
 
 rP 
 
 be 
 
 *-H 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 -4-3 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 K 
 
 W 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 LVII1.-RUBIACE2E, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Adina 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cordifolia, Hook.f. ... 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 2, Stephegyne- 
 
 parvifolia, Korth. ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3. Uncaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pilosa, Boxb. 
 
 ••• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 4. Hymenopogon. 
 
 
 
 . - 
 
 
 
 
 parasiticus, Wall. ... 
 
 in 
 
 Sh. r. 
 
 I ' -2 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 J uly 
 
 Binsar, &c. „. 
 
 5. Hymeiiodictyon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 excelsum, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. P. 
 
 30' 
 
 HI 
 
 
 Kal apathar, 
 
 flaccidum, Wall. ... 
 
 i 
 
 Tr. P. 
 
 20' 
 
 ill 
 
 . • . 
 
 &c. 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 6. Wendlandia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 exsrta, DC. 
 
 i 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Bhabar, Bage~ 
 
 tinctoria, DC. 
 
 o 
 
 Tr. 
 
 
 Wh. 
 
 
 Bar. 
 
 
 
 15' 
 
 Do. 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 7. Argostemma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sarmentosum, Wall. ., 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 Do. 
 
 
 Verticiilatum, Wall.,.. 
 
 i 
 
 3" 
 
 3" 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 Do. 
 
 8. Clarkella- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nana, tiaoh.f. 
 
 ••• 
 
 II. 
 
 2"— 3" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 9- Hedyotis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 stipulata, Br. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Alniora , „. 
 
 10- OldenJandia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Heynei, Br. ,,, 
 
 gracilis, DC. 
 
 III 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 coccinea,Rc/?//e 
 
 
 0" — 9" 
 
 6" — 15" 
 
 Br. , April 
 
 t J Wy ...j] 
 
 Do. 
 
 3insar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 493 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 .a 
 
 o3 
 
 CJ 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Elevation in fe< 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Sh 
 
 Q 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 —Nauclea No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 =Nauclea No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 6-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 000 
 
 R. 
 
 » 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1-3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2-3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet banks 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R 
 
 iet 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 — Ophinrrhiza No. 2 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & W. 
 
 Near Abater ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 in 
 
 
 — IJedy otis No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •i 
 
 — Kohautia No. 1 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 Open grass 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 
 
 zzKohauiia No. 2 in Herb. >S. & W 
 
494 
 
 HIM A'LAYAN JJISTRI0T& 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarinm number 
 
 (Strachey and *Wm- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 11. Anotis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calycina, Wall. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Na : ni Tal, &c., 
 
 12- Ophiorrhiza- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fasciculata, Don ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 13 Adenosacrae- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Iongifolia, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Mohargari, Sar- 
 ju valley. 
 
 14- Randia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tetrasperma, Roxb. ... 
 dumetorum, Lam. ... 
 
 15. Gardenia- 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 Sb. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 Sarju valley 
 
 Bhabar, Ba> 
 gesar. 
 
 fcurgida, Roxb. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 16- Knoxia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eorymbosa, Willd. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, & c: ... 
 
 brachycarpa, Br. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 12"- 15" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September, 
 
 Baijnath ... 
 
 17- Pavetta- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 indica, L. 
 
 • • < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. tomentosa 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Kota Dun, Sar- 
 ju valley. 
 
 18- Coffea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bengalensis, Roxb. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'-3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 19- Hamiltonia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 suaveolens, Roxb. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' -12' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Kalimat, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
 20 Leptodermis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceolata, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Binsar, &c. 
 
 e P 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Dudatoli 
 
 21- Spermacoce- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lasiocarpa, Hr. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September. Almora 
 
 articularis, L. f. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 • • * | 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Do. 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 495 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 .*• t 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Kainy. 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 6—7,000. 
 
 K. 
 
 III 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Hedy otis No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •i 
 
 — Ophiorrhiza No. 1 in Herb S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 hi 
 
 
 Open ••• 
 
 4-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ss Gardenia No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4-500 
 
 R. 
 
 * * 
 
 
 —Spermacoce No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 
 Do. in 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * ' ' 
 
 ... 
 
 W. 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 2-3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1-2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2,5-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5-8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ..« 
 
 
 By water 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 —Borreria lasiocarpa in Herb.S. 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 •••* 
 
 & W . 
 
i-iima'layan districts 
 
 49 G 
 
 List of K umaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 22. Rubia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cordifolia, L. 
 Manjista, Roxl>. 
 
 1 
 
 H sc. 
 
 6'-10' 
 
 R. 
 
 July 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 3' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Niti 
 
 Edgewortliii, Hovk.(r )• 
 
 3 
 
 H. pr. 
 
 6' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sar ju valley ... 
 
 23. Galium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 triflorum, Mich. v. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Dwa- 
 li, Milam. 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 2 & 8 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 2 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. & June 
 
 Naini Tal, Ka- 
 lirnundi, Rur 
 Pass. 
 
 Mollugo, L. 
 
 3, 5, 9, 
 
 H. sc 
 
 2'— 14' 
 
 R. Pk. 
 
 June, Au- 
 gust. 
 
 Gori valley, 
 
 Rainni, Bin- 
 sar, Girgaon. 
 
 sp 
 
 4 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 2 r 
 
 
 August ., 
 
 Binsar, Milam, 
 
 acutum, Edgeiu. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. sc 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Badarinath ... 
 
 aparine, L. ... 
 
 7 
 
 H. sc 
 
 3'— 5' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam, Niti ... 
 
 hirtiflorum, Req. 
 
 10 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 3' 
 
 Ml 
 
 May 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 LIX — Y ALERIA N- 
 CE^E. 
 
 I. Triptostegia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glandulifera, Wall. ... 
 
 • i • 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 KalimundiPase, 
 
 2, Valeriana. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hardwickii, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra- 
 lam valley. 
 
 var.— 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 12" — 15" 
 
 . . • 
 
 Do. 
 
 Milam, Niti ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Bompras 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 • • » 
 
 
 Garhwal 
 
 Wallichii, DC. ... 
 
 5, 6 
 
 II. 
 
 9" — 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March, 
 
 May. 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal, Madhari 
 Pass. 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
©1? THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 497 
 
 
 Plants — (continued)- 
 
 1 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 t 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 O pen 
 
 5-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 I 
 
 • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 • «« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Shade St open, 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 HI 
 
 
 Do. St woods ... 
 
 5—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 tk« 
 
 * • % 
 
 
 Shade St open... 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 
 Do, ««• 
 
 7 — 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 DO. BOO 
 
 1—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ■ •« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *•« 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » i • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. *o* 
 
 6-8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 ••• 
 
 D. 
 
 .01 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 IM 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 • •r 
 
 R. 
 
 HI 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 | 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 »»« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 -# - — 
 6‘d 
 
41)8 
 
 'himAlay'an districts 
 
 List of Kumaun 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3. Nardostachys- 
 
 Jatamansi, DC. ... 
 
 1 & 2 
 
 H, 
 
 9"-l¥ 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalam, Milam, 
 
 LX. — DIPSACEJE. 
 
 1, Scabiosa- 
 
 Candolleana, Wall., 
 
 
 IP. 
 
 \ ' 
 
 liVll. 
 
 April 
 
 Pindar i. 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 2. Dipsacns. 
 
 inermis, Coult. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 4' -6' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Binsar, &c. ... 
 
 3. Morina- 
 
 longifolia, M all. ... 
 
 1 
 
 PI. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Kalam, Pindari, 
 
 persica, L. 
 
 2 
 
 IP. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 J une 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Coulteriana, Boyle , 
 
 8 
 
 PL, 
 
 1 1 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 J uly 
 
 Bampa 
 
 LXI.— COMPOSITE 
 
 1. Vernonia- 
 
 anthelmintica, T Villd. 
 
 1 
 
 H, 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 cinerea, Less. 
 
 2 
 
 H, 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Do., &c. ... 
 
 2. Adenostemma. 
 
 Yiscosum, Font. ... 
 
 3 
 
 IP, 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Gori river 
 
 Yar. elatum, Don, 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 „ latifolinm, 
 
 Don 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Do. 
 
 3. Eupatorrum- 
 
 Reevesii, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 PI. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Kalimat, Binsar, 
 
 cannabinum, L. ... 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 rar. indi visum ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 4. Solidago. 
 
 Virga aurea, L. ... 
 
 
 IP. 
 
 3'-4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
OF THE' NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 499 
 
 giants — (continued) , 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 >■ 
 
 O 
 
 •§- 
 
 4*. 
 
 <D 
 
 QJ 
 
 O <U 
 
 V 
 
 <3 CL> 
 
 O +a 
 
 S. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya, 
 
 | Tibet. 
 
 Remarks.' 
 
 V 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Sh 
 
 ft 
 
 ©pen' ... 
 
 12,5—13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 <•< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 Open 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • e 
 
 tea 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ■ X 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 r % 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 6- 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R*. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6_7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « . « 
 
 ... 
 
 
500 * 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U i 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'oh 
 
 
 Name, 
 
 3 d 
 e ' 3 ^ 
 
 a si 
 
 4^> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 r-* 
 
 fcJD 
 
 4-3 
 
 § 
 
 Fh 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 trt 
 
 .3 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 trt 
 
 
 
 p 71 « 
 
 .-H ^ +3 
 
 n cS O 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 >> 
 
 
 S £ & 
 ’gco.S 
 
 4-3 
 
 • i— < 
 
 rO 
 
 rCT 
 
 *4 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 rt 
 
 4-3 
 
 "oS 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 CD 
 
 K 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 •r— ♦ 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 1-3 
 
 5, Dicrocephala- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 latifolia, DC. 
 
 h 2 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal, Al- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mora, &e. 
 
 6, Cyathocline- 
 
 lyrata, Cass. 
 
 ••• » 
 
 H. 
 
 l'-li' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 [February, 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 7. Myriactis- 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Less. ... 
 Gmelini, DC. 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 1 r — 2 r 
 
 W. Y. 
 Li. 
 
 « 
 
 August ... 
 Bo. ... 
 
 Almora, Bwali, 
 Naim Tal, &c.. 
 
 8. Rhyncospermpm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Terti eillatam, 
 Beinw. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 September, 
 
 Binsar 
 
 9, Aster. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tricephalus, C. B. 
 Clarke. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 B1 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Milam, Nairn 
 Tal. 
 
 Kalam 
 
 diplostep h i o i d e 3, 
 
 BP7l1.ll. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 9" —12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Bo. ... 
 
 molliusculus, Benth ., 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Li. 
 
 May 
 
 Common 
 
 Thomsoni, C. B. 
 Clarice. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 l'-2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Gangoli, &c. ... 
 
 asp e viilus, Nets 
 tibeticus, Hook f. 
 Stracheyi, Hook. f,„. 
 
 t • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 9" 
 
 2" 
 
 1 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Li. 
 
 ? 
 
 Bo. 
 
 September, 
 October ... 
 
 Ralam river ... 
 Laptel 
 
 Pindari 
 
 10. Erigeron. 
 
 acre, L. 
 
 trt • 
 
 < 
 
 1 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 var. monticola ... 
 
 „ alpinum 
 „ multi caule ... 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 u. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" | 
 6" ! 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 April ...1 
 August ... 
 
 £alimat 
 
 Bompras 
 
 Naim Tal, &e. 
 
 mul tiradiatum, 
 Benth. 
 
 6 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. ... ; 
 
 tfaini Tal, 
 
 Sp, ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 8" 
 
 Li. 
 
 July ... ] 
 
 Budatoli. 
 £alajawar, Niti 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 501 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Open near 
 ■water 
 
 Open 
 
 Woods 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Woods 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 Do. 
 W oods 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 5 — 8,000 
 
 5,6—10,000 
 
 6,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 13.000 
 6,-8,500 
 
 6,000 
 
 9,000 
 
 15.000 
 12—12,500 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 5,5—7,000 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 14—17,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • » 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Leptocoma raoemosa in Herb, 
 S. & W. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 = Erigeron, No. 3 in Herb S & W. 
 
 = Diplopappus No. 6 in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 = Diplopappus No. 1 in Herb- 
 S. & W. 
 
 = Calimeris flexuosa in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 = DiplopappusNo. 2 in Herb. S & W, 
 = Heteroc/iceta No. 2 in Plerb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 = Heterchceta No. 1 in Herb, 
 S. & W. 
 
 i 
 
502 
 
 MTMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kurnaon, 
 
 
 o pj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bb 
 
 
 
 
 rd 
 
 +3 
 
 
 
 
 Name; 
 
 _ a 
 
 as s 
 
 = oS 
 (.So 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 r— ( 
 
 bJO 
 
 O 
 
 c3 
 
 «H 
 
 O 
 
 -♦-3 
 
 rCl 
 
 o> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 tp. 
 
 <4H 
 
 o- 
 
 r— < 
 
 o> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 iC 
 
 
 u CO O 
 
 Qj ^ 
 
 *Jq 
 
 c3 
 
 .Sf 
 
 '8 
 
 rjJ 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 ■ H 
 
 
 W 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 _ 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 Hi 
 
 11. Microglossa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 albescens, C. B. 
 Clarke. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. Sh 
 
 . 2'-— 3* 
 
 Li. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Dugli, Tola .. 
 
 12. Conyza- 
 
 japonica, Less. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March . . 
 
 Aim ora, Naini 
 
 viscidula, Wall. 
 absinthifolia, DC. ... 
 sp- 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 H. Sh. 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 August ... 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 Almora, Saba, 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 ; 9"— -12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Bo. ... 
 
 Pajhoti, lia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lam 
 
 13. Blumea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lacera, DC. 
 
 4 
 
 T-T 
 
 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 Do. 
 
 Garhwal 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 laciniata, DC. 
 oxyodonta, DC. 
 aromatica, DC. 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 8" =9" 
 S' 
 
 3/ 
 
 ... 
 
 March 
 
 March 
 
 14. Laggera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 alata, Benth. 
 pterodonta, Benth. 
 aurita, Benth. ? ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H 
 
 3' 
 
 4'— 5'- 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September,. 
 
 March 
 
 Kapkot 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 ? 
 
 15, Sphseranthus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indicus, L. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora 
 
 16. Leontopodiiim- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 alpinum, Cass. 
 sp. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 1J" 
 1"~ 1J"' 
 
 
 August ... 
 Do. 
 
 Uhor-hoti Pass, 
 Valleys in 
 
 >5 
 
 „ var. Stracheyi, 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 1'— 1J/ 
 
 ... 
 
 Do '...] 
 Do r 
 
 Guge 
 
 lalam 
 
 Cola 
 
 17. Anaphalis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cinnamonea, Benth., 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. |S 
 
 September, I 
 
 linsar, Naini 
 
 trip! iner vis, Sims..., 
 nubigena, DC. 
 
 12 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. i 
 Wh. 
 
 August ...I 
 Do. ..Jl 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Jinsar 
 
 larjikang, To- 
 
 cortorta, Hooh.f. ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pidhunga. 
 
 3, 4, 8 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 1 ' 
 
 Wh -{s 
 
 Do. ...C 
 
 lothi ng. AI- 
 
 
 
 
 
 eptember. 
 
 mora, &c 
 

 
 s 
 
504 
 
 him a'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 l 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Anaphalis— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( conoid .). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ehion.au tha, DC. ,, 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 12" -16" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Tola, M i 1 a m, 
 
 var. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. . 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 adnata, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'~1J' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 intermedia, DC. ... 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh 
 
 August . . . 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 5 
 
 Ii. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Dhauli valley, 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 • 
 
 Tk. 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari 
 
 18, Phagnalon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 niveum, Edgew. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 J une 
 
 Samangentlia... 
 
 19. Gnaphalium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hypoleucum, DC. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 ixr 
 
 1 2 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Alrnora, Kathi, 
 
 luteo-album, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 Y, 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 indicum, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 20, Csesulia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 axillaris, Roxb. 
 
 21. Inula- 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 »•* 
 
 September, 
 
 Kota, Retagar, 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Alrnora, Hard- 
 war. 
 
 nervosa, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September, 
 
 Kapkot, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 barbata, Wall. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Raiam river ... 
 
 Cappa, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 IT. 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 ■ . • 
 
 March ... 
 
 Pyura, &c. ... 
 
 cnspidata, Hf.fy 7’., 
 
 6 
 
 Sh, 
 
 4'— 6' 
 
 Y. 
 
 F ebruary, 
 
 Alrnora, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 o I f 
 
 Y. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 22. Vicoa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 auriculata, Cass. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Y - 
 
 March ... 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 23, Carpesium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cernuum, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 var. pedunculosum, 
 
 , . • 
 
 . . • 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 abrotanoides, L. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 • •• 
 
 August .. 
 
 VL o li a r g a r i 
 Pass, Binsar. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 505 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 . 
 
 <x> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 
 PQ 
 
 aua. 
 
 
 
 • f* 
 
 o 
 
 GO 
 
 +3 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 4-1 
 
 
 
 
 
 *+H 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 on 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 Remai’ks. 
 
 o 
 
 O CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 4-3 
 • H 
 
 nd 
 
 d 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 +3 
 
 £ 2 
 <U +a 
 
 S 
 
 1 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Open 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ? 
 
 . . . 
 
 D.' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,5-8,000 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,600 
 
 R. 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 Rice fields 
 
 2—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,5 - 7,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,5 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 * • < 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 64 
 
506 
 
 'Himalayan districts 
 
 List qf Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 24- Adenocatslon- 
 
 bicolor, Hook,, 
 
 • • « 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 -Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Paton 
 
 25- Xanthium. 
 
 Strumarium, L. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 June , . . 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 26. Siegesbeckia- 
 
 orientalis, L. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jalat 
 
 27- Eclipta 0 
 
 alba, Hassk, 
 
 
 H. 
 
 H' 
 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 28- Blainvillea. 
 
 lati folia, DC. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 S. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Do. 
 
 29- Bidens. 
 
 tripartita, LL~ ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 pilosa, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February, 
 
 Ramganga r i- 
 
 decomposita, Wall., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Augu st ... 
 
 ver, &c. 
 Almora, &c. 
 
 30- Galinsoga- 
 
 parviflora, Cav. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 All the 
 
 Do. 
 
 31- Allardia. 
 
 glabra, Dene. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 year. 
 
 July 
 
 Chorhoti Pass, 
 
 tomentosa, Dene. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4 " -5" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, &c. 
 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Balchha Pass... 
 
 32- Chrysanthel- 
 liim. 
 
 indicum, DC. 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 5" 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 33. Cotula, 
 
 hemispherica, Wall., 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Patli Dun 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 507 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 h 
 
 o 
 
 •§ 
 
 o 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 •4-i 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 g 
 
 -M 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in f € 
 the sea. 
 
 j Rainy. 
 
 b 
 
 ft 
 
 a> 
 
 A 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forests 
 
 5—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • % 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6-6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Naturalized in 
 gardens. 
 
 6 — 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • 
 
 Open' 
 
 16,600 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 • » * 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 16—17,000 
 
 to 
 
 * ' ' 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • » • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 tsMachHs kcemispherica in Herb 
 S. & W. 
 
508 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 34, Tanacetum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nubigenum, Wall.... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 V 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Pindari, Tung- 
 nath. 
 
 tibeticum, Hf. §• T., 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Milam ... 
 
 longifolium, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Pindari, Tung- 
 nath. 
 
 tomentosum, DC. ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Gothing 
 
 gracile, H. J $ T. . . . 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 September, 
 
 Satlaj river 
 
 in Guge 
 
 35- Artemisia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 scoparia, W. Sf K. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Hawalbagli ... 
 
 stricta, Edgew. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ho. ... 
 
 Milam, She- 
 long. 
 
 maritima, L. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 . . • 
 
 Ho. ... 
 
 Jelam ... 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 Common 
 
 Bacrorum, Ledeb. ... 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 September, 
 
 Satlaj river 
 
 in Gugd. 
 
 var. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Br. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tola, Milam ... 
 
 vulgaris, L. 
 Roxburgbiana, Bess, 
 
 2, 8, 9, 14 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—3' 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Almora, Ke- 
 darnath. 
 
 var, grata 
 
 3, 7 
 
 II. 
 
 3' 
 
 Br. 
 
 Do. ,.. 
 
 Binsar, Ralam 
 
 fasciculata, Bieb. ... 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 September, 
 
 valley. 
 
 Satlaj valley in 
 
 hypoleuca, Edgew. . . . 
 
 12, 13 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gugd. 
 
 Milam, Shelong, 
 Satlaj valley 
 in Gugd, Ba- 
 darinath. 
 
 Stracheyi, Hf. &f 7 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Manasarowar... 
 
 macrobotrys, Ledeb. 
 
 18 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 1 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Milam, Topi- 
 dhunga. 
 
 sp* ■ , ••• 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •1 
 
 36- Tnssilago- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Farfara, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Vlay 
 
 Dwali Pindari, 
 
 37- Doronicum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iloylei, DC. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 14' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tuugnath 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 509 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 c5 
 
 • rH 
 
 o 
 
 oo 
 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea, 
 
 Hivid- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 OQ 
 
 o 
 
 • r— 1 
 
 >r 3 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 n 
 
 Pi 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ®e 
 
 18,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 an 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13,500 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 13,500 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • II 
 
 4—11,500 
 
 R, 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 11 — 12,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 12—13,500 
 
 ... 
 
 T, 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 1 — 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 11—13,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 =A Roxburghiana, Bess. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 14 - 15,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 » • 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •i 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open, debris .. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 r~ *1 
 
 1 
 
 oo 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • • 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = D. P ardalianches in Ilerb. S. & Vi 
 
 . 
 
510 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Name. 
 
 38 Gynura. 
 nepalensis, DC. ... 
 3 9. Em ilia. 
 
 sonchifolia, DC. ... 
 
 40- Senecio. 
 
 alatus, Wall. ... 
 
 rufinervis, DC. ... 
 
 Kunthianus, Wall., 
 Candolleanus, Wall., 
 graciliflorus, DC., 
 c h r y santhemoides, 
 DC. 
 
 diversifolius, Wall., 
 nudicaulis, Ham. 
 coronopifolius, Desf. 
 pedunculatus, 
 Edgew. 
 
 Ligularia, Hook. f. ... 
 arnicoides, Wall. ... 
 
 41- Werneria- 
 
 nana, Benlh. 
 
 42- Echinops- 
 cornigerus, DC. ... 
 niveus, Wall. 
 
 43. Carduus. 
 
 nutans, L. ... 
 
 yar. lucida ... 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Or. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 August , . . 
 
 N a i n i T a 1, 
 Kathi, Rdlam. 
 
 T 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 N a i n i T a 1, 
 Kathi 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam riyer ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 11'— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Pindari 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Pindari, Ralam, 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 l' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Gothing 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Binsar, &c. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 12"— 18" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 September, 
 
 Rakas Tal, 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Shelshel 
 Malari, Niti. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam river, 
 Dudatoli. 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Sajhoti, Chor- 
 hoti,andNxti 
 Passes. 
 
 III 
 
 H. 
 
 4"' 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. .., 
 
 Rajboti and 
 
 Chor ho t i 
 Passes. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do* iM 1 
 
 1 
 
 Bhim-ud i y a r, 
 Malari. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 February, , 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Galana ... 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 511 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 -tfe 
 
 cJ 
 
 (D 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 / 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 P ■ 
 
 Open 
 
 -2,5—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .»• ■ 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 8—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ••1 
 
 • •* 
 
 
 Woods *.■ 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do, ••• 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 9 — 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml' 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 >•» 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—11,500 
 
 • a. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Ligularia No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 16—17,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 it. 
 
 T. 
 
 = Ligularia No. 4 inHerb. S, & W. 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 . 16—17,000 
 
 ... 
 
 
 T. 
 
 Ligularia No. 8 inHerb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. »< 
 
 . 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. • 
 
 .. 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Fields , 
 
 12,000 
 
 R 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 
512 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Height of growth. 
 
 Habit of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 44- Cnicus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arvensis, Hoffm, ••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 II . 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March 
 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 eriophorus, Hoffm., 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 involucratus, DC..., 
 
 
 H. 
 
 G r 
 
 Pr. W. 
 
 August 
 
 
 Jalat, Ralam 
 
 var. horrida .. • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 river. 
 
 argyracanth us, 
 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 Pr. W. 
 
 April 
 
 
 Naini Tal, Ra- 
 
 Benth. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lam. 
 
 var. nepalensis ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 H. 
 
 6 r 
 
 Pr. W. 
 
 August 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 Walliehii, Benth. ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 H. 
 
 6' 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 > 
 
 Lohathal, Al- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mora. 
 
 45 . Saussurea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 obvallata, Wall. ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Mt 
 
 Pindari, Barji- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 kang Pass. 
 
 braeteata, Dene. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3"- 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 . • . 
 
 Balchha Pass, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lanjar. 
 
 Kunthiana, Wall.... 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2"- 3" 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ralam, Kala- 
 
 sorocephala H.f , 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 3" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 
 
 jawar. 
 
 Sf T- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • i. 
 
 Balchha Pass... 
 
 eossypiphora, Don,.. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Barjikang, Ke- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 darnath. 
 
 graminifolia, Wall., 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3" — 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 *• • 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 Candolleana, Wall.... 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 3 r 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 Pindari 
 
 piptathera, Eclgew., 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 1 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 candicans, Clarke ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 l'—2 r 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 1 » . 
 
 II a w a 1 b a gh, 
 
 albescens, Hf .$ T., 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 
 
 
 Naini Tal. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 August 
 
 • •• 
 
 Josimath, Ga- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gar. 
 
 denticulata, Wall.,,, 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 4 r 
 
 Pr. Br. 
 
 Do. 
 
 *•< 
 
 Dwali, Ralam, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Niti. 
 
 hypoleuca, Spreng., 
 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Jalat, See. 
 
 deltoidea, Clarke ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6 ' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do- 
 
 • it 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 II. 
 
 1" — 2" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 Unta-dhura ... 
 
 99 ' ••• 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 3"< — 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Balchha Pass... 
 
 99 ' ' 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 »•• 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Plain of Guge, 
 
 „ ... 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 IM 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 Gothing 
 
 46. Jurinea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macr oeephala, 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ralam, Pin- 
 
 Benth. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dari. 
 
 47- Serratula- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 pallida, DC. 
 
 IM 
 
 H. 
 
 1£'— 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Ml 
 
 Binsar, Gagar, 
 
 1 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 513 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 H ill 
 layt 
 
 >> 
 
 a 
 
 '3 
 
 P3 
 
 d- 
 
 l. 
 
 rH 
 
 ft 
 
 Eields 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 i 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ©pen 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »• 1 
 
 Do. »*• 
 
 4,5-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7 — 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 12,5—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 III 
 
 Do* • • • 
 
 16 — 17,000 
 
 t a • 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,5—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D, 
 
 Do. 
 
 16—17,000 
 
 ... 
 
 
 DO. r«i 
 
 12—14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Banks ... 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 P. 
 
 • a o 
 
 Open 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7 — 40,000 
 
 Ml 
 
 D. 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 6 -7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 16,000 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 16,000 
 
 • «• 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 16.000 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 - 4 — > 
 
 CD 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Cirsium No. 4| in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 — Cirsium No. 3 in Herb. S. & W". 
 
 = Cir siu'n No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Cirsium No 1 in Herb S. & W. 
 = Cirsium No. 4 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 — Aplotaxis No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 -Aplotaxis No. 6 in Herb. S. & W. 
 = Aplotaxis No. 5 in Herb. S & W. 
 
 = Dolomieea macrocephala in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 65 
 
514 
 
 'HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 
 M 1 
 
 s.a 
 
 
 
 
 [' 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bi) 
 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 fl 
 
 e3 • 
 
 * 
 
 4-3 
 
 u 
 
 Jh 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 a s s 
 
 3 o £ 
 "go 
 
 !r< B. A 
 
 o 
 
 be 
 
 ‘H 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 ‘,3 
 
 Ph 
 
 M-f 
 
 O 
 
 4-3 
 
 rP 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 i-< 
 
 53 
 
 O 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 '33 
 
 qn 
 
 O 
 
 <u 
 
 a 
 
 4-=» 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 _ a 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 bA 
 
 48- Tricholepis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f areata, DC. 
 elongata, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Hardol Pass ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Buff 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 49- Caithamtis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tinetorius, L. 
 
 III 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 50- Lencomeris. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 epectabilis, Don ... 
 
 ... 
 
 S. Tr. 
 
 10'— 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Ho. i»* 
 
 51. Ainslisea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pteropoda, DC. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Id. 
 
 i*' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Naim Tal, &c.„ 
 
 aptera, DC. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Gagar, &c. ••• 
 
 52- Gerbera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanuginosa, Benth., 
 
 • • • 
 
 Id. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Naini Tal, &c, 
 
 macrophylla, Wall., 
 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 December, 
 
 Binsar, &c. ... 
 
 53. Pieris. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hieracioides, L. ... 
 
 m 
 
 Id. 
 
 14'— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Tola, Niti, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Byansi. 
 
 54. Crepis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 feetida, L. ... 
 
 ««• 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 8" 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora, &c. . 
 
 japonica, Benth. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 glauca, Benth. 
 glomerata, Dene. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 in 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 • • • 
 
 Y. 
 
 • •• 
 
 September, 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 Milam, Niti ... 
 BarjikangPass. 
 
 55- Taraxacum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dens-leonis, Desf., 
 
 »•» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. eriopodum ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 A 1 l"*t he 
 
 Ralam, Naini 
 
 „ paryulum ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Y. 
 
 year. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Tal. 
 
 99 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Niti 
 
 99 * ••• 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 [ 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Kyangar Pass, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES; 
 
 515 
 
 F l ants — (continued) . 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 Hinia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 •a. 
 
 c3 
 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 xo 
 
 
 -4J- 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks.. 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 
 o g 
 
 
 
 
 
 *4-» 
 
 % 
 
 
 •43 « 
 c3 a> 
 
 
 
 433 
 
 © 
 
 
 Cr 
 
 o 
 
 
 © 4-3 
 
 - S' 
 
 & 
 
 S-l~ 
 
 ft 
 
 S' 
 
 
 Op on 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 »OB 
 
 5,500 
 
 K. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 ... 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Dry, op m 
 
 • •• 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 9 •• 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 6,5—7,500 
 
 K. 
 
 . . • 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Open rocks 
 
 • • • 
 
 6 5 — 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 =Oreoseris lanuginosa in Herb. 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 • •1 
 
 6,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 = Bern-' era nepahnsis in Herb. 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7,5—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Barkhausia foetida in Herb, 
 
 
 
 
 
 S & W. 
 
 Do 
 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Yd ung i a No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 0 • 
 
 11—12,500 
 
 ... 
 
 b. 
 
 • . . 
 
 = Youngia No. 2 in Herb. S & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 14,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 •• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 »«• 
 
 7-10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 b. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 5—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 no 
 
 16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 . • i- 
 
 . . • 
 
 
HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 5X6 
 
 Name. 
 
 56- Lactuca. 
 
 obtusa, Fenth. 
 
 dissecta, Don 
 longifolia, DC. 
 
 sagittarioides, C. B. 
 Clarke 
 
 Brunoniana, Wall., 
 
 gracili flora, DC. ... 
 
 macrorhiza, Hook, f., 
 
 var. saxatilis 
 
 Lessertiana, Wall ...... 
 
 Dubysea, Benth. ... 
 ap. 
 
 57- Sonchiis. 
 
 asper, Vill. 
 arvensis, L. 
 
 58- Tragopogon. 
 
 gracile, Don. 
 
 LXIII.- CAMPANU- 
 
 LACEAE. 
 
 1. Lobelia. 
 
 Wallicbiana, Hf. 
 
 fr T. 
 
 pyramidalis, Wall., 
 trialata, Ham. 
 
 2. Cephalostigma 
 
 hirsutum, Eilgew ... 
 
 3- Wahlenbergia. 
 
 gracilis, DC. 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Stracheyand Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit pf growth. 
 
 Pleight of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 l'-OJ' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Almora, &c. .. 
 
 3 
 
 PI. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Eamganga val- 
 ley, Almora. 
 
 1,4 
 
 H. 
 
 l r — ]*' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gangoli 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Li. 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1 >. g' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 llalam, Milam, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kalam, Niti ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 n r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Niti 
 
 ... 
 
 PI. 
 
 H'—8' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Niti, valleys of 
 Guga, P.alam. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Saba, Pindari, 
 
 * * * 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Sar ju valley .. . 
 
 2 
 
 ii. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 February, 
 
 Ditto 
 
 « •+ 
 
 II. 
 
 G"— 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora 
 
 1 
 
 H, 
 
 4 r 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 2 
 
 PI. 
 
 6' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Namik,Jagesar, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Dhanpur . . 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 2" 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 2 
 
 II, 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. | 
 
 1 
 
 if arch ... 
 
 Almora 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued) > 
 
 517 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 O 
 
 Hlma- 
 
 
 
 od 
 
 o 3 
 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-H 
 
 o 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 S-a 
 
 • r~ < 
 
 Pi 
 
 evatio 
 the sei 
 
 g 
 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 os 
 
 P 
 
 H 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 , , , 
 
 . . . 
 
 = M icrorhy nchus No. 1 in Herb. 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,550 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5.500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • * ’ 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 — Melanoseris No. 4 ^ in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 7,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 -. . 
 
 = Prenantkes Nos. 1 & 3 in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 S & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 = Mulgedium gracilifiorum in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 — Melanoseris No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 = Melnnoseris No. 4 in Herb. S. & 
 W. 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 12—16,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 = Melanoseris Nos. 2 & 3 in Herb. 
 S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 9—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Dubt/cea hispida in Herb. S. & W 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . * 
 
 . . . 
 
 =iM icrorhy nchus No. 2 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 5 - 
 
 
 . • « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5— 6,00C 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 — 6,00C 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = L. pyramidalis in H. Ind. iii., 
 
 Forest 
 
 6 — 7,001 
 
 » R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 p. 426. 
 
 Fields 
 
 6,001 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5,00( 
 
 j R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,00( 
 
 l R. 
 
 
 
 — Campanula No. 11 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
518 
 
 H IM A' LAYAN D ISTR ICTg 
 
 Name, 
 
 3- Wahlenbergia. 
 
 •—(concluded'). 
 peduncularis, A. DC. 
 
 6 p. 
 
 4- Codonopsis- 
 
 purpurea, Wall. ... 
 lurida, Lindt. 
 viridis, Wall. ... 
 
 5- Cyananthus- 
 
 lobatus, Wall. 
 linifolius, W all. ... 
 integer, Wall. 
 
 6 Campanula. 
 
 latifolia, L. ... 
 
 argyrotricha, Wall., 
 aristata, Wall. 
 
 cana, Wall. 
 camosa, Wall. 
 cashmiriana, Royle, 
 ramulosa, 14 all. ... 
 sylvatica, Wall. ... 
 canescens, Wall. ... 
 eolorata, Wall. 
 
 LNIV.— ERICACEAE 
 
 1- Gaultheria- 
 
 trichophylla, Royle. 
 nummularioides, 
 
 Don 
 
 2 Cassiope. 
 
 fastigiata, Don ... 
 
 3- Andromeda. 
 
 ovalifolia, Wall. ... 
 villosa Wall. 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Straehey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Hahit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3 
 
 PI. 
 
 4" 
 
 Li. 
 
 May 
 
 Chaur 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3"- — 4" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 FT. sc. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Lahathat ... 
 
 2 
 
 H sc. 
 
 4' 
 
 Pr. Gr. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Palam river .. 
 
 3 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Gr. Br. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Rathi, Kalimun- 
 di Pass. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Bl, 
 
 August ... 
 
 Pindari, Ralam 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 3 
 
 Ii. 
 
 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Rur Pass ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi Pass, 
 &c. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Champwa, Niti 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Shargcha, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 4, 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 10" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 5 
 
 II. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 MadhariPass . 
 
 6 
 
 II. 
 
 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Niti ... 
 
 9 
 
 II. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Lahathal, &c., 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Binsar, &c. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 10" 
 
 Bl 
 
 March 
 
 Almora 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3" -4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 9' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Lahur ... 
 
 HI 
 
 Sh, 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June #t . J 
 
 ?indari, & c. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'' 
 
 Wh. , 
 
 lune .. 
 
 Haini Tal, &c., 
 logila 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. jJune „. ] 
 
•OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 519 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 *6 
 
 
 \> 
 
 O 
 
 _Q 
 
 Himd- 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 c3 
 
 4-3 
 
 D 
 
 lai/a. 
 
 
 
 CQ 
 
 
 O-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 GQ 
 
 
 ri 
 
 • pH 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 
 S c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 ••pH 
 
 4-3 
 
 '» pH 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 > J3 
 
 CD 4-3 
 
 S 
 
 .s 
 
 s 
 
 >> 
 
 •n 
 
 A 
 
 <u 
 
 £> 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 = Campanula No. 8 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,000 
 
 R 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 R 
 
 1 • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 = C. rotundifolia, Benlh ? 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 *• • 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • i t 
 
 12—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open rocks 
 
 • • • 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 8,5—11,000 
 
 R 
 
 D. 
 
 in 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 8—1 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 «»• 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Peracarpa carnosa, H. F. Sf 1 , 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 12—13,000 
 
 6—12,000 
 
 ... 
 
 R- 
 
 D. 
 
 •HI 
 
 • » 
 
 = C. color ata No. 13 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »•* 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 5,500 
 
 R, 
 
 • » » 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 in 
 
 
 Open banks 
 
 • •• 
 
 10— 12,00C 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,5— 10.00C 
 
 • 
 
 R 
 
 • «« 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 11— 14,50( 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 5— 9,00( 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *• • 
 
 - Pieris No. 1 in Herb, S. & W. 
 
 Do, 
 
 0* 
 
 10,000^ R. 
 
 • n 
 
 
 = Ditto No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
520 
 
 HIM /LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant, 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 4- Rhododendron- 
 
 
 
 
 
 lepidotum, Wail. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1"— li" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 anthopogon, Don ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 campanulatum, Don 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Li. 
 
 nobile, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 
 ? 
 
 5 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 R. 
 
 barbatum, G. Don, 
 
 6 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 25' 
 
 R. 
 
 arboreum, Sm. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 var. roseum 
 
 7 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 R. 
 
 ,, puniceum ... 
 
 8 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25'— 40' 
 
 R. ] 
 
 LXV.-PRIMUL- 
 
 ACEJ5. 
 
 1. Primula- 
 
 
 
 
 
 speciosa, Don ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 i'— H' 
 
 Pr. i 
 
 denticulata, Sm. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 i' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 capitata, Hook. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. ] 
 
 Stuartii, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Pr. . 
 
 Moorcroftiana, Wall., 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 3" -4" 
 
 Pr. i; 
 
 sibirica, Jacquem. .. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 1 f li' 
 
 I 1 2 
 
 Pr. j 
 
 var. tibetica 
 
 15 
 
 II. 
 
 1" 
 
 Pr. £ 
 
 floribunda, Wall. ... 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Y. J 
 
 pulverulenta,i?<A/ea>., 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 1 
 
 nana, Wall. ... 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. A 
 
 sulphurea, Hookf... 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pr. I 
 
 petiolaris, Wall. ... 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6"i 
 
 Pr. A 
 
 autumnalis, Hook.f. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pr. C 
 
 Stracheyi, Hook. f. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 irr 
 
 2 
 
 Pr. ; 
 
 minutissima, Jac- 
 
 
 
 
 
 quem. ... 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 i rr 
 
 4 
 
 Pr. J 
 
 2. Androsace- 
 
 
 
 
 
 rotundifolia, Hardw., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Wh. F 
 
 incisa, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. A 
 
 lanuginosa, Wall.... 
 
 3 
 
 H.rn. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. a 
 
 sarmentosa, Wall.... 
 Jacquemontii, Duby, 
 
 4 1 
 
 H.rn. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Pk. J 
 
 5, 10 
 
 H.rn. 
 
 1"— 3" 
 
 Pk. Pr. A 
 
 pedicillata, Royle ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk Afl 
 
 a 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 *4— I 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 * — < 
 
 H 
 
 June 
 
 +-a 
 
 *65 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Hi 
 
 February, 
 
 Pindari, Bom- 
 pras. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Pindari, &c. ... 
 
 Champwa 
 
 Jhuni 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 i •• 
 
 Namik 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 Pindari, Raj- 
 hoti. 
 
 Pindari, &c. ... 
 Niti Pass 
 Pindari, Niti, 
 &c. 
 
 G-yanima ... 
 Naini Tal 
 Madhari Pass, 
 Champwa, Pin- 
 dari. 
 
 Suring 
 
 Aladhari pass... 
 Namik 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 Bompras. 
 
 Plains, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 Almora 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 Ralam, &c. ... 
 
 Topi dli ung a 
 Hangar. 
 Dwali 
 
V>F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 521 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 ■Open 
 
 IOI 
 
 9—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 •10—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Osinotliamnus in Herb. S. & W« 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 00 
 
 9—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 •e • 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 in 
 
 9—10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 **• 
 
 ••• . 
 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ■ •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ••• 
 
 4—10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 "Near water 
 
 »*» 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,5—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • •• 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 0 9 
 
 11,5—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • «■ 
 
 16,800 
 
 
 • «i 
 
 . T. 
 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 • •• 
 
 11—16.000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 • 0 • 
 
 15,500 
 
 • «■« 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Wet banks 
 
 • •• 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 • • 0 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 • •• 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • »• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 12,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ■Shady banks'... 
 
 4,500 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open & woods, 
 
 9—12,000 
 
 1 K - 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Woods, wet 
 
 • •0 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 «•• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 It • 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 • •» 
 
 1— 3,00C 
 
 R. 
 
 • •i 
 
 !•• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 «» 
 
 5— 7,50C 
 
 > R. 
 
 • •« 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 DO 
 
 6 — 7,500 R. 
 
 .«« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. banks .. 
 
 8— 12,00( 
 
 ) 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • 
 
 15— 17,00( 
 
 ) ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 •• 
 
 8,00( 
 
 ,|B. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 • 
 
 66 
 
522 
 
 HIMA’LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 f 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 2- Androsace— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( concluded ). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Tr. 
 
 July 
 
 Bampa, Nvti ... 
 
 villosa, L. 
 
 8, 11 
 
 H. st. 
 
 l" — 2" 
 
 l J r. 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Rogila, 
 G Hire. 
 
 globifera, Duby. ... 
 
 3- Lysimachia- 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 debilis, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 IT. cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Gagar " ... 
 
 pyramidalis, Wa 11 , 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H f 
 
 Dk. 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 n. 
 
 4" — G" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 Dwali. 
 
 al term folia, Wall., 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 G" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, See. ... 
 
 lobelioides., W all., 
 
 4- Anagnathis- 
 
 6 
 
 II. 
 
 H' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 4 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 arvensis, L. ... 
 
 • •1 
 
 H. 
 
 G" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 LXYI. — MYRSINA- 
 CEJE. 
 
 1- Msesa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 argentea, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5'— 6' 
 
 Ml 
 
 May 
 
 • 
 
 Binsar 
 
 indica, A. DC. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 • •• 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota, outer 
 hills. 
 
 2- Myrsine. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bifaria, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 R. 
 
 February, 
 
 Binsar, &c &c., 
 
 semiserrata, Wall., 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 20' 
 
 ••i 
 
 March ... 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 3- Embelia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 robusta, Boxb. ... 
 
 III 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 in 
 
 ... 
 
 Kota- Dun ... 
 
 4- Ardisia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 floribunda, Wall. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Below : Binsar, 
 
 humilis, Vahl. ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 mi 
 
 • • • 
 
 Punagiri ... 
 
 LXVII.— SAPOTA- 
 CE2ES. 
 
 1. Bassia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 buiyracea, Roxb. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 35' 
 
 • • • 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 ep. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 ... 
 
 January ... 
 
 Sarju r alley ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 523 
 
 6 
 
 « r—* 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 >> 
 
 O 
 
 & 
 
 cd 
 
 -1-3 
 
 a 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 SH 
 
 o 
 
 DO 
 
 £ 
 
 c 
 
 *4-» 
 
 ^3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 d 
 
 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 X 
 
 rH 
 
 « 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks, 
 
 Rocks 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—15,500 
 
 it. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,700 
 
 it. 
 
 * • i 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet, shade ... 
 
 6-7,000 
 
 it. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 it. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Damp woods ... 
 
 9,000 
 
 it. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open, by water, 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 It. 
 
 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 It. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 5,000 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 It. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 5—7,001 
 
 It. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 7,00C 
 
 It. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 , 50( 
 
 > It. 
 
 . « « 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. #»• 
 
 4,00( 
 
 ) It. 
 
 
 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 2 — 4,00( 
 
 ) It. 
 
 
 . < • 
 
 
 Surest .. 
 
 1,00 
 
 0 it. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. « > 
 
 0,000 li. 
 
 1 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 1 
 
 • • 
 
 1 
 
 
524 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS' 
 
 List of Knmaou 
 
 Name; 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terhottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 l 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 
 LXVIII. — EBENA- 
 CKiE. 
 
 1- Diospyros. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceaifolia, lioxb ► .. 
 
 
 • Tr. 
 
 30" 
 
 Wli. 
 
 m 
 
 
 LXIX . - ST YR ACEJE. 
 
 1. Symplocos. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cratsegoides, Don ... 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 IS' — 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 ... 1 
 
 Hamiltoniana, Wall , 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 ... ] 
 
 ramosissima, Wall., 
 
 a 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 ... 
 
 polystachya, Wall., 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 35' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 LXX— OLEACEJE. 
 
 1- Jasminum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rcvolutum, Sims ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 
 var inodorurn ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 April 
 
 
 pubescens, Willd . ... 
 
 3 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 
 officinale,. L. ... 
 
 4 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 **« 
 
 grandiflorum, L. ... 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 IWI 
 
 dispermum, Wall.,., 
 
 6 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Anril 
 
 
 arborescens, Roxb. .. 
 
 b* 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 V. 
 
 0 
 
 r— ( 
 
 1 
 l 
 
 00 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February. 
 
 glandulosum, Wall., 
 
 8 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 
 2 ■ Nyctantlies. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arbor-tristis, L. ... 
 
 to* 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 20' 
 
 • « • 
 
 May 
 
 eM 
 
 3. Schrebera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 swietenoides, Roxb 
 
 o#» 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 
 4. Syringa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Emodi, Wall . 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 ... 
 
 5. Fraxiims. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 floribtinda, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 April 
 
 ... 
 
 santhoxyloides, Wall, 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 in 
 
 May 
 
 "‘I 
 
 c3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 t-1 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 Bhabar, Bage 
 sar. 
 
 Naini Till, Ka 
 thi. 
 
 Almora, outer 
 hills. 
 
 Ramgar valley, 
 Bhabar 
 Bhainskhet 
 
 Do. 
 
 sar. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 525 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, & c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 Q 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4-8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • i 
 
 #!• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000, 
 
 R. 
 
 itl 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 itt 
 
 • • * 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,5—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 o • » 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 0,5 — 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■5 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 lit 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. »«• 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • ll 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 2,500 
 
 R, 
 
 . . • 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,5—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 » .» 
 
 
 DO. m 
 
 2,5— 3,50( 
 
 ) R. 
 
 .«! 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 ,50( 
 
 » E, 
 
 ... 
 
 in 
 
 
 Do. it 
 
 . 8,5—11,50 
 
 .) R. 
 
 D. 
 
 *09 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 , 6,5—8,00 
 
 0 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 
 Open .. 
 
 . 9—10,00 
 
 [ 
 
 0 «•» 
 
 D. 
 
 III 
 
 • 
 
526 
 
 HIM X LA Y AN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 6 Olea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glandulifera, Wall... 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, out- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 er hills. 
 
 acuminata, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'— 50' 
 
 Wli. 
 
 June 
 
 Kapkot 
 
 euspidata, I Vail. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Sli. 
 
 10' 
 
 . . 
 
 J une .. 
 
 Josimath 
 
 compacta, Wall. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Satrali valley, 
 
 7 Ligustrum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalense, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Biusar 
 
 bracteolatum, Don, 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Kapkot 
 
 rob ust nm, IJj . Sf 1 . 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Tola (S a r j u 
 
 LXXI.— ABOCYNA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 valley). 
 
 CKJE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Carissa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 diffusa, Rcxb. ... 
 
 *•» 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 W. 
 
 June 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 2 ■ Vinca. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pusilla, Murr. 
 
 « •« 
 
 H. 
 
 \ r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Ilawalbagli ... 
 
 3- Alstonia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 scholaris, R. Br. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Kota Dun ... 
 
 4- Tabernsemon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tana- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 coronaria, R. Br. ... 
 
 • a • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 0' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 5 ■ Holarrliena. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 antidysenterica, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Blrnbar 
 
 pubescens, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Do. 1(1 
 
 6- Vallaris- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 clichotoma, Wall. .. 
 
 ... 
 
 S. BC. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7 • Wriglitia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 molliseima, Wall ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 January 
 
 Do. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 527 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Him 
 
 layi 
 
 a 
 
 • r— * 
 
 C3 
 
 Ph 
 
 d - 
 
 t. 
 
 Sh 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Eemarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 Wi 
 
 3,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • ft • 
 
 3,500 
 
 E. 
 
 • « • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • ft. 
 
 G— 8,000 
 
 E, 
 
 • ft « 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 * . . 
 
 5—6,000. 
 
 R. 
 
 • ft • 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • « < 
 
 G— 7,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ft • • 
 
 3,500 
 
 E. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • 1 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 1*4 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 1—3,600 
 
 E. 
 
 
 • •ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■5 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 E. 
 
 • Oft 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 • ft* 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ft ft ft 
 
 • ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 Forest 
 
 • ft* 
 
 1,00C 
 
 > R- 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • * 
 
 i,oor 
 
 E. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • ft 
 
 1— 3,00C 
 
 E. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 •ft 
 
 1— 2,60C 
 
 E. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • 
 
 • 
 
528 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 8- Nerium. 
 
 odorum, Soland. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar, &c. 
 
 9. Cbonemorpha. 
 
 macrophylla, G. Don , 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 • •9 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 LXXII.— ASCLEPIA- 
 HACEJE. 
 
 l. Cryptolepis- 
 
 reticulata, Wall. ... 
 
 • It 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 • • • 
 
 • II 
 
 Bagesar, Bha- 
 
 2- Periploca. 
 
 calophylla, Falc. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 40' 
 
 Gr. Br. 
 
 March ... 
 
 bar. 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 3- Calotropis. 
 
 procera, R. Br. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sli. 
 
 CO 
 
 =5 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 Wh. Pr 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 gigantea, R. Br. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4- Vincetoxicum, 
 
 ep. 
 
 • •• 
 
 II. 
 
 1' 
 
 • • • 
 
 July 
 
 Bampa,Bhatkot 
 
 5. Cynanchum. 
 
 auriculatum, W.8f A. 
 
 1 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 8' 
 
 Gr Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam Valley, 
 
 glaucum, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 1^ 
 
 Y. 
 
 Augusf . . . 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 Dalhousiffi, W. Sf. A. 
 
 3 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Damus, &c. ... 
 
 6- Pentasachme. 
 
 Wallichii, Wight ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G"— 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Kapkot ... 
 
 7- Gongronema. 
 
 nepalense, Dene ,,, 
 
 Ml 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bagesar, Moh- 
 
 8. Tylophora, 
 
 Goyanii, Dene. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 argari. 
 
 Jagthana Pass. 
 
 liirsuta, Wight 
 
 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ? 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 52 $ 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 f—i 
 
 «f— < 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 & 
 
 c3 
 
 ■4-3 
 
 o 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 PS 
 
 o 
 
 •H 
 
 ■U3 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 fi 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 If eat water ... 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • «r 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 »«0 
 
 R. 
 
 » • • 
 
 oil 
 
 
 Open .. 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 
 ■Open 
 
 1—1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 - 1 
 lit 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 9—10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 «• i 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 5 -8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 
 Open. ... 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 «lt 
 
 
 Shady, wet. ... 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Marsdenia No. 5 in Herb S. & W„ 
 
 Open 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 8,400 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 «•« 
 
 • • 
 
 67 
 
530 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 9- Marsdenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tenacissima, W Sf A. 
 
 1 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 • • • 
 
 July 
 
 Almora. „. 
 
 Calesiana, Wiglit ... 
 Boylei, Wight ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. So. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 July 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 3 
 
 S. Sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Or. 
 
 May 
 
 Sarju valley, 
 Naim Tal.. 
 
 lucida, Edgew. 
 
 4 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 30 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 10- Pergularia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 odoratissima, L. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 • M 
 
 June 
 
 Almora, outer 
 hills. 
 
 11. Hoya 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceolata, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota Dun, Kap- 
 kot. 
 
 longifolia. Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 12 Leptadenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 viminea ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 6' 
 
 if t 
 
 May 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 13- Ceropegia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elegans, Wall 
 
 1 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 Wallichii, Wight ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 LXXIII.-LOG A- 
 NIACEiE. 
 
 1. Buddleia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 crispa, Benth. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 10' 
 
 Li. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 Neemda, Ham. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 10' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 2. Gardneria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 angustifolia, Wall. 
 
 • •• 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 Ml 
 
 March ... 
 
 Binsar, Gagar, 
 
 LXX1V.— GENTIA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 NACEJE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Crawfurdia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fascicu'ata, Wall. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. se. 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 i 
 
 Madhari Pass. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 531 
 
 Plants — ( continued) . 
 
 CJ 
 
 <8 
 
 o 
 
 02 
 
 00 
 
 PI 
 
 O 
 
 T3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Open 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Woods. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open. 
 
 Forest 
 
 On rocks ... 
 
 Iviver beds 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 o 
 
 f> 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 +3 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 SH 
 
 g <3 
 2 
 
 CC 
 
 O) +3 
 
 ■a 
 
 4,500 
 4,500 
 5 — (3,000 
 
 5—7,50o 
 
 2— 4,000 
 
 3,500 
 
 3— 3,500 
 
 1 — 2,000 
 
 4.500 
 
 6.500 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 1—1,500 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 C 3 
 
 R. 
 
 li. 
 
 it. 
 
 li. 
 
 6,5—7,000 li- 
 
 lt. 
 
 li. 
 li. ... 
 
 li. 
 
 li. 
 
 li. 
 
 li. 
 
 ,• . 13 
 
 b .-2 
 
 ft I H 
 
 D. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 = Orthanthera in Herb. S. W . 
 
532 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 § i 
 
 a 
 
 .3 « e 
 
 h ? O 
 cS i 
 
 ,P 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 U 
 
 bjj 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 -4-3 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 PH 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 Sh 
 
 <U 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 <p 
 
 ■4H 
 
 o 
 
 fc- 
 
 d 
 
 • r-< 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 cp 
 
 o 
 
 -43f 
 
 
 *£co g 
 
 S 
 
 be 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 ’cS 
 
 
 CD 
 
 ta 
 
 d 
 
 K 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 H 
 
 1-4 
 
 2. Gentiana- 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 aprica, Dene. ... 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 [March ... 
 
 Kota Dun ... 
 
 tubiflora, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 n. 
 
 1" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 1 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass 
 
 Tenusta, Wall. ... 
 depressa, Don ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 11" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. W. 
 
 [August ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 capitata, Ham. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Shaideyi 
 
 decemfida, Ham. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
 marginata, Griseb ., 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, Nairn 
 
 
 8 
 
 TI. 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. 
 
 1" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Champ wa 
 
 pedicella, Wall. ... 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 3"~ 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Namik, Naim 
 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 2" — 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 
 11 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. 
 
 1// 
 
 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Sagtea, Deo 
 
 
 12 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 argentea, Boyle 
 
 l" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Moorcroitiana, Wall., 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Rajhoti, Pin- 
 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 
 dari. 
 
 sp.*— “ ••• 
 
 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September,! Valleys of Gu- 
 
 aquatiea, L. ... 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 2" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 ge. 
 
 Gating,. Gyan- 
 
 tenella, Fries 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 ima. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 1 
 
 Sangcha, &c. ... 
 
 nubigena, Edgew. ... 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September,! 
 
 Rakas Tal, Bal- 
 
 
 18 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 
 cliha Pass. 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 2l" 
 
 4 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 squarrosa, Ledeb. ... 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 1// 
 
 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Topidhunga ... 
 
 ep. 
 
 20 
 
 11. 
 
 6" — 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Milam, Lanjar, 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 21 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 14' 
 
 Wli. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralarn ... 
 
 decumbens, L. ... 
 
 22 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Rajhoti ... 
 
 3. Pleurogyne. 
 
 corinthiaca, Griseb. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mi lam, Rajhoti, 
 
 var. ... 
 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 let 
 
 • •a 
 
 • •• 
 
 « • t 
 
 4- Ophelia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cordata, Don ... 
 
 It 8 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 3' 
 
 • • 1 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s a r , K a 1 i- 
 mundi, and 
 Madhari 
 
 floribunda, Don ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Passes. 
 
 Naini Tal ...1 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 533 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 r— t 
 • l*H 
 
 o 
 
 a> 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 pO 
 
 o3 
 
 O 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya 
 
 
 
 DO 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 O 
 
 • r— < 
 
 4-i 
 
 • rH 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 .2 
 
 3 
 
 P3 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 2,000 
 
 it. 
 
 • • • 
 
 » •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 14,000 
 
 it. 
 
 ••• 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 8,2,000. 
 
 It. 
 
 IM 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 a • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . a . 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • 1 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 11,500 
 
 It. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 r i. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 • •> 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Wet open 
 
 13,5—1500 
 
 « • i 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 15-17,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 It. 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—17,000 
 
 .. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 * • t 
 
 12-15000 
 
 Ml 
 
 4 # * 
 
 D. 
 
 t • • 
 
 T. 
 
 in 
 
 = Swertia No. 1 in Herb. S. and W 
 
 Do. 
 
 6 — 10,000 
 
 It. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7— 8,00C 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
534 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 1 £.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bi) 
 
 
 
 a ^ 
 
 rG 
 
 -*a 
 
 Jh 
 
 Ch 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 P 
 
 c3 ^ 
 
 a fra 
 
 5 |S 
 
 O 4J 
 
 o 
 
 u* 
 
 bo 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 rS 
 
 4-1 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 on 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 S3 
 
 SH 
 
 (A 
 
 
 S -5 A 
 
 t—i c/J 
 
 4-3 
 
 ’rQ 
 
 rC 
 
 Jb 0 
 
 fH 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 g 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 hJ 
 
 4- Ophelia— icon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eluded ). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 alata, Griseb. 
 
 3, 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r — 3' 
 
 Mt 
 
 August ... 
 
 Biusar, Almo- 
 
 purpurasccns, Don, 
 augusti folia, Don ... 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 » • • 
 
 August ... 
 August .. 
 
 ra. 
 
 Do. Naim Tal, 
 Almora, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
 Biusar, Gagar, 
 
 paniculata, Don ... 
 pulchella, Don 
 
 *7 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 August .. 
 
 Dalhousiana, Griseb., 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralani 
 
 5 • Swertia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 speciosa, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 H 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 W. BI. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Bindari. Ra- 
 
 ccerulea, Royle 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 lain. 
 
 Ralarn ... 
 
 6- Halenia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elliptica, Don ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Li. 
 
 AllgUBt ... 
 
 Tola, K a 1 a - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 muudi . 
 
 LXXY.— rOLEMO- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 NIACEiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Polemonium. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 coeruleum, L. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tola, Milam ... 
 
 LXXVI. — BOEA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 GINEiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Cordia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Myxa, L. 
 
 latifolia, Roxb. ... 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 9 A 
 
 • •a 
 
 March 
 
 In Bhabar ... 
 Ditto. 
 
 2 Ehretia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gevrata, Roxb. 
 kevis, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 30' 
 
 w 
 
 w. 
 
 May ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 "Inter hills ... 
 Bhabar 
 
 3' Ehabdia. 
 viminea, Dalz. 
 
 4 Heliotropium- 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wh. 1 
 
 March ... f 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 brevifolium, Wall. ... 
 
 Ilf 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Bk. J 
 
 hily ... i 
 
 Minora 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 535 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 
 the sea. 
 
 H im 
 lay 
 
 S 
 
 • f - i 
 
 c3 
 
 W 
 
 ti- 
 
 ll. 
 
 >> 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 1 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • «« 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 0—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • II 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 G— 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 #• * 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 . • • 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet open 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 • •» 
 
 
 Open " ... 
 
 12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7, 5—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 til 
 
 ... 
 
 * 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 — 3,00C 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,00< 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Open .. 
 
 3—5,501 
 
 ) R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest .. 
 
 1—2,501 
 
 » R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 River bed 
 
 2,50( 
 
 1 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Ehretia No. 3 in herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 5,50< 
 
 3 R. 
 
 
 Ill 
 
 
53 G 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 i 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 [ 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 i 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 5 Trichodesma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indicum, JR.Br. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March .. 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 6- Cynoglossmn- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 microglochin, Benih 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3' - 4' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam valley .. 
 
 sp.- 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gori valley... 
 
 furcatum, Wall. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3^' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Binsar, Gagar... 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . 
 
 Milam 
 
 Wallichii, Don ... 
 
 5 
 
 II. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam valley .. 
 
 furcatum, Wall. ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Samkhet 
 
 Bp. 
 
 7 
 
 11. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Dhauli valley, .. 
 
 micranthum, Desf., 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Bl. 1 
 
 June 
 
 Almora 
 
 sp. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalamundi ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 sp. ••• 
 
 11 
 
 H. * 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Dudatoli 
 
 grandiflorum, Benih. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Patharkori ... 
 
 7. Solenanthus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August .., 
 
 Laptel 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. Rajpot... 
 
 8- Echinospermum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 barbatum, Lekm. ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 9" — 12" 
 
 BL 
 
 July 
 
 Dhauli valley, 
 
 glochidiatum, .DC. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 O' 
 
 BL | 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, Pindari, 
 
 sp. - ■ “ 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Mhy 
 
 Do. 
 
 9. Eritrichium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp.' — • 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 BL 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kyungar Pass 
 
 rotundifolium, DC. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 lime 
 
 Patharkori .. 
 
 nemorosum DC. ... 
 
 3 
 
 II. 
 
 8" 
 
 Wh. 1 
 
 Jay 
 
 Dwali 
 
 longifolium, Don ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 ... 1 
 
 August ... 
 
 Suge, Milam... 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. i 
 
 August . . . 
 
 lalam 
 
 sp. ••• 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. i 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ho. 
 
 10. Asperugo. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 BL 1 
 
 August ... I 
 
 kyungar Pass, 
 
 11. Bothriosper- 
 muin. 
 
 terellum, Fisch and 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mey. ... 
 
 ... | 
 
 H 1 
 
 9" | 
 
 BL P 
 
 ebruary, jE 
 
 iapkot. 
 
<0F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 537 
 
 Pleads — (continued). 
 
 o 
 
 * f— 1 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 !> 
 
 O 
 
 rQ 
 
 d 
 
 •4-3 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 <4H 
 
 o 
 
 ec 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 +•> 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 Elevation in ft 
 the sea. 
 
 a 
 
 "S 
 
 M 
 
 hH 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 • •• 
 
 o* • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 6—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 11,500 
 
 -• 
 
 B. 
 
 .0. 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 5,500 
 
 E. 
 
 . . • 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 8—11,000 
 
 R, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 «•» 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • •1 
 
 8,500 
 
 • •• 
 
 R. 
 
 • . 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 = Lithospermum No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 
 & w. 
 
 Open 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • o • 
 
 ... 
 
 Bo, 
 
 15,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14-15,000 
 
 lit 
 
 • « • * 
 
 <>• 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 7—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 B. 
 
 • <* » 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—12,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 8—12,500 
 
 R: 
 
 • • . 
 
 • a* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 16,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 = Myosoiis No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ■ i« 
 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 8,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ,,, 
 
 ... 
 
 —Myosotis No. 4 in Plerb. IS. & W. 
 
 Open ... 
 
 15-15,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 =Echinospermum No. 3 in Herb. 
 
 Bo. ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 S. & w. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 16,50C 
 
 R. 
 
 IM 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Fields ... 
 
 3,50( 
 
 ) ... 
 
 i 
 
 <f 0 0 
 
 ... 
 
 . 
 
 68 
 
538 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 |.s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 .9 
 
 V 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 sd 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 53 ^ 
 gal 
 
 z o £ 
 
 3 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 f-i 
 
 bo 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 3< 
 
 m 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 qd 
 
 >> 
 
 -+-a 
 
 "cS 
 
 o 
 
 
 utfi s 
 
 S v - /+a 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 c3 
 
 -+J 
 
 *<D 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 •i— < 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 A 
 
 12- Myosotis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pal lens, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralaru, Tola 
 
 sylvatica, Hoffm . ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June „. 
 
 Pindari 
 
 13- Lithosper- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tenuiflorum, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 14- Macrotomia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ben tli ami, DC. 
 bracteata, DC. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 sr 
 
 i'— i * ' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 BL 
 
 July 
 
 July 
 
 Ralam, Sec. ... 
 Pindari, Raj- 
 
 15- Onosma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hoti. 
 
 echioides, Benik. ... 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Emodi, Walt. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl~Pr. 
 
 September, 
 
 Tungnath 
 
 LXXYII — CONVOL- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VULACEjE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 Ipomsea- 
 
 sessiliflora, Roth ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Aim ora 
 
 pes-tigridis, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Do. &c. ... 
 
 sp. ( oxyphylla, 
 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 
 
 Edgew. 
 
 3 
 
 12' 
 
 « • • 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 bona-nox, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 JH. Sc. 
 
 12' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ramganga val- 
 
 2 Convovulus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ley, &c. 
 
 arvensis, L. 
 
 Nil, L. 
 
 barlerioides, /Jam., 
 
 ... 
 
 H. Sc. 
 II. Sc. 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 3'— 4' 
 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Li. 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 August . . . 
 August ... 
 
 Niti 
 
 Gangoli, &c. ... 
 Almora 
 
 3- Evolvulus 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hirsutus Ham. 
 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 2" -3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 All the 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 4 For ana- 
 
 
 
 
 
 year. 
 
 
 paniculata, Roxb. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. Sc. 
 
 20' 
 
 W. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer bills 
 
 racemosa, Roxb. ... | 
 
 2 
 
 II. Sc. 
 
 15' 
 
 W. 
 
 September, A1 mora 
 
 5- Cuscuta. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrantha, Dun ... j 
 reflexa, Roxb. ... j 
 
 capillaris, Edgew..., | 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 H. Sc. 
 H. Sc. 
 II. Sc. 
 
 6' 
 
 6' 
 
 6 " 1 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 w 
 
 Pk. 
 
 October ... 
 October ... 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 Do. 
 
 Ralam, Niti ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 539 
 
 Plants — (continued ). 
 
 o 
 
 43 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Open 
 
 Near water 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Woods 
 
 Open 
 
 Fields 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 On bushes 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 On herbs 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 SI 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 < 4-1 
 
 O ^ 
 o oj 
 
 t> -d 
 
 W 4-3 
 
 12,000 
 
 11,000 
 
 11 - 
 
 12 - 
 
 - 12,000 
 
 -15,000 
 
 12,000 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 a 
 ' 3 
 P3 
 
 15.000 
 
 14.000 
 
 6,000 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 11,500 
 
 6,000 
 
 4,000 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 4,500 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 11 — 12,000 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 o 
 
 a E-t 
 
 R. D. 
 
 E. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. D. T. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R, 
 
 R 
 
 R, 
 
 = Makar angti in Herb. S. &. W. 
 
 D. 
 
 ■. C atony ction speciosum in Herb. 
 S. W. 
 
 : Pharbitis Nil in Herb, S. &. W. 
 Anise ia in Herb. S. &. W. 
 
 D. 
 
540 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS’' 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Straehey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Habit of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 LXXYIII . — SOLA- 
 NACKAE. 
 
 1 . Solaniun- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nigrum, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 xan thocarpum, 
 Schrad., var. Jac- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 quinii 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9 " 
 
 Pr. 
 
 All the 
 
 Do. 
 
 lysimaehioides, Wall, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9 " 
 
 Pr. 
 
 year. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gori valley ... 
 
 verbascifolium, L. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12 ' — 15 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February, 
 
 BIG bar, Bage- 
 
 indicum, Nees. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 S' 
 
 
 
 sar. 
 
 Bhim Pal 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 Sli. 
 
 4' 
 
 . • . 
 
 • • • 
 
 Alaknanda 
 
 sanctum, L. 
 
 7 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 • 4 4 
 
 valley. 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 sp. 
 
 8 
 
 PI. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 2. Physalis, 
 
 flexuosa, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2 '— 3 ' 
 
 > 
 
 February, 
 
 Kaladhungi ... 
 
 peruviana, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 3 Datura. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Stramonium, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 S' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Do. . ... 
 
 4- Scopolia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 praealta, Dene. ,,, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—iy 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Niti, Tisum ... 
 
 5- Hyosciamus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 niger, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Malari, &c. ... 
 
 6- Nicotiana- 
 
 sp. 
 
 
 IP. 
 
 
 
 • M 
 
 Almora 
 
 LXXIX — SCROPlIU- 
 LARIACEAE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- V erbascum 
 
 Thapsus, L. 
 
 i 
 
 IP. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ealam, Milam 
 
 var. — - .c, 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 “• ! 
 
 S'— o' 
 
 Y. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 541 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4— ,5000 
 
 Do. 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 Banks 
 
 •o 
 
 4,500 
 
 Open 
 
 li« 
 
 1,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 9 • • 
 
 1,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 III 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 • 91 
 
 11,5 — 15,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 • * 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 Open 
 
 • • 
 
 12,000 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 « 
 
 . 5 — 8,000 
 
 Remarks. 
 
542 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 2 Celsia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 coromandeliana, V«hl. 
 
 ... 
 
 Id. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 3- Linaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ramosissima, Wall 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 All the 
 year. 
 
 Alrnora, &c. ... 
 
 4. Antirrhinum 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Orontium, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1 r — 2' 
 
 Pk Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 Scrophularia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 decomposita, Route. ... 
 
 ] 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Milam 
 
 variegata, Bieb. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 J une 
 
 Malari, &c. ... 
 
 obtusa, E(h,ew. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 • . • 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 himalaiensis, Roi/le.... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 4'- — 5' 
 
 • • . 
 
 July 
 
 N ai ni Tal 
 
 Edgeworthii, Benth. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. Gr. 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 Saba 
 
 calycina, Benth. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari, Pa- 
 tharlrori . 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—n' 
 
 • o 
 
 July 
 
 Laptel 
 
 6- Mimulus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gracilis, R.Br. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 iV 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 Lodh 
 
 7- Mazus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dentatus, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Betuli Pass ... 
 
 rugosus, Sour. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 surculosus, Bon 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Kapkot 
 
 8- Lindentergia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 urticnefolia, T.ehm. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagcsar, &c. ... 
 
 grandiflSra, Benth. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Y. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bagesar, &c. ... 
 
 macrostachya, Benth., 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Kaiapathar ... 
 
 9. Limnophila. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 menthastrum, Benth., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Alrnora ... 
 
 Koxburghii, G.Dott, 
 hypericifolia, Benth., 
 
 2 
 
 Id. 
 
 4" 
 
 • • • 
 
 February... 
 
 Patli Dun 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 + 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 10- Herpestis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Monmeria, B B K. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bhabar, Ram. 
 ganga valley- 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 543 
 
 I'l ants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 .5 
 
 3 
 
 « 
 
 ft 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 f • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 1- — 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 (|t 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 K. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 «•» 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • 
 
 
 
 Do- 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 It! 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • « 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 * • i 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 DO. at 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ■ ••• 
 
 • • * 
 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 544 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number' 
 (Strachcy and Win- 
 ter bottom.) 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 11. Dopatrium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 juncetim, Ham. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 12- Torenia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 edentula, Griff . 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1"- 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 September, 
 
 (Naini Tal, Sar- 
 in valley. 
 
 13. Vandellia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Crustacea, Benth. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 pedunculata, Benth 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 uummularifolia, Don, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Pk, 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 14 Bonnaya- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bracliiata, Link. 
 
 ... 
 
 e. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 15 Hemiphragma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 heterophyllum, Wall., 
 
 ... 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 China, Dhakuri 
 Pass. 
 
 16- Picrorhiza. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kurrua, Beyle. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Br. Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Madhari Pass... 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Milam ... 
 
 17- Wulfenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Amherstiana, Benth . . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Binsar 
 
 18- Veronica. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Anagallis, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 I'— 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Ramgar, & c. ... 
 
 laxa, Benth. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
 ciliata, Fisch. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 September, 
 
 Milam, Topid- 
 hunga. 
 
 Berpylli folia, L. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 6" 
 
 Rl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 cana, Wall 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Saba 
 
 agrestis, L. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 &"■ — -9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora 
 
 Maddeni, Edgew. 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Do., Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 biloba, L 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 capitata, Boyle 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Barjikang Pass 
 
 lanosa, Benth. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Niti 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 545 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 t> 
 
 O 
 
 rQ 
 
 03 
 
 -v=> 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 *H 
 
 O 
 
 CQ 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 -t-3 
 
 >r 3 
 
 a 
 
 , o 
 
 o 
 
 Elevation in ft 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 ... 
 
 »•« • 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 s' 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Shady damp . . . 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,5—11,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ♦ 
 
 7 % 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—10,000 
 
 \ 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 6—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 9—10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 1 ••• 
 
 
 Walls 
 
 5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6 — 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ii. 
 
 ... 
 
 • 
 
 69 
 
546 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Name. 
 
 19— Buchneva- 
 
 hispida, Ham. ... 
 sp. 
 
 20— Striga- 
 
 enphrasioides, Benth ., 
 hirsuta, Benth. 
 
 21— Centr anther a. 
 
 hispida, fi.Br. 
 
 22— Sopuaia- 
 
 trifida, Barn. 
 
 23— Leptorhabdos . 
 
 parviflora, Benth. ... 
 
 24— Euphrasia- 
 
 officinalis, L. 
 
 25— Pedicularis- 
 megalantha, Don 
 Ditto 
 
 gracilis, Wall. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 carnosa, Wall. 
 
 siphonantha, Dun ... 
 pectinata, Wall. 
 tubiflora, Fisch. 
 
 verticellata, Wull. ... 
 
 versicolor, Wall. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Hookeriana, Wall. ... 
 rhinanthoides, 
 Schrenk. 
 
 e P- 
 
 List o f Kumcton 
 
 [ Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 H eight of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 "cS 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bi. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Gopesar, Almo- 
 ra. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Alrnora, &c. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 W. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Tejam, &c, ... 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Gangoli, &c. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Gagar, Binsar, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 3"~ 9" 
 
 Y. W. 
 
 June 
 
 Dhakuri-bina- 
 ya, &c. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 7 
 
 H 
 
 6" 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 2 . 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Girgaon, Pitti 
 river. 
 
 11 
 
 A. 
 
 9" 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Gothing 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 R. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Nami Tal, Al- 
 mora. 
 
 4 
 
 II. 
 
 6" 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 5, 15 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Saba 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Milam, valleys 
 of Gugd. 
 
 8 
 
 II. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Bar jikang 
 Pass. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 R. May 
 
 Pindari 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 9" 
 
 Br. Y. 
 
 September. 
 
 Rimkin, Balch- 
 ha Pass. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 R. 
 
 June 
 
 Rogi-la 
 
 12, 13 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 R. 
 
 September, 
 
 Balcliha Pass ... 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Do. 
 
OF TH 1C NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 547 
 
 Plants (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hit 
 la I 
 
 .3 
 
 3 
 
 nd- 
 
 /a. 
 
 (H 
 
 Q 
 
 | Tibet. 
 
 i 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5-6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6-8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■5 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—1 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—1 ',500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 2,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 \ 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 
 b. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—16,500 
 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13—16,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 16,500 
 
 , . , 
 
 . . . 
 
 T. 
 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
548 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 
 rH t 
 
 S.s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 Name-. 
 
 r barium nr 
 Strachey and 
 erbottom). 
 
 A 
 
 4-3 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 be 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 IS 
 
 +=> 
 
 a 
 
 & 
 
 'Ph 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 oc 
 
 Sh 
 
 0) 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 4-f 
 
 O 
 
 Sh 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 .2 
 
 *Sh 
 
 a> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 '-H 
 
 o 
 
 Q) 
 
 4-3 
 • H 
 
 "c3 
 
 
 0> W+J 
 
 hh 
 
 HH 
 
 o3 
 
 K 
 
 0/ 
 
 a 
 
 'o 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 h4 
 
 LXXX — OROBAN- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CHACEAE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1— iEginetia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, Boyle. 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 i' 
 
 Br. Pr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kapkot, Bilim- 
 
 2— Orobanche- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tell . 
 
 indica. Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 
 March 
 
 Hard war 
 
 S]X' 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 * . . 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali, Ramni, 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 July 
 
 Tola 
 
 epithymum, DC. 
 
 4 
 
 
 V 
 
 00 
 
 V 
 
 
 Jnly 
 
 Ralam, Milam, 
 
 LXXXI — PLUMBA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 GINACEAE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 — Plumbago- 
 
 zeylanica, L. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4"— 5" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar, Bage- 
 
 LXXXIL— GESNER- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sar. 
 
 ACEtE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1.— .ffischyiiaiitlius. 
 
 ramosissima, Wall. ... 
 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 i' — 14' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 2 .— Lysionotus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ternifolia, Wall. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 9'— 15' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 3 — Rhynchoglos- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 obliquum, DC. 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 i'— 14' 
 
 Pr. Bl. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 4-— Platy stemma ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 violoides, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 5 — Didymocarpus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanuginosa, Wall. ... 
 macrophylla, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Mohargari, Ba- 
 
 subalternans, Wall. ., 
 
 6— Chirita. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 l' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 gesar. 
 
 Dyari Pass, 
 
 Ramni. 
 
 bifoiia, Don 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pr Y. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 Edgeworthii, DC. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 
 
 Gangoli, & c. ... 
 
 | 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 549 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 i 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 t. 
 
 0 
 
 Open 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Fields 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *»• 
 
 On trees 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Fields 
 
 11,500 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 On Thymus . . . 
 
 12—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■9 
 
 Trees 
 
 4,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 
 Trees & banks, 
 
 2,5—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Shady banks . . . 
 
 1,5—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Trees & rocks. 
 
 6—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Dry rocks 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 3—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,5—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Shady banks .. 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 * * * 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 / 
 
550 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 bb 
 
 • >— < 
 
 r-*' 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 <4H 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 Locality. 
 
 LXXXIII.- — BIGrNO- 
 N I ACE AO. 
 
 1— Calosanthes- 
 
 indica, Bl. 
 
 
 Tr 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Bhabar a n d 
 
 2 ■ — Stereospermum 
 
 suaveolens, DC. 
 
 »•* 
 
 Tr. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 outer hills. 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 3 •— Amphicome- 
 
 Emodi, ( Royl I 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March 
 
 J 
 
 Deoprayag 
 
 arguta, ( Uuyle ) 
 
 2 
 
 S. H. 
 
 l'-l*' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Dhauli valley, 1 
 
 LXXXIV — PE DA- 
 LINEAL 
 
 1 — Sesamum. 
 
 indicum, L 
 
 
 H. 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Bhabar, Almo- 
 
 LXXXV. — ACANTH- 
 
 1 — Thunbergia 
 
 coccinea, Wall. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10 r — 15' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 December, 
 
 ra. 
 
 Baliya bridge, 
 
 2-— Hygrophila- 
 
 polysperma, T. Anders. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 • #« 
 
 Harara, 
 
 Mohan 
 
 3— Kuellia- 
 
 hirta, Vahl. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills .... 
 
 4 — Petalidium 
 
 barlerioides, Nees ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 o' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 February, 
 
 3habar 
 
 5— Strobilanthes. 
 
 Edgeworthisnus, Nees, 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. ] 
 
 December, 1 
 
 dota Dun 
 
 auriculatus, Nees 
 
 2 
 
 Sh 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do 
 
 Do. 
 
 glutinosus, Nees 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2'— S' 
 
 Li. ] 
 
 0 ebruary, 1 
 
 vapkot 
 
 Wallichii, Nees ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. , 
 
 August ... 1 
 
 iur Pass 
 
 alatus, Nees 
 
 5 
 
 Id. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 Do. ... 1 
 
 )iyari Pass ... 
 
 attenuatus, Jacq. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. ...I 
 
 ^ohathat 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ounghasi 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 551 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 t> 
 
 o 
 
 rO 
 
 c3 
 
 <D 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 H-i 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 %-a 
 
 #r 3 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 n 
 
 ft 
 
 ! Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 1,..3,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 7,000 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 
 Open and cul- 
 tivated 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R, 
 
 • •• 
 
 * 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Heceacentris in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = FJemiadelphis in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Shady woods ... 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2.000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open .. 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 • 
 
552 
 
 HTM/LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 j Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 1 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 6 — Goldfussia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eapitata, Nees 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 ... 
 
 bracteata, Nees 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 . . » 
 
 penstemonoides, Nees, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 . . • 
 
 divaricata, Nees 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 S' 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 ? 
 
 
 7 .■ — M climanther a • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wallichii, Nees 
 
 in 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Sarju valley 
 
 ... 
 
 8— Barleria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dichotoma, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2 f 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August 
 
 G angol i 
 
 • • • 
 
 cristata, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 s' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 September, 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 • • • 
 
 var. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Pr. 
 
 September, 'Kalapathar 
 
 • •• 
 
 cilialata, Roxb. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Sep tear 1 er, 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 • • t 
 
 nepalensis, Nees ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Satrali 
 
 • • • 
 
 9 — Asystasia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrocarpa, Nees 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 
 10 — Eranthemum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nervosum, R.Br, 
 
 • « 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 ... 
 
 11 .— Plilo gac anthus 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 thyrsiflorus, Nees ... 
 
 ill 
 
 Sh, 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Or. Br. 
 
 Marrh ... 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 l"i 
 
 12— Lepidagathis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 euspidata, Nees 
 
 1 
 
 Sh 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. Pr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 Kl 
 
 ustulata, Nees ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 purpuricaulis, Nees... 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1 '—2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 hyalina, Nees ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13 — Justicia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 micrantha, Wall. 
 
 
 H, 
 
 9" 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ratnari 
 
 Ml 
 
 procumbens, L. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March .. 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 • • • 
 
 Adhatoda, L. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh 
 
 00 
 
 f 
 
 o 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Plains, Bagesar, 
 
 14— Eiingia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 parvifiora, Nees 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 3"- 4" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Sirmoria 
 
 • •• 
 
«5E THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 553 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &e., 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 rO 
 
 oS 
 
 +3 
 
 Q) . ^ 
 
 i 
 
 Him d- 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 Elevation in fc 
 the sea. 
 
 tA 
 
 c3 
 
 t, 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 J)o. 
 
 (>,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 .. . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2 — 6,000 
 
 RE 
 
 , 
 
 .. . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,-5.000 
 
 R. 
 
 „ , 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 .. . 
 
 
 Shady banks . . . 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ..T 
 
 ' • • • 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 * / 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *»w 
 
 M. 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,5—3,000 
 
 R 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 K. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... . 
 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 4,500 
 
 R 
 
 
 • •« 
 
 = Rnstellarid. No. 2 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 ( )pen 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 >• • 
 
 =•= nostellaria No. 2 ditto ditto. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R 
 
 | "• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Adhatoda vasica ditto ditto. ' 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 ' 
 
 l R 
 
 L 
 
 ... 
 
 
 70 
 
554 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Straeheyand W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 i Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 15 Dicliptera. 
 
 bnpleuroideB, A hes ... 
 
 *•* 
 
 H. 
 
 o' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 IM 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 16- Peristrophe 
 
 speciosa, Nees 
 
 2 
 
 H. Sh 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Outer hills, B&- 
 
 g p, 
 
 1 
 
 H. Sh. 
 
 2' 
 
 Sc 
 
 August ... 
 
 gesar. 
 
 Gangoli ... 
 
 LXXX VI. — SEL A - 
 GLNACELE. 
 
 1. Gymnandra- 
 
 kunawarensis, Boyle 
 
 • •• 
 
 H, 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Raj-hoti, Ra- 
 
 LXXXVII.— VER- 
 BEN ACEiE 
 
 1. Phryma. 
 
 leptostachya, /-. ... 
 
 f •• 
 
 H. 
 
 ! 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk 
 
 August „. 
 
 kas Tal. 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 2- Lantana. 
 
 alba, Mill. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 3. Lippia. 
 
 nodiflora, llich. 
 
 t»< 
 
 Ii. cr. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pr. Br. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kalapathar, &c. 
 
 4 Verbena- 
 
 officinalis, L. .. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Li. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 5 Callicarpa- 
 
 macrophylla, Vahl. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Outer hills, Ba- 
 
 arborea, Roxb. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 V. 
 
 o 
 
 04 
 
 Ml 
 
 May 
 
 geBar, 
 
 Do. do. ... 
 
 6- Premna. 
 
 herbacea, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2"— 3" 
 
 W. Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 interrupta, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Supi 
 
 barbata, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Bhabar, B£ge- 
 
 integrifolia, L. .. 
 
 4 
 
 • •a 
 
 
 Wh. 
 
 • •• 
 
 sar. 
 
 Do* 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 555 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. | 
 
 b 
 
 Q 
 
 Woods 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R- 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shady woods ... 
 
 1—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 » # » 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4 5,000 
 
 R 
 
 • • . 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Wet open 
 
 15—16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 1 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Damp woods . . . 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 » • * 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 , 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • t* 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do ... 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 M* 
 
 
556 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Vi in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 -4-a 
 
 § 
 
 7- Gmelina. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arborea, Roxb. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 V. 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 Y. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 8. Vitex 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Negundo, L. 
 
 !•« 
 
 Sh 
 
 10' — 15 ' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 April 
 
 Bhabar, outer 
 billB. 
 
 9- Clerodendrnni. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 infortunatum, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 (>' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 gratum,. [Yuli. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh 
 
 6' 
 
 Sc. VV. 
 
 M arch 
 
 Naini Ta!, outer 
 hi Is. 
 
 serratum, Spreng, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 10 Holmskioldia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Banguinea, Retz. 
 
 11. Caryopteris. 
 
 • • * 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15' 
 
 Sc 
 
 December, 
 
 Ivalapathar ... 
 
 W allichiana, Schuuer., 
 
 t • • 
 
 Sh 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Bhabar, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 LXXX Vll I. —LABI- 
 ATE. 
 
 1- Geniosporum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Birobilifcr um^ Wall , 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 2 Orthosiplion- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 virgatus, Benth. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 rubicundus, Benth. ... 
 
 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Kosi valley ... 
 
 3- Plectranthns. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tfcrnifolius, Don ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3 '— 4 ' 
 
 
 October ... 
 
 Bhabar, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
 rugosus, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh 
 
 4 ' 
 
 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Costsa, Don 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3 ' 
 
 Li. 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota Dun, Al- 
 in or a. 
 
 eordifolius, Don 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3 ' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 scrophu'.arioides, Wall. 
 
 5 
 
 Ii. 
 
 3 '— 4 ' 
 
 W. Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 Gerardianus, Benth.... 
 
 6 , 10 
 
 II. 
 
 1 '— 3 ' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Gori valley, 
 
 Almora. 
 
 Maddeni, Benth. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 4 ' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ...; 
 
 Ka’imundi 
 
 Striatus, Benth. 
 
 8 
 
 II. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 Stracheyi, Benth. 
 
 9 
 
 II. 
 
 H' 
 
 Li. 
 
 1 
 
 October ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sarju valley .. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 5-57 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 o 
 
 «3 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 T ) 
 
 sa 
 
 O 
 
 Cf 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest 
 \V oods 
 
 Open 
 
 Woods 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 
 < L > 
 
 > 
 
 Q 
 
 .£5 
 
 c3 
 
 0} 
 
 OJ 
 
 s ^ 
 
 o a 
 
 <U +J 
 
 1,500 
 
 1 — 4,000 
 
 1,500 
 4 — ( 5 , 5(10 
 
 3 — 4,000 
 
 2 — 3,000 
 
 1 — 3,000 
 
 4,000 
 
 
 H ir.id- 
 layi. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 j .5 
 
 1 <3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 It. 
 
 It. 
 
 It 
 
 It 
 
 R. 
 
 H i 
 
 R. 
 
 It. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 1 — 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 — 7,' "00 
 
 R. 
 
 Do 
 
 2 — 0,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,700 
 
 It. 
 
 Woods & Open, 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 W oods 
 
 8 — 9,000 
 
 R 
 
 Open 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Wet places ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 K. 
 
558 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Straehey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 ! 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 1 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 4. Coleus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 foarbatus, Benth. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 5- Anisochilus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 carnosus, Wall. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 November, 
 
 iByas-gh&t 
 
 6- Pogostemon 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 plectranthoides, Deaf. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 parviflora, Benth. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10'— 15' 
 
 Fr. 
 
 May 
 
 Kapkot 
 
 7. Dysophylla- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eruciata, Benth 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 8 Colebrookia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oppositifolia, Sm. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8"— 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 9. Elsclioltzia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polystachya, Benth 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 8' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 eriostachya, Benth. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Ralam, 
 
 densT, Benth. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 1J' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Ralam 
 
 strobilifera^ Benth ... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, &c; r 
 
 pusilla, Benth. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 ? 
 
 August ... 
 
 Topidhunga ... 
 
 Hava, Benth 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8'— 10' 
 
 Y. 
 
 September. 
 
 Tunghasi 
 
 incisa, Benth. 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 i' — ij' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Bhainskhet ... 
 
 pilosa, Benth. 
 
 8 
 
 H_ 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 cristata, Willd. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 . . • 
 
 October ... 
 
 Jalat 
 
 sp. 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 October ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 10 Perilla- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ocymoides, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bhabar, Dwali, 
 
 11. Mentha. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 sylvestris, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Niti 
 
 12- Origanum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 normale, Bon 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora 
 
 vulgaie, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 1 
 
 Pk. August ... 
 
 Vliiam 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 559 
 
 riants — (continued) . 
 
 O 
 
 & 
 
 o 
 
 QQ 
 
 n3 
 
 rt 
 
 a 
 
 Open 
 
 Do 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Wet, open 
 
 Open 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Banks 
 
 Open 
 
 Woods 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 « 
 
 o 
 
 js 
 
 Cj 
 
 4-J 
 
 Q 
 
 CD 
 
 S * 
 © 0 ) 
 «»-« QQ 
 
 03 
 
 a ) +» 
 
 ft 
 
 4 — 5,600 
 
 1,600 
 
 1 — 3,000 
 3,600 
 
 5,000 
 
 1 — 5,500 
 
 6 — 9,500 
 12 — 13,000 
 10 — 12,000 
 8 — 10,000 
 15,000 
 5,500 
 — 9,500 
 4 — 6,500 
 4,000 
 6 — 7,000 
 4,000 
 
 1 , 5 — 8,500 
 
 11,500 
 
 5,900 
 
 11,500 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 £ 
 
 ■ H 
 
 c3 
 
 K 
 
 R . 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R. 
 
 R 
 
 R. 
 
 R 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 Sh 
 
 ft 
 
 <u 
 
 .a 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
300 
 
 tttma'layan districts 
 
 Name. 
 
 13 Thymus. 
 
 Serpyllum, L. 
 linearis, Benih. 
 
 14. Micromeria. 
 
 bi flora, Benih. 
 
 15. Hedeoma. 
 
 nepalensis, Benih. ... 
 
 16- Calamintha. 
 
 Clincpodium, Benih. 
 umbrosa, Benih. 
 
 17- Melissa. 
 
 flava, Benih. 
 parviflora, Benih: ... 
 
 18- Salvia- 
 
 lanata, Roub. 
 -eampanulata, Wail. .. 
 glutinosa, L. 
 
 gp. 
 
 plebeia, Br. 
 ianceolata, Willd. 
 
 19- Nepeta- 
 
 ruderalis. Ham. 
 
 spicata, Benih. 
 campestris, Benih. ... 
 graciliflora, Benih. ... 
 Go rani ana, Benih. ... 
 leucophylla, Benih. ... 
 elliptica, R«yH • ••( 
 discolor, Hoyle •••: 
 
 supma, Siev. 
 tibetica, Benih. 
 
 longibracteata, Benih. 
 
 List of Knmaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Stfachey and \Y in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 [ 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 I 
 
 H. 
 
 4" — 5" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Ralam, Eajhoti 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 5" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Aim ora 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2 f 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 r 
 
 111. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 2,3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 N a i n i Tal, 
 Almora. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. Bl. 
 
 J une 
 
 Binsar 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ramganga and 
 Gori valley. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 12" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Dwali, Dugli... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Niti 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 I'i' 
 
 1 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 -i ' 
 
 
 February, 
 
 Hardwar, outer 
 hills. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Fehruary, 
 
 Milam, Ralam, 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jalat 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 1' 
 
 ••• iFebruary, 
 
 Hardwar 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ...1 
 
 Ralam valley. 
 
 6 
 
 H, 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 r 
 
 Li. 
 
 •ieptember, 
 
 Do 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 l'— 14' 
 
 ... 1 
 
 August ... : 
 
 Milam, Niti, 
 Pass 
 
 9,10 
 
 H. 
 
 H' 
 
 Bl. 1 
 
 September, Rakas Tal 
 
 11 
 
 n. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 Bl. i 
 
 August ... Kyungar Lan- 
 1 gar 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Li. £ 
 
 September, Balchha Pass... 
 
 1 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 561 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 j Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 (H 
 
 « 
 
 Open 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do, ••• 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 it* 
 
 ... 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 Open 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 — 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 101 
 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 7—11,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 f »« 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 mo 
 
 i •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 Naturalized .. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •0 
 
 Open 
 
 .] 1—5,000 
 
 R, 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,5—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D - 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 Ml 
 
 • •<1 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 . 7,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,500 
 
 u< 
 
 ... 
 
 • . * 
 
 Do. 
 
 15—15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. 
 
 . 17,000 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 T. 
 
 \ 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 71 
 
562 
 
 -hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 20- Dracocepha- 
 1am- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 acanthoides, Edgeiv ., 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kyungar 
 
 speciosum, Benth. ... 
 
 21- Scutellaria. 
 
 2 
 
 Id. 
 
 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalajawar 
 
 discoloT, Calebr. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pic. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar ... 
 
 linearis, Benth. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Kk. Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Ain ora 
 
 angulosa, Benth. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—iy 
 
 Pk. Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal. ' 
 
 sp.— 
 
 4 
 
 Id. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk 
 
 March 
 
 Do. 
 
 repens, Ham. 
 
 5 
 
 11. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 prostrata, Jacq. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pr. Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 grogsa, Wall 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 S' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gagar Pass ... 
 
 22. Brunei! a- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vulgar is, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 &"■ — 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, & c., 
 
 23 Marrubium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanatum, Benth. 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 6" 
 
 Br.? 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Shelshel 
 
 24 Craniotome- 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 versicolor, Reich. 
 
 25- Anisomeles- 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk, W. 
 
 September, 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 ovata, Br. 
 
 • • . 
 
 H. 
 
 2'-4' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 26- Colquhounia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vestita, Wall. 
 
 27- Stachys- 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 8' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal, Gori 
 valley. 
 
 sericea, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Li. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 splendens, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Li. 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 28- Leonurus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cardiaca, L. 
 
 . • . 
 
 II. 
 
 2'— S' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 29- Lamium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 araplexicaule, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal, 
 
 Naini Tal, Sa- 
 ba. 
 
 petiolatum, Royle 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 i' — 1§' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 rhomboideum, Benth., 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 September, 
 
 Kyungar, &c.... 
 
 sp ?■ 
 
 . 4 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 • • . 
 
 June 
 
 Sagtia-deo 
 
 30 Roylea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 8' 
 
 Br. 
 
 March 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
I 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 563 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 nO 
 
 c3 
 
 -8 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 O 
 
 OQ 
 
 fl 
 
 O- 
 
 • r-< 
 
 +3 • 
 
 • r— < 
 
 pi 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 CD 
 
 4H 
 
 .2 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 O CD 
 * 
 
 c3 q; 
 
 \> ,£2 
 
 CD 7a 
 
 . S 
 
 >> 
 
 .2 
 
 8 
 
 M 
 
 i-. 
 
 ft- 
 
 4^ 
 
 <D 
 
 *Q 
 
 e 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 15,500 
 
 14,000 
 
 B. 1 
 
 D. 
 
 T 
 
 it* 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 Open 
 
 Do 
 
 • • • 
 
 4,5—6,500 
 
 5,400 
 
 4-8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 •• • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do 
 
 Wet 
 
 banks. 
 
 Open 
 
 W oods 
 
 shady, 
 
 5.000 
 
 2.000 
 
 11,500 
 
 6 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 B. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 6—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 ... 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 K. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 1—6,000 . 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do-. 
 
 Woods 
 
 • • 
 
 6 8,000 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 •• 
 
 6,5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 •• 
 
 13—15,000 
 
 11,500 
 
 r! 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 •• 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
564 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Stracliey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 ~3l- Leucas. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hyssopifolia, Bentk. 
 cephalotes, Spreng. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 V 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar, &c. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Hawalbagh, &c. 
 
 lanata, Benth. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 G"— 8" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora 
 
 mollissima, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 II. 
 
 1' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 32- Leonotis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepetsefolia, Br. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 PI. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 33 . Phlomis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrophylla, Wall. ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Br. Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam valley ... 
 
 bracteosa, Boyle 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 July 
 
 Sagtia-deo 
 
 34. Tencrium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macrostachyum, Wall, 
 
 1 
 
 Sli. 
 
 5'— 10' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Gori valley , 
 
 quadrifarium, Ham. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 Li. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, &e., 
 
 Royleanum, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— S' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora? 
 
 laxum, Don 
 
 35. Ajnga. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Ramganga val- 
 ley. 
 
 bracteosa, Benth. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 M arch 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Bl. 
 
 February, 
 
 Lota Dun 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 U/'—2" 
 
 Y. P. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 
 
 H. cr 
 
 2" 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Lahur 
 
 LXXXIX. — PLAN- 
 taginace^:. 
 
 1. Plan ta go- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 asiatica, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Naini Tal, &c.. 
 
 Do.— — 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4"- — 5" 
 
 
 June 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 Do. >•■ 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 5" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Niti 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 Do 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Pal am valley... 
 
 XC.-NYCTAGIN- 
 
 ACE.®. 
 
 1. Bcerhaavia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Joshimath, Je- 
 1am. 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Tapuban 
 
 cliffusa, L. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Kaiadhungi ... 
 
 XCI.— AMARANT- 
 ACEiE. 
 
 1. Deeringia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 baccata, Moq. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 October ... 
 
 Jyari 
 
OF TIIE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 565 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Condition of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation ’n feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 .s 
 
 c3 
 
 P4 
 
 P 
 
 s- 
 
 p 
 
 Open 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 E. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 
 
 9—11,500 
 
 Woods 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 5,800 
 
 5,000 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4__8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • • 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 1, 5—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 , ^ 
 
 Open 
 
 12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . * . 
 
 On rocks ... 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 . . . 
 
 D. 
 
 Do. 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 r—i 
 
 1 
 
 xo 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . * * 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 5 (? 6 ' 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Htracheyand Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 _ i 
 
 Height of plant 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 2- Celosia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 argentea, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pk. W. 
 
 March 
 
 K a 1 a p athar, 
 &c. 
 
 3- Amarantus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 spinosus, L. 
 
 I 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kota, Almora, ; 
 
 Anardaua, Ham. 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 R. Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kathi, &c. 
 
 caudatus, L. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 R. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 4- Cyathula 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 capitata, Moq. 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 3' 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 tomentosa, Moq. 
 
 5- Pupaiia. 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 G/ 
 
 * * * 
 
 J une 
 
 Almora, &c. .... 
 
 lappacea, Moq. 
 
 t • i 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Kaladhungi ... 
 
 6 iErua. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ecandens, Wall. 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 2' —3' 
 
 Wli. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 7- Achyrantlies- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Lohathal 
 
 argentea, Lam. 
 
 2 
 
 II. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh, 
 
 August ... 
 
 llawalbagh 
 
 aspera, L. 
 
 3 
 
 II. 
 
 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 8- Alternanthera- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sessilis, B.Br. 
 
 ... 
 
 II. er. 
 
 1" 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 XCII. — CIIENOPO- 
 DIACE^E.. 
 
 1. ChenopocLium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 multiflorum, Moq. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Badarinath ... 
 
 album, L. 
 
 2,4, 5 
 
 II. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tola, Almora, 
 
 sp. 
 
 .3 
 
 H. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 Milam 
 
 sp-— 
 
 6 
 
 11. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 Botrys, L. 
 
 7 
 
 II. 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 2. Blitum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 virgatum, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 9" 
 
 . ••• 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Malari 
 
 i 
 
■OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 56-7 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hi)i 
 
 lay 
 
 >> 
 
 £ 
 
 c5 
 
 P3 
 
 Dry. ? P 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 In fields 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 > . 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—6,500 
 
 K. 
 
 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 4—9,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • . 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 Shady 
 
 6—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * 9 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shady 
 
 6,500 
 
 R 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,000 
 
 
 D, 
 
 
 - 
 
 In fields 
 
 6—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 1 ,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 R. 
 
 . » • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Open 
 
 . ’ 10,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
568 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 bi) 
 
 .2 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 <33 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3. Beta- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vulgaris, Moq. 
 
 t • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 , , 
 
 
 
 
 var. orientalis ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 4. Atriplex. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. — - 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 2" 3" 
 
 . • « 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Topidhunga ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 2. 
 
 II. cr. 
 
 3" 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Milam 
 
 5- Eurotia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ceratoides, C.A. Mey., 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1 ir 
 
 1 2 
 
 ... 
 
 August , . . 
 
 Laptel, plains 
 of Guge. 
 
 6- Salsola- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kali? L. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 • . . 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tisum 
 
 XCIII— PHYTOLAC- 
 CA CEiE. 
 
 1. Phytolacca. 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tlecandra, L. 
 
 • * * 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar, &c.,... 
 
 XCIY.— POLYGONA- 
 CEJE. 
 
 1. Polygonum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 macropliyllum, Don, 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 9" 
 
 Cr. 
 
 June 
 
 Dudatoli, Cha- 
 mi Pass. 
 
 Brunonis, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Cr. 
 
 September 
 
 ,Ralam, P i n - 
 dari. 
 
 vaccinifolium, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Cr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Do. &c. ... 
 
 viviparum, L. 
 
 5 
 
 ir. 
 
 l'-ll 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam, Laptel, 
 
 var. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Valleys in 
 Guge. 
 
 var. gracilimum, 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Rogila 
 
 horridum, Roxb. 
 
 7 
 
 II. 
 
 S' — 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 BhimTal 
 
 capitatum, Don 
 
 . . • 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 / 
 
 
 var. pingue 
 
 8 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 'March ... 
 
 Almora, outer 
 hills. 
 
 nepalense, Meisn. ... 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2 ' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
 sphcerocejihalum, 
 
 10 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 Pk. Pr. 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi 
 
 Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 perforatum, Meisn. ... 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 amplexicaule, Don ... 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 May 
 
 
 var. ambiguum 
 
 12, 14, 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Do., Kathi, &c. 
 
 var. oxyphyllum ... 
 
 13 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVISOES. 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 O 
 
 <3 
 
 o 
 
 in 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 •© 
 
 § 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 x 
 
 c3 
 
 • 4-3 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 ■ 4-4 
 
 g c3 
 
 O CJ 
 
 +3 * 
 
 C$ 0) 
 
 > -3 
 CD +J 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 .5 
 
 +a 
 
 . - a> 
 
 fc> ! r2 
 
 fi i H 
 
 1 
 
 •Cultivated 
 
 500 
 
 U. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,000 
 
 * * * 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 15—16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 - 
 
 E, 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 Open 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 11—14,000 
 
 K. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 11,-13,000 
 
 R, 
 
 D. 
 
 • . • 
 
 Open 
 
 11—14,5000 
 
 E. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 11,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Near and in 
 
 4,400 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 water. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 6—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 • . • 
 
 Forest 
 
 7-8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8000, 
 
 R. 
 
 , . . 
 
 ... 
 
 * * * 
 
 *•* 
 
 • « • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 569 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 72 
 
570 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Li M of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 i 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 lanigerum, R. Br, ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. indicum 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Bhim Tal, Al- 
 
 flaecidum, Roxb. 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 IN' 1 ay 
 
 mora. 
 
 E agesar, near 
 
 Posumbu, Ham. 
 
 17 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 R. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Na ni Tal, &c.. 
 
 strictum, All. 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 Hamiltonii, Spreng., 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 barbatnm, L. 
 
 20 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 jlebruary, 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 aTicuIare, L. 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 , , , 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 var. difEusum 
 
 21 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam 
 
 Dryandri, Spreng. ... 
 
 22 
 
 II. cr. 
 
 i" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Nay 
 
 Naini Tal, &e. 
 
 illecebroides, P elsn .... 
 quadrifidum, Ham. ... 
 
 23 
 
 H. cr. 
 
 \r/ 
 
 Pk. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Outer bibs 
 
 24 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 glabruui, Willil. 
 
 25 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Do., Kosi ri- 
 
 amphibium, L. 
 
 26 
 
 II. 
 
 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 ver. 
 
 Do. 
 
 pterocarpum, Wall. ... 
 
 27, 28 
 
 11 . sc. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 A ugust 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 
 • 
 
 polystachyum, Wall, 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 September. 
 
 Tal, Dhauli 
 valley. 
 
 var. glabrum 
 
 32 
 
 H- 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 w. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Vishnugauga 
 
 var. pubeseens 
 
 33 
 
 II. 
 
 3' — 4' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 valley. 
 
 Pal am, Milam. 
 
 frondosum. Meisn. 
 
 24 
 
 Sh. 
 
 8' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Lahur, Kathi ... 
 
 rumicifolium, Royle , 
 
 42 
 
 H. 
 
 1 1 r 
 
 1 2 
 
 Gr Y. 
 
 A ugust . . . 
 
 Ralam 
 
 var oblongum 
 
 35 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ? 
 
 May 
 
 Jhuni 
 
 chinense, L 
 
 • . • 
 
 , , , 
 
 • «. 
 
 
 . • « 
 
 var. Tlmnbergia- 
 
 36 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 nmn. 
 
 var. corymbosum ... 
 
 36i 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Ho. 
 
 filicaule, Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,, , 
 
 var. extenuatnm ... 
 
 37 II. cr. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam, Milam. 
 
 delieatulum, Meisn.... 
 
 38 
 
 II 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gothingy Ra- 
 
 sp. 
 
 39 
 
 H. 
 
 1 rr 
 
 2 
 
 K. 
 
 August ... 
 
 lam. 
 
 Barjikang 
 
 sinuatum, Royle 
 
 40 
 
 H, 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Pass. 
 
 Ralam, &c. 
 
 reeumbens, Royle ... 
 
 41 
 
 H cr 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 Pk, 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 
 nummul ari f o 1 i u m , 
 
 43 
 
 H. 
 
 G" 
 
 Pk 
 
 August ... 
 
 Dyari Pass. 
 Barjikang Pass. 
 
 Meisn. 
 
 perforatum, Meisn. ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. glacial e 
 
 44 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . 
 
 Milam ... 
 
 hntaile, Meisn. 
 
 45 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ralam valley... 
 
 cognatum, Meisn. 
 
 
 . , 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 
 var. alpestre 
 
 46 
 
 H. 
 
 11" 
 
 J 2 
 
 W,Pk. 
 
 August 
 
 3ompras 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 571 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hi/ 
 
 lay 
 
 V, 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 )&- 
 
 a , 
 
 & i 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 | 
 
 Near water 
 
 4,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 I?,. 
 
 
 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ..a 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 i— 2 ooo 
 
 K. 
 
 " 1 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 .. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 In water 
 
 6,100 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—6,100 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • ** 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,400 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On bashes 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 a • • 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 M * 
 
 
 Do 
 
 9 — 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Near water 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,500 
 
 lv. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 6— -7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 11,-13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,5 — 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ..a 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ! 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 14,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 r 
 
 
572? 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 \ 
 
 List of Kumoan 
 
 [Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 -M 
 
 ■ F— 4 
 
 "rt 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 i-4 
 
 tortuosum, Aids?). ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 rar. tibetanum 
 
 47 
 
 ii. 
 
 1 r 
 
 2 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Plains of Guge, 
 
 Bp.- 
 
 48 
 
 H. 
 
 1! * 
 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 Glivierii, Jaub.&f Spaeh 
 
 49 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 l/r 
 
 4 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Milam, Niti ... 
 
 2- Fagopyrnm, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 esculentwm, Manch. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Tola, &c. 
 
 cymosum, Mei s n. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Chaur, Almora, 
 
 rotundatum, Bab. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2 A— S' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Tola, &c.. 
 
 XCV. — ARISTOLQ- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CHI AGILE. 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 1. Aristolochia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 saccata, Wall. 
 
 • • « 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 co 
 
 I 
 
 i — j 
 
 o 
 
 Pr. E. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal,Ma- 
 
 XCVI.— PIP ERA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dhari Pass. 
 
 CEAL 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l. Peperomia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 reflexa, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 
 February, 
 
 Sarju river. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 Heyneana, Mlq. 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 2. Piper- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 longum,/,. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 t t » 
 
 ... 
 
 
 The Bhabar ... 
 
 XCVII.-LAURI- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 NEAL 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1, Cinnamomran. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tamala, Nees. 
 
 » • • 
 
 S. 
 
 10'— 12' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 2 Maciiilus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 odoratissimus, Nees. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' — 30' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills, See., 
 
 Tar. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 March 
 
 Do. Sar j u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 river. 
 
 3. Plicebe- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceolata, Nees. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'— 50' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Baisani 
 
 pallida, Nees. 
 
 2 
 
 | 
 
 Tr. 
 
 I 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Wh. j 
 
 May ...j 
 
 Jak Pass 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 573 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 r A 
 
 >> 
 
 P 
 
 Open 
 
 15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 l 
 
 ... | 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 6—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Polygonum No. 29 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W . 
 
 Open 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 i •• 
 
 = Polygonum No. 30 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 = Polygonum No. 31 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 6,5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Trees & rocks. 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 i« i 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 1 1—2,400 
 
 I R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 = C. albifiorum in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 | R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 1 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 .1 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
574 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List oj Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 H eight of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 £ 
 
 *03 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Hi ' 
 
 4. Litsea- 
 
 consimilis, Nees. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 O 
 
 [ 
 
 o 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 lanuginosa, Nees. .. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 5 Tetranthera, 
 
 tomer.tosa, Roab. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kosi river 
 
 monopetala, Liuxb. . . . 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 March . . 
 
 Outer hills, Sri- 
 
 6 Daphnidium. 
 
 pulcherrimum, Nees, 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 April 
 
 nagar. 
 
 Naini Tal, Biu- 
 
 bifariutn, Nees. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25'— 30' 
 
 
 May 
 
 fear. 
 
 Satrali valley, 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Binsar 
 
 XCVIII.— THYME- 
 LACEYE. 
 
 1. Daphne. 
 
 papyracea, Wall. 
 
 I 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 olcoides, L . 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 w: y. 
 
 June 
 
 sar, &c. 
 
 Jtlam 
 
 2 Wikstraemia- 
 
 virgata, Mtisn. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 J tine 
 
 Naini Tal, &c. 
 
 3 Stellera- 
 
 concinna, Edgew . 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 1"— 1*' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Bampa 
 
 XCIX. — EL^EAGNA- 
 CEAE. 
 
 1. Hippophae. 
 
 rhamnoides, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 1' 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 VI i lam, plains 
 
 salicifolia, Don. 
 
 2 
 
 T. 1 
 
 5' — 20' 
 
 • « 
 
 J 
 
 of Guge 
 
 Jwali, Gori ri- 
 
 2. Elaeagnns. 
 
 umbellata, Tliunb. ... 
 
 1,2 
 
 S. T, 
 
 3'— 20' 
 
 
 ipril ... i 
 
 ver. 
 
 Umora, Naini 
 
 latifolia, L. 
 
 3 
 
 T. 
 
 • • » 
 
 HI 
 
 I 
 
 Tal. 
 
 iota Dun ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 575 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 CS 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 qq 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 fl 
 
 O 
 
 *4J 
 
 ^3 
 
 G 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fee 
 the sea. 
 
 E 
 
 • rH 
 
 c3 
 
 Ph 
 
 Q 
 
 1 Tibet. 
 
 i 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest 
 
 « 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Telrndenia in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Daphnidium No 4 in Herb. S. & 
 
 Do. 
 
 .1,600 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1, 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . '<• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 e*4 l 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ill 
 
 *5 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 8,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods ••• 
 
 * 
 
 6—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open ••• 
 
 1 1 ,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 = rasserina in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Forest by wa- 
 
 6,5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • ir 
 
 
 ter. 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 • • 
 
576 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 C.-LORANTHA- 
 
 CEiE. 
 
 1. Loranthus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 longiflorus, Desr. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 cordifolius, Wall, ... 
 
 2, 3 
 
 Sh. p, 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 Br. R. 
 
 March 
 
 Outer hills .. 
 
 puiverulentus, Wall. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 3' — 4 ' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar, Bage- 
 
 vestitus, Wall. 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 R. 
 
 May 
 
 sar. 
 
 Gangoli, Naini- 
 
 ligustrinus, Wall. ... 
 
 6 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 May ... 
 
 Tal 
 
 Bagesar ,. 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 Sh. ? 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Baisani ... 
 
 2 Viscum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 attenuatum, DC. ... 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Bhabar, Gan- 
 
 album, L, 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 1'— 2’ 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 goli. 
 
 Common 
 
 articulatum, Burm. ,, 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Gagar &c 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. p. 
 
 1" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 CL— SANTALA- 
 CEiE 
 
 1. Thesium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 multicaule, Ledeb. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar, Niti ... 
 
 2. Osyris- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arborea, Wall. 
 
 ,,, 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5'— 8' 
 
 • • . 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kilimat, &c. ... 
 
 CII. — EUPHORBIA- 
 CEL®.. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Euphorbia- 
 
 pilulifera, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3" — '12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Kaladhungi ... 
 
 indica, Lam. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 i' — 14' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sar ju river ... 
 
 Stracheyi, Boiss 
 
 5, 18 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 « • • 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 
 Bp. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 ,,, 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Karnali river, 
 
 sp. (E. procera, Bieb ?) 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 Laptel. 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 i r — 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Singjari 
 
 cognata, Boiss. 
 
 9, 10 
 
 H. 
 
 i'— ir 
 
 • . . 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kalimat, Na- 
 
 nepalensis, Boiss 
 
 11, 13 14 
 
 H. 
 
 i' 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 mik 
 
 Almora 
 
 Maddeni, Boiss. 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Bp. 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 8" — i" 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Rarnni 
 
 .1 
 
OP fHE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 577 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 ci 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 ,5 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 Himd- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 ■+» 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 f 
 
 Qnultnus 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 On dalbergia ... 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 On trees 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • *« 
 
 »*• 
 
 On quercus ... 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 On trees ... 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 On trees 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 On pyrns and 
 
 3—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ulmus. 
 
 On quercus ... 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »M 
 
 Open ••• 
 
 6—11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . » 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 15—16,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 t • « 
 
 it! 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 5_6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 9,000 
 
 • * • 
 
 . o . 
 
 ... 
 
 Remarks. 
 
578 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey aud Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Bp. 
 
 37 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 Bp .— 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 ... 
 
 Juiy 
 
 Raj -hot i, Bom- 
 nras. 
 
 sp. 
 
 20 
 
 II. 
 
 1" 
 
 a . . 
 
 May 
 
 Champ w a 
 
 Royleana, Boiss. 
 
 * 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Sarju river & c., 
 
 2. Sarcococca- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Baligna, Mull. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 3- Buxus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bempervirens, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Ramni, Bagd- 
 war. 
 
 4- Bridelia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 stipularis, Bl. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 0 • 0 
 
 a a a 
 
 a a a 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 retusa, Spreng. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 ri* 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 5- Andrachne. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cordifolia, Mull. 
 
 6- Phyllanthus- 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 8' 
 
 . 
 
 • M 
 
 February, 
 
 Iiamganga ri- 
 ver. 
 
 Urinaria, L. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Aim ora 
 
 Niruri, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 V 
 
 a«« 
 
 September, 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 reticulatus, Foie. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 W. Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 Emblica, L. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Outer hills, Sar- 
 ju river. 
 
 nepalensis, Mull. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Bhabar, Sarju 
 river. 
 
 BP- 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 sp. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Kota 
 
 sp. 
 
 ... 
 
 Sh. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 7 — Securinega- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 obovata, Mull. 
 
 » • * 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 12' 
 
 W. Gr. 
 
 May 
 
 Bhim Tal, Kosi 
 valley. 
 
 8- Putranjiva- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Roxburghii, Wall. ... 
 
 ota 
 
 Tr, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 09« 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 9- Daplmiphyllum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 himalense 
 
 a • a 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 
 
 Gagar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 579 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 d 
 
 <£3 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 Him 
 
 a - 
 
 
 
 
 
 layct. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 -t-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 .s 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 c3 0 
 !> ^ 
 
 03 
 
 . 
 
 >> 
 
 pi 
 
 • i - l 
 
 c3 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 P3 
 
 0 
 
 s 
 
 
 Open 
 
 14,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . 1 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • * . 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 « • 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 8,600 
 
 L. 
 
 ... 
 
 <«< 
 
 ss Leptopus cordifolius in Herb. S. 
 and W. 
 
 Wet 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « • • 
 
 
 * 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 »ac 
 
 &=Fluggea No. 1 in Herb- S. and W 
 
 Do- 
 
 1 — 4,600 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Bmblica officinalis in Herb. S. and 
 
 W. 
 
 = Bradleia ovata in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1_ 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » a • 
 
 sac 
 
 = Ph. juniperinus , Wall, in Herb. S. 
 and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 099 
 
 Anisoneina in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • O 0 
 
 — Glochidion bifarium ? in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 Open 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 =iFluggea Nos. 2 and 3 in Herb. S. 
 and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • «< 
 
 
 Do# " «o 
 
 6-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 tit 
 
 = Goughia in Herb. S. and W. 
 
580 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumccon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 10- Antidesma- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 diandrum, Tulasne ... 
 
 11. Jatropha. 
 
 » * 0 
 
 T. 
 
 • •• 
 
 im 
 
 • •• 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 Curcas, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 12- Acalypha. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calyciformis, Wight, 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Dhanpur 
 
 13- Adelia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ep. 
 
 t • a 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 ^February, 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Sarju vadley. 
 
 14. Trewia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nudiflora, L, 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 March . , . 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 15- Mallotas. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 philippinensis, Mull., 
 
 • it 
 
 Tr. 
 
 26' 
 
 ill 
 
 December, 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 16- Ricinus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 communis, L. 
 
 » « • 
 
 Sh. 
 
 Ol 
 
 r—i 
 
 I 
 
 00 
 
 R. 
 
 ill 
 
 » » i 
 
 17- Excaecaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 acerifolia, Mull. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 ... 
 
 All the 
 year. 
 
 Kapkot, Gango- 
 li. 
 
 insignia, Mull. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30 
 
 Y. 
 
 January ... 
 
 Outer hills, 
 Sarju river. 
 
 CIII.— URTICA* 
 CEHi, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Ulnius. 
 
 I 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'— 60' 
 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 integrifolia, Uoxb. ... 
 parrifolia, Jacq. 
 
 H 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 
 February, 
 
 Bagesar ... 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 , , . 
 
 
 campestris, L 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 var. macrophylla ... 
 » " 
 
 2. Celtis. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 601 
 
 
 April 
 
 Dwali 
 
 australis, L. 
 
 2,3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25'— 40' 
 
 
 March ... 
 
 Kota, Namik, 
 Almora. 
 
 eriocarpa, Dene. 
 
 4,5 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 March 
 
 Kota, Almora, 
 &e. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 581 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 G> 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 pO 
 
 & 
 
 -4-3 
 
 <D 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Elevation in f 
 the sea. 
 
 1 : — : — i 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 tH 
 
 A 
 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 2—3.000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . ••• 
 
 = Rotilera in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3,5—5000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Sapium sp. in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Falconeria in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • • i 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Mt 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 • 
 
 Forest 
 
 2—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
582 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaqn 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 +3 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 • r-< 
 
 -s 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3. Sponia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 politoria, Planch. ... 
 
 in 
 
 Sh. 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 December, 
 
 Kalapathar ... 
 
 4. Cannabis. 
 
 sativa, L. „. 
 
 • • » 
 
 H. 
 
 8'— 18' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 5. Streblns- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 asper, Lour. 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 6- Morus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 laevigata, Wall. 
 
 I 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota 
 
 indica, L. 
 
 2,4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 • • . 
 
 February, 
 
 Do. 
 
 Berrata, Roxb. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 44' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Namik 
 
 7- Ficus- 
 
 cordifolia, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 
 
 Kota 
 
 religiosa, L. 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 virgata, Roxb. 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 • . . 
 
 . • « 
 
 B h a b a r, A 1- 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 mora. 
 
 Kota 
 
 retusa, L. 
 
 5 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 
 
 Kosi river 
 
 Roxburghii, Wall. ... 
 
 6 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Ramganga river 
 
 infectoria, Roxb. 
 
 7 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40' 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 Pindar river ... 
 
 conglomerata, Roxb.... 
 
 8 
 
 Tr. 
 
 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ramganga 
 
 tuberculata, Wall. ... 
 
 9 
 
 S. sc 
 
 15' 
 
 
 
 river. 
 
 Sarju 
 
 hispida, L.j. 
 
 10 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 indiea, L. 
 pubigera, Wall. 
 
 11 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • . 
 
 Kota Dun, &c., 
 
 12 
 
 S. BC. 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 ... 
 
 . . * 
 
 Below Gangoli 
 
 scandens, Roxb. 
 
 13 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 50' 
 
 
 
 Bagesar. 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 foveolata, Wall. 
 
 14 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30' 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 N a i n i T a 1, 
 
 parasitica, Keen. 
 
 15 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 30' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Dliauli river. 
 Kaladhungi ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 16 
 
 ? 
 
 , . • 
 
 l • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 18 
 
 Tr. 
 
 » . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Outer hills 
 
 sp. — - 
 
 19 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Pyura 
 
 sp. 
 
 20 
 
 Fr. 
 
 40' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bhabar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WE STEEN PROVINCES 
 
 583 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 d 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 W 
 
 0 
 
 o 
 
 T3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 On rocks 
 Forest 
 Opeu 
 Do. 
 
 Forest. 
 Forest 
 On rocks 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest 
 
 Open 
 
 Forest 
 
 <d 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 rO 
 
 d 
 
 •4-a 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 2,000 
 
 B. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Epicarpus in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 500—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 6—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1—5,400 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *5 
 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 * * » 
 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = F. brachycarpa, Miq., in Herb. S 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 and W. 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 500 — 4,000 
 
 E. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . a r 
 
 
 500 4,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • i a 
 
 ,,, 
 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 E. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 i 2,500—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 z=F. densa, Miq., in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 a a a 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 - 
 
584 
 
 Himalayas districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 8. Artocarpus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lakoocha, Roxb. 
 
 Tr. 
 
 ... 
 
 30'. — 40' 
 
 ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 Near Kota 
 
 9. Urtica. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 parviflora, Roxb. 
 
 1, 3, 16 
 
 H. 
 
 3'— 8' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 July. 
 
 Paton, Kota ... 
 
 dioica, L. 
 
 2, 15 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ? 
 
 hyperborea, Jacquem., 
 
 4, 18 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kyungar 
 
 10. Laportea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 evitata, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 S' 
 
 Ml 
 
 July 
 
 J elicit 0 * . 
 
 11. Girardinia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 heterophylla, Dene. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Paton 
 
 12. Pilea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 umbrosa, Wedd. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar 
 
 scripta, Wedd. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 S’ 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do Gagar ... 
 
 trinervis, Wight 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 U f 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Kalimundi ... 
 
 13- Lecanthus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wightii, Wedd. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2" — S" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 ver, Jagesar. 
 
 14- Elatostemma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 obtusum, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 lit 
 
 6" 
 
 • • • 
 
 June 
 
 Kathi, Lahur... 
 
 sessile, Wedd. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • ■ « 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 var. polycephalum, 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal, Na- 
 mik. 
 
 „ cuspidatum ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Lahur 
 
 diversifolium, Wall.... 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Lohathal 
 
 Stracheyanum, Wedd., 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Tola, Binsar ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 4'-6' 
 
 • . » 
 
 February, 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 15- Bcehmeria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 platyphylla, Wedd. ... 
 
 1, 2, 3, 6 
 
 H. or 
 S. 
 
 1'- 10' 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 May to Au- 
 gust. 
 
 Dhakuri-bina- 
 yak, Bagesar, 
 Sarju river, 
 Almora. 
 
 macrophylla, Don ... 
 
 4 
 
 S. 
 
 6'— 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 rugulosa, Wall. 
 
 7 
 
 Tr. 
 
 20' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ditto 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 585 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 a> 
 
 CJ 
 
 <*3 
 
 o 
 
 Him a- 
 
 c3 
 
 lay a. 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 4h 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 o ^ 
 
 Q QJ 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 > ^ 
 
 
 
 O 4-» 
 
 
 Jh 
 
 
 P3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 Forest 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Open 
 
 2,5—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do 
 
 • • • 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—17,500 
 
 • . • 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,000 
 
 R, 
 
 Open . • • 
 
 4—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Woods 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do by water, 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 Damp shade ... 
 
 4—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Wet banks ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 
 Ditto 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Wetshady 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 rocks. 
 
 
 
 Forest & open, 
 
 2—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Open . . 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ditto 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 • • . 
 
 D. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 = Urtica No 1 . 2 in Herb". S. and W, 
 
 = Urtica No. 9 in. Herb. S. and W . 
 
 = Urtica, No. 1 in Herb. S. and W. 
 =-• Urtica No. 19 in Herb. S. & W. 
 = Urtica No. 17 in Herb. S. and W ^ 
 
 =; Procris Nos. 3, 4, 8, & 9 in Herb. 
 S. and W. 
 
 
 = Procris No. 1 in Herb. S. & W; 
 
 — Procris No. 7 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 ±= Procris No. 6 in Herb, S. and W 0 
 Procris No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 = Procris No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 = Urtica No. 23 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 = Urtica Nos. 4, 5 and 20 in Herb. 
 S. and W. 
 
 = Urtica No. 7 in Herb. S. & W, 
 = Urtica No. 21 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 \ 
 
 74 
 
586 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strackey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 1 
 
 Locality. 
 
 16- Chamabakia. 
 
 cuspidata, Wedd. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Mohargari, 
 
 17. Memorialis- 
 
 ciliaris,- Wedd. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 i«« 
 
 
 Tungnath. 
 
 Baijnath 
 
 18- Pouzolzia- 
 
 ovalis, Wedd. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 quinquenervis, Bl. ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4 r 
 
 ... 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Alrnora 
 
 19- Villebrunia- 
 
 f rutescens r Bl. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 lO 
 
 H 
 
 .1 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 20- Debregeasia. 
 
 velutina, Wedd.. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5'— 15' 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gori river, Sar- 
 
 hypoleuca, Wedd. 
 
 2 
 
 Shi 
 
 15' 
 
 
 March ... 
 
 ju river. 
 Ramganga ri- 
 
 21 Maoutia- 
 
 Pay a, Wedd. 
 
 
 Sh. 
 
 5'' 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 ver. 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 22 ■ Parietaria, 
 
 debilis, Forsh. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Below Milam & 
 
 CIV.— JFGLANDA- 
 CEiE. 
 
 1- Juglans. 
 
 regia,, L. 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 O 
 
 r 
 
 ox 
 
 O 
 
 
 March ... 
 
 Badarinath. 
 
 Dwali 
 
 2 Engelhardtia. 
 
 Colebrookiana, Lindl., 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40' 
 
 » 1 1 
 
 March 
 
 Kota, Bagesar. 
 
 sp- 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 C V. — MYRIC ACE M. 
 
 1- Myrica. 
 
 sapida, Wall. 
 
 
 T K 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 
 April 
 
 Suring, Almo- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ra. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 587 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 & 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 OQ 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 ■§ 
 
 +=> 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 laya , 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 OQ 
 
 S 
 
 • r-t 
 ■+3 
 
 • pH 
 
 n3 
 
 !=3 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 ■Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 '3 
 
 95 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Wet banks ... 
 
 6—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 '•4 
 
 = Urtica No. 8 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 3,500 
 
 B. 
 
 ... 
 
 ..... 
 
 
 Open banks . . . 
 
 ? 
 
 5,000 
 
 B. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Urtica No. 24 in Herb. S. & W* 
 = Urtica No. 10 in Herb. S. &W . 
 
 Forest 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 B. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Urtica No. 22 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 Ditto 
 
 2, 5—5,000 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Urtica Nos. 12 and 13 in Herb 
 S. and W. 
 
 = Urtica No. 14 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Banks 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Urtica No. 11 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 8,500—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 4—8,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ? 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open .» 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
588 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTKICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. j 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 cvi — cupuLi- 
 
 FEKAL. 
 
 1. Carpinus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 viminea, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60* 
 
 ... 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal,Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 faginea, Lindl. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60* 
 
 ... 
 
 March 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 2. Corylus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Colurna, L. 
 
 3. Gtuercus- 
 
 ... 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60* 
 
 • * * 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali Tongha- 
 ri. 
 
 semicarpifolia, Sm — 
 
 1 
 
 Tr. 
 
 100' 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 China, Kathi, 
 &c. 
 
 lanuginosa, Don 
 
 o 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40* 
 
 •V 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 dilatata, Lindl. ... 
 
 3 
 
 Tr. 
 
 GO' 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 incana, Roxb. 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Ubique 
 
 annulata, Sm. 
 
 5 
 
 Tr. 
 
 60' 
 
 ... 
 
 March ... 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 4- Castanea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fcribuloides, A. DC. ... 
 
 » • « 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40* 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gangoli, &c. ... 
 
 5- Betula. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bhojpattra, Wall. ... 
 
 1,2 
 
 Tr. 
 
 16'— 30' 
 
 . • * 
 
 May 
 
 Champ wa, &c. s 
 
 acuminata, Wall. ... 
 
 6- Alnus. 
 
 3,4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 40'— GO' 
 
 
 April 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 ncpalensis, Don 
 
 
 Tr. 
 
 30'— 40* 
 
 • • • 
 
 October ... 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 CVII.-SALIGINE2E. 
 
 1- Salix- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 acutifolia, Willd. 
 
 1 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Ramni, Betuli 
 Pass 
 
 elegans, Wall. 
 
 2, G, V 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6'— 15' 
 
 ... 
 
 May, June, 
 
 Naini Tal,Dug- 
 li, NainikjNi- 
 ti. 
 
 tetrasperma, Roxb. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Tr. 
 
 25' 
 
 » . < 
 
 May 
 
 Satrali valley, 
 
 Wallichiana, Anders., 
 
 3, 11 
 
 Sh. 
 
 12' 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 589 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevati on in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 fen 
 
 P 
 
 Forest 
 
 • • • 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • i 
 
 • i • 
 
 
 Do 
 
 • •• 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 hi 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Dq. 
 
 • •• 
 
 6, 5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 hi 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4, 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 t • « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ill 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 III 
 
 • « • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 III 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 1 R. 
 
 ill 
 
 ill 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 7—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •« 
 
 • • • 
 
 
590 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Name. 
 
 Grisea, Wall. 
 
 sclerophylla, Anders . , 
 
 Lindleyana, Wall. ... 
 
 furcata, Anders. 
 
 CVIIL— GNETA- 
 CEiE. 
 
 1. Ephedra. 
 
 vulgaris, Rich. 
 
 CIX.- CONIFER JE. 
 
 1. Cupressus- 
 
 toralosa, Don 
 
 2 Jnniperns. 
 
 excelsa, M. Bieb. ... 
 recurva, Don ... 
 
 var. squamata, 
 Wallichiana,///. Sf T. 
 
 communis, L. ... 
 
 3. Taxus. 
 
 baccata, L. ... 
 
 4. Finns. 
 
 longifolia, Roxb. ... 
 excelsa, Wall. 
 
 5. Cedrus. 
 
 Deodara, Loud. 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 £ 
 
 •H 
 
 l“—4 
 
 cS 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Hi 
 
 5 
 
 Sh. 
 
 16' 
 
 ... 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
 8, 10 
 
 Sh. 
 
 3'— 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkirn, Raj- 
 hoti. 
 
 12, 14 
 
 Sh. 
 
 2"— 2' 
 
 ill 
 
 June, July, Pindari, Barji- 
 1 kang Bass. 
 
 13 
 
 Sh. 
 
 9" — 12" 
 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari, Barji- 
 kang Pass. 
 
 • • • 
 
 s. 
 
 l'.— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari, 
 
 Milam, Tibet. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 100' 
 
 ... 
 
 February, 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 20'— 30' 
 
 
 June 
 
 Milam, Malari, 
 
 2 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 J une 
 
 Dugli, &c. 
 
 3 
 
 Sh. 
 
 6' 
 
 * •« 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 4 
 
 Sh. 
 
 4' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Milam, Rim- 
 kim. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 60' 
 
 ••• 
 
 April 
 
 Dwali, & c. 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 100' 
 
 • • « 
 
 February, 
 
 Ubique 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 100' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Above Joshi- 
 math. 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 160' 
 
 • •• 
 
 September, 
 
 1 
 
 Jelam 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 591 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &e. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Himd- 
 
 laya-. 
 
 ■£ 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 >> 
 
 '3 
 
 «■ 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 5 — 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 C 13,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 ( — 15,500 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11 — 14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 9 - 16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 4 , 5 — 9,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 9 — 14,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 , 
 
 Do. in 
 
 9 — 14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D, 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 9 — 14,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 o 
 
 0 
 © 
 
 r—i 
 
 1 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open forest „ 
 
 2 — 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 hi 
 
 • 
 
 Do. •• 
 
 5 — 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ill 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 9 — 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS? 
 
 m 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 • 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 6- Abies. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Webbiana, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 T. 
 
 150' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Champta, 
 
 Dwali. 
 
 var. Pindrow 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 150' 
 
 • . . 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi, &e. 
 
 Smithiana, Wall. 
 CX.—HYDBOCHA' 
 
 3 
 
 T. 
 
 150' 
 
 ... 
 
 April, ... 
 
 Above Joshi- 
 raath. 
 
 PIDEvE. 
 
 1. Hydrilla- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 verticillata, Rich . ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 • •• 
 
 HI 
 
 • •• 
 
 Bliim Tal, Nai- 
 rn Tal. 
 
 2- Vallisneria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 spiralis, L. 
 
 CXI.— SCITAMI- 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 HI 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 B him Tal, Nai- 
 rn Tal. 
 
 NBAS. 
 
 1. Globba- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 orixensis, Roxb. ... 
 
 • M 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Of. 
 
 HI 
 
 DyariPass, Ha- 
 walbagh. 
 
 2- Zingiber. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 capitatum, Roxb. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 chrysanthum, Rose . ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Moliargari 
 
 3 Curcuma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 long - a, Wall. ... 
 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Or. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Bagesaf ... 
 
 4- Koscoea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 purpurea, Sm. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— li' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 May ••• 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 alpina, Royle ... 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4"- 6" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Karim Pass, 
 China. 
 
 gracilis, Sm. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— li' 
 
 ... 
 
 June ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 elatior, Sm. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi ... 
 
 5 ■ Hedychium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 coccineum, Sm. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 S. 0. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Jagesaf 
 
 spicatum, Sm. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 var. elatum 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 densiflorum, Wall. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 W. Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Near Bagesar... 
 
 ellipticum, Sm. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 3' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Du. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 593 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 ■Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 • pH 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 & 
 
 XQ 
 
 r* 
 
 p— n 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Thick forest ... 
 
 9,5—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 IM 
 
 — 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,5—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 i.l 
 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 6—11,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 In water ... 
 
 4—6,400 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • »•« 
 
 \ . 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 4,400 
 
 R. 
 
 Mt 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? % 
 
 
 Open 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . o * 
 
 M< 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • ♦ • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 »«• 
 
 • t • 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Open 
 
 7—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 « I • 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,600 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . • • 
 
 Woods 
 
 5 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 75 
 
504 
 
 himXlayan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 *4 ' 
 
 © S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 & r 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 9 , 
 
 ■+3 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 J-l 
 
 bC 
 
 <4H 
 
 o 
 
 +3 
 
 s 
 
 © 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 S3 
 
 © 
 
 Jh 
 
 p* 
 
 o 
 
 Tl 
 
 
 Name, 
 
 erbarium 
 (Strachey : 
 terbottom) 
 
 r— i 
 
 SH 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 .bp 
 
 ’© 
 
 % 
 
 o 
 
 q3 
 
 SH 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 a 
 
 «r*t 
 
 o 
 
 
 W 
 
 K 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 6- Costus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 speciopus, Sni. 
 
 • •• 
 
 II. 
 
 3' 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Sarju valley .. 
 
 7- Musa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 papientum, L. 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 6'~~8' 
 
 • . • 
 
 ? 
 
 Sarju and Kali 
 
 CXIL— QRCHI- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 river. 
 
 DKJE . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Epiphttai.. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Obgronia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iridifolia, Lindl. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 4" — 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Bliabar,Bagesar, 
 
 2- Empnsa- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 paradoxa ? Lindl. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 9'f 
 
 G. Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Lohathal 
 
 3- Dienia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C ylmdrostachya,Z.i?id/ 0 , 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 G. W. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 4 Liparis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Lindl . 
 
 1 
 
 IJ. 
 
 8" 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar 
 
 5- Phalidota- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 articulata, Lindl. 
 
 17 
 
 n. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Bagesar, outer 
 
 ipibricata, Lindl , 
 
 16 
 
 H. 
 
 i'—iy 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 hills. 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ver, Sarju, 
 
 6- Ccelogyne. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elata, Lindl. 
 cristata, Lindl. 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 i'-i ? 
 
 i' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 April 
 
 Sar j u river . . . 
 Champ a wat, 
 
 7* Bolbophylhmx. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 ujnbellatum, Lindl. ... 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ramganga river 
 
 8- Cinhopetalum- 
 
 Wallichii, Lindl. 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 
 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 59-5 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil. &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above' 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks.- 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 R 
 
 Open 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods ... 
 
 3-4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ■5 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 #•« 
 
 t • • 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 3 — 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ,,, 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,700 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • * * 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. • • 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ■ 
 
596 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 $erbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 9. Elia. 
 
 excavata, Lindl. 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 sp. 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 Qf' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 10- Dendrobium. 
 
 denudang, Don 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Jalath 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 li. 
 
 1' 
 
 Or. 
 
 May 
 
 Jagthana, &c., 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 II. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 • > • 
 
 
 sp.— 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 6''— -8" 
 
 ... 
 
 • M 
 
 Kamgangariver 
 
 sp. 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 11 Phajns. 
 
 albus, Lindl. 
 
 18 
 
 B. 
 
 1 f 
 
 2 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 12. CymMdium. 
 
 giganteum, Swartz. . . . 
 
 26 
 
 H. 
 
 1 X f* 
 
 1 2 
 
 Br. R. 
 
 October ... 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 13- Vanda. 
 
 cristata, Lindl. 
 
 21 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 Hay 
 
 Bagesar, outer 
 
 sp. 
 
 22 
 
 H. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Hay 
 
 hills. 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 14. Chiloschista- 
 
 sp. 
 
 23 
 
 H. 
 
 0" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Below Binsar. 
 
 15. Saccolabium. 
 
 guttatum, Lindl . 
 
 24 
 
 H. 
 
 K 
 
 Pk. 
 
 Tuly ... 
 
 B/igesar, outer 
 
 16- Aerides. 
 
 affine, Wall. 
 
 25 
 
 H. 
 
 1" 
 
 Pk. * 
 
 Tuly ... 
 
 hills 
 
 3habar, Bage- 
 
 Tjsbrestriai,. 
 
 17. Enlophia- 
 
 arupestris, Lindl. 
 
 19 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. I 
 
 Hay ... 1 
 
 sar. 
 
 Bagesar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 597 
 
 — 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 
 the area. 
 
 Hir 
 
 lay 
 
 .s 
 
 P3 
 
 na- 
 il . 
 
 u 
 
 « 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 On trees 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 4,700 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 . .. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 ••• . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. mi 
 
 3,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 t 
 
 ' 
 
598 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Name, 
 
 18- Cyrtoptera- 
 
 flava, Lindl. 
 
 19- Calanthe- 
 
 plantaginea, Lindl. ... 
 
 20- Orchis. 
 
 latifolia, L., var. ... 
 
 21- Gymnadenia. 
 
 Chusua, Lindl. 
 orchidia, Lindl. 
 
 22- Aceras- 
 
 angustifolia, Lindl.... 
 
 23- Platanthera- 
 
 Susann®, Lindl. 
 obcordata, Lindl. 
 
 acuminata, Lindl. ... 
 
 Candida, Lindl. 
 
 24. Hemipilia. 
 
 cordifolia, Lindl. ... 
 
 25- Peristylns- 
 
 fallax, Lindl. 
 goodyeroides, Lindl., 
 
 26. Herminium. 
 
 gramineum, Lindl. ... 
 congestu in, Lindl. ... 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 •4-3 
 
 § 
 
 20 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Below Almora? 
 
 27 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Binsar, &e. ... 
 
 28 
 
 H, 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Kulara, Tola. 
 
 35 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June 
 
 Rogila 
 
 42 
 
 H. 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 ? 
 
 August .. 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 29 
 
 H. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 39 
 
 H. 
 
 2 r 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora. 
 
 40 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kali mat, Jage- 
 sar. 
 
 41 
 
 li. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 44 
 
 h. 
 
 9" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bagesar, Loha- 
 tlial 
 
 37 
 
 H, 
 
 5" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Shaidevi Peak, 
 
 32 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Ral- 
 am. 
 
 33 
 
 H. 
 
 !'•— 
 
 Gr. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 31 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Kalimundi ? ... 
 
 34 
 
 H. 
 
 8" 
 
 Gr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Tola 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 599 
 
 Plants — (con tinned) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the area. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 £ 
 
 • r— 1 
 
 PS 
 
 a 
 
 Open 
 
 4,500 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 » 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,500 
 
 E. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 11,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5— 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * . • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,500 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open, Wet . . 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
600 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD rj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 0 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Name. 
 
 * /A 
 r-- &V* 3 
 
 •d 
 
 +3 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 f-i 
 
 +3 
 
 c 
 
 a. 
 
 f-4 
 
 a> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 *C3 
 
 a 
 
 • 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 S Jo 
 
 r* rG +3 
 .2 0+3 
 
 bo 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 q-i 
 
 • 
 
 
 p cj O 
 
 o 
 
 -«3 
 
 fH 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ■ess 
 
 • .-H 
 
 •i 
 
 bB 
 
 • r— < 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 3 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 
 S3 
 
 k 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 27 • Habenaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 plantaginea, Lindl. ... 
 marginata, Lindl. ■■ 
 
 36 
 
 H. 
 
 • 8" 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Binsar 
 
 .38 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Y. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Almora 
 
 commelynsefolia, Wall., 
 
 43 
 
 H. 
 
 ir 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Ratnganga, ri- 
 ver 
 
 intermedia, Don 
 
 45 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Jagesar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 pectinata, Don 
 
 46 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Y. G. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 28- Satyrium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalense, Don 
 
 30 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 29- Cephalan- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tliera- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 acuminata, Lindl. ... 
 
 47 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Rogila, Dudu- 
 
 
 
 
 toli 
 
 cnsifolia, Rich. 
 
 48 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 • •• 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 30. Listera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 49 
 
 H. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 31- Epipactis. 
 
 jnacrostachya, Lindl., 
 
 50 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 4' 
 
 Y. Gr. 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 consimiliB, Don 
 
 51 
 
 H. 
 
 r— 2 ? 
 
 Gr. Pr. 
 
 March 
 
 Kapkot, outer 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hillB. 
 
 32- Spiranlhes- 
 
 amsena, Bicb. 
 
 52 
 
 H 
 
 6" — 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 33- Zeuxine. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sulcata, Lindl. 
 
 53 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 February, 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
 34. Goodyera. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 marginata, Lindl. ... 
 
 64 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Gagar, Kali- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mundi. 
 
 35. Cypripedium. 
 
 cordigerum, Don 
 
 55 
 
 H. 
 
 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindar valley. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PRVINCES 
 
 601 
 
 Plants — ^continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 1 
 
 Woods 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • ♦ ♦ 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 3 — 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 and 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 woods. 
 
 
 
 
 
 t « • 
 
 
 o » 4 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 and 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 open. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • % • 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • l * 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ♦ : 
 
 Woods 
 
 • •• 
 
 6,6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Open 
 
 4*4 
 
 3—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 9*4 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 B. 
 
 ... 
 
 Wet 
 
 • 4 • 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Remarks^ 
 
 76 
 
602: 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name.- 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 CXIII.— IRIDEJE. 
 
 1. Iris. 
 
 nepalensis, Don 
 
 1 
 
 Id. 
 
 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 April 
 
 Almora 
 
 Kumaonensis, Walt., 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Bl. 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari, Niti... 
 
 sulcata, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 ] i" 
 
 1 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Pindar Talley, 
 
 2. Par dan thus. 
 
 cliinensis, Wer. 
 
 
 H. 
 
 S'— 4' 
 
 Se. 
 
 June 
 
 Almora 
 
 CXI V.— AM ARYL- 
 LIDEHS. 
 
 1, Curculigo, 
 
 orchioides, Gcertn. ... 
 
 I 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 gracilis, Wall. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' —S' 
 
 Y. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 2 . Hypoxis- 
 
 minor, Don 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Y. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora, Katlii, 
 
 CXV.— DIOSCO- 
 RIDEiE. 
 
 1. Dioscorea. 
 deltoidea, Wall. 
 
 I 
 
 H. se. 
 
 15'— 20' 
 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Kap- 
 
 bulbifer, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 16' 
 
 
 July 
 
 kot. 
 
 Almora 
 
 glabra, Roxb. 
 
 3 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 f 
 
 u> 
 
 c 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Bbabar, Bage- 
 
 pentaphylla, L. 
 
 4 
 
 H. se. 
 
 10 ' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 sar. 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 sagittata, Roxb. 
 
 5 
 
 II. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 . . . 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
 quiuata, Wall. 
 
 6 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 s' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Lolia-thal 
 
 dsemona, Roxb. 
 
 7 
 
 H. sc. 
 
 25' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 CXYI— SMI- 
 LACEJE. 
 
 1 Smilax. 
 elegans. Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 S. se. 
 
 •v. 
 
 0 
 
 rH 
 
 1 
 
 lO 
 
 Pr. 
 
 May 
 
 Samkhet, Naini 
 
 sp. (Hook cat. No. 7), 
 
 2 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10'— 36' 
 
 Hr. 
 
 May 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Katlii Pass 
 
 vaginata, Dene. 
 
 3 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Bin- 
 
 maculata,. Roxb. 
 
 4 
 
 S. sc. 
 
 10' 
 
 
 May 
 
 sar. 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 ovalifolia, Roxb. 
 
 5 
 
 6,7 
 
 S. sc. 
 S. sc. 
 
 25' 
 
 25' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 March . . . 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 Kota Dun 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 *603 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &e. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 a 
 
 * r-t 
 
 cS 
 
 M | 
 
 Dry. 
 
 i 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Open. 
 
 11,5-15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 . . . 
 
 Da. 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 t • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 W oods 
 
 3—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—6,500 
 
 Ei 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Woods 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Open woods 
 
 5,5—7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Forest 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • . 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Forest 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Remarks. 
 
604 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kurnaon 
 
 
 H ' 
 
 d a 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 5h 
 
 a> 
 
 SB 
 
 
 
 d ^ 
 
 H d 
 
 •*2 
 
 .5 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 03 
 
 S I s o 
 
 ► 
 
 o 
 
 5-1 
 
 be 
 
 | 
 
 ft 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 O 
 
 q3 
 
 
 
 ^ +=» 
 
 C c3 O 
 
 4H 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 C M 
 
 >> 
 
 
 cS £ S3 
 
 ■goQ S 
 
 w 
 
 — 
 
 +3 
 
 ■s 
 
 M 
 
 £ 
 
 be 
 
 *E3 
 
 tn 
 
 5h 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 O 
 
 o> 
 
 a 
 
 EH 
 
 4j> 
 
 § 
 
 i-i 
 
 CXVII. — LILIA- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CEAE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Lilium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 giganteum, Wall, 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6' 
 
 Wli. 
 
 June 
 
 Dwali 
 
 Wallichianum, Schultz. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 5' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 oxypetalum, Balter ... 
 
 • t • 
 
 H. 
 
 9" — 12" 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 June 
 
 Pindari 
 
 nepalense, Don 
 
 
 IT. 
 
 S r — 4 r 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Naim Tal ... 
 
 2- Fritillaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cirrhosa, Don 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— -12" 
 
 Gr. Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Champwa, Pin- 
 
 macrophylla, Don ... 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Rose. 
 
 March . . . 
 
 dari. 
 
 Almora 
 
 3. Tulipa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Btellata, Hoolt. 
 
 ... 
 
 H. 
 
 6" — 18' ; 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Feb. 
 
 Almora, &c. .., 
 
 4- Lloydia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 scrotina, Reich. 
 
 1, 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May to Ju- 
 
 Pindari Pathar- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iy- 
 
 kori, Bom- 
 
 5. Gagea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pras, Raj- 
 hoti. 
 
 lutea, L. 
 
 • • » 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Pindari 
 
 6- Iphigenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 intlica, Kill, 
 
 • t t 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 June 
 
 Almora 
 
 7- Gloriosa- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 superba, L. 
 
 » o • 
 
 H. 
 
 4'— 15' 
 
 Sc. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora, Bha- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Or. 
 
 
 bar. 
 
 8- Allium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Govanianum, Wall. ... 
 Wallicaii, Kih. ... 
 
 victoriale, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 Pk. 1 
 Wh. 1 
 
 June 
 
 June 
 
 June 
 
 Sing-jari 
 
 3hma, Ralam, 
 Binsar, Duda- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 toli. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 605 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation infeet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hin 
 
 lay 
 
 Pi 
 
 • i— t 
 
 o3 
 
 « 
 
 a- 
 
 2. 
 
 >> 
 
 « , 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 W oods 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 = Fritillaria sp. in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • « • 
 
 = Lilium No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 3, 5—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Lilium No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Fields 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open »• 
 
 8—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 9 
 
 ... 
 
 
 W oods 
 
 . 7 — 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
606 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 | 1 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 sp. (No. IS Hook cat.). 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Sing-jari 
 
 mbens, Schrced. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 tRalam 
 
 sp. (No. 15 Hook cat.), 
 
 lineare, L. 
 
 6, 9 
 
 H. 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 R. 
 
 J une, J uly, 
 
 • •0 
 
 Rajhoti, Lap- 
 tel, Tazang. 
 
 var. junceum 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 8" 
 
 Pr. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Rakas Tal, ... 
 
 ellipticum, Wall. ... 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 June ... 
 
 Jaliya khal, Mi- 
 lam. 
 
 schasnoprasum, L. ... 
 
 10 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 ? 
 
 July 
 
 Plain of Tibet ? 
 
 9. Urginea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 indica, Kth. 
 
 t • • 
 
 H. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • (I 
 
 » • • 
 
 Plains 
 
 10 Asphodelus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fistulosus, L. 
 
 • « • 
 
 H. 
 
 Uf 
 
 ... 
 
 January ... 
 
 Hard war ,.. 
 
 11. Asparagus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ascendens, Boxb. ... 
 
 1 
 
 S. 
 
 6" 
 
 Wh 
 
 • <« 
 
 Outer hills ... 
 
 laevissimua, Stend. ... 
 
 2 
 
 S. 
 
 S'- — 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Jnly 
 
 Ramganga river 
 
 filicinus, Ham. 
 
 3 
 
 s. 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Sing-jari, Na- 
 milr. 
 
 12. Polyonatum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 multiflorum, All. ... 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 2-3 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April 
 
 Gagar Pass ... 
 
 roseum, Led? 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 n 
 
 W. V. 
 
 July 
 
 Rimkim 
 
 yerticillatum, All. ... 
 
 2, 3, 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 April to 
 June, 
 
 Naini Tal,Na- 
 mik Kamni, 
 Sing-jari. 
 
 sibiricum, Bed. ... 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 S'— 4' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 &c. 
 
 13. Theropogon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pallidus, Maxim. ... 
 
 14- Tovaria. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Samkhet 
 
 pallida, Roxb. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' — S' 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Dwali 
 
 purpurea, Wall . Ir » 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 v-n 
 
 Pr - i 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 607 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks, 
 
 >> 
 
 .2 
 
 *3 
 
 PS 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 12,000 
 
 It. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 14—16,000 
 
 • • • j 
 
 . . . 
 
 T. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 16.500 
 
 . i* 
 
 • . « 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 10—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ••• 
 
 15,500? 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 r. 
 
 «•» 
 
 
 = Scilla No. 2 in Herb. S. and W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 tit 
 
 i 1,000 
 
 it. 
 
 
 • ti 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ti» 
 
 3—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 • • * 
 
 7—9,500 
 
 it. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • it 
 
 7—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •4 
 
 13,500 
 
 ... 
 
 •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 IK 
 
 7—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 .«« 
 
 • • 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 • #« 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • it 
 
 • •• 
 
 csChloopsis No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • ■ . 
 
 • •• 
 
 <= Smilacina No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 lit 
 
 .it 
 
 es Smilacina No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
608 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 S H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tab 
 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 pi 
 
 Js 
 
 § 
 
 pH 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 .S 
 
 CD 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 - 
 
 M i 
 
 O 
 
 fH 
 
 tX) 
 
 'PH 
 
 <4-1 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 cp 
 
 
 
 ^ n O 
 
 •r-l W 
 
 ?h 03 
 
 o 
 
 hCJ 
 
 Ph 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 _Q ■*-» _Q 
 
 <D W CD 
 
 • 1— ' 
 rQ 
 
 03 
 
 bfl 
 
 *3 
 
 P 
 
 O 
 
 r-H 
 
 o 
 
 <D 
 
 a 
 
 ”<3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 15- Clintonia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 alpina, Kth. 
 
 • •• 
 
 H. 
 
 U' 
 
 1 2 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Kulhara 
 
 16- Streptopus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 simplex, Don 
 
 • ■ « 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Eur Pass ... 
 
 17. Opliiopogon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 inter medius, Don ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ii. 
 
 i-ir 
 
 Wh. 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal, Ka- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 thi. 
 
 18- Disporum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calcar atum, Don — • 
 var. Hamiltonia- 
 
 l, 2 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Gr, Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Katlii? Dwali, 
 
 mum, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 pullum, Salisb. — 
 var. parvitlorum ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 Gr, Y. 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi ••• 
 
 19 Tofieldia. 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Wall. 
 sp. (No. 2 Hook cat.), 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 4" 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 July 
 
 Patharkori ... 
 Rajhoti ... 
 
 20- Paris. 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 polyphyila, Sin. 
 sp. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 1' 
 
 Gr. 
 
 May 
 
 May 
 
 Naini Tal 
 Namik 
 
 21- Trillidium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Govanianum, Kth. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 IM 
 
 May 
 
 Maclhari Pass. 
 
 CXVIII.— PONTE- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 DEBIACEiE. 
 
 1. Monochoria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vaginais, Presl. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 H. 
 
 1 1 ' 
 
 A 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 July 
 
 Almora 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 609 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 
 the area. 
 
 H in 
 lay 
 
 oj 
 
 a- 
 
 a. 
 
 Jh 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 W oods 
 
 10—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • tt 
 
 
 Open 
 
 11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 - 
 
 Do. 
 
 6, 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 10—13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 * • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,500 
 
 K. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 , 9,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
810 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kttmaon 
 
 Name, 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit cf growth. 
 
 CXIX.— COMMELY- 
 NACKffi. 
 
 1- Commelyna. 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 1,4 
 
 II. 
 
 bengalensis, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 obliqua, Lam. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 sp.— 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 communis, Kth. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2 • Cyanotls- 
 
 
 
 barbata, Kth. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 cristata, Kth. .. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3. Aneilema. 
 
 
 
 nudiflora, Kth. 
 
 »• • 
 
 H. 
 
 scapi flora, H iglit 
 
 ... 
 
 II. 
 
 4- Dithyrocarpus. 
 
 
 
 paniculatus, Roxb. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 H. 
 
 5. Streptoliiion. 
 
 
 
 volubile, Ed yew. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 H sc 
 
 GXX.-JUNCEJE. 
 
 1. Juncrns. 
 
 
 
 triglumis, L. 
 
 1 
 
 : H. 
 
 sphacelatus, Deve . .. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 sp.' 
 
 3 
 
 II. 
 
 sp — - — ■ 
 
 4 
 
 . H. 
 
 castaneus, Sm. 
 
 5 
 
 II. 
 
 glaucns, Eta'll. .. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 bi glum is, L. 
 
 7 
 
 i H, 
 
 Height of plant, 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering, 
 
 Locality. 
 
 11^ 11' 
 
 ^ 4 X 2 
 
 BI 
 
 August .. 
 
 Mohargari, 
 Naim Tal. 
 
 l r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 1 ' 
 
 BI. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Do. 
 
 11 ' 
 
 1 2 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August .. 
 
 Rarnari ... 
 
 \ r 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 3"— 6" 
 
 BI. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Naini Tal, Jd- 
 gesar. 
 
 9" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Almora? 
 
 6" 
 
 Bl. 
 
 August 
 
 Almora 
 
 2' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Jagesar, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 1' 
 
 Pk. 
 
 August ... 
 
 Near Almora .. 
 
 ... 
 
 Pk. 
 
 September, 
 
 Dhauli river ... 
 
 3" 
 
 0 0 1 
 
 July 
 
 Rajboti „. 
 
 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 July 
 
 Laptel ... 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 • 00 
 
 July 
 
 Bar j i kang 
 | Pass. 
 
 2' 
 
 « e • 
 
 July 
 
 Milam, Ralam, 
 
 2 7 
 
 • o« 
 
 July 
 
 Tola 
 
 2' • — 3 r 
 
 09 * 
 
 June 
 
 Binsar, Naini 
 | Tal. 
 
 2” 
 
 • • « 
 
 ^August ... 
 
 B a r j i kang 
 j Pass. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 611 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 
 Q> 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 4S 
 
 >• 
 
 O 
 
 Hiirui- 
 
 
 
 
 
 l-aya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 02 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 43 
 
 • r-H 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 o S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *43 82 
 
 >4 
 
 
 4-S 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 > ^3 
 
 <U 44 
 
 .s 
 
 oS 
 
 W 
 
 t- 
 
 fi 
 
 O 
 
 rO 
 • H 
 
 H 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *4 4 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 H. 
 
 • • • 
 
 *4 » 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 H. 
 
 ■ 4" 
 
 e« « 
 
 „ 
 
 DO, co. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • » 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 •4 » 
 
 • * • 
 
 
 Do. «i« 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « 4« 
 
 '* « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *44 
 
 
 Do. c«» 
 
 5-6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 By water ... 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ••0 
 
 
 Open, on bushes, 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 m 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 15,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •4 
 
 • • 1 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D 
 
 14 4 
 
 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 « 4 • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,500 
 
 •• 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .44 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 (04 
 
 
612 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 fH 1 
 
 oj d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 M fl 
 
 A 
 
 is 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 CL> 
 
 £ 
 
 b£) 
 
 .s 
 
 *Jh 
 
 <u 
 
 
 Name, 
 
 A 
 
 .H U5 
 
 o 
 
 *-< 
 
 b€ 
 
 <4H 
 
 Pd 
 
 C H 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 S 
 
 «4H 
 
 L 
 
 
 h a o 
 
 
 
 1-t 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 rQ ^ ^ 
 
 o> 
 
 • r— 1 
 
 ■s 
 
 .SP 
 
 d 
 
 c» 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 "d 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 HH 
 
 fi 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 6-* 
 
 si 
 
 bufonius, L. 
 gp. (No. 9 Hook, cat ), 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 
 May 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 9, 11 13 
 
 H. 
 
 3"— 10" 
 
 • •• 
 
 May A a- 
 
 Bindari. liajho- 
 
 
 
 
 
 grist. 
 
 ti, Barjikang 
 Pass. 
 
 
 concinnus, Don ... 
 
 10 
 
 H 
 
 15" 
 
 9*6 
 
 August .. 
 
 Jagesar, Naini 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. ( — No. 10 Hook. 
 
 12 
 
 H 
 
 8" 
 
 lit 
 
 August ... 
 
 Milam, Ralain, 
 
 cat..') 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2- Luzula. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 plumosa, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 9" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 campostris, L. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 May 
 
 Do. 
 
 epicata, DC. ... 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Pk. 
 
 July 
 
 Bopipras 
 
 CXXI. — AROIDEiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Arissema- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 costatum, Mart. 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 11' 
 
 • • * 
 
 May 
 
 Madhtiri Pass, 
 
 speciogiun, Mart. 
 
 5 
 
 H. 
 
 H' 
 
 • •• 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi 
 
 consanguineuir, Schott. 
 
 6 
 
 H. 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 'June 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 curvatum, Roxb , 
 
 7, 9 
 
 H. 
 
 4'— 2' 
 
 # • • ■ 
 
 June 
 
 Bampa, Jelam, 
 
 s P 
 
 8 
 
 H. 
 
 r— 2 ' 
 
 • . • 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi 
 
 Jacquemontii, Bl. ... 
 
 11 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 ,,, 
 
 June 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 China. 
 
 sp.( Wall. cat. 8920)... 
 
 12 
 
 H, 
 
 Oi' 
 
 — 2 
 
 
 July 
 
 Ralam, Rilkot, 
 
 erubt scons, Sch, 
 
 13 
 
 H. 
 
 2'-^-3' 
 
 • t • 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi 
 
 2- Sauromatum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 guttatum, Sch, ... 
 
 10 
 
 H, 
 
 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 July ... 
 
 Almora, outer 1 
 lulls. 
 
 3- Remusatia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ilookeriana, Sch. 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 3" 
 
 
 June 
 
 Kathi •• 
 
 vivipara, Sch. ... 
 
 14 
 
 H. 
 
 1'— 2 7 
 
 ... 
 
 September, 
 
 Bagesar, Bhim 
 Tal 
 
 4. Colocasia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 antiquorum, Sch. 
 
 3 
 
 IT. 
 
 r— 2' 
 
 
 September, 
 
 Almora, Sarju 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j river 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 Plants — ( continued) . 
 
 613 
 
 o 
 
 % 
 
 • 1— < 
 o 
 
 GQ 
 
 O 
 
 t> 
 
 O 
 
 X2 
 
 o> 
 
 CD 
 
 Hi Ma- 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 co 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 4-> 
 
 • w* 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 Elevation in f 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 • r^ 
 
 a 
 
 hH 
 
 Dry. 
 
 -4-3 
 
 QJ 
 
 -2 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open, wet . 0 . 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 —15,000 
 
 li. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do ... 
 
 6—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 •• 
 
 
 Open ••• 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • «.« 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »<• 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 6-7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 •1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 6—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 9—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 !•# 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . • 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 In shade 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 7,200 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 ► 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • » 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Cultivated .. 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 « » • 
 
 ... 
 
 
614 
 
 HIM A'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 5. Scindapsus- 
 
 decursiva, Sch. 
 sp. 
 
 6 Typlionrum, 
 diversifolium, Wall. 
 
 7. Gonatantlms. 
 
 sarmentosus, Rlotsch ? 
 
 CXXII-— TYPHA- 
 CE2E. 
 
 1 Typha. 
 
 elephantina, Roxb. .. 
 CXXIII— LEMNA- 
 
 ce^:. 
 
 1. Lenina- 
 
 polyrhiza, L. 
 
 CXXIV. -NAIA- 
 DEJE. 
 
 1. Triglochin- 
 
 palustre, L. 
 maritimum, L. 
 
 2 - Potamogeton- 
 
 natans, L. 
 lucens, L. 
 ruf escens, Schra d 
 crispum, L. 
 perfoliatum, L. 
 
 sp.-— 
 
 pectinatum, L. 
 
 sp. 
 
 sp. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 1 
 
 PI. 
 
 30' 
 
 
 
 Baisani 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 20' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Sarju river, 
 
 outer hills. 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar, near, 
 Almora. 
 
 15 
 
 PI. 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 September, 
 
 Kali-mat, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 CO 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Tarai 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • » 
 
 Almora, &c. ... 
 
 1 
 
 IP. 
 
 9" 
 
 G. R. 
 
 July 
 
 Tisum, Rajhoti, 
 
 2 
 
 PI. 
 
 6" 
 
 
 July 
 
 Rajhoti 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 9" 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 2 
 
 H. 
 
 6' 
 
 • • • 
 
 . , . 
 
 Do. 
 
 3 
 
 IP. 
 
 6" 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rajhoti 
 
 4 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 5 
 
 H, 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Naini Tal, 
 Bhim Tal 
 
 0 
 
 H. 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 Above Milam, 
 
 7 
 
 PI. 
 
 6' 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 8 
 
 PI. 
 
 1' 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Rajhoti 
 
 9 
 
 H. 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Above Milam, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 615 
 
 P lants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 | Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 O 
 
 On trees 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 4—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On trees. & c, ... 
 
 5 -8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Swamps 
 
 1,800 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 In water 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 •• 
 
 •** 
 
 
 Open., wet 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 In water 
 
 4—6.400 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,400 
 
 R. 
 
 
 « . • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. •> 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 4—6,400 
 
 R. 
 
 • it 
 
 . •« 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 18,000 
 
 • «« 
 
 . • . 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 6,400 
 
 R. 
 
 *•« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. •• 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. • • 
 
 . 13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 
 T* 
 
 
616 
 
 Name. 
 
 CXNV • — ALISMA- 
 CEiE. 
 
 1- Alisma. 
 
 reniforme, Don 
 
 CXXVI.— ERIOCA- 
 ULEJL 
 
 1- Eriocaulon- 
 
 oryzetorum, Mart. ... 
 luzulsefolium, Mart. 
 hexangulare, L, 
 (quinquangulare,) ... 
 
 B P ' — 
 
 CXXYII.- CYPE- 
 RACEDE. ' 
 
 1. Car ex- 
 
 sruciata, Nees. 
 Icondensata, Nees. ... 
 
 filicina, Nees. 
 var. meiogyna 
 
 foliosa, Don 
 nubigena, Don 
 
 Wallichiana, Presc. 
 ligulata, Nees. 
 cardiolepis, Nees. ... 
 
 hsematastoma, Nees. 
 fusiformis, Nees. ... 
 psychrophila, Nees — 
 orbicularis, Boon. ... 
 Moorcroftii, Pale. ... 
 
 obscura, A'ees. 
 seti ;era, Don 
 
 var. fasciculata ... 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 ... 
 
 4 
 
 11' 
 
 1 2 
 
 Wh. 
 
 June 
 
 Baijnath 
 
 1 
 
 H. 
 
 12" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 2, 5 
 
 Id. 
 
 4" 
 
 V\h. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 3 
 
 H. 
 
 4" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. 
 
 4, 6 
 
 Id. 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Do. (& Mad- 
 hariP.? 
 
 10,000 ft). 
 
 7 
 
 H. 
 
 2" 
 
 Wh. 
 
 July 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 3' 
 
 
 July 
 
 Shaidevi 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 S' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Almora,Binsar, 
 
 &c, 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Kathi 
 
 4 
 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 
 May ... 
 
 Do., Binsar... 
 
 5 
 
 
 l'-H' 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 1 
 
 Binsar Ralam 
 river. 
 
 6 
 
 ... 
 
 l ' — 2' 
 
 
 March 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 7 
 
 * . . 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 July 
 
 Shaidevi 
 
 8 
 
 ... 
 
 4"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Narnik, Pin- 
 dar i. 
 
 9 
 
 • * • 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 1 
 
 ? 
 
 10 
 
 
 li' 
 
 1 2 
 
 • . • 
 
 July 
 
 Binsar 
 
 11 
 
 . . . 
 
 11' 
 
 1 2 
 
 • . . 
 
 May 
 
 Dudutoli 
 
 12 
 
 . . • 
 
 4"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 August ... 
 
 Laptel 
 
 • 13 
 
 ... 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 
 August Damchen, val- 
 
 1 leys of Tibet. 
 
 14 
 
 • • • 
 
 U 5 
 
 
 April ... 
 
 Ralam R. 
 
 16 
 
 • • • 
 
 1' 
 
 • • • 
 
 April ... Naini Tal 
 
 16 
 
 
 9" 
 
 
 May Jagthana PaBS, 
 
617 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 «rH 
 
 o 
 
 <L> 
 
 c5 
 
 +3 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 0Q 
 
 o 
 
 •1-1 
 
 •4-3 
 
 • r— t 
 
 rt 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in f< 
 the sea. 
 
 >> 
 
 •H 
 
 c3 
 
 £5 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks 
 
 Open, wet ..* 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet ••• 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1_ 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Do. •" 
 
 1_4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • it 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 
 « . « 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open, near 
 water. 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 a.. 
 
 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 7,200 
 
 R. 
 
 a a a 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 75—10,500 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Near water ... 
 
 1,500 
 
 R. 
 
 a a a 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 a a • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10—12,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 • •a 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 • a • 
 
 lit 
 
 at 
 
 
 Open 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 a a a 
 
 
 Do., wet ... 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • at 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 a a a 
 
 att 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15—15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do., wet 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 .•# 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • . « 
 
 
618 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 snpina, Wahl. 
 
 17 
 
 
 3" 
 
 
 June 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 Stracheyi, Booit. 
 
 18 
 
 ... 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 May 
 
 Below Madhari 
 Pass. 
 
 Essenbeckii, Kill. ... 
 
 19 
 
 i • • 
 
 6" — 9" 
 
 
 June 
 
 Patlmr-kori ... 
 
 gracilenta, Booit. ... 
 
 20 
 
 • • • 
 
 4" G" 
 
 
 May 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 Lehmanni, Drej. 
 
 21 
 
 . . . 
 
 6" -8" 
 
 ♦ •A 
 
 August ... 
 
 Dung 
 
 erostrata, Booit. 
 
 22 
 
 ... 
 
 3"- 8" 
 
 ■ M 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 Danichen. 
 
 nivalis, Booit. 
 
 23 
 
 * * •' 
 
 H 
 
 • • • 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 Damchen, val- 
 leys of Tibet. 
 
 cruenta, Nees. 
 
 24 
 
 ... 
 
 1' — li' 
 
 Ml 
 
 August ... 
 
 Barjikang Pass, 
 Damcben. 
 
 var. mutica 
 
 25 
 
 • • • 
 
 G"— 12" 
 
 .4. 
 
 August . . . 
 
 Damchen 
 
 coriophora, Fisch. ... 
 
 26 
 
 ... 
 
 8" 
 
 
 August ... 
 
 Balchlia Pass... 
 
 2 Trilepis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Koyleana, Nees. 
 
 • •• 
 
 .... 
 
 6" 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Hoti, Karnali 
 river. 
 
 3- Elyna- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sclioenoides, C.A M. 
 
 
 • 
 
 6" 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 ? 
 
 4. Hypopomin- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pergracile, Ness. ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 1' 
 
 t • • 
 
 III 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 5 HypoJytrum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 argenteum, Valil. ... 
 
 6- Eimibristylis- 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • O' 
 
 1' 
 
 • •4 
 
 • •• 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 choetoriTiiza, Nees. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 9 •• 
 
 Almora 
 
 complanata, Link, ... 
 
 2 
 
 
 9" 
 
 
 • M 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 pallescens, Aees. 
 
 3 
 
 • • * 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 • ■ » 
 
 oe« 
 
 Almora 
 
 communis, Kth. ... 
 
 4 
 
 • •• 
 
 2 f 
 
 
 0 0# 
 
 Binsar, Jagesar, 
 Loha-thal. 
 
 7- Isolepis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 trifida, Nees. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 G" — 8" 
 
 Ml 
 
 • 01 
 
 Loha-thal, 
 above Jalat. 
 
 setacea, B. Br. 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 6" 
 
 
 M • 
 
 Near Milam. 
 
 barbata, 11. Br. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 4" 
 
 »•• 
 
 » • • 
 
 ? 
 
or THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 619 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 , Him d- 
 laya. 
 
 ■4J 
 
 CD 
 
 rO 
 
 •pH 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks.. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 J-i 
 
 A 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Near water 
 
 ... 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 1 1 ,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ,, . 
 
 « . » 
 
 
 Do . wet 
 
 • • • 
 
 10,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 13,500 
 
 .w 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 14,5 — 15,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 14,5—15,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 . 
 
 14,5— 15., 500 
 
 R. 
 
 >l> 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 15,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Near water 
 
 • * > 
 
 16,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 e i > 
 
 15,500 
 
 m 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • a. 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 • IV 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 in 
 
 . <i 
 
 
 Near water 
 
 • a • 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R 
 
 <•• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Lipocarpha in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 • •» 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 .a ■ 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . • • 
 
 * M 
 
 
 By water 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 • a. 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 »*• 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 hi 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • a. 
 
 «•• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 12,500 
 
 IM 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • a. 
 
 • •« 
 
 
620 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 8- Scirpus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mucronotus, L. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 3' 
 
 • •• 
 
 999 
 
 Loha-thal, Al- 
 mora, &c. 
 
 sylvaticus, A. 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • 9* 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 lacustris, L 
 
 3 
 
 ♦ 9 » 
 
 10' 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 Bhim Tal 
 
 9. Schcenus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 compressus, Pam. ... 
 
 000 
 
 
 6" 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Karnali river... 
 
 10- Eleocharis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 palustris? R. Br. 
 
 11. Eriophorum. 
 
 »•» 
 
 «• » 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 III 
 
 99. 
 
 Jagesar ... 
 
 comosum, Wall, ... 
 
 12. Cypenis- 
 
 • •a 
 
 • •• 
 
 2'— 3" 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 90 
 
 Bhabar, AH 
 mora, Bage- 
 s a r , Earn- 
 ganga river. 
 
 angulatus, Wees. 
 
 l 
 
 ... 
 
 4" 
 
 • •• 
 
 1 9 0 
 
 Loha-thal ... 
 
 aristatus, Rottb. 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ... 
 
 990 
 
 ? 
 
 pumilus, L. ... 
 
 3 
 
 . . • 
 
 <."—6" 
 
 900 
 
 *•0 
 
 Almora, 
 
 niveus, lleiz, ... 
 
 4 
 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 99. 
 
 Ditto, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 Eragrostis, V nhl. 
 
 5 
 
 ... 
 
 l'-U' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Ditto, Saba ... 
 
 polystachyus, Rottb.... 
 
 6 
 
 
 li' 
 
 III 
 
 909 
 
 Ditto, Doha-, 
 thal. 
 
 rot undue, L. 
 
 7 
 
 ... 
 
 14' 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Ditto 
 
 exaltatus, Ret ... 
 
 8 
 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 •0 9 
 
 Ditto, Kapkot, 
 
 corymbosue, Rolib 
 
 9 
 
 
 4' 
 
 099 
 
 • 9 9 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Iria, L. 
 
 10 
 
 • •• 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 *99 
 
 090 
 
 Ditto, Kosj 
 river, Nainj 
 Tal. 
 
 pilosu® 9 v uhl . 
 
 11 
 
 
 2 r — 3' 
 
 HI 
 
 009 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 distans, L 
 
 12 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 999 
 
 ? 
 
 13 Kylingia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gracilis, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 
 i'— 14 ' 
 
 9 09 
 
 
 Shaidevi ... 
 
 monocephala, L. 
 
 2 
 
 
 4" 
 
 » » 1 
 
 
 Jagesar ... 
 
 cylindrica, Nees. ... 
 
 8 
 
 ... 
 
 4" 
 
 » . • 
 
 09 9 
 
 ? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 621 
 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 
 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hit> 
 
 lay 
 
 d 
 
 '3 
 
 03 
 
 a- 
 
 a. 
 
 b 
 
 Tibet. ' 
 
 1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Wet 
 
 ••• 
 
 3,5-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 
 In water 
 
 »•« 
 
 4—4,400 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ••• 
 
 15 — 16,000 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 • »> 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Dry banks 
 
 c*» 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Trichophorum No . 1 & 2 in Herb, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■? 
 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 mo 
 
 
 4—6,000? 
 
 R 
 
 ••• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 • • • 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 •M 
 
 
 Open, dry 
 
 • • • 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 • • • 
 
 5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 1 
 
 <•• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • * • 
 
 4-6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • M 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 M 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • 1 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R 
 
 / 
 
 i • • 
 
 • II 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 0 • • 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 •M 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 4,000? 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •1 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 M< 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ? 
 
 r. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
622 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 . Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 14- Maris cns- 
 
 umbellatus, Vahl. ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 r 
 
 
 tot 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 puniceus, Link. 
 
 2 
 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 tot 
 
 Ho. 
 
 CXXVJII. — GRAMI- 
 NEiE. 
 
 1. Oryza. 
 
 sativa, L. 
 
 t ■ I 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 rot 
 
 tat 
 
 Almora, &c. 
 
 2 ■ Zea. 
 
 Mays, L. 
 
 
 • •I 
 
 999 
 
 tat 
 
 Mt 
 
 Almora, See. ... 
 
 3 Coix. 
 
 lacliryma, L. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 4' 
 
 Ml 
 
 ttt 
 
 Bagesar, Almo- 
 
 4- Alopecimis. 
 
 fulvus, Sm. 
 
 ttt 
 
 III 
 
 1' 
 
 tta 
 
 »• a 
 
 ra. 
 
 ? 
 
 5 ■ Phlenm. 
 
 alpinum, L. 
 
 1, 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 11' 
 
 i 4 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Ralam 
 
 6- Phalaris- 
 
 minor, Retz. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 tat 
 
 tat 
 
 tta 
 
 Sirmoria ,.. 
 
 7- Hierochloa. 
 
 laxa, R. Br. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 0 I 
 
 2' 
 
 
 act 
 
 Pindari : above 
 
 8. Paspalum. 
 
 scrobicalatum, L. 
 
 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 tat 
 
 Milam. 
 
 ? 
 
 Roylcanum, JS’ees. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • a 
 
 
 e* i 
 
 ttt 
 
 ? 
 
 fliiculine, Nees. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ail 
 
 tat 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 9. Milium. 
 
 *efEusum, L. ... 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 
 tM 
 
 ... 
 
 Vladhari Pass, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 f>23 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hin 
 
 lay 
 
 a 
 
 • i—4 
 
 0 3 
 
 P3 
 
 id - 
 
 a. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Open 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 7—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 12—13,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 Do* m 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. im 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 * • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do* ••• 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
624 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 i 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 10- Digitaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *sanguinalis ... 
 
 1 
 
 in 
 
 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 Almora 
 
 *commutata, ISees. ... 
 
 2 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Aim ora ... 
 
 *cruciata, Nees. 
 
 3 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •t 
 
 • •• 
 
 ? 
 
 11. Panicmn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *flavidum, Retz. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Somesar 
 
 *miliaceum, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 • « • 
 
 • ■I 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 *Helopus, Trin, ... 
 
 3 
 
 • •• 
 
 l' 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 *vestitum, Nees. ... 
 
 4 
 
 • •• 
 
 9' 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 *psilopodium, Trin .... 
 
 5 
 
 • • • 
 
 2' 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 flagesar 
 
 *frumentaceum, Roxb. 
 
 6 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 Almora 
 
 12. TJrochloa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 semialata, Kih. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Binsar ... 
 
 13. Thysanolsena. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Agrostis, Nees. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 6' — 8' 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 ver, Kota ri- 
 ver, 
 
 14. Isachne. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 albens, Trin. 
 
 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 ]±' 
 
 1 4 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • t 
 
 Girgaon 
 
 murioata, Nees. ... 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 11' 
 
 1 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 III 
 
 Somesar, near 
 Almora, 
 
 15. Oplismeims. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 $rus-Galli, Ktli. 
 
 1,2, 
 
 
 2' 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 Almora, Gori 
 valley. 
 
 *undulatifolius, R. 8f 
 
 3 
 
 III 
 
 1' 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 S., 
 
 16 Pennisetum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *triflorum, Nees. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 2' 
 
 III 
 
 Ml 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 ep. ••• 
 
 1*1 
 
 Ml 
 
 1* 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Jelam, Niti ... 
 
 17 Penicillaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *spicata, Lamk. ... 
 
 IM 
 
 *»• 
 
 • « ■ 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Almora 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 I 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 625 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Bin 
 
 lay 
 
 .3 
 
 « 
 
 id- 
 
 le. 
 
 u 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 lit 
 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • ' • 
 
 *•' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 11. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 ... 
 
 5,500 
 
 it. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 ... 
 
 1—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Open 
 
 tc » 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 szCaridochloa In Herb. S. & W. 
 
 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 2—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 t • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 E. 
 
 . . • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 ... 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 tt* 
 
 
 Open 
 
 »•* 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 9—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 isa Gymnothrix in Herb. S &. W, 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 \ 
 
 79 
 
626 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 i Height of plant. 
 
 1 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 18- Setaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glanca, Beauv. ... 
 
 1, 
 
 
 2' 
 
 
 • •a 
 
 Near Almora ... 
 
 vertieillata, Benth. ... 
 
 2, 
 
 • •• 
 
 2' 
 
 , , , 
 
 *•• 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 ita'ica, Ktk 
 
 3, 
 
 » • 0 
 
 3' 
 
 
 • • * 
 
 Almora 
 
 viridis, Beauv. 
 
 19 Piptat’aerum. 
 
 4. 
 
 • 01 
 
 2' 
 
 • * * 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 i, 
 
 
 H' 
 
 , , , 
 
 • •• 
 
 Shelshel river, 
 
 eoongarieum, ... 
 
 2, 
 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 hi 
 
 ? 
 
 saquiglume, Munro, ... 
 
 20- Lasiagrostis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mongholica, Trin. ... 
 
 21 Stipa- 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 H' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Shibchilarn ... 
 
 pallida, Munro 
 
 • •• 
 
 in 
 
 U' 
 
 ... 
 
 i*i 
 
 Plains of Tibet, 
 
 22 Aiistida. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cyanant’ria, Nees. ... 
 
 It* 
 
 in 
 
 2' 
 
 • •« 
 
 in 
 
 Almora 
 
 23 Sporobolus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elongatus, RBr. ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 hi 
 
 Almora, Jtige- 
 sar. 
 
 24 Agrostis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3/lbdn Is. 
 
 1, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 iii 
 
 
 ? 
 
 Koyleana, Nees. ... 
 
 2, 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 ciliata, Nees. ... 
 
 3, 4, 
 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... { 
 
 Ralam river ... 
 BarjikangPass, 
 
 Roylei, Trin. 
 
 25 Polypogon. 
 
 5, 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Above Namik, 
 
 monspeliense L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • t« 
 
 • •I 
 
 iii 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar, below 
 Almora. 
 
 Sp. <1\ fugax, frees), 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 ft! 
 
 ... 
 
 Mt 
 
 Almora 
 
 26 Calamagrostis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Nees. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 3' 
 
 in 
 
 • •• 
 
 Above Jalat, 
 Dwali. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PBOVINCES 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 627 
 
 Open 
 
 Do, ... 
 
 Cultivated ... 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Wet 
 
 Open 
 
 Wet 
 
 Water 
 
 Open 
 
 Do. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the s ea. 
 
 Hvmd- 
 
 lay a. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Ren: arks. 
 
 a 
 
 • F-H 
 
 c3 
 
 P3 
 
 « 1 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 K. 
 
 
 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1- 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 6,000? 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 14,500 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 14,500 
 
 ... 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 14,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 4—5.000 
 
 R. 
 
 ,... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Chataria in Herb S Sc W. 
 
 5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Vilfa diandra. in Herb, S & W. 
 
 ? 
 
 R, 
 
 
 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • i 
 
 
 11,000 > 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 —1,41.500 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . • . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1 — 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 5,600 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 7, 5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
628 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 r f-4 \ 
 
 G) r- 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 
 
 S, 
 
 d 
 
 -d 
 
 £ 
 
 •43 
 
 d' 
 
 CU 
 
 £ 
 
 **£h 
 
 o 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 erbarium 
 Strachey a 
 erbottom). 
 
 O 
 
 bfl 
 
 qn 
 
 0 
 
 4-* 
 
 1 
 
 PH 
 
 qn 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 [S) 
 
 o 
 
 <d 
 
 o 
 
 rjJ 
 
 5 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 <d 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 4- v 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 r-H 
 
 HH 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 27- Deyeuxia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 compacta, Munro, M S. 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 1" 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 Valleys of 
 
 s cabrescens, Munro 
 M S. 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 r 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Tindari, Mil- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 am. 
 
 28- Arundo. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 madagascariensis, Kth. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 •'i * 
 
 M • 
 
 Almora, Ba- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 moth. 
 
 29 Phragmites- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Roxbnrghii, Steucl. ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 10' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bhim Til, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Blnibar. 
 
 30. Arundo, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 benghalensis, Betz. ... 
 
 
 
 8' 
 
 • • « 
 
 111 
 
 Kapkot, Jalat, 
 
 31- Cynodon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dactylon, Pers. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 i' 
 
 . . . 
 
 • . • 
 
 The plains, Sir- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 moria, Al- 
 
 32- Elensine 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mora. 
 
 corocana, Pers. 
 
 i 
 
 . . . 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 *var. stricta 
 
 2 
 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Jalesar, Almo- 
 
 indica, Guertn. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 I i /" 
 
 J 2 
 
 . . . 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 r a, below 
 Jalat. 
 
 33. Deschampsia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 csespitosa, Beauv. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 6" — 18" 
 
 ... 
 
 »’» . 
 
 Laptel river, 
 
 34. Tri setnm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bale h h a 
 Bass. 
 
 anreum, Nees. 
 s ubspicatum, Beauv. 
 
 1 
 
 2, 4,5 
 
 • ♦ f 
 
 1 '• — 2' 
 3"— 4'' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Milam, Tola ... 
 Balchha Pass, 
 
 virescens, Aees. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 valleys of 
 Tibet. ‘ 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 2 r 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Mokargari 
 
 35 Avena- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 saliva.- L. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 629 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 ' 
 
 Him 
 
 layi 
 
 £ 
 
 .s 
 
 o3 
 
 P3 
 
 fl- 
 
 . 
 
 Si 
 
 ft 
 
 IS 
 
 A 
 
 £ 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Wet 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1 — 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Water 
 
 1—4,400 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Amphidonax in Herb. S & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 .. . 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5— 6,0 0 
 
 R. 
 
 r " 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14—16,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 12—16,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Fields 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 in 
 
 
 / 
 
630 
 
 HIMA'LATAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of , Kumaon 
 
 
 n ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • - 
 
 |E 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 bi 
 
 .2 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbari am 
 (Strachey an< 
 terbottom). 
 
 t 
 
 O 
 
 5> 
 
 O 
 
 C® 
 
 "3* 
 
 <4-i 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 fM 
 
 a> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 33 
 
 o 
 
 -u . 
 
 
 1 
 
 w 
 
 ‘53 
 
 W 
 
 S3 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 1' a 
 
 H 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 36- Danthonia- 
 
 kashmiriana 
 
 1 , 2 
 
 ... 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Milam, R&lam, 
 Niti, near 
 
 Tola. 
 
 37- Poa- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tibetica, Munro. ... 
 
 *pratensis, L 
 *Koyleana, Nees. 
 *bulbosa, L. ... 
 
 *var, vivipara. 
 
 * annua, L. ... 
 
 *flexuosa, Wahl. 
 var. 
 
 sterilis, Bieb. ... 
 
 femora 1 is, L. 
 *serotina, Ehr , ... 
 
 *alpina, L. 
 
 nepalensis, Wall. ... 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 • •• 
 
 U' 
 
 ir 
 
 i' 
 
 4" -6" 
 6"— 9" 
 6" 
 
 6" 
 
 1' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 « • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • M 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 «•! 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Plains of Tibet 
 Do. 
 
 Kulhara 
 Topidhnnga ... 
 Do. 
 
 Kulhara 
 
 Pindari 
 
 Milam, Jung- 
 bwatal. 
 Barjikang 
 
 Niti 
 
 Dugli 
 
 Do. plains of 
 Tibet. 
 
 Binsar ... 
 
 38- Eragrostis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Brownei, Nees. 
 elegantula, Kth. 
 verticillata, Nees. ... 
 amabilis, W. 8f A. ... 
 bifaria, W 8f A. ... 
 *megastachya, Link. 
 nigra, Nees. 
 
 1,2, 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 111 
 
 ir 
 
 i' 
 
 i' 
 
 2' 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 Ml 
 
 , • # 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sirmoria 
 
 ? 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 Almora ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Above Jalat, 
 K a 1 i m u n d i 
 Pass. 
 
 39- Melica- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 micrantba, Griesb. 
 
 var. insequalis. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 8' 
 
 t • t 
 
 • • « _ 
 
 Niti 
 
 40- Kseleria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cristata, Pers. ... 
 
 • » • 
 
 lit 
 
 H' 
 
 - 
 
 ... 
 
 N a i n i T a 1 , 
 Kathi. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 «31 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 » iH 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 •s 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 «4H 
 
 O 
 
 GG 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 <r 3 
 
 d 
 
 6 
 
 Elevation in fc 
 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 1 1 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 It. 
 
 •V 
 
 D. 
 
 , \r 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 r' 
 
 . . . 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 10,500 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 it. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 * 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do, 
 
 12,-15,500 
 
 ... 
 
 «»> 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,500 
 
 R, 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 10,-15,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 T, 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 .. • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 It. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 »•* 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 in 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open .. 
 
 11,500 
 
 til 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. • 
 
 6—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
632 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 41- Dactylis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glomerata, L. 
 
 42- Tripogon- 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 3 ' 
 
 Ml 
 
 • ai 
 
 N a i n i Tdl, 
 Kathi, Jalat, 
 Jhuni. 
 
 filiformis, Nees. 
 
 h 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 1' 
 
 Ml 
 
 aaa 
 
 Ditto, Thakil, 
 abore Jalat. 
 
 43- Festuca- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *elatio’ - , L. ... 
 
 3 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 
 
 • •4 
 
 a a a 
 
 Binsar 
 
 sp. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 4 ' 
 
 tan 
 
 a • » 
 
 Ditto, Kathi, 
 &c 
 
 *pumila, Vill. 
 
 1 
 
 
 6" 
 
 a «a 
 
 aaa 
 
 Valleys of Ti- 
 bet. 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ditto ditto, 
 Chorhoti 
 Pass. 
 
 sp 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 IV 2' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • a • 
 
 Plains of Tibet, 
 
 1 
 
 44. Bromus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 giganteus, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • t * 
 
 4 ' 
 
 Ml 
 
 aaa 
 
 Dwali 
 
 eonfinis, Nees. 
 
 2 
 
 < • • 
 
 2V 
 
 . • • 
 
 aa 
 
 Ralam 
 
 arvensis, L. ... 
 
 3 
 
 • •• 
 
 H' 
 
 a a a 
 
 aaa 
 
 Above Jhuni, 
 
 *tectorum, L. 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 '—iv 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Milam ... 
 
 45- Brachypodium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6caberrimum, ISees. 
 
 
 i • a 
 
 I'—iy 
 
 • •• 
 
 aaa 
 
 China, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 46. Dendrocala- 
 mus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 strict <i3, Nees. 
 
 HI 
 
 ... 
 
 20 '— 30 ' 
 
 It* 
 
 aaa 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 47- Amndinaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 falcata, Nees. ... 
 
 
 Ill 
 
 15' 
 
 a a a 
 
 
 Naini Tal, &c , 
 
 sp. ••• 
 
 lit 
 
 • a • 
 
 20 ' 
 
 
 aaa 
 
 Rarnni. Dudu- 
 toli J 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 633 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &e. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 i the sea. 
 
 Hin 
 
 layt 
 
 >> 
 
 £ 
 
 3 
 
 id- 
 
 z. 
 
 >> 
 
 n 
 
 Q 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 E. 
 
 ... 
 
 ia« 
 
 
 Rocks open ... 
 
 7—8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Woods ••• 
 
 7,500 
 
 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Schcenodorus No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Open 
 
 15,000 
 
 •»« 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15—16,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 15,000 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 T. 
 
 = Sch<Enodorus No, 2 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 •s 
 
 
 W. 
 
 By water 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Open 
 
 1 -J,000 
 
 K. 
 
 II. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ♦ «• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11,000 
 
 •it 
 
 D. 
 
 »«• 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 .«• 
 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 1—2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Forest .. 
 
 5 — 7,000 
 
 R, 
 
 
 
 aLudolfia No. 1 in Herb. S. Sc W. 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 8—11,000 
 
 R. 
 
 <•« 
 
 III 
 
 =zLudolfia No. 2 in Herb. S. & WV 
 
 80 
 
634 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 48- Thaimiocala- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mus. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Palconeri, Munro ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 20' 
 
 » • • 
 
 hi 
 
 spathiflorus, Munro... 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 49. Bambusa. 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 30 ' 
 
 ... 
 
 • ♦ • 
 
 Palconeri, Munro 
 
 2 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 50- Lolium- 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 *temnlentum, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3 ' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 51. Triticum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *vulgare, Vill. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 * var villosum 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 2— 2J 
 
 • • • 
 
 •ii 
 
 longiaristatum 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 
 
 14 '— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 caninum, L. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 2' 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 52. Agropyrum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 siemicostatum, Nees, 
 
 1,5 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3 ' 
 
 i • t 
 
 ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 ... 
 
 H' 
 
 III 
 
 ... 
 
 53- Ely mus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *sibiricus, L. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2' 
 
 
 
 sp 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 24' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 dasystachyus, Trln,... 
 
 3 
 
 • • • 
 
 3' 
 
 • • 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 54. Hordemn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pratense, L. 
 
 3 
 
 
 14'— 2' 
 
 
 
 *vulgare, L. 
 
 1,2 
 
 ... 
 
 24 ' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 55- Mnesithea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lasvis, Kih. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 ••• 
 
 15 
 
 o 
 
 Ml 
 
 Madliari Pass, 
 Dugli. 
 
 Ukhimath 
 
 Sirmoria 
 
 Niti, &c. 
 Milam, &c. 
 Milam, Plain of 
 Tibet 
 Almora 
 
 Almora, Milam 
 Karnali ri- 
 ver. 
 
 Almora ? 
 Gotliing 
 
 Plains of Tibet, 
 Milam, Pinda- 
 ri, Topidhun- 
 ga. 
 
 LapteL 
 
 Shib Milam 
 Plains, Niti, 
 Milam, Ky- 
 unlung. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 635 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 *o 
 
 <D 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 rO 
 
 c3 
 
 +3 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 OQ 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 • H 
 
 -4-3 
 
 *73 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 • 1— < 
 
 O d) 
 
 jd GQ 
 ci q) 
 
 CD +2 
 
 r 1 
 
 w 
 
 .s 
 
 c3 
 
 P3 
 
 ft 
 
 +» 
 
 CD 
 
 rO 
 
 H 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Forest ... 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Bambusa No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open woods ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 s £ 
 
 Corn fields ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 1—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Open ... 
 
 11,500 
 
 12,5—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 — Ayr opyrum Nos 2 & 3 in Herb. 
 S. & w. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • « « 
 
 — Agropyrum No. 6 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do, 
 
 5—15,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. .. 
 
 12,000 
 
 in 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 tii 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 12—15,000 
 
 ii. 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 
 •M 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Cultivated ... 
 
 1—14,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 e=IIamarthria in Herb. S. & W. 
 
636 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 56. Rottboellia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 exaltata, L. 
 
 
 •at 
 
 10' 
 
 • #e 
 
 aaa 
 
 Hawalbagh ... 
 
 57- Mauisuris- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 granular is, Swartz. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 taa 
 
 ... 
 
 ill 
 
 aaa 
 
 Almora 
 
 58. Perotis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 latifolia, Ait. ••• 
 
 cal 
 
 aa* 
 
 1 r. o' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 59. Eriochrysis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Narenga, Nees ... 
 
 ill 
 
 id 
 
 6' 
 
 a a a 
 
 a a o 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 60. SaccEarum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sara, Rotb. 
 
 aaa 
 
 "«* a 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 • a a 
 
 aaa 
 
 ? 
 
 officinarum, L. ... 
 
 tea 
 
 a a a 
 
 5'— 8' 
 
 a* • 
 
 aaa 
 
 The plains, Al- 
 mora. 
 
 61- Imperata 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Koenigii, Beauv. 
 
 1,2 
 
 ... 
 
 3'— 6' 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 
 
 Bhabar, Almo- 
 ra, Shaidevi, 
 Sarju valley. 
 
 62. Pogonatkernm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polystacliyum, R.SfS. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river 
 
 near Almora. 
 
 63- Eriantlius. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 yelutinus, Munro ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 aa* 
 
 3' 
 
 aaa 
 
 aa* 
 
 Almora near 
 Jalat. 
 
 rufipilus, Griseb. .. 
 
 2 
 
 taa 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 111 
 
 • aa 
 
 Kami Tal, Ga- 
 gar pass 
 
 Jacquemontii, Munro 
 
 3 
 
 a aa 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 aaa 
 
 aaa 
 
 Above Kota, 
 Ramganga ri- 
 ver. 
 
 *rufus, Nees 
 
 4 
 
 • • a 
 
 2' 
 
 aaa 
 
 a a a 
 
 Below Jalat ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 5 
 
 • *• 
 
 3 ' 
 
 aae 
 
 aaa 
 
 Almora, above 
 Jalat, 
 
 64. Eulalia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalensis, Trin. 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 
 
 2 ' 
 
 aaa 
 
 • 1/ 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 637 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 l 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 1 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 o • • 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • a* 
 
 aaa 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 at* 
 
 1—3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 aaa 
 
 aaa 
 
 =Saccharum No. 1 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 ? 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • t* 
 
 aaa 
 
 = Eriantlius No. 1 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 n 
 
 1—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • a 
 
 
 Open 
 
 
 1—7,200 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 1—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 tat 
 
 aaa 
 
 = Pollinia No. 1 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Woods 
 
 M 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Open 
 
 M 
 
 2,5—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • tt 
 
 aaa 
 
 * 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 tat 
 
 aaa 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 tat 
 
 aaa 
 
 
 Woods 
 
 a • 
 
 7,500 
 
 , K - 
 
 aaa 
 
 tea 
 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 e*8 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Stracliey and Win- 
 terbottom'). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 65. Pollinia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lehmanni, Nees 
 
 2 
 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora, near 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jalat. 
 
 66- Anthistiria 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 anathera, Nees 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 in 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora, below 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jalat 
 
 ciliata, L.f. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 Above Jalat ... 
 
 67. Androscepia 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gigantea, Brogn ■ 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 15' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •a 
 
 Kota, Almora, 
 
 68. Apluda. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aristata, L. 
 
 1 
 
 • • * 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Almora 
 
 var. 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 Do. 
 
 69. Batrarotherum 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lanceolatum, Nees ... 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 1' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Air ora 
 
 submuticum, JSees ... 
 
 } 2 
 
 
 i r 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 plumbeum 
 
 5 2 
 
 * * * 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 UO. ... 
 
 molle, Nees 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 i' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 70. Hologamium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nervosum, A'ees ... 
 
 • • « 
 
 • • • 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 • at 
 
 • • • 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 71. Gymnandropo- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 annulatum 
 
 • • • 
 
 » • • 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 aaa 
 
 Kalidhungi ... 
 
 triste ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 4 ' 
 
 • at 
 
 ... 
 
 Above Jalat ... 
 
 72- Anatherum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 muricatum, Beauv. ... 
 
 . « • 
 
 ... 
 
 6'— 7’ 
 
 aaa 
 
 i • • 
 
 Bhabar ... 
 
 73. Sorghum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 muticum, Nees ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 ' 
 
 
 . • 0 
 
 Bagesar ... 
 
 halepense, Pers. 
 
 2 
 
 • • t 
 
 • « • 
 
 • • . 
 
 • . • 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 vulgar e, Pers. ... 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 « « « 
 
 • • t 
 
 Almora 
 
 74- Heteropogon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 contortus, Nees ... 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 2' 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 Almora 
 
 melauocarpon ... 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 4 ' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
O'F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 G39 
 
 Plants-^- (continued) . 
 
 ii 
 
 • i— < 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 rQ 
 
 c3 
 
 CD 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 HH 
 
 O 
 
 DQ 
 
 a 
 
 .0 
 
 %-a 
 • !— 1 
 n3 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 Elevation infe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. ©•• 
 
 4—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. •»« 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Anthestiria No 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • n 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 «• * 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 «•* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 M • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do* 
 
 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 = Lepeocercis in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Amlropoyon No. 1. in Herb. S. & 
 
 W. 
 
 Do* m* 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 «•« 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » • * 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . . 
 
 in 
 
 
 Cultivated 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Open ... 
 
 1—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 in 
 
 i. • 
 
 
640 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 75- Aiidrop ogon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pachnodes, Trin. 
 
 S 
 
 • • • 
 
 5' 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Adhbadri, &c , 
 
 *Iwarancusa, Roxb. 
 
 7 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 - 
 
 Bhabar and 
 
 low valleys. 
 
 76- Cymbopogon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 distans ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • % 
 
 3 r — 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 Gidarba, Ham. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 W 
 
 1 
 
 >» 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Kalimath, Nai- 
 ni Tal. 
 
 laniger ... 
 
 77- Chrysopogon. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 4'— 5' 
 
 s' 
 
 Ill 
 
 
 Kalapathar ... 
 
 montanus, Trin. ... 
 
 7 
 
 III 
 
 3' 
 
 
 ill 
 
 Almora? ... 
 
 serrulatus, Trin. 
 
 1 
 
 III 
 
 2—3 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Almora 
 
 cceiuleus Nees 
 
 2 
 
 • • » 
 
 ! 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 in 
 
 Do. 
 
 Gryllus, Trin. 
 
 3, 4, 5, 
 
 »«• 
 
 3’ — 4' 
 
 * • i 
 
 i • • 
 
 China, Binsar, 
 Paton. 
 
 villosus, Nees 
 
 6 
 
 1 •• 
 
 u' 
 
 J 2 
 
 in 
 
 • • • 
 
 Below Jalat ... 
 
 78. Garnotia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polygonoides, Wight, 
 
 79. Ischseimmi- 
 
 • • • 
 
 • 
 
 III 
 
 
 m 
 
 ill 
 
 Near Jalat 
 
 speciosum, Nees 
 
 It* 
 
 • •• 
 
 3' 
 
 in 
 
 HI 
 
 Almora ... 
 
 var. 
 
 • K 
 
 . • I 
 
 2'— 2\' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 80 Spodiopogon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 angustifolius, Nees ... 
 
 ill 
 
 
 2' 
 
 • •I 
 
 • • • 
 
 Naini Tal? ... 
 
 I find the following note by Mr. C. B. Clarke at the end of his MS. list 
 unequal, I have turned over the bundles marked “Ind Or” or “ Cosmopali 
 have been worked by Gen. Munro, some are passing through his hands, some not 
 large residuary bundles marked “ spp. ” and in these sometimes the Strachey 
 many other cases where the Strach. and Winterb. plant is found in a particular 
 since the ticket was put on, and it may have been hastily sorted into the bundle 
 very partially renamed .' — Triticum seems not to have been touched since the list 
 Even where the genera have been thoroughly worked and written, up, it would 
 part of Bumbusa, sp. 2., into Bambusa , part into Thamnocalumus, but it would 
 were not cut by Strachey from the same plant. 
 
 Kew, 1 1th November, 1879. 
 
 The names which are not included in Mr. Clarke’s list are marked with an astc- 
 mentioned, he did not come across in the Kew Herbarium. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 641 
 
 Plants — ('continued). 
 
 * 
 
 Q 
 
 ® •— < 
 
 O 
 
 CD 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 4-3 
 
 CD 
 
 Himd - 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 d . 
 
 o 
 
 • r4 
 
 • »— < 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fc 
 the sea. 
 
 jr 
 
 a 
 
 03 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open 
 
 2-4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • «o 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 1—4.000 
 
 K. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do 
 
 4— 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 =Androgoeon No. 2 in Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 hi 
 
 = Andropoqon No. 4 in Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ea Andropoqon No. 5 in Herb . S 
 & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 »•« 
 
 
 t= Andropoqon No. 6 in Herb. S. 
 
 & W. 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 5,300 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 nt 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6—8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • •» 
 
 • • 0 
 
 
 Do. ••• 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 » 0 0 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 7-000 
 
 R 
 
 • t • 
 
 ... 
 
 =Nov. Genus near Polypogon in 
 Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 5—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 » « « 
 
 IM 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ill 
 
 
 
 of grasses of the >S and W. Herbarium. “ The above reduction of the Grasses is 
 tan,” not any others (in general). The grasses are in various states; some 
 yet touched, or at all events not yet written up. To many of the genera are 
 and Winterbottom tickets remain. In this case they cannot be reduced, but in 
 bundle (with a name outside) there is no sign that the plant has been examined 
 merely as being “ inter affines ” From these various causes the grasses are only 
 was made. Why I found all the Eragrostis and very little of the Poa I cannot guess 
 take a long time to verify the species carefully ; thus Gen. Munro lias sorted 
 nevertheless take me some time to assure myself that the two pieces of No. 2 
 
 C. B. CLARKE. 
 
 risk. Amongst these are no doubt several, such as from the various causes above 
 
 J. F. D. 
 
 81 
 
642 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 CXXX — PILICES.* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Gleichenia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 linearis, C. B. Clarke, 
 
 2- Woodsia. 
 
 til 
 
 Ml 
 
 2’ — 3' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 Eamganga val- 
 ley, &c. 
 
 elongata, Hook. ... 
 
 l 
 
 ... 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 
 • M 
 
 Kalimundi, 
 
 Bagdwar. 
 
 lanosa, Hk. 8f Baker... 
 
 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 2" 
 
 • •• 
 
 in 
 
 Pindar i ... 
 
 sp. ••• 
 
 3- Dicksonia- 
 
 3 
 
 Ml 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Pindar and 
 above Namik. 
 
 appendiculata, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 3' 
 
 III 
 
 114 
 
 Gori valley, 
 
 Karim. 
 
 4- Hymenophyl- 
 lum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 exsertum, Wall. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4" 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 polyanthus, Swartz . ... 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 III 
 
 • It 
 
 Dwali, Namik, 
 
 5. Davallia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polypodioides, Don ... 
 
 1 
 
 III 
 
 2’ 
 
 • M 
 
 • •• 
 
 Eamganga 
 
 river. 
 
 chinensis, Sioartz. ... 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 1' — 2' 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 membranulosa, Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 Ml 
 
 9" 
 
 • •• 
 
 V 
 
 111 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 pulchra, Don 
 
 4 
 
 Ml 
 
 11' 
 
 1 2 
 
 » •• 
 
 III 
 
 Eamganga 
 river, Binsar. 
 
 immersa, Wail. 
 
 5 
 
 • •• 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 Binsar ... 
 
 6- Cystopteris- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fragilis, Bernli. 
 
 hi 
 
 • •• 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 • • . 
 
 • •• 
 
 T o p i d h u n g a, 
 Sangcha. 
 
 7- Adiantum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Capillus- Veneris, L — 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 1' 
 
 Ml 
 
 » • • 
 
 Jagthana *, 
 
 vennstum, Don 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 H' 
 
 • •• 
 
 in 
 
 Naini Tal, See., 
 
 pedatum, L. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 1' 
 
 III 
 
 • •1 
 
 Dwali, Sing- 
 jar i. 
 
 caudatum, L. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Ill 
 
 1'— s' 
 
 i •• 
 
 IM 
 
 Bagesar, Phar- 
 ka. 
 
 var. rhizophorum.. 
 
 6 
 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 Jagthana, Bin- 
 sar. 
 
 lunulatum, Barm. 
 
 5 
 
 Ml 
 
 1' — 11' 
 
 • M 
 
 III 
 
 S a’r j u river, 
 Bhim-Tal. 
 
 * These have been arranged as far as possible in accordance with Mr. C. B. Clarke’s 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 643 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 [ Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Open 
 
 • •• 
 
 S— 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ill 
 
 • •l 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 in 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 in 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 E. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • II 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 ••• 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •1 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *• * 
 
 
 
 
 Trees and rocks, 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 K. 
 
 *•• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,500 
 
 E. 
 
 HI 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V % 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 m 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Trees 
 
 
 4,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 Ml 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 14—15,000 
 
 • • » 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 Rocks near wa- 
 
 3—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 hi 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 ter. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • • • 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 VII 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 9—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 .•« 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 
 3—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 ••• 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ml 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 i 
 
 
 recently published “ Review of the Ferns of Northern India.” 
 
644 
 
 HIM A* LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 ✓ 
 
 List of Iiumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 8- Cheilanthes- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 farinosa, Kaulf. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • tt 
 
 l'— 14' 
 
 • •0 
 
 • •• 
 
 Bagesar, Alrno- 
 ra, &c. 
 
 sp. — — M » 
 
 2 
 
 ••• 
 
 1' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • « • 
 
 Pharka ... 
 
 Bp.— ... 
 
 3 
 
 • • • 
 
 1" 
 
 • • « 
 
 • •• 
 
 Moliargari 
 
 9- Onychium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 japonicum, Kunze ••• 
 
 2 
 
 ill 
 
 2' 
 
 1 •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 Naini Tal &c., 
 
 var. nmltisecta 
 
 1 
 
 in 
 
 14' 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 10- Cryptogram- 
 me. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 crispa, R.Br. ... 
 
 1 & 2 
 
 Mt 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 Mt 
 
 III 
 
 Champwa, Tola, 
 Kalam, 
 
 11 Pellsea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 calomelaaos, Link. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 6" 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 Below Almora. 
 
 12- Pteris- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pellucida, Presl. ... 
 
 
 i 
 
 • t • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • * • 
 
 • • i 
 
 var. stenophylla ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 l'— 14 ' 
 
 Mt 
 
 • •a 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 cretica, L. ... 
 
 longifolia, L. ... 
 
 2 
 
 • M 
 
 2' 
 
 •tc 
 
 mo 
 
 NainiTal,Kathi, 
 
 3 
 
 Ml 
 
 3 ' 
 
 • M 
 
 Ml 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 quadriaurita, Retz. ... 
 
 4, 5,6 
 
 Mt 
 
 V—3’ 
 
 • * » 
 
 • •• 
 
 Bagesar, Jalat, 
 Pharka, 
 Barmdeo. 
 
 sp. 
 
 Mt 
 
 Mt 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 IM 
 
 III 
 
 Kathi, &c. ... 
 
 Wallichiana, Agardk., 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 4'— 6' 
 
 • n 
 
 111 
 
 Bagdwar ... 
 
 13- Woodwardia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 radicans, Smith ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 IM 
 
 6' 
 
 HI 
 
 • M 
 
 Pyura, &c. ... 
 
 14. Asplenium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nidus, L. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • * • 
 
 14'— 2 ' 
 
 «M 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ramganga 
 
 river. 
 
 ensiforme, Wall. ... 
 
 2 
 
 « t i 
 
 14' 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Kathi 
 
 alternans Wall. 
 
 3 
 
 « • « 
 
 so 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 IM 
 
 Bagesar, Almo- 
 ra. 
 
 septentrionale, L. ... 
 
 4 
 
 • » • 
 
 4" 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 Milam, Niti ... 
 
 viride, Buds. ... 
 
 5 
 
 » • • 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 i • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 Pindari 
 
 Trichomanes, L. 
 
 6 
 
 • « • 
 
 3"— 4" 
 
 
 III 
 
 Milam 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 645 
 
 Plan ts — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 ; Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 t 
 
 Rocks 
 
 • • • 
 
 3—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 *• < 
 
 G,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 «•« 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 6—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 G— 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 On rocks 
 
 • • « 
 
 10—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Dry rocks 
 
 • • • 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • :>• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Allcsorus No. 1 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 
 
 
 * 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 8—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 t • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • •• 
 
 2—4,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open 
 
 • •• 
 
 7 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 = Allosorus No. 2 in Herb. S. & W 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 =sCampteria in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 W et banks 
 
 • •• 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • J« 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • t t 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 . . i 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 • • 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 • • 
 
 11,-12,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • « • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 
 
 11,500 
 
 i • t 
 
 D. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
64G 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Straehey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 1 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 faleatum, Sw. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 I*'— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 Cl 
 
 Dwali, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 7 
 
 ... 
 
 4" — 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 Jageear 
 
 laciniatum, Don ... 
 
 8 
 
 ... 
 
 10" 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Jak, upper To- 
 la. 
 
 yarians, tik.Sc Grev. 
 
 9 
 
 • • * 
 
 * • . 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . * 
 
 2' 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • . 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 Filix-foemina, Bernh., 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1'— 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 var. pectinata 
 
 
 * * • 
 
 n r 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 esculentum, Presl. ... 
 
 • « * 
 
 . . . 
 
 S'— 4' 
 
 . • e 
 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. — • — ... 
 
 • • i 
 
 . . • 
 
 S'— 4:' 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Gori valley ... 
 
 japonicum, 1'hunb. ... 
 
 . . « 
 
 ... 
 
 1 ir 
 
 1 2 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 15- Aspidium. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 2' 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Kathi ... 
 
 auriculatum, Sw. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 var. lenta 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 1J'— 2' 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 ver. 
 
 „ casspitosa ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1' 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 ,, marginata ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 »tn 
 
 H'-2' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali 
 
 sp. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 1' 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Kathi ... 
 
 ilicifolium, Don 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 
 aculeatum, Sw. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 **»* 
 
 
 
 
 var. rufo-barbata ... 
 
 1 • 4 
 
 ... 
 
 S' 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Binsar 
 
 sp. 
 
 M« 
 
 Ill 
 
 C'— 12" 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 Dwali, Ralam, 
 Tola. 
 
 Prescottianum, Wall., 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 1 1 f 
 
 1 2 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Ralam, Milam, 
 
 aculeatum, Sw. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 
 • 'i 
 
 var. setosa 
 
 !M 
 
 
 3'— 4' 
 
 
 
 Kathi ... 
 
 angulare, Willd. ? ... 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 III 
 
 Naini Tal, Ka- 
 rim. 
 
 var.? ... 
 
 1 • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 2' 
 
 1*1 
 
 ... 
 
 Kaphini ... 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 2' 
 
 * . I 
 
 Ill 
 
 ? 
 
 16. NephrocLium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 parasiticum, C. B. 
 Clarke? 
 
 • •• 
 
 • M 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 ? 
 
 var. multijuga 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 2'— 21' 
 
 . 1 . 
 
 ... 
 
 Karim 
 
 Sp .*”■"* ‘ Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ill 
 
 • •• 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 III 
 
 HI 
 
 2' 
 
 Ml 
 
 «•« 
 
 ? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 647 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &e. 
 
 Q 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 rO 
 
 a> 
 
 Himd- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Elevation in ft 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Forest 
 
 • - . 
 
 7—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •4 
 
 
 = Cyrtomium in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (named “ plebeium?” and ,( ruta t 
 
 Banks 
 
 • • • 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 J LV’ in original, probably = A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [ varians. 
 
 Rocks 
 
 
 5 - 6.000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 # , 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 
 
 — Athyrium No. 1 in Herb. S &. W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 !«' 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • 4* 
 
 « 4 • 
 
 = Athyrium Nos. 2 & 4 in Herb. S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & W. 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 R. 
 
 • •4 
 
 4*‘ 
 
 e= Athyrium No. 5 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 1* 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • a# 
 
 ... 
 
 = Athyrium No. 3 do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 ... 
 
 . 4 . 
 
 = Diplazium No. 1 do. 
 
 Open 
 
 • • • 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *44 
 
 = Diplazium No. 2 do. 
 
 
 
 . . 
 
 R. 
 
 IM 
 
 ... 
 
 s= DiplaziumTSo. 3 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •* 
 
 7,800 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 c= Diplazium No. 4 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 • 44 
 
 2,600 
 
 R. 
 
 • 41 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 *•« 
 
 .44 
 
 = Polystichum No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Rocks 
 
 • • • 
 
 4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 444 
 
 444 
 
 = Do. No. 2 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 44 • 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • 14 
 
 
 = Do. No. 3 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 4 # » 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 . 
 
 = Do. No. 4 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • . 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 =s Do. No. 5 do. 
 
 
 
 • • * 
 
 ,,, 
 
 • 4 4 
 
 
 = Do. No. 6 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 444 
 
 6,5—7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 » 4 
 
 
 = Do. No. 8 do. 
 
 Wet rocks 
 
 ... 
 
 8—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 444 
 
 = Do. No. 9 do. 
 
 Open 
 
 • •4 
 
 11—12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 = Do. No 10 do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 7,700 
 
 R. 
 
 
 *4 4 
 
 = Do. No, 7 do. Not 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in Clarke’s review of N. Indian 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ferns. 
 
 Do. 
 
 M 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ♦ 44 
 
 • 1 « 
 
 = Do. No. 11 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Open 
 
 • If* 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 
 = A 1 ephrodium No. 1 in Herb. S. & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • 4* 
 
 444 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 R. 
 
 444 
 
 4 4 C 
 
 = Lastrea No. 2 in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 444 
 
 • 4* 
 
 Do. No. 1 do. 
 
 #•« 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 44 4 
 
 
 Do. No. 3 do. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ... 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 |= Do. No. 4 do. 
 
 
648 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 H 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O £ 
 o .rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 feb 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 03 /A 
 
 s|*I 
 
 ~ O 
 
 g 8 5 
 
 rd 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 Jh 
 
 bX) 
 
 4H 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 43 
 
 d 
 
 rS 
 
 Pi 
 
 qn 
 
 o 
 
 43 
 
 rd 
 
 Jh 
 
 a> 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 qq 
 
 O 
 
 f-4 
 
 d 
 • >— < 
 
 CD 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 qp 
 
 q-< 
 
 O 
 
 43 
 
 
 -SS S3 
 
 • r— < 
 
 .Q 
 
 c3 
 
 bfi 
 
 • r— l 
 
 0) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 r— 1 
 
 o3 
 
 <D 
 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 •i-h 
 
 H 
 
 v-J 
 
 Filix-mas, Rich. 
 
 
 • • i 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 var. patentissima ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 Kalimundi, Da- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 dutoli. 
 
 var. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 
 Milam 
 
 Brunonianum, Hook., 
 
 
 ut 
 
 11^ 
 
 1 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Ralam 
 
 var. 
 
 til 
 
 ••• 
 
 3' 
 
 ..1 
 
 i . • 
 
 Ralam, Sagtia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 deo. 
 
 cochleatum, Don 
 
 • •• 
 
 « • • 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Sarju valley* 
 
 crenatum, C.B. Clarke, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D a r g a r a, 
 Thai. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 Bp. 
 
 1 4 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • * 
 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 2'—3 r 
 
 • • * 
 
 • • • 
 
 Kalimundi ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 11' 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 polymorphum, Hk. Sf 
 
 00 0 
 
 ut 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 in 
 
 
 Ram gangs 
 
 Baker. 
 
 eicutarium, Hk. and 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 river. 
 
 Baker. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. coadunata 
 
 ... 
 
 in 
 
 3' 
 
 • • • 
 
 . • • 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 17* Nepbrolepis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cordifolia, Hk. and 
 Baker. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 2'— 3*' 
 
 m 
 
 ... 
 
 Near Bagesar .. 
 
 18. Oleandra. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wallichii, Fred. 
 
 
 hi 
 
 H'-2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 «♦» 
 
 Mohargari> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Binsar. 
 
 19- Poly-podium- 
 
 erubescens, Wall. ... 
 
 I 
 
 • •• 
 
 3 f 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ver. 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 » • • 
 
 1 ' — 2' 
 
 m 
 
 • • « 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 4"— 6" 
 
 • •• 
 
 0.1 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 sp- 
 
 4 
 
 in 
 
 3' 
 
 hi 
 
 001 
 
 ? 
 
 argutum, Wall. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 l r — 2' 
 
 • • * 
 
 • . 1 
 
 Binsar ... 
 
 BP- 
 
 • •• 
 
 •i • 
 
 1'— H 
 
 
 
 Jngesar 
 
 lachnopus, Wall. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • i • 
 
 1 r 2' 
 
 * • • 
 
 
 Naini Tal, Mo- 
 
 amcenum, Wall. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hargari. 
 
 
 
 l'—U r 
 
 
 
 Kathi 
 
 proliferum, Roxb. ... 
 
 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 
 
 Bhabar, &c. ... 
 
 lineatum, Colebr. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 2'— 3' 
 
 
 
 Bagesar, Phar- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ka? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 649 
 
 P lants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 1 ' V 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 j Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 I 
 
 th 
 
 t. 
 
 P 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 = Lastrea No. 5 in Herb. S. 5c W. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 11,500 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 = Do. No. 6 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 = Do. No. 7 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 t • • 
 
 11—12,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 e®a 
 
 = Do. No. 8 do. 
 
 Open banks and 
 
 4—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • ii 
 
 > • • 
 
 = Do. Nos. 9 & 12 do. 
 
 forest. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 3—4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 » • i 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Do. No 10 do. 
 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Do. No. 11 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 ... Do. No. 13 do. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 = Do. No. 14 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 2, GOO 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 «« 
 
 = Aspidium in Herb. S. & W. 
 
 • • « 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 3—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 * • . 
 
 *•« 
 
 = Sagenia in Herb. S. 6s W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 |M 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Trees & banks, 
 
 6, 5—8,000 
 
 R, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 2,5—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 1 • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 name P. pendulum in Herb. S. 6c W 
 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 named P. angulosum Lab. in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. & W. 
 
 Trees 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . . 
 
 • « • 
 
 =marginaria No. 1 in Herb. S. 6s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 G,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . « 
 
 • » * 
 
 = Do. No. 2 do. 
 
 Forest 
 
 • •• 
 
 6—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ill 
 
 = Do, No. 3 do. 
 
 Banks 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Do. No. 4 do, 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 1—2,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • . . 
 
 s=Goniopteris in Herb. S. 6s W. 
 
 Trees 
 
 
 3,5,— G.000 
 
 R. 
 
 • . . 
 
 • I I 
 
 = Nephrodium JSio. 2 in Herb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6c W. 
 
 82 
 
650 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kuviaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 membranaceum, Don 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 Below Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 hastatum, Thunb. .. 
 
 
 » . . 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 
 var. oxyloba 
 
 • • 9 
 
 * • . 
 
 1 ' 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 Binsar 
 
 juglandifolium, Don, 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 2'- — 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river, Ja- 
 gesar. 
 
 ebenipes-, Hook. 
 
 » • • 
 
 r.. 
 
 1'— li' 
 
 ... 
 
 i . . 
 
 Binsar, Kali- 
 mundi 
 
 sp. 
 
 III 
 
 ... 
 
 6"— 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Binsar 
 
 sp.- 
 
 III 
 
 ... 
 
 9" 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 sp. 
 
 • • 9 
 
 ... 
 
 6"~8" 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 Do.,Kalimundi, 
 
 piopinquutn, Wall. ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 • . • 
 
 1 1 1 1 r 
 
 9 . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Binsar Rainari, 
 
 Wightianum, Wall.... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 Jagthana 
 
 lineare, 7 hunb. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 i'-ir 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 Naini Tal, &c., 
 
 sp. 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 4" 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 Pathar-kori, ... 
 
 iStewartii,C. B 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . . 
 
 1'— li' 
 
 • • 1 
 
 ... 
 
 Binsar 
 
 Clarke. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ep. — — 
 
 »* • 
 
 
 6" 
 
 \ 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bagesar, Jak 
 Pass 
 
 sp. 
 
 ... 
 
 . 9 . 
 
 i' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Bamari, Bage- 
 sar. 
 
 flocculosum, Don 
 
 
 ... 
 
 H'-2' 
 
 • • • 
 
 • . . 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 adnascens, Sw. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 3" — 4" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 20- Gymnogram- 
 ma. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vestita, Hook. 
 
 
 . >9 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 
 China 
 
 flavescens, fresh 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sirring 
 
 sp. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Mohargari 
 
 sp.- ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ramganga ri- 
 ver. 
 
 Totta, Schlecht. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 V 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 sp. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 G" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 21- Meniscium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 22. Vittaria. 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 n r 
 
 • . 1 
 
 ... 
 
 Bagesar valley. 
 
 elongata, Sto. 
 
 • 9* 
 
 . . • 
 
 i'-ir 
 
 ... 
 
 
 £athi, Sarju 
 valley. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 651 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 & 
 
 o 
 
 
 o> 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 ja 
 
 d 
 
 Him a.' 
 lay a. 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 -4J 
 
 • r>* 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 Elevation in fet 
 the sea. 
 
 d 
 
 < 
 
 c3 
 
 M 
 
 A 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Trees 
 
 ... 
 
 4—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Phjmatodes No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 & W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 
 6' — 7,000 
 
 ii’. 
 
 in 
 
 
 = „ No. 2 clo. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,5-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 =s „ No. 3 do. 
 
 On trees 
 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = „ No. 4 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 « «-• 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 
 = „ No. 5 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • . • 
 
 • •a 
 
 — ,, No. 6 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ,,, 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 . • . 
 
 = „ No. 7 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 »• 
 
 4,5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • . . 
 
 = „ No. 8 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • « . 
 
 . . . 
 
 = „ No. 9 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 6,5 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * • • 
 
 . . • 
 
 = „ No. 10 do. 
 
 Open 
 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... - 
 
 = „ No. 11 do. 
 
 On trees 
 
 ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 it* 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Pleopeltis in Herb. S. & VV. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 3—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 a Dtiphobolus No. I in Herb. S. 8 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 3,5—6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = „ No. 2 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 • • 9 
 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = „ No. 3 do. 
 
 
 ..a 
 
 R. 
 
 « • * 
 
 . . • 
 
 = „ No. 4 do. 
 
 On rocks 
 
 
 7 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = Nothol tna m Herb. S. & W. 
 
 Forest 
 
 ... 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Loxogramme No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 W. 
 
 Do. 
 
 
 4,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 = „ No. 2 do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 ... 
 
 2,5 — 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 named G. caudata in Herb. S. & V 
 
 On rocks 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 9. « 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Graminitis No. 1 in Herb. S. 
 
 W. 
 
 • a * 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 •«« 
 
 
 = „ No. 2 do. 
 
 F*orest 
 
 a . 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Trees 
 
 • • 
 
 4,8—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
652 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 i 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 23. Osmunda- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 regalis, L. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 2' 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 Claytoniana, L. 
 
 2 
 
 
 2' — 3' 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Above Namik, 
 Rogila. 
 
 24- Lygodium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 japonicum, Sw. 
 
 1 & 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 4' — 5' 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Bagesar, Bha- 
 bar. 
 
 25. Botrychinm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 virghuanuni , Sw. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 2" -3" 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Almora 
 
 Lunaria, Sw. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Tola 
 
 CXXXI.— MARSILI- 
 ACEiE. 
 
 1. Azolla- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 piunata, Ham. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Satrali valley, 
 Almora. 
 
 CXXXII— LYCOPO- 
 DlACEiE. 
 
 1. Psilotum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 triquetrum, Sn. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 6" 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Gagas river 
 
 2. Lycopodium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hamiltonii ,Spreng. ... 
 
 1 
 
 ie« 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju & Ram- 
 ganga val- 
 leys. 
 
 setaceum, Ham. 
 
 91 
 
 ... 
 
 9"— 12" 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju valley, 
 Jagthana. 
 
 var. subulifolia ... 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 g" 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 . • . 
 
 Do. 
 
 claratum, L. ... 
 
 s 
 
 • • • 
 
 3'— 6' 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Madhari Pass, 
 Dwali. 
 
 3, Selaginella. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 caulescens, Spring. ... 
 
 4 
 
 • . • 
 
 6" 
 
 
 
 Near Bagesar... 
 
 sp. 
 
 5 
 
 • •• 
 
 2" 
 
 • « • 
 
 
 Deopryag 
 
 ap. ■... 
 
 G 
 
 ... 
 
 2" 
 
 
 
 Rinde river ... 
 
 radicata. Spring. ... 
 
 7 
 
 ... 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Bagesar 
 
 integerrima, Spring . ... 
 
 8 
 
 ... 
 
 6" 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Naini Tal, Ta- 
 puban. 
 
 semicordata, Wall. ... 
 
 9 
 
 ... i 
 
 9" 
 
 ... 
 
 ! 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 65 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. ■ t 
 
 ! 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 — 
 
 Dry. 
 
 
 9,000? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 8—10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 On bushes, scan- 
 
 1—4,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 dent. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Open 
 
 5—7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 , , , 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 On water 
 
 1—5,600 
 
 R. 
 
 « • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■5 % 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 On trees 
 
 • * • 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 4—5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • i 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Woods &open... 
 
 8 — 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Shady banks ... 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 River banks ... 
 
 2,500 
 
 R. 
 
 y 
 
 ... 
 
 
 On rocks ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • « 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 On banks 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 *.« 
 
 
 Open rocks ... 
 
 7—8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 •• » 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Damp woods ... 
 
 4-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 «•* 
 
 • •• 
 
 
654 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 U 1 
 
 £ & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 a 
 
 a a? 3 
 
 S xi 3 
 
 4-3 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 Jh 
 
 bfl 
 
 4-3 
 
 a 
 
 cZ 
 
 PH 
 
 U 
 
 CD 
 
 O 
 
 'Th 
 
 q-i 
 
 .s 
 
 CD 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 .2 « £ 
 i-i a o 
 
 g *-e 
 
 H CC <u 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 1 Q 
 
 o 
 
 4-3 
 
 & 
 
 bB 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 4-3 
 
 •a 
 
 
 O '4-* 
 
 
 o> 
 
 ■ < 
 
 a 
 
 
 M 
 
 H-i 
 
 HH 
 
 w 
 
 1 3 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 i-i 
 
 CXXXIII - EQUI- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SET ACE AC 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Equisetum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 arvense, L. ... 
 
 1,3 
 
 t • • 
 
 6"— 18" 
 
 . . • 
 
 • . • 
 
 Pindari, Rim- 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lcim. 
 
 palustre, L. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 var. ••• 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 6"— 12" 
 
 ... 
 
 « • . 
 
 Below Almora, 
 
 debile, Roxb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Naim Tal. 
 
 4,5 
 
 ... 
 
 4' 
 
 ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 Bhabar, Naini 
 
 CXXXIY. — MUSCI. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tal, Baton. 
 
 1. Braunia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. ••• 
 
 I 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Rur pass 
 
 2 Ancectangmm- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sestiyum ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. ? 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Devi-dhura ... 
 
 var. ?• 
 
 curvirostrum, H.SfT. 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali 
 
 Dwali? 
 
 var. ... 
 
 5 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ? 
 
 var. 
 
 6 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Below Jalat ... 
 
 involutum, Hook. ... 
 
 7 
 
 1 • • 
 
 • *• 
 
 mi 
 
 • at 
 
 ? 
 
 4. Neissia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 serratula, Bey. ... 
 
 8 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • tt 
 
 • • a 
 
 Above Namik, 
 
 5. Khabdoweissia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fugax, Btxj. 
 
 9 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Champwa ... 
 
 6. Symblepharis- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bp. 
 
 10 
 
 
 ... 
 
 *•• 
 
 Ml 
 
 Dwali ,. r 
 
 7. Disticlmm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 inclinatum, Bry. 
 
 11 
 
 #•> 
 
 •r 
 
 • •• 
 
 « . a 
 
 Raj-hoti 
 
 8- Desmato&on. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Laureri, Bry. 
 
 12 
 
 it* 
 
 • at 
 
 it* 
 
 a a a 
 
 ? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 655 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 1 1 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 Himd- 
 . Ztn/a. 
 
 
 
 <4-1 
 
 o 
 
 DO 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 • rH 
 •4-i 
 
 • r-4 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 J* 
 
 M 
 
 Sm 
 
 o 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Open, wet 
 
 11—13,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • •« 
 
 
 • it 
 
 
 Wet places ... 
 
 4-7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 1—0,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 Open ground ... 
 
 10,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 1 0* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Trees, &c., in 
 
 7,000 
 
 ii. 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 forest. 
 
 • • < 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a • 
 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • «. 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 tit 
 
 • « 1 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * • « 
 
 • at 
 
 
 • 01 
 
 9,000 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • a • 
 
 
 Open wet 
 
 15,000 
 
 
 tM 
 
 T. 
 
 — Didymodon inclination , Hk. 
 
 ground. 
 
 ? 
 
 1 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Tortula bryoides , Hk. 
 
 i 
 
G56 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Straohey and Win- 
 terbottnm,. 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 ' 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 9- Tortilla- 
 
 sp. 
 
 13 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Dwali 
 
 fallax, Sw. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • • # 
 
 Ml 
 
 i*. 
 
 var. 
 
 14 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 (M 
 
 Do. 
 
 unguiculata, Hk. Sf T 
 
 15 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 10- Dicranum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 .16 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Champwa .. 
 
 11. Didymodon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cylindricus, Bry. 
 
 ■ a • 
 
 . . . 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 • . • 
 
 var. 
 
 17 
 
 • • 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 Ml 
 
 ? 
 
 Tortula Harv. ? 
 
 18 
 
 »•» 
 
 • • • 
 
 CM 
 
 ... 
 
 D wiili 
 
 12- Campy lopns- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 19 
 
 ... 
 
 « • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 IM 
 
 Devi-dhtira ... 
 
 13- Fissidens. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bryoides, Hedw. 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 Devi-dhura ... 
 
 taxifolius, Hedw. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 ... 
 
 var. ... 
 
 21 
 
 t • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 nobilis, Griff. 
 
 22 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • # 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Pharka 
 
 14. Atrichum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 crisp urn, LPi/s. 
 
 23 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 15- Pogonatum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cirrhatum, Sw. 
 
 24 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • M 
 
 III 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 urnigerum, Bry. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . . 
 
 var. crassum .. 
 
 25 
 
 • •• 
 
 • it 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 Bagdwar, Sarju 
 
 micrastomum, Hook., 
 
 26 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 valley. 
 
 Dwali 
 
 16* Eucalypta. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 27 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 IM 
 
 ? 
 
 17- Qrthodon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 serratus, Schw. 
 
 28 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ? 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 657 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 6 
 
 • PH 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 c3 
 
 Himd- 
 
 l»ya. 
 
 
 
 *H 
 
 0 
 
 w 
 
 1 
 
 Va 
 
 • PM 
 
 PH 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation infei 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 « 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 m 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 i •• 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • i« 
 
 
 IM 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 »«• 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ? 
 
 Banks & trees. 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 = Weissia tenuirostris , Hk. and T. 
 
 Banks 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ■9 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • M 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 t 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 R. 
 
 • « • 
 
 1 •• 
 
 
 • » » 
 
 7,000 
 
 • t • 
 
 • . » 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 III 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 =*= Polytrichum, Hook. & T. 
 
 Ml 
 
 3,500 
 
 I 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 . . • 
 
 • it 
 
 IM 
 
 
 
 
 3,5' — 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 IM 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • •0 
 
 Ml 
 
 = Octoblepharum serratum, 
 
 83 
 
658 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and \V in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 18- Bissodon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bp. 
 
 29 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 *#• 
 
 • tl 
 
 Champwa 
 
 19- Ptychomi- 
 trium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polyphyllum, Bry. ... 
 
 SO 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali ... 
 
 20. Schistidium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 apocarpum, Bry. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 ... IM 
 
 var. — — 
 
 31 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •1 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 21- Eacomitrium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bp. 
 
 32 
 
 « • • 
 
 • * • 
 
 It* 
 
 » . • 
 
 Katlii 
 
 22- Mielicliho- 
 feria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 33 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 » I I 
 
 ttt 
 
 Pindari ... 
 
 23- Brachynie- 
 nium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nepalense, Hook. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • » . 
 
 . r » 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 
 var. 
 
 34 
 
 • • • 
 
 • « • 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Dwali 
 
 24. Bryum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 elongatum, Hk. &c T., 
 
 35 
 
 • • • 
 
 • .1 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp.’ 
 
 36 
 
 . r. 
 
 . . . 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 37 
 
 . . . 
 
 • .. 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 sp. 
 
 38 
 
 . . ( 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 1 
 
 Do. 
 
 Diwalii ? Bry. ... 
 
 39 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •1 
 
 • . . 
 
 Ml 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 turbinatum ? Bry. ... 
 
 40 
 
 • •0 
 
 • •• 
 
 s » . 
 
 » . . 
 
 ? 
 
 latifolium ? Bry. 
 
 41 
 
 , , . 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 42 
 
 ... 
 
 HI 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Barjikang 
 
 versicolor, Bry. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 » . • 
 
 9 . » 
 
 Pass. 
 
 * . i 
 
 rar. 
 
 43 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 
 
 Saba ... 
 
 giganteum, Hook. 
 
 44 
 
 
 Ill 
 
 
 
 Near Kathi ... 
 
 sp. • 
 
 45 
 
 ... 
 
 
 « • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Jagesar 
 
©F THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 659 
 
 Plants — (continued) . 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the area. 
 
 Himd- 
 i lay a. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 ft 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •4 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 444 
 
 9*000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 = Trichostomum pdlpTii/Uum, Ilk. and 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 t 
 
 •■*•4 
 
 9,00® 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 = Grimmia, , Ilk. and T. 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • 4 4 
 
 = Trichostomum, Hook, and T. 
 
 Open ground, 
 
 1 1,000 
 
 R. 
 
 •M 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 4 4 
 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 * • • 
 
 44 4 
 
 
 «i *1 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 7,500 
 
 E, 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 4 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,500 
 
 E. 
 
 • •4 
 
 444 
 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 E 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •4 
 
 
 Open ground ... 
 
 14,000 
 
 • • » 
 
 • • • 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 15,00o 
 
 • •• 
 
 • < 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 14,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 44 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wet banks and 
 
 9,000 
 
 E. 
 
 
 • 44 
 
 
 rocks. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■Banks & trees. 
 
 8,000 
 
 E. 
 
 *44 
 
 4 44 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 E. 
 
 <•4 
 
 . . . 
 
 
660 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g£ 
 
 5 ^3 
 a 
 
 <*5 /A 
 
 « ^ 3 
 ||S 
 
 
 
 
 fee 
 
 
 Name, 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 bJD 
 
 4-3 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 *H 
 
 O 
 
 .2 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 L. cfl O 
 
 5? if t-i 
 TCC O' 
 
 5 
 
 w 
 
 4^ 
 
 ’r3 
 
 c3 
 
 W 
 
 4J 
 
 .S 3 
 
 *s 
 
 w 
 
 fH 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 » — < 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 G> 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 4-3 
 
 i-— < 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 14 
 
 25- Mnium- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rhyncophorum, Harv., 
 
 46 
 
 ••• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 Kathi ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 47 
 
 ... 
 
 • ». 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 48 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Kathi, Jalat, 
 
 26- Funaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hygrometrica,. Hedw. 
 
 • •• 
 
 . • • 
 
 • ♦ • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Tar,- 
 
 49 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 Kapkot ... 
 
 var. 
 
 50 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 Ml 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 27- Orthotriclmm- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp.— ' — 
 
 51 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali 
 
 28- Eartramea. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 patens, Sclav. ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . * • 
 
 var. 
 
 52 
 
 
 
 
 
 Champwa ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 faleata* Hook. .. 
 
 54 
 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 Kalimundi 
 
 var. ••• 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Gagar Pass ... 
 
 29- Leucodon. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. — - 
 
 56 
 
 *•4 
 
 » » « 
 
 Ml 
 
 » * • 
 
 Dwali, near 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jalat. 
 
 30- Leptodon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 57 
 
 • ii 
 
 
 ... 
 
 1 M 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 31. Pterogonium. 
 
 coespitosum, Wils. ... 
 
 58 
 
 
 • M 
 
 
 * 
 
 ... 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 32 . decker a- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 59 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 sqnarrosa, Hook. 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jalat 
 
 crispatula, Hook. ... 
 
 61 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Above Jalat ... 
 
 pcnnata, Hedio. 
 
 62 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 dendroides, Hook. ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 var. 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 
 
 Kathi 
 
 sp. 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 acuminata ? Hook. ... 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 blanda? Harv. 
 Griffithiana, Sclav, ... 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bagesar valley* 
 
 Julacea, Harv. 
 
 68 
 
 
 
 • M 
 
 
 Jagesar 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 661 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 d 
 
 • rH i 
 
 K 
 
 b 
 
 o 
 
 • •• 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 « 0 9 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 3.500 
 
 R. 
 
 » 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Trees 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *•« 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 • •• 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 K. 
 
 » *» 
 
 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Banks wet ... 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 5—8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 — Scleroduntium secundum, Harv. 
 
 « • • 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 *•« 
 
 
 HI 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 6,800 
 
 R. 
 
 *” 
 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 «a« 
 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 = N. aurea , Griff. 
 
 • • • 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 
662 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 j . 1 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 33. Cylindrothe- 
 cimn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 69 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Bagesar valley, 
 
 34. Anmodon ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 70 
 
 • • * 
 
 
 
 
 Kathi 
 
 sp. 
 
 71 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 lit 
 
 ? 
 
 35- Pilotrichum 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 72 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 36. Isotheciinn. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 73 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 ? 
 
 37- Pylaisxa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 polyanthos, Bry. 
 
 • M 
 
 • II 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 IM 
 
 var. 
 
 74 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Jagesar 
 
 38- Hypnum- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 75 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • t 
 
 1.4 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 76 
 
 III 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •I 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 confer turn, Vicks. ... 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 var. — 
 
 77 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 plumosum ? Hook. ... 
 
 78 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Kathi 
 
 var. 
 
 79 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 Madhari Pas'!, 
 
 sp. — — — — ••• 
 
 80 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •ft 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Kathi 
 
 sp. 
 
 81 
 
 • »• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 salebrosum, Hedw. ... 
 
 82 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 B • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp 
 
 83 
 
 I •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju valley 
 & Kathi. 
 
 sp. 
 
 fluviatile, Sw. 
 
 84 
 
 III 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Samkhet ... 
 
 var. 
 
 85 
 
 ... 
 
 • * I 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Wallichii, Hook. 
 
 86 
 
 • •• 
 
 • . • 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 Pharka 
 
 sp.- ■— • »• 
 
 87 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 88 
 
 • •1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ... 
 
 dwali 
 
 sp. 
 
 89 
 
 III 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 macrocarpum, Schw , 
 
 
 • « 
 
 1.. 
 
 • •1 
 
 • . • 
 
 
 var? 
 
 90 
 
 ... 
 
 ) • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... ] 
 
 Garnik & Jalat, 
 
 proliferum, L. 
 
 91 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • I 
 
 1 
 
 £athi, Naini 
 Tal. 
 
 recognitum, Hedw. ... 
 
 92 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • I 
 
 • IB 
 
 ... I 
 
 £athi 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 663 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soils &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Hin 
 
 lay 
 
 ‘3 
 
 « 
 
 d- 
 
 a. 
 
 >> 
 
 !h 
 
 ft 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 i 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 = Neckera myura, Hook. 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 Ill 
 
 i«i 
 
 = Neckera minor ? Hcdw. 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 • •1 
 
 «•* 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • 0* 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 *«• 
 
 • •• 
 
 = Leshea polyanthos , Hook, and T. 
 
 Banks ... 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 III 
 
 
 = Leskea sp ? 
 
 ... 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 #• • 
 
 ... 
 
 = Les/tea acuminata ? Hedw, 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 ’? 
 
 E. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • n 
 
 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • I 
 
 m 
 
 ! ~ 
 
 • • • 
 
 3,5—7,000 
 
 R, 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 In water 
 
 5,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 W et banks ... 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • I 
 
 in 
 
 
 Bo. 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 i • 1 
 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 III 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 III 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 7—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • • I 
 
 III 
 
 = H. Strongylum, Taylor. 
 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 1*1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
664 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 List of Kumcion 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and Win- 
 ter bottom). 
 
 Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Sh 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 / 
 
 commutatum, Hedw., 
 
 
 • * • 
 
 • • ■ 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 var. ? 
 
 93 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 Raj-hoti 
 
 Palustre, L 
 
 
 
 i • • 
 
 
 
 Bagdwar 
 
 var, subsphterocar- 
 
 94 
 
 i • • 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 • € • 
 
 pum. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 95 
 
 ... 
 
 
 , . . 
 
 
 Sarju valley ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 9G 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 filicinum, L. 
 
 97 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Gagar Pass ... 
 
 39- Leptohyme- 
 nium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 microphyllum, Schw., 
 
 98 
 
 
 
 
 
 Katlii 
 
 tenue, Schw. 
 
 99 
 
 »». 
 
 m 
 
 
 in 
 
 ? 
 
 40- Dicranodon- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tium. 
 
 longirostrum, Bry. ., 
 
 100 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ? 
 
 41. Hookeria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp 
 
 101 
 
 • •• 
 
 •H 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Dwali ... 
 
 42- Hypoptery- 
 gium. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. ••» 
 
 102 
 
 « • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 • I I 
 
 
 Pharka „. 
 
 HEPATICAE, 
 
 1. Riccia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. 
 
 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 » •• 
 
 in 
 
 Samkhet ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 » • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. 
 
 2. Marchantia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. .. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 * • ♦ 
 
 III 
 
 • a t 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 2 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 0 10 
 
 • • a 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 >•« 
 
 1 •• 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 Near Jalat 
 
 sp.' 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • 0 0 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp. ... 
 
 5 
 
 Hi 
 
 III 
 
 * • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 G 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 
 ? 
 
 sp. 
 
 7 
 
 
 • . • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 8 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Vlason 
 
 sp. — — . 
 
 9 
 
 IAI 
 
 III 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 Sarju river ... 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 665 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 d 
 
 *s 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 a> 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 
 
 <4H 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 • rH 
 
 <r 3 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 Elevation in ft 
 the sea. 
 
 .3 
 
 P3 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Tibet. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 • c« 
 
 
 
 »•* 
 
 • a • 
 
 
 Open wet 
 ground. 
 
 15.000 
 
 E. 
 
 *• 
 
 ... 
 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 »•* 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 IM 
 
 tat 
 
 
 Banks 
 
 4,000 
 
 E, 
 
 • • 4 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 • • « 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ., . 
 
 
 
 Wet banks 
 
 7,000 
 
 R 
 
 wt 
 
 tat 
 
 
 Banks & trees, 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •» 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 IM 
 
 ? 
 
 R 
 
 a • a 
 
 ... 
 
 — Nechera tenuis, Hook. 
 
 Cat 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •a 
 
 = Didymodon , Schw. 
 
 
 8,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 14 • 
 
 6,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 — Hypnum laricinum, Hook 
 
 In water ... 
 
 6,060 
 
 R. 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 aa. 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 6,000 
 
 R- 
 
 ... 
 
 m 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • a a 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . a 
 
 
 Damp earth 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5 000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,000 
 
 R. 
 
 > • a 
 
 a . a 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ? 
 
 R. 
 
 Ml 
 
 a a « 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 
 a « • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 5,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • a* 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 3,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 
666 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 S ei 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 tS> 
 
 
 
 u ^ 
 
 i • 
 
 C3 x-n 
 
 -4-3 
 
 1 
 
 U 
 
 CD 
 
 * 
 
 rt 
 • !— * 
 
 5-4 
 
 O 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium 
 
 (Strachey 
 
 terbottom 
 
 O 
 
 5-1 
 
 bJD 
 
 q-< 
 
 O 
 
 +3 
 
 ■ 1 
 w 
 
 r — < 
 
 o- 
 
 qn 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 be 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 qn 
 
 O 
 
 rH 
 
 D 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 O 
 
 q-4 
 
 O 
 
 <D 
 
 a 
 
 . r— 1 
 
 Locality. 
 
 3. Jungermaimia- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bp. 
 
 1 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Champwa 
 
 sp. — - 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 Natnik ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Dwali 
 
 sp. 
 
 4 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp. 
 
 5 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 sp. 
 
 6 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 It* 
 
 Do 1 
 
 CHARACEiE. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1- Chara. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 verticillata 
 
 ... 
 
 . • • 
 
 ... 
 
 » • • 
 
 • •1 
 
 SariyaTal, &c., 
 
 2. Nitella. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sp. ■ 
 
 ... 
 
 .... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 t * t 
 
 Naini Tal ... 
 
 LICHENES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Collema. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 saturninum, Ach, 
 
 1 
 
 . . • 
 
 . . . 
 
 • 0* 
 
 1 • • 
 
 Madliari Pass, 
 
 nigrescens, Ach. 
 
 2 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . • 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 
 tremelloides, Ach . ... 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 It. 
 
 Do. 
 
 2. Umbilicaria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 depressa, Schrad. 
 
 i • « 
 
 ... 
 
 0 . . 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Pindari ... 
 
 3- Lecidea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 glacialis ? Fries. 
 geographica, Ach. ... 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 1 
 
 • 1 « 
 
 Shelong ... 
 
 Maichak Pass, 
 
 armeniaca, Ach 
 sabuletorum, Fries. 
 
 3 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Shelong 
 
 var, coniops ... 
 
 4 
 
 ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • »« 
 
 DO. etc 
 
 4. Biatora. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 himalayana, Bab. ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 0 . . 
 
 • . * 
 
 1 » « 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 Gori river ... 
 
 5. Cladonia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pyxidata, Fries. 
 
 1 
 
 1 * 1 
 
 
 
 
 Pindari 
 
 vermicularis, Ach. ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 » . I 
 
 var. taurica 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 »•» 
 
 • • • 
 
 perfoliata 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 . • . 
 
 
 Bompras 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 667 
 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Open 
 Banks in fores 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 In water 
 
 On trees 
 
 Earth 
 
 Rocks 
 
 • M 
 
 • •• 
 • •• 
 • M 
 
 • •• 
 a » 5 
 • • a 
 
 <D 
 
 O 
 
 *0 
 
 a 
 
 4-3 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 4-1 
 
 g § 
 
 aa 
 
 c« <D 
 t> -3 
 
 <D +» 
 
 S 
 
 10,000 
 8,000 
 8,500 
 8,500 
 8 500 
 8,500 
 
 5 — 6,000 
 
 6,500 
 
 8,200 
 
 8,700 
 
 8,700 
 
 12,000 
 
 13.000 
 
 16.000 
 13,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 13,000 
 
 4,700 
 
 12,000 
 
 • •• 
 
 16,000 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 >> 
 
 a 
 
 '3 
 
 P3 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 IH 
 111 
 • M 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • o 
 
 >» 
 
 P -< 
 
 ft 
 
 !«• 
 Ml 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 >0* 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 D. 
 
 •i« 
 
 D. 
 
 CD 
 
 rO 
 
 Ml 
 Ml 
 Ml 
 * •» 
 Ml 
 III 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 Ml 
 • ■ • 
 
 Ml 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 • II 
 
 Remarks. 
 
HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 668 
 
 List of Kumaon 
 
 
 n h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 faX3 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 £ 
 
 4-3 
 
 § 
 
 <P 
 
 is 
 
 o 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 er barium 
 
 (Strachey 
 
 terbottom] 
 
 o 
 
 f-* 
 
 be 
 
 4-t 
 
 O 
 
 4-3 
 
 cS 
 
 <4-1 
 
 O 
 
 4^ 
 
 be 
 
 • r— 1 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 J-* 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 r— < 
 
 is 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 4— 1 
 .1— r 
 
 *3 I 
 
 o 
 
 
 HH 
 
 HH 
 
 M 
 
 w 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 
 6. Stereocaulon. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 tomentosum, Fries. .. 
 
 l 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Gori river 
 
 corallinum, Schr. ... 
 
 . 2 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 • . . 
 
 • '• 
 
 Tindari 
 
 ramulosum, Ach. 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 • • . 
 
 ret 
 
 var. strictum. 
 
 3 
 
 i « e- 
 
 ... 
 
 . . • 
 
 • t( 
 
 S a g t i a- 1> e o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pass, Madha-I 
 
 7. Urceolaria- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri Pass. 
 
 calcar ea 
 
 ... 
 
 • tf 
 
 ... 
 
 
 • tt 
 
 Shelong 
 
 8- Parmelia' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 melanaspis, Wahl. ... 
 
 1 
 
 • ft 
 
 . . . 
 
 . i . 
 
 • tt 
 
 Shelong 
 
 pulverulenta, Ach. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • . » 
 
 •• • 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • at 
 
 var.. 
 
 2 
 
 ..r 
 
 ... 
 
 t • . 
 
 • tt 
 
 Gori river 
 
 elegans, Ach. 
 
 B 
 
 • f . 
 
 • • i 
 
 Ml 
 
 1 . « 
 
 Shelong 
 
 oreina, Ach. ... 
 
 4 
 
 Ml 
 
 in 
 
 Ml 
 
 • » • 
 
 Do. 
 
 vitellina ? Ach. 
 
 5 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 • It 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 calcarea ? Fries. .. 
 
 6 
 
 • •• 
 
 * •• 
 
 • tt 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 scruposa ? Ach. 
 
 7 
 
 • • • 
 
 • t • 
 
 • tt 
 
 . . . 
 
 Do. 
 
 chrysoleuca, Ach. 
 
 8 
 
 • •• 
 
 tit 
 
 ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 b ax i col a, Ach. ... 
 
 9 
 
 i • • 
 
 It. 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. 
 
 coesia, Ach. ... 
 
 10 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 • tt 
 
 Do. 
 
 gtellaris, Ach. ... 
 
 11 
 
 t • • 
 
 ■ M 
 
 • tt 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. 
 
 speciosa, AcA. 
 
 12 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 Gori river, Chi- 
 
 Igevigata, Ach. >• 
 
 13 
 
 ... 
 
 • ft 
 
 • tt 
 
 • tt 
 
 na. 
 
 China 
 
 perlata, Ach. 
 
 15 
 
 . . . 
 
 Ml 
 
 • tt 
 
 • •• 
 
 Karim Pass ••• 
 
 var. saccatiloba ... 
 
 14 
 
 Mi 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 
 
 • tt 
 
 China 
 
 perforata, Ach. ••• 
 
 16 
 
 • t • 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 • tt 
 
 Do. 
 
 tiliacea, Ach. ••• 
 
 17 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 Do. 
 
 Bcortea, Ach. 
 
 18 
 
 . • . 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 M;idhari Pass, 
 
 caperata, Ach. .. 
 
 19 
 
 Ml 
 
 ••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 • at 
 
 China 
 
 leucomela, Ach. 
 
 20 
 
 • tt 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • tt 
 
 Do. 
 
 cirrhata, Fries. ... 
 
 21 
 
 • •• 
 
 • tt 
 
 * 1 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 9- Sticta. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pulmonacea, Ach. .. 
 
 lit 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 var. hypomela .. 
 
 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 • tt 
 
 • tt 
 
 China 
 
 retigera, Ach. 
 
 2 
 
 III 
 
 Ml 
 
 IM 
 
 • tt 
 
 Dugli 
 
 herbacea, Del. ,. 
 
 3 
 
 • * 1 
 
 • •1 
 
 III 
 
 ... 
 
 Karim and Ka- 
 
 10. Pettidea- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 th'i Passes,] 
 China. 
 
 horizontal is, Ach. 
 
 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 **' 
 
 • • • 
 
 Above Dwali... 
 
 canina, Ach. 
 
 2 
 
 • M 
 
 . * • 
 
 IM 
 
 • • • 
 
 Chinar Dwali J 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 669 
 
 Plants — (continued). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 Elevation in feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 1 
 
 Ilimd 
 lay a. 
 
 Pi 
 
 05 
 
 >> 
 
 fH 
 
 Pi 
 
 4-3 
 
 < V 
 
 rO 
 • r-t 
 
 Remarks 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 4,700 
 
 R. 
 
 r • • 
 
 
 
 Earth 
 
 12,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 
 
 lit 
 
 ... 
 
 •- 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 
 Rocks 
 
 8—11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 III 
 
 13,000 
 
 « • ♦ 
 
 D. 
 
 • •(1 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 i • * 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 in 
 
 . 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 4,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 • * . 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 • •I 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 . • 1 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 . . « 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 U. 
 
 . •• 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 D. 
 
 .« * 
 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 tea 
 
 D. 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 « • • 
 
 1 3,000 
 
 ... 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 Rocks and trees, 
 
 4, 7—8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 
 On trees 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 . . * 
 
 III 
 
 
 
 7,500 
 
 R. 
 
 i ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 On trees ... 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 
 * I « 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 8,200 
 
 It. 
 
 . • * 
 
 . . I 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 •I • 
 
 
 • it 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 til 
 
 « •• 
 
 
 o«» 
 
 
 • • « 
 
 M 
 
 III 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 t • 
 
 i • 
 
 
 
 10,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • 
 
 • « 
 
 
 ill 
 
 7, 5—9,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 a • 
 
 
 
 9,000 
 
 R 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 • • * 
 
 8—9,000 
 
 R 
 
 tl 
 
 •. at 
 
 
670 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 List of Kumcton 
 
 Name. 
 
 Herbarium number 
 (Strachey and W in- 
 terbottom). 
 
 [ Habit of growth. 
 
 Height of plant. 
 
 Colour of flower. 
 
 Time of flowering. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 11. Solorina. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 saccata, Ach. 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 • af 
 
 Ml 
 
 Kathi Pass ... 
 
 12. Cetraria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Straclieyi, Bab. 
 
 1 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 Near Kathi ... 
 
 ambigua, Bab. 
 
 2 
 
 • •• 
 
 » «a 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Bompras 
 
 13. Ramalina- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 farinacea ? Ach. 
 
 ... 
 
 * • i 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 Pindari 
 
 14 Evernia. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Stracheyi, Bab. 
 
 • at 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • ai 
 
 Pindari, Bom- 
 
 15- Usnea. 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 pras. 
 
 himalayana, Bab. ... 
 
 1 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ... 
 
 Binsar ... 
 
 longissima, Ach. 
 
 2 
 
 ■>*• 
 
 u< 
 
 • at 
 
 ... 
 
 China 
 
 ceratina, Ach. ... 
 
 3 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • aa 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp.? 
 
 » • • 
 
 lit 
 
 Ml 
 
 IM 
 
 • • t 
 
 Do. 
 
 sp.? ... 
 
 * * * 
 
 •** 
 
 • • « 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 Hot valleys ... 
 
 Note.— The whole of this chapter has been edited and prepared by Mr. F„ 
 
 nished by General R. Strachey. My work has been confined to seeing that the 
 proofs.— E, T. A. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 671 
 
 Plants— (concluded). 
 
 Conditions of soil, &c. 
 
 CJ 
 
 t> 
 
 O 
 
 rQ 
 
 d 
 
 4-3 
 
 <U 
 
 Hima- 
 
 laya. 
 
 X 
 
 +3 
 
 o 
 
 rO 
 
 EH 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Elevation in fe 
 the sea. 
 
 Rainy. 
 
 >> 
 
 R 
 
 Ml 
 
 8,000 
 
 R. 
 
 
 »•» 
 
 
 
 7,200 
 
 R. 
 
 
 in 
 
 
 Stones ... 
 
 16,000 
 
 • • • 
 
 D. 
 
 in 
 
 
 Do. ... 
 
 11,500 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 •i • 
 
 
 Do. 
 
 11, 5—16,000 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 t»i 
 
 
 Trees 
 
 7,000 
 
 R. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 t • i 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • •« 
 
 hi 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 8,700 
 
 R, 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 8,700 
 
 R. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •» 
 
 
 On oberonia .. 
 
 . 2,000 
 
 R.. 
 
 i 
 
 III 
 
 
 Duthie, Superintendent of the Botanical Gardens, Saharanpur, from the list fur- 
 corrections made in the first proofs by Mr. Duthie were carried out in the second 
 
i 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Economic Botany. 
 
 contents. 
 
 Arrangement of the subject. Food of the people. Analysis of the food- 
 grains. Watson’s formula. Cultivated food-grains. Cereals. Pulses. Ama- 
 ranths. Polygonaceae. Cultivated vegetables. Gourds. Vegetables. Condi- 
 ments and spices. Greens. Fruits, cultivated and wild. Uncultivated products 
 used as food. Drugs. Narcotics and spirits. Oil-seeds. Dyes and tans. Gums 
 and Gum-resins. Fibres. Woods. 
 
 The economic botany of the Himalayan districts of these provin- 
 Arrangement of the ces > actual and potential, opens out such a 
 subject. wide field for investigation that it would be 
 
 impossible to do more than review the information that we possess. 
 The materials are to be found scattered over numerous memoirs, 
 articles, reports, and notes, and are as practically inaccessible to the 
 general public as if they had never been collected. The form of 
 this chapter will, therefore, be more that of a suggestive classified 
 list than of a treatise which would, in the first place, be more than 
 could be usefully prepared by one person ; and, in the second 
 place, will come more fitly into the general review of the economic 
 products that is about to be undertaken by the Department of Agri- 
 culture in these provinces . 1 For the more orderly arrangement of 
 our subject, we shall divide the useful products of the vegetable 
 kingdom into the following classes: — 
 
 I . — Vegetable substances used as food by men and animals. 
 
 a. Cultivated food-grains. 
 1). Cultivated vegetables. 
 c. Spices and condiments. 
 
 d. Greens. 
 
 e. Fruits, cultivated and wild. 
 
 /. Uncultivated products used as food. 
 
 II . — Vegetable substances used in pharmacy. 
 
 a. Drugs. | b. Narcotics and spirits. 
 
 1 Progress has been made in this direction by tire publication of my “ Notes 
 on the Economic Products of the North-Western Provinces.” Part I . on ‘ Gums 
 and gum-resins Part II., on ‘ Economic Mineralogy Part III, issued by 
 the Department of Agriculture, contains, ‘ Tans and Dyes” Part IV./‘ Cultivat- 
 ed food-grains’ ; Part V., ‘Gourds: vegetables: condiments and uncultivated 
 products used as food. The remainder are under preparation and will comprise 
 ‘ Drugs,’ ‘ Fibres,’ ‘Woods, and ‘ Narcotics.’ * 
 
 fst 
 
 a; 
 
 ‘A' 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 673 
 
 I 
 
 a. 
 
 b. 
 
 a. 
 
 b. 
 
 III . — Vegetable substances used in manufactures. 
 Oil-seeds. i c. Gums and gum-resins. 
 
 Tans and dyes. I d. Fibres. 
 
 e. Woods. 
 
 IV. — Special subjects. 
 
 Forest history. I c. Rhea experiments. 
 
 Tea cultivation. I d. Sericulture. 
 
 e. Miscellaneous. 
 
 . — Vegetable substances used as food by men and animals. 
 
 The population of the Himalayan districts is essentially Hindu, 
 
 and consequently the vegetable kingdom 
 Food of the peop e. affords most of the substances used as food 
 
 by the people. Few of the hill-men, even amongst those who have 
 had much communication with the plains, have any prejudice in 
 regard to eating animal food. The majority partake of the flesh of 
 kids, short-tailed sheep, and young male buffaloes at festivals and 
 marriages, and whenever sacrifices are offered to the consort of 
 Siva. With but few exceptions all eat the flesh of deer, pheasants, 
 and partridges, but not of jungle fowl ; whilst in Garhwal, all, includ- 
 ing Brahmans, eat the flesh of the wild pig. The servile classes 
 (Dorns, &c.) eat meat of all kinds whenever they can get it, even of 
 animals killed by wild beasts or which have died from disease, and 
 in their habits differ little from the Chamars of the plains. Uncul- 
 tivated products are used as food chiefly by the inhabitants of the 
 jungly tract lying along the foot of the hills and along the banks 
 of the Kali, and, in times of scarcity, by the people of the upper 
 Pattis. At all times, however, the young leaves of nettles, of 
 several species of ferns, sorrel, and the like, are used- as a spinach 
 by all classes. An examination of the list of cultivated products 
 use das food will show that the greater portionbelong to the great 
 natural orders Graminece or grasses, Leguminosce or pulses, and 
 Cucurbitacece or gourds. The two former afford life-supporting 
 substances abounding in albuminous matters and those capable of 
 repairing tissues accompanied with starch, gum, and sugar in 
 such proportion as to support respiration and promote animal 
 heat. They also provide the inorganic substances necessary to keep 
 the circulation in a healthy state and to renew the solid frame-work 
 of our bodies. Of these two orders the Graminece or grasses is the 
 more important, containing as it does wheat, barley, rice, millets, 
 
 85 
 
674 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS' 
 
 maize, and sugarcane, which enter so largely into the food-resources 
 not only of this country hut of every country in the universe. To 
 the Leguminosce belong peas, beans, lentils, and gram. The gourds 
 and cultivated vegetables are eaten more as a relish or to eke out 
 a scanty supply of food-grain than as a sole food resource, and 
 then only at certain seasons when their abundance and cheapness 
 render them a favourite. The same may be said of fruits, culti- 
 vated and wild, and of the wild plants collected for food. 
 
 There are three forms of nitrogenous substances common to both 
 Analysis of the food- animal and vegetable organizations distin- 
 S rains - guished by the names albumen, fibrine, and 
 
 caseine ; and it has been found that, when introduced into a living 
 organism, each of these is capable of being converted into the other? 
 The principal ingredients of the blood of animals is found to be fibrine 
 and albumen, and these substances contain, besides the carbon, hydro- 
 gen, and oxygen found in farinaceous products, such as the cereals, 
 nitrogen, sulphur, and phosphorus, which abound in the pulses. 
 These elements are also found in all parts of the animal organism 
 except water and fat. It follows, therefore, that nutritious food must 
 possess both albuminous and nitrogenous ingredients. The former 
 are composed of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen; the hydrogen and 
 oxygen being in proportion to form water, thus leaving the carbon 
 wholly unoxidised ; or if we suppose the oxygen to be divided 
 between the carbon and hydrogen, a surplus of carbon and hydrogen 
 that is unoxidised remains. We are now speaking of what takes 
 place after the food has been taken into the body and there submit- 
 ted to assimilation. From the moment an animal is born until it 
 dies oxygen is taken into its body through the skin and lungs, and 
 given out again by the same channels in the form of compounds of 
 carbon and hydrogen, or, in other words, as the vapour of water and 
 carbonic acid. The latter is derived from the food eaten ; for, when 
 an animal is unable to take food, so long as it lives, it continues to 
 inspire oxygen and give out compounds of carbon and hydrogen, 
 which it obtains from the waste of the tissuesof its own body. In fact 
 death ensues from the action of the inspired oxygen, on account of its 
 powerful affinity for carbon and hydrogen. When the animal has 
 no longer superfluous carbon and hydrogen capable of combining 
 i Based on the researches of Professor Mayer, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 €75 
 
 wit'll oxygen, it seizes on the carbon and. hydrogen of the animal s 
 ewn body ; and, in the first instance, on the fat, which is almost all 
 carbon and hydrogen, in order to satisfy the oxygen absorbed in the 
 circulation, which afterwards goes off as carbonic acid in water. 
 From the above it will be seen that food containing a surplus of 
 carbon and hydrogen is necessary to an animal in order to support 
 respiration without destroying its structure. But, besides defending 
 the animal tissues and other parts from the action of oxygen, food 
 maintains animal heat ; for, whenever oxygen combines with a com- 
 bustible, heat is developed ; and that this does not depend on outward 
 influences is shown by the fact that the heat of the body is the same 
 in the tropics and in cold countries. 
 
 There are thus two great uses to which food is adapted by its 
 composition — the nitrogenous to renew the blood and the noil-nitro- 
 genous to support respiration and maintain animal heat. But 
 besides these there are other ingredients in food, the salts, such as 
 iron, phosphate of lime, chloride of sodium with other salts of sodi- 
 um, potash and magnesia, which occur also in the blood and bones, 
 nails and hair. The following analyses of the principal cultivated 
 food-grains are intended to show separately the quantity of these 
 three principal ingredients present in each class of grain, and in 
 doing so its comparative value as a food resource. A study of the 
 tables will corroborate in most cases the empirical verdict on the 
 value of each grain formed by the natives of these provinces, and 
 give a scientific basis to their estimates, which would otherwise 
 appear to be based on arbitrary data arising from their habits of life. 
 The first series refer to the cereals, the second to the pulses, and the 
 third to other vegetable products. We shall first, however, give 
 Liebig’s analysis of the three forms of nitrogenous substances found 
 in animal and vegetable organisms for comparative purposes, and 
 then Professor Mayer’s ultimate analysis of the various food-grains. 
 
 Analysis of 
 
 
 Albumen. 
 
 Caseine. 
 
 Fibrine. 
 
 Sulphur ... ... ... ••• 
 
 1-30 
 
 0*9 
 
 1*0 
 
 Carbon ... ... ... ... 
 
 53*50 
 
 43*6 
 
 53*2 
 
 Nitrogen 
 
 15*50 
 
 15*8 
 
 17*2 
 
 Hydrogen ... 
 
 7*16 
 
 7-1 
 
 6*9 
 
 Oxygen ... ... ... 
 
 22*54 
 
 22*6 
 
 21*7 
 
 
 100*00 
 
 100*00 
 
 100 00 
 
676 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Results of analysis A. 
 
 These are arranged in percentages so as to show the composition 
 of the different substances existing in each vegetable product 
 examined with their separate uses as life-sustaining compounds. 
 
 Names of products. 
 
 Nitro- 
 
 genous 
 
 ingredi- 
 
 ents. 
 
 Non- 
 
 nitro- 
 
 genous 
 
 ingredi- 
 
 ents. 
 
 Inorga- 
 nic in- 
 gredi- 
 ents. 
 
 Cereals. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Triticum vulgare, wheat, gehUn , B. 
 
 
 
 14-45 
 
 83"I5 
 
 2-40 
 
 Ditto, H. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 19-15 
 
 79-77 
 
 0-70 
 
 Hordeum hexasticlwn , barley, jao, H. 
 
 IN 
 
 
 .14-72 
 
 84-80 
 
 2-84 
 
 Oryza sativa, rice, d/idn, M. 
 
 Ml 
 
 • •• 
 
 9-08 
 
 89-08 
 
 0‘47 
 
 Ditto, H. ... 
 
 
 • • » 
 
 7-40 
 
 91-60 
 
 0-36 
 
 Zea Mays , maize, makai , II. ... 
 
 •91 
 
 • •• 
 
 14-66 
 
 84-52 
 
 1-92 
 
 ••• • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 10-70 
 
 87-00 
 
 2-30 
 
 Do., H. 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 11-92 
 
 85*65 
 
 1-33 
 
 Peniciltaria spicata , millet, bdjra, M. 
 
 
 • « • 
 
 13-92 
 
 83-27 
 
 0-73 
 
 Eleusine Corocana, mandua , M. 
 
 
 III 
 
 18-12 
 
 80-25 
 
 1-03 
 
 Avena saliva, oats, jai, B. 
 
 • 0* 
 
 • 1 1 
 
 13-93 
 
 82-07 
 
 4-00 
 
 Ditto, H. ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 15-24 
 
 86-05 
 
 3-26 
 
 Sorghum vulgare, jodr, M. ... 
 
 t » • 
 
 • •• 
 
 15-53 
 
 83-67 
 
 1-26 
 
 Pulses. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JErvum Lens, lentils, masitr, II. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 30-46 
 
 65-06 
 
 2-60 
 
 Pisum sativum, peas, mattar, B. 
 
 IN 
 
 Ml 
 
 26-52 
 
 70-38 
 
 3-10 
 
 Ditto, H. 
 
 III 
 
 • •1 
 
 28-02 
 
 67-31 
 
 3-18 
 
 Phaseolus vulgaris , bean, sent, H. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 28-64 
 
 66-70 
 
 4-38 
 
 Other vegetable products. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Solanum tuberosum, potato, alu, B. 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ml 
 
 9-50 
 
 86-50 
 
 4-00 
 
 Ditto, H. ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 9'96 
 
 86-36 
 
 3-61 
 
 Brassica Rapa, turnip, shalgam , B. 
 
 IN 
 
 in 
 
 10-70 
 
 81-70 
 
 7-60 
 
 Ditto, H. 
 
 M9 
 
 Ml 
 
 12-62 
 
 81-33 
 
 7-02 
 
 Beta vulgaris, beet, chauhandar , B. 
 
 • •• 
 
 III 
 
 10-70 
 
 83-00 
 
 5-30 
 
 Ditto, H, 
 
 • •0 
 
 »• 
 
 15-50 
 
 73-18 
 
 6 43 
 
 Daucus Carota, carrot, gajar , H. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ••1 
 
 10-66 
 
 84-59 
 
 5-77 
 
 Brassica Napus, colza, H. 
 
 Hi 
 
 Ml 
 
 9-24 
 
 90-32 
 
 4-01 
 
 Mag., November, 1816, p. 365. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN FROYINCES 
 
 677 
 
 Results of analysis B. 
 
 Here the arrangement is in percentages so as to show the 
 ultimate composition of each product examined, without reference 
 to the different compounds existing in them or their uses as life- 
 sustaining compounds : — 
 
 Names of products. 
 
 Carbon. 
 
 Hydrogen. 
 
 Oxygen. 
 
 Nitrogen. 
 
 Asli. 
 
 Cereals. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Trilicum vulgare, wheat, B. 
 
 « • • 
 
 46-10 
 
 5-10 
 
 43 50 
 
 2.30 
 
 2:40 
 
 Ditto, IT. ... ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 45‘69 
 
 6-76 
 
 43 23 
 
 3-00 
 
 0-70 
 
 Hvrdeum hexastichon, barley, H. ... 
 
 
 45-50 
 
 6 89 
 
 44.68 
 
 2 34 
 
 2-84 
 
 Oryza saliva, rice, M. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 44-87 
 
 5-85 
 
 46-10 
 
 1-43 
 
 0-47 
 
 Ditto, H. 
 
 
 44-61 
 
 6-53 
 
 46-62 
 
 1-16 
 
 0-36 
 
 Zea Mays, maize, H. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 45-04 
 
 6 60 
 
 44-62 
 
 214 
 
 0-86 
 
 Rye, B. ... 
 
 
 46-20 
 
 5-60 
 
 44-20 
 
 1.70 
 
 2-30 
 
 Do., H ... ... ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 44-37 
 
 6 65 
 
 44 55 
 
 1 87 
 
 1-33 
 
 Fenicillaria spicata, bajra, M. 
 
 
 44-48 
 
 6 43 
 
 44-09 
 
 2-19 
 
 0 73 
 
 Eleusine Corucana, mandaa, M. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 48-64 
 
 6-10 
 
 43-77 
 
 2-86 
 
 1-03 
 
 Avena sativa, oats, B. ... ... 
 
 • 0 . 
 
 50 70 
 
 6-40 
 
 36-70 
 
 2-20 
 
 4-00 
 
 Ditto, IT. 
 
 ... 
 
 46-50 
 
 6 64 
 
 ‘ 45-59 
 
 2 39 
 
 3 26 
 
 Sorghum vufgare, jodr, M. 
 
 ... 
 
 45-69 
 
 6-24 
 
 44-82 
 
 2-45 
 
 1-26 
 
 Pulses. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ervum Lens, lentils, H... 
 
 
 45*35 
 
 6-75 
 
 38-50 
 
 4-77 
 
 2-60 
 
 Visum sativum, peas, B. 
 
 • •• 
 
 46-50 
 
 6-20 
 
 40 00 
 
 4-20 
 
 3-20 
 
 Ditto, H.. 
 
 
 45-12 
 
 6-73 
 
 38.92 
 
 4-42 
 
 3-18 
 
 Fhaseolus vulgaris, beans, H. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 45-07 
 
 6-63 
 
 39 03 
 
 4-47 
 
 4-38 
 
 Other vegetable products. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Solarium tuberosum, potato, B. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 44-00 
 
 5'80 
 
 44-70 
 
 1-50 
 
 4-00 
 
 Ditto, H. ••• ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 43-86 
 
 6-00 
 
 44-79 
 
 1-56 
 
 3-61 
 
 Brassica Rapa, turnip, B. 
 
 ••• 
 
 42-90 
 
 5-50 
 
 42-30 
 
 1-70 
 
 7-60 
 
 Ditto, H* . .. ••• 
 
 HI 
 
 43-19 
 
 5-68 
 
 42-96 
 
 1-98 
 
 7-02 
 
 Beta vulgaris , beet, B.... 
 
 • . e 
 
 42-80 
 
 5-80 
 
 43-40 
 
 1-70 
 
 6-30 
 
 Ditto, H, ... ... 
 
 ... 
 
 40-99 
 
 5-72 
 
 39-37 
 
 2-43 
 
 6-43 
 
 Baucus Carota, carrot, H. ... 
 
 ... 
 
 43-34 
 
 6 22 
 
 43-90 
 
 1-67 
 
 5-77 
 
 Brassica Napus, colza, H. 
 
 
 45-32 
 
 6*01 
 
 46-68 
 
 1-45 
 
 4-01 
 
G78 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Tlie results of the preceding tables are supported by a further 
 examination of the pulses grown in these provinces. The following 
 table gives the average result of an analysis of several samples of 
 each product taken from ‘ Panjab Products,’ 1., 243 : — 
 
 Names of products. 
 
 Nitrogenous 
 
 ingredients. 
 
 Carbonaceous 
 or starchy 
 ingredients. 
 
 Fatty or oily 
 matter. 
 
 
 In 100 parts 
 
 : varies in specimens 
 
 from 
 
 
 
 different parts of India. 
 
 
 Cicer ariet.inum, gram, channa 
 
 ] 8-05 
 
 21-23 
 
 60-11 63-62 
 
 4-11 
 
 4-95 
 
 Ervum Levs , lentils, masur ... ,.. 
 
 24-57 
 
 26-18 
 
 59-34 59-96 
 
 1-00 
 
 1-92 
 
 Lathyrus sutivus , kisari (Calcutta speci- 
 
 31-50 
 
 
 54-26 ... 
 
 0-95 
 
 • 
 
 men). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi sum sativum, yea,*, inattar ... 
 
 Ph iseulus aconitifulius, moth (Calcutta spe- 
 
 21-80 
 
 25-20 
 
 58-38 62-19 
 
 1-10 
 
 1-12 
 
 23-80 
 
 ... 
 
 60-78 ... 
 
 0-64 
 
 • • • 
 
 cimen). 
 
 Phnseolus Munqo,mung ... ... 
 
 23-54 
 
 24-70 
 
 59-38 60-36 
 
 1-11 
 
 1-48 
 
 P. var. radiatus , urd (Bombay speci- 
 
 22-48 
 
 • • • 
 
 62-15 
 
 1-46 
 
 • • • 
 
 men). 
 
 Vigna Catjang, lohiya (Bombay speci- 
 
 24-00 
 
 
 59-02 ... 
 
 1-41 
 
 
 men). 
 
 Dolichos bifjnrus, qnliat ... 
 
 23-03 
 
 23-47 
 
 61-02 61-85 
 
 0-76 
 
 0-87 
 
 ,, Liblab , shlmi ... 
 
 22*45 
 
 24-55 
 
 60-52 60-81 
 
 0-81 
 
 2-15 
 
 Cajanus indicus, arhar ... 
 
 Glycine Snja, bhat 
 
 19-83 
 
 20-38 
 
 61-90 64-32 
 
 1-32 
 
 1-86 
 
 37-74 
 
 41-54 
 
 29-54 31-08 
 
 12-31 
 
 18-90 
 
 Cyamopsis psoralioides, gawar (Puna spe- 
 
 29-80 
 
 ... 
 
 53-89 ... 
 
 1-40 
 
 • •• 
 
 cimen). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 From an inspection of the preceding tables it will be seen that 
 the pulses abound in nitrogenous elements so efficient in repairing 
 the tissues, and next to them the cereals. A comparison with the 
 analysis of the constituents of the blood will show that the composi- 
 tion of both is almost identical, and will also explain why experience 
 has taught the natives of these provinces to mix together in their 
 food, in certain proportions, cereals and pulses, the one supplying 
 what the other is wanting in. Thus the flour of gram and peas is 
 mixed with that of the cereals and especially with millet flour. 
 Pulse bread is very seldom eaten alone, and then only locally and for 
 some special reason. 
 
 The millets and the coarser pulses form the staple food of the 
 hill population. Amongst the former the manclua, janghora, koni, 
 china , and mana, and amongst the latter the gahat , bhat , and rains. 
 The mandwa is either made into bread or into a porridge called bari , 
 and the china and koni are also made into bread or boiled whole and 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 679 
 
 eaten as rice. When travelling, the lower classes live chiefly on 
 satu, the meal of parched barley, which only requires the addition of 
 a little water to prepare it for eating. The following remarks ot 
 Traill still hold good : — 
 
 « Rice forms the favourite food of all those who can afford to pur- 
 chase it. Wheat is only in partial consumption, chiefly on occasions 
 of entertainments at marriages, &c., when the peculiar scruples of 
 Hindus prevent the use of rice. Vegetables of all kinds, both cul- 
 tured and wild, are objects of universal consumption ; among the 
 latter description, not already noticed, may be mentioned the nettle, 
 fern, tulip, maU, &c., of which the shoots, root, and bean, respec- 
 tively, are eaten: the list of herbs, roots, and leaves, considered ed- 
 ble by the natives, is endless ; indeed, from their indiscrimination 
 in this respect, fatal cases of poisoning sometimes occur. During' the 
 periodical residence of the agricultural classes in the Bhabar their 
 principal food is the “ guiya” or sweet potato, boiled and eaten with 
 buttermilk. Animal food is in much request among all classes; 
 with the exception of those animals the use of which as food is 
 prohibited by their religion, and excepting also reptiles of all descrip- 
 tions and carrion birds or beasts, every sort of animal is converted 
 to food in some part or other of the hills: by the southern Garh- 
 W alis rats and mice are considered as dainties. The favourite flesh 
 is that of the goat, or of the she’ep, where bred : against the sheep 
 of the plains an universal prejudice exists, its long tail rendering 
 it in the eye of the highlander, a species of dog. Ho scruple as 
 to the mode of decease exists, and animals dying a natural death 
 from disease, or other cause, are eaten by the Hindus as well as by 
 
 the Dorns.” 
 
 Stewart also in his interesting report on the food of the people 
 of the Bijnor district, which lies at the foot of the Garhwal hills, 
 notices many points which have an interesting bearing on the 
 lessons learned by experience as to the dietetical value and effect 
 of each food-grain. He writes : 
 
 “The prices of the various staple crops would appear to have 
 a Greater effect on the relative quantities of those consumed at 
 different periods of tile year than opinions connected with their 
 wholesomeness, &e. Still, the latter consideration has its weight in 
 
680 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 determining the choice of certain kinds of food at certain seasons. 
 Thus, in the cold weather, much more bajva^ which is considered 
 “ heating,” is consumed, with a large proportion of salt and spices, 
 than at any other time ; and in that season generally, one meal a 
 day, at least, consists of pulse with rice in the form of khijri. Ba- 
 ghar, or rice made into meal with its inner husk, is also a favourite 
 kind of food in the cold weather. In the hot season, again, rice is 
 the cereal most used, and this accords with the fact that its com- 
 parative consumption is found gradually to increase towards Cal- 
 cutta, and to decrease towards Afghanistan, so that in the Upper 
 Panjab it constitutes a very small proportion of the food of the 
 people, and wheat and maize are very much used. In the rainy 
 season more wheat appears to be eaten than at any other time of 
 the year, very often in the form of gochni bread, with about one 
 part in four of pulse-meal. The labourer, if not in straits, always 
 has two meals a day, the fullest being the morning one, at 6 to 
 8 a.m., before he begins, or during an interval of, his work ; 
 the evening one, after the day’s labour is finished : but, of course, the 
 change of the seasons, the weather, and the nature and place of his 
 work, cause considerable variation in this respect. 
 
 “ Tlie staple of food of the labouring classes in this as in most 
 other countries consists of one or other of the cereals, here generally 
 combined with a considerable amount of pulse. From very many 
 enquiries the average consumption of adult labourers, male and 
 female, appears to be about ten or twelve chhattaks (20 to 24 oz.) a 
 day of meal, or rice, with about two chhattaks (4 oz.) of pulse. The 
 average weight of the adult males admitted into Bijnor jail in six 
 months was— Hindus, one maund and ten seers (1001b.), and Musal- 
 mans, one maund and eight seers (961b.); and since this may be 
 assumed as a tolerably close approximation to the average weight 
 of the adult male inhabitants of the district, the above quantity^of 
 food seems liberal when compared with the amount which has been 
 found to support healthy persons in Europe, where the average 
 weight of individuals is probably considerably higher than here. 
 Less invariable (than pulse) but still very frequent concomitant? cf 
 the bread or rice consumed are greens and tcirkdri of gourds and 
 other vegetables, and, in the season, one or two kinds of fruits, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 681 
 
 ©specially the mango. These not only have their uses in supplying 
 fresh vegetable juices to the economy, but also add to and vary the 
 sapid elements of the food, and thus, besides satisfying the natural 
 craving for flavour, they also aid in stimulating the process of diges- 
 tion, although, both theoretically and practically, an excessive amount 
 of such food taken habitually is deleterious, A more constant error 
 of the labourer is that of making his cakes too thick and under- 
 cooking them. The reasons for this practice are, that it saves 
 trouble, time, and fire, and produces the feeling of satiety with 
 a smaller quantity. It is barely necessary to observe that the 
 practice is calculated to injure digestion seriously (and in native 
 regiments I have very often found that it materially inter- 
 fered with convalescence from certain diseases of the alimentary 
 canal). Hill men eat greedily all kinds of fruits, both cultivated 
 and wild, and very rarely allow either to ripen thoroughly. The 
 number of wild fruits and berries is very large, and the supply lasts 
 from April to October, forming a welcome, though not perhaps 
 always a healthy addition to their food. 
 
 <l The average quantity of animal fibrine consumed by the labourer 
 must be very small indeed, as meat is but rarely eaten by him, and 
 then generally only in quantity sufficient to constitute a relish to 
 his ordinary vegetable diet. The. place of the oleaginous element 
 which is, among meat-eating nations, mostly derived from flesh, is 
 here filled by the very large amount of animal and vegetable oils 
 Consumed in various ways, especially as adjuncts in cooking vege- 
 tables, &c., and in the protei-form sweetmeats. The amount of 
 spices taken is also large, and is probably, to some extent, necessitated 
 by the rarity of the stimulus of meat, and by the considerable pro- 
 portion generally borne by crude vegetables, to the other articles of 
 food. Sugar likewise is used in larger quantity than in temperate 
 climates, but I should think not more than, if so much as, is used 
 in other countries where the sugarcane is cultivated.” 
 
 Dr. Forbes Watson has published a most useful table, show- 
 ing the properties of nitrogenous substances 
 Watson’s formula. '. . , , . , , , , . 
 
 which can be combined to tne best advantage 
 with carbonaceous ones; that is, of pulses to be combined with cereals 
 arrowroot, sago, millets, and the like. ' By a simple formula we can 
 
 86 
 
682 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 find out the quantity ef a pulse that should be added to a carbona- 
 ceous substance, provided only we know from previous analysis the 
 amount of carbonaceous and nitrogenous matter in each, from which 
 we can deduce the proportions of carbonaceous to nitrogenous in 
 each, representing nitrogenous as unity. 
 
 Then, to find the quantity of one substance to be added to the 
 ‘•other, we have this formula : — 
 
 Let the proportion of nitrogenous to carbonaceous in the given 
 -substance be m : 1. Let the proportion of nitrogenous to car bona- 
 -ceous in the substance required to be added be n : 1. 
 
 Then the standard proportion or best possible combination 
 (which is 6 carb.: 1 nit.:)=y> : 1. Let the number of parts in the 
 
 given substance be a, and the number required to be added be x. 
 
 then- 
 
 X- 
 
 I 
 
 
 om 
 
 in Q+i) Q+i)-j?0+i) o + i) 
 
 O -») O+i) 
 
 'Or simplified, x — f P~P) 0+0 l a . This will be clear fr 
 
 1 (.<0-70 0 + 1) J 
 
 an example. Let it be required to know what proportion of a pulse, 
 say gram, should be added to a hundred parts of arrowroot to give 
 the best combination. By analysis we know that the proportion of 
 carbonaceous to nitrogenous in arrowroot is 165*5 : 1, and in gram 
 is 3*8 : 1 : then in the formula m will be represented by 165*5 ; n 
 by 3*8 ; p by (the standard known) 6, and a by 100 : so 
 f (165-5-6) (3-8 + 1) _ r 765-60 T 
 
 a ~~ | (6-3-8) (165-5 + 1) J 100= | 366-96 J 100 = 2*09X 
 
 100 = 209*0 = the number of parts required; that is, that 209 parts 
 of gram to 100 parts of arrowroot makes the best combination. 
 This formula is of great value in settling jail and hospital dietaries. 
 
 A —CULTIVATED FOOD-GEAINS. 
 
 The cultivated crops are divided into those of the rabi or sown 
 
 . , in the autumn and reaped in the spring and 
 
 Cultivated food-grams . 1 ) 1 1 ® 
 
 those of the hhcirif or chaumas, sown in the 
 
 summer and reaped in autumn, exactly as in the plains, for the 
 
 1 A botanical description of eacli of these plants will be found in my ‘ Noteu 
 on the Economic Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ Part IV., Allahabad, 
 
 1881. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 683 
 
 influence of the periodical rains is felt in all the hills on this side of 
 the snowy range. In the hills ? the staple crops are the same as they 
 were sixty years ago, wheat and barley in the spring, and lice and 
 mandua in the autumn ; in the tract along the foot of the hills 
 rice and arum are the principal rain-crops, and wheat, barley, and 
 mustard the chief spring crops. Dividing the cultivated food-grains 
 amongst the great natural orders, we have as follows : 
 
 Grammes or Grasses. 
 
 Triticum vulgare , Linn., wheat — gehun, najihal. 
 
 Hordevm hexastichon, Linn., barley — -jau. 
 
 „ himalayense, Linn,, celestial barley — ua-jau. 
 
 Onjza sativa, Linn., rice — dhdn. 
 
 Zea Mays, Linn., maize — hhutta, junala, mungari. 
 
 Paspalum scrobiculatum, Linn. — kodo, Itodra. 
 
 Panicum. miliaceum , Linn. — chiita, gandra. 
 
 Oplismenus fruvientaceus, Link. — viandira , jhangora. 
 
 Set aria italica, Kth —kauni, koni, kukni, 
 
 Penicillaria spicata, Lam. — bdjra. 
 
 Eleusine Coracana, Goertn . — mandua. 
 
 Arena sativa, Linn., oats — -jai. 
 
 Sorghum, vulgar e, Pers . — -joar, junali. 
 
 Saccharum officinarwn, Linn., sugarcane Ikh, rihhti, ganna, 
 
 Leguminos.e or pulses. 
 
 Cicer arietimm, Linn., gram— clmna, chola. 
 
 Ervwn Lens, Linn., lentils — masur. 
 
 Vida Faba, Linn., bean — ha Ida. 
 
 Lathyrvs saiims, Linn., kisari, cliapta. 
 
 Pisuin sativum, Linn., pea — lialon, kulai. 
 
 Phaseolus acomtifolius, Jacq. — moth. 
 
 „ Mungo, Linn. — mvng, chhimi. 
 
 P. Mungo var. radiatus, Linn. — urd, mash, chhimi, ruindar. 
 
 „ torosus, Roxb. — guransh. 
 
 Phaseolus vulgaris, Linn., bean — shimi, sent. 
 
 „ multi jhvrus, Willd., scarlet runner. 
 
 „ coccineus, Lam., ditto variety. 
 
 Vigna Catiang, Endl. — loibiya, riansh. 
 
 JDolichos biflorus, Linn. — gahat. 
 
 ,, Lablab, Linn. — shimi. 
 
 Cajamis indicus, Spreng. — arhar, rahar , Mr, 
 
 Glycine Soja, Sieb. — bhat. 
 
 Cyamopsis psoralioides, D. C. — gamar. 
 
 CHENOPODIACEiE. 
 
 Chcnopodium album, Linn. — bethua. 
 
684 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Amarantacrle or Amaranths-, 
 
 Amaranthus frumentaceous , Buch. — chua- 
 » caudatus, Moq. — iteddri chua. 
 
 » Blitum, Linn. — chamli. 
 
 Poly gon a ceje. 
 
 Fagopyrxm esculentum, Moench., buckwheat —ogal, pdltv. 
 
 „ tataricum, Geer in., buckwheat — -phdpar. 
 
 Cereals . 1 
 
 Triticnm vulg-are, Linn.— Wheat, and Hordeum hexastichon, 
 Linn.— Barley. There are four recognized varieties of wheat 
 (1) geUn safed or white wheat ;• (2), ddU-klidm or dchm, a white- 
 awnless variety grown in large quantities in the Kosi valley near 
 Somesar ; (3), daidat-khdni and (4) Idl-gehun, tdnga or j usher, the 
 bearded varieties. Wheat is called generically kanak or gehun r 
 
 and by the Bhotiyas ndphal The flour is known as dta or 
 kaunik. 
 
 There are also several varieties of barley known generically as 
 j au ; a sliort-awned variety is called vena. When barley is sown 
 and reaped together with wheat, the mixed grain is called gojai - 
 and with gram or peas or lentils, it is known as bijru. In both 
 these cases^ the grains are grown together and cooked and eaten 
 as one-. Mixed wheat and gram is called gochni below the hills. 
 
 Wheat and barley usually follow rice in the same fields. These 
 are prepared in Asauj (September-October) by ploughing and clean- 
 ing, and, when practicable, they are irrigated by turning into them 
 a stream from some river. The irrigated fields are sown in October- 
 November and the uplands in November-December. The seed is- 
 sown in furrows {siya), which are again covered in by the plough, 
 whilst the clods are broken by the dalaya and again smoothed by a 
 heavy flat wooden log {may a), drawn by oxen and kept steady by a 
 man standing on it. Barley ripens in March-April and wheat a 
 month later, and yield about tenfold the seed sown. Both are 
 cut in the middle of the stalk with a sickle and tied in sheaves 
 {dntha) and stacked near the homestead to dry. When dry, the 
 sheaves are unbound and threshed out by a flat wooden board with 
 a short handle known as mungra. In some of the north-eastern 
 
 &cc wUl'b^fourul fnm * species and full notes on localities, uses. 
 
 Provinces; Part IV? 7 MteS ° U ^ Ecouomic Relucts of the North-Western 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 685 
 
 Pattis of Kuinaun a primitive form of flail is used in the shape of 
 a long pliant stick. The chaff is used as fodder ; cow-dung 
 ashes (khariya) are mixed with the grain when stored, to pre- 
 vent the attacks of insects. The variety II. JEgiceras , mentioned 
 by Thomson (p. 102) as that 1 curious, awnless, monstrous barley,’ 
 is peculiar to the highlands of Tibet, where it is extensively culti- 
 vated. It ripens in August in the Pruang valley. At the same 
 time that wheat is sown, and often on the borders of the same fields, 
 masur ( Ervum Lens ) and gram ( Cicer arietinum ) are cultivated in 
 quantities. 
 
 Hordeum himalayense {ccdeste)— Ua-jan, the chama of the 
 Bhotiyas of Darina. 
 
 This species is only grown in villages bordering on the snowy 
 range and at high elevations, 7-12,000 feet. The seed is sown in 
 first-class unirrigated land in October and ripens in May. The 
 average yield per acre is about fifteen loads, worth one rupee a load, 
 and raised at a cost of about eight rupees an acre. The produce is 
 consumed locally by the Bhotiyas, being esteemed much too poor a 
 food for the lowland folk. 
 
 Oryza sativa, Linn. — Rice. This widely-distributed grain is, 
 
 as may be supposed, the principal rain-crop 
 111 ce ' in the lowlands, and is also largely cultivated 
 
 in the hills up to 6,500 feet, where some of the most valuable varie- 
 ties are raised in the deep, hot valleys. It is an annual, belonging 
 to the natural order Graminece, having numerous culms, erect, joint- 
 ed, round and smooth, the leaves sheathing and long, scabrous out- 
 side and the panicles terminal. The local names of the varieties are 
 almost endless ; the principal recognized in the Kumaon Division are 
 the following : — 
 
 Dli an. 
 
 dhesima. 
 
 sathiya. 
 
 dli&ni. 
 
 makani. 
 
 batasuma. 
 
 Ddnsmdti. 
 
 duda. 
 
 dhaniya. 
 
 badatiya. 
 
 jogydna. 
 
 ma liar at. 
 
 Hansraj. 
 
 sisliali. 
 
 banpasa. 
 
 haltuniya. 
 
 ratuma. 
 
 rdjbhati. 
 
 Gajlo. 
 
 anjan. 
 
 iauliya. 
 
 motiya. 
 
 altari. 
 
 rupasma. 
 
 Ilya. 
 
 amdrasi. 
 
 Idrmuli. 
 
 adarat. 
 
 r ashy a. 
 
 haldv/ma. 
 
 Jamol. 
 
 sal. 
 
 nauliya. 
 
 maisuwa. 
 
 parayai. 
 
 mandkuri. 
 
 Bahurva. 
 
 ltatyuri. 
 
 rakasuma. 
 
 andi. 
 
 chunkuli. 
 
 salam. 
 
 Timiliya. 
 
 gajaliya. 
 
 muthamuth. 
 
 gemma. 
 
 chinablmri. 
 
 pdliya. 
 
 In the hills, the agricultural year commences about the middle 
 of February, when the land has to be prepared for the rice-crop, 
 
686 
 
 HIM A'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 which is usually sown where mandua has been raised in the pre- 
 vious season. The manure from the cattle-sheds is spread over the 
 ground which is then ploughed and freed from stones. The terrace 
 walls are repaired and the roots of the mandua from the last crop 
 are collected and burned. In Baisakh (March-April) or Jeth, 
 (April-May), the land is ploughed again and the seed is sown in the 
 furrows, which are closed by a flat log of wood drawn along them. 
 When the young plants have risen to some three or four inches in 
 height, a large rake or harrow is drawn over the ground to remove 
 the weeds and thin the plants. Where water is abundant, the better 
 sorts of rice are sown in a highly- manured and irrigated nursery 
 (bihnora) or seed bed. This is first flooded with water and then 
 ploughed until the soil becomes a semi-liquid mass. Manure is then 
 added and the seed is sown on the top and covered over with leaves, 
 especially those of the chir, which are said to decompose easily in 
 water and form an excellent top-dressing manure. The young plants 
 are transferred (ropa) from the nurseries by the women and children 
 in June-July to the open field. The manure used is commonly the 
 sweepings of the cattle-pens, which are collected in regular heaps on 
 a place set apart for it in the field, usually that in which the cattle 
 have been regularly penned ( kliatta ), to economise the collection of 
 their droppings. Leaves also are collected and allowed to rot in 
 heaps on the field, and twigs and branches of trees are burned 
 and the ashes made use of. The latter are usually taken 
 from the village forests and cost nothing but the labour in 
 gathering and stacking them. When the field is a small 
 one, the earth is loosened and the weeds removed by a small iron 
 sickle (Jcutala). In July-August the weeds are again removed, 
 whilst the land is kept inundated with water, and by the end of 
 August the poorer highland varieties are ready, and by the end 
 of September or beginning of October the finer sorts grown on the 
 lowlands. Iiice is cut from the root and stored on the field in stacks 
 ( hanyura ) with the ears inwards. There it is left for four or five 
 days to dry, and after that the grain is trodden out by cattle 
 on a threshing-floor paved with slates (Jchala) or simply by men 
 on mats ( moshta ). The stalks ( puwdl !) are made up in bundles 
 (ptila) and stored round a pole or in the fork of a tree and afford 
 food for cattle and bedding for the poor. The grain is taken home, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 687 
 
 and, after being dried on the roof of the house, is stored for use 
 in boxes (bhaJcdr) or in baskets plastered with mud or cow-dung, 
 called korangas or cldlas. Unhusked rice is known as dhdn m 
 Kumaun ; and before husking it is again dried in the sun 
 and then pounded in a wooden or stone mortar called an 
 ukhcd. The pestle (mused) in use is tipped with iron, and the grain 
 is pounded three different times before the clean rice or chanwal is 
 produced. The chaff {child) is used as fodder for cattle, and the 
 husk {pithi) of the third pounding, by the poor. Winnowing is 
 performed by a shovel-shaped basket ( supa ) which is held at such an 
 angle to the wind as allows the chaff to fly off, or the grain is placed 
 on the ground and the basket is used as a fan. One nali or about 
 four pounds of rice-seed produces in irrigated land 35 ndlis of 
 unhusked or one-half that amount of husked rice, and rice-seed in 
 upland unirrigated land about half as much. Dry upland rice ripens 
 from early September ; common irrigated rice from early October 
 and the better irrigated sorts from the middle of October. In 
 Dehra Dun there are three principal varieties, 1 the chaitru, hcdtyu , 
 and kydri or transplanted. The first, which is also known as chambu 
 or anjana, is sown in unirrigated land in March-April {Cheat) and 
 is cut in August-September. Haltyu is sown a month later in 
 similar land and is cut in September ; it is also known as anjani 
 and naka. The kydri furnishes rice of the best quality ; the seeds 
 are sown in nurseries in April-May, and the young plants are 
 transferred in the following two months to wellirrigated fields, 
 where they are carefully weeded. The principal varieties are the 
 ramjawdin and basmati , and these grow best in warm valleys and 
 alon°' the great rivers where there is much moisture. Chcinwcil 
 cooked in water is called bhc'it, but the broken grains {kcinikci) when 
 cooked are called jciula. Khijri is a mixture of rice with urd or 
 bdjra boiled together in water ; and khir is rice boiled in milk. 
 The commoner varieties are often made into bread, and in that case 
 the grain is only husked once and the inner husk is left on to be 
 ground into flour, called baghar in Garhwal. 
 
 Zea Mays, Linn. — Indian-corn, maize ; — Bhi'Uta, mukui (Ku- 
 maun) ; mungari , junala (Garhwal). The maize plant is grown in 
 
 1 Memoir, 22. 
 
688 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 small quantities in the hills for the heads which are usually roasted 
 whole, and the seed is then eaten from the cob (clinch). The seed 
 is sometimes ground into flour and made into bread either alone or 
 with the flour of moth. 
 
 Paspalum scrobiculatum, Linn.; P. kora , Willd. — Kodo, 
 kodra , koclram. 
 
 An annual belonging to the natural order Graminece and sub- 
 order Panicece, cultivated in the sub-Himalayan districts. Dr. 
 J. L. Stewart writes 1 of the Bijnor district : “ Kodra is said to 
 
 produce cholera and vomiting, and I find that some authors mention 
 a similar phenomenon as occasionally occurring in all three presi- 
 dencies. The natives generally hold that with the ordinary kodra, 
 and undistinguishable from it, grows a kind that they call majna or 
 majni which produces the above effects, but it has been suggested 
 with greater probability that these depend on the use of the new 
 grain under certain conditions.” These results are, however, un- 
 common, as they are seldom met with, and the grain is a favourite 
 one for home consumption amongst the poorer classes. It is husked 
 with the pestle (mused) and frequently eaten unground called 
 chdnwal in the Bijnor district, a term usually applied to husked 
 rice. P. longifiorum, the kdna of Kumaon, grows wild and its 
 seeds are also used as food, lloxburgh, 93 ; Drury (F. P.), III., 
 565. 
 
 Panicum miliaceum, Linn. — The china of the hills and chimia 
 sdnodn of some places, of which the ganara or gandri variety ( P. 
 zdiginosum ? ) is grown extensively in the Bhabar. It is an annual 
 with erect, round culms, belonging to the natural order Graminece 
 and the sub-order Panicece. It is cultivated in the hills up to 6,000 
 feet and the sub-Himalayan tract, and is noted by Madden as 
 apparently wild at Hawalbagh. It is a very delicate plant, sown in 
 March ; it ripens in May in the Bhabar, and is grown chiefly for 
 immediate consumption. In the hills it is occasionally sown in 
 May- June up to 6,000 feet in a few villages and ripens in August. 
 The average outturn per acre in the hills is about 25 loads of 
 unthreshed grain, worth about Us. 20, and raised at half that cost. 
 The seeds are white and smooth like sago, and are considered a fit 
 
 1 J. Agri.-Hort., XIII., sec. 50. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 689 
 
 food for invalids. They are husked by the pestle and mortar, and, 
 like kodra, are often eaten unground under the name chanwal in 
 the Bijnor district. It is known as a tinpdkh or “ three-fortnight ” 
 grain, that being the time required for its production from sowing 
 to cutting, and is therefore one of those allowed as food to devout 
 Hindus during fasts. P. brizoides, Jacq., is occasionally cultivated 
 under the name bdrti for the same purpose. Roxburgh, 104. 
 
 Oplismenus frumentaceus, Link. — the mandira and jhangora of 
 Kumaun, jhungara of Gtarhwal, the saman of the Bhabar, and smvcm 
 of the plains ; sgdmdk, Sanskrit. 
 
 This is a small hardy annual belonging to the natural order 
 €h 'aminece and sub-order P anicece , cultivated throughout the hills 
 up to 6,500 feet and in the submontane tracts. It thrives best in 
 soils tenacious of moisture or which receive plenty of rain, and is 
 sown in July and gathered in September. The ears are cut first, 
 and the stalks afterwards as fodder for cattle. It is also one of 
 the “ tinpdkha ” or “three-fortnight” grains, coming to perfec- 
 tion in about six weeks. It has culms erect, 2-4 feet high, panicle 
 erect ; spikes secured, incurved; flowers three-fold unequally pedi- 
 celled ; leaves large, margin hispid. The grain is considered 
 heating, but when kept for four or five years loses that quality. 
 It is chiefly consumed by the pooler classes made into khir ( boiled 
 with milk), khuskhdb, khijri, &c. It is th ePanicum frumentaceum 
 of Roxburgh, 102. 0. colonus, Kth., occurs w r ild and occasionally 
 
 cultivated or rather allowed to grow under the nam e jangli-mandira* 
 
 Setaria italic a> Kth. ; Panicum italicum, Linn. ; Pennisetum 
 italicum , R. Brown. — Italian millet. The Jcauni, koni of the hills, 
 hukni of Bijnor, and kangni of the plains. 
 
 This is an annual with culms erect, 3-7 feet high, round, smooth ; 
 roots issuing from the lower joints ; margins of leaf hispid ; mouths 
 of the sheaths bearded ; spikes nodding ; spikelets scattered ; seeds 
 ovate ; cultivated in the hills up to 6,500 feet and in the submon- 
 tane tracts. In the hills it is sown with mandira or along the 
 edges of rice-fields for home consumption in April and gathered 
 in September. An unmixed field of kauni is very uncommon. 
 The ears are cut off while the crop is standing and the stalks are 
 only used as bedding for cattle. As a food, natives consider it to 
 
 87 
 
690 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 be cool and dry, astringent and diuretic, and to be of use exter- 
 nally in rheumatism. When taken as the sole food it is said to be 
 apt to produce diarrhoea. It renders beer more intoxicating. In 
 Madras its flour is highly esteemed for pastry. Roxburgh, 102 ; 
 Drury (U. F.), 338. 
 
 Penicillaria spicata, Willd. — Spiked millet — Bajra. 
 
 This millet is also occasionally grown along the foot of 
 the hills and in the lower valleys within the hills, but bajra , joar, 
 and maize are essentially plants of the plains proper, Roxburgh, 
 95. 
 
 Eleusine Coracana, Goertn. ; the mandua or maruwa of the hills, 
 k odo of parts of the western hills and ray Id of the south of India. 
 Mandua belongs to the natural order Graminece and sub-order Cldo- 
 ridece, and has an erect culm supporting from four to six spikes, 
 digitate, incurvate, from one to three inches long, composed of two 
 rows of sessile spikelets, each consisting of from three to six 
 flowers. Calyx formed of jtwo glumes : seed covered with a thin, 
 pellucid, membraneous aril. It is the staple autumn or chaumds 
 ( saoni in Dehra Diin) crop of the highlands (up to 8,000 feet) 
 between the Tons and the Sarda, and forms the main food-resource 
 of the agricultural classes. It gives a larger yield than other 
 crops, and is said to increase in bulk when ground, qualities that 
 have probably led to its more general cultivation, as it is a poor 
 and very coarse grain. Indeed, Madden terms it u a bitter and 
 indigestible food.” Mandua is cultivated both in ordinary agri- 
 cultural land and in freshly cleared jungle. In ordinary land, 
 it usually follows a wheat crop which is gathered in April-May, 
 and the land is at once prepared for the mandua in the same 
 manner as for rice. The seed is sown broadcast, and, instead of a 
 harrow, the bough of a tree is drawn over the newly-sown land to 
 cover the grain. When the young plants have risen two or three 
 inches, the whole field is harrowed two or three times and the vacant 
 spaces are filled up from those where the plants are in excess. Seeds 
 of the g alicvt , urd, bhat, and other similar grains are then sown in the 
 midst of the mandua , and their produce is collectively called lean in 
 Kumaun. Later on the crop is well weeded with the kutala, and in 
 October-November the ears of the mandua are cut off' and the kdn 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 691 
 
 are rooted up. Afterwards the stalks (naluwa) of the mandua are out 
 and tied in bundles and stacked like those oi rice to serve as fodder, or 
 cattle are driven into the field and allowed to consume them. The 
 ears of the mandua arestacked ( thupard ) for some twenty to twenty-five 
 days, when they begin to ferment, and, when warm, they are spread 
 out and dried and are then threshed out by a flail ( -saila ) , or are trodden 
 out by cattle. Winnowing is performed by the supa as in the case of 
 rice, and the heap formed is then passed through a sieve (rangra) before 
 being stored. The chaff ( dhusi ) is used as fuel for cooking and its 
 ashes as a dye and for washing clothes. The chaff ( nat ) of the kan is 
 useful for fodder. Mandua is ground into flour of a somewhat rough 
 and astringent taste, and made into unleavened cakes or a kind of 
 porridge called bciri. A spirit called dura is also made from it and 
 sells at from three to six annas per bottle. A variety called mandin 
 has usually 3-4 spikelets which are not incurvate and ripen in 
 September. E. indica , the mandavi of the tract along the base of 
 the hills, is common in the hills and Bhabar. 
 
 The rent per bisi, which is only forty square yards less than an 
 acre, varies from one-fourth to ono-lialf the crop, and may be set 
 down as about two rupees. The cost of ploughing and harrowing 
 where cattle are hired would be about two to two and-a-half rupees 
 per bisi, and for labour whilst the crop is on the ground about the same 
 amount. Seed, sowing, cutting and cleaning the grain about three 
 rupees, 1 giving a total expenditure of ten rupees per bisi. The aver- 
 age outturn is between fifteen and twenty maunds of forty seers each, 
 worth about one rupee a maund. Mandua is one of the favourite 
 crops with squatters in the forests. Their mode of operation consists in 
 felling the timber and clearing patches along the ridges in autumn, 
 and when the timber is dry it is burned in spring, and mandua is 
 then sown in the ashes and lightly ploughed in or hoed in by hand. 
 No other labour is required beyond roughly fencing in the patches 
 with the half-burned logs and watching them at night to prevent 
 the incursions of wild animals. The cost of production is much less 
 than in ordinary land, and no rent is paid, as but one crop is taken, 
 after which the patch lies fallow for from six to twelve years. This 
 
 1 Sowing four annas ; seed at twelve seers per bisi, eight to ten annas ; cutting 
 and winnowing, for the former eight and the latter four men, wo dd cost from 
 to 36 annas. 
 
692 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 mode of cultivation is, according to the nature of the soil, known as 
 Jcatil, kcila banjar or ijran in Kumaun and as khll ©r kdndala in Garh- 
 wal. In ordinary land there is a formal rotation of crops. Thus, rice is 
 sown in April and gathered in September, after which the land is pre- 
 pared and yields a crop of wheat or barley, which is cut in April, and 
 is succeeded by manduct , and as the last is not ready for the sickle 
 until November, the land is allowed to remain fallow until the follow- 
 ing spring, when rice is again sown.. Where land has been long 
 allowed to lie fallow, a crop of mandua or chiki or buckwheat is 
 usually taken first, and, as a rule, a field is allowed to lie fallow after 
 every third crop, except in a bad year. In the Bhabar, mustard is 
 sown in August and gathered in February, when it is followed by 
 the gandra variety of millet which is ripe in May. Then wheat is 
 sown, which is followed by rice in the next spring. In the older vil- 
 lages nearly half the land, especially that on which rice has been 
 sown, is allowed to lie fallow one season. In new villages land is 
 cropped without intermission for several years. Roxburgh, 115.;. 
 Drury (U.P.), 206. 
 
 Avena sativa> Linn. — Oats — Jai, unldyaii-jau . Jai is grown 
 in small quantities in the hills (6-10,000 feet) and in the Dun for 
 local consumption. In the hills it is usually sown mixed with bar- 
 ley and the two are eaten ground up together. A. fatua seems to 
 occur wild. 
 
 Sorghum vulgare, Vers.; Ilolcus Sorghum , Linn. — Great mil- 
 let — The junali of the Bhabar and joar oi the* plains. 
 
 This millet is grown in very small quantities near houses here 
 and there in the Bhabar and in parts of the hills up to 5,000 feet. 
 S. JIalepense , Linn., occurs wild in the Bhabar, under the names 
 buru and rikhonda. Junali is grown in the plains for its seed and 
 sown closely as a fodder, which is acceptable to, and greedily eaten 
 by, cattle of all sorts, notwithstanding the size of the stalks. Rox- 
 burgh, 90; Drury (U.P.), 413 ; Steudel, 384. 
 
 Saccharum officinarum, Linn. — Sugarcane — Ikh, rikhu •, ganna T 
 puna-rikhu ( large variety ) , kanthi-rikJm ( small variety ) . Though the- 
 sugarcane is not a food-grain, it may be noticed here as belonging 
 to the Graminece. It is only occasionally cultivated in the hills, 
 notably near Dvvara Hat and Gangoli Hat, but is largely grown m 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 693 
 
 the submontane tract and the Tarai. The details of manufacture 
 for export do not differ from the system generally observed else- 
 where. 
 
 Pulses. 
 
 The pulses belong to the natural order Leguminosce or pea-tribe, 
 and afford a large quantity of the food-resources from the vegetable 
 kingdom in these provinces. Of those raised by field cultivation, 
 mung, mash, and masur are often eaten unhusked by the poor. The 
 two first and gram or cliana are held in high repute, though all are 
 considered, when eaten alone, to be apt to produce colic and flatu- 
 lency. Gram, peas, and a few others are occasionally ground into a 
 flour called besan and made into bread either alone or in the propor- 
 tion of one-fourtli with cereals. Thus, wheat is ground with gram, 
 maize with urd, and the millets with moth. Pulse bread alone is 
 only resorted to when nothing better can be obtained. Mash and 
 mung split in two and then known as dal are usually eaten separately 
 or with rice, when the mixture is called Jchijri. Mimg and arhar are 
 reckoned as good nutritious food for invalids, but moth and master are 
 considered less valuable as causing heat and thirst. Master is said 
 to be the source of the well-known Du Barry’s Revalenta Arabica 
 Gram, peas, mung, moth, and lobiga are frequently parched by trades- 
 men known as bhwijas, and, under the name chabena, form the usual 
 food for persons going on a journey or employed so as to prevent 
 their being able to cook their regular meals. The usual mode of 
 preparation, however, is to boil the pulse, after removing the pod, 
 and serve with condiments of various kinds as shred onions, turme- 
 ric, spices, &c. Eaten with boiled rice, they form one of the staple 
 dishes of the country ( dal-bhdt ), and in this form are said to be most 
 wholesome, the cereal correcting, to a certain degree, the heating 
 properties of the pulse. 
 
 Cicer arietinum, Linn. — Gram — Ghana. The gram plant is 
 sparsely cultivated in the hills. It is a naturalised plant, a native of 
 Europe, deriving its name from the pea having a supposed resem- 
 blance to a ram’s head (aides). It belongs to the natural order Legumi- 
 nosce and sub-order Viciece. There are four varieties, black, white, 
 red, and yellow, the last of which is that usually found here. It is 
 cultivated in the warmer localities, usually as a border to wheat, and 
 
694 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 ripens in February. The bhiisa of the stalks and leaves forms a 
 valuable fodder for cattle and horses, and the green leaves are eaten 
 as a pot-herb. Hook. FI. Ind., II., 176: Roxburgh, 567. C. micro- 
 phyllum , Benth., a wild species growing in Tibet, is remarkable for 
 a very viscid exudation and its strong odour (Thomson’s Travels, 
 371): Drury (U.P.), 134. 
 
 Ervum Lens, Linn.; Cicer Lens, Willd. — Lentils. — Masur, an 
 annual belonging to the natural order Leguminosce and sub-order 
 Vicieoe, is sparsely cultivated in the hills, but is increasing in favour 
 in the Bhabar. The seeds split in two are used as a ddl, but they 
 are commonly regarded as heating. It also is sown at the border 
 of fields and ripens in February. Roxburgh, 567. 
 
 Vicia hirsuta, Koch. This plant is found wild near Ahnora, 
 and is occasionally cultivated as a fodder under the names mamri, 
 mamr-clianci, a n d j h anj ha nig a-kuri up to 5,000 feet in Kumaun and 
 also in the Tarai. Hook. FI. Ind., II., 177. 
 
 Vicia Faba, Linn. — The garden bean — Bahia. This bean is 
 cultivated occasionally for its seed and straw up to 8,000 feet. 
 There are several varieties sown from introduced seed or native 
 seed either in fields or gardens. V. sativa, Linn., var. angustifolia 
 (Hook FI. Ind., II., 178) and V. tenera occur wild. 
 
 Lathyrus sativus, Linn. — The chickling vetch — Kisdra , churdl, 
 chapa, mattar , kcisa. This species is occasionally cultivated below 
 the hills and in the hills up to 8,000 feet. The evil effects of this 
 pulse is unknown in Bijnor and the Bhabar, though it is said to 
 produce paralysis in Allahabad. L. sphcericus, Iietz., and L. Aphaca, 
 Linn., are found wild. 
 
 Pisum sativum. Linn. — The field-pea — Kalon , hulai, batana 
 (Jaunsar). This well-known annual has been introduced from 
 Europe. The seeds are round, of uniform colour, and there are 5-6 
 leaflets. Another species, P. arvense, Linn., having 2-4 leaflets and 
 compressed marbled seeds, is said by Royle to be a native of India. 
 It is cultivated in small quantities up to 8,000 feet in the hills. 
 Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 181. 
 
 Phaseolus aconitifolius. Jacq. — The aconite-leaved kidney 
 bean — Moth. This species is chiefly grown in the submontane tract 
 in the poorest soils and is of little account amongst food-resources 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 695 
 
 here except in dry seasons. Hooker, ibid., 202 : Roxbui gh, 
 558. 
 
 Phaseolus Mungo, Li tin. — The small-fruited kidney bean. 
 Mung, chhimi, cJiikcin , and var. rculiatus, Linn. — rayed kidney bean ; 
 urd, mash, chhimi ruinddr. 
 
 Both these varieties are cultivated in Eumaun up to 4,500 feet. 
 The former is rare and has greenish yellow flowers, pods 10-15 
 seeded, and seeds with numerous longitudinal close streaks. Theie 
 are four varieties, green, black, yellow, and white, of which the first is 
 most common : ripens in October. The second has yellow flowers, 
 pods very hairy, 4-6 seeded ; two varieties, black and green, and a 
 third smaller plant occurs called urdi. It is a rain crop and is more 
 commonly cultivated in the hills up to 6,000 feet. It is considered 
 the most heating of all the pulses and is seldom eaten alone. Hooker, 
 l. c., 203 ; Roxburgh, 556. P. Mungo of Roxburgh is the common 
 green mung ; the black variety is his P. Max and the yellow variety 
 is his P. aureus, whilst P. Roxburghii, W. et A., is the same as P. 
 radiatus, Linn., urd or mash, now reduced by Aitchison (p. 389) to 
 a variety of P. Mungo, Linn. 
 
 Phaseolus torosus, Roxb. — Guraush, gdrdnsh. This species is 
 grown at a higher elevation than any other pulse (6,500 feet), 
 chiefly in Kali Kumaun, but '’also in Ahnora and the Bhagirathi 
 valley up to 4,500 feet. It is apparently a cultivated form of P. 
 calcaratus, Roxb. (Hooker, II., 204). There are two varieties, one 
 of which has a red and the other a cream-coloured seed : ripens in 
 October. Roxburgh, 558. 
 
 Phaseolus vulgaris? Linn. — French bean — Shiuchcina, bakula. 
 This and P. multifiorus, Willd. (scarlet-runner) are chiefly grown 
 in gardens as pot-herbs. P. coccineus, Lam., differs by its bright 
 scarlet, casually white, flowers arranged in long racemes which often 
 overtop the leaves. Hooker, ibid., 200. 
 
 Vigna Catiang, Endl. ; Dolichos sinensis, Linn. : both are now 
 united — Lobiya ridnsh, rdish, riensh. 
 
 * 
 
 The first is low and sub-erect with pale purplish flowers ; the 
 latter is tall and voluble. There are several varieties differing in the 
 •colour of the flowers and seeds (white, brown, yellow, black). Three 
 
G96 
 
 HIM A'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 oi tom mo cultivated in Kumaun (up to 4,000 feet), of which one is 
 known as sonta. All the varieties are usually sown with other crops. 
 The young legumes are eaten as a vegetable and the ripe seeds in 
 curries. Hooker FI. Ind., II,, 205 ; Roxburgh, 559, 560. 
 
 Dolichos biflorus, Linn.— Horse-gram— Gahat, Math, the Jculthi 
 of the plains. The horse-gram is occasionally grown in the hills 
 up to 6,000 feet and in the submontane tract. In the Bhabar it 
 ripens in October. Hooker, l. c., 210 ; Roxburgh, 563. 
 
 Dolichos Lablab, Linn. — Black seeded kidney-bean — Shimi, 
 cMmi. Six varieties of this species are commonly cultivated in 
 gardens and very occasionally as a field-crop. Hooker, l. c., 209 : 
 Roxburgh, 560 : Drury (U. P.), 282. 
 
 Cajanus indicus, Spreng. ; C.flavus and bicolor, D. C. ; Cytisus 
 Cajan, Linn. Pigeon-pea. — Arhar, rahar, tor, thohar. 
 
 The pigeon-pea is occasionally cultivated in the hills up to 4,000 
 feet and in the submontane tract as a border to other crops and has 
 a reputation for being easily digested and nutritious. C.flavus has 
 the vexillum yellow, whilst C. bicolor has it beautifully veined with 
 purplish red ; the latter is more commonly cultivated in Kumaun. 
 
 Glycine Soja, Sieb. ; Sojahispicla, Moench. — Soybean — the bhat 
 of Kumaun, bhatncis and bhatwas of Nepal and northern Tirhut, and 
 Khajuwa of the Tarai. This bean, though a poor food resource, is 
 extensively grown in the hills 4-6,000 feet, as food for men and cattle. 
 It ripens in October. Hooker, l. c., 184 ; Roxburgh, 563. 
 
 Cyamopsis psoralioides, D. C.— the gawdr of Meerut and kauri, 
 syamsundari, phali-gawar, kawdra and kachMr of the submontane 
 tract. It is sown with other rain crops or along the borders of the 
 fields in the rains in favourable places, but will not stand either 
 excess of moisture or high winds. The legumes are delicate and 
 aie used in vegetable curries when young, and when mature they 
 are boiled and with a little mustard-oil given to cattle as a condi- 
 tion fodder. Drury (U.P.), 179. 
 
 CHEN OPODIACEiE. 
 
 Chenopodium alburn, Linn.— Goosefoot— Bethuwa, chardi, 
 jau-sag. An annual which occurs ( cultivated occasionally ) in the 
 hills up to 4,000 feet. It is gathered for its seed, whilst the young 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 697 
 
 loaves are used as a vegetable. It is entirely a rain crop and 
 attains a height of six feet. The seeds ripen in October and are 
 considered nutritious. Roxburgh, 260. 
 
 Amaranths. 
 
 Amaranthus frumentaceus, Buch. — Prince’s feather — Clda, 
 ehua-mdrsa, ramdana, ancirddna of these hills and bcitu , bdthu f 
 batliua of Bisahr. There are two varieties, the red and yellow, 
 both of which belong to the natural order Amarantacece and 
 sub-order Achyranthew, pentandrous ; steins and branches erect ; 
 leaves broad-lanceolar ; panicles erect ; leaves of the calyx daggered ; 
 capsules wrinkled, seed, solitary, round, pellucid with callous white 
 margins. Calyx longer than the stamens ; leaflets in both male and 
 female with subulate points. Male flowers with five stamina : female 
 flowers with 2-3 styles. Chua is largely grown in the northern par- 
 ganahs up to 9,500 feet, where it forms the staple food of the poorer 
 classes and is a favourite crop in newly-cleared jungle, as it is not easily 
 inj ured by bears and deer. It is sown in May and J une in first and 
 second class unirrigated land and yields about twenty loads to the acre. 
 The produce of an acre is worth about sixteen rupees, and the estimated 
 outlay is about half that sum. From an experiment conducted in 
 the Botanical Gardens in Calcutta it was found that forty square 
 yards of ground sown with this plant in June yielded twenty-one 
 pounds weight of clear ripe seed in September, or thirty-one rnaunds 
 to the acre. It also grows well from October to February in the 
 plains. Some identify cluia with A. Anardcina ( farinaceus ) , and 
 much remains to be done to clear up the synonymy of the 
 amaranths. Roxburgh, 663. 
 
 Amaranthus caudatus, Linn. — Love lies bleeding — the Jceddri 
 chiia of the hills. This species has an erect stem angularly- 
 striated, glabrous, green ; leaves long, petioled, ovate or rhombo- 
 vate, narrowing at both ends, bluntish, emarginate, glabrous, green ; 
 spikes ascending : flowers sessile, green : bracts longer than the sepals, 
 which are three in number. Cultivated in gardens or near the 
 homestead in the hills for local consumption. The seed is sown in 
 May-June and the crop is ripe in October. Drury (F. P.), III., 21. 
 
 Amaranthus Blitum, Linn. ; Var. poly g on oi den, A. polyga- 
 mus , Linn. Hermaphrodite amaranth . — Chamli sdg, chauldi. This 
 
 88 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 £98 
 
 common species is sometimes grown along the edges of fields in the 
 submontane tract as a pot-herb. Like all the amaranths, it is one 
 of the phaldhas or food-grains which Hindus may eat during' 
 fasts. 
 
 POLYGOFACEJE. 
 
 Pagopyrum esculentum, Moench. — Buckwheat — The ogal of , 
 Kumaun, kotu of Garhwal, and paid of the Bhotiyas. The Himala- 
 yan buckwheat belongs to the natural order Polygonacece and 
 sub-order Apterocarpece. It is grown chiefly as a vegetable in the 
 hills and is recognisable by its red flowers. It is frequently 
 sown in newly-cleared forest land and ripens in September. The 
 grain is exported to the plains under the name kotu and is eaten by 
 Hindus during their fasts ( bart ), being one of the phaldhas or food- 
 grains lawful for fast-days. It is said to be heating, but palatable, 
 and is sold by the pansdri or druggist, and not by the general 
 grain-dealer. F. cymosum, Meissn., the ban-ogal of Kumaun, 
 occurs wild in the lower hills. 
 
 Eagopyrum tataricum, Goertn. ; F. emarginatum. — Buck- 
 wheat, — called phdpar or pdphar by the Kumaunis and hhe by the 
 Bhotiyas. It has a white or yellow flower and only grows at high 
 elevations, 7-12,000 feet. It ripens towards the end of September 
 or beginning of October. The seeds are oval, acute, nearly tri- 
 angular with acute, smooth, brilliant angles, the size of a hemp 
 seed, of ash-brown colour, whilst the seeds of the ogal are rounded. 
 
 B.— CULTIVATED VEGETABLES. 
 
 The vegetables grown in the Kumaun division are those noted 
 below, which may be divided into three classes : (1) those like the 
 gourds and melons that are eaten raw or cooked ; (2) those general- 
 ly boiled in water with salt and spices or cooked with ghl (clarified 
 butter) or oil, as the ordinary garden produce , such as radishes, 
 onions, carrots, turnips, and the legumes of various plants and which 
 are known generically as tarkdri ; and (3) the leaves and stems of 
 various herbaceous plants, cultivated and wild, which are boiled in 
 water and form what is known as sag or greens and when cooked 
 merely with sufficient water to prevent their burning, hhangi or 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 699 
 
 bhangiya. The first class comprises a great proportion of the food 
 of all classes during the months that they are in season and form 
 one of the most important dietetical products of native horticulture. 
 The second class forms the staple of curries eaten with split pulse 
 or dal and the third class includes both plants specially cultivated as 
 greens ; the leaves and parts of plants cultivated for seed, fruit or 
 fibre, but not specially cultivated for greens, and the roots, bark, 
 leaves, and flowers of an immense number of wild plants which are 
 edible, and form a substitute for the cultivated plants with the 
 poorer classes and with all, indeed, in times of scarcity. We shall 
 divide the vegetables therefore into gourds, ordinary vegetables ; 
 thirdly, those plants that are cultivated as greens ; and lastly, the 
 principal wild plants that are considered edible and form a portion 
 of the food of the people. 
 
 Gourds . 1 
 
 Gourds belong to the natural order Cucurbitacece , and are grown 
 in the hills and submontane tract. They are annuals, climbing, hav- 
 ing clasping tendrils on the stalk, hairy, drastic, pulpy and refresh- 
 ing, but apt to produce evil effects if taken in inordinate quan- 
 tities. The principal species, cultivated and wild, are noted below 
 in order to give a general view of the entire order. They may be 
 divided for their dietetic properties into three classes : — (a) the plea- 
 sant tasted, with a refreshing juice, usually eaten raw like the melon 
 and water-melon : (b) the other edible gourds which are either 
 insipid or bitter, and are all cooked before being eaten and (c) those 
 cultivated or used for their medicinal properties only. The prin- 
 cipal genera represented in the Kumaun division are Trichosanthes, 
 Luffa, Cucumis, Citrullus, Cephelandra, Bryonia, Mukia, and Zeh- 
 neria. 
 
 Trichosanthes palmata, Roxb. — The indrdyan of Kumaun and 
 pahval of the plains. This species may be known from its red glo- 
 bose fruit which is possessed of severely drastic properties when 
 wild, though edible under cultivation when boiled. T. dioica, 
 Roxb., the palical of Bijnor, is also edible. Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 
 606 : Drury, (F. P.), I., 467 ; Roxburgh, 695. 
 
 1 For a botanical description of each plant see my ‘ Notes on the Economic 
 Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ i’art V. 
 
700 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Trichosanthes anguina, Linn. — Common snake gourd. — The 
 ehachindct of Kumaun and chaclringa of Rohilkhand. This species 
 is cultivated throughout the hills and plains. The fruit is greenish 
 white, 2 '-3' long, and is usually eaten cooked. Hooker, FI. Ind. y 
 II., 610 ; Roxburgh, 694 : Drury (F. P.), I., 467. 
 
 Trichosanthes cucumerina, Linn. — The jangli-ehachinda of 
 Kumaun. The jcmgli-chachinda appears to be the wild representa- 
 tive of the preceding ; the fruit is chiefly used in medicine, though 
 it is edible. Hooker, l. c., 609; Roxburgh, 094; Drury (U.P.), 440; 
 Royle, 219. • 
 
 Luffa aegyptiaca, Milk— GUya tarm or ghiyci tori. It may be 
 known by its 5-angled leaves and 10-angled fruit. It is used much 
 in curries-, dressed as a vegetable with clarified butter and spices. 
 Hooker, l. c., 614; Roxburgh, 698-; Drury (F. P.), I., 459. 
 
 Lllffa acutangula? Roxb . — Kali taroi or tori. It has the lower 
 leaves 5-angled, the upper leaves palmate, the seeds black and irre- 
 gularly pitted and the fruit usually smaller and is commonly culti- 
 vated and highly valued as a vegetable. Hooker, l. 615 ; Rox- 
 burgh, 698 ; Drury (U.P.), 291. 
 
 Lagenaria vulgaris, Sering.— Pumpkin or bottle gourd— 
 Lanka , tumid (small variety), gol kciddii. It is from this gourd that 
 the bottle carried by mendicants is made; it is extensively cultivated 
 along the foot of the hills. Tire pulp is eaten with vinegar or mixed 
 with rice as a cTihachM or vegetable curry. Hooker , l. c. 613 - 
 Drury (U.P.), 383; Roxburgh, 700. This fine species was brought 
 to Almora from Jabalpur in 1846 by the Bengal Artillery. The 
 tumri variety is not edible. 
 
 Benincasa cerifera, Savh— White gourd melon— BMnja, petha, 
 chdl-kumhra. Cultivated for its fruit, which is used in curries and 
 as a vegetable. Fruit 1-1 1 feet, cylindric, without ribs, hairy, ulti- 
 mately covered with a waxy bloom. Hooker, l. e., 616 ; Drurv 
 (U.P.), 76 ; Roxburgh, 700. 7 
 
 Momordica Charantia, Linn. — ITarela, karola. There are two 
 varieties well marked; the one with longer and more oblong fruit, 
 and the other with fruit smaller, more ovated muricated and tuber- 
 cled and numerous gradations between them. The fruit is steeped 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 701 
 
 in water with a little salt and then eaten cooked in curries. Hooker, 
 l. c., 616 : Drury (U.P.), 306 ; Roxburgh, 696. 
 
 Momordica dioica, Roxb. — Gol kdnkra. There are several 
 varieties, of which the unripe fruit and tuberous roots form an 
 article of food. M. Balsamina also occurs along the foot of the 
 hills in wild state and in Bijnor. Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 617 ; 
 Drury (U.P.), 306 ; Roxburgh, 696. 
 
 Cucumis trigonus, Roxb. — Bislombhi. Found wild along the 
 foot of the hills. Hooker, l. c., 619 ; Roxburgh, 701. 
 
 Cucumis Melo, Linn. — Melon — Kharbdz, and C. var. utillisimus , 
 kakri. Both these varieties may be seen at Srinagar, but they are 
 not cultivated in the hills generally or in the submontane tract. 
 Hooker, l. c., 620; Drury (U.P.), 172; Roxburgh, 701. 
 
 Cucumis sativus, Linn. — Cucumber — KMra, khirai, kakura. 
 This species is also cultivated for its fruit, and C. Hardwichii, Royle, 
 the air-dlu of Kumaun and pahdri-indrayan of the plains seems to 
 be only a variety of it. Both the latter and C. himalensis occur 
 wild in the hills and Bhabar. C. Afomovdica , Roxb. (<B0), seems 
 also to be a variety ; it is the kachra (unripe) and pMnt or tuti (ripe) 
 of the submontane tract ; names given from the fruit bursting when 
 ripe, and is frequently cultivated. Hooker, Z. c., 620 , Druiy 
 (U.P.), 173 ; Roxburgh, 700. * 
 
 Citrullus Colocynthis, Schrad.— Colocynth gourd— Indrdyan 
 of the plains. Found along the foot of the hills ; only used in 
 medicine. Hooker, Z. c., 620; Drury (U.P.), 135; Roxburgh, 700. 
 
 Citrullus vulgaris, Schrad. — Water-melon F cirbhuj , hindwanc i. 
 It is very sparsely cultivated in the Bhabar, and still more rarely 
 in the hills. The seeds are eaten parched with other grain. The 
 bitter variety is the C. amarus of authors. Hooker, Z. c., 621 ; 
 Drury (U.P.), 174; Roxburgh, 700. 
 
 Cephalandra indica, Naudin. — Bimba, kanderi ki bel. It 
 occurs wild, but is occasionally cultivated in the submontane tract, 
 and the ripe fruit is eaten raw or cooked. Hooker, l. c., 621 ; 
 Drury, (U.P.) 144 ; Roxburgh, 696. 
 
 Cucurbita maxima, Duch. — Squash gourd. — Kaddu , mitha 
 kaddu , gadmoa . It is frequently cultivated for its fruit which is eaten 
 
702 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 boiled: the seeds also yield a mild oil used in cooking and burning. 
 Hooker, l. c., 622 ; Drury (U.P.), 175 ; Aitch., 64. 
 
 Cucuibita moschata, Duch. — Musk-melon — Kumhrtx. It is 
 cultivated below the hills for its fruit, which is esteemed highly palat- 
 able and nutritious. Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 622] Roxburgh, 700. 
 
 Cucurbita Pepo, D.C. — Pumpkin or white gourd — Kumhra, 
 kondha, lauka, and kaddu-safed. It is cultivated for its fruit. 
 Hooker, l. c., 62 2 ; Roxburgh, 700. 
 
 Bryonia laciniosa, Finn. It is found wild and is only used in 
 medicine; the seeds also yield a medicinal oil. Hooker, l. c., 623 ] 
 Drury (U.P.), 87; Roxburgh, 703. 
 
 Mukia scabrella, Arn. — Gwdla-kakn. It occurs wild and 
 is only used in medicine. Hooker, l. c., 623 ; Drury (U.P.), 
 88 ; Roxburgh, (02. Zehneria umbellata , Th., known under the 
 same vernacular name, and its variety Z. nepalensis , occur wild in 
 Kumaun. 
 
 Vegetables . 1 
 
 Brassica Rapa, Linn. Turnip — Shalgam ; the chankan of the 
 Bhotiya parganahs. The turnip is beginning to form an article of 
 food. The Brahmans and Baniyas of the plains have a prejudice 
 against the turnip and carrot as in some manner resembling flesh, 
 which is forbidden as food for them. Hooker, FI. Ind., I. 156 ; 
 Roxburgh, 497. 
 
 Raphanus sativusj Linn. — Radish — Midi. Both the long radish 
 and the turnip-shaped radish are now largely cultivated and consumed. 
 
 Hooker, l. c., 166 ; Roxburgh, 500. 
 
 Lepidium sativum, Linn.— Cress— Hdlim, hdlang. Hooker, 
 l.c., 159 ; Roxburgh, 497. 
 
 Hibiscus esculentus, Linn . — Bhindi. This and H. sabdcirifa 
 are cultivated in gardens below the hills and are consumed 
 by all classes. Hooker, l. c., 343 ; Roxburgh, 529. 
 
 Canavalia ensiformis, D. C.— Bean— Sent. Consumed by all 
 classes. Hooker, l. c., II., 195 ; Roxburgh, 559. 
 
 1 For a botanical description of each plant see my ‘Notes on the Economic 
 Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ Part V. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 703 
 
 Apium graveolens- Linn. — Celery — Scderi. Grown for Euro- 
 peans. Hooker, 1. c., II., 679 ; Roxburgh, 273. 
 
 Daucus Carota, Linn. — Carrot — Gajav . Hooker, l. c., II., 71b ; 
 Roxburgh, 270. 
 
 Lactlica sativa H. C. — Lettuce — Kahu. Roxburgh, 593. 
 
 Mentha vil’idis, Linn. — Spear mint — Pahdri-pudina. 
 
 Salvia plebeia, R. Br.— Sage— Salbia. Drury (F. P.), II., 552. 
 
 Lycopersicum esculentum, Don. — Tomato Wilayati baigcm. 
 Roxburgh, 190. 
 
 Batatas edulis, Choisy. — Sweet potato — Shakrkand, pinddlu. 
 It is grown in the submontane tract and is a favounte with all 
 classes. Drury (U. P.), 70 ; Roxburgh, 162. 
 
 Solanum esculentum- Linn.— Egg, plant— Baigan (Kumaun), 
 bhatta (Garhwal). It is grown commonly by natives and Europeans. 
 Drury (U P.), 409 ; Roxburgh, 190. 
 
 Solanum tuberosum, Linn. — Potato — Alu. The potato was 
 introduced into Kumaun in 1843 by Major Welchman and now 
 forms an important article of export. The seed is from time to time 
 renewed by fresh importations. 
 
 Beta vulgaris, Linn. — Beet — Chaukandar. This root is chiefly 
 grown in English gardens. Var. bengcdensis, Roxburgh, 1, pdlang , 
 is cultivated as a pot-herb. 
 
 Dioscorea globosa, Roxburgh. — Yam — CMpri alu. This yam 
 is cultivated, whilst the following species found wild, furnish edible 
 
 tubers : — 
 
 D- sagittata, Royle— Tair tarur , the tubers lie 3-6 feet deep in 
 the soil, edible. 
 
 D. quinata — Magiya or muniya ; white tubers, edible. 
 
 D. versicolor. — Genthi, gajir, ganjira ; yields a deliciously fra- 
 grant yam, edible. 
 
 D, pentaphylla. — Teguna , takuli ; tubers edible. Drury (F. P.), 
 III., 276. 
 
 D. deltoides- — Gun; on Siyahi Devi. 
 
 Allium Cepa, Linn.— Onion— Piydj. The onion is commonly 
 cultivated, but is objected to by Brahmans and Baniyas in the plains 
 
704 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS. 
 
 from its having some fancied resemblance to flesh. Chives, leeks, 
 and shallots are cultivated in European gardens. 
 
 Maranta arundinacea, Linn. — Arrow-root. This useful plant 
 has been successfully cultivated by Mr. Fraser at Haldwani in the 
 Bhabar, and has yielded produce equalling the best West Indian. 
 
 Amorphophallus campanulatus, Blume . — Zamin hand. This 
 sweet potato is grown in small quantities at the foot of the hills. 
 It yields a large root stock, the size of a Swedish turnip, but flatter, 
 and is the only one of the family that keeps well in the ground. 
 It ripens too after the rest. 
 
 Colocasia antiquoruni, Schott. — Ghuiya , Ghwiya ; arui (plains). 
 Cultivated along the foot of the hills. 
 
 Colocasia himalensis, Boyle. — Glmiya (plains), pindalu (white 
 variety), gaderi (red variety), pdpar (leaf), guba (unrolled leaf), 
 all of which are edible. Other wild species are Remusatia vivipara, 
 the bdgh-pindalu , and R. capillifera, the bdnj-pindalu ; the former 
 occurs 3-4,500 feet, and the latter 5-8,000 feet, flowering in June. 
 
 C— SPICES AND CONDIMENTS . 1 
 
 There is no country in the world, perhaps, where spices and 
 condiments enter so largely into the food materials of the popula- 
 tion. The man must be very poor indeed who cannot afford some- 
 thing of this kind with his daily meals. Much of the spices consumed 
 are, however, imported, such as mace, cloves, black pepper, assafoe- 
 tida, Ceylon cinnamon and nutmegs. The bark and leaves of 
 Cinnamomum Tamala form an important flavouring material for 
 curries, and the former is used generally as a substitute for true 
 cinnamon. From the Himalaya, also we have turmeric, ginger, 
 red pepper, cumin and cardamoms of excellent quality and divers 
 wild herbs used as condiments. 
 
 The principal plants yielding spices or condiments cultivated or 
 occurring wild in Kumaon are as follows : — 
 
 Papaver somniferum, Linn.— Poppy— Khash-khash (seeds). 
 The seeds are used in curries ; cultivated. 
 
 1 A full description of each will be found in my ‘ Notes on the Economic 
 Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ Part V. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 705 
 
 Peucedanum graveolens, Benth. — Dill — Soya. The seeds are 
 used in curries ; cultivated. Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 709 ; Roxburgh, 
 272 ; Pliann. 101. 
 
 Murraya Kcenigii, Spreng. — Gdndla , gani (Kumaun), gandela 
 or gundi (Bijnor). The leaves are used for flavouring curries ; the 
 tree occurs wild in the lower hills and Bhabar. Hooker, l. c., I., 
 503 ; Brandis, 48 ; Roxburgh, 362. 
 
 Carum Carui, Linn. — Caraway — Jim. Cultivated for its seed 
 in Garhwal, where it also occurs wild. Hooker, 1. c., II., 680 ; 
 Pharm., 98. 
 
 Carum Roxburghianum, Benth — Ajmud. Cultivated for its 
 aromatic seeds, below the hills. Hooker, l. c., 682 ; Roxburgh, 
 273. 
 
 Carum copticum, Benth. — Lovage — Ajicdin. Cultivated for 
 its seeds below the hills. Hooker, L c., 682 ; Roxburgh, 357 ; 
 Pliarm., 99. 
 
 Coriandrum sativum, Linn. — Coriander — Dhaniya. Cultiva- 
 vated for its seeds. Hooker, l. c., 717 ; Roxburgh, 272. 
 
 Cuminum Cyminum, Linn. — Cumin — Jira. Believed to be 
 cultivated for its seeds below the hills (?). Hooker, l. c., 717 ; Rox- 
 burgh, 271. 
 
 Foeniculum vulgare, Goertn. — Indian fennel — Son f. Cultivated 
 for its seed. Hooker, l. c., 695 ; Roxburgh, 272. 
 
 Capsicum frutescens, Linn. — Red pepper — Ldl mircho, hirsdni . 
 Cultivated for its fruit and exported. There are several species 
 cultivated, for which see Roxburgh, 193. 
 
 Piper silva ticum, Linn. — Long pepper — Plpala mor. 
 
 Occurs wild in the valleys and the Bhabar and yields a substi- 
 tute for the pepper of commerce. The average annual export from 
 the Kumaun Forest Division is about 22 tons. Roxburgh, 52 ; 
 Drury (U.P.), 131. 
 
 Cinnamomum Tam ala, Var., albifiorum , Nees. — Taj,jangli 
 dalchini (bark), kikra, kirkiriya, tej-pdt (leaves). 
 
 A common shrub in Kumaun belonging to the natural order 
 Lauraoece, of which the bark and leaves are exported for culinary 
 
 89 
 
706 
 
 IIIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 purposes and for use in medicinal preparations. The average 
 annual export of the bark of this tree from the Kumaun forest 
 division alone amounts to 25 tons, and of the leaves to 35 tons. 
 
 Curcuma long-a, Roxb. — Turmeric — Hctldi, haehur. 
 
 This is the well-known halcli, so much used as a condiment. 
 It is grown in large quantities in south-eastern Garhwal and 
 Kumaun and in parts of Dehra Dun. It forms one of the most 
 important and most profitable of exports from the lower hills, and is 
 cultivated in jungles where nothing else can be profitably raised, as 
 well as in the Duns and Bhabar. It is singularly free from the 
 attacks of wild animals. The tubers are planted in April-May, and 
 the produce is gathered in November. Major Garstin has estimated 
 the cost of cultivating one acre of turmeric at Rs. 36, of which one 
 rupee goes for rent, Its. 5 for sowing, Its. 3 for planting out, Its. 20 
 for seed, Its. 4-| for weeding and hoeing, and Its. 2\ for harvesting. 
 An acre will produce thirty maunds of root worth Its. 60, and when 
 cured and dried, weighing about 74 maunds, worth Bs. 75. Setting 
 down the cost of curing and drying at Its. 8, the average net profits 
 ©n an acre of turmeric amounts to Its. 31, and thus justifies its 
 popularity amongst the hill cultivators. C. angustifolia is found wild. 
 
 Zingiber officinale, Ross. — Ginger — Ada (plant), south (green 
 root), adrak (dried root). 
 
 Extensively grown in all hot valleys in Kumaun as an article of 
 export. The mode of cultivation consists in first selecting a piece of 
 ground not liable to be flooded and protecting it from excessive rain- 
 fall by digging a trench around the upper side. This is then well 
 hoed and richly manured, and in Cliait the ginger is planted out in 
 trenches about half a foot deep with one foot space between each 
 trench and between each plant. The earth is then heaped over the 
 trenches and the whole covered over with leaves, which are kept in 
 their places by bamboo or wooden poles. The poles are removed before 
 the rains, but the leaves are not disturbed until the ginger crop is 
 dug up and all the weeding is done by hand. Z. datum ( Jcachur ) is 
 found wild in the Kota Dun and is a favourite food of the porcu- 
 pine and wild hog. It is dug up in February all along the foot of 
 the mountains and sent for sale to the plains, where it comes into 
 use as a medicine. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 707 
 
 Amornun subulatum, Roxb. — Cardamom- — IldichL Cultivated 
 in gardens for its fruit. Roxburgh; 15. 
 
 Allium sativum, Linn. — Garlic — Lahscm . Cultivated for its 
 bulb. 
 
 Humulus Lupulus, Linn.— Hop. The hop flowers well at 
 Hawalbagh, though not so successful as in the west : intro- 
 duced. 
 
 Xh— GREENS. 1 
 
 The vegetable products used as greens may be conveniently 
 divided into three classes : — 
 
 1. Plants specially cultivated for food as greens, such as the 
 
 cabbage, pdlaks, &c. 
 
 2. Products collected from plants cultivated for other purposes, 
 
 such as the mustard and gram. 
 
 8. Uncultivated products used as food. 
 
 Greens are prepared for food in much water and are then 
 pressed to get rid of the excess moisture and are seasoned with 
 spices and clarified butter and in this form are called sag . When 
 cooked in a moderate quantity of water, which leaves then crisp and 
 dry, they are called bhangiycu In either form they are, as a rule, 
 insipid and utterly unpalatable to European tastes. They are 
 seldom eaten alone and are usually combined with cereals, pulses or 
 other vegetables. 
 
 1 . — Plants specially cultivated m greens. 
 
 Brassica oleraeea, Linn. — The cabbage. — Gobi Its cultivated 
 varieties, the cauliflower { pMl-gobi ), white-cabbage, Savoy, Brus- 
 sels’ sprouts, borecole, broccoli, and knol-kohl are all cultivated in 
 English gardens and are gradually spreading amongst the natives. 
 Hooker, El. Ind., I., 156. 
 
 Brassica juncea, H. / et T. — Mustard — Mi, sarson . The variety 
 
 ramosa, Roxb., is the banlcd of Kumaun, and the variety 
 S. rugosa, Roxb., is the bddshdhi-ldi and bhotiya-ldi of Kumaun, in- 
 troduced by the Gorkhalis from Nepal. Both of these are culti- 
 vated and highly valued as a vegetable. Hooker, l.c., 157. 
 
 i Full description of all these plants will he found in my ‘Notes on the Eco* 
 ooauc Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ Part V., Allahabad, 1881. 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 708 
 
 Eruca sativa, Lam., is the clua and chdra of Kumaun. Culti- 
 vated as a fodder and for the oil expressed from its seeds. 
 Hooker, l. c., 158. 
 
 Nasturtium officinale, Brown . — Water-cress — Piriya-hdlim. 
 It occurs cultivated and wild in the Kota and Dehra Dun, Hooker,, 
 h c II., 133. 
 
 Lepidilim sativum, Linn. — Cress — Halim hdlang (Garhw&l). 
 Commonly cultivated as a relish. Hooker, l. c., I., 159. 
 
 Trigonella Fsenum-gnecum, Linn.— Fenugreek — MethL Cul- 
 tivated ; cooked either alone as a relish or with unleavened bread 
 (roti). Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 87. 
 
 Oxalis corniculata, Linn. — CJialmori . Occasionally cultivated, 
 usually wild; used as a salad. Hooker, l. c I., 436. 
 
 Portulaca oleracea, Linn. — Small purslain — LunaJc. Culti- 
 vated everywhere. Green leaves cooked or eaten as a salad. 
 Hooker, l. c.y I., 24b. 
 
 Amaranthus Blitum, Linn. — Cliaulcti. This and other species 
 of amaranth, such as A. gangeticus and its- variety A. oleraceus, aro 
 chiefly used as pot-herbs. Roxburgh, 641. 
 
 Ocimum Basilicum, Linn. — Sweet basil — Kali tuhL Cultivated 
 as a flavouring pot-herb. Roxburgh, 463. 
 
 Chenopodium album, Linn. — Bethuioa, charm . This and G. 
 viride are used as greens and are very popular. 
 
 Phytolacca acinosa, Ro xb.—Jirrag. Cultivated up to 10,000 
 feet for its leaves, which are used as greens. Roxburgh, 389. 
 
 Basella rubra, Willd'.— P7n. Cultivated' as greens. Rox- 
 burgh, 275. 
 
 Rumex vesicarius, Linn. — C Ivaka-pd Icing. Cultivated in beds 
 near wells. Roxburgh, 309. 
 
 Perilla ocimoides, Linn. — Bhangara. Cultivated both for its 
 leaves and for the culinary oil expressed from the seeds. 
 
 2. — Products collected from plants cidtivated for other purposes. 
 
 Under this head the following may be briefly noticed. The 
 leaves of the coriander, Coriandrum sativum ., Linn, the dhaniya of 
 he hills and plains, are collected as greens, the plant itself being. 
 
OF thF north-western provinces. 709 
 
 Cultivated for its aromatic seeds. Similarly the leaves of the grata 
 plant, Cicer arietinum, Linn., and buckwheat are used as a spinach, 
 as well as those of the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius , Linn. The 
 leaves of most of the pulses, such as lobiya , sem, &c., grown for their 
 seeds, are eaten ; also of Brcissica campestris and JPerilla ocimoicles , 
 cultivated for their oil-seeds ; of the different species of Arum 
 grown for their tubers, and of Hibiscus cannabinus, Linn., cultivated 
 for its fibre. In' times of scarcity there are few products of the 
 Vegetable kingdom which are not absolutely hurtful that do not 
 afford some aid to the poor man’s table. The next section gives a 
 long list of those wild fruits, berries, and leaves that are thus brought 
 under requisition, whilst the number of trees whose foliage affords 
 fodder for cattle when the drought dries up the grass is hardly 
 smaller. The value of the forests, therefore, in times of scarcity is 
 considerable, and it is then that the hungry pour into them from 
 every district in the plains, and try to eke out a miserable existence 
 by collecting these berries and leaves. 
 
 E -FRUITS, CULTIVATED AND WILD, 
 
 The cultivated fruits of the Kumaun division include the peach, 
 apricot, plum, damson, cherry, tipple, pear, quince, medlar, orange, 
 lemon, lime, citron, walnut, mango, guava, plantain, pomegranate, 
 fig, strawberry, and mulberry : a goodly list, but varying muchni 
 quality. Most of the European fruit trees have been introduced 
 and distributed from the plantations formed in recent years at Mus- 
 sooree, Clihajauri, Paori, Hawalbagh, and Ranikhet. Amongst the 
 wild fruits may be noticed the gooseberry, red and black currant, 
 blackberry, hazel-nut, raspberry, strawberry, figs, pears, apples, and 
 walnuts, none of which are of much value. Wild rhubarb of the 
 red species grows in large quantities in the upper ranges above 9,000 
 feet and is of good flavour. In the following section will be found 
 a short notice of the more valuable species and a list of the wild 
 fruits that are commonly regarded as edible and in some respects 
 afford a food resource, especially in seasons of scarcity. In each 
 case a reference is given to a full botanical description from which 
 the tree or plant may be recognized. 
 
710 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 Citrus medica, Linn, — Citron. Brandis, p. 50. 
 
 Brandis refers the citron, lime, and lemon as varieties of this 
 species. 
 
 L — meclica proper — Citron. To this belongs the wild varieties 
 known as bijaura and Jcciran-phal found in the Bhabar and along 
 the Sarju under Gangoli Hat in Kurnauu. The wild varieties arc 
 used for pickling and the dried rind is made into a preserve. The 
 cultivated variety yields the well-known citron preserve ; and to it 
 belongs the madhakari of Garhwal. 
 
 II. — Limonum— Lemon. Madden refers to this variety the 
 jctmira found wild in the Kota Dun of Kumaun, and Royle notes 
 one called pahdri-nimbu or pahdri-kdghazi as wild in the Delira Dun 
 and the north-western Himalaya. Madden states that the lemons 
 produced in and around Almora in the cold season and allowed 
 to mature in straw are of excellent quality. 
 
 III. — acida — Sour-lime. This includes the nibu and its culti- 
 vated varieties, the kdglmzi , &c. They are much employed for sher- 
 bets and the like and thrive well in the warm valleys. 
 
 IV. — Limetta.-— Sweet-lime. This variety is cultivated in suit- 
 able localities in Kumaun under the names amrit-phcd , mitJia-mbu . 
 It ripens as far north as the valley of the Sarju near Bageswar and 
 is much used for sherbets. The dried rind is in request as a flavour- 
 ing agent. 
 
 Citrus decumana, Linn.— Shaddock, pumelo. Brandis, p. 55. 
 This species was introduced into India from Java and is now com- 
 pletely naturalised, ripening in the hills as far as Hawalbagh, near 
 Almora, under the names saddphal, mahd-nibu. It is a great favourite 
 with all classes and gives fruit all the year round, so that on one 
 tree may be seen the flower and ripe and unripe fruit at the same time. 
 
 Citrus aurantium, Linn., includes the bitter or Seville orange, 
 the sweet orange and the bergamot. Brandis, p. 50. Of these 
 three varieties the sweet orange is the form most commonly culti- 
 vated. There are several local varieties, some named after the locali- 
 ties in which they are produced and others according to specific 
 distinctions in size or flavour. The kaunla is the smallest and most 
 esteemed, and of it the best cultivated varieties are found in the warm 
 valleys of eastern Kumaun. Oranges are now cultivated generally 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 711 
 
 throughout the hills up to 5,500 feet and some excellent varieties 
 thrive at Bamti in Garhwal. The orange has been found wild or 
 apparently wild with unwinged petioles at Bageswar in Kumaun 
 (Str. and W.) and with globose fruit, naked or margined petioles 
 and oblong-lanceolate, acuminate leaves in Garhwal (T. T.) 
 
 Vitis v-inifera, Linn. — The vine. Brandis, 98. The fruit is 
 called ddkhang in Kunaor, where it flourishes ; but it can be raised 
 in Kumaun, where the rains are not too heavy. The vines and 
 apricots of Kunaor are much praised in the Puranas. 
 
 Mangifera indica, Linn. — Mango Am. Hooker, II., 14. The 
 mango is said to occur wild in the sub-Himalayan tract from Kumaun 
 to Sikkim, but it is also cultivated in the Duns. The mango groves 
 of the Kota Dun have more than a local repute. 
 
 Prunus Amygdalus, Baill.— Almond— Baddm. Hooker, II., 
 
 312. A few trees are cultivated in Kumaun, introduced probably 
 by Aoghani workmen. 
 
 Prunus persica, B. et IT./. — Peach — Aru, rek. Hooker, II., 
 
 313. The usual English varieties have been imported and thrive 
 well in suitable localities. The Kabuli peach is completely natura- 
 lised in the north-western Himalaya and in places appears to grow 
 wild. Brandis has some observations (p. 191) on its distribution, 
 and notes that the blossom is apt to be killed by excessive frost and 
 that a small green beetle, at times', strips the tree of its leaves. Mad- 
 den states that at Almora the fruit does not ripen well nor does it 
 ripen at Nairn Tal, but in the Delira Dun and the warmer valleys it 
 comes to perfection and bears well. The flowers appear in Januaiy- 
 May, and the fruit ripens in May-October, according to locality. 
 
 Prunus Armeniaca, Linn. — Apricot — Chuaru, cholci , zard-cdu , 
 jcdd-aru, kushm-dru , the galdam of Tibet. Hooker, II., ol3. 
 
 The apricot is commonly cultivated all over the hills, especially 
 to the west, in the valleys of the Jumna and Tons, where it affords a 
 very important local food resource and an article of export. An oil 
 is there extracted from the kernels and is used in medicine and for 
 perfumery purposes for the hair and for burning. This oil is clear, 
 of a pale yellow colour and smells strongly of hydrocyanic acid, of 
 which it often contains four parts in 100. Several European varie- 
 ties have been introduced and distributed through the Ramkhet nad 
 
712 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Mussooree nurseries. The flowers appear in January-May, accord- 
 ing to elevation, and the fruit ripens in May-September. 
 
 Prunus Avium, Linn. — Sweet cherry or gean — Gilds. Hooker, 
 II., 313. Brandis unites this and the following and Hooker keeps 
 them separate. This Species is cultivated to the west up to 8,000 
 feet. It flowers in April-May and the fruit ripens in June. The 
 European varieties introduced have not succeeded in these hills, 
 owing to the effect of the heavy rain on the young fruit. 
 
 Prunus Cerasus, Linn. — Acid cherry — Alu-hhdlu. Hooker, II. 
 313. Cultivated up to 7,000 feet. Several varieties from European 
 stock have been introduced and thrive where the rain is not excess- 
 ive. It flowers and fruits at the same time as the preceding. 
 
 Prunus Puddurn, Roxb. — Wild cherry — Puya, poiya , padam , 
 padclam. Hooker, II., 315. Common, both wild and half cultivated 
 all over the hills of these provinces. The fruit, though very bitter, is 
 eaten by the natives and is collected for Europeans to make the 
 well-known hill cherry brandy. The flowers appear in October- 
 Nov ember and the fruit ripens in spring. 
 
 Prunus communis, Huds. — Yellow bullace — Alu-bukhdra (blue) , 
 alecha, cilucha (yellow), cliliota dlu (small variety). Hooker, II., 
 
 315. Madden notes two cultivated varieties at Ahnora; one a dark- 
 blue damson known as bhoiiya-bad dm, and the other a larger orange 
 red variety called laddk. The first ripens in July and the second 
 in June, and both may probably be referred to P. comniunisj var 
 domestic a, plum or prune. Madden styles them “ palatable, but un- 
 wholesome.” Brandis unites (p. 192) under this species the sloe 
 and the different kinds of plums, damsons, and prunes. Many 
 European varieties have been introduced with more or less success. 
 
 Prunus Padus, Linn. — Bird-cherry — Jdmana. Hooker, II. 
 
 316. This species occurs wild 4,000 to 10,000 feet. The fruit' 
 though insipid and somewhat astringent, is eaten by the natives and 
 may be used in the manufacture of liqueurs. The flowers appear in 
 the hot season, the fruit in the rains. Other wild species are (1) ■ 
 P. nepalensis , Ser., which differs from P. Padus by having the fruit 
 twice as large with a quite smooth, thick-walled stone. (2) P. Jac~ 
 euqmonth , Hook. /., recorded from the Dhauli valley in Garhwal. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 713 
 
 (-8) P. undulata , Ham., which occurs from the J umna to Bhutan at 
 6,500-8,000 feet, but none of them have any economical value. 
 
 Fragaria vesca, Linn. — Strawberry. Hooker, II., 343. The 
 strawberry grows very well in the hills at 01 uss o oree, Lmsar, Rani— 
 khet, Naim Tal, and on most tea plantations. Imported stocks 
 also thrive, and indeed experience shows that the local stock 
 sliould be renewed every three years and, when possible, from cut- 
 tings from other gardens. The wild strawberries ( Fragaria inclica , 
 Andr. — Kipaliya , bliyula and F. Vesca, var. nubicola ) yield abun- 
 dantly a palatable fruit, which, however, can be wonderfully im- 
 proved by cultivation. The fruit of the cultivated species ripens in 
 the hills during April-May. 
 
 Cydonia vulgaris, Rers. — Quince — Biki. Hooker, II., 368. 
 The quince is cultivated in the hills up to 5,500 feet and is eaten 
 fresh, candied, dried or in tarts. The fruit ripens June- July. 
 Several European varieties have been introduced through the pub- 
 lic nurseries and by private growers. 
 
 Pyrus communis, Linn. — Pear — Ndspati, ndk. Hooker, II., 
 374. The pear is cultivated for its fruit throughout the hills 2-8,500 
 feet. Most of the European varieties flourish in Kumaun, and pears 
 of excellent quality from Jalna near Almora and other gardens are 
 now procurable in the Naini Tal market. The tree flowers in the 
 spring and the fruit ripens during the rains. 
 
 Pyrus Pashia, Ham. — Mehal, mol. Hooker, II., 374. This spe- 
 cies occurs wild everywhere in the hills 2,500-8,000 feet. The 
 - fruit is hard, bitter and worthless, and is only eatable when half- 
 rotten. The stocks are good for grafting. The flowers appear in 
 the spring and the fruit ripens in September-December. 
 
 Pyrus Malus, Linn. — Apple — Seb, seo. Hooker, II., 373. The 
 apple occurs wild in the hills 5,000-9,000 feet and is also cul- 
 tivated. The flowers appear in the spring and the fruit ripens 
 J uly-September. Much has been done of late years to promote 
 pomiculture by the distribution of grafts of introduced species from 
 the public nurseries. Apples of all varieties are now found in the 
 markets of excellent quality and at a reasonable price. 
 
 Pyrus baccata, Linn. — Siberian crab — Ban-mehal, gwdla-me - 
 hal. Hooker, II., 373. This species occurs wild 6-11,000 feet. 
 
 90 • 
 
714 
 
 himXiayan districts 
 
 The fruit is small and sour, but is much prized by the natives. 
 H. Strachey found it at Kunti in Cyans of Kumaun bearing a 
 very small red crab no bigger than a wild cherry and worthless 
 to eat. The flowers appear in spring and the fruit ripens towards 
 the end of the rains. 
 
 Pyrus lanata, Con. Gallon , mehali, pattu, ban-patti. Hooker, 
 II., 375. This species is also wild and is not uncommon 5-10.000 
 feet. Like the fruit of P. P ashia , the fruit of this tree is only eatable 
 when half-rotten. The flowers appear in April-May and the fruit 
 ripens in August-October. There are several other wild species 
 occurring in Kumaun, such as (1) P. humauni, Decaisne, 5-8,000 feet; 
 (2) P. vestita, Wall., known as mauli and one of the best (sweetest) 
 wild fruits ; and (3) P. foholosa , Wall., known as Mliya-suliya. 
 None of these, except P. vestita , yield a fruit of any value, nor 
 is it lecoided whether the stocks can be utilised for grafting. 
 All have been described by Hooker. 
 
 Kibes Gi ossularia, Linn. — Gooseberry — Pepcha, goddam (Cyan s) , 
 sirgochi (Juhar). Hooker, II., 410. The wild gooseberry occurs 
 in the dry parts of the inner Himalaya, 8-11,500 feet. The flowers 
 appear m spring and the fruit ripens in September- October. It 
 has a soui taste and is small and not eatable. LI. Strachey records 
 having found it at Tala-kawa in Cyans in September and pro- 
 nounces it worthless. The European cultivated varieties have 
 been introduced, but do not thrive nor bear freely. 
 
 Kibes glaciale, Wall, — Clack and red currant — Kuhuliya, kala - - 
 baliya mdngle (Cyans), the red variety ; durbui, dong ole (Cyans), 
 the black variety. Hooker, II., 410. The red variety occurs’ 
 rarely, but the black is frequent above 10,000 feet in Kumaun. 
 The latter is the P. acuminatum of Wallich. Coth yield a sour 
 unpalatable fruit of no value. H. Strachey found it near Nabhi 
 in Cyans, where it is very abundant and yields a fruit described 
 by him as <£ small and insipid.’ The flowers appear in May 
 and the fruit ripens in September-Oetober. 
 
 Kibes nigrum, Linn'.— Clack currant. — Pdpar. Hooker, II.. 
 411*. This species occurs towards the heads of the Tons and Jumna 
 and m Kumaun on the northern slopes of Rigari-Gudari (G.) over 
 10,000 feet. The flowers appear in July and the fruit ripens in 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 715 
 
 Augus t-September. Major Garstin states that the fruit is quite 
 as large and as palatable as the cultivated variety. 
 
 Ribes rubrum, Linn. — Red currant — Pdpar. Hooker, |IL, 411. 
 This species occurs in both moist and arid tracts along the inner 
 Himalaya, 5,000-12,000 feet. Brandis notes that in Lahul there 
 are specimens with a deep campanulate calyx, the lobes of which 
 are ciliate and the fruit (niangha) is yellow when unripe, but black 
 when ripe with the taste of red currants. This fruit is altogether 
 better than that of R. glaciate above, though small and more acid than 
 is agreeable. The cultivated red, white, and black currants have 
 been introduced from Europe, but do not appear to succeed in th©' 
 Kumaun climate. 
 
 Punica Granatum, Linn. — Pomegranate — Anclr ddrim (tree and’ 
 fruit), ndshphdl, kushiala, post-anar (rind). Hooker, II., 580. The 
 pomegranate occurs wild all over the hills. The flowers (red or yel- 
 low) appear in April-May and the fruit ripens in July-September. 
 There are several varieties cultivated, the flowering pomegranate- 
 and those with sweet or acid fruit, but those raised from Afghan- 
 istan stocks are preferred. The fruit is sub-acid and pleasant to the 
 taste and allays thirst. The bark is largely exported for tanning. 
 
 Bassia butyracea, Roxb. — Butter-tree — Chiura, chydra ; the 
 butter is called chydm-ka-pina in Almora and phalel and phalwdra 
 in the plains. Brandis, 290 ; As. Res., VIII., 477. This fine tree 
 occurs along the outer ranges 1,500-4,000 feet. The flowers appear 
 from November to January, and the honey produced by the bee* 
 that feed on them is esteemed above all others in Kumaun. Madden 
 records its occurrence on the Kamolaghat leading to the Kota 
 Hun. In Sor, it is abundant in the Pithoragarh valley, reaching 
 the size of a large tree as high up as Kanthagaon (4,000 feet), and 
 it occurs in abundance in the Kali valley on both the Kumaun 
 and Nepal sides, from Askot to Punagiri, near Barmdeo. The 
 sweet insipid pulp of the fruit is eaten and the cake left aftei the 
 oil has been extracted is eatable. From the seeds a soft solid vege- 
 table butter is extracted of the consistence of fine lard and of a deli-' 
 cate white colour, which does not melt in the heat of the plains and 
 keeps a long time without deteriorating. It melts completely at 
 120°F., and is used as a cold-cream and lip-salve. Pharm., 131. 
 
71h 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Corylus Collirna, Linn— Hazel— Kaptisi, Bhotiyci-baddm. The? 
 hazel occurs wild 5,000-10,000 feet to the west of the Ganges 
 and in one strip ot jungle in Painklianda, nine miles north-east 
 of Joshimath and in a few other places in Garhwal. The flowers' 
 appear in March-April and the fruit ripens in the rains. The 
 kernels of the fruit are eaten and in some places are as good as- 
 English hazel-nuts. The trees bear every third year and yield a 
 crop sufficient for export to the plains- 
 
 Juglans regia, Linn. — Walnut — AJcTirof, kharot , ak. Brandis, 
 497. This tree occurs wild and planted throughout the hills. The 
 fruit ripens in J uly-September and numbers several varieties, the best 
 being the thin-shelled or kdghazi-akhrot. The better sorts appear 
 to be more common to the west of the Ganges. An oil used for 
 burning and culinary purposes is expressed from the kernels of both 
 the wild and cultivated varieties- 
 
 A mere list of the remaining trees, cultivated and wild, that 
 afford edible products will be sufficient. A description of each- 
 tree will be found in Part V. of my ‘ Notes on the Economic Pro- 
 ducts of the North-Western Provinces.’ 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Dillenia indiea 
 
 Ckalta, chalita ... 
 
 Hooker, I., 38 ... 
 
 Anona squamosa ... 
 
 Be he 
 
 » 78 ,. 
 
 Berberis asiatiea ... 
 
 Kilmora ... 
 
 „ 110 ... 
 
 „ aristata ... 
 
 Capparis spinosa ... 
 
 Cholra nachi.shin 
 
 (Bhot> 
 
 Ulta-kanta ■„ 
 
 „ 110 ... 
 
 „ 173 ... 
 
 Flacourtia Earuont- 
 chi. 
 
 Flacourtia sepiaria... 
 Saurauja nepalensis, 
 Bombax malabari- 
 cnm. 
 
 Sterculia urens ... 
 
 K andi, Kandai .., 
 
 Gogina , gogana 
 
 Semal ... 
 
 „ 193 ... 
 
 „ 194 ... 
 
 „ 280 .. 
 
 „ 349 ... 
 
 „ 355 ... 
 
 Portions edible. 
 
 Bads, calyx, leaves 
 and fruit. 
 
 Fruit (Banndeo), 
 wild. 
 
 Fruit : other species 
 also eaten. 
 
 Fruit often dried like 
 raisins. 
 
 Flower-buds pickled 
 as capers ; fruit. 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Calyx of flower-buds. 
 
 Roasted seeds. 
 
 Grewia asiatiea 
 
 ... Dhdman , pharsiya ... 
 
 „ oppositifolia, 
 „ sCabrophylla, 
 Elaeocarpus Varu- 
 nua. 
 
 Bhevgul 
 (Sur-bheli 
 J alp ut 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 387 ... 
 
 Palatable sub-acid 
 
 
 
 fruit. 
 
 
 384 ... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 » 
 
 387 ... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 )> 
 
 407 ... 
 
 Fruit : very rare. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 717 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Portions edible. 
 
 Glycosmis penta-' 
 
 phylla. 
 
 Ban-nimbu pilru, pota- . 
 la. 
 
 Hooker, I., 499 . 
 
 Fruit : very rare in 
 Bhabar. 
 
 Limonia acidissima. 
 
 Beli 
 
 „ 507 ... 
 
 Pulp of fruit in sher- 
 bet : wild. 
 
 Feronia Elephant- 
 um. 
 
 Kait, hath bel 
 
 „ 51G ... 
 
 Fruit: cultivated and 
 wild. 
 
 JEgle Marmelos 
 
 Bel , sriphala ... 
 
 „ 517 - 
 
 Ditto: ditto. 
 
 Garuga pinnata 
 
 Kitmira, kharpat ... 
 
 „ 529 ... 
 
 Fleshy black drupe. 
 
 Zizyphus Jujuba ... 
 
 Ber, her a 
 
 Kandidri, hul phal, 
 
 hhalis , bcri. 
 
 „ 632 ... 
 
 Fruit : cultivated. 
 
 „ vulgaris ... 
 
 „ 634 ... 
 
 Ditto : cultivated 
 
 and wild. 
 
 „ CEnoplia ... 
 
 Ma/w, bamolan 
 
 „ 634 ... 
 
 Ditto : wild. 
 
 „ oxyphylla ... 
 
 Giyar ... 
 
 „ 634 ... 
 
 Ditto : do. 
 
 Hovenia dulcis 
 
 • •• 
 
 „ 640 ... 
 
 Ditto: cultivated and 
 wild. 
 
 Sageretia oppositi- 
 folia. 
 
 Agluia 
 
 » 641 ... 
 
 Black, succulent fruit. 
 
 Vitis lanata 
 
 Asaujiya, pahdr.phuta, 
 purain. 
 
 » 651 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 iEsculus indica 
 
 Pdnkar ... 
 
 „ 675 ... 
 
 Seeds steeped and 
 ground. 
 
 Tistacia integerrima, 
 
 Kakra-singi (fruit) ... 
 
 Hooker, II., 13 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 Semecarpus Anacar- 
 dium 
 
 Bhilatva, bhela 
 
 „ 31 ... 
 
 Fleshy receptacle 
 
 around seeds. 
 
 Buchanania latifolia, 
 
 Piyal, muriya, katli- 
 b/nldwa. 
 
 „ 23 ... 
 
 Kernels of the fruit. 
 
 Spondias mangifera, 
 
 Amra , bahamb, amara , 
 
 „ 42 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 M o r i nga p t ery gosp ei - 
 ma. 
 
 Sahujna, schjna ... 
 
 „ 45 ... 
 
 Bark, leaves, flowers, 
 pods. 
 
 Bauhinia malabarica, 
 
 Anili 
 
 „ 277 ... 
 
 Leaves. 
 
 „ variegata, 
 
 Kachnar, khainwal, 
 
 burial. 
 
 „ 234 ... 
 
 Ditto and flower- 
 buds. 
 
 „ purpurea . 
 
 Kaniyar, kandan, yu- 
 ridl. 
 
 „ 284 ... 
 
 Flower-buds. 
 
 ,, Vahlii 
 
 Maljan , mala 
 
 „ 279 ... 
 
 Seeds. 
 
 Tamarindus indica 
 
 Imli 
 
 „ 273 ... 
 
 Fruit: cultivated. 
 
 Cassia Fistula 
 
 KitwuV , kitola, itola.,., 
 
 „ 261 ... 
 
 Young pods. 
 
 Brinsepia utilis 
 
 Bhekara , dhulela, jha- 
 tela. 
 
 „ 322 ... 
 
 Oil of seeds. 
 
 Rubus lanatus 
 
 Hindi u 
 
 „ 331 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 „ paniculatus 
 
 Kdla-hisdlit , anchu, 
 
 patharola. 
 
 » 329 ... 
 
 Black fruit. 
 
 „ mo’uccanus ... 
 
 Katsul, his ala , 3 . 
 
 „ 330 ... 
 
 Red fruit. 
 
 „ niveus ... 
 
 Pila-hinalu 
 
 jj 3.35 o # « 
 
 Brownish-yellow fruit 
 common. 
 
 „ lasiocarpus ... 
 
 Flisdlu, kdla } and lal ... 
 
 ,, 339 ... 
 
 Red and black fruit ; 
 common. 
 
 „ ellipticus ... 
 
 Guuri-phal, jogiya- 
 
 hisalu. 
 
 ,, 336 ... 
 
 Yellow fruit, common. 
 
 „ nutans 
 
 Langur, sinjang (Bhot 
 
 ). „ 334 .. 
 
 Red fruit. 
 
 Tcrminalia bellerica 
 
 Bahera 
 
 ,, 445 .. 
 
 Kernels of fruit. 
 
 Eugenia operculata, 
 
 \Rdi-jdman 
 
 „ 498 .. 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 . Alangium Lamarekiv A kola, gkaul 
 
 „ 741 .. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Cornus macrophylla,' Kdgshi, ruchiya 
 
 „ 744 .. 
 
 . Do. 
 
 „ capitata 
 
 j Bamaura 
 
 „ 744 .. 
 
 . Do. 
 
718 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Portions edible. 
 
 Lonicera angustifo- 
 
 Geang (Jaunsar) ... 
 
 Hooker, III., 13... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 lia. 
 
 
 
 
 Viburnum stellula- 
 
 Ldl tlt-maliya ... 
 
 „ 4.. 
 
 Do. 
 
 turn. 
 
 
 
 Anthocephalua Ca- 
 
 Kadam ... 
 
 ,> 23... 
 
 Do. : cultivated. 
 
 damba. 
 
 
 Randia uliginosa ... 
 
 Pindaru 
 
 „ 110.. 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ dumetorum, 
 
 Mainphal, manyul ... 
 
 ,, 1 10 .. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Maesa argentea 
 
 Phasera, gogsa 
 
 Brandi a, 283 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ortliantheraviminea, Chupkiya 
 
 „ 334 .. 
 
 Flower-buds. 
 
 Cord i a Myxa 
 
 D uirata, baurala 
 
 „ 336 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 „ reatita ... 
 
 Fin , hum ... 
 
 „ 338 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Eliretia aerrata 
 
 Puna, p widen, .. 
 
 „ 339 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ lsevis 
 
 Cham ror ... 
 
 „ 340 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ilippophae rliarn- 
 
 noides. 
 
 Dhur-chukf tarwa- 
 
 c/tuk. 
 
 388 ••• 
 
 Do. 
 
 Elaeagnus latifolia, 
 
 Ghiwai, m ijhaula ... 
 
 „ 390 .. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Morus indica ••• 
 
 Tut tueri ... 
 
 „ 408 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ serrata 
 
 Klmu , himu 
 
 „ 409 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ laevigata 
 
 Shah-tut , siydh-tut .. 
 
 „ 409 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ multicaulia ... 
 
 tH 
 
 • II 
 
 Leaves for silk- worms. 
 
 „ chinenaia ••• 
 
 HI 
 
 • • • 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ficus Carica ... 
 
 Anjir 
 
 418 . 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 „ macrophylla... 
 
 Timla 
 
 Roxburgh, (’45... 
 
 Do. 
 
 yt virgata 
 
 Bern 
 
 Brandis, 419 
 
 Do. 
 
 }} Cunia 
 
 Kunia, kuinau 
 
 „ 421 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ glomerata 
 
 Gular , pariwa, lelha... 
 
 „ 422 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Artocarpua Lakoocha, 
 
 DahUjbarhal 
 
 „ 426 ... 
 
 Do. and male flower 
 heads. 
 
 Celtia auatralia ... 
 
 Khar ah 
 
 „ 428 ... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 AntideBma diandrum, 
 
 Amli, sarshoti, sar- 
 sheti. 
 
 „ 447 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Bricdelia retusa 
 
 Gauli ... 
 
 „ 449 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Fhyllanthus Embliea, 
 
 Aonla, arnla, amlika,.. 
 
 „ 454 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Securinega obovata, 
 
 Gwala-ddrim , dhani... 
 
 „ 455 .. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Myrica aapida 
 
 Kdiphal 
 
 „ 495 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Ephedra vulgaria ... 
 
 Khana ... 
 
 „ 501 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 MuBa sapientum 
 
 Kela 
 
 Roxburgh, 223 ... 
 
 Do., wild and culti- 
 vated. 
 
 Dendrocalamus atric- 
 
 Bdns ... 
 
 Brandis, 564 
 
 Tender shoots. 
 
 tua. ^ 
 
 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 719 
 
 F.-PARTS OF WILD PLANTS USED AS FOOD IN THE 
 HILLS OR SUBMONTANE TRACT. 
 
 The following list 1 gives some of the wild plants of which parts 
 are used for food in seasons of scarcity. Some of them, such as the 
 lotus, yams, and wild millets, are always eaten by the poorer 
 classes : — • 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Parts edible. 
 
 Nelumbium specio- 
 
 Kaniaal , padam, am- 
 
 Hooker, I., 116... 
 
 Stalk, leaves, and 
 
 sum. 
 
 bnj. 
 
 
 roots. 
 
 Triumfetta rhomboi- 
 
 Manphora, jhinjhru .. 
 
 „ 395... 
 
 Leaves and seeds. 
 
 dea. 
 
 
 
 „ pilosa ... 
 
 Leshwa-kumariya 
 
 „ 394... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Tribulus terrestris ... 
 
 Gokhru 
 
 „ 423... 
 
 Leaves and fruit. 
 
 Leea aspera 
 
 Kim ali, kurmali 
 
 „ 666. 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 Pueraria tuberosa ... 
 
 Bildi-hund, hiralt. 
 
 puna , sardl (Jaun- 
 sar). 
 
 Hooker, II., 197... 
 
 Tuberous roots. 
 
 Flemingia congesta, 
 
 Mus-hela 
 
 „ 229... 
 
 Pods. 
 
 Cassia Tora 
 
 Bandr. panuodr ... 
 
 „ 263... 
 
 Leaves and stems. 
 
 Trianthema mono- 
 
 Bishkhapra .. 
 
 „ 6G0... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 gyna. 
 
 
 
 Leaves. 
 
 Hydrocotyle asia- 
 
 Thalkari 
 
 „ 669... 
 
 tica. 
 
 
 
 
 Ipomcea sessiliflora, 
 
 Haran-khuri, liara .. 
 
 Roxburgh, 169... 
 
 Ditto and stems. 
 
 Solanum verbascifo- 
 
 Aseda ... 
 
 „ 189... 
 
 Fruit. 
 
 lium. 
 
 
 
 
 Celosia argentea ... 
 
 Strati, qhogiya i ... 
 
 „ 228... 
 
 Leaves and stems. 
 
 Digera arvensis 
 
 Das 
 
 Drury, III., 29... 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Euphorbia angusti- 
 folia. 
 
 Dudhila-ghds, maha- 
 bir. 
 
 „ 120... 
 
 Seeds. 
 
 Urtica parvifiora ... 
 
 Berain, shishona 
 
 Roxburgh, 664... 
 
 Leaves. 
 
 Aloe vulgaris 
 
 Gaikwdr ... 
 
 Drury (U.P.)27... 
 
 Seeds and leaf pulp. 
 
 Commelyna obliqua, 
 
 Kana, kanjura ,. 
 
 Drury (F.P.)III., 
 310 
 
 Leaves and stems. 
 
 Dioscorea sagittata, 
 
 Tair, iarur 
 
 R,oyle 
 
 Roots. 
 
 „ versicolor, 
 
 Genihi, githi gajir,- 
 
 Drury (E.P.)III., 
 
 
 
 ghanjin. 
 
 277 
 
 Do. 
 
 ,, pentapliylla 
 
 Taguna , takuli ... 
 
 Magiya , munnja 
 
 „ 276. 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ quinata ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 „ deltoidea ... 
 
 Gun 
 
 • •• 
 
 Do. 
 
 „ aculeata ... 
 
 Man -a tu 
 
 276 ... 
 
 Do. 
 
 Oplismenus col onus, 
 
 Satin, jangli-mandira, 
 
 „ 570 ... 
 
 Seeds. 
 
 Saccharum Sara 
 
 Sarhar sarur 
 
 Roxburgh, 82 . . . 
 
 Do. in Bhabar. 
 
 Scirpus Kysoor 
 
 Kaseru 
 
 „ 77 ... 
 
 Roots. 
 
 Asplenium polypo- 
 
 Lingura 
 
 • •• 
 
 Fronds. 
 
 dioides. 
 
 
 
 
 Nephrodium odora- 
 
 Kutra ... 
 
 » • * 
 
 Do. 
 
 turn. 
 
 
 
 
 1 Descriptions of all these plants will be found in Part V. of my * Notes on the 
 Economic Products of the North-Western Provinces,’ Allahabad, 1881. 
 
720 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 II. — Vegetable substances used in medicine or for 
 
 INTOXICATION. 
 
 A. — Drugs. B. — Narcotics and Spirit. 
 
 A.-DRUGS. 
 
 My object in the following list of the vegetable drugs fonncl 
 and used in or exported from the Himalayan districts of these 
 Provinces is to give a reference to a work where each one is botani- 
 cally described and also to a work where their medicinal properties 
 have been noticed . 1 It would be out of place here to do more 
 than briefly indicate the therapeutic virtues attributed to them by 
 European and Native practitioners. The following remarks 2 of 
 Dr. Burton Brown on the vegetable drugs collected for the Lahore 
 Exhibition will form a fitting introduction to this section of our 
 subject : — 
 
 “ The medicinal use of preparations of vegetable drugs has been 
 for a long time of the greatest importance, and until a comparatively 
 recent period the number of drugs obtained from plants and animals 
 greatly exceeded that of preparations from the mineral kingdom. 
 This depended on the fact that until chemical knowledge was fixed 
 on a firm basis, it was only with great difficulty and after many 
 failures that chemical products could possibly be obtained ; while, on 
 the other hand, the different parts of plants to which a medicinal 
 use was assigned were easily distinguished and procured without 
 much trouble. In Europe, owing to the progress of science, mine- 
 ral preparations are now most extensively made and used for 
 medicinal purposes, and many of our most valuable drugs are derived 
 from this kingdom. But in India the knowledge of chemistry is 
 confined to those among the natives who have been instructed by 
 Europeans, and therefore medicinal substances procured from the 
 mineral kingdom are comparatively seldom made or used, except- 
 ing by those who have been so taught ; or those mineral articles 
 are used which are procurable without much skill in preparation 
 and are often of little efficacy. The use of vegetable drugs would 
 probably be the first to recommend itself to those seeking relief from 
 
 1 A full description of each plant or tree and a more detailed noticeof uses of 
 each drug will be found in my “Notes on the Economic Products of the North- 
 Western Provinces,” Part VII. * Panj. Products. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 721 
 
 pain and disease, because plants are everywhere at hand, their num- 
 ber is very great, and their forms are distinctive and often peculiar, 
 and in some cases they have been supposed to bear a more or less 
 obscure resemblance to certain parts of the body, either in health 
 or when diseased. Thus, in olden times, we find in Homer that 
 Nestor used a poultice of onions, cheese, and meal, mixed with wine, 
 to Macliaon’s wound ; and the former substance was used by the 
 ancient Egyptians in cases of dropsy. The hellebore of Anticyra 
 was long extolled by the Greek writers, and is said to have been 
 used by Melampus of Argos to cure the daughter of king Proclus 
 of melancholy. It has also been supposed that opium was the 
 Nepenthe of Homer. 
 
 “ Enough has been adduced to prove the antiquity of those sim- 
 ples or Galenical preparations as medicinal drugs derived from the 
 vegetable kingdom, and it is well next to consider in what manner 
 the use of drugs was probably commenced. The use of each vege- 
 table preparation was, probably, at first brought about by the expe- 
 rience of individuals, each of whom had found that certain plants 
 were useful in the diseases which afflicted himself or his neighbours, 
 and this knowledge was more rapidly spread owing to the ancient 
 custom of placing the sick in public roads and markets, so that 
 passers-by might communicate information respecting such remedies 
 as were employed in similar cases. As observed by Herodotus, in 
 this way a knowledge of a great number of medicines would be 
 acquired, at first chiefly of those which were indigenous to the coun- 
 try, but gradually the drugs of other countries would become known, 
 especially those which were found to be of undoubted efficacy in 
 the disease for which they are used. 
 
 Hence it is to be expected that there will be found a larger 
 number of substances, which are inert or nearly so in a Materia 
 Medica which comprises indigenous plants only, than in a collec- 
 tion of drugs brought from a distance. Moreover, as the imported 
 drugs must always be more costly than the indigenous ones, there 
 will always be a tendency to substitute some indigenous substance 
 which may resemble the foreign one in appearance or action, espe- 
 cially as the description of the drugs or of the plants from which 
 they are derived was formerly much less carefully attended to than 
 now. Thus it will be seen, as above stated, that an Indian plant, 
 
 91 
 
722 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Picrorhiza Kurrooa , has been substituted for the more remote 1 
 hellebore of the Greek physicians. Similarly a kind of Valerian 
 takes the place of Asarabacca , and fruits of Gardenia that of the’ 
 juniper. This substitution would certainly bring the kind of remedy 
 in which it was employed into disrepute, as the substance used for 
 adulteration would differ greatly from the original drug in its 
 powers and mode of action. 
 
 u Besides the above modes of ascertaining the natures of reme- 
 dies, which, being founded on actual experience, must be termed 
 improved methods, there is another mode called the Doctrine 
 of signatures. This is founded on the belief that every natural 
 substance possessed of medicinal virtues indicates by its external 
 character the disease for which it should be employed. Tlius 
 turmeric, rhubarb, and other roots, which have a brilliant yellow 
 colour, were supposed to be specially useful in jaundice and 
 diseases of the liver. Cassia fistula ( amaltds ), from the peculiar 
 septa of the fruit resembling the valves of the intestines, is supposed 
 to be especially destined for the cure of diseases of those organs ; 
 and similarly, poppies, from the shape of their capsule, were sup- 
 posed to be useful in diseases of the head ; and roses, from the colour 
 of their petals, in those of the blood. Many small red or yellow 
 Seeds, especially those of cruciferous plants, were supposed to be 
 useful in cases of gravel, the deposit of which they sometimes 
 resemble in appearance ; and sdlap misri is used in diseases of that 
 organ to which the name of Orchis (applied usually to the plant) 
 is assigned. The convoluted pod of the Helicteres Isora is employed 
 in colic, since it is supposed to resemble the twisting of the coils 
 of the intestines. But although it is probable that the use of differ- 
 ent drugs was commenced in some of the ways already spoken of, 
 yet at the present day the native physicians have adopted, with 
 some modifications, the idea of Galen respecting the method of 
 operation of medicines : this was, that the uses of all medicines were 
 derived from their elementary or cardinal properties — namely, 
 heat, cold, moisture, and dryness ; and that all diseases could also 
 be classed under the above heads, but that in the treatment of dis- 
 ease a medicine should always be employed which was of a con- 
 trary nature to the disease treated. Thus a cold disease requires a 
 hot remedy and the converse. It is probable that ignorance of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 723 
 
 attachment to this theory (which is well known to native patients 
 and haMms ) is often an obstacle to the employment of European 
 medicines in the hands of European practitioners among natives, 
 as either a remedy which they consider hot is employed for a dis- 
 ease which is also considered hot, or the prescriber does not state 
 whether the remedy given is a hot or cold one even when asked* 
 Although the theory that medicine acts by being hot or cold only 
 is entirely erroneous, yet it has so strong a hold on the confidence 
 ■of many natives that, without some attention to it, it would 
 be difficult in many cases to induce them to take the medicine 
 ■ordered. 
 
 “ The following is a list of some of the drugs employed, show- 
 ing their nature according to native ideas, and also their real use 
 in European medicine : — 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Phyllanthus Emblica, 
 Linn. 
 
 Rosa centifolia, 
 Linn. 
 
 Rosa alba, Linn. 
 Citrus Aurantium, 
 Linn. 
 
 Tamarindus indica, 
 Linn. 
 
 Terminalia Chebula, 
 Retz. 
 
 Rhus Coriaria, Linn., 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Real use. 
 
 Cold medicines. 
 
 Aonla, amlika 
 
 Gul-surkh 
 
 Gul-seoti 
 
 Narangi 
 
 Imli 
 
 Harera 
 
 Samak 
 
 » 
 
 Semecarpus Anacar- Bhilawa 
 dium, Linn. 
 
 Corylus Colurna, Findak 
 
 Linn. 
 
 Zingiber officinale, South 
 
 Roxb. 
 
 Moschus ... Mushk 
 
 Aquilaria Agallocha, tJd 
 
 Roxb. 
 
 Amber .. Kahruba 
 
 Hot medicines. 
 
 Brandis, 124 
 „ 494 
 
 Drury, 1G3 
 
 Brandis, 387 
 
 Brandis, 454 
 „ 200 
 
 200 
 
 53 
 
 163 
 
 223 
 
 120 
 
 Astringent and acid 
 purgative. 
 
 ... Astringent and purga-. 
 
 I tive. 
 
 ...Astringent. 
 ...jAstingent, tonic. 
 
 ... Refrigerant. 
 
 ..^Astringent. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Acrid. 
 
 i 
 
 ... Demulcent. 
 
 I 
 
 ... Aromatic. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Tonic. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 i The references are to Brandis’ Forest Flora, Drury’s Useful Plants, Hooker’s 
 Flora of British India , and the Pharmacopeia of India. 
 
724 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular name. 
 
 Reference. 
 
 Dry medicines. 
 
 Prunella (species) ... Ustukhudus 
 Raw silk ...lAb-i-reshm 
 
 Centaurea Behhen, Bahman 
 Psoralea corylifolia, Babe hi 
 Linn. | 
 
 Cinnamomum zeyla- Dalcliini 
 nicum, Bayn. 
 
 Cinnamomum Tama- Kirkiriya 
 la, Nees. 
 
 Mentlia sativa, Padina 
 
 Linn. 
 
 Crocus satirus Linn. Zafran 
 
 Hooker, II., 103 , 
 Brandis, 375 ... 
 
 „ 374 ... 
 
 Phyllanthus Emblica, Aorila 
 Linn. 
 
 Silica (of the bambu), Tabashir 
 Vilis vinifera (rai- Jzirishk 
 sins). 
 
 Camphor ... 'Kafur 
 
 Onosma echioides, Gau-zaban 
 Sm. 
 
 Coriandrum sativum, Dhaniya 
 Linn. 
 
 Nymphaea stellata, Nilofar 
 VVilld. I 
 
 Moist remedies. 
 
 ... Brandis, 454 
 
 )> 
 
 566 
 
 98 
 
 ••• 
 
 Hooker, II., 717, 
 
 Real use. 
 
 Aromatic. 
 Inert. 
 Tonic. 
 Ditto. 
 
 Aromatic. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 Inert. 
 
 Astringent. 
 
 Inert. 
 
 Demulcent. 
 
 Aromatic. 
 
 Tonic. 
 
 Aromatic. 
 
 Inert. 
 
 “ From the above list it will be seen that many of the cold reme- 
 dies aie what are used in European therapeutics as astringent 
 medicines, while the hot remedies are principally aromatics, while 
 remedies having various properties fall under the dry and moist 
 categories.” 
 
 A. 
 
 Abrus precatorius, Linn.— A Indian liquorice— GuncM, raM, 
 rcitnaliya; described by Baker in Hooker, FI. Ind., II., 175. The red 
 or white seeds are used as a weight and as beads in a rosary ; hence 
 the specific name, and also for fistula m native practice .The root is 
 used as a substitute for, and to adulterate, true liquorice, and an ex- 
 tract from it, like that from the latter, is officinal. Pharm., 74, 446. 
 
 Abutilon indicum, Don. — Kangai ; described by Masters in 
 Hooker, I., 326. The leaves yield a mucilaginous extract used as 
 a demulcent. The root is used in leprosy and in infusion as a cooling 
 di ink, and the seeds ai e considered laxative and are given in coughs. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 725 
 
 Acacia arabica, Willcl. — Babul; described by Baker in Hooker, 
 
 11., 293. This tree and others of the same genus yield a gum which 
 is used as a substitute for gum-arabic. The bark is considered a 
 powerful astringent and is used as a substitute for oak bark, and the 
 leaves enter into preparations for sores and cutaneous affections 
 Pliarm., 62, 77. 
 
 Acacia Catechu, Willd. — Khair; described by Baker in Hooker, 
 
 11. . 295 . The extractcalled hath yields an active principle consisting 
 of mimo tannic acid and catechu and is used as an astringent and 
 tonic. Pharm., 62, 63. 
 
 Achyranthes aspera, Linn. — Chirchira ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 4). The seeds are given in cutaneous diseases, the flower- 
 ing spikes in hydrophobia, the bruised leaves as an application for 
 stings, and the dried plant in colic. Pharm., 184. 
 
 Aconitlim ferox, Linn. — Aconite — Mitha-zahar (bazaar), mau- 
 ra-bikh (root), rnahitr; described by Hooker and Thomson, I., 28 : see 
 also Pharm., 3, 434. This species is found above 10,000 feet and is 
 largely export ed. It yields a deadly poison used in rheumatism 
 and neuralgia. 
 
 Aconitum heterophyllum, Linn. — Aconite — Atis (root) ; de- 
 scribed by Hooker and Thomson, I., 29. This species also grows at 
 high elevations above 8,000 feet. It is used as a tonic, febrifuge, 
 and aphrodisiac, and with A. Lycoctonum ( Bish .) and A. Napellus 
 ( Piliya-kachang and dudliiya , the roots), occurring at similar eleva- 
 tions, is exported in small quantities to the plains. Pharm., 4, 434. 
 
 Acorus calamus, Linn. — Gur-bach, bach (root); described by 
 Drury (U. P., 13). The dried rhizomes are used as a bitter, aromatic 
 tonic in fevers, rheumatism, and dyspepsia, and are exported to the 
 extent of about 26 tons every year from the Kumaun forest division. 
 Pharm., 249. 
 
 Actiniopteris radiata. — The Asplenium radiatum of Boyle — 
 Mor-pankhi, Mor-pachh. This fern is used as an anthelmintic. 
 The root of Goniopteris proliferum is used in fevers and that of 
 JS ephrolepis cordifolia in electuaries. 
 
 Adiantum Capillus-veneris, Linn. — Maiden’s hair fern — the 
 mubdraka of Kumaun. This fern and A. venustum ( Pareseoslian , 
 hansrdj) are exported from the Kumaun forest division, both as a 
 
72$ 
 
 HIMA’LaYAN districts 
 
 medicine and a dye, to the extent of ahont 10 maunds a year. They 
 are both considered astringent, aromatic, tonic, and emetic in large 
 doses. The rhizomes and dried leaves of various other species of 
 ferns are sold in the bazaars under the names iskidikandriy4n and 
 baliikanbim, corruptions of the names Seolopendrium and Polypodium 
 
 iEgle Marmelos, Corr. — Bael — Bel ; described by Hooker, I., 
 516. The fruit is a specific in atonic diarrhoea and dysentery. 
 Pharm., 46, 441. 
 
 Albizzia Lebbek, Benth. — Siras; described by Baker in Hooker, 
 II., 298. The bark is applied to sore eyes and the root in making 
 an ointment used in ophthalmia and in cutaneous affections and is 
 given in decoction for diarrhoea. 
 
 Allium Cepa, Linn. — Onion — Piydj. This common vegetable 
 is used in special diseases as a stimulant, diuretic, and expectorant. 
 A. sativum — Garlic — Lalisan — is supposed to have similar proper- 
 ties in native medicine. 
 
 Aloe indica, Royle — Gliikawav ; described by Drury (U.P., 26). 
 The bitter inspissated juice contains a cathartic principle. A. per- 
 foliata, Hoxb., occurs rarely in gardens in Kumaun. Pharm., 242. 
 
 Alstonia scholaris, R. Br. — Chhatiy'dn, satiyiin of the Bhabar ; 
 described by Drury (U. P., 29). The bark is a powerful tonic, an- 
 thelmintic, and antiperiodic : the milky juice is applied to ulcers 
 and mixed with oil in ear-ache. It is also valuable in dysentery 
 and diarrhoea. A. lucida, the diidhi of Kumaun, is found on the first 
 range and is said to possess similar properties. Pharm., 137, 
 455. 
 
 Amarantus farinaceus and others of the same and allied genera 
 are held to possess diuretic and purifying properties. Pharm., 184. 
 
 Anagallis arvensis, Linn., var. ccerulea — Pimpernel — •Jonkh- 
 mari, jainghani; described by Drury (F. P., II., 128). Triturated 
 it is used to intoxicate fish and to expel leeches from the nostrils. 
 
 It is also used in cerebral affections, leprosy, hydrophobia, and 
 dropsy. 
 
 Anatherum muricatum, Beauv. — Kas or khas ; described 
 by Drury (U. P., 38). The roots are given in infusion as a 
 febrifuge and in powder in bilious affections and also yield an oil. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 7*27 
 
 Alieilema tuberosa, Ham., Murdannia scapiflora , Hoyle 
 Musli-siyah and safed (roots). The rootlets furnish an astringent, 
 tonic preparation and are exported for this purpose from Ivumauri. 
 Pliarm., 235. 
 
 Anisomeles ovata, R. Br — Gobara; described by Drury (F. P., 
 II., 557). This plant has carminative, astringent, and tonic pro- 
 perties and also yields an oil. Pharm., 168. 
 
 Anona squamosa, Linn. — Custard-apple — Sitaphal, sharifah . 
 Hooker, FI. Ind., I., 63. The powdered seeds mixed with flour of 
 gram and water make a hair-wash and the bruised leaves with salt 
 make a cataplasm to induce suppuration. 
 
 Artemisia vulgaris, Linn. — Pdti; described by Roxburgh, 599. 
 This species is common in Kumaun ; it has stomachic and tonic pro- 
 perties and is given in fevers. A. scoparia, Wall. — Jhao — has simi- 
 lar uses. Pliarm., 122, 126. 
 
 Argemone mexicana, Linn. — Kantela ; described by Hooker 
 and Thomson, I., 117. An introduced plant now completely 
 naturalized. The seeds yield an oil, used as a mild, cooling laxa- 
 tive. The juice of the plant is diuretic, relieves blisters and heals 
 excoriations and indolent ulcers. Pliarm., 22, 440. 
 
 Argyreia speciosa, Choisy — Gao-patta, bich-tarcik ; found wild 
 in the Delira Dun and the Bhabar, described by Drury (U. P., 49). 
 The leaves are used as emollient poultices for wounds and externally 
 in skin diseases, having rubefacient and vesicant properties. A. 
 setosa occurs in the Sarju valley near Kapkot. Pharm., 157. 
 
 Artocarpus iiitegrifolia, Linn. — Jack-tree kuthcil / described 
 by Brandis, 425. The juice of the trunk is used in glandular swell- 
 ings the voung leaves in skin diseases, and. the root in decoction in 
 diarrhoea. 
 
 Asparagus adscendeus, Roxb. Khairuwa ; desciibcd by Rox- 
 burgh, 291. The tuber of this species is used as a demulcent and 
 
 tonic. 
 
 Asparagus racemosus, Willd. — Sitrdwal (plant), bozidan (root), 
 haliyun (fruit). The root is used in special diseases and has also 
 demulcent properties in veterinary medicine. I liaiin., 243. 
 
728 
 
 bimXlayan districts 
 
 B. 
 
 Bcenninghausenia albiflora, Reicli. — White rue — Pisu-ghds ; 
 described by Hooker, I., 486. Exported and used as a medicine 
 for poultry. 
 
 Balanites Roxburgdiii, Planch. — Inguwa; is found in Dehra 
 Dun (Royle), and is described by Bennett, I., 522. The leaves 
 have anthelmintic properties and the bark is used as a cattle 
 medicine. The unripe drupes have strong cathartic proper- 
 ties, but when ripe are pleasant and the seeds are given for 
 coughs. 
 
 Baliospermum indicum, Dne. — Croton — Jangli jamdlgota ; 
 described by Drury (P. P., III., 192). The seeds are used as a pur- 
 gative, but in over-doses are an acro-narcotic poison. They are also 
 used externally as a stimulant and rubefacient. The oil is a power- 
 ful hydragogue, cathartic, and useful for external application in 
 rheumatism. Pharm., 201. 
 
 Barleria cristata, Linn. — Gorp-jlba , kdla-bansci (leaves) ; 
 described by Roxburgh, 471. The seeds are supposed to be an anti- 
 dote for snake-bites and the roots and leaves are used to reduce 
 swellings and in coughs. 
 
 Bassia butyracea, Roxburgh (see page 715 anted). The butter 
 is used for rheumatism and as a pomade and lip-salve. The oil 
 of B. latifolia is used for soap and emollient ointments and the 
 spirit distilled from the flowers as a stimulant. Pharm., 130 
 
 131. 
 
 Bauhinia variegata, Linn. — Khwairdl, kachndr ; described by 
 Baker, II., 284. The root in decoction is useful in dyspepsia and 
 flatulency ; the flowers with sugar as a gentle laxative; and the bark, 
 flowers or root triturated in rice-water as a cataplasm to promote 
 suppuration. 
 
 Benincasa cerifera, toavi Bhunja^ pethct , kumhra (see page 
 700). This gourd has alexipharmic and tonic properties and is 
 given in dysuria in native practice. 
 
 Berberis Lycium, Royle— Kashmal ; described by Hooker and 
 Thomson, I., 110. The root is known as king ora- hi-jciT in the hills 
 and ddr-hald and ddr-cJwb in the plains. An extract from the roots 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 w 
 
 m 
 
 729 
 
 is known as rasaut , and it is chiefly from this species that it is 
 obtained in Sirmor and Gfarhwal. The medicinal extract is highly 
 esteemed as a febrifuge and as a local application in eye-diseases. 
 It is said by some to have been known to the ancient Greeks and 
 Romans as ‘ Lykion,’ and pots labelled “ Best Himalayan Lykion” 
 have been found in the ruins of Pompeii, but this identification is 
 disputed. In Kumaun B. aristata and B. asiatica yield rasaut. The 
 average annual export of the root from the Kumaun forest division 
 is about two maunds and from Grarhwal about double the quantity. 
 Pharm., 13, 436. 
 
 Boerhaavia diffusa, Linn. — Gdcla-purna ; described by Drury 
 (F. P., III., 34). The root of this common weed is given in infu- 
 sion as a laxative, anthelmintic, and cooling medicine. Pharm., 
 185. 
 
 Bombax malabaricum, D.C. — Senial ; described by Masters in 
 Hooker, I., 349. The gum is given in asthenic cases ; the root fur- 
 nishes one of the musali and is used as a stimulant and tonic and in 
 large doses as an emetic, and the leaves are employed as an aphro- 
 disiac and in. special diseases. Pharm., 36. 
 
 Boswellia thurifera, Cole — Indian frankincense — the salhi of 
 Grarhwal ; described by Drury (U. P., 84). The gum is prescribed 
 with clarified butter in special diseases, with cocoa-nut oil for sores, 
 and as a stimulant in pulmonary diseases. Pharm., 52. 
 
 Brassica nigra, Koch. — Black mustard — Kali sarson. This 
 and the allied species, B. alba and B. juncea, are frequently used in 
 medicine as rubefacients and vesicants. Pharm., 25. 
 
 Briedelia mentana, Roxb. — Kangnaliya ; described by Rox- 
 burgh, 705. Reported to possess astringent and anthelmintic pro- 
 perties and found at 3-4,000 feet, 
 
 Buchanania latifolia, Roxb, — Chironji ; described by Brandis, 
 127. The oil extracted from the kernels of the fruit is used as a 
 'substitute for almond oil in native medicinal preparations and con- 
 fectionery. 
 
 Butea frondosa, Roxb. — Balds, dhdk; described by Brandis, 142. 
 The inspissated juice obtainable by incision is used as a substitute 
 for kino : the seeds as a vermifuge and anthelmintic and when 
 
 92 
 
730 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 made into a paste as a remedy for ring-worm. B. parvifora 
 maula — has similar properties. Pharm., 73, 74, 79, 446. 
 
 Buxus sempervirens, Linn. — PapH , shamdj ; described by 
 Brandis, 447. A tincture from the bark is used as a febrifuge, 
 
 c. 
 
 Csesalpinia Bondncella, Fleming — Karaunj ; described by 
 Baker, II., 254. The kernels are used as a tonic in fevers and 
 made into an ointment with castor-oil and applied externally in 
 hydrocele. An oil is extracted from the leaves which is used in 
 palsy and rheumatism. Pharm., 68, 446. 
 
 Callicarpa arborea, Roxb. — Ghiwala ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 97). The bark is aromatic and bitter and is applied in 
 decoction in cutaneous affections. 
 
 Calosanthes indica, Blume — Pharkath ; described by Drury 
 (U. P. 100). The bark is astringent and used in applications to 
 cuts and fractures. The seeds are applied to abscesses and the offi- 
 cinal syonak seems to be procured from the leaves. 
 
 Calotropis procera, R. Br. — Maddr , ah; described by Brandis, 
 331. The root, bark, and inspissated juice are used extensively for 
 their emetic, diaphoretic, alterative and purgative properties. Pharm., 
 141, 457, 458. 
 
 Canna indica, Linn. — Indian shot — Kiwara ; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 106). The root is used as a diaphoretic and diuretic 
 in fevers and dropsy. 
 
 Cannabis indica, Linn. — Bhang. See intoxicating drugs, posted, 
 and Pharm., 216, 463. 
 
 Capparis horrida, Linn. — Ulta-kdnta , bipuwa-kanta ; described 
 by Hooker and Thomson, I., 178. Found in the Bhabar. A cata- 
 plasm of the leaves is considered useful in boils, swellings, and piles. 
 
 Capsicum frutescens, Linn. — Mircha , kursdni ; prescribed in 
 native practice in gout, dyspepsia, cholera, and ague. 
 
 Careya arborea, Roxb. — Vakamba, kdmbhi ; described by 
 Clarke in Hooker, II., 511. The flowers are given as a tonic in 
 sherbet after childbirth. 
 
 Carum copticum, Benth. — Lovage — Ajwdin ; described by 
 Clarke, II., 682. This plant possesses valuable stimulant, 
 
 93 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 731 
 
 carminative and antispasmodic properties ; it aids digestion, and 
 is used in colic, colds, rheumatism and fever and is also esteemed as 
 a diuretic. Pharm., 98, 99, 447. C. Carui, Linn. — Carraway — 
 Kdlajira — (Hooker, l. c., 680) occurs at the same elevations 
 (8-10,000 feet) and possesses similar virtues. Both are exported 
 to the plains. 
 
 Cassia Absus, Linn. — Bctndr ; described by Baker, II., 265. 
 The seeds are used in powder applied beneath the eyelids or in the 
 form of an ointment in ophthalmia. Pharm., 78. 
 
 Cassia Fistula, Linn. — Kitola, itola , rdj-briksh of the Bhabar ; 
 described by Baker, II., 256. This tree yields the commonest 
 cathartic used in native medicine. The pulp around the seeds is a 
 valuable laxative, the flowers are used as a febrifuge made into a 
 confection known as gdl-kand , and the root is a strong purgative. 
 The bark and leaves are applied to cutaneous eruptions. Pharm., 
 65. 
 
 Cassia Sophera, Linn. — Bandr of the Bhabar ; described by 
 Baker, II., 262. The bark, leaves, and seeds of this tall weed are 
 cathartic and the juice of the young leaves is applied in ringworm. 
 C. Tora has the same native name in Kumaun ; its leaves are eaten 
 by men and animals and the seeds are used as a remedy for itch. 
 Pharm., 78. 
 
 Cedrela Toona, Roxb. — Tuni ; described by Drury (U. P., 128). 
 The bark is astringent and has been found a fair substitute for qui- 
 nine in fevers and bowel complaints, especially with young children. 
 Pharm., 55. 
 
 Celosia argentea, Linn. — Sirali, sarwdli, gogiya ; described by 
 Drury (F. P., III., 15). The seeds are used chiefly in special dis- 
 eases. 
 
 Chavica Roxburghii, Miq. — Piper longum, Linn, fruit pipla- 
 mill ; described by Drury (U. P., 131). P. longum, var. silvaticum, 
 grows wild and the fruit is largely exported as a condiment and a 
 stimulant in medicine. Pharm., 208. 
 
 Chenopodium album, Linn. — Bhatuwa ; described by Drury 
 (F. P., III., 5). It is used in special diseases and as a laxative in 
 
 spleen and bilious disorders. 
 
732 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Cicer arietinunb Linn. — Gram — Ghana (see page 693). The 
 hairs of the stem and leayes exude an acid used as a refrigerant in 
 fevers ; the seeds are considered stimulant and when roasted are 
 used as a substitute for coffee berries. Pharm., 80. 
 
 Cinnainomum Tarnala, Nees — Taj (bark), tejpdt (leaves) ; 
 described by Brandis, 374. The bark and leaves are used as a car- 
 minative, aromatic and stimulant in coughs and dyspepsia and 
 generally as a substitute for true cinnamon. Pharm., 196. 
 
 Cissampelos Pareira, Linn. — Pari ; described by Hooker and 
 Thomson, I., 203. The dried root has diuretic, tonic and slightly 
 aperient qualities and forms part of the pili-jari or ‘ yellow-root’ of 
 the native Materia Medica. The leaves are applied to abscesses. 
 Pharm., 7. 
 
 Citrullus Colocynthis, Schrad. — Indr dy an (see page 701). 
 The fruit affords a safe and active cathartic in hepatic and 
 visceral congestion. C . Hardwickii , the air-alu of Kumaun and 
 pahdriindrdyan of the plains, has similar properties. Pharm., 94. 
 
 Citrus Anrantium, Linn. — Orange — jT dr any i — (2) C. medica — 
 Bijaura — (3) G. var. Limonum — Jdmira — and (4) C. var. Limetta — 
 Amritphal — are all used in medicine as tonics and purifiers of the 
 blood, refrigerants in fevers, Savouring materials in infusions, 
 pomades, &c., anti-scorbutics, stomachics, and carminatives. The 
 juice is exported from the Kumaun forest- division to a great extent 
 every year. Pharm., 42, 43, 45. 
 
 Cleome viscosa, Linn. — J anyli-harhar ; described by Hooker and 
 Thomson, I., 170. The seeds are considered anthelmintic ; the leaves 
 are used as a vesicant, and boiled in clarified butter are applied to 
 wounds, and the juice to ulcers. The root is administered in decoc- 
 tion as a febrifuge. This plant is often confounded with Gy nan- 
 dr op sis pentaphylla. 
 
 Clerodendron serratum, Spr .— Ganth-baharanyi; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 141). The leaves of this common plant are boiled 
 in oil for applications in ophthalmia : the roots boiled in water 
 with ginger and coriander are given in nausea, and the seeds are 
 slightly aperient. The leaves of C. infortunatum, Linn .—Bhat— 
 also aftord a cheap and efficient tonic and antiperiodie. Pharm., 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 733 
 
 164. C. Siphonanthus, R. Br.— Ami— also occurs and its roots 
 and leaves are officinal in native practice. 
 
 Cochlospermum Gossypium, D. G. Ivatera , gajra ; described 
 by Hooker and Thomson, I., 190. This small tree yields a gum 
 used as a demulcent in coughs and special diseases. Pharm., 27. 
 
 Colocasia antiquorum, Schott— Kachu, arwi ; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 155). The inspissated juice of the petioles is a capital 
 styptic for wounds. Pharm., 250. 
 
 Cominelyna obliqua, Don. — Kanjura, lcdna. The root is use- 
 ful in vertigo, fevers, and bilious affections, and is said to be used as 
 an antidote to snake-bites. 
 
 Cor chorus olitorius, Linn. — Banphal ; found in Dehra Dun ; 
 described by Masters in Hooker, FI. Ind., I., 397. The leaves are 
 emollient and used in infusion as a refrigerant in fevers and special 
 diseases. The dried plant toasted and powdered is used in visceral 
 obstructions. 
 
 Cordia latifolia, Boxb.—Bairdlu, baurdla; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 160). The fruit is used as an expectorant and astringent. 
 
 Pharm., 157. 
 
 Cordia Myxa, Linn .—Kocla; described by Drury (U. P., 161). 
 The pulp of the fruit is used as a laxative and the seeds mixed with 
 oil are deemed a specific in ringworm. The juice of the bark in 
 infusion is given with cocoa-nut oil in gripes. Pharm., 157. 
 
 Coriandrum sativum, Linn. — Coriander — Dhaniya ; described 
 by Clarke, II., 717. The dried ripe fruit and the volatile oil are 
 both used in medicine as an aromatic stimulant in colic and the like. 
 
 Pharm., 101. 
 
 Costus speciosus, S. M .—Keyu, keoli, kut-shirm (root) ; des- 
 cribed by Drury (U. P., 164). From the root a strengthening tonic 
 is made and it is also used as an anthelmintic. 
 
 Crinum asiaticum, var. toxicavium , Herb. — Chindar, kanwal , 
 pindar, Icanmu ; described by Roxburgh, 283. A valuable emetic ; 
 in small doses nauseant and diaphoretic. The dried sliced roots are 
 also emetic i the leaves with castor-oil are used m lheumatism and 
 the juice in ear-ache. Pharm., 234. 
 
734 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Cucurbita Pepo, Linn. — Bhunga, petha ; and C. maxima — ga- 
 duioa (see page {02). Both these gourds are used in medicine ; the 
 leaves as applications for burns and the seeds as anthelmintics. 
 Pharm., 96. 
 
 Cuminum Cyminum, Linn. — Jira (see page 705.) Both fruit 
 and oil possess carminative properties allied to dill and coriander : 
 the seeds are largely exported to the plains. Pharm., 108. 
 
 Curculigoorchioides, Groertn. — Petdri; described by Drury 
 (F. P., III., 458). The tuberous roots are some of those known as 
 musli-siyah and are held in the highest esteem by native physicians 
 as a specific in special diseases. Pharm., 235. 
 
 Curcuma longa, Roxb. Turmeric — Haldi (see page 706.) 
 This is much used as an application in bruises ; the fresh juice as 
 an anthelmintic ; the fumes of the burning root in coryza and the 
 root in decoction for relieving catarrh and purulent ophthalmia. 
 Pharm., 231. 
 
 Cymbopogon Martini, Munro— Bujina, pdla-khari. The oil, 
 known as raus-ha-tel and Nimar oil, enters largely into native per- 
 fumeiy. The loots of C. laniger Piriya — are also used as an aro- 
 matic stimulant (see Drury, F. P., III., 641). Pharm., 256. 
 
 Cynodon Dactylon, Pers.— Ddb ; described by Drury (U. P., 
 180). This glass yields a cooling decoction from the roots and young 
 leaves found useful in fever. 
 
 Cyperus rotundus, Linn. — Motha ; described by Drury (U. P., 
 182), The roots are held to be diaphoretic, diuretic, and astringent 
 Pharm., 250, 
 
 D, 
 
 Dalbergia Sissoo, Roxb. — Si&u ; described by Drury (U. P., 
 186). The leaves and saw r -dust in decoction are esteemed in erup- 
 tive and special diseases and to allay vomiting. The oil is also 
 applied externally in cutaneous affections. 
 
 Datisca cannabina, Linn. — Bujr-bhanga , bhang-jala (roots) ; 
 described by Clarke, II., 656. The roots are exported as a medi- 
 cine useful as a sedative in rheumatism and to aid in dyeing 
 red. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 735 
 
 Datura alba, Linn. — Dhatura ; described by Drury (U. P., 
 188). The leaves and seeds are used as anodynes and antispasmo- 
 dics. Pharm., 175, 460. 
 
 Daucus Carota, Linn —Carrot— Gdjar. This common vege- 
 table is used as a poultice for ulcers and boils. 
 
 Delphinium Brunonianum, Boyle — JSepdri; described by 
 Hooker and Thomson, I., 27. Occurs at 14,000 feet and is exported 
 for its highly musk-scented leaves, used in native perfumery and for 
 temple offerings. 
 
 Dendrocalamus strictus, Nees— Bambu— Bdns, bdsila; 
 
 described by Brandis, 529. The bambu yields a siliceous secretion 
 11 in the joints of the female plant, called bdns-loehan or tabashir , 
 
 considered by the Baids to be useful as a stimulant and aphrodisiac. 
 The root is said to be a diluent, the leaves are used as an 
 emenagogue and anthelmintic and the dried steins as splinters in 
 surgery, which seems to be the only really valuable use that the 
 products of the bambu are put to in medicine. The product bans- 
 lochcin is exported in small quantities from Kamaun. Pharm., 2o6. 
 
 Desmodium triflorurn, D. C ,—Kudaliya ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 190). The fresh leaves are applied to wounds and abscesses 
 
 that do not heal well. 
 
 Dioscorea versicolor, Wall. — Yam Genthi, gcijir. Thetubeis 
 yield a farinaceous food for invalids. 
 
 Diospyros Melanoxylon, Boxb. — Tendu ; described by Bran- 
 dis, 294. This and the other species of ebony afford an astringent 
 from the bark which is used in decoction in diarrhoea, dyspepsia, 
 and the like as a tonic. Phann., 132. 
 
 Dolichos sinensis, Linn.— Lobiya (see page 695). This and 
 other similar pulses are prescribed in special diseases and as 
 
 stomachics. 
 
 Drosera peltata, Gm .—MuJcha-jali ; described by Clarke, II., 
 424. The leaves bruised and mixed with salt are used as a blister 
 
 in Kumaun. 
 
 E. 
 
 Eclipta erecta, Linn.— Moch-kand, bhangra, bdbri ; described 
 by Drury (U. P., 202). The fresh plant is applied with sesamum 
 
 
736 
 
 HIMALAYAN JDISYRI£TT§ 
 
 oil m elephantiasis ; the expressed juice in affections of the liver, 
 spleen, and dropsy, and in large doses as an emetic ; also as a black 
 hair-dye. The average annual export from the Kumaun forest 
 division is about 5 maunds. Pharm., 128. 
 
 Elseagnus umb ellat a, Thunb. — Ghiwain , kankol common in 
 the hills from the Jumna to the Sarda ; described by Brandis, 390. 
 The seeds are reported to be used as a stimulant in coughs, the 
 expressed oil in pulmonary affections, and the flowers as a cardiac 
 and astringent. 
 
 .Elgeodeildron glaucum- Pers. — Shauriya (Kumaun) and jamu- 
 w a (Delira Dun) ; described by Roxburgh, 214. The root is held 
 to be an antidote in snake-bites ; a decoction or cold infusion of the 
 fresh bark of the roots is applied to swellings. 
 
 Embelia robusta? Roxb. — Bayabirang (fruit) ; described by 
 Brandis, 284. The fruit is said to be used to adulterate black pepper 
 like that of E. Ribes , which has the same vernacular name and is 
 given as an anthelmintic and internally for piles. The greater 
 portion of the bayabirang exported from Kumaun seems to be the 
 fruit of My r sine, africana . 
 
 Eragrostis cynosuroides, Ret. — Bdbh. A common grass said 
 to possess diuretic and stimulant virtues. 
 
 Eugenia Jambolana? Lam. — Phaunda ; described by Brandis, 
 233. The leaves and bark are astringent. 
 
 Euphorbia pentagona, Bois.— Sehund. This and other species 
 of the same genus yield an acrid milky juice having cathartic and 
 anthelmintic properties. Pharm., 204. 
 
 Exacum tetragonum, Roxb. — Titakhana ; described by Rox- 
 burgh, 133. It is used as a tonic in fevers and a stomachic bitter. 
 Pharm., 149. 
 
 F. 
 
 Feronia Elephantum, Corr. — Kath-bel; found in the Siwaliks 
 and Bhabar ; described by Drury (U. P., 220). This tree yields a 
 gum used for the same purposes as gum-arabic ; and the leaves are- 
 carminative and stomachic, especially with children. Pharm., 48, 
 
 Ficus Carica> Linn. — Fig — Anjir ; described by Brandis, 41§„ 
 The fruit is used medicinally as a laxative. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES, 
 
 737 
 
 Ficus indica, Roxb. (F. bengalensis, Linn.)— Bar, bat ; described 
 by Drury (U. P., 221). The juice collected from incisions in the 
 bark of the banyan-tree is considered a specific in cracked heels, 
 excoriations, and sometimes for toeth-ache, lumbago, and croup. 
 Pharm., 217. 
 
 Ficus religiosa, Linn. — Pipal ; described by Drury (U. P., 225). 
 The young shoots are used as a purgative and have some rej^ uta- 
 tion in skin diseases ; the bark of this and the preceding is used as a 
 tonic in desoction. The seeds are given in electuary as a purifier of 
 the blood. 
 
 Ficus hispida, Linn.,/. — Kagoha,gobla, dhtira, totmila; described 
 by Brandis, 423. The fruit, seeds, and bark are possessed of emetic 
 properties. Pharm., 217. 
 
 Ficus glomerata, Roxb. — Gular ; described by Brandis, 422, 
 The bark is used as an astringent and a wash for wounds. The 
 milky juice is given in piles and diarrhoea and in combination with 
 sesamum oil in cancer. The root is useful in dysentery. 
 
 Flacourtia sepiaria, Roxb. — Kandai; described by Brandis, 18, 
 This tree yields an antidote to snake-bites from an infusion of 
 the leaves and roots : the bark triturated in sesamum oil is used as 
 a liniment in rheumatism. 
 
 Fceniculum vulgare, Linn. Fennel — Sonf; described by Clarke 
 in Hooker, II., 695. It is used as a carminative and stomachic, 
 cultivated. Pharm., 100. 
 
 Fraxinus floribunda, Wall. — Angu ; described by Brandis, 302. 
 A concrete saccharine exudation (manna) from the stem is obtained 
 by incision and is a substitute for the officinal manna. Pharm., 136. 
 
 Fumaria parviflora, Lam.; Var. Vaillantii, the Khairuwa of Ku- 
 maun, also known as pitpdpra , mijcilu ; described by Hooker, /., and 
 Anderson in Hooker, I., 128. The dried herb is employed as a 
 diuretic, anthelmintic, diaphoretic, and aperient, especially as a blood 
 purifier. The average annual export from the Kumaun forest 
 division is about 32 maunds. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gentiana Kurroo, Royle. — Kuru , kutkb — Llimalayan gentian. 
 This plant occurs near the snows. There are four or five allied species, 
 
738 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 all of which are exported to the plains to the extent of about five tons 
 a year, and are there sold as a valuable bitter tonic. See Royle, 
 111. Bot., Him. Moun., pi. 58, fig. 2, and Pharm., 149. 
 
 Geranium ocellatum, Camb . — Bhdnd; described by Edge- 
 worth and Hooker, / ., in Hooker, I., 433. A very common 
 plant in Ivumaun, which possesses diuretic and astringent pro- 
 perties. 
 
 Gloriosa superba, Linn. — Bish nangal , bish ningala; described 
 by Drury (U. P., 234). The root is used in special diseases, but is 
 said to be poisonous in large doses. Pharm., 242. 
 
 Gmelina arborea, Roxb. — Kumbhdr , gumbhar ; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 234). The root is given in coughs, rheumatism, and 
 special diseases, and is said to have anthelmintic properties like A. 
 asiatica. Pharm., 164. 
 
 Gossypium herbaceum, Linn. — Cotton — Kapds. The down of 
 this well-known shrub is applied to burns ; the seeds to increase milk, 
 also in epilepsy and as an antidote to snake-poison ; the root as a 
 diuretic, emenagogue, and demulcent, and the leaves in decoction as 
 a tonic in fever and diarrhoea. Pharm., 33. 
 
 Grewia asiatica, Linn. — Pharsiya ; described by Masters in 
 Hooker, I., 386. The leaves are used as an application to pustular 
 eruptions and the fruit in sherbet as a refrigerant in fevers and a 
 gargle for sore-throat. 
 
 Gynandropsis pentaphylla, D. C. — Kathal parhar; described 
 by Hooker,/., and Thomson in Hooker, I., 171. It occurs common 
 in the Bhabar ; the leaves are used as a rubefacient and vesicant ; the 
 expressed juice is given with salt in earache ; the seeds in powder are 
 given with sugar internally in fevers and bilious complaints, and the 
 entire plant with sesamum oil is used as an ointment in cutaneous 
 affections. Pharm. 25. This plant is often confounded with Cleome 
 viscosajn native shops. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hedychium spicatum, Smith — Kachur-kachu, kapdr-kachri, ban- 
 lialdi. It possesses carminative and stimulant properties and is 
 especially used as a cattle medicine : it is exported from Kumaun 
 to the extent of a few tons annually. Pharm., 232. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 739 
 
 Helicteres Isora Linn. — Jhonkha-plicil , maror-phal; described 
 by Masters in Hooker, I., 365. The seeds accordingto ‘ thedoctrine of 
 si e-natures’ are considered useful in colic and diarrhoea and as a blood 
 
 O 
 
 purifier: and are exported from the Kumaun forest division to the 
 extent of about a ton per annum. 
 
 Heliotropium brevifolium, Wall. — Safed-bhangra, chiti phul. 
 The whole plant is laxative and diuretic ; the juice is used as 
 an application to sore-eyes, gum-boils and sores generally to pro- 
 mote suppuration and as a cure for the sting of nettles and insects. 
 
 Herpestis Monniera, H.B.gtf K. — Jal-mm; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 249). A dose of six mdshas of the leaves steeped in water is 
 an esteemed aperient ; the water may be used as an embrocation in 
 skin diseases and croup, and the juice with kerosine-oil is used in 
 rheumatism Pharm., 161. 
 
 Hiptage Madablota, Goertn. — Aita-lugala ; described by Hooker, 
 I 418. The leaves are esteemed useful in cutaneous diseases. 
 
 Holarrhena antidysenterica, R. Br.—Kudr and moriya of 
 Bijnor and IciU 3 r, Jcuda , kuva of Kumaun; described by Brandis, 326. 
 The bark is a specific in dysentery : hence the name, and the 
 seeds are also said to possess similar properties. Pharm., 137, 455. 
 
 Hordeiim hexastichon, Linn. — Barley— Jau. The husked seeds 
 form pearl barley, a favourite food for invalids and in decoction a 
 drink in fevers. Pharm., 253. 
 
 * 
 
 Hymenodictyon excelsum, Wall. — Bhulan, bhalena , bhamena, 
 dhauli; common in the Kota Dun; described by Brandis, 267. 
 The inner coat of the bark possesses the bitterness of cinchona 
 and its astringent properties. Pharm, 117. 
 
 HyoscyamilS niger, Linn. — Henbane — Kliorasani ajwdin (seeds) ; 
 occurs wild and is also cultivated. The seeds are given in native 
 medicine as an anodyne and sedative in mental diseases. Pharm., 
 178. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ichnocarpus frutescens, R. Br. — Dddhi ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 259). The root possesses alterative, tonic properties and is 
 employed as a substitute for sarsaparilla : the stalks and leaves are 
 used as a decoction in fevers. Pharm., 138. 
 
740 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 J. 
 
 Jasminum grandiflorum, Linn. — Jdhi; very abundant in low 
 valleys ; described by Brandis, 313. The flowers and their essence 
 are used as an application in skin diseases, headache and weak eyes : 
 the leaves are used in toothache. Other species of this genus are also 
 found in Kumaun and are employed in making perfumed waters. 
 
 J atropha Curcas, Linn. — Safed ind; described by Drury (U. P., 
 27 6). The oil from the seeds is used as a purgative, but is uncertain : 
 it is also applied diluted in rheumatism : the leaves warmed with 
 castor-oil form a poultice for bruises : the seeds in over-doses are 
 poisonous, and the milky juice is used to destroy maggots in sores on 
 sheep. Pharm., 203. 
 
 Juglans regia, Linn. — Walnut — Akor, akhrot , kharot. The 
 bark is used as an anthelmintic : the leaves are astringent and 
 tonic and in decoction a specific in strumous sores : the fruit is given 
 in special diseases and rheumatism. 
 
 Justicia Adhatoda, Linn. — Bashing ; described by Drury as 
 Adhatoda vasica (U. P., 16). The flowers, leaves, and roots are 
 considered antispasmodic and anthelmintic; the juice is found useful 
 in pulmonary affections, and a tincture is also commonly given as an 
 expectorant. Pharm., 162. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kydia calycina, R. W.—Puta ; described by Masters in Hooker, 
 1., 348. The bark is mucilaginous and is used to clarify sugar. 
 
 L. 
 
 Lepidium sativum, Linn. — Cress — Halang. The seeds of this 
 common vegetable are used as a tonic laxative and antiscorbutic 
 and as a gentle stimulant in indigestion. 
 
 Lilium wallichianum, Royle — Findora. The dried bulb scales 
 possess demulcent properties and are used like salep in pectoral 
 complaints. 
 
 Limonia acidissima, Linn. — Bali ; described by Hooker, I., 
 507. The root is purgative, sudorific, and used in colic : the leaves in 
 epilepsy and the dried fruit as a tonic and disinfectant. Pharm., 43. 
 
 Linum usitatissimum, Linn. — Flax. The seeds are the linseed of 
 the pharmacopoeia, of which the uses are well known. Pharm., 37» 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 741 
 
 M. 
 
 Mallotus phillipinensis, Miill. — Roini, roli ; described by 
 Drury as Rottlera tinctoria (U. P., 378). The powder on the seeds 
 is a valuable anthelmintic, vermifuge, and purgative. Pharm., 
 202 . 
 
 Malva rotundifolia, Linn. — Sonchala ; described by Masters in 
 Hooker, I., 320. The seeds are demulcent and are used especially in 
 bronchitis, inflammation of the bladder, and haemorrhoids, and 
 externally in cutaneous affections and coughs. 
 
 Malva sylvestris, Linn. — kanji , tilchuni ; described by Masters 
 in Hooker, I., 320. It is a valuable demulcent in pulmonary affec- 
 tions and a substitute for the marsh mallow of Europe. 
 
 Mangifera indica, Linn.— Mango— Arnb. The sliced rind of 
 this well-known fruit is astringent and used as a stimulant tonic in 
 debility of the stomach : the kernels are styptic in haemorrhoids, 
 astringent in diarrhoea, and tonic in fever. Pharm., 59. 
 
 Melia Azedarach, Linn. — Bakayan, dek, jek, betain ; described 
 by Brandis, 68. The bark of the root and the pulp of the seeds are 
 anthelmintic in small doses and poisonous in large doses. Pharm., 55. 
 
 Melia indica, Linn — Nim; described by Brandis, 67. The 
 bark, leaves, and seeds are all really valuable ; the bark as a 
 febrifuge and substitute for quinine ; the leaves as a cataplasm for 
 wounds and sores; and the seeds for their oil, which is used as an 
 anthelmintic and an application to foul sores. Pharm., 55. 
 
 Mentha viridis, Linn. — Spearmint — Pahari pudina. The oil 
 obtained by distillation from the fresh herb in flower is inferior 
 only to peppermint and is useful in cholic, nausea, and flatulence. 
 Pharm., 166. 
 
 Mimosa rubicaulis, Lam.— Agio, ; described by Baker in Hooker, 
 II., 291 ; M. pudica, Linn. — Lajawanti; described by Hooker ( l.c .) 
 The seeds of both are used as purifiers of the blood, and the 
 leaves are given in infusion in piles, and pounded they are applied 
 to burns. 
 
 Mirabillis Jalapa Linn. — Gdl-bdnsa. The root forms a safe and 
 efficient purgative equal to jalap, and the leaves are applied to 
 abscesses. Completely naturalised in Kumaun. Pharm., 184. 
 
742 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Momoidica charantia, TV illd. — Karela ; described by Druary, 
 U. P., 306 (see page 700). Used as a laxative and in preparation as 
 an ointment for sores and the juice of the leaves as an anthelmintic. 
 
 Moringa pterygosperma, Gcertn. — Sahajnct— Horse-radish 
 tree ; described by Hooker, II., 45. The fresh roots are vesicant 
 and rubefacient and useful in rheumatism. Used internally, the 
 fresh juice of the roots has stimulant and diuretic properties and the 
 root in decoction furnishes a gargle. The seeds yield a fine oil 
 useful in rheumatism, and the tree itself a gum used as an anodyne 
 in headache and as an application to buboes. Pharin., 61. 
 
 Morus indica, Linn. — Indian mulberry — Tutri ; described by 
 Brandis, 408. The fruit forms a sherbet used as a refrigerant and 
 the bark a vermifuge and purgative. The fruit of M. serrata, 
 Roxb. — Kemu — and M. Icevigata, Wall., Siyah-tut — is said to possess 
 similar properties. Brandis, 409. 
 
 Mucuna pruriens, JD. C.— Cowhage— Goncha; described by 
 Baker in Hooker, II., 187. The hairs of the legume are mechanically 
 anthelmintic and are given in round worm : see Pharm., 73. The 
 seeds are given with milk in special diseases and snake-bites and 
 the leaves as a vermifuge. M. atropurpurea , the ba Iclhalci of Kumaun, 
 is said to possess similar properties. 
 
 Murraya Kcenigii, Spreng. — Gani , gandla; described by 
 Hooker, I., 503. The seeds yield a clear transparent oil known as 
 simboli oil ; the root is laxative and both bark and roots are stimulant 
 and used in cutaneous diseases and to check vomitino-. Pharm. 
 49. 
 
 Musa Sapientum, Linn. — Plantain — Kela. This well-known 
 fruit is demulcent, antiscorbutic, and alterative ; the tender leaves are 
 used as a dressing for wounds, blisters, and sores, and as eye-shades 
 in ophthalmia ; the root and stem are considered in native practice 
 purifiers of the blood and are good in scorbutic complaints and 
 special diseases. Pharm., 233. 
 
 Myrica sapida — Kdiphal ; described by Brandis, 493. The 
 fruit is eaten, and the bark is used externally as an anthelmintic, 
 stimulant, and rubefacient, and in the arts as a tanning agent. 
 Natives use it in epilepsy and to rub the body after illness. The 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 743 
 
 average annual export of this bark from the Kumaun forest division 
 is about fifty tons. Pharm., 217, 
 
 Myrsine africana, Linn., the so-called box — PaMri-cha , 
 chiipra ; described by Brandis, 286. The fruit is said to be a power- 
 ful cathartic vermifuge. It is sold in the bazaars as bdyabirang , 
 a name also of Embelia Ribes ; used also in dropsy, colic, and as 
 a laxative. About a maund is exported every year from the Kumaun 
 forest division. M. semiserrata, Wall., also called chupra, is said 
 to possess similar properties. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nardostacbys Jatamansi, D. C.— Spikenard— Bdlchhar, sham- 
 bed, balkar. Hoyle, t. 54,/. 2. This plant occurs above 12,000 
 feet and its roots with those of certain species of Valerian, especially 
 V. Ilardwickii ( shameo , roots), are exported through the Kumaun 
 forest division to the extent of about twenty maunds per annum. 
 They occur in the form of short pieces of an underground stem, 
 about the thickness of a quill, covered towards one extremity or 
 almost entirely with coarse, dark, hair-like fibres. It has all the 
 properties of Valerian in a high degree and is used as a stimulant 
 and antispasmodic in hysteria and epilepsy. N. grandiflora, a 
 larger species, also occurs in Kumaun at similar elevations. Pharm., 
 120. : Bird., 46. 
 
 Nelumbium speciosum, Willd.— Lotus— Kanwal; described 
 by Hooker/, and Thomson in Hooker, I., 116. The nuts are eaten 
 as a tonic in disorders of the digestive functions. 
 
 Nerium odorum, Aiton.— Oleander — Kaniyur ; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 323). All parts of the plant are poisonous and are 
 used in native practice in leprosy, cutaneous affections, and as an 
 anthelmintic. The bark in paste is used in ringworm and itch 
 and a decoction of the leaves externally as a vermifuge. Pharm., 
 
 139. 
 
 Nicotiana Tabacum, Linn. — Tobacco — Tamdku, dhamdku . 
 For the medicinal uses of tobacco see Pharm., 178, 460, and 
 O’Shaughn., 471. 
 
 Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis, Linn.— Ktiri, harsinghar; described 
 by Drury (U.P., 323). Used in native practice for ringworm 
 
744 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 and to promote the adhesion of broken bones, also in indigestion : 
 the bark is an astringent and is used as a gargle and in applications 
 to sores and ulcers. 
 
 0 . 
 
 Odina Wodier, Roxb. — Jingan, jlban; described by Hooker, 
 II., 29. The bark is used in decoction as a lotion in impetigo 
 and obstinate ulcers : the gum and leaves have also astringent 
 properties and are applied to bruises and wounds. Pharm., 60. 
 
 Olea glandulifera, Wall. — Gair , galdit, garur ; described by 
 Brandis, 309. The bark and leaves are astringent and are used 
 as an antiperiodic in fevers. 
 
 Onosma echioides, Linn. — Maharanga , lal-jari, and ratan-jot 
 (root), gauzaban (leaves), gul-i-gau-zabdn (flowers). The bruised 
 root is applied to eruptions, the leaves as an alterative, and the 
 flowers in cases of rheumatism and palpitation of the heart as a 
 cardiac and stimulant. Exported through Dehra Dun. The root 
 is also used as a dye. It appears that under the name ‘ ratanjot ’ 
 the roots of Geranium nocbsum, Linn.; of Potentilla nepalensis, 
 Hook.; Macrotomia euchroma, H. /. et. T.; and Jatropha Curcas, 
 are also collected and sold. 
 
 Ophelia Chirayta, Gris. ;Agathotes chirayta, Do n.-Tita-khdna, 
 chirayta. Some call this species the true Ddkhini chiretta or true 
 Nepal chiretta. The former name is properly applied to a South- 
 Indian species, Andrographis paniculata, and the latter name may 
 perhaps suit, as 0. Chirata occurs in Nepal. Equally good 
 chiretta is obtained from 0 . purpurascens, 0 . cordata, 0 . speciosa , 
 Agathotes angustifolia and A. alata. All yield a valuable bitter 
 extract used as a tonic and febrifuge and corrector of biliary dis- 
 turbance. About six tons are exported every year from the 
 Kumaun forest division. See further Pharm., 149 : As. Res. XI. 
 167. 
 
 Oxalis corniculata, Linn. — Chalmori ; described by Edge- 
 worth and Hooker/, in Hooker, I., 436. The leaves, stalks, and 
 flowers possess refrigerant and antiscorbutic properties and are used 
 internally in fevers, dysentery, and scurvy, and externally to 
 remove warts. The juice is useful in removing iron-moulds. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 745 
 
 P. 
 
 Poeonia emodi, Wall. — Chandra (the plant), sujuniya (the young 
 edible shoots), bhiima-madiya , yet ghas of the Bhotiyas ; described 
 by Hooker/, and Thomson in Hooker, I., 30. The tubers are some 
 of those exported under the name bikh and are proha oly those known 
 as padam-chhal. There is nothing in the local Materia Medica re- 
 quiring further investigation more than tne roots exported under the 
 name ‘bikh’ and 1 nirbisi.’ Under the former come the various spe- 
 cies of aconite. A. erox is the maura , maur or mahur bikh, and 
 Madden tested it to see whether it deserved the name ‘ rnitha ,’ sweet, 
 and found it was so : but this was soon succeeded by the most 
 distressing burning all over the mouth and fauces, though nothing 
 was swallowed. Dr. Royle says that Polygoncitum verticillatum, 
 Linn., is called mitha-dudhiya in Sirmor and Smilacina pallida is 
 called dudhiya-mohura, and both are poisonous. The cylindrical 
 tuberous roots of Delphinium Jcashmerianum, Royle, found at Pindari 
 in Kumauu and Bhojgara on the south side of the Kawari pass in 
 Garhwal (11,000-14,000 feet), are absolutely identical with the 
 ordinary nirbisi roots. See Madden, An. Mag., N. H., 2nd Ser., 
 XVIII., 445. 
 
 Parmelia kamtschadalis, Esch.— Lichen— Chalchalira, pat- 
 tharke-phul. Several species are exported to the plains and are used 
 in native practice as a tonic febrifuge and antiperiodic. See Pharm., 
 
 260. 
 
 Peucedanum graveolens, Benth.-Dill-Soya ; described by 
 Clarke in Hooker, II., 709. An excellent carminative for relieving 
 flatulence in children. Pharm., 101. 
 
 Pharbitis Nil, Ghoisy — Baunra ; described by Drury (U. P., 
 350). A safe and effectual cathartic. Pharm., lo5. 
 
 Phyllanthus Emblica, Linn.— Amla, aonla; described by Bran- 
 dis 454. The dried fruit is astringent and when fresh is given as 
 a tonic aperient : the flowers are refrigerant and aperient and the 
 bark is astringent. See Pharm., 204, and O’Shaugh., 551 The 
 leaves of Paraphyllanthus urinaria ( serdhi ) and of Phyllanthus 
 niruri, Linn., are given in infusion as a diuretic and the fresh roots 
 
 of both in jaundice. See Drury. 
 
 94 
 
746 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Picrorhiza Kurrua, Roxb. — Kuruwa. Found only at high 
 elevations about 11,000-14,000 feet : the bitter roots are exported 
 with Saxifraga ligulata under the name pakhdn-bed , and with 
 Gentiana Kurroo under the name Mtki, to the extent of about three 
 tons a year and are used as a tonic. Nima quassioides occurs in 
 upper Grarhwal (5,500-8000 feet) and is known as Iccirivi and has 
 similar uses. 
 
 Pinus longifolia, Roxb. — Pine — CMr. This pine is very com- 
 mon in Kumaun and yields a turpentine and resin : for uses see 
 Pharm., 222, 219. The turpentine from P. Gerardiana is used 
 principally in special diseases, and that from P. JDeodara in 
 cutaneous diseases and as a diuretic. Pharm., 225. 
 
 Pistacia integerrima, j. L. S. — KaJcra, haTcra-singi ; describ- 
 ed by Hooker, II., 13. The gall-like excrescences formed on the 
 leaves and petioles in -October are exported as a medicine and are 
 esteemed useful in coughs, asthma, fever and dysentery, and as a 
 sedative. They occur black, hard, rugose, hollow, irregularly 
 crooked, often 6 '-7' long. The average annual export from the 
 Kumaun forest division is about seventy maunds, Brandis, 122, 
 574. 
 
 Pithecolobium bigemimim, Mart. — KaeMora ; described by 
 Brandis, 173. A decoction of the leaves is used in leprosy and as 
 a stimulant to promote the growth of hair. 
 
 Plantago major, Linn. — Luhuriya. It is doubtful whether this 
 has the properties of P. decumbens, Forsk., the isbaghol of the 
 bazars. Pharm., 182. 
 
 Plumbago zeylanica, Linn. — Chita, chitra ; described by Rox- 
 burgh, 155. The roots triturated in water form a vesicant and in 
 tincture a good antiperiodic : they are exported from the Kumaun 
 forest division to the extent of about twelve maunds annually. 
 Pharm., 170: O’Shaugh., 508. 
 
 Pongamia glabra, V ent. — Pdpar, SuTch-chain ; described by 
 Baker in Hooker, II., 240. The seeds yield an oil much used 
 in skin diseases and as an embrocation in rheumatism : the 
 leaves are also officinal. Pharm., 79, and J. Agri.-H., Cal., X., 
 
 223. 
 
 95 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 747 
 
 Pontedera vaginalis, Linn. — Nauka ; described by Drury 
 (U.P., 364). The root is chewed for toothache and the bark is 
 eaten with sugar for asthma. 
 
 Populus ciliata, Wall. — Chalniya , chauniya , chan , gar-pipal ; 
 described by Brandis, 475. It is occasionally used as a tonic 
 stimulant and purifier of the blood. 
 
 Portulaca oleracea, Linn. — Small purslain — Liiniya-Mlfah ; 
 described by Drury (U.P., 364). The bruised leaves are used as an 
 anodyne and are given as a refrigerant and antiscorbutic in 
 cutaneous diseases. Bird., 38. 
 
 Premna integrifolia, Linn. — Bakarcha of Garhwal ; described 
 by Drury (U.P., 365.) The root is given in decoction as a cor- 
 dial and tonic ; the leaves beaten up with pepper are also adminis- 
 tered in colds and fevers. The whole plant is given in decoction in 
 rheumatism and neuralgia. The milk of the bark of P. mucronata, 
 the agniun of Kumaun, is applied to boils and the juice is given to 
 cattle in colic. 
 
 Primula speciosa, Linn. — Bisli-kopra , jal-Mtra. It is found 
 along streams from 3,500-5,500 feet in Kumaun : it is said to 
 be poisonous to cattle and is used externally as an anodyne. 
 
 Prinsepia utilis, Royle. — Chirara, jhatela , dhatela, phalawa, 
 bheJcla; described by Hooker, II., 323. This shrub yields an oil 
 used as a rubefacient and as an application in rheumatism and pains 
 from over-fatigue : a small quantity is exported from the forests 
 and pays a duty of five rupees per maund. 
 
 Prunus Communis, var. domestica, Linn. — Prune. See page 
 712. The dried drupe is considered a laxative and emollient and is 
 used in medicinal confections. Pharm., 86. The alu-bukhdra is 
 used as a refrigerant and laxative both in a cold infusion and a con- 
 fection. P. persica — the peach — is given as a demulcent and anti- 
 scorbutic and stomachic. The oil from the kernels is considered a 
 valuable vermifuge and strengthener of the hair. The kernel of P. 
 Puddum is used in stone and gravel, and that of P. Padus yields a 
 poisonous oil, like oil of almonds, much used in medicinal preparations. 
 
 Psidium Guyava, Linn. — Guava — Amrud ; described by Baker 
 inHooker, II., 148. The bark of the root is given in decoction in 
 
748 
 
 hima'iayan districts. 
 
 infantile diarrhoea and the young leaves as a tonic in diseases of 
 the digestive functions. Pharm., 92. 
 
 Pueraria tuberosa, D.C.; Hedysarum tuberosum, Roxb. — 
 JBildi-kand , bill, birali-panwa (Kumaun), sural (Jaunsar), sarar, 
 sarwala (Bijnor); described by Baker in Hooker, II., 197. The 
 tubers are dug up and exported in large quantities to the plains, 
 where they are considered demulcent and refrigerant in fevers and 
 useful as a cataplasm for swollen joints. 
 
 Punica Granatum> Linn. —Pomegranate — Anar (cultivated) ; 
 ddrim (wild) ; naspal, kushiala (rind of fruit). The root-bark and 
 dried rind possess powerful astringent properties from the presence 
 of tannin. The former is considered anthelmintic in European 
 practice and the latter astringent. See Pharm., 93, 447. 
 
 Putranjiva Roxburghii, Wall. — Ji'iti, putrajiva; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 372). Given in decoction in colds and fevers. 
 
 Pyrus Cydcnia, Linn. — Quince — Bihi. See page 713, Cydonia 
 vulgaris. The seeds are used as a demulcent in native practice and 
 as a tonic ; also in decoction in dysentery and special diseases : 
 Pharm., 86. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quercus incana, Roxb. — Bdnj ; described by Brandis, 482. 
 The acorn ( sil-supdri ) washed and powdered is used as an astringent 
 in indigestion, diarrhoea, and asthma. Pharm., 209. 
 
 R. 
 
 Randia dumetorum, Law. — Mainphal, manydl, Icarhar ; des- 
 cribed by Drury (U. P., 373). The fruit is highly esteemed as an 
 emetic and is used to poison fish and the bark of the root in infusion 
 to nauseate. Pharm., 118. 
 
 Raphanns sativus, Linn. — Radish — Muli. The seeds of this 
 common vegetable have diuretic and laxative properties and the 
 roots are prescribed in native practice for special and urinary 
 diseases. 
 
 Rheum emodi, Wall. — Dolu. This species is found near the 
 Pindari glacier and at similar elevations in Kumaun and Garhwal ; 
 the average annual export from the Kumaun forest division is 
 about l,0C0tb. This and R. Webbianum, Royle, are used as a 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 749 
 
 substitute for Turkey rhubarb. R. emocli is less active as a pur- 
 gative and more spongy in texture. See Pharm., 187 : O’Shaugh., 
 519 : Panjab Products, 370 : J. A.-PI. Beng., I., 76 : Birdwood, 
 70 : Pereira Mat, Med., II., 485. 
 
 Rhododendron campanulatum, Don. — Chirw'd; described by 
 Brandis, 281. The leaves are exported to the plains, to be made 
 into a snuff called hulds-kashmiri , useful in colds and head- 
 aches. 
 
 Ricinus communis, Linn. — Castor bean — Rendi. This well- 
 known plant yields the medicinal oil used as a purgative, &c. 
 Pharm., 201, 462 : O’Slmugh., 556 : Drury (U. P., 375). 
 
 Roylea elegans, Wall. — Tit-patti , kauri. The leaves are used 
 as a bitter tonic febrifuge. 
 
 Rubia cordifolia, Linn. — Majethi. The natives consider the 
 roots most useful in cases of poisoning, cutaneous eruptions, dysen- 
 tery, and as a tonic to promote menstruation. Pharm., 118 : Drury 
 (U.P., 379). 
 
 RumOX acutUS, Roxb. — ■ Jangli pdlak ; described by Drury 
 (F. P., IIL, 49). This plant has cooling properties : the leaves 
 are applied to burns and the seeds are applied as the Uj-band of 
 the bazars. R . acetosa is also widely distributed and known under 
 the same vernacular name and also as ‘ Almora ,’ whence the name 
 of the capital of Kuraaun, as Mussooree is derived from the verna- 
 cular name of Coriaria nepalensis. 
 
 s. 
 
 Salix tetrasperma, Roxb. — Gar-byush ; described by Bran- 
 dis, 462. The bark in decoction is of some account as a febrifuge. 
 Pharm., 213 : O’Shaugh., 606. 
 
 Saxifraga ligulata, Wall. ; Var. ciliata , Royle. The roots of this 
 and perhaps P. Kurrua ( antea ) and G. Kurroo [anted) are all exported 
 to the plains as pdkhdn-bhed or pcithan-bhed and jintidna and are 
 used as a tonic in fevers and also in diarrhoea and coughs and as an 
 antiscorbutic. The average annual export from the Kumaun forest 
 division is about thirty maunds. 
 
 Sapindus detergens, Roxb. — Kanmar, ritha; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 393). The nut is used externally in cutaneous 
 
750 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 affections and internally in epilepsy and headache and as an ex- 
 pectorant ; also in the arts as a detergent. It is exported from the 
 Kumaun forest division to the extent of about twenty tons per 
 annum. 
 
 ScindapSus officinalis, Schott. — Ga,j-pipali , hcith-ungliya. The 
 dried and sliced fruit has stimulant, diaphoretic, and anthelmintic 
 virtues. Pharm., 250. 
 
 Semecarpns Anacardium, Linn., F. — Bhildwa, bhaliau, bhdla ; 
 described by Hooker, II., 30. The acrid viscid juice between the 
 laminae of the shell possesses powerful caustic properties and is used 
 as a vesicant : see further Pharm. 60 : K. Dey, 105. The average 
 annual expor from the Kumaun forest division is about five 
 maunds. 
 
 Sesamum indicum, Linn. — Till. See page 764. This plant 
 furnishes the sesamum or sweet oil, used as a substitute for olive 
 oil in native practice. Pharm., 151 : Drury (U. P. 402) : O’Shaugli., 
 479. 
 
 Sesbania segyptiaca, Pers. — Jcdnt; described by Baker in 
 Hooker, II., 114. The seeds have stimulant and emenagoguic pro- 
 perties and are used in cutaneous diseases and itch : the leaves are 
 used in poultices to promote suppuration, and the juice of the bark 
 internally as an antiscorbutic. 
 
 Shorea roblista, Roxb. — Sal ; described by Drury (U, P., 405). 
 The resin (rdl or dhamar ) is an efficient substitute for pine 
 resins in plasters : in native practice, the resin is taken internally 
 in special diseases and applied as a styptic to wounds. Pharm., 33. 
 
 Solanum indicum, Linn. — Katang-kari ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 408). The root is used in decoction in dysuiia and in fevers 
 and coughs: and when powdered as an anodyne. The juice of the 
 leaves boiled with ginger is used to stop nausea. Pharm., 181. 
 
 Solanum tuberosum, Linn. — Alu. The tubers are occasionally 
 used as a substitute for salep. 
 
 Solanum esculentum — Baigan, bhutta. See page 703. The 
 leaves possess narcotic properties : nearly every species of this 
 
 genus in Kumaun affords some aid to the native Materia Medica. 
 Pharm., 181, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 751 
 
 Spondias mangifera, Pers.— Hog-plum— Ambara ; described 
 by Hooker, II., 42. Tlie bark is used in dysentery and a decoc- 
 tion of tlie wood in special diseases ; tbe juice of the leaves forms 
 an application in earache and the gum and fruit are eaten. 
 
 Sterculia urens, Roxb.— Kuli, lulu ; described by Masters in 
 Hooker, I., 355. The leaves and tender branches steeped in water 
 yield a mucilaginous extract useful in pleuro-pneumonia in cattle. 
 
 Streblus asper, Lour. — Sihora, rusa; described by Drury 
 (U.P., 211). The milky juice is applied to cracked heels, sore 
 hands, and has astringent and septic qualities. The bark in 
 decoction is given as a lotion in fevers. 
 
 Symplocos cratcegoides, Ham. — Lod, lodh ; described by 
 Brandis, 299. The leaves are considered astringent and are used 
 in diarrhoea and as an application to fresh wounds and the bark 
 in tanning. About nine tons are exported every year from the 
 Kumaun forest division. 
 
 T. 
 
 Taxus baccata, Linn.— Yew— TMner, brdhmi ; described by 
 Brandis, 539. The leaves are used in native practice in epilepsy 
 and indigestion. 
 
 Tephrosia purpurea, Pers. — Sarphonla ; described by Baker in 
 Hooker, II., 123. The leaves^and seeds possess astringent, tonic, 
 febrifugal properties. The leaves of T. Candida , the lelitiya of 
 Kumaun, are used to poison fish. 
 
 Terminalia Chebula, Retz. — H&r ; described by Drury (U.P., 
 431). This and other species of the same genus yield nuts much 
 used in medicine and the arts. See Pharm. b9 . Iv. L. Dey, 117 . 
 Birdwood, 34. 
 
 Tetranthera laurifolia, Jacq .— Gar bijaur , meda-lakri; 
 described by Brandis, 379. The oil from the berries is used in 
 rheumatism ; the bark triturated in water or milk, or even dry, is 
 applied to bruises and is given internally in infusion in diarrhoea ; 
 the leaves have a rich aromatic odour. Pharm., 88 : O’ Shaugh., 548. 
 
 Thalictrum foliolosum, D.C .-Pila-jari, pengla-jari, barmat ; 
 described by Hooker /. and Thomson in Hooker, I., 14. The roots 
 are exported from Kumaun under the name mamira and are highly 
 alued in ophthalmia and as an antiperiodic. Pharm., 5. 
 
752 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 Tinospora COrdifolia, Miers — Gulancha ; described by Hooker 
 /• and Thomson in Hooker, I., 97. The stems yield the well-known 
 extract known as gulancha or giloi, a much-esteemed specific in 
 stings as well as infever and rheumatism. The leaves bruised and 
 mixed with honey are applied to ulcers, with oil to the head in 
 neuralgic affections, and in decoction for gout. The extract is 
 made from the root by boiling for twelve hours and then strain- 
 ing and evaporating the water. The annual average export of 
 the extract from the Kumaun forest division is about two maunds. 
 Pharm., 9, 435. 
 
 Toddalia aculeata, Pers . — Kauj ; described by Hooker, I., 
 497. The root-bark has tonic, stimulant, and anti-periodic pro- 
 perties. Pharm., 47, 442. 
 
 Tricliodesma indica, R. Rr. — Ratmandi. The natives con- 
 sider it to be an antidote in snake-bites ; the leaves are used as a 
 poultice and in cold infusion as a purifier of the blood. Pharm. 
 158. 
 
 TricllOSanth.es palmata? Roxb . — Indray an; described by 
 Clarke in Hooker, II., fi06. The roots and fruit are poisonous and 
 are used in pleuro-pneumonia in cattle. Pharm., 9fi. T. cucum- 
 erina, Linn., gives seeds, tender shoots, and dried capsules, all of 
 which are used as medicine. O’Shaugh., 351. 
 
 Trigonella Fcenum-grsecum, Roxb.— Fenugreek — Methi ; 
 described by Baker in Hooker, II., 87. The seeds are stimulant, 
 aromatic, and laxative, and are given in colds, coughs, diarrhoea, 
 and special diseases. 
 
 Typha angustifolia, Linn. 13oro. The down of the ripe fruit 
 is used as an application to burns and the lower succulent parts 
 of the stem to clear muddy water. 
 
 IT. 
 
 Urgmea indica, Kunth. ; Scilla indica, Roxb — hUl, Undn or 
 
 “ ld ffh ‘ SUWa ° f Kuma ™ ; described by Drury 
 (U. P., 399). It is exported largely from the lower hills. The 
 nauseous bitter young bulbous roots have expectorant and diuretic 
 
 proper les in small doses, and in large doses they are emetic and 
 cathartic. Pharm., 211 : K. L . Dey> U)L 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 753 
 
 V. 
 
 Vallaris dichotoma, Wall . — Duclhi; described by Drury (P. F. 
 II., 198). The juice is applied to wounds. 
 
 Valeriana Hardwickii, Wall. — Shumeo, asdrun. The roots 
 are exported and are said to possess anti-spasmodic properties : 
 when dry they are burned as a perfume, and are also used as a 
 flavoring agent and to keep off insects from clothes. Pharm., 120. 
 
 Vernonia anthelmintica, Willd . — Kali-jiri; described by 
 Drury (U. P., 449). The bitter seeds are powerfully diuretic 
 and anthelmintic and are given in infusion in coughs and 
 flatulency. Powdered and mixed with lime-juice they are used 
 to expel vermin from the head, and mixed with oil in scabies and 
 anasarca and in plasters for abscesses. Pharm., 126. 
 
 Viola serpens, Wall. — Thungtu, banafsha ; described by Baker 
 in Hooker, II., 184. The flowers are considered diaphoretic and 
 laxative : the seeds are diuretic and the root emetic (like ipeca- 
 cuanha) and purgative (Brown). 
 
 Vitex Negundo, Linn. — Shiivdli, simdli, filjil-bdri (fruit) ; 
 described by Drury (U. P., 452). The root and fruit have anodyne, 
 diuretic, and emenagoguic properties, and the leaves are given in 
 colic. Exported from Kumaun. Pharm., 163 : O’Shaugh., 484. 
 
 ’ W- 
 
 Withania somnifera, Don .—Asgand (root); described by Dru- 
 ry (U. P., 355)- The leaves are bitter and narcotic and are used 
 • n i n f us ion in fever : the seeds coagulate milk and the roots are 
 aphrodisiac and diuretic. Pharm., 182 : O’Shaugh., 466. The 
 seeds of W. coagulans, Don., have also sedative properties and 
 are given in colic. Both are exported from Kumaun. 
 
 Woodfordia floribimda, Salis. ; Grislea tomentosa , Roxb. — 
 Dhaula, dhdi ; described by Clarke in Hooker, II., 572. The dried 
 flowers are used as an astringent tonic in affections of the mucous- 
 membrane, hoemorrhoids, and bilious complaints. The leaves are 
 also officinal in native practice. Exported from Kumaun. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zanthoxylum alatum, Roxb .—Tejbal, timi'ir ; Sansk. jwardn- 
 tika, 1 fever ender ; described by Hooker /. and Thomson in 
 
754 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Hooker, I., 193. The bark and seeds are used in native practice 
 as a tonic in fevers and bowel complaints : the small branches 
 are used as toothbrushes and the thorns as an application in 
 toothache : the fruit is used to intoxicate fish. Supposed to 
 possess generally stomachic and carminative properties. The 
 average annual export from the Kumaun forest division is about 
 half a maund. Pharm., 48. 
 
 Zingiber officinale, Ros. — Ginger — Adrak, sonth. This well- 
 known plant yields the ginger of commerce, extensively used in 
 medicinal preparations. See Pharm., 228. 
 
 B- -NARCOTICS AND SPIRITS. 
 
 Tobacco, opium, hemp, and the preparations made from them, are 
 the principal vegetable substances used for their narcotic and intoxi- 
 cating properties in these provinces, but to them we may add the 
 various forms of alcohol obtained by distillation and the prepara- 
 tions of betel and areca. The use of tobacco in the plains is universal 
 amongst males from their twelfth year, and the practice has so far 
 entered into the social arrangements of the people that few matters 
 of importance are discussed without the Tiukka being passed around. 
 In the hills tobacco-smoking is becoming more common every year, 
 and now, perhaps, all except a few Brahman families smoke tobacco 
 either pure or mixed, and these even chew the leaf pounded with lime, 
 a practice common to every caste. Opium is principally consumed 
 by Musalmans, and its use in the hills is very limited. The prepara- 
 tions of hemp are in great request amongst Hindus, and are much 
 indulged in by Jogis and others of the wandering religious mendi- 
 cant classes. Spirits are consumed chiefly by the lower castes of 
 Hindus. Brahmans and Baniyas profess to hold it in abhorrence, 
 and the use of it is forbidden to Musalmans by the Koran. As a 
 general rule these restrictions are observed, but still there are very 
 many individuals of these classes who openly disregard the rules of 
 their religion and many more who do so in secret. The statistics 
 derived from the Excise Department would otherwise be inexplicable. 
 Still, taking into account the quantities of opium, hemp, and spirits 
 that must be consumed in a country like India without paying any 
 license or contributing in any way to the revenue, there is only a 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 755 
 
 moderate consumption on the whole. It has often been observed 
 that you may pass through any fair or assembly, except during the 
 Diwali, the Hindu carnival, without seeing a drunken man, and there 
 can be no doubt but that the consumption is very small and quite 
 insufficient in the hills, at least, to have much effect upon the public 
 health. Although hemp is produced in such quantities in Garhwal 
 and Kumaun, the preparations from it are not a favourite form of 
 intoxication in the hills and are seldom used by the permanent 
 inhabitants. 
 
 Tobacco. 
 
 Uicotiana Tabacum, Linn. Tobacco — Tcimdku, clhamoku. 
 
 Tobacco is raised in large quantities in the forest clearings along 
 
 the foot of the hills, where the conditions 
 Tobacco. necessary — a rich alluvial soil, warmth, and 
 
 abundance of manure — exist. The last is furnished by the cattle 
 which are sent there for grazing in immense numbers from Novem- 
 ber until May. In the Garhwal Bhabar the cultivation of tobacco 
 is carried on by men of the gardener caste from the plains, who 
 remain long enough to plant and gather the crop. The indige- 
 nous Bhuksas of these parts consider that they are prevented 
 by their caste rules from growing tobacco, or rather are too in- 
 dolent to undertake its cultivation. Further east all classes 
 cultivate the plant, and great quantities are exported to the 
 plains from the Kumaun Bhabar and the Tarai. The quality of 
 the leaf is not so delicate as that of the better sorts of the plains 
 varieties, but the quantity produced from a given area is greatly in 
 excess of that raised elsewhere. In the hills, a far superior variety 
 is cultivated from Jaunsar to the Kali, but not in quantity sufficient 
 to be of much commercial importance. That grown on both banks 
 of the Alaknanda near Srinagar in Garhwal is specially esteemed. 
 The Kumaun vernacular names above given represent two varie- 
 ties, N. Tabacum and the N. rustica or Latakia, which latter 
 seems to have been grown in the hills from time immemorial, and 
 when carefully prepared is palatable to Europeans. Dr. Stewart, 
 writing of its cultivation in the western Himalaya, states that 
 “ more of it than of the ordinary kind can be grown per acre, 
 especially as in many places the flowers are not plucked off, but 
 are mixed with the leaves for smoking, and it brings in a greater 
 
756 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 price than the ordinary species. It is said to be much stronger 
 than the latter and to be generally smoked mixed with a large 
 proportion of it. Its qualities when smoked in the European pipe 
 give assurance that, if properly cured, it would rival Turkish 
 tobacco.” Some efforts have been made lately by Mr. E. C. Buck 
 to improve tobacco cultivation in Kumaun, but the experiments 
 have failed and their history will be found in the annual report of 
 the Department of Agriculture and Commerce. 
 
 The Sikhs, Wahabis, and certain Hindu sectaries are forbidden 
 the use of tobacco by their religious guides, but the first console 
 themselves with the preparations of hemp and the second use 
 opium. The earliest mode of procuring and inhaling the smoke 
 was to make two holes in the ground, in one of which the fire and 
 tobacco were placed and a pipe connected the two. The smoker 
 then crouched on the ground and sucked the smoke through the 
 second hole. This method may still be seen in the hills. 
 Another mode was to twist a leaf and smoke through the 
 narrow end, still a favourite with coolies in the hills. An improve- 
 ment was then effected by drawing the smoke through a bambu, 
 and thus avoid the uncomfortable crouching position, and eventually 
 the hukka was invented. The cocoanut served as the first form 
 of the hukka, and though metal is now used for the receptacle for 
 water and the original form has been modified, the cocoanut 
 is still the basis of all the forms of the hukka from the elaborate 
 and costly pechicdn of the nobleman to the simple pipe of the cooly. 
 Musalmans seem to affect those hukkas that have stands, whilst 
 Hindus adopt the round or oval shape, which are fitted chiefly to 
 pass from hand to hand. In the plains tobacco is seldom smoked 
 in its pure state ( sacla ), but is mixed with from a half to an equal 
 weight of molasses, either of the sort known as gtir or that known 
 as shira, to which a little saji, or impure carbonate of soda, is added. 
 In the interior of the hills, however, the pure leaf is generally the 
 only sort procurable, but in the principal bazars the fashionable 
 mixtures may be obtained. One of these in high repute amongst 
 the wealthy is known as khamera and consists of a certain quan- 
 tity of tobacco of the Latakias sort, to which is added the sence of 
 the Pandanus odoratissimus or keora ; the dried leaves of the musk- 
 plant, Delphinium hrunonianum ; sandal-wood dust ; a conserve 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 757 
 
 of roses known as gi'cl-kand ; the fruit of the Zizyphus jujuba ; 
 apple-preserve, cardamoms, and the wilted leaves and stems of the 
 betel palm known as pdnri , in certain proportions kept secret by 
 each maker and which form his particular brand or manufacture. 
 Snuffing tobacco, though not unknown, is rarely seen. Its use, 
 however, as one of the ingredients of ‘betel’ should perhaps come 
 under the head of chewing. 
 
 Opium. 
 
 Papaver somniferum, Linn. — Poppy — Post, posta; juice of the 
 
 capsule, opium ; afydn, afim. A plant be- 
 0lUU11, longing to the natural order Papaveracece. 
 
 The cultivation of the poppy is a Government monopoly and is 
 chiefly confined to the plains. The capsules, whilst immature, 
 yield by incision a juice which on solidification is known as the 
 opium of commerce. When ripe or dried they yield an intoxica- 
 ting liquor by inspissation. The use of the drug was known to the 
 ancients, and some say that it was the pharmakon nepenthes of 
 Homer. Dr. Royle considers that it was introduced into India 
 from Persia, and in this suggestion he may, perhaps, be correct, 
 as the common names for opium are of Persian origin. The Ain-i- 
 AJcbciri refers to theo pium monopoly in Sirkars Kora (Fatehpur 
 district), Allahabad, and Ghazipur in the time of Akbar, and we 
 know that from time immemorial the opium poppy has been culti- 
 vated in Nepal and Kumaun. 
 
 The three principal preparations of poppy in use are the abkari 
 or excise opium, madak and chondu. The first is supplied from the 
 Ghazipur factory and is sold at the rate of sixteen rupees per seer 
 of eighty tolas. As a rule, abJcari opium is taken in the form of pills, 
 but many soak the preparation in water for some hours and drink 
 the solution thus formed, leaving the impurities at the bottom of 
 the cup : very moderate consumers take about one tola or 180 
 grains Troy or 11 -6 6 2 grammes per month, and the average con- 
 sumption of habitual opium-eaters may be set down at five tolas 
 each per mensem. In some cases as much as two tolas a day are 
 taken boiled in milk. Opium-smoking has of late years increased 
 very much in these provinces. The results are the same as iu 
 other countries, the drug inducing stupor, reverie, and voluptuous 
 
758 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 listlessness. Still the individual can easily be roused to business, and, 
 unless taken in excess, the effects are not more injurious or lasting 
 than those attendant upon a too liberal indulgence in spirituous 
 liquors. The temptations to excess are, perhaps, stronger in the 
 case of opium, and with over-indulgence come sickness, consti- 
 pation, indigestion, want of appetite, emaciation, impotency, and 
 premature old age. In small doses as far as one grain, opium 
 when eaten acts as a stimulant, increases the pulse in strength and 
 frequency, and excites the mind by a happy train of thought. It 
 is believed to promote digestion, and for this purpose it is taken 
 usually in the afternoon or evening, so that its effect may come on 
 before the time for the evening meal. This condition is however 
 succeeded by drowsiness, thirst and loss of appetite, and the habitual 
 eater then increases his dose, when after a smoke of tobacco from 
 the hukka the excitement again begins and is followed by a period 
 of stupor and eventually a profound sleep, “ the pupils are slightly 
 contracted, the pulse slow and full, the breathing slow, and the 
 temperature of the body somewhat increased.” Beyond four 
 grains to healthy persons not accustomed to opium it may be consi- 
 dered to act as a poison. Milk is taken by opium-eaters to keep 
 the bowels open, and as in the case of lhang and, indeed, spirits 
 when once the habit of using the drug has been fixed, it is almost 
 impossible to shake it off. Kahars and men who have much trying 
 physical labour to get through in a short space of time can, fre- 
 quently, take large doses without apparent injury . 1 
 
 Madak and chandu are forms of opium extensively used in these 
 
 provinces. In preparing them the opium 
 
 Madak and chandu . # 1 
 
 is first reduced to a watery extract, which is 
 then strained two or three times through cloth and afterwards boiled 
 over a slow fire until it thickens somewhat. The impurities left in 
 the process of straining are again washed and strained two or three 
 times to extract any portions of the active principle which may 
 remain. The refuse, called joga , is then thrown away and the resi- 
 duum of pure extract of opium that remains is called Teimam and 
 forms the basis of both madak and chandu. One ser of excise 
 opium yields a little more than half a ser of kimam. To make 
 
 1 I am indebted to several sources, official and private, for these notes on opium 
 and hemp. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 759 
 
 madaJc, the leaves of the guava, pdn, or, in some cases, the rose are 
 collected and cut into very fine pieces and then boiled in water. 
 When they become soft they are strained in a cloth and dried and 
 then fried on an iron pan over a slow fire. These leaves thus pre- 
 pared are called jesa, and equal quantities of jesu and kimam form 
 madak. This preparation is made up into small pills about the size 
 of a pea, which sell in the retail shops for a pice each. The consu- 
 mer buys these pills, breaks one of them into six to twelve parts, 
 which are called 1 chittas each of which serves for one operation or 
 whiff. The ordinary hukka is used, hut the chillam or upper portion 
 for receiving the drug and fire is much smaller. The cMtta is 
 placed on the cliillam and lighted by a charcoal pencil, and the smoke 
 is taken inwards in one inspiration and swallowed. The result is 
 considerable pleasurable excitement, which as it begins to wear off 
 is renewed by consuming another chitta until satiety is produced. 
 One pill is sufficient to intoxicate a new smoker, but many consume 
 a dozen pills with impunity. 
 
 The basis of chandu is the same Jcimam from which madak is 
 
 made, but instead of leaves the half-burned 
 ashes of the chittas of madak are mixed with 
 the kimam in equal quantities and the resulting compound is called 
 chandu. For this preparation there is a particular pipe made of 
 wood and about twelve to fifteen inches long. A small brass or tin 
 bowl is fixed towards one end and communicates with the stem by 
 a small aperture. The chandu formed into a paste and made up 
 into pills is placed in the bowl, and this is lighted from a lamp and 
 gives a gurgling noise while burning. The smoker reclines on a 
 pillow with his eyes closed, and the pipe is lighted by an attendant 
 and refilled when necessary. Like the madak- smoker, the chandu- 
 smoker takes in all the smoke arising from one application of the 
 chandu by one deep inspiration and swallows it. After every inspi- 
 ration there must be a rest, and the heated tongue is moistened by 
 chewing sugarcane or by the application of a rag moistened in 
 sherbet. Two or three applications are sufficient to affect a beginner, 
 but there are many who can doze away over pipes of chandu the 
 whole day. The effect of madak and chandu smoking is equally 
 pernicious with opium-eating, with this difference that intoxication 
 
700 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 supervenes at a much earlier period, because the smoke containing 
 the active principle of the opium is directly absorbed by the blood 
 in the lungs, and being carried into the circulation acts, at once, on 
 the brain ; whilst in eating opium the process of solution, absorption, 
 and digestion is much slower. Muhammadans are by far the greater 
 smokers and eaters of opium as compared with the Hindus, and they 
 make up by indulgence in this vice for the prohibition of spirituous 
 liquors. Love of sexual intercourse has much to do with inordinate 
 indulgence in opium, and for a time, like the preparations of hemp, 
 it acts as a powerful aphrodisiac, but in the end it induces impotency 
 and leaves the opium-drunkard a physical and moral wreck, utterly 
 careless for the present or the future and a mere semblance of a 
 human machine. 
 
 Hemp. 
 
 Cannabis sativa, Linn. — Hemp — Gdr-bhanga (female plant), 
 phul-bhanga (male plant). (See Fibres posted.) 
 
 The principal parts of the hemp that are used as intoxicating 
 ^ agents are the char as, gdnja and bhang , or 
 
 sabji and their preparations. The best charas 
 is obtained from the female plant and consists of a resinous exu- 
 dation from the leaves, stems and seeds when ripe, and is collected 
 from them by rubbing them in the hands or on the naked thigh 
 or by scraping the resin from the plant with a blunt iron knife. 
 The quantity and quality of this resin differs with the soil and 
 locality. In some places the plant developes a woody tissue, whilst 
 in others the bark splits and a resin is secreted. In the plains 
 in many places the hemp plant yields excellent gdnja , but 
 neither charas nor bhang ; and again in the hills the charas is the 
 principal product. The best qualities of charas are imported from 
 Yarkand, Bukhara, and Afghanistan. In former times only the pure 
 resin collected by the scraping process was imported, but now a sys- 
 tem of manufacture has sprung up by which a much larger return 
 is effected. When the plants have arrived at maturity, which is 
 known by the bark commencing to split, they are cut down and 
 soaked in water and when well moistened the resinous juice is 
 pressed out. This is then boiled and reduced to the consistence of 
 a paste, in which form it is imported by the Afghan fruit-sellers. It 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 761 
 
 contains, in addition to the resin, much of the juice of the plant, its 
 colouring matter and other foreign substances, and is altogether 
 inferior to the resin collected by the old scraping process. The 
 Kabulis sell this preparation to the contractors at about one and a 
 half rupee per ser, and they again to the licensed vendors at fiom 
 four to five rupees per seer, and the latter retail it at about two chhcit- 
 tdks for a rupee or eight rupees a seer. The drug is consumed 
 in the following manner : — About the weight of a two-anna silver 
 piece or 22 grains Troy is taken and covered up with twice its 
 weight of prepared tobacco in the shape of a ball. This is dried 
 over a charcoal fire, and during the process the charas melts inside. 
 The dried ball is then reduced to powder and mixed with tobacco 
 is placed on the chillam of an ordinary cocoanut huJcka and smoked 
 in the same way as tobacco. Charas seems to be a mildei foim 
 of the drug than gdnja and is used by the better class of people 
 and those who do not care for intoxication pure and simple. 
 
 GXnja. 
 
 Ganja consists of the dried flower heads and smaller leaves from 
 
 which the resin has not been removed. It 
 Gdn J a - yields to alcohol twenty per cent, of resinous 
 
 extract composed of the resin ( charas ) and green colouring matter. 
 Distilled with a large quantity of water traces of essential oil pass 
 over, highly odoriferous of the drug. The colour of the bundles of 
 gdnja is dusky green, the odour narcotic and the touch adhesive. 
 The gdnja produced iu Kumaun and Garhwal is considered of 
 little value and is not, so far as I am aware, expoited. The 
 gdnja consumed locally is imported from the lower districts. Two 
 sorts of gdnja are sold in these provinces the patten and the 
 biluchar. The pattar is imported chiefly from Holkar’s territories 
 and is of quality inferior to the Bengal gdnja. It is purchased 
 at from five to six rupees per maund in Indur in the rough 
 state, including the stalks and useless leaves, and also pays a duty 
 of about four annas per maund on exportation to British territory. 
 The farmer of the drug revenue pays the cost of carriage and sells 
 it to the licensed retail vendors at from Bs. 20 to Us. 22 per maund. 
 The retail sellers separate the real gdnja from the rough plant and 
 throw away the refuse, which amounts to from five-eighths to 
 
 96 
 
7 62 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 two— thirds of the whole, or in one raaund of rough plant only 
 thirteen to fifteen sers of real gdnja will be found. This sells at 
 from three to four rupees per ser, and about one quarter of a ser 
 will form a month’s supply for an ordinary smoker. This pattar 
 ganga is chiefly consumed by the lower classes of Hindus, and espe- 
 cially by all the mendicant sects of Bairagis, Nagas, Sanyasis, &c. 
 
 The biluchar variety is imported from Lower Bengal and is far 
 superior to the pattar. It is grown in the Rajshalii district and sells 
 there in the rough at from Us. 18 to Rs. 22 per maund. The Ben- 
 gal Government charge a duty of from Rs. 2 to Rs. 2-8 per ser, or 
 Rs. 100 per maund, on all exports of gdnja to these provinces. The 
 farmers of the drug revenue separate the real gdnja from the rough 
 plant and sell to the licensed retail vendors at tromRs. 10 to Rs. 12 
 per ser, and the latter retail the drug at one rupee per chhatak 
 (loz. 17dwt. 12grs. Troy), so that Bengal gdnja is as dear as excise 
 opium in these provinces. One or two chliataks are sufficient 
 for a month’s consumption to an ordinary smoker. The Bengal 
 gdnja is much stronger than the pattar variety, so that a much 
 smaller quantity produces the same result. It is used only by the 
 better classes, being the more expensive of the two. Gdnja is not 
 in general used so much as tobacco. Kahars when they complete a 
 portion of their journey often take it as a stimulant, and others 
 with weak digestions smoke a little before a meal to excite a feeling 
 of hunger and promote digestion. It may serve as a stimulant for 
 the time, but its after-effects are lassitude and depression. Gdnja is 
 also used as a sedative to promote sleep, which it does after an 
 interval of excitement by intoxication. 
 
 Gdnja is prepared for smoking by taking a portion of the dried 
 leaves, say 20 grains in weight, in the palm of the left hand; these 
 are rubbed with the right thumb, a few drops of water being added 
 to moisten it. Then an equal quantity of dry but soft tobacco leaf is 
 added, and the whole is formed into a paste. This is then cut into 
 thin layers with a knife and again rubbed and pressed into a paste 
 with more water. The compound when well mixed is again sliced ? 
 and the process is continued tw r o or three times until the gdnja and 
 tobacco are thoroughly amalgamated. It is then smeared with the 
 fingers over a very narrow, small, earthen chillam , and a small cake 
 
 97 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 763 
 
 of lighted charcoal is placed on the top. The chillam is placed on 
 the ordinary hukka, consisting of a hollow wooden cylinder fitted 
 into a dry cocoanut shell which is half full of water ; another cylin 
 der attached to the middle of the cocoanut forms the stem through 
 which the smoke is swallowed. Gdnja smokers are, as a rule, sociable, 
 and the pipe is passed around after each one has had one good pull at 
 it. Each smoker swallows the smoke, which conveys the active prin- 
 ciple in that form to the lungs and stomach. With strong Bengal 
 gdnja it is difficult to retain all the smoke inspired at a single time, 
 and a cough usually interrupts the operation. This custom is as 
 much due to economical considerations as to good-fellowship, foi no 
 one could smoke time after time and the gdnja keeps burning away 
 all the same. One dose of gdnja is quite sufficient to give a moder- 
 ate feeling of intoxication to four or five persons. To those unac- 
 customed to it a single inspiration produces giddiness and even 
 stupor for a time, whilst habitual smokers can take their turn fox 
 half an hour. Heaviness, laziness and agreeable reveries ensue, but 
 the person can be readily roused and perform routine duties. As in 
 the case of opium, gdnja is often made use of as an aphrodisiac. 
 
 Bhang. 
 
 Bhang comprises the larger leaves and capsules of the hemp 
 without the stalks. In these provinces there 
 are three varieties of bhang in common use, viz., 
 the Hard war bhang which comes from Garhwal, the Oudh which 
 comes from the Gonda district, and the Panjabi which comes from 
 Jalandhar. Of these the Oudh variety is the strongest and there- 
 fore the best, so much so that one part of it intoxicates as quickly 
 as two parts of the other varieties. The bhang -'g r o d uc ing hemp 
 grows wild and is sold in the rough with the stalks and refuse 
 leaves at about one rupee per maund in the producing distucts, hut 
 to this must he added the cost of carriage. The farmer of the 
 drug revenue sells the cleaned plant to the licensed vendors at from 
 ten to fifteen rupees per maund according to the distance from the 
 base of supply. The latter retail the drug to consumers at eight annas 
 per ser or Rs. 20 per maund. The names sabji and siclhi are, also, 
 applied to bhang in its gree i state, and mdjvm is a conserve of 
 bhang which is noticed hereafter. 
 
764 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Bhang is prepared for use by soaking the dried leaves for a 
 time in cold water and carefully washing and freeing them from all 
 sorts of impurities, such as dust, seed, kunkur, and the stalks and 
 stems. The leaves are then bruised in a mortar or on a flat stone 
 and made into a thick paste. The paste is then ready for use, and 
 when required is diluted with water according to taste and the so- 
 lution is drunk. Many persons mingle spices with the paste 
 during the pounding operation, such as black pepper-corns, aniseed, 
 cloves, cardamoms, sugar, and melon and cucumber seeds, but 
 the pepper forms the pi’incipal ingredient. An ordinary drinker 
 will consume one ser of bhang or eight annas worth per mensem. 
 Most Hindus who do not indulge in wine, such as Brahmans, Ba- 
 niyas and the like, take bhang. It is the special drug of the Hindu 
 mendicant classes as madak is affected by the Musalman fakirs. The 
 Chaubes of Muttra, the Pragwals of Allahabad, and the Gangapu- 
 tras of Benares, are noted for their indulgence in excessive bhang- 
 drinking. In the Panjab, the Bhangi misl, or sub-division of the 
 great Sikh confederacy, was so called from the real or fancied fond- 
 ness of its members for the use of the drug. Bhang taken in 
 moderate quantities is exhilarating and tonic : it creates an appetite 
 and promotes digestion. In large doses, when the intoxication is 
 severe, its effects are very remarkable : the patient is raised to a 
 state of ecstacy and cares neither for his own life nor the lives of 
 others. Sometimes he cries in a delirium of joy and then again 
 breaks out into exulting laughter. Even in moderate doses its 
 effects are noteworthy. Dr. O’Shaughnessy made several experi- 
 ments to ascertain the effects of the drug on men and animals, and 
 in the course of them several of his pupils commenced experiments 
 on themselves which are thus reported : — “ In all, the state of the 
 pulse was noted before taking a dose, and subsequently the effects 
 were observed by two pupils of much intelligence. The result of 
 several trials was that in as small doses as the quarter of a grain, 
 the pulse was increased in fulness and frequency ; the surface of 
 the body glowed ; the appetite became extraordinary ; vivid ideas 
 crowded the mind ; unusual loquacity occurred ; and with scarcely 
 any exception great aphrodisia was experienced. In one pupil, 
 Diuonath Dhar, a retiring lad of excellent habits, ten drops of the 
 tincture, equal to a quarter of a grain of the resin, induced in 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 765 
 
 twenty minutes the most amusing effects. A shout of loud ancl 
 prolonged laughter ushered in the symptoms, and a transitory 
 state of cataleptic rigidity occurred for two or three minutes. 
 Summoned to witness the effects, we found him enacting the part 
 of a Raja giving orders to his courtiers ; he could recognize 
 none of his fellow-students or acquaintances ; all to his mind 
 seemed as altered as his own condition ; he spoke of many years 
 having passed since his student’s days ; described his teachers 
 and friends with a piquancy which a dramatist would envy ; 
 detailed the adventures of an imaginary series of years, his tra- 
 vels, his attainment of wealth and power. He entered on discus- 
 sions on religious, scientific, and political topics with astonishing 
 eloquence, and disclosed an extent of knowledge, reading, and a 
 ready apposite wit which those who knew him best were alto- 
 gether unprepared for. For three hours and upwards he main- 
 tained the character he at first assumed, and with a degree of 
 ease and dignity perfectly becoming his high situation. A scene 
 more interesting it would be difficult to imagine. It termina- 
 ted nearly as abruptly as it commenced, and no headache, sick- 
 ness, or other unpleasant symptom followed the innocent excess.- 
 Dr. Groodeve and more than thirty students were present at this 
 occurrence. In the symptoms above described, we are unavoidably 
 led to trace a close resemblance to the effects produced by the' 
 reputed inspiration of the Delphic Oracles ; perhaps it would not be 
 very erroneous to conclude that it was referable to the same kind of 
 excitement.” 
 
 MXjum. 
 
 Majwm or conserve of bhang is a preparation much affected by 
 
 the better classes. In one maund of jndjum, 
 Mdjum. ag used in these provinces, there are three 
 
 sers of bhang , two sers of ghi or clarified butter, and thirty-five 
 sers of sugar. It is prepared in this way : — take three sers of 
 clean bhang and soak it for a night in cold water ; next morning 
 take out the bhang wash it well and put it into a basket, to allow 
 the water to drain off. Then place a large shallow iron-pan on a 
 slow fire and throw into it about two and a half sers of good ghi. 
 When this melts and begins to boil throw into it the bhang and fry 
 it until it becomes crisp. Then add water and boil for some hours 
 
766 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 until the bhang becomes soft and pulpy. Then strain through a 
 cloth and pound in a mortar until a paste is made. You next take 
 a maund of sugar and put it in the pan, adding a sufficient quan- 
 tity of water to melt it. The sugar is then boiled, and while boiling 
 is clarified with milk ; when properly purified the bhang paste is 
 added in small quantities at a time and carefully stirred to ensure 
 its mixing with the sugar. When thoroughly amalgamated, the 
 compound is taken out and spread on flat brass plates about an 
 inch thick, and when this hardens by drying, it is cut into small 
 square pieces with a knife. The quantity of ghi and bhang make 
 up for the loss in clarifying the sugar, and the result is one maund 
 of indjum. The confection costs about Rs. 18 to 20 per maund and 
 is sold to the licensed vendors at Rs. 40 per maund, and these 
 latter retail it at one pice per square to their customers . Two 
 squares are sufficient to produce a moderate amount of intoxica- 
 tion to an ordinary person. People seldom get used to taking 
 majum daily, and it is generally taken for purposes of pleasure 
 and as an excitant to debauch. 
 
 Another mode of preparation is as follows : — Four ounces of 
 siclhi and an equal quantity of ghi are placed in an earthen or well- 
 tinned vessel, a pint of water is added, and the whole is then warmed 
 over a charcoal fire. The mixture is constantly stirred until the water 
 all boils away, which is known by the crackling noise of the melted 
 butter on the sides of the vessel ; the mixture is then removed from 
 the fire, squeezed through cloth while hot, by which an oleaginous 
 solution of the active principle and colouring matter of the hemp is 
 obtained, and the leaves, fibres, &c,, remaining on the cloth are 
 thrown away. The green oily solution soon concretes into a 
 buttery mass, and is then well washed by the hand with soft watei 
 so long as the water becomes coloured. The colouring matter and an 
 extractive substance are thus removed, and a very pale green mass, 
 of the consistence of simple ointment, remains. The washings aie 
 thrown away, for if used they are intoxicating and produce constiic- 
 tion of the throat, great pain, and very disagreeable and dangerous 
 symptoms. The operator then takes two pounds of sugai, and 
 adding a little water, places it in a pipkin over the fire. When 
 the sugar dissolves and froths, two ounces of milk are added , a 
 thick scum rises and is removed, more milk and a little water aie 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES* 
 
 767 
 
 added from time to time, and the boiling continued about an hour, 
 the solution being carefully stirred until it becomes an adhesive 
 syrup, ready to solidify on a cold surface ; four ounces oi new 
 milk, dried before the sun, in fine powder are now stirred in, and 
 lastly the prepared butter of hemp is introduced, brisk stirring 
 being continued for a few minutes. A few drops of atar of roses are 
 then quickly sprinkled in, and the mixture poured from the pipkin 
 on a flat cold dish or slab. The mass concretes immediately into a 
 thin cake, which is divided into small lozenge-shaped pieces. A 
 ser thus prepared sells for four rupees. One drachm by weight will 
 intoxicate a beginner and three drachms one experienced in its use. 
 The taste is sweet and the odour is very agreeable. 
 
 The pure resin of the hemp is very soluble in alcohol and ether, 
 partially soluble in alkaline and insoluble in acid solutions. When 
 pure it is of a blackish grey colour, hard at 90°, softens at a higher 
 temperature and fuses readily. It is soluble in several volatile and 
 fixed oils. Its odour is fragrant and narcotic ; the taste is slightly 
 warm, bitterish and acrid. The late Sir W. O’Shaugnessy gives 1 a 
 very interesting historical account of the plant and of the experi- 
 ments made by him on its properties and uses. Mention of the 
 drug is made by the Sanskrit, Arabian, and Persian writers at a very 
 early date. Some trace a reference to it in the gdnja mentioned by 
 Manu, but Williams refers the name to the Abrus precatorius, whilst 
 giving the adjective gdnjakini to anything made of hemp. It is 
 noticed as early as 658 H. { 1259 A.D.) by Musalman writers, and 
 was early introduced into Egypt, where, under the name of hashish , 
 it is still eagerly consumed by the lower classes. As in India, its 
 use by religious zealots has led to terrible scenes of slaughter and 
 rapine, so in Egypt, the sect most addicted to it was called the Hashi- 
 shin or Assassins. 2 Throughout the east, from an early period, it 
 has been used as a medicine and now forms an article of the Indian 
 Pharmacopoeia, prescribed in cases of tetanus, hydrophobia, cholera, 
 delirium-tremens, and neuralgia. A careful chemical examination 
 of the different forms of Indian hemp and their preparations is still 
 a desideratum and worthy the attention ol the many able chemists 
 residing in India. 
 
 i Bengal Dispensatory, 579-604; Waring’s Dispensatory 16. 2 See 
 
 Yuie’s Marco Folo, 1., 132. 
 
768 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 Spirits. 
 
 Tlie ordinary country spirit is manufactured in all the hill dis- 
 tricts. It is made from shira and yiir, two 
 forms of the products of the sugarcane. 
 These are placed in a covered tub with water, barley, and certain 
 spices and allowed to ferment. When fermentation has taken place, 
 the tub is filled with water and after two or three days the 
 mixture is ready for distillation. The still in common use is the 
 ordinary rude apparatus of two vessels of metal connected by a 
 tube of bambu. In one the liquor to be distilled is placed and a 
 fire lighted under it ; the liquor passes through the tube into the 
 other vessel which is kept cool by being placed in water. This 
 once distilled liquor, known as tharra, is of two qualities : the rdsi 
 or weaker and the pla'dka or strong spirit. If re-distilled the pro- 
 duct is known as makattav. The process of fermentation takes 
 from ten to twelve days in the hot-weather and double that time 
 in the cold season. The liquor produced from molasses is dearer, 
 hut much stronger than that produced from the mcihua. By one 
 distillation, however, it seldom reaches to 50° under proof by the 
 Syke’s hydrometer, but by several distillations spirits even above 
 London proof may be obtained. In Kumaun, as a rule,, the use of 
 spirituous liquors is confined to the lower castes, though gradually 
 spreading to the better classes ; but in Garhwal the Hindus are less 
 scrupulous, and, according to Traill, all but a few Brahman families 
 drink spirits manufactured there from rice or barley. At the same 
 time, however, they will not drink the spirits manufactured in the 
 plains or after the plains method, objecting both to the materials 
 employed and the caste of the makers. In Garhwal the spirit is 
 made by Rajputs, not Kalwars as in the plains. A coarse spirit is 
 also manufactured from mandna, and the Bhotiyas prepare another 
 called ddru. 
 
 Betel. 
 
 Chavica Beteh Miq. — Pan. The pan is imported from the 
 plains. The leaves are used in chewing and are membranaceous 
 or the adult ones coriaceous, shining above, glabrous on both sides ; 
 the inferior ones ovate, broadly cordate, equal-sided ; slightly une- 
 qually cordate or rounded at the base, five to six nerved. The 
 ingredients in the masticatory in common use are the pdn leaves ; 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 769 
 
 sitpdri, the nut 1 of the Areca catechu or betel-nut palm, a native 
 of the eastern islands and cultivated in Lower Bengal and Tia- 
 vancore ; chiina or lime ; and hath or catechu, the produce of the 
 hhair tree (Acacia catechu). Women usually add a small quantity 
 of tobacco to the compound and many add the small cardamom. 
 The average quantity consumed by pan-eaters is about five leaves a 
 day, costing about one and a half pice, or if- fai things. The mix- 
 ture is pleasant and refreshing, but like other things its inordinate 
 use is injurious to the digestion. Marco Polo mentions the use of 
 the plant, which he calls tembal ; the name of the caste still employed 
 in its sale and preparation is Tamboli. The shreds of the unused 
 leaves and the juice of the stalks (pdnri ) are made use o.t in the 
 preparations of tobacco for smoking. 
 
 XXI. — Vegetable substances used in manufactures. 
 
 A.— OIL-SEEDS- 
 
 The only oil-seeds of importance grown in the Kumaun division 
 and the tract under the hills are the rapeseed and linseed of com- 
 merce. The medicinal and other oils have no great value as arti- 
 cles of export and are only procurable in very small quantities. 
 The Bhabar exports great quantities of rapeseed, for which the cli- 
 mate and soil appear to be eminently suited. As so much confu- 
 sion exists in the synonymy of the mustards, the botanical descrip- 
 tion of the more important species is given here to aid in distin- 
 guishing it. 
 
 Brassica nigra, Koch. Hook, FI. Ind., I., 156. S. erysimoides , 
 Boxb., FI. Ind., 499 — A si rdi, glior rdi, makara rdi, and bandrasi rdi 
 of Kumaun and sarshaf of the hospitals, where the seeds are used 
 for poultices and also in veterinary practice. The leaves are used 
 as a cress. The oil is used chiefly for medicinal purposes. 
 
 Brassica campestris, Linn., Hook. FI. Ind., 156. S. dichotoma, 
 Roxb., FI. Ind., 497. 
 
 Erect, lower leaves lyrate, upper auricled, flowers corymbose, 
 beak of pod flat, seedless. An erect, stout, simple or branched, 
 
 1 This nut is yellow, oval, the size of a small egg, enclosing an oily kernel 
 like a nutmeg, conical, rounded, pointed and marked with white and reddish 
 veins ; inodorous, but oi a very astringent taste. It contains a large protiou of 
 tannic and gallic acidB. 
 
770 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 glabrous or slightly hispid annual, l-3ft. high. Leaves large, 
 petioled, more or less pinuatifid, upper oblong or lanceolate. Flow- 
 ers large, bright yellow, pedicels fin., ascending or spreading. 
 Pods l^-3in., glabrous, sub-erect; valves with midrib and flexuous 
 veins. Seeds small, smooth, pale or dark. 
 
 Yar. dichotoma , Roxb., the jariya, jadiya of the hills and lahota 
 laita of the Bhabar, where it is grown only in a few valleys in Kota, 
 and kali sarson of Northern India. 
 
 Yar. glauca , Roxb., the rdra, rdda, rdra-sarson of Kumaun, 
 banga-sarson of Dehra Dun, and pila-sarson of Oudh and Rohil- 
 khand : seldom grown in the Bhabar, as it yields a crop good in 
 quality, but poor in quantity. 
 
 Yar. glauca , Royle, the dain, dain , and lai of Kumaun and 
 Garhwal : sometimes khetiya , tori , and toriya of Northern India, 
 where this variety is in general cultivation : grown very largely in 
 the Bhabar. 
 
 The jariya variety is sown in the beginning of September in 
 fields where manure has been lying. The stalks are cut from the 
 root and when dry the grain is threshed out and the oil is expressed 
 in the common kola or oil-press. It is a favourite crop near Almora. 
 The rdra variety is grown all over the hills in small quantities 
 only, as it requires much manure and is liable to injury from hail. 
 It is sown in first-class unirrigated land in November-December 
 and gathered in April. It yields about three maunds of oil to an 
 acre. The lai variety is cultivated all over the hills up to 11,000 
 feet and is the staple mustard crop of the Bhabar. These three 
 varieties are grown as oil-seeds and afford the rape-seed of com- 
 merce. 
 
 Brassica juncea, H./. et T. : Sinapis juncea, Linn. — Rai, sarson. 
 There are several varieties of this species. The S. ramosa, Rox- 
 burgh (498), is the barldi of Kumaun, and the <S. rugosa , Roxburgh 
 (499), is the bddshahi-ldi or bhotiya-ldi introduced by the Gorkhalis 
 from Nepal. Both these varieties are cultivated chiefly for their 
 leaves, which are eaten as a vegetable cooked and dressed with 
 spices and clarified butter. The brown seed of B. juncea proper, 
 however, yields an oil that possesses properties similar to those 
 of B. nigra , and for which the seeds may be substituted in the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 771 
 
 preparation of poultices. Eruca sativa, Lam., tlie di'ia and chdra of 
 Kumaun, is cultivated as a vegetable and also for the oil from its 
 seeds, which is less pungent than mustard-oil. It escapes frequently 
 in cultivated tracts, coming up accidentally with other crops. 
 
 Linum usitatissimum, Linn. — Flax ; seed is known as linseed— 
 Alsi, tisi. An annual belonging to the natural order Lineacece ; seeds 
 oval, pointed in shape, compressed, with a sharp margin ; brownish 
 coloured ; smooth and shining outside, but white internally. The 
 native country of the flax plant is not known, though it has been 
 thought to be indigenous to Central Asia and has been cultivated 
 for centuries in India. The Indian seed is better for oil and the 
 European seed for fibre. In these hills it is cultivated only for the 
 oil and the oil-cake, which is used as fodder for cattle. 
 
 Sesamum indicum, Linn.; the seed is known as til and the oil as 
 mitha tel. An annual belonging to the natural order Peclaliacece. 
 There are two varieties known to commerce, the black and the white 
 grain, and a third parti-coloured is found in these provinces. The 
 white-grained called till is cultivated in Kumaun, and the black- 
 grained variety grows wild there and in the Bliabar. As a rule the 
 fresh seed is expressed at once, but in many cases where a finer oil is 
 required the dark colouring matter of the epidermis is removed hy 
 bleaching in hot water or washing in cold water several times. The 
 oil produced from these whitened seeds is considered a useful sub- 
 stitute for olive oil in the preparation of medicines and in manu- 
 factures. The mode of extracting the oil is usually the same in the 
 hills and Bhabar. The seed is first sifted, cleaned and dried, 
 and then put into a kolu or press worked by hand or by oxen. A 
 little water is added, and after some time the oil runs out. The oil 
 is then strained or allowed to stand in shallow vessels, when the 
 impurities sink to the bottom. Every three parts of good seed 
 yield one part of oil, which has risen in price much of late years and 
 renders til a very valuable crop. Besides its use in painting and 
 medicine, the oil is burned in lamps, forms a substitute for salad- 
 oil in cooking, and is the basis of most of the perfumed oils in use 
 in India. The last are made by adding one weight of flowers to 
 three weights of oil in a bottle ; the mixture is then cooked and 
 exposed to the sun for forty days, when the oil is supposed to be 
 
772 
 
 hibiXlayan districts 
 
 sufficiently impregnated for use. The seeds of sesamum are largely 
 used in religious ceremonies by Hindus, and mixed with sugar in 
 the form of a sweetmeat (lad a) forms an appropriate present for 
 old and young at all festivals. 
 
 Ricinus communis, Linn. — Castor bean — Ind , rendi, arand. 
 This bean is commonly cultivated in small quantities in the lower 
 valleys for home consumption. 
 
 Bassia butyracea, Roxb . — Chivra (Kumaun); the butter made 
 from its fruit is called chiilra-ka-pina and phalel ; the phalwa and 
 phaliodra of Almora. A tree belonging to the natural order Sapo- 
 tacece , 30-40ft.: leaves obovate, tomentose beneath : corolla 8-cleft : 
 stamens 30-40 on longish filaments : pedicels aggregate, and are, as 
 well as the calyx, woolly: drupes oval : flowers smallish, white. Roxb. 
 FI. Ind., II., 527 ; Reprint, 411 : Don. FI. Rep., 146. Flowers 
 in November. It occurs abundantly in the valley of the Kali, where 
 the bees feed on its fragrant flowers and those of the jaundela 
 (JEchmanthera Wallichii ) : hence Sor honey is so esteemed (see page 
 715). The timber is of little value, the principal product being the 
 1 vegetable butter’ extracted from the fruit and which is used as a 
 pomade or cold-cream, also in rheumatism and stiffness of the limbs. 
 Its medicinal properties deserve further investigation (Ind. Phar., 
 131). It dissolves readily in alcohol, burns without smoke or smell, 
 and makes good soap and candles. Solly’s analysis gives solid oil, 34 
 parts of fluid oil and 6 parts of vegetable impurities (J. Agri.-Hort., 
 Ben., I., 23). It retains its consistency up to 95° and completely 
 melts at 120° and does not become rancid by keeping. The phalel 
 is produced by bringing the kernels of the fruit into the consistence 
 of cream, which is then put into a cloth bag with a moderate 
 weight laid upon it and left to stand until the oil or fat is 
 expressed, which becomes immediately of the consistence of 
 lard and is of a delicate white colour (see Roxburgh’s description 
 in As. Res., VIII., 477 ; and Drury, U. P., 67). B. latifolia, 
 Roxb., maliua , occurs occasionally in the Bhabar and affords an oil 
 from its seeds, but is of little economical value here. 
 
 The medicinal oils, as already noticed, consist chiefly of sesa- 
 mum oil impregnated with the various herbs and flowering plants 
 that they are named after or with the different gum-resins. Oils in 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 773 
 
 small quantities made from tea, poppy, and many fruit trees and 
 flowering shrubs were exhibited at Agra in 1867, but owing to the 
 imperfect arrangement of the catalogue no data exist for estimating 
 their value commercially or ascertaining their uses. 
 
 B — DYES AND TANS 1 
 
 The dyes of vegetable origin in these provinces may be broadly 
 divided into two classes : first, those produced from plants spe- 
 cially cultivated for the purpose ; and second, those obtained 
 from plants or trees growing wild or which are cultivated 
 on account of some other product. There are no representatives 
 of the first class in the hills, and to the second class belong tur- 
 meric and the great mass of dyes exported from the hills as 
 a portion of the minor forest produce, but which are of little 
 commercial value. The tanning materials of vegetable origin are 
 all the products of trees and plants that grow wild and afford a 
 valuable assistance to the supply of similar materials found in the 
 plains. In neither case, however, does it appear that much can be 
 done in the way of making further use of these substances until 
 their character and qualities have been more thoroughly examined. 
 At present it is believed that, with few exceptions, they do not pre- 
 sent any such features as would give good grounds for the hope that 
 they might become of much importance or objects of a regular 
 trade, but until competent persons undertake their investigation it 
 is unnecessary to discuss the finality of this verdict. The local 
 market for either tans or dyes is inconsiderable, and the plains’ 
 markets are now filled with the products of the latest discoveries 
 in Europe which in cheapness and quality far surpass the hill mate- 
 rials and are now ousting the local dyes from general use. A 
 demand for bark for tanning purposes will, however, always exist 
 as it would not be profitable to import it. 
 
 Dyes. 
 
 (a .) — Extracted from the root. 
 
 Rubia cordifolia, Linn. — Madder — Majethi, manjit. It should 
 be remembered that the vernacular name majethi is sometimes given 
 
 i For more detailed information on this subject, see “ Economic Products of 
 the North-Western Provinces, Part III;” Allahabad, 1878. 
 
774 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 in Knmann to Impatiens Balsamina , which also yields a red dye, 
 but it is properly applied only to Rubia. There are two species, 
 R. Manjistha, Roxb. (1,374), abundant 4,000-9,500 feet with black 
 fruit and deep red flowers, and R. cordifolia, and both are distinct 
 from the European madder ( R . tinctorum ) and yield a brighter dye, 
 but whether owing to inherent defects or improper appliances the 
 dye is not so durable. It is in common use with the Bhotiyas and 
 gives with alum a reddish-brown colour. Some attempts have been 
 made to introduce the cultivation of the European madder plant, 
 but they were neither continuous nor exhaustive, though successful 
 in Afghanistan and apparently also in Kumaun. The average 
 annual export from Kumaun is about ten maunds. 
 
 Curcuma longa> Roxb. — Turmeric — Haldi (root). See Condi- 
 ments. This root is chiefly grown as a condiment, but one variety 
 which when cut has a rich unctuous appearance also yields a yellow 
 dye. When it comes into contact with an alkali it turns red, and 
 is seldom used except for the commonest purposes and by the poorer 
 classes. 
 
 Berberis aristata, D. C. — Chitra , totar. The bark and root of 
 this species and B. Lycium , known as kingora-ki-jar or ddrhcdd, 
 ddrchob , yield a yellow dye. They are both common in the Hima- 
 laya of these provinces. The colouring principle is found chiefly 
 in the root and affords an excellent dye for leather. The average 
 annual export from the Kumaun forest division is not more than 
 two maunds. 
 
 Mariscus cyperinus — Nagarmotha , panmotha. The roots are 
 used in dyeing to give a scent to the cloth and also in medicine. 
 Some identify nagarmotha with Cyperus juncifolius. 
 
 Datisca cannabina, Linn. — Afcalbir (root) , bajr-bhanga (plant). 
 The yellow root is exported to aid in dyeing red and is also used in 
 medicine. 
 
 Hedychium spicatum> Em. — Kachdr-kachri , Kapur-kachri. 
 The root has a strong perfume and is used in dyeing to scent 
 cloth, also to scent tobacco and as a medicine. The average annual 
 export from the tract between the Ganges and the Sarda is about 
 ten tons. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 775 
 
 (h.) — Extracted from the bark or stem. 
 
 Acacia Catechu? Willd .- — Khair (the tree) — Catechu, cutch — ■ 
 hath , Jcatha (the dye). The manufacture of catechu or cutch, or 
 terra japonica as it is variously called, has gone on from time 
 immemorial at the foot of the hills. The men employed are of the 
 Dom caste and are called Khairis from the vernacular name of 
 the tree. They continue at work from November until the rains 
 set in and are aided by their families. Madden’s description of 
 the manufacture still holds good. He writes “One portion of 
 the Khairis is constantly employed in cutting down the best trees, 
 and for these they have to search far in the jungles ; only those 
 with an abundance of red heart-wood will answer. This is chop- 
 ped into slices a few inches square. Under two large sheds 
 are the furnaces, shallow and with a slightly convex clay roof, 
 pierced for twenty ordinary sized earthen pots. These are nearly 
 filled with chips, and water is then poured in and boiled until 
 the contents of twenty will only fill two pots. This operation takes 
 place in about an hour and a half. The liquor resembles thin 
 light port, and the hatha crystallizes on leaves and twigs thrown into 
 it for the purpose. Each pot yields about a seer of an ashy white 
 colour. The work is carried on for twenty hours out of the twenty- 
 four by relays of women and children ; the men merely preparing 
 the wood, which, after being exhausted, is made use of as fuel.” The 
 best samples of hath are clean and whitish or of a pink colour, but 
 some are dirty and mixed with foreign matter. In 1848, hath was 
 worth six rupees a maund in the forests. In the Dun the hath is not 
 allowed to crystallize on twigs, but is poured into clay moulds and 
 made into cakes. Kath is used as an ingredient in the prepared pan 
 so commonly chewed by natives and gives the red colour to the 
 saliva. As a dye it gives brown tints and is largely used for colour- 
 ing sails and fishing-nets. The average yearly export from the 
 forests between the Granges and the Sarda is about 120 tons, though 
 but little catechu is now made west of the Ramganga. The bark 
 of this tree is also used in tanning. 
 
 Taxus baccata? Linny— Yew — Thaner, geli, gallu, hist. The 
 bark yields an inferior red dye only used in the Bhotiya parga- 
 
 nahs. 
 
776 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Symplocos cratsegoides, Ham. — Lodh , loci. The baric and 
 leaves yield a yellow dye and are used in combination with madder. 
 The average annual export from the tract between the Granges and 
 the Sarda amounts to about twenty tons, of which about nine tons 
 come from the Kumaun forest division. 
 
 Alnns nepalensis, Don. — Himalayan alder — Udis , kunch , Jcoish. 
 The bark is used in tanning and in dyeing red and is one of the 
 ingredients in the native-made red ink. 
 
 (c .) — Extracted from the leaves. 
 
 Justicia Adhatoda, Linn.— Artisa. This plant yields a yellow 
 dye from its leaves by boiling them in water in the proportion of 
 101b to 161b until half the water has evaporated. In combination 
 with, indigo it gives a dark-blue green. The leaves are procurable 
 at from 20 to 25 seers per rupee. 
 
 Cinnamomuin Tamala, Kees. — Ddlchini, kirkiriya, sinkauri , and 
 leaves tejpdt. The leaves are more commonly used as a condiment 
 (see Condiments ), but they are also of use in calico-printing in 
 combination with myrobalans. The average annual export from the 
 tract between the Ramganga and the Sarda is about 33 tons of the 
 leaves and 24 tons of the bark. 
 
 (<L ) — Extracted from the fruit-rind. 
 
 Acacia arabica, Willd. — Balml. This tree does not flourish in 
 the Kumaun Himalaya, though stunted specimens are found as 
 high as 3-4,000 feet. It occurs, however, in the drier tracts 
 along the foot of the hills and yields a black dye from the pods, 
 which are simply pounded and boiled. The gum is also used 
 extensively by dyers and calico-printers and the bark in tanning. 
 
 Mallotus phillipin&nsis, Mull — Kamela, n'dna, roli. The 
 ripe fruit of this small tree is covered with a powder that yields 
 an orange dye. It is commonly used in dyeing silk and wool 
 and gives a rich flame colour of great beauty and permanence 
 and is one of the best of its kind. It sells at from 3 to 4 seers per 
 rupee. Stewart writes : — “ The ripe capsules are gathered off the 
 bushes in March, and after being allowed to lie in a heap for a 
 few hours are rubbed and kneaded with the feet on the ground to 
 remove the powder, the broken capsules being then separated by 
 winnowing, sifting, and picking. One man will collect about a 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 777 
 
 seer of the powder in a day, which is bought by the dealers at 
 five seers for a rupee. The above process will quite account for 
 the commercial kamela not being very clean ; but besides this, 
 although the Bhuksas, who gather it, deny that any adulteration 
 takes place, it is said never to reach the plains’ market in its com- 
 paratively pure state.” The substances added are stated to be the 
 pounded bark of Casearia tomentosa, Roxb., the chila of Garhwal, 
 and the red powder on the fruit of the Ficus indica, Roxb., the com- 
 mon banyan or bargad. On the other hand kamela itself is used 
 to adulterate arnotto. The bark is employed in tanning. About 
 2,000 maunds of the powder are exported every year from the 
 Kumaun forest division. 
 
 Punica Granatum, Linn. — Pomegranate — Anar, darim, and the 
 rind of the fruit naspdl. The rind of the pomegranate is used as 
 a tan and dye for leather and gives cloth the greenish colour known 
 as kakrezi. It is, however, generally used with some other dye as 
 a concentrator, in which case the pulverised rind is boiled along 
 with the dye. The flowers also yield a fleeting dye of a light-red 
 colour. Morocco leather is tanned and dyed with the bark of this 
 tree, of which the export amounts to the large quantity of 270 tons 
 per annum from the Kumaun forest division alone. 
 
 Terminalia Chebula, Betz. — Har, harara. The dried fruit are 
 the black or Chebulic myrobalans of commerce used as a dye, tan, 
 and medicine. Galls are also found on the leaves which in con- 
 junction with alum yield a good permanent yellow dye. The 
 average yearly export from the forests between the Jumna and 
 Sarda amounts to about 50 tons, of which the Kumaun forest 
 division yields 550 maunds or about 20 tons. 
 
 Terminalia belerica, Roxb. — Bahera. The dried fruit of this 
 species also forms one of the myrobalans of commerce used in dyeing- 
 cloth and leather and in tanning. Native ink is made from it 
 and it is also used in medicine. The average annual export 
 from the same tract as the preceding is about ten tons. 
 
 Phyllanthus Emblica, Linn. — Aonla, amlika. The fruit of 
 this species furnishes the Emblic myrobalans of commerce used 
 as a dye, a tan, and in medicine. The bark is also used in tanning. 
 The fruit is pounded and boiled in water, and in combination with 
 
 98 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 sulphate of iron fields the bluish-black colour abunsi , and alone 
 is used as a hair-dye and ink-material. The annual export from 
 the Kumaun forest division is about four tons.- 
 
 fEgle Marmelos, Corr. — Bel. The rind of the fruit is occa- 
 sionally used with myrobalans by calico-printers, and by itself yields 
 a fleeting yellow dye. The annual export from the Himalayan 
 forests is, however, very small. 
 
 (e.) — Extracted from flowers. 
 
 TTyctanthes Arbor- tristis, Linn. — Har,, harsinghar , pahira r 
 laduri , lay era. The flowers yield a fine but fleeting buff or orange- 
 brown dye. It is much used in combination with other dyes, and 
 the flowers can be had in any quantity from the submontane forests 
 at from 2-6 seers per rupee. 
 
 Butea frondosa? Roxb. — BhdJc , pains, cMchra. The flowers 
 ( Msu , tesn) yield a fleeting yellow dye with alum, much used in the 
 Holi festival. The tree occurs abundantly along the foot of the 
 hills, and is very remarkable from the effect produced by its large 
 orange-red flowers. 
 
 Cedrela Toona, Roxb. — Tun, ttini. The flowers of this well- 
 known tree also yield a yellow dye known as basanti, from the prac- 
 tice formerly in fashion to wear clothes dyed yellow at the spring 
 festival ( basant ). A red dye is occasionally extracted from the seed. 
 
 Tagetes erecta, Linn. — Genda. The- flowers of this plant, the 
 common marigold, also yield a yellow dye which is, however, but 
 little used except by the poor. 
 
 Woodfordia fioribunda> Salis. — DTiai, clhaura, tbdwa, dhdrla. 
 The red flowers of this large shrub are used in dyeing silk ; the 
 average annual export for this purpose from the tract between the 
 Jumna and the Sarda being about 27 tons, of' which about 200 
 maunds come from the Kumaun forest division. The leaves and 
 twigs also yield a yellow dye. 
 
 Parmelia kamtschadalis? Esch. — Rose lichen — GJiarda, dial- 
 ptiri, charchubilu, chalchalira. This lichen is used in calico-print- 
 ing to give a perfume to the cloth and a rose tinge. The average 
 annual export from the tract between the Ganges and the Sarda is 
 about 25 tons. 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 779 
 
 Tans. 
 
 (a.) — Tanning agents derived from the baric. 
 
 Acacia arabica? Linn. — Babul. The bark of this tree is the 
 most plentiful and effective of all those used for tanning purposes. 
 The legumes and leaves also have similar properties in a less 
 degree. Besides tanning a skin, the babdl bark dyes it a buff 
 colour. 
 
 Cassia Fistula, Linn. — Amaltas^ Jcitola , itola , Jcitwah , svtnhara , 
 sim. The bark of this tree yields a tan and dye and, like the 
 preceding, the pods contain much tannin. The average annual 
 export of the bark from the forests between the Ramganga and 
 the Sarda amounts to about sixteen tons. 
 
 Shorea robusta, Gkertn. — Sal. The bark of this tree, so well 
 known for its timber, contains tannin, though it is not much used as 
 a tanning material. 
 
 Butea frondosa, Roxb. — Dhdk , palds. The bark contains an 
 excellent tanning agent much used where babul is not procurable. 
 
 Myrica sapida, Wall. — Kaiphal. The bark is used in medicine 
 and as a tanning agent. The average annual export from the 
 tract between the Jumna and the Sarda amounts to about 
 seventy tons. » . 
 
 Bauhinia purpurea, Linn .—Kachnar, Jchdirwal , gurial. A 
 common small tree, the bark of which is used in tanning. 
 
 Buchanania latifolia, Roxb. Kath-bhildwa , muriya , piydL 
 The bark of this tree is also a tanning agent. 
 
 Garuga pixmata, Roxb.— Kharpat. The bark yields a tan- 
 ning material. 
 
 Zizyphus Jujuba, Lam. Ber, Jchalis, guter. This tiee yields 
 a much valued tanning material in its bark. The export of oak 
 bark of various kinds from the Kumaun forest division alone amounts 
 on an average to between 50 and 60 tons per annum. 
 
 (&,) — Tanning agents derived from fruits. 
 
 Terminalia Chebula, Retz .—Ear, haraira. This and the fruit 
 of T. belerica form the Chebulic and Beleric myrobalans of com- 
 merce, used as an ingredient in tanning mixtures. 
 
780 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Semecarpus Anacardium> Linn. — Bbrilawa. The fruit of this 
 tree, better known as the ‘ Marking-nut tree,’ is used in medicine 
 and as an ingredient in varnish. When pounded and boiled in rape 
 oil it is applied to stay putrefaction in hides. 
 
 The babul, dhao, bahera, har and dhauri or bdkli ( Anogeissus 
 latifolia , Roxb.) are also used as tanning agents, and the milky 
 juice of the ak or maddr in curing catgut and cleaning leather. 
 
 C— GUMS AND GUM-RESINS. 
 
 There are six classes of gums known to commerce, each of which 
 admits of numerous varieties : (1) gum-arabic ; (2) gum-senegal ; 
 (3) cherry gum and the gum of other stone-fruit trees ; (4) gum- 
 iragacanth ; (5) gum of Bassora, and (6) the gum of certain seeds 
 and roots. 1 The first five spontaneously flow from trees and the 
 sixth is extracted by boiling water. Representatives of (1), (3), (4), 
 and (6) occur in Kumaun, and in addition we have the oleo-resin 
 bhilawa and tar and turpentine. The better classification, however, 
 is that proposed by Cooke, viz,: — 
 
 I — Gums — 
 
 A. — True gums — 
 
 (а) — Arabic kind as babul ( Acacia arabica). 
 
 (б) — Cherry kind as padam (. Primus Puddum). 
 
 B. — Pseudo-gums — 
 
 if 1 ) Tragacanth kind as kulu ( Sterculia urens). 
 
 ip) Baik or Moringa as sahajna (Moringa pterygo- 
 sperma ) . 
 
 C. — Astringent gums as dhak ( Butea frondosa ). 
 
 II.— Gum-resins— 
 
 A. — Emulsive as gota-ganbci or gamboge. 
 
 B. — Foetid as bring or asafoetida. 
 
 C . — F ragrant — 
 
 (a) — Bdellium kind as giigal. 
 
 (b) — Benzoin kind as luban. 
 
 *For a full account of the ‘Gums and Gum-resins’ in these Proving 
 “ Notes on the Economic Products of the N.-W. Provinces,” Pari l AUahabmf 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 781 
 
 IIL— Resins— 
 
 A, — Hard or Copaline — 
 
 (a) — Pale resins as safed damar ( Vateria indica). 
 
 (b) — Dark resins as kola damar. 
 
 B. — S 0 ft or elemi as jangli-b addm ( Canarium commune ). 
 
 IV-— Oleo-resins— 
 
 A. — Balsams as bdlsan-ki-tel. 
 
 B. — Varnishes as bhildioa. 
 
 0. — Turpentine and tar. 
 
 The average annual export of gums, some years ago, from the 
 G-arliwal forest division was about 265 maunds, and of birja or pine- 
 resin about 30,500 pitchers of 2^Bb. each. From the Dehra Dun 
 the export of semli gum is about 786 maunds, and of dhak gum about 
 27 maunds, whilst about 200 maunds of gum are exported every 
 year from the Kuraaun forest division. Taking gums alone, the 
 average yearly outturn from the Himalayan forests o± these provinces 
 is about 1,300 maunds. If encouragement were offered and trained 
 collectors were employed, the quantity of produce of each kind of gum 
 would be much more than at present ; but so long as African gums 
 can be sold in the London market at their present low rates, there 
 is little hope that this branch of industry can be extended with pro- 
 fitable results. * . 
 
 I.— GUMS. 
 
 A. — True gums. 
 
 Acacia arabica? Willd. — Babdl. This common tree yields 
 the East Indian gum-arabic or gum gattie of commerce used in 
 medicine and the arts. The bazar collections, however, contain 
 the gum of allied species under the same name, babul-ki-gond. The 
 gum exudes spontaneously or is procured by incisions in the 
 bark, when the sap runs out and hardens into small lumps 
 varying in form and size. There are two kinds, the brown 
 and white gum; the former is more esteemed in medicine and 
 the latter in the arts. The gum exudes principally in March- 
 April, and a good tree should yield about 21b in the year. 
 The bazar specimens occur in broken tears of a brownish red to 
 brown, light-brown and white colour, rather brittle with a shining 
 fracture and wholly soluble in water, forming a dark-coloured 
 
782 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 mucilage. With this gum is usually collected and sold the gum of 
 the following allied species : — 
 
 A. Catechu , Willd. — Khair. 
 
 A. Farnesiana, Willd. — Wilayati babul. 
 
 A. lenticularis, Ham. — Khain. 
 
 Albizzia procera , Benth. — iSafed-siras, kharanji. 
 
 A. Lebbek , Benth. — Siras. 
 
 A. odoratissima, Benth. — Wilayati siras. 
 
 iEgle Marmelos, Corr. — Bel. This tree yields a good gum- 
 arabic, occurring in tears like coarse brown sugar and of a similar 
 colour. 
 
 Prunus Puddum, Roxb. — Padam , ptiya, paya. This and the 
 other species of cherry yield a gum-arabic of the stone-fruit kind 
 which, however, is not of commercial importance owing to the 
 smallness of the yield and the presence of other gum-bearing trees. 
 
 Buchanailia latitolia, Roxb. — Piyal, muriya, kath-bhilawa . 
 This tree occurs commonly in the Bhabar and yields a pellucid 
 gum by incision, known in the plains as chironji-ki-gond. 
 
 Bauhinia variegata, Linn. — Kaclmdr. This and its allied 
 species yield a gum known as sem-ki-gond. It is said to be a brownish 
 mild gum that swells in water and is only partly soluble. 
 
 Careya arborea, Roxb. — Kurnbh. This tree yields a greenish 
 gum regarding which but little is known. 
 
 Cassia Fistula, Linn. — Kitwdli, amaltas. A red juice exudes 
 from the bark and hardens into a gum called kamarkas, regarding 
 which further information is desirable. 
 
 Cedrela Toona, Roxb. — Tun. This tree yields a resin rather 
 than a gum. 
 
 Sponia orientalis, Planch., yields a gum of the cherry tree 
 kind. 
 
 Anogeissus latifolia, Wall. — JDhdivd, dhaura , hdkli. It yields 
 a fine white hard gum used chiefly by calico-printers. 
 
 Odina Wodier, Roxb. — Jhingan, jiban, sindan. The gum is 
 obtained from incisions in the bark and when solidified appears 
 much like glue. It is used for ink-making and in the finer parts 
 of stucco work. There are two sorts exported from Kumaun ; the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 783 
 
 white ( Jeanne ) picked from the tree and sold at about ten seers for 
 the rupee, and the black ( jingan-ki-gond ) gathered on the ground 
 and sold at fifteen seers for the rupee. 
 
 Elseodendron glaucum, Hook. — Bakra , shauriya , mdmri . The 
 gum produced by this tree is known as the jamrasi gum in the 
 Central Provinces. It occurs in roundish tears and is soluble in 
 water. 
 
 Feronia Elephantum, Corr. — Kath-bel, kait. The gum of this 
 tree is recommended as a substitute for gum-arabic in medicinal 
 preparations. 
 
 Woodfordia floribunda, Salisb.— DMi, dhaura. The gum of 
 
 this tree deserves further examination. It appears to be of the 
 tragacanth kind and swells in water. Specimens of the gum from 
 the following trees known to yield gum should be collected and 
 subjected to examination : — 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 j Pagein 
 
 | Brandis. 
 
 Scientific name. 
 
 Vernacular 
 
 name. 
 
 Page in 
 Brandis. 
 
 Citrus Aurantium ... 
 
 Narcmgi .. 
 
 53 
 
 Semecarpus Anacardium, 
 
 Bhilawa... 
 
 124 
 
 „ medica 
 
 Bijaura ... 
 
 51 
 
 Terminalia Arjuna 
 
 Arjun 
 
 224 
 
 rhyllanthus Emblica, 
 
 Amlika 
 
 454 
 
 „ tomentosa... 
 
 Sain 
 
 225 
 
 Erythrina indica 
 
 P angara ... 
 
 139 
 
 „ belerica ... 
 
 Baker a ... 
 
 222 
 
 Garuga pinnata 
 
 Khar pat ... 
 
 62 
 
 „ Cliebula ... 
 
 Har 
 
 223 
 
 Jatropha Curcas 
 
 Safed-ind 
 
 442 
 
 Zizyphus oxyphylla ... 
 
 Jigar 
 
 85 
 
 Melia Azedarach 
 
 Ba/tciyan ... 
 
 68 
 
 „ GSnoplia 
 
 fieri 
 
 86 
 
 Morus indica 
 
 Tut, 
 
 408 
 
 „ Jujuba 
 
 Ber 
 
 86 
 
 Tunica Granatum ... 
 
 Uarivi 
 
 241 
 
 ,, rugosa 
 
 D kauri ... 
 
 89 
 
 Sapindus detergens ... 
 
 Ritha 
 
 107 
 
 Schleichera trijuga 
 
 Kusumbha, 
 
 105 
 
 B. — Pseudo-Gums. 
 
 (a.) — Pale or tragacanth kind. 
 
 Cochlospermum Gossypium, D. C. — Kumbi. This tree yields 
 the gum katira of the local Materia Medica. It occurs in semi- 
 
 <D 
 
 transparent, white, striated pieces very much twisted and con- 
 torted. 
 
 Sterculia urens, Hoxb — Gulu, kuru, This tree also yields a 
 gum katira that occurs in large light-brown transparent tough 
 masses. Immersed in water like the other pseudo-gums it swells 
 like a jelly, but does not dissolve except by protracted boiling. S. 
 villosa , Hoxb. (Brandis, 32), the uddla or udiydl of Kumaun, and 
 
784 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 S. colorata , Roxb. (Brandis, 34), the boclula of Kumaun, yield a 
 similar gum. 
 
 (b.) — Dark or Moringa kind. 
 
 Moringa pterygosperma, Gsertn. — Sahajna. This tree yields 
 a gum of the sort known as mocharas , used in medicine. It occurs 
 in irregular pieces of a whitish to a reddish-brown colour. 
 
 Bombax malabaricum, D. O. — Semal. The gum of this tree is 
 also known as mocharas. It occurs in opaque, light-brown, knotty 
 pieces, inodorous and of a slightly astringent taste, and contains a 
 large proportion of gallic and tannic acids. It is chiefly used as an 
 astringent in medicine. 
 
 Stereospermum suaveolens, U C. — Pdral. This tree yields a 
 gum of the same character as the preceding, but not in general use 
 nor sufficiently examined. 
 
 C. — Astringent G-ums. 
 
 Pterocarpus marsupium, Roxb. — Bija-sal. This tree, rare in 
 Kumaun, yields a gum of the kind known as kino. It is procured 
 by incisions when the tree is in flower, and the gum is collected on 
 leaves placed beneath the cuts in the bark. It forms a part of the 
 commercial East Indian gum-kino. 
 
 Bntea frondosa, Roxb. — Dhdk, palcts. The gum of this useful 
 tree is the principal sort exported as gum-kino under the local 
 name kamarkas. It occurs in the form of tears which when fresh 
 are of a beautiful red colour, but when kept for any time become 
 opaque and darker in colour. It is used in medicine and for 
 tanning and dyeing. 
 
 Ougeinia dalbergioideS) Benth. — Sdnclan, chdndan. This tree 
 yields by incision a sort of gum-kino used medicinally for the same 
 purposes as Butea kino. 
 
 ' II.— GUM-RE SINS. 
 
 A. — Emulsive gum-resins. 
 
 Under this class come the products of trees of the genus Gar~ 
 cinia, none of which occur in these provinces. 
 
 B. — Foetid gum-resins. 
 
 Under this class we have asafoetida, gum-ammoniacum, and 
 others that do not occur in these provinces. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 785 
 
 C. — Fragrant gum-resins. 
 
 To this class belong the gum-resins which are not emulsive and 
 do not possess the foetid odour of the preceding, but none of them 
 occur in these provinces. 
 
 Ill— TRUE RESINS. 
 
 A. CoPALINE RESINS. 
 
 Shorea robusta, Gsertn .—Sdl. The resin of the sdl constitutes 
 one of the common dammars of the bazar and occurs in small rough 
 pieces from a pale creamy colour to a dark-brown nearly opaque and 
 very brittle. Each piece has a striated appearance, as if composed 
 of several layers. It is devoid of taste and smell, sparingly soluble in 
 alcohol, almost entirely so in ether and perfectly so in turpentine and 
 the fixed oils. The superior kinds are sufficient substitutes for pine- 
 resins in medicine. Since the conservation of the sdl forests has 
 been taken in hand the export of this resin has very much declined. 
 
 B. — Elemi or soft-resins. 
 
 No representative of this group is traceable in Kumaun, though 
 several occur in Southern India. 
 
 IY._OLEO-RESINS. 
 
 A. — Balsams. 
 
 No representative of tins group occurs in the North-Western 
 Himalaya, though common in Eastern Bengal and Asam. 
 
 B.— Natural Varnishes. 
 
 Semecarpus Anacardiunu Linn. Bldldwa . The pericaip of 
 the fruit is full of an acrid juice used in medicine and to foim a 
 black varnish. There is a considerable trade in these seeds, of 
 which the exports from the forests between the Jumna and the 
 Sarda every year amount to about 125 maunds. Varnishes are also 
 said to be procured from the Odina Wodier noticed before for its 
 gum, Buchanania latifolia , Rhus succedanea, and R. vernicifera , all 
 of which occur in the Himalayan districts of these provinces. 
 
 G. — Turpentine and Tar. 
 
 Finns longifolicl, Hoxb. — Ohiv , scillcij holon , scivul , thcinsci . 
 
 The long-leaved pine is the principal source of the oleo-resm 
 known as bivjci in Garhwal and Icshci or lassci in Kali-Ivumaun, and 
 
786 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 of the oil called Urja-ki-tel or tdrpin-ki-tel. There are two kinds of 
 resin : (1) the birja or berja sort, which comprises the tears exuding 
 naturally from the bark ; and (2) the bakhar-birja , or resin produced 
 by making long and deep incisions in the sap-wood. The latter is 
 chiefly used by bangle-makers. The resin is highly charged with 
 oil of turpentine, and of late years some attempts at extracting it 
 Turpentine. have been made. The oil of turpentine sells 
 
 at from twelve to fourteen annas per bottle, 
 and the residue known as sunclras , the black colophony of com- 
 merce, is sold on the spot at about four rupees per maund. I am 
 not aware of any attempt having been made to value this product, 
 but of a similar article from British Burma Dr. Forbes Watson 
 whites (1873) : — 
 
 “ The crude turpentine from British Burma has been very 
 favourably reported upon. It is the produce of Pinus Khasyana 
 and Pinus Massoniana, the market rate being about 4<rZ. per lb. in 
 Burma. The reports of the two firms to which the sample was 
 submitted for valuation are ‘ No. 5— We have submitted the 
 crude turpentine to the trade, and have their report to the effect 
 that it appears to be of very fair quality. We estimate the market 
 value would be from £12 to £14 per ton. No. 6— We have care- 
 fully examined the sample of rough or crude turpentine and found 
 the quality to be fine and equal to any ever imported from the 
 United States, where the distillation for this market and that of the 
 .continent (Bordeaux excepted) is carried on. Crude has ceased to 
 be an article of import ; there was not any since 1868, where twenty 
 years ago it was a great trade. The nominal value of the sample 
 before us would be 13s. 6d. per cwt. Manifestly, if the value in 
 Burma of this turpentine is about 4cZ. per lb., or 37 s. per cwt., and 
 its value here is only from 12s. to 14s. per cwt., it would be far 
 better to rely upon home consumption.’ ” 
 
 The average annual export of resin from the G-arhwal forests 
 during the five years 1869-73 amounted to about 35 tons. Dur- 
 ing the same period the average annual export of the birja sort 
 from the Kumaun forests was 86 maunds, of the bakhar-birja 
 description 45 maunds, and of the oil about 10 maunds. This 
 industry is now discouraged as much as possible owing to the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 787 
 
 destruction of much valuable timber. The chips of the cMr, 
 
 deodar , and P. excelsa , yield tar by dry 
 Tar ' distillation. The following account of the 
 
 process is given by Mr. Baden Powell : “ First an earthen 
 
 ghara or vessel with a wide mouth, and capable of containing 
 about four sers, is sunk in the ground. Next a large ghara of 
 about twelve sers capacity is taken, and three small holes are 
 drilled in its underside : it is then filled with scraps of the pine 
 wood, and over its mouth another small jar is placed and kept 
 there by a luting of clay very carefully applied, and then both the 
 jars are smeared over with a coating of clay. These two jais thus 
 stuck together are next set on the mouth of the receiver or ghara 
 sunk into the ground, and the joint or seat is made tight by a 
 luting of stiff clay. Light firewood is now heaped around the 
 apparatus and ignited, and kept burning from four to eight hours ; 
 the rationale of the process being that the heat causes the tar con- 
 tained in the chips inclosed in the large ghara to exude, and it 
 falls through the three holes drilled in the bottom, and into the 
 receiver sunk into the ground. AVhen the fire is out, the ashes 
 are raked away, the jars very carefully separated, so that pieces of 
 dirt may not fall into the receiver, and the latter is then exhumed 
 and the contents poured out. It is only necessary to replace the 
 receiver with the jars over it as before, duly charged with chips, 
 and lute the joints up carefully, and the process can be carried on 
 as before. TF ith care the same jars may be made to do ovei and 
 over again without cracking. One ser of wood yields about 2 - 6 
 chhataks of tar and 4-3 chhataks of charcoal. To procure a ser of 
 tar requires 6 sers 4 chhataks of wood chips to charge the pot, and 
 2 maunds 6 sers and 9 chhataks of chips for fuel. The estimated 
 cost is one anna per ser, but this is far too low.” 
 
 Besides the long-leaved pine the following conifers 1 occur in 
 the Himalayan districts of these provinces, and some yield resin, 
 tar, and turpentine. 
 
 Pinus excelsa, Wallich. Brandis, 510. The tar produced from 
 this tree is said to be equal to the best Swedish. It is a mixture 
 of resin and oil of turpentine more or less blackened by the 
 1 For the intricate vernacular synonym see posted. 
 
788 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 admixture of empyreumatic products. It thickens after exposure 
 to the atmosphere and is used for protecting wood-work in every 
 position. 
 
 Pinus Gerardiana, Wallich. Brandis, 508. This tree is very 
 resinous and is much used for torches. Major Longden obtained 
 excellent tar from the chips. Gordon states that it affords abundance 
 of fine turpentine and the cones exude copiously a fine white resin. 
 Brandis says it is very resinous and that a good white resin may be 
 obtained in quantity from the bark and cones. 
 
 Cedrus Deodara, Loudon. Brandis, 516. The deodar yields 
 an oleo-resin like that of the cliir and an oil which is used in 
 medicine. Tar is also procured from the chips of the sap-wood. 
 
 Abies Smithiana, Forbes. Brandis, 525. Both Stewart and 
 Boyle mention it as a resin-bearing conifer. It does not appear 
 to be common east of the Alaknanda. 
 
 Nothing is recorded regarding the resinous properties of A. 
 Webbiana and dumosa and of C. torulosa. Juniperus communis , 
 recura and excelsa aud Taxus baccata are the great sources of dhup 
 or incense in India and Tibet. 
 
 Elastic gum-resin. 
 
 Calotropis gigantea, B. Br. — Maddr , dk. This and the allied 
 species, C. Hamiltonii , Wight., yield an elastic gum-resin which 
 is procured by making incisions in the plant and is used as a 
 substitute for gutta-percha. Dr. Biddell calculated that ten aver- 
 age-sized plants will yield as much juice as will make one pound 
 of this substance. The juice when collected is evaporated in a 
 shallow dish, either in the sun or in the shade, and, when dry, 
 the substance is worked up in hot water with a wooden kneader 
 in order to get rid of the acridity of the gum. The juice is 
 also used to destroy tne offensive smell of fresh leather and in 
 medicine. The macldr also yields a kind of manna known as 
 ‘ shukr-ul-ushr.’ which is caused by an exudation from the piercing 
 of an insect called galtigdl. 
 
 Lac. 
 
 Lac is found all over these provinces, notably in the Bundel- 
 khand, Bhabar, and Gorakhpur forests. It consists of a resinous 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 789 
 
 substance produced from the female of the Coccus Caeca , an insect 
 which is found on the twigs and branches of the pipal ( Ficus 
 religiosa), bargad ( Ficus indica), kathbel ( Feronia Elephantum), 
 ber (. ZizypTius Jujuba), dhak (Butea frondosa) , the Erythrina indica, 
 Schleicher a trijuga , Inga clulcis, and others. The Hindus have six 
 names for lac, but they generally call it laksha {lakh, ( one hundred 
 thousand)’ from the multitude of small insects which, as they believe, 
 discharge it from their stomachs and at length destroy the tree on 
 which they form their colonies. 1 There are two products from this 
 resin, the lac dye and the various forms of the resinous lac. A 
 description of the insect will be found hereafter in its proper place. 2 
 
 The process of manufacture may be briefly described as fol- 
 lows : — The stick-lac as it is brought in is 
 Manufacture. picked and triturated in water, which takes 
 
 out the colouring matter that forms the dye, and the residue depriv- 
 ed of all impurities forms the seed-lac. This is then sewed up in a 
 long narrow bag about the size of a cable and passed over a char- 
 coal furnace; when the resin melts and when quite fluid it is passed 
 on to a man seated before another charcoal fire with a cylinder of 
 glazed earthenware in front about two feet long and eight inches 
 in diameter supported on pivots at each end : or in some places the 
 stem of the plantain is used. The melted wax is allowed to drop 
 on the cylinder and forms thin layers about eighteen inches square 
 known as shell-lac. These are sorted according to consistence and 
 colour ; orange, liver, garnet and their varieties being the order of 
 excellence. Sometimes the seed-lac is merely melted into buttons 
 or lumps, but this is usually only done with lac of inferior quality 
 and for home consumption. 
 
 The analyses of Unverdorben and Hatchett give the constituents 
 of stick-lac as — (1) an odorous resin soluble in alcohol and ether ; (2) 
 a resin insoluble in ether ; (3) a bitter balsamic resin ; (4) laccic acid; 
 (5) a dull yellow extract ; (6) colouring matter ; (7) a fatty matter ; 
 (8) some salts and earth. The resin according to Unverdorben con- 
 tains — (1) a resin soluble in ether and alcohol; (2) a resin insoluble 
 
 1 Sir W Jones quoted by Birdwood, 274, 322. Other insects of this genus 
 furnish a colouring matter. The female of C. ilicis is the Kermes ; that of C. 
 Cacti, the nopal or cochineal and the female of C. polomcus produces the scarlet 
 grains of Roland. 2 Chiefly from Carter’s notice in Ann. Mag. Nat. 
 
 Hist., VII., 31, 41. 
 
790 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 in ether and soluble in alcohol ; (3) a resinous body little soluble ill 
 alcohol ; (4) a crystallizable resin ; (5) an uncrystallizable resin. 
 Hatchett’s analysis of 100 parts gives resin, 68 ; colouring matter, 
 10 ; wax, 6 ; gluten, 5’5 ; foreign substances, 6 5 ; loss, 4. His 
 analysis of shell-lac gives resin, 90*5 ; colouring matter, 0*5 ; wax, 
 4*0 ; gluten, 2*8 ; loss, 1*8. 
 
 The lac insect can be removed from one forest to another 
 by merely taking the insect on the stick while in its transition 
 state and applying it to the branches of a similar tree. There 
 are two seasons of the insect’s activity in Upper India, the one 
 commencing in June and the other in November. The first 
 crop is ready in September and the second in February or March, 
 but neither are gathered until the season for the next operation has 
 commenced. Thus the March crop may be gathered in June and 
 the September crop in November. Should, however, the object be 
 more to obtain lac- dye than resin, the sticks should be gathered 
 before the insect escapes to commence its next season’s operations. 
 The best Indian lac of these provinces is manufactured at Mir- 
 zapur, where the materials are collected from all parts of the North- 
 west, but principally from the jungles of Central India as far south 
 as Sambhalpur. Lac makes an excellent varnish and is used in 
 combination with various colouring matters to make the durable 
 lacquer so well known in Benares toys. It is also used for sealing- 
 wax and for housepainters’ varnish. 
 
 D.-FIBRES. 1 
 
 The forests and wastes of the lower hills and the submontane 
 tract yield an immense quantity of materials for ropes, cordage, 
 twine, basket-making and matting, but little of which has as yet 
 received the attention due to it. The babar grass alone is sufficient 
 in quantity to supply all India with a valuable material for making 
 coarse cordage and paper. The bambu of the Gfarhwal Duns might 
 be utilised in the same way, and the reeds and grasses of the Bhabar 
 and Tarai afford an inexhaustible supply of common twine and 
 matting material* The hemp of Garhwal has more than a local 
 
 1 A botanical description of all the fibre-producing plants mentioned in the 
 following list will be found in Fart VI. of my “Notes on the Economic Products 
 of the North-Western Provinces,” The reference at the foot of each notice 
 here is also to a botanical description of the plant. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 791 
 
 reputation and for a long time furnished a portion of “the annual 
 investment” of the East India Company. The pulp manufactured 
 from the Daphne papyracea yields materials for a paper that gives 
 the engraver finer impressions than any English-made paper and 
 nearly as good as the fine Chinese paper that is employed for 
 what are called India paper-proofs. The paper made from this 
 shrub in Kumaun is almost as strong and durable as leather and is 
 largely used for village records and court proceedings. It is 
 exported to Tibet on the north and to the plains on the south for 
 manuscripts and account-books. With this wealth of raw material 
 in existence it is remarkable that so little has been done to render 
 the fibre resources of our hills available to European enterprise, and 
 it is the object of the following pages again briefly to bring them 
 to notice. 
 
 Abutilon indicum, Eon. A mallow found in the lower hills 
 and Bhabar, the stem of which yields a cordage fibre. Hooker, FI. 
 Ind., I., 326. A. polyanclrum , Schlecht, found up to 3,000 feet, also 
 yields a fibre. Hooker, l. c., 325. 
 
 Hibiscus ficulneus, Finn., affords a very large proportion of 
 strong fibre of a white colour useful for twine and light cordage. 
 Hooker, l. c., 340. H. pungens, lloxb., and II. cancellatus, Koxb, 
 (Hooker, l. c ., 341, o42), also yield a soft, silky fibre useful for 
 cordage, and are hence generically known in Kumaun under the 
 name kapasiya. 
 
 Hibiscus cannabinus, Linn., san, grows wild and is also culti- 
 vated to a small extent in the Kota Dun and Bhabar. Hooker, 
 l. c.j 339. 
 
 Kydia calycina, Roxb.; patta, pattiya ; common in dry forests 
 and along the submontane tract. Yields a strong coarse fibre 
 from the inner part of the bark. Hooker, l. c., 348. 
 
 Bombax malabaricum, D.C., cotton-tree ; semal. The cotton 
 from the pods is chiefly valuable as a half-stuff for paper. Experi- 
 ment has shown that the staple is too short for use as a textile 
 fabric (J. Agri-Hort. Ben., III., 122), and it is now chiefly employed 
 for stuffing pillows and the like, and for this purpose there is a 
 small export trade. Hooker, l. c., 349. 
 
792 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Sterculia villosa, Roxb., is the uddla and udiydl of the Kumaun 
 Bhabar. This tree grows to a considerable size, but it is only the 
 saplings from two to three years old that are useful for fibre. From 
 these the layers of bark can be stripped off from one end to the 
 other, the inner furnishing a fine and the outer a coarse cordage 
 fibre that stands moisture well. One stem will yield about 21b. 
 of good fibre by steeping the bark well and beating it out with 
 wooden mallets. The ropes made from it are strong enough for 
 elephant harness, but are chiefly used for cattle halters. The 
 rope is said to become stronger for a time from being frequently 
 wetted, but it seldom lasts more than eighteen months if constant- 
 ly exposed to moisture. The root of the tree is eaten in the hills. 
 Hooker, l. c., 355. 
 
 Sterculia colorata, Roxb , the boddla and boddl of Kumaun, 
 occurs somewhat commonly at the foot of and along the lower 
 range of hills. The bark yields a fibre for cordage similar to that 
 of the preceding species. Brandis, 34. 
 
 Abroma augusta, Linn.: cultivated in gardens in the Dehra 
 Dun where it is probably introduced. It yields a very strong fibre 
 fit for cordage. Hooker, l. c., 375. 
 
 Grewia asiatica, Linn. — Pharsiya, phcdsa, dhdrnin. Occurs 
 wild in the lower hills, cultivated in the plains. The inner bark 
 yields a fibre like the basts of Europe. Hooker, l. c., 386. 
 
 Grewia oppositifolia, Roxb., the bhemval and bliimal of Garh- 
 wal and bhengul of Kumaun, occurs commonly in the lower hills 
 2,500-4,500 feet and up to 6,000 feet. It is occasionally cultivated. 
 Hooker, l. c., 384. It yields an inferior fibre similar to the pre- 
 ceding and for which the branches are cut from July until March 
 or, indeed, at all seasons except in the spring. The leaves are given 
 to cattle, and the sticks are soaked for a month or forty days in 
 water and when dry are beaten on stones and the bark is stripped 
 off. One tree will give about five sers of the inner fibre fit for 
 making into ropes and twine, which are used for tying up cattle 
 and for stringing cots. It is neither very strong nor very durable. 
 Women use the green bark for cleaning their hair. (Hud.) 
 
 Odina Wodier, Roxb. — -jinghan, J i ban , sindan ; occurs in the dry 
 forests along the foot of the hills, ascending the outer range up to 
 
op the north-western provinces. 793 
 
 4,000 feet. The bark yields a coarse cordage fibre. Hooker, II., 
 29. 
 
 Butea frondosa, Roxb. — .Dhdk, palds ; is common in the Duns 
 and warm valleys and yields a very strong fibre from its bark used 
 for caulking boats and making rope. Hooker, II., 164. 
 
 Desmodium tilisefolium, Don. — Chamara, matta; occurs along 
 the outer range 3-8,000 feet and yields from its bark a substance 
 from which paper is made. In Kunaor there is some trade in this 
 paper with Tibet. Hooker, II., 168 : Panj. Prod., 516. 
 
 Bauhinia racemosa, Lam. — Kachndl, gural; occurs in the dry 
 parts of the plains and ascends the hills in Kumaun to 5,000 
 feet. The inner bark yields a strong cordage fibre. Hooker, II., 
 276. 
 
 Bauhinia Vahlii, W. et A. — Mdljan, m&lii ; is a large creeper 
 that occurs rather commonly in the lower hills and upper Bhabar 
 from the Jumna to the Sarda, especially at the bottom of hot valleys 
 and along the sides of precipices. The leaves are used for making 
 umbrellas, and sewn together with twigs form baskets for holding 
 pepper, turmeric, and ginger. They are also used as a substitute 
 for plates at meals and by the petty shop-keepers to wrap up the 
 goods that they sell. This creeper often attains a length of 40-50 
 feet, and is generally cut down in J uly- August, though it may be 
 cut at all seasons. In its natural state it is used for making rope- 
 bridges, but to manufacture rope from it, the outer bark is peeled 
 off and thrown away and the inner coating is steeped in water and 
 twisted when wet. A large creeper will produce a maund of this 
 fibre known as selu. Before being used, the bark is boiled and 
 beaten with wooden mallets, which renders it soft and pliable enough 
 for being made into rope and twine used in the erection of rope- 
 bridges, for thatching, stringing cots, and the like. These ropes 
 though strong are not very durable and require occasional soaking, 
 though if constantly kept in the water they rot quickly and alto- 
 gether do not last more than eighteen months. The broad flat 
 seed of the pod is eaten fried in clarified butter. Hooker, II., 
 279. 
 
 Gerbera lanuginosa is the well-known tinder-plant or kapasiya 
 of Kumaun. The tinder is derived from the tomentum on the 
 
 100 
 
794 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 lower side of the leaves, which is also woven into twine and then 
 netted into small bags for carrying hukkas, &c., so much in use 
 amongst the hill-men. 
 
 Careya arborea, Boxb. — Kiimbhi ; is a large tree that occur® 
 in the forests along the foot of the Himalaya from the Jumna to the 
 Sarda. The bark affords a fair fibre fit far cordage and twine. 
 Hooker, II., 511. 
 
 Calotropis gigantea, It. Br. — Safed-alc, maddr; is a large plant 
 or shrub ; common along the foot of the hills. This is the species 
 that prevails in the Bhaoar, where large patches of it occur, espe- 
 cially near Kalidhungi, hut it does not occur westwards of the Gan- 
 ges at Hardwar. It yields a soft, silky fibre fit for cloth manufac- 
 ture and for making the finer kinds of twine : see Sel. Bee. Born., 
 XVII. ; journ. Agri-Hort. Ben., VIII., 73, 226, 231. 
 
 Calotropis procera, B. Br. — Ak , maddr ; is the prevailing spe- 
 cies from Hardwar southwards and westwards. This species also 
 yields a valuable fibre. Brandis, 331. 
 
 Marsdenia tenacissima, W. et A., occurs in the plains and 
 ascends the hills up to 4,000 feet. The bark of the young shoots 
 yield a fine fibre remarkable for its strength and toughness, for- 
 merly used by natives for bow-strings. Boxburgh, 258. 
 
 Marsdenia Roylei, Wight — Murktila ; a large knotty creeper 
 that occurs along the outer ranges of the Himalaya up to 6,000 feet. 
 It is cut at the knots and boiled in a mixture of ashes, after which 
 the outside bark is thrown away, and the inner yields a fibre used 
 for making fishing-nets and lines of great strength and durability 
 and is capable of forming a cloth material. Brandis, 333. 
 
 Orthanthera viminea, Wight j the chapkiya of Kumaun ; occurs 
 along the foot of the Himalaya, ascending the lower valleys in Kali 
 Kumaun for some distance. The bark is steeped in water and then 
 yields a fibre that affords a good cordage material and is remark- 
 able for its tenacity and length. Drury, F. P., II., 236. 
 
 Cordia Myxa, Linn.. — Bairala , baurala; occurs wild in the for- 
 ests below the Himalaya and is also cultivated in many parts of 
 Upper India. The bark yields a fibre used for caulking boats and 
 making rough cordage. Brandis, 336. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 795 
 
 Daphne papyracea, Wall., the set-bardwa of Kumaun, satpura 
 of Garhwal, and bhalu-suang and bholuwci of Nepal. Two varieties 
 of this species are commonly found in Kumaun -the one with white 
 flowers and yellow fruit occurs at 4,000-8,000 feet, and the other 
 with purple flowers and fruit at 7-8,000 feet. Both yield . a valu- 
 able paper-stuff from which the strong, tenacious hill-papei is made. 
 The following account of the mode of manufacture is from a paper 
 by Mr. B. H. Hodgson in J . A. S. Ben., I., 8 . 
 
 Mode of making the hill-pcipev usually called Nepalese . 
 
 “ For the manufacture of the Nepalese paper the following im- 
 plements are necessary, hut a very rude constiuction of them suffices 
 for the end in view : — 
 
 ls£. — A stone mortar, of shallow and wide cavity, or a large 
 block of stone, slightly but smoothly excavated. 
 
 2nd . — A mallet or pestle of hard wood, such as oak, and in size 
 proportioned to the mortar and to the quantity of boiled rind of 
 the paper plant which it is desired to pound into pulp. 
 
 3rd. — A basket of close wicker work, to put the ashes in, and 
 through which water will pass only drop by drop. 
 
 4-th. — An earthen vessel or receiver, to receive the juice of the 
 ashes after they have been watered. 
 
 5 th. A metallic open-mouthed pot, to boil the rind of the plant 
 
 in. It may be of iron, or copper, or brass, indifferently ; an earthen 
 one would hardly bear the requisite degree of fire. 
 
 Qth' A sieve, the reticulation of the bottom of which is wide 
 
 and open, so as to let the pulp pass through it, save only the lumpy 
 parts of it. 
 
 Tth. A frame, with stout wooden sides, so that it will float 
 
 well in water, and with a bottom of cloth, only so porous that the 
 meshes of it will stay all the pulp, even when dilated and diffused 
 in water, but will let the water pass off when the frame is raised 
 out of the cistern ; the operator must also have the command of a 
 cistern of clear water, plenty of fire-wood, ashes of oak (though 
 I fancy other ashes might answer as well), a fire-place, however rude, 
 and lastly, quantum smfjicit of slips of the inner bark of the papei tiee, 
 such as is peeled off the plant by the paper-makers, who commonly 
 use the peelings when fresh from the plant ; but that is not indis- 
 pensable. With these ‘ appliances and means to boot,’ suppose you 
 
796 
 
 himAlayan districts 
 
 take four seers of ashes of oak, put them iuto the basket above- 
 mentioned, place the earthen receiver or vessel beneath the basket, 
 and then gradually pour five seers of clear water upon the ashes, 
 and let the water drip slowly through the ashes and fall into the 
 receiver. This juice of ashes must be strong, of a dark bark-like red 
 colour, and in quantity about 2tt>. ; and if the first filtering yield 
 not such a produce, pass the juice through the ashes a second time. 
 Next, pour this extract of ashes into the metal pot already describ- 
 ed, and boil the extract ; and so soon as it begins to boil, throw into 
 it as many slips or peelings of the inner bark of the paper plant as 
 you can easily grasp, each slip being about a cubit long and an inch 
 wide ; (in fact the quantity of the slips of bark should be to the 
 quantity of juice of ashes, such that the former shall float freely in 
 the latter, and that the juice shall not be absorbed and evaporated 
 with less than half an hour’s boiling) . Boil the slips for about half 
 an hour, at the expiration of which time the juice will be nearly 
 absorbed and the slips quite soft. Then take the softened slips and 
 put them into the stone mortar, and beat them with the oaken mal- 
 let till they are reduced to a homogeneous or uniform pulp, like so 
 much dough. Take this pulp, put it into any wide-mouthed vessel, 
 add a little pure water to it, and churn it with a wooden instrument 
 like a chocolate mill for ten minutes, or until it loses all stringiness, 
 and will spread itself out when shaken about under water. Next, 
 take as much of this prepared pulp as will caver your paper frame 
 (with a thicker or thinner coat according to the strength of the 
 paper you need), toss it into, such a sieve as I have described, and 
 lay the sieve upon the paper frame, and let both sieve and frame 
 float in the cistern : agitate them, and the pulp will spread itself 
 over the sieve ; the grosser and knotty parts of the pulp will remain 
 in the sieve, but all the rest of it will ooze through into the frame. 
 Then put away the sieve, and taking the frame in your left hand, 
 as it floats on the water, shake the water and pulp smartly with 
 your right hand, and the pulp will readily diffuse itself in a uni- 
 form manner over the bottom of the frame. When it is thus pro- 
 perly diffused, raise the frame out of the water, easing off the water 
 in such a manner that the uniformity of the pulp spread shall con- 
 tinue after the frame is clear of the water, and the paper is made* 
 To dry it, the frame is set endwise, near a large fire ; and so soon 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES- 
 
 797 
 
 as it is dry, the sheet is peeled off the bottom of the frame and 
 folded up. When (which is seldom the case) it is deemed needful 
 to smooth and polish the surface of the paper, the dry sheets are 
 laid on wooden boards and rubbed, with the convex entire side of 
 the conchshell ; or, in case of the sheets of paper being large, with 
 the flat surface of a large rubber of hard smooth-grained wood ; no 
 sort of size is ever needed or applied, to prevent the ink from run- 
 ning.” See also As. Res., XIII., 385. 
 
 In Nepal this paper is manufactured exclusively by the tribes 
 inhabiting cis-Himalayan Bliot, known as Murmis, Lepchas, &c., or 
 generically as Rongbo, in contradistinction to the Sokpo, the name 
 given to the inhabitants of trans-Himalayan Bhot. The manufac- 
 tories are mere sheds, established in the midst of the great forests 
 of the upper ranges which afford an inexhaustible supply of the 
 material as well as of wood ashes and good water, both of which are 
 essential to the manufacture of the raw material into the blocks 
 from which the paper is made. Specimens of these blocks sent to 
 England have been pronounced by experts to be of unrivalled excel- 
 lence as a material for the manufacture of that sort of paper upon 
 which proof-engravings are taken off. 
 
 Wikstrcemia virgata, Meisner ; the chamliya of Kumaun ; is 
 also common in the lower ranges from 5,000-7,000 feet. The paper 
 made from its bark is considered inferior to that made from the 
 bark of the preceding, as it allows the ink to run unless sized, but 
 the bark also affords a strong cordage material, and ropes made from 
 it are used in Naini Tab Brandis, 386 : Drury, F. P., III., 86. 
 
 Bcehmeria nivea, H. et A. ; China-grass, Rheea ; grown expe- 
 rimentally in the Dehra Dun and at Saharanpur. Yields the well- 
 known rheea fibre which is specially noticed hereafter. Brandis, 
 402. 
 
 Bcehmeria macrophylla, Don. — Gargela; occurs common in the 
 lower hills up to 4,000 feet. B. platyphylla, Don., is also very com- 
 mon and is known as gargela ; both yield a fine fibre fit for twine. 
 Dr. Jameson notes that B. lobata, under the native name ullah, is 
 found in Kumaun and also yields a fibre. Brandis, 403. 
 
 Girardinia heterophylla, Decaisne, the aiva-bichhu of Kumaun 
 and bdbar of Simla, is a very common weed in the forests along the 
 
798 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 foot of the Himalaya and yields a fine, strong fibre much used for 
 cordage and twine, but cannot stand much moisture. Brandis, 
 404. 
 
 Villebrunea frutescens, Blume, the plvdsar-patta , poi-dhaula 
 and kdgshi of Kuuiaun, is commonly met with along the foot of the 
 hills ascending to 5,000 feet. It occurs in the neighbourhood of 
 Naini Tal and Bhim Tal and along the valley of the Sarjn and 
 Ganges. It has the appearance of a small bambu and grows 6-8 
 feet, varying in the thickness of the stem from the size of a quill 
 to that of the thumb. It is cut down for use when the seed is 
 formed. The bark or skin is then removed and dried in the sun 
 for a few days ; when quite dry it is boiled with wood-ashes for 
 four or five hours and allowed to cool. When cold it is macerated 
 with a mallet on a flat stone while cold water is applied and gradu- 
 ally the woody matter disappears, leaving a fine fibre which is 
 admirably adapted for fishing lines and nets as well for its great 
 strength as for its power of resisting moisture. Brandis, 406. 
 
 Maoutia Puya, Wedd. ; the ptiya ofKumaun and Nepal, though 
 sometimes known under the same vernacular names as V. frutescens , 
 is common in the lower hills and Bhabar, ascending to 5,000 feet. 
 
 Debregeasia bicolor, Wedd. ; the tushiydra of Kumaun ; is very 
 common all over the lower hills ascending as high as 7,000 feet and 
 is particularly abundant in the Siwaliks. It yields a very strong- 
 cordage fibre. Brandis, 405. 
 
 Memorialis pentandra, Wedd. the juiphal-jctri of Garhwal s is 
 also somewhat common in the lower hills and yields a useful cordage 
 fibre. Drury, F. P., III., 210. Swetenham notices a large nettle 
 as occurring in Garhwal, from the bark of which a fibre is obtained 
 after only three days’ steeping by merely peeling off the rind from 
 one end to the other. He considered it to be in every way far 
 superior to the fibre of hemp. Huddleston mentions the jarkcind- 
 alu, kand-dlu or kalra as yielding a fibre from which sandals and 
 ropes are made in the north of Kumaun. It grows 8-9 feet and 
 the stalks are about as thick as a man’s finger. They are gathered 
 in the cold season and, after being steeped in water for a few days, 
 yield a fibre by peeling from the thick end in the manner of hemp. 
 Both these notices probably refer to G. heterophylla, Decaisne. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 799 
 
 Artocarpus integrifolia, Linn., (Jack-tree) and A. Lakoocha, 
 Roxb., both yield a cordage fibre from their bark. The former is 
 but rarely seen in the Kumaun division, and the bark of the latter is 
 seldom used for this purpose. 
 
 Cannabis sativa, Linn. ; C. indica , Humph. ; gur-ldiangci 
 (female plant), pMl-bhanga (male plant). An annual 3-14 feet 
 high according to soil and climate. Root white, fusiform, furnished 
 with fibres. Stem erect, branched, green, angular, covered all 
 over with an extremely fine but rough pubescence. The stem 
 is hollow within or only filled with a soft pith, which is itself sur- 
 rounded by a tender, brittle substance con- 
 Hemp - sisting chiefly of cellular texture with some 
 
 woody fibres, which is called the 1 reed, ‘ boons, and shov e 
 of the hemp. Outside this we have the thin bark composed of fibres 
 extending in a parallel direction all along the stalk. Lhese fioies 
 consist of delicate fibrils, united together by cellular tissue and all 
 covered by a thin membrane or cuticle. Found abundantly in the 
 Himalayan districts of the North-Western Provinces. The wild 
 hemp known as ganara-bhanga, ban-bhanga or jangli-bhanga , is of 
 little use for fibre. 
 
 The female plant yields seed for oil and the drugs gdnja (see 
 page 755), charas, &c. The male plant yields only fibre from which 
 the bhang ela cloth of Garhwal is manufactured ; also called kothla, 
 bora and gdji, and the ropes ( sel ) for bridges. For the history of 
 the plant see Royle (Fib. PI., 315) and Drury (U. P., 106). The 
 possibility of attaining success in the cultivation of hemp in these 
 provinces was pointed out by Dr. Roxburgh as early as 1800, and 
 on the cession of these provinces, skilled Europeans were sent to 
 carry on experiments in the Muradabad and Gorakhpur districts. 
 In Garhwal and Kumaun its cultivation was encouraged, and for 
 many years the East India Company procured a portion of its 
 ‘annual investment from the Kumaun hills in the shape of hemp.’ 
 
 With the abolition of the Company’s trade the cultivation lan- 
 guished and is now entirely dependent on the local demand, which, 
 
 however, is by no means small. 1 
 
 iq P p < I’aners regarding the cultivation of hemp in India,’ Agra 1855 : Royle’s 
 Fibrous Plants of India, Londou, 1855, and Drury’s Useful Plants of India, Madras, 
 
 1858. 
 
800 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Cultivation 
 
 The following account of the cultivation is derived from Hud- 
 dleston and Batten’s notes. There are two varieties common in 
 Garhwal, the wild and the cultivated. The former is practically 
 useless either for fibre or the drug, so we shall confine our notice 
 chiefly to the latter. The cultivated variety in Garhwal is grown 
 chiefly on high lands having a northern exposure in well-prepared 
 and abundantly manured soil close to the village site. Occasionally 
 
 freshly cleared forest land gives a crop for 
 one year without any need for artificial 
 manure. Irrigation is never resorted to, nor is it needed if the soil 
 be properly prepared. The plant does not flourish below 3,000 feet, 
 as the heat of the valleys is prejudicial to its growth, and it seems 
 to thrive best at elevations of 4-7,000 feet. The mountainous 
 region occupied in Garhwal by the Badhan, Lohba, Chaundkot, 
 Chandpur, Dhanpur and Dewalgarh parganahs, has the greatest 
 area under hemp cultivation. These parganas are marked by lofty 
 ranges, extensive forests and a fairly even temperature. The 
 northern parganahs bordering on the snowy range have no hemp 
 cultivation whatsoever, and there is very little in the parganas 
 bordering on the plains, so that it may be said that the hemp- 
 producing area in Garhwal lies between the Pindar on the north 
 and the southern Nayar on the south and is bounded on the east 
 by the western Ramganga and on the west by the Ganges. The 
 cultivation of the plant as practised in this tract is as follows. 
 The ground, after being well cleared and prepared for the seed, 
 is sown, in the end of May or early in June, at the rate of 
 26 to 33 sers per hi si. 1 During the early growth of the plant the 
 ground is kept free from weeds and the young plants are thinned, 
 leaving a few inches between each, and until the crop has attained 
 a good height, the ground is kept free from all rank vegetation, 
 after which it attains a height of 12-14 feet and is cut in Septem- 
 ber-November. There are two classes of the cultivated plant, the 
 female and the male. The latter is cut some 4-6 weeks earlier than 
 the former and yields a much stronger and superior fibre. On the 
 stalks being cut green, they are dried for several days in the sun 
 by being piled against the walls of the terraced fields until they 
 
 * The bisi is 40 square yards less than an acre, and the seed used for it is 20-25 
 pa than, or 52-66 lt>. avoirdupois. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 80l 
 
 become quite brown. The charas is extracted by rubbing the 
 hands oyer the tops of the plant when the seed is ripe and is best 
 in the female plant. The exudation collected is scraped off the 
 hands and made into rolls for sale. The leaves are also pounded 
 for gdnja and sabzi. When the stalks are sufficiently dry they 
 are tied up into bundles and steeped for 15-16 days in tanks or 
 running streams, being kept under water by stoiies laid upon them. 
 When taken out, they are beaten with wooden mallets and then 
 dried in the sun. The fibre is then peeled off from the thick end 
 of the stalk to the top, and after being again beaten and freed from 
 impurities is tied up into hanks for sale and manufacture of sack- 
 cloth for wear and for bags. For wear, the people simply fold the 
 cloth around the shoulders and fasten it in front with an iron 
 skewer, in the manner the inhabitants of the upper parganahs Wear 
 their blankets. Hemp-cloth is still the chief clothing fabric of the 
 poorer classes in Garhwal during the summer months. 
 
 In Kumaun, hemp is cultivated chiefly in Chaugarkha, especially 
 in pattis Lakhanpur, Darun, Bangor, and Salam. There is also 
 a considerable quantity grown in patti Baraun of the Gangoli par- 
 ganahs, and in a feAv villages in pattis Assi-Chalisi, Uchyur, Mahr- 
 yuri, Gumdes, Dhyanirau, and Malla Chaukot. As in Garhwal there 
 is much prejudice against growing the plant, and it is left almost 
 entirely to the Doms, the Bajputs considering it degrading to them 
 to be styled “hemp-growers. ” So much is this the case that the 
 phrase c tera glmr bhang bono liolo ’ — ‘may hemp be sown in thy 
 house’ — is one of the most common abusive imprecations. Still 
 there are some differences in the obloquy attached to hemp cultiva- 
 tion, for whilst the Khasiyas may, Avithout loss of caste, grow hemp 
 and manufacture rope therefrom for house consumption, they must 
 abandon the manufacture of hempen sack-cloth to the Doms, of 
 whom the Koli, Bora and Agari sections possess almost an exclu- 
 sive monopoly of hemp-weaving. All tribes, however, can traffic 
 in the seed and rope, and even in the charas , without prejudice to 
 their social position. 
 
 In Kumaun the sowing takes place from the middle of May to 
 the end of June. In warm situations the hemp is soavii rather 
 later, in order that the heat and damp of the rains may cease 
 
 101 
 
802 
 
 HIM/LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 before the plant shall have time to run into useless stalk and excess- 
 ive seed. During July-August the ground about the plants is 
 hoed and fresh earth is heaped up about the roots. The female 
 plant ripens from about the middle of October to the middle of 
 November, and the male plant, that yields the more valuable fibre, 
 somewhat earlier. In Kumaun, the situation of hemp-growing 
 villages is rarely so high as in Garhwal, and a cold climate, though 
 preferred to that found at elevations below 5,000 feet, is not consi- 
 dered absolutely necessary. The favourite situation for the culti- 
 vation of hemp in Kumaun is a cool, dry, upland ground with a 
 good soil and' with facilities for manuring. Sites near the home- 
 stead or close to cattle-sheds in the pasturing grounds of the upper 
 ranges are consequently chosen for the abundance of manure. 
 Hemp is supposed to exhaust the soil, and the wheat and barley, 
 which are commonly sown in succession thereto, are said to be 
 defective both in quality and quantity. 
 
 When Dr. Rutherford held his contract for the supply of hemp 
 for the East India Company’s investment, he seems to have managed 
 his enterprise by making advances to the headmen of villages or 
 the principal cultivators ; and should the cultivation of hemp ever 
 again become a commercial speculation, this would seem to be the 
 best method for obtaining success. The produce of a Usi has been 
 estimated at about three seers (bib.) of cJuivctSj foui' maunds 
 (3201b.) of hemp fibre, and 30-35 seers (60-701b.) of seed, yield- 
 ing about five seers (101b.) of oil. In 1814, the fibre was pro- 
 duced for four rupees per maund delivered at the cultivator’s doors 
 or five rupees delivered at Kotdwara or Chilkiya, and it would 
 appear that now a price of from six to seven rupees per maund of 
 82tb. would ensure a constant supply. In 1840, the entire value of 
 the hemp produce in Kumaun, including seed, fibre, and drug, was 
 little more than Rs. 1,000, and Captain Huddleston estimated the 
 total area under hemp in Garhwal during the same year as only 250 
 acres, yielding about forty tons of fibre per annum ; but there is 
 every reason to believe that the outturn has since considerably 
 increased in quantity, and a rough estimate would point to 780 acres 
 under hemp in Garhwal alone in 1880. The seed is collected to 
 be used as a vegetable food, for which purpose, indeed, it is chiefly 
 cultivated in the Sor and Sira parganahs, or to be pressed for the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTEEN PROVINCES. 
 
 803 
 
 extraction of hemp-oil or to be dried and retained for seed. The 
 cluxras or juicy essence is collected for exportation, being hardly, 
 if at all, used in the hills. It now sells at from four to five rupees 
 per seer, and is resold by the farmer of the drug monopoly at eight 
 rupees per seer. The farm of charas in Kumaun alone during 1880- 
 81 was sold for Rs. 3,357. The leaves, too, are dried and exported 
 for use in the various preparations of bhang. The fibres, as already 
 noticed, are made into ropes or sack-cloth. In Kumaun the sale 
 of the untwisted fibres is more common than that of the twisted or 
 manufactured stuff. In 1840, the seed sold at about three rupees 
 per maund, and is now worth about three to four rupees per maund, 
 and in some places where it is chiefly used for culinary purposes is 
 even cheaper. The fibre where it was produced sold at from two to 
 three rupees per maund in 1840 and is now worth from three and a 
 half to four rupees a maund. The bhangelci or hemp -cloth is made 
 up into sheets for weaving or into Icotlas or sacks, and the finer sorts 
 into thailis or bags for carrying flour and lime. A large sack-cloth 
 baa: cost but six annas at Almora in 1840 and is now worth twelve 
 annas. Bags of a smaller size cost about two rupees per dozen in 
 1840 and are now proportionately more expensive. The produce is 
 so small and the demand for bags for sending potatoes to the plains 
 so great that these sacks are yearly advancing in price, and a consi- 
 derable trade in them exists at Ramnagar and Kotdwara. 
 
 Mr. J. H. Batten, in one of his reports, gives the following opi- 
 nion on the prospects of hemp cultivation in Kumaun : — “ If 
 a large demand for hemp, the produce of these mountains, were to 
 arise and it were to become generally known that capital to a 
 Prospects of the hemp considerable amount was ready to be ex- 
 industry. pended for the purpose of procuring the 
 
 article, a very great increase of hemp cultivation might be expected 
 even in Kumaun Proper, but especially from the Chaugarkha par- 
 ganah. If European capital should hereafter be employed in 
 increasing the growth of the excellent hemp existing in this 
 province, I should certainly recommend that the means first used 
 for the purpose should be an outlay of money in advances to 
 and purchases from the present growers and manufacturers, rather 
 than in the attempt on the part of any enterprising individuals to 
 procure land and grow hemp for themselves. Notwithstanding 
 
804 
 
 HIM A' LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 their prejudices, I think that the example of their neighbours, 
 if the latter attained to any fair degree of prosperity from the 
 increase of trade, would soon he followed by many villagers 
 throughout Kumaun, who now are indifferent to or despise their 
 advantageous situation for the growth of hemp, and large tracts of 
 land now waste would be brought under cultivation. There are not 
 
 in Kumaun, .as in Garhwal, many waste villages still left unowned 
 and unclaimed ; and from what I have seen of the character of the 
 people in Kumaun Proper, I think that any stranger who should 
 purchase or rent land within the boundary of a village, for the 
 purpose above indicated, would be quite as liable to litigation, 
 inconvenience with his neighbours, and prejudices against his 
 position, as in any part of India, however populous in compari- 
 son. In the case of advances and purchases on the contrary, the 
 transactions of capitalists would be confined to simple contracts, of 
 a nature to which, if found necessary, the law is open at a cheaper 
 cost, and under simpler forms, than in most other parts of the 
 country.” Captain (now Sir Henry) Ramsay, in a report on the 
 same subject, writes : — “ I would not advocate the system of 
 making advances to individual cultivators : it is not improbable that 
 some ill-disposed persons might create a suspicion that Government 
 intended evil instead of good and actually produce the effect of 
 making those who now grow hemp discontinue its cultivation for 
 a time ; the best plan I think would be to enter into engagements 
 with respectable zamindars for large quantities and allow these 
 contractors to make their own arrangements. The cultivators are 
 quite equal to taking care of themselves in such dealings.” 
 
 Hemp is also grown in the northern parganahs of Nepal, and the 
 mode of cultivation there is thus described by Mr. B. H. Hodgson:— 
 “ The seed is sown from March to April. Damp soils, comprising 
 
 black earth, are fitted for this crop. Before 
 
 Cultivation in Nepal. . . n m • i 
 
 ploughing the held, sufficient manure is 
 
 to be sprinkled over it, then completing the work of the plough, 
 
 the seeds are to be sprinkled, and having broken the clods 
 
 into dust, the field is to be made even. At seven or eight 
 
 days after sowing the seeds the plants come up, but their 
 
 rapidity of growth and their size and strength depend on the 
 
 abundance of the rains or artificial watering. If the plants be 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 805 
 
 very thick, they must be thinned, so as to stand three inches dis- 
 tance from each other. They flower and fruit in Sawan (July), 
 and at the beginning of Bhadon (August) are in their full growth ; 
 but while yet succulent and in flower they are to be cut, with the 
 exception of some seed plants, which are not to be gathered until 
 October. It is the bark of the young but full-grown or Sawan 
 plants (which is soft) that is used for making bhungela. That of 
 the old or October plants is hard and not suitable for manufacture. 
 After the plants have been cut off at the ground, they must be 
 placed in the sun for eight or ten days, or until they be dried suffi- 
 ciently. They must then be steeped in water for three days, and 
 on the fourth day the plants must be taken out of the water and 
 peeled. The peelings are to be washed and put in the sun ; and 
 when quite dried, they are ready for manipulation. They are then 
 to be torn into thin threads with the nails of the hands; next twisted 
 with a spinning-wheel ( tikuli ), and when the threads are thus pre- 
 pared, they are to be boiled with ashes of wood and water in a pot 
 for four hours, and to be washed again for the purpose of whiten- 
 ing. This is the w r ay of preparing bhangela thread, out of which 
 sack-cloth is woven. One mdna (half a kachcha ser ) of seed is 
 sufficient for a ropini of land (one-fifth of a badshahi biglici or 60o 
 square yards), which produces ten or twelve loads of bliang. 
 Hemp grows equally well on slopes and flats, and neai the tops 
 as well as on the sides of the mountains, if not too low. But 
 a moist rich soil is indispensable. The plant attains to a height 
 of eio-ht to ten feet, and should be cut when the flower is 
 falling and the seed forming.” For an account of its cultivation 
 in other countries, see Boyle (Fib. PL, 3bh). 
 
 Hemp prepared for the European market should have the fibres 
 laid parallel to each other and then be simply tied near the thicker 
 end so as to form heads like the Petersburgh hemp, not twisted, 
 plaited and tied, as is the custom in our hills. The Himalayan 
 hemps show strength, divisibility, fineness and softness of fibre- 
 in fact all the essentially good qualities which a fibie should 
 
 possess. 
 
 Clia, interops ‘Martiana, Wall., the jhangra, jager, and thdhl of 
 Kumaun, occurs' on Bhatkot, Tlmkil, Dhnj, and in the valley of the 
 
806 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 karju. The fibre is used for cordage and the leaves for mats and 
 baskets. Brandis, 546. 
 
 Calamus Rotang, Linn. — Rattan — bet; occurs abundantly in the 
 Eastern Dun, in places in the Siwalik tract and along the outer hills 
 eastwards. It yields the common rattan so much used in uphols- 
 tery and for basket work. Brandis does not consider C. Royleanas, 
 Griffith, as distinct. This species has also its western limit in the 
 Delira Dun and is known under the same vernacular name and 
 used for the same purposes. About fifty bullock-loads are exported 
 every year from the Kumaun forest division. Brandis, 559. 
 
 Typha angustifolia, Linn. ; Yar. elephantina, Roxb. — Bora . 
 This species occurs throughout the North-Western Provinces and 
 Oudli, ascending the hills in the Kali valley, and indeed in most 
 of the valleys bordering on the plains. It is the reri of the upper 
 districts, and the variety elephantina is the pacleri or pateri of 
 the hills. The leaves are much used in the manufacture of soft 
 matting, and from Kumaun alone about twenty bullock-loads of the 
 raw material and 3,500 pieces of the matting are exported every 
 year. T. lati folia , Linn., is called patera in Bijnor and kanda-tela 
 in Garhwal, and the leaves are largely employed in the manufac- 
 ture of a coarse matting called boriya , of which some 900 maunds 
 are annually exported from Kumaun. In fact these two species 
 afford the chief matting materials in common use. I am not aware 
 that the leaves have ever been used for other purposes. Roxburgh, 
 648 : Drury, F. P., III., 495. 
 
 Arundo Karka, Roxb., the Jcarka and nal of the Kumaun 
 Bhabar, is of common occurrence in suitable localities. A. ( Phrag - 
 mites) Roxburghii , Kunth., is the bichhra of Garhwal and the Jchaila 
 and khailuioa of the Kumaun Bhabar, ascending up to 3,500 feet 
 in the valleys. A. nepalensis is the nal , nal-tura, and tot-nal, 
 common in the Bhabar and found at Bhim Tal. All these are 
 sent to the plains under the generic name ‘ nal ’ and are applied 
 to cane-work in chairs, matting and similar uses, and the fibre of the 
 flower-stalks is manufactured into rope. About 220 bullock-loads are 
 yearly exported from the Kumaun forest division. Roxburgh, 117. 
 
 Saccharum Munj a, Roxb. — Munja. The upper half of the culm 
 is known as sirki-munja or sirki; the lower half as sent ha or sarpat; 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 807 
 
 the blade twisted and beaten yields the strong cordage known as 
 munj ; the tufty leaves are called sarlcctra towards Hardwar. Munj 
 abounds along the banks of rivers and in sandy places and generally 
 along the base of the hills from the Jumna to the Sarda and up the 
 valleys to 3,500 feet. The fibre is made from the sheathing leaves 
 of the culm and forms the material from which the janeo or sacri- 
 ficial thread of the Hindus is made. Munj is commonly employed as 
 a tow-rope from possessing great elasticity and strength, with a power 
 of resisting moisture common to few other fibres. It is also used for 
 the riffo-inc of boats, the bottoms of cots, chairs, and footstools, mat- 
 ting, in the manufacture of coarse paper, and as a string for fastening 
 the bambu framework for the roofs of houses, and indeed for all com- 
 mon purposes in every district. The sirlci is used for thatching, a 
 covering or pawlin for carts, and for chairs and the like. Under 
 the names bind and mdnj a considerable amount of the various 
 products of this grass are sent to the plains. The returns for four 
 years from Kumaun give an average export of 1,600 bullock-loads 
 of the unmanufactured article and about 75 maunds of the rope. 
 Drury, F. P., III., 653. 
 
 Saccharum spontaneum, Linn., is the Msh, jasha or jhdnsh 
 of Kumaun, according to Madden. It occurs commonly in the 
 Bhabar and lower hills and is found near Almora, where its long- 
 rooting surculi are substituted for the Jcuska grass in religious 
 ceremonies by the local Brahmans. The leaves yield a thatching 
 grass and matting material and a fibre useful for string for common 
 purposes. Roxburgh, 79. Eragrostis cynosuroides under the names 
 ddbh and kasa is used in the religious ceremonies of the Hindus. 
 
 Saccharum fuscum, Roxb., is a common reed of the Bhabar, 
 where it is known as tat, neja (grass), and mora ; it is the kilik of 
 the plains. The culms are used in the manufacture of screens and 
 pens. The average annual export of this reed from Kumaun 
 amounts to over 800 bullock-loads. Drury, F. P., III., 653 : 
 Roxburgh, 79. 
 
 Saccharum Sara, Roxb., is the sarhar or sar-ur of the sub- 
 montane tract, where it is very common. This reed is also used as 
 a matting material and for chairs and the like, but the fibie is 
 inferior to that of S. Munja, with which it is often confounded. 
 
808 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 It is said, however, to be employed as a tow-line ill Mirzapur, and 
 must therefore possess tenacity and strength. Roxburgh, 82. 
 
 Eriophorum comosum, Wall., Scirpus comosus, Roxb.; babar, 
 bab, bdbilci, and at Almora pan-babiyo, only found in the Siwaliks 
 and in low hot localities in the interior on base and steep slopes. 
 It forms but a small portion of the fibre exported to the plains 
 as babar or bliabar grass. The jlitila or rope bridges erected 
 where sangas or planked bridges cannot be made are chiefly formed 
 of this fibre in Kumaun. They are safe for men and sheep and 
 last about a year, when the ropes require renewal. The chhinkas 
 or bridges of a single cable bearing a transverse seat are sometimes 
 made from it, and it is also extensively used in rafting timber. 
 The principal portion of the babar grass of commerce is derived 
 from the Spodiopogon angustifolius , Trin. Drury, F. P., III., 
 530. 
 
 Cyperus tegetum, Roxb.; Papyrus pangorei, Fees ; motha ; 
 grows wild and is also cultivated on the edges of inundated fields 
 for the sake of its culms, which form an excellent material for 
 matting. The culms whilst green are split into three or four pieces, 
 which, in drying, contract so much as to bring the margins into 
 contact, in which state they are woven into mats and thus show 
 nearly a similar surface on both sides. C. rotundas , Linn., also 
 known as mothci , is applied to similar uses in a lesser degree. 
 Roxburgh, 68, 70. 
 
 Imperata arundinacea, Cyrilh, is the shiro of the Bliabar and 
 lower hills, ascending to 7,500 feet. The culms are used for the 
 same purpose as those of mtinj, and the leaves for thatching and 
 matting. Drury, F. P., III., 652. 
 
 Anthistiria arundinacea, Roxb., is the ulu, ullah , kangtir and 
 kandura of the Bliabar and affords the same products as the pre- 
 ceding. Drury, l. c., 650. 
 
 Anatherium muricatum, Beauv., is the gandar of the sub- 
 montane tract. The roots are commonly known as has or khas and 
 the culms as sink. The latter are exported from Kumaun with the 
 sirki of the mtinj under the same name and are used for the same 
 purposes. The roots are exported for making tatties, dyers’ brushes, 
 and fans. Drury, l. c., 644. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 809 
 
 Spodiopogon angustifolius Trin.; Andropogon involutus, Steud.; 
 the bdbar of the tract from the Jumna to the Sarda. Dr. J. L. Stewait 
 writes : — “This grass, which is abundant in the Gfarhwal Himalaya 
 and occasional on the skirts of the Siwaliks, appears to furnish 
 almost all the material called bdbar so largely used for string in 
 these parts (Bijnor). Botanists from Wallich and Hoyle downwards 
 have stated this to be the produce of Eriophorum comosum, of which, 
 however, only a very small proportion of that brought to the plains 
 consists. Dr, Brandis first drew my attention to the probability of 
 the ordinary belief being erroneous, and subsequent inquiry has 
 shown the case to be as above stated. The string is very coarse but 
 strong, and, although there is great waste in the manufacture, exceed- 
 ingly cheap. It is well adapted for boat-ropes, the rope-work of 
 bedsteads and other ordinary purposes. Possibly the bdbar may 
 come into play as a paper material ; at least it is worth the trial, and 
 probably larger quantities of the raw article could be got than of 
 any other fibre in this part of the Himalaya.” (J. Agri.-Hort. 
 Cal., XIII., 293). The raw material is procurable for about eight 
 annas per matmd and the fibre at four times that price. About 25,000 
 bullock-loads are yearly exported from the Kumaun forest divi- 
 sion. 
 
 Cymbopogon laniger, Desf.; Andropogon Iwarancusa, Roxb.; 
 is known variously as miriya , ban, ganguli , dab, and piriya in 
 the submontane tract. It ascends the hills up to 5,000 feet at 
 Almora and is found along the Sarju as far as Bageswar ; flowering 
 in April. The culms are exported with those of the mora for 
 similar purposes, and the leaves are used for thatching and coarse 
 matting. The culms and leaves of C, Martini, Munro, are applied 
 to similar uses. Roxburgh, 92. 
 
 Bambus. — The genera included under the common name bambus 
 are sufficiently numerous and important to deserve special notice 
 here in connection with their use as a half-stuff for paper-making. 
 Following the arrangement of Brandis, we shall briefly refer to 
 each in the order given by him in his 1 Forest Flora’: — 
 
 1. Arundinaria falcata, Nees — NingdL Madden notes that the 
 people of the Danpur pargana in Kumaun enumerate no less than 
 eight kinds of ningdla or ringdl as it is pronounced in Garhwal, 
 
 102 
 
810 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 viz., — thcim, utham , kutino, malingo, jhumro or jhungra, cleo-ningdla , 
 gorningdla, and dom-ningala. The last is probably the common or 
 kali-ningala found abundantly along the Gagar range, and, like the 
 jhumro , in much request for pens. Dr. Falconer referred it to the 
 genus Thamnocalamus. The tham is said to be the largest of the 
 whole and is sent down to the plains for hukka pipes. The deo- 
 ningdla is the A. utillissima of Edgeworth, and occurs in great 
 abundance in the snowy range, especially in the upper valley of the 
 Pindar. It affords excellent material for matting, baskets, fishing- 
 rods and the like. The gor-ningdla is the gol of Bisahr, with 
 their culms eighteen feet high, occurring in dense clumps of a 
 hundred or more each. Brandis (p. 562) gives to A. falcata a range 
 of 4,500-10,000 feet, ascending to 12,000 feet from the Ravi to 
 Nepal, abundant in places, gregarious, often forming underwood in 
 moist forests of Abies Smithiana, A. Webbiana, and Quercus seme- 
 carpifolia. It flowers in May and the seeds ripen in August. 
 
 2. Tharnr, oca Iannis spatliijlorus , Munro — Ringal. 
 
 This is probably the kdli-ningdla of the preceding notice, occur- 
 ing in Danpur. It is recorded from Deoban in Jaunsar, Diidatoli 
 in Garhwal, and Kumaun at elevations 8,000-11,000 feet. T. Fcil- 
 coneri, Hook. /., is also recorded from the Madheri pass in Kumaun. 
 See Brandis, p. 563. 
 
 3. Dendrocalamus strictus, Nees. — Bans. 
 
 To this species belongs the great mass of the bambus exported 
 as minor forest produce from the Jumna to the Sarda. For the 
 Garhwal forests, Dr. J. L. Stewart gives the following classification 
 of cut bambus, beginning with the least valuable : — 
 
 1. Chhaneju, [chhaneju, K.), long and thin, used for roofing 
 purposes. 
 
 2. Lathi or IdthicMr [lathi-baha, K.), thicker, shorter, solid, for 
 walking-sticks and clubs. 
 
 3 Bdlu, similar, but thicker, for sides of cots. 
 
 4. Kanemva ( kanderu , K.), between the last two in thickness 
 but chiefly used for roofing purposes. 
 
 5. Sardicha ( sardinchu, K.), much thicker, shorter, hollow; also 
 used for roofing purposes. 
 
 6. Dash'itta, similar, but much longer. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 811 
 
 7. Bhengi ( baliaga , K.), thickest of all and less hollow, used for 
 tent and dooly poles. See further Brandis, p. 569. 
 
 Bambus form the most important portion of the minor forest 
 produce of all the forest divisions and one that increases in 
 value every year, but it is to the materials for half-stuff in 
 paper-making which they afford that we wish to invite attention 
 here, and for this purpose will refer to a paper 1 by Mr. J. Routledge 
 on the subject. In his opening paragraph, he writes : — “ Of 
 all the fibre-yielding plants known to botanical science there 
 is not one so well calculated to meet the pressing requirements 
 of the paper-trade as ‘ bambu,’ both as regards facility and 
 economy of production as well as the quality of the ‘paper- 
 stock’ wdiich can be manufactured therefrom. Grown under 
 favourable conditions of climate and soil there is no plant which 
 will give so heavy a crop of available fibre to the acre and no 
 plant that requires so little care for its cultivation and continuous 
 production.” Attempts have been made in England to obtain 
 from the bambu a half-stuff or pulp for paper manufacture, but 
 these have failed chiefly from using the plant when it had attain- 
 ed to some degree of maturity and the fibre had become extremely 
 dense and the external skin hard and silicious. In this state the 
 processes for softening the material and converting it into pulp by 
 long-continued boiling or digesting in very strong solutions of caus- 
 tic alkali at a high temperature were troublesome, expensive, and 
 dangerous. Mr. Routledge would therefore take the young plant, 
 and by a system of close plantations well watered and systematical- 
 ly cropped ensure successive growths available for preparation into 
 stock. His estimate is as follows: — “Allowing 208 feet square 
 to represent one acre divided into {twelve beds each 96 x 26 feet 
 with twelve paths 96' x 8'8" wide and one intersecting road 208' 
 x 16' wide, leaves a space for planting equal to 2,496 feet, or 
 29,952 feet in the twelve beds ; allowing the stems to be 2 feet 
 apart and (say) only 12 feet high, we have 7,488 stems, which at 
 121b each will yield 40 tons to the acre.” Assuming that these 
 40 tons of green stems will lose 75 per cent, of moisture in drying, 
 ■we have 10 tons of dry stems to the acre, which will yield 60 per 
 
 i Bamboo considered as a paper-making material, by T. Routledge : London, 
 1875. 
 
812 
 
 HIM X LAY AN DISTRICTS 
 
 cent., or six tons of unbleached fibrous paper-stock baled up in 
 merchantable condition. It is unnecessary to enter into Mr. 
 Routledge’s system of treating the bambu for the manufacture of 
 paper-stock, our object being merely to show that a practical paper- 
 maker considers it possible to turn the preparation of bambu fibre 
 into a profitable commercial speculation. Nothing has yet been 
 attempted in this direction in India. 
 
 WOODS. 
 
 The timber-producing trees of the Himalaya of these pro- 
 vinces are sufficiently described in the admirable work of Dr. 
 Brandis on the Forest Flora of North-West and Central India , to 
 
 which the reader must be referred for 
 Timber trees. . 
 
 descriptions of those trees noticed hereafter 
 
 and of those which do not claim a reference in a work like 
 the present one. The forests themselves will be enumerated in the 
 succeeding chapter, and here we shall only refer generally to their 
 more valuable timber-products. The forests below the hills and 
 those clothing the outer spurs contain sal, sisu, tun, and trees belong- 
 ing to the genera Acacia Terminalia, Anogeissus, Adina, and Stephe- 
 gyne, besides the grasses popularly known as bambus, all of which 
 are of the first importance for house-building, furniture, agricultu- 
 ral implements and boat- building. From them is derived the 
 greater portion of the revenue in the State forests, and omitting 
 them, there would be little of any practical value to record. In 
 the upper hills, the conifers clothe almost every ridge and valley 
 within the zone of arboreous vegetation, and with oaks and rhodo- 
 dendrons, the box, maple and birch afford, if proper precautions be 
 observed, an inexhaustible supply of every class of wood equal in 
 quality to that procurable in Europe. The sal of the submontane 
 tract and the cedar of the hills are held in the highest esteem and 
 have been much worked in all easily accessible forests, but there are 
 other trees that afford a timber equally suitable for most of the pur- 
 poses to which the former are now applied. The bdkli, sain, lialdu , 
 and gosam of the submontane tract and some of the oaks, the pine, 
 spruce and fir of the hills give very valuable timber fit for every- 
 thing except perhaps railway-sleepers, and it will be necessary, 
 should the existing demand continue, to call on the reserve of these 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 813 
 
 trees to supply all common wants. This can best be done by rais- 
 ing the duty on the more valuable timber, and the sooner a move- 
 ment of this so.t is made, the better it will be for the future of the 
 sdl and deodar forests, which now require rest and care. Bambus 
 have already been sufficiently described on a previous page (p. 809) , 
 and it will not be necessary to notice them further here. We shall, 
 therefore, restrict ourselves to a brief description of the most impor- 
 tant trees in the forests of the submontane tract and of the coni- 
 fers, oaks, and a few other timber trees in the hills. All of these 
 have an ascertained value and are the chief sources of the timber 
 supply for the plains. 
 
 Shorea robusta, Goertn. — Scil, Jcanddr, sakhu (plains). Brandis, 
 26 : Hook., I., 306. The sal occurs along the foot of the hills from 
 the Jumna to the Sarda and also in the Duns. It ascends the hills 
 in places to 3,000 feet and is found in the valleys to a great dis- 
 tance inland, notably along the Sarju and Ramganga. It is the 
 most valuable and most sought after of all the timber trees of the 
 submontane forests and from time immemorial has been exported 
 to the plains. It is usually the characteristic tree of the tracts 
 which it affects, and though other trees occur, the sal predominates. 
 In the Patli Dun and other places where pure sdl forests exist and. 
 thrive, the soil is usually composed of alluvial deposits, and drift in 
 the valleys and plateaus and sandstone or conglomerate interspersed 
 with blue shale on the ridges. Brandis notes that the climatic con- 
 ditions favourable to its growth are a rainfall of 40-100 inches and a 
 mean temperature during the four seasons within the following 
 limits: — cold-season, 50-70°: hot season 77-85°: rainy season, 
 80-88°: autumn, 74-77°. The sdl grows, as a rule, to a height 
 of 60 to 90 feet with clear stems 30-40 feet long and 6-8 feet in 
 girth. Further east under Nepal it attains much larger proportions 
 and measurements are recorded of trees 100-150 feet in height 
 and 20-25 in feet girth. Captain Wood has estimated the growth 
 to be on an average (in the Oudh forests) 54 feet in 65 years and 
 72 feet in 95 years. The wood is reddish coloured, coarse-grained, 
 even-fibred, hard, strong, tough, and so heavy that it cannot be 
 transported by water without the aid of floats. The average weight 
 of a cubic foot is 50-60fb. — with variations 40-691b. — and its specific 
 gravity is over 1,000. The transverse strength as ascertained 
 
814 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 from numerous experiments varies from 609 to 972. Baker found 
 that a six-feet bar, two inches square, broke at 12381b., and Brandis 
 also records a number of experiments. 
 
 Cedrela Toona, Roxb. — Tim , trim. Brandis, 72. The trim is 
 not now very common west of the Ramganga except in the low 
 moist valleys leading into the Path Dun and in parts of the east- 
 ern Dehra Dun, and even to the east of that river the reserves have 
 been denuded of most of the mature trees. The tun attains a height 
 of 60-70 feet, with a girth of 6-10 feet. The heartwood is 
 close-grained, hard, capable of taking a high polish like mahogany, 
 and when properly seasoned is deservedly known as an excellent 
 furniture wood. A cubic foot weighs 29-361b, and the co-efficient 
 of transverse strength ranges from 420-560. In one of Baker’s 
 experiments, a six-feet bar, two inches square, broke at 8001b. 
 Stewart notes the interesting fact that in the small family to which 
 the tun belongs there are four other valuable timber-trees, only 
 one of which, the mahogany ( Swietenia Mahogani), is extra- Indian. 
 The others are Satin-wood ( Ohloroxylon Swietenia, D. C.) ; rohuna 
 (Swietenia febrifuga, Roxb.), and Chittagong wood ( Chickrassia 
 tabularis , A. Juss.), all of which are indigenous in Southern India 
 and the last also in Eastern Bengal. The tun ranks as a first-class 
 timber in the forest tariff. The wood of C. serrata , Royle (Bran- 
 dis, 73) the dala of Kumaun and ‘ bastard-toon ’ of Europeans, is 
 of a lighter colour than that of the true tun and is used in the hills 
 for house-building and the like. 
 
 Schleichera trijuga, Willd.— Gosam, gausam, hosam. Bran- 
 dis, 105. This tree occurs in the Siwalik tracts and Duns, ascend- 
 ing the valleys to 3,000 feet. It attains a height of 60-70 feet 
 and a girth of 5-6 feet. The wood is reddish brown, close-grained, 
 tough, hard and heavy, and weighs 66-7 01b. to the cubic foot. 
 It is much used for the crushers (cMran) for oil and sugarcane 
 mills, pestles, rollers, agricultural implements and carts, and all 
 work in which toughness and strength are desirable. 
 
 Dalbergia Sissoo, Roxb. — Sliisham, sissu. Brandis, 149 : 
 Hooker, II., 231. The sisu occurs throughout the submontane 
 tract and Duns in moist places on the banks of streams and on 
 islands in the rivers. It attains a, height of 40-60 feet, with a 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 815 
 
 girth of 6, and in very rare cases up to 12 feet. The sap-wood is 
 light coloured and the heart-wood is of a deep brown colour, close- 
 grained, hard and capable of taking a high polish. A cubic foot of 
 seasoned wood weighs 45-50fb., of unseasoned wood 64-70fb. 
 The co-efficient of transverse strength ranges from 700 to 900, be- 
 ing superior to nearly all other woods. A six-feet bar, tw r o inches 
 square, broke at 1,1041b. in one of Baker’s experiments. Sisu is 
 useful for all work requiring strength and elasticity, and is much 
 employed for furniture, house-building, boat-building, carts, beds, 
 saddle-frames, and agricultural implements. It is considered a 
 first-class wood in the forest tariff. 
 
 Ougeinia dalbergioid.es, Benth.; Dalbergia Oogeinensis , Roxb. 
 — Sdndan , sanan, ckandan. Brandis, 146 : Hooker, II., 161. It 
 occurs chiefly in the valleys of the outer hills, ascending to 5,000 
 feet and attains a height of 40-50 feet with a girth of 3-5 feet 
 and occasionally 7-8 feet. The wood is close-grained, hard, 
 strong, tough, and very durable. A cubic foot weighs 57-601b., 
 and it is much valued for wheels, ploughs, furniture and indoor 
 household work. It is one of the first-class timbers in the forest 
 tariff. 
 
 Acacia Catechu, Willd.; Mimosa Catechu , Linn., M. Sundra, 
 Roxb. — Khair. Brandis, 186. The khair occurs along the sub- 
 montane tract and in the Duns,'- ascending the valleys to 3,000 feet. 
 It has been much worked for the extraction of hath, and in the 
 more accessible tracts few large trees remain. It attains a height 
 of 30-40 feet, with a girth of 4-6 feet and occasionally 8-10 
 feet. The heart-wood is of a deep red colour, close-grained, hard, 
 tough, elastic and heavy. It is admirably suited for crushers 
 ( cliuran ) for oil and sugarcane mills, and for this purpose yields 
 only to the tamarind. It is also largely used for axles, pestles, pins, 
 plough-shares, cotton-rollers, wheels, bows, spear-handles and the 
 like, and is one of the most valuable of the second-class woods. Its 
 product, hath, has been noticed elsewhere (p. 775). 
 
 Terminalia tomentosa, W. et A.; T. crenulata and coriacea, 
 W. et A.; Pentaptera crenulata , coriacea , and tomentosa , Roxb. 
 Sain , a sin, asain, sdj. Brandis, 225. This tree is common in the 
 .submontane tract and the Duns, attaining a height of 80-100 feet, 
 
 
816 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 with a girth of 8-10 feet. The heart-wood is dark-brown, tough, 
 strong, elastic, and very durable. A cubic foot of seasoned wood 
 weighs 601b, varying from 50-70tb. The co-efficient of transverse 
 strength is 860, varying from 591-1,104. In one of Baker’s 
 experiments a bar six feet long and two inches square broke at 
 9031b. It is used for indoor household work, carriage shafts, 
 agricultural implements, rice-pestles and boat-building, and is one 
 of the best of the second-class woods now coming into general use. 
 
 Terminalia Chebula, Retz. — liar , harara. Brandis, 223. This 
 tree occurs in the Siwalik tract and outer hills ascending to 5,000 
 feet and along the hot valleys in the interior. It attains a height 
 of 60-80 feet and a girth of 5-10 feet. A cubic foot of seasoned 
 wood weighs 54-60fb. The timber is of a brownish colour, close- 
 grained, heavy, capable of taking a high polish and fairly durable. 
 It is used for furniture, indoor household work, and agricultural 
 implements. T. belerica, Roxb., the bahera of the submontane 
 tract, yields an inferior wood, of little value, though used for 
 planks. 
 
 Anogeissus latifolia, Wall., Conocarpus latifolia , Roxb. — Dhaa - 
 ri , bdkli, clhawa. Brandis, 227. This handsome tree is common 
 over all the submontane tract and is found in Dehra Dun, imparting 
 a fine copper tint to the foliage of the forests in winter. It attains 
 a height of 60-70 feet, with a girth of 6-9 feet. The timber is 
 close-grained, of a brown colour, hard, tough, and elastic. A cubic 
 foot of the seasoned wood weighs 57-65ib, and of the unseasoned 
 wood 75-80!b. The co-efficient of transverse strength, according 
 to Skinner, is 1,220, but is placed much lower by others. From 
 its elasticity, the bdkli variety is especially fitted for cart-poles, 
 axles, axe-handles and the like, and it is gradually coming into 
 great demand as the prices of the superior timbers have risen. It 
 is well fitted for all house-building and agricultural purposes, 
 though said to be not very durable when exposed to moisture. The 
 bark of the bdkli variety appears to be of a lighter colour than that 
 of the dhauri variety, while the leaves are smaller and it grows to a 
 greater height. 
 
 Adina cordifolia, II. f. et Benth.; Hauclect cordifolia, Roxb. — 
 Haldu. Brandis, 263. The haldu occurs abundantly in the open 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 817 
 
 plain along the foot of the hills from the Sarcla to the Ramganga 
 and less commonly westwards through the Dehra Dun to the Jum- 
 na. It ascends the valleys to 3,000 feet. It is not gregarious and 
 is remarkable for its trunk being often buttressed like that of the 
 semal. Trees GO-100 feet high and with a girth of 10-18 feet 
 are not uncommon in the Bhabar. The average weight per cubic 
 foot is 42fb., varying 36’3-49Ib. The co-efficient of transverse 
 strength is about 700. The wood is yellow, smooth fibred and 
 fine-grained and is fairly durable. It seasons well, works easily 
 and takes a fine polish, and is suitable for turnery, though some- 
 times apt to warp and crack. It is now much used for indoor 
 household work, planks, boxes, the keels of boats, combs, writing- 
 tablets, gun-stocks, and agricultural implements. 
 
 Stephegyne parvifolia, Korth.; Nauclea parvifolia , Roxb.— - 
 Kaim , kangai , phaldu. Brandis, 262. This tree is gregarious, 
 though occasionally met solitary in the open plain. It grows to a 
 height of 50-60 feet, though specimens of 80 feet have been 
 recorded and the average girth is 6-7 feet. The weight of a cubic 
 foot of sea soned timber is 35-47tb., of green timber 54th., and the 
 co-efficient of transverse strength is 586-683. The timber is 
 durable if not exposed to moisture and is applied to the same 
 purposes as the preceding. This and all other woods of the sub- 
 montane forests, except sal, sissu, tun , and sdndan come under the 
 designation ‘ Katrukh.' 
 
 Quercus semecarpifolia, Smith — Rarslm, sauj. Brandis, 479. 
 This species occurs at high elevations 8, 000-10, 000 feet. Madden 
 records it at Naini Tab It attains a height of 70-80 feet, and a girth 
 of 7-8 feet is not rare. It grows slowly and gives a hard, heavy tim- 
 ber that will not easily bear export, but on the spot is used for house- 
 building, bedsteads, poles, helves and ploughs. It is said to warp on 
 exposure and to be liable to the attacks of insects. 
 
 Quercus lanuginosa, Don. ; Q. lanata, Wall. — Rianj, rai-bdnj. 
 Brandis, 481. This species occurs at Naini Tal and a few other 
 places in Kumaun, 6,000-7,500 feet. The word is of a greyish- 
 brown colour, hard and very heavy, and is not easily worked. It 
 is much liable to the attacks of a small black hymenopterous 
 insect which often riddles it completely in a few years. 
 
 103 
 
818 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTKICTS 
 
 Quercus dilatata, Royle ; Q. floribunda, Lind. — Tilonj , kilonj , 
 moru. Brandis, 482. This species is common on the outer ranges 
 from the Jumna to the Sarda at 4,500-9,000 feet. Pearson 
 notices the noble forests of this oak in the valleys of the Bhagirathi 
 and Jumna rivers. It attains a height of 80-90 feet and a girth 
 of 8-9 feet, and Madden records one 100 feet in height and 19' 8" 
 in girth. The wood is of a brownish colour, hard, durable and 
 heavy. It is used for agricultural purposes and house-building 
 and is considered the best of all the oaks for carpentry. 
 
 Quercus incana, Roxb. — Bcmj. Brandis, 482. 
 
 This species is common on the outer hills from the Jumna to 
 the Sarda. It generally attains a height of 20-30 feet, with a girth 
 of 4 — 5 feet. The wood is used for house-building and agricultural 
 purposes and ranks second to the preceding in popular estimation. 
 Madden records Q. annulate /,, underthe names ‘ phaliaut ’ or phaniat ,’ 
 as occurring in Naim Tal ; it is the pharonj of Eastern Garhwal. 
 
 Buxus sempervirens, Linn.; B. Wallichiana, Baillon. — Box — 
 Papari. This tree occurs in the upper hills at 6,000-8,000 feet 
 and is common in the Bhagirathi, Jumna, and Tons valleys. The 
 wood is very close-grained, hard and heavy, weighing 60-651b. 
 per cubic foot, and selected pieces are fitted for all the purposes 
 to which European box is applied. 
 
 Acer oblongum, Linn. — Patangliya , kirmali. Brandis, 110. 
 This species occurs up to 6,000 feet in the great valleys. It is 
 used for agricultural implements and from its knots some of the 
 better wooden drinking-cups exported to Tibet are made. A consi- 
 derable number of these cups are made from the knots of A. pictum , 
 Thunb., which is common in the hills above 7,000 feet, and is also 
 used for agricultural purposes and house-building. 
 
 Betula acuminata, Wall. — Himalayan Birch — Puya-udish or 
 utis, Brandis, 458. This tree occurs in sheltered places 6,500- 
 10,000 feet on all the outer ranges. The wood is close-grained 
 and takes a fine satin polish. It is particularly good for panels for 
 doors, and the examples in the Government-house at Naini Tal 
 show that it is a valuable acquisition for ornamental work. The 
 alder, known as 1 udish,’ is the A Inns nepalensis , Hon., which 
 occurs at lower elevations and is also used for house-building pur- 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 819 
 
 poses and gives a fair-sized log, from which planks may be cut for 
 tea-boxes and the like. The wood is light and somewhat brittle, but 
 takes a satiny polish like the birch. The people towards the snows 
 use the bark of the silver birch ( Betula Bhojpatra, Wall.; Brandis, 
 457) for writing and packing in place of paper. 
 
 CONIFERS. 
 
 As already noticed, the conifers constitute the most valuable 
 section of the timber-producing trees of the upper Himalaya both 
 for quantity and quality. In many parts of the country they 
 occur in unbroken masses extending over many miles and present 
 a scene of magnificent grandeur unknown elsewhere. Each species 
 has its own peculiar beauty, but perhaps the wide-spreading cedar 
 with its branches almost reaching to the ground is the finest and 
 
 well deserves the epithet ‘divine-tree’ given 
 to it by the old Hindu poets and still in 
 common use to designate it from Kashmir to the Ganges. We 
 have added Stewart’s analytical key to the conifers and a list of 
 vernacular synonyms compiled from the writings of C leghorn, 
 Madden, Stewart, and Brandis, which seem necessary in order to 
 understand the very confusing local nomenclature : — 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
Analytical ley to the chief arboreous Conifers of the North-Western Himalaya by the late J. L. Stewart, M.D. 
 
3 
 
 OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 821 
 
Local names of the Conifers of the North-West Himalaya. 
 
 822 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 cS 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 W 
 
 ■ VS 3 
 
 M 
 
 ■-3 
 
 8 '2 v£ 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 2 P 5 
 
 3 W 
 
 rc 3 • bfi 
 
 d 
 
 M/a 3 
 
 od £ 
 
 a i a 
 
 v“ 'os a 
 
 WWW 
 
 £*-i 
 
 S3 -3 c3 
 CO O CZ 2 
 
 fca 
 
 3 
 
 $ 
 
 o 
 
 -►3 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 GO 
 
 G» 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 vc3 
 
 £ 
 
 cl 
 
 © 
 
 Ph 
 
 S • 
 
 O 
 
 CD .pH 
 
 PP 
 
 o 3 ’ 
 
 I ^ 
 
 . J O 
 
 • pH \P» FH 
 
 o 5 cS 
 
 won 
 
 ph 
 
 PH 
 
 . 2 rd 
 
 ei.a d s 
 
 , 2 ^ 5-2 o 3 -h § 
 
 .5 ».2 u d d .p 43 
 
 W W W 02 02 O H 
 
 5 o3 
 
 ■g-S 
 
 S3 
 
 o o 
 
 MW 
 
 -M 
 
 C8 
 
 t/D 
 
 rd 
 
 VC3 
 
 GO 
 
 c3 
 
 « 
 
 <D 
 
 rd 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 be 
 £ , 
 
 
 o d P ° S ° s 
 5 d d nos g 
 a) oj .h q a; c >> 
 
 KMM«M © 
 
 rd 
 
 o 
 
 pH 
 
 o 
 
 \c3 
 
 § 
 
 w 
 
 ad 
 
 ft 03 
 
 nw 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 DU r, 
 
 i o_* 
 •iJ 'os ft 
 33 3 ft 
 O O 
 
 : p* 
 
 • »h 
 
 •ft 
 
 ^ .S 32 
 fc /-v’S v — ' 
 
 °3H » 
 
 -■*? 
 
 3 
 
 'CC 
 
 a o 
 
 b .h 
 
 W S £ h 
 
 3 | 
 
 WWcoW 
 
 <D 
 
 rd 
 
 o 
 
 5§ 
 
 w 
 
 GO 
 
 \c3 
 
 M 
 
 T 3 
 
 w 
 
 5d o 
 
 <D O (D 
 
 WWW 
 
 o3 
 
 w 
 
 -3 
 
 o 
 
 o £ 
 
 ** 
 ft 'S 
 
 a q 
 
 cd 
 
 
 *0 3 
 
 O 3 
 
 a 
 
 ft 
 
 00 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 O 
 
 <X» 
 
 M 
 
 Ph 
 
 vc3 
 
 • H 
 
 T 3 
 
 Ph 
 
 : '<a 
 
 42 2 2 28 O 
 
 o3 •— • a; • rft o 
 
 MMWMP 
 
 £ m a 
 
 333 
 
 ft-s a 
 
 V d VH 0 ^ _ 
 
 ft ft 33 3 ft 
 
 oon(*co 
 
 bo 
 
 3 
 
 » rH 
 
 d ^ 
 
 GO £ 
 
 a.§ 
 
 2n 
 
 ft 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 ^ -2 
 
 \r -4 \C 3 
 
 rC FH 
 
 OP 
 
 PH 
 
 \rf 
 
 'd ph 
 
 O 'c 3 
 
 O .pH 
 
 nn 
 
 PH 
 
 VpH 
 
 ■§ 
 
 o 
 
 Ph 
 
 • rH 
 
 >» 
 
 C 3 ,g s a 
 
 ft -2 '03 3 
 
 on>i!ft 
 
 ft 
 
 o 
 
 3 c3 
 
 oS 
 
 W 
 
 1 • i * « »PH 
 
 • PH O O .pH -M -2 
 
 *- be d « 
 
 ft ft ft 2 
 ft ? 52 <s ►< 
 OOO^WPh 
 
 •Ti 
 
 CD 
 
 <D 
 
 d 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 CL> 
 
 nc 5 
 
 Ph 
 
 \c3 
 
 N 
 
 o3 
 
 w 
 
 VC3 
 
 Vg . 
 
 "S * vd 
 
 O Cd H 
 
 CD .p- c 3 
 
 ppp 
 
 Ph 
 
 vc3 
 
 .pH 
 
 PQ 
 
 ft ft 
 OO 
 
 3 
 
 4 H 
 
 rd 
 
 GO 
 
 d 
 
 p 
 
 PH 
 
 d 
 
 H -3 
 
 ^3 
 
 p^ 
 
 d 
 
 t 2 iP 
 
 d da 
 d 'd 
 
 r M 
 P O' 
 
 Ph 
 
 d 
 
 4H 
 
 pd 
 
 ^4 
 
 o3 
 
 S3 
 
 c 3 nd 
 
 *P Q> 
 
 O b* 
 .pH C3 
 
 2 ■ 
 
 isSS 
 
 BCD’! 
 
 K 
 
 o3 pD 
 S3' ft ' 
 
 3 
 
 cS 
 
 N „ _ . 
 2 N 3 53 
 
 ft ° z 2 
 
 bCft 3 ft 
 
 •aiP g SP 
 
 ft c 3 3 oo 
 
 O 1-3 CQ 
 
 o3 I 
 
 H 3 
 S3 O 
 T3 
 
 O H 
 
 n ° 
 
 Ph 
 
 no8 
 
 2 "o 
 ? oj y 
 ii ft £ 
 V, V-ZTS 
 
 3 
 
 OQ 
 
 H 
 
 CD * 
 O 
 « 
 CD 
 
 no 
 
 d 
 
 .s< 
 
 n 
 
 <D 
 
 d 
 
 • rH 
 
 Pm 
 
 4-a 
 
 «4H 
 
 o 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 823 
 
 CV. 
 
 Sh 
 
 P 
 
 C 3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 0 
 
 ao 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 /°\ 
 
 GO 
 
 0 . 
 
 vc3 
 
 PP 
 
 d J5 
 
 03 
 
 pC g cq g 
 bcJ3 d .2 
 
 rsJ d oS 
 
 d \3 'SJ 
 
 £ f- a 
 
 (S'3 Si 
 
 05 02 CQ 
 
 '2 >r> 
 
 j -3« 
 2 
 
 53 d ai 
 
 2 2 p § 
 CO O 03 5 
 
 43 _£ 43 
 
 ft ft ftW 
 
 o 
 
 43 
 
 pq 
 
 ,£*3 ’8> 
 
 5 oi'3 
 
 ft PM cq 
 
 44 
 
 o 
 
 43 
 
 V 
 
 d 
 
 ._r 
 
 cT'rf 
 
 s ^ 
 
 n3 v 
 
 d 
 
 d vc3 
 03 cc - 
 
 ft So 
 
 s -4 r* 
 
 oT'd - 0? S 5 ^ 
 £ 43 ft a3 
 
 T3 S “' / Vl •— « 
 
 d „'<a be — \d '■g b 
 c3 03 % rt 'd "d 'O d 
 
 ei 
 
 oS V 
 
 «a 
 
 'P 
 
 d 
 
 GO 
 
 U 
 
 ■ 2 vd 03 'd 
 
 S?hWM 
 
 ^ -3 
 
 d id 
 
 Vi 
 
 'd 
 
 2 
 
 # rS d 
 
 Ms-/ , . 
 
 • r— * 03 
 
 v v 'd >> 
 
 O o V v 
 
 03 C3 -d \3 
 
 1-3 1-3 gq co 
 
 Vh 
 
 03 
 
 i 
 
 ft 
 
 ft § 
 
 V v rrj 
 
 g » a 
 Is '3 a 
 
 <u ■£ 43 
 
 hlflO 
 
 o 5 ft 
 ta’g<o 
 
 ccM fl 
 aft 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 .d 
 
 . o 
 
 0) v g 
 
 *1 I a a 
 2 § 
 
 d o .2 '□ a g ^ 
 
 d H d O d .d 3 
 
 V . 1—1 
 
 '| ‘3 43 
 
 3 =-! cc 
 
 pppqft ftftftftft 
 
 d 
 
 ^ O d >- 
 
 #X V J- 03 ,_, 
 
 a ft -g g 
 
 o d d 5 ••-< 2 d 
 
 v .h .d j 3 ,d rd p. 
 
 ft PM ft ft O ft C/2 
 
 ft 58 
 
 >> 
 
 d 
 
 *-* cf'd 
 
 V3 .H rM -- 
 
 r** d d d 
 
 coOOft 
 
 a 5 13 ft 5 a 
 
 d 03 rH 2 ^ d 
 
 ■ft a | 5 d 3 
 
 0 c3 ^ H ' 
 
 _ ^ d 
 
 OHMfd 
 
 d 
 
 2 s d o 
 
 .« ft'd 
 
 b^a § 
 gM 
 
 
 44 
 
 'a d £ uu v_, 
 
 f 6c g I . 
 
 u (-, 44 5-c 
 
 \d \p \d d 'd 
 
 rd rd d? ^ rd 
 
 02 CC 05 7 a CC 
 
 d 
 
 cc P3 
 
 Vl 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 'P • 
 p d d 
 
 , V k ^ be d 03 
 
 
 Vl 
 
 'd 
 
 nd 
 
 a a ^3 — 
 
 <u d S d d 
 
 CQ 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 03 
 
 . ft PP CO CO 02 
 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 
 • 
 
 : 
 
 d 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 d 
 
 « 
 
 03 
 
 . >h 
 d 
 
 2 d o 
 
 d o$ v 
 
 ^ pq UJ 
 
 d -2 
 
 d =3 
 
 QQ 
 
 3 
 fl 
 a 
 
 rd NOT W 
 
 ft Q 3 «Ph 
 
 ou • 
 03 
 
 -^-T f-* 
 
 bfi.rH ^ 
 
 >d d 03 
 
 Vi 
 
 d 
 
 rO 
 
 03 
 
 ft 
 
 o , 
 
 a 
 
 O ; r-> U 
 
 5 XJ 2 S 
 
 flo Wpq 
 
 • - j 
 
 VD vd 5 
 
 be a 
 
 o d m 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 »— H • 
 
 •x Vl 
 v vd 
 d ^ t3 
 ^'3 1> 
 aj 43 « 
 ft CO ft 
 
 d d 
 
 •So 
 
 d d 
 
 ra "d 
 
 •§! 
 d d 
 
 — ^ «-t ,• 
 
 d d d be 
 "d cj 
 d d-2'3 
 
 MftftH 
 
 d2 
 
 ^ i - 3 
 
 '3 'aJ ^ ■■3 
 jd ® 43 
 
 1-3 — h-S 
 
 ^ Wp2 s_/ 
 
 d 
 
 & “•a ‘ft M 
 
 ti a 3 ® a 
 
 S a >a o a 
 to ft H P-t 02 
 
 u a 
 
 a 
 
 ft '3 
 
 PPft 
 
 •'d g 
 — — d 
 h do 
 
 OO^ 
 
 d • 
 
 pCj V 
 
 0Q vd 
 03 • r— a 
 
 sS 
 
 2^ 
 
 a '<« a 
 
 “as 
 
 t-i d 
 
 .aw & 
 
 JZ W OQ 
 
 5 > 
 
 d 
 
 S«H 
 
 03 
 
 $£: 
 2 n - / 
 
 1 d 
 
 2 § 
 
 si 
 
 ® a 
 
 DO W 
 
 d 
 
 OQ 
 
 3 
 
 03 
 Vl 
 
 cl d 
 
 Sarap? 
 
 Badar 
 
 ■ 
 
 •> 
 
 DQ 
 
 Vi 
 
 'D 
 
 Oi 
 
 < 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 4-a 
 
 02 
 
 d 
 
 
 0 
 
 O • 
 
 03 
 
 x 
 
 d 
 
 03 
 
 OQ 
 
 w $ 
 
 v ' V 
 
 P4 
 
 a ^ 
 
 r- 5 0) 
 
 M K 
 
 d ' 
 
 H 
 
 S ^ 
 
 P -rH 
 
 V C3 
 03 rj 
 
 ft 3 
 ^ Oi 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 *-s 
 
824 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 Pinus longifolia, Roxb. — Long-leaved pine. Madden, J. Agri.- 
 Hort. Soc. Cal,, VII., 75 : Brandis, 506 : Cooke, 125 : Roxb., 677, 
 
 The long-leaved pine. CMr (in Sanskrit “ kshira ,” or “ milk”), 
 sula (Sansk. sarala, “ straight”) in Kumaun ; kolon, kolan, kolain in 
 Garhwal ; saral in Jaunsar ; thansa above the Dun ; dhiip in Oudh. 
 To the west of Grarhwal the name chir or clnl is applied to P. 
 excelsa , except in Kunaor, where P. longifolia preserves the name 
 chir with the indigenous affix 1 sthV or ( shthi’ (M.) 
 
 The chir occurs all through the Ivuinaun Division, dividing the 
 
 forest with oak, from 1,600 feet above the level 
 Distribution. . 
 
 of the sea at Sitakoti, eight miles above Deo- 
 
 prayag in Garhwal, to 7,200 feet on the Pindar river. The limits 
 at which it is found vary much in different parts of the Himalaya 
 between Afghanistan and the Tista, and apparently the upper 
 limit descends the further east we proceed from Kumaun. 1 As a 
 rule, however, 2,500 feet is the lowest height at which it seems to 
 flourish. The chir appeal’s to have the power of driving out all other 
 vegetation from the tracts it occupies, and forests of these trees are 
 interpersed only with scanty underwood of the smallest shrubs. 
 Madden and Brandis note the curious phenomenon observable in 
 many of these pines in Kumaun. This consists in the spiral arrange- 
 ment of the bark and woody fibre, the coils being sometimes as much 
 compressed as those of an ordinary corkscrew, and in some instances 
 the stem itself is thus distorted. Straight trees are found mixed 
 with these contorted specimens in the same forest in Kumaun, and 
 they do not appear to occur in Garhwal or in the higher ranges in 
 Kumaun. The straight variety is known in Kumaun by the term 
 sapin. The wood of the straight variety is usually of a reddish white 
 colour, and is preferred for building purposes, as the other is liable 
 to warp and split in working, though in the log form capable of 
 bearing heavy strains. It is, however, rarely used except as fuel. 
 Dr. Jameson thinks the crooked variety is confined to localities with 
 a southern aspect and under 5,000 feet, but the fact remains that 
 crooked and straight trees occur in the same forest with the same 
 aspect, as may be observed near Ganai and Pyura. 
 
 1 Hooker gives the upper limit in Sikkim as 2,000-2,500 feet ; Grifith fives 
 the lower limit in Bhutan at 1,800-2,000 feet. At Ramesar bridge on the Sarju 
 in Kumaun, 1,500 feet above the sea, it descends to within a few hundered yards 
 of the river. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 825 
 
 The forest survey of 1865-66 estimated the total area under 
 chir as 413,650 acres in Kumaun and 152,264 
 ^ acres in Garhwal. Many acres of forest contain 
 20 large and 50 small trees per acre ; but in a square mile the 
 bare places bring down the average to 20 trees per acre. First- 
 class trees are those having a girth at five feet from the ground of 
 eight feet and over ; second class have a girth five to eight feet ; 
 third class, two feet to five feet, and fourth class under two feet. 
 The first-class trees average about one-twelfth, the second about 
 one-fifth, and the third about one-third of the total number per 
 acre. This would give a total of about twelve million cMr trees in 
 the Kumaun Division, of which one million beiong to the first 
 class. 
 
 The forests lying along the Gumti, western Ramganga and east- 
 ern Ramganga approximately contain the following trees : — 
 
 
 
 
 Trees per acre . 
 
 
 
 Acres. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 4th. 
 
 Sources of the Gumti towards Baijnath ... 
 
 61,440 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 Upper Sarju from Kapkot and Phungar 
 
 42,380 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 valley to Bagesar. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Middle Sarju from Bagesar to Naini bunga- 
 
 28,280 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 low. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lower Sarju and Ramganga from Naini 
 
 40,020 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 to junction with the Kali. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Middle western Ramganga from Ramari .. 
 
 11,790 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 Lower western Ramganga and Katyur 
 
 22,985 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 river. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Between Bino and the Ramganga beyond 
 
 32,300 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 Lohba. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Between Badliangarh and Latugarh 
 
 16,000 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 In the Tarag Tal valley ... 
 
 5,760 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 9 
 
 12 
 
 In the Gumti valley 
 
 8,960 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 To the west of Budha Kidar and Bikya-lce- 
 
 11,460 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 sain, to the east of Masi bungalow. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The Soni jungle ... ... 
 
 2,560 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 31 
 
 Nearly all these trees grow on slopes rising from the river-beds, 
 and near enough to repay the cost of cutting and launching. The 
 trees on the upper western Ramganga and its tributaries are mostly 
 twisted, though towards Bungidar they are straight and so placed as 
 to be easily shot into the Bino river. Following the stream of the 
 Ramganga, the north-east banks from Garoth down to Bagri have 
 
 104 
 
826 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 first-class timber covering all the slopes of the Badhangarh and 
 Gopalkot ranges, and could be easily worked into the Ramganga. 
 The Syuni jungle near Chaun Debi is one of the finest in Kumaiin. 
 The large trees have all straight boles without a knot and with much 
 red wood. The soil is light, micaceous sand on loose beds of earth 
 and stones, which appears to be eminently suited to the chir. In 
 Garhwal there are extensive chir forests in the valley of the Alak- 
 nanda and along the Pindar from Chuding (4,800 feet) to Gwaldam 
 (4,300 feet), a distance of thirteen miles. In the three upper miles the 
 timber is small, but lower down there are fine straight trees close to 
 the river-bank, and a flat near Chiringa suitable for a timber depot. 
 All along here and up the Kailganga, for two miles, the forest could 
 easily be worked. The forests on the Mandakini and Madmahesvar 
 rivers have been worked for railway sleepers, but in many places tlie 
 timber is too remote from the river for removal. The forests along the 
 N ay ar and Chlnpkalgkat rivers are extensive and yield good straight 
 timber. 
 
 In native Garhwal there are almost inexhaustible forests of c/uV, 
 along the Bhagirathi between Sainsu, some twenty miles above Tihri 
 „ and Bhatwari, a distance of fifty-five miles. There are numerous 
 patches along the head-waters of the Jumna and the Tons, and the 
 left banks of both rivers are clothed with one immense forest 
 capable of supplying all possible wants. Describing these forests 
 Colonel Pearson writes: — “It would be difficult adequately to 
 describe the enormous seas of chir forest which line its bank. In these 
 the trees must be numbered not by thousands but by hundreds of 
 thousands, and many of them are of huge size.” The lower hills 
 towards the Dun and the Siwaliks themselves contain large quanti- 
 ties of pine, and taking the entire forest area of the hills, the long- 
 leaved pine may be considered the characteristic tree for quantity, 
 but for quality it ranks below several other conifers. The great 
 object at present is to find some inexpensive process for preserving' 
 it from the effects of exposure by creosoting or covering it with a 
 permanent silicious coating. The chir grows even in the plains and ; 
 specimens can be seen at Meerut and Saharanpur. It occurs, as we 
 shall see, in every sub-division in the hills in abundance and in 
 places from which it can be easily removed. It is often used for 
 boat-building, but boats made of it seldom last for more than seven 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 827 
 
 <or eight years; - Where deocldr can be procured for the outside and 
 cJdr for the inside the combination is excellent. GMr is easily 
 worked into planks and beams and does well for interior work in 
 houses. The bark is used in the preparation of charcoal for smelt- 
 ing iron. The knotty wood is used for torches, and the charcoal of 
 the burned leaves with rice-water makes a fair ink. The growth of 
 this pine may he calculated from observing the number of rings 
 contained in a transverse section of the trank. Of eight trees taken 
 as a fair sample, Mr. Webber considered the largest, nine feet in girth 
 and 200 feet high, to be 264 years old, and others, with an average 
 girth of 5 '7" at five feet from the ground and a height of 98 feet, 
 to be 154 years old. The growth is fairly rapid, averaging four or 
 five rings t® the inch. In the Turag Tal valley a fallen tree at five 
 feet from the ground girthed 13'6^, and at 66 feet from the ground 
 the girth was ten feet. The extreme height was 169 feet, of which 
 over 100 feet were clear of branches. 
 
 The following table gives the measurements of several trees near 
 Hanikliet ; — 
 
 Aspect. ' 
 
 Rings.. 
 
 Age 
 
 in 
 
 years. 
 
 Girth at 
 5 feet 
 from 
 ground. 
 
 Girth 
 at 60 
 feet. 
 
 Height. 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Heart. 
 
 Sap. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ft. 
 
 in. 
 
 Ft. in. 
 
 
 
 N. W. 
 
 15 
 
 SO 
 
 65 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 1 0 
 
 75 
 
 Ranikhet. 
 
 S. 
 
 JOS 
 
 145 
 
 251 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 6 0 
 
 120 
 
 Elevation 5,000 feet. 
 
 N. 
 
 104 
 
 100 
 
 204 
 
 7 
 
 0 
 
 5 0 
 
 110 
 
 
 N. 
 
 110 
 
 154 
 
 264 
 
 9 
 
 0 
 
 7 3 
 
 120 
 
 Syuni. 
 
 S. 
 
 52 
 
 23 
 
 75 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 75 
 
 Mansi mica rock. 
 
 S. E. 
 
 80 
 
 46 
 
 126 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 
 100 
 
 Ditto sandstone rock. 
 
 N. W. 
 
 28 
 
 62 
 
 80 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 60 
 
 Shaitangarh. 
 
 N. W. 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 170 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 
 80 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 S. 
 
 96 
 
 90 
 
 186 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 
 130 
 
 Pachrar nadi. 
 
 The following table shows the result of experiments made in 
 Almora in 1844 towards ascertaining the transverse strength of 
 cUr. As far as No. 10 the distance between the supports was four 
 feet, and the bars used were two inches square. From 11 to 20 
 the distance between the supports was increased to eight feet, 
 the depth of the piece used to 2£ inches and the breadth to 3 
 inches : — 
 
HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 828 
 
 Number. 
 
 Specific 
 
 gravity. 
 
 Weight pro- 
 ducing deflec- 
 tion of 
 
 Break- 
 
 ing 
 
 weight, 
 
 
 
 ^ inch lb. 
 
 S5. 
 
 1 
 
 '545 
 
 
 640 
 
 1,000 
 
 2 
 
 •570 
 
 
 624 
 
 1,144 
 
 8 
 
 •552 
 
 
 568 
 
 940 
 
 4 
 
 •596 
 
 
 1,112 
 
 1,372 
 
 5 
 
 •596 
 
 
 1,000 
 
 1,444 
 
 6 
 
 •670 
 
 
 1,036 
 
 1,420 
 
 7 
 
 •634 
 
 
 820 
 
 1,132 
 
 8 
 
 •673 
 
 
 940 
 
 1,288 
 
 9 
 
 •710 
 
 
 1,036 
 
 1,540 
 
 10 
 
 •600 
 
 
 764 
 
 1,304 
 
 
 
 1 inch. 2 inph. 
 
 
 11 
 
 •665 
 
 412 
 
 792 
 
 1,168 
 
 32 
 
 •726 
 
 680 
 
 1,324 
 
 1,763 
 
 13 
 
 •707 
 
 636 
 
 1,288 
 
 1,744 
 
 14 
 
 •615 
 
 484 
 
 976 
 
 1,756 
 
 15 
 
 •625 
 
 568 
 
 1,132 
 
 1,420 
 
 16 
 
 •691 
 
 456 
 
 844 
 
 1,168 
 
 17 
 
 •585 
 
 400 
 
 764 
 
 1,208 
 
 18 
 
 •575 
 
 490 
 
 1,036 
 
 1,648 
 
 19 
 
 •601 
 
 344 
 
 680 
 
 1,168 
 
 20 
 
 •662 
 
 484 
 
 904 
 
 1,300 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Broke at a knot. 
 
 Red coloured and rather knotty. 
 
 Large coarse grained. 
 
 Apparently the best piece, though all 
 were very good. 
 
 Coarse grain. 
 
 Quite free from knots. 
 
 A few small knots. 
 
 No knots. 
 
 Good wood, but broke at a small knot. 
 
 Very evenly and fine grained. 
 
 The quality of the timber varies with the locality in which it 
 has been raised, the slow-growing timber of the upper and colder 
 regions being much better than that of the rapid-growing timber of 
 the hot valleys, and from this fact maybe derived an explanation of the 
 difference in the results of experiments as to its strength and weight. 
 
 Finns Gerardiana, Wallich. Neoz;a pine : Gerard’s pine. The 
 rhi, ri of Kunaor ; shangti of lower Kunaor : neivr further down the 
 Satlaj ; ruminche, romunchi of Shipki and Hangrang ; ronecha, 
 roleclici of Juhar in Kumaun: neoza (the seeds). 
 
 The Gerard’s pine is found between Malari and Bampa in the 
 Dhauli valley in Garhwal, which seems to be its eastern limit, and 
 locally in the upper valleys of the Tons and Jumna. It is generally 
 associated with the cedar and is probably the sancmbar-saghar or 
 ‘lesser-pine’ of Afghanistan, its height seldom exceeding 50 feet. 
 It rarely gives a larger girth than eight feet and is preserved for 
 its” seed, which are collected and eaten and form a part of the 
 chilghoza of the bazars. Brandis notes that the wood is used for 
 the hook which supports the passenger’s seat on the single-rope 
 swing-bridge. Baskets and rough water-buckets are made from 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 829 
 
 the bark. The cones are plucked before they open and are heated 
 to make the scales expand and to get the seed out. The seeds are 
 about an inch long, nearly cylindrical, with little or no wing, and are 
 very palatable with a slight and not unpleasant flavour of turpentine. 
 Large quantities of the seeds are stored for winter use, and they form 
 a staple food of the Kunaoris, amongst whom the proverb is current, 
 ‘ One tree, a man’s life in winter.’ The range varies from 5,800 
 feet (on the Marru river) to 12,300 feet near Sungnam. In Garh- 
 wal it occurs between 6,000 and 10,000 feet. 
 
 Pinus excelsa, Wallich, P. Peuce , Griseb.; P. pendula, Griff. — 
 Lofty pine. 1 Chil, cl dr, chilu , to the west of Jaunsar, wherever 
 P. longifolia is known by the name salla ; cldla and karchilla in 
 Garhwal; kail and chil in Jaunsar; clol chilla in Kumaun ; rdisalla 
 in Central Kumaun ; Urn in Byans ; lavishing amongst the Bhotiyas 
 of Darina. Madden, Jour. Agri.-Hort. Soc., Cal., VII., 80 : Bran- 
 dis, 510 : Cooke, 824. 
 
 This pine occurs in Upper Garhwal, on Rikholi Gudari (a spur 
 from Trisul), about Kanol near Ramni, and on Tungnath ; along the 
 Dhauli to the Niti pass and in Byans and generally only on spurs 
 issuing directly from the snowy range. It seems to he absent in 
 Central and North- W estern Kumaun, but occurs near Dhakuri. The 
 limits between which it flourishes in this portion of the Himalaya 
 have been estimated at from 5,000 to 12,000 feet. The forest 
 survey of 1865-66 gives the total area under this tree at 2,100 
 acres in Kumaun and 14,042 acres in Garhwal. The following are 
 the principal localities, with the size of the forest and the number 
 and class of each tree per acre : — 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Acres. 
 
 
 Trees. 
 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 4tli. 
 
 Kanol Shatul on the banks of the Nandakini 
 
 782 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 Above Sirka near Titalakot on the Kali 
 
 100 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 On the Vishnuganga near Pandukeswar 
 
 1,290 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 On the left bank and between it and the eastern 
 Dhauli. 
 
 3,500 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 On the left bank of the Dhauli 
 
 3,000 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 On the left bank of the Rishiganga and near Tapuban, 
 
 5,050 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 Along the Kunti river in Darma 
 
 700 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 On its lower course ... ... 
 
 1,400 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 1 This name seems a misnomer, for though specimens occur up to 150 feet, it 
 is not distinguished by its height from the other pines and is more of a silver-fir. 
 
830 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The Vishnuganga forests are inaccessible except near Pandu- 
 keswar, and those along the Rishiganga, Dhauli, and Kunti rivers are 
 practically excluded from the market by their distance from the 
 plains and the difficulties of transport. There are considerable forests 
 of this pine near Datmer on the Tons and on the right bank of the 
 Rupin, and generally throughout the cedar tracts and above them it 
 occurs in quantity. The grain of the wood is close and soft in 
 working. The sapwood is whitish and the heart-wood light-brown 
 and streaked with red. It is in some demand for liouse-building > 
 though ranking below the cypress for durability. It does not stand 
 exposure to excessive moisture. In the form of planks it is said to 
 warp badly when exposed to the sun, and to become affected by 
 dry-rot if placed in contact with damp earth. The highly resinous, 
 small, knotty branches are used for torches, and the charcoal of the 
 entire tree for smelting iron. The tree grows to a great size, the 
 average girth of the larger trees being 13 feet. The rings average 
 fifteen to the inch and the weight of a cubic foot is about 251b, with a 
 specific gravity of *686. A piece of this timber of average quality, 
 22 inches long and one inch square, broke with a pressure of 
 368fb. 
 
 Cedrus Deodara, Loudon; Pinus Deodara, Roxb — Himalayan 
 cedar — the deodar , diyar of Kumaun and Garhwal ; the kelon, kelu 
 of W estern Garhwal and Jaunsar, where the name deodar is given to 
 the Cupressus torulosa : deva-ddru (divine tree), Sansk. Madden, J our. 
 Agri.-Hort. Soc., Cal., VII. : Brandis, 516 : Cooke, 128 : Roxb., 
 677. 
 
 There are no natural groves of deodar in Kumaun and only one 
 large forest in Garhwal. There are numerous plantations around tem- 
 ples in Kumaun, aggregating about 800 acres. Amongst them may 
 be mentioned those at Lodh, Bala- Jagesar, Pharka, and the groups 
 at Sui, Rikhesar, Mankesar, Kalsia, Simalti and Ghatot near Lohu- 
 ghat, and Kshetrapal near Somesar. Along the western Dhauli be- 
 tween Kak and Malari there is a natural forest having an area of about 
 1,500 acres and giving one second-class, three third-class and eight 
 fourth-class trees to the acre. At Lata on the Rishiganga there are 
 about 70 acres of fine, healthy trees, one giving a girth of 30 feet, and 
 at Parbati, near theNandakini and Shatul, there are some fine groves. 
 The average girth of the largest trees in these provinces appears to be 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 831 
 
 about 15-20 feet. Major Garstin measured some near Malari over 20 
 feet in girth at six feet from the ground. The cedar yields an oleo- 
 resin similar to that of the chir ; the oil is used in medicine and the 
 twigs and branches are also said to possess medicinal properties. 
 
 j ' k - , . 
 
 The great cedar forests of these provinces occur along the Bha- 
 girathi valley and in Jaunsar-Bawar, and these are fully noticed 
 in the accounts of those forests given hereafter. Dr. Brandis 
 writes : — 
 
 “ The deodar for the first three or four years of its life grows 
 slowly, attaining 12-20 inches in height with spreading roots that do 
 not go deep down. In this shrubby and stunted state the young 
 plant can maintain its existence under the shade of other trees for 
 considerable number of years without making much progress : but 
 when light overhead is given, then a leader is at once formed 
 which shoots up rapidly. At a more advanced age, the rate of 
 growth of the deodar is determined without difficulty by counting 
 the annual rings.” The existing records show that the growth is 
 influenced very much by the climate. In the dry valley of the 
 Bhagirathi the rate of growth is much slower than in Jaunsar, 
 where there is a heavy rainfall, so that in the former tract a tree 
 takes 86 years to increase from 4/6 " to 6 feet, whilst in Jaunsar this is 
 accomplished in 23 years. Within each tract also the rate of 
 growth differs considerably. Colonel Pearson noticed in the Bha- 
 girathi valley a stump 6'9" in diameter with only 305 rings, and. 
 in another part of the same valley a tree with a diameter of only 
 4 feet showed 480 rings and two having a diameter of only 18 
 inches had 145 and 147 rings respectively. The wood in these 
 slow-growing tracts usually has a closer grain and a deeper colour 
 than the timber grown on southern aspects and in a moister climate. 
 The soil too in these tracts is generally poor and is formed from 
 the decomposition of granite, gneiss, and clay slate, and in the rapid- 
 growing tracts the soil is richer and deeper. Isolated trees, such 
 as those at Wan, often attain a great size. Dr. Stewart measured 
 one at Kuarsi in the Ravi basin, at an elevation of 7,500 feet above 
 the level of the sea, 44'2" in girth at two feet from the ground and 
 36'4" in girth at six feet. Dr. Brandis records that one was 
 measured at Parbani in Kunaor 34'4", and that the girth attained 
 by the largest trees there is 30-36". Madden measured one between 
 
832 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Nachar and Turanda in lower Kunaor (in 1830) having a girth of 
 36f feet at five feet from the ground. The tallest deodar measured 
 by him was in the Nachar forest on the Satlaj, 250 feet high, 20 
 feet in girth at the base, and more than 550 years old, and there 
 was a considerable number of trees in the same forests more than 
 200 feet high. Moorcroft measured a fallen tree on the Tugasi hill 
 in the Dhauli valley and found it 159 feet : another was 180 feet in 
 height. 
 
 Many experiments have been made to ascertain the transverse 
 strength of deodar taken from the Panjab, the Garhwal, and the 
 Kumaun forests. The weight of a cubic foot appears to vary from 
 25 to 401b., but in Garhwal approaches more the latter ; in one series 
 giving an average of 371b. A well, seasoned piece, 22 inches long 
 and one inch square-broke at 3451b. It had a specific gravity of 
 *655 and showed eight rings to the inch. The result of eight 
 experiments on Garhwal timber made at Rurki (390-798) gave 
 an average of 592. The result of a series of experiments at 
 Almora in October, 1844, conducted by Captain W. Jones, ten with 
 timber cut in the preceding month and ten with seasoned timber, 
 is shown in the following table. In the first ten experiments 
 the distance between the supports was four feet and the pieces 
 were two inches square : in the second ten the distance between 
 the supports was increased to eight feet and the pieces were 
 2J X 3" 
 
 Specific 
 
 gravity. 
 
 Weight pro- 
 ducing deflec- 
 tion of 
 
 Breaking 
 
 weight. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 £ inch lb. 
 
 Ib. 
 
 
 •608 
 
 1,036 
 
 1,588 
 
 Good straight grained wood. 
 
 •710 
 
 1,024 
 
 1,636 
 
 Lower side split a little at 1,060. 
 
 Not straight-grained and Blightly 
 flawed. 
 
 •698 
 
 736 
 
 880 
 
 •669 
 
 1,060 
 
 1,540 
 
 Lower side split at 1,308. 
 
 •620 
 
 904 
 
 1,456 
 
 Ditto 904. 
 
 •585 
 
 680 
 
 976 
 
 Broke suddenly. 
 
 •574 
 
 680 
 
 708 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 •614 
 
 344 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ditto No flaw perceptible. 
 
 •586 
 
 568 
 
 1,204 
 
 Ditto. 
 
 •604 
 
 624 
 
 • » • 
 
 Lower side went at 624 ; uneven 
 grained 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 833 
 
 Specific 
 
 gravity. 
 
 Weight pro 
 ducing deflec- 
 tion of 
 
 Breaking 
 
 weight. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 1 inch. 
 
 2 inches. 
 
 ft. 
 
 
 ’641 
 
 350 
 
 764 
 
 820 
 
 Snapped suddenly : light-coloured ; said 
 
 
 
 
 
 to be outside of tree. 
 
 •618 
 
 400 
 
 788 
 
 1,028 
 
 Heart of tree red and oleaginous. 
 
 '644 
 
 344 
 
 660 
 
 908 
 
 Snapped short suddenly ; light-coloured. 
 
 '679 
 
 428 
 
 876 
 
 1,116 
 
 Heart of tree very good and red. 
 
 •678 
 
 344 
 
 736 
 
 964 
 
 Snapped suddenly, but was in appearance 
 
 
 
 
 
 the best piece of all five. 
 
 •566 
 
 •629 
 
 344 
 
 344 
 
 680 
 
 576 
 
 750 
 
 624 
 
 0 Good sound wood, but knotty, coarse 
 > and wavy in grain ; snapped suddenly 
 ; at knot. 
 
 •619 
 
 512 
 
 960 
 
 1,188 
 
 Dark cedar- coloured, fine grained ; broke 
 
 
 
 
 
 at knot. 
 
 •630 
 
 598 
 
 1,080 
 
 1,700 
 
 Dark cedar-coloured ; under-side very fine 
 
 
 
 
 straight grained and light- coloured. 
 
 •603 
 
 484 
 
 876 
 
 1,092 
 
 Dark cedar-coloured, but rather coarse 
 
 
 
 
 
 in grain. 
 
 The timber of the deodar is the most highly prized of all the 
 conifers for house-building, granaries, chests, boat-building, and 
 railway sleepers. It appears to be little affected by extremes of 
 heat, cold or moisture and is easily worked. In a climate like that 
 of Kashmir it appears to be almost imperishable. Moorcroft states 
 that the pillars of the great mosque erected by Aurangzeb at 
 Srinagar showed no vestige of decay from exposure or insects at 
 the time of his visit, and that pieces of deodar from the Zain-ul- 
 kadal bridge were found little decayed, although exposed to the 
 action of water for four hundred years. Many of the other bridges 
 still standing in Srinagar may perhaps claim a greater antiquity. 
 Gerard records some timber in a house in Basahir as being 200 
 years old and as sound as the day it was cut. The cedar is a 
 sacred tree in the hills and is in much demand for the temples, for 
 the doors, walls, and roofs. Madden notes that he saw some beams 
 in a Kunaor temple that were said to be 600 to 800 years old and 
 showed no signs of decay, and though this may be an exaggeration 
 of his informants, it indicates the popular belief. Boats built of 
 deodar and lined with clixr last from thirty to forty years, and for 
 railway sleepers no other wood can compete with it. White-ants 
 eat the sap-wood and but rarely attack the heart-wood, and neither 
 the sap-wood nor the heart-wood is liable to dry-rot. Immense 
 numbers of sleepers of this w r ood have been supplied from the 
 
 105 
 
<834 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Bhagirathi and Jaunsar forests during the last fifteen years. The 
 Jaunsar forests on the Deoban ridge between the Jumna and the 
 tons were estimated by Colonel Pearson in May, 1869, to contain 
 -34,000 available first-class trees and the Bhagirathi forests (exclud- 
 ing the Bhilang valley) 116,700 first-class trees. If to these are 
 added the probable contents of the valleys of the Tons and Jumna 
 rivers, the total number of first-class trees available in 1868-69 was 
 about 500,000. The proportion of smaller trees may be gathered 
 from the following estimate of those in the Bhagirathi valley : — 
 
 First-class or above 6' in girth 
 Second-class or 4'6"-q' „ 
 
 Third-class or 
 Fourth-class, below 1'6" 
 
 ... 116,700 
 
 ... 53,660 
 
 ... 127,536 
 
 ... 213,281 
 
 Since 1868-69, however, there has been a great diminution of 
 first-class trees to supply the numerous requisitions for railway- 
 sleepers and public works. 
 
 Abies Smithiana, Forbes ; A. Khutrow, Loudon ; A. spinulosa, 
 Griffith; Pinus Smithiana , Wallich; P. Khutrow, Boyle; Picea 
 Morinda , Link. — the Himalayan spruce ; Smith's spruce — the 
 morinda and rdi of Jaunsar ; kandre , re, rhai, rdo, kudrau , rdi ala , 
 rdglia, kail, kdluchilu and kiu of Garhwal. Madden, Jour. Agri- 
 Hort. Soc., VII., 87 : Powell, I., 564 : Cleghom’s analytical key 
 to the Conifers : Brandis, 525 : Cooke, 127. 
 
 Smith’s spruce, according to the survey, is found in the north 
 of Garhwal near Joshimath and in the Dhauli and Vishnuganga 
 valleys. The forest survey of 1865-66 estimated the area under 
 this tree in Garhwal at 26,908 acres. The following are the 
 principal localities, with the size of the forest and the number of 
 each class of tree per acre : — 
 
 
 
 
 
 Trees. 
 
 
 Locality. 
 
 
 Acres. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 4th, 
 
 Near Kanol, Peri and Shatul on the upper 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nandakini 
 
 On the slopes of Tamba Deo near 
 
 the 
 
 6,328 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 western Dhauli ... 
 
 Near Golabkoti on the left bank of 
 
 the 
 
 50 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 western Dhauli ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 2,050 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 On the Biriganga and Rishiganga 
 
 • • • 
 
 13,000 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 Further up the Rishiganga 
 
 ... 
 
 4,980 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 835 
 
 Dr. Griffith describes this spruce as growing abundantly on the 
 northern ranges of Bhutan, 7,800-11,600 above the level of the 
 sea, preferring northern aspects and occurring in masses below 
 A. Webbiana. It is rare in Sikkim and confined to valleys of the 
 inner range at 8,000 to 9,000 feet mixed with A. dumosa and 
 seldom exceeding 50 feet in height. It has not been found in 
 Kumaun, and Madden states that he was unable to detect a trace of 
 it in Danpur, Juhar, or along the snowy slopes of Nan da Devi and 
 Nanda Kot. Nor were Bhotiyas of Milam, accustomed to traverse 
 the mountains, able to recognise the cones or dried specimens. It is 
 not mentioned in Webber’s survey as occurring in Kumaun, 
 but is said to be indigenous on Rikholi Gudari and occurs, as 
 we have seen, in the valleys of the Nandakini and western Dhauli. 
 On the left bank of the Bhagirathi above Jliala it is found with 
 cedar, silver fir, and birch on the slopes having a northern aspect. It 
 occurs also in the forests of the upper Jumna and Tons and in Jaunsar. 
 
 The spruce grows to an immense size. Webber mentions 
 one on the Nandakini 18 feet in girth and 110 feet in height. 
 Hodgson records the length of a fallen tree as 169 feet, and Madden 
 gives the girth of ten trees as varying from 13 \ to 20 feet and 
 showing an average girth of 16 feet. Dr. Stewart has record- 
 ed one of 21 feet, but the average girth is from 8-12 feet with a 
 height of 100-150 feet. As has been noticed, the spruce prefers a 
 northern aspect, and this is but one of many instances of the pheno- 
 menon which strikes every traveller in the Himalaya, that of the 
 northern and north-western aspects being densely wooded, whilst the 
 south and south-eastern are wholly or almost bare. Baron Hugel, 
 as quoted by Madden, thus refers to the valley of Perhamgala in 
 the Pir Panjal range : — “ Strange to say the south side (aspect) 
 of the valley is everywhere wild and dreary, while fine trees grow 
 up to the very summit of the mountain on the north face. The 
 reason may possibly be found in the fact that on the south side the 
 repeated action of alternate freezing and thawing destroys every kind 
 of vegetation except a few grasses.” The wood is white ; the outer 
 part turns red and decays rapidly if exposed to moisture, so that it 
 is seldom used except for indoor work. A very dry piece 22 inches 
 long by one inch square broke at 2881b., being the weakest in a 
 series of experiments of all the conifers. The specific gravity was 
 
836 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 only 426, though the piece in question averaged 14 rings to the 
 inch. The bark is used for roofing purposes and to make rough 
 water-troughs for cattle, and the young cones form a part of the 
 drug sold as gaj-pipal in the bazars. 
 
 Abies dumosa, Loudon ; Pinus dumosa, Don ; P. Brunoniana , 
 Wallich — Hemlock spruce of Nepal — the tungsing of the Bhotiyas 
 of Darma in Kumaun ; changathasi dhup of Nepal. Madden, 
 Journ. Agri.-Hort. Soc., VII., 95 : Brandis, 527. 
 
 The forest survey in 1865-66 gives the total area in Kumaun 
 under this tree at 3,650 acres. The principal localities, with the 
 size of the forest and the number of trees per acre according to 
 class, are as follows : — 
 
 
 
 
 Trees. 
 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Acres. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 4th. 
 
 Lola Kot and IvalaMundi, to the west of the 
 
 140 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 Gori river, mixed withA/hes Webbiana. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 In Chaudans and Byans, to the north-west 
 
 650 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 of the Dhauli. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Manktil danda and in the valley of the 
 
 1,160 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 Chirkila gar, falling into the Dhauli. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 At Titala Kot near the Kali 
 
 600 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Spurs of Panch Chula above Tunik 
 
 920 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 In Byans near the Kali ... 
 
 1,000 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 It was first discovered by Captain Webb in 1810 and again by 
 Mr. Webber in 1863. Dr. Hooker found it in Sikkim in narrow 
 gorges on the southern flank of Kanchinjinga at an elevation of 
 between 9,000 and 10,000 feet. In the innermost valleys the limits 
 are 8,500 and 10,500. The Gorkhali name there is 4 thingiyd or 
 4 tingtiri-sallaj and the Bhotiya name is 4 semadting .’ One specimen 
 measured 27 feet in girth at five feet from the ground. Griffith 
 found it in Bhutan at 6,500-9,700 feet above the level of the sea, 
 and it is said to be indigenous on Gosainthan and Banepa. In 
 Kumaun, it occurs in Darma and about the Chipula range at 
 9,000-11,000 feet, and here it is called 4 tungsing ’ and attains a 
 height of 80-100 feet, with an average girth of 10-12 feet. The 
 timber is white, fine-grained and light, having a specific gravity of 
 •612, but is said to warp much from exposure. The bark is used 
 for thatching purposes. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 837 
 
 Abies Webbiana, Bindley ; A. Pindrow , Boyle ; A. densa , 
 Griffith ; Picea Webbiana, Loudon and Wallich ; Pinus spectabilis, 
 Lambert — Himalayan silver-fir. 
 
 Madden separates the variety known as Picea Pindrow , Hoyle, 
 from A. Webbiana, Wallich., though the names of both are the same 
 in the vernacular ; rdglia and rdo rdgha in Kumaun ; wuman 
 amongst the Bhotiyas of Darma ; bang, dodlima rdglia, teliya or 
 chili rdgha in South-eastern Garhwal ; chilrao in Central Garhwal ; 
 mornnda in North-western Garhwal and Jaunsar ; raunsla or rdi 
 salla about the sources of the Kosi in parganahs Barahmandal and 
 Danpur and on the Dudu-ki-toli range near Lohba in Garhwal. 
 Madden, Jour. Agri.-Hort. Soc., Cal., VII., 96 : Brandis, 528. 
 
 Madden thus describes his Picea Pindrow of Hoyle : — 
 
 “ It flowers in April and May, when the young shoots are of the 
 brightest green, the old leaves being nearly black. The trunk is 
 branched nearly to the ground, but cones are produced only on its 
 loftiest boughs. By the middle of May the cones are about 3 inches 
 long by one in diameter and more or less cylindrical. As the sea- 
 son advances, they become more or less completely so, and of a rich 
 dark purple colour. They ripen in October and November. The 
 cones of P. Webbiana are less cylindrical, thicker and shorter, and 
 the bracteoles more rounded, scarcely emarginate, and with a 
 thicker and longer apex. The spiral arrangement of the scales 
 seems identical, and each has the same copious supply of white 
 resin. The cones of P. Pindrow are perfectly cylindrical ; the scales 
 more prominently eared ; bracteoles oval, obtuse, eroded, emargi- 
 nate, the mucro of the same length as the border of the sinus.” 
 
 This variety forms dense forests on all the great spurs towards 
 
 the heads of the Pindar, Sariu, eastern Ram- 
 Localities. , 
 
 ganga and Kali rivers : near the sources of 
 
 the Kosi at Bhatkot and on the Dudu-ki-toli range, near the sources 
 
 of the western Bamganga. 
 
 The other variety is thus described as the Picea Webbiana of 
 Wallich. .— 
 
 “ Tree tall, very narrow and like the cypress. Branches short, 
 thick, scrubby, and declining at the extremities. Foliage very dark 
 green ; near its upper limit of a grayer colour. Bark somewhat 
 
838 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 smooth, tessellated by shallow farrows into small squares ; young 
 branches silvery. Leaves three-quarters of an inch to two inches 
 long, flat with three small points, in two rows on either side of 
 branches and twigs. Cone erect, rather short, cylindrical, dark 
 purple, scales broad, dark-coloured near edge, deciduous. Ripe in 
 October. The tree flowers in May, when the strobili are of a pur- 
 plish red. Remarkable for its upright columnar appearance.” 
 
 It occurs at Ramni on one of the spurs of the Trisul, between 
 
 the Pindar and Alaknanda up to the glaciers, 
 Localities. and on the summit of Dudu-ki-toli. The forest 
 
 survey, 1865-66, gave an estimated area for Kumaun of 13,110 
 acres, and for Garhwal of 53,280 acres. The principal localities, 
 with the number of each class 1 of tree per acre, are as follows : — 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Acres. 
 
 Trees. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 4th. 
 
 On the left bank of the Nandakini in Garh- 
 
 790 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 wal, atChati Bukiyal andGudari Bukiyal. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 At Sliik,Kanol and Sliatul, near the same river 
 
 5,600 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 Above Kiraoli in the Pindar valley 
 
 1,040 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 On the Kailganga and above the Pindar ... 
 
 1,230 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 On the Pindar from Gumra Pani to Chuding, 
 
 3,680 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 Between the Pindar and Sarju and east of 
 
 1,890 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 the Ramganga. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 About Munsyari 
 
 670 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 In Darina, Chaudans, and Byans 
 
 2,900 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 On the spurs of Tungnith, and in the valleys 
 
 4,370 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 of the Nigholi and Balsukhi rivers. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 To the left bank of the Alaknanda, on the 
 
 6,070 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 Pilkanta and Ramari ranges. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 On the left bank of the western Dliauli 
 
 15,100 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 • • 
 
 8 
 
 On the npper Nyar ... 
 
 3,200 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 Dudu-ki-toli range ... ... 
 
 8,800 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 On the spurs of Ranch Chula ... 
 
 3,910 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 7 
 
 8 • 
 
 Deo Thai in Agar Patti, Kumaun 
 
 3,200 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 The forests on the Pindar could easily be worked, and that river 
 
 can carry the largest logs with ease. Those on the Balsukhi and 
 on the Mandakini, near Kedarnath, are too high up to be access- 
 ible. In the Bhagirathi valley, above Jhola, it occurs with cedar, 
 spruce and birch, and in the upper valleys of the Jumna and Tons 
 and their tributaries is abundant, associated with oaks. It is also 
 found throughout Jaunsar along the ridges of the main range and 
 of the lateral spurs and on Surkhanda near Masuri at an elevation 
 
 Classes as in chir ; first, 8 feet in girth and upwards ; second, 5 to 8 ; third, 
 2 to 5 ; and fourth, under 2 feet. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. '839 
 
 of 8,200 feet. It occurs on the Dudu-ki-toli range in Central Garh- 
 wal at 7,500-10,000 feet and on Tungnath up to 11,200 feet. 
 Brandis notes the limits in Jaunsar, Garhwal, and Kumaun to be. 
 7,500-13,000 feet ; it nearly reaches the latter elevation in the Mun- 
 syari district and in the Nandak valley ceases at 12,000 feet. 
 Griffith states that it forms vast forests at 12,000 feet in Bhutan, 
 below the belt of rhododendrons, and in Sikkim, under the Gorkliali 
 name ‘ gobriya-salla and the Bhotiya name £ dung siring’ it occurs 
 abundantly in the zone 9,700-11,500 feet. The limits in the south- 
 erns flanks of Kanchinjinga and crests of the inner sub-Himalaya 
 are 10,000-12,000 feet, hut in the inner valleys and rearward ranges 
 9,000-13,000 feet. In the north-west Himalaya, it thrives best in 
 cold damp glens with a north or west aspect, and in such places, 
 according to Brandis, constitutes alone or associated with the Alpine 
 birch the upper forest belt. The silver-fir attains a height of 
 120-150 feet and an average girth of 9-15 feet, though specimens 
 exceeding 20 feet in girth have been noticed. The wood is white, 
 soft, rather coarse-grained and inodorous and is not much esteemed. 
 It is not durable when exposed to moisture or the sun and is chiefly 
 used for indoor work, though in dry climates where better wood 
 is not obtainable it is split up and used for shingles. A piece 
 22 inches long and one inch square broke with a weight of 3791b. 
 The specific gravity of this piece was ‘491 and it showed 16 rings 
 to the inch. The following table shows the results of some experi- 
 ments on the transverse strength of the silver-fir made by Captain 
 W. Jones at Almora in 1844. The distance between the supports 
 in the first five experiments was four feet and the pieces used were 
 two inches square. The distance in the last five experiments was 
 increased to eight feet and the pieces used were 2j% inches in depth 
 by 3 inches in breadth : — 
 
 Specific 
 
 gravity. 
 
 Weight produc- 
 ing deflection of 
 
 Breaking 
 
 weight. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 £ inch. 
 
 Ib. 
 
 
 •472 
 
 680 
 
 940 
 
 Broke at a knot one foot from the centre. 
 
 •559 
 
 512 
 
 880 
 
 Broke suddenly ; no flaws perceptible ; 
 
 •546 
 
 820 
 
 1,206 
 
 deflection £ths. 
 
 •518 
 
 820 
 
 1,084 
 
 
 •560 
 
 736 
 
 904 
 
 
840 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Specific 
 
 gravity. 
 
 Weight produc- 
 ing deflection of 
 
 Breaking 
 
 weight 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 - 
 
 1 inch. 
 
 2 inches. 
 
 n$. 
 
 
 •436 
 
 344 
 
 652 
 
 780 
 
 ) Broke gradually ; all very moist and 
 
 *481 
 
 514 
 
 944 
 
 1,064 
 
 S soft. 
 
 •434 
 
 372 
 
 740 
 
 788 
 
 Broken at a knot. 
 
 •458 
 
 456 
 
 848 
 
 930 
 
 
 •483 
 
 400 
 
 764 
 
 968 
 
 
 Cupressus torulosa, Don — Himalayan cypress — Surui , surdi, 
 Kumaun and Grarhwal ; rdi scilla, Naini Tal ; leauri of Jaunsar ; 
 to the west and towards Simla it is called deodar ; and the name 
 
 surai is given to Juniperus excelsa. Madden, l.c. : Brandis, 533. 
 
 Found in Chaudans, Naini Tal, and of remarkable size near 
 Ramni and Wan on the Kailganga in Grarhwal, and from Joshimath 
 to Niti. The forest survey of 1864-65 estimates 1,200 acres of 
 cypress in Kumaun and 4,938 acres in Grarhwal. The principal 
 localities, with the number of trees in each, are as follows : — 
 
 
 
 
 Trees. 
 
 
 Locality. 
 
 Acres. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd 
 
 4th. 
 
 Right bank of the Nandakini near Ramni, 
 Guni, Bura, Barkuna, Shik, Ali Bukiyal 
 
 17 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 601 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 and Wan, near the source of the Kail- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ganga. 
 
 On the Kailganga and at Ketha and Mel- 
 
 378 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 khet, on the Bindar and higher up. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Near Pandukeswar on the Yishnuganga, 
 
 150 
 
 • • • 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 a difficult river. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 On the left bank and near the slopes of 
 
 1,790 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 Tamba Deo. 
 
 
 
 
 
 In the valley of the western Dhauli, from 
 
 1,585 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 Samaughata to Malari. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Near Turag Tal ... 
 
 100 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 Naini Tal 
 
 160 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 In north-eastern Kumaun, it occurs along the Kalimundi range, 
 separating the Ramganga from the Grori, but is apparently wanting 
 
 in north-western Kumaun. The older trees in a favourable climate 
 grow up in a slender column like the A. Webbiana, and, except that 
 the foliage is a yellowish green, considerably resemble it in its 
 sombre colour and columnar appearance. The thick contorted 
 boughs also give it a rough appearance. At Naini Tal the boughs 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 841 
 
 with a southern aspect are fuller and more regular, giving the tree 
 a lop-sided appearance. The cypress occurs also in the Bbagirathi 
 valley and along the head- waters of the Jumna and the Tons, and in 
 Jaunsar-Bawar on the Lohkandi and Moila hills and below the 
 Karama peak. In Munsyari it occurs at 7,000-9,000 feet ; in 
 Naini Tal at 6,500-8,000 feet and in the valley of the western 
 Dhauli it abounds from 7,000-8,000 feet : “ after leaving the oaks, 
 elms, hornbeams, &c., the wood becomes entirely cypress, and from 
 summit to base of the mountains no other tree is seen. The 
 larger trees not unfrequently attain an enormous size, some of 
 them having a girth of 27 feet.” Major Garstin measured one 
 at Wan over 38 feet in girth and several were over 20 feet. 
 Madden writes : — “ The famous cypress grove at Ming, four 
 or five miles south-east of Joshimath, stands on the north- 
 east aspect of the mountain at 7,500 feet elevation, surrounding 
 the temple of Chandika Devi. Most of the trees are 12-16 feet 
 round : but there is one 27 feet, measured flush with the ground 
 on one side, 10 or 12 feet above it on the other : it is branched 
 nearly to the base with enormous root-bole embracing rocks and is 
 probably not under a thousand years old.” The cypress has an 
 average height of 60-120 feet and an average girth of 6-12 feet. 
 These measurements vary much with the position and elevation. 
 Above Malari, in the Niti valley, it is so dwarfed as to appear a mere 
 bush, and its limits as a tree in Garhwal may be set down at 
 4,500-9,000 feet, but when introduced, it flourishes consider- 
 ably lower, as at Hawalbagh (4,000 feet) and Diwangiri (2,000 
 feet). The wood is hard, tough, long-fibred and of a reddish colour, 
 and was formerly extensively used for house-building in ISTaini Tal. 
 Throughout Kumaun the timber is freely used for indoor work, and 
 there is apparently no religious consideration prohibiting its use, but 
 to the west of the Tons it assumes the name deodar and is solely 
 used for incense. The timber when used is considered very dur- 
 rable, but too flexible for any position where great weights have to 
 be sustained, and for this purpose oak is preferred. A piece 22 inches 
 Ion o- and one inch square broke at 4321b., it had a specific gravity 
 of ‘695 and showed 18 rings to the inch. C. semper virens, Linn., 
 is occasionally cultivated in gardens in Kumaun at low eleva- 
 tions. 
 
 106 
 
842 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Juniperus communis, Linn. Varieties alpina, nana; ground 
 cypress ; padma and parpinja of Niti ; clmrpunja ot the Mana 
 valley ; Ihdla of Byans, but H. Strachey names the Ihdla of Byans 
 J. religiosa ; the cMchiya of Milam. Madden, Journ. Agri.-Hort. 
 Soc., Cal., VII., 153-5 : Brandis, 535. 
 
 It is found on Chitu Binayak (10,500 feet) ; at Milam and Tola 
 (11,000-12,000 feet), Bampa, Malari (10,500 feet); Jelam (9,000 
 feet), and Rimkim (14,000 feet), on the glacier-moraines of the Vish- 
 nuganga, west of Mana and in Kunaor. It is said to be used as 
 one of the sources of incense and rarely attains a height of more 
 than 7-8 feet with a stem 18-24 inches. It is used for fuel in 
 Juhar. The aromatic berries are added to spirits distilled from barley 
 and are also exported to the plains under the names abhdl, alvdber , 
 and are used in medicine as a stimulant and diuretic. 
 
 Juniperus recurva, Ham. — Weeping blue juniper; the letter, 
 Ihedara, jhora, gi'gal, ciru and agaru of Kumaun and Garhwal ; 
 the HI of Milam ; padbank and pdma of Byans. Brandis, 530. 
 There are two varieties : one with acute spreading leaves, found 
 at 12,000 to 13,000 feet ; the other with imbricated cupressiform 
 leaves and extending to nearly 15,000 feet. It flowers May- 
 August and the fruit ripens July-November. 
 
 It occurs beyond Milam and Niti (to 15,000 feet); in the valleys 
 
 of the Dhauli (lower limit, 9,000 feet), Vish- 
 nuganga and Kedarganga, at Pindari and 
 most other glaciers. Hodgson found it on the Bhagirathi at 12,914 
 feet, and describes it as having there the form of a large creeper, 
 not a tree ; some of the branches were 6 inches in diameter and of a 
 considerable length ; in some places they were above the spongy soil 
 and in others below the surface. The wood is of a red colour, has a 
 brittle and soft grain and the characteristic odour of the pencil 
 cedar. It is- one of the sources of incense and is apparently the 
 thalu, ihelu or telu of Basahir. It is used in the manufacture of the 
 yeast called balma, which forms an adjunct in the preparation of 
 spirits from rice. The yeast is made by moistening coarse barley 
 flour, which is formed into a ball and covered all round with the 
 leaves and twigs of juniper. The whole is then closely wrapped 
 up in blankets kept in a warm place and allowed to ferment, which 
 usually takes place in three or four days. 
 
 Localities. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 .843 
 
 Juniperus excelsa, M. Bieb. — Himalayan pencil cedar — Skur- 
 buta, shilrgu, shukpa of Tibet ; dhup, padmak , siirgi of N.-W. P. ; 
 padmak of Milam. Madden, Journ. Agri.-Hort. Soc., Gal., YII., 
 138-146 : Brandis, 538. 
 
 This is another of the sources of Tibetan incense. It occurs at 
 the upper limits of A. Webbiana (8,900-11,500 feet) beyond Mi- 
 lam ; at Jelam on the Dhauli (9,000 feet) and in the valley of the 
 Girti. In Nepal it grows to a height of 60 to 80 feet, and is there 
 a fine large tree with dense branches of a dark colour and close foli- 
 age. In Sikkim it falls to from 15 to 20 feet. Hooker notes that 
 
 o 
 
 the Sikkim tree has a scaly bark ; the heart-wood is red and odorous, 
 and the leaves are quadrifariously imbricated, and the wood is 
 burned as incense. The juniper is often confounded with the cy- 
 press ; the former, though the ultimate ramifications are very numer- 
 ous, has them much shorter and less pendulous than the cypress, 
 and the green is more brilliant. The leaves are closely imbricated 
 in decussate pairs, somewhat obtuse, with a central gland or raised 
 line on the back ; four-ranked and imbricate ; or slender, acute, 
 disposed in threes and spreading. The fruit ripens in September- 
 October, of a purplish blue colour, the size of a small pea, one or 
 two-seeded, with a strong aroma when bruised. The tree does not 
 usually attain any great height, seldom being more than 15-30 feet, 
 with a disproportionately thick stem 2-5 .feet at six feet from the 
 ground and often 6-8 feet and in some cases much more. One at 
 Sungnam girthed 13 feet at 5-6 feet from the ground, and Brandis 
 mentions another in Lahul with a girth of 33^ feet and only , about 
 the same height. The pencil-cedar occurs also in the valley of the 
 Jadh-ganga at over 11,000 feet, and was first found thereby Captain 
 Herbert. Some logs of this valuable wood have been removed and 
 exported by the Bhagirathi river to the plains, but in the lulls it is 
 only used for fuel or incense. 
 
 Taxus baccata, Linn.; T. mteifera , Wall., T. Wallichiana , 
 Zucc. — Yew — Thaner, Kumaun ; Met, Sor ; nhare , Byans. Madden, 
 Journ. Agri.-Hort. Soc., Cal., YII., 155 : Brandis, 537. 
 
 The yew is found at Bala Jagesar, 5,900 feet ; Puya-pani, on 
 the road to Deo Dura, 6,500 feet ; on Thakil in Sor ; Kanol on 
 the Nandakini ; Chula in Chaudans ; Laduli ghat on the Nayar 
 
844 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS OF THE N.-W. PROVINCES. 
 
 (7,000 feet) and near Tungnath, but is indigenous only on the 
 spurs from the snowy range. It occurs with box and cypress in 
 the Bhagirathi valley between Bhatwari and Jhola and along the 
 head-waters of the Tons and Jumna. Griffith notes its occurrence 
 in Bhutan between 7,100 and 9,800 feet, and 8,000-9,000 feet would 
 seem to be the limit within which it flourishes there. On the outer 
 ranges in Sikkim it does not descend below 9,000 feet, but on the 
 inner ranges it is found as low as 7,000 feet, and in Basahir Madden 
 has not seen it below 8,000 feet. In Garhwal poor scrubby speci- 
 mens ascend as high as 11,200 feet at Kedarnath and to 11,000 feet on 
 Tungnath. Hoffineister records a tree near Gangotri, 15 feet in girth, 
 and Dr. Hooker notes one of 18 feet in girth on Tonglo in Sikkim; but 
 the average girth is not more than 5-8 feet and height 20-30 feet. 
 The sap-wood is whitish, but the heart-wood is heavy, close-grained, 
 and eminently fitted for turnery, taking a very high polish. The tree 
 is held in high veneration and the wood is burned as incense and the 
 branches are carried about in processions in Kumaun. The people 
 of Ladak import yew-bark from Kashmir and use the inner part 
 dried and prepared as tea or for mixing with tea and as a dye. 
 The tree is there called sungcha and the bark chatting. The leaves 
 ( birmi ) are exported to the plains and are used in medicine and 
 the berries are eaten by the poorer classes. There is little export 
 of the timber, which would seem to be well adapted for shafts and 
 the purposes to which its European representative is applied, if it 
 could be procured in sufficient lengths. 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 Economic Botany — ( continued ). 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Forest history. Grazing tax. Boundary disputes. Government forests. 
 Kumaun forest-division. Naini Tal forest-division. Ranikhet forest-division. 
 Garhwal forest-division. Dehra Dun forest-division. Ganges (Bhagirathi) 
 division. Forest at the head of the Tons and the Jumna. Jaunsar forest-division. 
 Rheea cultivation. Cinchona. Tallow-tree. Ipecacuanha. Cork-oak. Sweet- 
 chestnut. Carob. Mezquit and others. Tea. 
 
 From time immemorial, tlie forests along the foot of the hills to 
 
 which alone any fiscal value pertained as 
 Forest history. we ll as those within the hills were consi- 
 
 dered the property of the ruling power and as such invariably 
 formed a source of revenue to the State. The most simple mode of 
 realising this revenue was that actually adopted by subjecting the 
 products of the forests to a small proprietary due in the shape of 
 duties payable by the exporters. The products consumed within the 
 hills by the people themselves were, as a rule, too inconsiderable 
 to be taken into account and » where exceptionally large, as in the 
 case of fuel for smelting ores, were included in the revenue demand. 
 These duties on ordinary forest produce were collected at stations 
 along the foot of the hills, whilst the duty on catechu was fixed at 
 so much per kiln and was paid by the manufacturers. For the 
 first three years of our rule the forest dues were leased with the 
 transit duties on merchandise, and on the abolition of the latter 
 source of revenue, Mr. Traill was authorised to farm out the forest 
 dues or kdth-bdns and kath mahals as they were called from their 
 principal items kdth (timber), bans (bamboos) and kath (catechu), 
 to the zamindars of the parganahs in which they were collected. 1 
 The revenue from this source in 1818-19 for Kali Kumaun, Chau- 
 bhainsi, Chhakhata, Kota, the Path Dun and Udepur amounted to 
 Rs. 3,200, as compared with Rs. 2,841 in the previous year. The 
 
 1 From Commissioner, 14th September, 1818. To Commissioner, 25tli Septem- 
 ber, 1818,' 
 
846 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 following table shows the collections in sonat rupees for nine years 
 under the new system : — 
 
 Year. 
 
 1820-21 4 ’s“ 
 
 -{“i ::: ^ 
 
 1822-23 - •>?“ 
 
 t Garhwal ... 934 
 
 Rs. Rs. 
 3,200 
 3,989 
 4,850 
 
 6,503 
 
 6,302 
 
 Year. 
 
 -{g“i JgS 
 
 isos 0-7 S Kumaun .. 2,266 
 i82b-27 •••[ Garhwal ... 1>100 
 
 1827-28 ( p U | aU ^ ■“ ^’ool 
 
 t Garhwal ... 1,381 
 
 DO (Kumaun ... 2,620 
 18-8--9 ... | Garhwal .. 1,406 
 
 Rs. Rs. 
 7,101 
 3,366 
 3,675 
 
 4,025 
 
 In 1824, the collection of these dues was intrusted to the 
 
 authorities of the Muradabad and Bareilly districts in consequence 
 of the difficulties regarding boundaries that had occurred, but in 
 1826 the duty of collecting them was restored to the hill-districts. 
 In 1828, the forest dues were leased to the farmers of the ch'irai 
 or grazing-tax at the same rate, as it was found that the two could 
 not be then usefully separated. 
 
 This grazing-tax was one of the many miscellaneous items of 
 
 revenue that descended to the British from 
 
 Grazing-tax. 
 
 former Governments. I rom the earliest 
 times, the landholders in the hills were all subject to a tax on their 
 cattle known as ghikhur which with other cesses was abolished at 
 the first settlement. 1 The practice of collecting these dues, whether 
 for the Government or for the landholders, extended to the Bhabar 
 and Tarai and was continued there under the name gdi-ch irdi ; 
 but the cattle of the hill-men were exempt from this tax, which 
 was levied chiefly on the cattle of the villages in the plains that 
 came into the forests during the hot season. During the two 
 or three years succeeding the conquest the number of cattle pro- 
 ceeding from the hills to the Bhabar and Tarai was not so great as 
 to render any cess on them an object of interest to the Government, 
 but the security afforded by the abolition of the old rural guard 
 (i chaukidari ) system and the introduction of an efficient police led 
 
 J To Board, dated 16th July, 1822. These cesses were called gliikhar, gobar, 
 and puchhiya in the hills and were farmed out as jogat, and under the Heris and 
 Mewatis in the Bhabar were called donia , from the dona or wooden bar to which 
 the cattle were tied at night, and each of which paid one kuehcha ser of ghi and 
 four pice a year. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 847 
 
 to increased resort to the plains. It was therefore resolved in 
 1822 to subject all cattle sent to graze in the Bh&bar and Tarai to 
 a uniform tax of three annas for each female buffalo, two annas 
 for each cow, and one anna for each bullock a year. The farm of 
 this tax for the year 1822-23 was given out in three leases, aggre- 
 gating Rs. 2,077 per annum. The unsettled state of the boundaries 
 between Kumaun and Rohilkhand became a fertile source of dis- 
 pute between the farmers of this tax for the hill and plains portions 
 of the submontane tract. Many of the hill-men having made their 
 arrangements with the Rohilkhand farmers paid the duties to them 
 and were again called upon to pay by the hill farmers, who claimed 
 the right to levy these dues in all places in which the chaukiclari 
 cattle dues had formerly been collected. In 1823, the cattle 
 belonging to the Kamins, Sayanas, and Thokdars or head-men of 
 parganahs in the hills and to Padhans or head-men of villages in 
 the Bhabar and those belonging to permanent residents were 
 exempted from these dues. In 1826, the boundary between the hills 
 and Rohilkhand was finally arranged and separate farms for the 
 grazing dues were established. The principle on which the collec- 
 tions were made was that the farmer within whose jurisdiction the 
 cattle-pens were situate was entitled to collect the tax. The dues 
 were very rarely collected per head, the plan being to count in each 
 goth or cattle-pen the agals or donas , that is the wooden bars to 
 which the cattle were tied at night. The customary rate was to 
 consider each agal as containing eight buffaloes and eight cows liable 
 to a tax of two rupees. 
 
 To make this point in the history of the management of the 
 
 forests more clear, it will be necessary to 
 Boundary disputes. refer to these boundary disputes. In the 
 
 earlier years there were no exports of any value from the portion 
 of the lowland tract lying below the chain of custom posts estab- 
 lished to levy the export duty, and it was thought that no difficulty 
 could arise in regard to the collections made there, but the unset- 
 tled state of the boundary between the Bhabar and Tarai and the 
 conflicting claims of the landholders of the frontier villages, both 
 of the hills and of the plains, soon led to innumerable complaints 
 in which the district authorities on both sides found themselves 
 partizans. The records show a voluminous correspondence on 
 
848 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 this subject extending over several years. Early in 1819, 
 Mr. Traill reported on the encroachments made by the zamin- 
 dars of Bilhari on the forests lying along the foot of the hills 
 now included in the Tallades Bhabar. This tract was valuable 
 to the hill-men as affording them pasture for their cattle during 
 the winter months when the grass in the hills dried up and 
 became useless for fodder. During the Grorkhali rule a joint com- 
 mission had been appointed by the Nepal Government and the 
 Nawab of Oudh to settle these disputes, and the Saniha nala was 
 fixed upon as the boundary between the two states. The hillmen 
 had always occupied the jungle to the north of this boundary and 
 were anxious to undertake the cultivation of the portions lying at 
 the foot of the hills which had recently been taken possession of 
 by the Bilhari landholders. 1 It was agreed that an attempt should 
 be made to settle the disputed boundary on the basis of that which 
 existed in 1802, when Rohilkhand was ceded to the British, and 
 that advantage should be taken of this arrangement to demarcate 
 the whole line of boundary between Rudrpur and the Nepal fron- 
 tier. The difficulty was much enhanced by the claims set up by 
 Major Hearsey, who, in 1814, had purchased the entire taluka of 
 Bilhari at auction for arrears of revenue and now demanded posses- 
 sion of a portion of the Kumaun Bhabar, on the plea that it belonged 
 to the lowland parganah. A commission was appointed to investi- 
 gate these matters, and it was at length decided that the Saniha 
 nala had always been, and should continue to be, the boundary 
 between the hills and the low country. 2 The collection of all dues 
 was handed over to the plains authorities, but, in 1826, was again 
 intrusted to the Commissioner of Kumaun. 
 
 1 To Board, dated 5 th February, 1819. 
 
 From Board, dated 6th February, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 1st March, 
 1819. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 8th 
 March, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 20th 
 March, 1819. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 26th 
 March, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 5th April, 
 1819. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 10th 
 April, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 5th No- 
 vember, 1819. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 18th 
 November, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 24th No- 
 vember, 1819. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 1st 
 December, 1819. 
 
 To Collector, Bareilly, dated 16th Feb- 
 ruary, 1820. 
 
 From Collector, Bareilly, dated 24th 
 February, 1819. 
 
 2 From Board, dated 27th June, 1820. 
 
 To Board, dated 19th July, 1820. 
 
 From Board, dated 4th August, 1820. 
 
OF THE NORTH -WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 849 
 
 The first notice 1 that I have been able to discover in regard to 
 
 the reservation of forests for Government 
 
 Government forests. uge a ] one occurs in 1826. The whole of the 
 
 forests had always been recognised as belonging to Government, 
 and any part of them could therefore be appropriated to the ex- 
 clusive use of Government without the slightest infringement of 
 the rights or claims of a single individual. Mr. Traill recom- 
 mended the reservation of the thdplas or terrace land immediately 
 adjoining the lower range for the timber and bambus required by 
 Government, whilst the extensive forests below it should still remain 
 open to private individuals. A proclamation was issued in 1826, 
 prohibiting the cutting of sal within the reserves, which were at 
 once excluded from the lease of forest produce, and thus the 
 system of Government forests commenced. In 1828, as we have 
 seen, the lease was fixed for four years, but in 1831-32 I find the 
 total forest revenue amounted only to Rs. 4,328, of which 
 Rs. 2,923 were realised in Kumaun and in 1832-33 it reached 
 Rs. 4,457, of which Rs. 2,932 were collected in Kumaun. No 
 attempt was made to enforce any system of conservancy and the 
 old system of leasing out the forest dues to contractors continued. 
 In the report on the settlement of Garhwal in 1840, Mr. Batten 
 remarks that large portions of waste lands, including whole ranges 
 and their vast forests, were included from olden time in the bound- 
 aries of the adjacent villages, though not in their recorded area. 
 No change in this nominal allotment of waste was then attempted, 
 as such a division was found useful in assigning separate tracts for 
 pasture for the cattle of different villages ; but, at the same time, the 
 inhabitants of the villages within whose area these tracts of waste 
 land were nominally included were prohibited from levying any 
 grazing dues unless it had been a custom of immemorial date, and 
 even then the burden of proof rested on those claiming the dues. A 
 similar clause was entered in the lease given to the head-man and in 
 the several agreements signed by the shareholders in the village. Mr. 
 Batten further states that his report 2 should be considered, in a measure, 
 declaratory of the principles on which the settlement was formed, 
 and adds : — “I therefore take this opportunity of asserting that the 
 
 1 To Board, dated 22nd .Tune, 1826. To Collector, Bareilly, dated 26th Septem- 
 ber, 1826. ! Stat. Kumaun, 125, 336. 
 
 107 
 
-850 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 right of Government to all the forests and waste lands not include d 
 in the assessable area of the estates remains wholly unaffected by 
 the inclusion of certain tracts within the boundaries of villages, and 
 110 one has a right, merely on account of such inclusion, to demand 
 payment for the use of pasture-grounds or for the permission to cut 
 timber and firewood. Neither does such inclusion interfere neces- 
 sarily with the right of Government to accept offers for clearance 
 ( naudbad ) leases. But as ordered in the case of the Tarai forests, so in 
 the hills (where, too, claims to proprietary rights are rare), the inhabi- 
 tants of the villages most adjacent to the tract, or having it recorded 
 within their boundary, should have the first refusal of such leases.” 
 In his Kumaun report Mr. Batten distinctly states that these prin- 
 ciples apply equally to Kumaun. 
 
 In his report on the Kumaun Bhabar in 1846-47 Mr. Batten 
 gives the revenue from the hath bdns and chardi mahals as fol- 
 lows : — 
 
 Name of patti. 
 
 Forest dueB. 
 
 Pasturage 
 
 dueB. 
 
 Total. 
 
 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Ks. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Kota ... »*• 
 
 • • • 
 
 4, GOO 
 
 3,801 
 
 8,401 
 
 Chhakhata 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,451 
 | 3,705 
 
 2,650 
 
 4,101 
 
 Kali Kumaun 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,522 
 
 6,227 
 
 Total 
 
 ... 
 
 1 9,756 
 
 8,973 
 
 18,729 
 
 He states that though the injury said to be done to the reserved 
 Government forests was somewhat exaggerated in some places, the 
 Government rights had been suspended and in others the older trees 
 had been removed, and recommended that steps should be taken 
 to preserve the few patches of old sal that remained and the young 
 sisu plantations. In the eastern Bhabar cultivators were allowed 
 to clear the ground and sell the timber. The restriction as to cutting 
 sal in the thdplas or plateaus of the lower hills which was issued ill 
 1826 had been removed, when Mr. Traill saw the farms falling in one 
 after the other owing to the scarcity of sal in the lower sites. In 
 the Kota and Chhakata Bhabar the farmers were allowed to cut 
 down and sell the sal timber which is there confined to the thdp- 
 las and does not occur also in isolated patches in the plains as it 
 does farther east. In appendix A. will be found a list of rates 
 according to which farmers of the forest dues in Kumaun were 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 851 
 
 Sub-Himalayan forests. 
 
 authorised to collect from the exporters in 1847, and we shall now 
 proceed to describe the forests as they now exist. 
 
 The sub-Himalayan forests of the Kumaun and Garhwal districts 
 
 extend from the Ganges to the Sarda, cover- 
 ing the lower spurs and ridges of the Hima- 
 laya and running down some distance into the Bhabar. The Tarai 
 forests contain a little sal , of inferior growth, barely sufficient for 
 the requirements of the cultivators, and are not included in the 
 tracts under the Forest Department. With the exception of a por- 
 tion of the Chandni Chauk which belongs to the Tarai, almost all the 
 islands in the Sarda below Kumaun have been given to Nepal. 
 A cart-road running along the foot of the hills from the Ganges to 
 the Sarda generally forms the southern boundary of the forests in 
 Garhwal, but further east several blocks reserved for Government 
 purposes lie to the south of the road and are included in the existing 
 reserved forest area. The western Ramganga and its tributaries, 
 the Barsoti and Kotirao, form the boundary between the two great 
 forest-divisions of Kumaun and Garhwal, whilst the outer Himalaya 
 give a well-defined boundary on the north. Except the Kumaun 
 Iron Company’s grant and a number of villages, all of whose rights 
 
 have been recorded and for whom blocks of forest have been left 
 open, the entire area described forms one vast State forest in one 
 compact block perfectly marked out either by natural or artificial 
 boundaries. Within these limits no private rights exist which can 
 prove injurious to the best sal forests, and cattle-grazing is prohi- 
 bited in all portions which are free of village' rights, except where 
 it is entirely harmless. The most valuable timber is sal, which 
 grows with great vigour in many parts and covers about one-fourth 
 of the forest area. Ttin ( Cedrela Toona) and sissoo ( Dalbergia Sis sit ) 
 are plentiful in the low, moist valleys and flats, whilst other jungle 
 trees, especially the Terminalias, Lagerstroemias, Acacias, various 
 species of Anogeissus, Adina, and Ougeinia, are found mixed with 
 sdl everywhere, even when the last predominates. Amongst the 
 minor forest produce the bambu takes the first rank, and next the 
 matting and cordage materials and indigenous drugs, tans and dyes. 
 
 We shall now proceed to give a short account of the existing forest- 
 divisions and their origin. The contract arrangements for felling 
 continued in Kumaun until the year 1858, and as a consequence no 
 
852 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 system of conservancy could be introduced. The forests of the 
 
 present Kumaun forest-division 1 were denud- 
 Kumaun forest-division. ..... ...... 
 
 ed oi good trees m all easily accessible places, 
 and were it not that nature has happily made the sal, sisu, Jchair, and 
 dhaurilargely reproductive, the new Forest Department would have 
 had little to conserve. Between 1855 and 1857, the demands of the 
 railway authorities induced numerous speculators to enter into con- 
 tracts for sleepers, and in order to secure a certain favourite area for 
 themselves, these men were allowed, unchecked, to cut down acres of 
 old trees very far in excess of what they could possibly export, so that 
 for some years after the regular forest operations commenced the 
 attention of the department was chiefly directed to cutting up and 
 bringing to the depot the dead timber left behind by the contrac- 
 tors. 2 Major (now General) Ramsay was the first Conservator. 
 He abolished the contract system in 1858 and gradually introduced 
 a better arrangement, by which the cultivation of patches of land in 
 the forests proper was discouraged and the cultivators were induced 
 to take up lands chiefly south of the cross-road from Hardwar to 
 Barmdeo, leaving the valuable forest land to the north untouched. 
 This the first attempt at real conservancy would, probably, have suc- 
 ceeded better had not the management of the forests been taken from 
 the Commissioner of Kumaun in 1868, for arrangements of this kind 
 take much time and trouble to elaborate. In his report for the 
 year 1867 the Commissioner writes : — “As yet cattle have notin 
 all cases been excluded from the tracts recently made over to the 
 Forest Department, because some time must be allowed to the villagers 
 to make other arrangements. A great many cattle-sheds have been 
 removed from the vicinity of the sal forests of the outer rano-e 
 between Haldwani and the Sarda river and the cross-road has been 
 declared the boundary nearly the whole way.” In his report for 
 1868 the Commissioner writes : — “In another year or two I hope 
 that all the Kumaun valuable sal forests will be as free from cattle 
 as those of Garhwal.” Unfortunately this is hardly true even at 
 the present day. The same officer introduced the system of having 
 
 1 This division extends from the Sarda on the east to the Phika river on 
 the west and from the base of the outer hills on the north to the boundary of 
 the Tarai district on the south. I am indebted for the materials for the notice 
 0 f this division to Major Campbell through the Conservator, Mr. G. Greig. 
 
 % See Major Kamsay’s report on the condition of the forests in 1861 in ' Nurtli- 
 \ \eattrji t rovinces Gaztilt Supplement, lSth December, 1861. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 853 
 
 all trees marked by responsible officers before permission was given 
 for felling and commenced arrangements for protecting the reserved 
 forests from fire. Operations, however, appear to have been con- 
 ducted on too large a scale or were too irkso me to the squatters, for, 
 though successful for a time, the occurrence of an unusually dry 
 season led to great loss by fires. But, on the whole, the administra- 
 tration of the forests was a marked success. From the table given 
 in the appendix the receipts and expenditure for the years 1859-60 
 to 1867-68 show an excess of receipts over charges amounting to 
 considerably over fifteen lakhs of rupees. 1 The forests not only 
 gave a better return but were conserved for the first time, and 
 arrangements were made for the better protection of the young 
 plantations and planting out the denuded tracts. 
 
 Major Pearson took charge of the Kumaun forest-division in 
 
 Under the imperial Fo- 1868, but made little change in the working 
 rest Department. arrangements. In 1877 the reserved forests 
 
 in the Kumaun Bhabar were formally demarcated, 2 and it will be 
 convenient to adhere to the arrangements then sanctioned in the 
 following brief description of each block : — 
 
 Block 1 comprises the Cliilkiya forest, tvhich is one of the largest 
 and most valuable, having an area of about 126 square miles and 
 containing- much fine sal timber. The more accessible forests in 
 this block were worked by contractors before 1858, and the remain- 
 der have furnished the chief part of the timber brought to market 
 since that year. The entire block has been worked, but there are 
 still numbers of mature trees that have been reserved for shade and 
 shedding seed and which may be cut down when the young stock 
 have been established. Fire conservancy has also been successfully 
 enforced for some years and the young trees bid fair to produce 
 good timber. 
 
 Block 2, comprising the Garhi Balchand forest, has an area of 
 17 square miles, all of which have been demarcated, and of this 
 about 11 square miles have been enclosed with fence and ditch 
 and are protected from fire. The forest is chiefly sal , but the soil 
 does not seem suited to produce large sound trees, and its fittest use 
 
 1 Receipts, Rs 32,90,459 (Kumaun, Rs. 15,01,050; Garhwal, Rs. 17,89,309). 
 Charges, Rs. 17,43,542 (Kumaun, Rs. 8,33,477 ; Garhwal, Rs. 9,10,065). 5 See 
 
 G.Os.No. 407 F.C., dated 5th September, 1877,andNo. 173, dated 29th February, 1879. 
 
854 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 will be to supply saplings, which can be carted from the spot and 
 will find a ready market in the plains. 
 
 Block 3 comprises the western Kota forest, which has an area of 
 about 55 square miles and contains much valuable sal forest. Gene- 
 ral Ramsay writes : — “ There is no part of Knmaun where sal thrives 
 so well as in the Kota Dun, west of the Dhabka river.” The Kota 
 forests have been worked like block No. 1 and have supplied much 
 timber to the market during the last twenty years. Fire conser- 
 vancy has been introduced since 1877. 
 
 Block 4, comprising the forests below the Chhakhata parganah, has 
 an area of about 103'5 square miles and consists of sal on the thdplas 
 or plateaus and some very fine haldu below. The western portion 
 between the Bhakra and the Gaula streams has been worked for 
 many years by the Nawab of Rampur, 1 and the eastern portion from 
 the Gaula to Chorgaliya by contractors and for canal-works and 
 building purposes in Haldwani. The only large tract remaining 
 unworked in this block is the Nandhaur valley. 
 
 Block 5 is known as the Horai forest. It has an area of 14 
 square miles and lies below the hills. It contains some valuable sal 
 forest, of which the eastern half has been enclosed with fence and 
 ditch. 
 
 Block 6, or the Kali Kumaun forest, has an area of about 230 - 5 
 square miles and consists entirely of hill-forest, of which the lower 
 slopes and more easily accessible parts have been worked out by 
 contractors. Still there is a larger area of unworked sal forest 
 here than in any other block of the Kumaun Bhabar. 
 
 Block 7, or the Dhyanirao forest, has an area of 68 square miles, 
 of which about one-third is sal forest and the remainder is chiefly 
 Jchair and mixed jungle and open plains, on which immense numbers 
 of cattle graze. 
 
 Block 8, known as the Chela forest, has an area of about seven 
 square miles, of which about a quarter is sal forest and the remainder 
 is chiefly halclu and bambu. 
 
 Block 9 comprises the Barmdeo forest, which has an area of 
 7-3 square miles and lies at the foot of the hills near the Sarda 
 
 1 The Nawab of Rampur is allowed to export every year 200 trees, not less 
 than 6£ feet in girth, free of duty. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 855 
 
 river. It contains some promising young sal forests, besides khair, 
 sisii, and bambus. 
 
 Block 10, known as the Sarda forest, comprises a number of 
 islands in the Sarda which are covered with sisu and khair forest 
 and have an area of about eight square miles. 
 
 — 
 
 Block 11 comprises a small patch of sal forest on the Sarda about 
 three miles above Banbasa measuring 320 acres, recently transferred 
 to the Imperial Forest Department, which has charge of all these 
 demarcated forest blocks, and the remainder ot the forest area is 
 managed by the Commissioner of Kumaun. As a rule, the good 
 sal forests consist chiefly of sal, but there are also patches of tun , 
 kliair, sisu, sandan , gosam , sain, haldu, dhauri, hakli, and bambus, all 
 of which are rising in value every year. The cart-road from Barmdeo 
 to the Ganges is connected with cross-roads to the different blocks and 
 temporary roads are made when necessary. 
 
 In the young forests the trees differ materially in different 
 localities. In some places where the soil is suitable and other cir- 
 cumstances have favoured the growth of the young trees, they are 
 exceedingly fine and show straight stems, clean barks, and fine 
 heads. In other places where the soil is poor, but more especially 
 where the numerous cattle stations formerly existed, and where in 
 consequence the young trees suffered continually from being lopped, 
 barked, and otherwise injured* and where they were more exposed 
 to repeated fires, the trees are knotted, crooked, and with poor 
 heads. The best forests in the eastern tract are perhaps those above 
 Barmdeo, near the junction of the Ladliiya with the Sarda, where, 
 owing to the favourable nature of the soil, the sal has developed to a 
 remarkable degree and, owing to the difficulty of carriage, the trees 
 have been left uninjured by speculators and contractors. Next in 
 importance come those to the west and north of Chorgaliya and 
 those on the flats and plateaus above the Jagbura and Kulauniya 
 streams, and next the sat forests in the valleys of the Nandhaur 
 and Sararagadh streams. The geological formation in the last 
 tract is sandstone and massive boulders. Further west there 
 are still valuable forests between the Kosi and the Ramganga, 
 and there can be little doubt that in the course of time the 
 forests under a careful system of conservancy will renew their 
 
HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 856 
 
 Iron Company’s forests. 
 
 pristine vigour and well repay the core and money expended upon 
 them. 
 
 The only important private forest is that belonging to the Ku- 
 
 maun Iron Company, whose grant extends 
 from the Manar Gadhera, about one mile 
 west of the Dhabka, as far as the Bhakra river, about half way be- 
 tween Kaladhungi and Haldwani. The grant is bounded on the 
 north by the Himalaya and on the south towards the Bhabar by a 
 line of pillars, and the area is about 350 square miles. The collec- 
 tions from this tract for timber and minor forest produce from 1861 
 to 1881 have amounted to more than two lakhs of rupees, and it 
 now constitutes one of the most valuable forests in Kumaun. It is 
 difficult to say what portion of their rights Government resolved 
 to grant to the company, for the deed was never executed, but from 
 the draft it would appear that only fuel-rights were intended, and 
 certainly none other is expressed. The subject of these forests and 
 the company’s claim to them being now under the consideration of 
 Government, it will not be necessary to allude to them any further. 1 
 
 The climate in some parts of the tract below the Kumaun hills is 
 
 fair from November to J une, but in other parts 
 it is very fatal in November and after April. 
 During the cold-weather the Bhabar forests present a busy scene. 
 They are then filled with wood and bambu cutters, labourers haul- 
 ing out timber, men and women collecting babar grass, making mats 
 and baskets, gathering roots, leaves and plants used in medicine or 
 the arts, or herding cattle. After April all, except those who have 
 become acclimatised, leave the forests, and during the rains they 
 remain practically closed. Ordinarily every hill stream becomes 
 then a raging torrent often impossible to cross for several days. 
 Elephants and tigers, though now less numerous than in former 
 times, return to the haunts from which they had been driven dur- 
 ing the hot weather : the prairies become a sea of grass and the 
 undergrowth in the thick jungle presents an obstacle to moving 
 about most difficult to surmount. To the unacclimatised these 
 forests are deadly during the rains, and few survive the malarious 
 fever that a night’s residence within them then frequently gives 
 
 rise to. There is no doubt, however, that the clearances effected 
 1 See for a sketch of the Company’s history. 
 
 . Climate, &c. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 857 
 
 by the Bliabar cultivators have done much towards ameliorating 
 the climate, for places where man could not formerly exist are now 
 the centre of flourishing colonies, the inhabitants of which remain 
 all the year round in their villages. 
 
 The forests in and around the settlement of Naini Tal were 
 
 demarcated in 1865 and now form the Naini 
 Naini Tal forest-division. „ , ,. . . , T) . , 10 . K .. 
 
 lal iorest-division/ .Previous to 1845, all 
 
 the trees in the neighbourhood were considered to belong to the 
 villages within whose boundaries they were situate, and those 
 within the valley were alone protected. Some years later, the 
 Commissioner took over the forests in the neighbourhood of the 
 settlement and allowed no timber to be felled without his permis- 
 sion. A small establishment was entertained to patrol the forests 
 and a royalty was levied on each tree felled to meet the expense. 
 In 1865, the forests were taken over by Government, and have 
 since then been managed chiefly with a view to supply the local 
 wants of Naini Tal. CMr of a good quality for building purposes 
 is abundant and the various species of oak and the rhododendron 
 afford materials for charcoal. In 1879, these forests were gazetted 
 as ‘ protected/ and now comprise about 38 square miles. Deocldr 
 plantations have been made with marked success along the slopes 
 of Lariya kanta, and bdnj and tilonj and Jcharsu oaks, also walnuts, 
 horse-chestnuts, and ash have been extensively sown and planted. 
 An attempt to reproduce the cypress was thought to have failed, 
 but the seeds have germinated after remaining a long time in the 
 ground. 
 
 The Kanikhet forest-division is, like the preceding, intended to 
 
 control and provide for the local supply of 
 timber and fuel to the Ranikhet settlement 
 The Imperial Forest Department deputed an officer to take charge 
 of the forests around the intended military station in 1867, but it 
 was not until 1873 that the forest boundaries were finally settled 
 and operations regularly commenced. The tracts now conserved 2 
 are fifteen in number, of which one having an area of about seven 
 square miles is closed and surrounded by a ring fence of thorn and 
 is ‘reserved ’ and clear of all private rights. It contains pine, oak, 
 
 1 Reserved by Nos. 149 and 150, dated 21st February, 1879. 2 See 
 
 G. Os. Nos. 176 and 177, dated 26th February, 1879. 
 
 108 ' 
 
 Ranikhet forest-division. 
 
358 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 rhododendron, and other woods of minor value. The other forests 
 which are ‘ protected ’ and cover an area of about 59 square miles 
 are situated at distances varying from one to 24 miles from Rani- 
 khet, and are held conjointly by Government and the inhabitants 
 of the villages within whose area they occur. The latter have a 
 right to graze their cattle and cut wood for fuel or for building or 
 agricultural purposes, but no power to cut for sale to any one. 
 But the great feature of this division is the nursery which, though 
 commenced only in 1871, has done much good in distributing 1 fruit 
 and timber trees all over the province and in conducting acclima- 
 tisation experiments. 
 
 In Garhwal, as in Kumaun, the contract system remained in 
 Garhwal forest-divi- force and, in 1839, we find the right of collect- 
 * 10n ‘ ing the forest and pasturage dues of the Patli 
 
 Dun leased to one Padam Singh for twenty years at a fixed annual 
 rental of Rs. 2,750, of which Rs. 1,649 were on account of the 
 Icdth-bdns section. The forests here are amongst the most valuable 
 both for timber and bambus that exist along the whole line of hills 
 between the Jumna and the Sarda, and the loss that must accrue 
 should this arrangement continue was brought 2 to the notice of 
 Government in 1853. The result of the correspondence that then 
 took place was that Padam Singh’s rights were purchased for 
 Rs. 15,000, and the forests were taken under direct management 
 and transferred from the Bijnor district 3 to Garhwal, whilst the col- 
 lection of the dues from the Khoh river westward still remained with 
 the plains authorities. Posts were established at the outlets of the 
 Ivotri and Patli Duns for the collection of dues from exporters, and 
 the surplus revenue was devoted to opening up roads and improving 
 the forests. In 1854, Captain Reid took over the management and 
 remained in charge until 1858. Captain Reid attempted little in 
 the way of conservancy, but commenced felling operations on a large 
 scale and erected a saw-mill that could not be worked owing to a 
 
 1 12,000 grafted plants have been distributed to villagers and householders, 
 besides some 32,000 forest and ornamental plants, and about 400,000 forest trees 
 have been planted in the reserve from the nursery. 2 By Mr. (now Sir 
 
 John) Strachey, to Commissioner, 4th August, 1853 ; from Government, No. 3747, 
 dated 17th September, 1853. 3 The collections of the forest and pasturage 
 
 dues from the Kotri Dun, including Udepur, was handed over to the Superin- 
 tendent of the Dun and the Collector of Bijnor in 1849. In 1853, the dues from 
 the Kotri Dun and the Rawasanwar part of Udepur amounted to Rs. .1,403, and 
 from the Rawasan-par portion to Rs. 1,011 a year ; total of Garhwal, Rs. 5,104. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 859' 
 
 defect in the slope of the canal that was to afford the motive power. 
 The mutiny then intervened, and in 1858 the forests came under 
 Major Ramsay, who introduced the system of conservancy that we 
 have noticed in the account of the Kumaun forest-division. His 
 administration was marked hy the control of felling operations, the 
 removal of squatters from the valuable forest tracts to available land 
 fit for cultivation below the forest boundaries, the construction of 
 roads and the establishment of stations for the collection of revenue 
 at convenient intervals. In 1861-62, cultivation in the Patli Hun 
 was put a stop to by assigning lands to the people in the Bhabar, 
 and the cattle-stations were broken up and removed from the 
 reserved forests. This operation occupied three years, from 1862 
 to 1865, the cattle stations being removed from all the Garhwal 
 forests, and in Kumaun from all the forests above the main line of 
 road. In the meanwhile excellent roads were opened out, and the 
 forests, especially those of Garhwal, were made accessible from all 
 sides : at the same time a regular system was instituted of working 
 only certain forests, the remaining ones being kept rigidly shut 
 up, and the selection and marking of all trees previous to felling 
 was insisted on. The felled timber left by the old contractors and 
 Captain Reid was exported and sold and the machinery of the 
 saw-mill was transferred to Rurki. Colonel Baugh acted as Conser- 
 vator under Major Ramsay and an establishment was entertained 
 to prevent the felling of timber without license, to protect the 
 forests from fire, to cut down creepers and to mark trees for felling. 
 The management of the forests was transferred to the Imperial 
 Forest Department in 1868, and, in 1879, the whole forest-division 
 of Garhwal from the Ramganga to the Ganges was divided 1 into 
 five blocks, an arrangement that we shall observe in the following 
 brief description : — 
 
 Block 1 comprises the Patli Dun forest with an area of 237-5 
 square miles. It is bounded on the east by the Kumaun boundary 
 and on the west by the Palain river to its junction with the Ram- 
 ganga, and thence down by the Ramganga to the Bijnor district. 
 
 Block 2 comprises the forests of the Kotri Dun with an area of 
 about 180 square miles, and is bounded on the east by the Patli 
 
 1 F. 162, dated 24th February, 1879. 
 
860 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Dun' forests and on the west by the Klioh river to the Kotdwara 
 mart, thence by Jamangarh and the Lalpani ridge to the Saneh 
 depot on the Granges road. 
 
 Block 3, known as the Saneh forest, has an area of 17 square 
 miles and lies between the Khok river on the east and the Malin 
 river on the west as far as the Chaukighata mart. 
 
 Block 4, known as the Laldhang forest, has an area of 36-5 square 
 miles and lies between the Malin oil the east and the Rawasan river 
 on the west. 
 
 Block 5, comprising the tract between the Rawasan and the 
 Ganges known as the Khara forest, has an area of 88 square miles. 
 
 Block 6, known as the Kartiya forest, has an area of about 800 
 acres. It consists chiefly of sdl and is situate on the left bank of the 
 Mandhal stream. 
 
 The northern boundary of all these blocks lies between the culti- 
 vated area of the hill villages and the forests proper, and the southern 
 boundary is found in the road between Kotirao on the east and the 
 Ganges on the west. 
 
 The Patli Dun forests occupy the valleys of the Ramganga and 
 . , its affluents and the ridges which run between 
 
 their watersheds, the geological formation of 
 this tract consists of alluvial deposits and drift in the valleys and 
 plateaus, and massive grey sandstone interspersed with blue shale 
 on the ridges. The whole Dun has been a noble forest of sdl, the 
 lower and more accessible portions of which have been worked out, 
 but in which enormous tracts of virgin forest still remain, from 
 which under judicious treatment inexhaustible stores of timber may 
 be drawn. Excellent roads were constructed though the principal 
 valleys by Major Ramsay, and these have been kept up by his suc- 
 cessors. The forests of this tract may be conveniently divided into 
 those (1) of the Palain or Taimuriya ; (2) those of the Mandhal ; 
 and (3) those of the Ramganga, south Patli Dun and Sona river. 
 
 (1) The whole basin of the Taimuriya and its affluents con- 
 tains a noble sdl forest. This tract was considerably thinned out 
 many years ago for wood for the gun-carriage agency, but not 
 io a too great extent, as the result has been satisfactory in the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 8(11 
 
 improvement of the growth of second-class trees as compared with the 
 condition of the same class of trees in those portions of the forest 
 wdiich have never been overworked. Throughout this tract since 
 conservation has been enforced the growth of sal saplings gives hope 
 of an unlimited supply of this valuable timber. This growth is 
 fostered by the ground becoming thickly clothed everywhere with 
 bambus, by which the moisture is retained in the soil and the increase 
 of other grasses is prevented, and thus the risk of fires is materially 
 diminished. 
 
 (2) The forests of the Mandhal owing to their remote position 
 have never been much worked. There are here in consequence to be 
 found a large number of first-class sal trees as well as an abundance 
 of trees of every age and size. The good forests may be said to extend 
 over about fifteen miles in length through all the lower portions of 
 the valley below Jarat, on the slopes and plateaus facing the north 
 and on the opposite bank of the Mandhal over the last five miles. 
 On the plateaus above the river the sal has attained a very large 
 size and fine tun trees exist in the valley which seems particularly 
 well adapted to their growth. 
 
 (3). The forests of the valley of the Ramganga, the south 
 Patli Dun and the Sona are all situated on the hills sloping down to 
 the Ramganga and its affluents, the Sona and Gaujhera nala on the 
 right bank and the Maira Sot, Patharpani and Dharau streams 
 on the left bank. These forests were ‘ felled even to desolation’ 
 years ago and many parts of them have been permanently injured. 
 No attempts at reproduction were made, and the land where fine 
 sal forest once stood is now too denuded by exposure to admit of 
 efforts in this direction proving successful. There are, however, 
 some good young plantations springing up and some mature trees, 
 as already noticed, exist in the Mandhal valley. The exceptions 
 are places where the old trees have been completely cut away, and 
 here, there being no natural shade or seed-sowing, the dense grass 
 effectually prevents all artificially sown seeds from germinating, and 
 though measures have been taken from time to time to reproduce 
 the forest, they have met with only very partial success. There is 
 still, however, some sal in the highlands, some sisu along the rivers 
 and tun in the valleys, and a fair amount of khair and good grass 
 in the open level ground. Below the Siwaliks there are great 
 
862 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 bambu forests on the level flats that afford a considerable revenue. 
 The great question of fire conservancy has always engaged the 
 attention of the establishment, and up to 1879 no great injury 
 had been done for several years. In 1879, however, the cholera- 
 stricken pilgrims returning from the Hardwar fair spread fires in 
 every direction, and considerable damage to the young plantations 
 resulted. Roads have been opened to all the principal blocks 
 in connection with the road from Kotirao to the Ganges that 
 forms the southern boundary of the division. 
 
 Blocks 3 and 4. 
 
 The forests of the Kotri Dun lie between the Patli Dun on the 
 east and the Khoh river on the west. The 
 formation of the soil is sandstone and drift 
 and there is little water and few good forests. The trees are 
 almost entirely sal differing in value in different places accord- 
 ing to the soil and other natural circumstances. Few tracts in this 
 forest have not been worked more or less, but there still remains 
 some good timber on the more inaccessible ridges. Since this 
 forest has been rigidly protected the young trees have made con- 
 siderable progress, and the keeping out of cattle and fires will in a 
 few years do much to restore them to their original condition. 
 
 Blocks 3 and 4 lie between the Rawasan and the Khoh rivers, 
 a distance of about sixteen miles. The soil 
 is a dry sandy loam with outcrops of gravel 
 and blue clayey slate in the hills. The entire tract appears 
 to have been extensively cultivated in former times, but there is a 
 great want of water through all the lower forests. There are here 
 three large sal patches. The first along the Rawasan has been 
 extensively worked and little valuable timber remains ; the second 
 along the Chaukighata stream contains some mature sd l trees and in 
 the valleys tun; and the third is a young sal forest in the south-east 
 corner of the division, about three square miles in extent. Bahera , 
 sain, and haldu are also found on the lower plains along the southern 
 boundary, but bambus, which grow luxuriantly everywhere, form 
 the main article of export from both blocks. 
 
 The early history of the forests of Dehra Dun has much in com- 
 mon with that of the eastern forests in 
 Kumaun and Garhwal. Both the Gurhwfd 
 
 Dehra Dun forests. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 86 ? 
 
 Rajas and the Gorkhali Government derived a considerable revenue 
 from the various items of forest produce grown in the Dun and 
 adjacent hills. This was usually levied as a transit duty and was 
 collected with the export and import duties on every article of 
 commerce entering or leaving the Dun. The aggregate amount of 
 these duties in 1809-10 was Rs. 16,000, and in the following year 
 was Rs. 15,200, of which over one-third was absorbed in paying the 
 collecting establishment. The transit duties were abolished at the 
 conquest, and with them the duty on the export of forest produce, 
 which, though a legitimate source of income, tvas lost sight of until 
 Mr. Moore took it under his management in 1819. For three 
 years the duties on exports yielded a revenue averaging Rs. 4,000 
 per annum, and in 1822 tvere leased to one Surjan Negi for four 
 years at Rs. 5,000 a year. In 1825, Mr. Shore gave new leases for 
 five years to various persons for all the collecting stations, except 
 that at the Kheri pass, at an aggregate demand of Rs. 8,500. In 
 making these arrangements it was distinctly laid down that these 
 dues were not to be regarded as transit duties, but as rent for the 
 use of the forests and as a royalty on their products, and on this 
 principle all subsequent settlements were made. 1 Curious to say, 
 Mr. Shore 2 was averse to preserving sdl and devoted all his attention 
 to the propagation of sisu , going so far as to import seed for this 
 purpose from Fatehgarh. It does not appear that any attempt was 
 ever made to conserve the forests on any system or to control fell- 
 ing operations, and in 1829 the revenue had fallen off so much that 
 balances amounting to Rs. 6,000 had to be written off on account 
 of the leases granted in 1825. Major Young then took charge of 
 the forests and offered the right of levying the forest duties to pub- 
 lic competition by auction. The experiment was fully justified by 
 the results, giving a revenue of Rs. 6,425 for the ghats on the 
 Jumna and Ganges and of Rs. 9,595 for the passes to the plains, or a 
 total of Rs. 16,020. The duties were farmed at these rates for the 
 years 1830-31 to 1832-33, when another auction sale gave an income 
 for three years longer of Rs. 25,345 a year. From 1839 to 1844 the 
 farm was leased to Atmagir, a Mahant of Hardwar, for Rs. 35,000 
 a year, and at the conclusion of his lease the forests were taken 
 
 *To Commissioner, Kumaun, 15th September, 1896. 5 In appendix 
 
 A. 2. -will be found a list of the iatee authorised for collection by Mr. Shore. 
 
864 
 
 HIMALAYAN districts 
 
 under direct management by Mr. Yansittart and so remained until 
 1855, when a forest establishment was formed. A sal log which would 
 then fetch at Meerut between forty and fifty rupees and could be 
 carried on a four-bullock cart paid an export duty of only eight 
 annas. Five of these carts could carry out one hundred maunds of 
 good lime worth over Rs. 100, the duty on which was only twenty 
 annas. A four-bullock cart of catechu sold for Rs. 200 in the plains, 
 and a similar load of bambus (about 400) was worth eighteen rupees. 
 It can therefore be readily understood how eager speculators were 
 to enter into this profitable business, especially as no control what- 
 ever was exercised over their operations either as to the quantity of 
 timber cut down or the localities to be worked. Mr. Williams 
 writes : — “ Every one continued to hack and hew away at the trees 
 as he pleased, only paying certain dues to the farmer in the event 
 of the wood being exported. The latter made his own arrangements 
 to secure the collections at the different passes. Reckless waste was 
 inevitable and the fine sctl forests began to disappear rapidly. The 
 absence of conservancy was absolute. The district still abounded in 
 fine trees from one hundred to two hundred years old and upwards. 
 All these fell before the axe, and probably the rest would have gone 
 with them had the roads been a little better. The consequences of 
 this bad system are most perceptible in the western Dun whilst 
 in the eastern Dun large numbers of hhair trees were cut down to 
 burn lime for the Riirki workshops and the canal head at Maya- 
 pur. 
 
 With the introduction of a regular forest establishment in 1855 
 the revenue rose enormously, but unfortunately even then no sys- 
 tem of conservancy was attempted. The mutiny intervened and in 
 1860 the revenue began to fall, and in 1867-78 reached the low 
 figure of Rs. 23,332. In 1864, regular forest operations commenced 
 under Mr. F. Williams, C.S.I., Commissioner of the Meerut divi- 
 sion, within which the Dehra district is situate. His jurisdiction 
 extended over the whole of the Dun forests, the Siwaliks and a por- 
 tion of the Saharanpur district, besides certain forests of the outer 
 range leased from the Raja of Tirhi. The story of the sub-Siwalik 
 forests in the Saharanpur district has been noticed in the Memoir of 
 of that district. No attempt of any kind was made to preserve 
 the forests there ; on the other hand efforts were directed to induce 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 865' 
 
 squatters to take up the land and clear it for agricultural purposes, and 
 grants of so-called waste land were made to any one that could be 
 prevailed on to accept them. Up to 1839 the forests were left 
 entirely in the hands of the Rajput zamindars within whose boundaries 
 they were nominally included, but in that year some 142,420 acres 
 were demarcated as forest under the names Kheri, Kansrao, and 
 Pathari Nadi. Within these boundaries the grants were made and 
 the tracts unlet were handed over to the new Forest Department in 
 1864. Mr. Williams devoted his attention to a survey of the forests, 
 to making roads and securing and defining the rights of Govern- 
 ment and individuals. This was no easy task owing to the neglect 
 of former years which permitted the growth of prescriptive rights by 
 lapse of time. It was not until 1877 that the forests were pro- 
 perly demarcated, 1 and we shall follow the arrangements then 
 made in our brief description of the existing forest sub-divi- 
 sions. 
 
 Block 1, called the Siwalik range, is bounded on the west by the 
 Existing forest-di- Jumna and on all other sides by a forest line 
 visions. marked by pillars. It has an area of 449’12 
 
 square miles and contains sal, sain , and cl dr. The two former are 
 
 the prevailing trees, but are all young, and the last occurs along 
 the slopes of the hills and on the higher peaks. There is a consider- 
 able export of bambus and the range affords pasturage for numerous 
 herds of cattle. Block 2, known as Majhera, lies in the Rurki 
 parganah and consists of islands in the Ganges well stocked with sis a 
 and /chair. The area is only 6 ‘74 square miles. In the western 
 Dun we have block 3, known as Ram pur Mandi on the Jumna, 
 devoid of trees and only yielding a revenue from grazing dues and 
 grass. It has an area of only 1'54 square miles. East of this 
 comes block 4, comprising the sal forest of Ambari and having 
 an area of 6*4 square miles. The sal here is immature and is mixed 
 with sain, bci/cli, and inferior forest trees. 
 
 Block 5, or Cliandpur, has an area of 3*38 square miles and con- 
 tains sdl mixed with a few tun, sain, and bdkli trees. 
 
 1 The following references are to the notifications of Government demarcat- 
 ing and reserving the forest lands : — 73, dated i6th March, 1 877 (all the Dunl : 
 
 74, of same date (closes Thano and Balawala): 443. dated 24th September, 1877 
 (reserves the eastern Dun): 190, dated 19th July (reserves the Pathari forests): 
 184, dated 27th February, 1879 (reserves all the forests). 
 
 109 
 
866 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Block 6, or Dholkot, lias an area of 7‘94 square miles and consists 
 of sal with an admixture of sain , dliaura, and a few tun trees, but 
 none are mature. 
 
 Block 7 comprises the scd forest of Thano in the eastern Bun 
 and has an area of 9*96 square miles. There are no mature trees, 
 but there is a very promising crop of sal interspersed with bciJdi, 
 haldu, semla, sisu, and /chair. Balawala and Thano have been closed 
 since 1877. 
 
 Block 8, or Nagsidh, has an area of 25‘38 square miles consisting 
 of sal , sain , hdkli , and haldu. 
 
 Block 9, or Tirsal, is situate near Rikliikes and has an area of 
 28 - 22 square miles. All the mature trees have disappeared and only 
 young sal remains, intermixed with dhdman , haldu , sain, jdman, and 
 khair. 
 
 Block 12, or Saora Saroli, comprises a small patch of semla, hdkli 
 and dhdman near Raipur, with an area of only 1*82 square miles. 
 
 Block 13, or the Song forest, consists mainly of khair trees and 
 
 grass. 
 
 Block 14 comprises the Patri or Pathari forests in pargana 
 Jawalapur of the Saharanpur district and contains mainly dhdk and 
 grass appropriated tor the use of the Rurki workshops. Attempts 
 are, however, being made to introduce timber trees, with what suc- 
 cess is not yet apparent. 
 
 The Bhagirathi or as it is now called the Ganges division com- 
 Ganges (Bhagira- prises the forests on either bank of the river 
 
 of that name in the Raja of Tihri’s territories. 
 These were leased by Mr. Wilson from the Raja of Tihri in 1859, 
 and in 1864 the lease was transferred to Government for twenty 
 years. About one-third of the drainage area of the Bhagirathi and 
 its feeders is covered with forest and cultivation, of which the forest 
 occupies about one-tenth, or on a rough estimate 600 square miles. 1 
 Prom the village of Jliala, close to the point where the Bhagirathi 
 cut its way through the snowy range, to Gangotri, the valley lies 
 nearly due east and west for a length of about seventeen miles and 
 is filled with deodar. For a few miles above Gangotri deodar is 
 
 c“> 
 
 1 Sec report by Major Pearson, Sel. Bee., N. W. B. (2nd Scr.), II., 117, and III 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 867 
 
 also found, but stunted and of little value. The excelsa pine also 
 extends eight miles up the valley above Gangotri, and the birch is 
 found in patches to within half a mile of the glacier. The forest on 
 both sides of the river is divided into blocks, each of which has 
 been roughly surveyed, giving some 12,500 acres of deodar and a 
 fair average of second class, third class and fourth class trees. 
 Before taking over the forests they had been much neglected and 
 injured. “The ravages committed by the cultivators in the west- 
 ern portion of the valley, where thousands of dead trees, all killed 
 by fire, disfigured the hill-side in every direction, were only 
 equalled by the destruction committed by avalanches higher up 
 the valley.” The former practice has been stopped, but the latter 
 influence continues, and the damage wrought by the cyclone of 
 1880 will be visible for many years to come. 
 
 Great forests of Quercns dilatata occupy the ridges between Ma- 
 suri and the Bhagirathi, and noble forests of cl dr extend from 
 Sainsa, some twenty miles above Tihri, as far as Bhatwari, a dis- 
 tance of about fifty-five miles along the valley. The latter tree 
 clothes the mountains on both sides of the river and its affluents up 
 to 3-5,000 above their beds, filling every ravine and occupying 
 every plateau. Above Bhatwari the forests of box, yew, and 
 cypress commence and cover the hills on both sides of the river as 
 far as Jhala, a distance of about thirty miles, and from Jhala to 
 Gangotri, as we have seen, the deoddr is the principal forest tree. 
 On the right bank of the river above Jhala, where it has a southern 
 aspect, the forest is nearly pure deoddr , but on the left bank, with a 
 northern aspect, there is a large admixture of silver-fir, spruce, and 
 birch. Up to Darali the deoddr extends to about a thousand feet 
 above the river’s banks, but further north it rises to fully two thou- 
 sand feet, where it meets the vast forests of spruce and silver-fir 
 already mentioned. The valley of the Jadli-ganga is also full of 
 deoddr, and towards its head the valuable pencil-cedar occurs in 
 appreciable quantities. As a rule the growth of the deoddr, except 
 in very favourable localities, is much slower here than in the com- 
 paratively warmer valleys of Jaunsar. From an examination of 
 the stumps of many trees it was found that a diameter of 16 inches 
 was attained in 64 years, of 24 inches in 105 years, and of 30 
 inches in 230 years ; the nearer the northern limit, the slower the 
 
HIMA'LAYAN districts 
 
 ■868 
 
 growth. To recapitulate, the forests in the lower parts consist 
 chiefly of pine. Higher up we have the yew, box, birch, three 
 species of oak, two of juniper, cypress, silver-fir, spruce, deodar , and 
 ■excelsa pine, and in small quantities the sycamore, horse-chestnut, 
 and walnut. Only those useful timbers found in the more access- 
 ible valleys bordering on the Ganges below Deoprayag and between 
 the Hiunalgadh and the Dun have hitherto been exported, and the 
 revenue collected has chiefly been from deoddr sleepers and small 
 logs for building purposes and bambus. 
 
 The lease from the Raja of Tihri includes the forests in the 
 remaining portion of his territories about the heads of the Tons and 
 Jumna rivers . 1 These lie to the south and west of the Bhagirathi 
 
 Forests at the head of sub-division and may be noticed in order 
 the Jumna and Tons. from the Bhagirathi westwards. There are 
 
 the remains of a considerable forest of deoddr above Barahat near 
 Saida and Uparikot in the Bhagirathi valley, and above it a splen- 
 did strip of moru oak (Q. dilatata). Crossing the water-parting into 
 the J umna valley, there is a small deoddr forest above Shalna and 
 small patches of the same tree about the Bonk and Nagtiba peaks, 
 whence there is water carriage by the Jumna to the Dun. Cross- 
 ing the Jumna to the Kedar-kanta ridge which separates the Jumna 
 from the Tons, there are the remains of what was once a very fine 
 deoddr forest in the valley of the Banal, a tributary of the Jumna 
 that joins it just above Barkot. There are also small patches of 
 deoddr in the Ramasera valley to the south of the Banal, but of no 
 great value. The chief glory of the Jumna is, however, the 
 immense fo ests of the long-leaved pine (chir) that line its banks and 
 in which there are numbers of magnificent trees fit for any purpose. 
 Unfortunately, sleepers of pine are not esteemed by railway con- 
 tractors, being liable to dry-rot and requiring frequent renewal, and 
 no means for effectually preserving them have yet been discovered. 
 The left bank of the Tons is also covered with immense forests of 
 cMr. On the upper part of this river near Datmer, the cMl ( P.excelsci ) 
 takes the place of the chir (P. longifolia ) . When the range that sepa- 
 rates the Tons from the Pabar is crossed, we come again into a 
 tract of which the characteristic forest tree is deoddr. The deoddr 
 commences on the north of the Tons near Gangor,and is scattered all 
 i Sel. Kec., N.-W. P. ; III. (2nd Ser.,) 129. 
 
or THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 869 
 
 over the ridge that separates the Tons proper from the Panch-ganga 
 river which joins the Tons opposite Shankuri. The hills here are 
 rocky and precipitous, and the deodar is chiefly confined to the small 
 ravines and streams that run down from them to the river. The 
 more important forest lies between Gangor and Datmer and on the 
 further side of the ridge above Lyor and opposite Kahsol and Raksha. 
 
 Following the course of the Tons southwards, we find a consider- 
 able amount of deodar on the spur that comes, down to the river a 
 little above the village of Koarbo, also in the valley of the stream 
 next to it on the west. The Rupin joins the Tons on its right 
 bank at Naintwari, and on both its own banks and on those of its 
 feeders are large and valuable forests, the lower part of which con- 
 sists of deodar and the upper part of excelsa pine and silver fir. 
 The valley of the next tributary of the Tons on its right bank also 
 contains a very large proportion of deodar forest interspersed in 
 places with silver fir, spruce, and oak. If we take the country from 
 the junction of the Rupin and the Tons as far as the junction of 
 the Tons and the Pabar, some of the finest deodar forests in the hills 
 may be met with; and here the Forest Department found a valuable 
 addition to their resources for meeting the demands for sleepers. 
 In 1869, the forests of the upper Tons were estimated to contain 
 50,000 deodar trees fit for felling and to be able to supply a lakh 
 of sleepers per annum, but no such great demand has yet been 
 made on their resources. It is the Jaunsar-Bawar and Bhagirathi 
 divisions that have had to provide the largest number of sleepers in 
 recent years. In the year 1879, the forests on the upper Tons with 
 those in khats Deogai’h and Bawar of Jaunsar-Bawar were formed 
 into a new division known as the Tons division. 
 
 The forests of the Jaunsar division now comprise the whole of 
 Jaunsar-Bawar except khats Deogarh and Bawar to the north of 
 the Dharmigadh and Banal, Shalna and Jaunpur in Tihri. They 
 
 had little or no practical value in the earlier 
 days of British rule, owing to their distance 
 from the plains. With the denudation of the Dun, however, their 
 real value became known, and some rough attempts at management 
 were undertaken. Up to the year 1868, the Commissioner of the 
 Meerut division was ex officio Conservator of the Jaunsar-Bawar 
 forests, and when the latter came into the hands of the Forest 
 
 Jaunsar-Bawar. 
 
870 
 
 IITMA'LAVAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Department, everything connected with conservancy had to he taken 
 in hand. Here, as in the eastern hills, the people, though nominally 
 in possession of immense tracts of forestland, were never considered 
 proprietors, but occupiers entitled to the usufruct and whose rights 
 were sufficient to prevent people from other Mints— as the local sub- 
 divisions of the district are here called — from entering upon or using 
 the nominal waste in their possession. They could pasture their 
 cattle in every part of this nominal area and cut down trees for 
 fuel or for building or other agricultural purposes, but could not 
 alienate these rights to others. The Dun forests were being worked 
 out whilst the demand for sleepers for the railways was increasing 
 every year, so that it became necessary for the authorities to examine 
 closely their timber resources, so as to meet the wants of both the 
 Government and private persons, present and prospective. It had 
 been shown that permission to graze cattle in a forest was absolute- 
 ly incompatible with forest conservancy. Provision had also to be 
 made for stopping the destructive fires that, hitherto, regularly 
 swept away every year the young trees that a suitable soil and 
 climate had raised to fill up the gaps caused by felling. The people 
 were accustomed to obtain early grass in the hot weather by setting 
 on fire the old grass, provided rain fell at the right time. This is 
 the chief reason given for their adherence to this practice, but it has 
 been shown that the rank crop of grass that occurs after firing is 
 much coarser and less nutritious than if nature had been allowed 
 to deal with the reproduction of the plant in its own way. Each 
 one, too, imagined that he had a prescriptive right to hack and hew 
 when and where he desired. The weak establishment hitherto kept 
 up was insufficient to control the felling of timber, and it was not 
 uncommon for a Jaunsari, who wanted one tree to repair his home- 
 stead, to cut down eight or ten and sell the surplus. To remedy 
 these evils, the forests had to be demarcated, then grazing and the 
 felling of timber in unauthorised places had to be restricted, and, 
 again, fire conservancy had to be introduced. To prevent unlawful 
 felling in the demarcated tracts an officer was usually deputed to 
 inspect the work before a pass was given to fell trees. The people 
 objected to this, as it gave them trouble, caused delay, and cut off 
 one source of their irregular gains ; so that in a short time a great 
 cry was raised against the demarcation of the waste lands as 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 871 
 
 Government property. As already noticed, at the former settlement, 
 the right of each khat in the lands within its own boundary was 
 declared absolute as against all , other khcits; the use of the wood 
 and jungle products was allowed to them, hut it was held that they 
 had no right as against Government — i. e ., Government could at 
 any time step in and appropriate any portion required for its own 
 use or for settlement with others, so long as sufficient lands were 
 left for grazing purposes to each village. Since that time circum- 
 stances have greatly changed and almost every considerable tract 
 containing forest useful for timber or fuel has been appropriated 
 and marked off as first or second class forest. A large area has 
 been taken possession of at Chakrata, sufficient for all the require- 
 ments, present and prospective, of the cantonment there. What 
 remains is good for grazing or for grass and jungle produce or 
 possibly for some extension of cultivation. It is good for little 
 else, and there is no prospect of its being turned to any other 
 account. There is probably no portion of this land that can be 
 used either for tea cultivation or for any kind of plantation. 
 Under these circumstances the question arose whether the restric- 
 tion as to proprietary right being acknowledged in anything more 
 than the cultivated and occupied spols should be maintained. Sir 
 W. Muir resolved 1 that only such waste lands in excess of the 
 requirements of a khat should be marked off* as “ Government 
 waste ” that were in excess of one thousand acres. That within 
 the khat proprietary right should be exercised over all third-class 
 forest land to such extent as each khat might require, with the pro- 
 vision that had always existed that there should be no power to 
 alienate the lands. The restrictions as to grazing and collecting 
 firewood were confined to first-class reseved forests. Such con- 
 cessions as were then granted and such restrictions as were then 
 enforced were entered in the wdjih-ul-arz or 1 record-of-rights’ of 
 each village, so as to prevent any disputes in future. 
 
 The Jaunsar division is entirely surrounded by Native States, 
 except on its southern boundary, where it adjoins the Debra Dun. 
 The main physical feature is the great central ridge that forms the 
 water-parting between the Jumna and the Tons. Commencing at 
 Haripur-Bias near Ivalsi, it runs west of Chakrata to Deoban, and 
 1 G. 0. No. 30A., Revenue Department, dated 4th January, 1873. 
 
872 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 then in a north-easterly direction to the Karamba peak. It next 
 turns round the head-waters of the Dharagadh and proceeds east- 
 wards into Tihri. It is along this ridge and its numerous spurs 
 that the chief forests are found. The rocks are principally lime- 
 stones, shales and slates. The first-class forests within this tract 
 measure 8,795 acres, and the second-class forests cover 88,282 acres. 
 The first-class forests are entirely within the control of the Forest 
 Department with the exception of some 575 acres, within which 
 grazing rights are permitted. Of the. second-class forests some 
 13,917 acres are temporarily closed and are preserved from fire to 
 allow of reproduction. The division forms a section of the outer 
 Himalaya and the forest vegetation varies accordingly. At Kalsi 
 on the south we have such trees as sal, bakli, dhaora, kusam, haldu , 
 khuir, and sisu, some of which run a long way up in the hot and 
 confined valleys of the Tons and Jumna to an elevation of nearly 
 4,000 feet. We have next the grey oak, rhododendron, and Andro- 
 meda between 5,000 and 7,500 feet. At the lower limit we have 
 the chir pine and at the upper the blue-pine and the deodar. Above 
 these, 7,500-10,000 feet, come the deodar, moru and karshu oaks, 
 four species of maple, horse-chestnut, walnut, cypress, spruce and 
 silver fir, yew and several species of Pyrns and the willow. Of all 
 these, the deodar is the most valuable, and it is now found in the 
 Lohkandi and Kotikanasar forests in khat Misan : the Konain 
 forest in khat Lakhan ; the Tutwa, Maura and Lakhan forests on 
 the Dharagadh ; the Chijal or Kathiyan forest in khat Phanyar, and 
 the Ivoti forest in Bawar. Of these the Lakhan forest is the finest, 
 but it is doubtful whether the Dharagadh can be utilized for the 
 transport of timber. The revenue and exports of timber will be 
 found in the appendix. 
 
 The forests of the Upper Himalaya in Kumaun and British 
 
 Garhwal contain very little deodar and are 
 Forests of the Upper „ 7 , 
 
 Himalaya in British ter- composed principally of c/nr pine, spruce, 
 
 rltory - silver-fir, oaks, horse-chestnut, and other 
 
 trees of small economical value, and consequently, except those 
 
 on the upper feeders of the Alaknanda, 1 have hitherto been little 
 
 1 See Webber’s forest survey of Kumaun and Garhwal, 1864-65, which gives 
 colored maps ou the scale of one mile to an inch in sheets of twelve inches 
 square, accompanied by tabular statements showing the acreage and number and 
 class of trees in each block. 
 
OP TH® NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES*- 
 
 STB 
 
 worked. Front these fatter a large number of chir sleepers lias 
 
 been supplied to the East Indian Railway. There are several fine 
 
 forests of Abies Smithiana, A. Webbiana and Pinus excelsa along the 
 
 left bank of the Alaknanda from Joshimath to Pipalkoti, but they 
 
 occupy the tops of the ridges at some dis- 
 Northern Garhwal. . ^ 
 
 tance from 1 the river; I lie long-leaved pine 
 
 covers the slopes of the Nagoli valley opposite Nandprayag, the 
 Nagpur hills opposite Chhatwapipal, and the valley up to Pokliri. 
 The forests on the upper part of the Mandakini and in the valley of 
 the Mad mail esh war rivers are too distant to be of economical value. 
 Similarly, the fine clrir on the slopes of Tungnath are too far from 
 the river to bear the expense of export, though, perhaps, the box- 
 wood, of which there are some good examples, may prove- of use. 
 The cypress and excelsa forest on the Bishuuganga near Badrinath 
 is also too far removed from the means of carriage to be suitable 
 for working. The pine forests near Tapuban on the Dhauli a^e the 
 most extensive in Garhwal. They stretch in one unbroken olock 
 from the western spurs of the Pilkhunta range to above Rindi, a 
 distance of sixteen miles with a breadth of from one to three miles. 
 All this is a mixed forest of Abies Webbiana , A. Smithiana , P. ex- 
 celsa, cypress and a few deodar , with box, yew, and Quercus semecar- 
 pifolia. The sycamore (Acer pictum, Thunb.), from which the 
 Tibetan bowls known as lahauri-doba are made, is found' in the 
 valley of the Rluiganga with horse-chestnut ( yPJsculus indica) 
 and silver fir. Higher up the Dhauli as far as Malari similar 
 forests occur, and here also' is the only natural deodar forest in 
 British Garhwal, hut unfortunately so placed as to be useless for 
 export. 
 
 In Southern Garhwal, there are chir forests on the Nayar at 
 
 Kainur, Sungarkhal, and Juniyagarh, and on 
 the Dudukatoli range, great forests of silver 
 fir and spruce cover all the summits up to 8,000' feet. The western 
 slopes of the same and adjoining ranges are clothed with dense 
 forests of oak and other trees of some value to the extent of about 
 fifty square miles, of which the silver fir occupies eleven square 
 miles. Below Kainur, the Nayar might be used for transporting 
 small timber during the floods, but the Chhiphalghati river is too 
 shallow for this purpose and too much obstructed by boulders, 
 
 110 
 
 Southern Garhwal. 
 
874 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 though fine cMr trees are to he found on both its banks and at 
 Saimkhet and Tal. The Dhanpur hills have been cleared of jungle 
 for the mineral works. The eastern slopes of the Dudukatoli range 
 are covered with oaks and some seven square miles of silver fir and 
 they drain down to the Ramganga. A fine cMr forest nearly fifty 
 square miles in extent occupies the valleys leading to the Ram- 
 ganga between Lohba and Ganai, and the pine-clad slopes of Badhan- 
 garh and Bhatkot have a similar direction. The Ramganga 
 appears to be large enough for floating down sleepers during the 
 time of flood, and these forests may prove a useful reserve hereafter. 
 All the hills below Ganai are covered with stunted and twisted 
 clur. Extensive cMr forests of good quality exist at Ranikhet and 
 Syuni, and have already been noticed: also along the Gagar range 
 and in the Malwa Tal, Ramgarh, Saimkhet, and Khairna valleys, 
 and at Badhandhura on the Kosi. The Kosi appears to be unfit 
 for rafting except in the floods, when small timber might be sent 
 down it to Ramnagar. 
 
 The pine forests on the Pindar from Betuwa to Ivulsari adjoin 
 
 „ the river where it is 3-600 feet wide. From 
 
 North-eastern Garhwal. 
 
 May to October, the floods are incessant and 
 sufficient to float the largest timber to the Alaknanda at Karn- 
 prayag, and thence to the Ganges at Hardwar. There are no rocks, 
 rapids or obstructions the whole way, and the fall is about fifty feet 
 to the mile. The cost of felling is about two annas per tree, and 
 the cost of carrying and shooting down large trunks would be 
 from two to five rupees each according to the distance or, if pre- 
 viously cut into sleepers, about one anna per sleeper per mile of 
 land carriage. Sawing can easily be arranged for by imported 
 labour. For three or four miles above its junction with the Pindar, 
 the Kailganga might be used for sending down small scantlings of 
 the pine which grows abundantly along its banks, but the cypress 
 appears to be too far up to admit of working. The Nandakini, for the 
 first fifteen miles from its junction with the Alaknanda, possesses 
 sufficient volume in times of flood for the transport of sleepers from 
 the magnificent forests along its banks. The extent and variety of 
 the pines here are nowhere surpassed. They grow over the entire 
 valley, six different species being indigenous and a diameter of five 
 feet is a usual size. The spruce forest above Kanali is the most 
 
875 
 
 OE THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 important, but cypress and deodar also occur with yew, hazel, box, 
 and all the other pines except Abies dumosa . 
 
 The upper valleys of the Sarju and its tributaries contain over 
 
 & hundred square miles of fine pine forest. 
 
 Northern Kumaun. 
 
 About and above Kapkot there is nothing but 
 pine ; much of it, however, is practically inaccessible, and as the 
 Sarju is not a snow-fed stream, rafting can only take place in time 
 of occasional floods in the rains. The valley of the eastern Ramganga 
 down to its junction with the Sarju has a considerable extent of 
 cMr and silver-fir forest along its banks, but the river itself presents 
 some obstacles to rafting, Sdl also occurs in the valleys of the 
 Sarju and Ramganga, but of little value as timber. There is a con- 
 siderable amount of pine forest near enough to the Kali, and about 
 Askot and Balwakot some very fine timber. Indeed, almost all the 
 valleys leading down to the Kali between Askot and Barmdeo con- 
 tain an abundance of chir of very fair quality. The Grori has a 
 volume iu time of flood nearly equal to the Pindar, and there is no 
 obstacle in its course from the pine districts to the Kali. The chir 
 forest along its banks, especially near Mastoli, are inferior to none 
 in quality or quantity. The banks also are well-adapted to shooting 
 down logs into the river, and labor is cheap and abundant. A 
 mixed forest of silver fir and A. dumosa with box occurs on Hum 
 Dli lira, but apparently too high up to be available for timber. The 
 forests around Chipula abound with horse chestnut, sycamore, birch, 
 yew, poplar, and wild fruits which grow up to 11,000 feet, above 
 which is bare grass and rocks covered with snow till June. These 
 are all too remote from the river to be available for timber for 
 export. In the upper valley of the Kali there are numbers of chir 
 along the precipices close to the river, scattered patches of the 
 hemlock-spruce {A. dumosa) intermixed with the excelsa pine and 
 considerable blocks of the silver fir, here called ivtiman, which occurs 
 also in the Darina valley, too far from the river for export. Box is 
 found in the Gori valley near Milam, and in the Byans patti und er 
 the name papri. The grain of the wood appears to be coarser than 
 that of the European species. The yew is as good as the European 
 species for turnery and all purposes. The holly is close and even 
 grained, and fit for turnery, and the species of birch known as piiya- 
 utis yields a wood for doors and panels that bears a very high 
 
876 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 polish and is one of the best that we have. Besides these, maple, 
 hazel, birch, wild apples, wild cherries and pears abound, all of which 
 have their value as timber for turnery and other purposes. It can - 
 not be denied that, as in the case of mines, much of the valuable 
 timber trees of the Inner Himalaya are in such a position as to 
 render them practically useless for export ; but should the necessity 
 arise, some mechanical contrivance will doubtless be invented for the 
 better and more easy removal of the logs to a stream that can carry 
 them to the plains. The shoots that have been in use in Jaunsar 
 for some years have materially assisted manual labour, and when 
 advisable, the same princi pie can be applied to the removal of valu- 
 able timber from the fores ts of British Garhwal and Kumaun. 
 
 We have now briefly sketched tbe character and position of each 
 
 of the great State forests, and shall proceed 
 
 Forest Department. 
 
 to describe the system under which they are 
 managed. The expenditure under ‘ fores is’ is divided broadly into 
 that incurred on account of 4 conservancy’ and that for 1 establishment/ 
 The establishment protects the forests from trespassers, prevents 
 unauthorised felling of timber, cuts down creepers and noxious 
 undergrowth, marks trees for felling, repairs the fire lines, and 
 superintends felling operations, both those undertaken on behalf of 
 Government and those carried on by private individuals. The 
 forest officer himself decides when felling operations may be under- 
 taken, the principle observed being to work out distinct blocks as 
 well for the sake of more easy supervision as to enable the depart- 
 ment to open or close distinct areas at the same time. It is also 
 the duty of the forest officer to superintend the felling, sawing, collect- 
 ing and carriage to the depot of the timber collected for Govern- 
 ment ; the counting, stacking, and classification of the logs in the 
 depot and the settlement of the accounts of contractors ; the repair 
 of old roads and the construction of new ones. The forest officer 
 has charge of the collection of tolls at the forest stations. These 
 are situate along the main lines of forest road, and in each there is a 
 clerk and several peons. On the arrival of produce of any kind 
 liable to toll, the clerk examines it, and the quantity and the duty 
 received are entered in a book arranged in the form of a receipt 
 and counterfoil. The clerk hands the receipt over to the exporter, 
 and forwards a copy of the counterfoil to the head-office of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 877 
 
 forest-division. The exporter proceeds with his load until he is 
 stopped at a second line of posts established where the forest roads 
 converge on the main public roads. Here he gives up his pass, and 
 the goods are again checked and any deficient duty is collected. 
 These passes are also sent to the head-office and compared with the 
 copies of the counterfoils previously forwarded by the clerks in 
 charge of the first line of posts. Deputy overseers inspect each 
 post, and rangers patrol the intermediate spaces to prevent smug- 
 gling ; and in addition the smallness of the tax makes it hardly 
 worth the trouble and risk necessary to successfully evade the pay- 
 ment on petty ventures. It is only when the exporter bribes the 
 whole establishment and removes valuable timber wholesale that any 
 profitable result can be expected, and this may be considered a very 
 remote contingency. The revenue collected is forwarded day by 
 day from post to post to the nearest treasury, and the official in 
 charge reports the amount received from each post to the head- 
 office of the division, and this is again compared with the total 
 entered in the passes and counterfoils. 
 
 Timber marts. 
 
 The principal timber depots in the Kumaun forest-division are 
 
 those at Ramnagar and Moradabad, and the 
 markets for minor forest produce are at 
 Chorgaliya, Haldwani, Kaladhungi, Chilkiya, and Ramnagar. The 
 Nairn Tal forest-division finds its market in the settlement itself. 
 It has a special local conse rvancy staff, who superintend the felling 
 of trees for timber, fuel and charcoal, the dues on which are col- 
 lected according to a special table of rates. The Ranikhet forest- 
 division is purely conservative and supplies only the local demand 
 in the Ranikhet settlement. Khohdwara or Kotdwara, as it is 
 more commonly called, is the great mart for the exchange of minor 
 forest produce in Garhwal, and, for the sale of timber, depots have 
 been established in this division, both on the Ramganga and on the 
 Ganges. Hardwar on the Ganges and Rajghat on the Jumna are 
 the two great timber depots for the whole Himalayan tract between 
 the Ganges and the Tons, including the Dehra Dun, Jaunsar, and 
 Bhagirathi forest- divisions. A considerable amount of timber and 
 minor forest produce, however, finds a way to the plains through 
 the passes in the Siwaliks to Saharanpur, Dehli, and Meerut. 
 Good roads connect all these marts with the different lines of 
 

 — 
 
 878 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 railway, and with the extension of the existing line from Bareilly to 
 Pilibhit and Naim Tal, the communication, so far as Kumaun is 
 concerned, will be complete and the value of the minor forest pro- 
 duce will be enhanced considerably. In appendix A. will be found 
 a table showing the rates now levied on timber of all kinds and 
 minor forest produce in the Kumaun forest-division. It has not 
 been considered necessary to give these tables for every forest-divi- 
 sion, though they vary slightly in details in each tract. Enough has 
 been given to furnish a fairly accurate idea of the extent and character 
 of the State impost on forest produce. Perhaps the most curious fact 
 elicited is the number and variety of the articles coming under the 
 
 head ‘minor forest produce.’ Here we have the drugs, tans, dyes, 4 
 
 gums, reeds, fibres and grasses of the preceding pages, with the toll 
 that is levied on them by Government, and the average annual 
 export from the forest-division based on the returns of four years. 
 
 It has been found impracticable to give a correct selling price for 
 these articles : so much depends upon the locality and circumstances. 
 
 The greater part is collected and exported by the poorer classes who 
 exchange their goods for grain or clothes and earn but a scanty 
 subsistence. Still confining our remarks to the Kumaun forest- 
 division, some idea of the extent of the felling operations will be 
 gathered from the fact that, between 1859-60 and 1879-80, the tim- 
 ber cut and and sold by Government agency amounted in this divi- 
 sion alone to 3,040,241 cubic feet and the quantity cut and exported 
 by private agency amounted to 2,620,607 cubic feet between 1865- 
 66 and 1879-80. The greater portion of this timber was sal of good 
 quality, though of late years second-class timber has come into 
 considerable repute. In addition to this, great quantities of dry 
 timber were exported by merchants at lower rates, and in the 
 Kumaun Bhabar, many thousand acres of sal, haldu, dhami, and 
 other trees were cut down and exported to make room for cultiva- 
 tion. No detailed account of the quantity can be given as the duty 
 was usually levied by cart or bullock load. If we remember that 
 similar operations are going on in each of the other forest-divisions 
 bordering on the plains, some, idea may be formed of the extensive 
 nature of the forest operations. In Jaunsar and the Bhagirathi valley 
 the principal export is timber for railway sleepers cut and exported 
 by Government agency. Appendix A. gives the revenue and 
 
 ■ i 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 879 
 
 expenditure of all forests for as far back as the records appear 
 accurate enough for reproduction. 
 
 Rheea. 
 
 Boehm eria nivea, Hook, et Arn . ; Urtica nivea, Linn. ; U. tena- 
 cissima, Roxb. — China grass, rhea, rheea, ramie (Malay). Brandis, 
 402. 
 
 The rheea is indigenous in China, Japan, the Phillipine Islands, 
 Java, Sumatra, the Indian Archipelago, Siam, Burma, Singapur, 
 Penang, Asam, and Rangpur and Dinajpur in Eastern Bengal. It 
 is cultivated in China, Japan, and the Indian Archipelago, where it 
 is stated to like a moist soil, and flourishes best in alluvial deposits 
 along the banks of rivers and generally in the fertile flats such as 
 are found in its native haunts in China and Sumatra. The cultiva- 
 tion of the rheea in these provinces dates from the year 1863, and 
 in 1865 there were several small plantations in the Dehra Dun. 
 The Government plantations were begun in 1867 by devoting a 
 small portion of the Chandwala garden in the Dun to the propaga- 
 tion of the plant for distribution to those who desired to embark in 
 its cultivation. In 1870, the regular cycle of inquiries as to the 
 value of the economic products of India brought rheea prominently 
 to notice, and orders were issued for the extension of the existiuo- 
 Government plantations both in the Dtin and at Saharanpur. In 
 1871, a prize of £5,000 was offered to the inventor of the best 
 machine or process for the preparation of the fibre, and in the same 
 year, instructions were issued for the supply of stems for a trial 
 between competitors for the prize and for distribution for prelimi- 
 nary experiments to all who were likely to make use of them both 
 in this country and in England. During the year 1871-72, the area 
 under rheea in the Dun and at Saharanpur exceeded 37 acres, and 
 upwards of nine tons of stems were forwarded to England for the 
 use of intending competitors. 
 
 First competition. 
 
 The first trial for the prize took place at Saharanpur in August, 
 
 1872, when a machine, the property of Mr. 
 J. Greig of Edinburgh, was entered for com- 
 petition. The following extract from the official report of the trial 
 will show what degree of success was obtained : — 
 
 “ The machine, as a piece of mechanism, is good ; it is well-made and well-pro- 
 portioned, the relative strength of the various parts having been well considered. 
 
880 
 
 HIMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 It is calculated to wear well, and deserves commendation so far as being a good 
 substantial piece of work. The machine, however, as must always be the case 
 with machines of this kind, i. e., contrived to do a work of which there is little 
 or no experience available and without means of obtaining the natural material to 
 work upon, is far from matured. Few, if any, of such machines are ever con- 
 structed at once able to do the work for which they are intended ; most are generally 
 perfected by degrees through numerous partial failures ; experience gained in the 
 process of working alone enabling many defects to be seen and remedied and a 
 perfect machine to be produced, and such appears to be the case with this mill ; 
 for, independent of whether it is or is not the best description of machine for 
 preparing the fibre, it is, on the one hand, in many points very deficient in the 
 work the exhibitor sets it forward to perform, while, on the other hand, it is 
 certain that it can be improved in much that is faulty.” 
 
 Mr. Greig was awarded £1,500 for his machine, in considera- 
 tion of the skill, labour, and expense incurred in its construction, 
 and in recognition of its being a real attempt to meet the wants of 
 Government. 
 
 In 1873-74 and 1874-75, the area under rhea was maintained at 
 
 37 acres, and in 1875-76 further instructions 
 
 Second competition. . . ,. . _ 
 
 were received to continue the supply ot 
 
 stems for experimental purposes. In August, 1877, the offer of a 
 
 prize of £5,000 was renewed, and the following specification of the 
 
 machine required was published for general information in India, 
 
 Europe, and America : — 
 
 “What is required is a machine or process capable of producing, by animal, 
 water, or steam power, a ton of dressed fibre of a quality which shall average in 
 value not less than £45 per ton in the English market, at a total cost, including all 
 processes of preparation and all needful allowance for wear and tear, of not more 
 than £15 per ton, laid down at any port of shipment in India, and £30 in England, 
 after payment of all the charges usual in trade before goods reach the hands of the 
 manufacturer. The processes of preparation are to be understood to include all the 
 operations required subsequent to the cutting of the stems from the plants in the 
 field, until the fibre is in a condition fit to be packed for conveyance to the 
 market. The machinery employed must be simple, strong, durable, and inexpen- 
 sive, and should be suited for erection in the plantations where the rhea is grown. 
 It must be adapted for treatment of the fresh stems as cut from the plant. The 
 treatment of dried stems offers certain difficulties, and the fibre prepared from 
 them must, moreover, always be much more costly than the fibre produced from 
 green stems. Except during the hot, dry, weather preceding the rains in Upper 
 India (where rhea grows best), it is very difficult so to dry the stems that no fer- 
 mentation or mildew shall occur. But during this season the stems are compara- 
 tively short and the crop poor and stunted, unless it is artificially irrigated, and 
 such greatly increases the cost of cultivation. In the rainy season the plant is in 
 fine condition, but at this season it is almost impossible to dry the stems in quantit 
 
OF THE NORTH-V/E STERN PROVINCES. 
 
 881 
 
 without injuring the fibre, unless recourse is had to artificial means of desicca- 
 tion, which greatly increase the cost of the material. It is therefore obvious that 
 the attention of inventors should be given to the discovery of a process for the 
 treatment of the green stems.” 
 
 The trials commenced in September, 1879, at Saharanpur, and 
 ^ ^ ten competitors entered machines of differ- 
 
 ent kinds, of which three were withdrawn. 
 The following is an abstract of the results : — - 
 
 Competitor. 
 
 Green stems 
 worked up. 
 
 Total 
 
 fibre 
 
 obtain- 
 
 ed. 
 
 Percent- 
 age of 
 fibre. 
 
 Cost per ton. 
 
 
 Tons, qrs 
 
 cwt. 
 
 fi). 
 
 m. 
 
 
 Es. 
 
 a. 
 
 p. 
 
 M. Z. P. Vander Ploeg 
 
 1 14 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 H 8 i 
 
 311 
 
 337 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 Dr. Collyer 
 
 1 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 147 
 
 660 
 
 112 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 Paris machine ... 
 
 
 
 
 104 
 
 . . • 
 
 483 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 M. Nagona 
 
 3 7 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 337k 
 
 4-44 
 
 38 
 
 14 
 
 4 
 
 Mr. Cameron ... 
 
 1 2 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 9 4 
 
 3-61 
 
 270 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 Mr. Aruery 
 
 1 10 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 
 3-21 
 
 418 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 Mr. Blechynden 
 
 0 11 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 685 
 
 4-68 
 
 251 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 The judging committee consider that the limit of £15 per ton 
 for the cost of preparation and laying down the fibre at a port of 
 shipment in India would render competition practically impossible 
 from a place so distant from the sea-board as Saharanpur. Fur- 
 ther, that the plant grown at Saharanpur is not calculated to give 
 such good results as that grown in more suitable localities, but that, 
 on the whole, the experiments made during the trials, though not 
 decisive, have gone far towards establishing the conditions under 
 which a fair verdict can be awarded and have advanced an impor- 
 tant step in the progress made towards the solution of the problem. 
 The awards have not yet been published, as they depended on the 
 valuation of the fibre in the English market. The advance made 
 in this competition shows that the invention of a successful machine 
 is merely a question of time and justifies the resolution of Govern- 
 ment to continue the supply of rheea stems for experimental purposes. 
 
 The Dutch botanist Blume, in his report on the cultivation 
 
 of rheea in Java and Sumatra, states that 
 
 Cultivation and prospects. . . , . . ... 
 
 “ the plant thrives best in shade, m a moist 
 and fertile soil : conditions such as are usually found in abandoned 
 
 111 
 
882 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 coffee plantations. * * The plant thrives best in the hilly parts of 
 the country in which rain is frequent. In the plains it would 
 require irrigation.” The conditions under which the plant flourishes 
 in the countries best adapted to its growth are a moist tropical 
 atmosphere, a shady situation and a low-lying alluvial soil. These 
 conditions do not exist in Saharanpur. In the cold season, so soon 
 as the temperature falls to about 40°F., the whole crop, leaves and 
 steins, become black and fall to the ground. The roots then 
 remain dormant until January, when the fields become green again 
 with the young shoots. As the weather becomes warmer, the 
 plants require irrigation at regular intervals of time, and weeds must 
 be removed until the plants are strong enough to keep them down. 
 The stems also are very short, owing to the effect of the hot dry 
 winds which prevail in these provinces, and they ripen irregularly 
 from the same cause, the tops being often green and soft, whilst the 
 lower portions are ripe and hard. Until the meeting of the com- 
 petitors in 1879 it was not known how inferior the Saharanpur 
 stems were when compared with those raised in more suitable cli- 
 mates. During this trial, stems grown in Dehra and Calcutta were 
 found to give better results than the local produce, presumably 
 owing to their having been raised in a moister climate. A healthy 
 stem is described as an evenly shaped flexible wand of a length 
 varying from 5-7 feet with the same colour throughout and ripening 
 in all parts simultaneously. The Saharanpur stem was generally 
 an irregularly shaped stick, 3-5 feet high, of uneven growth, 
 with irregular distances between the joints. Many of the stems 
 were stunted and imperfectly nourished and unequally ripened. 
 The conclusion arrived at by the committee was that either the cul- 
 tivation was insufficient or the climate is unsuitable. Experiments 
 are now being made to ascertain whether trenching and heavy 
 manuring will correct the defects observed, but it is believed that, 
 as with most plants, climate is the first consideration, and therefore 
 rheea cultivation in the drier parts of these provinces can never be 
 more than partially successful. There is no difficulty in raising 
 the plant from seed or in propagating it by cuttings. Dr. Jameson 
 has estimated that an acre will yield four crops in the year, aggre- 
 gating ten tons of green stems. Taking the yield of fibre at one- 
 twentieth of the green stem, the return of marketable fibre per acre 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 883 
 
 will be half a ton. The value of rheeasfibre in the English market 
 at present is from £40 to £60 per ton, according to quality, a price 
 that should always leave a fair margin of profit to the cultivator of 
 the plant and the preparer of the fibre. 
 
 CINCHONA. 
 
 For several consecutive years previous to 1872, experiments 
 were undertaken in the valleys and hills of these provinces for the 
 cultivation of the cinchona plant. It was tried at Chandwala and 
 other localities in the Dehra Dun at 2,500 feet, at Chhajauri in 
 Garhwal at an altitude of 4,500 feet, and at Mussooree at an altitude 
 of 6,500 feet. In Kumaun, experiments were made in the Bhabar 
 at 2,000 feet, at Hawalbagh at 4,500 feet, at Ayar-Toli and Rani- 
 khet at 6,000 feet, and at Arkalli at 6-7,000 feet. In all these 
 places, except the Bhabar, the plants progressed during the hot 
 weather and rains. It was considered necessary to protect the 
 young trees from the frost during the cold weather, and this was 
 done for three years and until many of the plants had attained a 
 height of 4-6 feet. These, with many others ranging 2-3 feet, 
 were then left uncovered during the cold weather, with the result 
 that every one of them perished in all the localities mentioned. 
 Similar attempts proved unsuccessful in the Kangra Valley and 
 Panjab Himalaya. In Kangra, where many of the plants had reach- 
 ed 4-5 feet in height, a single winter’s frost was found enough to 
 destroy them, and at Ranikhet, plants of C. succirubra , 4-5 feet in 
 height, were cut down by the frost, though partially protected. Dr. 
 Jameson closes his account 1 of these operations with the following 
 remarks : — ■“ To continue the growth of the plant as an experiment 
 in view to the cultivation for economic purposes would be a mis- 
 take, and the time therefore has come to close the experiment which 
 has been carried on with the utmost labour, care, and attention, and 
 to declare that the valleys and hills of the Himalaya of the North- 
 Western Provinces and the Panjab are not fitted for the cultivation 
 of the cinchona plant.” 
 
 TALLOW TKEE. 
 
 Stillingia S’ebifera, Michx. — Tallow-tree. 
 
 A tree belonging to the natural order Eupliorbiacece , introduced 
 from China. This tree fruits abundantly in all climates in India 
 1 Sel. Rec., N.-W. P. (2nd Ser.), VI., 602, and Dick’s Report, ibid., I,, 79. 
 
884 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTBICTS 
 
 from Calcutta to the Himalaya. There are large plantation® its 
 Saharanpur, the Dun, and on the several tea-plantations in Kumaun. 
 The seeds were sown in the Saharanpur gardens in 1858, and so 
 rapid was their growth that, in 1866, they measured 6 feet in cir- 
 cumference 3 feet from the ground. Plantations were esta- 
 blished in the Dehra Dun, at 4-5,000 feet in the hills at Hawalbagh, 
 Ayar Toll, and Paori, and in all these places there was an abundant 
 yield of fruit. The seeds lie within a capsule and are enveloped in 
 a fatty matter which yields a tallow. Animal tallow consists of 
 stearine and elaine, both of which are found in nearly a pure state 
 in these seeds. The mode of extracting 1 the tallow is very simple. 
 It is merely necessary to boil the seeds and strain through cloth 
 into water; and to purify the fallow, boil again in water and strain 
 through a cloth as before. For burning purposes the tallow is 
 excellent, as it gives a clear, bright, inodorous flame without smoke. 
 It has also been tried with some success as a lubricator for railway 
 wagons. The wood is close-grained and yields a timber well fitted 
 for printing-blocks, and the leaves afford a dye. It was thought, at 
 one time, that the cultivation of this tree in Kumaun would yield 
 results second only to tea, but actual experiment has shown that the 
 labour and expense involved in collecting the seeds and extracting 
 the tallow are far in excess of the value of the product ; and in 
 Calcutta, where it was introduced over thirty years ago, the result 
 has been the same. 
 
 IPECACUANHA. 
 
 Cephcelis Ipecacuanha.— In 1870, Dr. Jameson procured two 
 plants at the Kew Gardens and brought them out to India, where 
 they arrived safely and were planted in the gardens at Chandwala 
 in the Dehra Dun, but ultimately perished from frost. 
 
 CORK OAK. 
 
 Quercus suber, Linn.— Cork oak. Brandis, 485. 
 
 At various times seeds of the Italian and Spanish cork oak have 
 been planted in Dehra Dun and have germinated freely. The 
 young trees thrive well and may, hereafter, prove of value, but the 
 ultimate success of the experiment has yet to be seen. 
 
 1 For Dr. Macgowan’s description f the process of manufacture in China. se3 
 J. Agri.-Hort., Ben., VII., 164. 
 
OF THE NORTH WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 885 
 
 SWEET CHESTNUT. 
 
 Castanea vulgaris, Linn.; C.vesca, Gsertn. — Sweet chestnut, 
 Spanish chestnut, chataignier. Brandis, 491. 
 
 The seeds of this tree were introduced by Sir John Strachey, 
 and subsequently consignments were received by the Superintendent 
 of the Botanical Gardens, Saharanpur, by whom they were planted 
 and the young trees distributed all over the Don and Kumaun. 
 The chestnut yields freely in the Duns and Lower Himalaya, and 
 now forms an appreciable addition to the fruit resources of the 
 Debra bazar. In Italy, Greece, Central France, Spain, and Corsica, 
 it forms an important article of food for the inhabitants of the 
 mountainous regions of those countries, and from the success of the 
 experiments tried here, it appears that the establishment of the 
 chestnut in suitable localities in these hills presents no difficulties 
 that cannot be easily surmounted. 
 
 CAROB. 
 
 Ceratonia Siliqua, Linn. — Carob or St. John’s bread-fruit tree : 
 the Algaroba beans of commerce (fruit). Brandis, 166. 
 
 The carob was introduced by Dr. Jameson from Malta in 1861, 
 and by 1863 it was extensively propagated and distributed in the 
 Dun. The trees, though they flourish well, do not seem to give pods 
 in such quantities as they yield in Malta and Italy. In 1866, the 
 same report was received, and in 1880, it has been decided to try to 
 improve the quality of the seeds by grafting, which, in Italy, not 
 only produces better fruit, but gives a yield in a much shorter space 
 of time. The trees appear to be unaffected by any extremes of 
 temperature or excessive moisture. The sweet nutritious pulp of 
 the pods is ground and mixed with grain and then baked and eaten 
 by the poorer classes in Italy, the Levant, and Malta. The pods 
 are also given to draught cattle in the proportion of one measure of 
 carob beans to two measures of barley, and on this food they both 
 work and thrive well. This tree is indigenous in Spain, Algeria, the 
 eastern part of the Mediterranean region, and Syria. 
 
 MEZQUIT. 
 
 Prosopis glandulosa— The Mezquit bean. 
 
 This plant, a native of Texas, was introduced in 1878, and has 
 been successfully propagated in Kumaun. It produces pods freely 
 
886 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 during the rains, not all at once, but in succession, and seems to stand 
 the extremes of heat, cold, and moisture very well. The beans are 
 used as fodder for cattle. Acacia tortuosa , a native of Jamaica, 
 has recently been introduced. It yields a fodder pod and might be 
 cultivated as a hedge as well. It thrives well at Saharanpur. The 
 Euchlcena ( Reana ) luxurians , which yields a good fodder grass, is 
 also under trial in the Government gardens, as well as a series of 
 Australian grasses. The Pithecolobium Saman , or ‘ rain tree,’ has 
 been found a failure, not being able to withstand the frosts in the 
 cold weather. Several experimental sowings of fibre plants have also 
 been made. Dr. Jameson recommended the cultivation of Agave 
 Cantala and americana , Aloe angustifolia and intermedia , Sanseveria 
 zeylanica and Tacca stricta. A recent report on Malaehra capitata 
 shows that it grows to a fair height and seeds freely, producing a 
 fibre, however, in no way superior to the indigenous patsan ( Hibis- 
 cus cannabimis) , but useful for mixing with jute in the manufacture 
 of bags. Some forty species of Eucalyptus have been cultivated. 
 All seem to thrive faiidy, and some of them remarkably well in 
 Saharanpur and the hills. Catalpa speciosa, Engel., a tree indige- 
 nous to North America, yields a timber especially adapted for under- 
 ground work, such as posts, sleepers, and the like, and is now under 
 cultivation in Saharanpur, and will also be tried in Mussooree. 
 Olives have been received from Florence and are now planted out at 
 Chajauri, where they appear to thrive well, the climate and soil 
 being very suitable. They are of the same species as that from 
 which the famous Lucca oil is extracted. A considerable number 
 of seedlings of the oil-plant, Lallemantia iberica, raised in Saharanpur 
 have been planted at Mussooree, but it will take some time before a 
 correct estimate of its value can be obtained. Madden records that 
 hops were raised with some success in Hawalbagli in Kumaun over 
 thirty years ago, and experiments in the Dun in 1862-63 showed 
 that they grow well there also. In the plains, however, the flowers 
 do not seem ever likely to be useful for brewing purposes. Hops 
 grow well at Saharanpur, and during the rains become most luxu- 
 riant ; but it also happens that the flowers are produced at that 
 time and the heavy rain prevents their proper development. This 
 would appear to be a matter that should affect the culture of the 
 hop plant in this country wherever the periodical rains are felt, and 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTETtN PROVINCES. 
 
 887 
 
 Tea. 
 
 History. 
 
 would apply to the whole of the Himalaya of these provinces equally 
 with the plains. In conclusion, mention may be made that fruit 
 trees of all kinds, vegetables, flowers, and ornamental shrubs, have 
 been introduced and propagated and distributed all over the hills 
 from the Tons to the Sarda, and that for this purpose the gardens at 
 Mussooree, Chajauri and Ranikhet have well fulfilled the object for 
 which they were established. 
 
 TEA . 1 
 
 The history of the cultivation and manufacture of tea in the hill 
 
 districts of the North-Western provinces 
 having originated simultaneously with the 
 introduction of the plant in India generally, and with its discovery 
 as an indigenous plant in Asam, it will be advisable to commence 
 with a brief sketch of the circumstances which have led to the 
 undoubted success of tea culture in these provinces. 
 
 The claim of first originating the idea of cultivating the tea 
 
 plant in India is variously attributed. As 
 early as 1788 it appears that Sir Joseph 
 Banks, at the request of the East India House, wrote a memoir on 
 the subject, 2 recommending the introduction of plants from China 
 to Behar, Rungpur, and Kuch Behar. Some years afterwards 
 considerable interest was aroused by the reported discoveries oi 
 indigenous tea plants in Burma, Asam, Nepal, Kumaun, and 
 Basd.hr. It was in Asam only, however, that the discovery of the 
 truly indigenous plant was confirmed. Mr. Burrell is inclined 
 to believe that the discoverer of the wild tea plant in Asam 
 was Mr. David Scott, an Indian civilian, who, when Asam was 
 ceded to us, took charge of the settlement of that province. It 
 appears that sometime between 1819 and 1821 he sent a specimen 
 of the Asam wild tea plant to Calcutta to his friend Mr. James 
 Kyd, whose father, Colonel Kyd, corresponded with Sir Joseph 
 Banks about tea cultivation in India amongst other matters. This 
 specimen was handed over to Dr. Wallich, and Mr. Burrell has 
 succeeded in identifying it in the Walli cliian herbarium now 
 
 1 1 am indebted to Mr J F Duthie, Superintendent of the Botanical Gardens, 
 N.-W. P., for this notice of the tea industry in Kumaun 2 See an interest- 
 
 ing paper read by Mr. A. Burrell before the Society of Arts on February 2nd, 
 1877, and published in the Society’s Journal, Vol. XXV., p. 199. 
 
888 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 belonging to the Linnean Society. Attached to the specimen he found 
 a portion of Mr. Scott’s letter, but without any indication as to tho 
 date. The conclusions arrived at by Mr. Burrell are fully borne 
 out by Mr. Thiselton Dyer, who, being the author of a monograph 
 on the Indian Ternstrcemiaceai, must have made a special study 
 of this subject ; also by the late Dr. Anderson and Dr. McClelland. 
 In a letter from the latter to Mr. Clerk Marsham the following 
 passage occurs : — 
 
 “ The circumstances brought to light by Mr. Burrell coincide exactly with 
 what I hare always understood to be the fact, that specimens of the plant and 
 seeds of the indigenous tea plant had been sent by Mr. Scott through Mr. Kyd to 
 Dr. Wallich as early at least as 1821.” 
 
 And further on he remark 
 
 “ Had Mr. Scott’s discovery in 1821 been taken up in an active and enlight- 
 ened spirit, several years might have been gained, but public spirit was not pre- 
 pared at that period for much enterprise, and we were content to receive our teas 
 from China. Besides, Mr. Scott had not at that time reduced the tribes on the 
 frontier to subjection, and their troublesome character was kept alive by our war 
 with Burma, and, above all, we wanted Lord William Bentinck, without whom the 
 second discovery of the tea plant might have shared the fate of the first. What 
 we have most to regret is that Mr. Scott’s discovery was not properly recorded, 
 when steps might have been taken, with his assistance, for the transmission of 
 seeds and plants to the Botanic Garden in Calcutta, where the tea plant could 
 have been propagated twelve years before its subsequent discovery in Asam.” 
 Other writers on the early history of Indian tea have mentioned 
 Mr. Bruce as having first discovered the true tea plant in Asam, 
 but as his discovery was only made in 1823, his claim must give 
 way to that of Scott. 
 
 The Kumaun plant noticed by Bishop Heber on his visit to 
 Almora in December, 1824, as well as that of Basahr, described by 
 Moorcroft in 1821, must be referred to an evergreen shrub called 
 Osyris nepalensis and belonging to the sandal-wood family. Bishop 
 Heber thus writes concerning this plant. “ The tea plant 1 grows 
 wild all through Kumaun, but cannot be made use of, from an eme- 
 tic quality it possesses. This might, perhaps, be removed by culti- 
 vation, but the experiment has never been tried. For the cultiva- 
 tion of tea I apprehend both the soil, hilly surface, and climate of 
 Kumaun, in all which it resembles the tea provinces of China, are 
 
 1 Regarding the same plant Dr. Royle in his “ Illustration of the Botany of 
 the Himalayan Mountain,” p. 322, says : — “ The leaves of this plant are in 
 Kumaun employed as a substitute for tea : hence some travellers have been led 
 ; into the error of stating that the true tea plant was to be found in this part of 
 the mountains.” 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 889 
 
 extremely favourable.” The plant observed in Nepal was a true 
 tea plant in cultivation, and which Dr. Wallich afterwards ascer- 
 tained to have been brought from Pekin on the occasion of one of 
 the triennial embassies sent to China by the Gorkhali government. 
 
 The idea of cultivating tea in the hill districts of Northern India 
 
 Tea cultivation in the was first originated by Dr. Royle in 1827, 
 Himalaya. who was at that time in charge of the East 
 
 India Company’s Darden at Saharanpur. In a report to the Gov- 
 ernment of India, at the close of that year, he pointed out the 
 resemblance of the Himalayan vegetation with that of tea-producing 
 districts of China, as well as the suitability of the soil, especially 
 in Kumaun. Four years later he again expressed these opinions 1 
 to the Governor-General, Lord W. Bentinck, during the visit of 
 the latter to Saharanpur. The representations of Dr. Royle from 
 Saharanpur, and of Dr. Wallich at Calcutta, and of other writers, 
 (eventually led in 1834 to the formation by Lord W. Bentinck of 
 the Tea Committee. The chief object of this committee was to 
 ascertain the best mode of introducing the Chinese tea plant into 
 India, and of its cultivation in carefully selected localities. One 
 of the first acts of the committee was the deputation of Mr. G. J. 
 Gordon to China in order to arrange as to the best modes of 
 obtaining both the gennine plant as well as Chinese cultivators. In 
 the meantime,- arrangements- were being made to select the best 
 localities in India for sowing the seeds which -were expected to arrive 
 before the end of the year (1834). At the same time a set of 
 queries was circulated by the committee for the purpose of obtain- 
 ing the opinions of those who were most competent to give their 
 advice on this matter. Two important communications were 
 received in reply — one from Captain J enkins, Agent to the Governor- 
 General in Asam ; and the second from Dr. Hugh Falconer, who 
 had recently succeeded Dr. Royle as Superintendent of the Saharan- 
 pur garden. After describing the conditions under which the tea 
 plant was being cultivated in China, and the attempts which had 
 been made to introduce the plant to other countries, he observes : — 
 
 “ There is, perhaps, no part of the Company’s territories in India which 
 supplies all the conditions of tea districts in China in respect of climate ; but 
 there are situations which approach it so nearly as strongly to bear out the 
 
 1 See also his *• 111. Him.,” pjr. 1*24-27, where these views are more fully stated. 
 
 112 
 
890 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 conclusion that tea may be so successfully produced in this country as to be 
 object of high commercial importance * * * * 
 
 It has been seen that the annual heat of the southern limit of the tea cultivation 
 In China, assumed to extend to Canton, is 73° F. At [Saharanpur, which may 
 be considered as at the northern limit nearly of the plains of Hindustan, 3° of 
 latitude higher, and 1,000 feet above the sea, the mean temperature of the year is 
 73° F. ; the temperature of June is 90°, and of January, 52°. 
 
 “ In the Himalaya mountains this case is widely different, excepting periodi- 
 cal rains ; here all the conditions of the temperate climate are found, and here; 
 above all parts of India, we ma.y look for successful cultivation of tea.” 
 
 After describing the geological feat ares of these mountains, 
 having made a special study of the subject, he summarizes his 
 opinions as follows r — 
 
 1. “ That the tea plant may be successfully cultivated in India. 
 
 2. “ That this can be expected nowhere in the plains from 30° 
 north down to Calcutta. 
 
 3. ci That in the Himalaya mountains near the parallel of 30°N\, 
 notwithstanding some circumstances of soil and moisture of climate, 
 the tea plant may be cultivated with great prospect of success ; 
 that a climate here may be found similar in respect of temperature to* 
 the tea countries in China ; that in the direction and great slope of 
 the hills, the absence of table-land or elevated valleys, and the con- 
 tracted figure of the existing valleys, are the chief difficulties in the 
 way of cultivation, which may prevent tea from being produced in 
 great quantity on any one spot. 
 
 4. “ That the most favourable ground for a trial is a tract on 
 the outer ridges, extending from 3,000 feet above the sea, or the 
 point where the hot wind ceases, up to the limit of winter snow. 
 
 5. u That in the valley of the Dhoon, if not the better, the 
 inferior sorts of tea might be produced.” 
 
 The opinions expressed by Dr. Falconer in the above letter are 
 remarkably similar to those of Dr. Hoyle submitted from England 
 about the same time ; and, as the latter declared, u without any 
 communication of ideas, for the two essays must have crossed each 
 other at sea.” Among the localities recommended by Dr. Hoyle 
 were Bliim Tal, Hawalbagh, Delira, and Pinjor in valleys from 
 2-2,500 feet in elevation above the sea; also Almora, Jerrapani, 
 Nahan, and Subathu at elevations of 4 to 5,000 feet ; also Mus- 
 soorie at 6,500 feet. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 891 
 
 Dr. Falconer. 
 
 Shortly after this Dr. Falconer received orders to examine the 
 
 hill country situated between the Jumna 
 and the Ganges for the purpose of selecting 
 suitable sites for tea nurseries. In view also of the experiments 
 that were to be undertaken in Kumaun, a letter was addressed to 
 Mr. G. W. Traill, Commissioner of that province, by Dr. Wallich, 
 Officiating Secretary to the Tea Committee, dated 28th June, 1834, 
 requesting him to render what assistance he could in order to carry 
 into effect the object in question. In Mr. Traill the Government 
 found an officer well qualified to undertake this tvork. He was 
 assisted by Mr. R. Elinkworth, who was then at Almora acting as 
 plant-collector under Dr. Wallich for the Calcutta Botanical Gar- 
 den. Two sites were chosen for nurseries in which to sow the 
 seeds that were shortly expected from China. They w r ere — Lackh- 
 inesar near Almora and Bhartpur near Bhim Tab They are thus 
 described by Mr. J. H. Batten, B.C.S., who was afterwards 
 Commissioner of this province, 1 — “the former occupying three acres 
 of old and easily acquired crown land on the north-west slope of the 
 hill below the capital town at 5,000 feet above the sea, the latter 
 occupying four acres at 4,500 feet above the sea in the near neigh- 
 bourhood of the Bhim Tal lake, which is situated on the first step 
 of the mountains above the Bliamauri Pass.” It was in this same 
 year (1834) that through the energetic researches of Captain 
 Jenkins and Lieutenant Charlton some specimens of the true tea 
 plant of Asam were obtained, and thus confirmation was secured 
 as to its being really wild in that country. 
 
 The question of selecting sites gave rise to much discussion ; 
 
 some, such as McClelland, Griffith, &c., be- 
 ing in favour of restricting cultivation to 
 Asam, or to countries with a similar climate, on the assumption 
 that a damp and equable climate was necessary for its proper 
 growth. As far as the Asam plant was concerned, this has been 
 proved to be good advice, and results have shown that though the 
 Asam tea plant is botanically the same species as that of China, 2 
 it is not sufficiently hardy to bear the extremes of temperature to 
 which the Chinese variety is exposed in the tea gardens of North- 
 
 1 “ Notes and recollections of tea cultivation in Kumaun and Garlrwal, 
 foyJ.H Batten, b.c.s., retired, Journal, Agri -Ilort. Society of India, Vol. V,, 
 Fart IV., p. 5-3, 1878. 3 Sso F . Ind., i., p. 292. 
 
 Sites. 
 
89 2 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Western India. In China itself, where the area of tea cultivation 
 extends over nearly twenty degrees of latitude, there must he many 
 degrees of hardiness in the plants which are grown throughout this 
 wide extent of country. 
 
 Previous to the rediscovery of the tea-plant in Asam, the sites 
 
 Tea-plant discovered recommended for cultivation in India had 
 m Asam. reference solely to the Chinese plant, as far 
 
 as was known about it at that time. In most cases these sites have 
 proved successful so long as cultivation was restricted to the Chi- 
 nese variety, or with hybrids only slightly crossed with that of Asam. 
 The pure Asam plant, on the other hand, requires a hot and moist 
 climate ; in fact the more unhealthy the locality may be from the 
 above cause, the greater the chances of success. The discovery of 
 the true tea-plant in Asam naturally gave rise to a considerable 
 amount of partiality in favour of restricting the cultivation of tea 
 entirely to that country or its neighbourhood ; and consequently 
 attention was diverted from the more distant nurseries in Kumaun 
 and Grarhwal. These nurseries, however, were in good hands, and, in 
 spite of all drawbacks, the success of the experiments soon became 
 evident. At this point, it will be advisable to confine attention to 
 matters more immediately connected with the subject of this notice, 
 viz., the progress of tea cultivation in Kumaun and Grarhwal. 
 
 The first batch of plants numbering about 20,000 were despatch- 
 Cultivation in Ku- ed from Calcutta in 1885, but very few of 
 
 these arrived at their destinations alive ; and 
 of the seeds sent to Dr. Falconer not one germinated, a fact not to 
 be much wondered at, considering the length of the journey they 
 had to undergo, and the short-lived nature of the seed. The plants 
 flourished in the two Kumaun nurseries and produced abundant 
 crops of seed. In the Saharanpur garden plants were also to be 
 seen, the offspring of seed produced at Koth in T ihr i- Grarhwal . 
 In 1841, Dr. Falconer, who was then in charge of all the tea 
 plantations in Northern India, visited the two Kumaun gardens. 
 At the Bhartpur nursery he found 1,344 plants. Of these, 291 
 were original plants introduced in 1885 ; 153 were seedlings of 
 1840, and the remainder were from layers made in this and the two 
 preceding years. At Lachhmesar there were 3,840 plants ; viz., 
 250 of the original plants of 1835, 2,0 r 72 seedlings of 1839 and 
 
OF THE' NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 893 
 
 1840, and the rest layers. The greater success of the latter garden 
 he attributed partly to its better site, but in a great measure to Mr. 
 Blinkworth, who happened to be residing in the neighbourhood. 
 On the whole, he considered the results up to this time as most 
 encouraging. Shortly after this he paid a visit to the Garhwal 
 nurseries and reported similar progress. As far, therefore, as the 
 plants were concerned, everything looked promising ; but nothing 
 was known as to the quality of the leaves for the manufacture of 
 good tea. At that time there was very little practical knowledge in 
 India regarding the various processes of tea manufacture, and in 
 order to avoid unfavourable opinions at the outset through the 
 attempts of unskilled workmen, Dr. Falconer strongly recommended 
 that two complete sets of Chinese tea manufacturers should be 
 supplied for the nurseries fin Kumaun and Garhwal, especial care 
 being taken that these men should be of the best descrip- 
 tion. 
 
 A small manufacturing establishment was accordingly sanction- 
 
 . , , . ed by Government. Some men who were 
 
 Chinese labour imported. J 
 
 selected for this work by the Commissioner 
 of Asam declined to go to Kumaun. Dr. Wallich, however, suc- 
 ceeded in engaging the services of a party of Chinese artizans in 
 Calcutta. These were accordingly sent up to Kumaun, together 
 with a set of implements all under the charge of Mr. Milner, who 
 happened to be on his way to Saharanpur to take up his duties 
 there as Read Gardener. They arrived at their destination in April, 
 1842. The Chinamen, as soon as they saw the Kumaun tea bushes, 
 all declared that it was the genuine China plant ; and, in their 
 opinion, far superior to that of Asam. They recommended that 
 the plants should be pruned down close to the ground, so as to 
 encourage the production of a fine crop of young leaves in the suc- 
 ceeding spring. They managed to make a small quantity of tea 
 with the leaves of that year, a sample of which was taken to Eng- 
 land by Dr. Falconer a few months afterwards. This sample was 
 submitted to the celebrated tea-brokers Messrs. Ewart, Maccaughly, 
 and Delafosse in London in September, 1843, and they reported as 
 follows : — a The tea brought by Dr. Falconer as a specimen of the 
 growth of the China plant in the Himalaya mountains resembles 
 most nearly the description occasionally imported from China under 
 
894 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 the name of Oolong. This resemblance is observable in the appear- 
 ance of the leaf before and after infusion. The colour of the liquor 
 is also similar, being paler, and more of the straw colour than the 
 general description of black tea. It is not so high flavoured as the 
 fine Oolong tea, with which we have compared it, and it has been 
 too highly burnt in the preparation, but it is of a delicate, fine 
 flavour, and would command a ready sale here.” 
 
 After the departure of Dr. Falconer, the Saliaranpur garden was 
 _ T put under the charge of Dr. W. Jameson, 
 
 whose energy and indomitable perseverance 
 contributed mainly to the success of tea cultivation in Northern 
 India. He was also an active witness of the progress of tea culti- 
 vation from its experimental stage to the period when its profitable 
 cultivation justified the Government in handing it over to private 
 enterprise. A sample of probably the same tea as that of Dr. Fal- 
 coner above referred to was sent by Dr. Jameson to the Calcutta 
 Chamber of Commerce, where it was pronounced to be a tea of 
 very good marketable value, and worth in London about 2s. 6d. 
 per pound. Another portion of this sample sent to London 
 was reported on by Messrs. Thomson of Mincing Lane, and pro- 
 nounced to be of u the Oolong Souchong kind, fine-flavoured and 
 strong. This is equal to the superior black tea generally sent as 
 presents, and better, for the most part, than the China tea import- 
 ed for mercantile purposes.” Dr. Jameson visited the Kumaun 
 plantations in April, 1843, and found them in a very satisfactory 
 state. The Chinamen were manufacturing a different kind of tea 
 which appeared to be far superior in quality. Some samples of the 
 above contained in sixteen small canisters were despatched in Au- 
 gust to the India House. The flavour of this tea was somewhat 
 spoilt by the wax-cloth in which the canisters were wrapped. 
 In other respects, however, the reports were most satisfac- 
 tory. 
 
 The history of the progress of the various tea plantations in 
 
 North-Western India from this period, i.e., 
 
 1844 . 1 ’ ’ 
 
 from the year 1844 until a few years ago, 
 when the last of the Govennnent gardens passed into private hands, 
 is chiefly to be gathered from Dr. Jameson’s annual reports to Gov- 
 ernment, some of which have been published in the Journal of the 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 895 
 
 Agri-Horfcicultaral Society of India. 1 In his report, dated 28th 
 February, 1844, he gives a full account of the Kumaun nurseries, 
 their number and extent, as well as the number of plants contained 
 in each ; he also enters into some particulars regarding the mode of 
 manufacturing the tea. There were at this time five separate nurse- 
 ries scattered over four districts ; their total area amounted to 55 
 acres, and they contained 4,306 tea-bearing plants. More land 
 being required, new nurseries were marked out by Dr. Jameson, 
 and some of the old ones were extended, making in all an addition 
 of 66 acres. Dr. Jamesows intimate knowledge of geology enabled 
 him to select these new sites with great advantage. The total quan- 
 tity of tea manufactured in 1843 was 1911b. In discussing the 
 future prospects of tea, Dr. Jameson clearly shows the success of 
 the experiment so far, and urges the necessity of greatly extending 
 the cultivation of tea in the provinces of Kumaun and Garhwal. 
 He says : — 
 
 “ The plants now amount to 150,000, and these will be doubled, I 
 trust, or trebled annually ; and were there only seed in sufficient numbers, as they 
 germinate most freely, provided they are fresh, the aspect of the nurseries in an 
 infinitely short space of time would be changed ; for instead of patches there 
 would soon be districts covered with tea plants * * * * * 
 
 The nursery at Ivaulagir in the Dehra Dun contains about 4,500, and here the 
 plants arejhriving as well as in any other of the nurseries. It is, however, to 
 be proved whether the leaves yielded by the plants in this locality are fitted for 
 making tea of a superior quality, as it has been ascertained that all the tea grown 
 in China at low elevations is of an inferior description. If, however, it does 
 prove to be a marketable article, and equal to that produced in the neighbourhood 
 of Canton, avast field for enterprise will be opened up, whether Government consi- 
 dered it worthy of their own attention, or it be brought about by private capital. 
 Water carriage will soon, it is hoped, be within two or three marches of this valley, 
 which will also be a strong inducement, in addition to the above, to make capital- 
 ists invest their capital in this channel, and thus we trust ere long to see the hill 
 provinces, which at present yield but a trifling sum to the revenues of the State, 
 become as important, in an economical point of view, as any of those in the plains 
 of Hindustan.” 
 
 In a letter to Dr. Royle dated 1st July, 1844, Dr. Jameson after 
 havino- made an inspection of all the nurseries writes : — “ At Koth, 
 Rama Serai, and Gadoli in the Garhwal Hills, the tea plants are 
 thriving admirably, many of them being nearly six feet high.” In 
 
 1 See Vol. II., p. 323; Yol. IV., p. 173; and Vol. VI., p. 81. For the 
 first few years Dr. Jameson corresponded regularly with Dr. Royle, and the sub- 
 stance of his letters is contained in a paper by the latter published in the 
 Journal of the Agri.-Hort. Soc , Vol. VII. ; part II., p. 11. 
 
89 6 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 a later letter lie informs Dr. Royle that the Chinese manufacturers 
 denied that gieen and black tea were made from different plants, 
 and that it was only a difference in the mode of manufacture. In 
 another letter he mentioned that 4361k. of tea had been made, and 
 that three acres yielded 1621k. of tea ; that he had then 120 acres 
 under cultivation, and hoped soon to have double this area. 
 
 In Dr. Jameson’s next report, published in 1845, he gave a 
 lg45 detailed account of the progress made during 
 
 the preceding year at the several gardens 
 in Kumaun and Garhwal. Seventy-six acres of land were added 
 and 94,100 plants were put into them. In September and November 
 upward of four lacs of seeds had been sown, of which 167,000 ger- 
 minated and were still germinating. Three hundred and seventy- 
 five pounds of tea were manufactured, showing an increase of 185 Ik. 
 on the preceding year ; and as the plants were still young, Dr. 
 Jameson was confident of a steadily increasing quantity per acre 
 every year. In this report he entered into the subject of cost and 
 profit, and shows by the following estimate the amount of profit 
 that might be realized from 6,000 acres of tea, on the assumption 
 that an acre was capable of yielding one maund of tea : — 
 
 Rs. 
 
 The expenses of cultivating 6,000 acres ... ... 87,000 
 
 Ditto of making the tea ... ... ... 39,975 
 
 Ditto of packing the tea ... ... ... 2,259 
 
 Land rent, carriage to Calcutta, &c. ... ... ... 36,500 
 
 Total ... 1,29,734 
 
 To value of 6,000 maunds of tea or 240,000 seers at Rs. 2 per 
 
 seer ... ... ... ... .. 4,80 000 
 
 Or say that the tea sold at Re. 1-8 per seer ... „. 3,60,000 
 
 Expenditure ... ... ... ... ... 1,29,734 
 
 Balance ... ... ... ... ... 2,30,266 
 
 Re garding the Garhwal nurseries, Dr. Jameson reports that 
 Garhwal that of Kaulagir in the Dehra Dun consist- 
 
 ed of six acres and contained 8,000 plants. 
 At Ivoth in the Bhaddri valley, elevation 5,000 feet, there were 729 
 plants ; and in the Rama Serai nursery, elevation about the same, 
 728 plants. About a quarter of the total number in the two latter 
 nurseries were a portion of the plants which came originally from 
 Calcutta. Another nursery at Gadoli near Paori, established by 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES.. 
 
 897 
 
 Dr. Jameson in 1843, contained 5,000 plants. Shortly after this 
 Dr. Jameson sent a sample of Dehra Dun tea to Dr. Royle for an 
 opinion, which was favoured by Mr. R. Twining, who reported as 
 follows : — “ I have carefully tasted your sample of Himalayan 
 tea, and I really think it a promising specimen. The flavour is not 
 strong, but it is delicate and pleasant, and a little, methought, of tha 
 Orange Pekoe character. The complexion of the leaf is rather good, 
 and pains seem to have been taken in the manipulation.” This 
 favourable account was very gratifying to Dr. Jameson, who at once 
 foresaw the profit that would result by extending tea cultivation 
 throughout the Dun. Other samples were submitted through the 
 Court of Directors for professional examination in London, and the 
 reports, on the whole, were most satisfactory. Dr. Jameson receiv- 
 ed about this time from the Court of Directors grateful acknowledg- 
 ment for the good work already done by him. The sales of tea at 
 Almora, two of which had lately been held, showed an increasing 
 appreciation of Indian tea by natives as well as by Europeans. 
 The average price offered for black tea was seven rupees per seer. 
 In 1847, Dr. Jameson wrote to Dr. Royle : — “ The tea this year 
 will, I think, be very superior to anything yet made, as it has been 
 manufactured and packed under advantages which were not pro- 
 curable until now ; that is, there is now a sheet-lead maker attached 
 to the manufactory.” Another sale was held this year at Paori. 
 The amount realized for green tea varied from Rs. 10-8-0 to 
 Rs. 9-4-0, and black from Rs. 7-8-0 to Rs. 4 per seer. About 
 this time, Dr. Jameson received orders to select sites for new plan- 
 tations in the hilly districts between the Satlaj and the Ravi, 
 which resulted in the establishment of the Kangra valley nur- 
 series. 
 
 Dr. Jameson’s third report 1 gives further details regarding the 
 
 condition of the different nurseries. His 
 Third report. . 
 
 observations as to soil were to the effect 
 
 that the tea plant thrives well both in stiff and free soils, but appa- 
 rently better in the latter, or in a mixture of the two ; with regard 
 to elevation, that it thrives equally well at heights ranging from 
 2,200 feet above the sea to 6,000 feet. The area under cultivation 
 at this time was 162^ acres, and the minimum yield of tea per acre 
 
 1 J., Agri-IIor., Cal., VI., pt. ii. 
 
 113 
 
898 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 was 801b. It is also stated in this report that about half the quan- 
 tity of the < ~ P ouchong ’ (black tea) was bought up by natives at an 
 average price of Rs. 6-8-8 per seer. The coarse Boheci tea was sold 
 to the Bhotiyas at from Rs. 2 to Rs. 2-4-0 per seer for export 
 to Tibet, where it successfully competed with the tea imported to 
 that country from China. Other interesting matters are discussed 
 by Dr. Jameson in this report, but space will not permit to give 
 more than the headings of these subjects : — 
 
 1. On the method of preparing ground prior to forming a plantation, viz., 
 
 fencing, draining, ploughing, trenching, &c. 
 
 2. On seeds when ripe, the season of ripening, and the methods to be adopt- 
 
 ed to ascertain it. 
 
 3. On the method of sowing seeds and season, and on the treatment of the 
 
 young tea plants after they have germinated. 
 
 4. Method of rearing plantations, by sowing seeds, by layers, and by cut- 
 
 tings. 
 
 5. On the method of transplanting, and the season. 
 
 6. On pruning, best season and mode. 
 
 7. On irrigation. 
 
 8. On the tea plant ; season of flowering ; its character and species ; and 
 
 on the advantages to be derived from importing seeds from China. 
 
 9. Method and season for plucking and gathering leaves. 
 
 10. On the method of manufacturing black tea. 
 
 11. On the method of manufacturing green tea. 
 
 12. Packing tea. 
 
 13. Manufacture of sheet-lead. 
 
 14* Tea manufacture. 
 
 15. Implements required in manufacturing tea. 
 
 In a letter to Dr. Royle, dated 25th January, 1849, Dr. Jame- 
 son states that 2,6561b. of tea had been manufactured in the pre- 
 vious season, of which 6001b. (black and green) had been sent to 
 England, that there would be 400 acres under cultivation at Kau- 
 lagir by the end of the season, and at Priori he expected to have 
 2-3,000 acres. One hundred thousand plants were sent to the 
 Kangra valley, and he hoped in the course of eight or ten years to 
 have a sufficient number of plants in the Kaulagir plantation to 
 plant the whole of the Dun. 
 
 Mr. Fortune. 
 
 In 1848, the services of Mr. Robert Fortune, already well 
 
 known as a horticulturist, were engaged by 
 the Court of Directors to make an expedi- 
 tion to the northern part of China in order to obtain plants of 
 hardier varieties, as well as to investigate the mode of manufacture 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 899 
 
 in that part of China. In all this he was completely successful. 
 About 8,000 plants and several packets of seeds were despatched by 
 him to India from localities celebrated for the good quality of their 
 tea. He returned in 1851, bringing with him 12,000 more plants, 
 together with a large quantity of seed in a germinating state. With 
 these he proceeded at once to the Himalayan nurseries, which he after- 
 wards inspected officially by request of Government. In his report 
 on the condition of the nurseries he mentions eight as being at this 
 time under Government control, viz., one in Hehra Dun, one in 
 Garhwal, and six in K umaun. Their names are : — Kaulagir (Dehra 
 Dun) : Gadoli (Garhwal) : Hawalbagh, Lachhmesar, Kapena, Anu, 
 Kuasar, Bhartpur, and Rasiya (K umaun). 
 
 Some remarks of his on each of the above may be briefly given 
 here : — 
 
 1. Kaulagir plantation. — The soil is composed of clay, sand, 
 
 and vegetable matter, on a gravelly subsoil of rocks 
 similar to the surrounding mountains. The plants ap- 
 peared less healthy than in good Chinese plantations 
 owing (according to Mr. Fortune) to — 
 
 (a) The flatness of the land : (5) , the system of 
 
 irrigation: (c), too early plucking: (d), hot 
 drying winds. 
 
 2. Gadoli . — Soil composed of loam, sand, and vegetable matter, 
 
 very suitable for tea. Very like a Chinese plantation ; 
 plants healthy and prospects good. 
 
 3. Hawalbagh. — Land undulating similar to Chinese tea coun- 
 
 try ; soil a sandy loam mixed with vegetable matter ; 
 land terraced and sloped. Terrace cultivation is not 
 adopted in China. 
 
 4. Lachhmesar and Kapena. — Situation steep ; soil light and 
 
 sandy, rarely irrigated ; plants in good order. 
 
 5. Bhim Tdl. — (a) Anu and Kuasar : land low and flat, area 
 
 46 acres ; bad situation : (b) Bhartpur : 4^- acres of 
 
 terraced land ; soil, light loam mixed with clay, slate, and 
 trap rock and a small amount of vegetable matter ; well 
 adapted for tea : (c) Rasiya, 75 acres of sloping land, 
 
 plants most healthy, which are not irrigated. 
 
9 00 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Mr. Fortune also visited two plantations belonging to zamindars, 
 the first called Lohba in Eastern Garhwal, 50 miles west of Almora, 
 and at 5,000 feet altitude ; excellent land. In 1844, 4,000 plants 
 from the Government plantations were put here, hut failed owing 
 either to want of knowledge or intentional carelessness. The other 
 plantation called Katyur was situated near Baijnath in Western 
 Kumaun ; the ground was undulating ; there were numerous 
 streams, and the soil was fertile. Captain (now General Sir H.) 
 Bamsay^s two plantations each of four acres were planted in 1850. 
 Good management produced good results. The labour and manure 
 of the two neighbouring villages were secured in lieu of taxes. At 
 the close of his report Mr. Fortune gives some advice on certain 
 points connected with tea cultivation in this part of India : (.1) 
 The land best suited for tea, he considered, should be undulating 
 and well drained, and such as would produce good crops of mandua 
 or wheat, moist but not stagnant. (2) Irrigation he declared to 
 be generally injurious and should be resorted to only on emergen- 
 cies. (3) Plucking in China was never carried on until the third 
 or fourth year after planting, and was only necessary up to this 
 time for forming good bushes ; sickly plants should not be plucked. 
 (4) The most suitable climate was to be found in Eastern Garh- 
 wal and Kumaon. At H&walbjigh, the thermometric readings 
 showed a great similarity of climate with that of China. The rainy 
 season in China is earlier, and the hottest time is in July and Au- 
 gust, whereas in India the hottest month is June. 
 
 In appendix B. the annual yield of manufactured tea for each 
 
 garden (between 1848 and 1868-69) is given 
 Outturn. & ' . 
 
 as far as could be ascertained from scattered 
 
 reports and office records. With the exception of the deductions from 
 these figures, there is little to add regarding the later history of tea 
 culture in these provinces beyond the general conclusion as to the 
 ultimate success of the part which Government undertook with the 
 able assistance of Er. Jameson in order to bring about the complete 
 establishment of the tea trade in North-West India. As early as 
 1864 Dr. Jameson was of opinion that, owing to the increase of 
 private enterprise and the production of seed in private gardens. 
 Government would be justified in handing over the tea plantations 
 to private capitalists. “ Government,” he says, “ has done its work 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 901 
 
 in proving tliat tea can be profitably cultivated in North India. 
 Seeds and seedlings . have been distributed and skilled workmen 
 supplied to planters in various parts of India.” The extraordinary 
 progress which occurred within a few years may be understood from 
 the following facts : — In the year 1847, and up to 1859, tea cultiva- 
 tion was confined entirely to Government plantations, the total area 
 being 166 acres. In 1859 the land under tea in Delira Dun did not 
 exceed 700 acres, and in Kumaon there was only one small private 
 estate besides the Government plantations. In 1880 the area was 
 as follows : — ■ 
 
 
 Number 
 
 of 
 
 gardens. 
 
 Area. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Acres. 
 
 Roods. Roles. 
 
 Kumaun 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 33 
 
 3,342 
 
 3 10 
 
 Garhwal 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 10 
 
 634 
 
 3 O 
 
 Dehra Dun 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 20 
 
 6,960 
 
 O O 
 
 
 Total 
 
 ... 
 
 63 
 
 10,937 
 
 2 10 
 
 On the occasion of the recent International Exhibition at Mel- 
 
 Indian teas in the Aus- bourne the opportunity was taken of bringing 
 traiian markets. to the notice of the Australian people the 
 
 merits of Indian-grown teas. The undertaking was entirely success- 
 ful, and the prospects of Indian tea-planters have thereby received a 
 great impulse. They will now have abetter chance of satisfying 
 a demand for Indian tea on its own merits, and the prejudice in 
 favour of Chinese tea which went so far as to encourage the doubt- 
 ful practice of selling Indian tea as that of China will undoubtedly 
 lose ground. The planters in Asam and Bengal will be more 
 directly benefited by these imports to Australia. For the teas of 
 North-West India a market closer at hand is required. Efforts are 
 now being made to renew and extend the Indian tea trade beyond 
 the borders of the North-Western frontier where the demand is 
 practically unlimited. Mr. J. B. Fuller in his report on the 
 foreign trade of the North-Western Provinces and Oudh makes 
 the following remarks as to the advantages of opening up a trade 
 between Kumaun and Tibet : — 
 
 “ So far as the commercial interests of these provinces are concerned, the 
 most interesting point in the traffic they transact with Tibet is the opening it 
 
902 
 
 HTMA'LAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 might afford for the inferior classes of Kumaun tea, which will not bear the cost of 
 carriage to the sea-board. At present the markets of Tibet are closed by the uni- 
 ted influence of the Chinese Government and the Tibetan Lamas, who, having the 
 monopoly of the wholesale and retail tea supply of the country, are naturally 
 averse to the competition of a traffic in Indian tea, which might be more diffi- 
 cult to engross. The strict monopoly to which the tea trade between China 
 and Tibet is subject is fully described in a recent report by Mr. Colbourn 
 Baker, H. B. Al.’s Consul at Chung Cliing : his remarks, which specially relate to 
 the prospects of a tea trade between Assam and Tibet, apply no less pertinently 
 in the case of Kumaun, and the result of the system which he describes is that 
 during the year under report not only was no tea exported to Tibet from these 
 Provinces, but Chinese tea was actually imported into native Garhwal by the 
 Nilang pass. ‘ Tea’, Mr. Baker writes, ‘is to the Tibetan more than a luxury : it is 
 an absolute necessity.’ Yet the Tibetans on our frontier are compelled to pur- 
 chase tea of atrocious quality, the price of which has been swelled by a long and 
 difficult transport from the eastern extremity of the country; while immedi- 
 ately across the frontier there are tea gardens whence they could be supplied 
 with a better article, at a cheaper price, and with profit to the Kumaun tea- 
 planters as well as to the itinerant traders (Bliotias) through whose hands it 
 would pass. The price of brick tea per lb. on the Kumaun-Tibet frontier is not 
 known with accuracy, but since Air. Baker shows that its price is increased 
 from 4J annas to 8 annas per lb., by transport from Bathang to Lhassa, which is 
 not one-third of the way, its price on the Kumaun frontier must be very con- 
 siderable and much in excess of what Kumaun planters could supply it for. 
 Were the trade opened therefore the Tibetans would get cheaper as well as far 
 better tea than what they at present consume, which in the words of Air. Baker 
 is ‘the merest refuse,’ consisting of little else than the twigs and brushwood of 
 the tea plant, and vastly inferior to the very sweepings of Indian tea godowns. 
 The tea-planting industry of Kumaun would benefit largely by the opening out of a 
 trade, which would enable it to dispose of its coarser produce easily and cheaply. 
 So heavily is Kumaun tea handicapped by the expense of transport to Calcutta 
 that the most profitable portion of the trade even now is that transacted in 
 green teas with merchants from Central Asia who purchase the tea at the fac- 
 tory and carry it away themselves, saving the planters the expense and trouble 
 of packing. Kumaun planters are well aware of the advantages which a trade 
 with Tibet would give them, and a former manager of the Kousani Tea Company 
 actually manufactured brick tea and endeavoured, but unsuccessfully, to get it 
 into Tibet. Lastly, the Bhotias, in whose hands the Tibet trade lies, would 
 derive great benefit from the substitution of a new article of commerce for 
 borax, the price of which has fallen under American competition too low to 
 afford substantial profits on its import.” 
 
 The great success which has attended the cultivation of tea in 
 
 Tea in Dehra Dun. Pehra Dlin ™ 8 hard b’ anticipated by Dr. 
 
 Royle, who appeared to be decidedly in 
 
 favour of a higher elevation. The locality which he recommended 
 as being the most suitable for experiments in this district was a 
 
OF THE NORTH- WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 903 
 
 place called Jarrapani halfway between Raj pur and Mussoorie and 
 about 5,000 feet above the sea. The flatness of the ground in the 
 Dun however was probably the chief cause of its being rejected m 
 the first instance ; for it had been observed that in China the 
 finest tea plantations were situated for the most part on sloping 
 ground. 1 Dr. Falconer, who succeeded Dr. Royle at Saharanpur, on 
 finding that the tea plant would grow even at Saharanpur, was 
 naturally led to a different conclusion, and it was at length decided 
 to commence operations in the Dun. The first tea plants were 
 introduced in 1842, and two years later the Kaulagir plantation was 
 started under the superintendence of Dr. Jameson, who is still living 
 to witness the successful results of his energy and perseverance. 
 
 In 1847 this piece of ground covered about eight acres. The 
 
 plantation was added to from time to time 
 Kaulagir. until over 300 acres were under cultivation. 
 
 It was visited in 1850 by Mr. Fortune, who was deputed by Govern- 
 ment to inspect the tea plantations in India and to submit a report 
 on their condition. The result of his visit led him to condemn the 
 Dun as altogether unsuited for the cultivation of tea. The Kaula- 
 gir plantation happened just at this time to be in an unsatisfactory 
 condition, but for reasons depending on the mode of cultivation, 
 and not, as time has shown, on account of any radical defect in the 
 locality. At any rate the defects, such as they were, were soon 
 remedied by Dr. Jameson, and the good prospects of tea cultiva- 
 tion in the Dun were ensured. At a lecture given by Dr. Royle at 
 the Royal Asiatic Society a letter from Captain Cautley was read 
 in which he gave the following description of the Delira Dun plan- 
 tations : — “ I saw the Government garden near Kaulagir, m which 
 there were 4,000 plants growing most luxuriantly, the whole m full 
 blossom. I believe that the whole of these, with the exception of a 
 few brought from the hill plantations, are seedlings ; and certainly, 
 as far as luxuriance of vegetation goes, I never saw anything so pro- 
 mising in my life. There cannot be a doubt of the tea growing 
 luxuriantly in all this part of the Dun.” Dr. Falconer was also 
 present at this meeting and spoke strongly m favour of extending 
 cultivation in the Delira Dun, not only on account of the suitable 
 
 iMr. Fortune was no doubt similarly influenced when criticising the condi- 
 tion of the plants at Kaulagir during his inspection tour m 1850. 
 
904 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 climate and soil, but also because of the large amount of cleared 
 land that was available in that locality ; labour too, he maintained, 
 was cheap as well as carriage. 
 
 The yield of tea and seeds from Kaulagir plantation during the 
 years 1861 to 1865 is given below : — 
 
 
 
 1861-62. 
 
 1862-63. 
 
 1863-64. 
 
 1 864-65. 
 
 1865-66. 
 
 tv „ ( Green 
 
 Tea \ Black 
 
 • •• 
 
 ft 
 
 1,756 
 
 14,982 
 
 ft. 
 
 1b. 
 
 ft 
 
 ft. 
 
 Total 
 
 • * • 
 
 1 6,737 
 
 18,915f 
 
 1 9,878 £ 
 
 25,078 
 
 36,202 
 
 Seeds 
 
 • • • 
 
 Mds. 
 
 fc.60 
 
 Mds. 
 
 1,307 
 
 Mds. 
 
 860 
 
 Mds 
 
 1,050 
 
 Mds. 
 
 1000 
 
 Remarks 
 
 •i 
 
 Outturn 
 lessened by 
 severe 
 drought. 
 
 
 Ten acres 
 added to 
 planta- 
 tion. 
 
 Two acres 
 added to 
 plantation. 
 
 
 This plantation after having remained for upwards of 23 years 
 under Government management was sold in 1867 to the Itaja of 
 Sirmor for two lacs of rupees. In 1868 the receipts amounted only 
 to Rs. 1,401, but the garden now promises to become a valuable 
 source of income to the purchaser. In 1866 the road over the 
 Mohan pass was constructed and a much more direct route was 
 thus established for the carriage of tea from the Duti. 
 
 Shortly after the formation of the Government plantation 
 
 _ 3 several other gardens were started in the 
 
 Other gardens. . 
 
 Dun, including Harbanswala and Arcadia, 
 both now belonging to the Dehra Dun Tea Company, the largest and 
 at the present time the most successful concern in the Dun. Many 
 of the other gardens however failed, either from want of capital to 
 start with, or because the managers were totally ignorant as to 
 how the plant should be cultivated or the tea prepared. Sinee the 
 year 1850 however the prospects of tea-cultivation have gone on 
 improving and every year sees an increase in outturn and a finer 
 quality of tea. In 1857 Dr. Jameson estimated regarding the tea- 
 bearing capabilities of the Dun as follows : area 100,000 acres ; yield 
 10, 000,0001b ; average per acre 1001b Although the additional 
 land hi ought uuder tea cultivation is annually considerable, it seems 
 improbable that such a large area as calculated by Dr. Jameson will 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 905 
 
 ever be utilized for this purpose. On the other hand his estimate of 
 outturn per acre was far too small, as will be seen by some detailed 
 statements which follow. In 1863-64 only 1,700 acres were under 
 tea cultivation. 
 
 The question as to the effect of canal irrigation on tea plants 
 
 _ . , . seems to be finally disposed of. Fine 
 
 Irrigation. J L 
 
 healthy plants are now to be seen where 
 formerly, when artificial irrigation was practised, the plants were 
 sickly and sterile patches of soil were frequent. These patches 
 were caused, it is supposed, by the excess of lime contained in the 
 water ; the low temperature of the water no doubt contributed to 
 bring about the injurious conditions as described above. Artificial 
 irrigation has therefore been altogether given up by most of the 
 tea-planters in the Dun, and a marked improvement in the 
 healthiness of the plants has been taken place in consequence. 
 Other causes have also combined to bring about better results. 
 Greater attention for instance is being given to the advantages of 
 manuring. Firewood, an equally indispensable article, is yearly 
 becoming more scarce, and is likely to prove a cause of anxiety 
 for the future. Until recently a large quantity of tea used to be 
 bought up by merchants from Kabul and Central Asia, who took 
 it away with them in their own bags. Tea of very average quality 
 was thus sold at from 13 annas to one rupee per lb. The trade with 
 Kabul will in all probability be renewed now that hostilities with 
 that country have ceased. The quality of the Dun teas as 
 regards flavour and aroma has a close resemblance to that of the 
 other kinds produced on the Himalaya in Kumaon and Kangra. 
 Two varieties of the plant are cultivated, vis., the China and a 
 hybrid between it and the Asam plant, the latter being more 
 closely related to the China than to the Asam variety. The Asam 
 and Asam hybrid are found to be too delicate for cultivation in this 
 part of India. There are at present twenty plantations in the Dun, 
 making up a total area of 6,960 acres. The Dehra Dun Tea Company 
 have lately introduced at their factories sets of rolling machinery 
 which have proved to be a great saving of labour. The outturn of 
 tea from the Dehra Dun Tea Company’s plantations in 1879 was 
 313,058 lb., an average tint is of 439 lb. per acre. The cost per 
 acre amounted to Rs. 133-10-7. 
 
 114 
 
906 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 i— i 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 CQ 
 
 O 
 
 l-H 
 
 EH 
 
 CO 
 
 l—l 
 
 EH 
 
 <j 
 
 Eh 
 
 CQ 
 
 «1 
 
 E3 
 
 H 
 
 1855. 
 
 •oaqog; 
 
 ^ r — 1 
 
 40 oo 
 
 R zo 
 
 <rT 
 
 ■^o»ia 
 
 ft. 
 
 9,882 
 
 1854. 
 
 •tfoqog 
 
 . Tj« 
 
 ->Q 
 
 fp oo 
 
 •qo*ia 
 
 ft. 
 
 5,388 
 
 «0 
 
 IQ 
 
 00 
 
 H 
 
 *»eaqog; 
 
 ft. 
 
 534 
 
 'qotqg 
 
 • CO 
 
 •& 00 
 
 rf-H iO 
 
 co^ 
 
 1852. 
 
 •■Baqog 
 
 ft. 
 
 178 
 
 •^ia 
 
 ft. 
 
 1,103 
 
 1851. 
 
 •Eaqog 
 
 ft. 
 
 132 
 
 • 000.10 
 
 • h* 
 
 £ 2 
 
 •qon[a 
 
 • o> 
 
 fi 5 
 
 o 
 
 VO 
 
 oo 
 
 "eaqog; 
 
 ft. 
 
 247 
 
 •naoaQ 
 
 ft. 
 
 385 
 
 •qo®ia 
 
 ft. 
 
 58 
 
 o> 
 
 00 
 
 H 
 
 "B3qoa 
 
 . X* 
 
 itS ^ 
 
 * 000.10 
 
 & 2 
 r — 1 
 
 ■qonig 
 
 ■■r> t'' - 
 
 3d to 
 
 1848. 
 
 *08010 
 
 fi S3 
 
 *qoBig 
 
 jO 
 
 3d co 
 
 Name of 
 plantation. 
 
 ___ 
 
 Kaolagir 
 
 P *r— I 
 
 R 
 
 £h 
 
 £ _ 
 vc3 '“j 
 
 HH 
 
 H-t <M 
 
 a " 
 
 ° 
 
 03 O 
 
 rC C- . 
 
 ■*“ „ Sh =*> 
 
 CO HI «p 
 
 * 2 » 55 
 
 *£ 
 
 a 
 
 IT. ' 1 
 
 d H3 
 
 fldB: 
 
 < ,rH 0 d 
 
 c? P "* 
 
 as 2«fi 
 
 H'uPn 
 
 oS m 
 
 i — i « 
 
 nT-° m N 
 
 •vHH 50 ** 
 
 S’-® 
 
 oo 
 
 *8^-9 a 
 
 „ w . —• 
 
 s ? fi. 
 
 cs a; 
 
 .’flifO 
 
 C0 - 
 
 io c „: 
 w. ® T) © 
 
 -T’S g « ' 
 
 *. C3 03 Oi 
 c3 bJD— 
 
 ® CD GO 
 +3 **— ' , 
 
 gJ|.S 
 
 <u pL, 2 . 
 
 tio 03 a as 
 as’ . ., 
 
 , 
 
 50 S ^ 
 o> "o sT' 
 
 “5.5 -' 
 
 O* q, 
 
 O o 
 . <? 
 se «. 
 
 •fs ^ 
 
 j N 00 
 
 « 'N H 
 
 g * a 
 l§e. 
 
 's g « I 
 .°? += =j 
 
 e 
 
 M 
 
 ^ d c 
 ■p o 
 °3 g; j 
 
 C3 
 
 CD bo c 
 ■** «H p 
 
 M °. ! 
 
 J e i 
 
 ^ to * 
 
 l» l I c 
 
 'g 00 C 
 
 I cti 
 
 i 2 
 
 £* 
 o ,P 
 p 
 
 PUtw 
 © ° 
 . 
 
 to 
 
 vo 
 
 GO 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 907 
 
 vo 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 QO 
 
 e 
 
 co 
 
 00* 
 
 CO 
 
 oa 
 
 VO 
 
 00 
 
 »— 
 
 o 
 
 vo 
 
 cq 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 oo 
 
 fi 
 
 N 
 
 Oa 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 «T 
 
 oo, 
 
 oT 
 
 co 
 
 to 
 
 I 
 
 (M 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 iS 
 
 <M 
 
 Ol 
 
 to 
 
 ♦V 
 
 CO 
 
 C5 
 
 CO 
 
 o\ 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 GO 
 
 9 
 
 N 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 to 
 
 O 
 
 vo 
 
 e 
 
 t£T 
 
 
 t— 
 
 oT 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 00 
 
 *U 99 I£) 
 
 
 *0 
 
 HO 
 
 •3[0Bie; 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 oa 
 
 GQ 
 
 00 
 
 oa 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 oa 
 
 wo 
 
 00 
 
 •uaatif) jg 
 
 oa 
 
 00 
 
 to 
 
 r- 
 
 •X 
 
 co 
 
 •^ia 
 
 of 
 
 T* 
 
 00 
 
 Oa 
 
 vo 
 
 c? 
 
 a 
 
 CD -2 
 
 1*8 3 
 
 a S 
 
 p« 
 
 rd 
 
 be 
 
 \cti 
 
 jo 
 
 *cS 
 
 £ 
 
 'c3 
 
 w 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 *c3 
 
 <3 
 
 be 
 
 rS- 
 
 73 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 -— ■ ■).■■■■■■-—— — — ■ ■■■ 
 
 r-4 
 
 N 
 
 «_. 
 
 O 
 
 Jl^ 
 
 oo 
 
 pH 
 
 fi 
 
 5,231 
 
 147 
 
 ■ 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 OO 
 
 
 
 o> 
 
 e 
 
 Oa 
 
 Oa 
 
 • 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *"• 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 oa 
 
 
 VO 
 
 ov 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 VO 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 •e 
 
 CO 
 
 VO^ 
 
 • 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 oo 
 
 
 t-H 
 
 pH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO* 
 
 
 CO 
 
 VO 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 N 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 r-^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 QO 
 
 
 c-H 
 
 C-H 
 
 
 
 r*4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 t— 
 
 GH 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 e 
 
 ! i 
 
 c\ 
 
 o. 
 
 o 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 vo 
 
 Oi' 
 
 •* 
 
 • 
 
 00 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 r— < 
 
 
 
 r— « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 pH 
 
 o 
 
 (M 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 oa 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 vo 
 
 £* 
 
 « 
 
 Oa^ 
 
 CN 
 
 
 to 
 
 eo 
 
 i—i 
 
 to' 
 
 
 uo 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 &g 
 
 CO § 
 
 4^ CO 
 
 a 
 
 cS 
 
 cd 
 
 n3 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 rO 
 
 c5 
 
 *4 
 
 o3 
 
 a> 
 
 H ^ 
 ci ^ 
 
 S' 'g 
 
 t* 2 
 
 CD rj 
 
 £ 5 
 
 o g 
 
 rd t+4 
 
 a" | 
 
 * a 
 
 CD 
 
 fH. 
 
 <D <D 
 rd-d 
 
 H + 3 - 
 
 *h 
 
 .O 
 
 >» 
 
 03 . 
 
 S'S 
 
 H | 
 
 §i 
 
 n3 
 
 1,2 
 
 .s-g 
 
 •g I 
 § a 
 
 flS 
 
 o _ 
 
 05 2 
 
 © 2, 
 
 02 O 1 
 
 <u 
 
 1§ 
 
 ® $ 
 
 d CU 
 
 .S 
 
 bC tj d 
 
 d b S 
 
 .a « o 
 > •>- 
 a to ■s 
 
 -§ a ^ 
 
 43 «3 Cj 
 
 _!2 c3 . 
 
 2o5 
 
 ^3 g 
 
 O 
 
 4J ^ QQ 
 
 be of 2 
 
 d r e ^ 
 
 r C +3 
 
 ^ rj CO 
 
 nd “S^rd 
 
 '3 <m a 
 
 „ ci 
 ^ Nd 
 
 a •£ a 
 ■ M s s 
 
 ® 
 
 c3 d 
 a- *> Tx3 
 
 O m O 
 
 'o jd ^ 
 
 0> ^ a 
 
 £^5 S 
 H Q> 
 
 „ S' as 
 « “ u 
 . a> 
 
 **H >• 
 
 o £ 
 
 T3 
 
 rH 
 
 a> 
 
 • p4 
 
 tf: 
 
 • H 
 
 a> 
 
 m. 
 
 eS 
 
 0> 
 
 ?-» 
 
 o 
 
 Q> 
 
 n3 
 
 CD 
 
 dl 
 
 4^» 
 
 <d 
 
 o 
 
 & 
 
 a) 
 
 rd 
 
 T5 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 M- 
 
 O 
 
 4^> 
 
 U2 
 
 Q> 
 
 £ 
 
 d 
 
 4JI 
 
 ?-* 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 Ol 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 c3 
 
 ft 
 
 a> 
 
 rd 
 
 c8 
 
 ■73 
 
 CD 
 
 +3 
 
 CD 
 
 (D 
 
 o3 
 
 >> 
 
 ci 
 
 2 
 
 »73 
 
 d 
 
 03 
 
 ^4 
 
 04 
 
 <4 
 
 be 
 
 a 
 
 • H 
 f-4 
 
 d 
 
 M 
 
 CD 
 
 d 
 
 4-3 
 
 35 
 
 (D 
 
 >a 
 
 H 
 
 'rJ 
 
 CD 
 
 -d 
 
 H 
 
908 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Receipts and Expenditure of the Government plantations , 1862-1S6"9. 
 
 
 I 
 
 1862-63. 
 
 1863-64. 
 
 1864-65. 
 
 1865-66. 
 
 1867 68. 
 
 1868-60. 
 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Receipts ... 
 
 *1,11,006 
 
 1,04,387 
 
 
 82,180 
 
 7,275 
 
 • »o- 
 
 Expenditure, 
 
 65,000 
 
 64,300 
 
 59,199 
 
 68,000 
 
 26,000 
 
 14,507 
 
 Balance 
 
 46,006 
 
 40,087 
 
 
 24,180 
 
 
 • M 
 
 * This does not include credit for 700,^00 plants distributed gratis ; also seeds 
 for which Rs. 14,060 might have been realized by selling to planters in Kangra. 
 The records are too imperfect to give the full details for eacb year. 
 
 Actual outturn of tea from plantations of Kumaon, Delira Dun, 
 and Kangra Valley for tlie last ten years : — 
 
 1871 
 
 
 619,072 
 
 lb. 
 
 1872 
 
 • • • 
 
 741,769 
 
 99 
 
 1873 
 
 • •• 
 
 981,854 
 
 99 
 
 1874 
 
 • it 
 
 1,217,975 
 
 » 
 
 1875 
 
 • • • 
 
 1,289,532 
 
 99 
 
 Estimated crop 
 
 for 1881 
 
 • •• 
 
 1876 
 
 Ml 
 
 1,535,300 
 
 lb. 
 
 1877 
 
 • •t 
 
 1,398,785 
 
 99 
 
 187 a 
 
 • M 
 
 1,632,054 
 
 99 
 
 1879 
 
 Ml 
 
 1,800,000 
 
 99 
 
 1880 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,945,181 
 
 99 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 1,868,900 
 
 99 
 
 uncertain. 
 
 Distribution of Tea Seeds. 
 
 From the Kumaon } Garhwdl and Dehra Diin Nurseries , 1860-67. 
 
 1860-61. 
 
 1861-62. 
 
 1862-63. 
 
 1863-64. 
 
 1864-65. 
 
 1865-66. 
 
 1866-67.. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 . Mds. srs. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 Mds. srs. 
 
 2,220 0 
 
 No record 
 found. 
 
 2,859 32 
 
 2,361 0 
 
 2,842 0 
 
 2,103 0 
 
 1,643 O 
 
 The records for 1861-62 are not procurable. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES.- SOS'' 
 
 The following references are to some works bearing on the Botany, Scientific) and Economic, of 
 the Hiniiilayan districts of these provinces : — 
 
 REFERENCES. 
 
 Scientific Botant. 
 
 1. Hortus Indicus Malabaricus continens Regni Malabarici omnis generis- 
 
 plantas variores, by W. Van Rheede Van Drakeustein and J. Casearium. 
 Amsterdam, 1678-36. This work contains many plates with names in 
 
 the Persian and Hindi characters. 
 
 « 
 
 2. Herbarium Amboinense, by G. E. Rurnph, edited by Burmann. Amsterdam, 
 
 1741-5. The descriptions are in Latin and Dutch, and refer to many 
 Indian plants. 
 
 3. Flora lndica, by N. J. Burmann. Amsterdam, 1768. It contains a number 
 
 of good plates of rare Iniadn plants. 
 
 4. Indian Cyperaceae, by Professor Rottler. Copenhagen, 1773. 
 
 5. Flora Cochin- chinensis, by J. de Loureiro, ed. Willdenow. Berlin., 1793. 
 
 6. Plants of the coast of Coromandel, by Dr. W. Roxburgh. London, 1795- 
 
 1819. 
 
 7. Flora lndica: or description of Indian plants, by the same, edition Carey. 
 
 Serampur, 1832. The same, edition C. B. Clarke. Calcutta, 1874; 
 this is the edition referred to in the preceding pages. 
 
 8. Flora of British India, by J. D. Hooker and others. London, 1875-8.1. This 
 
 work is constantly referred to in the preceding pages. 
 
 9. Genera plantarum ad exemplaria imprimis in Herbariis Kewensibus ser- 
 
 vata definita, by G. Bentham and J. D. Hooker. London, 1862-67. Con- 
 tains Rauunculacece-Cornacece. 
 
 10. Descriptions of the genera and species of plants of the order Labiatae, by 
 
 G. Bentham. London, 1832-36. 
 
 11. Le jardin fruitier du Museum, ou iconographiedes toutesles especes et vari- 
 
 etes d’arbres fruitiers cultives dans cet etablissement, par J. Decaisne. 
 Paris, 1858-69. 
 
 12. Prodromus sive ennmeratio contracta ordinum, generum, specierumque 
 
 plantarum hujusque cognitarum, by A. P. De Candolle. Paris, 1824-73. 
 
 13. Genera Plantarum secundum ordines naturales disposita, by Endlicher. 
 
 Vindobonoe. 1836-40. Supplementa to the preceding. 1842-47. 
 CnuipositEe India Cae, by C. B. Clarke, Calcutta, 1876, 
 
 Commelynaceas and Cyrtandracc-ae by the same. Calcutta. 
 
 Ferns. 
 
 14. The Ferns of Southern India, by Captain R. H. Bcddome. Madras, 1863-64. 
 
 15. Ferns of British India, being figures and descriptions of the ferns of Bri- 
 
 tish India, exclusive of those figured in the preceding work, by the same. 
 Madras, 1866-70. 
 
 16. Species Filicum: or description of the known ferns, by the same. London, 
 
 1846-64. 
 
 17. leones Filicum : or figures and descriptions of ferns, by the name and Gre- 
 
 ville. London, 1831. 
 
 Century of ferns and a second century of ferns, by the same. London, 
 1854-64. 
 
9-10 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS' 
 
 18. Filices Exotic® r or coloured figures and descriptions of exotic ferns, by the 
 
 same. 1859. 
 
 19. Synopsis Filicum, by the same. London, 1868. 
 
 20. Genera Filicum: or illustrations of the ferns and other allied genera-, by 
 
 F. Bauer and Sir W. J. Hooker. London, 1842. 
 
 21. Index Filicum: A.-Gon., by T; Moore. London, 1857-63. 
 
 22. Ferns, British and Exotic, by E. J. Lowe. London, 1872. 
 
 23. Natural history of new and rare ferns, being a supplement to the preceding-, 
 
 by the same. London, 1868. 
 
 Ferns of northern India, by C. B. Clarke. London, 1880. 
 
 Mosses. 
 
 24. Musci exotici : containing, figures and descriptions of new or little known 
 
 foreign mosses and other cryptogamic species, by W. J. Hooker. Lon- 
 don, 1818-20. 
 
 25. Historia muscorum in qua 600 species describuntur cum appendice et 
 
 indice synonymyormn, J. J. Dillenii. Edinburgh, 1811. 
 
 2 6 Synopsis muscorum frondosorum, by C. Muller. Berlin, 1849-51. 
 
 Mosses of northern India, by Mitten. London. 
 
 Lichens. 
 
 27. Introduction to Cryptogamic Botany,, by Revd. M. J. Berkeley. London,, 
 
 1857. 
 
 28. Selecta Fungorum carpologia, by L. R. and C. Tulasne. Paris, 1861-65. 
 
 29. Lichens : J. A. S. Ben., X. 828. 
 
 30. Systema Mycolagicum, sistens Fungorum genera et species, by Fries. Fun- 
 
 dee, 1&21-28. 
 
 Pines. 
 
 31. Synopsis Coniferarum, by Endlicher. St. Gall, 1847. 
 
 32. Pinetum : being a synopsis of all the coniferous plants as yet known, by 
 
 G. Gordon. London, 1875. 
 
 33. Description of the genus Pious, illustrated with figures, directions as to, 
 
 cultivation, and remarks on the several species of the family Conifer®, 
 by R. K. Lambert. London, 1828-37. 
 
 Others. 
 
 34. Melastomacearum in Museo Parisiensi monographic® descriptionis ten- 
 
 tamen, by C. Naudin. Paris, 1849-53. 
 
 35. Rumphia sive commentatio botanic® imprimis de plantis Indite orientalis* 
 
 by Blume. Leyden, 1836-48. 
 
 36. Flora orientalis sive enumeratio plantarum in oriente a Grcecia et ^Egypto 
 
 ad Indi® fines observatarum. Basil, 1867-72, 
 
 37. Illustrations of the genus Carex (Cyperacece), by F. Boot. London, 1858- 
 
 67. 
 
 38. Orchids and how to grow them in India, by S. Jennings. London, 1875. 
 
 39. Genera and species of orchidaceous plants, by J. Lindley. London, 1830- 
 
 38. 
 
 30. Sertum orcliidaceum, by the same. London, 1838 . 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 911 
 
 •41. -Flora Indica, being a systematic account of the plants of British India, by 
 J. D. Hooker and T. Thomson. London, 1855. Though superseded by 
 the ‘Flora of British India,’ this volume is valuable for its introduc- 
 tion, giving a history of Indian Botany and the geographical distribu- 
 tion of plants. 
 
 42. Exotic Flora : or figures and descriptions of new , rare or interesting exotic 
 
 plants, by Sir W. J. Hooker. Edinburgh, 1823-27. 
 
 43. Historia naturalis Balmarum, by C. F. de Martius. Munich, 1823-50. 
 
 44. Balms of the British East Indies, by W. Griffith. Calcutta, 1 850. 
 
 45. Rhododendrons of the Sikkim-Hiinalaya, by J. D. Hooker. London, 1849-51. 
 
 46. Panjab plants, comprising botanical and vernacular names, and the uses of 
 
 most of the trees, shrubs, and herbs of economical value, growing within 
 the province ; intended as a hand-book for officers and residents in the 
 Panjab, by J. L. Stewart, M.D. Lahore, 1869. 
 
 47. A catalogue of the plants of the Pan jab and Sindh, to which are added some 
 
 others that from their present geographical proximity may be found 
 hereafter to occur in the Panjab, by J. E. T. Aitchison, M.D. London, 
 1869. 
 
 48. Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of the Natural History of the 
 
 Himalayan Mountains and of the Flora of Cashmere, by Dr. J. F. Royle. 
 London, 1839-40. 
 
 49. Plantce Asiatic* Variores: or descriptions and figures of a select number of 
 
 unpublished East India plants, by Dr. Wallich. London, 1830-32. 
 
 50. List of dried specimens of plants in the East India Company’s Museum, by 
 
 the -same. (Calcutta? 1840-48). 
 
 61. leones Plantarum Indioe orientalis, by R. Wight. Madras, 1838-56. 
 
 52. Prodromus Florse Peninsula} Indise orientalis, by R. Wight and G. A. 
 
 Walker-Arnott. London, 1834. 
 
 53. Illustrations of Indian Botany : or figures illustrative of each of the natural 
 
 orders of Indian plants described in the preceding works, but not confined 
 to them, by R. Wight. Madras, 1838-50. 
 
 54. Illustrations of Indian Botany, principally of the southern parts of the 
 
 Peninsula, by R. Wight. Glasgow, 1831. 
 
 55. The Indian Botanical works of W. Griffith, arranged by J. MacClelland. 
 
 London, 1848-54. Containing notes on, and plates of, many species. 
 
 56. A hand-book to the Indian Flora, by Major H. Drury. Travancore and 
 
 Madras, 1864-69. 
 
 Economic Botany. 
 
 My main authorities on the economic botany of Kumaon are Madden, Stewart, 
 and Brandis. 
 
 Madden’s articles will be found in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, 
 XV., 79 (1845) ; XVI. j 226, 596 ; XVII. (I ), 349, and XVIII., 603. Also 
 in the Journal of the Agri-Horticultural Society of Calcutta, IV. (184o) ; 
 223 : VII., 75, 129; and VIII., 99; and An. Mag. N. H. on Nepalese flora. 
 Notes upon the pines of the N. W. Himalaya by Dr. Cleghorn. J. Agri-IIort. 
 Cal., XIV. (1866). 
 
912 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Report on the deodar forests of Basahir, by Drs. Brandis and Stewart and Cap- 
 tain E. Wood. Calcutta, 1865. 
 
 Keport on the food of the inhabitants of the district of Bijnor, by Dr. J. L. 
 Stewart. Sel Bee., North-Western Provinces, XXXVIII., 25 ; II., N. S., 
 463. The same writer’s article on ‘ The Sub-Siwalik Tract, with 
 especial reference to the Bijnor forest and its trees, and an account of 
 their useful products,” appeared in the J. Agri-IIort., XIII., 265, in 1864. 
 
 Statistics of Kumaon, p. 344, Agra, 1851, gives a list of the principal agricul- 
 tural products based on Madden. The Garhwal Settlement Report, 
 Allahabad, 1866, gives a similar list (app. 13) based on the same authority. 
 
 Forests of Kuraaun. In. Rec. Supp., VIII. 5— -15. Records, North-Western 
 Provinces, Pt. XVIII , 374. on the Bhabar and Tarai 
 
 On the cultivation of Imphee, by N. A. Dalzell, J. R. A. S., XIX., 39. 
 
 Forests. 
 
 Timber trees, timber and fancy woods, as also the forests of India and of East- 
 ern and Southern Asia, by E. Balfour. Madras, 1862. 
 
 Collins’ Report on the caoutchouc of commerce. London, 1872. 
 
 The useful plants of India, by Major H. Drury. Madras, 1858. 
 
 English index of the plants of India, by H. Piddington. Calcutta, 1832. 
 
 Cyclopcediaof India and of Eastern and Southern Asia, commercial, industrial, 
 and scientific, by E. Balfour. Madras, 1873. 
 
 The Forest Flora of North-West and Central India ; a hand-book of the indige- 
 nous trees and shrubs of those countries, commenced by the late J L. 
 Stewart, M.D., continued and completed by D. Brandis, l’li. D , London, 
 1874. By far the most valuable of all the preceding for its accuracy and 
 its practical applicat : on of science to economic purposes. 
 
 Report on insects destructive to woods and forest^, by R. Thompson. Sel. Rec., 
 North-Western Provinces (2nd ser.), I., 377. 
 
 On the seasoning of wood for practical purposes, by G. Paton. Ibid., V., 444. 
 
 Experiments on the strength of Sal timber, by C. B Thornhill. Ibid., V., 454. 
 
 Report on the present state of the Sub-tlimalayan forests below Kumaon and 
 Garhwal (1861). by Major H. Ramsay, Gaz., Norik- Western Provinces , 
 Suppt., December, 19th, 1861 and Webber’s forest survey. 
 
 Report on the forests in the Bhagirathi Valley, by Major G. Pearson, Sel Rec., 
 North-Western Provinces (2nd ser.), II., 117 ; III , 106. 
 
 Report on the Sub-Himalayan forests of Kumaun and Garhwal, by the same. 
 Ibid. ,11., 125. 
 
 Report on the Deodar forests of Jaunsar-Bawar by the same. Ibid., II., 373 ; 
 III., 129. 
 
 Tobacco. 
 
 Report on the production of tobacco in India, by J. E. O'Connor. Ca'cutta, 1873. 
 This work gives a summary of all the information available up to the 
 date of its publication. 
 
 Synopsis of our knowledge of tobacco cultivation and manufacture, by P. 
 Robinson, Cir. H. II. H of Board of Revenue, North-Western Provin- 
 ces, dated 6th September, 1872. Contains anwers to some fifty -five 
 questions, compiled from reports and works, a list of which is given. 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 913 
 
 Papers regarding the tobacco monopoly in the Presidency of Fort St. George, 
 and the proposed levy of a tax on tobacco in the other presidencies. 
 Calcutta, 1870. 
 
 Silk. 
 
 Some account of Silk in India, especially of the various attempts to encourage 
 and extend sericulture in that country, by J. Geoghegan. Calcutta. 
 
 Annual Reports on sericulture in Dehra Dun in the Proceedings of Govern- 
 ment, 1878-81. 
 
 Notes on the Bombyeidse as at present known to us, by Captain T. Hutton, 
 Suppi., Gaz. of India , for September 2nd, 1871. 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 Cotton : an account of its culture in the Bombay Presidency, by W. R. Cassels. 
 Bombay, 1862. 
 
 The Cotton Hand-book of Bengal, by J. G. Medlicott. Calcutta, 1862. This 
 work gives from official sources a digest of all the information available 
 on the subject of the production of cotton in these provinces to the 
 date of its publication (pp. 166-217.) 
 
 Parliamentary papers on * Cotton Cultivation in Bengal.’ 1857. 
 
 Culture of cotton in India, by J. F. Royle. London, 1851. 
 
 Review of measures for the improved cultivation of cotton in India, by the 
 same. 1859. 
 
 Cotton in India, by Dr, Forbes Watson. London, 1859. 
 
 Experiments in cotton cultivation in the North-Western Provinces, Sel. Rec., 
 North-Western Provinces, I. N S., 114. Ibid., III., S. S., 91. Thomason 
 despatches, II., 38. 
 
 Area and outturn of cotton crop, North-Western Provinces, 1869-70 — 1874-75, in 
 Sel. Rec., North-Western Provinces, IV.-VI. 
 
 Cotton in India, Cal. Rev., XXXVII., 1. 
 
 Cotton soils, J., A. S., Ben., V., 314. 
 
 Reports of the Cotton Commissioner with the Government of India. 
 
 Reports of the Manchester Cotton Supply Association from 1858. 
 
 Hand-book of the Cotton Trade, by Ellison. London, 1868. 
 
 Administration of the East India Company, by Kaye. App. (c.), 689. 
 
 Annual Reports of the Board of Revenue, North-Western Provinces, on the 
 culture and outturn of cotton in these provinces. 
 
 Notices of experiments in the Saharanpur Botanical Gardens. Reports passim. 
 
 Cotton trade in India, J. R. A. S., XVII., 346. 
 
 Cotton in Dharwar by Marshman. Ibid., XIX., 351. 
 
 Fibres, &c. 
 
 Fibrous plants of India fitted for cordage, clothing, and paper, with an account 
 of the cultivation and preparation of flax, hemp, and their substitutes, by 
 J. F. Royle, M.D. London, 1855. This valuable work gives a sum- 
 mary of nearly all that was known up to its publication regarding the 
 fibres of grasses, sedges, liliaceous plants, plantains, palms, flax, jute, 
 hemp, and nettles. 
 
 115 
 
914 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 The cultivation and manufacture of flax in the North-Western Provinces, by 
 Dr. Jameson. Sel. Rec., North-Western Provinces, Pt. XXXV., 4, and 
 III., N. S., 332. 
 
 Notes on the subject of paper-making in India, by W. S. Stiven, M.D. Sel. 
 
 Rec., North-Western Provinces, III., N. S., 249. 
 
 Report on the process of tanning observed in the Government tannery, Cawnpore. 
 Ibid. (2nd ser.), III., 201. 
 
 Note on the Chu-ma or grass-cloth plant of China. J. , Agri-Hort. Calcutta, VI., 
 219 ; VII. Part 1, 18 ; Part II., 36. 
 
 Notice of the Rheeas or nettle-grasses and other textile fibres of Assam. Ibid., 
 VII., Part I., 216 ; Part II., 62. 
 
 Report on the trial of Greig’s machine for extracting Rheea-fibre at Saharanpur 
 in 1872, by Lieutenant-Colonel Hyde. Calcutta, 1872. 
 
 Report on the preparation and uses of Rheea-fibre, by Dr. J. Forbes Watson. 
 London, 1875. 
 
 Preliminary report of the Committee appointed by Government to test Rheea- 
 fibre-extracting machines in the competitive trial held at Saharanpur in 
 Septembr-October, 1879. Allahabad, 1879. 
 
 Note, — The works marked, with an asterisk have been consulted by Mr. F. Duthie in his 
 notice of Tea^cultivation in these provinces. 
 
 Tea. 
 
 Report on the tea-plant of Upper Assam, by W. Griffith. Calcutta, 1836. 
 Account of Assam, by W. Robinson. Calcutta, 1841. 
 
 Notes on the cultivation of tea in Assam by J. C. Marshman, J. R. A. S., XIX., 316. 
 
 * Tea cultivation in Kumaon, by J. H. Batten, Ibid., X., n. a., 131, and J. Agri.- 
 
 Hort., Col. V., Pt. IV. (1878). 
 
 * Report on the culture and manufacture of Tea in Kumaon and Garhwal, by Dr. 
 
 W. Jameson. Calcutta, 1843-46 (J., Agri -Hort., Ben., Vols. II. and IV.) 
 
 * Report on the progress of the culture of the China Tea plant in the Himalayas 
 
 from 1835 to 1847, by J. Forbes Royle. London, 1849. 
 
 * Report on the Tea plantations in the North-Western Provinces, byR. Fortune. 
 
 Agra, 1851 : and Sel. Rec., N.-W. P. (2nd ser.), V., 401. 
 
 Journey to the Tea-countries of China, by the same. London, 1852. 
 
 Suggestions for the importation of Tea-makers, implements, and seeds from 
 China to the North-Western Provinces, by Dr. W. Jameson. Agra, 1852. 
 Report showing the present condition and progress of the Government Tea plan- 
 tations, by the same. Gaz., N - W. P., Suppt., 26th March, 1861. 
 Government Tea plantations : the yield of the factories and the support given to 
 private capitalists, by the same (1862). Sel. Rec., N.-W. P. (2nd ser.), V., 422. 
 
 * See also the annual reports on the working of the Government Tea plantations : 
 
 that for 1862-63 is given in Sel. Rec., N.-W. P., V. (2nd ser.), 430; for 
 1863-64 in Ibid., Pt. XLIII., 1 ; for 1864-65 in Ibid , Pt. XLIV., 1 ; for 
 1865-66 in Ibid., Pt. XLVI., 1; for 1866-67, Ibid., 82; for 1867-68 
 in Ibid., I., 1 ; for 1868-69 in Ibid., II., 433, &c. 
 
 * Indian Agriculturist, passim. 
 
 * Indian Tea Culture, by A. Burrell. J. Soc. Arts, xxv. (1877). 
 
 * Kumaon Tea. Saunders’ Month. Mag., March, 1851, p. 389. 
 
OP THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 915 
 
 * Tea Committee Reports, including letters from Wallich, Falconer and others, 
 
 1834-38. 
 
 * Tropical Agriculture, by P. S. Simmonds, 1877. 
 
 Drugs. 
 
 Materia Indica, or articles employed by the Hindoos and others in medicine, 
 arts, and agriculture, by Dr. Ainslie. London, 1826. 
 
 The Bengal Dispensatory, chiefly compiled from the works of Roxburgh, Wallich, 
 Ainslie, Wight, Arnott, Royle, Pereira, Bindley, Richard, and Fee, by 
 W. B. O’Shaughnessy. Calcutta, 1842. 
 
 The Pharmacopoeia of India, by E. J. Waring, M.D. London. 1868. 
 
 Remarks on the uses of some of the bazaar medicines and common medical 
 plants of India, by E. J. Waring. London, 1874. 
 
 The Indigenous Drugs of India : or short descriptive notices of the medicines, 
 both vegetable and mineral, in common use amongst the natives of India, 
 by K. L. Dey. Calcutta, 1867. 
 
 Supplement to the Pharmacopoeia of India, or a catalogue of Indian synonyms 
 of the medicinal plants, products, inorganic and organic substances con- 
 tained in that work, with explanatory and descriptive remarks, & c., in 
 fourteen languages, by Moodeen Sherriff. Madras, 1869. 
 
 APPENDIX A. 1. 
 
 Table of rates according to which farmers of the forest dues in 
 Kumaon were authorised to collect in 1847. 
 
 Each cart-load of wood ... 
 
 „ of sal logs ( lattas ) ... 
 
 wooden sugar- mill 
 cart-load of rafters ( Itaris ), 
 
 „ of ebony ... 
 
 „ of bambus 
 
 pony-load of ditto ... 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 bhangy-load of ditto 
 cart-load of bhdbar grass... 
 pony-load ditto ... 
 
 head-load ditto 
 
 cart-load of tat reeds 
 pony-load of ditto ... 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 cart-load of grass 
 „ of munj 
 bullock-load ditto ... 
 
 head-load ditto • •0 
 
 gun of catcehu 
 
 >» 
 
 » 
 
 99 
 
 >9 
 
 ft 
 
 It 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 It 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 it 
 
 tt 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 tt 
 
 A. p. 
 6 0 
 8 0 
 8 0 
 8 0 
 4 0 
 6 0 
 0 6 
 
 0 3 
 
 1 0 
 6 0 
 0 6 
 0 3 
 6 0 
 0 6 
 0 3 
 6 0 
 4 0 
 0 6 
 0 3 
 8 0 
 
 A. p. 
 
 Each 
 
 cart-load of burnt lime 
 
 HI 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 
 „ kunkur 
 
 ,,, 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 
 pony-load of lime 
 
 in 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 }> 
 
 ass-load ditto 
 
 Ml 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 >> 
 
 pony-load of lac 
 
 ■ . • 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 5) 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 
 in 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 >> 
 
 pony-load of piparmor 
 
 • • • 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 >5 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 
 Ml 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 55 
 
 cart-load of charcoal 
 
 ... 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 55 
 
 bhangy-load of baskets 
 
 • •• 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 ditto of wooden utensils. 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 55 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 
 III 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 >5 
 
 pony-load of ruina 
 
 • • • 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 yy 
 
 head-load of ditto 
 
 • •• 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 
 Catechu furnaces. 
 
 
 Rs. a. 
 
 One in Kota 
 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 5 ) 
 
 „ Chaubhainsi... 
 
 • • • 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 yy 
 
 „ Tallades 
 
 • •• 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 yy 
 
 „ Chhakhata ... 
 
 0«« 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 The grazing dues were three annas for each buffalo and one anna for each 
 cow or bullock pasturing in the Bhabar during the year, with the following exemp- 
 tions: — Calves of all kinds up to two years of age, all cattle actually employed 
 in carriage, all cattle bond fide the property of a hill head-man possessing a lease, 
 all cattle passing through and not stay'ng more than five days, all cattle belong- 
 ing to the head-men of the Bhabar villages, and all belonging to cultivators 
 actually residing in the Bhabar all the year round. 
 
916 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 APPENDIX A. 2. 
 
 The following table shows the duties which the farmers were 
 permitted to levy by Mr. Shore 1 in Delira Dun in 1826: — 
 
 Table of duties levied in the Ddn forests in 1826. 
 
 Article. 
 
 Per 4 bullock 
 cart = 20 
 maunds. 
 
 Per 3 bullock 
 cart = 15 
 
 maunds. 
 
 Per 2 bullock 
 
 cart = 10 
 
 maunds. 
 
 Mule or buf- 
 
 falo = 4 
 
 maunds. 
 
 Bullock or 
 
 pony = 3 
 
 OQ 
 
 P 
 
 r* 
 
 cS 
 
 s 
 
 Hc« 
 
 i—i 
 
 II m 
 'd'g 
 
 c3 H 
 
 O P 
 
 $ a 
 
 Head-load = 
 
 ri 
 
 g 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 -|C* 
 
 
 Rs. a. 
 
 P- 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 Rs. a. 
 
 P- 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 A. 
 
 p- 
 
 A. p. 
 
 A. 
 
 p- 
 
 Sisu, tun and ebony of 
 
 5 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 12 
 
 0 
 
 2 8 
 
 0 
 
 1 0 
 
 0 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 6 0 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 any size. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Each wooden sugar-mill, 
 
 0 12 
 
 0 
 
 0 12 
 
 0 
 
 0 12 
 
 0 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 . • • 
 
 .. 
 
 • 
 
 Bambus 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 6 
 
 0 3 
 
 0 
 
 0 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 Beam for sugar-mill ... 
 
 1 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 12 
 
 0 
 
 0 8 
 
 0 
 
 0 3 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 1 0 
 
 0 
 
 & 
 
 Sal of any size 
 
 0 8 
 
 0 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 0 
 
 0 1 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 & 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 Eire-wood and timber 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 6 
 
 0 3 
 
 0 
 
 0 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 not expressly specified. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Bdbar and munj grass 
 
 0 8 
 
 6 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 0 
 
 0 1 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 Ringals for hukka stems, 
 
 3 0 
 
 0 
 
 2 4 
 
 0 
 
 1 8 
 
 0 
 
 0 10 
 
 0 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 4 0 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 A 'al reed for matting ... 
 
 1 4 
 
 0 
 
 0 15 
 
 0 
 
 0 10 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 1 6 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 Khat or catechu 
 
 5 10 
 
 0 
 
 4 3 
 
 0 
 
 2 13 
 
 0 
 
 1 2 
 
 0 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 7 0 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 Lac ••• ••• 
 
 1 12 
 
 0 
 
 1 5 
 
 0 
 
 0 14 
 
 0 
 
 0 6 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 2 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 Lime ... ... 
 
 0 4 
 
 0 
 
 a 3 
 
 0 
 
 0 2 
 
 0 
 
 0 0 
 
 9 
 
 0 
 
 & 
 
 0 3 
 
 0 
 
 & 
 
 Charcoal ... 
 
 0 8 
 
 0 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 0 4 
 
 0 
 
 0 1 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 6 
 
 0 
 
 . 
 
 3 
 
 APPENDIX A. 3. 
 
 Revenue of each Forest Division, 
 
 Year. 
 
 Kumaon. 
 
 Naini 
 
 Tal. 
 
 Ram- 
 ie het. 
 
 Garh- 
 
 wal. 
 
 Dehra 
 
 Hun. 
 
 Bhagi- 
 
 rathi. 
 
 Jaunsar 
 
 Bawar. 
 
 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 Rs. 
 
 1865-66 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,59,544 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,48,305 
 
 40,431 
 
 ... 
 
 
 1866-67 
 
 
 1,60,369 
 
 
 » » t 
 
 2,28,357 
 
 43,729 
 
 
 ... 
 
 1867-68 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,78,459 
 
 ... 
 
 • • 
 
 1,77,359 
 
 41,156 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 1868-69 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,72,601 
 
 . • • 
 
 lit 
 
 1,88,733 
 
 40,333 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 
 
 1869-70 
 
 • •• 
 
 2,55,333 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 1,48,972 
 
 84,252 
 
 4,508 
 
 *•« 
 
 1870-71 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,05,601 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 1,11,745 
 
 31,943 
 
 15,451 
 
 36,689* 
 
 le7 L-72 
 
 
 1,10,152 
 
 
 1,295 
 
 1,30,380 
 
 90,819 
 
 5,36,924 
 
 1,28,891 
 
 1872-73 
 
 
 2,67,339 
 
 1,016 
 
 1,981 
 
 2,08,700 
 
 90,233 
 
 6,94,013 
 
 3,23,834 
 
 1873-7-1 
 
 » « • 
 
 3,65,687 
 
 1,346 
 
 3,292 
 
 1,53,796 
 
 78,270 
 
 4,66,591 
 
 6,12,336 
 
 1874-75 
 
 • • • 
 
 2,76,372 
 
 1,729 
 
 6,000 
 
 1,16,948 
 
 81,806 
 
 2,84,376 
 
 2,62,017 
 
 1875-76 
 
 • • • 
 
 2,97,334 
 
 5,124 
 
 15,697 
 
 2,00,946 
 
 67,521 
 
 1,00,480 
 
 2,22,247 
 
 1876-77 
 
 
 2,18,166 
 
 18,010 
 
 11,885 
 
 1,40,322 
 
 67,033 
 
 87,964 
 
 2,03,628 
 
 1877-78 
 
 • •• 
 
 1,79,364 
 
 15,285 
 
 12,073 
 
 1,73,348 
 
 77,221 
 
 1,21,129 
 
 2,07,098 
 
 1878-79 
 
 
 1,70,856 
 
 17,155 
 
 53,364 
 
 1,31,875 
 
 48,490 
 
 1 ,02,822 
 
 2,62,436 
 
 1879-80 
 
 ... 
 
 1,65,574 
 
 21,426 
 
 7,165 
 
 1,11,794 
 
 41,482 
 
 50,970 
 
 2,14,456 
 
 A 'uie. — In 1879-80 the Tons division was separated from Jaunsar-Bawar, and 
 ior that year the adjusted accounts show Rs. 43,875 for Jaunsar-Bawar and 
 R». 1,70,581 for the Tons division. 
 
 1 Mr. Shore to Commissioner, Kumaon, 16th September,. 1826, 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 91 7 
 
 X 
 
 I— I 
 
 Q 
 
 55 
 
 W 
 
 Ph 
 
 a* 
 
 <4 
 
 A 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
 > 
 
 Q 
 
 H 
 c n 
 W 
 pq 
 
 O 
 
 W 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 pq 
 
 fe 
 
 o 
 
 w 
 
 pH 
 
 t3 
 
 H 
 
 « 
 
 fz; 
 
 pq 
 
 PM 
 
 M 
 
 W 
 
 £ 
 
 >» 
 
 CO 
 
 •t<> 
 
 i~o 
 
 .-O 
 
 e 
 
 K> 
 
 -00 
 
 K) 
 
 !3> 
 
 S 
 
 •<S' 
 
 r-ij 
 
 5* 
 
 £ 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 ?»S 
 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 e 
 
 5> 
 
 *» 
 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 e 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO rH GM 
 
 05 I> 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc^* iO 
 
 JV- G'l 
 
 in 
 
 
 PP 
 
 QQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO t- 05 
 
 rH CO 
 
 r-i CO 
 
 ft 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO to o? 
 
 »> A 
 
 05 o 
 
 •S fN 
 
 •'Cj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S'* o 
 
 co 
 
 G'l r-H <M 
 
 »— • Gl G'l G'l 
 
 PP 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 GO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 X>» 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 in 
 
 co 
 
 h b (M O 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 si co 
 
 CO t'- CO 
 
 05 CO 
 
 xn o 
 
 
 < 
 
 CO 
 
 pq 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 9 
 
 m 
 
 5 
 
 : 
 
 
 CO r— 1 iO 
 ccf rfT 
 
 ^ co 
 r>' o 
 
 CM^ 
 
 05 m 
 
 & 
 
 *■3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TJ4 X"- ^ 
 
 05 O 
 
 00 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of rH H 
 
 r-H (M 
 
 r-4 •— i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 "4* 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 05 O 
 
 t— rH 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CO 
 
 05 
 
 lOOlD 
 
 in r-H 
 
 in rt« 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 in 
 
 Tt4 
 
 CO 
 
 hN CO CO 
 
 CO o 
 
 CO r-H 
 
 • H 
 
 43 
 
 pq 
 
 pq 
 
 ? 
 
 • 
 
 
 : 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 co 
 
 CO CO ^ 
 
 CO 05 
 
 Til 
 
 4-3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r— i 
 
 I-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 r— i 
 
 r-H r— 1 r—4 
 
 r—4 
 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 o3 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 
 CO 05 o 
 
 CM t- 
 
 to s>* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -4 
 
 05 
 
 co 
 
 co 
 
 Tf< r- ^ 
 
 CO 05 
 
 r- rH 
 
 • 
 
 m 
 
 • 
 
 « 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 Cl 
 
 oo 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 CO O 05 
 
 CO CO 
 
 r-H CO 
 
 PP 
 
 <3 
 
 pq 
 
 • 
 
 t 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 Jtf 
 
 ocT 
 
 05 
 
 Gq 
 
 O O 05 
 
 05 CO 
 
 of TjT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 r— i 
 
 4f! 
 
 r-H 
 
 1 — 1 CO co 
 
 sq hi 
 
 00 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cl 
 
 co 
 
 Hi Hi CO 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 
 05 
 
 __ 
 
 in 
 
 in HUO 
 
 CO rH 
 
 cs « 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 cm 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 in 
 
 G^i 
 
 05 
 
 o o co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 r-H O 
 
 (3 
 
 pq 
 
 m 
 
 *> 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 co in co 
 
 © HI 
 
 in 
 
 pq 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 cm 
 
 CO 
 
 T* 
 
 CM 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 cf GQ T*< 
 
 05 GO" 
 
 n o 6' 
 
 Q 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 Ol 
 
 CM 
 
 G1 
 
 CM GM 
 
 O'! 
 
 r-H 
 
 CM 
 
 GN G^ ^ 
 
 r-H Ol 
 
 GM rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 f— 4 
 
 rH 
 
 Tfl Tfi 
 
 o 
 
 CO rH CO 
 
 CO 05 
 
 O m 
 
 a? 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 X- 
 
 r— 4 
 
 X- 
 
 O 
 
 iO 
 
 05 
 
 G'l in co 
 
 O 00 
 
 <m m 
 
 • 
 
 
 CO 
 
 Tfl 05 
 
 r— 4 
 
 in 
 
 r— 4 
 
 o 
 
 in 
 
 CO Tfi t- 
 
 i — l r—4 
 
 Ttl co 
 
 
 pq 
 
 iff 
 
 CO* 
 
 ,-T 
 
 sf 
 
 in' 
 
 co* 
 
 05* 
 
 <M 
 
 co in’ o 
 
 05 rH 
 
 m 05 
 
 
 
 oi 
 
 G1 
 
 rH 
 
 CM 
 
 S'* 
 
 GM 
 
 CO 
 
 G'l 
 
 S* S'* H 
 
 r S'* 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 r— i 
 
 co 
 
 iO 
 
 co 
 
 rH 
 
 ci 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 Ol M in 
 
 I> c 
 
 05 Tfl 
 
 
 
 
 ■4* *n 
 
 iC 
 
 co 
 
 
 CO Tfl 
 
 
 m oo 
 
 CO o 
 
 
 pq 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 r— 
 
 O iO 
 
 CM Tfi 
 
 05 
 
 O 
 
 Ml rH iO 
 
 r-H 
 
 CO Ol 
 
 £ 
 
 pq 
 
 r—4 
 
 o 
 
 cm 
 
 os' 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 H*" 
 
 00 
 
 CO o 
 
 O 05 
 
 rH Tf4 
 
 
 
 r—4 
 
 r—4 
 
 r—4 
 
 rH 
 
 r-i 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH rH O'! 
 
 G'l rH 
 
 S'* S'* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 x^ m 
 
 CO 
 
 
 O -4* 
 
 GO 
 
 o 
 
 N O l>iO O 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 1—4 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 Cl 
 
 05 
 
 05 
 
 
 GO rH t— 
 
 Ol 
 
 oo m 
 
 < 
 
 GO 
 
 
 GM t*4 
 
 r— 4 
 
 X^ 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 in 
 
 t'OCO 
 
 CO 05 
 
 oo o 
 
 
 pq 
 
 rH 
 
 in 
 
 o 
 
 H< 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 Xrf iO hJI 
 
 CO t> "Tfi 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 05 tji m 
 
 iO 
 
 Tfl T# Tfl IQ Tfl CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 CO TJ4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 05 
 
 05 rH rH 
 
 rH CO 
 
 rl © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lr- O 
 
 in m G'l 
 
 co in 
 
 05 O 
 
 
 pq 
 
 QQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 in 
 
 t- co 
 
 CO O 
 
 05 05 
 
 +3 
 
 pq 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 CO* 
 
 CO 
 
 *~ © -i 
 
 oo co 
 
 s* o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-H r-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 »—4 rH 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 05 05 rH 
 
 H tn W 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 GN 
 
 co G'l m 
 
 O t- 
 
 r—4 m 
 
 4 
 
 QQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o\ 
 
 iO o co 
 
 CO Ol 
 
 CO Tfi 
 
 
 pq 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 »> *\ 
 Hi « 
 
 si s-*’ hi tV io 
 
 GM CO 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Hl>OC0 
 
 HI lo 
 
 05 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 O r-H 05 
 
 CO rH 
 
 Tfi CO 
 
 H 
 
 pq 
 
 CO 
 
 pq 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 *• 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 : 
 
 00 GN^ 
 
 1—4 
 
 o\ of 
 
 in co 
 
 Ol r-T 
 
 iH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 1-4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO CO G'l 
 
 05 co cn in 
 
 o3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l> Tfi O 
 
 CM co 
 
 oi 
 
 A 
 
 
 DO 
 
 pq 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 : 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 : 
 
 : 
 
 : 
 
 H< 
 
 m co co 
 
 r-H 
 
 CO CM 
 
 n *\ 
 
 CO 
 
 r-H 
 
 in' of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 
 
 
 
 r— ( 
 
 CO 
 
 gm tf 
 
 00 
 
 Hi 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 05 CO 
 
 HI © 
 
 00 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 t~- tH 
 
 co 
 
 1—4 
 
 o 
 
 H CO co 
 
 ■vfi IO 
 
 Ol r-H 
 
 
 pq 
 
 CQ 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 f— 4 
 
 CO 
 
 i — i 
 
 —4 
 
 CO ^ co 00 
 
 r-H r—4 
 
 CO CO 
 
 a 
 
 pq 
 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 co' 
 
 co*' 
 
 r — 1 
 
 r-H 
 
 iff icf co" 
 
 N r~4 
 
 co co 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 GM 
 
 O'* 
 
 rH 
 
 Cl 
 
 Cl 
 
 tM 
 
 Gq 
 
 Ol G^ GH 
 
 rH 01 
 
 St S'* 
 
 o3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 r-i 
 
 
 t~ r-H H* 00 
 
 r- \n 
 
 H< — i O) H< io 
 
 Tfi CO 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 CO CM 
 
 to 
 
 00 
 
 X^ 
 
 05 
 
 CO 
 
 iO 
 
 ^ 05 
 
 »o in 
 
 co co 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Tfl in 
 
 rH 
 
 GO 
 
 
 05 co m 
 
 *> O 
 
 in o 
 
 
 < 
 
 pq 
 
 
 to 
 
 CO* 
 
 05 
 
 X-f 
 
 co 
 
 Hi" 
 
 of 
 
 xf o’ 
 
 co Tfi' 
 
 i> cf 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 Tfl ■*tj4 
 
 o 
 
 iO 
 
 CO 
 
 in in co 
 
 ® io 
 
 H< m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 r- co 
 
 05 O 
 
 r—4 
 
 CM CO Ttl 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 
 00 
 
 05 
 
 o 
 
 Jh 
 
 CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 CO t- 
 
 
 t- 
 
 r- 
 
 r- 
 
 xr- 
 
 
 X- 
 
 00 
 
 c3 
 
 in 
 
 CO 
 
 00 05 
 
 o 
 
 r-4 G'l CO 
 
 Tfi 
 
 in 
 
 CO 
 
 r- 
 
 00 
 
 C5 
 
 
 CO 
 
 co co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X- 
 
 X- 
 
 x^ 
 
 r* 
 
 00 
 
 GO oo 
 
 oo co 
 
 00 
 
 00 00 co 
 
 00 
 
 GO 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 
 r-H 
 
 r-H rH 
 
 r—4 r-i 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H • rH 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 rH 
 
 Ks. 68,318 (Ks. 66,282 A. and Ks. 2,036 B.) belongs to the latter. 
 
APPENDIX A. 5. 
 
 Schedule of tolls on the export of minor forest produce in the Kumaun forest division. 
 
 318 
 
 hima'layan districts 
 
 " 7 “ 
 
 0) 
 
 bX +-> 
 c: 2 v 
 Vl 3 O 
 o> p a, 
 ► P H 
 <3 x <d 
 
 T3 
 
 c3 ~ 
 
 o ~ 
 
 CO * O O 
 
 O CM © CM rH 
 
 »o o o 
 
 Hf** QL H 
 
 CM 
 
 • S 
 
 o o 
 
 o © 
 
 *o >c 
 co* t>r 
 CO CM 
 
 T3 
 
 c« 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 •v 
 
 (M 
 
 VO 
 
 CO OQ CO 
 
 •O T3 • p* 
 
 s s 'o 
 
 io"o§ 
 
 XT'- 00 00 
 
 r* — 
 
 
 
 • ^-i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Oi 
 
 co CO 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 
 •puai-peaq aaj 
 
 c3 
 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o — o 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 r-H 
 
 00 
 
 rH 
 
 r— 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tc 
 
 O 
 
 o c 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 c 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 O. 
 
 cc 
 
 CO Oi 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 to © to 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 20 
 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 •ifqSuBq J8j 
 
 c3 
 
 r-H 
 
 © © 
 
 
 © 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 _ 
 
 r-r 
 
 01 
 
 CM 
 
 
 _ 
 
 CM 
 
 © 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 © o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 fl 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 &. 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 05 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © © © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 ® 
 
 
 Xaqnop jaj 
 
 c8 
 
 r-* 
 
 © © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © CQ © 
 
 CM 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CM 
 
 
 CM 
 
 CM 
 
 © 
 
 T* 
 
 ^2 
 
 
 1) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 C3 
 
 o 
 
 <P o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 s 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *s 
 
 
 « 
 
 o 
 
 05 o 
 
 05 
 
 © 
 
 G1 S ffl 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 •laod aaj 
 
 o3 
 
 <M 
 
 o — 
 
 © 
 
 r — 1 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 «o 
 
 CM 
 
 © 
 
 
 CO 
 
 © 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 CD* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 
 02 
 
 o 
 
 © o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 C5 O 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 05 o -• 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 = 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 X0 J0J 
 
 c3 
 
 CM 
 
 o - 
 
 © 
 
 rH 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 CO 60 
 
 5C 
 
 o> 
 
 © 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 P5 
 
 o 
 
 © o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © © © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 CO 
 
 03 o o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 
 •oirjjnq jaj 
 
 c3 
 
 Ol 
 
 •-H 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 O © 
 
 © 
 
 
 00 
 
 CM 
 
 00 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 o 
 
 © © 
 
 © 
 
 H* 
 
 o o o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 © © 
 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 •piU'BO J0J 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 iO 
 
 : : 
 
 - 
 
 4 
 
 © : — 
 
 • 
 
 
 © 
 
 CM 
 
 9 
 
 • 
 
 ■ 
 
 ** 
 
 : 
 
 
 ■** 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 © © 
 
 
 © 
 
 rH O 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 o © 
 
 © 
 
 c 
 
 © o © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 43 
 
 • 0 [i!jjnq 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 CJ 
 
 J0d A|['bau‘}I 
 
 CO* 
 
 X 
 
 xO CO 
 
 jr 
 
 co 
 
 frl © *3 
 
 © 
 
 X 
 
 
 © 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 R 
 
 
 02 
 
 fp 
 
 © © 
 
 © 
 
 - 
 
 © - © 
 
 r-H 
 
 © 
 
 - 
 
 © 
 
 3*5 
 
 © 
 
 - 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 •a 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 © c 
 
 - 
 
 © 
 
 © © © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 *■© 
 
 *xo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 O 
 
 J0d 
 
 XT. 
 
 20 
 
 -T# 1 50 
 
 IN 
 
 Ol 
 
 — co W 
 
 OJ 
 
 • H 
 
 © 
 
 * 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 •N 
 
 rn 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 o 
 
 © © 
 
 © 
 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 c 
 
 © 
 
 — 
 
 © 
 
 CM 
 
 © 
 
 c 
 
 
 © 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 o3 
 
 a 
 
 u» 
 
 (D 
 
 > 
 
 Vi 
 
 O 
 
 rz oa 
 
 C3 Qj 
 
 •s a 
 
 5 cd 
 
 .g S3 
 
 2 H 
 
 ,Q cfl 
 
 i— H 
 
 H3 
 
 P 
 
 c3 
 
 b0 
 
 p 
 
 CD 
 
 >■ 
 
 c3 
 
 <D 
 
 : : 3 : 
 
 c3 
 P T3 
 
 ^ C w 
 
 CD c3 c 
 CD .pH 
 
 V* P^JZ 
 rp V 4J 
 
 P '3 
 
 c3 O 
 
 c3 43 
 
 CO rH +J 
 
 CO r — t .pH 
 
 03 P-Q 
 
 CH 
 
 c3 
 
 C- bo 
 c 
 
 CO 
 ■ <D 
 : t> --s 
 
 II 
 
 JZ W 
 
 Ij 
 
 nd 4 ^> 
 p 
 c3 
 
 co co 
 
 CO rp 
 C3 CD 
 Vl (U 
 
 ca 
 
 a 
 
 tV 
 03 
 
 tn o 
 
 go 
 
 ^ 1 — 1 
 *3C •<<* 
 © O 
 Co 
 
 "-'O' 
 
 03 r— 
 
 O ci 
 O C ■ 
 
 * g 
 
 2^ 
 
 • rH h- . 
 
 O 
 
 p 
 
 rP 
 
 P 
 
 N 
 
 N < 
 
 <D 
 Q) ^ 
 
 a - 
 
 m 
 
 O 
 
 R 
 
 >< s*» 
 »© <55 
 
 © 
 
 S M 
 
 CD 
 
 a o 
 
 c3 
 
 1 P 
 
 51 
 
 O 03 
 
 D % 
 
 O. o 
 
 ,-a u 
 
 <d 
 
 CD zi M 
 
 .§ o rf . 
 
 I-2MP20 
 
 s ° 
 
 _ ' — ” ro 
 
 P-> M f-» 
 
 rl 01 z; H 
 
 s I = a o 
 fflddW 
 
 ’°N 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 919 
 
 'lo. 
 
 English and bota- 
 nical or vernacu- 
 lar names. 
 
 Measurement. 
 
 Royalty. 
 
 Average 
 
 annual 
 
 export. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Its. 
 
 a 
 
 p- 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 Acacia Catechu 
 
 Length up to 1 (t ' 
 
 Per score 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ( churan ) 
 
 girth to 3u". 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 D). (mumla) 
 
 ., 5' „ 30" 
 
 t i 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 l)o. ( [balli ) ... 
 
 Length as it may 
 
 it 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 Scores. 
 
 
 
 be 12". 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 2,000 
 
 21 
 
 Do. ( musal ) 
 
 Length up to 8' 
 
 Per each 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 girth 8". 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 Dj. ( parts of carts) 
 
 „ 14' 8" ... 
 
 tt 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 Do. (ditto) 
 
 „ 6' 10" 
 
 ti 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 Large bedsteads 
 
 Girth of legs, 
 
 )) 
 
 0 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 made of sal, sisu, 
 
 heads above 17" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sandan. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 Do. of other woods 
 
 Ditto 
 
 )> 
 
 0 
 
 5 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 Do. as 24 
 
 Girth of legs. 
 
 Jl 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 heads up to 16" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 tt 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 Legs of bedsteads 
 
 Girth of heads 
 
 »> 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 as 24. 
 
 above 17" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pieces. 
 
 29 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 tt 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 
 4,800 
 
 30 
 
 Do. as 24 
 
 Girth of head up 
 
 tt 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 16" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto *44 
 
 9t 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 Small bedsteads 
 
 Length up to 7' 
 
 1) 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 as 24. 
 
 girth to 10" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 ti 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 Do. as 24 
 
 Length up to 4' 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 girth to 10" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 it 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 Boxes as 24 
 
 Length up to 3' 
 
 ti 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 
 
 girth above 60" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 it 
 
 0 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 Do. as 24 
 
 „ girth 3 1" to 60" 
 
 a 
 
 0 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 0 
 
 5 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 Do. as 24 
 
 ,, girth up to 30" 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 Do. as 25 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 Bambus saraincha 
 
 
 Per 100 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 37,800 scores. 
 
 
 baliga. 
 
 
 scores. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 Kanderu ... 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 96,000 „ 
 
 44 
 
 Chhaneju and 
 
 Ml 
 
 »i 
 
 7 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 190,000 „ 
 
 
 chhari. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 Paina ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 23,000 ,, 
 
 46 
 
 Balk ••• ••• 
 
 Long up to 24 feet 
 
 Each 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 3,000 „ 
 
 47 
 
 Dolt ... 
 
 „ 25' or over. 
 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 
 2,000 „ 
 
 48 
 
 Bhabari 
 
 
 Per 100 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 with 44. 
 
 
 
 
 Bcores. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 Chiralu'od for uten- 
 
 (M 
 
 Per head- 
 
 O 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 sils. 
 
 
 load. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 Large bambu box, 
 
 Ml 
 
 Each 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 « 
 
 ) 
 
 61 
 
 Small ditto and 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 
 [ Pieces. 
 
 
 basket. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , 16,000 
 
 52 
 
 Ditto basket 
 
 • M 
 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 63 
 
 Sticks and fishing 
 
 Ml 
 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 
 13,000 
 
 
 rods. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
D 
 
 54 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 
 
 76 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 
 78 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 
 81 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 86 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 89 
 
 90 
 
 91 
 
 92 
 
 93 
 
 94 
 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 102 
 
 103 
 
 104 
 
 105 
 
 j06 
 
 1 07 
 
 108 
 
 109 
 
 110 
 
 111 
 
 112 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 Royalty. 
 
 
 
 Each 
 
 Rs. 
 
 0 
 
 a 
 
 0 
 
 P- 
 
 1 
 
 Per yard 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 Each 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 19 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 5 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9l 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 19 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0* 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 Per seer 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 >9 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 59 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 9> 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 »9 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 Per maund 9 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 » 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 1 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 >9 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 V 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 M 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 >9 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 0 
 
 59 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 99 
 
 0 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 ” 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 English and botanical or vernacular 
 names. 
 
 Scale plates .. ... ... 
 
 Matting ( chatdi ) ... 
 
 Box made of cane, large 
 Do, small ... ... 
 
 8kin of Barasingha ••a 
 
 Do. cow, buffalo, camel, large ... 
 Do. do. deer, middling 
 Do. do., small ... ... 
 
 Do. sheep and goats ... 
 
 Shoes 
 
 Horns of stag, deer, &c.... 
 
 Footstools (mora) 
 
 Ropes of mdljan and boddla 
 Each gold-washing sieve 
 Cart wheels, large ... 
 
 Ditto, small, 
 
 Parts of carts 
 
 Stools (pfra) ... 
 
 Wooden platters and pots, large 
 
 Ditto, small ... 
 
 Ditto, large of B. malabaricum, 
 Ditto, middle 
 
 Ditto, small 
 
 Wooden shoes 
 
 Seal a beams, spoons, and sieves 
 Nigali ( dewat and takhti) 
 
 Spinning wheels 
 Drums 
 
 Native musical instruments ( dutara ), 
 Gun stocks ... 
 
 Various seeds dry and gums 
 Diito green 
 
 Ditto do. and resins, 
 
 Ditto roots and fibres „. 
 Bark of the pomegranate ... 
 
 Powder of Malloius phillipinensis ... 
 Various drugs • •• ••• 
 
 Piper longum ... 
 
 Piper Bubia, cordifolia , honey, &c. ... 
 Banslochan ... 
 
 Lac ... ... ... 
 
 Catechu • •• • • • ••• 
 
 Seeds of Prinsepia utilis ( tatuwa ) ... 
 
 Dried root of Datisca cannabina ... 
 Myrica sapida, khas-khas, and gum... 
 Cinnamonum Tama la, &c. 
 
 Wood/ordia Jloribunda, §•<?. 
 
 Drugs of sorts ... 
 
 Rliha & c., ... 
 
 Drugs of sorts ... 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Bark of Cinnamonum Tamala 
 Drugs of sorts ... ... 
 
 String and rope of muvj and babar ... 
 Wax . ... 
 
 Resin of Pinus tongifolia ( birja ) 
 
 Ditto bdkhar -birja 
 
 Rhubarb ( dolu ) 
 
 Acorus calamus (bach) ... 
 
 Average 
 
 4,000 
 
 3,400 
 
 • •• 
 • • • 
 
 Pieces 
 
 86,000 
 
 In 17. 
 
 46,600 pieces. 
 
 650 maunds. 
 460 
 
 150 
 
 400 
 
 6,800 
 
 175 
 
 170 
 
 550 
 
 900 
 
 6 
 
 713 
 
 3,000 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 1,800 
 
 848 
 
 2,200 
 
 100 
 
 600 
 
 100 
 
 160 
 
 616 
 
 80 
 
 75 
 
 173 
 
 86 
 
 50 
 
 11 
 
 646 
 
 >» 
 
 19 
 
 >1 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 19 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 >9 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 9> 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 >9 
 
•OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES. 
 
 921 
 
 Notes on the above list. 
 
 Includes — 
 
 (a) — BLbar, the grass of E. comosum , S. anguslifolius , and others 
 referred to at p. 80S. 
 
 £ b ) — Bind, the leaves of S. munja, used for thatching. 
 
 (c) — Hindu, the leaves of other reeds used for the same purpose. 
 
 (7 /) — Munj and sir hi, parts of S. munja . 
 
 (e) — Tat, the culms of S.fuscum and C. laniger. 
 
 (/) — Sink, the culms of Anatherium muricatum. 
 
 а. Includes small reeds of the patera ( T. Elephantina ), the reeds of the motha 
 
 { Gy per us tegetiformis ) and the leaves of the khajur ( Phoenix sylvestris ). 
 5. Includes the reeds of the nal-tura ( Phragnntes nepalensis'). 
 
 б. Includes the leaves of th e sirdlu (Andropogon species') and bambu used for 
 
 fodder. 
 
 43. See page 810. 
 
 67. These are ropes made from the mdlj an (Z? a uhinia Vahlii), page 793, and 
 
 bodala ( Sterculia coloraia), page 792. 
 
 68. A royalty is levied on each sieve or rocker used by the gold- washers. 
 
 85. Under this head comes the following: — 
 
 Dry aon la, the fruit of P. Emblica known asEmblie myrobalans, page 777. 
 Dry haraira, the fruit of T. Chebula known as Chebulic myrobalans, 
 page 779. 
 
 Mocharas, the gum of the Bombax mala bar icum -(page 784) and Moringa 
 pterygosperma (page 784), Mochkand, the root of Eclipta erecta , page 735. 
 Roli-ki-dana, the seeds of Mallotas phillipinensis (page 776). 
 
 $6. Under this head we have the green fruit of the aonla and haraira. 
 
 Dry bahera , the fruit of T. belerica, known as Beleric myrobalans, page 777. 
 Amalias, the pods of Cassia Jistula, page 779. 
 
 Tulsi, the leaves of Ocimum sanctum , and the flowers of the dhdk or 
 Butea frond&sa, page 77-8. 
 
 87. Under this eome; — 
 
 The resin of the s&l (page 785) and the galls of Pistacia integerrima 
 known as kakrastngi, page 746. 
 
 88. Under this head are included the following fruits, roots and fibres 
 
 Green pipla, the fruit of Piper silvaticum, page 705. 
 
 Kdla-j.ra, the fruit of Car uni Carui, page 705. 
 
 Bildi-kund, the tubers of Pueraria tuberosa, page 748. 
 
 The fibre of the pods of the cotton-tree, Bombax malabaricum , page 791. 
 91. Under this head we have the following: — 
 
 Kadui. 
 
 Kutki, plants of the genus Ophelia used for bitters, page 744-46. 
 Bdlchar, root of Nardostachys Jatamansi , page 743. 
 
 93. Under this head the following are included : — 
 
 Plplamor, the Piper silvaticum, page 705. 
 
 Manjit-ka-jar, root of Rubia cor difolia, page 773. 
 
 Rutti, seeds of Abrus precatorius, page 724, and sahut , honey. 
 
 116 
 
922 
 
 HIMALAYAN DISTRICTS 
 
 94. Is the silicious secretion from the joints of the bambu, also known, as iaba- 
 
 shir. 
 
 98. See page 742. 
 
 99. See pages 705. 
 
 100. See page 705 for C. Tamala. This head also includes : — 
 
 Roots of various kinds exported as hand and Kinjora-ki-jar, the roots of 
 the different species of Berberis , page 728. 
 
 The seeds of Pliarbiiis Nil (f 'tdla-ddna ), page 745 ; and the roots of Hedy- 
 chium spicatum ( k apu r-hachrif page 738. 
 
 201, This head includes the following : — 
 
 Dhai-he-phul, the flowers of Woodfordia jloribunda , page 778, Chhalara 
 oak-bark. Pahhan-bed, the root of Saxifraga ligulata, page 749. Nisot, 
 the root of Ipomoea tiapethum, and the bark of Symplocos craiagioides 
 ( lodk ), page 776. 
 
 102. Under this head come the following : — 
 
 Tung> the bark of Rhus Cotinus, flowers and bark of Cedrela Toona, page 
 778. Nagarmotha, roots of Cypcrus juncifo/ius, page 774. Pit pdpra y 
 seeds and leaves of Fumaria parviflora, page 737, fruit of Elceaguus 
 umbellcita , page 736, and seeds of A. Catechu. 
 
 103. Includes Ritha, the seeds of Saplndus deter gens t page 749 ; Selkhari, a white 
 
 clay and man jit. 
 
 104. Comprises giloi, the roots of Tinospora cordifolia, page 752, medicinal 
 
 herbs of sorts and phindaru ( Colocasia himalensis ?) 
 
 105. Includes various mineral drugs. 
 
 107. Includes Rhus vernici/era, page 785, and makoi. 
 
 APPENDIX A. 6. 
 
 List of rates for the sale of timber at Rdmnagar and Moradabad 
 
 Government Forest Depots. 
 
 Name of timber. 
 
 Measurement 
 
 Class. 
 
 Rate per cubic foot 
 at 
 
 Ranraagar. 
 
 Morad- 
 
 abad. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 Sal karis ... 
 
 
 12' X5"X4" 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 5 0 
 
 1 8 0 
 
 Ditto 
 
 • « » • • • 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 15 6 
 
 12 0 
 
 Ditto 
 
 « • • • • • 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 III 
 
 0 
 
 6 0 
 
 »•! 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 10X5X4 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 5 0 
 
 1 7 O 
 
 Ditto 
 
 o • a • • » 
 
 Ditto 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 15 6 
 
 • M 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 III 
 
 0 
 
 6 0 
 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 13X6X5 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 6 0 
 
 • •• 
 
 Ditto 
 
 • if* ••• 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 0 0 
 
 ... 
 
 Ditto 
 
 
 8X4X4 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 15 6 
 
 
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES 
 
 923 
 
 List of rates for the sale of timber at Rdmnagar ancl Moradabad 
 Government Forest Depots — (concluded). 
 
 Name of timber. 
 
 Measurement. 
 
 Class. 
 
 Rate per cubic foot 
 at 
 
 Ramnagar. 
 
 Morad- 
 
 abad. 
 
 Sal karis. <•* ••• ••• 
 
 8X4X4 
 
 Ill 
 
 Rs. a. 
 
 0 6 
 
 P- 
 
 0 
 
 Rs. a. p. 
 
 • 44 
 
 Ditto >f« ••• i«i 
 
 6X4X4 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 • 44 
 
 Ditto ••• • •• 
 
 Ditto 
 
 III 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 Jaman karis ... 
 
 10X5X4 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 Ditto 
 
 Ditto 
 
 III 
 
 0 
 
 2 
 
 0 
 
 
 Haldu karis ... ... 
 
 12 X5X4 
 
 I 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 »4« 
 
 Ditto mi u< 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 
 Cliir karis ... 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 I 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 » . « 
 
 Ditto •«« mi 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 II 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 • •4 
 
 Ditto »•« •• « ••• 
 
 10X5 X4 
 
 I 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 
 Du to m« ••• 
 
 Ditto ... 
 
 11 
 
 0 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 •44 
 
 Sal sleeper ... ... ... 
 
 10' x 32" 
 
 Ml 
 
 0 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 4*4 
 
 Sal karis 
 
 Sal logs squared with axe if pur- 
 
 15 X 5 X 4 
 
 »(• 
 
 II 
 
 • •1 
 
 1 
 
 • •* 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 14 0 
 
 • 44 
 
 chased unselected from one end 
 of the line five logs or over. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ditto ditto selected 
 
 ill 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 
 0 
 
 • • 4 
 
 Ditto round, class I., if purchased 
 
 • as 
 
 • •• 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 0 
 
 1 14 0 
 
 unselected from one end of the 
 line 10 logs or over. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ditto ditto selected ... 
 
 <«t 
 
 *•4 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 2 0 0 
 
 Ditto round mixed class if pur- 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 0 
 
 • 44 
 
 chased unselected from one end o£. 
 the line 10 logs or over. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ditto ditto selected ... 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 • 44 
 
 Ditto round, class II., if purchased 
 
 • • 0 
 
 • •< 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 0 
 
 • 44 
 
 unselected from one end of the 
 line 10 logs or over. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ditto ditto selected ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 • 4 4 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 0 
 
 1 • • 
 
 Sal kolhus selected 
 
 M» 
 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 US 
 
 © 
 
 9 
 
INDEX I 
 
 GENERAL. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 A. 
 
 
 Bodos ... 
 
 22, 24, 27 
 
 , 28 
 
 
 
 Bodpas ... 
 
 23, 24, 31 
 
 , 38 
 
 A.bors ••• i<i 
 
 20, 21 
 
 Borax ... 
 
 *•1 • • • 
 
 293 
 
 Aconite 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Bournonite 
 
 ••• • . • 
 
 282 
 
 Afghanistan, its extent and people, 33, 34 
 
 Box ... 
 
 • •• ••• 
 
 818 
 
 Agar Sera mine 
 
 ... 287 
 
 Brahmaputra basin and subordinate 
 
 
 A kas ... ... 
 
 20, 21, 22 
 
 systems ... 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 69 
 
 Alder ... ... 
 
 776, 818 
 
 Bread fruit tree, St. John’s 
 
 884 
 
 Almond ... ... 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Buckwheat... 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 698 
 
 Alum 
 
 ... 297 
 
 Building stone 
 
 
 296 
 
 Amaranth, hermaphrodite 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Bullace, yellow 
 
 •II ••• 
 
 712 
 
 Apple . M 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Butter tree 
 
 til ••• 
 
 715 
 
 „ custard ... 
 
 ... 727 
 
 
 c. 
 
 
 Apricot ... 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Cabbage 
 
 
 Arrow- root ... 
 
 ... 704 
 
 III 
 
 707 
 
 Arsenic 
 
 ... 291 
 
 Caraway ... 
 
 •II ••• 
 
 705 
 
 Asam, its tribes 16, 17, 27, valley 71, 81 
 
 Cardomum... 
 
 ••I ••• 
 
 707 
 
 Asbestos 
 
 ... 294 
 
 Carob ... 
 
 0 • • •• 
 
 884 
 
 Atmospheric pressure and winds, 222, 230, 
 
 Carrot 
 
 aaa 703j 
 
 735 
 
 
 [232 to 239 
 
 Catechu, Cutch 
 
 • Ml 
 
 775 
 
 Avalanches ... 
 
 ... 106 
 
 Celery 
 
 M* • • • 
 
 703 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Cedar Himalayan 
 
 830, growth and 
 
 
 
 durability of 831, Himalayan pen- 
 
 
 
 
 Cll 
 
 # , 
 
 843 
 
 Bael ... ... ... 726 
 
 Bamboo 809, its usefulness as a 
 paper- making material ... -811 
 
 Barley ... ... 684, 739 
 
 Barma-Tibetan tribes 20, 23, their 
 language ... ...17,20 
 
 Barometric tides 222, 225, 227, 228 
 Bean 702 
 
 aconite-leaved kidney ... 694 
 
 black-seeded kidney ... 696 
 
 castor ... 749, 772 
 
 French 695 
 
 garden ... ... 694 
 
 small-fruited kidney 695 
 
 . Soy ... ... ... 696 
 
 Beet ... ... ... 703 
 
 Beleric myrobalano ... ... 779 
 
 Bengal, the people of ... ... 17 
 
 Bhabar 82, 8 7, 117, its extent 85, 
 distinctive feature 87, 88 oceanic 
 theory regarding 88, 89, fluviative 
 theory regarding ... ,,..89,92 
 
 Bhutan and Sikhim, the tribes of 23, 24 
 
 Bhotiyas 24, 29, 31, 36, 38 
 
 Birch, Himalayan ... 818 
 
 Bisarh, its people and religion 29, 30 
 Blaini group of rocks ... 130 
 
 Central Himalaya 145, nummulitic 
 formations in 148, 168, eruptire 
 rocks 149, General Strachey’s geo- 
 logical description of 146, granite 
 
 152, schists 152, slates and con- 
 glomerates 153,fossiliferous rocks 
 
 153, trias 156, Jurassic group 156, 
 Oxford clay 157, remarks on Ge- 
 
 neral Strachey’s description 
 
 a a • 
 
 165 
 
 Cereals 
 
 «ai 
 
 684 
 
 Chebulic myrabolans ... 
 
 • a • 
 
 779 
 
 Thepangs ... 
 
 24, 26 
 
 [, 29 
 
 Cherry, acid 
 
 • aa 
 
 712 
 
 „ bird 
 
 aai 
 
 712 
 
 „ sweet 
 
 • a • 
 
 712 
 
 „ wild 
 
 a a • 
 
 712 
 
 Chestnut, sweet ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 883 
 
 Chickling vetch 
 
 ... 
 
 694 
 
 China grass 
 
 a • • 
 
 879 
 
 Citron ... ... 
 
 • a • 
 
 710 
 
 Climate, sketch of 
 
 202 to 206 
 
 Conifers 819, analytical key to a 
 list of their vernacular synonyms. 
 
 820 
 
 Cork oak ... 
 
 • a a 
 
 883 
 
 Clouds, annual variations of 
 
 aa* 
 
 247 
 
 Copper mines of Kumaon 279, of 
 Garhwal ... 
 
 282 
 
926 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Cinchona 882, unsuitabilty of the 
 Himalaya of the North-Western 
 Provinces for the cultivation 
 
 of 
 
 ... 882 
 
 Coriander . 
 
 705, 783 
 
 Corn, Indian ... 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Cotton 
 
 ... 738 
 
 „ tree... 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Cowhage ... 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Crab, Siberian 
 
 713 
 
 Cress 
 
 702, 708, 740 
 
 Croton 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Cucumber ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Cumin 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Currant, black 
 
 ... 714 
 
 „ black and red ... 
 
 ... 714 
 
 „ red ... 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Customs, clothing and food of the 
 
 people of the plains 
 
 ... ,_J9 
 
 Cypress, ground 
 
 ... 842 
 
 ,, Himalayan 
 
 ... 840 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Dards ... ... 
 
 ...32, 34 
 
 Dehra Dun... ... 
 
 96, 111, 300 
 
 Dhimals 
 
 24, 27, 28 
 
 Duns 85, 96, 99, Kayarda 97, 
 
 Pinjor 
 
 98, 121, Patli 98, Katri 9S 
 
 , Kota, 98 
 
 Dill 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Drugs 720, list of, showing their 
 
 nature according to native ideas 
 
 and their real use in European 
 
 medicines 
 
 ... 723 
 
 Dyes and tans ... 
 
 ... 773 
 
 E. 
 
 Eastern depression of p'ai ts, 
 
 defini- 
 
 
 tions and examples of 
 
 » 
 
 324 
 
 Egg-plant ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 703 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 Fennel, Indian 
 
 
 705 
 
 Fenugreek .. 
 
 708. 
 
 752 
 
 Fever ender 
 
 *»♦ 
 
 753 
 
 Fibres ... ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 790 
 
 F ield pea .. ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 694 
 
 F'ir, Himalayan silver 
 
 ... 
 
 837 
 
 Flax 
 
 740, 
 
 771 
 
 F’ood of the people 19, 693, 
 
 of the 
 
 
 hill population 
 
 678 
 
 679 
 
 Food grains, analyses of 675 
 
 culti- 
 
 
 vnted ... ... 
 
 . .. 
 
 683 
 
 Forest history 
 
 • * « 
 
 846 
 
 „ boundary disputes 
 
 • •• 
 
 848 
 
 , government 849, manage- 
 
 876 
 
 ment of 
 
 Ml 
 
 Page. 
 
 Forest divisions: Sub- Himalayan 
 851, Kumaon 852, Kumaon Iron 
 Company 85fi, Naini Tal 857, 
 Ranikhet 857, Garhwal 858, Patli 
 Dun 8C0, Kotri 802, Dehra Dun 
 802, Ganges or Bhagiratha 806, 
 Jaunsar 807, Upper Himalayan in 
 
 Kumaon and Biitish Garhwal ... 
 
 876 
 
 Frankincense, Indian ... 
 
 ... 
 
 729 
 
 Fruits, wild and cultivated 
 
 • •• 
 
 709 
 
 Furnace, figure and construction of 
 smelting 129, improved app i- 
 ances recommended 272, Chili 
 furnace ... 
 
 272 
 
 G. 
 
 Gaddis 
 
 
 31 
 
 Galchha States 35, people of 
 
 ...36,40 
 
 Ganges basin and subordinate 
 terns ... . 
 
 sys- 
 
 6C 
 
 , 67 
 
 Garlic 
 
 
 707 
 
 Garos ... ... 
 
 22 
 
 , 27 
 
 Gean 
 
 
 712 
 
 Geology 111, its early pioneers in 
 India 112; Herbert, his division 
 of the rocks 112, Cautley and 
 Falconer 114, Strachey 
 
 115 
 
 Ginger 
 
 706, 
 
 754 
 
 Glaciers 107, 180, Pindari 107, 
 motion of 188, Kuphini 
 
 182, 
 
 •W* 
 
 186 
 
 Gold 
 
 • • • 
 
 2 76 
 
 Gold mines of Tibet 277, of Thok 
 Jalang ... 
 
 278 
 
 Gooseberry 
 
 • •• 
 
 714 
 
 Goosefoot ,,, 
 
 
 696 
 
 Gorkhalis . ... 
 
 26 
 
 , 27 
 
 Gourd bottle 
 
 ... 
 
 700 
 
 ,, co'ocynth 
 
 CU f 
 
 701 
 
 ,, common snake ... 
 
 III 
 
 700 
 
 , melon, white ... 
 
 Gourd, squash 
 
 
 700 
 
 ... 
 
 701 
 
 ,, white 
 
 
 702 
 
 Gourds 
 
 ... 
 
 699 
 
 Gram 
 
 693, 
 
 732 
 
 Graphite ... 
 
 -•« 
 
 292 
 
 Grazing tax 
 
 
 846 
 
 Greens ... ... 
 
 III 
 
 707 
 
 Guava 
 
 ... 
 
 747 
 
 Gums, pseudo ... 
 
 
 783 
 
 „ resin 
 
 • •• 
 
 784 
 
 ,, true 
 
 ... 
 
 781 
 
 Gurungs ... 
 
 ...24 
 
 , 26 
 
 Gypsum ... 
 
 m 
 
 294 
 
 H. 
 
 Flail ... 
 
 III 
 
 256 
 
 Hayus ... ••• 
 
 III 
 
 26 
 
 Hazel 
 
 • •• 
 
 716 
 
 Hemp 760, 799, cultivation of 
 
 III 
 
 800 
 
INDEX 
 
 927 
 
 Page , 
 
 Hill-paper usually called Nepalese, 
 mode of making ... ... 795 
 
 Himalayan gentian ... 737 
 
 Himalaya, account of the physical 
 characteristics of 4-1 3, derivation 
 of name 16, its mountain system 
 7,9,10, 11,62, 115, 116, 166, its 
 river basins 61, 62, its geological 
 division 100, materials of 101, of 
 younger formation than the hills 
 of the Deccan and Central India 
 102, .. ... 141 
 
 Hindustan, application of the name 
 of 18, boundaries and area of 77, 78 
 Hog plum ■•» • •• ... 751 
 
 Hop .«• ... ... / 0/ 
 
 Horse gram ... «. 696 
 
 Horse radish tree ... ... 742 
 
 Humi ity in the Himalayan 
 regions ... ... 240, 245, 247 
 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Ice-wedges 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 106 
 
 Indian eocene times ... 
 
 ... 102 
 
 Indian desert 
 
 
 ... 78 
 
 Indian shot 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Indo-Gangetic plain ... 5, 
 
 8, 79, 89 
 
 Indus basin 63, subordinate systems, 64 
 
 Indus plain 
 
 ... 
 
 77 
 
 Ipecacuanha 
 
 
 ... 883 
 
 Iron mines 287, in 
 
 Kumaon 288, 
 
 in 
 
 Giwar 288, in Garhwal 
 
 ... 289 
 
 
 J. 
 
 
 Jnclc-tree ... 
 
 
 727, 799 
 
 Juniper, weeping 
 
 blue 
 
 ... '842 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 Kara-kurchlns 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 37 
 
 Kara-Tangutans 
 
 3 
 
 7, 38, 39 
 
 Khamtis... 
 
 Ml 
 
 22 
 
 Khasiyas 
 
 ... 22,24,29 
 
 Kirghiz 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 36 
 
 Koch 
 
 ... 24, 27, 28 
 
 Kohistanis 
 
 i • • 
 
 ... 35 
 
 Krol group 
 
 IM 
 
 ... 136 
 
 Kukis 
 
 • • • 
 
 22 
 
 Kumaon Iron Wor 
 
 ks Comnany 
 
 ... 262 
 
 Kunets 
 
 ... 
 
 30, 31 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 Lac ... 
 
 
 ... 788 
 
 Lakes of Kumaon and Garhwal 
 
 ... 199 
 
 Lamas ... 
 
 Il( 
 
 £3, 39 
 
 Lead 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 290 
 
 Lemon ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Lepchas 
 
 24, 25, 26, 28 
 
 Page. 
 
 Lettuce 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Lhoba Daphlas 
 
 • • • 
 
 20, 21, 22 
 
 Lichen ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 745 
 
 „ rose 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Lignite 
 
 • tl 
 
 ... 291 
 
 Limbus 
 
 Ml 
 
 24j 25, 26 
 
 Lime, sour 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 710 
 
 „ sweet 
 
 • tl 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Limestone ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 295 
 
 Liquorice, Indian 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 724 
 
 Lob-Nor basin and 
 
 its system 
 
 74, 87 
 
 Lotus 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Lovage 
 
 Ml 
 
 705. 730 
 
 Love lies bleeding 
 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Lower Himalayan 
 
 sections 
 
 129, 
 
 Simla region 130. Sirmur series 
 131, 133, Kumaon section 139, 
 Nepal section 140, Sikkim sec- 
 
 tion. 
 
 ••• •«« 
 
 M. 
 
 141 
 
 Madder 
 
 ••• 
 
 773 
 
 M ai len hair fern 
 
 
 725 
 
 Magar 
 
 • • • 
 
 26 
 
 Mango 
 
 ... 711, 
 
 741 
 
 Manipur, its dialects, population 
 
 
 and religon 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 22 
 
 Maize 
 
 • in 
 
 687 
 
 Mecliis 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 28 
 
 Melon, musk 
 
 ••• 
 
 702 
 
 „ water 
 
 • •i • • • 
 
 701 
 
 Mezquit bean 
 
 ■ in 
 
 884 
 
 Millet, great 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 692 
 
 „ Italian 
 
 •it ••• 
 
 689 
 
 „ spiked 
 
 • • • Ml 
 
 690 
 
 Mineral resources of Kumaon 
 
 259 
 
 Minerals, financial 
 
 results of the 
 
 
 settlements of 
 
 the revenue 
 
 
 derived from 
 
 ... ... 
 
 274 
 
 Mines, causes of poor returns from 266 
 „ drainage of 269, division of 
 profits of 271, outturn from 273, 
 experimental opening of in Garh- 
 
 wal . ... ... 261 
 
 Mining, mode of ... ... 267 
 
 „ industry in Kumaon, the 
 future of ... ... 276 
 
 Miris .. ... 20,21 
 
 Mishmis ... ... 20,21 
 
 Mountain formation, mode of ... 104 
 
 Moupas ... 23 
 
 Mountain sculpture ... ... 106 
 
 Mo isoon currents in the Himalaya, 238 
 Mountain system 170, Jumna sys- 
 teml70, principal affluents 171, 
 Ganges system 171, principal 
 affluents 172, Western Ramganga 
 system 171, 173, Nayar system ... 172 
 
 Mulberry, Indian ... ... 742 
 
 Mu.ta:d ... ... ... 7o7 
 
928 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Mustard, black 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Prune 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Murmis 
 
 ... 
 
 24, 25, 26 
 
 Pulses ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 693 
 
 
 
 
 Pumelo ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 710 
 
 • 
 
 N. 
 
 
 Pumpkin ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 700, 702 
 
 
 
 
 Panjab proper. 
 
 population 
 
 and 
 
 Nagas 
 
 • •• 
 
 22 
 
 distribution of 
 
 
 20 
 
 Nagpur mines 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 289 
 
 Purslain, small 
 
 • •• 
 
 708, 747 
 
 Nahan group 
 
 114, 121 
 
 123, 129, 13.3 
 
 
 
 
 Narcotics and spirits .. 
 
 ... 757 
 
 
 Q. 
 
 
 Nepal 24, its tribes 
 
 26, 140 
 
 
 
 
 Newars 
 
 ... 
 
 24, 26, 27, 28 
 
 Quince 
 
 ••• 
 
 713, 748 
 
 
 O. 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Oats 
 
 Oil seeds 
 
 Oleander 
 
 Olives 
 
 Onion 
 
 Opium 
 
 Orange 
 
 703, 
 
 bergamot 
 
 bitter 
 
 Seville 
 
 sweet 
 
 692 
 
 769 
 
 743 
 
 885 
 
 726 
 
 757 
 
 732 
 
 710 
 
 710 
 
 710 
 
 710 
 
 Kadish ... ... 702 
 
 Radiation ... 
 
 Rain, its influence on the mountain 
 masses 
 
 Rainfall, 249, 252, 255, causes of 
 in the Himalaya 254, table of at 
 stations on the plains Dear the 
 base of the Himalaya 250, on the 
 Himalaya slope 251, on the outer 
 slope of the Himalaya compared 
 
 748 
 
 707 
 
 108 
 
 Ore, removing of 267. crushing and 
 
 plains 
 
 ... 252 
 
 cleaning 268, 
 
 smelting of 269, 
 
 Rainy season 
 
 ... 257 
 
 refining of 270 
 
 assay of ... 280 
 
 Ramie 
 
 ... 879 
 
 Outer Himalaya, 
 
 the term as under- 
 
 Rattan 
 
 ... 806 
 
 stood by geographers and geolo- 
 
 Range, definition of the term ... 15 
 
 gists 
 
 ««• 
 
 ... 169 
 
 Resins ... ... 
 
 780 
 
 Oxus basin... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 75 
 
 „ oleo .. 
 
 781. 785 
 
 
 
 
 Rhea competition 879, cultivation 
 
 
 P. 
 
 
 and prospects of 
 
 ... 882 
 
 
 
 
 Rice 685, season and manner of 
 
 Parbatiya ... 
 
 Ill 
 
 25, 26. 27 
 
 cultivation of 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Pear 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Rivers, their action on the 
 
 moun- 
 
 Pepper, long 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 705 
 
 tain system ... 
 
 ... 168 
 
 „ red 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Roofing slate ... 
 
 ... 296 
 
 Pigeon pea 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 696 
 
 
 
 Pimpernel ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 726 
 
 S. 
 
 
 Pine 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 747 
 
 
 
 „ Gerard’s 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 828 
 
 Sage 
 
 ... 703 
 
 „ lofty ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Shaddock ... ... 
 
 ... 7J0 
 
 ,, long- leaved 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 824 
 
 Silver 
 
 ... 279 
 
 „ Neoza .. 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 828 
 
 Siwaliks or Sub-Himalaya 84, 96, 
 
 Plantain 
 
 • •• 
 
 742 
 
 111, 299, division of the tertiary 
 
 Plants of Kumaon, Hr. 
 
 Watson’s 
 
 rocks of ... 
 
 1 j 8 , 126 
 
 list of 327, introduced 
 
 325, in- 
 
 Siwalik deposits, horizontal 
 
 varia- 
 
 digenous 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 326 
 
 tions in, indicating the 
 
 impor- 
 
 Plants of Garhwal, Jaunsar-Bawar, 
 
 tance in the question of mountain 
 
 and the Dehra Dun 
 
 304 
 
 formation 
 
 123, 127, 128 
 
 Plants found in Kumaon, 
 
 Garhwal, 
 
 Snowy range 
 
 ... 175 
 
 and the adjacent parts 
 
 of Tibet 
 
 Snow line 190, its height 
 
 191, 220 
 
 by Captain R. Strachey 
 
 and Mr. 
 
 Soapstone .. 
 
 ... 294 
 
 W interbottom 
 
 
 ... .403 
 
 Spearmint ... ... 
 
 703, 741 
 
 Pomegranate 
 
 • • • 
 
 715, 748, 777 
 
 Spices and condiments 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Poppy 
 
 • •• 
 
 704, 757 
 
 Spikenard ... ... 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Potato 
 
 III 
 
 .. 703 
 
 Spirits 
 
 ... 768 
 
 „ sweet 
 
 . • • 
 
 703, 704 
 
 Spruce hemlock of Nepal 
 
 ... 836 
 
 Prince’s feather 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 697 
 
 „ Himalayan 
 
 ... 834 
 
INDEX, 
 
 929 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Spruce, Smith’s 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Turnip 
 
 Turpentine 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Spur, definition of 
 
 ... 15 
 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Strawberry 
 
 ... 713 
 
 
 
 Sugarcane ... ... 
 
 ... 692 
 
 
 U. 
 
 
 Sulphur 
 
 ... 293 
 
 
 
 
 Sweet basil 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Upper India, its 
 
 inhabitants and 
 
 
 
 natural features 
 
 •«« 
 
 17, 18, 19 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Uzbegs 
 
 • •i 
 
 36 
 
 Tajiks 
 
 ... 36 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 Tallow-tree ... 
 
 ... 883 
 
 
 
 
 Tar 
 Tarai 83, 86, 
 ture of 
 
 786 
 
 118, distinctive fea- 
 
 87, 91 
 
 Tea, history of the cultivation and 
 manufacture of, in the hill dis- 
 tricts of the North-Western Pro- 
 vinces 886, 890, its introduction 
 into India 887, 896, nurseries in 
 Kumaon 890, Garhwal 
 Thaksyas ... 
 
 Thakurs ... ... ...31,32 
 
 Tharus ... ... ...24, 29 
 
 Tibet and its divisions 38, 39, 71 
 
 Tibet, Western, Dr. Stoliczka’s ac 
 
 893 
 
 27 
 
 count of . . 
 
 ... 
 
 
 146 
 
 Tibetan plateau 
 
 ... 62, 116, 
 
 163, 
 
 178 
 
 Tibetans 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 278 
 
 Tibetan Musalmans 
 
 ... 
 
 31 
 
 Temperature 209, 214, diurnal and 
 
 
 annual range of 
 
 213, table of 
 
 in 
 
 
 the Himalayan 
 
 districts of 
 
 the 
 
 
 North-Western 
 
 Provinces 
 
 • • • 
 
 211 
 
 Timber marts 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 877 
 
 Timber producing 
 
 trees of 
 
 the 
 
 
 Himalaya 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 M2 
 
 Tinder plant 
 
 *•• 
 
 • •• 
 
 793 
 
 Tobacco ... 
 
 
 743, 
 
 755 
 
 Tomato 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 703 
 
 Turmeric ... 
 
 ... 706, 
 
 734, 
 
 774 
 
 Vapour tension 241 to 244 
 
 Vegetation in the Siwaliks 299, 
 Sub-Siwaliks 300, Dehra Dun 300, 
 Himalayan tract 302, from the 
 plains to Mussooree and north- 
 
 wards 
 Vegetables 
 
 „ cultivated ... 
 Vine 
 
 W. 
 
 302, 303 
 702 
 698 
 711 
 
 Walnut 
 Water-cress 
 Water parting, definition of 
 Wheat ... ... 
 
 White rue ... 
 
 Winds, General Strachey’s descrip- 
 tion of the diurnal variation of 
 in Ku i aon 
 
 Wind and atmospheric pressure 
 222, 230, 232, mean velocity of 
 in miles per diem ... ... 
 
 716, 740 
 
 ... 708 
 ... 15 
 
 ... 684 
 
 728 
 
 229 
 
 240 
 
 Y. 
 
 Yam ... 
 Yew ... 
 
 703, 736 
 751, 775 
 
INDEX II 
 
 € 
 
 SCIENTIFIC NAMES OF PLANTS AND TREES. 
 
 A. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Aloe intermedia ... 
 
 Page • 
 
 ••• 882 
 
 Abies densa ... 
 
 ... 837 
 
 „ perfoliata 
 
 
 726 
 
 ,, durnosa, 
 
 788, 836 
 
 Alstonia lucida 
 
 • • • 
 
 726 
 
 „ Khutrow 
 
 ... 834 
 
 „ sckolaris 
 
 ••• 
 
 726 
 
 „ Pindrow 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Aruarantaceas 
 
 • • • 
 
 697 
 
 „ Smitliiana, 788, 
 
 810, 834, 872 
 
 Amaranthus anardana 
 
 • • . 
 
 697 
 
 ,, spinulosa 
 
 ... 834 
 
 „ Blitum ... 
 
 697, 
 
 708 
 
 ,, Webbiana, 788, 
 
 810, 837, 872 
 
 „ caudatus 
 
 • •• 
 
 697 
 
 Abroma au usta 
 
 ... 792 
 
 „ farinaceus 
 
 
 726 
 
 Abrus precatorious, ... 
 
 724, 767 
 
 „ f i umentaceus 
 
 • •• 
 
 697 
 
 Abutilon indicum. 
 
 724, 791 
 
 „ gangeticus 
 
 • • • 
 
 708 
 
 „ polyandrum 
 
 ... 791 
 
 „ oleraceus 
 
 • • • 
 
 708 
 
 Acacia arabica, 18, 7 26, 776 
 
 779, 78', 8)6 
 
 „ polygamus 
 
 • • • 
 
 697 
 
 „ Catechu, 83, 726, 
 
 769, 776, 782 
 
 „ polygonoides 
 
 • • • 
 
 697 
 
 ,, Farnesiana ... 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Amomum subulatum ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 707 
 
 „ lenticularis 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Amorphophallus campanulatus 
 
 • •• 
 
 704 
 
 ,, tern inalia 
 
 ... 812 
 
 Anagallis aryensis 
 
 • • • 
 
 726 
 
 ,, tortuosa 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ coerulea 
 
 ... 
 
 726 
 
 Acer oblongum ... 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Anatherium muricatum 
 
 726, 
 
 808 
 
 „ pictum, ... 
 
 818, 872 
 
 Andrographis paniculata 
 
 
 744 
 
 Achyranthese 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Andropogon involutus 
 
 • • r 
 
 809 
 
 Achyranthes aspera ... 
 
 ... 726 
 
 „ Iwarancusa 
 
 • •• 
 
 809 
 
 Acida 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Aneilema tuberosa 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 Aconitum lerox 
 
 726, 745 
 
 Anisomeles ovata 
 
 • •• 
 
 727 
 
 „ heterophyllum 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Anogeissus 
 
 • • • 
 
 812 
 
 „ Lycoctonum 
 
 ... 725 
 
 „ latifolia, ... 780, 
 
 782, 
 
 816 
 
 „ Napellus ... 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Anona squamosa 
 
 ... 
 
 727 
 
 Acorus calamus 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Anthistiria arundinacea 
 
 
 808 
 
 Actiniopteris radiata ... 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Apium graveolens 
 
 • • • 
 
 703 
 
 Adhatoda vasica 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Apterccarpese ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 698 
 
 Adiantum Capillus-veneris ... 726 
 
 Areca Catechu 
 
 • *« 
 
 769 
 
 „ venustum ... 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Argemone mexcana ... 
 
 ... 
 
 727 
 
 Adina 
 
 ... 812 
 
 Argyreia setosa 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 „ cordifolia, 
 
 83, 816 
 
 „ speciosa ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 .ZEchm anther a \\ aliichii 
 
 ... 772 
 
 Asarabacca 
 
 • • • 
 
 722 
 
 Aigle Marmelos, 
 
 726, 778, 782 
 
 Asparagus adscendens 
 
 
 727 
 
 uEsculus indica 
 
 ... 872 
 
 „ racemcsus .. 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 Agathotes alata 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Asplenium radiatum ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 726 
 
 ,, angustifolia 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Artemisia scoparia ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 „ Chirayta ... 
 
 ... 744 
 
 „ vulgaris ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 727 
 
 Agave americana 
 
 ... 882 
 
 Artoearpus integrifolia, 
 
 727 
 
 799 
 
 „ Cantala 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ Lakoocha .. 
 
 • •• 
 
 799 
 
 Albizzia Lebbek 
 
 726, 782 
 
 Arum 
 
 
 709 
 
 „ odoratissima 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Arundinaria falcata, ... 
 
 809 
 
 810 
 
 „ procera ... 
 
 ... 782 
 
 „ utilissima 
 
 • •• 
 
 810 
 
 Allium cepa 
 
 703, 726 
 
 Arundo Karka ... 
 
 ... 
 
 806 
 
 „ sativum 
 
 707, 726 
 
 „ nepalensis 
 
 • • • 
 
 806 
 
 Alnus nepalensis 
 
 776, 818 
 
 „ Koxburghii ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 806 
 
 Aloe angustifolia 
 
 ... 882 
 
 Avena fatua ... 
 
 
 692 
 
 „ indica 
 
 ... 726 
 
 „ sativa 
 
 o • o 
 
 692 
 
INDEX 
 
 931 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Capparis horrida ... 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Balanites Roxburghii... 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Capsicum frutescens, ... 
 
 705, 730 
 
 Baliospermum indicum 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Careya arborea, ... 
 
 730, 782, 794 
 
 Barler. a cristata 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Carthamus tinctorius 
 
 ... 709 
 
 Basella rubra 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Carum Garni, 
 
 705, 731 
 
 Bassia butyracea ... 
 
 ... 728 
 
 „ copticum, 
 
 705, 730 
 
 „ latifolia, 
 
 728, 772 
 
 ,, Roxburghianum 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Batatis edulis 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Casearia tomentosa 
 
 777 
 
 Bauhinia purpurea 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Cassia Absus 
 
 ... 731 
 
 „ raeemosa ... 
 
 ... 793 
 
 „ fistula, 722, 
 
 731, 779, 782 
 
 „ Yahlii 
 
 ... 793 
 
 „ sophera 
 
 ... 731 
 
 „ variegata, ... 
 
 728, 702 
 
 „ Tora 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Benincasa cerifera, ... 
 
 70", 72s 
 
 Castanea juglans 
 
 ... 881 
 
 Berberis aristata, 
 
 729, 774 
 
 ,, vesca 
 
 ... 881 
 
 „ asiatica ... 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Catalpa speciosa 
 
 ... 883 
 
 „ Lycium, 
 
 728, 774 
 
 Cedrela serrata 
 
 ... 814 
 
 Beta bengalensis ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 „ Toona, 731, 
 
 778, 782, 814 
 
 „ vulgaris 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Ccdrus Deodara, 
 
 788, 830 
 
 Betula acuminata ... 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Celosia argentea 
 
 ... 731 
 
 „ Bho.ipatra 
 
 ... 819 
 
 Cephalandra indica ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Bcehmeria lobata 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Cephcclis Ipecacuanha 
 
 ... 881 
 
 „ macrophylla 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Ceratonia Siliqua 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ nivea 
 
 ... 877 
 
 Chamasrops Martiana .. 
 
 ... 805 
 
 „ platyphylla 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Chavica Betel 
 
 ... 768 
 
 Bcenninghaus°nia a'biflora 
 
 ... 728 
 
 „ Roxburghii ... 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Boerhaavia diffusa 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Chenopodiacete 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Bombax.malabaricum, 7 29, 
 
 78), 791 
 
 Chenopodium album, 
 
 696, 708, 731 
 
 Boswellia thurifera ... 
 
 ... 729 
 
 „ viride ... 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Brassica alba ... 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Chickrassia tabularis 
 
 ... 814 
 
 „ campestris, ... 
 
 709. 769 
 
 Chloroxylon Swietenia 
 
 ... 814 
 
 „ glauca 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Cicer arietinum, 685, 
 
 693, 709, 732 
 
 „ juncea 
 
 707, 729 
 
 „ lens 
 
 ... 694 
 
 „ nigra, ... 729, 
 
 769, 770 
 
 „ macrophyllnm ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 „ oleracea 
 
 ... 707 
 
 Cinnamomum albiflorum 
 
 ... 705 
 
 „ Rapa 
 
 ... 702 
 
 „ Tamala, 704, 
 
 705, 732, 776 
 
 Briedelia montana 
 
 ?29 
 
 Cissampelos Pareira ... 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Buchanania latifolia, 729, 779 
 
 782, 786 
 
 Cleome viscosa, 
 
 732, 738 
 
 Butea frondosa, 729, 778, 779, 784. 789, 793 
 
 Clerodendron infortunatum 
 
 ... 732 
 
 „ parvi flora 
 
 ... 730 
 
 „ serratum 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Buxus sempervirens, ... 
 
 730, 818 
 
 „ Siphonanthus ... 733 
 
 „ Wallichiana ... 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Citrullus amarus 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Bryonia laciniosa ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 „ Colocynthis, 
 
 701, 7 32 
 
 
 
 „ Hardwickii ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 C. 
 
 
 ,, vulgaris 
 
 ... 701 
 
 
 
 Citrus aurantium, 
 
 710, 732 
 
 Calamus Rotang ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 „ decumana 
 
 ... 710 
 
 „ Royleanus ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 „ Limetta 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Calosanthcs indica ... 
 
 ... 730 
 
 „ Limonum 
 
 ... 732 
 
 CaDsalpinia Bonducella 
 
 ... 730 
 
 „ medica, 
 
 710, 732 
 
 Cajanus bicolor 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Cochlospermum gossypium, 
 
 733, 783 
 
 „ flavus 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Colocasia antiquorum, 
 
 7o4, 733 
 
 „ indicus 
 
 ... 696 
 
 ,, himalensis ... 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Call icarpa arborea 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Commelyna obliqua ... 
 
 ... 73 5 
 
 Calotropis gigantea, ... 
 
 788, 794 
 
 Conocarpus latifolia ... 
 
 ... 816 
 
 „ Hamiltonii 
 
 ... 788 
 
 Corchorus olitorius ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 ,, procera, ... 
 
 730, 794 
 
 Cordia latifolia 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Canavalia ensiformis ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 „ Myxa, 
 
 733, 79 t 
 
 Canna indica ... 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Coriandrum sativum, 
 
 705, 708, 733 
 
 Cannabis indica, ... 
 
 730, 799 
 
 Coriaria uepalensis ... 
 
 ... 749 
 
 „ sativa. 
 
 700, 799 
 
 Corylus Colurua ... 
 
 ... 716 
 
932 
 
 INDEX 
 
 I 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Costus speciosus 
 
 ... 733 
 
 El mod endron glaucum, 
 
 
 736, 783 
 
 Crinum asiaticum 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Embelia Ribes, 
 
 
 736, 743 
 
 toxicarium ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 „ robusta 
 
 
 .. 736 
 
 Cucurbita maxima, ... 
 
 701, 734 
 
 Eragrostis cynosuroi des, 
 
 
 736 807 
 
 „ moschata ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Eriopliorum comosum, 
 
 
 808, 809 
 
 „ Tepo, 
 
 702, 734 
 
 Ernca sativa, 
 
 
 708, 771 
 
 Cucumis Hardwickii ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Ervum Lens, 
 
 
 685, 694 
 
 „ himalensis ... 
 
 ... 7ul 
 
 Erythrina indica 
 
 
 ... 7»9 
 
 „ Melo 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Euchlaena luxurians ... 
 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ momordica ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Eugenia Jambolana 
 
 
 ... 736 
 
 „ sativus ... 
 
 ... 7ul 
 
 Euphorbia pentago.ua ... 
 
 
 ... 736 
 
 „ trigonus ... 
 
 ... 7ol 
 
 Exacum tetragonum ... 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 „ utilissimus ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 
 
 
 Cuminum Cyminum, ... 
 
 705, 734 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 Cupressus toralosa, ... 
 
 830, 840 
 
 
 
 
 Cixrculigo orchioides ... 
 
 »«« 734 
 
 Eagopyrum cymosum . 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Curcuma angustifolia 
 
 ... 706 
 
 „ emarginatum 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 „ longa, 
 
 706, 734, 774 
 
 „ esculentum 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Curcurbitsicea? 
 
 ... 699 
 
 „ tataricum 
 
 
 698 
 
 C'yamopsis psoralioides 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Feronia elephantum, 
 
 736 
 
 783, 789 
 
 Cydonia vulgaris, 
 
 713, 748 
 
 Eicus bengalensis ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Cymbopogon laniger, ... 
 
 734, 809 
 
 „ Carica 
 
 
 ... 736 
 
 „ Martini.., 
 
 734, 809 
 
 ,, glomerata ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Cynodon Dactylon 
 
 ... 734 
 
 „ hispida 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Cyperus juncifolius ... 
 
 ... 774 
 
 „ indica, 
 
 737, 
 
 777, 789 
 
 „ rotundus, ... 
 
 734, 808 
 
 „ religiosa, 
 
 
 737, 789 
 
 „ tegetum 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Elacourtia sepiaria ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Cytisus Cajaxr 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Fceniculum vulgare, ... 
 
 
 705, 737 
 
 
 
 Fragaria indica 
 
 
 ... 7 3 
 
 D. 
 
 
 „ nubicola 
 
 
 ... 713 
 
 
 
 „ vesca 
 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Dalbergia Oogeinensis 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Eraximus floribunda ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 „ Sissoo, 
 
 83, 734, 814 
 
 Fumaria parviflora ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Daphne papyracea, ... 
 
 791, 794 
 
 „ Vaillantii 
 
 
 737 
 
 Datisca cannabina, ... 
 
 734, 774 
 
 
 
 
 Datura alba ... 
 
 ... 735 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 Daucus Carota, ... 
 
 703, 735 
 
 
 
 
 DebregeaBia bicolor ... 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Garcinia ... 
 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Delphinium brunonianum, 
 
 735, 756 
 
 Gardenia ... ... 
 
 
 ... 722 
 
 „ Kashmcrianum 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Garuga pinnata ... 
 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Dendrocalaraus strictus, 
 
 735, 810 
 
 Gentiana Kurroo 
 
 737, 
 
 746, 749 
 
 Desmodium tiliasfolium 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Geranium nodosum ... 
 
 
 ... 744 
 
 „ tritiornm 
 
 ... 736 
 
 ,. Ocellatum ... 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Dioscorea deltoides 
 
 ... 7> 3 
 
 Gerbera lanuginosa 
 
 
 ... 793 
 
 „ globosa ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Girardinia heterophylla, 
 
 
 797, 798 
 
 „ pentaphylla 
 
 ... 7 03 
 
 Gloriosa superba ... 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 quinata ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Glycine Soja 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 sagittata ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Gmelina arborea 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 versicolor, .. 
 
 703, 735 
 
 Goniopteris prolifernm 
 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Diospyros Melanoxylon 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Gossypium herbacenm 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Dolichos bitiorus 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Graminese, ... 
 
 
 485, 692 
 
 Lablab 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Grewia asiatica. 
 
 
 738, 792 
 
 „ Binensis, 
 
 695, 735 
 
 ,, oppositifolia... 
 
 
 ... 792 
 
 
 
 Grislea tomentosa 
 
 
 ... 753 
 
 E. 
 
 
 Gynandropsis pentaphylla, 
 
 
 732, 738 
 
 Eclipta erecta 
 
 ... 735 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 Elcusme Corocana 
 
 ... 690 
 
 
 
 
 „ indica 
 
 ... 691 
 
 Hedychium spicatum, 
 
 
 738, 744 
 
 Elceagnus umbellata ... 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Hedysarum tuberosum 
 
 
 ... 748 
 
INDEX. 
 
 933 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Helicteres Isora, 
 
 722, 7 39 
 
 Luffa acutangula ... 
 
 ... 7 ' >0 
 
 Ileliotropum brevifolium 
 
 ... 739 
 
 „ aegyptiaca 
 
 ... 700 
 
 HerpeStis Monniera ... 
 
 ... 739 
 
 
 
 Hibiscus canccllatus ... 
 
 ... 791 
 
 M. 
 
 
 „ cannabinus, ... 
 
 7 -9, 791 
 
 
 
 „ esculentus ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Macrotomia euchroma 
 
 ... 744 
 
 „ ficulneus ... 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Malachira capitata 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ pungens 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Mallotus pliilipinensis, 
 
 74!, 776 
 
 „ sa.bdariffa ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Malva rotundifolia ... 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Hiptage Madablota ... 
 
 ... 739 
 
 ,. sylvestris 
 
 Mangifera indica, ... 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Hoi arrhena. anti dysenterica 
 
 ... 739 
 
 711, 74i 
 
 Holcus Sorghum, ... 
 
 35, 692 
 
 Maoutia buy a ... 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Hordeum iEgieeras 
 
 685 
 
 Maranta arundiuacea ... 
 
 ... 704 
 
 „ hexasticlion, 
 
 682, 739 
 
 Mariscus cyperus 
 
 ... 774 
 
 „ himalensis ... 
 
 ... 685 
 
 Marsdenia Koy'ei 
 
 ... 794 
 
 Humulus Lupulus 
 
 ... 707 
 
 „ tenacissima 
 
 ... 794 
 
 Hymenodicyton excelsum 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Melia Azedarach 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Hyoscyamus niger 
 
 ... 739 
 
 „ indica 
 
 ... 741 
 
 
 Memorial is pentandra 
 
 ... 798 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Memha viridis, 
 
 703, 741 
 
 
 
 Mimosa Catechu 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Ichnocarpu8 frutescens 
 
 ... 739 
 
 „ Pudica 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Impatiens Balsa u ina .. 
 
 ... 774 
 
 „ rubicaulis 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Imperata arundiuacea 
 
 ... 808 
 
 „ Sundra 
 
 ... 8'5 
 
 Inga dulcis ... 
 
 ... 789 
 
 Mirabilis Jalapa 
 
 ... 741 
 
 
 
 Momordica Balsamina 
 
 .. 701 
 
 J. 
 
 
 „ charantia... 
 
 700, 742 
 
 
 
 „ dioica 
 
 701 
 
 Jasminum graudiflorum 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Moringa pterygosperma 
 
 742, 784 
 
 Jatropha Curcas, 
 
 740, 744 
 
 Morus indica 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Juglans regia, 
 
 716, 740 
 
 „ lcevigata 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Juniper us alpina ... 
 
 ... 842 
 
 „ serrata 
 
 ... 742 
 
 ,, communis, ... 
 
 7S8, 842 
 
 Mucuna atropurpurea... 
 
 ... 742 
 
 ,, excelsa, ... 
 
 788, 840, 843 
 
 ,, pruriens ... 
 
 ... 7 2 
 
 „ nana 
 
 . 842 
 
 Mukia scabrella ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 „ reeurva, ... 
 
 788, 842 
 
 Musa sapientum 
 
 ... 742 
 
 ,, religiosa ... 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Murdannia scapiflora ... 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Justicia Adhatoda, ... 
 
 740, 776 
 
 Murraya Koenigii ... 
 
 705, 742 
 
 
 
 Myrica sapida, 
 
 742, 779 
 
 K. 
 
 
 Myrsine africana, ... 
 
 736, 743 
 
 
 
 „ semiserrata ... 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Kydia calycina, ... 
 
 740, 791 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 
 Nardostachys grandiflora 
 
 ... 743 
 
 L. 
 
 
 „ latamansi 
 
 ... 743 
 
 
 
 Nasturtium officinale... 
 
 ... 708 
 
 tactuca sativa ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Nauclea cordifolia ... 
 
 ... 816 
 
 Lagenaria vulgaris ... 
 
 ... 700 
 
 ,, parvifolia ., 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Lallemantia iberica ... 
 
 ... 883 
 
 Nelumbium speciusum 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Lathyrus Aphaca ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Nephrol epis cordifolia 
 
 ... 725 
 
 „ sativus ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Nerium odor urn ... 
 
 ... 743 
 
 „ sphcericus ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Nicotiana rustica ... 
 
 ... 755 
 
 Lauracese ... 
 
 705 
 
 „ Tabacum, ... 
 
 743, 755 
 
 Leguminosce ... 
 
 693, 694 
 
 Nima quassioides 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Lepidium sativum, ... 
 
 702, 708, 740 
 
 Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis, 
 
 743, 748 
 
 Lilium Wallichianum 
 
 ... 740 
 
 0 . 
 
 
 Limetta ... 
 
 ... 710 
 
 
 Limonia acidissima ... 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Ocimum Basilicum 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Limonum ... .., 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Odina Wodier, 744, 
 
 782, 785, 792 
 
 Hineaceae ... ... 
 
 ... 771 
 
 Olea glandulifcra 
 
 ... 744 
 
 JLinum usitatissimum, 
 
 740 ; 771 
 
 Onosma echioides 
 
 ... 744 
 
934 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Pjge. 
 
 Ophelia 
 
 Chirayta ... 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Pinus 
 
 longifolia, 
 
 33 
 
 cordata ... 
 
 ... 744 
 
 33 
 
 Massoniana 
 
 33 
 
 purpurascens ... 
 
 ... 744 
 
 33 
 
 pend u' a 
 
 3 » 
 
 speciosa 
 
 ... 744 
 
 33 
 
 Peuce 
 
 Oplismenus colonus 
 
 ... 6J-9 
 
 33 
 
 Smithiana 
 
 33 
 
 frumentaceus 
 
 ... 689 
 
 5) 
 
 spectabilis 
 
 Orthantera viminea ... ... 794 
 
 Oryza sativa ... ... 685 
 
 ()ugein.ia dalbergioides, 784, 815 
 
 Oxalis corniculata, ... 708, 744 
 
 P. 
 
 Pandanus odoratissimus ... 756 
 
 Panicum brizoides ... ... 689 
 
 frumentaceum ... 6 C 9 
 
 italicuin ... ... 689 
 
 miliaceu’n ... ... 688 
 
 „ uliginosum ... ... 668 
 
 Paniceae, ... ... 685, 692 
 
 Papaver eomniferum, 704, 757 
 
 Papaveraceie ... ... 75 7 
 
 Papyrus Pangorei ••• ... 8' 8 
 
 Paraphyllant.hus urinaria ... 745 
 
 Parmelia Kamtschadalis, 745, 778 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 746. 
 
 Piper longum 
 „ silvaticum, 
 
 Pistacia integerrima 
 Pisum arvtnse 
 „ sativum 
 Pithecolobiuui bigeminum 
 ,, saman 
 
 Plantago decumbens ... 
 
 „ Major 
 Plumbago zeylanica .. 
 Pceonia emodi 
 Polygonacete 
 
 Polygonatum verticillatum 
 Polypodium 
 Pongamia glabra 
 Pontedcra vaginalis ... 
 Populus ciliata 
 Portulaca oleraeea, 
 
 Page. 
 
 785, 824 
 
 ... 786 
 
 ... 829 
 
 ... 829 
 
 ... 884 
 
 ... 887 
 
 ... 731 
 
 705, 731 
 ... 746 
 
 ... 694 
 
 ... 694 
 
 ... 716 
 
 ... 8 8a 
 ... 746 
 
 .. 746 
 
 ... 746 
 
 ... 745 
 
 ... 698 
 
 ... 745 
 
 ... 726 
 
 ... 746 
 
 ... 747 
 
 .. 747 
 
 708, 747 
 
 Paspalum Kora 
 
 ... 688 
 
 Potentilla nepalensis ... 
 
 ... 744 
 
 „ scrobiculatum 
 
 ... 688 
 
 Premna integrifolia .. 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Pedaliacece 
 
 ... 771 
 
 « « 
 
 mucronata 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Penicillai ia spicata ... 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Primula speciosa 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Pennisetum italicu n ... 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Prinsepia utilis 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Pentaptera coriacea ... 
 
 ... 8 1 5 
 
 Prosopis glan lulosa ... 
 
 ... 882 
 
 „ crenulata 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Prunus amygdalus 
 
 ... 711 
 
 ,, tomentosa... 
 
 ... 815 
 
 
 armeniaca 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Perilla ocimoides 
 
 ... 708 
 
 
 Avium ... 
 
 ... 7 i 2 
 
 Peucedanum graveolens, 
 
 705, 745 
 
 >y 
 
 Cerasus 
 
 ... 712 
 
 Pharbitis Nil 
 
 ... 745 
 
 33 
 
 can munis, ... 
 
 712, 747 
 
 Phaseolus aconitifolius 
 
 ... 694 
 
 33 
 
 domestica, 
 
 712, 747 
 
 „ aureus 
 
 ... 694 
 
 3 > 
 
 Jacquemontii .. 
 
 ... 7 1 2 
 
 ,, calcaratus ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 33 
 
 nepaleusis ... 
 
 ... 712 
 
 „ coccineus ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 » 
 
 padus, ... 
 
 712, 747 
 
 „ Max ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 33 
 
 persica, ... 
 
 712, 747 
 
 ,, multiflorus 
 
 ... 695 
 
 3 
 
 Puddmn, ... 
 
 7 12, 747, 782 
 
 „ Mungo ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 ' 3 
 
 undulata ... 
 
 ... 713 
 
 „ radiatus 
 
 . . 695 
 
 Psidium Guyava 
 
 ... 747 
 
 „ Boxburghii 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Pterocarpus marsupium 
 
 ... 784 
 
 „ torosus 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Pueraria tuberosa 
 
 ... 748 
 
 „ vulgaris ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Punica gran at um ... 
 
 715, 748, 777 
 
 Phyllanthus embliea ... 
 
 745, 777 
 
 Putranjiva Boxburghii 
 
 ... 7 48 
 
 „ Niruri ... 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Pyrus baccata ... 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Phytolacca acinosa 
 
 ... 708 
 
 33 
 
 communis ... 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Picea Morinda ... 
 
 ... 834 
 
 33 
 
 Cydonia ... 
 
 ... 748 
 
 ,, Webbiana ... 
 
 ... 837 
 
 33 
 
 foliolosa 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Picrorhiza Kurrua, ... 
 
 722, 746, 749 
 
 33 
 
 Kumauni 
 
 ... 714 
 
 PL.us Brunoniana ... 
 
 ... 836 
 
 33 
 
 lanata 
 
 ... 713 
 
 „ C'embra ... 
 
 ... 220 
 
 3 > 
 
 malus 
 
 ... 713 
 
 ,, Deodara, ... 
 
 746, 830 
 
 33 
 
 Pashia, . M 
 
 713, 714 
 
 ,, dumosa ... 
 
 ... 836 
 
 33 
 
 vestita 
 
 ... 714 
 
 ,, excelsa, ... 
 
 787, 829, 872 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ,, Gerard iana, ... 
 
 746, 788, 828 
 
 
 
 
 „ Khasyana 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Quercus annulata 
 
 ... 818 
 
 „ Khutrow 
 
 ... 834 
 
 33 
 
 dilatata 
 
 ... 818 
 
INDEX. 
 
 935 
 
 
 Paye. 
 
 Querciis floribunda 
 
 ... 818 
 
 yj mcana, <-«• 
 
 748, 818 
 
 jj lanata 
 
 ... 817 
 
 „ lanuginosa 
 
 ... M 7 
 
 „ semecarpifolia 
 
 ... 817 
 
 R. 
 
 Randia dumetorum 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Raphanus sativus, 
 
 • •• 
 
 702, 748 
 
 Remusatia capillifera 
 
 ... 704 
 
 „ vivipara 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Rheum ernodi, 
 
 
 748, 749 
 
 ,, Webbi annin 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Rhododendron campanulatum 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Rhus succedanea 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 785 
 
 „ vernicifera 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 785 
 
 Ribes acuminatu n 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 714 
 
 „ glaciale, 
 
 
 714, 715 
 
 „ grossularia 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 714 
 
 „ nigrum 
 
 
 ... 714 
 
 ,, rubrum 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Ricinus communis, 
 
 • •• 
 
 749, 77 i 
 
 Royiea elegans 
 
 • II 
 
 .. 749 
 
 Rubia cordifolia, 
 
 1 •• 
 
 749, 7 73 
 
 ,, Manjistha 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 774 
 
 „ tinctorum 
 
 • . 1 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Rumex acetosa 
 
 • « • 
 
 749 
 
 „ acutus 
 
 BD- 
 
 ... 749 
 
 „ vesicarius 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 708 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 Saccharum fuscum 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Munja, 
 
 • •• 
 
 806, 807 
 
 „ officinarum 
 
 ... 4592 
 
 ,, Sara 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 807 
 
 „ spontaneum 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Salix tetrasperma 
 
 il. 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Sterculia colorata, 
 
 III 
 
 784, 792 
 
 ,, urens 
 
 751 
 
 , 780, 783 
 
 „ rillosa 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 783 
 
 Stereospermum suaveolens 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Stillingia sebifera 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 881 
 
 Streblus asper 
 
 • «« 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Swietenia febrifugia 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 814 
 
 ,, Mahogani 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 814 
 
 Symplocos cratcegioides, 
 
 751, 776 
 
 T. 
 
 
 
 Terminalia coriacea ... 
 
 Page. 
 
 ... 816 
 
 „ crenulata .. 
 
 ... 815 
 
 „ tomentosa 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Tetranthera laurifolia 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Thalictrum folioiosum 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Thamnocabimus 
 
 ... 810 
 
 „ Falconer i 
 
 ... 810 
 
 ,, spathitlorus 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Tinospora cordifolia ... 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Toddulia aculeata 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Trichosanthes anguina 
 
 ... 700 
 
 ,, cucumerina 
 
 700, 752 
 
 „ dioica ... 
 
 ... 699 
 
 „ palmata 
 
 699, 752 
 
 Trigonella Foenum-gr<ecum 
 
 708, 752 
 
 Triticum vulgar e 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Typha angustifolia „. 
 
 752, 806 
 
 ,, elephantina ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 „ latifolia ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 U. 
 
 Urginea indica ... 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Urtica nivea 
 
 ... 877 
 
 „ tenacissima ... 
 
 ... 877 
 
 V. 
 
 Valeriana Hardwickii 
 
 743, 753 
 
 Val laris dichotoma 
 
 ... 753 
 
 A’ernonia anthelmintica 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Vicia angustifolia 
 
 ... 694 
 
 ,, Faba ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 „ hirsuta ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 ,, sativa ... 
 
 694 
 
 ., tenera 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Vicieaj ... ... 
 
 693, 694 
 
 V igna Catiang ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Villebrunea frutescens 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Viola serpens ... 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Vitex Negundo ... 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Vitis vinifera 
 
 ... 711 
 
 W. 
 
 Withania coagulans ... 
 
 ... 753 
 
 „ somnifera ... 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Woodfordia floribunda, 
 
 753, 778, 783 
 
 Tacca strict a 
 Tagetes erecta 
 Taxus baccata, 
 
 „ nucifera 
 „ Wallichiana 
 Tephrosia Candida 
 ,, purpurea 
 Terminalia belerica, 
 „ Chebula, 
 
 ... 111 882 
 
 ... ... 778 
 
 751, 775, 788, 843 
 .«• ... 843 
 
 ... ... 843 
 
 in ... 751 
 
 •I. ... 751 
 
 777, 779, 816 
 751, 777, 779 , 816 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zantlioxylum alatum ... 
 Zea Mays ... ... 
 
 Zehneria nepalensis ... 
 
 ,, umbellata 
 Zingiber elatum ... 
 
 „ officinale, ... 
 Zizyphus Jujuba, ... 
 
 ... 753 
 
 ... 687 
 
 ... 702 
 
 ... 702 
 
 ... 706 
 706, 764 
 757, 779 
 
INDEX III 
 
 VERNACULAR. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Arusa ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 776 
 
 
 
 
 Arwi ... 
 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Abhul 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... ... 842 
 
 Asain ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Achala 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... ... 1 b 
 
 Asarun 
 
 • it 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Ada 
 
 ... 
 
 ... ... 706 
 
 Asgand 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Adrak 
 
 
 ... 706, 754 
 
 Asin 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Afirn 
 
 
 ... 757 
 
 Asl-rai 
 
 III 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Afyun 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... ... / 5 7 
 
 Ata 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 684 
 
 A gal 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... ... 846 
 
 Atis 
 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Agaru 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... ... 842 
 
 Awa-bichhu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Agla 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 741 
 
 
 
 
 Agnifin 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... ... 747 
 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Ah fiber 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Bab 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Air-alu 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 701, 732 
 
 Babar ... 
 
 
 797, 808, 809 
 
 Aitulugala 
 
 ... ... 739 
 
 Biibila 
 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Ajmfid 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... ... 705 
 
 Babri 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 735 
 
 A j wain 
 
 • • • 
 
 705, 730 
 
 Babul ... 18, 
 
 725, 776, 
 
 779, 780, 781 
 
 Ak 
 
 ... 
 
 716, 730, 780, 788, 794 
 
 Babfil-ki-gond 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 781 
 
 Akalbir 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Babui-wilayati 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Akhrot 
 
 • &« 
 
 716, 740 
 
 Bach 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Akor 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... ... 7-10 
 
 Badam 
 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Ala 
 
 . « « 
 
 ... ... 834 
 
 Badshahi-bigha 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 805 
 
 Alaya 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... ... 16 
 
 Badsliahi-lai 
 
 • •• 
 
 707, 770 
 
 Alecha 
 
 ill 
 
 ... ... 712 
 
 Baghar 
 
 
 680, 687 
 
 Alsi 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 771 
 
 Bagh-pindalu 
 
 1 • • 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Ain 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 703, 750 
 
 Bahera 
 
 • •• 
 
 7 77, 780 
 
 Alu-bhalu 
 
 ... ... 712 
 
 Baigan 
 
 • ft 
 
 703, 750 
 
 Alu-bukhara 
 
 712, 747 
 
 Bairala ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 733, 7 94 
 
 Alficha 
 
 
 ... ... 712 
 
 Bairalu ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Am 
 
 ... 
 
 ... ... 711 
 
 Bajra ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 680, 687, 690 
 
 Amaltas 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 722, 779, 782 
 
 Baji-bhanga 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Amb 
 
 ... 
 
 ... ... 741 
 
 Bakarcha ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Ambara 
 
 
 ... ... 751 
 
 Bakayan ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Ami a 
 
 IM 
 
 ... ... 745 
 
 Bakliar-birja 
 
 •y* 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Amlika 
 
 
 ... 777 
 
 Bfikla 
 
 M* 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Amrit-phal 
 
 ... 710, 733 
 
 Bakli 
 
 780, 
 
 782, 812, 816 
 
 Amrud 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Bakra 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 783 
 
 Anar 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 715, 748, 777 
 
 Bakula ... 
 
 • # • 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Anardana 
 
 . • • 
 
 ... ... 697 
 
 Balchhar ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Angn 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... ... 737 
 
 Baldaki ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Anjana 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... ... 687 
 
 Bali ... 
 
 ill 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Anjani 
 
 l»J 
 
 ... ••• 687 
 
 Balkar ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Anjir 
 
 III 
 
 ... ... 736 
 
 Balina ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Antha 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... ... 684 
 
 Balu 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Aonla 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 745, 777 
 
 Balfikanbun 
 
 III 
 
 ... 726 
 
 A rand 
 
 • • 
 
 ... ... 772 
 
 Bambu ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 17, 809 
 
 Arliar 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 693, 696 
 
 Bam-i-dunya 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 36 
 
 Arni 
 
 
 ••• ... 733 
 
 Ban ... 
 
 ... 24, 25, 83, 809 
 
 Aru 
 
 ■ • I 
 
 ... 711,842 
 
 Banafsha ... 
 
 • •t 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Arui 
 
 ... 
 
 '«•• ... 704 
 
 Banar ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 731 
 
INDEX. 
 
 937 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Banarasi rai 
 
 • a • 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Bhatta 
 
 • oo 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Bang- 
 
 »oo 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Bhatuwa ... 
 
 
 . . . 731 
 
 Ban-bhanga 
 
 0O» 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Bhatwas .. 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Ban-haldi ... 
 
 • o a 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Bhe 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 
 can 
 
 748, 818 
 
 Bhedara 
 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Banjang ... 
 
 BOO 
 
 16 
 
 Bhekla 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Banja- sarson 
 
 » • ( 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Bhengi 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 811 
 
 Banj-pindalu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Bhengul 
 
 
 .oo 7y2 
 
 Banlai 
 
 to* 
 
 ... 707 
 
 Bhenwal ... 
 
 
 792 
 
 Ban-mehal 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Bhilawa ... 
 
 
 750, 780, 785 
 
 Ban-ogal ... 
 
 aoa 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Bhimal 
 
 
 ... 792 
 
 Ban-patti ... 
 
 eo e 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Bhindi 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Banphal 
 
 * a * 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Bholuwa . . . 
 
 
 ... 795 
 
 Bans 
 
 < a • 
 
 735, 810 
 
 Bbotiya-badam 
 
 
 712, 716 
 
 Bans-lochan 
 
 to* 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Bhotiya lai 
 
 ... 
 
 707, 770 
 
 Bar 
 
 a a a 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Bhulan 
 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Barf 
 
 » 
 
 16 
 
 Bbuma-madiya 
 
 • 00 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Bargad 
 
 ta 
 
 777, 789 
 
 Bhdnga 
 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Bari 
 
 
 678, 691 
 
 Bhunja 
 
 ... 
 
 693, 700, 728 
 
 Barlai ... 
 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Bhusa 
 
 coo 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Barniat 
 
 « a a 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Bhutta 
 
 
 687, 750 
 
 Bart .. 
 
 • »a 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Bhyula 
 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Barti ... 
 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Bichhra 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Bashing 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Bich-tarak 
 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Bisila 
 
 • 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Bihi 
 
 ... 
 
 713, 748 
 
 Basmati ... 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Bihnora ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 686 
 
 
 • at 
 
 .. 737 
 
 Bija sal 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Batana ... 
 
 aoa 
 
 694 
 
 Bijaura 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Bathu ... 
 
 •«« 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Bij-band ... 
 
 
 • •• 6 
 
 Batliua ... 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Bikh 
 
 000 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Batu ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Bil 
 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Baunra 
 
 a av. 
 
 . 745 
 
 Bilai-kand... 
 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Baurala ••• 
 
 ... 
 
 733, 794 
 
 Bili 
 
 * 0 0 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Bayabirang 
 
 aaa 
 
 736, 743 
 
 Bibicliar ... 
 
 ... 
 
 761, 762 
 
 Bel 
 
 aaa 
 
 726, 778, 782 
 
 Bimba 
 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Ber 
 
 aoa 
 
 779, 789 
 
 Bind 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Berja 
 
 a 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Bipuwa-karita 
 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Besan 
 
 *aa 
 
 ... 693 
 
 Birali-panwa 
 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Bet 
 
 «o« 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Birja 
 
 
 684, 785 
 
 Betain 
 
 • 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Birja-ki-tel 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Bethua ... 
 
 000 
 
 696, 708 
 
 Bisi 
 
 
 691, 800, 802 
 
 Better 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 812' 
 
 Bish-kopra 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Bhabar 
 
 
 ... 117 
 
 Bislombhi 
 
 ..0 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Bhadeliya ... 
 
 
 ... 271 
 
 Bish-nangal 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Bhagna 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 81 
 
 Bish-ningal 
 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Bhakar 
 
 
 .. 687 
 
 Bodal ... 
 
 
 ... 792 
 
 Bhala ... 
 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Bodiila 
 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Bhalcna 
 
 a a a 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Bodnia ... 
 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Bhalian 
 
 aoa 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Bora 
 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Bhalu-suang 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 795 
 
 Boriya 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Bhamena ... 
 
 ■aaa 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Boro 
 
 coo 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Blnind 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Bozidan 
 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Bhang 
 
 aaa 
 
 730, 760, 763 
 
 Brahmi 
 
 • 00 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Bhangara ... 
 
 a a a 
 
 . . 708 
 
 Bujr-bhanga 
 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Bhangela ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Bujina 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Bhangi 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Buldunga ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 288 
 
 Bhangiya ... 
 
 ■ a a 
 
 699, 707 
 
 Buru 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Bhang- jala... 
 
 aea 
 
 ... 734 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 Bhangra 
 
 • a ■ 
 
 ... 735 
 
 
 
 
 Bhat 
 
 t'- 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 t- 
 
 690, 696, 732 
 
 Chabena 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 693 
 
 Bhatnas 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Chalchalira 
 
 • 0 • 
 
 745, 778 
 
 118 
 
938 
 
 INDEX 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Chachinda... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Chirchira ... 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Chaehinga... 
 
 • •4 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Chironji ... 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Chaitra 
 
 > •• 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Chiti-phil ... 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Clial-kumhra 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Chita 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Ohahnori ... 
 
 • S > 
 
 708, 744 
 
 Chitra 
 
 746, 774 
 
 Chalpuri ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 77S 
 
 Chitta 
 
 ... ... 759 
 
 Chalniya ... 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Chiura 
 
 715, 772 
 
 Chama 
 
 • ftf 
 
 ... 685 
 
 Chiura-ka-pina 
 
 ... 772 
 
 Chamara ... 
 
 • •a 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Chola 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Chambu ... 
 
 » • • 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Chua 
 
 692, 697 
 
 Chanli sag 
 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Chila- marsa 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Chauiliya ... 
 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Chuaru ... 
 
 ... ... 7 1 1 
 
 Chan 
 
 • »• 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Chuchi 
 
 ... 688. 
 
 Ghana 
 
 ... 
 
 693, 732 
 
 Chuka-palang 
 
 ... ... 708 
 
 Chandan ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 784, 816 
 
 Chuna 
 
 ... ... 769 
 
 Ckandu ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 757, 758, 769 
 
 Chupra 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Chandra ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Chnral 
 
 ... ... 694 
 
 Chang 
 
 . . . 
 
 ...31, 39 
 
 Churan 
 
 ... ... 814 
 
 Changathasi dhup 
 
 • a * 
 
 ... 836 
 
 Churpunja ... 
 
 ... ... 842 
 
 Chankan . . . 
 
 l.< 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Chyura 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Chanwai . . . 
 
 t.l 
 
 687, 688 
 
 Chyura-ka-pina 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Chapa 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 
 
 Chapkiya ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 794 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Chara ... 
 
 
 ... 708 
 
 
 
 Charai 
 
 ... 
 
 696, 708, 846 
 
 Dab 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Charaa ... 
 
 
 760, 761, 771 
 
 Dabh ... 
 
 735, 807 
 
 Charila 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Dain 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Chaukandar 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Dai 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Charchubilu 
 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Dakhang ... 
 
 ... ... 711 
 
 Chaulai ... 
 
 • •a 
 
 697-708 
 
 Dal 
 
 692, 694, 099 
 
 Chaumas ... 
 
 ... 
 
 682, 690 
 
 Dala ... 
 
 ... ... 814 
 
 Chauiliya ... 
 
 • o o 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Dalas 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Cheharadar rupaiyia 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 279 
 
 Dalaya 
 
 ... ... 684 
 
 Chhahki ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ••• 700 
 
 Dal-bhat ... 
 
 ... 693 
 
 Chhaneju ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Dalchini ... 
 
 ... ... 776 
 
 Chhatiyun... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Dao 
 
 21 
 
 Chhattak ... 
 
 
 680, 761, 762 
 
 Darchob ... 
 
 728, 774 
 
 Chhimi ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Darhald 
 
 ... 737, 774 
 
 Chhinkas ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Daritn 
 
 715, 748, 777 
 
 Chkota-alu 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 712 
 
 Darn ... 
 
 691, 768 
 
 Chichiya ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Dasatta ... 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Chichra 
 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Daud-khani 
 
 ... ... 684 
 
 Chick 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Dawa 
 
 ... ... 684 
 
 Chikan ... 
 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Dek 
 
 .,. ... 741 
 
 Clill 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Deodar 325, 320, 
 
 788, 830, 831. 833, 840, 
 
 Chila ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 687, 777 
 
 
 [867, 868, 
 
 Chilghoza ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 828 
 
 Deo-ningala 
 
 ... ... 810 
 
 Chili-ragha 
 
 .«• 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Dhai 
 
 753, 778, 783 
 
 Chilla ... 
 
 • o a 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Dbak 18, 729 
 
 778, 779, 784, 789, 792 
 
 Chilians 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 759 
 
 Dhamaku ... 
 
 743, 755 
 
 Chilrao 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Dhamar ... 
 
 ... ... 750 
 
 Chiln 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Dhamin 
 
 ... ... 792 
 
 Chimi 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Dhan ... 
 
 ... ... 687 
 
 Chimia-sawan 
 
 
 ... 683 
 
 Dhanauriya 
 
 ... ... 269 
 
 Chimul 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Dhaniya ... 
 
 ... 705, 708, 733 
 
 China 
 
 it* 
 
 678, 688 
 
 Dliao 
 
 ... 780 
 
 Chindar 
 
 • at 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Dharla 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Chipsa ... 
 
 ... 
 
 24 
 
 Dhatela 
 
 ... ... 747 
 
 Chir 746, 786, 787, 
 
 788, 824, 829 
 
 Dhatura 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Chirara 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Dhaula 
 
 ... ... 753 
 
 Chirayta ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Dhauli ... 
 
 ... ... 739 
 
INDEX 
 
 939 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 Page . 
 
 
 
 rage. 
 
 Dhaura ... 
 
 
 778, 783 
 
 Gao-patta ... 
 
 ».i 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Dhauri 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 780, 816 
 
 Gar-bijam ... 
 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Dhawa 
 
 Ml 
 
 782, 83 6 
 
 Gar-byush ... 
 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Dhun 
 
 III 
 
 .. 268 
 
 Gargela 
 
 
 ... 797 
 
 Dhup ... 
 
 
 788, 824, 843 
 
 Gar-pipal ... 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Dliura 
 
 
 ... 737 | 
 
 ( arur 
 
 
 • • • V 44 
 
 Dbusa 
 
 
 ... 691 
 
 Gauzaban .. 
 
 .. . 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Diyar 
 
 
 ... 830 
 
 Gawar 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Do ihina ragha 
 
 
 ... 837 
 
 G chan 
 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Doja 
 
 
 ... 279 
 
 Gehun, safed 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Dol chilla ... 
 
 • •V 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Geli 
 
 
 ... 775 
 
 Dolu 
 
 tm * 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Genda ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Dom-ningala 
 
 III 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Genthi 
 
 ... 
 
 703, 735 
 
 Donas 
 
 
 ... 846 
 
 Ghesuwa ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Dongole 
 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Ghi 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Dua 
 
 ... 
 
 708 771 
 
 Ghikar ... 
 
 
 ... 846 
 
 Dual’s 
 
 
 99 
 
 Ghikawar .. 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Dudhi 
 
 
 726, 739, 753 
 
 Ghiwain ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Dudhiya 
 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Ghiwala 
 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Dudhiya-mohura 
 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Ghiya-tori ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Dun 
 
 
 85, 99, 118 
 
 Ghiya-taroi 
 
 in 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Dungshing... 
 
 
 ... 839 
 
 Ghor-rai ... 
 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Durbui 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Ghuiya ... 
 
 
 ... 703 
 
 
 
 
 Ghwiya 
 
 
 ... 703 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 Gilas m 
 
 
 .. 712 
 
 
 
 
 Giloi ... 
 
 • «« 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Filfil-bari ... 
 
 *•0 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Gobara ... 
 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Findora ... 
 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Gobi 
 
 
 ... 707 
 
 
 
 
 Gobli 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 Gobriya-salla 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 839 
 
 
 
 
 Gochni 
 
 
 680, 684 
 
 G ada-purna 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Gogiya 
 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Gaderi 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Gojai 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Gaduwa 
 
 • • • 
 
 701 734 
 
 Gol ... 
 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Gtihut ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 678, 690, 696 
 
 Gol-kaddu... 
 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Gair 
 
 »•* 
 
 ... ’744 
 
 Gol-kankra 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Gajar 
 
 Ml 
 
 703, 735 
 
 Goncha 
 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Gaji 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Gor-ningala 
 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Gajir 
 
 
 703, 735 
 
 Gorp-jiba ... 
 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Gaj-pipali ... 
 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Gosarn ... 
 
 
 812, 814 
 
 GcijrJi mi 
 
 • . , 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Guba ... 
 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Galdara ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 711, 714 
 
 Gugal ... 
 
 
 i«« 842 
 
 Galdu ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Guiya 
 
 
 ... 679 
 
 Galion 
 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Guiancha ... 
 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Gallu 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 775 
 
 Gular 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Galtigal ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 788 
 
 Gul-bansa ... 
 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Gan 
 
 • •• 
 
 290 
 
 Gul-i-gau-zaban 
 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Gandra 
 
 III 
 
 688, 692 
 
 Gul-kand ... 
 
 ... 
 
 731, 757 
 
 Ganara-bhanga 
 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Gulu 
 
 
 ... 783 
 
 GclLlMl’i »•« 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 688 
 
 Gumbhar ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 787 
 
 Gandar 
 
 III 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Gun ... 
 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Gandela 
 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Gonchi ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 724 
 
 Gandla 
 
 Ill 
 
 705, 742 
 
 Gundi 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Ganguli ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 809 
 
 Gur 
 
 ... 
 
 756, 768 
 
 Gani ... 
 
 Ill 
 
 705 742 
 
 Gural ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Ganja 
 
 • . » 
 
 760, 761, 762 
 
 Guransh ... 
 
 i*. 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Ganjakini ... 
 
 • •I 
 
 ... 767 
 
 Guraush 
 
 
 ... 69f> 
 
 Ganjira 
 
 III 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Gur-bach ... 
 
 
 ... '725 
 
 Ganna 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 692 
 
 GGr-bhanga 
 
 
 760, 799 
 
 Gansam ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 814 
 
 Gurial 
 
 
 ... 779 
 
 G anth-baharangi 
 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Guter 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 779 
 
940 
 
 INDEX 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page, 
 
 Gwala-kakri 
 
 • * • 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Jangli palak 
 
 ••ft 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Gwala-mehal 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Jao 
 
 • •« 
 
 ... 277 
 
 
 
 
 Jariya 
 
 • ft • 
 
 ... 770 
 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Jarkund-alu 
 
 
 ... 798 
 
 
 
 
 Jasha 
 
 • «« 
 
 807 
 
 Hakim ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 723 
 
 Jau ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 684, 739 
 
 Halang 
 
 702, 
 
 708, 740 
 
 Jaula 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Haldi ... 
 
 ... 706,734,774 
 
 Jaundela ... 
 
 ... 
 
 772 
 
 Haldu ... 
 
 83, 
 
 812, 816 
 
 Jao sag 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Halim 
 
 CIO 
 
 702, 708 
 
 ,, ivikiyati 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Haliyun ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Jek 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 7H 
 
 Haltyu ... 
 
 « • • 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Jesu ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 759 
 
 Har ... 751, 
 
 777, 778, 779, 
 
 780, 816 
 
 Jhangora . . . 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Haraira ... 
 
 • •e 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Jhangra 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 805 
 
 Harara 
 
 • • • 
 
 777, 816 
 
 Jhanj 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 270 
 
 Harital ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 291 
 
 J hanj haniya-kur i 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Harsinghar 
 
 • •• 
 
 743, 778 
 
 Jhansh 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Hashish 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 767 
 
 Jhao ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Hathiya ... 
 
 »•• 
 
 ... 257 
 
 Jhatela 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Hath-ungliya 
 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Jhil ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 81 
 
 Hindwana... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Jhingan 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Hukka 
 
 • • • 
 
 754, 756 
 
 Jhonka-phal 
 
 .• « 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Hulas-Kashmiri 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Jhora 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Huliya-suliya 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Jliula 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 808 
 
 
 
 
 Jhumro 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 810 
 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Jhungara ... 
 
 ... 
 
 .. 689 
 
 
 
 
 Jhungra 
 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Ikh 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Jiban 
 
 ... 
 
 744, 782, 792 
 
 Ilaichi ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 707 
 
 Jingan 
 
 *•* 
 
 744, 792 
 
 Ind ... 
 
 1 1 • 
 
 ... 772 
 
 Jintiana 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Indrayan ... 
 
 699, 701, 
 
 732, 752 
 
 Jira 
 
 ... 
 
 705. 734 
 
 Inguwa 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Jirrag 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Ishagol 
 
 • • • 
 
 746 
 
 Joar 
 
 ... 
 
 690, 692 
 
 Iskil ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Joga 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 758 
 
 Iskulikandriyun 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Jonkhmari... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Itola ... 
 
 
 731, 799 
 
 J unal a 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 687 
 
 
 
 
 Junali ... 
 
 • * » 
 
 ... 692 
 
 
 J. 
 
 
 J usher 
 
 • * . 
 
 ... 684 
 
 
 
 
 Juti 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Jadiya ... 
 
 • •ft 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Jwaran-tika 
 
 »•• 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Jager 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 805 
 
 
 
 
 Jahi ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 740 
 
 
 K. 
 
 
 Jai ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 692 
 
 
 
 
 Jaint ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Kachlora ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Jainghani ... 
 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Kachnal 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Jaiphal-jari 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Kachnar 
 
 • •• 
 
 728, 779, 782 
 
 Jald-aru 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Kachra ... 
 
 »•• 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Jal-kuira ... 
 
 < • • 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Kachu ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Jal-nim 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Kachur 
 
 • • . 
 
 696, 706 
 
 Jalposhi ,. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 297 
 
 Kachur-kachri 
 
 ■ » • 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Jamana , M 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 712 
 
 Kachur-kachu 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Jamira ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 710, 732 
 
 Kaddu 
 
 »• • 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Jamuwa ... 
 
 • • t 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Kaddu, safed 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Janeo ... 
 
 * • • 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Kaghazi 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Janghora ... 
 
 • •ft 
 
 ... 678 
 
 „ akhrot 
 
 
 ... 716 
 
 Jangli-bhanga 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Kagoha 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 737 
 
 „ chachinda 
 
 »• • 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Kagshi 
 
 
 ... 793 
 
 ,, dalchini 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Kahu 
 
 
 ... 703 
 
 „ harhar 
 
 • •* 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Kail 
 
 ... 
 
 829, 834 
 
 „ jamalgota 
 
 • •tt 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Kaim 
 
 
 - 817 
 
 „ mandira 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 689 j 
 
 Kaiphal 
 
 ... 
 
 742, 779 
 
INDEX, 
 
 941 
 
 Kait 
 
 • •• 
 
 Puge. | 
 ... 783 j 
 
 Karsliu 
 
 m 
 
 Pag e. 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Kakra 
 
 * • 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Karwi 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 746 
 
 „ smgi 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Kas 
 
 ... 
 
 726, 808 
 
 Kakri 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 70 1 ! 
 
 Kasa 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Kakura 
 
 t «t 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Ivasli 
 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Kala bausa ... 
 
 »« i 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Kashmal 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 728 
 
 ,. b. injar 
 
 . 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Katang-lcari 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 750 
 
 ,, ijran ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Katera 
 
 ii. 
 
 7 33 
 
 ,, jira 
 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Kath 
 
 725, 7G9, 
 
 775, 815 
 
 „ kaliya 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Rath a ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 775 
 
 Kalath 
 
 « •• 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Kathal 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Kalijiri 
 
 
 ... 763 
 
 Kathal-parhar 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Kali-sarson 
 
 • •• 
 
 729, 770 
 
 Kath-bans ... 
 
 ... 
 
 845, 850 
 
 ,, taroi ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Katli-bel 
 
 ••• 7 3G, 
 
 783, 789 
 
 „ tori 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Kath-bhilawa 
 
 • • • 
 
 779, 782 
 
 ,, tulsi ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Katil 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Kalon 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Katira 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 783 
 
 Kalra 
 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Kato 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 23 
 
 Kalucliilu ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 831 
 
 Kauj 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Kamarkas ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 782, 784 
 
 Kauni 
 
 *•* 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Kamela ... 
 
 
 - ... 776 
 
 Kaunik 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Kamera 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 766 
 
 Kaunla 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Kan 
 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Kauri 
 
 . . • 
 
 696, 749 
 
 Kana 
 
 • • • 
 
 688, 733 
 
 Kawara 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Kanak 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Kedari-chfia 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Kandai ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Kela ... 
 
 IM 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Ivandala 
 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Kelon 
 
 • it 
 
 ... 830 
 
 Kand-alu ... 
 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Kelu 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 830 
 
 Kandar 
 
 
 ... 813 
 
 Ketnu ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Kanda-tela .. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Keoli 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Kanderi-ki-bel 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Keora 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 756 
 
 Kandre 
 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Keyu ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Kandura ... 
 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Khadir 
 
 . . • 
 
 63 
 
 Ivanerwa ... 
 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Kb aila ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Kangai 
 
 
 724, 817 
 
 Khailuwa ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Kangnaliya 
 
 
 ... - 729 
 
 Khain 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Kangni 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Khair ... 83, 
 
 725, 769, 775 
 
 , 782, 815 
 
 Kangur ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Khairuwa ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 727, 737 
 ... 779 
 
 Kanika 
 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Khairwal ... 
 
 ... 
 
 Kanji 
 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Khala 
 
 • 4. 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Kan jura 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Khalis 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Kaniyur ... 
 
 
 ... j 43 
 
 Khar an ji ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Kankol 
 
 i. • 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Kharbuz ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Kanmar ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Kharif 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 682 
 
 Kanmu ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Khariya 
 
 • « « 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Kansa 
 
 
 ... 294 
 
 Kharot 
 
 * . • 
 
 716, 740 
 
 Kantela 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Kharpat ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Kanthi-rikhu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Khas 
 
 • •• 
 
 726, 808 
 
 Kariwal 
 
 
 733, 743 
 
 Khash-khash 
 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Kaniyura ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Khatauniya 
 
 • * • 
 
 ... 270 
 
 Kapas ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Khatla ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Kapasi 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 716 
 
 Khetiya 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Kapasiya ... 
 
 ... 
 
 791, 793 
 
 Khijri 
 
 680, 687, 689, 693 
 
 Kapur-kachri 
 
 ... 
 
 738, 774 
 
 Khil 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Karan-phal 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Khir 
 
 • . • 
 
 686, 687 
 
 Karaunj ... 
 
 »•« 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Khira 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Karchilla ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Khirai 
 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Karel a ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 700, 742 
 
 Khorasani-aj wai n 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Karhar ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Khuskhab ... 
 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Karka 
 
 • •a 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Khwairal ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Kaiola ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Kikra 
 
 
 ... 705 
 
942 
 
 INDEX 
 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Kilik 
 
 • ti 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 807 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 Kilonj 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 8:8 
 
 
 
 
 Kimam 
 
 
 * . « 
 
 758, 759 
 
 Ladaki ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 7 i 0 
 
 Kingora-ki-jar 
 
 
 728, 774 
 
 Ladu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 772 
 
 Kino 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Laduri 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Kipaliya 
 
 Kirkiriya 
 
 • • • 
 
 • II 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Lahauri-doba 
 
 
 ... 873 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • . 
 
 705, 776 
 
 Laliota laita 
 
 . . • 
 
 . 770 
 
 Kirmali 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Lahsan 
 
 
 707, 726 
 
 Kisara 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Lai 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Kitola 
 
 • . • 
 
 • •• 
 
 731, 779 
 
 Lajawanti ... 
 
 . • • • 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Kitvvali 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 
 
 779, 782 
 
 Lakh 
 
 III 
 
 ... 789 
 
 Kiu 
 
 Ml 
 
 . •• 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Laksha 
 
 1 • • 
 
 ... 789 
 
 Kiwara 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Lal-gehun ... 
 
 • « • 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Kiyera 
 
 • •• 
 
 • *• 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Lal-jari ... 
 
 • . . 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Koda 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 7?3 
 
 Lil-niirclia... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Kodo 
 
 • • • 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Lamshing ... 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 820 
 
 Koish 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 776 
 
 Langar 
 
 • • k 
 
 ... 16 
 
 Kolain 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 824 
 
 Lassa 
 
 • • . 
 
 ... 785 
 
 Ivolan 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 824 
 
 Lathi 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Kolon 
 
 • • • 
 
 . • . 
 
 785, 824 
 
 Lathichur ... 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Kolu 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 770, 771 
 
 -i . a 1 1 k a ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 700, 702 
 
 Kondha 
 
 • • • 
 
 III 
 
 ... 702 
 
 Leauri ... 
 
 
 ... 840 
 
 Koni 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 678, 689 
 
 Lchtiya 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Koranga 
 
 
 * • • 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Lepcha 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Kosam 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 814 
 
 Lobiya 
 
 693, 695, 
 
 709, 735 
 
 Knthla 
 
 t • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 799 
 
 Lod 
 
 Mi 
 
 761, 776 
 
 Kotu 
 
 III 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Lodh ... 
 
 n 
 
 751, 776 
 
 Knar 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Lhala 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Kuda 
 
 
 III 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Lha-lhaka .. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 293 
 
 Kudaliya 
 
 ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Lhali-lhaka 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 293 
 
 Kudram 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Lira 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 829 
 
 Kiier 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Lisha 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 785 
 
 K akni 
 
 • •• 
 
 ). • 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Luet 
 
 • •1 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Kukri 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ...25,27 
 
 Luhuriya ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Kukuliya 
 
 I •• 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Lunak ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Ivul 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 2 
 
 Luniya kulfah 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Kulai 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Luet 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 775 
 
 Kuli 
 
 Ml 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 750 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 Kut-shirm 
 
 • « 
 
 
 ... 733 
 
 
 
 Kulu 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Madak 
 
 757, 
 
 758, 759 
 
 Kulthi 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 .. 696 
 
 Madar 
 
 730, 780, 
 
 788, 794 
 
 Kumbh 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •1 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Madkakari 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Kumbhar 
 
 ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Magiya 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Kumbhi 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 730, 794 
 
 Maha-nibu ., 
 
 M ' 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Kumbi 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 783 
 
 Maharanga 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Kumhra 
 
 • . 
 
 Ml 
 
 702, 728 
 
 Mahua ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 768, 7 72 
 
 Kunch 
 
 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 776 
 
 Ma.hur 
 
 • •a 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Kunda 
 
 • »l 
 
 • . 1 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Mahur-bikh 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Kundri 
 
 Ml 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Mainphal ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Kura 
 
 ... 
 
 lV1 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Majethi 
 
 • •• 
 
 749, 773 
 
 Kuri 
 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Majna ... 
 
 • • I 
 
 ... 688 
 
 Kursani 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 705, 730 
 
 Majni 
 
 III 
 
 ... 688 
 
 Kuru 
 
 . • • 
 
 ... 
 
 737, 783 
 
 Makara-rai 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Kuruwa 
 
 
 >•« 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Makattar ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 768 
 
 Kusha 
 
 » • • 
 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Malingo ... 
 
 ... 
 
 .... 810 
 
 Kushiala 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 715, 748 
 
 M:iljau 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Kushm-aru 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Malu 
 
 • • • 
 
 679, 793 
 
 Kutala 
 
 1 «• 
 
 ... 
 
 686, 691 
 
 Manura 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Kutino 
 
 
 I • • 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Mamri 
 
 f 
 
 • •0 
 
 ... 783 
 
 Kutki 
 
 
 ... 
 
 737, 746 
 
 Maua 
 
 III 
 
 678, 805 
 
 Kyari 
 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Mandavi ... 
 
 • •1 
 
 ... 691 
 
INDEX 
 
 943 
 
 
 
 Page. | 
 
 
 
 Page • 
 
 Mandin ... 
 
 
 ... 691 1 
 
 Munja 
 
 . • • 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Mandira ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 689 1 
 
 Muriya 
 
 ... 
 
 779, 782 
 
 Mandua 
 
 678, 686, 690, 
 
 691, 768 
 
 Murkula ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 794 
 
 Mangle ... 
 
 Ml* 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Musal 
 
 ... 
 
 687, 688 
 
 Man iit ... 
 
 
 21, 773 
 
 Musali 
 
 
 .. 729 
 
 Many ill ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Musli-siyah 
 
 ... 
 
 727, 734 
 
 Maii 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 99 
 
 
 
 
 Maror-phal 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 739 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 Marusthali... 
 
 • • • 
 
 79 
 
 
 
 
 Maruwa ... 
 
 t ». 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Nagarmotha 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Mash ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 693, 695 
 
 Nak 
 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Masha ... 
 
 
 277 
 
 Naka 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Masur 
 
 ... 686, 
 
 693, 694 
 
 Nakshatra ... 
 
 . . . 
 
 ... 257 
 
 chana 
 
 • •• 
 
 .. 694 
 
 Nal 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Masuri 
 
 
 ... 6.; 4 
 
 Nala 
 
 
 , 296 
 
 MilttSi ••• 
 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Nali 
 
 * • • 
 
 ... 687 
 
 M attar 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 694 
 
 Nal-tura ... 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Mmils, 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Kaluga 
 
 
 ... 691 
 
 Mauli 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Naphal 
 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Maulvi 
 
 
 ... 34 
 
 Naspati 
 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Maund ... 
 
 ... 
 
 .. 268 
 
 Nasbphal ... 
 
 
 715, 748, 777 
 
 Maura ... 
 
 • t • 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Nat 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 691 
 
 M lura-bikh 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Nauabad 
 
 
 ... 850 
 
 Maur-bikh ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Nauka 
 
 in 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Miya 
 
 • • • 
 
 .. 684 
 
 Neja 
 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Meda-lakri 
 
 » • • 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Nepari ... 
 
 . • . 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Mehal ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Nhare 
 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Mehali 
 
 «*« 
 
 ... 7)4 
 
 Nianga 
 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Methi 
 
 • • • 
 
 708, 752 
 
 Nibu ... 
 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Mijalu ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Nim 
 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Mirclia ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Ningal 
 
 
 .. 809 
 
 Miriya 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 809 
 
 Ningala 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 809 
 
 Mitha-dudliiya 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 745 
 
 
 
 
 ,, kaddu 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 701 
 
 
 0. 
 
 
 nibu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 710 
 
 
 
 
 Mitlian 
 
 
 '21 
 
 Ogal 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Mitha-tel ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 771 
 
 
 
 
 zaliar 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 725 
 
 
 P. 
 
 
 Mocharas ... 
 
 
 ... 784 
 
 
 
 
 Mock-kand 
 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Padam 
 
 
 712, 782 
 
 Mol 
 
 * * » 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Padam-chhal 
 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Mora ... 
 
 * . • 
 
 807, 809 
 
 Pad bank ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Morinda ... 
 
 • . * 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Pad dam ... 
 
 . 
 
 ... 712 
 
 Moriya ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 739 
 
 Paderi 
 
 III 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Mor-paohh... 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Padma .. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 842 
 
 „ pankhi 
 
 . • . 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Oadmak ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Morunda ... 
 
 . . • ** 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Pahar 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Morn 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Pahari-cha 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Moslita 
 
 . • * 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Pahari-indrayan 
 
 • • » 
 
 701, 732 
 
 Moth 
 
 ... 688 
 
 , 693, 694 
 
 Pahari-kaghazi 
 
 III 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Motha 
 
 li* 
 
 734, 808 
 
 Pahari-nimbu 
 
 • * • 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Mubaraka ... 
 
 • II 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Pahari-pudma 
 
 
 703, 741 
 
 Mukha-jali 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 735 
 
 Paijamas 
 
 
 27, 30 
 
 Mukui 
 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Pain 
 
 III 
 
 ... 271 
 
 Muli 
 
 ♦ *• 
 
 702, 748 
 
 Paiya 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 712 
 
 Mullah ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 34 
 
 Pakhan-bed 
 
 
 746, 749 
 
 Mung 
 
 • •• 
 
 693, 694 
 
 Pakura ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 778 
 
 Mungari ... 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Pala-kliari 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Mnngra 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Palak 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 707 
 
 Muniya 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Palang 
 
 . . • 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Munj ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 807, 808 
 
 Palas ••• 
 
 729, 778 
 
 779, 784, 793 
 
944 
 
 INDEX 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Palwal ... 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 699 
 
 Pindar 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 733 
 
 Pama 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Pipal 
 
 • •• 
 
 737, 789 
 
 Pan 
 
 • • i 
 
 757, 768 
 
 Pi'pala-mor 
 
 
 ... 705 
 
 Pan-babiyo 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Piplainul 
 
 • r • 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Panmotha ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 774 
 
 Piriya 
 
 • • • 
 
 734, 809 
 
 Panri 
 
 > . • 
 
 757, 769 
 
 ,, liiiliin 
 
 t • • 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Pansari 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Pisu-ghas ... 
 
 
 ... 728 
 
 Papar 
 
 704, 714, 
 
 715, 740 
 
 Pithi 
 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Papari ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 8.18 
 
 Pitpapra ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 737 
 
 Paphar 
 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Piyaj 
 
 • • • 
 
 703, 726 
 
 Papri 
 
 i a a 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Piyal 
 
 • • • 
 
 782, 799 
 
 Paral ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 784 
 
 Poi-dhaula 
 
 • » « 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Parhar 
 
 • . • 
 
 ... 738 
 
 Post-anar ... 
 
 
 ... 715 
 
 Pari 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 732 
 
 Pui 
 
 • • • 
 
 .. 708 
 
 Parpinja ... 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Pula 
 
 • •r 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Patangliya 
 
 III 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Puna-rikhu 
 
 • at 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Patera 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Puta ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 740 
 
 Pateri 
 
 • mi 
 
 a v a 806 
 
 Putrajiva ... 
 
 »*• 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Pathan-bed 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Puwal 
 
 ■a • 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Patiia 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 800 
 
 Puya 
 
 • • • 
 
 712, 782, 798 
 
 Ptxti ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Puya-udish 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 818 
 
 1 (ittdi ••• 
 
 III 
 
 — 791 
 
 
 
 
 Pattar 
 
 a a a 
 
 761, 762 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Pattliarke-phul 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 745 
 
 
 
 
 Patti 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 698 . 
 
 Rabi 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 682 
 
 Pattiya 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Rada 
 
 >aa 
 
 ... 770 
 
 1 att u. ••• 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Ragha 
 
 «• « 
 
 834, 837 
 
 Paya ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Raghi 
 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Pechwan ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 756 
 
 Rahar 
 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Pengla-jari 
 
 • « • 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Rai 
 
 • • • 
 
 707, 770, 834 
 
 Petari 
 
 • a • 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Raish 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Petba 
 
 ... 700, 
 
 728, 734 
 
 Rai-banj ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Rhala • • i 
 
 as* 
 
 ... 271 
 
 Rains 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 678 
 
 Phalaha ... 
 
 , , , 
 
 ... 698 
 
 Rai-salla ... 
 
 • a • 
 
 829, 837, 840 
 
 Phalawa . 
 
 
 ... 747 
 
 Raj-briksh .. 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Pkaldu 
 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Rakshi ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 27 
 
 Phalel 
 
 . . • 
 
 715, 772 
 
 Rakti ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 724 
 
 Phaliant ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Ral 
 
 MO 
 
 ... 750 
 
 Phali-gawar 
 
 a a • 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Ramdana ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 697 
 
 Plialka 
 
 
 ... 270 
 
 Ramjawain 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 687 
 
 Phalsa 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 792 
 
 Rangra 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 691 
 
 Pbalwa 
 
 
 ... 772 
 
 Rao 
 
 • 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Phalwara . 
 
 »*• 
 
 715, 772 
 
 Rao-ragha ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Phaniat . . . 
 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Rara 
 
 • aa 
 
 ••• 770 
 
 Phapar ... 
 Pharkath ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 • a • 
 
 ... 698 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Rara-sarson 
 
 Rasaut 
 
 • aa 
 
 • •a 
 
 ... 770 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Pharonj 
 
 • a • 
 
 .. 818 
 
 Rasi 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 768 
 
 Pharsiva, ... 
 
 a • • 
 
 738, 792 
 
 Ratan-jot ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 744 
 
 Phatang ... 
 
 a . « 
 
 ... 277 
 
 Ratmandi ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 ... 752 
 
 Phaunda ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Ratnaliya ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 724 
 
 Phedi 
 
 at* 
 
 ... 16 
 
 Raunsala ... 
 
 a a ■ 
 
 ... 837 
 
 Phitkari ... 
 
 
 ... 297 
 
 Raus-ka-tel 
 
 • a a 
 
 ... 734 
 
 Phul-banga 
 
 • •a 
 
 760, 799 
 
 Rg mi 
 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Phul-gobi ... 
 
 a a • 
 
 ... 707 
 
 Rek 
 
 • a* 
 
 ... 711 
 
 Phulka 
 
 aa a 
 
 ... 768 
 
 Rena ... 
 
 aaa 
 
 • aa 684 
 
 Pliunt 
 
 a. a 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Rendi 
 
 aa 
 
 749, 772 
 
 Phusar-patta 
 
 HI 
 
 ... 798 
 
 Reri ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Pila-sarson 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 770 
 
 Rhai ... 
 
 •r a 
 
 ... 834 
 
 Pili-jari ... 
 
 • «1 
 
 732, 751 
 
 Rianj ... 
 
 • aa 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Piliya-kachang 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 725 
 
 Riansh 
 
 a a a 
 
 , .o 695 
 
 Pindalu ... 
 
 a a a 
 
 703, 704 
 
 Riensh ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 695 
 
'S’ii - - S f ly 
 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 945 
 
 
 I 
 
 | 
 
 
 Rikhu ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 Page. 
 ... 692 
 
 Rikonda ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 692 
 
 Ringal 
 
 • • • 
 
 809, 810 
 
 Rxtha ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Roini 
 
 ••• 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Roli 
 
 
 741, 776 
 
 Ropa 
 
 
 ... 686 
 
 Ropini ... 
 
 
 ... 805 
 
 Roti ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 708 
 
 Ruina ... 
 
 • # • 
 
 ... 776 
 
 Ruindar ... 
 
 
 ... 695 
 
 Kusa m 
 
 lit 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Sabji ... 
 
 S. 
 
 • •• 
 
 760, 763 
 
 Sada 
 
 » • • 
 
 ... 756 
 
 Sadaphal ... 
 
 i*ei 
 
 ... 710 
 
 Safed-ak ... 
 
 in 
 
 ... 794 
 
 „ bhangra 
 
 ••• 
 
 »«• 739 
 
 „ ind ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 740 
 
 „ sir as... 
 
 • a* 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Sag »*• 
 
 • • • 
 
 698, 707 
 
 Sahajna 
 
 • •0 
 
 742, 784 
 
 Saila ... 
 
 
 ... 691 
 
 Sain .... 
 
 in 
 
 812, 815 
 
 Saishu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 278 
 
 Saj 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 815 
 
 Saji 
 
 • •• 
 
 .. 756 
 
 Sakha ... 
 
 lit 
 
 ... 813 
 
 Sal 7, 28, 83, 86, 
 
 301, 750, 
 
 779, 784, 785, 
 
 • M 
 
 • • • 
 
 [812, 813 
 
 Salajit 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 2~9S 
 
 Salap misri 
 
 i • • 
 
 ... 722 
 
 S al I) i a «ii 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Saleri ... 
 
 r . . 
 
 ... ”703 
 
 Sallii ... 
 
 , • • 
 
 ... 729 
 
 Sal la im 
 
 • i • 
 
 785, 829 
 
 Sallo 
 
 III 
 
 ... 326 
 
 San 
 
 III 
 
 ... 791 
 
 Sanan 
 
 Ml 
 
 815 
 
 Sananbar-saghar 
 
 III 
 
 ... 828 
 
 Sandan 
 
 o • • 
 
 784, 815 
 
 Saoni 
 
 ■ II 
 
 ... 690 
 
 Saraichu ... 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Saral 
 
 Ml 
 
 785, 824 
 
 Sarar 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Sar-bachyad 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... '277 
 
 Sar-chaka ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 277 
 
 Sarjao 
 
 til 
 
 ... 277 
 
 Sarhar 
 
 *• • 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Sarkara ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Sar-pan ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 277 
 
 Sarpafc 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Sarpbonka... 
 
 m 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Sarshaf 
 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Sarshu 
 
 & • • 
 
 ... 277 
 
 S arson 
 
 in 
 
 707, 770 
 
 Sarur 
 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Sarwala ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Sarwali 
 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Page. 
 
 Satiydn 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 726 
 
 Satpura 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 795 
 
 Satn 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 679 
 
 Sauj 
 
 • • « 
 
 ... 817 
 
 Sawan 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Sob ... 
 
 Mi 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Sehund .. 
 
 • «« 
 
 ... 736 
 
 Selu ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 793 
 
 Sem 
 
 • •• 
 
 702, 709 
 
 Sernal 
 
 • • • 
 
 729, 784, 791 
 
 Sem-ki-gond 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Sentlia ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Seo ... 
 
 in 
 
 ... 713 
 
 Ser ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 270 
 
 Serahi 
 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Set-baruwa.., 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 795 
 
 Shakrband.. 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Shalgam ... 
 
 
 ••• 702 
 
 Shanraj ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Shambal ... 
 
 Hi 
 
 ... 743 
 
 Sharifah ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Shauriya ... 
 
 e«t 
 
 736, 783 
 
 Shib-wala ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 118 
 
 Shimi 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Shincb ana ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 695 
 
 Shira 
 
 • • • 
 
 756, 768 
 
 Shiro ... 
 
 !*• 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Shisham ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 814 
 
 Shiwali 
 
 * • • 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Shukpa ... 
 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Shukr-ul-uslir 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 ... 788 
 
 Shumeo 
 
 • •• 
 
 745, 753 
 
 Shurbuta ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Shurgu 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Sidhi 
 
 • o» 
 
 ... 763 
 
 Siga 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 33 
 
 Sihora ... 
 
 
 ... 751 
 
 Silajit ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 295 
 
 Sil-supari ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Sim 
 
 ■ •• 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Simali ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Sir liara ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 779 
 
 Sindan ... 
 
 ■ ■ • 
 
 782, 792 
 
 Sink 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 808 
 
 Sinkauri ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 776 
 
 Sirali 
 
 • •a 
 
 ... 731 
 
 Siras 
 
 • • • 
 
 726, 782 
 
 „ wilayati 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Sirgochi 
 
 
 ... 714 
 
 Sirki ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 806, 808 
 
 Sirki-munja 
 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Sisu ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 83, 734, 812 
 
 Sissu 
 
 • . • 
 
 814, 851 
 
 Sitaphal 
 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Sitrawal ... 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 727 
 
 Siyah-tut ... 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 742 
 
 Siya 
 
 III 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Son 
 
 (M 
 
 ... 271 
 
 Sona-ke-pathar 
 
 III 
 
 ... 290 
 
 Sonchala ... 
 
 1 II 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Sonf 
 
 «M 
 
 705, 737 
 
 
 Jt 
 
 119 
 
' i * 
 ; 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 Sonta ... 
 Sonth • M 
 Soya ... 
 Sujuniya ... 
 Sukh- chain 
 Sula ... 
 Sundras ... 
 Snnadung ... 
 Sujia ... 
 Supari 
 
 Surai ... 
 Sural ... 
 Surgi ... 
 Surki ... 
 Syamak 
 Syamsundari 
 
 Tiibahshir 
 Talr ... 
 
 Taj ... 
 
 Takuli 
 Ta. ... 
 
 Tamaku ... 
 
 Tauja ... 
 
 Tarai ... 
 
 Tarbhui Ml 
 Tarkari 
 Tarpin-ki-tel 
 Tarur 
 
 Tat ... 
 
 Teguna ... 
 Tejbal 
 Tej-pat ... 
 
 Teliya ... 
 
 Telu ... 
 
 Tembd ... 
 
 Tendu ... 
 
 Thaka ... 
 
 Tbakil 
 Thalu ... 
 
 Tham ... 
 
 Thana 
 Thaner 
 
 Thansa 
 
 Thapla 
 Thelu 
 Thohur 
 Thuner ... 
 
 Thungtu ... 
 
 Thupara ... 
 Tikuli ... 
 
 Til 
 
 Tilchuni ... 
 
 Tin ... 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 Pnge. 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... G96 
 
 Tilonj 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 818 
 
 III 
 
 706, 764 
 
 Timur 
 
 ill 
 
 ... 753 
 
 
 706, 745 
 
 Tinpakh ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 689 
 
 at* 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Tisi 
 
 
 ... 771 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 746 
 
 Tita-khana 
 
 • • • 
 
 736, 744 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 818 
 
 Tit-patti ... 
 
 • • 
 
 ... 749 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 786 
 
 To’ar 
 
 M • 
 
 ... 774 
 
 III 
 
 ... 836 
 
 Tor 
 
 III 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Ml 
 
 687, 691 
 
 Tori 
 
 • *• 
 
 ... 770 
 
 III 
 
 ... 769 
 
 Toriya 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 770 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 840 
 
 Totnula ... 
 
 
 ... 737 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 748 
 
 Tot-nala ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 806 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 843 
 
 Tumri ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 700 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 296 
 
 Tun 
 
 <N 
 
 CO 
 
 t- 
 
 CO 
 
 JS 
 
 812, 814, 851 
 
 VII 
 
 ... 689 
 
 Tuni ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 731, 778, 814 
 
 1 l.«L 
 
 ... 696 
 
 Tuti ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 701 
 
 
 
 Tutri ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 742 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Tushiyara... 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 798 
 
 • M 
 
 ... 735 
 
 
 u. 
 
 
 III 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Ua-jau ... 
 
 
 
 III 
 
 705, 732 
 
 Ill 
 
 ... 685 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 703 
 
 IJdala ... 
 
 • l« 
 
 ... 783 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 199 
 
 Udis 
 
 • • * 
 
 ... 776 
 
 III. 
 
 743, 755 
 
 Udish ... 
 
 III 
 
 ... 818 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 684 
 
 Udiyal 
 
 III 
 
 ... 783 
 
 
 ... 117 
 
 Ukhal 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 687 
 
 1.1.1. 
 
 ... 701 
 
 Ukhar-bhumi 
 
 • II 
 
 82 
 
 Ill 
 
 680, 698 
 
 Ullah 
 
 • • 1 
 
 797, 808 
 
 III 
 
 ... 786 
 
 Ulta kanta 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... 730 
 
 • Ml 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Ulu 
 
 III 
 
 ... 808 
 
 
 ... 807 
 
 Urd 
 
 687, 
 
 690, 693, 695 
 
 • l.l 
 
 ... 703 
 
 Urdi 
 
 III 
 
 ... 695 
 
 III 
 
 ... 753 
 
 Utham 
 
 III 
 
 ... 810 
 
 • •• 
 
 705, 732, 776 
 
 litis 
 
 
 ... 818 
 
 III 
 
 ... 837 
 
 
 
 
 III . 
 
 ... 842 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 • 1.1 
 
 ... 769 
 
 .. 735 
 
 Vakamba 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 730 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 279 
 
 
 w. 
 
 
 III 
 
 ... 801 
 
 
 
 
 ... 842 
 
 Waj’ib-ul-arz 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 ... 871 
 
 III. 
 
 ... 810 
 
 Wilayati-babul 
 
 ■ 1 1 
 
 ... 782 
 
 Ill 
 
 tit 
 
 • • • 
 
 76o 
 
 775, 843 
 785, 824 
 849, 850 
 
 ... 842 
 
 „ baigan 
 
 ,, jau 
 
 „ siras 
 
 Wuman 
 
 III 
 
 III 
 
 Ml 
 
 III 
 
 ... 703 
 
 ... 692 
 
 ... 782 
 
 ». 837' 
 
 • •I 
 
 ... 696 
 
 
 Y. 
 
 
 III 
 
 ... 751 
 
 
 
 
 • I* 
 
 ... 753 
 
 STet-gbas ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 745 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 691 
 
 
 
 • 14 
 
 ... 805 
 
 
 Z. 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 771 
 
 
 
 
 III 
 
 ... 741 
 
 Zamin-kand 
 
 • •• 
 
 ... 704 
 
 Ml 
 
 760, 771 
 
 7ard-alu ... 
 
 Ml 
 
 ... 711 
 

 I 
 
 ef 
 

 
 
 jep&nirr 
 
 ippailipi! 
 
 !!fiiji!P 
 
 Warn 
 
 '.•X.-i'rxzr 
 
 ?j}iWW» 
 
 
 «iia: 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc : 
 
 jhnjjj 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wp/; 
 
 m 
 
 ill 
 
 11 
 
 !p(i 
 
 Ij^cx: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •••; 
 
 
 llpji: 
 
 
 
 
 
 K9gS2«?*B>